the – Radio Free https://www.radiofree.org Independent Media for People, Not Profits. Fri, 01 Aug 2025 23:18:18 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://www.radiofree.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/12/cropped-Radio-Free-Social-Icon-2-32x32.png the – Radio Free https://www.radiofree.org 32 32 141331581 The New York Times Does Not Fear Trump… But Bret Stephens Is Another Matter https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-new-york-times-does-not-fear-trump-but-bret-stephens-is-another-matter/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-new-york-times-does-not-fear-trump-but-bret-stephens-is-another-matter/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 23:18:18 +0000 https://nader.org/?p=6564
This content originally appeared on Ralph Nader and was authored by matthew.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-new-york-times-does-not-fear-trump-but-bret-stephens-is-another-matter/feed/ 0 547399
He’s worked in the US for 30 years—then masked ICE agents beat and kidnapped him in broad daylight https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/hes-worked-in-the-us-for-30-years-then-masked-ice-agents-beat-and-kidnapped-him-in-broad-daylight/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/hes-worked-in-the-us-for-30-years-then-masked-ice-agents-beat-and-kidnapped-him-in-broad-daylight/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 22:20:45 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335938 Still image of TRNN editor-in-chief Maximillian Alvarez (right) speaking with Alejandro Barranco (left), one of Narciso Barranco's sons, in front of the IHOP in Santa Ana, CA, where his father was beaten and kidnapped by ICE agents. Still image from TRNN documentary report "Armed, masked ICE agents KIDNAP CA father in broad daylight: ‘They beat him really badly.’"We speak with Alejandro Barranco at the IHOP in Santa Ana, CA, where Alejandro’s father, Narciso Barranco, was working as a landscaper when armed, masked ICE agents without a warrant brutally beat him and kidnapped him in broad daylight.]]> Still image of TRNN editor-in-chief Maximillian Alvarez (right) speaking with Alejandro Barranco (left), one of Narciso Barranco's sons, in front of the IHOP in Santa Ana, CA, where his father was beaten and kidnapped by ICE agents. Still image from TRNN documentary report "Armed, masked ICE agents KIDNAP CA father in broad daylight: ‘They beat him really badly.’"

Narciso Barranco, an undocumented father of three Marines, has lived and worked in the US for over 30 years. On June 21, Barranco was doing landscaping work at an IHOP in Santa Ana, CA, when he was suddenly swarmed by a group of armed, masked, unidentified Customs and Border Patrol agents who chased him down, brutally beat him in the middle of a busy intersection, and kidnapped him in broad daylight. “I believe he was racially profiled,” Alejandro Barranco, one of Narciso Barranco’s sons, tells TRNN. “My dad has never done anything wrong. They had no warrant for him.” In this on-the-ground report, TRNN editor-in-chief Maximillian Alvarez speaks with Alejandro Barranco at the IHOP where his father was abducted about the cruel, terrifying reality of the Trump administration’s immigration raids.

Speakers:

  • Alejandro Barranco is the eldest son of Narciso Barranco. He served in the Marines from 2019 to 2023
  • Jose Francisco Negrete is a resident of Anaheim, CA, a rank-and-file Teamster, and a member of Labor for Palestine and Teamsters Mobilize
  • We spoke with a number of undocumented day laborers near the site where Narciso Barranco was abudcted, including one eyewitness to Barranco’s abduction. To ensure their safety, we have kept their identities anonymous. 

Additional resources:

Credits:

  • Pre-Production: Maximillian Alvarez
  • Studio Production / Post Production: Cameron Granadino
Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Amy Goodman (Democracy Now!):

On Saturday, Narciso Barranco was arrested while working as a landscaper at an IHOP in Santa Ana.

David González (ABC 7):

Multiple videos shared on social media show a [inaudible 00:00:19] man being punched by border patrol agents as they try to detain him in the middle of a busy intersection in Santa Ana.

Maximillian Alvarez:

You can feel it. You can see it on the faces of people, you can see it in their eyes. The terror is real, and that’s the whole point of these raids. That’s the whole point of this campaign from the Trump administration. These are working people.

These are people like Narciso Barranco, a landscaper who’s been living and working in this community for 30 years. He has three sons who have all served in the military, and one day, he just gets beaten and abducted, and disappeared.

Speaker 4:

[inaudible] get back in your vehicle.

Speaker 6:

Hey, leave him alone, bro.

Alejandro Barranco:

Yeah, so I’m Narciso’s son. We’re at the IHOP location where all this attack happened. He was just working right behind here, doing the weed eating job, the weed whacker. I think they approached him from behind, no type of ID. My dad had never done anything wrong, so he is confused, scared. Where he got attacked was around here in this area.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Let’s be clear here. Your dad, who’s been here for over 30 years, was doing his job, and then a bunch of masked guys who don’t announce themselves start trying to kidnap him. Naturally, he runs away and then they tackle him and they beat the shit out of him. That’s what happened, right?

Alejandro Barranco:

Yeah, yeah, exactly. Yeah. No, I don’t think it was right at all. Very unprofessional. It doesn’t look like they had any type of training to handle this type of situation. They just felt powerful and just started beating on a guy while three, four other people were holding him down.

I don’t think it’s right at all. I believe he was racially profiled. Like I said, my dad has never done anything wrong. They had no warrant for him. He didn’t know why they were there.

Maximillian Alvarez:

I spoke to some day laborers outside the Home Depot, right next to where Narciso Barranco was abducted, including one man who saw the whole thing with his own eyes.

Maximillian Alvarez: 

Muy brutal, no? 

Really brutal, no? 

Day Laborer 1:

Muy feo, muy brutal, lo golpearon muy feo, él nunca se resistió para nada y allí lo estaban golpeando entre 4 muchachos (agentes) hasta que el señor del bus miró todo. Y ahí se paró todo el tráfico y fue cuando empezaron a pitar todos. Y si lo golpearon muy feo al señor.

They beat him really badly, really brutally, and he didn’t resist at all, and so these four men just beat him to the ground. Even the bus driver saw everything. Traffic stopped and then everyone started honking. And they beat the hell out of him.

Maximillian Alvarez:

So the Department of Homeland Security Assistant Secretary McLaughlin said, and I quote, “The illegal alien,” referring to your father, “Refused to comply every step of the way, resisting commands, fighting handcuffs, and refusing to identify himself.” Now, that’s pretty damn rich coming from a department where the masked agents weren’t identifying themselves to your dad

Alejandro Barranco:

Just the fact that they said-

Maximillian Alvarez:

That he attacked him with the weed whacker?

Alejandro Barranco:

Nowhere in the video does it show that. There’s tons of videos where these guys are just pointing guns at him, pointing guns at the public, super unprofessional. They’re running with guns in their hands, fingers on the trigger. That’s not professional at all.

Maximillian Alvarez:

You and your brothers are… you served in the military. You’re a Marine. What do you see when you see these guys with guns, terrorizing the community this way?

Alejandro Barranco:

I see no training, no discipline, nothing. It just looks like they’re out here just playing games. That’s what it looks like. They don’t have any warrants for these people. They’re just coming out here, looking at you, racially profiling, and then just running towards you, harassing you.

Maximillian Alvarez:

We’re standing here, just yards away from where one of our community members, Narciso Barranco, was beaten and abducted by masked agents of the state just a few weeks ago. This is our home. You live here. I grew up here. Can you tell people who don’t live here, what’s actually been happening over the past few weeks and months?

Jose Francisco Negrete:

It’s been a pseudo-style military guerrilla occupation. Unlike Gaza in the West Bank in historical Palestine, where you see the military, it’s a full-on occupation. Out here, it’s more of a guerrilla style occupation. We don’t know when they’re going to come out. We’re in front of a Home Depot right here, and they’ve been targeting Home Depots. They raid that, and ICE has a formula or a system of how they do it.

They park the car here, and then if they see nine or 10 more day laborers, they come and attack. It’s fear and terror. Some people don’t want to get out. I live in an apartment in Anaheim, and some of my neighbors, they only leave their house if they really have to. Other than that, they don’t because of the fear. You see it at indoor swap meets or in plazas, that you don’t see people out. It’s taking a hit on the community. The community doesn’t feel safe to go to a supermarket, or if they don’t feel safe going anywhere.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Amidst all this horror and tragedy, we have gotten a little bit of good news about your father. Can you tell us what it’s been like since he was arrested and detained, the fight to get him free, and where things stand now?

Alejandro Barranco:

Yeah, no, yeah, for sure. It was really, really hard to get in contact with him to try to find where he was at. We did have a lot of help from the community, so that definitely made it easier, but I can’t imagine what it would be like for someone who doesn’t have that support. It’s almost impossible. They have no clear system at the LA Detention Center. After that, he was transferred to Adelanto.

He was woken up at 2:30 in the morning, but didn’t receive notification that he got there until 7 PM. Makes no sense. Once he went to his bond hearing, they told us that he was approved for bond. It was set at $3,000. We paid it, and then earlier today, we received notification, they accepted the payment, and now we’re just waiting. We’re on standby.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Again, we’re here in Orange County, California, where you and I grew up, and this is one of the most diverse places in the world. Like in Santa Ana where we’re standing, immigrants make up like 46% of the population, and like 69% of the workforce. What do you want people out there to know who are believing this crazy racist fantasy, that we’re somehow going to just get rid of all those people?

Alejandro Barranco:

You can’t. Like you said, there’s a lot of us, and we’re just here to work. Our people are just here to work. They’re raising kids like myself, like my brothers who serve, who might want to join law enforcement, who might want to be a firefighter, who might want to, I don’t know, run for mayor.

We’re good people. Not all of us are bad, and I think that’s just the majority. The majority of the people here are just here to work and look for a better life, that American dream.

Maximillian Alvarez:

For folks out there who think or are being told that these are the worst of the worst criminals, that everyone who’s being detained has committed some sort of a crime, what is the story of what happened to your dad and your family? Sort of tell us about the reality of what’s going on here.

Alejandro Barranco:

Yeah, they’re not going after criminals. They’re just going out for people looking for work or doing work. I think it’s lazy, because they should have records of all these criminals, should do proper investigations, go after them directly instead of just terrorizing the streets. They’re empty. These people have families. They just do work to provide for their families. They’re not doing anything bad.

Day Laborer 2:

No somos criminales, nosotros ya tenemos tiempo aquí. Quince, veinte años, trabajando, siempre nosotros pagamos nuestros impuestos y para que nos hagan este tipo de agravios, yo pienso que el señor este ya era mayor y porque se le fueron a él si él no estaba haciendo nada, él no estaba robando, no estaba haciendo nada malo, solamente andaba trabajando, y porque otros, los que comenten más grandes errores, principalmente los corruptos, del gobierno mismo, entre ellos no se miran, miran a  la gente pobre, los  apenas andamos luchando para ganar algo para la familia, para la pan de cada día de la casa, aquí no somos criminales, aquí la policía a veces pasa aquí cuando estamos aquí esperando trabajo, si fuéramos criminales ya nos hubieran llevado a la cárcel, 

We’re not criminals, and we’ve been here for years now, some fifteen or twenty years, trying to make a living. We always pay our taxes, just to have them do these terrible things to us. I think that he [Narciso Barranco] was older, which is why they took him down. He wasn’t doing anything, he wasn’t stealing anything, he wasn’t doing anything wrong at all, he was just doing his job. So why do other people, those who commit greater offenses—the corrupt ones, some working for this very government—why aren’t they paying attention to what’s happening among themselves? They only focus on the poor, the people who are fighting to make a living, trying to earn enough to feed our families. Those of us living here aren’t criminals. Sometimes the police drive by when we’re waiting for work, and if we were criminals, they would’ve taken us away by now. 

Maximillian Alvarez:

Narciso Barranco was finally released on bond and reunited with his family on July 15th. Alejandro has said his father is applying for parole in place, which is granted to undocumented family members of active duty military members, giving them permission to stay in the US for at least a year. Lisa Ramirez, Narciso’s immigration attorney, said the federal government is still seeking to remove him from the country. Narciso has an upcoming immigration status hearing in August.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Maximillian Alvarez.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/hes-worked-in-the-us-for-30-years-then-masked-ice-agents-beat-and-kidnapped-him-in-broad-daylight/feed/ 0 547386
Armed, masked ICE agents KIDNAP CA father in broad daylight: ‘They beat him really badly’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/armed-masked-ice-agents-kidnap-ca-father-in-broad-daylight-they-beat-him-really-badly/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/armed-masked-ice-agents-kidnap-ca-father-in-broad-daylight-they-beat-him-really-badly/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 21:57:51 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5a52f7be875877c39e27b2a5f0316442
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/armed-masked-ice-agents-kidnap-ca-father-in-broad-daylight-they-beat-him-really-badly/feed/ 0 547377
From Wreck to Riches? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/from-wreck-to-riches/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/from-wreck-to-riches/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 21:03:18 +0000 https://progressive.org/magazine/from-wreck-to-riches-lueders-20250801/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Bill Lueders.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/from-wreck-to-riches/feed/ 0 547374
Holding On to the Truth in a Gale of Lies https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/holding-on-to-the-truth-in-a-gale-of-lies/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/holding-on-to-the-truth-in-a-gale-of-lies/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 20:48:32 +0000 https://progressive.org/magazine/holding-on-to-the-truth-in-a-gale-of-lies-conniff-20250801/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Ruth Conniff.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/holding-on-to-the-truth-in-a-gale-of-lies/feed/ 0 547376
After Eighty Years, Nuclear Threat Remains Grave https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/after-eighty-years-nuclear-threat-remains-grave/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/after-eighty-years-nuclear-threat-remains-grave/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 20:07:46 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/after-eighty-years-nuclear-threat-remains-grave-helfand-20250801/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Ira Helfand.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/after-eighty-years-nuclear-threat-remains-grave/feed/ 0 547368
‘Everything Makes Sense if You Get That Most of the MAGA Base Are Members of a Cult’: CounterSpin interview with Thom Hartmann on Epstein and MAGA https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/everything-makes-sense-if-you-get-that-most-of-the-maga-base-are-members-of-a-cult-counterspin-interview-with-thom-hartmann-on-epstein-and-maga/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/everything-makes-sense-if-you-get-that-most-of-the-maga-base-are-members-of-a-cult-counterspin-interview-with-thom-hartmann-on-epstein-and-maga/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 19:10:26 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046788  

Janine Jackson interviewed the Hartmann Report‘s Thom Hartmann about Jeffrey Epstein and the MAGA movement for the July 25, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

Hartmann Report: Dear MAGA: You Stormed the Capitol for a Guy Who Couldn’t Even Storm Out of Epstein’s Pedo Pool Party

Hartmann Report (7/24/25)

Janine Jackson: There’s no need to choose: We can and must address the grievousness of the operation Jeffrey Epstein ran, how it was abetted by the banks that process the checks, and the lawyers dismissing the women who were brave enough to come forward, against literally the most powerful people in the country. And at the same time, we can marvel that this is what it takes to get a measurable subset of the MAGA cult to say, “Wait a minute, the guy who said, ‘grab ’em by the pussy’ is a creep?”

The Trump base’s relationship to reality is obscure to many people who are wondering; Why this? Why now? As much as we might want to look away, those questions have repercussions for all of us.

Here to help us with understanding the place of the Epstein story in various narratives, including that of corporate news media, is Thom Hartmann. He is a political analyst, radio host, author of the daily newsletter the Hartmann Report, along with many books, including The Last American President: A Broken Man, a Corrupt Party and a World on the Brink, which is forthcoming from Penguin Random House. He joins us now by phone. Welcome to CounterSpin, Thom Hartmann.

Thom Hartmann: Hey, thanks, Janine. Thanks for inviting me.

JJ: The MAGA/QAnon relationship to pedophilia is a psychosocial, historical phenomenon that will be studied for decades, I’m sure. We’re interested, today, in the political repercussions, wherein Trump, who could not be more obviously part of the Epstein crime factory, is throwing it all at the wall to hold on to a crowd who live and breathe conspiracy around precisely these things.

ABC: Timeline of Trump and Epstein's relationship, and what Trump has said about their falling out

ABC (7/31/25)

So when you’re trying to break it down for people who have avoided this storyline, for various reasons, and are now just trying to get caught up, you need to explain a little history, right? Where do you start, if you want to orient someone to why the Jeffrey Epstein story would be the fissure in the MAGA crowd?

TH: To start with, everything makes sense if you get it that most of the followers of Donald Trump and the MAGA base are actually members of a cult. What differentiates people who live in a cult versus people who are just in normal society is that people who live in a cult live in a constructed reality that does not comport with actual reality. In other words, they are being lied to at a bunch of different levels, and they live in this unreal world. And, typically, it’s an unreal world that’s filled with panics, particularly moral panics.

So if you think back to the Reagan administration, the McMartin preschool, where for a year or so, everybody was convinced that the people were doing Satanic rituals with children and killing rabbits and stuff. And it turned out it was all imagination. But the whole nation was seized with this moral panic. This Pizzagate thing, you know, the Democrats are drinking the blood of children to get their adrenochrome and all this, is another moral panic.

And moral panics lend themselves to conspiracy theories. The McMartin preschool spun off 1,000 conspiracy theories.

Thom Hartmann

Thom Hartmann: “You’ve got people who have been conditioned to live in a world of conspiracy theories.”

So you’ve got people who have been conditioned to live in a world of conspiracy theories. “The election in 2020 was actually stolen from Donald Trump.” “The fluoride in the water is a Communist conspiracy to destroy America.” On and on and on, right? And Jeffrey Epstein is one of the powerful people who control the world, and he’s part of this pedo ring, you know, this international pedo ring, and that probably has a lot of Jews associated with it, because usually these right-wing conspiracy theories are antisemitic, as well as everything else. “The Jews will not replace us,” the “Great Replacement Theory,” is another one. You know, the moral panic/conspiracy theory that Jewish people, wealthy Jews, are paying for Black and brown people to replace white people in their jobs and in education in America.

So what has happened is that Trump, during his campaign in 2016 and again in 2020, used Epstein as basically a foil, saying, “Yeah, you know Epstein? You know he had Bill Clinton on his plane, and he had Bill Gates on his plane, and it’s a bunch of him and a bunch of Democrats.”

And it’s a real testimonial to the power of Fox News to exclude data from the news that they’re sharing with their viewers, that these people never realized that Trump was Jeffrey Epstein’s best friend for a decade, and he’s all over the Epstein files, and any investigation of Epstein has Trump all over it.

And they just didn’t know this. And they were convinced that, when the truth comes out, Bill Clinton is going to get crucified here. And it’s starting to dawn on them that Trump maybe wasn’t the most honest with them, which may hopefully cause them to wonder about what are the other things that he lied to us about? Because there’s certainly a long list.

JJ: But is it really the case? I mean, they seem so separated from reality. And it, to me, it seems like if Trump said, “No, don’t look behind the curtain, actually,” well, as he’s said, “Those files are fake. These files are partial, anybody who says I’m involved….” I’m not sure why they wouldn’t fall for that too.

TH: Because they’ve been sold the counterstory. They’ve already bought the frame. The framework is that there’s this international network of pedophiles, and Epstein, of course, is Jewish. That helps as well. So you’ve got this frame that draws on racism, it draws on antisemitism, it draws on classical moral panic, and they have come to believe it, and it’s been reinforced over and over and over again for well over a decade. And it was conflated in their minds with the whole Pizzagate, Hillary Clinton, pedophile ring stuff.

Guardian: Who is Dan Bongino? FBI deputy at center of Maga fallout over Epstein files

Guardian (7/14/25)

And so, undoing that, you’d have to go back and say, “You know, what you’ve really believed for the last decade, that Donald Trump has been telling you, and Republicans have been telling you, and all these right-wing talkshow hosts and Dan Bongino and Kash Patel, and they’ve all been telling you this, but you know, it was all wrong. It didn’t exist.” That’s just not going to fly. This is too well-established, too solidly established in their brains, for them to simply deny it or walk away from it, or look away from it, even.

JJ: Given that, I wonder what you make about so-called “mainstream media’s” response to this. Because this is obviously a kind of, like I say, sociological thing that’s happening that we can look at, the sort of petri dish of what happened with QAnon and the MAGA cult and their relationship to reality.

But we look to mainstream news media to see that as an event, and to incorporate that into the reality for, if I may say, the rest of us, you know? So I’m mad at news media for the implication that they can flip on and off the switch of outrage. You know, it was also mainstream news media who were like, “The Epstein files are very important. Well, no, they’re not so important. We’re not going to talk about them. Now they’re important again.”

TH: Going after Barack Obama, our first Black president, and calling him “Hussein” and all this other kind of stuff, you know, it’s just classic Trump racism, and that does play well with his base, because I think the one major common denominator that runs through his base is white supremacy, particularly male white supremacy, Christian male white supremacy.

But the mainstream media has acknowledged that Trump is in the Epstein files for years. It comes and goes as a media fad, but they’ve acknowledged it.

It’s just that the people who are the MAGA base, that 20% of the Republican Party, that maybe 7% or 8% of the American population, they’ve never experienced that, because they don’t read or listen to or watch the mainstream media. They live in this isolated bubble of Fox News, right-wing talk radio, and Breitbart on the internet.

And social media, of course, has really closed the door even tighter for them, by running algorithms that are designed to keep you in your bubble. Both Facebook and Twitter do that aggressively to make more money for their owners, of course. These people are just befuddled, baffled. And I think that’s something that we really should be taking notice of, how poorly informed the Republican base is.

NYT: Trump’s Deflections EaseBase’s Fury Over Epstein

New York Times (7/22/25)

JJ: I understand where right-wing media might be, but so-called “mainstream,” elite, corporate media, New York Times, Washington Post, they have a job to do, too, which is to locate this disinformation in a reality frame. And I guess I’m not seeing that. I guess my problem is I see things like “Trump Is Easing His Base’s Fury,” and that just seems like not telling us what we need to get from a free press, in terms of this nightmare, frankly, that we’re living through.

TH: I agree with you on that. I mean, the New York Times has been sanewashing Trump for years; this is what they do. Things that Trump has done and said recently, that had Joe Biden done them, would have been a full week’s news cycle, just largely get ignored. Just blatant lies, manufacturing stories, like the story about his uncle and the Unabomber. He literally just made it up out of thin air, and it was impossible. And yet the media did not harp on that. If Joe Biden had done that, if he had just made up a story out of nothing, they’d be calling for his impeachment or his resignation.

Trump has always had a special relationship with the media. Partly they’re afraid of him, partly they depend on him. He generates eyeballs and clicks and likes and views, and that makes them money.

JJ: You noted recently that the kind of “what aboutism” just isn’t landing this time, in terms of the Epstein story. When folks are saying, “Well, Clinton did it too,” people are like, “Well, yeah, OK, if Clinton did it too, he should also go to jail.” You can’t pluck the same thought-ending strings anymore, particularly with young people. And I see hope there.

CNBC: House speaker starts August recess early to avoid Jeffrey Epstein votes

CNBC (7/22/25)

TH: Yeah, I do too, and I think it certainly is the moment that some people, the hold of the cult on them has been weakened. You’ve got a dozen members, Republicans in the House of Representatives, who are willing to vote against Trump and demand the release of the Epstein files. This is why Mike Johnson just cut and ran, you know why he shut down for the end of this month, all of next month, and into the first week of September, is because he’s afraid of this topic coming up.

I think it’s going to backfire on him. I think it’s going to be just as hot in September. I think everybody’s going to kind of take a month off, and then just come back with some ferocity. But I could be wrong. It may be that Trump will actually succeed.

My big fear is that Trump will do what dictators are famous for doing when their approval ratings are in the tank. What Putin did, for example, with Ukraine, and what George W. Bush did with Iraq and Afghanistan, is he’ll declare a war someplace, as a way of distracting us. And that could be, particularly if he decides to go to war with China and Russia, that could be civilization-altering. I believe that Donald Trump will do anything to protect himself, and that’s the danger.

JJ: And I’ll just add, finally, that the way a lot of people will understand that danger will have to do with media. That will be the way that people understand what’s happening, and what it means for them. And news media are not neutral town criers, not to put too fine a point on it, but they are not simply telling us what’s happening; they’re also telling us how to feel about it, and I think, if we want to have a positive vision of what could come after, I just wonder, in terms of media, where do you think that conversation could happen?

FAIR: Info Bandits

FAIR.org (3/6/96)

TH: In my opinion, the big problem with media goes back to the Telecommunications Act of ‘96, and Reagan’s doing away of the Fairness Doctrine in ‘87, or in ‘86, I guess it was. Because we used to regulate how many radio stations an individual billionaire or a corporation could own, and not just radio stations–radio, television and newspapers.

And that all got blown up in ‘96, when Clinton signed the Telecommunications Act. Within a year, Clear Channel had gone from being a little regional cluster of stations in the Southeast to having over 1,000 stations, and Sinclair Broadcasting now runs kind of a semi-monopoly.

And this CBS merger is another example of just insane monopolistic behavior that’s not good for America. It’s not good for business, it’s not good for the media, and it’s definitely not good for our democracy.

So that’s where my biggest concern lies right now, that and Brendan Carr being the head of the FCC, when he’s just an open Trump toady and will do whatever Donald Trump tells him to do, including investigating the big three networks, and all this other stuff that he’s doing right now.

JJ: We’ve been speaking with Thom Hartmann. You can get started on his varied work online at HartmannReport.com, and the new book is The Last American President: A Broken Man, a Corrupt Party and a World on the Brink. That’s forthcoming from Penguin Random House. Thom Hartmann, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

 

TH: Thank you, Janine.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/everything-makes-sense-if-you-get-that-most-of-the-maga-base-are-members-of-a-cult-counterspin-interview-with-thom-hartmann-on-epstein-and-maga/feed/ 0 547362
Trump’s Texas gerrymander: RIGGING the 2026 election? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/trumps-texas-gerrymander-rigging-the-2026-election/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/trumps-texas-gerrymander-rigging-the-2026-election/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 17:00:31 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=3c1af544638f28f3cb8d5ad948007fe4
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/trumps-texas-gerrymander-rigging-the-2026-election/feed/ 0 547323
Louisiana Survived Katrina. Will it Survive the Petrochemical Industry? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/louisiana-survived-katrina-will-it-survive-the-petrochemical-industry/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/louisiana-survived-katrina-will-it-survive-the-petrochemical-industry/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 16:49:43 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d1d198e8e0012e2c1633275642d9a57a
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/louisiana-survived-katrina-will-it-survive-the-petrochemical-industry/feed/ 0 547322
The World Divided https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-world-divided/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-world-divided/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 15:00:03 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160396 An interesting news report revealed the discovery of a Russian woman and her two young daughters living in a southern India cave. Earth’s inhabitants ponder how they can escape the madness, and this woman found a simple and agreeable solution. She described a close to nature life — swimming in waterfalls, painting, and doing pottery. […]

The post The World Divided first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
An interesting news report revealed the discovery of a Russian woman and her two young daughters living in a southern India cave. Earth’s inhabitants ponder how they can escape the madness, and this woman found a simple and agreeable solution. She described a close to nature life — swimming in waterfalls, painting, and doing pottery.

The way the world is going, she and her children might be the precursor of the dwelling habits of the future generations, those who manage to survive the coming nuclear war between the rising bloc of rising nations and decaying bloc of decaying nations, the war between the BRICS and the Pricks.

The BRICS ─ Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa, and five new members — have no “biggest BRIC,” each Bric nation relishes its independence and the group is cemented by their distaste for the offensive Pricks. Fortunately, for the BRICS, their entourage contains China, the new superpower that encourages cooperation rather than domination and has initiated a “Belt and Road” that facilitates free trade throughout the world.

The Pricks — United States, Great Britain, and the European Union — have the United States as their power Prick, which is led by their president, the biggest Prick. In slavish obedience to genocide Israel, the U.S. identifies itself as the Super Prick. This bloc has recently featured severe discord, lack of cooperation, and inauguration of high tariffs that impede global trade. Domination is its focus. with cooperation a temporary means to enable domination.

For one simple reason, the Pricks are finding it difficult to control and use the BRICS for their personal gain ─ the BRICS have economic dominance.

Gross Domestic Product (GDP)
GDP PPP, Int$: 2025

The post The World Divided first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Dan Lieberman.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-world-divided/feed/ 0 547289
A year after new Bangladesh leader vows reform, journalists still behind bars  https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/a-year-after-new-bangladesh-leader-vows-reform-journalists-still-behind-bars/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/a-year-after-new-bangladesh-leader-vows-reform-journalists-still-behind-bars/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 14:45:39 +0000 https://cpj.org/?p=502028 On March 5, 2025, in a crowded Dhaka courtroom, journalist Farzana Rupa stood without a lawyer as a judge moved to register yet another murder case against her. Already in jail, she quietly asked for bail. The judge said the hearing was only procedural.

“There are already a dozen cases piling up against me,” she said. “I’m a journalist. One murder case is enough to frame me.”

Rupa, a former chief correspondent at privately owned broadcaster Ekattor TV, now faces nine murder cases. Her husband, Shakil Ahmed, the channel’s former head of news, is named in eight.  

A year ago, Nobel Laureate Muhammad Yunus took charge of Bangladesh’s interim government after Sheikh Hasina resigned and fled the country following weeks of student-led protests, during which two journalists were killed.

Yunus promised media reform and repealed the Cyber Security Act, a law used to target journalists under Hasina. But in a November 2024 interview with newspaper The Daily Star, Yunus said that murder accusations against journalists were being made hastily. He said the government had since halted such actions and that a committee had been formed to review the cases.

Still, nearly a year later, Rupa, Ahmed, Shyamal Dutta and Mozammel Haque Babu, arrested on accusations of instigating murders in separate cases, remain behind bars. The repeated use of such charges against journalists who are widely seen as sympathetic to the former regime appear to be politically motivated censorship.

In addition to such legal charges, CPJ has documented physical attacks against journalists, threats from political activists, and exile. At least 25 journalists are under investigation for genocide by Bangladesh’s International Crimes Tribunal – a charge that has been used to target figures linked to the former Hasina government. 

“Keeping four journalists behind bars without credible evidence a year on undermines the interim government’s stated commitment to protect press freedom,” said CPJ Regional Director Beh Lih Yi. “Real reform means breaking from the past, not replicating its abuses. All political parties must respect journalists’ right to report as the country is set for polls in coming months.”

A CPJ review of legal documents and reports found that journalists are often added to First Information Reports (FIRs) – documents that open an investigation – long after they are filed. In May, UN experts raised concern that over 140 journalists had been charged with murder following last year’s protests.

Shyamal Dutta’s daughter, Shashi, told CPJ the family has lost track of how many cases he now faces. They are aware of at least six murder cases in which he is named, while Babu’s family is aware of 10. Rupa and Ahmed’s family told CPJ that they haven’t received FIRs for five cases in which one or the other journalist has been named, which means that neither can apply for bail.

Shafiqul Alam, Yunus’s press secretary, and police spokesperson Enamul Haque Sagor did not respond to CPJ’s emailed request for comment. 

Violence and threats

In 2025, reporters across Bangladesh have faced violence and harassment while covering political events, with CPJ documenting at least 10 such incidents, most of which were carried out by members or affiliates of the Bangladesh Nationalist Party (BNP) and its student wing, Chhatra Dal. In several instances, journalists sustained serious injuries or were prevented from reporting after footage was deleted or phones seized, including Bahar RaihanAbdullah Al Mahmud, and Rocky Hossain.

Responding to the allegations, Mahdi Amin, adviser to Acting BNP Chair Tarique Rahman, told CPJ that while isolated misconduct may occur in a party of BNP’s size, the party does not protect wrongdoers. 

Others have faced threats from supporters of different political parties and the student groups that led the protests against Hasina. Reporters covering opposition groups like Jamaat-e-Islami or its student wing, Islami Chhatra Shibir, have come under particular pressure. On June 9, Hasanat Kamal, editor of EyeNews.news, told CPJ he’d fled to the United Kingdom after being falsely accused by Islami Chhatra Shibir of participating in a violent student protest. Anwar Hossain, a journalist for the local daily Dabanol, told CPJ he’d been threatened by Jamaat supporters after publishing negative reports about a local party leader. 

CPJ reached out via messaging app to Abdus Sattar Sumon, a spokesperson for Jamaat-e-Islami, but received no response.

Since Hasina’s ouster, student protesters from the Anti-Discrimination Students Movement (ADSM) have increasinglytargeted journalists they accuse of supporting the former regime, which in one case led to the firing of five journalists. Student-led mobs have also besieged outlets like Prothom Alo and The Daily Star

CPJ reached out via messaging app to ADSM leader Rifat Rashid but received no response.

On July 14, exiled investigative journalist Zulkarnain Saer Khan, who fled Bangladesh after exposing alleged high-level corruption under Hasina and receiving threats from Awami League officials, posted on X about the repression of the media: “The more things change, the more they stay the same.”


This content originally appeared on Committee to Protect Journalists and was authored by Kunal Majumder/CPJ India Representative.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/a-year-after-new-bangladesh-leader-vows-reform-journalists-still-behind-bars/feed/ 0 547284
Starvation as a Weapon: Chris Hedges on Gaza #politics #palestine https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/starvation-as-a-weapon-chris-hedges-on-gaza-politics-palestine/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/starvation-as-a-weapon-chris-hedges-on-gaza-politics-palestine/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 14:26:25 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=46569dd808c2e5acedc87687709000f3
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/starvation-as-a-weapon-chris-hedges-on-gaza-politics-palestine/feed/ 0 547286
Mirror or Mirage? The Future of Truth and Freedom of the Press Today https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/mirror-or-mirage-the-future-of-truth-and-freedom-of-the-press-today/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/mirror-or-mirage-the-future-of-truth-and-freedom-of-the-press-today/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 14:26:01 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160404 Truth or Perception? True to the words of the legendary 19th-century French novelist Gustave Flaubert, “there is no truth. There is only perception”. The truth may sound or taste bitter. But in reality, there is no singular truth and perception about anything and everything in this divine universe, even about the most abstract ones. Inherent […]

The post Mirror or Mirage? The Future of Truth and Freedom of the Press Today first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Truth or Perception?

True to the words of the legendary 19th-century French novelist Gustave Flaubert, “there is no truth. There is only perception. The truth may sound or taste bitter. But in reality, there is no singular truth and perception about anything and everything in this divine universe, even about the most abstract ones. Inherent truth is subjective, which lies in the hands of an individual’s interpretation. Together, they have a profound influence on shaping people’s views.

Its real-life exponent is none other than the dictator Hitler⸺thanks to his exceptional oratory skills, once dangerous and fascinating. On the other side of the coin lies the legacy of the great American social and civil rights activist Martin Luther King Jr. His non-violent liberal views on racial equality echoed deeply. Both historical figures left an indelible mark on the world courtesy of their respective mindsets strategically manifested, intertwined with truth and perception.

To shape public perception, key news sources include print and electronic media. These include newspapers, television, books, magazines, and radio. Newspapers and television are naturally the most widely ubiquitous, commanding massive audience coverage and deep penetration.

India has one of the largest newspaper circulations in the world. It endures and reveres the media, but here is the catch. According to media literacy index data, our homeland, India, ranked at a very low level globally. The magnitude of freedom is handy to the journalists at large, and it is alarming! Sadly, in India’s context, it is directionless. Ultimately, it is a wake-up call. The freedom of the press is inextricably linked to the democracy of a country. Apart from this, news channels on television are not behind in the rat race with their contemporaries. Selling content to the audience instead of ensuring quality content that informs them the most. Running for TRP, the real news gets diluted. The essence of informing and information gets killed long before through various media.

India’s complex emotional landscape

In a country as emotionally vulnerable and socially heterogeneous — as India. The longstanding challenges, such as Hindu-Muslim tensions, population explosion, poverty, illiteracy, and more. Labyrinths of other enigmas are often engulfed, which causes reactive, colloquial responses. They manifest vividly during nightmarish, complex — Kafkaesque episodes. Numerous instances of public unrest like riots, rapes, suicides, and more are evidence to it. Such emotionally charged reactions complicate the government’s ability to implement and administer policies in a consistent, transformative manner. This is where the truth and the press hold a critical role. In these complexities, the leakages of the internal machinery get highlighted.

A Press Under Siege

Having such a media state has major concerns and equally questionable consequences. They often tend to leave a painful scar later in the long term. On the contrary, the case is very different in countries as Russia, China, the US, and the U.K. They usually have concrete, strong, hassle-free, definite political motives and policies. They refrain from the ways India often tends to follow. The typical Indian answer to our emotional country goes back to our heated history textbooks. There have been countless deliberate attempts the whole world has made to conquer the roots of our ‘bhāratavarṣa’. It was not only for centuries but for millennia indeed. Starting from the advent of Alexander the Great in 326 BCE to the British Empire in 1947. The continual cycle of ‘sought and fought’ had fragmented and fractured the internal cohesion. This legacy left the nation in a difficult yet diverse situation. Still, it often backfires, creating an ironic, complicated situation of unity in diversity. Unlike other countries, the US and Russia. Unfortunately, India hasn’t enjoyed an uninterrupted political lineage with a uniform singularity of purpose. In our case, the press doesn’t report the truth. It often has to wrestle for it amid the noise of unresolved historical background, painstakingly.

Indispensable, twin forces — the truth is an expression, the press is the medium. Shaping and reshaping our views, then our beliefs. Eventually, it solidifies respective ideologies. The media are the purveyors of truth and freedom. Conveying information concisely under the instructions of the government. With such a vital authority and verdict resting on the press, it is a transparent, crystal-clear mirror of the country. It is a double-edged sword, bridging the supreme authority with the assurance of the people. Just exactly like Snow White’s enchanted mirror, today’s press undergoes examination, “Mirror, mirror on the wall: Who tells the truth among us all”? Publicly, things get amplified and complicated with social media. It affects the scenario, which itself is in an uneasy, lopsided state.

Social Media Perils and Content Pollution

True to the words of the legendary English poet Alexander Pope, the warmth of his lines is produced in his thought-provoking work, ‘An Essay on Criticism’. The lines “A little learning is a dangerous thing.” These are so apt to the complex content we consume today. The essence of the magnum opus is deeply felt even today in the 21st-century modern world.

In the essence of the digital age today, Social Media is the online medium that makes shallow learning among the masses a dangerous thing! It has a profound impact and internal pressure on one’s daily life. The ignorance of countless posts on X (formerly Twitter), Facebook, Instagram, and so on, will undoubtedly be bliss. In shades of innumerable benefits, it often results in ruining one’s privacy. Social media validation and accumulating more and more followers are blinding. It is infused with overloaded fake news, intense addiction, and the urge to form opinions and criticism (trolling). Everyone wants to express something without having the real knowledge about it. With this huge confusion and anxiety, it has emerged everywhere like wildfire. All of this has created misconceptions, prejudice, manipulation, censorship, ambiguity, rumours, and misuse. This mess is one of the major grey shades of social media.

Content is not just consumed; it is exaggerated, engineered, and fabricated. All this is exercised under legitimate knowledge claims. Ultimately, this flooding mechanism has blurred the line between what is reel and what the actual reality is. It has adulterated information to an unprecedented level. India itself produces a large number of content creators globally. In turn, Indians also tend to consume a huge volume of content. Thanks to insanely addictive reels and posts on apps like TikTok, YouTube, and Instagram, and more. As a result, India also leads in average mobile screen time. The estimated screen time is more than 5 hours daily. Even sometimes creating obscene content for the sake of likes and comments is considered normal! At least for disseminating genuine content, social media proves to be an easy yet complex option. Consequently, it has driven the Indian media into peril.

The Collapse of Free Speech

Unearthing the truth in the crossword and its clues embedded in a web of lies is hard. It has paradoxically suffocated the very freedom of speech within the compound chaos altogether. Truth is born out of freedom and courage. The press, which once investigated the unknown, unbelievable, and the unthinkable, now tirelessly circles. Just hunting for the truth for the sake of real, meaningful truth. But alas, today, there is both speech and courage immersed deep. The axis of profoundly malicious, politically motivated actions and intentions is strongly holding it. Both truth and press now operate in a system they once sought to expose. Here, language often bought through bribes speaks loudly and boldly to rule over everyone. Often, institutions buy and sell the freedom of speech, putting their agenda forward to the masses. This dirty, unethical transaction not only trades monetary value but also corrupts the system. It hollows the society morally, emotionally, and socially, both intentionally and unintentionally, like a parasite.

The voice of the innocent (media professionals), who dare to speak the truth, often embraces unjust retribution and tyrannical faith. Their remarkable efforts peel back those thick layers of deception, corruption, and bribery, but go in vain. Pressure groups and others often bury uneasy truths and astonishing facts under the guise of national interest and public welfare. The beautiful irony is just showcased as normal in thin air! The menace is that it is paraded to the audience as a sideshow spectacle. Such skillful, shrewd wordplay and rhetorical acrobatics contribute significantly to it. As a result, even the sharpest person in the room can’t pose a question. This puppetry media manipulation in a performative democracy becomes art, not for informing, but for controlling.

The Legal Lens: Indian Constitution and the Press

Laws and the press share a valiant, intertwined relationship where both have the power and potential in society. The law acts as a watchdog over the duty of both the people and the press. The freedom of the media is not only linked to journalism but to the vocal freedom of a country. Leaving it in a deadly dilemma of oblivion if left unchecked.

Resorting to legal methods for a hand-to-hand confrontation and cleansing it eventually may be the tedious yet best remedy. Highlighting the pitfalls and sorting them to the roots, as there is no smoke without fire. Although this is an even bigger headache since the magnitude of the Indian media industry is a whopping amount of more than a billion dollars.

By turning through the pages of the most voluminous rulebook of the world, the Indian Constitution. It offers us both a better, comprehensive, and far-sighted view. Indian law is just and faithful enough to meet both ends and refine its application by drawing the light of wisdom over the respective case.

Article 19(1)(a) relates to the independent freedom of voice and their respective opinions against the actions of the government. The media is legally backed up to highlight the plight of truth ‘lying’ beneath the surface and above it. Likewise, some notable eye-opening cases include the Romesh Thappar vs State of Madras and the Indian Express Newspapers (Bombay) (P) Ltd. vs Union of India. These astounding cases had thrust the freedom of the press and media into the limelight, concreting their status even more. These cases and many more are at the confluence of the political and social environment. The emancipation to advance facts and reports without any intervention, but with reasonable restrictions behind the fences.

Freedom and truth in the press should be carried sensibly within the thin line of legal demarcation relative to the audience. Sensitive news often triggers harmful ideas, and it can lead to both psychological and mental pain directly. Avoiding the spread of any fake news, defamation, contempt of court, blasphemy, voyeurism, and any threat to the sovereignty and integrity of India is of utmost national significance. There has been some progress over time to overcome the stagnant debacle; there is a long road to travel.

Press, Sacrifice, and Political Ironies

Dubbed as the 4th pillar of democracy, the press and media enjoy an ironic status owing to their gullible volatility. There remain shining examples of fearless Indian journalism that delivered the truth at the right place and at the right time, undeterred by mental pressure. But ironically, the most staggering report gathered is that our motherland, India, stands amongst the top countries to have the most journalist deaths.

Renowned cases of such ill-fated scapegoats include Gauri Lankesh, J.Dey, and Daniel Pearl; the list goes on. Their “sacrifice” bears a thought-provoking lesson. These media professionals fearlessly tried to unmask the bitter truth of the wrongdoers and guilty minds. To combat such authoritarian regimes, often influential political ideals march forward carrying the baton, calling for a major upheaval or revolution. In the process, this leads to doublespeak from the other side in a counterreaction. Often, when things take a U-turn, these political ideals later turn into political prisoners! Eventually, their descendants find their lives embroiled, burdened with defining and redefining their ideologies and legacy.

Such a misuse or mistake can lead to an Orwellian dystopia in a totalitarian manner, as pointed out by the great 20th-century English author George Orwell. In his magnum opus novel, 1984, he showcases the political nightmare the caged media and press cast upon it.

In the dynamics of India, the silver lining is certainly visible. The architectural Gandhian values of truth and freedom will be followed and resonate. Both the sanguine prospects and outputs of journalism will emerge rooted in integrity and moral duty, without fleeting urgency. But rather with an imperative role, a pillar of democracy, not with transience but with transparency.

The post Mirror or Mirage? The Future of Truth and Freedom of the Press Today first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Prabhav Khandelwal.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/mirror-or-mirage-the-future-of-truth-and-freedom-of-the-press-today/feed/ 0 547331
The Zionist Brutalization and Detainment of Chris Smalls: Emblematic of the White Supremacy at the Core of Zionism https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-zionist-brutalization-and-detainment-of-chris-smalls-emblematic-of-the-white-supremacy-at-the-core-of-zionism/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-zionist-brutalization-and-detainment-of-chris-smalls-emblematic-of-the-white-supremacy-at-the-core-of-zionism/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 14:25:08 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160402 The Black Alliance for Peace (BAP) unequivocally denounces the brutal assault and abduction of Amazon Labor Union co-founder Chris Smalls, who was detained by the Israel Defense Forces (IDF). Though he is now released, the exceptionally heinous treatment of Smalls by the Zionist state forces demonstrates the historical neurotic fear of any interconnection between Black […]

The post The Zionist Brutalization and Detainment of Chris Smalls: Emblematic of the White Supremacy at the Core of Zionism first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The Black Alliance for Peace (BAP) unequivocally denounces the brutal assault and abduction of Amazon Labor Union co-founder Chris Smalls, who was detained by the Israel Defense Forces (IDF). Though he is now released, the exceptionally heinous treatment of Smalls by the Zionist state forces demonstrates the historical neurotic fear of any interconnection between Black / African resistance to white supremacy and resistance to capitalist exploitation.

As part of the 21-member international collective aboard the aid ship Handala, a flotilla that was headed to Gaza to protest and break the blockade on the Palestinian people collectively being starved to death, Smalls was the only member of the group beaten and choked by IDF agents. He was also the only Black person aboard the ship. While the IDF stopped, boarded, and abducted all the activists on board, they did not use the same level of force against the other passengers or crew that they brutally applied against Smalls.

The special brutality meted out to Smalls is another example of the racist, white supremacy at the core of Israeli settler colonialism and explains both their genocide against Palestinians and the relative silence and support for it by the West. This racist violence reflects the reality of how African Jews from various countries are viewed and treated in Israel. Even as we have seen African Jews in the IDF carrying out unconscionable violence upon Palestinians, they are subjected to the forms of racist hatred that the same IDF meted out to Smalls, and worse. The lack of response from the U.S. government regarding the treatment of Smalls also reflects the way this state views Black/ African residents in the country, and highlights the continuity of white supremacist settler colonialism across both of these violent and genocidal nations.

For some time now, Small’s example has highlighted a vital understanding that the liberation of any domestic working class is inextricably linked to the defeat of U.S.-led Western imperialist domination. This attack on a working-class, anti-imperialist leader further highlights the connection between domestic oppression and Western imperialism, where the U.S. and its allies— including Israel— act with impunity.

This lack of meaningful action against the zionist occupation and genocidal acceleration of the state of Israel, as well as the U.S.’s consistent support and own human rights violations, motivates BAP’s call to ban the United States and Israel from hosting or participating in international sporting events. While this is but one strategy, what is clear is that more efforts toward anti-imperialist multilateralism are needed, represented through movement efforts like the Friends of The Hague Group (FOTHG), state-based support by The Hague Group, and consistent solidarity with the Axis of Resistance. It is this impunity that has allowed this genocide in Gaza to continue unabated for almost two years, that has contributed to the deepening siege and theft of the West Bank, and that has permitted the brutalization of Chris Smalls to occur with little uproar from so-called progressives and liberal elites.

The capture, brutalization, and imprisonment of Smalls by the fascist and racist IDF underscores the urgent need for solidarity between African/Black and Palestinian struggles. The lack of consequences for Israel reflects not only the hypocrisy of so-called democratic nations but also the complicity of the U.S.’s own Black Misleadership Class, which too often aligns with sustaining pan-European, capitalist, patriarchal interests.

Justice for Chris Smalls!

Smash Zionism!

End the U.S./EU/NATO Axis of Domination!

The post The Zionist Brutalization and Detainment of Chris Smalls: Emblematic of the White Supremacy at the Core of Zionism first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Black Alliance for Peace.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/the-zionist-brutalization-and-detainment-of-chris-smalls-emblematic-of-the-white-supremacy-at-the-core-of-zionism/feed/ 0 547348
Meet the Mother-Daughter Duo Fighting Pollution in Louisiana’s "Cancer Alley" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/meet-the-mother-daughter-duo-fighting-pollution-in-louisianas-cancer-alley/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/meet-the-mother-daughter-duo-fighting-pollution-in-louisianas-cancer-alley/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 14:14:37 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=e8bf41629ae71f70864fed3bee12fc97
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/meet-the-mother-daughter-duo-fighting-pollution-in-louisianas-cancer-alley/feed/ 0 547273
Trump’s EPA Is Gutting "The Main Tool We Have to Reduce Carbon Emissions" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/trumps-epa-is-gutting-the-main-tool-we-have-to-reduce-carbon-emissions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/trumps-epa-is-gutting-the-main-tool-we-have-to-reduce-carbon-emissions/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 14:11:22 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5e7ec73a9bbf862f25a9d1d0b2ddceaf
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/trumps-epa-is-gutting-the-main-tool-we-have-to-reduce-carbon-emissions/feed/ 0 547275
Mayor Karen Bass’s advice for the NEXT MAYOR #CA #WildFires #losangeles #ViceNews #sshq https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/mayor-karen-basss-advice-for-the-next-mayor-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/mayor-karen-basss-advice-for-the-next-mayor-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 13:00:05 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=538348ddfff7770ed80ad8125632599f
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/mayor-karen-basss-advice-for-the-next-mayor-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/feed/ 0 547261
“Plan to Rig the 2026 Midterms”: Ari Berman on Trump’s Push to Redraw Texas Congressional Map https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/plan-to-rig-the-2026-midterms-ari-berman-on-trumps-push-to-redraw-texas-congressional-map/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/plan-to-rig-the-2026-midterms-ari-berman-on-trumps-push-to-redraw-texas-congressional-map/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 12:45:26 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6c816482af51329ffb7be85ae8727063 Seg3 berman map split

President Trump is pushing for a major redrawing of Texas’s congressional districts to favor Republicans and shape the outcome of future elections, including next year’s midterms. Voting rights expert Ari Berman says this “unprecedented” Republican gerrymandering scheme manipulates an already-gerrymandered map that “limits democratic representation. It already limits representation for communities of color, and now that would be much worse.” The map was released this week, and a hearing is underway today as Republicans try to ram it through.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/plan-to-rig-the-2026-midterms-ari-berman-on-trumps-push-to-redraw-texas-congressional-map/feed/ 0 547292
Sound designer Helena de Groot on the unglamorous parts of creative practice https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/sound-designer-helena-de-groot-on-the-unglamorous-parts-of-creative-practice/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/sound-designer-helena-de-groot-on-the-unglamorous-parts-of-creative-practice/#respond Fri, 01 Aug 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/sound-designer-helena-de-groot-on-the-unglamorous-parts-of-creative-practice I understand that you grew up with musicians. What was that like?

My mom actually took singing lessons when she was pregnant with me. I don’t have a scientific basis for how that might’ve affected me, but come on, to live in the sort of resonating chamber of her body… I can only imagine that that left its impression. [Growing up in that kind of household] felt so comforting. There’s something about practicing that I love. Whether my dad was practicing a piece on the piano, and my mom was going through vocal exercises, whatever, I find that one of the most reassuring sounds in the world.

Did you think that you would be a musician? Was that an expectation?

I wanted to maybe go into law, medicine, Russian, or piano, or maybe dance. I was very obsessed with ballet. My mom actually said an interesting thing. She was like, “If you love your art form, don’t do it.” Because when you make it your profession, all the bullshit that comes with professions will be a part of your love of music or love of dance, and you will have to deal with egos, and you will have to deal with favoritism and worries about money and… you’ll have to do things or play games that kind of diminish the pleasure. So I really took that to heart, and went and studied Russian and Russian literature. A very practical degree. [laughs]

Was that her kind of admitting that she felt that way?

Oh, yeah. She told me that even when she would go to a concert, she would just be listening technically, like how is this person shaping their mouth? How are they projecting? And she just said, “I can’t turn that off anymore.”

I’m so interested in what drives someone’s creative practice and what proximity does. Sometimes when you’re too technical, you’re too close. It gets rid of this kind of spaciousness that you need for it to feel really imaginative.

I’ve always wanted to do so many things [but] was always very confused about, what should I actually focus on? Dance, writing, and music…I realized at some point that even though I loved all three an outrageous amount, there was none of them really, but writing most of all, that I liked the unglamorous part of actually doing it. Actually learning it, not just the result. I love music so much that I feel sometimes, “I would die for music,” if that was a thing. But I don’t want to do the exercises. I don’t want to. That’s so boring to me. With audio [production], that’s when I knew I’d found my thing. I love every bloody minutiae of it.

I started to realize a few years ago that, though there are lots of great podcasts in this world, some of them, especially post-podcast-boom, followed a very typical pattern or arc. Whereas in the Paris Review Podcast, you keep elements, like the set-up to an interview or a bird in the background, that in other shows would be removed and considered unnecessary. You’re using the world to score the world. It really transports me. Like in the [“Scenes from Open Marriage” episode, an essay written and read by Jean Garnett], where you hear her taking breaks and the tension between her performative “reading” voice and her sitting-back voice.

In a way, for me, it always feels like love. You might not really pay attention to that when you are around and about in the world and there’s a bird, “Okay, whatever, I’ve heard birds before.” But all of a sudden in this context, where it is carefully edited, and kind of curated, it serves a sort of a purpose. You are there with [Jean] as she drinks her tea and then puts the mug on the table. All of a sudden everything is sort of imbued with a shimmer. It’s elevated in some way. And so to me it’s almost like an ode to banal stuff of the world.

It reminded me of Svetlana Alexievich, [a Belarusian oral historian who documented the Soviet and post-Soviet period], whose work I know you love, and something you’ve said about how “history is in the heart.” I was reading more about her work and it being composed of so many interviews, and it strikes me that there’s a difference between “these are a bunch of facts” and “this is the felt experience of someone in this situation at this time.” And that felt experience is this really particular chemistry each time.

That’s why I love her so much. You don’t hear it. You don’t get to hear the tea mug, but you hear the effects of it. You hear the fact that someone is comfortable at their kitchen table, not speaking from the position of an expert who has studied the thing, but just like someone who’s remembering falling in love or gathering strawberries and their mom slapping them because they did something and their dad being carted off to the Gulag [under Stalin]. And then it’s so different… than when you just read a book written about the Gulag. [In the latter] it always feels like these people had no lives before or after or outside of that.

When did you encounter her work for the first time?

I don’t remember exactly when, but… I think I just saw the book at a bookstore.…Now I’ve read pretty much everything by her. I mean, I get very emotional when I think about her. I don’t know why there are not thousands of people doing what she does. I mean, not that anyone can do it as she does, everyone would do it in their different way, exactly as you’re talking about, this specific alchemy.

But I am so interested in history because history is nothing but life, right? It’s not different from now, it’s just life that happened a little bit ago or a lot ago. And when people are able to capture that life with all of its texture, it’s like an ode… It makes me appreciate actual life more, the one I’m living. I don’t need a big arc. I don’t need to do something important… And meaning is everywhere, if only you care to look or notice, pay attention.

Did reading her inform your approach to interviewing people?

I want to say yes, but I can’t be sure that that’s the correct cause and effect. I never thought about it practically. [Though] in the past few years I’ve been exchanging a lot of voice messages with friends. Some of them just because they don’t live in New York and I can’t see them. And when you have to come up with a time to call like, “Oh my god, no, I’m busy, and actually it’s not a good time anymore,” blah, blah. So we just record voice messages and send them and [they] are routinely like 30, 40 minutes long. And the beautiful thing about these is that you can notice the movements of someone’s mind because you’re not interrupting them, you’re not asking follow-up questions. So they get to just jump from thing to thing. You can hear them free-associate. It’s very moving because you get to know your friends in such a different way than if you would actually be with them and talk and interact. And that reminds me of [Svetlana]. She does ask questions, 100 percent, but I think she is silent a lot. I think she does do that thing where she asks one question and then just listens. And that is something that I’m learning to do. It’s awkward. We don’t like silence. Nobody likes silence, but they will fill it because they don’t like it. So just zip it.

What else have you noticed over time, doing interviews?

The main thing that has changed is I have willed myself to be less afraid to ask really difficult questions. I was so terrified. Aren’t we all? Because an interview is very much not like a normal conversation. You do things you would never do in a normal conversation, that would be considered rude and overstepping. And in an interview that is not out of the bounds of the expected or accepted.

I found it really hard, but I learned by listening to interviews that I’d done because I was transcribing them and editing them and being like, “Man, I left that on the table. Why did I decide for them that they probably wouldn’t want to go there? Why?” And it made me think, how often do people get the gift of being listened to? Especially say, when a loved one died? People are so awkward around death that if your loved one died, people will be like, “Oh, I’m sorry, that’s sad,” for a few months. And then they expect you to get over it, and then they will not ask you about it anymore. To the extent that they ever did.

I remember I interviewed a poet [for Poetry Off The Shelf] whose dad died when she was really young, maybe she was seven or eight… And she has written so many books about the death of her father. So she’s also interviewed about that a lot. And I asked her, “What was your dad like?” And she took a beat and she was like, “Nobody has ever asked me that.” Can you believe it? This is not a very spectacular question. This is not my genius coming up with the smartest thing to say, but people do not ask each other the most basic stuff because they’re afraid.

Now I know that I have to do it, and they want it, and I want it, and the listener wants it. And I tell them every time before the interview, “When I’m about to ask something hard, you are in charge. If you don’t want to answer, you’re good. If you want to… I have other questions.” And I can’t think of a single time where people have been like, “Can you take it out?” Sometimes they’re like, “Can you leave out that one comment that I made about my dad?” But [not] the whole thing, no.

What to you is the purpose of creativity, or maybe your particular questions when it comes to it? It seems like in this case it’s, “What is it like to be this person in this particular moment in time?” And maybe documenting something that would otherwise go unnoticed.

I’m less interested in the record-keeping part of it where it’s like if you don’t write it down, it will be gone forever. That of course is a big part of it. But what I’m interested in or what drives my curiosity is how does the world, the facts of the world, filter through each individual consciousness? What are the things that you specifically notice and get irritated about and get swoony about that [other people] don’t notice and get obsessed about? And how do you metabolize it? That is what I’m interested in.

I am working on a kind of memoir project right now. It’s the first time that I’ve done anything that is focused on me. It’s very uncomfortable. I am so curious about other people, and I cannot do the same thing for me. So I have had friends interview me. I’ve done that so that I can sidestep that problem.

Is this Creation Myth?

Yes.

Are you done with the show?

Oh no. Oh man… It’s going, but it’s very, I don’t want to say laborious. It’s way too fun for that. I don’t think I’ve ever had this much fun in my life.

What has made it so different?

One part of it is, you know how there’s things that you always feel like you should or want to be doing, but for some reason you’re not doing that? Because you don’t feel ready. Because you feel like nobody’s waiting for that or wants that. Because yeah, something about it intimidates you, because you don’t have the time, because any number of things. But it’s the thing that you want to make. It’s the thing that is resting on your heart like a brick and whatever you do and however many cool projects you do, you’re always like, “I’m not doing that thing. And when am I ever going to do it? And can I even? Is this for me? Am I busy because then I have the valid excuse to not do the thing?”

And for me, doing the thing was always having my own project, a project that nobody asked for. Now I’m doing that.

[Something else] that is so much fun is I have an editor. I’ve never worked with an editor so the first meeting where I was supposed to share a thing, I was terrified. Like sweaty hands, racing heart. I felt like, “Now it’s going to come out. Now she will know that all of the stuff that she thinks that I’m good at, I’m not. I’m a fraud.” I was so terrified. And of course it was great. I trust her completely. I know that we both want the same thing, for the show to be good. And having someone who’s not you but likes what you’re doing, help you is such a relief for how my brain works. [She] looks at it and she’s like, “This is great. This part was confusing. I think maybe we can start right there and cut that perfect part.”[Or]“This is great. We can work with it.” Whereas if I would be on my own, I would be like, “This is shit. I feel so ashamed that I did this. Why am I even bothering?” So that’s another really, really, really fun thing that makes me feel more free to play.

Helena de Groot recommends:

Secondhand Time by Svetlana Alexievich (book)

The Gleaners and I by Agnes Varda (film)

Aquanotes Waterproof Notes

Rumble Strip, a podcast hosted and produced by Erica Heilman

Long voice messages


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Alesandra C. Tejeda.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/08/01/sound-designer-helena-de-groot-on-the-unglamorous-parts-of-creative-practice/feed/ 0 547232
Trump Just Halted a Stride for Wage Equality https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/trump-just-halted-a-stride-for-wage-equality/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/trump-just-halted-a-stride-for-wage-equality/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 20:13:08 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/trump-just-halted-a-stride-for-wage-equality-ervin-20250731/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Mike Ervin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/trump-just-halted-a-stride-for-wage-equality/feed/ 0 547159
National Disasters Don’t Discriminate. But Does Recovery? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/national-disasters-dont-discriminate-but-does-recovery/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/national-disasters-dont-discriminate-but-does-recovery/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 20:13:00 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/national-disasters-dont-discriminate-but-does-recovery-chase-20250731/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Debbie Chase.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/national-disasters-dont-discriminate-but-does-recovery/feed/ 0 547161
Don Jr.’s Drone Ventures May Make $$$ Thanks to Daddy’s Budget Bill #politics https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/don-jr-s-drone-ventures-may-make-thanks-to-daddys-budget-bill-politics/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/don-jr-s-drone-ventures-may-make-thanks-to-daddys-budget-bill-politics/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 18:16:40 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=634ae2c336ce6d10d43d9a1025d12f50
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/don-jr-s-drone-ventures-may-make-thanks-to-daddys-budget-bill-politics/feed/ 0 547122
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 31, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-31-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-31-2025/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5bd86fccc4b605b4febffe64ed015519 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 31, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-31-2025/feed/ 0 547204
How is the eradication of a cactus in the 1920s effecting people in Madagascar today? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/how-is-the-eradication-of-a-cactus-in-the-1920s-effecting-people-in-madagascar-today/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/how-is-the-eradication-of-a-cactus-in-the-1920s-effecting-people-in-madagascar-today/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 16:08:51 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a5e25aab78176cd015f85a6d56d7fc10
This content originally appeared on Amnesty International and was authored by Amnesty International.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/how-is-the-eradication-of-a-cactus-in-the-1920s-effecting-people-in-madagascar-today/feed/ 0 547103
The Quantum Chip That Might Change Everything ft. Julian Kelly | Shane Smith Has Questions https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-quantum-chip-that-might-change-everything-ft-julian-kelly-shane-smith-has-questions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-quantum-chip-that-might-change-everything-ft-julian-kelly-shane-smith-has-questions/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 16:00:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=8c025d5f26bc146f89efb403adb5a654
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-quantum-chip-that-might-change-everything-ft-julian-kelly-shane-smith-has-questions/feed/ 0 547088
‘We’re going mad because of hunger!"- on the ground in starving Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/were-going-mad-because-of-hunger-on-the-ground-in-staving-gaza/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/were-going-mad-because-of-hunger-on-the-ground-in-staving-gaza/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 15:48:10 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=4349e76212a3514f32197da722d91160
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/were-going-mad-because-of-hunger-on-the-ground-in-staving-gaza/feed/ 0 547083
The AI Nuclear War Dead Hand https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-ai-nuclear-war-dead-hand/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-ai-nuclear-war-dead-hand/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 15:00:39 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46800 In August 2019, an influential inside-the-Beltway platform called War on the Rocks published a proposal to automate fighting nuclear wars with artificial intelligence, America Needs a “Dead Hand”. Two nuclear war strategy experts with significant academic and military credentials argued that the modernization of the nation’s nuclear-armed triad of missiles, bombers, and submarines must include a command, communication, and control system (NC3) operated by artificial intelligence.

The post The AI Nuclear War Dead Hand appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-ai-nuclear-war-dead-hand/feed/ 0 547079
Requiem for the Roberts Court https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/requiem-for-the-roberts-court/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/requiem-for-the-roberts-court/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://progressive.org/magazine/requiem-for-the-roberts-court-blum-20250731/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Bill Blum.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/requiem-for-the-roberts-court/feed/ 0 547059
“We’ll Smash the Fucking Window Out and Drag Him Out” https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/well-smash-the-fucking-window-out-and-drag-him-out/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/well-smash-the-fucking-window-out-and-drag-him-out/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://projects.propublica.org/trump-ice-smashed-windows-deportation-arrests by Nicole Foy and McKenzie Funk

This story contains videos and descriptions of violent arrests.

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

A month into the new Trump administration, on the predawn streets of suburban Maryland, a high-ranking ICE official stood alongside a Mazda sedan that his officers had just stopped.

The official told a local TV reporter at the scene what was about to happen. “He can either give us a license,” he said, “or we’ll smash the fucking window out and drag him out.” Then, as the driver refused to exit the car, officers broke the glass.

It was one of nearly 50 documented instances of immigration agents breaking vehicle windows that ProPublica has identified from social media, local news accounts, lawsuits and interviews since President Donald Trump took office six months ago. Using the same methods, we found just eight in the previous decade. Neither number is comprehensive. The government releases no relevant statistics.

Use-of-force experts and former Immigration and Customs Enforcement insiders say the tactic was rarely used during previous administrations. They say there is no known policy change greenlighting agents’ smashing of windows. Rather, it’s a part of a broader shattering of norms.

There are arrest quotas, and they are increasingly aggressive. “There’s been an emphasis placed on speed and numbers that did not exist before,” says Deborah Fleischaker, who served as ICE chief of staff under President Joe Biden.

Officers who break glass aren’t being disciplined — they’re being promoted. The official from Maryland, Matthew Elliston, now occupies a senior position at headquarters and oversees field operations on the East Coast. On the other side of the country, a Border Patrol chief who also embraced the tactic, Gregory Bovino, was put in charge of sweeps in Los Angeles. (Neither answered ProPublica’s questions.)

ICE says its officers use a “minimum amount of force” when making arrests. You can judge for yourself.

Agents break car windows even when sobbing children or pregnant women are inside.

Spokane, Wash. • March 10, 2025 (Courtesy of Kayla Somarriba)

Watch video ➜

“She is pregnant!” a man yelled as his wife, a U.S. citizen, filmed from inside their Chevy. “Is pregnant! Is pregnant!”

Officers smashed through three windows to arrest Jeison Ruiz Rodriguez and his younger brother César in early March. The video was not the first under Trump — at least nine broken-windows arrests preceded it this year, some documented by Facebook posts or local reporters or Spanish-language TV.

Chelsea, Mass. • May 11, 2025 (Kenneth Santizo)

Watch video ➜

On Mother’s Day in the Boston suburbs, ICE and FBI officers stopped a family on their way to church, threatening Daniel Flores-Martinez with what the family and a bystander believe was a gun. His three children and U.S. citizen wife sobbed in the car. Agents broke the window, forced Martinez to his knees, then slammed him roughly to the ground.

One of the children is a toddler. Another is a 12-year old with severe disabilities.

The incident was captured by then-high school student Kenneth Santizo, who was nearby waiting for his bus. “All I could hear was kids crying,” Santizo said.

People reported bloodied faces, bleeding arms and other injuries after agents smashed through the glass.

La Puente, Calif. • June 26, 2025 (Zeus S.)

Watch video ➜

Last month, a bystander filmed several masked agents using a baton to break a rear window of a white pickup truck, taking the driver to the ground and pressing his head forcefully into the asphalt. The man, last seen in the video bleeding from the head, has not been identified.

Watertown, Mass. • May 5, 2025 (Obtained by ProPublica via WBUR)

Watch video ➜

On a residential street in May, agents smashed through two windows of a Ford Focus to arrest the two men inside. A neighbor filmed from inside their home as one man, later identified by WBUR as Guatemalan immigrant Kiender Lopez-Lopez, struggled with masked agents. (He had previously been charged with domestic violence but was not convicted.) Several of them tackled him on the sidewalk while he screamed for help. The government released no information about the arrest, despite repeated requests from WBUR and ProPublica.

At least 10 people have said they were injured this year during broken-windows arrests. César Ruiz Rodriguez had an open wound at the back of his head when he arrived at detention from Spokane, Washington, his lawyer said, and X-rays showed glass in the knees of his brother Jeison. ICE claimed that the Nicaraguan-born brothers were members of the Venezuelan gang Tren de Aragua. Both men have denied any gang affiliation. We found that the brothers had been accused of threatening a family member, but prosecutors dropped the charges.

In Kentucky, agents stopped Martin Rivera and his girlfriend, Jennifer Gribben, a U.S. citizen, while the agents searched for a fugitive. “You said you’re looking for Garcia,” Rivera said in a scene the couple broadcast on Facebook Live and have since deleted. One of the agents replied, “And I found you instead.”

Then they smashed through the car’s window. Gribben later wrote on Facebook that she was beaten “brutally in my head” and that officers broke Rivera’s arm. She pleaded not guilty to charges of resisting arrest and third-degree assault stemming from the incident.

Near Detroit, masked ICE officers dragged 49-year-old Veronica Ramirez Verduzco, an aide at an assisted-living center, out of her car through a window they broke. Ramirez Verduzco still had bloody, jagged scratches up and down her forearms five days later, her lawyer said.

ICE told ProPublica that agents are allowed to use force when civilians don’t follow their commands. But Ramirez Verduzco and others said they were given little time to respond before officers broke their windows.

“They didn’t give me a chance to understand what was going on,” she said in an interview shortly before she was ordered deported to Mexico.

Officials claim they target the “worst of the worst.” But they’re breaking windows to arrest people who don’t have criminal records. In one case, ICE said a 51-year-old mom was connected to the MS-13 gang.

Westminster, Md. • March 31, 2025 (Karen Cruz Berrios)

Watch video ➜

This spring, ICE arrested Elsy Noemi Berrios after breaking her car window, scattering glass over her patterned dress. Her teenage daughter screamed and cried as she filmed with her cellphone. An officer helped Berrios shake off the glass and step out of the car. “Gracias,” she said. Then he put her in handcuffs.

After the video went viral and outrage spread, the agency put out a statement asserting that Berrios, a Salvadoran national, was a “known affiliate of the violent transnational street gang, MS-13.” Our review of judicial records — both federal and local — found no criminal history for Berrios and no other evidence to support this claim.

This July, in another widely circulated case, officers stopped an Iranian chiropractor and green-card applicant near Portland, Oregon. He was on his way to his toddler’s preschool. “There is a baby in the car,” the man said. They allowed him to continue to the school, then broke a window once the toddler was out. We found no criminal history for him.

Your car is a constitutional gray zone. It doesn’t have the same Fourth Amendment protections as homes. You can refuse to open the door of your home if officers don’t have a judicial warrant; you can’t refuse to step out of your car.

The Constitution still limits when officers can use force and how much they can use. But there are no firm rules. Should they shatter windows just minutes or seconds after making a vehicle stop? Should they drag someone through broken glass when they could wait to make the arrest another day?

“Use of force has to be objectively reasonable,” says Bruce-Alan Barnard, a retired Fourth Amendment instructor at the Federal Law Enforcement Training Center in Georgia, where ICE officers train. The problem with “objectively reasonable,” Barnard says, is that “it’s an oxymoron. What’s reasonable to you might not be reasonable to me.”

Immigration officers are given little guidance on whether or how they should breach car windows, former federal law enforcement officials told ProPublica. The tactic was never prohibited. It was just rare.

It isn’t mentioned in the government’s use-of-force guidelines for immigration agents. And past instructors and students at the Georgia training center say it was never part of the curriculum.

Often, civilians whose windows are smashed aren’t agents’ intended targets. Some are American citizens.

New Bedford, Mass. • April 14, 2025 (Telemundo Nueva Inglaterra)

Watch video ➜

In Massachusetts this spring, a tall ICE officer in a trucker’s cap swung a sledgehammer to arrest Juan Francisco Méndez, the Guatemalan asylum-seeker inside. Officers had stopped the car looking for an “Antonio,” his wife told the New Bedford Light. Méndez has no known criminal record.

He and his wife told officers they were waiting to exit the car until their lawyer could arrive. Before the sledgehammer swung, one of the officers threatened them in broken Spanish: “We can do it two ways. Hard or easy?”

An ICE spokesperson told ProPublica that the agency “concurs with the actions deemed appropriate by the officers on the scene.”

Rochester, N.Y. • June 17, 2025 (Kayden Goode)

Watch video ➜

In June, a 15-year-old girl and her mother watched as ICE agents stopped a work truck and roughly arrested several men.

“For the last time, are you opening this, or no?” an officer warned before he broke the glass. “I’m fucking blasting it right now.”

While the teenager yelled and asked the officers if they had a warrant, the driver turned toward her camera and said he was a U.S. citizen.

Early this year, border czar Tom Homan made one of his now-familiar threats to a sanctuary jurisdiction, promising to bring “hell” to the Boston area. To do that, his immigration officers needed help.

An ICE press release soon touted its collaboration with a half-dozen other federal agencies, including the Coast Guard and State Department, on a monthlong crackdown in the region, dubbed Operation Patriot. (The Coast Guard confirmed that it helped transport people arrested on Martha’s Vineyard and Nantucket. The State Department also confirmed its role. Neither commented further.)

In May, bystanders filmed in nearby Waltham, Massachusetts, as masked agents from the Drug Enforcement Administration and Homeland Security Investigations, along with agents from unidentified agencies, questioned two men parked in a work van. “Show me you’re here legally and I’ll leave you alone,” said one officer, identified on his vest only as “federal agent.”

In the months since, federal officers from other agencies have continued to participate in immigration operations around the country.

We don’t know who these masked officers are or, often, even which agency they’re from, or who can be held accountable.

Elgin, Ill. • Jan. 28, 2025 (Univision Chicago) Westminster, Md. • March 31, 2025 (Karen Cruz Berrios) Watertown, Mass. • May 5, 2025 (Obtained by ProPublica via WBUR) Waltham, Mass. • May 13, 2025 (Telemundo Nueva Inglaterra) Marlborough, Mass. • May 20, 2025 (@lr0293) Los Angeles, Calif. • June 19, 2025 (Job Garcia) La Puente, Calif. • June 25, 2025 (Zeus S.) Baltimore, Md. • July 10, 2025 (@vannvegapr)

What happens if officers cross the line? Usually very little.

Paths to suing federal officers are even more limited than for police officers, making it particularly hard for immigrants to hold officers accountable for any misconduct.

“The deck is stacked against them,” says Fleischaker, the former top ICE official.

Even if a judge decides to award damages, that usually won’t change what happens — or already happened — in the separate system of immigration court. Evidence of a violent arrest rarely stops a deportation, and if people have already been deported, it won’t bring them back.

In the instance of the family detained on Mother’s Day, they filed a complaint over “unlawful and excessive” actions — but the father has already been deported to Mexico. (The government has not responded to the complaint or to ProPublica’s questions about it.) A precursor to a full civil lawsuit, the complaint says their 3-year-old now tells people, “Police broke the window and threw daddy on the floor.”

Settlements in similar cases have been small. A California woman detained by Border Patrol in 2016 after agents broke her car window while her children screamed settled two years later for $25,000.

When we asked the White House detailed questions about the tactic and specific incidents, it stood by officers’ conduct. “ProPublica is a left-wing rag that is shamelessly doing the bidding of criminal illegal aliens,” deputy press secretary Abigail Jackson said in a statement. “ICE Officers are heroically getting these violent illegal aliens off of American streets with the utmost professionalism.”

Department of Homeland Security Assistant Secretary Tricia McLaughlin also defended the tactic in response to questions about Border Patrol. Officers “may break vehicle windows” if occupants don’t follow their commands, she said. In June, an ICE spokesperson told ProPublica, “Our officers follow their training to use the minimum amount of force necessary to resolve situations in a manner that ensures the success of the operation and prioritizes safety.”

Other agencies whose officers were involved in incidents we documented — FBI; DEA; and the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives — did not respond or declined to comment on specific cases.

Officers are arresting bystanders, too. But they’re still filming.

Los Angeles, Calif. • June 19, 2025 (Job Garcia)

Watch video ➜

Bystanders who film these videos do so at no small risk to themselves.

Job Garcia, a 37-year-old Ph.D. student and U.S. citizen, was filming an immigration raid in June near a Home Depot in Los Angeles when Border Patrol agents broke the window of a truck to detain the man inside. Then, agents turned on Garcia.

The Mexican American Legal Defense and Educational Fund filed a complaint against the federal government on Garcia’s behalf in July, alleging agents detained him in retaliation for recording and because he was Latino.

In response to our questions, DHS’ McLaughlin claimed Garcia “assaulted and verbally harassed” Border Patrol. (No assault is shown in the video.) McLaughlin added, “He was subdued and arrested for assault on a federal agent.”

Kayden Goode, the 15-year-old girl who filmed the arrest of the U.S. citizen in Rochester, New York, said she felt compelled to record despite the risk.

"I don’t think it was right,” Goode said. “Just because something is legal doesn’t mean that it’s right.”

Sometimes just the threat of window smashing is enough. One Afghan asylum-seeker who stepped out of a car after ICE threatened his window said in an affidavit, “It reminded me of the Taliban.”

But this all may be only the beginning. Shortly before Trump’s flagship domestic policy bill passed in early July, border czar Tom Homan told a conservative Christian conference that immigration agencies were just getting started. The law will triple the size of ICE and add thousands more immigration agents.

You think we’re arresting people now?” Homan said. “You wait.”

How We Did This

Earlier this year, reporter Nicole Foy heard about Border Patrol officers near Bakersfield, California, smashing a car window. Reporter McKenzie Funk also noticed immigration agents using the tactic in Washington state. The federal government does not publicly track how often agents break car windows, nor did government officials agree to requests to speak about it.

In the months that followed, Foy and Funk documented dozens of cases by searching social media, local news and legal filings. They spoke to current and former law enforcement officials, experts in constitutional law and advocates across the country and contacted the agencies of officers involved in the incidents.

Along with research reporter Mariam Elba, they also looked into the backgrounds of the identified individuals whose immigration arrests are shown in this story. They searched for records in the criminal courts of the counties in which the arrest took place, as well as in the counties public records show the person previously lived in. We found one criminal conviction among those people: Veronica Ramirez Verduzco was convicted of reentering the country illegally.

The findings on criminal records are not comprehensive because there is no universal database of charges or convictions, and there was not enough identifying information for some people. When the government made claims about an individual, Foy and Funk asked them for supporting evidence. They did not provide any.

How to Help Us

Do you have information or videos to share about the administration’s immigration crackdown? Contact Nicole Foy via email at nicole.foy@propublica.org or on Signal at nicolefoy.27 and McKenzie Funk via email at mckenzie.funk@propublica.org or on Signal at 212-379-5757.

Design and development by Anna Donlan, visual editing by Shoshana Gordon, research by Mariam Elba and reporting by Rob Davis. Additional production by Lucas Waldron.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Nicole Foy and McKenzie Funk.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/well-smash-the-fucking-window-out-and-drag-him-out/feed/ 0 547129
The USDA announced the cancellation of $148 million in ‘woke’ grants. Then it went dark. https://grist.org/food-and-agriculture/usda-148-million-woke-grants-cancellation/ https://grist.org/food-and-agriculture/usda-148-million-woke-grants-cancellation/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 08:45:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670676 The Department of Agriculture under President Donald Trump has charted a new course — the full-scale reduction of federal funding and staffing throughout the agency. A set of the president’s early executive orders targeted climate action, environmental justice, and diversity, equity, and inclusion; the USDA has since complied with those by eliminating DEI-focused programs and grants and revoking a longstanding provision that ensured producers confronting historical discrimination have equitable access to federal support. 

So, on June 17, when the USDA announced the end of $148.6 million in funding awarded by prior administrations to projects geared toward DEI, the move appeared in lockstep with the president’s priorities. The notice itself, for example, was titled “Secretary Rollins Takes Bold Action to Put American Farmers First, Cuts Millions in Woke DEI Funding.” 

The press release said that “more than 145” awards would be cancelled, and it gave three anonymized examples of such projects. There was a $575,251 project “educating and engaging socially disadvantaged farmers on conservation practices”; a $192,246 project for “creating a new model for urban forestry to lead to environmental justice through more equitably distributed green spaces”; and a $2.5 million award for a project “expanding equitable access to land, capital, and market opportunities for underserved producers in the Bay Area.” 

It all seemed like standard fare under the new administration — except that the USDA neither specified what awards it was scrubbing, nor did it follow the news with direct notifications to those affected. 

More than a month later, no one yet seems to know whether, or to what extent, the $148 million in grants has actually been cancelled. The scraps of information provided in the release have since been mined many times over by everyone from grantees to lawmakers. This fiscal year, the USDA had a total budget of $493.9 billion, of which $144.4 billion funded award obligations. That means the $148 million represents roughly 0.001 percent of what the agency planned to spend on awards. And yet, experts say, the missing money mystery indicates a new chapter in the USDA’s playbook — and it’s harming farmers and ranchers, and those that support them, across the country. 

“I just continue to think that they are motivated by the politics of saying that they cancelled a DEI-related program, and they’re not motivated by conducting thoughtful policy changes or updates, and they don’t seem to really be concerned about who’s on the other end of that policy change, and what the impact would be,” said Michael Amato, who was the USDA Communications Director during the Biden administration.

For those organizations that suspect their projects could be on the chopping block, the move is perplexing. When the team at the California-based organization Agroecology Commons saw the USDA press release, they presumed that the $2.5 million grant had to be theirs. Roughly two years beforehand, they had been awarded that very same amount through the USDA’s Increasing Land, Capital, and Market Access Program to identify, purchase, and help develop land for up to ten “BIPOC, LGBTQIA, and landless farmers” in the Bay Area. 

The nonprofit had already come to feel targeted under the new administration. They had confronted the elimination of another USDA award back in March. In June, less than two weeks before the $148 million cancellation news was shared, the organization joined two other plaintiffs in filing a lawsuit against the USDA for what they believe were unlawful grant terminations. And, according to director of partnerships Leah Atwood, they were “put on blast on the Secretary of Ag’s Instagram,” when Brooke Rollins announced the end of the group’s Community Food Projects grant in a social media video.

“All signs pointed to ‘that’s gonna be us,’” said Atwood. The revelation was nonetheless “a big blow” to her team. In response to the USDA’s announcement, they started to halt the work they were doing that was supported by the federal funds, in case they wouldn’t be able to invoice for reimbursements later. As the days and weeks passed, the team got more and more bewildered when no official termination notice hit their inbox. 

Until last Tuesday, when a cancellation notice finally dropped — just not the one that they were expecting. 

On July 22, more than a month following the agency’s initial termination announcement, the team finally received an email from the USDA, shared with Grist, which informed them of the end of their Beginning Farmer and Rancher Development Program grant, or BFRDP, amounting to nearly $600,000 that they were awarded back in 2021. First authorized by the farm bill more than two decades ago, the program provides grants to organizations in support of education, mentoring, and technical assistance for new agricultural producers. The letter stated that “the Secretary of Agriculture has determined, per the Department’s obligations to the Constitution and laws of the United States, that priority includes ensuring that the Department’s awards do not support programs that promote or take part in diversity, equity, and inclusion (“DEI”) initiatives, or any other initiatives that discriminate on the basis of immutable characteristics.” 

Though she isn’t sure, Atwood believes that Agroecology Commons’ BFRDP grant cancellation must be one of the 145 or so that the USDA says it has identified for elimination. She also believes that the notice for the bigger grant is still on the horizon, and has expressed concern over two other USDA grants of theirs that have an explicit DEI-focus. As of the time of this article’s publication, the Agroecology Commons team still has not received an official cancellation notice for the $2.5 million from the federal agency. 

“We’ve been in this constant state of evaluation and reevaluation and downsizing and streamlining and consolidating, and it’s impossible to do that in a clear, straightforward way when we don’t know what’s happening,” she said. “It’s just a juggling act of, like, plugging leaks and dodging waves.” 

The USDA has not responded to multiple inquiries from Grist sent over the last month requesting clarity on the full list of awards included in last month’s press release, why those affected had not been issued official notices, and the criteria being used in these funding eliminations. What’s more, it isn’t clear whether the recent rescission of BFRDP grants account for any part of the $148 million, or belong to an entirely new crop of cancellations. 

Grist reporting has revealed that at least three other recipients of BFRDP grants were also issued official USDA termination notices in the last week. They are the only series of DEI-adjacent grants from the USDA that have been confirmed as cancelled since the agency’s June announcement. Like Atwood, those other grantees believe the dissolution of their federal support falls within the 145 or so awards that the USDA declared. One such group is the Rhode Island Food Policy Council.

The end of the BFRDP grant didn’t come as much of a surprise to its executive director Nessa Richman. In fact, when she saw the USDA’s announcement about the $148 million funding pot, Richman had a “sinking feeling” that her group’s grant was over. Right before the USDA made the announcement, Richman noticed that their BFRDP money was suddenly unfrozen — an experience that the Food Policy Council went through when the Trump administration pulled another of their grants — before it was terminated.

When it finally arrived, the USDA’s letter singled out the Food Policy Council’s focus on DEI as the rationale for the cancellation. “Specifically, the project is targeted at beginning farmers and ranchers from Rhode Island communities defined by their immutable characteristics,” the letter said. “The award is therefore inconsistent with, and no longer effectuates, Department priorities.” 

But what surprised Richman was the way the USDA presented the news. “Normally, in a USDA announcement like that, when it’s about grant awards, in the past there’s been a link to a list of all of the grantees,” said Richman. “And it was confusing that there wasn’t one.” So she called around to see if anyone in her network had been able to find a list buried on a federal website somewhere. No one had. No one knew what programs were on that list of “more than 145.”

“My guess was that the work had been done internally at USDA to identify the grants, because it was a very specific number, but that they hadn’t done the administrative work to move forward and send out notices of termination,” said Richman. “At this point, it probably took them longer than they thought to get all of the administrative pieces in place. Why else would it take them longer?” 

A Grist analysis of a USDA National Institute of Food and Agriculture reporting portal shows that since 2009, roughly 13 percent of all BFRDP awards have been DEI-related, and just 21 are active projects. If the USDA terminates all of the BFRDP awards with equity-associated keywords, that leaves at least 124 other grants facing potentially imminent elimination following the agency’s effort to cut “Woke DEI Funding.” 

Vanessa García Polanco, government relations director at National Young Farmers Coalition, is worried about the future of the other equity-related awards. “So how are they picking and choosing these grants? Is it just the ones that have equity in the title? Do they have some equity outcomes? Or is it just literally strategic? Is there an equation, an algorithm behind it? We really don’t know,” said García Polanco. “Everything feels extremely haphazard and inconsistent.”  

The federal agency’s silence has prompted urgent calls for transparency from some members of Congress. Last Tuesday, on the same day that BFRDP letters began landing in inboxes, a cohort of nine Democratic senators sent an official congressional oversight letter to Rollins, urging her to provide the missing information, including “a complete list of awards that USDA intends to terminate, including information about awardees, programs, funding amounts, and locations.” The letter also asked for further details “on why these awards intend to be cancelled, as well as the legal basis for cancelling the awards, and if the funds are being repurposed, for what they will be repurposed.” 

“It’s created more uncertainty, in a sea of uncertainty,” said Mike Lavender, policy director at the National Sustainable Agriculture Coalition. “I don’t know how it wouldn’t have a chilling effect.” 

According to a former senior USDA official, who spoke to Grist on the condition of anonymity for fear of retaliation, the precedents of how the agency chooses to operate — and communicate — are changing so quickly and radically that it’s creating an environment of fear for the nation’s farmers and ranchers who could rely on federal government funds before Trump took office.

“People are just scared right now because they keep hearing the threat of these things, and they haven’t been notified. So ‘Do I continue to do work? Do I not continue to do work?’ The uncertainty is what’s getting people right now,” the official said. “You hear that from these grantees, as well as [USDA] employees, it’s hard to get people to talk about it, because they don’t know, from day to day, whether they’re going to be targeted. 

If they say anything, I think most folks are going on record anonymously because they’re in fear, because you really don’t know what’s next. And if you get out there on a limb, it might get sawed off behind you.”

Clayton Aldern contributed data reporting.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The USDA announced the cancellation of $148 million in ‘woke’ grants. Then it went dark. on Jul 31, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Ayurella Horn-Muller.

]]>
https://grist.org/food-and-agriculture/usda-148-million-woke-grants-cancellation/feed/ 0 546979
Data centers, drought, and dispossession: The real nightmares in Ari Aster’s ‘Eddington’ https://grist.org/indigenous/data-centers-drought-and-dispossession-the-real-nightmares-in-ari-asters-eddington/ https://grist.org/indigenous/data-centers-drought-and-dispossession-the-real-nightmares-in-ari-asters-eddington/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 08:30:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=671701 The film “Eddington” opens at night as Sheriff Joe Cross (Joaquin Phoenix) sits in his Chevy Tahoe on the edge of a New Mexico desert. On duty, he’s bathed in blue light, watching YouTube: a video on how to convince your spouse to want a child. More cops pull up, tribal police from the fictional Santa Lupe Pueblo, and tell him a mask mandate is active on their land. Joe pulls his mask up over his nose until they leave, then immediately yanks it down.

Set in the early days of the COVID-19 pandemic in 2020, “Eddington,” directed by Ari Aster, blends elements of horror, Westerns, and satire that explore how we process such an earth-shattering event half a decade later. But its subplot about the development of a massive data center nearby explores just how this volatile landscape became profitable for tech corporations, while engaging with contemporary vignettes of Native life where Indigenous communities exist along the border, haunting the town’s history and politics.

In the film, the mayor of the town of Eddington, Ted Garcia (Pedro Pascal), plays high-powered politics to the best of his ability in a small town, including cozying up to the shadowy tech company SolidGoldMagiKarp. The company has proposed a “Hyperscale Data Center Development” and Mayor Garcia touts the idea as a boon to the local economy, creating jobs. Sheriff Cross, however, sees it differently. To him, the world and its mask mandates have infringed on his town and life. As a result, he decides to run against Garcia for Mayor. 

From here, the action is set in motion. Defying masking orders is used for social media points, while young, mostly white activists, engage in online activism by invoking the Navajo Long Walk and calling out stolen land–talking points that operate more as currency than a genuine desire to engage with their Pueblo neighbors. Eddington, at its heart, is a Western. Like other Westerns, it evokes a moment of discovery and unleashes it on the viewing public. John Ford Westerns locate the founding mythologies of what animates American identity among red buttes and stagecoaches. Even in Twin Peaks, David Lynch’s revelatory vision of the first atomic bomb detonated in the New Mexico desert offers a view of evil’s origins. In “Eddington,” alienation drives the narrative, framed through social media, Zoom meetings, and the tech infrastructure pushing the community apart in every way possible.

That infrastructure, of course, exists off screen and in our lives. Earlier this month in southern Arizona, nearly 1,000 people in Tucson turned out to a city council meeting after local reporters revealed that officials had secretly planned an Amazon Web Services facility in their community. At a public meeting, angry residents cited that the city’s pattern of droughts would not meet the data center’s surging water needs. In Tennessee, residents in a South Memphis neighborhood have reported breathing problems due to nitrogen oxide emissions from burning fossil fuels used to power Elon Musk’s xAI’s servers, to run Grok, X’s resident chatbot.

Because of the speed of AI data center development, tribes have only begun to grapple with this trend and threats to water, land, and energy capacity. The Tonawanda Seneca Nation filed a lawsuit against the construction of a data center in upstate New York earlier this month, arguing the site would impede treaty rights, including hunting and gathering. Last year, the Arizona Corporation Commission, a utility regulator, approved an 8% rate hike to meet the energy demands brought on by the state’s rising number of data centers. In a separate measure, the Commission rejected a package to expand electricity to residents on the Navajo Nation, where nearly 13,000 households lack access.    

“As these data centers are moving into their communities, people are starting to realize that there are huge physical manifestations to all of this artificial intelligence and all of this computing that we’ve come to just kind of accept in our daily lives,” said Deborah Kapiloff, a policy advisor at the Western Resource Advocates. “There is going to start being a lot more pushback from communities as they understand what this means for them in terms of changes to their communities and these data centers siting there.” 

At the end of the film, there’s an opening ceremony of the center. In the corner, next to Phoenix’s character who is now physically incapacitated, is also a Santa Lupe Pueblo leader, symbolically incapacitated. It’s revealed that the state has invested millions of dollars into clean energy projects on their land and are praised for their partnership and participation with the data center. It’s unclear if the endeavors were driven by the Pueblo, or what kind of say the nation had in the deal. As the credits roll, the center glows against the dusky blue land, almost breathing.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Data centers, drought, and dispossession: The real nightmares in Ari Aster’s ‘Eddington’ on Jul 31, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Miacel Spotted Elk.

]]>
https://grist.org/indigenous/data-centers-drought-and-dispossession-the-real-nightmares-in-ari-asters-eddington/feed/ 0 546981
Journalist Brian Anderson on having patience with the time it takes to succeed https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/journalist-brian-anderson-on-having-patience-with-the-time-it-takes-to-succeed/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/journalist-brian-anderson-on-having-patience-with-the-time-it-takes-to-succeed/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/journalist-brian-anderson-on-having-patience-with-the-time-it-takes-to-succeed You are about to publish your first book. I’m going to ask the question all writers hate – how long did it take?

Each book is its own journey, but it’s been an exercise in time and patience. I got the deal in late 2022, and by January 1st, 2023, I had to sit down, roll up my sleeves, and start writing. A year and a half later, I had the full first draft.

I had started thinking about this project ten years ago when I published an initial feature on the Wall of Sound while on staff at Motherboard, Vice’s science and tech vertical. I had spent a year working on it, and it clocked in at around 9,000 words. By sheer coincidence, it ran during a series of shows celebrating the band’s 50th anniversary that generated additional attention. I remember thinking I’d gone so deep, “surely this will be the definitive take.” I quickly realized I had barely scratched the surface. I filed the idea away, but couldn’t stop thinking about it. I kept gathering bits here and there, reading everything I could, staying obsessed. I couldn’t shake it. I was so captivated.

Why do you think?

If you don’t know, the Wall of Sound was a groundbreaking technology consisting of hundreds of speakers, dozens of amplifiers, custom staging, and scaffolding, and stood over three stories tall. It was between 70 and a hundred feet wide and 40 feet deep. It was a custom sound reinforcement system–like a public address or PA system–that The Dead and their circle of roadies, audio engineers, sound consultants, and technicians built over several years, beginning in the mid-sixties through 1974. It revolutionized sound reinforcement. To this day, if you see live music, from a stadium to a small punk club, you’ll see some principles first forged through the Wall of Sound. If you talk to anyone in the sound world–a sound technician, a recording engineer–they will know about the Wall of Sound.

I see why it was so inspiring.

From that first feature in Motherboard to the book’s publication, it’s been almost 10 years to the month. One thing I learned is that a project is going to take the time that it needs. There was a point in 2018, early 2019, when I started putting together an initial proposal. But the agent I was working with saw the book as something different, so nothing came of it, which I learned is a rite of passage.

Can you explain?

The first time you shop around a book proposal, you might not get any bites, and that can sting and be demoralizing. But if you feel strongly, you just have to keep going.

After that initial round of rejections, the final proposal took shape. The real lesson was that you’ll probably get rejected, and that’s just part of it the first time around. But you have to keep going. And if you get a great agent, which I am so grateful for, good things can happen.

That’s a great point.

I feel like I’ve been working on this book my whole life. Being raised by two Deadheads, this music was always in the background. But the TLDR is that it will take years from idea to proposal to landing the book deal and then actually writing it. It’s an ultra marathon, not a sprint. If you’re going to get impatient at all, this might not be the thing for you. But if you’re committed to the vision and in for the long haul, you can totally do it.

You have very specific insight into the Dead through your parents. Was it more complicated that this topic was such a part of your personal narrative?

A funny part of my book journey has been what I call being “an insider-outsider.” I’m not a Dead Instagram hype beast. I’m not even a music journalist, per se. I’ve been an editor for various science, tech, and health verticals at major publications. But at the same time, I’ve listened to this band my entire life and absorbed so much knowledge. I also just appreciate a good yarn, and I always knew this story was entertaining.

I’m not a Grateful Dead fan, but still found myself invested.

It’s a psychedelic romp and ultimately a story about obsession. This group had to put aside any interpersonal drama or tensions in the name of driving toward this greater collective good. But having something of a personal stake helped because I could thread the needle.

There have been dozens of books written about The Dead. It’s this massive cultural institution. For so many on the outside, it can be overwhelming. Many don’t even bother trying to find a way to enter this world and see what it’s about.

Right.

Having that personal angle helped tell a story in a way that folks who might think they have no interest will be able to understand and keep turning the page. St. Martin’s is a big five publisher for a general audience, so I had to keep that in mind. Having absorbed so much information throughout my life crystallized what aspects of Dead history and lore I had to mention and what I could dispense with.

You actually bought a piece of the Wall of Sound.

Yes! I came to own a part of it through a Sotheby’s auction in 2021. Sotheby’s had partnered with the Grateful Dead Organization to auction decommissioned items from the Grateful Dead Warehouse in Northern California. There were around 150 lots, and I didn’t bother looking through until there were 24 hours left until bidding closed. The night before, I started scrolling through, wondering which item had the lowest starting bid. That was this object. Having a piece of the Wall fall into my life got me reconnected with old sources, people I’d first spoken to years ago, and reaching out to entirely new sources. One thing led to another.

Kismet!

To own a part of it, it’s special. Thinking of all of the places this artifact has been, all the miles it clocked–tens, even hundreds of thousands–and all the people who experienced The Grateful Dead partly through this thing that’s sitting in my office, my mind reels. It gave me a unique window into this gigantic story. There’s a part that just feels cosmic, or fate.

Truly.

Another lesson was that you can have something as iconic as The Grateful Dead, where so many books have been written and so much scholarship, but still find unique windows in. I can’t believe nobody has written this book yet, and I’m the one who did it. As a writer, there’s this feeling that nothing is new anymore. Everything has been covered. Everything’s been written about and explored to death. But it’s not true. You can still find fresh and interesting avenues into storytelling. You have to trust the process and know it might take time.

As a journalism professor, you must have students hoping to write books. What advice do you give them?

There is this idea that the book proposal-to-book-to-docuseries pipeline is a surefire thing, and it will happen quickly. But no, the first and foremost thing is that it will take time, and that’s something you’ll have to make peace with early on. In the formative stages of getting your idea together, putting the proposal together, and getting an agent, it might be something you’ll need to chip away at on nights and weekends. Even if it doesn’t feel like you’re getting as much done as you would hope to in the beginning or throughout any stage of the process, it will add up if you keep chipping away. At a certain point, you will look back and think, “holy shit, I’ve come this far.”

One thing I did learn is that working on a book can completely consume you. You get sucked in, so you have to ride that fine line between being totally committed and being totally uncommitted. If you don’t watch out, it will take you. With all of the work that goes into this process, maybe you have the time and the resources to work on it solely, but I know I couldn’t. I had to work on editing while the proposal was coming together.

But a book deal with an advance can free you up to put your head down for that first full draft and focus entirely on that, if you want to. I’m not pretending to know everyone’s exact situation, but in my case, I did a lot of chipping away early on it, got an advance, and the pressure was off a bit.

Just giving you the time and space and the encouragement too.

It felt very validating when I got the book deal. When you’re putting a proposal together that, in your heart of hearts, you know is a good idea and are fully committed, even if it gets rejected. I always knew this was a good idea, but the time it takes to make these sorts of things happen, you go through stretches where it feels like it’s you against the world. It can feel isolating. But if you stick to it, it can happen.

There are various milestones along the way that feel validating. Much of it is just you out on the trail, and then every once in a while, you come to an intersection, and there’s someone holding up a sign that says “keep running” or “good job.” You see people hold up signs during marathons–that’s what it feels like because so much of the work is just getting up every day and chipping away.

In the book, I loved the character of Bear, the band’s original soundman and key architect of what would later become the Wall of Sound. I kept imagining his dogged perfectionism was a stand in for the entire creative process.

He was a polymath. He could drive the others in this scene crazy, but he was the original force behind the Wall of Sound. He also needed others to help actualize those ideas — sound engineers, technicians, and classically trained audiophiles. He was brilliant and largely self-taught, and the Wall of Sound couldn’t have existed without him.

It took the crew ten years to realize the Wall of Sound. There were fits and starts and trial and error. Many take credit for the Wall of Sound, and while it was a group creative effort, Bear was highly influential. He was sensitive to “unclean signals” in tech, which fed into his idea of a sound system without distortion. Basically, each player had their own PA. There was no “intermodulation distortion”–the technical term. No two sounds were running through the same speaker. So if you listen to the Wall of Sound recordings, the clarity is unmatched.

Some of the early shows would be delayed by up to five hours because he would freak out over a single amplifier. He claimed to be able to communicate with inanimate objects, such as sound system gear in this case. People would happen upon him hugging a speaker and crying and talking to it, trying to coax signals out of it. He was way out there but also a very brilliant creative person without whom none of this could probably have happened.

What an interesting man.

He was obsessed with audio, but also a ballet dancer. He produced millions of hits of LSD and basically turned on that entire generation. So much of the acid flowing through the Haight-Ashbury in the Summer of Love, and then throughout the rest of the country, was manufactured by Bear and his assistants. He also got obsessed with metallurgy. He would go in deep and bring in everyone.

There’s a great quote from the late Steve Silverman, a New York Times bestselling science writer and an OG Wired writer who wrote the book that changed the conversation around autism and the spectrum, called Neuro Tribes. He noted, “I spent some time with Bear at a Grateful Dead studies conference back in the day, and came away convinced that he was on the spectrum in the best possible way.” Silverman said that the Wall of Sound is, he would consider, the most outstanding achievement of the neurodivergent community. That neurodivergent folks and neurotypicals came together and forged this groundbreaking piece of technology.

It’s interesting how much emotion this system of inanimate objects contained, and how much work went into building it. Obviously there’s a great metaphor in there for completing a book.

Talking about the process and the journey, putting this thing together in terms of the sheer timeline and the community–it takes everyone from your editor to your agents, friends, and acquaintances who often would listen to me, being a little harebrained, working through it. It takes all those people to realize something like this. I didn’t always think this would be something that would happen one day, but like everything else, it’s just a progression and then one day you realize “oh shit.” If you are committed and put in the time, patience, and work, you really can make these things happen.


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Laura Feinstein.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/journalist-brian-anderson-on-having-patience-with-the-time-it-takes-to-succeed/feed/ 0 546974
Filmmaker and artist Mahyad Tousi on finding your own path to an audience https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/filmmaker-and-artist-mahyad-tousi-on-finding-your-own-path-to-an-audience/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/filmmaker-and-artist-mahyad-tousi-on-finding-your-own-path-to-an-audience/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/filmmaker-and-artist-mahyad-tousi-on-finding-your-own-path-to-an-audience You began your career as a conflict zone documentarian and now you work in contemporary art, installations, and films, that is a significant change. What sparked that career transition?

You could say, I’m a child of family separation, I’m a child of war. I left my core family at the age of 13 and came here at 14. And what I didn’t know was how growing up in instability and conflict made me uniquely positioned to be in that kind of environment, because I understood what it meant to be a kid in that kind of environment. We always talk about how many people have died. And for me, that was an oversimplified and unsophisticated way of looking at the cost of conflict. I always felt like the true cost of conflict was in how many people lived through the conflict, those people who lost family members, kids, parents, uncles. Whose communities and homes and lives were impacted. That’s the true cost of conflict. And I always felt like if you measure conflict through that lens, the cost of war and the cost of conflict would no longer be justifiable. I think one of the biggest sorts of mistakes is looking at the cost of conflict through the number of people who die, because it underplays the cost.

It wasn’t until I was in my mid-20s that I was like,”I want to tell stories, and I want to do this kind of work.” So 9/11 coincided with me being focused on my career as an artist, allowing myself even the possibility of thinking, “Can I be an artist?” When you’re a kid, surviving and trying to swim, you don’t think, “Oh, let me just go into the arts.” I’d never had that privilege. So it wasn’t until I was in my mid-20s that I was like, “You know what? That’s what I always wanted to be as a kid. I’m going to give it a go.” I started working in installation work and video art in 2008. While I was at the same time trying to make rights and sell Hollywood projects and TV shows. And that’s sort of how it all happened. It was very organic. It was still all driven by two things. One, the need to survive as an artist, but also it needed to be broadly creative, and not limited. And here I am, still doing it.

Your feature directorial debut, Remote, premiered at the New York Film Festival. How did that experience impact your work moving forward?

I’ve been making stuff in one capacity or another for years. And I had directed shorts, documentaries, etc, but I’ve never taken the time to say, “Okay, let’s do my piece.” Then COVID happened, and everything shut down. And in that period in 2020, while we were waiting to see if the studios would open up, Mika Rottenberg, the co-director, and I started talking about something that we’d wanted to do since the first day we met, which was to make a film together.

At least for me, I never thought, “Oh, we’re going to do this thing, and it’s going to be at the New York Film Festival, and it’s going to premiere at the Tate Modern, and you name it.” We just wanted to have an outlet to do art. And 2020 was a bad year for many reasons. We had COVID, everything that was happening with George Floyd, and what was happening on the streets. There was an election that was coming up, which seemed quite consequential at the time. And this conversation that led to Remote was very much the way we were coping with that year.

Of course, it was wonderful to be at the New York Film Festival; it was a dream come true, as a New Yorker. It’s the festival that I always loved, it was where I would go every year to watch the latest Almodovar film. And that was my thing, you know, was, “Okay, what’s he got? It’s going to be at the New York Film Festival. I can’t wait to go see it.” And so that was beautiful. It was a very beautiful, meaningful experience.

You are working now on your project CURA, and one thing that struck me from this project is that it doesn’t rely on a specific narrative format for documentaries, like voice-over, verité, and archival. What is your intention in what you want to communicate with this project? Is there a specific point of view that you want to show, or is it more open to interpretation?

I think it was not an easy choice to make this film. I had to really find both the approach, but also answer the question of why, and why me? Or why us? And that came out of many conversations with the indigenous healers and tribal elders across Colombia, Peru, and Brazil, over the first seven months that we were really thinking about doing this. One of the things I learned is that, for many of the Indigenous people I spoke with, words were a problem. Words were a mechanism of lies, of deception. And some things cannot be expressed through words. So the challenge became, “All right, how do you tell a non-verbal story? How do you tell a story that doesn’t rely on words?” So that’s the initial impetus. And then, from my own experience of being there, I realized that so much of the relationship between these indigenous communities, these guardian communities, and the forest was not expressed through words, or not understood through words. It was very much about frequency and vibration, and this non-verbal relationship that they had with the spirits. And this thing, where they truly believe is a living entity. They believe the forest is alive, the rivers are alive, that the trees are alive, they believe that they are a sentient being and they’re in communication with, and they have a relationship too.

And I think that inherently is this sense of connection that they have to the natural world is what I realized was something that, as a cost of modernity or living in modernity, we have lost. And we get glimpses of it when we go hang out in the wilderness, we’re like, “Oh, my god. I feel so much at peace, and this is so good.” And we return and we forget again. And the reason we feel at home in the wilderness, in nature, it’s because that is who we are, that’s where we come from. Despite where we have arrived and how far we’ve come, we are inherently, as a being, creatures of the forest, creatures of the mountains, of this earth.

One of the things that came out of this process was recognizing that so much about conventional filmmaking made me go away from documentaries specifically, from conflict zones, and from this obsession with data and facts, and information. But we have an eco-anxiety pandemic. People are suffering from deep anxiety around the climate, and rightly so. And I think in part, you can say that this barrage of information and data, and doom and gloom, is what a byproduct of that was, is this eco-anxiety, which is now a big problem. And when you looked at these tribes and the way they existed, even though their conditions are extremely hard, they are still living in joy and hope. And I knew I couldn’t make conventional work. It had to find its own language. That it had to really rely on the modality that I was in the forest itself. And I knew that ultimately the character that had to emerge from this work had to be the forest itself. And I knew I couldn’t do that through conventional narrative means. And that’s why we took a non-verbal approach. And that’s sort of how I ended up where I am.

Since this project is so different from what you have done in the past, what are your hopes when it goes out into the world?

I think we’re living in a period of time where traditional institutions and legacy companies are no longer viable routes. Yes, it’s art, but it’s art that’s created within an economic framework, right? The reason these conventions are built has a lot to do with the economics of storytelling and media and film, and documentary. And they have nothing to do with actual artistic creativity.

And I felt, especially with this work, that I was going to go back to a documentary form that I didn’t want to rely on those things. So I had to take a very entrepreneurial approach to the work. And so that’s the approach that we’re taking. CURA is being made within what I find very valuable in the art world, which is these editions; you’re creating a work of art. There’s a certificate of authenticity; you’re selling additions to collectors and commissioners, etc., in advance. At the time, we’ve sold a couple of those already, and hopefully we’ll sell the rest of them, so that we can keep filming and do all that work.

I think partially what’s exciting about our Kickstarter campaign that we’re doing is that it incorporates some of these ideas. But one of the things that I did that I think is quite novel is that I said, “Okay, normally you have additions of the work. I’m going to take one of these additions and break it into digital editions.” So, several digital additions that I can sell directly to collectors. Now, those collectors are oftentimes inaccessible to so many people. But what if those additions were $500 or $1,000? Then suddenly people can collect a work of art that they own, that it’s always with them, like buying a vinyl, that you can play for your friends and family members, and your community. And your work, and you’re supporting a work, but you’re also getting something that you own in return.

I think this is about being aware of the moment we are in, and saying, “You know what? I can’t rely on these traditional institutions. If they want to come to me, great. But I can’t sit there and wait for gatekeepers to say, ‘Yes, no. It makes sense.’” If artists don’t find their own path to their audiences, then we’re facing what is a cultural extinction of sorts.

I want this to be a work of public art, so hopefully we can be available as installations in various places. In museums and art festivals as well. It’s something that we can take on the road and bring to people who don’t necessarily have access to the work. But also be able to digitally distribute in this way, around ownership and sovereignty, artists’ sovereignty, and impact. That’s going to be quite meaningful. And so we have our own life cycle in that way. And then if the conventional space, if the traditional institutions want to also play along, then we can find within this model a way to interact and also work with that space. But this allows us to maintain ownership and control, as opposed to giving everything away.

Following up on what you mentioned about how traditional institutions and legacy companies might not be the best path for artists, what role do audiences play in the equation?

Right now, artists often assume their audience is a buyer, a commissioner, or an executive, and that’s a problem. Making a film that must pass through conventional channels means assuming the audience lacks a deep or immersive understanding of the story, the issues at hand, or the artistic context, let alone the people behind the work. That assumption leads to self-censorship and manipulation. Even those of us who say, “You say what you need to say to sell it, and then you make what you really want,” eventually realize: if you’ve been through this process, as I have, that’s not how it works in reality.

Once you enter into that mindset of, “I’ll do the song and dance just to get the project commissioned,” you’ve already started down a path that alters the core of the original idea. Now, I’m not saying that this process is always negative, there are great executives out there who truly know how to support and shape an idea. But the reality of the marketplace is harsh: artists are often underpaid, overworked, and desperate. This is not a level playing field. It’s not a space where most artists hold real power. A few might, but most don’t.

Even the best advice comes at a price. Sometimes the baby goes out with the bathwater. Sure, it’s necessary to drain the bathwater, that’s part of the creative process. You shape, chisel, revise. Friction is necessary. We want friction; the best work often comes out of it. But the problem is, that friction has become distorted. Even well-meaning executives are worried about keeping their jobs. Data has become supreme, it’s driving all the decisions. Do you think documentary executives really believe everything should be true crime, cults, controversy, or celebrity-driven stories? No. They’re being told that’s what works, and they’re just collecting their paycheck while prescribing that reality to others.

That’s why, for me, choosing to say, “My audience is my audience,” and proving the value of a project by engaging that audience early on, that’s a form of liberation. I prefer that space of autonomy, of artistic sovereignty. It allows me to be true. I can sleep at night knowing that the conversations I’ve had—even the ones across the metaphorical forest, have been delivered honestly. I might not always arrive at the final destination, but what I make will reflect what was truly said and intended. And I believe that if you stick to that path, you have a real shot, a far greater one than in the system we’re currently trapped in.

What is one piece of advice that you received that helped you in your career?

Having no other choice. If you’re an artist, it’s just because that’s what you have to do, right? And turning that into a creative source as opposed to a source of desperation was the best advice. You don’t have a choice, and the people in this economy, which is called the arts, are well aware of your lack of choice. But if you liberate yourself from that lack of choice and make it a creative force, as opposed to a desperate need to just get forward, then you’re much more likely to actually get to where you wanted to go. So that was great advice. And the best advice I can give artists like myself, who don’t come from a conventional privileged background, whose stories that they care about or grew up around, isn’t what is dominant… It’s don’t shy away from your otherness. Your otherness is your superpower. Embrace it.

I truly believe that artists will survive, not based on this abstract idea of a global audience, but through small communities and small audiences, and local community power, that you build from the ground up. And that’s where artists always belong, and that is sort of the field, the farm that we have to cultivate, to be able to grow our work. And in that environment, your otherness is what helps you grow, not this sort of trying to fit a mold of mainstream conventions.

Mahyad Tousi Recommends:

A Swim in a Pond in the Rain: In Which Four Russians Give a Master Class on Writing, Reading, and Life by George Saunders

On Earth We’re Briefly Gorgeous by Ocean Vuong

Night Rain by Arooj Aftab (album)

Looking up at the stars in the Amazon night sky

Cuddling with my family on movie nights.


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Miriam Garcia.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/filmmaker-and-artist-mahyad-tousi-on-finding-your-own-path-to-an-audience/feed/ 0 546976
The Paranoia of Officialdom: Age Verification and Using the Internet in Australia https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-paranoia-of-officialdom-age-verification-and-using-the-internet-in-australia/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-paranoia-of-officialdom-age-verification-and-using-the-internet-in-australia/#respond Thu, 31 Jul 2025 02:37:32 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160352 Australia, in keeping with its penal history, has a long record of paranoid officialdom and paternalistic wowsers. Be it perceived threats to morality, the tendency of the populace to be corrupted, and a general, gnawing fear about what knowledge might do, Australia’s governing authorities have prized censorship. This recent trend is most conspicuous in an […]

The post The Paranoia of Officialdom: Age Verification and Using the Internet in Australia first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Australia, in keeping with its penal history, has a long record of paranoid officialdom and paternalistic wowsers. Be it perceived threats to morality, the tendency of the populace to be corrupted, and a general, gnawing fear about what knowledge might do, Australia’s governing authorities have prized censorship.

This recent trend is most conspicuous in an ongoing regulatory war being waged against the Internet and the corporate citizens that inhabit it. Terrified that Australia’s tender children will suffer ruination at the hands of online platforms, the entire population of the country will be subjected to age verification checks. Preparations are already underway in the country to impose a social media ban for users under the age of 16, ostensibly to protect the mental health and wellbeing of children. The Online Safety Amendment (Social Media Minimum Age) Bill 2024 was passed in November last year to amend the Online Safety Act 2021, requiring “age-restricted social media platforms” to observe a “minimum age obligation” to prevent Australians under the age of 16 from having accounts. It also vests that ghastly office of the eSafety Commissioner and the Information Commissioner with powers to seek information regarding relevant compliance by the platforms, along with the power to issue and publish notices of non-compliance.

While the press were falling over to note the significance of such changes, little debate has accompanied the last month’s registration of a new industry code by the eSafety Commissioner, Julie Inman Grant. In fact, Inman Grant is proving most busy, having already registered three such codes, with a further six to be registered by the end of this year. All serve to target the behaviour of internet service companies in Australia. Not all have been subject to parliamentary debate, let alone broader public consultation.

Inman Grant has been less than forthcoming about the implications of these codes, most notably on the issue of mandatory age-assurance limits. That said, some crumbs have been left for those paying attention to her innate obsession with hiving off the Internet from Australian users. In her address to the National Press Club in Canberra on June 24, she did give some clue about where the country is heading: “Today, I am […] announcing that through the Online Safety Act’s codes and standards framework, we will be moving to register three industry-prepared codes designed to limit children’s access to high impact, harmful material like pornography, violent content, themes of suicide, self-harm and disordered eating.”  (Is there no limit to this commissar’s fears?) Under such codes, companies would “agree to apply safety measures up and down the technology stack – including age assurance protections.”

With messianic fervour, Inman Grant explained that the codes would “serve as a bulwark and operate in concern with the new social media age limits, distributing more responsibility and accountability across eight sectors of the tech industry.” These would also not be limited in scope, applicable to enterprise hosting services, internet carriage services, and various “access providers and search engines. I have concluded that each of these codes provides appropriate community safeguards.”

From December 27, such technology giants as Google and Microsoft will have to use age-assurance technology for account holders when they sign in and “apply tools and/or settings, like ‘safe search’ functionality, at the highest safety setting by default for an account holders its age verification systems indicate is likely to be an Australian child, designed to protect and prevent Australian children from accessing or being exposed to online pornography and high impact violence material in search results.” This is pursuant to Schedule 3 – Internet Search Engine Services Online Safety Code (Class 1C and Class 2 Material).

How this will be undertaken has not, as yet, been clarified by Google or Microsoft. The companies have, however, been in the business of trialling a number of technologies. These include Zero-Knowledge Proof (ZKP) cryptography, which permits people to prove that an aspect of themselves is true without surrendering any other data; using large language models (LLMs) to discern an account holder’s age based on browsing history; or the use of selfie verification and government ID tools.

Specialists in the field of information technology have been left baffled and worried. “I have not seen anything like this anywhere else in the world,” remarks IT researcher Lisa Given. This had “kind of popped out, seemingly out of the blue.” Digital Rights Watch chair, Lizzie O’Shea, is of the view that “the public deserves more of a say in how to balance these important human rights issues” while Justin Warren, founder of the tech analysis company PivotNine, sees it as “a massive overreaction after years of police inaction to curtail the power of a handful of large foreign technology companies.”

Then comes the issue of efficacy. Using the safety of children as a reason for censoring content and restricting technology is a government favourite. Whether the regulations actually protect children is quite another matter. John Pane, chair of Electronic Frontiers Australia (EFA), was less than impressed by the results from a recent age-assurance technology trial conducted to examine the effect of the teen social media ban. And all of this cannot ignore the innovative guile of young users, ever ready to circumvent any imposed restrictions.

Inman Grant, in her attempts to limit the use of the Internet and infantilise the population, sees these age-restricting measures as “building a culture of online safety, using multiple interventions – just as we have done so successfully on our beaches.” This nonsensical analogy excludes the central theme of her policies, common to all censors in history: The people are not to be trusted, and paternalistic governors and regulators know better.

The post The Paranoia of Officialdom: Age Verification and Using the Internet in Australia first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/31/the-paranoia-of-officialdom-age-verification-and-using-the-internet-in-australia/feed/ 0 546948
Editor’s Note: A Terrifying Boomerang https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/editors-note-a-terrifying-boomerang/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/editors-note-a-terrifying-boomerang/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 19:40:39 +0000 https://progressive.org/magazine/editors-note-a-terrifying-boomerang-tempus-20250730/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Alexandra Tempus.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/editors-note-a-terrifying-boomerang/feed/ 0 546924
What Our Reporter Saw In Gaza: A Famine of Israel’s Making https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/what-our-reporter-saw-in-gaza-a-famine-of-israels-making/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/what-our-reporter-saw-in-gaza-a-famine-of-israels-making/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 19:01:03 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=3faa0b437b5b2d89a4e33c27275535fa
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/what-our-reporter-saw-in-gaza-a-famine-of-israels-making/feed/ 0 546915
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 30, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-30-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-30-2025/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6daa644e9e8d4782f3f366ae76175b28 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 30, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-30-2025/feed/ 0 546943
Do Advocates for ‘School Choice’ Have a Plan B? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/do-advocates-for-school-choice-have-a-plan-b/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/do-advocates-for-school-choice-have-a-plan-b/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 17:54:17 +0000 https://progressive.org/public-schools-advocate/do-advocates-for-school-choice-have-a-plan-b-greene-20250730/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Peter Greene.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/do-advocates-for-school-choice-have-a-plan-b/feed/ 0 546902
States Take the Lead in Reining in Private Equity’s Investment in Health Care https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/states-take-the-lead-in-reining-in-private-equitys-investment-in-health-care/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/states-take-the-lead-in-reining-in-private-equitys-investment-in-health-care/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 17:43:28 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/states-take-the-lead-in-reining-in-private-equitys-investment-in-health-care-daigon-20250730/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Glenn Daigon.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/states-take-the-lead-in-reining-in-private-equitys-investment-in-health-care/feed/ 0 546904
These ancient ruins prove our world today doesn’t have to be this way https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/these-ancient-ruins-prove-our-world-today-doesnt-have-to-be-this-way/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/these-ancient-ruins-prove-our-world-today-doesnt-have-to-be-this-way/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 17:09:23 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335873 The stories and language of their ancestors have been lost to time. But their spirits remain. And the ruins remember. This is episode 60 of Stories of Resistance.]]>

In the land of the Condor, near the base of the tallest mountain in the Western hemisphere, an Incan community lived. The people hunted, along the sheer hillsides, they farmed, they collected water from the river gushing from snowmelt. They had children, built families, and passed on traditions to generations of descendants.

The land was cold, inhospitable, but their village grew and their community thrived at the far Southern reaches of the vast Incan empire, in present-day Argentina. Today, centuries have passed, the people are gone, but the stones and dirt that made their homes remain. The stories and language of their ancestors have been lost to time. But their spirits remain. And the ruins remember.

This is episode 60 of Stories of Resistance—a podcast co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, we’ll bring you stories of resistance like this. Inspiration for dark times.

Written and produced by Michael Fox.


A note from Stories of Resistance host Michael Fox: 

If you enjoy this podcast, please subscribe, like, share, comment, or leave a review. 

And please consider signing up for the Stories of Resistance podcast feed, either in Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Spreaker, or wherever you listen.

You can check out pictures of these Incan ruins in Argentina’s Andes Mountains, on Michael’s Patreon account

Please consider supporting this podcast and Michael Fox’s reporting at patreon.com/mfox. There you can also see exclusive pictures, video, and interviews. 

Transcript

Michael Fox: In the land of the condor, near the base of the tallest mountain in the Western hemisphere, an Incan community lived. The people hunted along the sheer hillsides. They farmed. They collected water from the river gushing from snowmelt. They built families. Had children. Sons and daughters. Grandkids. And generations of descendants.

The land was cold. Inhospitable. But their village grew and poured over the hillside. A way station on the transit road across the Andes. The far Southern reaches of the vast Incan empire.

Today, centuries have passed.

The people are gone, but the rocks, stones and dirt that made their homes remain.

They were here when San Martin marched his troops over the Andes.

When the railroad came and went, its tracks now grown over, or broken and buried by landslide and avalanche.

They saw the bridges rise and crumble.

And they smelled the asphalt, as the excavators, and the dump trucks and the bulldozers and the road rollers crushed the land flat, and laid its surface smooth.

Today, thousands of cars and trucks speed by the village. Their tires spin. The sound of traffic reverberates across the rock walls. The choke of the air brakes punctuates the mountain breeze.

No one stops. Even though the village is just feet away. Just off the shoulder, down a tiny dirt road, beside a sign post reading: “Tambollitos Incan Site.”

No one stops. But the village ruins don’t care. 

The stories of their ancestors have been lost to the tongue of those who speak. But their spirits remain. And the ruins remember. They carry the stories, etched in the broken and crumbling walls and the cold, hard mountain dirt.

They’ve seen the seasons change. They’ve watched the snow fall and melt. Felt the warm sun as it slides across the thick blue Andean sky.

And they will remain long after those of us driving past can remember.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/these-ancient-ruins-prove-our-world-today-doesnt-have-to-be-this-way/feed/ 0 546897
The GOP is taking us backwards #shorts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-gop-is-taking-us-backwards-shorts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-gop-is-taking-us-backwards-shorts/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 13:02:26 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=bfad80d005110f06e9051f922a0479cd
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-gop-is-taking-us-backwards-shorts/feed/ 0 546846
“The Most Peaceful Man”: West Bank Mourns Odeh Hadalin, Palestinian Activist Killed by Israeli Settler https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-most-peaceful-man-west-bank-mourns-odeh-hadalin-palestinian-activist-killed-by-israeli-settler/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-most-peaceful-man-west-bank-mourns-odeh-hadalin-palestinian-activist-killed-by-israeli-settler/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 12:51:18 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=520b84ca91c1d0bc862a463705e720df Seg orev odeh

Family and friends are reeling after an Israeli settler shot and killed Palestinian activist Odeh Muhammad Hadalin, an athlete, teacher and father of three young children. Hadalin helped produce the Oscar-winning documentary No Other Land, which follows Palestinians in the occupied West Bank community of Masafer Yatta as they struggle to stay on their land amid violent attacks by Jewish settlers. Hadalin’s cousin Alaa calls him an exceptionally “humane” and “peaceful” person in an interview with +972 Magazine and Local Call reporter Oren Ziv, who joins us from Tel Aviv.

In January, the Trump administration lifted Biden-era sanctions on Hadalin’s alleged killer, Yinon Levi, who has been released on house arrest. Meanwhile, multiple members of Hadalin’s family are still imprisoned and awaiting hearings in Israel’s military court after they were arrested by Israeli soldiers following the shooting. Ziv describes how Israeli soldiers also conducted a raid on a mourning party days after Hadalin died of his injuries. “They forced us out. And even in the entrance to the village, they started to throw stun grenades,” Ziv says. “It’s important to say it’s not only an attack on the family, on his friends. It’s an attempt to prevent us, the journalists, [from] investigating the case.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-most-peaceful-man-west-bank-mourns-odeh-hadalin-palestinian-activist-killed-by-israeli-settler/feed/ 0 546867
Climate justice victory at the ICJ – the student journey from USP lectures to The Hague https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/climate-justice-victory-at-the-icj-the-student-journey-from-usp-lectures-to-the-hague/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/climate-justice-victory-at-the-icj-the-student-journey-from-usp-lectures-to-the-hague/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 10:08:04 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117998 By Vahefonua Tupola in Suva

The University of the South Pacific (USP) is at the heart of a global legal victory with the International Court of Justice (ICJ) delivering a historic opinion last week affirming that states have binding legal obligations to protect the environment from human-induced greenhouse gas emissions.

The case, hailed as a triumph for climate justice, was driven by a student-led movement that began within USP’s own regional classrooms.

In 2021, the government of Vanuatu took a bold step by announcing its intention to seek an advisory opinion from the ICJ on climate change. But what many may not have realised is that the inspiration behind this unprecedented move came from a group of determined young Pacific Islanders — students from USP who formed the Pacific Island Students Fighting Climate Change (PISFCC).

According to the United Nations background information, these USP students led the charge, campaigning for years to bring the voices of vulnerable island nations to the highest court in the world.

Their call for accountability resonated across the globe, eventually leading to the adoption of a UN resolution in March 2023 that asked the ICJ two critical legal questions:

  • What obligations do states have under international law to protect the environment?
  • What are the legal consequences when they fail?
Students from the University of the South Pacific who formed the Pacific Island Students Fighting Climate Change (PISFCC)
Students from the University of the South Pacific who formed the Pacific Island Students Fighting Climate Change (PISFCC). Image: Wansolwara News

The result
A sweeping opinion from the ICJ affirming that climate change treaties place binding duties on countries to prevent environmental harm.

As the ICJ President, Judge Iwasawa Yuji, stated in the official delivery the court was: “Unanimously of the opinion that the climate change treaties set forth binding obligations for States parties to ensure the protection of the climate system and other parts of the environment from anthropogenic greenhouse gas emissions.”

USP alumni lead the celebration
USP alumna Cynthia Houniuhi, president of the PISFCC, shared her pride in a statement to USP’s official news that this landmark opinion must guide not only courtrooms but also global climate negotiations and policy decisions and it’s a call to action.

“The law is on our side. I’m proud to be on the right side of history.”

Her words reflect the essence of USP’s regional identity, a university built not just to educate, but to empower Pacific Islanders to lead solutions to the region’s most pressing challenges.


Why is the ICJ’s climate ruling such a big deal?         Video: Almost

Students in action, backed by global leaders
UN Secretary-General Antόnio Guterres, in a video message released by the UN, gave credit where it was due.

“This is a victory for our planet, for climate change and for the power of young people to make a difference. Young Pacific Islanders initiated this call for humanity to the world, and the world must respond.”

Vishal Prasad, director of PISFCC, in a video reel of the SPC (Secretariat of the Pacific Community), also credited youth activism rooted in the Pacific education system as six years ago young people from the Pacific decided to take climate change to the highest court and today the ICJ has responded.

“The ICJ has made it clear, it cemented the consensus on the science of climate change and formed the heart of all the arguments that many Pacific Island States made.”

USP’s influence is evident in the regional unity that drove this case forward showing that youth educated in the Pacific are capable of reshaping global narratives.

Residents wade through flooding caused by high ocean tides in low-lying parts of Majuro Atoll
Residents wade through flooding caused by high ocean tides in low-lying parts of Majuro Atoll, the capital of the Marshall Islands. In 2011, the Marshall Islands warned that the clock was ticking on climate change and the world needed to act urgently to stop low-lying Pacific nations disappearing beneath the waves. Image: PHYS ORG/Wansolwara

A win for the Pacific
From coastal erosion and rising sea levels to the legacy of nuclear testing, the Pacific lives with the frontline effects of climate change daily.

Coral Pasisi, SPC Director of Climate Change & Sustainability, highlighted in a video message, the long-term importance of the ruling:

“Climate change is already impacting them (Pacific people) and every increment that happens is creating more and more harm, not just for the generations now but those into the future. I think this marks a real moment for our kids.”

Additionally, as Ralph Regenvanu, Vanuatu’s Minister for Climate Change, noted to SPC, science was the cornerstone of the court’s reasoning.

“The opinion really used that science as the basis for its definitions of accountability, responsibility, and duty.”

Among the proud USP student voices is Siosiua Veikune, who told Tonga’s national broadcaster that this is not only a win for the students but for the Pacific islands also.

What now?
With 91 written statements and 97 countries participating in oral proceedings, this was the largest case ever seen by the ICJ and it all began with a movement sparked at USP.

Now, the challenge moves from the courtroom to the global stage and will see how nations implement this legal opinion.

Though advisory, the ICJ ruling carries immense moral and legal weight. It will likely shape global climate negotiations, strengthen lawsuits against polluting states, and empower developing nations especially vulnerable Pacific Islands to demand justice on the international stage.

For the students who dreamed it into motion, it’s only the beginning.

“Now, we have to make sure this ruling leads to real action — in parliaments, at climate summits, and in every space where our future is at stake,”  said Veikune.

Vahefonua Tupola is a second-year student journalist at University of the South Pacific’s Laucala Campus. Republshed from Wansolwara News, the USP student journalism newspaper and website in partnership with Asia Pacific Report.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Wansolwara.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/climate-justice-victory-at-the-icj-the-student-journey-from-usp-lectures-to-the-hague/feed/ 0 546821
Idaho Schools Consistently Break Disability Laws. Parents Say They’re Not Doing Enough to Fix the Problem. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/idaho-schools-consistently-break-disability-laws-parents-say-theyre-not-doing-enough-to-fix-the-problem/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/idaho-schools-consistently-break-disability-laws-parents-say-theyre-not-doing-enough-to-fix-the-problem/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/idaho-special-education-disabilities-complaints by Becca Savransky, Idaho Statesman

Kali Larsen sat at her desk at Fruitland Elementary School in Idaho earlier this year, trying to read the test questions as her classmates silently worked around her. Her anxiety climbed as she stared at the paper. She asked to use the bathroom and left the room.

Her mother, Jessica Larsen, had been substitute teaching that day when she received a call from the front office, notifying her that her 9-year-old daughter was having a panic attack. Kali, now 10, has dyslexia and struggles with reading and writing, Larsen said.

“Wouldn’t you be anxious?” Larsen told the Idaho Statesman and ProPublica.

For years, Larsen had been pleading with the Fruitland School District to get Kali qualified for special education for reading. Larsen, who herself was diagnosed later in life with dyslexia, had her daughter tested in first grade in 2021 by a private specialist who said Kali had the same disability. But a diagnosis doesn’t automatically qualify a student for special education. The school still wouldn’t evaluate Kali for help, saying she likely wouldn’t qualify, in part because her scores weren’t low enough, Larsen said.

Larsen grew more frustrated with each passing school year as her child — a shy girl who feels most confident when competing in rodeos on her horse, Pie — would cry after school and tell her she felt “dumb.” A year before her daughter’s panic attack in fourth grade, Larsen had filed a state complaint against the district, saying it refused to evaluate Kali for special education. A few months later, in March 2024, a state investigator agreed: The district had broken the law.

Parents of students with disabilities have increasingly resorted to filing complaints with the state over their schools’ failure to educate their children, alleging districts are violating federal law. Most of the time, state investigators have agreed and found that districts refuse to identify and evaluate children with disabilities, such as dyslexia or autism, and fail to follow plans to educate them fairly.

In Idaho, students with disabilities have performed worse in reading and math than many of their peers in other states, federal data shows. Idaho was among the states with the most founded complaints per capita in recent years, according to a national center that analyzes data on complaints and provides support to states. Over the past five years, investigators found in over 70% of the complaints filed in Idaho that districts had broken the law.

But the state often closes cases without making sure the districts have fully solved the problems, parents across Idaho told the Statesman and ProPublica.

Districts can resolve the violations without “really changing their ways,” said Amy Martz, a Utah-based attorney who has worked with families in Idaho. “There’s no teeth.”

State Superintendent Debbie Critchfield said the state Department of Education expects districts to make any corrections needed to be in full compliance with state and federal law, and that it has conducted listening sessions and piloted other programs to help meet the needs of students and parents.

Critchfield said the challenge with educating students with disabilities comes down, in part, to the way the state distributes funding, which is based on a flat percentage and not the actual number of students with disabilities in each district. She said staff members have large caseloads and districts lack trained staff and specialists.

Parents say it can take months for the districts to evaluate a child for services, and in some cases, districts have refused to provide the instruction or behavioral interventions students need.

Lawmakers have been reluctant to approve changes to the funding formula despite warnings from state officials about a shortfall between what districts spend on special education and what the state allocates. An independent oversight office this year estimated the gap to be over $80 million. Idaho routinely ranks last in the nation for funding per student overall.

Larsen said she didn’t want to get the district or teachers in trouble when she filed her complaint. But she said she risked retaliation, in a small community where speaking out can be damaging, because she intended to make public schools better for her daughter and other kids.

“We’re failing our kids. This is our future,” Larsen said. “Why are we failing them? And that’s my question to them, but they can’t answer.”

Jessica Larsen and Kali at their home in Fruitland, Idaho. Kali is passionate about horses and competes in rodeos with her horse, Pie. (Sarah A. Miller/Idaho Statesman) What Investigators Found

School districts nationwide are required to identify children who have disabilities or health impairments that could make it harder to learn, such as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder or dyslexia, and evaluate them for special education services. A parent can also formally request an evaluation of their child. Under federal law, if the school has any reason to suspect a disability, it must provide that evaluation.

But when Larsen asked the district to evaluate her daughter, the school pushed back.

Records show that district officials over a period of 1 1/2 years provided numerous reasons Kali didn’t need or wouldn’t qualify for special education: Her low reading scores were mainly due to anxiety, rather than a disability; she needed to advocate for herself; she was “making progress”; a special education evaluation would take a long time; if she received special education services, she’d miss out on valuable instruction time in a general education classroom.

Fruitland Elementary School (Sarah A. Miller/Idaho Statesman)

A few months after Larsen filed her complaint in 2024, an investigator contracted by the state Department of Education concluded that the district didn’t have procedures in place to make sure all students with disabilities were identified and helped, and that it hadn’t conducted a full evaluation of Kali, even after Larsen requested it. The investigators issued a corrective action plan and ordered the district to begin the evaluation process with Kali within about two weeks and to help her within two months if they found she qualified for special education.

Fruitland Superintendent Stoney Winston, who started in July 2024, after the state issued the corrective action plan, said the district has “made corrections” and is meeting current requirements. He said he can’t speak to what happened before he assumed his role.

Get in Touch

Do you have personal experience with problems related to special education in Idaho or accessibility through the Americans with Disabilities Act in schools? We want to hear from you, whether you’re a student, a parent, an educator or an administrator. We will only use your name with permission. Reach out to Becca Savransky at bsavransky@idahostatesman.com or 208-495-5661.

Disability advocates have said the lack of funding makes it hard for school districts in the state to attract qualified specialists or special education teachers who fully understand the law, which can lead to improper education plans or other violations. High caseloads for staff members also mean less time for making or implementing specialized education plans, they said.

The state relies on a decades-old funding formula that assumes a set percentage of students in every district would qualify for special education: 6% in elementary school and 5.5% in middle and high school. State education officials acknowledged those percentages were never adequate. Officials said they don’t know how lawmakers first arrived at that formula.

“That 5.5 and that 6%, which was already insufficient back in 2016, is even more insufficient,” said Casey Petti, from Idaho’s Office of Performance Evaluations, an independent oversight agency.

According to the most recent data, about 12% of students in Idaho qualify for special education services — the lowest in the country.

In 2009, that agency told Idaho officials to consider tying special education funding to the actual cost of educating those students. In 2016, the office came out with a report with the same findings.

That same year, the Legislature created a committee to research the issue and rewrite the state’s funding formula. The committee met for three years, and in 2019, lawmakers proposed legislation. While those proposals would have provided money for special education based on the number of students actually receiving services, state education officials and school administrators said they were left out of the process and the legislation would be difficult to implement. The state superintendent at the time questioned whether it would even adequately fund special education.

Most Idaho School Districts Had to Spend More on Special Education Than the State Allocated

Nearly 75% of school districts that received state funding for special education programs spent anywhere from $640 to $19 million more than what the state provided during the 2023-24 school year.

Source: Idaho Office of Performance Evaluations (Chris Alcantara/ProPublica) Source: Idaho Office of Performance Evaluations. Note: West Bonner and Wendell school districts are not shown because they did not have financial data available for 2023. Prairie Elementary School District is not included because it had no estimated special education state allocations. Pleasant Valley Elementary District, Avery School District and Three Creek Joint Elementary School District are also not shown because they reported no special education spending and had no estimated special education allocations. All allocations are estimates based on Idaho’s funding formula. View the full table on ProPublica's site.

In the years since, lawmakers have introduced other bills to revise the funding formula, but the Legislature did not approve any of them. The cost to investigate complaints overall has nearly tripled since the 2020 school year, according to the state Department of Education, with each investigation ranging from a few hundred dollars to $30,000.

This year, the Idaho Legislature approved adding another specialist to help handle complaints. During the 2023-24 school year, the state received 53 complaints and found districts were out of compliance in most of them.

But while the state has spent more money to investigate the problems, administrators said they have been given little to fix them. In Idaho, districts rely on local taxpayers to fund special education more than in many other states, according to a 2024 study by Bellwether, a nonprofit that analyzed data from the National Center for Education Statistics for the 24 states where it was available.

Boundary County Superintendent Jan Bayer described special education as an “unfunded mandate.” The district spends about $1.7 million from its general fund to educate students with disabilities and goes to its taxpayers every two years to ask for additional funding to provide other programs.

Other superintendents said it was difficult to meet the needs of every student in special education.

“While we provide the vast majority of our students with the services they need, we do have a couple of higher need students who need more services than we can provide,” Butte County Superintendent Joe Steele, who retired this summer, said in an email to the Statesman. But finding educators or specialists with the proper training, and paying for them, would be challenging in the remote area, he said.

Kendra Scheid watched her son struggle in a larger district with high caseloads and inexperienced staff. Scheid’s son, who is autistic and nonverbal, qualified for developmental preschool before moving into the Pocatello-Chubbuck School District in eastern Idaho. But the district told her that her son could attend preschool only two days a week for 2 1/2 hours each day.

Before her son started attending full-day kindergarten, Scheid asked the school for a meeting to put together a revised education plan for her son. But the district refused, according to the complaint investigation.

Scheid went to school with her son on the first days, where he was placed with other students with disabilities, and witnessed what she described as chaos: kids climbing on tables, students injuring themselves with no staff intervention and teachers restraining children in their chairs. “They had no idea what any of these kids needed, what any of these kids were like coming into the classroom,” she said.

Pocatello school district spokesperson Courtney Fisher said the district is committed to “proactively addressing parent concerns” and improving its special education services. That includes putting into place a plan that meets all state requirements and hiring more staff, she said, and trying to address any gaps in its system to prevent issues in the future.

I feel like a bad mom because I didn’t know this stuff at the time. And I feel like I let my son down.

—Kendra Scheid

After school on the second day, Scheid’s son came home crying and covering his ears, something she said he hadn’t done before. After day three, Scheid disenrolled her son from the district. For the rest of that year, he saw outside therapists and Scheid worked with him at home.

After she filed a complaint with the state, an investigator found the district had broken the law when it failed to create a plan that would work for her son and to ensure the teacher had his previous education plan before school started. The state said the district must create a new education plan for her son should he reenroll, but Scheid had lost faith. Instead, she entered and won one of the few available lottery spots in a charter school, which her son now attends.

“I feel like a bad mom because I didn’t know this stuff at the time,” reflected Scheid, who said her son is now doing well in a charter school that’s more accommodating. “And I feel like I let my son down.”

“I Would Never Move Back There”

About 20% of Idaho districts have broken federal disability law multiple times in the past five years, and nearly 40% have violated the law at least once, according to data from the state Department of Education. When they do, the state, which enforces the federal law and corresponding state rules, asks them to fix the problems through corrective action plans.

The plans reviewed by the news outlets ask district staff to undergo training, and sometimes a child gets additional hours of education to make up for the time missed. But a Statesman and ProPublica review of corrective action plans and interviews with parents showed districts repeatedly receive training for the same problems and commit similar violations.

Critchfield, the state superintendent, said there are several factors that could play a role in whether training is successful for districts permanently, including staff turnover and access to resources.

“Compliance with state and federal law is the ultimate goal,” she said in an email. “As a department, we are always prepared to provide remedial training and intervention to address additional concerns as they arise.”

The Pocatello school district received 11 complaints over the past five years, according to data from the state Department of Education. The Garden Valley School District received 10. In both of these districts, federal investigators found systemic violations in special education law that impacted more than one student. The state Department of Education refused to provide the number of founded complaints per district, citing federal law on student privacy, though some other states publicly post much of their complaint investigations online.

Andrew Branham was among several parents who filed complaints against the Garden Valley School District over the past three years.

The Branhams wrote in the complaint that their daughter received “virtually no education” and was denied services, such as speech and counseling. At one point, they said a school resource officer called her parents threatening to arrest her. Her parents said they rushed to school to find her barefoot in the middle of the parking lot as several adults looked on. A state investigator concluded that the district in some instances had “relied” on the resource officer to address the student’s behavior.

Branham said the district was “unwilling” to meet the needs of their daughter. The Branhams elevated their case, hiring an attorney who presented it before a state-contracted hearing officer. The Branhams received a financial settlement with the district and moved to Washington to get their daughter a better education.

“It is a shame what Idaho is doing to kids in that state,” Branham said in December. “I would never move back there, and I would never recommend anyone live in that state, especially if you have special needs kids.”

After the Branhams filed their complaint and went public, more than 20 families shared similar experiences, they said. So they filed a complaint on behalf of other families that alleged that the district ignored state and federal laws meant to protect students with disabilities and denied them an education.

The resulting state investigations concluded that at least 13 of the allegations were founded. The district failed to properly construct education plans for students. It also didn’t have the proper plans for supporting a child with behavioral issues. The district did not gather or share the data it needed to assess student progress and could not adequately determine whether students were meeting their learning goals, the investigations found.

The state decided the district needed extra help, ranking Garden Valley in 2024 as one of three districts in need of substantial intervention. The state now requires the district to follow an improvement plan and monitors its progress — but the district’s funding remains the same.

The Garden Valley School District did not respond to requests for comment.

Families in other districts have also pulled their children from local schools. Some parents and advocates who talked to the Statesman said they are especially worried about President Donald Trump’s efforts to dismantle the U.S. Department of Education and leave it to the states when Idaho has long struggled to provide an education to students with disabilities.

In Kali’s case, the state’s corrective action plan issued in 2024, in addition to requiring that the district start to evaluate Larsen’s daughter, also mandated that the district help teachers learn how to spot students who should be evaluated for special education and identify those with disabilities.

The state closed the case earlier this year, about a year after it was filed. Kali had been struggling without adequate help for three years before the district conceded she was eligible for special education services.

Kali now has an education plan, but Larsen said the district still isn’t giving her the help she needs. She just finished fourth grade and still hasn’t mastered reading and writing. As her daughter prepares for middle school, Larsen is considering pulling her from the district next year. But Larsen doesn’t plan on filing another complaint. It was too much stress with little to show for it, she said.

When Kali was moved to a different classroom each day to receive more specialized instruction, her teachers sometimes told her to sit and read quietly, Larsen said.

“She can’t read,” Larsen said, exasperated. “It’s so frustrating.”

Kali uses a voice search tool on Google to help her with spelling. (Sarah A. Miller/Idaho Statesman)


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Becca Savransky, Idaho Statesman.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/idaho-schools-consistently-break-disability-laws-parents-say-theyre-not-doing-enough-to-fix-the-problem/feed/ 0 546817
Musicians Alexis Krauss and Derek Miller (Sleigh Bells) on practicing patience https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/musicians-alexis-krauss-and-derek-miller-sleigh-bells-on-practicing-patience/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/musicians-alexis-krauss-and-derek-miller-sleigh-bells-on-practicing-patience/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musicians-alexis-krauss-and-derek-miller-sleigh-bells-on-practicing-patience You’ve said that Bunky Becky Birthday Boy is inspired by Alexis’s late dog, Riz. Was Riz a Sleigh Bells fan?

Alexis Krauss: Well, she was a mysterious creature. But based on the love that she showed us, especially on tour and all of her many zoomies on the tour bus, I’m going to say she was a pretty big fan.

Derek Miller: We also hear her on the first track on Bitter Rivals. She’s the dog at the beginning, so she’s technically a performing, contributing member of Sleigh Bells.

Alexis: Exactly. She could ask for royalties. “Bunky Pop” was Derek’s effort to make a track that embodied her and her spirit, and I think he really succeeded in that. That song really does make me think of her in so many ways.

Derek: We turned the idea of Riz as a human being into half of the record. The other half would be Roxette, who represents Alexis. I’m definitely a little more Bunky Becky, a little more Riz—like a dog who playfully wanders into a room and starts knocking stuff over. They mean well, they’re just loud. Riz had a seizure in 2022. She was unconscious for two or three minutes, and Alexis called me crying. A week later, I got the idea to try to write an anthem for her. I tried to make a track that felt like her sprinting through a field, basically. Even though it is specific to a dog, it works in a less specific context as well. It’s really just about two friends. Even though there is autobiography in there, it’s really about any friendship that lasts. There’s going to be lots of ups and downs and you see each other through all of it.

You’ve worked together for almost two decades. What keeps your collaboration generative and invigorating?

Alexis: If it felt tired and stale, or if there was animosity that had built up, I don’t think we’d be doing it. Not that we wouldn’t care enough to try and fix things, but at this point, our relationship is so solid and the creative relationship is really pretty fluid. It’s something we both look forward to.

Derek: This is advice that I’ve given to younger artists who have asked me about the creative process: try to make music that you are, at least temporarily, madly in love with. Maybe it’s just a riff, maybe it’s a verse in a chorus, maybe it’s a complete arrangement. I want to get to a place where I record a new idea and I get in bed at night and I listen to it 19 times in a row staring at the ceiling, and on the 20th time I’m like, “This is madness. Go to bed.” So I put my phone down, I turn the lights out, and five minutes later I put my earbuds back in, turn the light on and listen to it three more times.

I feel like I’ve been in that zone since I was a teenager. Since I was 16, I’ve had at least one piece of music that I am absolutely dying for people to hear. Doesn’t mean it’s any good. Sometimes it is, sometimes it’s trash. You never know. But if you’re in that space where you’re madly in love with what you’re working on while you’re working on it, it’s very, very easy to move forward. And that’s the space that we’ve been in really since the beginning.

The first thing we recorded together was Infinity Guitars… We recorded the first rough vocals for Infinity Guitars [for a few hours] before we heard a knock on our door; it was these two kids that lived down the hall. I started to apologize, but they said, “It’s cool, what is that?” And I remember looking at you, Alexis, and looking at them and being like, “I guess that’s our new band.”

The riff on “Wanna Start a Band?” was something you’ve been working on since 2014. When do you know when it’s the right time to revisit old work?

Derek: Anyone who makes records, especially if you’ve been doing it for a while, has a mental Rolodex of existing sessions with moments that are really great. You don’t know what the texture or the tempo or the key should be, but you know that there’s something there. All I had for “Wanna Start a Band?” was the ascending part of the riff. That’s all it was. It was this little pleasurable thorn in my brain that just sits there until I solve it. It took a long time to find the verses and the rest of the riff. It turns out it took almost a decade.

I think I’ll probably make records for the rest of my life. I don’t know who will listen or if they’ll be any good. I don’t mind if I have to wait years. I think it’s just about having patience. Right now I have 30 or 40 sessions, and each of them has something really special, even if it’s just a bar. I don’t mean to make it sound momentous, by the way. There’s just a couple of ideas, but in my life, it’s momentous.

Alexis: Derek is really discriminating about the best ideas. There’s been multiple times where we’ve recorded something and I’ve gotten really excited, and then I’ve gotten almost pissed at him because he starts to doubt it. Then there’s the process of mourning the shape that it had taken. There’s a song that I fucking loved that didn’t make this album. But there’s been very few times, if any, where that patience hasn’t paid off in terms of creating a song that I think was better than what we had initially. I think that patience has really benefited the band.

Do you ever try to purposely disconnect from the creative process?

Alexis: Derek, one thing I’ve noticed is that when you’re in that more contemplative state of brainstorming or developing a direction for one of the new records, you’ll often do this thing where you’ll say, “I’m making tracks for [another] artist. This isn’t Sleigh Bell’s music.” I love that idea. I love the idea of Derek producing for other people. But in the back of my mind, I always know he’s going to switch soon and send me a song that we can work on. I think that’s a way that you maybe step into a more exploratory mindset.

Derek: I love when that switch happens. That happened recently with something I shared three weeks ago. We don’t have any vocals written yet, but in my mind it was for somebody else. It’s just a fun game to play, to trick yourself. Every time I do it, I’m convinced: “This time, it’s not going to be for Sleigh Bells. I’m going to keep it out of that lane. I’m going to keep crash cymbals and cymbal chokes and high-game guitars out of the mix. Blah, blah, blah.” But it usually tends to come back around, if I love it enough.

Something I love about Sleigh Bells is how consistent the vision is. How much is that natural, and how much is it through an intentional shaping of the record?

Derek: I feel like it happens naturally. We’ve gone pretty far outside of what we would consider to be the Sleigh Bell sound. I always use a track from 2017 called “And Saints” as an example. For that song, I literally made a list of everything recognizable as Sleigh Bells and was unable to do any of those things, any of my usual tricks. So we ended up with a really simple Arp synth, some lush pads, Alexis’s vocal, and that’s it.

Alexis: I think one of the reasons why that melody took the shape the way it did is because it came out in one longer melodic take, which doesn’t always happen. A lot of our stuff will go part by part, or verse by verse, and then we’ll work on the bridge. That one all came together at once; I think it was because the track had space for that.

Derek: I have to resist my natural impulse to impact the speaker really intensely. I like cyan; I like things that are bright and shiny and aggressive, but in a pleasurable way. I want it to be joyful and euphoric. Most music that’s sonically aggressive has a very dark, heavy aesthetic. Lyrically, it’s very dark. The artwork is very dark, the merch is very dark—and I love that. That’s great. I just feel like there’s so much more to be explored with music that is sonically intense and aggressive but is more playful. 100 gecs is a great example of that. I was so excited the first time I heard 100 gecs. Bits of Poppy’s record I Disagree as well, are really fun and playful. Just so it’s crystal clear, I’m not shading metal or hardcore. I come from that. I love those records, but there’s really a lot of room to mess around. It’s a big sandbox with not a lot of people in it.

I think it’s fair to argue that many artists who often get classified as hyperpop, like 100 gecs and Poppy, were heavily inspired by Sleigh Bells. How did you feel when you encountered this newer crop of artists who share elements of your sound?

Derek: It was so exciting to hear the next wave of artists who are exciting and inspired and connecting. It’s truly an honor. At first, it can make you feel old, even if you’re in your 30s. And a little scared, which is natural. I’ve exchanged really, really lovely messages with Dylan Brady from gecs. It was great to hear directly from them that they were influenced by us. In turn, they have influenced us: I borrowed from gecs on Texis and a little bit of this record. It’s like the circle’s complete.

It’s not even borrowing a specific thing… It’s just the feeling. There’s just a life and a spark and a spirit and a playfulness that I feel like, at our best, we have. And when you hear it in another artist, it just makes you want to step up and be great as well. Not in a competitive way. I feel like we’re only ever in competition with ourselves.

Alexis: Personally, I’ve never felt particularly compelled to identify with a specific genre, but I do agree that listening to Poppy’s album or listening to 100 gecs, there is that feeling of just wanting to lose your shit. There’s this completely un-self-conscious, rowdy intensity—but then also this saccharine sweetness and playful giddiness. The marriage of these components is so compelling. As Derek’s said, it’s a feeling. It’s a spark. To be considered amongst bands who are really doing that well, it’s a huge privilege and a huge honor.

Derek: We should mention Charli [XCX] as well, who finally reached the masses with that sound. Right after True Romance came out, Charli opened our UK Reign of Terror shows, and within three minutes of the first set, I was like, “Enjoy this moment because she will never be opening for us again.” Even then, as a little kid, she was great. To watch her do her thing has been really incredible and inspiring, especially with Brat.

Why do you feel like that intense, over-the-top sound is speaking so much to this current moment?

Alexis: I spend a lot of time with young people and teenagers. I think young people have access to so much music and so many different ideas and styles. You seldom hear about a young person talk about a guilty pleasure. Kids are so much more exploratory and open to so many different genres. When I was growing up, marrying pop and hardcore wasn’t groundbreaking, necessarily. Bands have been doing it for a long time in different ways. But there was always this feeling, at least for me, that there was almost something shameful about pop, or that hardcore was more authentic. Young people have a disregard for that, and it’s created so much more space for young women and femme people to go to, say, a Turnstile show. That band is so exciting. You look at their fan base, and those shows never would’ve looked like that 20 years ago.

How did the lyrics for the new record come about?

Derek: A lot of times the instrumental will inform the lyric, or I’ll have something kicking around. I’ll send an instrumental and then a lyric file to Alexis and say, “Go nuts. Do whatever you want, move things around, change it.” Once she gets her hands on it, she definitely colors it in the best way.

Alexis: I think of melody first. When I’m listening to a track, I’ll usually just start with some mumbles or syllables. Once I have a melody that I think is worthy, I’ll try and add the lyric into that… A lot of times it’s a piecemeal assembly. But there have been multiple times where Derek is like, “No, this is really what I think should be said here.” I love that this record has a narrative it’s telling. You’re going through a relationship with the characters, a storyline, especially with regards to Riz. It’s almost like a word scramble: How do I put this together in a way with a melody that’s going to do the track justice?

Derek Miller recommends:

Book of Love’s self-titled record. Kind of a hidden gem from 1986. Favorite tracks: “Boy,” “Modigliani (Lost In Your Eyes),” “I Touch Roses.” All great, will treat you right.

Movies by Steve McQueen, Luca Guadagnino, Kathryn Bigelow, James Cameron, Jordan Peele, Spielberg, Sean Baker.

I’ll Be There: My Life with The Four Tops by Duke Fakir. This is wonderful even if you don’t happen to love Motown/The Four Tops, which I most definitely do.

Alexis Krauss recommends:

Any and all books and essays by Robin Wall Kimmerer, especially Braiding Sweetgrass

Mela watermelon water


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Arielle Gordon.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/musicians-alexis-krauss-and-derek-miller-sleigh-bells-on-practicing-patience/feed/ 0 546801
Musician Shura on finding something to say https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/musician-shura-on-finding-something-to-say/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/musician-shura-on-finding-something-to-say/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-shura-on-finding-something-to-say I appreciate seeing that you have your own album artwork in the background on a frame.

Is that a bit embarrassing? It’s something I started in the pandemic when I was really not sure if I was ever going to make another record again, and I was like, “I need to make this little wall of things I have done to remind me that I’ve done them and I’m doing it,” and I call it my little affirmation wall.

I Got Too Sad for My Friends is your first album in six years, and it has a very different sound than your previous two. I know you wrote at least one of the songs at home on acoustic guitar during lockdown. To what extent has embracing less synth in your production since then been an intentional artistic direction, a product of your circumstances, or just some other creative motivation?

It’s a real mix. What I became known for with the first record, synth pop, was actually new for me. I had always written on acoustic guitar. My songs, before I released them, had an electronic flavor because I would produce them at home, use loops, and produce beats, but they were always built around acoustic guitar. I’m not a proficient keys player, and I certainly had never encountered a synthesizer in the flesh before. It wasn’t until I met my collaborator for the first two records, Joel Pott, that I really met [the Roland] Juno-106, which was the synth that became so much of the sound of my first record and a big part of the second record.

In some ways, embracing less synth is a return to my songwriting origins. It’s also a product of circumstance, having moved to New York, not having had the time to move my entire studio—or the money, to be quite frank—because it’s a lot of gear. I didn’t even have a guitar to begin with. I had to ask Torres to borrow her guitar, so she ran around in the middle of the lockdowns, and we did a distanced exchange. I say exchange, but I gave Torres nothing in return. I was just like, “Thank you. I finally have an instrument.”

In terms of textures, which are very different on this record, it was just where I needed to live, the space I needed to occupy. I needed things that felt natural, warm, tactile. The natural world was really calling me. And it was certainly the kind of textures I was listening to at that time. I’ve talked a lot about how Cassandra Jenkins’ record [An Overview on Phenomenal Nature] massively influenced the world I was in at that time.

Hearing you talk about going back to your roots makes me wonder if you’ve been doing any songwriting in the time since. If you have, has it veered more toward the sound you have on I Got Too Sad for My Friends or on Forevher and Nothing’s Real?

This stuff I’ve been writing, it’s still in the world of this third album, but also, everything starts off in that world because of how I write.

Every time I get to this stage in the album process, I’m like, “I’m never going to make an album ever again. I don’t want to do it. This is a completely mad endeavor. Why am I doing this when no one is asking me to? It is not like I have millions of people clamoring for a Shura record, and yet here I am putting myself through this process.” But it’s been interesting because I’ve been listening to a lot of pop music in the last couple of months, maybe as a kind of antidote to the world that I’m in right now and I’m like, “Oh, maybe I need to make some pop music again.” And then I’m like, “No. No more albums. Stop it.” But I’ve never really known where I’m going next until I’m already halfway there.

I’m interested in the idea that you’re always like, “No, I don’t want to do another album.” How do you reignite your creative spark?

The difference between the creative spark reigniting and what happened [in the years before I Got Too Sad For My Friends] was that this was the first time I experienced what people would call writer’s block, the inability to write. There was nothing going on in that way in my brain. Whereas in the past when I’d finished Nothing’s Real, I was like, “Oh, I never want to do that again,” it wasn’t so much that I didn’t have stuff to say or I wasn’t writing. It was just the experience of touring a record for two years and everything that happened was exhausting, and I was like, “Wow, I am just tired and I need to sleep.” In that moment of peak exhaustion, the idea of doing it again is horrifying.

What was different here with this album was that I was midway through a tour, so I was excited about playing these songs, about playing the record, and that sort of stopped. And I knew that meant I probably should use this time, this break, to write, because it’s not often that you get that break. You’re either recording, touring, or doing promo.

I said, “It’d be really useful now to write a lot.” And I just couldn’t. I had nothing to say. The only way I describe it to people is, I felt like my brain was a brick. The brain itself had calcified, and the particles weren’t moving, and the synapses weren’t firing. Anytime I tried, anything I began to say or tried to say just seemed awful, and I hated everything that I attempted to do and gave up, and then wondered if that was it. I was like, “Maybe the particles will never uncalcify,” which is, if that’s the first time it’s happened to you, quite discombobulating, and probably will be the second time it happens to me. I’ll probably be like, “Okay, no, this time for real, it’s calcified and it’s never coming back.”

Can you say more about how you transformed your mind from “it feels calcified” to “I have something to say again”?

It was a long process with several prongs. Relying heavily on my small group of peers and talking to them about feeling this way, and having them tell me they had felt this way and had come through the other side was really helpful to me. Ladyhawke, who I became very good friends with in the [lockdowns], was like, “I’ve been there. You will absolutely write another song again. Don’t panic.”

I had to let go of the panic. To this day, I still do it walking and leaving the house. Whenever I feel stuck—I got this book by Brenda Ueland called If You Want to Write, and she mentions the importance of walking and having that time to just observe and think. Observation and feeding my brain that way is something Katie Gavin would talk to me about, the idea of objective observations and writing them down.

One of the things I struggle with, which is also in Brenda Ueland’s book, is editing before you’ve even written it down. You have the thought, you go to write it down, and you’re like, “No, that’s a terrible thought. Don’t even bother writing it down.” [I learned] to quiet that voice and be like, “No, just write everything down.” Right now, that may not feel or sound interesting or feel like a lyric, but with time, you’ll go back and be like, “Actually, there’s this one tiny fragment that has nothing to do with this song that I’m writing. But for some reason there’s an image there or something that really fits.”

Maybe that’s also why nature and the textures of this record are the way they are, because I would go on these walks and sit down on a park bench, write down everything that I could hear, see, and smell, and just sit. If I think of “Richardson,” just feeling the air move across my face as a lyric would’ve been something that I wrote down in my notepad. When I wrote that, I probably was like, “Oh, why am I talking about the wind? God.”

As I’m hearing you talk about this, I want to ask, how do you edit?

I’m working on lyrics right until I record the final—I will have a draft, an early draft, and sometimes, there will be space for a second verse that I don’t have yet, and I’ll either leave a gap or copy the first verse twice. Sometimes, you’ll write a song and the whole thing will come out. And yes, you’ll tweak certain words and go, “Am I trying to force a rhyme here where there doesn’t need to be? Is there a more interesting word that doesn’t rhyme?” Those kinds of things. Sometimes, I’ll be like, “Why is verse two not coming?” How I’ve learned to deal with that is that, “Okay, verse two isn’t coming for me. I can’t force verse two,” so I have to let it arrive at me.

Sometimes, there will be songs [for which] I finish the lyrics years later. I try not to listen to my own music until time has passed. It’s like, “Maybe I should have put that word in there.” But I think it’s because I studied English literature, for me, the most important part, the bit I get the most out of as a consumer of music, as an enjoyer of music, is the lyrics. So for me, I really care. I try things out, I try different versions, I will sing different versions, and it’s a sort of long process [that] feels like I’m excavating dinosaur bones with a little toothbrush.

Why did you move back to the U.K., and how has doing so affected your creativity? How has it affected your relationships with the friends you’ve mentioned, none of whom live in the U.K.?

Coming back here is primarily a financial decision, to be honest. I was spending a lot of money on an apartment in New York, which is a city I love, and I couldn’t enjoy all that New York has to offer, including my friends who were there. We couldn’t hang out. It made sense to come back here.

It’s been interesting making a record where place, the idea of place, is a big character. So many of those places are on the other side of the world. I have friends who are creative, but I don’t think I’ve ever had a clique or a crew in music. I was really excited about moving to New York because there are so many incredible musicians there. I was signed to a label that started in America, and I was excited to tap into the creative sphere there. I definitely did make friends, and my life sort of revolved around The Lot Radio just because of the timing of when I got there and it being [lockdown]. It felt like I never got the opportunity to really explore what a full life as a creative person would be in New York. I feel like I have unfinished business that I’m not remotely interested in finishing for at least four years.

Do you have an overarching principle or philosophy for navigating change as an artist?

It’s funny because I’m thinking about a lyric in “Ringpull,” which is like, “I’m scared of change. What if you arrive and all I do is change?” I think, not being neurotypical, change is a challenge in some ways, in terms of my routine, my environment, which is why I sometimes push myself to do the thing I know I’m not comfortable with.

To rewind a bit, for this album, it was really important to me to not do the same thing again. I didn’t want to make a third album and make it with the same writers, the same producers, and tour it in the same places. By the time I’d gotten to the point where I knew I was able to make a third album, I had this voice in my head going, “What if you never make another one?” At the end of it all, I don’t want to say, “I did the same thing three times.” I wanted to do things I’d never done before, and I wanted to experience creative discomfort.

Even though I was signed to a major label on the first record, which sounds terrifying, I had a very fortunate experience. I had put out a song, it went viral. I was more or less left to do what I wanted because [the label’s mentality was], “Clearly, she has an idea of what she wants to do, so let her finish it.”

I wanted to experience what it might be like to push myself. I had experienced this discomfort. It sounds weird. I spent a year or two being sad in New York, and I was like, “You know what? More pain.” But it wasn’t painful. The change brought me so much joy, and maybe that’s the lesson. I am absolutely terrified of change, but when it happens, it’s quite joyful.

I cried in the studio the first day we all played together and we were recording live together, because it was something I’d never done before. I remember going back into the control room and listening to a take, and I’m singing live even with everyone playing. I was like, “Is this us? We sound so good.” I’d never experienced that before, and I just wanted to make sure I did it just in case.

Any motivation to keep going is still a motivation to keep going.

Yeah, and also to do it in a way that—to really just go for it. Tomorrow is not guaranteed for any person, so it’s like, what do you want to make sure you’ve done? I want to hear Hammond. I want to hear clarinets. I want to dress up in armor and walk up a Welsh mountain in the freezing cold. I think a lot of it is also bringing joy to the inner child, the kid in you who wanted to be a musician, who wanted to do this—what did they want to do? Because actually, they’re not traumatized yet. They haven’t experienced a pandemic. They haven’t been dropped in the middle of a tour.

If you’ve done The Artist’s Way or anything like that, it’s that pure version of you, that hasn’t had all that creative baggage, that makes you the editor of your own thoughts. It’s like, what does Shura who’s seven years old want to make? A lot of it was tapping into my inner child and the joy, because I think for any musician who’s been in the industry for a while, you discover it’s not always fun and it’s a difficult job, and we are blessed to be able to do it.

Shura Recommends:

5 things that take a really long time
The Art of Practicing Deferred Gratification

Cataloguing and Organizing Magic The Gathering Cards (or anything you collect).
With the world feeling increasingly chaotic I like to organize things that I am able to control. I find it satisfying to cherish physical media in an increasingly digital world.

Making Marcella Hazan’s 6 Hour Bolognese.
This will transform your life. I recommend quadrupling the recipe so that you can eat an enormous portion the day you cook it and then freeze the rest for when you want Marcella’s Bolognese but don’t have six hours to make it.

Play The Last of Us Part 1 & 2 (or watch the show if you’re not a gamer).
I first encountered the game when I watched my twin play part 1 (it was too scary for me - although I did end up playing both in the pandemic). I remember thinking that the story was so great that watching him play felt like watching a great tv series, which it now also is.

Becoming a Muscle Mommy
I watched Love Lies Bleeding and became inspired to get strong. I didn’t realise when I began, that what I thought would take six months, would in fact take closer to six years. Exercising is a non negotiable part of my life to try and keep my bad brain days in check but it’s also very exciting being able to open most jars now.

Making An Album (or any Art).
Going from sketches of an idea to a completed project is often a long and complex journey. In my case - 6 years. Deciding when something is finished is perhaps the hardest part of the process but it’s maybe the most important. Complete the thought. There’s no such thing as perfect (except maybe the Bolognese recipe).


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Max Freedman.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/musician-shura-on-finding-something-to-say/feed/ 0 546803
The most pathetic AOC vote ever https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-most-pathetic-aoc-vote-ever/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-most-pathetic-aoc-vote-ever/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 04:25:26 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=1708bae14c21432b2375d123e1e36ca9
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/the-most-pathetic-aoc-vote-ever/feed/ 0 546781
Trans Rights Matter: The Erin Reed Interview https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/trans-rights-matter-the-erin-reed-interview/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/trans-rights-matter-the-erin-reed-interview/#respond Wed, 30 Jul 2025 03:11:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=364315ae0d46279cb57e553cd9fbb062 In a world awash with disinformation and fear-based politics, what cuts through the noise isn’t perfection; it’s authenticity. As Erin Reed, a trailblazing journalist and trans rights advocate, puts it: the most effective leaders and allies are the ones who show up with sincerity, values, and courage.

Reed knows this from experience. Alongside her wife, Montana state legislator Zooey Zephyr, they’ve faced the harshest forms of political repression, from being silenced in state chambers to watching harmful laws passed in the name of "protecting" sports or children. And yet, their fight continues, fueled by love, clarity, and hope.

So how can you support the trans community in meaningful ways?

  1. Stand Firm in Your Values – Democratic Party leaders especially shouldn't be “Republican-lite” or speak through the filter of 12 consultants. Speak from the heart, like Kentucky’s Andy Beshear, who stood up for trans rights and still won big in a deep red state.

  2. Educate Yourself and Others – Learn the real facts. Trans athletes aren’t “cheating.” They’re barely even represented in elite sports. Medical care for trans youth isn’t a free-for-all;  it’s cautious, professional, and consent-driven. And no, no one is performing surgeries in school cafeterias. 

  3. Be Visible. Be Vocal. – When institutions cave to pressure and erase diversity programs, allies must speak up. Trans people aren’t always in the room, but you might be.

  4. Build Solidarity – Globally and locally. Anti-trans disinformation spreads across borders. So should our support. Reach out to advocate groups abroad and build an international coalition of support and solidarity. 

History is watching. As Reed reminds us, this is our civil rights moment. Whether you’re an activist, a parent, a lawmaker, or a friend, your genuineness, your voice, and your love can help shape a more just future. 

All it takes is a spark.

The song you heard in this week’s Gaslit Nation is “Tear the Fascists Down” by Deena Marie. Check out her music here: https://open.spotify.com/artist/2CuUJiaLhVF4x8WlZGLjRJ 

If you have a song to share on our show, submit your music to us at Gaslit Nation – we love hearing from you! More info: https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1-d_DWNnDQFYUMXueYcX5ZVsA5t2RN09N8PYUQQ8koq0/edit?ts=5fee07f6&gxids=7628

Want to enjoy Gaslit Nation ad-free? Join our community of listeners for bonus shows, exclusive Q&A sessions, our group chat, invites to live events like our Monday political salons at 4pm ET over Zoom, and more! Sign up at Patreon.com/Gaslit!

EVENTS AT GASLIT NATION:

  • NEW DATE! Thursday July 31 4pm ET – the Gaslit Nation Book Club discusses Antoine de Saint Exupéry’s The Little Prince written in the U.S. during America First. 

  • Minnesota Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Vermont Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Arizona-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to connect, available on Patreon. 

  • Indiana-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to join, available on Patreon. 

  • Florida-based listeners are going strong meeting in person. Be sure to join their Signal group, available on Patreon. 

  • Have you taken Gaslit Nation’s HyperNormalization Survey Yet?

  • Gaslit Nation Salons take place Mondays 4pm ET over Zoom and the first ~40 minutes are recorded and shared on Patreon.com/Gaslit for our community

 


This content originally appeared on Gaslit Nation and was authored by Andrea Chalupa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/30/trans-rights-matter-the-erin-reed-interview/feed/ 0 546775
John Filax and Otto The Watchdog discuss new cop watcher documentary ‘I Am But the Mirror’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/john-filax-and-otto-the-watchdog-discuss-new-cop-watcher-documentary-i-am-but-the-mirror/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/john-filax-and-otto-the-watchdog-discuss-new-cop-watcher-documentary-i-am-but-the-mirror/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 23:41:57 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=cce7bd9863b9d3e48eed5d7c8bdaf10f
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/john-filax-and-otto-the-watchdog-discuss-new-cop-watcher-documentary-i-am-but-the-mirror/feed/ 0 546891
John Filax and Otto The Watchdog discuss new cop watcher documentary ‘I Am But the Mirror’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/john-filax-and-otto-the-watchdog-discuss-new-cop-watcher-documentary-i-am-but-the-mirror-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/john-filax-and-otto-the-watchdog-discuss-new-cop-watcher-documentary-i-am-but-the-mirror-2/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 23:41:57 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=cce7bd9863b9d3e48eed5d7c8bdaf10f
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/john-filax-and-otto-the-watchdog-discuss-new-cop-watcher-documentary-i-am-but-the-mirror-2/feed/ 0 546892
New Zealand’s shameful role in the 1917 destruction of Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/new-zealands-shameful-role-in-the-1917-destruction-of-gaza/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/new-zealands-shameful-role-in-the-1917-destruction-of-gaza/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 23:39:58 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117978 As we’ve watched from afar the tragedy unfolding in Gaza over the past 22 months, it’s worth remembering the part New Zealand troops played in setting in motion the cycle of violence that continues today in Palestine and Israel.

HISTORY: By Scott Hamilton

The man in the photo walks down the deserted street, over rubble. On both sides of the street buildings have lost their roofs and walls. A pockmarked minaret totters over the wrecked townscape. The photo is captioned “Ruins of Gaza at the Time of the Great Attack”.

The photo I’m describing wasn’t taken in 2025, but in 1917. Today Gaza is being destroyed by the armies of Israel and Hamas. In 1917 the British and Ottoman empires wrecked the city. New Zealanders played an important role in the destruction.

In 1917 most Gazans lived in village-suburbs interspersed with gardens and orchards. Their houses were made with mud bricks. The highest building in their town was the Great Mosque, whose foundations dated from the 7th century.

The Ottomans had made Gaza into a fortress, and had connected it by rail and road to a series of redoubts further east. These guarded the southern border of the province of Palestine, and were manned by German and Austrian as well as Ottoman troops.

Britain’s new prime minister David Lloyd George was desperate to capture Palestine, in the hope a victory there would shift public attention from the disaster on the western front, where tens of thousands of Britons had died fighting over mud.

The Egyptian Expeditionary Force, which crossed the Sinai desert to attack Gaza and Palestine, was made up of British, Anzacs, South Africans, West Indians, a volunteer Jewish Legion and Indians.

The Anzac Mounted Division was an essential part of the EEF. Its men rode to battles but fought on foot. Many of them had learned to ride on the farms of their homelands. Some were survivors of Gallipoli, where they had battled without their horses; others had arrived in Egypt after that catastrophe.

Farmland confiscated
Gaza’s suffering began before the British attack. Its defenders confiscated farmland for trenches, and demolished houses to give artillerymen better sight lines. The Great Mosque was seized and turned into an ammunition dump.

Captioned "Gaza Beauty Show"
Captioned “Gaza Beauty Show”, this photo was likely taken by New Zealander Private Robert Kerr of the Anzac Mounted Rifle Division. Image: NZ Army Museum

It took the British empire three battles to capture Gaza. A photo taken before the second assault shows New Zealanders trying on gas masks. It is captioned “Gaza Beauty Show”. The attackers fired 4000 canisters of asphyxiating gas towards the city. No Gazan had a gas mask.

Before the final assault the city was bombarded for four days by naval guns, artillery and planes. When they finally captured Gaza, the New Zealanders found it empty. Almost the entire population had fled the bombardment; the Ottomans had followed them.

On the day its troops entered Gaza the British government issued the Balfour Declaration, which committed it to establishing a Jewish homeland in Palestine. In 1917, though, Jews made up less than a tenth of Palestine’s population.

And Britain had made contradictory promises to Arabs, promising them independence if they rose up against Ottoman rule, and funding an Arab army that had advanced to the edge of Palestine.

There was still another group that wanted Palestine. When the Auckland Mounted Rifles had passed the stone pillar that marked the border between Sinai and Palestine, Henry Mackesy had stopped his men, and prayed to thank god for delivering the “Holy Land” to Britain.

Like New Zealand’s wartime prime minister William Massey, Mackesy was a British Israelite, who believed that Anglo-Saxons were a lost tribe of Israel, and that the British empire was god’s kingdom on earth. For Mackesy and many other Anzacs, Palestine belonged rightfully to Britons, not Jews or Arabs.

Conquerors warned
So many Anzacs wanted to settle in Palestine that Kia ora Coo-ee, their official magazine, had to run an article warning them that conquerors could not legally take locals’ land.

For most Anzacs, the inhabitants of Palestine — the Arabs of the villages and towns, the nomadic Bedouin of the deserts, the small and ancient Jewish communities in towns like Jerusalem — were at best an inconvenience, and at worst a reminder of the decadence and evil condemned in the Old Testament.

New Zealander Alexander McNeur summed up a widespread feeling when he wrote “no wonder the old inhabitants of Palestine had to be destroyed . . .  many a chap is disgusted by the people”. (The only Palestinians the Anzacs really liked were the settlers in Zionist colonies, who looked, spoke and acted like Europeans.)

The Anzacs complained about the dirtiness and dishonesty of Palestinians. Many complained they had been cheated by Arab or Jewish traders; others said that Bedouins dug up soldiers’ graves and plundered them.

But the Anzacs themselves had a reputation for taking whatever they could from Palestinians, as well as from Ottoman soldiers. In 1988, Australian veteran Ted O’Brien gave an interview in which he confessed to killing a wounded Ottoman so that he could steal the man’s possessions. Robbing the dead was routine, O’Brien said.

O’Brien added that he and his comrades would immediately kill any Bedouins they found in the desert. Edwin McKay, a member of the Otago section of the New Zealand Mounted Rifles, said that theft was a “two-way thing”, with Anzacs and Palestinians preying on each other.

After its defeat of Gaza the Ottoman army began to disintegrate, but as the EEF advanced through Palestine and into Jordan and Syria, it did not always bring peace. Arabs who fought alongside the British imperial forces, hoping for independence, became possessive about the areas they had captured.

Pushed off land
Ottoman deserters became bandits. Bedouins who had been pushed off their land by war raided EEF camps in search of loot. The Jewish Legion clashed with Arabs so often that the EEF commander General Allenby asked the War Office not to send him any more Jews.

The Anzacs’ contempt towards Arabs grew even greater after a calamitous attempt to capture Amman near the end of the war. Rain, cold and tougher-than-expected Ottoman resistance sent the mounted riflemen away with heavy losses.

As they rode towards safety, the Wellington Mounted Rifles entered Ain es Sir, a small village set amid hills and ravines. Villagers opened fire from houses and from nearby ledges, and seven Wellingtonians died. The Anzacs counterattacked Ain es Sir ferociously, shelling the village and killing 38 of its inhabitants. They took no prisoners.

Two members of the Canterbury Mounted Rifles – their exact identities haven’t been established – are flogging Egyptians charged with rioting
Two members of the Canterbury Mounted Rifles – their exact identities haven’t been established – are flogging Egyptians charged with rioting. Egyptian police are holding the victim down, and other Egyptians are waiting, often in states of undress. 1919. Image: NZ Army Museum

The attack on Amman had made been made in partnership with an Arab force, and the Anzacs seem to have believed that the ambush at Ain es Sir was an act of treachery by their supposed allies.

They do not seem to have known, or cared, that Ain es Sir was not an Arab village. Its inhabitants were Circassians, a Caucasian group that migrated to the Middle East centuries ago.

On the night of December 10, more than a month after the end of the war, the Anzacs’ hatred of Arabs erupted. Hundreds of them were camped outside a village named Surafend, waiting impatiently for a ship to take them home. On the night of December 9 a man entered the tent of a New Zealand soldier named Leslie Lowry. Lowry had been using his kitbag as a pillow. The intruder grabbed it and fled.

Lowry chased the thief across the dunes that separated the Anzac camp from Surafend. The thief turned and fired a pistol. Lowry died three hours later. The next morning Anzacs found Lowry’s blood in the sand. Footprints led from the stain towards Surafend.

Surafend attacked
On December 10, up to 200 Anzacs and a few Scots smashed through the fence that surrounded Surafend. They beat and stabbed scores of male inhabitants of the village, leaving between 40 and 120 dead and many more wounded, then set fire to the Arabs’ homes.

A nearby Bedouin encampment was also set ablaze. Ted O’Brien was one of the raiders. He and his comrades had “done their blocks”. They “all went for” the Arabs with “the bayonet”. “It was a godawful thing,” O’Brien remembered.

New Zealander Ted Andrews explained that the massacre was not just about Lowry’s murder. “The treacherous ambush at Ain es Sir was still fresh in the minds of New Zealand troops,” he wrote, ignoring the fact that the men of Surafend had nothing to do with that village.

Andrews said that victims at Surafend were castrated. Some historians have dismissed this claim, but American scholar Edward Woodfin has shown that castration and humiliation of the dead were being practised in 1918 by the Indian members of the Egypt Expeditionary Force, with whom the Anzacs were friendly.

Most historians say that children, women and old men were removed from Surafend before the slaughter, but they ignore the testimony of Australian John Doran, who was at the Anzacs’ medical station the night of the massacre. Doran said that women and children appeared there with burns and bullet wounds.

The Jewish soldier Roman Freulich said that Australians had fired a machine gun at the Bedouin encampment on the night of December 10. Freulich also reported that the members of the Jewish Legion were excited by the massacre — they hated Arabs even more than the Anzacs — and that they used what he called “the Australian method” on a group of Bedouin civilians shortly after. Freulich said that he and his comrades sealed off a Bedouin camp and stabbed the men with bayonets.

Caption reads "ruins of Gaza at the time of the Great Attack"
Caption reads “ruins of Gaza at the time of the Great Attack”. Image: Library of Congress

No one prosecuted
Although the Anzacs’ commander General Allenby condemned the attackers, calling them “cowards and murderers”, no one was ever prosecuted for the massacre at Surafend. In 2009, the New Zealand television programme Sunday ran a story on the massacre.

Sunday’s team visited the site of Surafend, which has now been covered by an Israeli town, interviewed an old man who remembered the massacre, and asked why New Zealand had never apologised for the crime. The question is just as pertinent now.

When we look back from 2025 to the destruction of Gaza and the rest of the Palestine campaign, we can see that New Zealand troops played a part in setting in motion the cycle of violence that continues today in Palestine and Israel.

Scott Hamilton is the author of two great modern works of sociology and place, Ghost South Road (Titus Books, 2018), and Searching for Ata’a (Bridget Williams, 2017). He writes the blog Reading the Maps and is currently working on a book about sorcery and sorcery-related violence in Melanesia as part of his ongoing exploration of Pasifika arts and colonial Pākehā histories. This article was first published by The Spinoff and is republished with the author’s permission.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/new-zealands-shameful-role-in-the-1917-destruction-of-gaza/feed/ 0 546765
Chris Smalls BEATEN by Israeli forces after #Gaza Freedom Flotilla captured https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/chris-smalls-beaten-by-israeli-forces-after-gaza-freedom-flotilla-captured/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/chris-smalls-beaten-by-israeli-forces-after-gaza-freedom-flotilla-captured/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:37:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=1243120fc4d53d585ff4cb263a97d07a
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/chris-smalls-beaten-by-israeli-forces-after-gaza-freedom-flotilla-captured/feed/ 0 546762
The Erosion of Democracy Threatens Our Health https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-erosion-of-democracy-threatens-our-health/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-erosion-of-democracy-threatens-our-health/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 18:51:26 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/the-erosion-of-democracy-threatens-our-health-polakoff-sargent-20250729/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Phillip Polakoff.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-erosion-of-democracy-threatens-our-health/feed/ 0 546744
Latinos in Baltimore are living in fear: ‘I can be stopped just because of my accent’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/latinos-in-baltimore-are-living-in-fear-i-can-be-stopped-just-because-of-my-accent/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/latinos-in-baltimore-are-living-in-fear-i-can-be-stopped-just-because-of-my-accent/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 18:22:17 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335863 “People are not going out. We're going back to the pandemic time… when you were afraid to go out, but instead of getting sick, you're afraid of being caught. People cannot go to work, but at the same time they cannot go get food.”]]>

As the Trump administration ramps up its violent immigration raids around the country, increasingly targeting immigrants with no criminal record, and racially profiling Latinos to meet arrest quotas, immigrant communities in Baltimore and beyond are living in terror. In this urgent episode of The Marc Steiner Show, Marc speaks with two immigrant justice organizers in Baltimore—whose identities are being protected to ensure their safety—about the horrifying reality that immigrant families, particularly Latino families, are experiencing right now. “If you don’t look Latino, do you tell your child to carry around their passport or their birth certificate?… US citizens are being detained only because they look Latino, because they are Latino.”

Additional resources:

Credits:

  • Producer: Rosette Sewali
  • Studio Production: David Hebden
  • Audio Post-Production: Stephen Frank
Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Marc Steiner:

Welcome to the Marc Steiner Show here on The Real News. I’m Marc Steiner. It’s good to have you all with us. Now, as I was coming into the studio to tape this conversation with two Latina activists here in our community, people who live in Baltimore, my wife called me and said that ICE was all over a neighborhood called Canton, which is on the east side of Baltimore. And we’re rounding people up, arresting people on the street, stopping everybody, which shows you the level of danger and harassment that’s taking place in our city and our society as a whole. People who are in the Latino communities in this country are terrified. And lemme just say before we start that when I was a little boy, I spent a lot of time with my grandparents who were Jewish and from Poland. They had a hard time coming to America back in 1905, but all that meant is they stopped at the Port of Baltimore.

They were given a health check. The door opened, even though people hated them, the door opened. And now with Latinos coming from all Latin America, the issue of race and racism and our exploitation come all to a disgusting hit right here in this country. Today we talk with two women who are from that community, who are active in the defense of their community, who fled to this country from authoritarian brutality and oppression, live a life of freedom or so they thought, given that we are witnessing the neofascist takeover of our country, I won’t use our names today. It’s good to have you both here.

Guest 2:

Thank you. Thank you so much.

Marc Steiner:

I mean, the fact that you have to sit here in this studio and be anonymous, but you also consider yourself an American. Talk about that contradiction for a second. What you feel, what happens to you and other people like you in the community.

Guest 1:

Yeah. First I wanted to say thank you for your introduction. It was great. It was really great. That’s the way that it should be. That’s the way that we should feel when we come here to this country. I would like to say that it is very, very sad. It’s so sad to be anonymous or not to say whatever you want to say because if you do something wrong or you say something that you think it is the correct thing to do, somebody is going to say, oh, you know what? Against. Or she doesn’t want to follow the rules. That’s not true. We really love this country. We really want to be here. We really want to work. We do work.

Marc Steiner:

You do work,

Guest 1:

We do work. And it is hard, but this is the way that it has to be right now. We want to help. We want to do a lot of things, but sometimes you cannot do it in front of everyone. You just do it behind or just that’s how it is right now.

Guest 2:

And so we’re not also just here taking, a lot of us are here, and I say us as a generalization, we are here and we help society, we contribute, we volunteer. But it is a sad state of affairs that we have to do a lot of it now in hiding. But we’re here and we’re not going to go away. Our children are born here. Our children will stay here. They will have other children and we just, there’s just nowhere else for us to go. Many of us have come because not because we wanted to was out of necessity. We stayed in our countries, we would have been killed, our families would have been killed. So there’s also no jobs. People are dying of hunger and they need to find, they want to work and they just want to be able to earn a living. And usually there is work for them in the fields and they’re willing to do that. They put their children to work in the fields, sometimes earning less than minimum wage, but they will still do it because even in those grueling conditions, they’re still better off than what it would be where they’re coming from. So some people walk here days, some people get raped. Why would people go through all of that? Just because they want to come and take it. It’s because they’re really, really afraid of the situation. Where do they come from?

Marc Steiner:

I want to explore that more. I mean, you two came in studio here with us today. I remember years back when I was on the radio, I had a couple of whom were not documented as they say. And I got something in my ear saying the police were at the door and I shut down the mic. I got those people out the back door into my trunk and drove off. That’s the kind of world we live in. I felt like I was in. What happens when I see what happens to us today that I’m in Nazi Germany. As I said, when we started this program, my wife called from saying that ice was in Canton, just harassing people, locking people up, dragging people away. As we began this conversation

Guest 2:

And we were also getting the same notices and we were also sharing with the people that we know because we needed to protect them. And at the same time, people that when we hear something like that is happening, we share with the people that we know and we say, memorize our phone numbers. Call us if something happens. There might not be too much that we can do, but at least we know to look them. And then we try to give them instructions. Don’t sign anything, don’t speak. There’s not much for us to do other than just say, memorize our numbers, call us or memorize somebody’s number,

Marc Steiner:

Memorize our numbers.

Guest 2:

Why we can say, and then from there we will try and think about the next step. But we’re preparing people for the next step.

Guest 1:

And she’s correct because people are being raped. Some people, they don’t even know where is her husband or son. So it is very important to someone to be there. At least take a picture who is being taken so at least they know where they are. Can you imagine that they don’t know where their family is? That’s too sad. That’s very sad.

Marc Steiner:

I mean, it’s hard to imagine that in this country we call a democracy that this is actually happening. That the two of you and people in your community and your families have to live in this daily fear.

Guest 2:

Yes. And it’s a reality. A young lady, they deported her father. She’s a senior in high school. There’s nobody else for her right now for her father. They took him to another state, he cannot see him. So what can we do? We come in and figure out how to help the young lady that’s still here. But can you imagine? And young children, again, they pick up their parents and they don’t have a parent to go home to. Nobody thinks about that.

Guest 1:

Right. And then at the beginning you asked me, why don’t say your name? I don’t want to say my name because where I work, we help the immigrants. We do. And the government is taking that money, but I’m like, they are taking the money. It’s money from the immigrants that they work and they pay the taxes. That is something that the Americans, they don’t know that people, if they have a legal status or not, they pay taxes. Why they taking, taking the money from all the organization that they are working for the immigrants. Why? That’s one of the reasons when we cannot say the name because then they’re going to take everything.

Marc Steiner:

And what you’re describing here is, I think it’s people listening to understand is that the federal government under this government is taking money out of organizations who are helping immigrants in this country.

Guest 2:

Not only we helping immigrants, organizations that are oversights to make sure that other agencies are following the law. So they’re taking funding from oversights committees, agencies and things like that. And then going back to the taxes, people pay into the social security Medicare and it’s money that they will never see because they don’t have a status where they will be able to claim social security and all of that. But all of that money is going into the social security

Marc Steiner:

In their name and they can’t use it.

Guest 2:

They will not be able to claim it. So that money is being used right now to help those that are in receiving social security. That money is going towards that is millions of dollars. And if you’re taking all these people, not the ability for them to work and then that they’re putting in the money into social security, that’s also something that that’s going to be a deficit. And people don’t think about that. People think, oh, they’re taking us, they’re taking our taxes. No, they don’t qualify for anything. They don’t qualify for.

Marc Steiner:

What do you mean by that?

Guest 2:

So people think that if you are undocumented, you can still go apply for food stamps and medical assistance. You cannot qualify for that. You don’t get any of that at all. You cannot apply for, even though you were working and you were paying into the system, if you get fired, you don’t qualify for unemployment insurance. And even somebody that has a green card that is here with a legal status, they have to be here for five years before they can even qualify for food stamps or public benefits.

Marc Steiner:

So

Just to take me, take one piece here, what you just said. So what happens if someone in your family, one of you, it’s sick, what do you do?

Guest 2:

You keep on going, you keep on going, keep on going and until you’re dying. And then you end up going to the emergency room. And then so this for the system is where you could have gone to preventive visits. You end up going to where you are. It’s a life or death situation. I know of a young lady, she needed a feeding tube. The mom ran out of the food, the liquid food, she was watering it down. The young lady was malnutrition. She was doing so bad. She ended up having to go to the hospital to the emergency room. And only because I told her, go to the emergency room and she would’ve died had she not taken her to the emergency room. But again, if she would’ve had, because she needed a prescription, the mom was willing to pay for the food, but she needed a prescription for the food and she couldn’t go to a doctor to write up a prescription. So people die.

Marc Steiner:

Yeah, people die.

Guest 1:

Yeah. I’m going to give you two examples. I have one example that one kid, he came here when he was five years old with his mom. And the mother never took him to the doctor because she was told that if she takes her son to the doctor, the police will be there. Most of the people that they come here, they don’t go to the hospital because they think that over there, there is police or immigration that they will take them. And I’m not talking about right now, I’m talking about years ago. So she never took his kid and he lost his urine because she never took his kid. Another example that I can give you, and this is general

People immigrant, that they don’t have a little status, legal status. They will never go to the hospital until they die. Why? Because first they are afraid. Second, they know that they not apply for, they’re not going to be able to be attended. That’s what they think. And then the third thing is that they were working years and years and years that when they go to the hospital, it’s too late. So what’s going to happen? The community is going to help this family to take back the body. Can you imagine 30, 40 years working here and they never go to the doctor? Never. Never

Marc Steiner:

Out of fear.

Guest 1:

Yeah.

Marc Steiner:

When we were talking before we went in here, you were both talking about the overarching sense of fear that’s taking place inside the Latino communities

In Baltimore and what it’s like to live through that every day.

Guest 2:

Yes. It’s traumatic. So people are really afraid of what, even if they have children that are born here, me, myself included, where you have to talk to your children and you have to prepare them what to do if they are detained. And if you don’t look Latino, do you tell your child carry around your passport or your birth certificate in case that you are getting detained and now it’s worse and worse because you’re hearing that actual, you would think that having your passport or your id, that’s a real ID would be enough. But you’re hearing that US citizens are being detained only because they look

Latino. Because they are Latino. They are Latino. I can be stopped just because of my accent. Then that gives them probable cause to think that I am undocumented. So what do I carry that is going to be now with me, I am in their system. They have my fingerprints, and if they run my fingerprints, I will show up. My children are not in the system. They don’t have their fingerprint. They never been fingerprinted. And if for some reason, let’s say they were out with their friends and they didn’t have any idea, my children disappear. I don’t know. I will not know where to find them because they were taken. How would I know? Because they just grabbed them and take them and they’re not allowed to. So what do you do? There’s a registry that you can look them up, but they don’t show up right away. It takes a couple of days. So that’s one fear. The other fear is people are not going out. We’re going back to the pandemic time where people are scared to think about it. When you were afraid to go out, but instead of getting afraid of getting sick, you’re afraid of being caught. People cannot go to work, but at the same time they cannot go get food. So it’s really scary.

Guest 1:

Another thing that we can think about, it’s like if we are going to talk about mental health, okay, could you imagine if you are living in a country that you don’t have opportunities, that you don’t have rights. They come here, you have no idea. Everything that they have to go through months, years, they got stuck in Mexico, they have to live there for one or two years waiting. Come here. Then they come here and they say, this is the American dream, which I believe we can still say in that I pray God that it’s going to continue. So they got here and then somebody told them, yes, you are welcome, but then you are not, you’re going back. If we talk about mental health, could you imagine how these kids, they already went through a lot of things and then they got here and now they’re saying you’re going back because you are a criminal. I don’t understand that. I don’t understand that. I know that they don’t have to love us, but they have to have some kind of empathy with the people. That’s more dangerous than even if somebody doesn’t have food to eat, that’s okay. You can be like that one to three days. But talking about mental health, they are putting in dangers. The community, they are doing something very, very bad.

Marc Steiner:

So can we talk a bit here before we conclude just about in part how you fight back against this, what you see going on in terms of the fight back, there was just a huge demonstration. We can talk about that. That took place and I spoke well, what is it, I mean, among inside the Latino community and also the larger community that unites with the Latino community, how to begin the resistance to stop what’s going on? What do you see and how do you see that happening?

Guest 2:

So I personally, well, I’m not quite there on the organizing, the resistance and all that.

My own personal knowledge and how I work is sharing information because I think that part of anxiety is not knowing and not having control. So I think sharing information of what is understanding your rights, and I understand that right now people feel like that we don’t have no rights, but we do. We just have to make sure that people know that to follow the script basically. And if they hang in there, then they will eventually be able to find a resolution. So sharing information by either attending or organizing workshops where people can understand. The other thing is helping parents fill out the standby guardianship because in the case, the worst case scenario, then there’s something in place if you get picked up while your kids are in school, who’s going to be that?

Marc Steiner:

Let me stop a second.

Guest 2:

Oh,

Marc Steiner:

Sorry. I want you to jump into this too, but what you just said that you have a family and they have to have a legal document about guardianship for their children because you live in fear that you’re going to be picked up and deported or put in camps and your children will have nobody. Yes. That’s what you’re

Guest 2:

Saying? Yes. And because that’s the reality. Again, what if you get picked up while your child is in school? So that is where I am. Where we are in the helping process is getting ready for the worst case scenario.

Guest 1:

And we have a lot of community organizations, even mema, and I want to highlight that because they are providing those,

Marc Steiner:

Who’s that?

Guest 1:

MIMA, mayor’s Office of Immigrant Affairs for Baltimore City. They are providing those workshops. San Streets, they are doing that Latino, they are providing that. So there is a lot of organization that they are doing the workshops,

Guest 2:

Latino Providers Network. They also are doing, they provided a training for people to help fill out the standby guardianship, which is, so there’s a tricky part in Maryland because a lot of people think that if they get a power of attorney that will let them do it. But in Maryland you need a standby guardianship. However, people are charging a lot of money to fill this document that the court has made available and it’s free to print and it’s free. It is very easy to fill out, but people don’t understand. So just having that paper ready and the documents and understanding what documents to help, it eases people’s fears a little bit. Again, what we are suffering from is anxiety and having control over the situation helps with anxiety.

Guest 1:

And right now it’s not just like job food, it’s more education. We have to educate the community. What are the steps that they have, they have to do in order to be prepared for whatever is going to happen. That doesn’t mean that all the immigrants, they don’t have a legal status. But yes, even if your children were born here, they can take them because they look Latinos. I mean they are Latinos. So we cannot be just like, this is not going to happen to me. They have to be prepared.

Marc Steiner:

I mean, mental health and keeping your lives in balance is almost impossible with what you face every day as you never know. As we said, we started this program, ICE was all over one neighborhood, rounding up, who knows who and how many people were just taken away in the city. I would like to ask you too, this one question in time that we have, and we can spend more time over the period of days and months talking about more stories that people need to hear. But what drove you here? What were the reason that you left to come to the United States? What happened?

Guest 1:

For me, I would say I came here because I wanted to have a better life,

Marc Steiner:

Which is why most people come here.

Guest 1:

That’s what I want to say. I think everybody came here because we need to have a better life. Everyone has a different situation, but that’s the only reason. I don’t think somebody came here because they want to be criminals here. I don’t think so. But that’s what people,

Marc Steiner:

Yes.

Guest 2:

So I came here in the eighties when in Guatemala there was the Civil War.

Marc Steiner:

Oh yeah, right.

Guest 2:

And my father was a witness of a lot of the things that the army did,

What they consider gorillas. But again, looking back, and as I was saying, at that time, the government had control of the television. So when I was 10, I really did feel like the army was the heroes and the gorillas were the bad people. Come to find out that massive genocides happened in the eighties in Guatemala, and people can look it up, but it was basically, we were really well off in Guatemala. We had two chauffeurs, we had a nanny, we had two people, housekeepers, we were incredibly well off, but none of that was worth my father’s life. And we would stayed, my father would have been killed because even after we came here, our neighbors reported that somebody would park in front of our house for a long time, for at least two, three months. They were basically surveilling our house. So it hasn’t been easy when we came here, it wasn’t easy, but it was worth my father’s life. And I don’t think, and how things were, maybe they would have killed us too.

Marc Steiner:

One of the things that people don’t realize, I think, is that a lot of people from certain countries south of the border, Mexico, through Latin America, bled because of dictatorships that this country sponsored, that the United States sponsored and

Guest 2:

Supported. Yes. And you remember the Iran Contra thing, all of that. It was all

Marc Steiner:

Killing indigenous people in Guatemala and all the rest,

Guest 2:

I mean in Guatemala still up to this day, people have not recovered because even they would work the land. So even though they weren’t wealthy, people could work the land, but then the army came and they would even burn out their crops. So they were dying of hunger. And still to this day, there’s a famine in Guatemala, there’s a hospital that serves I think two or 300 children a day because they’re malnourished when people are used to working the land, but there’s just no land for them because it was all taken away.

Guest 1:

And I think that there is a different stories that you can hear from all the community, but everyone has something that they left behind. And it’s something sad,

Marc Steiner:

Right?

Guest 2:

And people don’t come here just because there’s a reason why they’re here.

Marc Steiner:

There’s a reason why, as I said, going back to my grandparents’ generation,

And my mother was not from this country either, that

People left because they were terrified and there was oppression and they couldn’t survive. So they came here. The place that has a Statue of Liberty, this is not a new story, but what’s happening now I think is one of the worst situations in our history when it comes to immigrants. It’s been bad. 19th century is bad. The Irish were killed, were imprisoned when they came here in the 1840s and fifties. But this is, we’re watching a repression that is on the part of the federal government that is just, it’s almost unfathomable.

Guest 2:

And it also has given permission for people to think that it’s okay to say things or to think things about immigrants in general. And I think it’s, what do you call it, a mob mentality that, oh, and they think because he says it’s bad, we’re all bad. But we do not all fall under one category. There’s so many of us, so many different things.

Marc Steiner:

And I just one last thought from the two of you here. What gives you hope, both politically in terms of your organizing, the movements and where you think the fight is for your rights? How do you see where we are and where do you see it going?

Guest 1:

I think we’re lucky that we live here in Maryland because

Marc Steiner:

In Maryland?

Guest 1:

Yeah.

Marc Steiner:

Yeah,

Guest 1:

Because everybody, if we are talking political, everybody’s supporting us. So that’s for sure.

Marc Steiner:

Right?

Guest 1:

So we don’t have the situation in Texas or in la, but even though we know that they are behind us or they are supporting us, people still living with fear. But I think at least we can breathe like, okay, if we need something, we know that they will help us. That’s the only thing that I can say that. And I can name people that they help us a lot. Like Mayor Sitco, like Mark Parker, like Catalina Rodriguez,

Guest 2:

Joceline Pena,

Guest 1:

Joceline Pena. They are with us and they are doing their best in the best way that they can do it. But there’s a lot of people that helping us,

Guest 2:

Some of the things, again, even when he started running the second time, we’re talking about July before there was a lot of organizations and a lot of

Marc Steiner:

You about Trump.

Guest 2:

Yeah, I cannot pronounce the name. I’m sorry. We don’t say the name. Honestly, I cannot say the name. So a lot of organizations and a lot of, they started to propose laws and that would protect us because we kind of had an idea of what was coming because we had seen it four years or eight years before. So there’s a lot of laws that Maryland and Baltimore City specifically started to make sure that they would pass so that they would be protected when the Office of Civil Rights would go away because it’s basically gone away.

So there’s a lot of, in January, a lot of laws passed that were put in place to protect us to the extent that they could and to the extent that the budget could afford to do it. So I think some states, again, people can find and figure out those politicians that are not beneficial and that are willing to work with the other side and that are willing to, even if they’re, so we need to put those people in place that they will start working because it might not be able to happen in the federal level. But there’s a lot of things that people or states can do at the local level, even not even states, cities, that they can do it at the local level to protect people in general. Let’s not even think about immigrants because let’s think about all the other things that are happening. Medicaid is being taken away. The Department of Education is being dismantled. So we have to realize that he’s making a lot of noise with the immigrants. But a lot of things are happening that people are not realizing that is happening. And I am aware of a lot of things that are happening that are affecting a lot of other people, and we are just paying a lot of attention with immigrants. But there’s so many other things or so many other people being affected.

Guest 1:

Even with our clients, they are Americans and they are about to lose benefits. So this is not just for the immigrants, this is for everyone. And people, they don’t realize that this is going to affect everyone.

Marc Steiner:

I think it’s important that these final messages, you both are giving of unity in this country and how it’s about all of us,

Yes,

To fight for a different world and a better world. And I will say that we will list a bunch of organizations on our page, people who can identify who to go to and where they can get involved. And I want to thank both of you both for being in the studio today, but also for being brave enough to stand up and speak despite what could happen. So we’ll use no names. I want to thank you both of your work. You do. And thank you so much for being in the studio today, and we will stand with you always.

Guest 2:

Thank you so much.

Guest 1:

Thank you. And I just want to say my last message is for everyone that is listening this is that please just think that like I said, no, everyone is a criminal. And also people that are here, they are working and now they are professionals. They are contributing a lot of things here in this country. We have kids, wonderful kids that they are doing their best. And another thing that we do, we educate the community. So now communities learning the rules, communities is trying to learn, speak English. So if they don’t know how to recycle, they are learning. This is the big difference that they don’t believe that we really want to learn. So that’s something that they have to know. And right now they are losing money because nobody wants to go any place who is buying now. Nobody.

Marc Steiner:

Thank you both so much.

Guest 1:

Thank you. Thank you so much.

Marc Steiner:

Appreciate you both.

Once again, I want to thank these two women, our guests today for joining us and for their bravery and what they face under the threat of this 21st century Gestapo called ICE. I want to thank producer Rosette Sewali for creating the power of the show behind the scenes. Our audio editor, Stephen Frank, working his audio magic, David Hebden, who run the program and making me sound good and Kayla Rivara for making it all happen behind the scenes. And everyone here through our news for making this show possible. Please let me know what you thought about, what you heard today, what you’d like us to cover. Just write to me at mss@therealnews.com and I’ll get right back to you and we’ll be linking to all the organizations mentioned to you today. You too can help and support the struggle of freedom in America. Once again, thank you to our guests for joining us and for the work they do. So for the crew here at The Real News, I’m Marc Steiner. Be involved. Keep listening and take care.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Marc Steiner.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/latinos-in-baltimore-are-living-in-fear-i-can-be-stopped-just-because-of-my-accent/feed/ 0 546740
‘To a Land Unknown’ Paints a Stirring Portrait of Palestinian Displacement https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/to-a-land-unknown-paints-a-stirring-portrait-of-palestinian-displacement/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/to-a-land-unknown-paints-a-stirring-portrait-of-palestinian-displacement/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 18:12:28 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/to-a-land-unknown-paints-a-stirring-portrait-of-palestinian-displacement-minton-20250729/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Matt Minton.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/to-a-land-unknown-paints-a-stirring-portrait-of-palestinian-displacement/feed/ 0 546746
Amazon Union Leader Chris Smalls Detained & Beaten by IDF, But US Media Ignores It https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/amazon-union-leader-chris-smalls-detained-beaten-by-idf-but-us-media-ignores-it/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/amazon-union-leader-chris-smalls-detained-beaten-by-idf-but-us-media-ignores-it/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 15:30:08 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160314 This week, the Israeli Defense Force (IDF) boarded the Handala, a ship associated with the Flotilla Freedom Coalition, that was attempting to reach Gaza with supplies for starving Palestinians. The IDF detained 20 activists, who had their hands held up, in graphic images that the Freedom Flotilla Coalition captured. Among those on the ship was Chris […]

The post Amazon Union Leader Chris Smalls Detained & Beaten by IDF, But US Media Ignores It first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Amazon Union Leader Chris Smalls Detained & Beaten by IDF, But US Media Ignores It

This week, the Israeli Defense Force (IDF) boarded the Handala, a ship associated with the Flotilla Freedom Coalition, that was attempting to reach Gaza with supplies for starving Palestinians. The IDF detained 20 activists, who had their hands held up, in graphic images that the Freedom Flotilla Coalition captured.

Among those on the ship was Chris Smalls, who gained fame when he led a successful union drive at Amazon in Staten Island in 2022. Not only was Smalls detained, but he was physically beaten by the IDF. He was the only Black member on the Handala.

“The Freedom Flotilla Coalition confirms that upon arrival in Israeli custody, U.S. human rights defender, Christian Smalls, was physically assaulted by seven uniformed individuals,” wrote the Freedom Flotilla Coalition on Instagram. “They choked him and kicked him, leaving visible signs of violence on his neck and back”.

Despite Smalls having been profiled by every major media outlet in the U.S. when he successfully led the union drive at Amazon, not a single major media outlet has covered his beating at the hands of the IDF.

In 2022, The New York Times even ran a Style section profile on his fashion choices among more than a dozen pieces that they ran on his organizing efforts, but the paper has not said anything about the beating of a high-profile labor activist at the hands of the IDF. Only three smaller, left-leaning outlets, ZeteoThe Grio, and Jezebel, covered it.

“This totally makes sense,” wrote University of New Brunswick Professor Nathan Kalman-Lamb on Bluesky. “A notable public figure in the US (Amazon labor organizer Christian Smalls) is illegally arrested by Israel and subjected to severe physical violence while on a hunger strike… and not one US media outlet of any type has decided that is news.”

This article is a cross-post from Payday Report and is a developing story. Payday Report will update it as more information becomes available.

You can donate to help Payday Report Cover Labor Activists for a Free Palestine.

The post Amazon Union Leader Chris Smalls Detained & Beaten by IDF, But US Media Ignores It first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Mike Elk.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/amazon-union-leader-chris-smalls-detained-beaten-by-idf-but-us-media-ignores-it/feed/ 0 546710
How the Israeli flag became the symbol of Brazil’s far right https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-the-israeli-flag-became-the-symbol-of-brazils-far-right/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-the-israeli-flag-became-the-symbol-of-brazils-far-right/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 15:06:42 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=e569f4a42916a629a6493515b7f5b2d4
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-the-israeli-flag-became-the-symbol-of-brazils-far-right/feed/ 0 546713
The Well https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-well/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-well/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 15:00:21 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160300 Sara’s cleaning her M-16 and drinking water from the well. When she looks up she sees a multitude of nomads, exhausted and covered with dust. Apparently they just crossed the desert. “May we drink your water?” their spokesman asks. “We’re parched.” “It’s a public well, not mine,” says Sarah. Then she stares down the old […]

The post The Well first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Sara’s cleaning her M-16 and drinking water from the well. When she looks up she sees a multitude of nomads, exhausted and covered with dust. Apparently they just crossed the desert.
“May we drink your water?” their spokesman asks. “We’re parched.”
“It’s a public well, not mine,” says Sarah. Then she stares down the old man. “No, you may not drink from it.”
The nomads cry out as one. “What’s wrong?! Why don’t you let us quench our thirst?”
“Simple as, me being fully hydrated feels even better now. Also, if you drink your fill, we’d be no longer any different from each other at all.”
The post The Well first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by J.S. O’Keefe.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-well/feed/ 0 546692
How the Lucas Plan came to be #shorts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-the-lucas-plan-came-to-be-shorts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-the-lucas-plan-came-to-be-shorts/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 13:03:06 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=369f7137b2a4f96567584c9aadce7a96
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-the-lucas-plan-came-to-be-shorts/feed/ 0 546681
When Israelis Call It Out: Finding Genocide in Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/when-israelis-call-it-out-finding-genocide-in-gaza/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/when-israelis-call-it-out-finding-genocide-in-gaza/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 13:00:52 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160310 It’s been almost an article of faith among Israeli officials: the state they represent is incapable of genocide, their actions always spurred by the noblest, necessary motivations of self-defence against satanic enemies who wish genocide upon Jews. Over time, as Holocaust scholar Omer Bartov writes, “Ethical concerns and moral qualms were brushed aside as either […]

The post When Israelis Call It Out: Finding Genocide in Gaza first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
It’s been almost an article of faith among Israeli officials: the state they represent is incapable of genocide, their actions always spurred by the noblest, necessary motivations of self-defence against satanic enemies who wish genocide upon Jews. Over time, as Holocaust scholar Omer Bartov writes, “Ethical concerns and moral qualms were brushed aside as either marginal or distracting in the face of the ultimate cataclysm that is the genocide of the Jews.”

This form of reasoning, known otherwise as “Holocaust-ism” or “Shoah-tiyut”, is a moral conceit left bare in the war of annihilation being waged in Gaza against the Palestinian populace. Israeli human rights groups have taken note of this, despite the drained reserves of empathy evident in Israel proper. (A Pew Research Center poll conducted last month found that a mere 16% of Jewish Israelis thought peaceful coexistence with Palestinians was possible.)

In its latest report pointedly titled Our Genocide, the Israeli human rights organisation B’Tselem offers a blunt assessment: “Israel’s policy in the Gaza Strip and its horrific outcomes, together with statements by senior Israeli politicians and military commanders about the goals of the attack, leads us to the unequivocal conclusion that Israel is taking coordinated action to intentionally destroy Palestinian society in the Gaza Strip. In other words: Israel is committing genocide against Palestinians in the Gaza Strip.”

The infliction of genocide, the organisation acknowledges, is a matter of “multiple and parallel practices” applied over a period of time, with killing being merely one component. Living conditions can be destroyed, concentration camps and zones created, populations expelled, and policies to systematically prevent reproduction enacted. “Accordingly, genocidal acts are various actions intended to bring about the destruction of a distinct group, as part of a deliberate, coordinated effort by a ruling authority.”

Our Genocide suggests that certain conditions often precede the sparking of a genocide. Israel’s relations with Palestinians had been characterised by “broader patterns of settler-colonialism”, with the intention of ensuring “Jewish supremacy over Palestinians – economically, politically, socially, and culturally.”

B’Tselem draws upon three crucial elements centred on ensuring “Jewish supremacy over Palestinians”: “life under an apartheid regime that imposes separation, demographic engineering, and ethnic cleansing; systemic and institutionalized use of violence against Palestinians, while the perpetrators enjoy impunity; and institutionalized mechanisms of dehumanization and framing Palestinians as an existential threat.” The attacks on Israel by Hamas and other militant groups on October 7, 2023 was a violent event that created a “sense of existential threat among the perpetrating group” enabling the “ruling system to carry out genocide.” As B’Tselem Executive Director Yuli Novak notes, this sense of threat was promoted by an “extremist, far-right messianic government” to pursue “an agenda of destruction and expulsion.”

Israeli policy in the Strip since October 2023 could not be rationalised as a focused, targeted attempt to destroy the rule of Hamas or its military efficacy. “Statements by senior Israeli decision-makers about the nature and assault in Gaza have expressed genocidal intent throughout.” Ditto Israeli military officers of all ranks. Gaza’s residents had been dehumanized, with many Jewish-Israelis believing “that their lives are of negligible value compared to Israel’s national goals, if not worthless altogether.”

The report also notes the use of certain terminology that haunts the literature of genocidal euphemism: the creation of “humanitarian zones” that would still be bombed despite supposedly providing protection for displaced civilians; the use of “kill zones” by the Israeli military and the absence of any standardized rules of engagement through the Strip, often “determined at the discretion of commanders on the ground or based on arbitrary criteria.”

Wishing to be comprehensive, the authors of the report do not ignore Israel’s actions in the West Bank and occupied East Jerusalem.  Airstrikes have regularly taken place against refugee camps in the northern part of the territory since October 2023. Even more lethal open-fire policies have been used in the West Bank, with the use of kill zones suggesting “the broader ‘Gazafication’ of Israel’s methods of warfare.”

Another group, Physicians for Human Rights-Israel (PHRI), has also published a legal-medical appraisal on the intentional destruction of Gaza’s healthcare system, finding that the Israeli campaign in Gaza “constitutes genocide under the 1948 Genocide Convention.” The evidence examined by the group “shows a deliberate and systematic dismantling of Gaza’s healthcare system and other vital systems necessary for the population’s survival.” The evolving nature of the campaign suggested a “deliberate progression” from the initial bombing and the forced evacuation of hospitals in the northern part of the Strip to the calculated collapse of the healthcare system across the entire enclave. The dismantling of the health system involved rendering hospitals “non-functional”, the blocking of medical evaluations, and the elimination of such vital services as trauma care, surgery, dialysis, and maternal health.

Added to this has been the direct targeting of health care workers, involving the death and detention of over 1,800 members, “including many senior specialists”, and the deliberate restriction of humanitarian relief through militarized distribution points that pose lethal risks to aid recipients. “This coordinated assault has produced a cascading failure of health and humanitarian infrastructure, compounded by policies leading to starvation, disease, and the breakdown of sanitation, housing, and education systems.”

PHRI contends that, at the very least, three core elements of Article II of the Genocide Convention are met: the killing of members of a group (identified by nationality, ethnicity, race or religion); causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of that group and deliberately inflicting on the group those conditions of life to bring about its destruction in whole or in part.

In accepting that genocide is being perpetrated against the Palestinians, Our Genocide makes that most pertinent of points: the dry legal analysis of genocide tends to be distanced from a historical perspective. “The legal definition is narrow, having been shaped in large part by the political interests of the states whose representatives drafted it.” The high threshold of identifying genocide, and the international jurisprudence on the subject, had produced a disturbing paradox: genocide tends to be recognised “only after a significant portion of the targeted group has already been destroyed and the group as such has suffered irreparable harm.” The thrust of these clarion calls from B’Tselem and PHRI is urgently clear: end this state of affairs before the Palestinians become yet another historical victim of such harm.

The post When Israelis Call It Out: Finding Genocide in Gaza first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/when-israelis-call-it-out-finding-genocide-in-gaza/feed/ 0 546666
Fiji ‘failing’ the Gaza genocide and humanity test, says rights group https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/fiji-failing-the-gaza-genocide-and-humanity-test-says-rights-group/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/fiji-failing-the-gaza-genocide-and-humanity-test-says-rights-group/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 09:25:45 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117969 Asia Pacific Report

The NGO Coalition on Human Rights in Fiji has sharply criticised the Fiji government’s stance over Israel’s genocide in Gaza, saying it “starkly contrasts” with the United Nations and international community’s condemnation as a violation of international law and an impediment to peace.

In a statement today, the NGO Coalition said that the way the government was responding to the genocide and war crimes in Gaza would set a precedent for how it would deal with crises and conflict in future.

It would be a marker for human rights responses both at home and the rest of the world.

“We are now seeing whether our country will be a force that works to uphold human rights and international law, or one that tramples on them whenever convenient,” the statement said.

“Fiji’s position on the genocide in Gaza and the occupation of Palestinians starkly contrasts with the values of justice, freedom, and international law that the Fijian people hold dear.

“The genocide and colonial occupation have been widely recognised by the international community, including the United Nations, as a violation of international law and an impediment to peace and the self-determination of the Palestinian people.”

Last week, French President Emmanuel Macron announced that France would formally recognise the state of Palestine — the first of G7 countries to do so — at the UN general Assembly in September.

142 countries recognise Palestine
At least 142 countries out of the 193 members of the UN currently recognise or plan to recognise a Palestinian state, including European Union members Norway, Ireland, Spain and Slovenia.

However, several powerful Western countries have refused to do so, including the United States, the United Kingdom and Germany.

At the UN this week, Saudi Arabia and France opened a three-day conference with the goal of recognising Palestinian statehood as part of a peaceful settlement to end the war in Gaza.

Last year, Fiji’s coalition government submitted a written statement in support of the Israeli genocidal occupation of Palestine, including East Jerusalem, noted the NGO coalition.

Last month, Fiji’s coalition government again voted against a UN General Assembly resolution that demanded an immediate, unconditional, and permanent ceasefire in Gaza.

Also recently, the Fiji government approved the allocation of $1.12 million to establish an embassy “in the genocidal terror state of Israel as Fijians grapple with urgent issues, including poverty, violence against women and girls, deteriorating water and health infrastructure, drug use, high rates of HIV, poor educational outcomes, climate change, and unfair wages for workers”.

Met with ‘indifference’
The NGO coalition said that it had made repeated requests to the Fiji government to “do the bare minimum and enforce the basic tenets of international law on Israel”.

“We have been calling upon the Fiji government to uphold the principles of peace, justice, and human rights that our nation cherishes,” the statement said.

“We campaigned, we lobbied, we engaged, and we explained. We showed the evidence, pointed to the law, and asked our leaders to do the right thing.

“We’ve been met with nothing but indifference.”

Instead, said the NGO statement, Fiji leaders had met with Israeli government representatives and declared support for a country “committing the most heinous crimes” recognised in international law.

“Fijian leaders and the Fiji government should not be supporting Israel or setting up an embassy in Israel while Israel continues to bomb refugee tents, kill journalists and medics, and block the delivery of humanitarian aid to a population under relentless siege.

“No politician in Fiji can claim ignorance of what is happening.”

62,000 Palestinians killed
More than 62,000 Palestinians have been killed in the war on Gaza, most of them women and children.

“Many more have been maimed, traumatised, and displaced. Starvation is being used by Israel as weapon to kill babies and children.

“Hospitals, churches, mosques,, refugee camps, schools, universities, residential neighbourhoods, water and food facilities have been destroyed.

“History will judge how we respond as Fijians to this moment.

“Our rich cultural heritage and shared values teach us the importance of always standing up for what is right, even when it is not popular or convenient.”

Members of the Fiji NGO Coalition on Human Rights are Fiji Women’s Crisis Centre (chair), Fiji Women’s Rights Movement, Citizens’ Constitutional Forum, femLINKpacific, Social Empowerment and Education Programme, and Diverse Voices and Action (DIVA) for Equality Fiji.

Also, Pacific Network on Globalisation (PANG) is an observer.

The NGO coalition said it stood in solidarity with the Palestinian people out of a shared belief in humanity, justice, and the inalienable human rights of every individual.

“Silence is not an option,” it added.

Fijians for Palestine Solidarity Network said it supported this NGO coalition statement.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/fiji-failing-the-gaza-genocide-and-humanity-test-says-rights-group/feed/ 0 546640
The Shambolic Grifter In the Arena, Daring Greatly https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-shambolic-grifter-in-the-arena-daring-greatly/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-shambolic-grifter-in-the-arena-daring-greatly/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 07:38:11 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/further/the-shambolic-grifter-in-the-arena-daring-greatly

As King Cheeto still lies, scams, babbles and scurries to escape the furor over his pedophile bestie, some fierce unlikely heroes have emerged to call bullshit. They range from Jon Stewart's "Go Fuck Yourself" choir to South Park's grifter with a "teeny tiny" talking penis to Scotland's blistering response to his unwelcome $10 million golf trip, complete with bagpipes, fish guts, a glowering "CONVICTED U.S. FELON TO ARRIVE IN SCOTLAND" headline and ever-splendid signs declaring, "Trump Is Still A Cunt."

With even his red-meat, poorly educated base clamoring for an imaginary transparency, Trump continues struggling and mostly failing to regain control of the narrative on partner-in-crime Jeffrey Epstein in the shadow of a steady trickle of damning new revelations - more smirking creepy photos, reports he flew on Epstein's jets at least seven times in the 1990s, news he was told in May his name is (probably frequently) in the infamous files. For once, his "nothing-to-see-here-but-look-over-there!" tactics fall short: As the turmoil morphs into a cultural as well as political firestorm, it lays bare the longtime fiction of Trump's whole braying, bullying shtick about taking down the deep state, exposing him as just another lying, hiding, duplicitous stiff out for himself. (Duh.) It's so bad even MAGA-ites are saying his claims of innocence are "insulting our intelligence." (Sic.)

Still, he strives to deflect. His release of 6,000 FBI files on MLK Jr. backfired big-time by confirming he can release any files any time he likes. Sample comments: "Now do the Epstein files" and, "His back is against the wall so hard he’s releasing more Black history." Mostly, he's reverted to calling the uproar "a witch hunt" about "a creep," feigning indifference - "I don’t really follow that too much" - and spinning his bonkers greatest hits, most featuring "Barack Hussein Obama." One rant: "We caught Hillary Clinton. We caught Barack Hussein Obama, absolutely cold." Also, "Many, many people under them...big stuff...2020 rigged...And it's the most unbelievable thing I think I've ever read....This was treason. This was every word you can think of." Including the claim, in one veering pivot, "This is like, proof, irrefutable proof that Obama was sedacious," which is not a word.

That was duly, gleefully noted by Stephen Colbert, once-and-no-longer-future king of The Late Show, just fired for exposing too much of what he once called "truthiness. In his recent, fatal transgression, he blasted CBS/Paramount's $16m settlement in a bogus Trump lawsuit to advance an $8 billion sale to Skydance Media, which requires federal approval: "I believe this kind of complicated financial settlement with a sitting government official has a technical name in legal circles. It’s 'big fat bribe.'" As always, he was both sharp and genial on the ignoble end of a 30-year franchise he'd excelled at. Declaring "the gloves are officially off" and he "can finally speak unvarnished truth to power" on Trump, he turned to the camera to mildly proclaim, "I don't care for him...He doesn't seem to have, like, the skillset." Later, in response to Trump gloating, Colbert stepped it up, again straight to the camera: "Go fuck yourself."

The Colbert kerfuffle seemed to kick off a new, fiery, vastly entertaining stage in the to-date often somnambulant fight against our creeping authoritarianism. With many American institutions - the press, courts, Congress, colleges, corporate powers - failing to heed fascism experts' pivotal rule of, "Do not obey in advance," the task of standing up rudely and loudly is incongruously, though not really for the first time (see Lenny Bruce, Richard Pryor, George Carlin etc etc) falling to middle-finger-wielding comedians with no interest in going gentle into that good night, thanks. On that Colbert show, a parade of high-profile, wise-acre colleagues and buddies - Oliver, Fallon, Meyers, Stewart, Lin-Manuel Miranda - showed up for a Coldplay kiss-cam parody to show their support. Letterman posted a lengthy video compilation whose message was, "You can’t spell CBS without BS.”

And Jon Stewart on The Daily Show, not for the first time, eviscerated "corporate capitulation to the whims of a pussy-grabbing enigma" - here, starting 16:30 - though it too runs on a Paramount-owned station, Comedy Central. Mulling our ongoing horrors, he offered, "I think the answer is in the fear and pre-compliance that is gripping all of America's institutions - institutions that have chosen not to fight the vengeful and vindictive actions of our pubic-hair-doodling commander-in-chief. This is not the moment to give in. This is the time to fight. This is the time to rise up." Adding a florid, "We affirm our shared humanity. We must continue to have humans make things that inspire and provoke other humans" - and joking, "#ChatGPT wrote that" - he and a gospel choir behind him then led the audience in a long, rousing, raunchy chorus of "Go Fuck Yourself" to his paymasters.

Still, leave it to South Park with its foul-mouthed kids and universally offensive, scorched-earth "shock comedy" to up the ante, with "their most furious episode" - "Hey Satan!" - arriving back on air just after signing a new, $1.5 billion, five-year deal with...Paramount, now richly paying creators Trey Parker and Matt Stone "to put out the same message as Colbert, a lot less politely." Many argue South Park, with its crude, crass, juvenile humor, is uniquely suited for the nearly impossible task of skewering a cartoon villain who routinely says and does things more outrageous than satire could ever be: South Park "is what happens when satirists are willing to play on the President’s terms." 20 years ago, it would be extreme; today, you need that level "to keep up with the absurdity of reality." The consensus on its inaugural show: From penises to pedophiles, "They went there." One fan: "Such a fun fuck-you."

Following its tradition since 1997 of pissing off almost everyone, the new show portrays Trump as a deeply insecure grotesquerie in the Epstein files who sounds like Saddam Hussein, sleeps with Satan, sues everyone, often gets naked to show us his tiny penis with googly eyes, and lines the White House walls with naked photos of himself. The "plot" has South Park residents angry the guy they voted for turns out to be a grifting fascist douchebag; when religion is foisted on schools in the form of Jesus, last seen in 2019 doing cocaine with Satan, they complain to the President, who sues them, then settles if they'll run pro-Trump messaging. Cue protests, showdowns, media too scared of lawsuits to say anything but “oh boy, oh shit, oh God,” and a deepfake, live-action, small-dicked Trump trudging through the desert: "When things heat up, who will deliver us from temptation?"

Enraged, the White House shrieked no "fourth-rate show can derail President Trump’s hot streak." Deadpan, Parker responded, "We’re terribly sorry." Then Trump fled the firestorm for a $10 million "work trip" to Scotland. "Many meetings planned!!" he boasted. In truth, exhibiting "a staggering level of grift," he went to golf on our dime at his failing courses at Turnberry and Balmedie in Aberdeenshire, and to open a new course there dedicated to his mother, though the first one's never turned a profit and is usually half-empty because he's so despised. His first term, he racked up 260 rounds of golf, most at his own resorts, at a cost of $151.5 million; this weekend's was his 44th, and most pricey, golf trip in six months; as of March 30, he's spent $26 million to golf, but we really can't afford food stamps. His spox dismissed concerns as "pathetic"; also, Biden went to the beach, and the autopen.

Despite an almost empty schedule, between rounds he did meet (very briefly) with British P.M. Keir Starmer and Scotland’s First Minister John Swinney. Meanwhile Scotland, where 75% of residents abhor him, gave Trump the welcome he deserved. In an editorial, the largest paper called him "a menace"; the "CONVICTED U.S. FELON" headline continued, "Republican Leader, Who Was Found Liable for Sexual Abuse and Defamation, Will Visit Golf Courses." Aberdeen South M.P. Stephen Flynn was asked if he'd meet with the felon; totally bald, Flynn responded, "I'll be busy getting a haircut, or washing my hair, or finding any excuse possible to make sure I'm looking after my own toddler at the time." Before his arrival, an anti-Trump group put up multiple smiling photos of him and Epstein; in a video, they warned it would "be a shame if (they) appeared absolutely everywhere on his tour of the U.K."

Elsewhere, a "festival of resistance" gathered: Despite his Scottish roots, "The vast majority of Scots have a deep disdain for Trump and everything he stands for." "So many people here loathe him," said a woman with a “We Don’t Negotiate With Fascists” sign. "We’re not divided (by) religion or race or political allegiance. We’re here together because we hate him.” Some singular signs: "Get Oot Nasty Little Manbaby, Scotland Hates Trump, Fuck Off You Tiny-Handed Orange-Faced Cunt, Scotland Totally Hates Trump, May Your Arse Break Out In Boils Ya Scunner, Not Even Your Wife Likes You, Beat It You Big Orange Jobbie, You Were Shite In Home Alone 2." A restaurant gave out fish guts to throw, Mexican and Palestinian flags flew, heart-filled signs declared him and Epstein "Best Friends Forever," bagpipers bragged, "At least this bag of hot air serves a purpose," many signs proclaimed, "Trump Is Still A Cunt."

Most of Scotland deems almost anything he's ever done "not the proper behavior of a decent person" because for nearly 20 years he bullied, threatened, coerced and conned residents to buy their land, trash their pristine coastline and build more crappy hotels while breaking every promise he made. In Aberdeenshire, he said he'd inject $1.5 billion into the economy; it was barely $120 million. He promised over 1,000 jobs; it was 84, fewer than the existing 100 on a shooting range. Instead of a 450-room luxury hotel and hundreds of homes, he built a 19-room hotel, a small clubhouse selling Trump merch, and a 36-hole course that cost $500 to play. In 2023, he lost $1.9 million, his 11th consecutive loss since 2006. Local officials who rejected the project then for its impact on precious sand dunes - the Scottish goverhment overrode them - now say they feel ashamed and "hoodwinked...We all fell for it."

Three neighboring families are still seething. Their horror stories: The farmer who wouldn't sell, so Trump sabotaged the water supply for him and his elderly mother. The 73-year-old retired quarry worker and salmon fisherman whose barn reads, "No More Trump Lies" who wouldn't sell where he'd lived since he was 14, so Trump blocked access to the beach where he did his fishing, which "he knew I loved"; he avows, "This place will never, ever belong to Trump." The energy consultant who lives in an old Coast Guard station overlooking the golf, dunes, North Sea; when he wouldn't sell, even after Trump "threw in some jewelry," Trump had landscapers put in trees to block the view and charged him for a fence he built. He wouldn't pay, but he did put up and fly a Mexican flag. This year, "I don't have a big enough flagpole - I'd need one for Mexico, Canada, Palestine, Greenland, you name it."

For years, the vile, vindictive lout also fought to block a wind farm that would "ruin my view"; today, 11 turbines spin, he still raves "windmills are killing us," and America cringes. One headline: "Old Man Goes to Scotland, Yells At Wind, Cheats At Golf," after he got busted in a now-viral video. America also thanked the Scottish people for "your always hilariously caustic insults that, however imaginative, can never truly plumb the depths of this most revolting excuse for a wannabe human...this walking pile of pestilential feculence." For proof, at a "bat-poop-crazy" presser, he kept spewing - his ballroom, Gazans "don't thank us enough," the six wars he's stopped, "about a war a month." He went off-script from the official story he split from Epstein because he was "a creep." Nope: It wasn't the pedophilia; it was that Epstein tried to recruit some of his staff: "He stole people that work for me."

He also invented fictional crimes, laws and payments by claiming Kamala paid $11 million to Beyoncé for "an ENDORSEMENT" - also some to Oprah and "low-rated" Al Sharpton - which is "TOTALLY ILLEGAL" (not) and "they should all be prosecuted." Sigh. Madness. One final reverie: A new AI fever dream from the official White House account shows Trump, a battle-weary, red-tied, gladiator messiah valiantly striding, despite bone spurs, from a smoke-and-rubble-strewn Roman coliseum, its flag in tatters. Cue Teddy Roosevelt's iconic Man in the Arena speech: "Credit belongs to the man who is actually in the arena, whose face is marred by dust and sweat and blood, (who) spends himself in a worthy cause; who at the best knows (the) triumph of high achievement, who at the worst at least fails while daring greatly." One response: "It's like when I was a kid and got sick, my fever got really high and I would hallucinate." Another: "What in the actual imperial cosplay is this? The Roman Empire fell too. Just saying.".

Protest sign in Scotland Protest sign in ScotlandScreenshot from Bluesky


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Abby Zimet.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/the-shambolic-grifter-in-the-arena-daring-greatly/feed/ 0 546623
Memoirist Sarah Perry on building trust in your creative process https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/memoirist-sarah-perry-on-building-trust-in-your-creative-process/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/memoirist-sarah-perry-on-building-trust-in-your-creative-process/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/memoirist-sarah-perry-on-building-trust-in-your-creative-process I appreciate when memoirists talk about self care. Your first book, After the Eclipse, is a memoir about your mother’s murder, which happened when you were 12. Your new book, Sweet Nothings, is a collection of essays about candy: and in it, you write more about your mom, about the aftermath of your first book, and about your mental health. What did you do to take care of yourself when you were working on After the Eclipse, and what are some things you wish you had done differently while writing that first book?

I think even the story itself predisposed me to have this kind of masochistic relationship to putting the story together. I had been interviewed and interrogated by police a lot as a young person, and I had been a really willing participant in that. Because I felt like, well, if I submit to this process—if I just fully submit to all of these questions and all of these things they’re asking me to do—maybe they will figure out who committed this crime. And this person will be put away, and I will at least not be worrying anymore that they’re still on the street and could be harming other people.

It’s tricky because, it’s like, that was great training in being extremely thorough and trying to nail down what had happened, and how I felt about it and what exactly I remembered. And so I think I went into it with that mindset, submitting myself to that process of just endless self-interrogation and endless… like, just being extremely rigorous and thorough with myself. And not having a great sense, at least at first, of what boundaries I needed.

And then, of course, the way that I moved toward prioritizing those boundaries was actually very productivity-motivated. If I was reading police documents or the autopsy report in the middle of the night, and I had been working for hours and hours and hours, and I went beyond my capacity, I wouldn’t be able to write anything for a week or two weeks. And I felt like, if I’m going to actually get this done, if I’m going to keep going forward, I need to be more mindful of what my capacity is at various times.

There are a few things I implemented eventually, and even more things that I advise students to do, that maybe I thought about doing but never actually did. I think embodied practices can be really useful. Like, people often talk about yoga, etc. But back in the days of writing After the Eclipse, I was still a pretty active roller derby player. I would have this immediate sense of belonging and also get to do this physically aggressive thing that was empowering. It was something that would help me get out my anger and my frustration, but among friends.

And a lot it is also just staying mindful of the fact that writing memoir can be such a process of time travel. I found myself really traveling back to times in my life that were a lot more difficult and mental states that were really challenging.

A great example of that is that one month in 2012, I wrote a check and I wrote the date—but 1994.

Oh my god.

Sometimes you don’t realize how transported you are. So I would resolve to write two hours, and then, even if I had more writing time afterward, I would stop and entrust the part of myself that was less under the trance of memory and of investigating these things to have a good sense of what my capacity for that day was, and I’d put it aside.

How do you hold yourself to it, though? Do you set timers for yourself?

Yeah, definitely setting a timer. I’m a big fan of tracking and logging things. I have a lot of my own spreadsheets and systems. If I am actively working, I’m usually working more than I feel like I am. So watching hours add up over a week really helps me assure myself that I am showing up for my work.

I’ve heard a lot of writers who write memoir about their trauma say that they’re not sure they’ll ever write about anything else. Do you identify with that at all?

I do. And I have to say, my current orientation to that is frustration.

Then I was working on this memoir that’s a lot about sexuality and love in the wake of trauma. And a lot about thinking through all of that via my mother’s example and experiences, and trying to interrogate some of the sex-negativity that surrounded the trial. So you can imagine, that one was a good time, too, to write. [laughs]

I was working on that, and it was 2020, and I was just like, “I can’t do this work right now.” I have the world’s biggest sweet tooth, I like to say, and my partner had long been suggesting to me, “Why don’t you write about candy?” And I had said, “I’m sorry, I’m a serious writer. I’m not going to do that. What are you talking about? That’s not a book.”

But I finally broke down and gave it a shot. I said, “I’m going to get up every morning for 100 mornings and write about a different candy every day, just as writing exercises.” I just wanted to enjoy making sentences again and get into that sort of pleasure of language. And then I would go on and do my “serious” writing for the rest of the day.

Now, Sweet Nothings has become this book that I hope gives people some lightness and joy in a continually really difficult time. Of course, it still does have this frame of—I like how you put it earlier—not only Mom and the murder, but this telling of that story in Eclipse. So it’s very much still folding back in onto the same subjects. The funny version is, “Why won’t my mom leave me alone already?”

And I feel like—a lot of people, especially those who have one big traumatic event—they get to feeling like, “Am I a good enough writer to make meaning without using this thing? Is this the only thing I can make the gravitational center of something?” Because so often, I’ll be writing a piece, and I’ll be trying to do another thing. I wrote this piece about a fried cherry pie in Oklahoma, and that turned into a mom-mourning piece. And I thought, is this just the same shortcut that I keep taking here? And then the New England part of me, who is embarrassed about having feelings, comes in with, “Am I so wounded that I can’t stop talking about this? Can I put it aside for a second and make something else already?”

How do you respond when you notice other writers writing about their trauma from different angles, taking a prismatic approach to that one event in their life? Do you have a similar reaction to their work as the frustration you’re describing you feel with your own?

I totally don’t. It’s definitely one of those things where it’s like, I would never say that to my best friend. My friends and colleagues can write about the same thing forever. But it was like, didn’t I write Sweet Nothings to get away from this?

I want to backpedal a bit and ask about that 100-day writing challenge you mentioned, which kicked off Sweet Nothings. What did you learn about yourself from doing that, and do you ever think you’ll try that kind of challenge again?

I actually openly welcome any idea from anyone about something I could do 100 times again. It was really fun, and very fun to accidentally have a draft of a book after 100 days.

What I learned was that I surprised myself a lot. It’s a lot weirder and funnier than I realized I could be on the page. I think that’s not only because After the Eclipse is obviously so serious, but also because I had this conception of myself as this very sedate writer of lovely, conventional sentences. This almost old-fashioned, little New Englander thing. I read too much Thoreau as a kid or something.

Whereas the work I love? I’ve always been such a big Maggie Nelson fan. I love Heather Christle’s poetry. I love weird little things. But I just never thought I could make that myself. I am long-winded, but to make all these short little things that are sometimes quite snappy and unplanned was really thrilling to me. I don’t think I could’ve done them well without the process. They are what they are because of how I wrote them: first thing in the morning, usually before my “editor brain” was on, as I say. I would just instinctively go to these weird places, and there was absolutely no pressure. If I were to do this again, the trick would be pretending I wasn’t taking it seriously. I don’t know if you can do that twice.

You were nominated for a James Beard Award for an essay you wrote about gas station pie.

Crazy.

Now you have this new book about candy. It’s so clear that food is a creative doorway for you. How did you discover that about your writing process?

Honestly, totally by accident. I started writing about candy just because I love it, and other people had to point out to me that I had an unusual level of focus. And then honestly, I ate that fucking pie, man! And I was like, “The world has to know about this pie. Oh my god.”

I also felt like it was an opportunity to do some class work around food. Class consciousness. Class critique. Thinking about who gets to eat what and how we judge those choices.

It’s funny, too, because one of the gigs that got me through writing After the Eclipse was working as a fact-checker for WSJ Magazine. They cover a lot of high-class food. That job gave me major poor-kid class anxiety. There was a lot of French I couldn’t pronounce. I remember thinking, “God, I’ve lived in New York for six years, and I still feel like a bumpkin in this job.” So to be at the James Beard Awards was surreal.

I want to ask about the art of writing micro-essays, since there are 100 of them in your newest book. How does your approach to writing a micro-essay differ from your approach to writing a longer essay?

I really believe that every time you sit down to write, it’s like you’ve never written anything before. You have to totally relearn it. But now that I have experience in writing a pretty long memoir and in writing micro-essays, I just don’t feel like I know how to write a conventional-length essay yet. It’s the length I teach, but I haven’t really nailed it yet.

We always talk about how the essay is flexible, capacious: insert whatever quote about the essay here. And I think those especially apply to that 3,000 to 5,000 word range. Each one really feels like its own form. I just haven’t aligned form with content at that length yet. I haven’t found the thing I want to say that wants that length.

With micro-essays, sometimes, maybe half the time, I’d start with something like, “Today is about Reese’s Pieces.” I’d start typing, maybe pull in a quick bit of history from Google, and then I’d write this paragraph. I’d hit the last sentence and I’d almost hear it click in my head. I’d know: that’s the end. And I’d put it down. And I’d walk away.

Wow. Did that happen 100 times?

Not 100 times, but maybe 30 or so. Sometimes, I’d get this feeling, like, “Okay, this paragraph sounds like the first one. There’s a shape here.” That’s the challenge with micro-pieces, you’re trying to signal to the reader that you’ve come to the end much earlier than in a length we’re more used to reading. You don’t want to give it unearned gravity. You can’t ring the bell of completion too loudly.</span< And since I knew there would be 100 of them, I was always asking the reader to reset their attention again and again. So each one had to feel complete but also open enough that you could step forward into the next one.

But as for how I did it? I don’t know. I just felt around.

Sarah Perry recommends:

“Selfish Soul” by Sudan Archives

Flow

Green Belly hot sauce

Ripton jeans

A Silent Treatment by Jeannie Vanasco


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Hurley Winkler.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/memoirist-sarah-perry-on-building-trust-in-your-creative-process/feed/ 0 546628
How Pacific students took their climate fight to the world’s highest court. And won https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-pacific-students-took-their-climate-fight-to-the-worlds-highest-court-and-won/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-pacific-students-took-their-climate-fight-to-the-worlds-highest-court-and-won/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 05:38:38 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117954

Last week, the UN’s highest court issued a stinging ruling that countries have a legal obligation to limit climate change and provide restitution for harm caused, giving legal force to an idea that was hatched in a classroom in Port Vila. This is how a group of young students from Vanuatu changed the face of international law.

SPECIAL REPORT: By Jamie Tahana for RNZ Pacific

Vishal Prasad admitted to being nervous as he stood outside the imposing palace in the Hague, with its towering brick facade, marble interiors and crystal chandeliers.

It had taken more than six years of work to get here, where he was about to hear a decision he said could throw a “lifeline” to his home islands.

The Peace Palace, the home of the International Court of Justice, could not feel further from the Pacific.

Yet it was here in this Dutch city that Prasad and a small group of Pacific islanders in their bright shirts and shell necklaces last week gathered before the UN’s top court to witness an opinion they had dreamt up when they were at university in 2019 and managed to convince the world’s governments to pursue.

The International Court of Justice in The Hague
The International Court of Justice in The Hague last week . . . a landmark non-binding rulings on the climate crisis. Image: X/@CIJ_ICJ

“We’re here to be heard,” said Siosiua Veikune, who was one of those students, as he waited on the grass verge outside the court’s gates. “Everyone has been waiting for this moment, it’s been six years of campaigning.”

What they wanted to hear was that more than a moral obligation, addressing climate change was also a legal one. That countries could be held responsible for their greenhouse gas emissions — both contemporary and historic — and that they could be penalised for their failure to act.

“For me personally, [I want] clarity on the rights of future generations,” Veikune said. “What rights are owed to future generations? Frontline communities have demanded justice again and again, and this is another step towards that justice.”

And they won.

Vishal Prasad of the Pacific Islands Students Fighting Climate Change group speaks to the media
Vishal Prasad of the Pacific Islands Students Fighting Climate Change group speaks to the media in front of the International Court of Justice following the conclusion last week of an advisory opinion on countries’ obligations to protect the climate. Image: Instagram/Pacific Climate Warriors

The court’s president, Judge Yuji Iwasawa, took more than two hours to deliver an unusually stinging advisory opinion from the normally restrained court, going through the minutiae of legal arguments before delivering a unanimous ruling which largely fell on the side of Pacific states.

“The protection of the environment is a precondition for the enjoyment of human rights,” he said, adding that sea-level rise, desertification, drought and natural disasters “may significantly impair certain human rights, including the right to life”.

After the opinion, the victorious students and lawyers spilled out of the palace alongside Vanuatu’s Climate Minister, Ralph Regenvanu. Their faces were beaming, if not a little shellshocked.

“The world’s smallest countries have made history,” Prasad told the world’s media from the palace’s front steps. “The ICJ’s decision brings us closer to a world where governments can no longer turn a blind eye to their legal responsibilities”.

“Young people around the world stepped up, not only as witnesses to injustice, but as architects of change”.

Vanuatu's Climate Minister Ralph Regenvanu talks to the media
Vanuatu’s Climate Minister Ralph Regenvanu talks to the media after the historic ICJ ruling in The Hague on Tuesday. Image: Arab News/VDP

A classroom exercise
It was 2019 when a group of law students at the University of the South Pacific’s campus in Port Vila, the harbourside capital of Vanuatu, were set a challenge in their tutorial. They had been learning about international law and, in groups, were tasked with finding ways it could address climate change.

It was a particularly acute question in Vanuatu, one of the countries most vulnerable to the climate crisis. Many of the students’ teenage years had been defined by Cyclone Pam, the category five storm that ripped through much of the country in 2015 with winds in excess of 250km/h.

It destroyed entire villages, wiped out swathes of infrastructure and crippled the country’s crops and water supplies. The storm was so significant that thousands of kilometres away, in Tuvalu, the waves it whipped up displaced 45 percent of the country’s population and washed away an entire islet.

Cyclone Pam was meant to be a once-in-a-generation storm, but Vanuatu has been struck by five more category five cyclones since then.

Belyndar Rikimani
Foormer Solomon Islands student at USP Belyndar Rikimani . . . It was seen as obscene that the communities with the smallest carbon footprint were paying the steepest price for a crisis they had almost no hand in creating.” Image: RNZ Pacific

Among many of the students, there was a frustration that no one beyond their borders seemed to care particularly much, recalled Belyndar Rikimani, a student from Solomon Islands who was at USP in 2019. She saw it as obscene that the communities with the smallest carbon footprint were paying the steepest price for a crisis they had almost no hand in creating.

Each year the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) was releasing a new avalanche of data that painted an increasingly grim prognosis for the Pacific. But, Rikimani said, the people didn’t need reams of paper to tell them that, for they were already acutely aware.

On her home island of Malaita, coastal villages were being inundated with every storm, the schools of fish on which they relied were migrating further away, and crops were increasingly failing.

“We would go by the sea shore and see people’s graves had been taken out,” Rikimani recalled. “The ground they use to garden their food in, it is no longer as fertile as it has once been because of the changes in weather.”

The mechanism used by the world to address climate change is largely based around a UN framework of voluntary agreements and summits — known as COP — where countries thrash out goals they often fail to meet. But it was seen as impotent by small island states in the Pacific and the Caribbean, who accused the system of being hijacked by vested interests set on hindering any drastic cuts to emissions.

So, the students argued, what if there was a way to push back? To add some teeth to the international process and move the climate discussion beyond agreements and adaptation to those of equity and justice? To give small countries a means to nudge those seen to be dragging their heels.

“From the beginning we were aware of the failure of the climate system or climate regime and how it works,” Prasad, who in 2019 was studying at the USP campus in Fiji’s capital, Suva, told me.

“This was known to us. Obviously there needs to be something else. Why should the law be silent on this?”

The International Court of Justice (ICJ) is the main court for international law. It adjudicates disputes between nations and issues advisory opinions on big cross-border legal issues. So, the students wondered, could an advisory opinion help? What did international law have to say about climate change?

Members of the Pacific Islands Students Fighting Climate Change.
Members of the Pacific Islands Students Fighting Climate Change activist group. Image: RNZ Pacific/PISFCC

Unlike most students, who would leave such discussions in the classroom, they decided to find out. But the ICJ does not hear cases from groups or individuals; they would have to convince a government to pursue the challenge.

Together, they wrote to various Pacific governments hoping to discuss the idea. It was ambitious, they conceded, but in one of the regions most threatened by rising seas and intensifying storms, they hoped there would at least be some interest.

But rallying enough students to join their cause was the first hurdle.

“There was a lot of doubts from the beginning,” Rikimani said. “We were trying to get the students who could, you know, be a part of the movement. And it was hard, it was too big, too grand.”

In the end, 27 people gathered to form the genesis of a new organisation: Pacific Island Students Fighting Climate Change (PISFCC).

A couple of weeks went by before a response popped up in their inboxes. The government of Vanuatu was intrigued. Ralph Regenvanu, who was at that time the foreign minister, asked the students if they would like to swing by for a meeting.

“I still remember when [the] group came into my office to discuss this. And I felt solidarity with them,” Regenvanu recalled last week.

“I could empathise with where they were, what they were doing, what they were feeling. So it was almost like the time had come to actually, okay, let’s do something about it.”

The students — “dressed to the nines,” as Regenvanu recalled — gave a presentation on what they hoped to achieve. Regenvanu was convinced. Not long after the wider Vanuatu government was, too. Now it was time for them to convince other countries.

“It was just a matter of the huge diplomatic effort that needed to be done,” Regenvanu said. “We had Odi Tevi, our ambassador in New York, who did a remarkable job with his team. And the strategy we employed to get a core group of countries from all over the world to be with us.

“It’s interesting that, you know, some of the most important achievements of the international community originated in the Pacific,” Regenvanu said, citing efforts in the 20th century to ban nuclear testing, or support decolonisation.

“We have this unique geographic and historic position that makes us able to, as small states, have a voice that’s much louder, I think. And you saw that again in this case, that it’s the Pacific once again taking the lead to do something that is of benefit to the whole world.”

What Vanuatu needed to take the case to the ICJ was to garner a majority of the UN General Assembly — that is, a majority of every country in the world — to vote to ask the court to answer a question.

To rally support, they decided to start close to home.

Hope and disappointment
The students set their sights on the Pacific Islands Forum, the region’s pre-eminent political group, which that year was holding its annual leaders’ summit in Tuvalu. A smattering of atolls along the equator which, in recent years, has become a reluctant poster child for the perils of climate change.

Tuvalu had hoped world leaders on Funafuti would see a coastline being eaten by the ocean, evidence of where the sea washes across the entire island at king tide, or saltwater bubbles up into gardens to kill crops, and that it would convince the world that time was running out.

But the 2019 Forum was a disaster. Pacific countries had pushed for a strong commitment from the region’s leaders at their retreat, but it nearly broke down when Australia’s government refused to budge on certain red lines. The then-prime minister of Tuvalu, Enele Sopoaga, accused Australia and New Zealand of neo-colonialism, questioning their very role in the Forum.

“That was disappointing,” Prasad said. “The first push was, okay, let’s put it at the forum and ask leaders to endorse this idea and then they take it forward. It was put on the agenda but the leaders did not endorse it; they ‘noted’ it. The language is ‘noted’, so it didn’t go ahead.”

Another disappointment came a few months later, when Rikimani and another of the students, Solomon Yeo, travelled to Spain for the annual COP meeting, the UN process where the world’s countries agree their next targets to limit greenhouse gas emissions.

But small island countries left angry after a small bloc derailed any progress, despite massive protests.

Solomon Yeo of the Pacific Islands Students Fighting Climate Change, standing second left, with youth climate activists.
Solomon Yeo (standing, second left) of the Pacific Islands Students Fighting Climate Change, with youth climate activists. Image: RNZ Pacific/PISFCC

That was an eye-opening two weeks in Madrid for Rikimani, whose initial scepticism of the system had been validated.

“It was disappointing when there’s nothing that’s been done. There is very little outcome that actually, you know, safeguards the future of the Pacific,” she said.

“But for us, it was the COP where there was interest being showed by various young leaders from around the world, seeing that this campaign could actually bring light to these climate negotiations.”

By now, Regenvanu said, that frustration was boiling over and more countries were siding with their campaign. By the end of 2019, that included some major countries from Europe and Asia, which brought financial and diplomatic heft. Other small-island countries from Africa and the Caribbean had also joined.

“Many of the Pacific states had never appeared before the ICJ before. So [we were] doing write shops with legal teams from different countries,” he said.

“We did write shops in Latin America, in the Caribbean, in the Pacific, in Africa, getting people just to be there at the court to present their stories, and then of course trying to coordinate.”

Meanwhile, Prasad was trying to spread word elsewhere. The hardest part, he said, was making it relevant to the people.

International law, The Hague, the Paris Agreement and other bureaucratic frameworks were nebulous and tedious. How could this possibly help the fisherman on Banaba struggling to haul in a catch?

To rally support, the Pacific Islands Students Fighting Climate Change decided to start close to home.
To rally support, the Pacific Islands Students Fighting Climate Change decided to start close to home. Image: RNZ Pacific/PISFCC

They spent time travelling to villages and islands, sipping kava shells and sharing meals, weaving a testimony of Indigenous stories and knowledge.

In Fiji, he said, the word for land is vanua, which is also the word for life.

“It’s the source of your identity, the source of your culture. It’s this connection that the land provides the connection with the past, with the ancestors, and with a way of life and a way of doing things.”

He travelled to the village of Vunidologa where, in 2014, its people faced the rupture of having to leave their ancestral lands, as the sea had marched in too far. In the months leading up to the relocation, they held prayer circles and fasted. When the day came, the elders wailed as they made an about two kilometre move inland.

“That’s the element of injustice there. It touches on this whole idea of self-determination that was argued very strongly at the ICJ, that people’s right to self-determination is completely taken away from them because of climate change,” Prasad said.

“Some have even called it a new face of colonialism. And that’s not fair and that cannot stand in 2025.”

Preparing the case
If 2019 was the year of building momentum, then a significant hurdle came in 2020, when the coronavirus shuttered much of the world. COP summits were delayed and the Pacific Islands Forum postponed. The borders of the Pacific were sealed for as long as two years.

But the students kept finding ways to gather their body of evidence.

“Everything went online, we gathered young people who would be able to take this idea forward in their own countries,” Prasad said.

On the diplomatic front, Vanuatu kept plugging away to rally countries so that by the time the Forum leaders met again — in 2022 — they were ready to ask for support again.

“It was in Fiji and we were so worried about the Australia and New Zealand presence at the Forum because we wanted an endorsement so that it would send a signal to all the other countries: ‘the Pacific’s on board, let’s get the others’,” Prasad recalled.

“We were very worried about Australia, but it was more like if Australia declines to support then the whole process falls, and we thought New Zealand might also follow.”

They didn’t. In an about-turn, Australia was now fully behind the campaign for an advisory opinion, and the New Zealand government was by now helping out too. By the end of 2022, several European powers were also involved.

Attention now turned to developing what question they wanted to actually ask the international court. And how would they write it in such a way that the majority of the world’s governments would back it.

“That was the process where it was make and break really to get the best outcome we could,” said Regenvanu.

“In the end we got a question that was like 90 percent as good as we wanted and that was very important to get that and that was a very difficult process.”

By December 2022, Vanuatu announced that it would ask the UN General Assembly to ask the International Court of Justice to weigh what, exactly, international law requires states to do about climate change, and what the consequences should be for states that harm the climate through actions or omissions.

More lobbying followed and then, in March 2023, it came to a vote and the result was unanimous. The UN assembly in New York erupted in cheers at a rare sign of consensus.

“All countries were on board,” said Regenvanu. “Even those countries that opposed it [we] were able to talk to them so they didn’t oppose it publicly.”

They were off to The Hague.

A tense wait
Late last year, the court held two weeks of hearings in which countries put forth their arguments. Julian Aguon, a Chamorro lawyer from Guam who was one of the lead counsel, told the court that “these testimonies unequivocally demonstrate that climate change has already caused grievous violations of the right to self-determination of peoples across the subregion.”

Over its deliberations, the court heard from more than 100 countries and international organisations hoping to influence its opinion, the highest level of participation in the court’s history. That included the governments of low-lying islands and atolls, which were hoping the court would provide a yardstick by which to measure other countries’ actions.

They argued that climate change threatened fundamental human rights — such as life, liberty, health, and a clean environment — as well as other international laws like those of the sea, and those of self-determination.

In their testimonies, high-emitting Western countries, including Australia, the United States, China, and Saudi Arabia maintained that the current system was enough.

It’s been a tense and nervous wait for the court’s answer, but they finally got it last Wednesday.

“We were pleasantly surprised by the strength of the decision,” Regenvanu said. “The fact that it was unanimous, we weren’t expecting that.”

The court said states had clear obligations under international law, and that countries — and, by extension, individuals and companies within those countries — were required to curb emissions. It also said the environment and human rights obligations set out in international law did indeed apply to climate change, and that countries had a right to pursue restitution for loss and damage.

The opinion is legally non-binding. But even so, it carries legal and political weight.

Individuals and groups could bring lawsuits against their own countries for failing to comply with the court’s opinion, and states could also return to the ICJ to hold each other to account, something Regenvanu said Vanuatu wasn’t ruling out. But, ultimately, he hoped it wouldn’t reach that point, and the advisory opinion would be seen as a wake-up call.

“We can call upon this advisory opinion in all our negotiations, particularly when countries say they can only do so much,” Regenvanu said. “They have said very clearly [that] all states have an obligation to do everything within their means according to the best available science.

“It’s really up to all countries of the world — in good faith — to take this on, realise that these are the legal obligations under custom law. That’s very clear. There’s no denying that anymore.

“And then discharge your legal obligations. If you are in breach, fix the breach, acknowledge that you have caused harm. Help to set it right. And also don’t do it again.”

Student leader Vishal Prasad
Student leader Vishal Prasad . . . “Oh, it definitely does not feel real. I don’t think it’s settled in.” Image: Instagram/Earth.org

Vishal Prasad still hadn’t quite processed the whole thing by the time we met again the next morning. In shorts, t-shirt, and jandals, he cut a much more relaxed figure as he reclined on a couch sipping a mug of coffee. His phone had been buzzing non-stop with messages from around the world.

“Oh, it definitely does not feel real. I don’t think it’s settled in,” he said. “I got, like, a flood of messages, well wishes. People say, ‘you guys have changed the world’. I think it’s gonna take a while.”

He was under no illusions that there was a long road ahead. The court’s advisory came at a time when international law and multilateralism was under particular strain.

When the urgency of the climate debate from a few years ago appears to have given way to a new enthusiasm for fossil fuel in some countries. He had no doubt the Pacific would continue to lead those battles.

“People have been messaging me that across the group chats they’re in, there’s this renewed sense of courage, strength and determination to do something because of what the ICJ has said,” he said.

“I’ve just been responding to messages and just saying thanks to people and just talking to them and I think it’s amazing to see that it’s been able to cause such a shift in the climate movement.”

Watching the advisory opinion being read out at 3am in Honiara was Belyndar Rikimani, hunched over a live stream in the dead of the night.

“What’s very special about this campaign is that it didn’t start with government experts, climate experts or policy experts. It started with students.

“And these law students are not from Harvard or Cambridge or all those big universities, but they are students from the Pacific that have seen the first-hand effects of climate change. It started with students who have the heart to see change for our islands and for our people.”

This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/29/how-pacific-students-took-their-climate-fight-to-the-worlds-highest-court-and-won/feed/ 0 546606
How Hollywood advanced the Russiagate hoax https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/how-hollywood-advanced-the-russiagate-hoax/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/how-hollywood-advanced-the-russiagate-hoax/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 22:13:16 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=e05d8d2c7a738a1a32a2aa3d19c9b09c
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/how-hollywood-advanced-the-russiagate-hoax/feed/ 0 546574
Statement by Ralph Nader on the Passing of Morton Mintz at the age of 103 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/statement-by-ralph-nader-on-the-passing-of-morton-mintz-at-the-age-of-103/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/statement-by-ralph-nader-on-the-passing-of-morton-mintz-at-the-age-of-103/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 21:20:41 +0000 https://nader.org/?p=6561
This content originally appeared on Ralph Nader and was authored by matthew.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/statement-by-ralph-nader-on-the-passing-of-morton-mintz-at-the-age-of-103/feed/ 0 546565
Changing the Narrative Around Gun Violence Victims https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/changing-the-narrative-around-gun-violence-victims/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/changing-the-narrative-around-gun-violence-victims/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 21:19:32 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/changing-the-narrative-around-gun-violence-victims-jones-20250728/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Sandra Jones.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/changing-the-narrative-around-gun-violence-victims/feed/ 0 546568
The World Is Watching and Waiting for a Strong Global Treaty to End Plastic Pollution https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-world-is-watching-and-waiting-for-a-strong-global-treaty-to-end-plastic-pollution/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-world-is-watching-and-waiting-for-a-strong-global-treaty-to-end-plastic-pollution/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 21:09:53 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/the-world-is-watching-and-waiting-for-a-strong-global-treaty-to-end-plastic-pollution Next week, governments from around the world will meet in Geneva for the final global plastic pollution treaty negotiations (INC-5.2). WWF calls on global governments to explore all available pathways to finally make good on the commitment made in March 2022 to forge a strong, legally binding global treaty that can put an end to the plastic pollution crisis. Otherwise, we risk leaving the negotiations with a weak treaty that will perpetuate this crisis for future generations.

While previous efforts to finalize a global treaty on plastic pollution have stalled, a majority of ambitious countries continue to push for progress, with only a small minority hindering momentum. As a result, the question of whether a strong and effective treaty can be achieved through formal consensus alone is up for debate, and it is expected that alternative pathways to deliver a meaningful outcome will be part of the upcoming negotiations.

“The speed at which the treaty went from conception to near completion is exactly what the planet needed, but it was never going to be without challenges,” said Erin Simon, Vice President and Head of Plastic Waste & Business, World Wildlife Fund. “As we approach the final stretch, negotiators must remember why we’re here. Our planet is overwhelmed by plastic waste, and it’s impacting everyone and everything that calls this planet home. At the start of these negotiations, the global community collectively agreed enough was enough, now is the moment to come together to deliver a path forward.”

At this point, the negotiations are well into overtime and every day that goes by, another 30,000 tonnes of plastic pours into our oceans. Failure to conclude a strong treaty at INC- 5.2 will only make the job of addressing this crisis more difficult, costly and dangerous for people all around the world. While the cost of not acting is grave, the potential benefits of meaningful action are plentiful. In the US and around the world a strong global plastic treaty could help create jobs, boost economic competitiveness, lower taxpayer costs, curb pollution and improve human and environmental health outcomes.

The global community must leave Geneva with a treaty built on specific binding rules supported by the majority of countries to be able to effectively tackle global plastic pollution. This means a treaty which includes global bans on the most harmful plastic products and chemicals; global product design requirements to enable a non-toxic circular economy; financial and technical support for developing countries to ensure effective implementation and mechanisms to strengthen and adapt the treaty over time.

“The path forward won’t be easy but it’s time to prioritize the key points where we can align globally and deliver a treaty that will protect the health of people and our planet well into the future,” added Simon.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-world-is-watching-and-waiting-for-a-strong-global-treaty-to-end-plastic-pollution/feed/ 0 546582
Sierra Club Statement on the Trump Administration’s Reckless Reorganization of USDA https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/sierra-club-statement-on-the-trump-administrations-reckless-reorganization-of-usda/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/sierra-club-statement-on-the-trump-administrations-reckless-reorganization-of-usda/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 20:33:45 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/sierra-club-statement-on-the-trump-administrations-reckless-reorganization-of-usda The Trump administration has announced a controversial reorganization of a critical federal agency.

In an announcement, Agriculture Secretary Brooke Rollins said the administration would move around 2,600 employees out of the department’s Washington, D.C. headquarters and into five regional hubs located in Fort Collins, Colorado; Kansas City, Missouri; Indianapolis; Salt Lake City; and Raleigh, North Carolina. The administration is also planning on shuttering research facilities and eliminating the U.S. Forest Service’s nine regional offices.

The move has received pushback from Democrats and Republicans in Congress, who objected to the administration’s decision not to inform Congress of its plans before the announcement. The announcement is another blow to the Department of Agriculture, which has been significantly affected by budget and staffing cuts stretching back to the “fork in the road” memo issued by DOGE. Some estimates calculate the department could lose nearly one-third of its staff under Trump’s proposed FY26 budget, including nearly 90 percent of wildland fire management staff and 70 percent of national forest system staff.

In response, Alex Craven, Sierra Club’s forest campaign manager, released the following statement:

“This isn’t a reorganization – it’s the continued dismantling of an essential department. This administration’s approach since January has been ‘fire first, ask questions later,’ and the U.S. Forest Service has suffered some of the worst consequences. The more the agency is cut, the harder it is for them to fulfill their critical responsibilities, and the easier it is for Donald Trump to claim it’s broken and pursue his ultimate agenda – privatization.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/sierra-club-statement-on-the-trump-administrations-reckless-reorganization-of-usda/feed/ 0 546588
How the world’s highest court bolstered the fight for climate reparations https://grist.org/article/the-worlds-highest-court-bolstered-the-fight-for-climate-reparations/ https://grist.org/article/the-worlds-highest-court-bolstered-the-fight-for-climate-reparations/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 20:30:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=671011 As global inaction over the climate crisis has mounted and Pacific islands nations have watched in frustration as their calls for decisive action have gone unheeded, a growing number of them, led by Vanuatu, have turned to the courts. If policymakers won’t act, they hoped, perhaps the courts would. 

And so island nations in the South Pacific region of Melanesia, where Indigenous communities have had to flee their traditional lands due to landslides and rising seas, filed a case that was ultimately joined by more than 130 countries. Together, they urged the International Court of Justice to decide whether nation-states have a legal obligation to address climate change, and whether those harmed by a warming world have a right to reparations. 

Justices considered testimony in Indigenous Pacific languages, heard arguments from Indigenous attorneys, and learned how Indigenous traditions are being harmed by the typhoons, rising seas, and other extreme weather events worsened by the burning of fossil fuels.

Last week, the court issued a landmark ruling that climate harm violates international law. The seismic decision, although advisory, opens the door for countries like Vanuatu to seek reparations from some of the world’s biggest polluters, and it is widely expected to shape current — and future — climate lawsuits as early as this week.

“What the court has done has come in and made it crystal clear that affected frontline nations and communities that have been devastated by climate harm — harm that can be traced to the conduct of specific countries and corporations — those communities, those nations, they absolutely have the right to redress and reparations,” said Joie Chowdhury, a senior attorney at the Center for International Environmental Law. 

The court’s decision, handed down Wednesday, said that all nations have a legal obligation to limit greenhouse gas emissions and failing to do so, through the support of fossil fuel production, could violate international law. The justices didn’t disclose how much major polluters might owe, and said the level of reparations would be determined on a case by case basis. But Chowdhury said she expects the ruling to immediately influence ongoing climate litigation worldwide, and prompt new lawsuits. “There are litigators all over the world that are looking to this case and will absolutely bring it into the courtroom,” she said.

Kelly Matheson, deputy director of global strategy for Our Children’s Trust, a nonprofit law firm representing youth in climate litigation, said the organization is already incorporating the language of the advisory opinion into an amicus brief that it plans to file in a case in Latin America this fall. She also expects the ruling to feature heavily in La Rose v. His Majesty the King, a Canadian climate case youth plaintiffs brought against the Canadian government scheduled for trial next year, as well as a climate case pending before the African Court of Human and Peoples’ Rights. 

Government attorneys also are studying the decision to determine whether their countries can sue. Malik Amin Aslam Khan, former minister of the environment in Pakistan, said the ruling “opens up a legally grounded pathway for claiming climate damages and demanding reparations for countries like Pakistan, which has continuously been one of the world’s worst climate sufferers and has credibly recorded climate damage costs crossing $40 billion in the past decade alone.”

Ralph Regenvanu, Vanuatu’s minister of climate change, said Vanuatu plans to immediately push for a resolution at the United Nations General Assembly to implement the advisory opinion. The government also plans to use the ruling to advocate for better climate financing for the Pacific and better regional and domestic policies to address the climate crisis.

“For the first time in history, the ICJ has spoken directly about the biggest threat facing humanity, which is climate change,” Regenvanu said during a press conference at The Hague last week. ”It’s very important now, as the world goes forward that we make sure our actions align with what was decided or what came out today from the court.”

The ruling builds upon a growing consensus in international law that states have a legal obligation to limit greenhouse gas emissions. Last year, the International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea ruled that the 169 countries that have signed the U.N. Convention on the Law of the Sea — a list that includes China and India, but not the U.S. — must reduce emissions. It was another victory led by Pacific island nations as well as island nations in the Caribbean and West Indies.

Chairperson of the African Union Commission on International Law, Hajer Gueldich (L) and Vanuatu's Climate Change Minister Ralph Regenvanu react ahead of the International Court of Justice (ICJ) session tasked with issuing the first Advisory Opinion (AO) on States' legal obligations to address climate change, in The Hague on July 23, 2025. The top UN court on July 23, 2025 described climate change as an "urgent and existential threat", as it handed down a landmark ruling on the legal obligations of countries to prevent it. (Photo by JOHN THYS / AFP)
“For the first time in history, the ICJ has spoken directly about the biggest threat facing humanity,” Ralph Regenvanu, Vanuatu’s climate change minister, said of the ruling. He is seen here in court before the decision was handed down. John Thys / AFP via Getty Images

Earlier this month, the Inter-American Court of Human Rights, a regional court for Latin and South America, ruled that a healthy climate is a human right and governments should limit emissions. The court also said they should prevent harm to marginalized communities such as Indigenous peoples and emphasized their role in combatting climate change.

“Indigenous peoples play an essential role in the preservation and sustainable management of these ecosystems because their ancestral knowledge and their close relationship with nature proved essential for the conservation of biodiversity and the mitigation of climate change,” the court wrote. “Therefore, states should listen to them and facilitate their continuing participation in decision-making.”  

Matheson said that when Sheila Watt-Cloutier, an Indigenous Inuk woman who then chaired the Inuit Circumpolar Conference, brought a climate case to the Inter-American Commission on Human Rights wo decades ago, it dismissed her claims within two pages. Several years later, Palau brought a similar case before the ICJ to no avail. 

“For the law to be moving at this speed —  to go from dismissals and no consideration of the impact that climate change has on human rights 20 years ago, when the first case was filed, to now you have opinions from all but one of the highest courts in the world — is amazing,” she said, noting that an African court is expected to weigh in soon. 

While the ICJ ruling did not expound on the rights of Indigenous peoples and focused on the responsibilities of nation-states, it did clarify a question that has long troubled leaders of countries like Tuvalu and Kiribati that are losing land to rising seas: What happens to their borders if their islands disappear? On that note, the ICJ said any recognized borders should remain unchanged, which is important to ensure they continue to have a political voice on the international stage and control over their waters. “That presumption of statehood and sovereignty is a critical bit,” said Johanna Gusman, a senior attorney for the Center for International Environmental Law. 

The case was initiated six years ago by a group of law students in Vanuatu and led by the government of Vanuatu and the Melanesian Spearhead Group, which represents several nations in that region of the Pacific and the Indigenous people of New Caledonia.

“By affirming the science, the ICJ has mandated countries to urgently phase out fossil fuels because they are no longer tenable for small island state communities in the Pacific, and for young people and for future generations,” Vishal Prasad, director of Pacific Islands, Students Fighting Climate Change, said during a press conference at The Hague. “This opinion is a lifeline and an opportunity to protect all that we hold dear, and all that we love.”

The United Nations established the International Court of Justice in the wake of World War II to help the global community address conflicts and concerns peacefully and judicially. It has heard cases on issues ranging from  nuclear testing to fishing rights to the status of entire territories, such as Western Sahara. While not binding, its decisions are significant because they interpret international law and clarify states’ legal responsibilities. In this case, the court reviewed several treaties, including the 2015 Paris Agreement climate accord, and concluded that under those  treaties and under customary international law, all nations have a legal obligation to limit emissions and may owe compensation to countries that are harmed. 

There are limits to who can bring cases before the ICJ, which only hears cases brought by nation-states and not, for example, Indigenous political entities such as First Nations in Canada. Gusman said that Indigenous peoples may instead use the language of the cases in domestic disputes or through other U.N. venues. For example, “Indigenous nations and First Nations within Canada now have stronger legal backbones to take cases against Canada,” she said.

The court’s ruling will also be dulled somewhat in the United States, which has long rejected the ICJ’s authority and under President Donald J. Trump has been retreating even further from climate action. The U.S. and China are two major polluters whose rejection of the ICJ’s jurisdiction could prevent a country like Vanuatu from suing them directly over their emissions. 

Korey Silverman-Roati, a senior fellow at the Sabin Center for Climate Change Law, said the ruling is a seminal moment for climate litigation but that the effects in the U.S. will be muted because U.S. courts don’t traditionally recognize the ICJ’s authority. “I don’t think we can expect that the direct language of the ruling will impact cases in the U.S.,” he said. He thinks the advisory opinion will likely instead influence other countries whose judicial systems give more weight to the ICJ, and influence the U.S. through the ruling’s use in international negotiations. 

Already, the ruling is expected to figure heavily at this year’s Conference of the Parties, or COP, in November in Brazil. Last year, negotiations fell apart in the waning minute to the disappointment of Pacific island nations and many climate advocates who criticized the amount of money pledged by U.N. member states as woefully insufficient. 

“The advisory opinion will be an essential tool that we in the Global South will use at the next meeting of the United Nations General Assembly, the U.N.’s climate change and biodiversity conferences, and everywhere to advocate for climate justice,” said Ilan Kiloe, acting director general of the Melanesian Spearhead Group. He said Pacific peoples have already suffered forced relocations due to climate change. “We have already lost much of what defines us as Pacific Islanders.”

Tik Root contributed reporting to this story. 

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline How the world’s highest court bolstered the fight for climate reparations on Jul 28, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Anita Hofschneider.

]]>
https://grist.org/article/the-worlds-highest-court-bolstered-the-fight-for-climate-reparations/feed/ 0 546556
Appeals Court Overturns Murder and Kidnapping Conviction in Etan Patz Disappearance https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/appeals-court-overturns-murder-and-kidnapping-conviction-in-etan-patz-disappearance/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/appeals-court-overturns-murder-and-kidnapping-conviction-in-etan-patz-disappearance/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 20:25:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/etan-patz-pedro-hernandez-conviction-overturned-murder-kidnapping by Joaquin Sapien

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

Last week, a federal appeals court overturned the conviction of Pedro Hernandez for the murder and kidnapping of Etan Patz, a 6-year-old New York boy who disappeared in 1979 in one of the most famous missing child cases in U.S. history.

The three-judge panel ruled that a trial court judge had given jurors “manifestly inaccurate” guidance regarding a confession Hernandez made before he had been advised of his Miranda rights. Jurors asked whether, if they decided the first confession was involuntary, that meant they should disregard two videotaped confessions that came afterward.

The trial judge said “the answer is no” and offered no further explanation.

The appellate judges, in their opinion, said that by doing so, “the state trial court contradicted clearly established federal law.” They threw out Hernandez’s conviction and ordered that he be released or retried. He is now 64 years old and has served 13 years of a 25-years-to-life sentence in a case that has haunted New York City for decades.

The body of the 51-page decision echoed stories published by ProPublica starting in 2013, before Hernandez was convicted, that raised questions about the veracity and legality of his confessions.

We reported that Hernandez met many of the criteria of a person prone to making false confessions, a growing phenomenon and leading cause of wrongful conviction. We also discovered that Hernandez’s statements to law enforcement and others over the years were inconsistent and did not match the known facts of the case.

On the morning of May 29, 1979, Patz was allowed to walk alone to his school bus stop two blocks away and then vanished. His disappearance ignited national concern around missing children, as he became one of the first “milk carton kids” and his image was plastered across New York City.

A massive search ensued, and law enforcement spent thousands of hours looking for him: Divers plunged into the East River searching for his remains following a tip from a psychic. Leads were chased as far as Israel. But no arrests were made. No charges brought.

In 2012, New York police and the FBI suddenly and very visibly took action on another lead, digging up the basement of a workshop near the Patz family home used by a carpenter who knew Etan and was briefly considered a suspect.

Nothing came of the dig, but the surge of media attention prompted one of Hernandez’s relatives to call police with a tip about rumors that he had a role in the disappearance of Patz.

New York police officers arrived at Hernandez’s home in New Jersey on the morning of May 23, 2012, and brought him to a local prosecutor’s office to question him. In the ensuing hours, Hernandez asked several times to go home, said the officers were trying to trick him, sobbed, clutched at his stomach, lay on the floor in a fetal position, had a fentanyl patch placed on his chest to treat his chronic pain, and mentioned his mental illness diagnoses. After more than six hours, he told officers that he “did it.”

He said he offered Patz a soda to lure him down into the basement of a bodega where he was working. He said he choked the boy, placed the body in a garbage bag, put the bag in a box and left it around the corner in broad daylight.

It wasn’t until after that confession that the officers read Hernandez his rights. They then had him repeat his statement in two video-recorded interviews over the next 24 hours. The stories he told contained several inconsistencies.

The federal court found that the trial court judge’s instruction to the jury about the confessions was “manifestly inaccurate,” that the jury should have been given more thorough instructions and that it could in fact disregard the recorded confessions.

The jury, which had asked about the un-Mirandized confession on the second of nine days of deliberations, was “clearly grappling with what weight, if any, to give to the confessions,” the appeals court wrote.

ProPublica covered the early phases of the case against Hernandez extensively, interviewing the people to whom he supposedly confessed over the years and speaking with a variety of legal and psychological experts about how police tactics can induce false confessions.

We found early on that Hernandez’s previous claims of having harmed a child not only conflicted with each other but bore little resemblance to the details of his confession to police. Once, for example, he said that he had killed a Black child. Patz was white.

We also learned that the bodega Hernandez was working out of had become a kind of police hub for the officers searching for Patz. Hernandez said in one of his confessions that he tossed the boy’s book bag behind a refrigerator there. It was never found.

Experts told us that a handful of factors are often at play in producing false confessions and that Hernandez’s situation contained many of them: He had low IQ, had a history of mental illness, and confessed to a high-profile crime where many of the details were widely known over the course of an intense, long interrogation.

The judges, in their decision, took note of many of these same characteristics, which, in their view, made it all the more important for the jury to have proper instructions to evaluate the confessions.

ProPublica also highlighted how the trial judge, Maxwell Wiley, held a hearing early in the proceedings to determine for himself whether Hernandez was properly informed of his rights and if he had the capacity to meaningfully waive them. He decided that the confession could be used. Later, Wiley, a former Manhattan prosecutor, limited the questions that could be asked about it and kept some subsequent hearings on the matter secret, drawing fire from several news organizations. Wiley, who is now retired, did not respond to calls for comment.

In an email, Cyrus Vance Jr., who handled the case against Hernandez as Manhattan district attorney, said it was “exceptionally challenging given the passage of time but also very strong.”

He said the recent decision came as a surprise, as other appellate courts had reviewed and sustained the confession and verdict.

“Clearly, the jury heard substantial expert testimony from both the prosecution and the defense, and considered both and the legal instructions by the court during deliberations and before the verdict,” he said, adding that he continues to believe Hernandez is guilty and that his “thoughts are with the Patz family and with Etan.”

Now Vance’s successor, Alvin Bragg, will have to decide whether to retry Hernandez for the third time. The first of his two trials ended in a hung jury.

In a statement from Bragg’s office, a spokesperson said only: “We are reviewing the decision.”


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Joaquin Sapien.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/appeals-court-overturns-murder-and-kidnapping-conviction-in-etan-patz-disappearance/feed/ 0 546572
How Israel became the symbol of Brazil’s Evangelical and far-right movements https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/how-israel-became-the-symbol-of-brazils-evangelical-and-far-right-movements/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/how-israel-became-the-symbol-of-brazils-evangelical-and-far-right-movements/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 20:21:19 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335824 Despite the far right's embrace of Israel and the United States, the majority of Brazilians are standing against Israel's attack on Gaza and ethnic cleansing of Palestinians.]]>

Support for Israel’s genocidal slaughter of Palestinians has become a critical political dividing line, not just in the United States, but in countries around the globe. At a recent pro-Donald Trump rally in São Paulo, Brazil, for instance, a protester waving an Israeli flag fought with a man in a Palestinian shirt. In this on-the-ground report, Brazil-based journalist Michael Fox shows how Israel’s US-backed war on Gaza and ethnic cleansing of Palestinians is playing out in South America’s largest country.

Additional resources:

Filming / Post-Production: Michael Fox

Transcript

Michael Fox [Narration]: This is a pro-Donald Trump rally on Avenida Paulista in São Paulo, Brazil. It’s an example of how Israel’s US-backed war on Gaza is playing out in South America’s largest country: the left staunchly in defense of Palestine, the far-right defending Israel and the United States. Both sides have become symbols for their separate causes inside Brazil…

Mauricio Santoro, Political Scientist: In Brazilian domestic politics, people are becoming more identified with Israel or with Palestinian, with the Arab political movements. And it’s more or less a right-left wing fight.

So conservative politicians in Brazil nowadays, they appear in public with Israeli flags of Israeli T-shirts, because Israel is very important to the Brazilian evangelicals, and we’re talking about 30% of the Brazilian population. It’s a very important political group for the presidential election next year. And on the left, the more traditional view is that Brazil should support Palestine.

Michael Fox [Narration]: In mid June thousands of people hit the streets of Sao Paulo in defense of Palestine and in opposition to Israel’s inhumane war on Gaza.

Just days later, evangelicals held the massive March for Jesus, on the same Paulista Avenue. Countless people wore Israeli flags. Among them was Sao Paulo state governor Tarcisio Genro. He is also the most likely conservative candidate to run for the Brazilian presidency next year.

It did not go over well in the country’s Arab community. Brazil has the largest population of people descended from the Middle East in all of Latin America.

Márcio França, Brazilian Minister of Entrepreneurship: The governor of São Paulo humiliated the entire Arab community yesterday. Syrians. Lebanese. We’re talking about millions of people. This is a grave mistake, which has nothing to do with the war. São Paulo is a Brazilian state.

Michael Fox [Narration]: The numbers of evangelicals in Brazil have been rising almost exponentially in recent years. They were a huge force in the election of former far-right president Jair Bolsonaro. And they’re playing an increasingly prominent role in far-right politics in Brazil. For them, the Israeli flag is a symbol. It was front and center at last year’s CPAC Brasil conference.

Jose Fabio Faustino, Devout Evangelical: This Israeli flag… We are from a country, Brazil, that is more than 80%, more than 90% Christian. And the word of God, which is the Bible, says that I will bless those who bless you. So we use the Israeli flag because we bless Israel. We believe that is the Holy Land. That they are the Lord’s chosen people. And we are descended from the olive tree. And we love Israel.

Michael Fox [Narration]: Brazilian Middle East analyst Monique Goldfeld says that in Brazil, the Israel-Palestine conflict has really become a question of internal politics over the last 10 years. 

Monique Sochaczweski Goldfeld, Senior Fellow, Brazilian International Relations Center: We have a political right that is closely linked to evangelical groups that have appropriated an image of Israel that doesn’t necessarily reflect the reality of Israel. I lived in Israel long enough to believe it’s quite different. But they’re using its symbols… The Star of David, the Israeli flag, and political demonstrations. And this has become associated with Jair Bolsonaro.

Michael Fox [Narration]: Former Brazilian president Jair Bolsonaro is the face of the far-right movement in Brazil. He’s Catholic, but he has deep ties to evangelicals. His wife is devout. While in office, Bolsonaro boasted of opening up a new era of relations with Israel. He traveled there, met with Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, and opened up an office for Brazilian trade in Jerusalem.

Bolsonaro, however, is now wearing an ankle bracelet. He’s accused of attempting to orchestrate a coup to remain in power, and is currently standing trial in Brazil. U.S. president Donald Trump responded in defense of his ally, slapping Brazil with 50% tariffs for its lawsuit against Bolsonaro. 

In a shocking partisan attack on Brazil’s independent judicial system, U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio has stripped U.S. visas from the eight Supreme Court justices the United States believes are antagonistic to Bolsonaro. Rubio left Bolsonaro’s allies on the court untouched. 

Meanwhile, many Brazilians have been marching in the streets against the United States, Donald Trump and in defense of Palestine.

Monique Sochaczweski Goldfeld, Middle-East Analyst: Above all, since the war in Gaza, but even before that. It was very common to see keffiyeh or the Palestinian flag at left-wing demonstrations.”

Barbara Sinedino, Rio de Janeiro State Union of Professional Educators: They are annihilating a people through the use of force. Today the Gaza Strip is a humanitarian calamity, because of the Israeli state, which was always supported by U.S. imperialism. But now, it’s even worse. The Trump administration has just opened it all up. Trump wants to make a luxury resort out of the Gaza Strip and he wants to kill the people. He wants to destroy the Palestinian people. So we are here, standing up in the streets.

We need to break political, economic, military relations with Israel. We have to break diplomatic, cultural and sporting relations with Israel. We did this in the era of Apartheid in South Africa and the international blockade was really important in ending apartheid.

Michael Fox [Narration]: President Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva hasn’t broken relations with Israel. But ties between the two countries are at a low. Lula has repeatedly condemned the violence in Palestine.

SOT9: Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva, Brazilian President [CLIP]: Absolutely nothing justifies the terrorist actions perpetrated by Hamas. But we cannot remain indifferent to the genocide perpetrated by Israel in Gaza, the indiscriminate killing of innocent civilians, and the use of starvation as a weapon of war. The solution to this conflict will only be possible with the end of the Israeli occupation and the establishment of a sovereign Palestinian state within the 1967 borders.

Michael Fox [Narration]: Analyst Monique Goldfeld explains how Israel’s war on Gaza is shaping domestic Brazilian politics, similar to the United States… Support for Israel or Palestine lines up along political lines. There’s a powerful evangelical lobby pushing a pro-Israel agenda.

But there are many differences. The number of Brazilians descended from the Middle East is three times larger than in the U.S. And the Jewish population is tiny. 

Monique Sochaczweski Goldfeld: The United States has 300 million people, and 6 million Jews. Brazil has 200 million inhabitants, and 120,000 Jews. It’s a very small community and it’s a community that doesn’t have a lot of political weight, although there are some Brazilian politicians, who are Jewish who are very prominent.

Michael Fox [Narration]: But far beyond the Jewish community… for evangelicals and the country’s far-right, Israel has become a symbol for Jesus, God, religious devotion, and the evangelical movement.

[CLIP]
Reporter: Why are you wearing the Israeli flag?
Protester: Because we are Christians, just like Israel.

Michael Fox [Narration]: While the Left is waving the flag for the Palestinian cause. In a June poll, over half of Brazilians had a disfavorable opinion of Israel. The same month, activists held the largest marches in defense of Palestine that Brazil had ever seen. Tens of thousands in the streets. They say they will not be silent. The situation in Gaza is too dire. The suffering is too great. The thousands of innocent deaths… too many. 

While Brazil has long defended the right of both Israel and Palestine to exist… that does not mean the country will be silent over Israel’s violence in Gaza. Brazil recently announced plans to join the genocide case against Israel in the International Court of Justice. It’s a sign of Brazil’s support for Palestine, both in and outside the government. 

Despite the far-right’s embrace of Israel and the United States, the majority of Brazilians are standing against Israel’s attack on Gaza and the on-going occupation. They are standing in defense of Palestine.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/how-israel-became-the-symbol-of-brazils-evangelical-and-far-right-movements/feed/ 0 546551
AIPAC May Already Be Targeting These Politicians In the Midterms #politics https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/aipac-may-already-be-targeting-these-politicians-in-the-midterms-politics/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/aipac-may-already-be-targeting-these-politicians-in-the-midterms-politics/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 20:05:24 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=78b7531b4b812046441ffb79a5354590
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/aipac-may-already-be-targeting-these-politicians-in-the-midterms-politics/feed/ 0 546549
Brazil’s far right embraces the Israeli flag https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/brazils-far-right-embraces-the-israeli-flag/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/brazils-far-right-embraces-the-israeli-flag/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 19:58:15 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a6f337cb7e70f686bcb8f2cedf8427dc
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/brazils-far-right-embraces-the-israeli-flag/feed/ 0 546560
America is built on prison labor. When will the labor movement defend prisoners? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/america-is-built-on-prison-labor-when-will-the-labor-movement-defend-prisoners-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/america-is-built-on-prison-labor-when-will-the-labor-movement-defend-prisoners-2/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 19:41:53 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335817 “Incarcerated workers are a part of the working class,” award-winning journalist Kim Kelly says. And we are “not telling the real history of labor in this country if [we’re] not focusing on the organizing efforts and the labor of people who are in prison.”]]>

Incarcerated people in the US are routinely forced to work for low pay or no pay, while state governments are saving billions of dollars—and private corporations are making billions of dollars—exploiting the slave labor of prisoners. And yet, incarcerated workers have been largely excluded from the ranks of workers the public in general, and organized labor specifically, cares about. What will it take for unions and union members to embrace incarcerated workers as part of the labor movement? In this episode of Rattling the Bars, Mansa Musa explores the history of labor exploitation and labor organizing in America’s prison system.

Guests:

Producer / Videographer / Post-Production: Cameron Granadino

Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Mansa Musa:

Welcome to this edition of Rattling the Bars. I’m your host, Mansa Musa. According to the Bureau of Justice Statistics, around 60% of formerly incarcerated people struggle with unemployment. The ACLU has reported that there are over 800,000 incarcerated workers in state prisons. This does not include jails and detention center in the US. People are exploited for their labor, either working to maintain the prison, or reduce commodities for low pay, or no pay. In contrast, the state saves billions, and multinational corporations make billions. This episode of Rattling the Bars will explore these relations with one of the labor organizers of the year for Indy’s Times Magazine, Katherine Passley, a grad school organizer and co-director of Beyond the Bars in Miami, Florida. Since the Covid-19 pandemic, Katherine has ran successful campaigns in Florida prison system to lower the cause of phone calls and assist formerly incarcerated people in obtaining employment. Her efforts have saved millions of dollars for loved ones of incarcerated people.

Katherine Passley:

We managed to pass free phone calls inside of our jails, and not just free phone calls, but we wanted everyone to have tablets so that way they have unrestricted access to calling their family members, access to the libraries. We ended up getting pushback from our commissioners because we wanted movies for them. Like, come on now.

Mansa Musa:

And in the later segment, we will speak with author Kim Kelly about her book, Fight Like Hell, which brings to the forefront workers who have generally been left out of the history and imagination of the labor struggle.

Kim Kelly:

I’ve been heartened to see labor unions, some of the unions whose members have been trapped in these drags, speaking up for farm workers, for grad student workers, for people that are just being disappeared saying, “You can’t do that to our members.” There are people.

Mansa Musa:

But first, my conversation with Katherine Passley. Welcome, Katherine.

Katherine Passley:

Thank you so much, Mansa Musa. It’s amazing to be here.

Mansa Musa:

And I open up by acknowledging that you was Labor Organizer of the year. How did you feel about that? How did you receive that?

Katherine Passley:

I mean, I’m just grateful to all the folks that allow me to be a leader in their space and developing leaders as well. So, it came as such a joy, but also bittersweet, because it’s just like, we’re just scratching the surface, there’s so much left to do.

Mansa Musa:

The reality is that when our peers acknowledge our work, our work is the reflection of our work, and it’s a reflection of how we doing our work that get us these accolades, these boots on the ground. This ain’t you wrote a poem, or you wrote an essay. This is labor. So thank you for your contribution.

Let’s talk about how do you look at the correlation between the prison movement, labor, and social conditions that exist in society today?

Katherine Passley:

Yeah, I think it’s really interesting to know, this system is working exactly as it’s designed to do. When we think about converse leasing to what we’re dealing with now with modern day slavery, and that clause in the 13th Amendment that allows for people to become slaves once they’ve been convicted of a crime. And even folks that haven’t been convicted of a crime. Right now in Florida, in my city, in Miami, 60% of our jails haven’t even been to pretrial yet, they’re in pretrial. And they’re the ones that are the trustees that are giving out the place, that are doing all of this cleaning the jail and all of this labor for free, and they’re still innocent of what they’re being accused of. So, we understand jail to jail and prisons to be a form of labor control. They’re incarcerating surplus labor, for anyone that is politically attuned, understand, this is also a way to cheapen labor. The moment you get out, your labor isn’t valued as much because of your record.

So now you’re forced into temp industries, you’re forced into accepting minimum wage. Your disadvantages are similar to our brothers and sisters that are immigrants. And as a child of immigrant parents, my father who’s currently incarcerated, I understand that when we talk about abolition, we need to talk about labor. We need to talk about that intersection. And also, we need to bring to the forefront the fact that most of the struggles for folks that have been inside, and out, when we think about Attica, the revolt, we’re talking about people that were fighting for better working conditions. It was always about labor, and our time. The Montgomery Bus Boycott was also like, “These corporations are exploiting us. Let’s attack their money.”

So, it is always going to be about how we can take back our power from the current political structure, and the current economic structure. So it’s like, how do we fight capitalism, basically? So that’s what we’ve been doing here at Beyond the Bars, is trying to bridge these two movements, bridge the abolition movement with the labor movement. And there’s so many challenges, right? Because if you are convicted of a crime, you also can’t hold union leadership for 13 years and have legal standing. So it’s just like, okay, we want unions, but our voices can’t be represented in unions because of our record, but we know that that’s the only way for us to get upward mobility. And so it’s like, how do we get unions to now fight for our interests, knowing that that’s also in the best interest of unions that need density. They need us as well in order to… So it’s really marrying these two self-interests to get to that class union that we need. We need all of us together.

Mansa Musa:

Right. For the most part. Your major unions don’t look at prisons as an entity when it comes to labor movement or union. Do you have a view on that?

Katherine Passley:

Yeah. I think a good chunk of that is education. We need to educate and bring our union brothers and sisters into the mix to understand that historically temp workers, prison labor, like you’re mentioning cheap labor, has been used to kind of bust union strikes. So it’s just like there’s that tension of like, oh, these people have been used against us for so long that there isn’t this realization that, well, what would it look like if we were to bring those people into the union so that they can’t bust these union efforts?

So I think it’s going to take some creativity, and just the will to actually bring in our incarcerated brothers and sisters into the union fold in ways that just hasn’t been done before. And I think it’s hard for people to reckon with something that they haven’t experienced, or haven’t even tried. And I think we have the conditions now, and that are getting worse, where it’s just like, “We need to.”

Mansa Musa:

Right. And we look at the latest assault on labor workers from this government, and we recognize that in a hundred days, this government been in existence for a hundred days, in a hundred days they have managed to take people’s jobs, force people out of work, they decimated the middle class. Now most people got PhDs and certain skill set, they’re trying to get jobs at basically anywhere. My question here is, how do we make the connection between that right there and the fact that on top of that people are going to be released, and going to be put in the same pot competing for jobs with other workers, and are unskilled? How do you look at that?

Katherine Passley:

That is quite the question, because it’s just like when we talk about competition within the working class, the reality is it’s like, this many folks at the top that are making these rules and making these jobs, and then there’s thousands, millions at this point, of job opportunities for folks. And so it is just like, we really have to fight for not just any kind of job, but it’s just like, how do we shift who’s making the amount of money? And the reality is these heads of these corporations are making billions of dollars, millions of dollars, and then saying, “Okay, you are in competition with that person because that person is an immigrant and they’re trying to take your 725 job.”

So it’s just like we need to actually know who the actual culprit is. And this is why I say union is important, because bargaining is important. So it’s like, when folks come out, it’s just like, how do we fight for good jobs? And folks that are currently unemployed, all of folks that are looking for jobs, it’s not that there aren’t jobs available, it’s just that there aren’t good jobs that pay living wages. And it’s not to the fault of the working class. It’s really to the fault of the ruling class, the capitalist class, that are putting profit above all things. And it’s just like, well, we actually need this competition, because we want you guys to keep fighting amongst yourselves, versus actually turning and trying to fight us for better working conditions, and for better pay, and for livable wages, and for all of these things that are due to us if we were able to get together and actually fight for them.

So I think, if anything, we all need to strengthen our organizing skills, and bring in our folks, because it just doesn’t make sense for us to fight each other for what these bad bosses say we deserve. I think we need to start coming together and fighting for better jobs, better conditions. And we can get it. If we fight for it, we can get it.

Mansa Musa:

In March, I went to the University of Massachusetts Amherst to speak on a panel after a screening of the film Strike, with the filmmaker and one of the elder revolutionaries in the movie, Bobby Dellelo. Strike was a film and a documentary about how California prisoners struck using the hunger strike as a means to get the solitary confinement as it was being used in California prisons to become no longer used.

JoeBill Muñoz:

One of, I think, the dynamic things about the moment in time that we’re in, that the film really brings to light, but it’s oftentimes overlooked, is really the past 15, 20 years has been a real dynamic moment of prison struggle, beginning with a statewide prison strike that was called in Georgia back in the mid-2000s onto several rounds of national prison strikes that have been called really by different sensible organizations. We’ve seen really a heightened level of strikes and other forms of collective action behind bars. And the Pelican Bay hunger strike is kind of a signal example of that, but it’s unique in a lot of ways in that many of those strikes have also been work stoppages. They’ve been strikes where folks have refused to leave their cells.

Mansa Musa:

General practicing prison. Once you call a collective action and it’s understood that’s what it’s going to be, there’s consequences for calls in the picket line. There’s consequences, because you’re not arbitrarily calling an action saying, “Oh, oh, we want to call the strike because we want to enjoy it.” The issue that we calling this strike about is life and death. So if you cross this picket line, then you’re saying you with the enemy. And it’s understood, and it’s not a matter of everybody, people will be running around like, you cross the picket line like, no, it’s an understanding that the conditions are so bad that it’s behoove you to understand this, that people dying in the medical department, the garbage we’re being served, we ain’t making parole, we’re not getting out here, and we’re trying to get this changed. So we are saying the peaceful resolution for this is, don’t go eat.

Bobby Dellelo:

What struck me was the attitude that I’m dying here, so it don’t matter what I do. And I’ve escaped three times with a bunch of almost, and each time that I went over that wall, I took my life in my hands and said, “I’m going to be free, or I’m going to be dead, but I ain’t living like this rat hole.”

JoeBill Muñoz:

This is our 75th screening, in-person screening, which has been amazing. The film came out last April at a film festival, and then since then you make a film and you’re like, “Man, I hope my parents show up to watch it.” But the way it’s been embraced by folks of all stripes, we’ve been in churches, we’ve been in film festivals, we had the opportunity to take the film into Sandpoint in state prison and screen it there, into juvenile detention centers in California. And that work is just expanding.

Mansa Musa:

I highly recommend that you review this documentary and make your own determination on how effective this strike was, but more importantly, how simple it was to organize and get something done when the problem seemed insurmountable.

Recently, I sat down with labor journalist Kim Kelly, author of the book Fight Like Hell. I spoke with Kim about her chapter on incarcerated workers and other workers who I generally undermined as organizers and leaders in the labor movement. In this segment, I explore how the prisoner rights movement and class struggle connects as a social issue. You took the position that in your book primarily about labor, that you going to specifically put a section there about the prisoners, but more importantly about the prisoners, and you looking at them as workers. Why was that? Why did you see the need to do that?

Kim Kelly:

Because for some reason that I don’t really understand, not that many other people who’ve written labor books have. It makes the most sense in the world to me. Of course, if we’re going to talk about not only workers, people performing labor, my book focuses on marginalized workers, vulnerable workers, workers who have not been given the respect and the treatment they deserve throughout the centuries. Of course, I would write about incarcerated workers. They’re part of the movement, they’re part of the working class, they’re the most vulnerable population of workers we have. And it always sort of rankled me that I didn’t see that expressed in a lot of the writing about labor, and the books about labor that I was reading.

And of course, there’s some people like Dan Berger, for one, has done a lot of incredible work. Victoria Law too, incredible work talking about incarcerated workers. But it seemed like incarcerated workers in prison, that whole subject was kind of kept in its own little bucket, much like how we see, I think there’s this impulse to silo out different struggles, like women’s rights, and queer and trans rights, and labor rights, and racial justice, and prison issues. But they’re all connected, because sometimes the same person is experiencing all of those struggles at once.

And so when I got the opportunity to write this book and to do it the way I wanted, I was like, okay, of course I’m going to write about auto workers, and farm workers, and so many of the people that are in the book, but I’m also going to specifically make sure that I’m able to include people like disabled workers, who are also kind of siloed out in a complicated situation, and sex workers who are criminalized, who are also dealing with all these different layers of oppression. And incarcerated workers, because not only are they part of the working class that doesn’t get their due and doesn’t, I feel, get the level of solidarity and support that other workers do, it’s also just not telling the real history of labor in this country if you’re not focusing on the organizing efforts and the labor of people who are in prison. That’s just not the whole story.

Mansa Musa:

And you know what? I want you to unpack that, because you’re making a nice observation on how we look at labor movement. But more importantly, unpack why you think that we don’t have that, we don’t have a general attitude about labor. When we say union, we say AFL-CIO, we say certain, it’s the hierarchy, the union hierarchy. When we say labor, we got a certain attitude on what that institution look like. But as you just said, we got sex workers, you got disabled workers, you got, like before the United Farm Workers became unionized they call them migrant workers. And then when they became unionized, they got their just due in terms of who they were, and they were. Why do you think that in this country, because it’s in this country in particular, why do you think that in this country we had this tendency to put things inside, mainly around labor?

Kim Kelly:

So, I think there’s a lot of reasons, some more understandable than others. First, I think a lot of folks in this country just don’t know that much about the labor movement in general, right? Unless they’re part of a union, part of a union family, unless they go out and seek that information. Because as much as it’s this crucial aspect of our lives, of our society, union density, only about, I think it’s down to 10% of workers are in a union in this country, down from much higher percentages in previous decades. So, already there’s fewer people that have real life experience with unions.

And then, how many of them are reading history books, are looking into the political and cultural aspects of the movement? How many people are going to their middle school, or their high school, and learning about this history? Not that many. Even when I was getting interested in it as I was organizing with my first union, I come from a union family. I’m third generation. And even I, and I am a big history nerd, even I didn’t really know that much about it until I went looking for it. And then I kind of had to take what I could get, because I wasn’t approaching it in an academic sense. They’re obviously labor historians, and researchers, academics. That’s a whole different ball game. They know more than I ever will. But there’s only so many of them.

All that to say, I feel like the labor movement is just not as well known in general. And then on top of that, the labor movement itself, especially when we’re talking about these bigger bureaucratic kind of entities like the AFL-CEO, and its predecessor, the AFL, sometimes they were perpetuating some of this exclusion, this oppression. I mean, for a very, very, very long time. Unions were segregated in this country. Black workers were not able to join unions. And there have been these threads of exclusion going back to the 1800s when the AFL supported the Chinese Exclusion Act, they intentionally decided they didn’t want to organize Latino workers. Women weren’t allowed to unionize for a very long time. There’s all these different aspects of the labor movement that are exclusionary. So that’s also kind of part of the stories that are told.

So now when you see a politician going on, whatever, news, and saying, “Oh, the working class,” they mean a guy like my dad: a white guy with a beard and a hard hat, and bad political opinions. They don’t see someone like you or someone like me as part of the working class, as part of labor. Even though if you look at the actual data and the actual reality, the person who is most likely to be a union worker in this country is a black woman who works in healthcare or the service industry. That’s what the present of future looks like. And that’s what the past has looked like too.

When I was writing the book, and even in just the other work I’ve done, I was always so interested in finding out those stories of the people that didn’t fit that stereotype, that easy stereotype, because that’s where the real stuff was happening. Back in 1866, I believe, when the Washerwomen of Jackson, one year after emancipation, a group of black washerwomen in the south, they organized the first labor organization in Mississippi. That is labor history, and that’s black history, and that’s women’s history. And that’s just one story. How many other stories are like that? I packed a bunch of them in the book, but there’s so many more out there. And if you want to understand labor in this country, you have to look below the surface, because otherwise you’re just not going to get the real story, and you’re going to not care as much about the people that have done all the work.

Mansa Musa:

How did you see that, the impact that had on the prison populations throughout the country? Because you cite some marquee cases. And I remember, we attempted Eddie Conway, we attempted to unionize in the Maryland system. And all this came from the attempts that was being made throughout the country.

Kim Kelly:

Yeah. As you know, California is kind of where it kicked off in Folsom with the PU, Prisoners Union. So obviously, prisons have been a site of rebellion, and resistance, and dissent organizing since people started being thrown into these places. But it was really in the 1970s when organizing just kicked off in a big way. Like I said, California, it kind of lit that spark with this push to unionize, to push for better working conditions and higher wages at all, right? But better wages as workers. And as you know, it spread throughout the country. And there was just this really dynamic and widespread effort, and an amount of interest around unionizing specifically. And there were in a variety of institutions across the country, incarcerated workers organized their own unions. And this was happening at the same time that a ton of people organized around black power, and brown power. Outside the walls, there was women’s lib; there were the first stirrings of the liberation movement; there was Vietnam, anti-war movement. There’s all these movements happening at the same time.

And of course, people, even if they’re inside, they still know what’s happening outside. Just seeing the way that organizers connected those issues inside and outside, I mean, one of the most consequential rebellions in prison history, Attica, when I was researching this, I learned that the year prior to that rebellion, there had been a strike in the machine shop of that facility that was led by Jorge Nieves, who was a brown panther. And throughout that organizing, that organizing takes a while. A place doesn’t just erupt. Throughout the organizing those conversations about the way they’re treated, the working conditions that are happening in that machine shop, it seems pretty clear that, cause and effect, that first strike led to a much bigger rebellion. And that’s a little piece of the history that I think is lesser known, that a strike led to this kind of monumental event. And it just makes you wonder how many other labor-focused, work-focused bits of organizing, bits of rebellion, led to these bigger events.

Mansa Musa:

Right. Rattling the Bars was intentional about showing the labor movement and its relationship to the prison industrial complex. But more importantly, we were intentional in bringing real life people into this space. People that are in this movement, people that are organizing, people that are moving around the country trying to abolish the prison industrial complex as we know it, by removing the 13th Amendment is one of the ways they’re trying to do it. But we’ve seen from these segments how labor, the prison industrial complex, prisoners has come together to eradicate the prison industrial complex and the 13th Amendment.

We ask that you look at these segments and make your determination on how you think this reporting was, how important this information was, and more importantly, what views you had on expanding or offering your critique on what we can do to improve this reporting. We ask that you continue to support the real news in Rattling the Bars, because guess what? After all, we are the Real News.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Mansa Musa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/america-is-built-on-prison-labor-when-will-the-labor-movement-defend-prisoners-2/feed/ 0 546553
America is built on prison labor. When will the labor movement defend prisoners? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/america-is-built-on-prison-labor-when-will-the-labor-movement-defend-prisoners/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/america-is-built-on-prison-labor-when-will-the-labor-movement-defend-prisoners/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 19:07:20 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=61d76c6f3019f6a45a340d6843dbcc2a
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/america-is-built-on-prison-labor-when-will-the-labor-movement-defend-prisoners/feed/ 0 546542
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 28, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-28-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-28-2025/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=1447205f55fc9c013651160c7169e598 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 28, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-28-2025/feed/ 0 546594
The Project Censored Newsletter—July 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-project-censored-newsletter-july-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-project-censored-newsletter-july-2025/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 17:43:27 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46750 Project Censored in the World Many members of Project Censored’s team attended the 2025 meetings of the Union for Democratic Communications, held at the University of Washington, Tacoma, from June 19 to June 22. Project Censored was represented by Allison Butler, Reagan Haynie, Nolan Higdon, Kate Horgan, Mickey Huff, Steve…

The post The Project Censored Newsletter—July 2025 appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-project-censored-newsletter-july-2025/feed/ 0 546535
Gaza journalist’s URGENT MESSAGE: ‘We need to eat! We need this war to stop!’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-journalists-urgent-message-we-need-to-eat-we-need-this-war-to-stop/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-journalists-urgent-message-we-need-to-eat-we-need-this-war-to-stop/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 16:10:09 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=c068646437af6bba16ec73001832969e
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-journalists-urgent-message-we-need-to-eat-we-need-this-war-to-stop/feed/ 0 546519
Gaza Flotilla Activist Slams "Israeli Piracy on the High Seas" After Aid Ship Seized in Int’l Waters https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-flotilla-activist-slams-israeli-piracy-on-the-high-seas-after-aid-ship-seized-in-intl-waters/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-flotilla-activist-slams-israeli-piracy-on-the-high-seas-after-aid-ship-seized-in-intl-waters/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 14:44:45 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d754714bc4aa3c258e1d0cf9ee62d3b8
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-flotilla-activist-slams-israeli-piracy-on-the-high-seas-after-aid-ship-seized-in-intl-waters/feed/ 0 546490
Ethiopia: Where Political Power Grows From the Barrel of a Gun https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/ethiopia-where-political-power-grows-from-the-barrel-of-a-gun/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/ethiopia-where-political-power-grows-from-the-barrel-of-a-gun/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 14:30:56 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160296 There is a brutal civil war being waged in Ethiopia where political power grows from the barrel of a gun. On one side is the western backed corrupt, brutal gangster regime of Prime Minister Abiy Ahmed, he who was bestowed the Nobel Peace prize by the imperialists on the Nobel Committee in Norway On the […]

The post Ethiopia: Where Political Power Grows From the Barrel of a Gun first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
There is a brutal civil war being waged in Ethiopia where political power grows from the barrel of a gun. On one side is the western backed corrupt, brutal gangster regime of Prime Minister Abiy Ahmed, he who was bestowed the Nobel Peace prize by the imperialists on the Nobel Committee in Norway

On the other side, are three armed groups with the ethnic Amhara FANO/Patriots army at the forefront. Included is the former ruling class the Tigray Peoples Liberation Front (TPLF) and what’s left of its once powerful army, today pretty much holding coats in this conflict. The other armed group opposing the gangster Abiy Ahmed is the Oromo Liberation Army (OLA), not nearly as powerful or well lead as FANO but a threat nevertheless.

The Abiy gangster regime is backed by the west, to be counted on when it comes to supporting their puppets in Africa. Abiy is little more than the Mayor of the capital Addis Ababa having lost control of some 80% of the country. With the FANO fighters on one side and the OLA on the other side Abiy has only about a thirty mile radius between him and the loss of his capital city and, if he is lucky, an exile in his supporters capital Abu Dhabi (maybe Dubai?) in the United Arab Emirates (UAE).

The bankster criminal class in the west is continuing to back Abiy with a recent emergency grant of $260 million along side a “loan” for $1.5 billion as well a a “debt reduction” of $3.5 billion (Ethiopia has historically been the largest recipient of “debt reduction” in Africa). It seems even the banksters in the IMF have begun to realize they are backing a losing hand in Abiy Ahmed, admitting their western banksters investors are increasing skeptical about putting up more money to prop up another gangster regime in Africa on the verge of collapse.

And now we hear about another US/UN World Food Program “aid” scheme that will see the diversion of more millions of dollar$ of food from those millions of starving people in Ethiopia to the Ethiopian military of Abiy Ahmed. The same thing happened a few years ago until this scandal could no longer be covered up and this “aid” diversion scheme was “suspended”. Now the same scam has been restarted with the pious reassurances that those in charge have “learned their lesson” and “it wont happen again”.

FANO is on a roll militarily, steadily capturing territory around the capital Addis Ababa as the defeat of the Ethiopian Army under Abiy accelerates. In the last few weeks, maybe a couple of months, over 7,000 Ethiopian army troops, mainly from the Amhara ethnic group/nation, have surrendered to FANO with hundreds more surrendering almost daily. Some dozen generals from the Ethiopian Army, all Amhara, have either been “retired” or defected to FANO as PM Abiy grows increasingly paranoid of a coup de tat by those left in his inner circle of the army generals corp.

With the noose tightening around him Abiy’s days are numbered and its not if but when he makes a desperate dash for safety for exile in the UAE. Hopefully he will be captured and have to face justice for the genocidal crimes he has committed against the Ethiopian people.

Either way its seems that the once mighty Abyssinian Empire, what Ethiopia was known as up until the middle of the 20th century, is about to come apart at the seems. A prison house of nations, Abyssinia/Ethiopia has been Africa’s only indigenous empire, built on the conquest of its neighbors using western firearms provided mainly by the Italians. Machine guns against cavalry has an inevitable ending with the result being a particularly brutal colonial empire. The Oromo nation, the largest in Africa today numbering over 50 million with the second largest language in Africa was the main goal of the Abyssinian conquest, something they had failed to do for centuries until acquiring Italian machine guns and artillery.

The subsequent brutality of the Abyssinian subjugation of the Oromo’s should be recognized for what it was, a genocide, with an estimated 5 million Oromo’s dying as a result. The scale and sheer inhumanity of the Abyssinian subjugation of the Oromo’s remains equal if not surpassing the worst crimes of the western imperialists when they invaded and colonized Africa. When you hear names like Menelik and Haile Sellasie, heroes amongst many of those who have been deluded by historical fiction in the west, remember the Oromo genocide.

The Ethiopian empire is about to come apart at its seams with the birth of new nations with names like Oromia, Amhara, Tigray, Afar, Ogaden amongst others in the soon to be defunct Ethiopian prison house of nations.

Hopefully these newly independent nations will find enough common ground to establish a cooperative organization similar to the Sahel Alliance of Burkina Faso, Mali, and Niger.

A saying in the Horn of Africa is “all roads to peace run through Asmara, Eritrea” and the long, principled leadership role of the Eritrean Peoples Liberation Front, today’s Peoples Front for Democracy and Justice under the Lion of Africa, President Issias Aferwerki will help guide the newly independent nations that once composed the Ethiopian empire through the perilous times to come.

Behind the scenes President Issias has been preparing for this transition period from colonialism to independence with “unofficial official” spokespersons like Eritrean media star Awel Seid already providing guidance for what Horn of Africans should expect in the not to distant future.

Of course, the western bankster regimes are not going to sit idly by and watch their “policeman on the beat” in Ethiopia become a footnote in history for the Horn of Africa is to strategically critical to ignore, no matter the moronic programs the west will continue to promote. Western hegemony is being battered on all sides but they won’t go down without a fight so expect twists and turns in the coming months and years including all sort of lies and slander spewed against Eritrea as it begins to lead the transformation taking place from the Ethiopian empire to the birth of multiple new nations once imprisoned in Africa’s only indigenous empire, todays Ethiopia.

The post Ethiopia: Where Political Power Grows From the Barrel of a Gun first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Thomas C. Mountain.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/ethiopia-where-political-power-grows-from-the-barrel-of-a-gun/feed/ 0 546478
Gaza Flotilla Activist Slams “Israeli Piracy on the High Seas” After Aid Ship Seized in Int’l Waters https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-flotilla-activist-slams-israeli-piracy-on-the-high-seas-after-aid-ship-seized-in-intl-waters-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-flotilla-activist-slams-israeli-piracy-on-the-high-seas-after-aid-ship-seized-in-intl-waters-2/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 12:28:40 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=7413a8e9d0493698c42a4167e2c46189 Seg2 handala wide 1

For the second time in as many months, Israel has raided a civilian ship in international waters to stop it from reaching Gaza to deliver much-needed humanitarian aid. The Handala was sailing toward the besieged Palestinian territory with baby formula, diapers, food and medicine on board when Israeli forces boarded it on Saturday and detained 21 crew and passengers. “Their blockade is, by all international standards, unlawful,” says Palestinian American human rights attorney Huwaida Arraf, who was among the activists on board and was just released from Israeli detention. She calls on the international community to hold Israel accountable and says the Freedom Flotilla Coalition will continue organizing aid ships to break the blockade of Gaza.

“Why is it that we had to be at sea in international waters, in a small boat, going to confront one of the most brutal militaries in the world? It is because … our countries are allowing Israel to deliberately starve Palestinians as part of this genocidal campaign that it has been carrying out,” says Arraf.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/gaza-flotilla-activist-slams-israeli-piracy-on-the-high-seas-after-aid-ship-seized-in-intl-waters-2/feed/ 0 546495
The FDA Is Cracking Down on an Indian Drugmaker Investigated by ProPublica Last Year https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-fda-is-cracking-down-on-an-indian-drugmaker-investigated-by-propublica-last-year/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-fda-is-cracking-down-on-an-indian-drugmaker-investigated-by-propublica-last-year/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/fda-letter-glenmark-pharmaceuticals by Patricia Callahan

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

The Food and Drug Administration is cracking down on a generic drugmaker that was the subject of a ProPublica investigation last year, citing problems with safety tests that delayed the recall of a medicine linked to deaths in the U.S.

In December, ProPublica reported that a Glenmark Pharmaceuticals factory in central India was responsible for an outsized share of recalls for pills that didn’t dissolve properly and could harm American patients. Among the string of recalls, federal regulators had determined that more than 50 million potassium chloride extended-release capsules sold in the U.S. could be deadly. Yet, federal drug inspectors at that point hadn’t set foot in the Madhya Pradesh factory for more than four years, ProPublica found.

Seven weeks after that story was published, FDA inspectors showed up at the plant and found serious problems. Glenmark subsequently recalled an additional two dozen medicines made there and sold to U.S. patients.

Now the FDA has sent Glenmark a warning letter, a disciplinary tool the regulator uses to lay out significant violations of federal requirements and demand changes. If Glenmark fails to fix any of the problems outlined, the FDA warned, it may bar drugs made at the factory from entering the U.S.

What’s more, the FDA pointed out that the company had made similar serious mistakes at three other manufacturing sites and acknowledged that those factories had been the subject of previous warning letters from the agency since 2019. The problems at one were so severe that federal regulators blocked drugs made there from being imported to Americans. ProPublica’s December investigation highlighted this pattern, noting that three of the five factories where Glenmark made drugs for the U.S. market in recent years had been in trouble with federal regulators. Despite that track record, the FDA — backlogged from the pandemic — waited five years before sending its inspectors back to the Madhya Pradesh plant.

In his July 11 warning letter, the director of the FDA’s Office of Manufacturing Quality wrote, “These repeated failures at multiple sites demonstrate that management oversight and control over the manufacture of drugs is inadequate.” (The agency made the letter publiclast week.)

“You should immediately and comprehensively assess your company’s global manufacturing operations to ensure that systems, processes, and the products manufactured conform to FDA requirements,” he added.

A spokesperson for the company said in a written statement: “Glenmark is actively engaging with the U.S. FDA and has initiated corrective actions to address the agency’s observations. Patient safety, product quality and regulatory compliance are foundational to how we operate.”

Citing ongoing litigation the company faces, she declined to comment further.

ProPublica has been investigating the FDA’s oversight of foreign factories that make generic drugs for the U.S. market.

Since last year, ProPublica repeatedly has asked the FDA why it didn’t send inspectors to the Glenmark factory sooner, given the outsized share of recalls and the company’s troubled track record at its other plants. The agency hasn’t answered the question. After the inspection found problems this year, an FDA spokesperson said the agency can only discuss potential or ongoing compliance matters with the company involved.

Among the most serious violations outlined in the FDA letter to Glenmark was the company’s failure to promptly test pills to ensure they dissolve properly during their normal shelf life, the subject of ProPublica’s investigation last year.

Companies hold on to samples of pills from batches sold to U.S. customers and test them periodically until they reach their expiration date. Medicines that don’t dissolve properly can cause perilous swings in dosing. This flaw is what made Glenmark’s potassium chloride pills potentially deadly since high potassium levels can stop the heart, according to the June 2024 recall notice.

Glenmark’s backlogged testing “was overdue by 3 months or longer for a large proportion of your samples,” the FDA wrote in the warning letter. The failure to perform these tests on time held up Glenmark’s discovery of defective pills and delayed the needed recalls, the agency said.

In multiple instances, the FDA found that it took 100 days from the time Glenmark pulled samples of potassium chloride for testing until the company learned the capsules had failed to dissolve correctly.

A delay in that recall could factor into a lawsuit that alleges Glenmark’s potassium chloride pills were responsible for the death last year of Mary Louise Cormier, a 91-year-old Maine woman. A letter alerting Cormier that her pills had been recalled arrived three weeks after she died. In court filings, Glenmark has denied responsibility for her death. The company stopped making the drug for U.S. patients.

Between July and December last year, Glenmark told the FDA that it had received reports of eight deaths in patients who took the recalled potassium chloride, federal records show. The reports, which companies must file so the FDA can monitor drug safety, contained so few details that ProPublica was unable to independently verify what happened in each case. In general, these adverse event reports reflect the opinions of those who filed them and don’t prove that the drug caused the harm, the FDA says. The agency didn’t mention these deaths in the warning letter.

The FDA lambasted Glenmark for failing to thoroughly investigate why pills made at its Madhya Pradesh factory weren’t dissolving properly. The agency listed possible reasons that Glenmark failed to consider, but FDA censors redacted so many passages — citing the protection of trade secrets and confidential business information — that it’s impossible to discern what could have gone wrong.

Citing the same confidentiality provision, the FDA kept secret the name of another Glenmark drug that the agency said failed these same tests. When asked why consumers shouldn’t be told which medication had the problem, the FDA didn’t answer.

More broadly, the FDA’s warning letter criticized Glenmark for failing to validate the tests it relies on to prove that its drugs have the identity, strength, quality and purity that they’re supposed to have.

“Without evaluating the validity of methods, you lack the basic assurance that your laboratory data accurately reflects drug product quality,” the FDA wrote.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Patricia Callahan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/the-fda-is-cracking-down-on-an-indian-drugmaker-investigated-by-propublica-last-year/feed/ 0 546467
The guerilla campaign to save a Texas prairie from ‘silent extinction’ https://grist.org/solutions/the-guerilla-campaign-to-save-a-texas-prairie-from-silent-extinction/ https://grist.org/solutions/the-guerilla-campaign-to-save-a-texas-prairie-from-silent-extinction/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670569 One sunny morning in early May, four high school boys stood on a flower-dappled prairie in southern Dallas holding shovels. On the ground before them stood a Texas blazing star, an imperiled member of the aster family. The oldest boy, a senior, made two putts on either side of the plant and was beginning to wedge it out when a police siren sounded. He paused, his foot on the blade. There were no signs or fences barring entry to this place. But it is — like 97 percent of the state — private property.  

“Hopefully that’s not for us,” he said.

The siren faded, and the teens — who attend an elite, all-boys prep school on the other side of town — got back to work. They are the most dedicated members of its prairie club, which finds them rising early on weekends to “rescue” rare plants from bulldozers and transfer them to restoration sites. Such unauthorized efforts have rattled some professional conservationists in the Dallas-Fort Worth metroplex; but in an era infused with climate anxiety, it offers a tangible way to make a difference — and a dose of adrenaline. “It’s like collecting Pokemons,” one said.

Two boys dig flowers out of a field
Laura Mallonee / Grist

a hand grasps a plant with roots and a bulb
A student holds up a plant “plug” dug from the prairie. It will be transplanted at a restoration site managed by students at St. Mark’s School of Dallas, 30 minutes north. Laura Mallonee / Grist Laura Mallonee / Grist

Max Yan (top, with shovel) and other members of the Blackland Prairie Restoration Crew at St. Mark’s School rescue plants at Coneflower Crest, a prairie in southern Dallas slated for demolition. Laura Mallonee / Grist

a closeup of two feet standing on top of a shovel digging out a flower
Laura Mallonee / Grist

Coneflower Crest — as the boys call this place, after the dusty pink flowers that bloom here — is a nearly 300-acre stretch of undeveloped land north of I-20 that they say constitutes the last large prairie in the county. But heavy machinery is expected to crush the majority of its flowers, making way for a self-billed sustainable development with hundreds of homes and businesses that promise to revitalize a neglected corner of Dallas. But even eco-friendly projects come at a cost: The city is trading an ecosystem that naturally mitigates the effects of climate change for more impervious sprawl that only exacerbates them. 

Blackland prairie once stretched 12 million acres in Texas from the Red River to San Antonio — an area twice the size of Vermont. Its limestone geology was formed by an ancient inland sea that enriched its soil, feeding more than 300 species of native grasses and forbes like big bluestem, lotus milkvetch, and devil’s bite.

coneflowers grow in tall grass
Narrow-leaved coneflowers dapple a prairie on a late spring morning in southern Dallas. Laura Mallonee / Grist

But since European colonization, agriculture and urban development have swallowed 99.9 percent of the prairie — and are still taking their fill. Last year, a solar farm claimed the majority of the state’s largest remnant, which spanned 2,100 acres near the border with Oklahoma. Over the past five years in Dallas County alone, more than 320 acres have succumbed to data centers, parking lots, high-rises, and warehouses with no coneflowers in sight. 

All that concrete increases flooding, pollution, aquifer depletion, urban heat island effects, and greenhouse gas emissions — the same problems prairies naturally alleviate, said Norma Fowler, a plant ecologist at the University of Texas at Austin. Long grasses slow rainfall, giving the ground more time to soak it up. Their roots spread in fine webs and reach a depth of 20 feet, producing humus-rich soil that holds water and releases it slowly, filtering out excess nutrients like nitrogen and phosphorus. Prairies also cool cities, temper the impact of wildfires (a fire on a prairie is easier to put out than one in a forested area), and sequester carbon — up to 1 ton per acre per year. It’s why biodiversity loss and climate change are inherently linked. “Everything we do for conservation is also mitigating the effects of climate change,” Fowler said.

Environmentalists have rallied to save area prairies since at least the 1970s, when one patrolled Pioneer — an 100-acre remnant off I-30 — with a shotgun. By the 1980s, development loomed, prompting naturalist Ken Steigman to start digging up plants. Steigman even used a sod-cutter to roll up ribbons of sod — bugs and all. “It’s like Noah’s Ark,” he said. “You want to save everything you can.”  

But the work has its ups and downs. Activists were relieved when development stalled at Pioneer. But in 2018, a native plant grower named Randy Johnson saw workers pulling cores for a new project. Johnson, 62, rode his minibike through Pioneer as a kid, but by his twenties, that youthful abandon gave way to wonderment. He tried and failed to convince the landowner to spare its most ecologically sensitive areas. “It’s depressing,” he said with a drawl. “[It’s] something you love, and every day you get in your car and see it being destroyed.” 

a man moves potted native plants on a table while a teen boy stands by
Native plant grower Randy Johnson sells seedlings during Native Plants and Prairies Day on May 3, 2025, at the Bath House Cultural Center at White Rock Lake in Dallas. Laura Mallonee / Grist

He had nearly given up hope when a lanky freshman named Akash Munshi wandered into his school’s glass greenhouse, where Johnson worked part-time, in 2019. Munshi was “hyper,” Johnson said, and extremely bright. His extended family are rice farmers in south India, and he wanted to learn how to grow food. But this interest gave way to native plants, and within a couple years, Munshi was as fluent in their Latin names as in their common ones. 

He started the school’s first prairie club his senior year to restore a stretch of bermuda grass along a bike path nearby. To source the seeds, he visited local prairies, including ones he found by scouring satellite imagery. He counted six high-quality sites fated for development, underscoring the need to also salvage plants. Within two years, all but one — Coneflower Crest — were under construction. 

“I didn’t realize how quickly I would lose them,” he said. “There were some sites where there was no sign of development, and I’d come back [the] next week, and the whole thing was scraped.” 

The destruction coincides with unprecedented biodiversity loss. An estimated 40 percent of all known plants are potentially threatened with extinction, and they are disappearing at a rate many magnitudes higher than they have on average historically — the result of both human activity and climate change. Those recently discovered — like glandular blazing star, an imperiled plant first described in 2001 that is only found in Texas — are even more likely to suffer extinction before scientists can understand their ecosystem role or potential application in medicine or agriculture. As the populations of at-risk plants shrink, their gene pools become less diverse, making them more vulnerable to collapse.  

“Each one of those that’s lost is threatening an already under-pressure system,” said Canaan Sutton, a botanist at the National Ecological Observatory Network. Invertebrates, some of which have unique relationships with specific host plants, lose their food and habitat. There are fewer caterpillars to feed the birds and fewer bees to pollinate blooms, including crops like Texas’s famed Fredericksburg peaches. 

Rescuing individual plants won’t save these historic ecosystems, but it can help prevent some species from undergoing “a silent extinction,” Sutton said. Though conservationists focus on collecting seeds, they aren’t always ripe when developers allow them on site. Some are still so poorly understood that no one knows how to germinate them, and others, like compass plants, take years to bloom. Keeping an individual alive helps bridge the gap, enabling a bumblebee to find its way to the pollen it depends on to survive. 

“What we’re in now is this perpetually shifting baseline of, ‘This is what we have, and this is as good as it gets,’” Sutton said. “Ultimately, people doing these rescues are trying to move that baseline back in the direction of the past and a more interconnected, natural world — even if that’s just [with] a handful of plants.”

The summer after his senior year, Munshi was leading a high school tour through another prairie destined to become a highrise. Stopping for a water break, he noticed a tiny yellow flower against a girl’s black shoe. “Oh shoot!” he said. “That’s dalea hallii!”

Commonly known as Hall’s prairie clover, this globally imperiled plant, listed as threatened by the state, grows nowhere else but chalky, south-facing slopes on limestone prairies, a subset of the blackland prairie where the bedrock surfaces, creating a unique microclimate where rare plants thrive. They face a unique risk, Sutton said: They survived the centuries because they were too rocky for the plow, but as developers seek more land to build on, that same rock now offers an ideal foundation for sprawl.  

At the time of Munshi’s discovery, less than 1,200 hall’s prairie clover were officially known to exist. He counted at least a hundred and shared his find on Instagram, where it caught the eye of a conservation botanist at the Botanical Research Institute of Texas, which banks obscure seeds. She used the organization’s heft to arrange an official rescue that October.  

The developer gave them three hours to dig up what they could. Wearing a straw hat shaped like a circumflex, Johnson showed 40 volunteers how to pry open the limestone with pickaxes, knives, sledgehammers, and pneumatic drills. Afterward, he hauled more than 200 daleas to the greenhouse in Forney that he now co-owns with Munshi. Johnson, whose long gray hair and narrowed eyes evoke something of a wizard, nursed the plants with a mycorrhizal fungi tea. A month later, he texted Sutton a picture of a flourishing dalea ready for transplant. “Check it out, dude!” he wrote.

A man leads a large group into the prairie
Botanist Canaan Sutton, in orange, gives a tour of a prairie at White Rock Lake in Dallas. The lake is home to 16 fragmented parcels of remnant prairie encompassing roughly 250 acres. Laura Mallonee / Grist

Despite this success, it wasn’t enough time to save the thousands of other plants at Penstemon Point. So, when Kay Hankins, a conservation botanist at BRIT, offered to contact the developer at Coneflower Crest, Munshi asked her not to, fearing they wouldn’t be given enough time. He and others have spent dozens of hours relocating thousands of plants from Coneflower Crest and other patches to the bike path 30 minutes north — casting trespassing worries aside as easily as the rocks their shovels sometimes hit. 

Munshi said no one has ever asked them to leave. Neither have the cops. Once, while he was at another prairie, a passerby suspected him of burying a body, and three police cars pulled up. When the officers saw the plants, they left, merely annoyed. “They don’t care,” Munshi said. “They’re literally about to scrape the entire site.” 

Johnson fears requesting permission could backfire. In Texas, plants deemed threatened or endangered by the state’s wildlife agency aren’t protected by law, but landowners who don’t want the hassle or liability may destroy them more quickly. “This is a war between us and the developers, and nobody’s calling uncle or throwing up no white flags,” he said. “You can get out of jail, you can post bail, but once the [plant] genetics are gone, they’re gone.”

But the approach vexes some in Texas’s native plant community who view permission as essential for “ethical” digs that promote trust with landowners and developers, eventually helping get more on board.  

“If all the experience developers have [with conservationists] is negative, we’ll always be initiating the dialogue from a disadvantaged position every single time,” said Kay Hankins, a botanist with BRIT’s Plant Conservation Team, which has participated in four other rescues since its inception in 2019. 

a large pot with a plant in it in a field with people digging
Students fill a bucket with plants from a prairie expected to be demolished. The rescued plants are covered in soil and kept moist until transplant. Laura Mallonee / Grist

Developer involvement could ensure that activists don’t inadvertently remove plants that grow outside construction boundaries, and more volunteers are willing to help if it doesn’t involve breaking a law. It also enhances the plants’ value for research and conservation, Hankins said, since reputable institutions, seed banks, and herbaria don’t accept plants collected without paperwork.

But it’s difficult to convince people of the long-term benefits when the few prairies that remain can quickly vanish. Developers aren’t easy to get a hold of, either. Ali Bocaum, who started the Central Texas Plant Rescuers in Austin in 2022, said one 1 of 10 respond. Some deny owning the land, though taking cookies to their offices helps. “They can’t ignore you when you’re there,” she said.  

Ashley Landry, who founded the Native Plant Rescue Project in Williamson County, north of Austin, in 2023, also plays “a long PR game” to gain access. She monitors building permits to watch for new development, then emails, snail mails, and drives by to try and catch landowners in person. In February, her team of volunteers succeeded in relocating 900 square feet of MoKan, the 30-acre “crown jewel” of central Texas prairies. Skid steers excised 56 sections, each as thick as a mattress, and pieced them like quilts at two nearby sites. If the plants survive, the method could be scaled.

“I just always feel so thankful to have seen these places before they’re gone,” said Landry. “It helps frame your understanding of what the landscape is supposed to look like.”

That sense of place isn’t easy to come by for the average kid in Dallas. A few prairie patches exist in public parks, preserves, and liminal spaces like power easements. But concrete – in the form of thousands of roads, highways, and bridges — has reshaped the city, and it’s anyone’s guess what’s buried under it all. The prairie club boys grew up in neighborhoods manicured with shrubs from other continents. They say they lacked a strong connection to the land — a quality that the environmentalist Wendell Berry has written is necessary for living in a locale without destroying it. But encountering landscapes like Coneflower Crest has transformed them. 

Munshi, now a plant science major at Cornell University, vividly remembers the morning two springs ago that he climbed up a roadside embankment and glimpsed part of what quickly became his favorite prairie. Butterflies frolicked amid more echinacea than he had ever seen, indicating the area was likely never plowed. “This is, like, a 10!” he exclaimed, filming the scenery. “Imagine what else is in here!”  

a young man holds a plant in a potting container
Max Yan, a senior at St. Mark’s School, sells plants grown by its prairie club during Native Plants and Prairies Day at White Rock Lake in Dallas. Laura Mallonee / Grist

Munshi has explored about 140 acres and said that they contain several rare species, including hall’s prairie clover and white rosinweed, another plant only found in Texas. But in May, just two days after the boys uprooted the last Texas blazing star, a dozen men and women in business suits lined up with shovels to break ground. The young activists knew it was coming, but it still angered them to imagine the landscape razed — even as they grappled with a sense of complicity. “All of our homes were built on indigenous lands and biodiverse areas,” said the senior.  

Stacked against this tremendous loss, their efforts felt almost trivial. “The thought of what was here once and is gone forever will not leave me as long as I live,” Berry wrote in 1968. “It is as though I walk knee-deep in its absence.” But long after the bulldozers at Coneflower Crest move on to the next job, hundreds of its rarest plants will persist, swaying in the breeze along the bike path. Before the boys even transplanted the last ones, a few uprooted daleas bloomed, just as they had for centuries.  

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The guerilla campaign to save a Texas prairie from ‘silent extinction’ on Jul 28, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Laura Mallonee.

]]>
https://grist.org/solutions/the-guerilla-campaign-to-save-a-texas-prairie-from-silent-extinction/feed/ 0 546453
8 Things to Know About New Research on Earth’s Rapid Drying and the Loss of Its Groundwater https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/8-things-to-know-about-new-research-on-earths-rapid-drying-and-the-loss-of-its-groundwater/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/8-things-to-know-about-new-research-on-earths-rapid-drying-and-the-loss-of-its-groundwater/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/groundwater-fresh-water-depletion-research-science-advances-takeaways by ProPublica

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

The continents are rapidly drying out and the earth’s vast freshwater resources are under threat, according to a recently released study based on more than 20 years of NASA satellite data. Here are the report’s key findings and what they portend for humankind:

Much of the Earth is suffering a pandemic of “continental drying,” affecting the countries containing 75% of the world’s population, the new research shows.

The study, published in the journal Science Advances, examined changes to Earth’s total supply of fresh water and found that nearly 6 billion people live in the 101 countries facing a net decline in water supply, posing a “critical, emerging threat to humanity.”

Mining of underground freshwater aquifers is driving much of the loss.

According to the study, the uninhibited pumping of groundwater by farmers, cities and corporations around the world now accounts for 68% of the total loss of fresh water at the latitudes where most people live.

Much of the water taken from aquifers ends up in the oceans, contributing to the rise of sea levels.

Mined groundwater rarely seeps back into the aquifers from which it was pumped. Rather, a large portion runs off into streams, then rivers and ultimately the oceans. According to the researchers, moisture lost to evaporation and drought, plus runoff from pumped groundwater, now outpaces the melting of glaciers and the ice sheets of either Antarctica or Greenland as the largest contributor of water to the oceans.

Water From Land Has Become a Leading Driver of Sea Level Rise

Most of the water lost from drying regions is from groundwater pumping, which ultimately shifts fresh water from aquifers into the oceans.

Note: Glaciers refer to the parts of the continents covered in glaciers but excludes the ice sheets of Greenland and Antarctica. Drying land and aquifers refer to the water lost by the continents in areas not covered by glaciers, including river flow and evaporation. Groundwater loss accounts for 68% of the drying in those places. As droughts grow more extreme, farmers increasingly turn to groundwater.

Worldwide, 70% of fresh water is used for growing crops, with more of it coming from groundwater as droughts grow more extreme. Only a small amount of that water seeps back into aquifers. Research has long established that people take more water from underground when climate-driven heat and drought are at their worst.

Drying regions of the planet are merging.

The parts of the world drying most acutely are becoming interconnected, forming what the study’s authors describe as “mega” regions. One such region covers almost the whole of Europe, the Middle East, North Africa and parts of Asia.

Drying of the Earth has accelerated in recent years.

The study examines 22 years of observational data from NASA’s Gravity Recovery and Climate Experiment, or GRACE, satellites, which measure changes in the mass of the earth and have been applied to estimate its water content. Since 2002, the sensors have detected a rapid shift in water loss across the planet. Around 2014, the study found the pace of drying appears to have accelerated. It is now growing by an area twice the size of California each year.

The Drying of the Earth Accelerated in Recent Years

The dramatic depletion of groundwater and surface water plus the melting of glaciers between 2014-24 has connected once-separate arid places, forming “mega-drying” regions that stretch across whole continents.

Watch video ➜

Note: Data is for February 2003 to December 2013 and January 2014 to April 2024. The first time period contains seven more months of data than the second. Water pumped from aquifers is not easily replaced, if it can be at all.

Major groundwater basins underlie roughly one-third of the planet, including about half of Africa, Europe and South America. Many of those aquifers took millions of years to form and might take thousands of years to refill. The researchers warn that it is now nearly impossible to reverse the loss of water “on human timescales.”

As continents dry and coastal areas flood, the risk for conflict and instability increases.

The accelerated drying, combined with the flooding of coastal cities and food-producing lowlands, heralds “potentially staggering” and cascading risks for global order, the researchers warn. Their findings all point to the likelihood of widespread famine, the migration of large numbers of people seeking a more stable environment and the carry-on impact of geopolitical disorder.

Data Source: Hrishikesh. A. Chandanpurkar, James S. Famiglietti, Kaushik Gopalan, David N. Wiese, Yoshihide Wada, Kaoru Kakinuma, John T. Reager, Fan Zhang (2025). Unprecedented Continental Drying, Shrinking Freshwater Availability, and Increasing Land Contributions to Sea Level Rise. Science Advances. https://www.science.org/doi/10.1126/sciadv.adx0298

Graphics by Lucas Waldron


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by ProPublica.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/8-things-to-know-about-new-research-on-earths-rapid-drying-and-the-loss-of-its-groundwater/feed/ 0 546457
Campaign started by youth activists in the Pacific islands leads to ICJ ruling https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/campaign-started-by-youth-activists-in-the-pacific-islands-leads-to-icj-ruling/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/campaign-started-by-youth-activists-in-the-pacific-islands-leads-to-icj-ruling/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 08:18:56 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=bcd7e7bc46ead1e0372efcd97fbb2687
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/campaign-started-by-youth-activists-in-the-pacific-islands-leads-to-icj-ruling/feed/ 0 546459
Tattoo artist and yoga instructor Blob Dylan on taking a long time https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/tattoo-artist-and-yoga-instructor-blob-dylan-on-taking-a-long-time/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/tattoo-artist-and-yoga-instructor-blob-dylan-on-taking-a-long-time/#respond Mon, 28 Jul 2025 04:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/tattoo-artist-and-yoga-instructor-blob-dylan-on-taking-a-long-time As a tattoo artist and yoga instructor, you step into the role of healer in two different contexts. Can you walk me through what those practices look and feel like in your body?

In a yoga training I just did, they asked that exact question. I feel like in the space of teaching [yoga], it’s literally to give people the mental space from their everyday lives. To give them a container to be in—to reflect, sit, be quiet, separate from the outside world, and see what comes up. With tattooing, I feel like it’s about making people feel more beautiful. Every time I get a tattoo, I feel like I look more like myself—it’s about making people look more like how they feel on the inside. Also giving people a space to lay, be quiet, listen to music, and not engage in anything other than the act of receiving.

How do you see the relationship between teaching yoga and tattooing?

I love teaching because it’s much less of a high stakes environment. A one-on-one interaction is so different from leading a collective. I love the balance of both because they feel equally life-giving, exciting, and embodying. For me, yoga is very internal—moving, burning, cleansing—while tattooing is very external. Tattooing feels like, “This is who I am externally.” Yoga feels like, “This is who I’m trying to be inwardly.” I think they complement each other extremely well. I also tattoo a lot of young people, and I teach a lot of older people. There’s been this funny crossover where I’ve had tattoo clients start to take my yoga classes because they vibe with me, and then I’ve had older people want to get tattoos because they feel safe, and trust my energy or my intention. It’s been cool to mix those communities and introduce them to each other. I like as much diversity in age as I can be around—both sides can teach you a lot about life.

Why do you get tattoos?

I think it’s genuinely so beautiful to be able to decorate yourself—with clothing, color, the way we can do our hair. Something about being able to adorn and decorate skin feels so cool and freeing.

I’m curious how giving and receiving tattoos has informed your perception of permanence, and the passage of time?

When I receive tattoos, the feeling of permanence is so comforting—to think that I’ll be 87 years old, hopefully, with everything I have on my body. Then I get to look back at things I got—I have a tattoo I got in India 5 to 8 years ago—and remember that I’m still that person. I’m still in that body. You know when you see a picture of yourself at five years old and you’re like, “Whoah, I’m still that person”? That’s how it feels. Whether I got it at a good or bad time, there’s something really grounding and comforting about knowing that person is within me. It makes you reflect on everything you’ve been through. For me, tattoos are a timestamp.

For other people, I feel like I watch them really practice surrender. They give up control to the artist to a certain extent. Obviously, they choose the placement and confirm they want the design, but then there’s a level of letting go. You’re fully giving me your body, and you’re trusting me while you lay there and hope that it turns out how you wanted. I’ve had a lot of past clients tell me they feel like they can take on way more risk and trust other people, all from the act of getting tattooed. I think the permanence of it all loosens people up, and makes them practice surrender. It makes them take their bodies less seriously. We’re so body centered and body focused. It reminds people that this is just a vessel to decorate.

Outside of all external definitions, how would you define artwork?

For me, it’s simply the inner world made visual. Someone trying to represent what’s happening inside of them. There’s so many mediums that are possible through that, which is where artwork is interesting to me.

Have you always felt drawn to bodywork?

I feel like massage came up first and foremost when I was a kid. I used to massage people’s feet under the table at Thanksgiving. I also loved giving face massages.

How did tattooing come into your life?

I think when I started practicing [tattooing], I recognized a similar feeling that I would get when I would teach [yoga]. There is an overlapping sense of embodiment—a coming into yourself more than you did before you arrived. Teaching came first, and then tattooing started a year or two after I did my [yoga teacher] training. Tattooing is way more personal. You’re working with one-on-one relationships rather than teaching a group of 20 or 30, but you’re still making people feel embodied and relaxed, creating that container for reflection. Tattooing is also more physical because people are leaving with something very permanent, which is scary.

How did you find the confidence to tattoo for the first time?

I practiced on myself for a while… But there was no confidence. It kind of just happened. I had a few moments of messing up at the very beginning, where it would hit me like a wall—the idea that you’re doing something extremely permanent—and I had to be checked a few times to realize it really was high stakes. I think the ignorant optimism you have as a young person, to just kind of do something and not really care about the outcome, actually served me pretty well in terms of getting into it, and doing it consistently without fear.

Why did you choose hand poke tattooing as your medium?

I started that way because it felt more accessible and less scary. Machines were really expensive, and I didn’t know much about them. Then I fell in love with the process of it, the quiet of it. I love slow art. I love things that take a long time. In an increasingly fast-paced, fast fashion kind of world, it’s so much harder to find things made slowly, and to find people who want things made slowly. To slow down in general is just more of a commodity. The slowness is what tethers me to it. Also, knowing that it’s pre-electricity. It’s funny that it’s coming back into trend. Hand poke is the original form of tattooing; it’s how people did it for thousands of years. Connecting with the original form of the practice is really cool to me.

How would you describe your style?

The technical tattoo term would be micro realism: small things that have a realistic quality to them. I wouldn’t say I do a lot of abstract work. I do a lot of realistic and natural forms through dot work, through pointillism—plants, animals, and shells. I would say my style is soft, and compliments the body well. It’s usually specific to what people find sacred, which happens to be natural life forms that you find outside.

Do you have a favorite piece you’ve ever done?

Yeah. In January I gave this girl a really big bird on her back that went from shoulder to shoulder. It took two days. I had never done a tattoo that took multiple days before. That was really awesome—not to rush and just be with one person for two days. The bird is a native Hawaiian bird and the client is from the island, so it meant a lot to her to wear that animal on her back. It was such a crazy honor to be the person to give it to her. Since then, I want to take on bigger pieces.

How has social media influenced your professional growth while being based in Hawaii?

I really like living rurally because a lot of the work I do comes through word-of-mouth. Everyone is talking and showing each other their tattoos. I would much rather work in that way, through organic ways of sharing and spreading my art. But social media is awesome. I’m able to reach people in cities and then I can afford to go to those cities and bring my art to other places. Before I moved [to Kauai], a few tattoo artists told me I had to be in New York or LA if I wanted to make it. I didn’t really want to do that, or believe that it was true. Social media has allowed me to be where I want to be and still reach people in more urban environments.

What are the challenges that come with owning your own shop?

Self-management, in general. There’s not a lot of challenges with owning and managing the specific space because I feel like I know how to do it really well. I know what I need. It’s literally just me. I don’t have any employees or people to oversee. I would say the challenges are the logistics of starting it alone and doing everything alone—business stuff, financial stuff, tax stuff. But I’m still in my first six years of tattooing… So I think time will help.

What do you gain from guest spotting at other shops and being around other creatives?

It’s so nice to just ask questions. To figure out what materials people are using, techniques, what kind of printers or online platforms people use to enhance their work… It’s really nice to be around other people who’ve also made this their career. It can be so up and down. Sometimes you make a lot of money, sometimes you make no money. It’s dependent upon the economy—how much disposable income people have. It’s just so nice to be around people that are down for that challenge, even though it can be really hard to have such an unpredictable and taxing job, physically and mentally. It’s such a cool community to be in.

Do you remember the best piece of advice another tattooer has given you?

Don’t rush. Oh, and quality over quantity. Yes, you can make more money by taking four or five appointments in a day, but the quality of your work is going to go down. It’s obviously nice to make more money, especially as a freelance artist, but what we’re making is forever. Prioritize the quality of the work over the money that could be made by rushing.

How do you ground and care for yourself after the intense physical and energetic exchange of tattooing? Do you turn to yoga or any other self-soothing practices?

I love that people feel so extremely comfortable with me, and speak to me about really personal things going on in their lives. I know a lot of tattooers who have their headphones on while doing their job, and their client is on their phone or listening to music. Personally, that’s not the kind of tattooer I want to be. To be able to hold as much space as I do, I think I need to take less people, eventually. I’m holding too much space for too many people right now.

The practice that keeps me from carrying too much—which I’m still trying to practice—is to visualize a barrier around myself while I’m tattooing, like a thin film of light protecting me, so I don’t take it home as much. Burning something after really helps. Right now, it feels important for me to allow people to let their minds run and say whatever they’re feeling. I don’t want to stop people from doing that, but I don’t think I’ve quite mastered how to not let it overwhelm me. The answer is not to close myself off. I think I am still seeking those tools. But I’m also going to be doing this my whole life, so I have a lot of time to figure it out.

Do you have advice for a freelance creative starting out?

Make art for yourself, not for the audience. When you authentically make what you think is cool, and what you find incredible, you’ll attract people that want to support you. If you’re trying to make art for an audience, you’re not going to build a sustainable audience that will follow your journey. Instead of catering to what people already want, show them something they didn’t even know they wanted by making it for yourself first.

Blob Dylan recommends:

Making friends who are much older than you

Falling asleep outside

On Earth We’re Briefly Gorgeous by Ocean Vuong

NTS Radio

Taking space before needing space


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sammy Steiner.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/28/tattoo-artist-and-yoga-instructor-blob-dylan-on-taking-a-long-time/feed/ 0 546451
‘We pose no threat – our aim is to break the siege’: Tan Safi on joining the Handala Gaza flotilla https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/27/we-pose-no-threat-our-aim-is-to-break-the-siege-tan-safi-on-joining-the-handala-gaza-flotilla/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/27/we-pose-no-threat-our-aim-is-to-break-the-siege-tan-safi-on-joining-the-handala-gaza-flotilla/#respond Sun, 27 Jul 2025 22:16:47 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117891 No New Zealanders were on board the Handala in the latest arrest and abductions of Freedom Flotilla crew on humanitarian siege-busting missions to Gaza. However, two Australians were and one talks to The New Arab just before the attack on Saturday.

INTERVIEW: By Sebastian Shehadi

The Handala, a 1968 Norwegian trawler repurposed by the Freedom Flotilla Coalition (FFC), set sail for Gaza from southern Italy on July 20, carrying around 21 people and a cargo of food, medical kits, baby formula, water desalination units and more.

The ship is named after the iconic Palestinian cartoon figure, Handala, who symbolises Palestinian identity, resilience and the ongoing struggle against displacement and occupation.

Just hours before departure, the crew uncovered deliberate sabotage: a rope tightly bound around the propeller and a sulfuric acid swap mistaken for water, leading to chemical burns in two people.

Despite this alarming start, the mission continued, echoing the defiance of past flotilla efforts such as the interception of the Madleen in June and the Israeli drone strike on the Conscience in May.

However, contact with the vessel was reported lost on July 24, with coalition officials warning that communications have been jammed and drones have been seen near the ship, raising concerns about interception or further hostile action.

The mission resumed following the brief two-hour communications blackout. “Connection has now been re-established. ‘Handala’ is continuing its mission and is currently less than 349 nautical miles from Gaza,” the Freedom Flotilla Coalition (FFC) announced on Telegram on July 25.

Then on Saturday, the Israeli military attacked the ship and violently detained and “abducted” the entire crew and issued a statement saying they were “safe” and on their way to Israel.

The New Arab spoke to one of Handala’s crew, Lebanese-Australian filmmaker, human rights activist and journalist Tan Safi, before the arrest to find out more about the mission and why she chose to be on board this mission:

The New Arab: How’s the mood on the ship at the moment?
Tan Safi: The morale of everyone at the moment is high, as everyone is happy to be here. Of course, different emotions come up, and we talk them out, but as a collective, we’re all looking out for one another. Everyone is very caring and kind.

We are a group of 21 people from 10 different countries. We have a very proud grandmother, as well as MPs, nurses, a human rights lawyer, a comedian, an actor, human rights activists and more. We’re from many different walks of life, and we pose absolutely no threat to anyone.

We’re simply trying to challenge something illegal. Like previous Freedom Flotilla actions, we will be sailing through international waters into Palestinian territorial waters.

Australian Handala crew member Tan Safi
Australian Handala crew member Tan Safi . . . “Back in 2010, we sent a flotilla that was caught in a deadly raid. The Israelis came in a helicopter, boarded the ship and killed nine people instantaneously, while another person died from a coma years later.” Image: FFC

How are you preparing for the very real threat of Israeli violence?
Back in 2010, we sent a flotilla that was caught in a deadly raid. The Israelis came in a helicopter, boarded the ship and killed nine people instantaneously, while another person died from a coma years later.

So we know very well that Israel poses a real threat.

More importantly, we’ve seen what they’re capable of over the last two years. The most horrific things imaginable. Israeli soldiers are committing endless crimes against Gazan children, and then going into the homes of the Palestinians they’ve murdered and taking selfies in women’s lingerie. We know what they’re capable of.

Any interception of our vessel would violate international maritime law. The ICJ [International Court of Justice] itself ordered Israel not to interfere with any delivery of international aid. Of course, we know that Israel gets to exist in this world by hopping over international law, without any accountability, without any real sanctions.

In terms of processing, what might happen to me? I’ve had to do it time and time again whenever I’ve joined FFC missions over the last two years. I’ve had to say goodbye to my friends and family, but also try to keep them reassured.

Sometimes I feel like I’m lying, to be honest. I tell them that “everything will be okay”. But it’s psychologically impossible to explain.

Are you worried that Handala is less protected than the last ship, Madleen, which had the global media attention (and protection) of having Greta Thunberg on board?

A Gaza Freedom Flotilla Instagram poster
A Gaza Freedom Flotilla Instagram poster. Image: Instagram/@loremresists

No matter how many Instagram followers you have, your life is just as important as the next person’s. We have people on this boat who have Instagram. We have people who do.

The lives of all these people are as valuable as everyone else’s. I would just try to focus on the fact that we’re all human beings, just as every Palestinian in Gaza is. I’m more worried that Israel’s violence will expand until it’s too late, and people wish that they had done more. The time is now.

What is your message to global or Australian leaders?
I’m Lebanese, but I grew up in so-called Australia, a country that has such a dark history. What our politicians forget is that so-called Australia was not theirs to begin with. Australia was, and will always be, Aboriginal land. They can try to hide their dark truths, just like Israel used to as well. But the truth will become exposed in time.

To this day, Aboriginal people are abused and discriminated against by the state. My message to Australia’s leadership is: how can you watch tens of thousands of men, women and children being slaughtered and still be enabling Israel’s siege and genocide?

The Australian embassy in Israel sent me a message urging me to “please reconsider your decision to join a humanitarian aid trip to Gaza”. If they’re so concerned about the two Australians on this boat, I would urge them to be more concerned with the millions of Palestinians who are suffering daily.

The Palestinian cartoon character Handala
The Palestinian cartoon character Handala . . . reimagined with deliberate starvation by the Israeli military forces. Image: X/@RimaHas

Can you tell us more about daily life and organisation on the ship?
We all put our hands up to volunteer for various tasks throughout the day. Some of us are more skilled in certain areas than others. For example, we have someone here from France who is a nurse, and they’re helping anyone who is feeling sick.

We have the proud grandmother, Vigdis from Norway, who loves to cook. And then someone will put their hand up to do the dishes. No one is too good to clean the toilets.

We’re all helping out to keep this ship organised. We also do shifts, helping out with the crew when needed. No one is sitting around. And if someone is, it’s because it’s really hot or the seas are rough.

What do you hope Handala will achieve, beyond potentially breaking the siege?
I hope this action will encourage all forms of solidarity and, more importantly, inspire direct action. I know that protests and non-direct actions serve a purpose, but we have talked and talked and talked at length. I don’t know how people are finding the strength.

Sometimes when I’m asked to talk at events, I just don’t know what to say, because if you need me to explain this, maybe you will never understand.

But what we clearly need to do is disrupt the financial flow that enables and fuels this genocide. The BDS movement is huge. People used to look down on it and question its efficacy. But now we’re able to quantify that it’s actually affecting real, big business.

I’ve always been advocating for that and asking people to be aware of the companies they consume from, such as Unilever, Nestle and Coke. This is having a real impact on these companies that are profiteering from unethical practices to begin with, that extends far beyond the genocide in Gaza.

Direct action could also involve blockading shipments of weapons from ports and docks, as seen in Greece. It’s amazing to see more countries step up. However, we often see a lot of lip service as well. It takes everyday people to actually stand up and say: “I’m able-bodied. I’m sick to my stomach. I’m gonna listen to my instinct and explore other options”.

If protesting is not working, explore other options. If there is no direct action group, create one. All it takes is one person to begin.

Are there any final or other messages you’d like to convey?
The Handala ship is the 37th boat from the FFC to travel to Gaza. There are thousands of people behind each of these journeys who make these voyages happen.

The FFC has existed for as many years as Israel’s siege on Gaza has. The FFC exists only because of Israel’s illegal siege.

We are people from around the world who are united in our shared consciousness and care for Palestine. We pose no threat. I’m looking at a bunch of toys and baby formula. We have as much food as we can carry, but our main goal is to break Israel’s illegal siege of Gaza because you need to fix a problem at the root of the cause.

Sebastian Shehadi is a freelance journalist and a contributing writer at the New Statesman. This article was first published by The New Arab. Follow Shehadi on X: @seblebanon


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/27/we-pose-no-threat-our-aim-is-to-break-the-siege-tan-safi-on-joining-the-handala-gaza-flotilla/feed/ 0 546434
Debunking the theological gaslighting of Israel-supporting Imams https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/27/debunking-the-theological-gaslighting-of-israel-supporting-imams/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/27/debunking-the-theological-gaslighting-of-israel-supporting-imams/#respond Sun, 27 Jul 2025 12:32:02 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117874 Muslims, and the global community, must rally around the Palestinian people’s inalienable rights: to exist, to return home, and to live free from occupation.

ANALYSIS: By Shadee ElMasry

In our world today, one would be hard-pressed to find a reputable, well-known scholar or group of scholars who support Israel. Of course, the keywords here are “well-known” and “reputable”, after a “misguided” delegation of European Imams travelled to Israel to placate the Israeli occupation and sponsor the genocide of the Palestinian people.

It is increasingly common to find these figures, Muslim apologists for Israel, who have breached the Islamic tenet of standing against injustice, laundering their authority to provide cover for Israel’s crimes against humanity against their brothers and sisters in Palestine and across the wider Arab world.

We live in a world of shameless opportunism, where the poisoned fruit of “normalising” relations with the Israeli occupation is weighed against moral conviction and our duty to stand with the afflicted Palestinians.

A few weeks ago, this tradeoff played out across our screens.

The delegation’s visit, which included 15 European Imams, was led by the controversial Hassen Chalghoumi (known for supporting Nicolas Sarkozy’s burqa ban) and involved meetings with Israeli President Isaac Herzog, who has been accused of inciting genocide.

Clearly, their consciences weren’t troubled by the catastrophic famine now gripping Gaza, a “hell on earth” where women and children are killed for scrambling to get flour, and men are killed without rhyme or reason.

I, like many companions across mosques and online feeds, was dumbfounded by the delegation’s complicity. This visit happened at a time when we as Muslims, and the global community, must rally around the Palestinian people’s inalienable rights: to exist, to return home, and to live free from occupation, especially as they face an existential threat.

Delegation swiftly denounced
The delegation was swiftly denounced. Al-Azhar University stressed that they “do not represent Islam and Muslims.” Worshippers walked out of UK mosques. A Dutch Imam was suspended.

But this isn’t just about them. We need to ask how this happened and ensure it does not repeat with us. As one scholar said, if an Imam sees the community fall into usury, then gives his Friday sermon on adultery, the Imam has betrayed his congregation.

The same is the case with Muslim apologists for Israel.

To understand their motives, we must examine three theological “traps” these figures use to justify their support for Israel, or at least the very least, their silence over Palestine. The first of which is the “Greater Good Trap”.

They claim that “speaking up against Israel will result in more harm than good”. But only the Prophet Muhammad’s silence constitutes tacit approval. Their reasoning doesn’t hold up.

A weak-willed person will always accept this reasoning because it allows them to have their proverbial cake and eat it: they gain spiritual cover for remaining silent. As we’ve seen, the scholar will say: “Yes, I can speak, but then our school will get shut down, or we’ll lose funding. For the sake of the greater good, I must remain silent.”

Israel, I’m sure, is delighted by this self-censorship. But we should also ask how it is that so many non-scholars, non-Muslims, and non-Arabs are speaking the truth about the Gaza genocide, while Islamic scholars remain silent.

It raises eyebrows, at the very least.

‘Pure theology’ trap
The second trap is the “Pure Theology” trap. Here, the scholar says: “Sound belief is the most important thing. How can we support the Palestinians when they resort to armed conflict? Their theology is flawed. I prioritise the truth, what’s wrong with that?”

But what they overlook is that falsehood has degrees. It is foolish to denounce one error while ignoring a greater one.

To attack a people’s doctrinal shortcomings while staying silent on their oppression is not principled; it is a failure to understand the fiqh of priorities.

This trap lies in misplacing truths: loudly condemning the religious mistakes of Israel’s victims while conveniently forgetting the far graver injustice of Israel itself and the violent context that brought it into being.

The final, and most sophisticated, trap that Muslim apologists for Israel use is metaphysical: they attempt to misdirect Muslims to a higher order of spiritual thought about the Divine will.

They ask what sounds like a noble question: “Why is Allah doing this to us? It must be because of our sins. Israel is merely a tool God is using to punish us or purify us.”

But the catch here is that the spiritual angle often (but not always) becomes a cover for pacifism. These figures that travelled to Israel, for instance, actively promote inaction. They showed no emotion, no voice, when witnessing the oppression of their own; only when it came to their sponsors did they find something to say.

Suffer in silence
The idea here is to suffer in silence, to clothe disengagement in the language of spiritual endurance.

In the end, this is precisely what Israel and its supporters want: to keep the spotlight off themselves. Any diversion, theological or otherwise, is welcome. As we know, the oppressor laughs at those who fixate on what is bad while ignoring what is worse. And that is the danger behind all three traps.

Yet despite these efforts, something far more powerful holds. The drive within the hearts and minds of Muslims to carry the burden of the Palestinian people, to speak their truth and fight for their freedom has not been extinguished.

It is sustained by faith, shared memory, and the belief that justice is not a slogan but a sacred duty. We ask Allah for continued guidance and protection, and the strength to continue this noble and just cause. Ameen.

Dr Shadee Elmasry has taught at several universities in the United States. Currently, he serves as scholar in residence at the New Brunswick Islamic Center in New Jersey. He is also the founder and head of Safina Society, an institution dedicated to the cause of traditional Islamic education in the West. This article was first published by The New Arab.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/27/debunking-the-theological-gaslighting-of-israel-supporting-imams/feed/ 0 546414
CONTROVESIAL Private FIRE Team Saves the Day #CA #WildFires #losangeles #ViceNews #SSHQ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/controvesial-private-fire-team-saves-the-day-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/controvesial-private-fire-team-saves-the-day-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/#respond Sat, 26 Jul 2025 16:00:33 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d410e2f161708e49649927d696a2f528
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/controvesial-private-fire-team-saves-the-day-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/feed/ 0 546358
While the Neo-Nazi Group The Base Ramps up Recruitment, Trump’s FBI Looks the Other Way https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/while-the-neo-nazi-group-the-base-ramps-up-recruitment-trumps-fbi-looks-the-other-way/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/while-the-neo-nazi-group-the-base-ramps-up-recruitment-trumps-fbi-looks-the-other-way/#respond Sat, 26 Jul 2025 15:00:35 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160142 Pre-2024 Election Pro-Trump Boat Parade Under Donald Trump’s FBI Director Kash Patel, federal attention to tracking far‑right groups has reportedly waned, enabling neo-Nazi, militia and accelerationist groups to mobilize and recruit new members more openly and easily. One of the most active of these  groups is The Base, a violent paramilitary network that promotes accelerationism; […]

The post While the Neo-Nazi Group The Base Ramps up Recruitment, Trump’s FBI Looks the Other Way first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
13 OCTOBER 2024 -- Neo-Nazis attending the Ultimate Trump Boat Parade in Jupiter, Florida, in support of Donald Trump for the 2024 US presidential election.
Pre-2024 Election Pro-Trump Boat Parade

Under Donald Trump’s FBI Director Kash Patel, federal attention to tracking far‑right groups has reportedly waned, enabling neo-Nazi, militia and accelerationist groups to mobilize and recruit new members more openly and easily. One of the most active of these  groups is The Base, a violent paramilitary network that promotes accelerationism; a doctrine calling on followers to hasten the collapse of society through acts of terrorism.

As the Guardian recently reported, “In its early history, part of what first piqued the interest of authorities was the Base’s courting of military veterans who could help drill its foot soldiers in a series of training camps across the US. Eventually implicated in an assassination plot, mass shootings and other actions in Europe, the Base went so far as to have a fortified compound and cell in Michigan, led by a US army dropout.”

According to the Guardian, “Online evidence from its various accounts, several of which live on Russian servers to avoid censorship on American sites, shows the Base has real plans for a national gathering this summer where members intend to train in paramilitary drills as in years past.

The Counter Extremism Project reported that in mid-February, Rinaldo Nazzaro, the leader of the The Base, “released a video on a Russian video streaming platform. … [that] was labeled as an interview for the Greek chapter of the neo-Nazi skinhead group Combat 18 earlier in the month.

Nazzaro promoted The Base and accelerationism, claiming, ‘As conditions continue to deteriorate in our countries, we can potentially use that as an opportunity for us to gain power [in a specific geographic area].’

Nazzaro also praised the Atomwaffen Division (AWD) and confirmed that former AWD members are currently in The Base. Nazzaro also claimed that a member of The Base had been present at the U.S. Capitol riot on January 6, 2021, but that he attended as a member of a different organization. Nazzaro criticized white supremacists who were celebrating the 2024 election of Donald Trump, repeating that there was no political solution and stating that white people could only be saved via ‘extra-constitutional’ tactics. Nazzaro concluded by encouraging Europeans to contact him on several platforms and join The Base.

Another post soliciting financial support, read: “The Base in [the] USA is preparing for an upcoming national training event. This one might be our most attended training event in [the] USA in a while. We could really use some financial support to help our members with travel expenses.”

The post continued: “When you donate money to the Base, you’re investing in a White Defense Force that’s aiming to protect white people from political persecution and physical destruction.”

The Guardian pointed out that “The Base … published a new photo of armed members claiming to be in the midwest, which follows a trend in 2025 of the group bragging about its unafraid American presence. As a sort of taunt to its enemies, on the day of Trump’s inauguration the Base released a photo of four members somewhere in Appalachia, in what was the largest number of American members in one photo in over a year

“’The upcoming national training event indicates that the group is seeking to grow and is willing to take the risk of advertising it publicly in advance,” said Joshua Fisher-Birch, an analyst of far-right terrorism who has been following the Base’s movements for close to a decade. ‘The Base appears to be actively seeking to grow in the US.’”

Fisher-Birch notes that while small in numbers,

An event entails planning, coordination, travel and face-to-face meetings between different regional groups, indicating that they operate in an environment where they view the potential amount of risk as acceptable. The group has previously stated multiple times that being a member or training with them is a risky endeavor; however, planning a meetup, which they will inevitably use for propaganda purposes, is a different approach than even a year ago, when the group advertised regional activities.

The Guardian reached out to the FBI for comment and a spokesperson said it only investigates people who have or are planning to commit a federal crime and pose “a threat to national security”.

“Our focus is not on membership in particular groups but on criminal activity,” spokesperson said. “Membership in groups is not illegal in and of itself and is protected by the first amendment.”

The resurgence of groups like The Base is no coincidence. It’s happening in a political climate where monitoring far-right extremism is being downplayed, defunded, or outright ignored. Trump’s FBI has de-prioritized domestic white supremacist threats, creating a vacuum that paramilitary groups are rushing to fill. By looking away, the administration has opened the door for extremists to recruit, organize, and train with alarming speed. The danger isn’t just that these groups are growing, it’s that they’re doing so with fewer obstacles than ever.

The post While the Neo-Nazi Group The Base Ramps up Recruitment, Trump’s FBI Looks the Other Way first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Bill Berkowitz.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/while-the-neo-nazi-group-the-base-ramps-up-recruitment-trumps-fbi-looks-the-other-way/feed/ 0 546422
While the Neo-Nazi Group The Base Ramps up Recruitment, Trump’s FBI Looks the Other Way https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/while-the-neo-nazi-group-the-base-ramps-up-recruitment-trumps-fbi-looks-the-other-way-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/while-the-neo-nazi-group-the-base-ramps-up-recruitment-trumps-fbi-looks-the-other-way-2/#respond Sat, 26 Jul 2025 15:00:35 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160142 Pre-2024 Election Pro-Trump Boat Parade Under Donald Trump’s FBI Director Kash Patel, federal attention to tracking far‑right groups has reportedly waned, enabling neo-Nazi, militia and accelerationist groups to mobilize and recruit new members more openly and easily. One of the most active of these  groups is The Base, a violent paramilitary network that promotes accelerationism; […]

The post While the Neo-Nazi Group The Base Ramps up Recruitment, Trump’s FBI Looks the Other Way first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
13 OCTOBER 2024 -- Neo-Nazis attending the Ultimate Trump Boat Parade in Jupiter, Florida, in support of Donald Trump for the 2024 US presidential election.
Pre-2024 Election Pro-Trump Boat Parade

Under Donald Trump’s FBI Director Kash Patel, federal attention to tracking far‑right groups has reportedly waned, enabling neo-Nazi, militia and accelerationist groups to mobilize and recruit new members more openly and easily. One of the most active of these  groups is The Base, a violent paramilitary network that promotes accelerationism; a doctrine calling on followers to hasten the collapse of society through acts of terrorism.

As the Guardian recently reported, “In its early history, part of what first piqued the interest of authorities was the Base’s courting of military veterans who could help drill its foot soldiers in a series of training camps across the US. Eventually implicated in an assassination plot, mass shootings and other actions in Europe, the Base went so far as to have a fortified compound and cell in Michigan, led by a US army dropout.”

According to the Guardian, “Online evidence from its various accounts, several of which live on Russian servers to avoid censorship on American sites, shows the Base has real plans for a national gathering this summer where members intend to train in paramilitary drills as in years past.

The Counter Extremism Project reported that in mid-February, Rinaldo Nazzaro, the leader of the The Base, “released a video on a Russian video streaming platform. … [that] was labeled as an interview for the Greek chapter of the neo-Nazi skinhead group Combat 18 earlier in the month.

Nazzaro promoted The Base and accelerationism, claiming, ‘As conditions continue to deteriorate in our countries, we can potentially use that as an opportunity for us to gain power [in a specific geographic area].’

Nazzaro also praised the Atomwaffen Division (AWD) and confirmed that former AWD members are currently in The Base. Nazzaro also claimed that a member of The Base had been present at the U.S. Capitol riot on January 6, 2021, but that he attended as a member of a different organization. Nazzaro criticized white supremacists who were celebrating the 2024 election of Donald Trump, repeating that there was no political solution and stating that white people could only be saved via ‘extra-constitutional’ tactics. Nazzaro concluded by encouraging Europeans to contact him on several platforms and join The Base.

Another post soliciting financial support, read: “The Base in [the] USA is preparing for an upcoming national training event. This one might be our most attended training event in [the] USA in a while. We could really use some financial support to help our members with travel expenses.”

The post continued: “When you donate money to the Base, you’re investing in a White Defense Force that’s aiming to protect white people from political persecution and physical destruction.”

The Guardian pointed out that “The Base … published a new photo of armed members claiming to be in the midwest, which follows a trend in 2025 of the group bragging about its unafraid American presence. As a sort of taunt to its enemies, on the day of Trump’s inauguration the Base released a photo of four members somewhere in Appalachia, in what was the largest number of American members in one photo in over a year

“’The upcoming national training event indicates that the group is seeking to grow and is willing to take the risk of advertising it publicly in advance,” said Joshua Fisher-Birch, an analyst of far-right terrorism who has been following the Base’s movements for close to a decade. ‘The Base appears to be actively seeking to grow in the US.’”

Fisher-Birch notes that while small in numbers,

An event entails planning, coordination, travel and face-to-face meetings between different regional groups, indicating that they operate in an environment where they view the potential amount of risk as acceptable. The group has previously stated multiple times that being a member or training with them is a risky endeavor; however, planning a meetup, which they will inevitably use for propaganda purposes, is a different approach than even a year ago, when the group advertised regional activities.

The Guardian reached out to the FBI for comment and a spokesperson said it only investigates people who have or are planning to commit a federal crime and pose “a threat to national security”.

“Our focus is not on membership in particular groups but on criminal activity,” spokesperson said. “Membership in groups is not illegal in and of itself and is protected by the first amendment.”

The resurgence of groups like The Base is no coincidence. It’s happening in a political climate where monitoring far-right extremism is being downplayed, defunded, or outright ignored. Trump’s FBI has de-prioritized domestic white supremacist threats, creating a vacuum that paramilitary groups are rushing to fill. By looking away, the administration has opened the door for extremists to recruit, organize, and train with alarming speed. The danger isn’t just that these groups are growing, it’s that they’re doing so with fewer obstacles than ever.

The post While the Neo-Nazi Group The Base Ramps up Recruitment, Trump’s FBI Looks the Other Way first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Bill Berkowitz.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/while-the-neo-nazi-group-the-base-ramps-up-recruitment-trumps-fbi-looks-the-other-way-2/feed/ 0 546423
"By the time you go to the police, nobody is going to ever see you again" | Podcast Trailer https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/by-the-time-you-go-to-the-police-nobody-is-going-to-ever-see-you-again-podcast-trailer/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/by-the-time-you-go-to-the-police-nobody-is-going-to-ever-see-you-again-podcast-trailer/#respond Sat, 26 Jul 2025 15:00:15 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=02c16a986a8bab4a7af10a4c205fcdcd
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/by-the-time-you-go-to-the-police-nobody-is-going-to-ever-see-you-again-podcast-trailer/feed/ 0 546346
Ethnic Cleansing in the United States https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/ethnic-cleansing-in-the-united-states/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/ethnic-cleansing-in-the-united-states/#respond Sat, 26 Jul 2025 14:58:11 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160196 Until 1492, all of North America belonged to its many indigenous peoples. With the coming of Europeans, that began to change. Said Europeans came as conquerors and colonial settlers. They brought new diseases which massively depopulated the indigenous nations. The ubiquitous abuses, which European and Euro-American governments perpetrated against the Indigenes, were “justified” with racial […]

The post Ethnic Cleansing in the United States first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Until 1492, all of North America belonged to its many indigenous peoples. With the coming of Europeans, that began to change. Said Europeans came as conquerors and colonial settlers. They brought new diseases which massively depopulated the indigenous nations. The ubiquitous abuses, which European and Euro-American governments perpetrated against the Indigenes, were “justified” with racial and religious prejudices. By 1900, the Indigenes had been: expelled from most of their lands, decimated, impoverished, and marginalized. Official United States history generally evades what was actually done and by whom.

Land cessions. Relevant history.

Colonial period. Between 1565 (when Spain established, in Florida, the first permanent European colony in what was to become the 48 contiguous United States) and 1783 (when the United States gained its independence from Britain), Euro-American colonial settler-states forcibly displaced the indigenous nations from most of the land east of the Appalachian divide. Said displacements were often effectuated through violent military action, often in wars provoked by abusive colonial-settler impositions upon their indigenous neighbors. Most of the displaced Indigenes, who survived, were thusly forced to relocate to territory further west.

US claims. During the War for United States Independence, some of the indigenous nations (and/or their internal factions) remained neutral, while others eventually took one side or the other. Of the latter, many more sided with the British than with the United States, because Britain (wanting to avoid costly armed conflicts) had attempted to protect indigenous territory from incursions by Euro-American land speculators and frontier settlers. With the end of the War in 1783, the United States laid claim to sovereignty over all of the territory between the Appalachian divide and the Mississippi River. At first, the US claimed the right to take ownership of all of the land in this new territory based upon a purported “right of conquest”. Naturally, the indigenous nations refused to accept either the claim of US sovereignty or the purported right of Euro-Americans to take their land.

Treaty cessions. As the United States seized indigenous land in response to pressure from wealthy land speculators and racist demagogues, war was the inevitable result. The US government soon recognized that negotiations for land cessions was an easier and far less costly means for enforcing the claimed sovereignty and obtaining the coveted land. In such negotiations, all of the advantages were with the US side, which used those advantages to gradually obtain nearly all of the coveted territory thru a series of unequal treaties. The treaties were, of course, always written: by the US side, in the language of the Euro-Americans, and using interpreters chosen by the US. US government agents (who often were territorial military governors) used intimidation, coercion, deceit, bribery, and exploitation of conflicts within and between the indigenous nations. Although the indigenous nations were paid for the land, that pay was a small fraction of its actual value and commonly included promised annuities. Said annuities were often subsequently withheld in order to extort cessions of additional territory. Moreover, the US side routinely recognized an indigenous go-between, who was willing to comply with US demands, as agent (or purported “Chief”) of an indigenous nation even though said go-between often had no authority to act for that nation. Naturally, the resulting treaties were generally fraudulent.

Principal source: Robert M Owens: “Indian Land Cessions” (encyclopedia.com, © 2019).

Land speculators. Until the middle of the 19th century, for Euro-Americans with money, the most popular and usual place to invest was in land, especially land on the frontier yet to be settled by Euro-Americans. Wealthy Europeans also often invested in such American land. Naturally, wealthy land speculators cast covetous eyes upon land owned and occupied by the indigenous peoples. Said land speculators were leading instigators of Euro-American aggressions and wars against the indigenous nations, aggressions thru which such lands were acquired by the governmental authority. Of course, “valid” title to land in frontier areas could only be obtained from the colonial governments or later the federal government. Politically connected land speculators used their influence with provincial and federal office-holders to purchase, on especially favorable terms, grants of large tracts of land newly extorted from the indigenous nations. Then, after the Indigenes had been expelled, said grant holders would contract surveys and sell the land in small lots at a great markup over their privileged purchase price. A notable example is the case of western New York.

Preemption. In the 1784 Treaty of Fort Stanwix, the US acknowledged that ownership of western New York belonged to the Six Nations Confederacy. A 1786 agreement to resolve conflicting claims over this territory gave its governance to New York, but gave to Massachusetts a preemptive right to buy the land from the Haudenosaunee. In 1788, Oliver Phelps and Nathaniel Gorham purchased (from Massachusetts) that preemptive right over nearly all of New York west of Seneca Lake (6 million acres occupying 14 present-day counties). The price was $1 million, but it was to be paid in Massachusetts scrip then worth about 20 cents on the dollar. The scrip rose in value to par, and Phelps and Gorham were then unable to complete payment. When they defaulted after having made their first of three payments, purchase rights over the western 2/3 (that is the part west of the Genesee River) reverted to Massachusetts. In 1791, Robert Morris (then the richest man in the US, also a signer of the Declaration of Independence, and [like half of his fellow signers] a slave owner) purchased the rights over most of that 2/3 (for $333,333.33).

Dispossession
. In 1792 and 1793, Morris contracted the sale of most (3,250,000 acres) of his subject land to the Holland Land Company (a syndicate of wealthy investors in Amsterdam, Netherlands). In order to deliver clear title, Morris had to buy the land from the Haudenosaunee, its actual owners. In 1797, their agreement to sell (for $100,000) was fraudulently extorted in the Treaty of Big Tree thru a combination of: (1) threat that the US would likely not recognize their ownership rights, and (2) bribery of their leaders and negotiators. As a concession, the Haudenosaunee were left with 200,000 acres (about 6%) for reservations. The Holland Land Company hired a survey (cost $71,000) and divided the land into lots which it then sold between 1801 and 1840.

End result. Massachusetts, which had never paid anything to the Haudenosaunee, received from 9 to 15 cents per acre (respectively from Morris and Phelps-Gorham). The surveyors were paid about 2.2 cents per acre. The actual owners, the Haudenosaunee, received about 3 cents per acre. The land in post-survey lots was then sold, initially at $2.75/acre. Thus, the land speculators (Morris and the Holland Land Company) apparently received, between them, gross profits in excess of $2.50/acre.

Principal source: Wikipedia: “Treaty of Fort Stanwix” (1784) (2025 April 06); “Treaty of Hartford” (1786) (2025 July 11); “Phelps and Gorham Purchase” (2025 July 13); “Holland Land Company” (2025 July 10); “Treaty of Big Tree” (2024 February 26).

Purchasers. Land, in the fully settled eastern part of the newly independent United States, was mostly all privately owned, and it was relatively expensive. Consequently, working tenant farmers and farm laborers generally could not afford to purchase farms there. Meanwhile, land in the western frontier areas possessed certain relative disadvantages; specifically: less of it had been cleared of woods, its roads and other transportation infrastructure were few and crude, and access to markets and established Euro-American communities was more distant and difficult. So, whenever land became available on the western frontier, it was relatively cheap. With every tract of territory ceded by the Indigenes to the US, the federal government asserted ownership of the ceded land. In the old Northwest Territory (Ohio, Michigan, Indiana, Illinois, and Wisconsin), the Indigenes received pennies per acre for their land, which the US government then surveyed and offered at auction to individual family farmers at prices of no less than $1.00 or $2.00/acre, often after having previously sold large tracts to wealthy politically-connected speculators at lower prices. The speculators, who never settled on the land, purchased it only to re-sell at a sizable mark-up to later settlers. Moreover, such speculators were a major influence on US policy to take the land from its indigenous peoples, as they (along with racist demagogues and war-profiteering military contractors) lobbied their friends in government to induce said government to seize and/or extort ever more cessions of territory from the indigenous nations. [3]

Principal source: Paul W Gates: “Land Speculation” (encyclopedia.com, © 2019).

Interracial relations. In order to justify the dispossession of the original owners and to obscure the fraud and theft utilized in the process, the proponents (land speculators, other advocates of US expansionism, and their apologists) routinely resorted to rationalization, misrepresentation, and bigotry.

Firstly, although there was brutality on both sides in the “Indian” wars (invariably provoked by the Euro-American side), the expansionists dehumanized the Indigenes by one-sidedly vilifying them as murdering heathen savages.

Secondly, they portrayed white settlement as bringing civilization to an untamed wilderness and falsely portrayed the indigenous peoples as incapable of making productive use of the land. In fact, the indigenous peoples throughout almost the whole of the territory between the Atlantic Ocean and the Mississippi River were farmers, who cleared tracts of the woodland in order to raise the crops which included their staple foods (maize [corn], beans, and squash) plus various other vegetables. Meat obtained in the hunt was a supplement to the staples. If the Indigenes did not clear as much of the woodland as the Euro-Americans, this was: because their lower population density and their land rotation practice made it unnecessary; and (until after European contact) because they lacked the steel saws and axes and the draft animals of the Euro-Americans, which made forest removal much easier.

Despite the disparaging propaganda against the indigenous peoples, most settlers sought to avoid conflict with the remaining local natives. Some, as attested in contemporary reports, went further and established neighborly and mutually beneficial trade relations with neighboring Indigenes. It was the avaricious profiteering men of wealth and power who created the conditions for ethnic cleansing and genocidal policies.

Principal sources:

Jack Lynch: “A Principal Source of Dishonor: Indian Policies in Early America” (C W Journal, 2009 Spring).

R Douglas Hurt: “Agriculture, American Indian” (encyclopedia.com, © 2019).

The post Ethnic Cleansing in the United States first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Charles Pierce.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/ethnic-cleansing-in-the-united-states/feed/ 0 546344
Oh, Darn, the Ultimate Victims Have Cornered the Market on Nazism https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/oh-darn-the-ultimate-victims-have-cornered-the-market-on-nazism/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/oh-darn-the-ultimate-victims-have-cornered-the-market-on-nazism/#respond Sat, 26 Jul 2025 13:40:22 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160248 Reference:  Chosen Trauma and Terrorism: The Jewish Victim Narrative  The purpose of this research paper was to investigate the justification of Jewish terrorism against the Palestinians, through the lens of chosen trauma. Through qualitative research, it was deduced that chosen trauma is the result of victimization and large-group identity. Hence, the psychological domain of collective victimhood […]

The post Oh, Darn, the Ultimate Victims Have Cornered the Market on Nazism first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

Bloodied' Israeli Flag in Milan Angers Visitors to Expo - Algemeiner.com

Reference:  Chosen Trauma and Terrorism: The Jewish Victim Narrative

 The purpose of this research paper was to investigate the justification of Jewish terrorism against the Palestinians, through the lens of chosen trauma. Through qualitative research, it was deduced that chosen trauma is the result of victimization and large-group identity. Hence, the psychological domain of collective victimhood and Sigmund Freud’s Group Psychology were employed to elaborate on this concept. It was deduced that the process and acceptance of victimization are dynamic and are a result of stages since it calls for the collective recognition of trauma by large groups. Large group identity becomes stronger upon attacks or threats from external groups, and attacks generate collective victimhood. The resulting concept is that; the perceived harm is stored in the collective memory of large groups, and they aspire to seek revenge. It was also presented that, shared tragedy is transmitted through generations by virtue of “depositing”. The psychological domain of transgenerational transmission of trauma argues that through depositing, the parties become free of the traumatic images and deal with their mental conflicts. The result is chosen trauma, whereby a collective sense of entitlement for the purpose of recovering from ancestral collective trauma is reflected. Along these lines, the Jewish Holocaust survivors passed down the trauma of concertation camps, torture, and sexual violence across generations. Present-day Jews aspire to avenge the Holocaust by maintaining domination over Jerusalem and current Israeli land. As a result, the Palestinian community which challenges the aspiration of Jews is a victim of state-sponsored terrorism.

In retaliation, Palestinians are victims of expulsions, killings, military occupation, forced detention, war crimes, and human rights violations. Despite being called out by various international organizations, Israel is able to justify its actions under the realm of chosen trauma. Hence, the notion of chosen trauma is employed to justify Jewish atrocities against the Palestinians.

Freud as Talmudist - Jewish Review of Books

But Freud testified that “my father allowed me to grow up in complete ignorance of everything that concerned Judaism.” Some scholars have made much of the fact that Jacob once gave his son a Bible with a Hebrew inscription, but when the adult Freud was given a book with a Hebrew message, he replied that he was entirely unable to read it. The belief that one’s children would be more burdened than fortified by Jewish knowledge was shared by many Jewish parents in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, in Brooklyn and Tel Aviv no less than in Vienna.

As for religious faith, Freud of course had none, identifying on occasion with Jewish unbelievers like Heinrich Heine and Baruch Spinoza. A strict rationalist, he theorized in The Future of an Illusion (1927) that the origins of religion lay in “the terrifying impression of helplessness in childhood,” which “aroused the need for protection—for protection through love—which was provided by the father.” God is the imaginary father adults call on to avoid confronting “the full extent of their helplessness and their insignificance in the machinery of the universe.” But “men cannot remain children forever,” Freud says, demanding that we emancipate ourselves from faith.

Freud as Talmudist

War

The Oxford Dictionary defines a “tragedy” as a play “concerning the downfall of the main character”. This main character is often referred to as the “tragic hero.” “Tragic heroes typically have heroic traits that earn them the sympathy of the audience, but also have flaws or make mistakes that ultimately lead to their own downfall.”

Literature is littered with tragic heroes — beginning with Lucifer of Judeo-Christian mythology, later Shakespeare’s Macbeth, Camus’ Clamence, and more recently Walter White of the TV series Breaking Bad. And so is real life: US President Richard Nixon, actor Bill Cosby, and cyclist Lance Armstrong. All people who gained support, success, fame, admiration, and power — only to lose it all because of the abuse of that power. Sometimes the tragic hero can be a nation.

The eyes of the world have watched the unfolding story of Israel over the past 75 years. What many saw as an inspirational tale in its early years has slowly turned into a tragedy — and the hero into a bully.

Bad bad Jewish New York Confused Writing, “almost”  ALWAYS: A Jewish Stance of Eternal Victimhood Fails Us All — The suffering of Jews doesn’t mean that Jews can’t make others suffer.

I grew up in the shadow of the Holocaust in a mainly Jewish community in New York. There were also South Africans who’d fled apartheid, as well as Persian Jews who’d been forced out of Iran after the Shah fell. Fleeing oppression tends to create an open-minded, liberal community — one that I have been proud to be part of traditionally, if not religiously — or, conversely, it can create a community that dangerously closes ranks, which I find particularly telling today when looking at what Israel is perpetrating in Gaza.

These effing so-called Jewish and Liberal New Yorkers are Bonkers in Yonkers: above quote.

The Israeli government has pivoted to a new deflection: The famine in Gaza is not the result of Israel’s publicly announced March 2 blockade of all food entering Gaza, nor is it connected to the Israeli- and U.S.-backed Gaza Humanitarian Foundation (GHF), which replaced the UNRWA aid system Israel shut down with its own militarized version in late May. Instead, according to the new Israeli campaign, the blame lies with the United Nations. “Hundreds of aid trucks have entered Gaza with Israel’s approval, but the supplies are standing idle, undelivered,” the Israeli Ministry of Foreign Affairs declared on X. “The reason? The UN refuses to distribute the aid.”

Clearly sensing a turning-point in world opinion, as the death toll from starvation mounts exponentially in Gaza, Israel brought dozens of sympathetic journalists to a crossing to wage a PR campaign on Thursday.

Comment on X: Bushra Shaikh — You haven’t let any International Journalists into Gaza freely since the aggression began. So IDF-controlled journalists in a 2-hour tour is not journalism. Try again, rabid liars.

Netanyahu gifts 'golden pager' to Trump; Know ‘hidden meaning’ behind Bibi’s gift

Oh, more than rabid liars. Rabid misanthropes, and they turned the Vice President into this glorifying Dipshit Faux Man, and what and who are these journalists who won’t attack the Vice President  and President Trump or his POTUS: Adolph “bibi” Mileikowsky.

Myriam François sits down with journalist Ahmed Shihab-Eldin to confront the media’s complicity in power — and the price of telling the truth. From abused children to erased journalists, this is a brutal exposé on how mainstream media narratives are shaped, sanitised, and sold. We break down how coverage of Gaza and Palestinian lives is distorted — and why “mistake” is the media’s favourite euphemism for mass murder.

Image

Nah, Jewish folk don’t control the White Man’s House and Minyan, or Higher Education:

Hudson Whittaker was a Chicago blues musician who performed under the name Tampa Red. One of his finest compositions, entitled “Don’t Deal with the Devil,” opens with the following warning:

When you dealin’ with the devil
Everything you do is wrong
You’ll drive away your lover
And keep all your things in pawn…
Don’t deal with the devil, cuz it ain’t no way to win.

Zionist Jews are the Collective Devil:

Fucking Military Industrial Complex and so-called Business Chlamydia Capitalism Schools:

Stanford Graduate School of Business, long considered among the most elite MBA programs in the world, is facing a storm of internal criticism from students who say the academic experience has fallen far short of expectations. In a series of interviews with Poets&Quants, current MBA students voiced concerns about outdated course content, a disengaged faculty culture, and a broken curriculum structure that they say leaves them unprepared for post-MBA careers — and worse, dilutes the reputation and long-term value of a Stanford degree by producing scores of grads unprepared for the modern world of work.

“We’re coming to the best business school on Earth, and the professors can’t teach,” says a rising second-year MBA student and elected member of the school’s Student Association. “We’re not learning anything. The brand is strong, but there’s nothing here to help you build discernible skills.”

a man in a black military uniform sits at a desk behind microphones

Albino head of the War Lord’s SNAKE:

“I firmly believe that the technology that we need to deliver Golden Dome exists today.”

Yep, there goes the neighborhood: A draft of President Dwight D. Eisenhower’s farewell address shows changes made around a reference to the military industrial complex at the Eisenhower Presidential Library in Abilene, Kansas, the U.S., December 10, 2010.

A draft of President Dwight D. Eisenhower's farewell address shows changes made around a reference to the military industrial complex at the Eisenhower Presidential Library in Abilene, Kansas, the U.S., December 10, 2010. /AP

The head of the Trump administration’s Golden Dome program says the technologies needed to create an ambitious space-based missile defense system are already in existence.

U.S. Space Force General Michael Guetlein, Vice Chief of Space Operations, was tapped by President Trump to lead the Golden Dome project on May 20 and was confirmed by the U.S. Senate on July 17. His role will be to oversee the development and procurement of technologies for Golden Dome, a planned missile defense system that can shoot down incoming hypersonic, cruise, and ballistic missiles from space.

This is devolution. Apartment Buildings Bombed.

A man walks past an apartment building heavily damaged in the Russia-Ukraine conflict, in Mariupol, Ukraine, November 16, 2022. /Reuters

“American-style democracy advocates that everyone has one vote, but ordinary voters simply cannot compete with the campaign investment paid by the big financial groups in the military-industrial complex,” said Zhang Tengjun, deputy director of the China Institute of International Studies Asia Pacific.

Another powerful tool of the military-industrial complex is its ability to shape elite discussions on national security issues by funding foreign policy think tanks.

At least 14 of the 15 think tanks represented in House Armed Services Committee hearings from January 2020 to September 2022 accepted arms industry cash, according to “US government and defense contractor funding of America’s top 50 think tanks” report by Bee Freeman, a research fellow with expertise in lobbying and money in politics at the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft.

“Think tanks are supposed to shape government policies in an unbiased manner, free from the influence of big money that can distort in-house policy planning,” said Stephen Semler, cofounder of Security Policy Reform Institute, a grassroots-funded U.S. foreign policy think tank.

However, many of the most influential think tanks have been compromised by the same financial interests as Congress, including military contractors, Semler argued.

Ukrainian servicemen use a Bureviy multiple launch rocket system at a position in Donetsk region, Ukraine, November 29, 2022. /Reuters

Weapons contractors are the main financial beneficiary.One-quarter to one-third of all Pentagon contracts in recent years have gone to just five major weapons contractors, including Lockheed Martin and Boeing, according to research from the Watson Institute at Brown University.

The direct military sales by U.S. companies rose nearly 50 percent in fiscal year 2022 from the previous year, data released by the U.S. State Department shows.

MIC

Deaths and injuries from such wars have reached the tens of millions. The number of estimated deaths from the post-9/11 wars in Afghanistan, Iraq, Pakistan, Syria, and Yemen is eerily similar to that from the wars in Vietnam, Laos, and Cambodia: 4.5 million.

The numbers are so large that they can become numbing. The Irish poet Pádraig Ó Tuama helps us remember to focus on:

one life
one life
one life
one life
one life
because each time
is the first time
that that life
has been taken.

MIC 2

As the MIC has fueled wars abroad, so it has fueled militarization domestically. Why, for example, have domestic police forces become so militarized? At least part of the answer: since 1990, Congress has allowed the Pentagon to transfer its “excess” weaponry and equipment (including tanks and drones) to local law enforcement agencies. These transfers conveniently allow the Pentagon and its contractors to ask Congress for replacement purchases, further fueling the MIC.

Seeking new profits from new markets, contractors have also increasingly hawked their military products directly to SWAT teams and other police forces, border patrol outfits, and prison systems. Politicians and corporations have poured billions of dollars into border militarization and mass incarceration, helping fuel the rise of the lucrative “border-industrial complex” and “prison-industrial complex,” respectively. Domestic militarization has disproportionately harmed BlackLatino, and Indigenous communities.

KYIV, UKRAINE - APRIL 28: Smoke rises after missiles landed at sunset on April 28, 2022 in Kyiv, Ukraine. The mayor of Kyiv, Vitali Klitschko, said on his Telegram account that Russian strikes hit the lower floors of a residential building in the Shevchenkivskyi district. The attack coincides with today's visit to Kyiv by UN Secretary-General Antonio Guterres. (Photo by John Moore/Getty Images)

You think? Reducing military spending would rein in U.S. debt and improve global security

What’s missing? All the defunding and tax payer coffer smash and grabs: Education, roads, bridges, medical clinics, rural doctors, health care for all — single payer — public transportation, more parks, less clear cutting and mountaintop removal, mitigating all the destruction caused by US industries (microplastics, poisons, forever chemicals, disease, CAFOs, fenceline communities), arts, sciences, ecology and marine and estuary restoration, wildland fire fighting, ocean inundation, wet bulb temperature deaths and stress, and MORE MORE MORE.

What’s dragging down and/or missing in your community? Too many pigs/cops? ICE raids? Cost of housing or lack thereof?

An end to this?

Getty Images Donald Trump with his girlfriend (and future wife) Melania Knauss, Jeffrey Epstein and Ghislaine Maxwell in Florida in 2000

Watch: “It’s exhausting” – Epstein accuser talks to the BBC about files saga

And so the Jewish Project toward Gazafication and Israelification of the world continues:

Why Was There More Outrage for Colbert’s Cancellation Than for 2 Million Palestinians Starving in Gaza?

The liberal establishment gave outsized attention to Colbert compared to the increasingly dire hunger in Gaza.

A perfect fucking target. Oh, Larry Silverstein is on the job, after his billions in bilking 9/11 and the Jewish and Israeli insurance scam:

Concept for postwar Gaza from the project “Great Trust” in which the Tony Blair Institute participated to develop a postwar Gaza plan that envisaged kick-starting the enclave’s economy with a “Trump Riviera” and an “Elon Musk Smart Manufacturing Zone.” It proposed paying half a million Palestinians to leave the area and attracting private investors to develop Gaza..

Yeah, business schools?

In her 60-page report, Albanese writes that her research “reveals how the forever-occupation has become the ideal testing ground for arms manufacturers and Big Tech… while investors and private and public institutions profit freely.”

Her point was underscored by the Israeli arms firm Rafael, which issued a promotional video of its Spike FireFly drone that showed it locating, chasing and killing a Palestinian in what it called “urban warfare” in Gaza.

As the UN special rapporteur points out, quite aside from the issue of genocide in Gaza, western companies have been under a legal and moral obligation to sever ties with Israel’s system of occupation since last summer.

That was when the world’s highest court, the International Court of Justice, ruled Israel’s decades-old occupation was a criminal enterprise based on apartheid and forcible transfer—or what Albanese refers to as policies of “displacement and replacement.”

Instead, the corporate sector—and western governments—continue to deepen their involvement in Israel’s crimes.

It is not just arms manufacturers profiting from the genocidal levelling of Gaza and the occupations of the West Bank and East Jerusalem.

Big Tech, construction and materials firms, agribusiness, the tourism industry, the goods and services sector, and supply chains have also got in on the act.

And enabling it all is a finance sector—which includes banks, pension funds, universities, insurers and charities—keen to continue investing in this architecture of oppression.

Albanese describes the mosaic of companies partnering with Israel as “an eco-system sustaining this illegality.” — Israel’s Genocide Is Big Business And It’s The Face Of The Future

One of my Substack followers mentioned how I didn’t have a rant against the Jews of Murdering Maiming Occupying Raping Starving Poisoning Thieving Israel that day. Shit dawg, there’s always room for more critiques of Jews.

In a rare public comment, Jewish tech leader Sergey Brin strongly criticized the United Nations, calling it “deeply offensive” and “transparently antisemitic” after a UN report accused tech companies like Google of

The Washington Post reported that, in the wake of Albanese’s report, Google’s co-founder, Sergey Brin, called the UN “transparently antisemitic” in a chat on a staff forum.

Lakota Language

Dirty languages of the white races:

March in Lakota History - Lakota Times

Educator, musician, activist, and creator of First Voices Radio, Tiokasin Ghosthorse. Tiokasin is a member of the Cheyenne River Lakota Nation of South Dakota, and shares deep wisdom from the Lakota worldview, language, and traditions.

He explores ways for us to redefine our relationship with Mother Earth, moving away from a mindset of separation and domination towards one of interconnectedness, mutual becoming, and intuition. Tiokasin shares how we can be more in tune with Earth’s natural rhythm to become more present in the now and more connected to the future.

The Indigenous way of being involves an openness to seeing and feeling our ancestors—not just our human ancestors, but also the earth itself. Tiokasin stresses the need for us to de-center humans in order to reconnect with nature, and demonstrates how understanding the living Lakota language can affect a cultural mindset shift in that direction.

*****

[Jewish freighters on the Santa Fe Trail with hired Kiowa Indian scouts.]

David S. Koffman: The title The Jews’ Indian is a play on a Robert Berkhofer, Jr.’s book from 1978, The White Man’s Indian: Images of the American Indian from Columbus to the Present.

I read that book in grad school and I liked the way that it forced the reader to think about the subject and the object. This was a book that was not about Native Americans. It was looking at white people’s representations of Native Americans.

I took this on as a similar project, but thought it important to disaggregate the category of “white man” and look specifically at Jews, with the hopes that other people might also look at sub-aggregates of colonists. Because people, for the most part, have seldom taken on colonial-settler identities. They think of themselves as Portuguese immigrants, or as Catholics, or as Mormons, but not “settlers.”

My interest is in seeing colonial actors as people who had ordinary economic and political concerns, who are desperate in their own way. I think that this study forces us to reckon with some of the political and moral ambiguities of settler-indigenous relations. Jews in the 19th century, like many others who arrived in the frontier West seeking to eke out a living, were often fleeing hunger, political violence, and disenfranchisement. Though they arrived as more powerful than Native Americans, they were not official state actors—they were, in a certain sense, refugees. We tend to think of the agents of settler-colonialism as military or political elites who created the conditions for expansion. But many were just pawns in the larger process. Jewish-Indigenous encounters were complicated; it’s not really a matter of good guys and bad guys, even though there are beneficiaries and losers.

The post Oh, Darn, the Ultimate Victims Have Cornered the Market on Nazism first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Paul Haeder.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/oh-darn-the-ultimate-victims-have-cornered-the-market-on-nazism/feed/ 0 546336
Oh, Darn, the Ultimate Victims Have Cornered the Market on Nazism https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/oh-darn-the-ultimate-victims-have-cornered-the-market-on-nazism-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/oh-darn-the-ultimate-victims-have-cornered-the-market-on-nazism-2/#respond Sat, 26 Jul 2025 13:40:22 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160248 Reference:  Chosen Trauma and Terrorism: The Jewish Victim Narrative  The purpose of this research paper was to investigate the justification of Jewish terrorism against the Palestinians, through the lens of chosen trauma. Through qualitative research, it was deduced that chosen trauma is the result of victimization and large-group identity. Hence, the psychological domain of collective victimhood […]

The post Oh, Darn, the Ultimate Victims Have Cornered the Market on Nazism first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

Bloodied' Israeli Flag in Milan Angers Visitors to Expo - Algemeiner.com

Reference:  Chosen Trauma and Terrorism: The Jewish Victim Narrative

 The purpose of this research paper was to investigate the justification of Jewish terrorism against the Palestinians, through the lens of chosen trauma. Through qualitative research, it was deduced that chosen trauma is the result of victimization and large-group identity. Hence, the psychological domain of collective victimhood and Sigmund Freud’s Group Psychology were employed to elaborate on this concept. It was deduced that the process and acceptance of victimization are dynamic and are a result of stages since it calls for the collective recognition of trauma by large groups. Large group identity becomes stronger upon attacks or threats from external groups, and attacks generate collective victimhood. The resulting concept is that; the perceived harm is stored in the collective memory of large groups, and they aspire to seek revenge. It was also presented that, shared tragedy is transmitted through generations by virtue of “depositing”. The psychological domain of transgenerational transmission of trauma argues that through depositing, the parties become free of the traumatic images and deal with their mental conflicts. The result is chosen trauma, whereby a collective sense of entitlement for the purpose of recovering from ancestral collective trauma is reflected. Along these lines, the Jewish Holocaust survivors passed down the trauma of concertation camps, torture, and sexual violence across generations. Present-day Jews aspire to avenge the Holocaust by maintaining domination over Jerusalem and current Israeli land. As a result, the Palestinian community which challenges the aspiration of Jews is a victim of state-sponsored terrorism.

In retaliation, Palestinians are victims of expulsions, killings, military occupation, forced detention, war crimes, and human rights violations. Despite being called out by various international organizations, Israel is able to justify its actions under the realm of chosen trauma. Hence, the notion of chosen trauma is employed to justify Jewish atrocities against the Palestinians.

Freud as Talmudist - Jewish Review of Books

But Freud testified that “my father allowed me to grow up in complete ignorance of everything that concerned Judaism.” Some scholars have made much of the fact that Jacob once gave his son a Bible with a Hebrew inscription, but when the adult Freud was given a book with a Hebrew message, he replied that he was entirely unable to read it. The belief that one’s children would be more burdened than fortified by Jewish knowledge was shared by many Jewish parents in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, in Brooklyn and Tel Aviv no less than in Vienna.

As for religious faith, Freud of course had none, identifying on occasion with Jewish unbelievers like Heinrich Heine and Baruch Spinoza. A strict rationalist, he theorized in The Future of an Illusion (1927) that the origins of religion lay in “the terrifying impression of helplessness in childhood,” which “aroused the need for protection—for protection through love—which was provided by the father.” God is the imaginary father adults call on to avoid confronting “the full extent of their helplessness and their insignificance in the machinery of the universe.” But “men cannot remain children forever,” Freud says, demanding that we emancipate ourselves from faith.

Freud as Talmudist

War

The Oxford Dictionary defines a “tragedy” as a play “concerning the downfall of the main character”. This main character is often referred to as the “tragic hero.” “Tragic heroes typically have heroic traits that earn them the sympathy of the audience, but also have flaws or make mistakes that ultimately lead to their own downfall.”

Literature is littered with tragic heroes — beginning with Lucifer of Judeo-Christian mythology, later Shakespeare’s Macbeth, Camus’ Clamence, and more recently Walter White of the TV series Breaking Bad. And so is real life: US President Richard Nixon, actor Bill Cosby, and cyclist Lance Armstrong. All people who gained support, success, fame, admiration, and power — only to lose it all because of the abuse of that power. Sometimes the tragic hero can be a nation.

The eyes of the world have watched the unfolding story of Israel over the past 75 years. What many saw as an inspirational tale in its early years has slowly turned into a tragedy — and the hero into a bully.

Bad bad Jewish New York Confused Writing, “almost”  ALWAYS: A Jewish Stance of Eternal Victimhood Fails Us All — The suffering of Jews doesn’t mean that Jews can’t make others suffer.

I grew up in the shadow of the Holocaust in a mainly Jewish community in New York. There were also South Africans who’d fled apartheid, as well as Persian Jews who’d been forced out of Iran after the Shah fell. Fleeing oppression tends to create an open-minded, liberal community — one that I have been proud to be part of traditionally, if not religiously — or, conversely, it can create a community that dangerously closes ranks, which I find particularly telling today when looking at what Israel is perpetrating in Gaza.

These effing so-called Jewish and Liberal New Yorkers are Bonkers in Yonkers: above quote.

The Israeli government has pivoted to a new deflection: The famine in Gaza is not the result of Israel’s publicly announced March 2 blockade of all food entering Gaza, nor is it connected to the Israeli- and U.S.-backed Gaza Humanitarian Foundation (GHF), which replaced the UNRWA aid system Israel shut down with its own militarized version in late May. Instead, according to the new Israeli campaign, the blame lies with the United Nations. “Hundreds of aid trucks have entered Gaza with Israel’s approval, but the supplies are standing idle, undelivered,” the Israeli Ministry of Foreign Affairs declared on X. “The reason? The UN refuses to distribute the aid.”

Clearly sensing a turning-point in world opinion, as the death toll from starvation mounts exponentially in Gaza, Israel brought dozens of sympathetic journalists to a crossing to wage a PR campaign on Thursday.

Comment on X: Bushra Shaikh — You haven’t let any International Journalists into Gaza freely since the aggression began. So IDF-controlled journalists in a 2-hour tour is not journalism. Try again, rabid liars.

Netanyahu gifts 'golden pager' to Trump; Know ‘hidden meaning’ behind Bibi’s gift

Oh, more than rabid liars. Rabid misanthropes, and they turned the Vice President into this glorifying Dipshit Faux Man, and what and who are these journalists who won’t attack the Vice President  and President Trump or his POTUS: Adolph “bibi” Mileikowsky.

Myriam François sits down with journalist Ahmed Shihab-Eldin to confront the media’s complicity in power — and the price of telling the truth. From abused children to erased journalists, this is a brutal exposé on how mainstream media narratives are shaped, sanitised, and sold. We break down how coverage of Gaza and Palestinian lives is distorted — and why “mistake” is the media’s favourite euphemism for mass murder.

Image

Nah, Jewish folk don’t control the White Man’s House and Minyan, or Higher Education:

Hudson Whittaker was a Chicago blues musician who performed under the name Tampa Red. One of his finest compositions, entitled “Don’t Deal with the Devil,” opens with the following warning:

When you dealin’ with the devil
Everything you do is wrong
You’ll drive away your lover
And keep all your things in pawn…
Don’t deal with the devil, cuz it ain’t no way to win.

Zionist Jews are the Collective Devil:

Fucking Military Industrial Complex and so-called Business Chlamydia Capitalism Schools:

Stanford Graduate School of Business, long considered among the most elite MBA programs in the world, is facing a storm of internal criticism from students who say the academic experience has fallen far short of expectations. In a series of interviews with Poets&Quants, current MBA students voiced concerns about outdated course content, a disengaged faculty culture, and a broken curriculum structure that they say leaves them unprepared for post-MBA careers — and worse, dilutes the reputation and long-term value of a Stanford degree by producing scores of grads unprepared for the modern world of work.

“We’re coming to the best business school on Earth, and the professors can’t teach,” says a rising second-year MBA student and elected member of the school’s Student Association. “We’re not learning anything. The brand is strong, but there’s nothing here to help you build discernible skills.”

a man in a black military uniform sits at a desk behind microphones

Albino head of the War Lord’s SNAKE:

“I firmly believe that the technology that we need to deliver Golden Dome exists today.”

Yep, there goes the neighborhood: A draft of President Dwight D. Eisenhower’s farewell address shows changes made around a reference to the military industrial complex at the Eisenhower Presidential Library in Abilene, Kansas, the U.S., December 10, 2010.

A draft of President Dwight D. Eisenhower's farewell address shows changes made around a reference to the military industrial complex at the Eisenhower Presidential Library in Abilene, Kansas, the U.S., December 10, 2010. /AP

The head of the Trump administration’s Golden Dome program says the technologies needed to create an ambitious space-based missile defense system are already in existence.

U.S. Space Force General Michael Guetlein, Vice Chief of Space Operations, was tapped by President Trump to lead the Golden Dome project on May 20 and was confirmed by the U.S. Senate on July 17. His role will be to oversee the development and procurement of technologies for Golden Dome, a planned missile defense system that can shoot down incoming hypersonic, cruise, and ballistic missiles from space.

This is devolution. Apartment Buildings Bombed.

A man walks past an apartment building heavily damaged in the Russia-Ukraine conflict, in Mariupol, Ukraine, November 16, 2022. /Reuters

“American-style democracy advocates that everyone has one vote, but ordinary voters simply cannot compete with the campaign investment paid by the big financial groups in the military-industrial complex,” said Zhang Tengjun, deputy director of the China Institute of International Studies Asia Pacific.

Another powerful tool of the military-industrial complex is its ability to shape elite discussions on national security issues by funding foreign policy think tanks.

At least 14 of the 15 think tanks represented in House Armed Services Committee hearings from January 2020 to September 2022 accepted arms industry cash, according to “US government and defense contractor funding of America’s top 50 think tanks” report by Bee Freeman, a research fellow with expertise in lobbying and money in politics at the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft.

“Think tanks are supposed to shape government policies in an unbiased manner, free from the influence of big money that can distort in-house policy planning,” said Stephen Semler, cofounder of Security Policy Reform Institute, a grassroots-funded U.S. foreign policy think tank.

However, many of the most influential think tanks have been compromised by the same financial interests as Congress, including military contractors, Semler argued.

Ukrainian servicemen use a Bureviy multiple launch rocket system at a position in Donetsk region, Ukraine, November 29, 2022. /Reuters

Weapons contractors are the main financial beneficiary.One-quarter to one-third of all Pentagon contracts in recent years have gone to just five major weapons contractors, including Lockheed Martin and Boeing, according to research from the Watson Institute at Brown University.

The direct military sales by U.S. companies rose nearly 50 percent in fiscal year 2022 from the previous year, data released by the U.S. State Department shows.

MIC

Deaths and injuries from such wars have reached the tens of millions. The number of estimated deaths from the post-9/11 wars in Afghanistan, Iraq, Pakistan, Syria, and Yemen is eerily similar to that from the wars in Vietnam, Laos, and Cambodia: 4.5 million.

The numbers are so large that they can become numbing. The Irish poet Pádraig Ó Tuama helps us remember to focus on:

one life
one life
one life
one life
one life
because each time
is the first time
that that life
has been taken.

MIC 2

As the MIC has fueled wars abroad, so it has fueled militarization domestically. Why, for example, have domestic police forces become so militarized? At least part of the answer: since 1990, Congress has allowed the Pentagon to transfer its “excess” weaponry and equipment (including tanks and drones) to local law enforcement agencies. These transfers conveniently allow the Pentagon and its contractors to ask Congress for replacement purchases, further fueling the MIC.

Seeking new profits from new markets, contractors have also increasingly hawked their military products directly to SWAT teams and other police forces, border patrol outfits, and prison systems. Politicians and corporations have poured billions of dollars into border militarization and mass incarceration, helping fuel the rise of the lucrative “border-industrial complex” and “prison-industrial complex,” respectively. Domestic militarization has disproportionately harmed BlackLatino, and Indigenous communities.

KYIV, UKRAINE - APRIL 28: Smoke rises after missiles landed at sunset on April 28, 2022 in Kyiv, Ukraine. The mayor of Kyiv, Vitali Klitschko, said on his Telegram account that Russian strikes hit the lower floors of a residential building in the Shevchenkivskyi district. The attack coincides with today's visit to Kyiv by UN Secretary-General Antonio Guterres. (Photo by John Moore/Getty Images)

You think? Reducing military spending would rein in U.S. debt and improve global security

What’s missing? All the defunding and tax payer coffer smash and grabs: Education, roads, bridges, medical clinics, rural doctors, health care for all — single payer — public transportation, more parks, less clear cutting and mountaintop removal, mitigating all the destruction caused by US industries (microplastics, poisons, forever chemicals, disease, CAFOs, fenceline communities), arts, sciences, ecology and marine and estuary restoration, wildland fire fighting, ocean inundation, wet bulb temperature deaths and stress, and MORE MORE MORE.

What’s dragging down and/or missing in your community? Too many pigs/cops? ICE raids? Cost of housing or lack thereof?

An end to this?

Getty Images Donald Trump with his girlfriend (and future wife) Melania Knauss, Jeffrey Epstein and Ghislaine Maxwell in Florida in 2000

Watch: “It’s exhausting” – Epstein accuser talks to the BBC about files saga

And so the Jewish Project toward Gazafication and Israelification of the world continues:

Why Was There More Outrage for Colbert’s Cancellation Than for 2 Million Palestinians Starving in Gaza?

The liberal establishment gave outsized attention to Colbert compared to the increasingly dire hunger in Gaza.

A perfect fucking target. Oh, Larry Silverstein is on the job, after his billions in bilking 9/11 and the Jewish and Israeli insurance scam:

Concept for postwar Gaza from the project “Great Trust” in which the Tony Blair Institute participated to develop a postwar Gaza plan that envisaged kick-starting the enclave’s economy with a “Trump Riviera” and an “Elon Musk Smart Manufacturing Zone.” It proposed paying half a million Palestinians to leave the area and attracting private investors to develop Gaza..

Yeah, business schools?

In her 60-page report, Albanese writes that her research “reveals how the forever-occupation has become the ideal testing ground for arms manufacturers and Big Tech… while investors and private and public institutions profit freely.”

Her point was underscored by the Israeli arms firm Rafael, which issued a promotional video of its Spike FireFly drone that showed it locating, chasing and killing a Palestinian in what it called “urban warfare” in Gaza.

As the UN special rapporteur points out, quite aside from the issue of genocide in Gaza, western companies have been under a legal and moral obligation to sever ties with Israel’s system of occupation since last summer.

That was when the world’s highest court, the International Court of Justice, ruled Israel’s decades-old occupation was a criminal enterprise based on apartheid and forcible transfer—or what Albanese refers to as policies of “displacement and replacement.”

Instead, the corporate sector—and western governments—continue to deepen their involvement in Israel’s crimes.

It is not just arms manufacturers profiting from the genocidal levelling of Gaza and the occupations of the West Bank and East Jerusalem.

Big Tech, construction and materials firms, agribusiness, the tourism industry, the goods and services sector, and supply chains have also got in on the act.

And enabling it all is a finance sector—which includes banks, pension funds, universities, insurers and charities—keen to continue investing in this architecture of oppression.

Albanese describes the mosaic of companies partnering with Israel as “an eco-system sustaining this illegality.” — Israel’s Genocide Is Big Business And It’s The Face Of The Future

One of my Substack followers mentioned how I didn’t have a rant against the Jews of Murdering Maiming Occupying Raping Starving Poisoning Thieving Israel that day. Shit dawg, there’s always room for more critiques of Jews.

In a rare public comment, Jewish tech leader Sergey Brin strongly criticized the United Nations, calling it “deeply offensive” and “transparently antisemitic” after a UN report accused tech companies like Google of

The Washington Post reported that, in the wake of Albanese’s report, Google’s co-founder, Sergey Brin, called the UN “transparently antisemitic” in a chat on a staff forum.

Lakota Language

Dirty languages of the white races:

March in Lakota History - Lakota Times

Educator, musician, activist, and creator of First Voices Radio, Tiokasin Ghosthorse. Tiokasin is a member of the Cheyenne River Lakota Nation of South Dakota, and shares deep wisdom from the Lakota worldview, language, and traditions.

He explores ways for us to redefine our relationship with Mother Earth, moving away from a mindset of separation and domination towards one of interconnectedness, mutual becoming, and intuition. Tiokasin shares how we can be more in tune with Earth’s natural rhythm to become more present in the now and more connected to the future.

The Indigenous way of being involves an openness to seeing and feeling our ancestors—not just our human ancestors, but also the earth itself. Tiokasin stresses the need for us to de-center humans in order to reconnect with nature, and demonstrates how understanding the living Lakota language can affect a cultural mindset shift in that direction.

*****

[Jewish freighters on the Santa Fe Trail with hired Kiowa Indian scouts.]

David S. Koffman: The title The Jews’ Indian is a play on a Robert Berkhofer, Jr.’s book from 1978, The White Man’s Indian: Images of the American Indian from Columbus to the Present.

I read that book in grad school and I liked the way that it forced the reader to think about the subject and the object. This was a book that was not about Native Americans. It was looking at white people’s representations of Native Americans.

I took this on as a similar project, but thought it important to disaggregate the category of “white man” and look specifically at Jews, with the hopes that other people might also look at sub-aggregates of colonists. Because people, for the most part, have seldom taken on colonial-settler identities. They think of themselves as Portuguese immigrants, or as Catholics, or as Mormons, but not “settlers.”

My interest is in seeing colonial actors as people who had ordinary economic and political concerns, who are desperate in their own way. I think that this study forces us to reckon with some of the political and moral ambiguities of settler-indigenous relations. Jews in the 19th century, like many others who arrived in the frontier West seeking to eke out a living, were often fleeing hunger, political violence, and disenfranchisement. Though they arrived as more powerful than Native Americans, they were not official state actors—they were, in a certain sense, refugees. We tend to think of the agents of settler-colonialism as military or political elites who created the conditions for expansion. But many were just pawns in the larger process. Jewish-Indigenous encounters were complicated; it’s not really a matter of good guys and bad guys, even though there are beneficiaries and losers.

The post Oh, Darn, the Ultimate Victims Have Cornered the Market on Nazism first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Paul Haeder.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/oh-darn-the-ultimate-victims-have-cornered-the-market-on-nazism-2/feed/ 0 546337
Hospital nurses STRIKE for FIRST TIME in Baltimore history at Ascension St. Agnes https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/hospital-nurses-strike-for-first-time-in-baltimore-history-at-ascension-st-agnes/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/hospital-nurses-strike-for-first-time-in-baltimore-history-at-ascension-st-agnes/#respond Sat, 26 Jul 2025 00:25:44 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=29540bd388e676b5f8d9f4f4d700e1bd
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/26/hospital-nurses-strike-for-first-time-in-baltimore-history-at-ascension-st-agnes/feed/ 0 546287
Watchdog: Emil Bove Privately Met With The Extreme Right-Wing Group Alliance Defending Freedom Whose Cases Could Come Before Bove on 3rd Circuit https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/watchdog-emil-bove-privately-met-with-the-extreme-right-wing-group-alliance-defending-freedom-whose-cases-could-come-before-bove-on-3rd-circuit/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/watchdog-emil-bove-privately-met-with-the-extreme-right-wing-group-alliance-defending-freedom-whose-cases-could-come-before-bove-on-3rd-circuit/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 23:29:10 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/watchdog-emil-bove-privately-met-with-the-extreme-right-wing-group-alliance-defending-freedom-whose-cases-could-come-before-bove-on-3rd-circuit A new Accountable.US investigation, first reported by Huff Post, has revealed new concerns about Emil Bove, President Donald Trump’s former defense attorney and his “enforcer” within the Department of Justice, who is nominated for a lifetime judgeship on the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit. In a Senate questionnaire, Bove revealed that he’s conferred with a top Alliance Defending Freedom (ADF) official to discuss his qualifications, judicial philosophy, and confirmation preparation. ADF is a Southern Poverty Law Center-designated anti-LGBTQ+ hate group that has been instrumental in overturning Roe v. Wade and advancing right-wing legal positions nationwide.

Making matters worse, ADF is actively involved in at least one case, Heaps v. Delaware Valley Regional High School Board of Education, that is set to come before the Third Circuit Court of Appeals. That means, if confirmed, Bove could preside over cases involving an organization he consulted with during his nomination process – a fundamental breach of judicial ethics.

“The red flags on Emil Bove’s judicial nomination are piling up. Bove has shown unflinching loyalty to his former client and current boss, Donald Trump; has refused to commit to recusing himself on cases involving the President; and is the subject of a whistleblower complaint casting doubt on his integrity and highlighting his lack of respect for the law. Now it’s clear that he has also conferred with a far-right legal organization that has matters before the court on which he would serve,” said Accountable.US President Caroline Ciccone. “Bove has repeatedly disregarded the ethical standards of the federal judiciary and the rule of law – his lifetime appointment opens the door for the President and his allies to seek out favorable rulings, no matter how unconstitutional their actions may be. Trust in the judiciary is at an all-time low because of repeated ethical lapses. If the Senate confirms Bove, it will undermine the credibility of the court even further.”

It’s just the latest disqualification for Bove, who is under a whistleblower investigation for misconduct while at the Department of Justice, and has come to be known as the Administration's “hatchet man.” Earlier this month, an Accountable.US research report revealed that Bove has not committed to key recusals ahead of his nomination hearing. In a nomination form, Bove pledged to recuse himself from “situations that present actual conflicts of interest based on my current or prior positions at the Department of Justice” – but he’s refrained from preemptively recusing himself from any future case involving his former client and current boss, Donald Trump.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/watchdog-emil-bove-privately-met-with-the-extreme-right-wing-group-alliance-defending-freedom-whose-cases-could-come-before-bove-on-3rd-circuit/feed/ 0 546297
Paramount-Skydance Deal Subverts Free Speech and the Free Press in America https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/paramount-skydance-deal-subverts-free-speech-and-the-free-press-in-america/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/paramount-skydance-deal-subverts-free-speech-and-the-free-press-in-america/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 23:23:48 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/paramount-skydance-deal-subverts-free-speech-and-the-free-press-in-america Open Markets Institute Executive Director Barry Lynn released the following statement on the Federal Communications Commission’s 2-1 vote to approve Skydance’s acquisition of Paramount:

“Skydance and Paramount’s self-censorship and pay-off of the Trump Administration, in pursuit of government approval of an unwise merger, is worthy of condemnation. But it’s important to view Paramount’s action within two broader contexts.

First, it marks but the latest in a long series of attacks by this administration on free speech and the free press in America, including unprecedented attacks on universities, newspapers, and even the oligarchs who control America’s communications platforms. The purpose of antimonopoly regulation is to establish a rule of law to protect individual liberty and the distributions of power on which democracy depends, not extort favors from desperate corporations.

Second, it’s important to remember how CBS and so many other news and entertainment companies came to this point. Today’s assaults on free speech and the free press are the direct result of the fantastically naïve pro-monopoly policies put in place under presidents Reagan and Clinton. It was Google and Facebook, after all, that for 15 years starved American newspapers and broadcasters of the ad dollars on which they always depended, and directly suppressed the ability of readers and viewers to connect with the reporters and publishers of their choice.

CBS and Paramount have been in deep trouble for years now. Many leading liberals helped create that crisis.

One immediate lesson stands out. Democracies around the world must beware. As the Trump administration tries to use tariffs and trade policy to loosen regulation of tech monopolists, theoretically in the name of free speech, remember always that their goal is the exact opposite.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/paramount-skydance-deal-subverts-free-speech-and-the-free-press-in-america/feed/ 0 546301
Did Israel attempt to sabotage the Gaza Freedom Flotilla? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/did-israel-attempt-to-sabotage-the-gaza-freedom-flotilla/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/did-israel-attempt-to-sabotage-the-gaza-freedom-flotilla/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:58:28 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=77f92019996e4853304057515f65b2a5
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/did-israel-attempt-to-sabotage-the-gaza-freedom-flotilla/feed/ 0 546255
‘People Don’t Want to Be Complicit in War Crimes’: CounterSpin interview with Iman Abid on the genocide economy https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/people-dont-want-to-be-complicit-in-war-crimes-counterspin-interview-with-iman-abid-on-the-genocide-economy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/people-dont-want-to-be-complicit-in-war-crimes-counterspin-interview-with-iman-abid-on-the-genocide-economy/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:57:49 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046691  

Janine Jackson interviewed the US Campaign for Palestinian Rights’ Iman Abid about the economy of genocide for the July 18, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

 

Al Jazeera: UN report lists companies complicit in Israel’s ‘genocide’: Who are they?

Al Jazeera (7/1/25)

Janine Jackson: Francesca Albanese, UN special rapporteur for the West Bank and Gaza, has called down all manner of official and unofficial grief for saying what any thinking person would know: that a mass extermination and displacement project, such as Israel is carrying out in Palestine, doesn’t fund itself.

As US citizens, we know we’re involved, that our “tax dollars” are used by politicians we may or may not have elected to do things that we don’t condone, much less endorse. But what US elite news media seem to hate above all things is the connecting of dots, the recognition that we are all related across borders and boundaries.

That the thing that brought US sanction was Albanese’s naming of defense companies providing weapons used by Israel’s military, makers of equipment used to bulldoze Palestinian homes, is telling. Watching corporate media try to maintain the notion that, yes, Citizens United said money is speech, and you can’t curtail that, but no, you absolutely cannot say that people might not want to support companies who are funding a genocide. Well, that’s telling about media as well.

Joining us now to talk about this is Iman Abid. She’s director of advocacy and organizing at the US Campaign for Palestinian Rights. She joins us now by phone. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Iman Abid.

Iman Abid: Thank you so much.

JJ: The statement in Albanese’s report, “While life in Gaza is being obliterated and the West Bank is under escalating assault, this report shows why Israel’s genocide continues: because it is lucrative for many”—I mean, it’s only in a weird world of elite media that that would be something that you can’t say. That should just be a point of information in our understanding, yes?

IA: At any point in time that we target or uplift the war crimes that these large corporations are partaking in, we’ve seen just how silenced or suppressed people are, and Francesca has now been a part of that. She’s brought a lot to light in this new document that has come out, information that many people, in various forms, have already uplifted, but has done a really incredible job at trying to both consolidate and make the information a lot more accessible. And so, since it is a lot more digestible to see, it’s easier to access. Weapons manufacturers and large corporations have been extremely disappointed in what the world is able to finally see.

Iman Abid

Iman Abid: “Weapons manufacturers and large corporations have been extremely disappointed in what the world is able to finally see.” (Photo: Thomas Morrisey, Rochester Democrat & Chronicle.)

JJ: Right. Transparency is their enemy.

IA: Yeah, exactly.

JJ: And you would think that journalists—whatever they want to say about it—would support the idea that the public can understand exactly what’s happening. And yet that’s not the response that we’ve seen, from certainly the US officially, but also from journalists. I don’t feel that they are celebrating this report in a way that one would hope.

IA: Absolutely. I think that the reality is that much of the documentation, and the notes that are provided to us for review in this report, showcase not just what has been going on, and what corporations have been enacting for the last two years, throughout the duration of the genocide, but rather for the last few decades. This information has been available to the public, available to journalists and reporters, for a really long time, and for whatever reason, people generally choose to still avoid it.

Now, whether or not they themselves—certain news outlets have partnerships with some of these corporations, and they’re keeping them quiet for that purpose, or if there’s any other reason where maybe they as individuals are profiting off of these corporations themselves, we’ve seen just how silent people are when it comes to uplifting the harms of these corporations.

JJ: What do you hope or think might be the impact? Because it seems, obviously, Marco Rubio saying, “Ah! Shut up! Sanctions!” is telling that this information is important. What do you hope might be used? How do you think it might be used?

IA: My hope is that, especially for the American people, in any point in time, when this administration tries to silence someone, when they implement sanctions or any of that, I really encourage people to take a look at their work. And Francesca Albanese is an incredibly profound, extraordinary being who has spent their career building up and bringing awareness to the atrocities happening to the Palestinian people. This report is only one aspect of the work that she’s been so committed to.

NPR: U.S. issues sanctions against United Nations investigator probing abuses in Gaza

NPR (7/10/25)

And I think that people like Marco Rubio, and other people within the Trump administration, don’t want you to see this, because they themselves are, again, establishing partnerships, or have established partnerships, with these corporations. And even some of the members of Congress, who have also uplifted and supported the sanctions on Francesca Albanese, some of them are war profiteers. They are the ones who are both building up the contracts with the federal government, or supporting the contracts with the federal government, to keep these corporations alive and thriving.

I think the report itself mentions on every single page just how Palestine is being used as this sort of military technology incubator. It’s an opportunity for these companies to use their work, and to see how it works on the Palestinian people. They’re almost using us as dispensable objects for their weapons. And I think that a lot of that is uplifted in this document.

And because of the atrocities that are being highlighted, and because of the direct connection to the United States Congress, the United States administration, it just shows an incredibly bad light on the US. And it also showcases just how harmful the partnerships and the military investment really is, across not only the US, but across the globe.

JJ: Elite media seem vigorously invested in policing lines between “us” and “them,” but it’s not working. Support for Palestinian human rights is growing, even as it’s being seriously criminalized. So where are you seeing daylight? Because I see a lot of people being extremely brave and using information, such as in this Albanese report, to say, “We’re armed. We’re armed with information, and we’re not going to buy the line that we’re being sold.”

IA: Absolutely. I think the movement has grown exponentially, and I think it’s simply because of the fact that we have watched this livestreamed genocide take place. And I think that when people see the level of death, when people see the level of atrocity, especially for those who’ve sat on social media platforms and watched the video footage and documentation of what’s been happening across Gaza, it’s become extremely difficult to deny what’s actually happening.

And people are moved. People are moved to speak up, people are moved to stand up, even against the faces of oppression, the Zionist forces that are trying to silence people, and they’re choosing to say that I don’t want to be on the wrong side of history, I want to take a stand on this, and not just a stand in the streets, but a strategic stand that allows me and my community to actually move towards getting this genocide to end, and for us to stop upholding these atrocities being committed against Palestinians.

Al Jazeera: Norwegian pension fund dumps Caterpillar over Gaza war risks

Al Jazeera (6/26/24)

It’s been deeply fortunate that so many reports have come out, even just the last two years alone, not only of the weapons that have been used on Palestinians, but just what specific correlation there is between the US, the complicity of the US, and what’s been happening across Gaza and the rest of the West Bank, and even in parts of Jerusalem. And so people are starting to really see that direct line between themselves as US taxpayers, and where and what their money is being spent on, and just how it’s actually being used to abuse, assault and murder Palestinians. And people don’t want to be on that side. People don’t want to be complicit. I don’t think anyone wants to be complicit in war crimes being committed, and mass genocides being committed.

And so I think we’re starting to see just how people are really trying to take that next step, and acknowledge there are different avenues that people can take to really get things to stop. And whether it’s the targeting of weapons manufacturers like Caterpillar or Hyundai or Elbit, whoever is actually equipping Israel with the technology and the software and the technology that’s being used to destroy homes, whatever it may be, people are using these sorts of reports to help uplift the documentation that already exists, to bring attention to these corporations that we, as the United States, as US taxpayers, are investing in.

And they’re choosing to say that we don’t want this. We don’t want this to continue. And we, again, as taxpayers can do something about it.

JJ: And I’ll end on the media thing, that it calls out the media hypocrisy, because when folks were pouring out their Bud Light because they had a trans person in an ad, media were sort of celebrating: Oh, you’re using your consumer voice, you’re speaking with your dollars, right? And then out of the other side of their mouth, they want to say, Well, BDS is criminal. You’re not allowed to not shop at a store, or whatever, that supports genocide. So to me, it tells the tale on US media’s understanding of what a consumer gets to do with their voice.

IA: Absolutely. Again, yes, the exceptionalizing of Palestine, the exceptionalizing of the BDS movement, still exists, but we are seeing a shift. We are seeing people break beyond that, and actually start to question and start to ask themselves, why has the BDS movement actually existed for as long as it has?

Again, boycotting, divestment, sanctions is not an area that’s just particular to the Palestinian movement. It’s been used with South Africa, it’s been used in other parts of the world, because it is something that actually works. When we stop the transfer of dollars to these corporations, and to these entities like Israel that are actually upholding the genocide and the mass expulsion of Palestinians, we do start to see the shifting of it.

Mondoweiss: The Shift: House Republicans pull anti-BDS bill from schedule

Mondoweiss (5/8/25)

And the Israeli economy, as a matter of fact, is actually beginning to decline, because of the level of education and the expansion of the Palestinian solidarity movement across the globe. And people are trying to be wiser about where they’re spending their dollars. And so I think that we’re not in the exact place we want to be just yet, but we are moving the needle towards where we want to go, and people are being wiser about where money is going.

And so while governments and elected officials are really still working hard to suppress any sort of BDS movement, whether it’s through the anti-BDS proposals, or if it’s through the sanctioning of certain individuals, the people themselves are starting to actually say: “Well, wait a minute. Why are you choosing to suppress us for engaging in this, when we know it’s the right thing to do?”

And members of Congress are starting to be a little more alert, and start to say, “Wait a minute, this isn’t actually a winning issue for me if I choose to engage in it. And it’s not necessarily something that I should really be pushing for.” Because people are becoming more attentive. And it’s allowing us, again, to move the needle where we really want to see us going.

JJ: We’ve been speaking with Iman Abid from the US Campaign for Palestinian Rights. They’re online at USCPR.org. Iman Abid, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

IA: Thank you so much.

 

 

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/people-dont-want-to-be-complicit-in-war-crimes-counterspin-interview-with-iman-abid-on-the-genocide-economy/feed/ 0 546249
Cutting Housing Counseling Is a Grave Mistake https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/cutting-housing-counseling-is-a-grave-mistake/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/cutting-housing-counseling-is-a-grave-mistake/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:50:29 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/cutting-housing-counseling-is-a-grave-mistake-young-20250725/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by David Young.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/cutting-housing-counseling-is-a-grave-mistake/feed/ 0 546243
Defending Their Land: Traditional Black communities resist Brazil’s Alcântara Space Center https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/defending-their-land-traditional-black-communities-resist-brazils-alcantara-space-center/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/defending-their-land-traditional-black-communities-resist-brazils-alcantara-space-center/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:05:36 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335791 After decades of threats, the Brazilian government has finally recognized Alcântara Quilombo Territory. This is episode 59 of Stories of Resistance.]]>

On the Northeastern Brazilian coast, in the region of Alcântara, Maranhão, there are dozens of traditional villages of Black communities. Their families have lived here for generations — farming and fishing. They are known as quilombos. These villages were founded by their ancestors, who were either freed or who escaped enslavement on the plantations of Brazil.

There are thousands of quilombos across Brazil. But only a small number have the titles to their lands. And many are under threat from development projects, resource extraction, Big Ag, and real estate. This was the story in Alcântara, where these communities have faced removal and threats from Brazil’s Alcântara Space Center. 

But they have fought back.

This is episode 59 of Stories of Resistance—a podcast co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, we’ll bring you stories of resistance like this. Inspiration for dark times.

Sign up for the Stories of Resistance podcast feed, either in Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Spreaker, or wherever you listen.

Please consider supporting this podcast and Michael Fox’s reporting on his Patreon account: patreon.com/mfox. There you can also see exclusive pictures, video, and interviews. 

Written and produced by Michael Fox.

Transcript

On the Northeastern Brazilian coast,

In the region of Alcântara, Maranhao… 

there are dozens of traditional villages of Black communities. 

Their families have lived here for generations.

Farming and fishing. The ocean… the main source of sustenance. 

They are known as quilombos.

These villages were founded by their ancestors 

who were either freed or who escaped enslavement on the plantations of Brazil

Today, more than a million people around the country self-identify as quilombolas or quilombo residents.

There are thousands of quilombos across Brazil.

But only a small number have the titles to their lands.

And many are under threat from development projects, resource extraction, Big Ag, and real estate.

This was the story in Alcântara.

See…. Here, in the early 1980s, Brazil’s military dictatorship built the Alcântara Space Center. 

Near the equator, this was a prime site for launching rockets into space.

But in order to do it, they had to remove the quilombo communities that lived on the land. 

300 families were taken from their ancestral homes

And moved to new inland villages far from the coast…

Far from their means of survival.

Far from the ocean…

Community residents still remember how hard it was….

Many quilombos were left outside the boundaries of the new launch site.

And they were allowed to stay….  For the time being. 

But they remained under constant threat. 

Years. Decades under the threat of removal

When the Alcântara Space Center would eventually expand…

The community of Mamuna would be the first to go.

But they and their neighbors would not go quietly.

They began to organize.

They joined with the other quilombos in the region. 

[MUSIC]

In 2019, however, the United States and Brazil signed an agreement over the launch site

They promised expansion, igniting old concerns.

But the residents would not go quietly.

They spoke out. They lobbied in Brasilia.

They brought their case in defense of their territory before the InterAmerican Court of Human Rights. And the court ruled in their favor.

Finally… 

In 2024, the government of president Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva

Officially recognized the nearly 800 square kilometers of Alcantara Quilombo Territory 

And committed to giving the quilombo communities the titles to their land.

Community residents say their struggle is not over yet. 

But they are hopeful.

Resistance over decades in defense of their ancestral homes and communities.

Resistance. Unity. Hope and success…

Hi folks, thanks for listening. I’m your host Michael Fox.

I visited quilombo communities in Alcantara back in 2019 and did some reporting for The Real News and other outlets. I’ll add a link in the show notes.

As always, if you like what you hear and enjoy this podcast, please consider becoming a subscriber on my Patreon. It’s only a few dollars a month. I have a ton of exclusive content there, only available to my supporters. And every supporter really makes a difference.

This is episode 59 of Stories of Resistance, a podcast series co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, I bring you stories of resistance and hope like this. Inspiration for dark times. If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment, or leave a review.

Thanks for listening. See you next time.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/defending-their-land-traditional-black-communities-resist-brazils-alcantara-space-center/feed/ 0 546228
Baltimore joins GLOBAL PROTEST to end Israel’s genocidal Gaza blockade https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/baltimore-joins-global-protest-to-end-israels-genocidal-gaza-blockade/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/baltimore-joins-global-protest-to-end-israels-genocidal-gaza-blockade/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:03:09 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=68c0ab384b32369dd79c96ace3a4af4c
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/baltimore-joins-global-protest-to-end-israels-genocidal-gaza-blockade/feed/ 0 546230
The Drying Planet https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-drying-planet/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-drying-planet/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/water-aquifers-groundwater-rising-ocean-levels by Abrahm Lustgarten, Graphics by Lucas Waldron, Illustrations by Olivier Kugler for ProPublica

As the planet gets hotter and its reservoirs shrink and its glaciers melt, people have increasingly drilled into a largely ungoverned, invisible cache of fresh water: the vast, hidden pools found deep underground.

Now, a new study that examines the world’s total supply of fresh water — accounting for its rivers and rain, ice and aquifers together — warns that Earth’s most essential resource is quickly disappearing, signaling what the paper’s authors describe as “a critical, emerging threat to humanity.” The landmasses of the planet are drying. In most places there is less precipitation even as moisture evaporates from the soil faster. More than anything, Earth is being slowly dehydrated by the unmitigated mining of groundwater, which underlies vast proportions of every continent. Nearly 6 billion people, or three quarters of humanity, live in the 101 countries that the study identified as confronting a net decline in water supply — portending enormous challenges for food production and a heightening risk of conflict and instability.

The paper “provides a glimpse of what the future is going to be,” said Hrishikesh Chandanpurkar, an earth systems scientist working with Arizona State University and the lead author of the study. “We are already dipping from a trust fund. We don’t actually know how much the account has.”

The research, published on Friday in the journal Science Advances, confirms not just that droughts and precipitation are growing more extreme but reports that drying regions are fast expanding. It also found that while parts of the planet are getting wetter, those areas are shrinking. The study, which excludes the ice sheets of Antarctica and Greenland, concludes not only that Earth is suffering a pandemic of “continental drying” in lower latitudes, but that it is the uninhibited pumping of groundwater by farmers, cities and corporations around the world that now accounts for 68% of the total loss of fresh water in those areas, which generally don’t have glaciers.

Groundwater is ubiquitous across the globe, but its quality and depth vary, as does its potential to be replenished by rainfall. Major groundwater basins — the deep and often high-quality aquifers — underlie roughly one-third of the planet, including roughly half of Africa, Europe and South America. But many of those aquifers took millions of years to form and might take thousands of years to refill. Instead, a significant portion of the water taken from underground flows off the land through rivers and on to the oceans.

The researchers were surprised to find that the loss of water on the continents has grown so dramatically that it has become one of the largest causes of global sea level rise. Moisture lost to evaporation and drought, plus runoff from pumped groundwater, now outpaces the melting of glaciers and the ice sheets of either Antarctica or Greenland as the largest contributor of water to the oceans.

Water From Land Has Become a Leading Driver of Sea Level Rise

Most of the water lost from drying regions is from groundwater pumping, which ultimately shifts fresh water from aquifers into the oceans.

Note: Glaciers refer to the parts of the continents covered in glaciers but excludes the ice sheets of Greenland and Antarctica. Drying land and aquifers refer to the water lost by the continents in areas not covered by glaciers, including river flow and evaporation. Groundwater loss accounts for 68% of the drying in those places.

The study examines 22 years of observational data from NASA’s Gravity Recovery and Climate Experiment, or GRACE, satellites, which measure changes in the mass of the earth and have been applied to estimate its water content. The technique was groundbreaking two decades ago when the study’s co-author, Jay Famiglietti, who was then a professor at the University of California, at Irvine, used it to pinpoint where aquifers were in decline. Since then, he and others have published dozens of papers using GRACE data, but the question has always lingered: What does the groundwater loss mean in the context of all of the water available on the continents? So Famiglietti, now a professor at Arizona State University, set out to inventory all the land-based water contained in glaciers, rivers and aquifers and see what was changing. The answer: everything, and quickly.

Since 2002, the GRACE sensors have detected a rapid shift in water loss patterns around the planet. Around 2014, though, the pace of drying appears to have accelerated, the authors found, and is now growing by an area twice the size of California each year. “It’s like this sort of creeping disaster that has taken over the continents in ways that no one was really anticipating,” Famiglietti said. (Six other researchers also contributed to the study.) The parts of the world drying most acutely are becoming interconnected, forming what the study’s authors describe as “mega” regions spreading across the earth’s mid-latitudes. One of those regions covers almost the whole of Europe, the Middle East, North Africa and parts of Asia.

The Drying of the Earth Accelerated in Recent Years

The dramatic depletion of groundwater and surface water plus the melting of glaciers between 2014-24 has connected once-separate arid places, forming “mega-drying” regions that stretch across whole continents.

Watch video ➜

Note: Data is for February 2003 to December 2013 and January 2014 to April 2024. The first time period contains seven more months of data than the second.

In the American Southwest and California, groundwater loss is a familiar story, but over the past two decades that hot spot has also spread dramatically. It now extends through Texas and up through the southern High Plains, where the Ogallala aquifer is depended on for agriculture, and it spreads south, stretching throughout Mexico and into Central America. These regions are connected not because they rely on the same water sources — in most cases they don’t — but because their populations will face the same perils of water stress: the most likely, a food crisis that could ultimately displace millions of people.

“This has to serve as a wake-up call,” said Aaron Salzberg, a former fellow at the Woodrow Wilson Center and the former director of the Water Institute at the University of North Carolina, who was not involved with the study.

Research has long established that people take more water from underground when climate-driven heat and drought are at their worst. For example, during droughts when California has enforced restrictions on delivery of surface water to its farmers — which the state regulates — the enormous agriculture enterprises that dominate the Central Valley have drilled deeper and pumped harder, depleting the aquifer — which the state regulates less precisely — even more.

For the most part, such withdrawals have remained invisible. Even with the GRACE data, scientists cannot measure the exact levels or know when an aquifer will be exhausted. But there is one foolproof sign that groundwater is disappearing: The earth above it collapses as the ground compresses like a drying sponge. The visible signs of such subsidence around the world appear to match what the GRACE data says. Mexico City is sinking as its groundwater aquifers are drained, as are large parts China, Indonesia, Spain and Iran, to name a few. A recent study by researchers at Virginia Tech in the journal Nature Cities found that 28 cities across the United States are sinking — New York, Houston and Denver, among them — threatening havoc for everything from building safety to transit. In the Central Valley, the ground surface is nearly 30 vertical feet lower than it was in the first part of the 20th century.

Ground subsidence around the world is one of the clearest ways to identify where groundwater is overdrawn.

When so much water is pumped, it has to drain somewhere. Just like rivers and streams fed by rainfall, much of the used groundwater makes its way into the ocean. The study pinpoints a remarkable shift: Groundwater drilled by people, used for agriculture or urban supplies and then discarded into drainages now contributes more water to the oceans than melting from each of the world’s largest ice caps.

People aren’t just misusing groundwater, they are flooding their own coasts and cities in the process, Famiglietti warns. That means they are also imperiling some of the world’s most important food-producing lowlands in the Nile and Mekong deltas and cities from Shanghai to New York. Once in the oceans, of course, groundwater will never again be suitable for drinking and human use without expensive and energy-sucking treatment or through the natural cycle of evaporating and precipitating as rain. But even then, it may no longer fall where it is needed most. Groundwater “is an intergenerational resource that is being poorly managed, if managed at all,” the study states, “at tremendous and exceptionally undervalued cost to future generations.”

That such rapid and substantial overuse of groundwater is also causing coastal flooding underscores the compounding threat of rising temperatures and aridity. It means that water scarcity and some of the most disruptive effects of climate change are now inextricably intertwined. And here, the study’s authors implore leaders to find a policy solution: Improve water management and reduce groundwater use now, and the world has a tool to slow the rate of sea level rise. Fail to adjust the governance and use of groundwater around the world, and humanity risks surrendering parts of its coastal cities while pouring out finite reserves it will sorely need as the other effects of climate change take hold.

How Groundwater Becomes Ocean Water
  1. The process starts when deep underground aquifers are tapped to make up for a lack of water from rainfall and rivers.
  2. Worldwide, 70% of fresh water is used for growing crops, with more of it coming from groundwater as droughts grow more extreme. Only a small amount of that water seeps back into aquifers.
  3. Instead, most of the water runs off the land into streams, eventually flowing into rivers.
  4. The rivers ultimately drain into the ocean, where fresh water becomes salt water. For that water to be usable again, it must either be industrially treated or return to the land as rain. But with climate change, these same drying regions are seeing less rainfall.

If the drying continues — and the researchers warn that it is now nearly impossible to reverse “on human timescales” — it heralds “potentially staggering” and cascading risks for global order. The majority of the earth’s population lives in the 101 countries that the study identified as losing fresh water, making up not just North America, Europe and North Africa but also much of Asia, the Middle East and South America. This suggests the middle band of Earth is becoming less habitable. It also correlates closely with the places that a separate body of climate research has already identified as a shrinking environmental niche that has suited civilization for the past 6,000 years. Combined, these findings all point to the likelihood of widespread famine, the migration of large numbers of people seeking a more stable environment and the carry-on impact of geopolitical disorder.

Peter Gleick, a climate scientist and a member of the National Academy of Sciences, lauded the new report for confirming trends that were once theoretical. The ramifications, he said, could be profoundly destabilizing. “The massive overpumping of groundwater,” Gleick said, “poses enormous risk to food production.” And food, he pointed out, is the foundation for stability. The water science center he co-founded, the Pacific Institute, has tracked more than 1,900 incidents in which water supplies were either the casualty of, a tool for or the cause of violence. In Syria, beginning in 2011, drought and groundwater depletion drove rural unrest that contributed to the civil war, which displaced millions of people. In Ghana, in 2017, protesters rioted as wells ran dry. And in Ukraine, whose wheat supports much of the world, water infrastructure has been a frequent target of Russian attacks.

“Water is being used as a strategic and political tool,” said Salzberg, who spent nearly two decades analyzing water security issues as the special director for water resources at the State Department. “We should expect to see that more often as the water supply crisis is exacerbated.”

India, for example, recently weaponized water against Pakistan. In April, following terrorist attacks in Kashmir, Prime Minister Narendra Modi suspended his country’s participation in the Indus Waters Treaty, a river-sharing agreement between the two nuclear powers that was negotiated in 1960. The Indus system flows northwest out of Tibet into India, before turning southward into Pakistan. Pakistan has severely depleted its groundwater reserves — the region is facing one of the world’s most urgent water emergencies according to the Science Advances paper. The Indus has only become more essential as a supply of fresh water for its 252 million people. Allowing that water to cross the border would be “prejudicial to India’s interests,” Modi said. In this case, he wasn’t attempting to recoup water supply for his country, Salzberg said, but was leveraging its scarcity to win a strategic advantage over his country’s principal rival.

What’s needed most is governance of water that recognizes it as a crucial resource that determines both sovereignty and progress, Salzberg added. Yet there is no international framework for water management, and only a handful of countries have national water policies of their own.

The United States has taken stabs at regulating its groundwater use, but in some cases those attempts appear to be failing. In 2014, California passed what seemed to many a revolutionary groundwater management act that required communities to assess their total water supply and budget its long-term use. But the act doesn’t take full effect until 2040, which has allowed many groundwater districts to continue to draw heavily from aquifers even as they complete their plans to conserve those resources. Chandanpurkar and Famiglietti’s research underscores the consequences for such a slow approach.

Arizona pioneered groundwater regulations in 1980, creating what it called active management areas where extraction would be limited and surface waters would be used to replenish aquifers. But it only chose to manage the water in metropolitan areas, leaving vast, unregulated swaths of the state where investors, farmers and industry have all pounced on the availability of free water for profit. In recent years, Saudi investors have pumped rural water to grow feed for cattle exported back to the Arabian Peninsula, and hedge funds are competing to pump and sell water to towns near Phoenix. Meanwhile, four out of the original five active management areas are failing to meet the state’s own targets.

“They like to say, ‘Oh, the management’s doing well,’” Famiglietti said, but looking out over the next century, the trends suggest the aquifers will continue to empty out. “No one talks about that. I don’t think it’s an exaggeration to say it’s an existential issue for cities like Phoenix.”

Both California and Arizona grow significant portions of America’s fruits and vegetables. Something has to give. “If you want to grow food in a place like California,” Famiglietti asked, “do you just bring in water? If we deplete that groundwater, I don’t think there’s enough water to really replace what we’re doing there.” The United States might not have much choice, he added, but to move California’s agriculture production somewhere far away and retire the land.

Chandanpurkar, Famiglietti and the report’s other authors suggest there are ready solutions to the problems they have identified, because unlike so many aspects of the climate crisis, the human decisions that lead to the overuse of water can be speedily corrected. Agriculture, which uses the vast majority of the world’s fresh water, can deploy well-tested technologies like drip irrigation, as Israel has, that sharply cut use by as much as 50%. When California farms reduced their take of Colorado River water in 2023 and 2024, the water levels in Lake Mead, the nation’s largest reservoir, jumped by 16 vertical feet as some 390 billion gallons were saved by 2025. Individuals can reduce water waste by changing simple routines: shortening showers or removing lawns. And cities can look to recycle more of the water they use, as San Diego has.

A national policy that establishes rules around water practices but also prioritizes the use of water resources for national security and a collective interest could counterbalance the forces of habit and special interests, Salzberg said. Every country needs such a policy, and if the United States were to lead, it might offer an advantage. But “the U.S. doesn’t have a national water strategy,” he said, referring to a disjointed patchwork of state and court oversight. “We don’t even have a national water institution. We haven’t thought as a country about how we would even protect our own water resources for our own national interests, and we’re a mess.”

Data Source: Hrishikesh. A. Chandanpurkar, James S. Famiglietti, Kaushik Gopalan, David N. Wiese, Yoshihide Wada, Kaoru Kakinuma, John T. Reager, Fan Zhang (2025). Unprecedented Continental Drying, Shrinking Freshwater Availability, and Increasing Land Contributions to Sea Level Rise. Science Advances. https://www.science.org/doi/10.1126/sciadv.adx0298

Visual editing by Alex Bandoni. Additional design and development by Anna Donlan.

Correction

July 25, 2025: This story originally included a quote from Jay Famiglietti characterizing Arizona’s water supply as facing total depletion by the end of the century. Famiglietti communicated a correction to that assertion to ProPublica, which failed to incorporate it before the story was published. The quote has been adjusted to reflect Famiglietti’s view that Arizona’s water supply will be diminished but may not disappear.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by .

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-drying-planet/feed/ 0 546257
The Drying Planet https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-drying-planet-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-drying-planet-2/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/water-aquifers-groundwater-rising-ocean-levels by Abrahm Lustgarten, Graphics by Lucas Waldron, Illustrations by Olivier Kugler for ProPublica

As the planet gets hotter and its reservoirs shrink and its glaciers melt, people have increasingly drilled into a largely ungoverned, invisible cache of fresh water: the vast, hidden pools found deep underground.

Now, a new study that examines the world’s total supply of fresh water — accounting for its rivers and rain, ice and aquifers together — warns that Earth’s most essential resource is quickly disappearing, signaling what the paper’s authors describe as “a critical, emerging threat to humanity.” The landmasses of the planet are drying. In most places there is less precipitation even as moisture evaporates from the soil faster. More than anything, Earth is being slowly dehydrated by the unmitigated mining of groundwater, which underlies vast proportions of every continent. Nearly 6 billion people, or three quarters of humanity, live in the 101 countries that the study identified as confronting a net decline in water supply — portending enormous challenges for food production and a heightening risk of conflict and instability.

The paper “provides a glimpse of what the future is going to be,” said Hrishikesh Chandanpurkar, an earth systems scientist working with Arizona State University and the lead author of the study. “We are already dipping from a trust fund. We don’t actually know how much the account has.”

The research, published on Friday in the journal Science Advances, confirms not just that droughts and precipitation are growing more extreme but reports that drying regions are fast expanding. It also found that while parts of the planet are getting wetter, those areas are shrinking. The study, which excludes the ice sheets of Antarctica and Greenland, concludes not only that Earth is suffering a pandemic of “continental drying” in lower latitudes, but that it is the uninhibited pumping of groundwater by farmers, cities and corporations around the world that now accounts for 68% of the total loss of fresh water in those areas, which generally don’t have glaciers.

Groundwater is ubiquitous across the globe, but its quality and depth vary, as does its potential to be replenished by rainfall. Major groundwater basins — the deep and often high-quality aquifers — underlie roughly one-third of the planet, including roughly half of Africa, Europe and South America. But many of those aquifers took millions of years to form and might take thousands of years to refill. Instead, a significant portion of the water taken from underground flows off the land through rivers and on to the oceans.

The researchers were surprised to find that the loss of water on the continents has grown so dramatically that it has become one of the largest causes of global sea level rise. Moisture lost to evaporation and drought, plus runoff from pumped groundwater, now outpaces the melting of glaciers and the ice sheets of either Antarctica or Greenland as the largest contributor of water to the oceans.

Water From Land Has Become a Leading Driver of Sea Level Rise

Most of the water lost from drying regions is from groundwater pumping, which ultimately shifts fresh water from aquifers into the oceans.

Note: Glaciers refer to the parts of the continents covered in glaciers but excludes the ice sheets of Greenland and Antarctica. Drying land and aquifers refer to the water lost by the continents in areas not covered by glaciers, including river flow and evaporation. Groundwater loss accounts for 68% of the drying in those places.

The study examines 22 years of observational data from NASA’s Gravity Recovery and Climate Experiment, or GRACE, satellites, which measure changes in the mass of the earth and have been applied to estimate its water content. The technique was groundbreaking two decades ago when the study’s co-author, Jay Famiglietti, who was then a professor at the University of California, at Irvine, used it to pinpoint where aquifers were in decline. Since then, he and others have published dozens of papers using GRACE data, but the question has always lingered: What does the groundwater loss mean in the context of all of the water available on the continents? So Famiglietti, now a professor at Arizona State University, set out to inventory all the land-based water contained in glaciers, rivers and aquifers and see what was changing. The answer: everything, and quickly.

Since 2002, the GRACE sensors have detected a rapid shift in water loss patterns around the planet. Around 2014, though, the pace of drying appears to have accelerated, the authors found, and is now growing by an area twice the size of California each year. “It’s like this sort of creeping disaster that has taken over the continents in ways that no one was really anticipating,” Famiglietti said. (Six other researchers also contributed to the study.) The parts of the world drying most acutely are becoming interconnected, forming what the study’s authors describe as “mega” regions spreading across the earth’s mid-latitudes. One of those regions covers almost the whole of Europe, the Middle East, North Africa and parts of Asia.

The Drying of the Earth Accelerated in Recent Years

The dramatic depletion of groundwater and surface water plus the melting of glaciers between 2014-24 has connected once-separate arid places, forming “mega-drying” regions that stretch across whole continents.

Watch video ➜

Note: Data is for February 2003 to December 2013 and January 2014 to April 2024. The first time period contains seven more months of data than the second.

In the American Southwest and California, groundwater loss is a familiar story, but over the past two decades that hot spot has also spread dramatically. It now extends through Texas and up through the southern High Plains, where the Ogallala aquifer is depended on for agriculture, and it spreads south, stretching throughout Mexico and into Central America. These regions are connected not because they rely on the same water sources — in most cases they don’t — but because their populations will face the same perils of water stress: the most likely, a food crisis that could ultimately displace millions of people.

“This has to serve as a wake-up call,” said Aaron Salzberg, a former fellow at the Woodrow Wilson Center and the former director of the Water Institute at the University of North Carolina, who was not involved with the study.

Research has long established that people take more water from underground when climate-driven heat and drought are at their worst. For example, during droughts when California has enforced restrictions on delivery of surface water to its farmers — which the state regulates — the enormous agriculture enterprises that dominate the Central Valley have drilled deeper and pumped harder, depleting the aquifer — which the state regulates less precisely — even more.

For the most part, such withdrawals have remained invisible. Even with the GRACE data, scientists cannot measure the exact levels or know when an aquifer will be exhausted. But there is one foolproof sign that groundwater is disappearing: The earth above it collapses as the ground compresses like a drying sponge. The visible signs of such subsidence around the world appear to match what the GRACE data says. Mexico City is sinking as its groundwater aquifers are drained, as are large parts China, Indonesia, Spain and Iran, to name a few. A recent study by researchers at Virginia Tech in the journal Nature Cities found that 28 cities across the United States are sinking — New York, Houston and Denver, among them — threatening havoc for everything from building safety to transit. In the Central Valley, the ground surface is nearly 30 vertical feet lower than it was in the first part of the 20th century.

Ground subsidence around the world is one of the clearest ways to identify where groundwater is overdrawn.

When so much water is pumped, it has to drain somewhere. Just like rivers and streams fed by rainfall, much of the used groundwater makes its way into the ocean. The study pinpoints a remarkable shift: Groundwater drilled by people, used for agriculture or urban supplies and then discarded into drainages now contributes more water to the oceans than melting from each of the world’s largest ice caps.

People aren’t just misusing groundwater, they are flooding their own coasts and cities in the process, Famiglietti warns. That means they are also imperiling some of the world’s most important food-producing lowlands in the Nile and Mekong deltas and cities from Shanghai to New York. Once in the oceans, of course, groundwater will never again be suitable for drinking and human use without expensive and energy-sucking treatment or through the natural cycle of evaporating and precipitating as rain. But even then, it may no longer fall where it is needed most. Groundwater “is an intergenerational resource that is being poorly managed, if managed at all,” the study states, “at tremendous and exceptionally undervalued cost to future generations.”

That such rapid and substantial overuse of groundwater is also causing coastal flooding underscores the compounding threat of rising temperatures and aridity. It means that water scarcity and some of the most disruptive effects of climate change are now inextricably intertwined. And here, the study’s authors implore leaders to find a policy solution: Improve water management and reduce groundwater use now, and the world has a tool to slow the rate of sea level rise. Fail to adjust the governance and use of groundwater around the world, and humanity risks surrendering parts of its coastal cities while pouring out finite reserves it will sorely need as the other effects of climate change take hold.

How Groundwater Becomes Ocean Water
  1. The process starts when deep underground aquifers are tapped to make up for a lack of water from rainfall and rivers.
  2. Worldwide, 70% of fresh water is used for growing crops, with more of it coming from groundwater as droughts grow more extreme. Only a small amount of that water seeps back into aquifers.
  3. Instead, most of the water runs off the land into streams, eventually flowing into rivers.
  4. The rivers ultimately drain into the ocean, where fresh water becomes salt water. For that water to be usable again, it must either be industrially treated or return to the land as rain. But with climate change, these same drying regions are seeing less rainfall.

If the drying continues — and the researchers warn that it is now nearly impossible to reverse “on human timescales” — it heralds “potentially staggering” and cascading risks for global order. The majority of the earth’s population lives in the 101 countries that the study identified as losing fresh water, making up not just North America, Europe and North Africa but also much of Asia, the Middle East and South America. This suggests the middle band of Earth is becoming less habitable. It also correlates closely with the places that a separate body of climate research has already identified as a shrinking environmental niche that has suited civilization for the past 6,000 years. Combined, these findings all point to the likelihood of widespread famine, the migration of large numbers of people seeking a more stable environment and the carry-on impact of geopolitical disorder.

Peter Gleick, a climate scientist and a member of the National Academy of Sciences, lauded the new report for confirming trends that were once theoretical. The ramifications, he said, could be profoundly destabilizing. “The massive overpumping of groundwater,” Gleick said, “poses enormous risk to food production.” And food, he pointed out, is the foundation for stability. The water science center he co-founded, the Pacific Institute, has tracked more than 1,900 incidents in which water supplies were either the casualty of, a tool for or the cause of violence. In Syria, beginning in 2011, drought and groundwater depletion drove rural unrest that contributed to the civil war, which displaced millions of people. In Ghana, in 2017, protesters rioted as wells ran dry. And in Ukraine, whose wheat supports much of the world, water infrastructure has been a frequent target of Russian attacks.

“Water is being used as a strategic and political tool,” said Salzberg, who spent nearly two decades analyzing water security issues as the special director for water resources at the State Department. “We should expect to see that more often as the water supply crisis is exacerbated.”

India, for example, recently weaponized water against Pakistan. In April, following terrorist attacks in Kashmir, Prime Minister Narendra Modi suspended his country’s participation in the Indus Waters Treaty, a river-sharing agreement between the two nuclear powers that was negotiated in 1960. The Indus system flows northwest out of Tibet into India, before turning southward into Pakistan. Pakistan has severely depleted its groundwater reserves — the region is facing one of the world’s most urgent water emergencies according to the Science Advances paper. The Indus has only become more essential as a supply of fresh water for its 252 million people. Allowing that water to cross the border would be “prejudicial to India’s interests,” Modi said. In this case, he wasn’t attempting to recoup water supply for his country, Salzberg said, but was leveraging its scarcity to win a strategic advantage over his country’s principal rival.

What’s needed most is governance of water that recognizes it as a crucial resource that determines both sovereignty and progress, Salzberg added. Yet there is no international framework for water management, and only a handful of countries have national water policies of their own.

The United States has taken stabs at regulating its groundwater use, but in some cases those attempts appear to be failing. In 2014, California passed what seemed to many a revolutionary groundwater management act that required communities to assess their total water supply and budget its long-term use. But the act doesn’t take full effect until 2040, which has allowed many groundwater districts to continue to draw heavily from aquifers even as they complete their plans to conserve those resources. Chandanpurkar and Famiglietti’s research underscores the consequences for such a slow approach.

Arizona pioneered groundwater regulations in 1980, creating what it called active management areas where extraction would be limited and surface waters would be used to replenish aquifers. But it only chose to manage the water in metropolitan areas, leaving vast, unregulated swaths of the state where investors, farmers and industry have all pounced on the availability of free water for profit. In recent years, Saudi investors have pumped rural water to grow feed for cattle exported back to the Arabian Peninsula, and hedge funds are competing to pump and sell water to towns near Phoenix. Meanwhile, four out of the original five active management areas are failing to meet the state’s own targets.

“They like to say, ‘Oh, the management’s doing well,’” Famiglietti said, but looking out over the next century, the trends suggest the aquifers will continue to empty out. “No one talks about that. I don’t think it’s an exaggeration to say it’s an existential issue for cities like Phoenix.”

Both California and Arizona grow significant portions of America’s fruits and vegetables. Something has to give. “If you want to grow food in a place like California,” Famiglietti asked, “do you just bring in water? If we deplete that groundwater, I don’t think there’s enough water to really replace what we’re doing there.” The United States might not have much choice, he added, but to move California’s agriculture production somewhere far away and retire the land.

Chandanpurkar, Famiglietti and the report’s other authors suggest there are ready solutions to the problems they have identified, because unlike so many aspects of the climate crisis, the human decisions that lead to the overuse of water can be speedily corrected. Agriculture, which uses the vast majority of the world’s fresh water, can deploy well-tested technologies like drip irrigation, as Israel has, that sharply cut use by as much as 50%. When California farms reduced their take of Colorado River water in 2023 and 2024, the water levels in Lake Mead, the nation’s largest reservoir, jumped by 16 vertical feet as some 390 billion gallons were saved by 2025. Individuals can reduce water waste by changing simple routines: shortening showers or removing lawns. And cities can look to recycle more of the water they use, as San Diego has.

A national policy that establishes rules around water practices but also prioritizes the use of water resources for national security and a collective interest could counterbalance the forces of habit and special interests, Salzberg said. Every country needs such a policy, and if the United States were to lead, it might offer an advantage. But “the U.S. doesn’t have a national water strategy,” he said, referring to a disjointed patchwork of state and court oversight. “We don’t even have a national water institution. We haven’t thought as a country about how we would even protect our own water resources for our own national interests, and we’re a mess.”

Data Source: Hrishikesh. A. Chandanpurkar, James S. Famiglietti, Kaushik Gopalan, David N. Wiese, Yoshihide Wada, Kaoru Kakinuma, John T. Reager, Fan Zhang (2025). Unprecedented Continental Drying, Shrinking Freshwater Availability, and Increasing Land Contributions to Sea Level Rise. Science Advances. https://www.science.org/doi/10.1126/sciadv.adx0298

Visual editing by Alex Bandoni. Additional design and development by Anna Donlan.

Correction

July 25, 2025: This story originally included a quote from Jay Famiglietti characterizing Arizona’s water supply as facing total depletion by the end of the century. Famiglietti communicated a correction to that assertion to ProPublica, which failed to incorporate it before the story was published. The quote has been adjusted to reflect Famiglietti’s view that Arizona’s water supply will be diminished but may not disappear.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by .

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-drying-planet-2/feed/ 0 546258
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 25, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-25-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-25-2025/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=8d993ded4eb1be9d172f476a0d0b5941 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 25, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-25-2025/feed/ 0 546290
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 25, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-25-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-25-2025/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=8d993ded4eb1be9d172f476a0d0b5941 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 25, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-25-2025/feed/ 0 546291
Border Patrol Wants To See Through Your Walls. Really. #politics #trump #technology https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/border-patrol-wants-to-see-through-your-walls-really-politics-trump-technology/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/border-patrol-wants-to-see-through-your-walls-really-politics-trump-technology/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 17:27:47 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f872f681dfd95dda8a46850e76731942
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/border-patrol-wants-to-see-through-your-walls-really-politics-trump-technology/feed/ 0 546221
“Why Is the World Letting It Happen?”: U.K. Surgeon, Back from Gaza, on Starving Children https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/why-is-the-world-letting-it-happen-u-k-surgeon-back-from-gaza-on-starving-children-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/why-is-the-world-letting-it-happen-u-k-surgeon-back-from-gaza-on-starving-children-2/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 17:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=7997c2e60a4f2d8c36fd38a33dedefbc
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/why-is-the-world-letting-it-happen-u-k-surgeon-back-from-gaza-on-starving-children-2/feed/ 0 546223
Big Tech Data Centers Deplete Water From Scarce Sources Around the World https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/big-tech-data-centers-deplete-water-from-scarce-sources-around-the-world/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/big-tech-data-centers-deplete-water-from-scarce-sources-around-the-world/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 16:48:39 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46741 Big tech companies are building data centers that “use vast amounts of water in some of the world’s driest areas,” according to an April 2025 report by Luke Barratt and Costanza Gambarini, based on a joint investigation by Source Material, a non-profit investigative journalism outlet, and the Guardian. In 2023, for example,…

The post Big Tech Data Centers Deplete Water From Scarce Sources Around the World appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/big-tech-data-centers-deplete-water-from-scarce-sources-around-the-world/feed/ 0 546212
Hunger Games – The Grayzone live https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/hunger-games-the-grayzone-live/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/hunger-games-the-grayzone-live/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 16:47:41 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=7148fdb6c032bdb49fdbefdbfd776b1f
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/hunger-games-the-grayzone-live/feed/ 0 546210
Toady Speaker Johnson: Closing Down the House to Cover for Trump’s Scandal https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/toady-speaker-johnson-closing-down-the-house-to-cover-for-trumps-scandal/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/toady-speaker-johnson-closing-down-the-house-to-cover-for-trumps-scandal/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 15:34:04 +0000 https://nader.org/?p=6558
This content originally appeared on Ralph Nader and was authored by matthew.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/toady-speaker-johnson-closing-down-the-house-to-cover-for-trumps-scandal/feed/ 0 546155
Prospects for the Continuation of Life on Earth and of the Human Species https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/prospects-for-the-continuation-of-life-on-earth-and-of-the-human-species/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/prospects-for-the-continuation-of-life-on-earth-and-of-the-human-species/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 15:11:50 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160190 In the July 12, 2024 issue of the scientific journal Nature, an article was published by nineteen co-authors, entitled, “The nature of the last universal common ancestor and its impact on the early Earth system.” The article describes the current status of research into the origin of life on Earth, and the latest available evidence, […]

The post Prospects for the Continuation of Life on Earth and of the Human Species first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

In the July 12, 2024 issue of the scientific journal Nature, an article was published by nineteen co-authors, entitled, “The nature of the last universal common ancestor and its impact on the early Earth system.” The article describes the current status of research into the origin of life on Earth, and the latest available evidence, based upon DNA data, the fossil record and isotope tracing. It demonstrates the remarkable, and even astonishing accomplishments of current state-of-the-art scientific inquiry into the origins of life on Earth.

The evidence discussed in the article points to a single Last Universal Common Ancestor (LUCA) as the original organism from which all life existing on earth today is descended and the appearance of this ancestor roughly 4.2 billion years ago. That ancestor appears to have been what is called a “prokaryote-grade anaerobic acetogen,” in other words, a very simple single-celled organism, neither male nor female and not requiring oxygen to survive. It procreates simply by creating copies of itself. Such cells continue to exist today, and our bodies contain large numbers of them.

As astonishing and significant as this statement is, it is important to recognize what it does not say. First, it does not say that other life forms did not precede LUCA. In fact, these even more primitive life forms (or pre-life chemistry) are presumed to have existed and evolved into LUCA, but we have no traces of them.

Second, LUCA is not presumed to have been the only existing life form at the time, but rather the only one that survived and evolved into all earthly life forms that exist today. To put this into perspective, let’s remember that our entire pre-human population of 900,000 years ago fell to only 1280 individuals, and remained that size until 117,000 years later, before starting to increase again. Furthermore, the entire human race today can trace its ancestry to a single woman, who existed around 200,000 years ago. Every human being alive today shares her DNA.

Both of these examples illustrate the fact that not all of the branches of a family tree ultimately bear fruit, so that even if the family is large, many individual members will themselves have no descendants. The continuation of my line, for example, depends entirely upon my two grandsons, who may or may not have children. That’s not unusual. Every family can ultimately trace its line to a single ancestor. In the case of LUCA, therefore, the common ancestor of all life on Earth is simply the one that survived. Others surely existed, but left no offspring that exist today.

The evolution of LUCA and the laws of evolution

Obviously, LUCA did not remain unchanged. It evolved into many other species and forms of life, through the processes first described by Charles Darwin. In fact, as the Nature article sets forth, it evolved into all other forms of life living today on Earth. How did it do that? Simply by following the laws of evolution. These laws have been described by many naturalists and biologists. The most famous of these laws with respect to evolution, is the law of natural selection, first articulated by Charles Darwin in his book, The Origin of Species. With some editing on my part to allow for the more recent discovery of DNA and its role in what Darwin called heredity, it can be stated as follows:

Evolutionary Law #1: Natural selection is the process by which an individual member of a species passes along traits encoded in its DNA to its offspring. To the extent that these traits contribute to the survival of the offspring, they propagate themselves (and therefore the species).

Natural selection operates over generations to select for the traits that help a species to survive, and to select out the traits that do not. This is often called “survival of the fittest,” with “fittest” being a relative term, depending on changes in the environment in which the species lives. In some cases, the entire species dies out, which we call extinction, when, for example a change in habitat is too great or too abrupt for natural selection to save the species. Some examples of extinct species are the trilobite, the Irish elk, and the Hawaii Chaff Flower. In other cases, one species can evolve into more than one, when populations of a species are isolated from each other for a long time in habitats that alter them in different ways. A common example is the donkey or burro and the horse.

The factors at play in evolution and extinction are many. Some examples are:

  • climate change
  • cataclysmic events
  • loss of habitat
  • invasive competing species
  • loss of food source
  • physical isolation of a species, or a population with the species

By the same token, some of the traits by which species propagate themselves in order to adapt to these changes are:

  • strength
  • speed
  • rapid maturation
  • defensive mechanisms
  • access to prey or nourishment
  • aerial flight
  • prolific distribution of seed or offspring
  • ability to store nutrients
  • access to sexual propagation
  • ability to survive hardship and deprivation

All of these are fairly obvious, but it is their common thread that can be consequential in ways that are well-known but not yet fully explored. That common thread is competition. All organisms compete with each other – both within and between species – for resources and sustenance, including food, shelter, mates/procreation, protection, etc. This is true for fungi and single-celled organisms as much as for higher species. It is a well-known, universally accepted statement (or law, if you prefer). It permeates the behavior of all life forms, including (obviously) the human species. It can also be stated as a second Law of Evolution:

Evolutionary Law #2: All living things compete for their existence with all other living things.

The role of cooperation

But does natural selection operate by competition alone? What about cooperation, such as symbiosis and other mutually beneficial relationships between organisms of both the same and different species?

There’s no doubt that cooperation is a factor, but what is its role? We can begin this line of inquiry by examining what eventually happened with LUCA. For well over a billion years, LUCA and its descendants remained prokaryotes. Evolution was not static during this time, but it was exceedingly slow, and dependent to a vastly greater extent upon chance mutations and interactions other than mating, which did not yet exist.

Nevertheless, prokaryotes eventually graduated to eukaryotes – single cells with a nucleus housing the DNA – sometime between 2.7 and 1.8 billion years ago. This means that for a minimum of 1.5 billion years, LUCA did not to evolve beyond simple anaerobic single-celled organisms with no nucleus. This is not to say that prokaryotes did not evolve at all during that time, only that before the appearance of eukaryotes, the potential of natural selection was not apparent. This all changed with eukaryotes – a fundamentally new form of life, containing a nucleus housing the DNA.

Eukaryotes were capable of combining with each other to form offspring that were a combination of two parent cells, and not merely copies of a single parent. As a result, the offspring would have combinations of the DNA from the two parents, and thus be different from either of them. This drove faster evolution, and eventually developed into male and female types, as well as a categorical distinction between plants, animals and fungi, starting as early as 1.5 billion years ago, with plants consuming carbon dioxide and expelling oxygen, and animals and fungi consuming oxygen and expelling carbon dioxide. Even more significant, eukaryote cells began to cluster in ways where some could specialize in certain functions – such as digestion and protection – that served other members of the cluster, and vice versa. These colonies of cells with specialized functions exist today in organisms like the Portuguese man o’war, and bear some resemblance to colonies of insects like ants, termites or bees. In any case, these clusters of eukaryotes can be considered early examples of cooperation, and these first cooperative groups of eukaryotes eventually evolved into the first multi-celled organisms, both plants and animals.

Competition vs. cooperation

There is no question that both competition and cooperation are inherent in all life forms on Earth, and that the origin of cooperation may be said to begin with the transition from prokaryotes to eukaryotes, some 2 billion years ago. It is no wonder that they are both part of our DNA, so to speak.

But I would argue that competition is in fact the only driving force in evolution. Why? Let me begin with a reductionist argument. Let us suppose that an organism exists that does not compete for its existence against organisms that do compete? With no motivation to defend itself against other organisms, how fast would it simply cease to exist?

But if that is self-evident, how can cooperation exist at all? The answer is that cooperation confers an advantage to the organisms that engage in it. It was true for the early eukaryotes, and it is true for social alliances today, from wolf packs to human nations and bee hives.

But what is the nature of the advantage that cooperation confers upon the organisms that engage in it? The simple answer is that it enhances the ability to compete. In French they say, “l’union fait la force.” Unity makes strength. Strength for what purpose? To compete.

Ungulates form herds. Why? For protection. Nations form alliances for the same reasons. Criminals form gangs. Wolves form packs. Fish form schools. Bees form hives. Eukaryotes form colonies and eventually multi-celled organisms. But the purpose is always the same: to compete more effectively, to survive and to pass one’s genes to one’s offspring. Cooperation is a means of competition, not an alternative to it, as far as natural selection is concerned. Life does not compete in order to cooperate; it cooperates in order to compete. This may be stated as:

Evolutionary Law #3: All living things cooperate in varying degrees with each other for mutual advantage over other living things.

Obviously, none of this is directly relevant to questions of morality, ethics, justice or religion. Right and wrong, as well as good and bad, are questions which must be answered in a different type of discussion. The analysis that is presented here is devoted to what is or is not, with respect to evolution and where it is leading the human species, life on Earth, and potentially life throughout the universe. I am not addressing the question of what should or should not be. But it always helps to start with what we know, in order to look at the effects and consequences.

The emergence of technological species

We come now to the question of the human species and its evolution. We know that evolution has led life in many different directions during its long history on Earth. It began in the sea, migrated onto land, and eventually into the air, as well. It has developed life forms that generate poison and perfume, change color at will, grow horns, fangs and armor and many other means and strategies for defending themselves, gaining advantage over other organisms, and propagating themselves. Evolution can be a very powerful process.

We are, nevertheless, at a particularly momentous juncture in the history of evolution. I refer not so much to the development of the human species per se as to the development of technology in the hands of the human species. Humans are of course the primary and almost exclusive agent of technology on Earth, and they are exceptional in its natural history. We tend to think of intelligence as the primary reason for the ascendance of the human species. But we know that other species possess intelligence as well, including cetaceans, corvids, elephants and cephalopods. And we can’t be sure about the power of their intelligence, their linguistic abilities, and their abilities to function in organized groups. Their intelligence and communication skills, as well as their social organization and life cycles may be so different that it can be hard to gauge their capabilities.

But the octopus is the only other intelligent organism that possesses anything like our hands, and cephalopods are handicapped by a very short lifetime and a lack of social structure. Our ability to fashion, with our hands, new and artificial objects and machines and to harness energy, i.e. technology, is unique. We are clearly the first technological species on this planet. This is why I prefer to emphasize the contribution of technology, rather than brain development or intelligence per se toward the age in which we find ourselves. Let us remember that our brains are essentially the same as they were tens of thousands of years ago. The last major change was the development of human language, which required some rewiring of the brain, but not a lot, because it had already proceeded in that direction, as it has in other species. Current estimates are that the capacity for modern language in Homo sapiens evolved prior to 135,000 years ago, but actual modern language may not be much older than 100,000 years. On the other hand, tool making is millions of years old. Neither tool making nor intelligence nor language nor even hands are unique to the human species, but the convergence of them is. And clearly, these capabilities have fed off each other in a systematic way, even if none of them has resulted in major physical changes in our species.

Some of this can be inferred from the growth and spread of human population, especially during the last 60,000 years or so. Equally astonishing has been the parallel and roughly simultaneous development of agriculture, urban architecture, and written languages, even in the Americas, which could not have known what was happening on the other side of the world. The reasons for this are not likely to be organic changes, since we are essentially the same organism everywhere on Earth. The process and the convergence appear to be largely self-driving, once all the elements are in place, perhaps when human settlements reach a critical size that creates a level of interaction that is in some ways exponential. No other species achieved these breakthroughs.

The process has now brought about the Age of Technology, which is accelerating at breakneck speed, challenging our efforts to keep up with and adapt to it, and potentially relegating our participation to that of mere cogs in a system controlled by algorithms, technical managers and organizations like Cambridge Analytica, who discovered that humans could be controlled to a significant degree through their electronic devices. The onset of the age may have begun with the first stone tool kits of hominids, millions of years ago, but today it has progressed to where technology increasingly drives itself, with humans as the pollinators of developments such as AI, artificial life forms and exploration of both the farthest and innermost reaches of the universe. We are often unprepared for the consequences. Most of us try to keep up, but it requires increasing vigilance to stay ahead of the forces arrayed to manipulate us and turn us into mere fuel for the vast machinery that is technology today. Think about your interaction with your smartphone. Who is controlling whom?

Perhaps most of this is the inevitable result of the convergence of forces that formed our species and its societal dynamics. Nevertheless, it is in our interest to try to understand what is happening to our species and our planet – and beyond – to the best of our abilities. This is a unique time in the history of life on earth, and it is due to the evolution of our species and its capabilities. Intelligent species existed in the distant past, especially among dinosaurs, but while we have found their remains, we have never found any signs of civilizations or technologies produced by them. And we surely would have, if they existed. Apparently, the convergence of developments that resulted in a species capable of creating a technological society has never existed on Earth until now.

Similarly, we have no confirmed signs of technology from other worlds, either on our planet or on the others that we have investigated thus far. At most, we have speculation about unexplained phenomena that remain unexplained, which has been true since the beginning of time. But we have no objects on Earth that could not have been produced on Earth, whereas we have transported earth-made artifacts to several other bodies in our solar system, which could not have been produced on those bodies. Where is the space junk from extraterrestrial civilizations?

A similar question was famously asked by nuclear physicist Enrico Fermi in 1950 at a gathering of his fellow scientists. After some debate about life on other planets, they concluded that it must exist, because there is nothing particularly unique about Earth. Planets with life may be rare, but there are so many planets in the universe that ours cannot be the only one to produce life. Even one in a million allows for a vast number. Furthermore, even though it took Earth more than 4 billion years to create its first technological species capable of interplanetary – and potentially interstellar – travel, there is no reason to think that we are necessarily the first in the entire universe, much less the only one. In fact, the odds are hugely against this being the case. This is the point at which Fermi asked his famous question, known as the Fermi Paradox, “Then where are they?”

This is more than an idle question. It is a troubling mystery and refers to an uncomfortable fact that deserves an answer. Why is there no evidence of any contact with extraterrestrial civilizations? Why would such civilizations not have left their traces during the billions of years of our planet’s existence? If we can find one-celled organisms from the earliest times, how much easier is it to find alien space junk? Even if aliens found our planet not worth very much of their time, how much more interesting are the moon and Mars, where we left our space junk? It is simply inconceivable that Earth would not have been visited, nor that we are the very first technological species to exist in all the universe.

The answer to Fermi’s question may help give us an idea about where we are headed as a technological species, and I believe it is possible to at least partially provide such an answer using the facts and analysis already discussed thus far. I apologize in advance if the answer is not to your liking; it is not to mine, either.

The evolutionary ceiling

What worries me is that there may be a law of evolution that has the effect of blocking technological species from developing beyond a certain point – that a technological species hits a ceiling above which it cannot rise, and that this law is the same everywhere in the universe, because the laws of evolution operate the same throughout the universe, as do the laws of physics. If we could pass that point, we would make contact with other technological species from other planets. But the available evidence points to the conclusion that no species anywhere in the universe develops beyond that point. Why?

Does it have anything to do with competition being the prime mechanism behind natural selection and cooperation secondary? I don’t know, but the idea that human nature is fundamentally different from the nature of all other life seems flawed and unrealistic to me. We’re not that different. The laws of the universe are universal.

Hollywood is full of films, like Dr. Strangelove and Don’t Look Up, about apocalyptic and post-apocalyptic visions of the world. We all agree that they have a plausible basis, because we know the power of existing weaponry and the potential to use it, as well as the weakness of human will. Our species is entirely capable of wreaking terrible destruction on our planet, and destroying many of its species, including our own. In fact, a significant number of species already trace their extinction to human activity. Did technological species on other planets and star systems meet the same fate? Is there a law of nature and evolution that dictates that when a technological species reaches a certain point of development, it destroys itself or sets itself so far back in development that it requires a long, arduous crawl to recover, at which time it once again hits its evolutionary ceiling? Perhaps we should take Hollywood more seriously.

We certainly have the means to accomplish such an apocalyptic outcome: nuclear war, climate change, biological warfare (such as experimental disease strains), chemical warfare, even artificial intelligence. If extraterrestrial civilizations have the same experience, this would certainly explain the absence of contact from or with them. But is it a law of evolution?

I believe that a strong case can be made that it is, that it is built into the nature of life and the primary mechanism of natural selection, as a corollary to Evolutionary Law #2, that all living things compete for their existence with all other living things. I therefore propose Evolutionary Law #4 as follows:

Evolutionary Law #4: When a technological species achieves the capability of self-destruction, its primary competitive drive sooner or later causes the exercise of this capability.

Is an evolutionary ceiling hanging over our heads like a sword of Damocles? Do natural laws of evolution dictate that sooner or later we will bring catastrophe upon ourselves? If so, how close are we to that point? In the last 2 million years, have we ever invented a weapon that we have not used? The answer is no, we haven’t.

The spectacular and unprecedented changes through which we are now living appear to be accelerating geometrically and perhaps exponentially. Compared to the period of the existence of life on Earth, the Age of Technology is no more than a split second, but its acceleration seems without constraint. My analysis is a modest attempt to suggest that there may in fact be a limit – an unplanned direction in which we may be headed, and which may be directed by universal laws that we as yet understand poorly.

Let me ask six questions for which I do not have answers but which may illustrate the problem.

  1. How likely is it that we will stop inventing new means of destroying ourselves, either in part or in whole, whether deliberately or not?
  2. How likely is it that all the nations of the world will agree to destroy all technology that endangers our entire species?
  3. How likely is it that we will live with the tools of our own destruction for the indefinite future without using them, either by accident or on purpose?
  4. If we agree to measures that will make us safe, how long will all the nations of the world abide by them, with no “Samson option” that destroys everyone?
  5. If we achieve the previous objectives, how likely is it that we will manage to keep the means of destruction out of the hands of actors that are not party to the agreements?
  6. If we manage to adhere to all of these control measures for ten years, how much longer will we be able to do so? Another 10 years? Another 50 years? Another 100 years? Another 1000? 10,000? 100,000? Will we really keep all of these weapons under control indefinitely?

We have no previous experience with this point in our evolutionary history. Nothing to compare it to. If or when we hit the Evolutionary Ceiling, what will it look like? Will we destroy all life on Earth? Will we destroy all human life plus some other species? Will we destroy ourselves only to the point of leaving behind enough population remnants to rebuild slowly, in the absence of the technological tools to which we will have become accustomed? If we succeed in rebuilding, will we find ourselves hitting the same Evolutionary Ceiling as before? In that case, will the result be as bad or better or worse than the first time, or is it totally unpredictable?

As I said, we have nothing to guide us. For us this is the first time in our planet’s history (and possibly the last) to face this situation. We also have no guidance from the rest of our galaxy or universe, at least not yet.

I don’t know about you, but I would find it very comforting to receive visitors from other planets telling and showing us that there is another option and explanation for Fermi’s Paradox.

  • Image credit: NASA.
The post Prospects for the Continuation of Life on Earth and of the Human Species first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Paul Larudee.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/prospects-for-the-continuation-of-life-on-earth-and-of-the-human-species/feed/ 0 546148
Mamdani, Black Farmers, USDA & ICE: The Stories BIPOC Journalists Uncover https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/mamdani-black-farmers-usda-ice-the-stories-bipoc-journalists-uncover/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/mamdani-black-farmers-usda-ice-the-stories-bipoc-journalists-uncover/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 15:06:56 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=93a13db1696198f9300d6a727272f107
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/mamdani-black-farmers-usda-ice-the-stories-bipoc-journalists-uncover/feed/ 0 546216
Bring Back the Hammer: Why the Labor Movement Must Get Militant Again https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/bring-back-the-hammer-why-the-labor-movement-must-get-militant-again/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/bring-back-the-hammer-why-the-labor-movement-must-get-militant-again/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 15:01:01 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160200 We Were Built for Militancy A century ago there was no need for such a case to be made. Unions acted as the hammer of the working class, beating down the bosses and nailing down victory upon victory for workers. It is a sad day when the labor movement loses its militancy as that means […]

The post Bring Back the Hammer: Why the Labor Movement Must Get Militant Again first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
We Were Built for Militancy

A century ago there was no need for such a case to be made. Unions acted as the hammer of the working class, beating down the bosses and nailing down victory upon victory for workers. It is a sad day when the labor movement loses its militancy as that means that the working class has lost one of its weapons in the fight for its lot. As a class born out of contradiction and born into conflict, workers have deplorably few organizations representing their interests; unions are often the largest – spanning the most industries and amassing the highest membership. We have no other choice but unionization which means we have no other choice but to reinvigorate the militancy within the unions.

To be militant is to be open to and prepared for conflict in the aim of advancing a political goal. Our goal is to advance the cause of the working, and all other oppressed, masses. Are we so foolish as to suppress our own organs for carrying out that struggle? Unions were once home to close comrades in the struggle to noticeably improve their collective conditions, but now they are home to a class of labor lieutenants and aristocrats that, like the capitalists during the death of feudalism, have placed themselves outside and above the ranks of those they supposedly represent. By telling workers to “get organized” and join a union we may as well be selling them a shovel to dig their own grave with because that is what unionization in these dire and trying times amounts to. How far we have fallen when the organization that used to stand up to the bosses and demand more, demand something above bread crumbs, is now sitting at the table with the bosses, indeed, making backroom deals with them.

We need a return to militancy in the labor movement because that is what every landmark victory for working people was won on. Without a tough, militant labor movement there is no eight hour workday. Militancy proves to the working class that labor is innumerably more powerful than lobbying. These were movements that people could truly be proud of – that brought about meaningful change that we still feel today. Workers saw a grizzly bear that they knew would have their back, that they knew would say and do the things that they couldn’t say or to do to their greedy bosses; nowadays, workers see a lamb being led to slaughter by capitalists. According to Pew Research Center, over 40% of Americans hold that unions negatively affect the United States. This, of course, can not be chalked up to one reason definitively, but un-militant trade unions reflect a weakening in demands for labor-friendly legislation and education regarding worker organization.

How We Lost Our Way

We have abandoned workers. It is no surprise then that the workers have abandoned the organizations which have played a role in their own downturn. If we want to see a revitalized labor movement then we need to resuscitate the organization of the worker. More precisely, we must revive all that which is militant, strong, disciplined and revolutionary about the unions while firmly abandoning all that which is reactionary. Let’s be clear, the working class left unionization behind after unionization left us behind first. The reality remains that workers are sequestered from labor organizing while, in the United States at least, we are all victims of a fictitious two-party system where we are so lucky as we get to choose our oppressors. Looking at the history of the labor movement, we shouldn’t be surprised that when it comes down to bringing substantial change, the working class is on their own. It is time, no, rather it is long overdue, that we take back the organizations that make us strong in the fight for our rights. We can give unions their strength, their appeal, their working class tenacity back by reigniting the militant fire that sits at the very core of labor organizing.

Working people and their unions won massive victories for everyone by not being afraid of a fight, by not being afraid to stand up directly to employers, by not being afraid of things getting worse before they get better. How can unions be expected to stand up to employers when the union stewards are getting their pockets lined by the same folks they are supposed to be bargaining against? You cannot seriously expect workers to win against employers when the organization representing the workers takes bribes and backroom deals, yet it happens all the time. Labor racketeering may seem like a thing of the past, of the golden age of organized crime, but, sadly, this is not the case. Nowadays, threats of violence have been replaced by threats of retaliation against employees, but the effects are quite similar: the working class is screwed over, benefits are not received, and workers often end up in worse conditions than before “bargaining.” Unfortunately, our government has not noticed this problem, or more likely they have but they do not care to implement solutions.

The Path Forward

How do you get rid of bribery between employers and union officials in these organizations? There needs to be less incentive to take bribes and more incentive to report officials and incidents involving bribes. We must demand real consequences for corruption and real protections for those who expose it. On the other hand, I believe we need much greater incentive to speak up and speak out against this injustice. For that reason, I propose that whistleblowing in the labor movement be federally protected from retaliation and punishment. Workers need to know that it is not only their right but indeed their obligation to report such instances to the Labor Relations Board. But no working person, and rightfully so, is willing to put themselves in harm’s way to clean the unions; it isn’t their responsibility, they are likely to face whiplash, and they have zero incentive to do so when they feel truly powerless. A new labor movement that begins by cleaning its own ranks of those who only look out for themselves shows the working class a dedication to rebuilding a powerful, but clean and disciplined, labor movement willing to do whatever necessary for its workers, and indeed wanting all workers to take a much more active role in bargaining for better. We cannot revive militancy in the labor movement without first purging it of the corrupt elements that sap its strength and betray its mission.

At its core a union is a fighting organization. Hence, it must be willing and able to strike both figuratively and literally. Direct action such as employee walkouts, organized marches, picketing, rallies, etc. are how we project the strength and voice of workers everywhere. But militancy isn’t just about strikes and pickets, it’s about discipline, education, and mastery of the law. A sharp legal strategy can be just as powerful a weapon as a walkout. There is a severe lack of action being taken by unions because they fear a severe lack of discomfort and potential retaliation against them. Labor’s struggle is a protracted and vicious war against forces with better resources, connections, money, and influence. This is very clearly a guerilla war pitting the forces of David against a truly oppressive Goliath. Labor and law were once joined together in the fight, virtually inseparable from one another. Nowadays, labor occupies one side, the side of the working class, while law has found itself interlocking fingers with big business against workers. Unions have so much potential, but that potential cannot be fully realized, that is to say that the working class can not use its full power, unless they become experts on labor laws and rights. It’s quite like smithing a longsword but forgetting to sharpen it on the day of battle, we are blunting the revolutionary potential of working folks. A unified force of laborers and lawyers strikes fear into the hearts of exploitative capitalists. Our legal representation must be masters of their fields capable of fighting against expansive, and expensive, legal teams who do everything in their capabilities to firmly consolidate power into the hands of employers.

Unions were once the training grounds for the working class where they could become steeled in grassroots organization and labor politics. We must rebuild the labor movement around unions that are both prepared and willing to do whatever necessary to advance working causes. Unions will once again become revolutionary training grounds which take in the unorganized and give them the tools to unite as one against a more powerful enemy. Workers will rise from the unions as soldiers fighting on the side of labor. We are an unorganized, splintered, and, by all relativity, weak labor movement. We ought to study history and see that it is when militancy is introduced into the working class that we win victories once thought unimaginable. We only have to open our eyes to see that if we are not willing to be militant then our enemies certainly are. We cannot limit ourselves to a “parliamentarian” struggle against the very forces that dominate parliament and keep legislation from passing, or ever being introduced in the first place.

Let us learn from our labor forefathers that militancy is a great thing for an oppressed force to have. Change occurs when people are pushed past the limits of acceptance. Have we not been pushed past the limits of acceptance as we sit back and watch a dying labor movement that, in the United States, officially represents under 10% of workers? We run the dire risk of seeing the remnants of the labor movement, the movement that won us paid vacation, sick days, safe working conditions, an eight-hour workday, etc., reduced to ash. The solution to this might as well be slapping us in the face: get militant and get organized. Make unions a staple of the working class again. Make unionization the norm rather than a rarity. Make unions fighting organizations again. We have so much potential and untapped power, but we do the work of our opponents when we limit ourselves.

Let us become a class of fighters once more. Let us bring back the fight to employers!

The post Bring Back the Hammer: Why the Labor Movement Must Get Militant Again first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Andrew Lehrer.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/bring-back-the-hammer-why-the-labor-movement-must-get-militant-again/feed/ 0 546172
Answering Questions from the Public https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/answering-questions-from-the-public/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/answering-questions-from-the-public/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 14:34:41 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160160 How should political figures do this? Ans what is the official name for this?

The post Answering Questions from the Public first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

The post Answering Questions from the Public first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Allen Forrest.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/answering-questions-from-the-public/feed/ 0 546174
The Strength of Peace: Nicaragua Celebrates its 46th Anniversary of July 19, 1979 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-strength-of-peace-nicaragua-celebrates-its-46th-anniversary-of-july-19-1979/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-strength-of-peace-nicaragua-celebrates-its-46th-anniversary-of-july-19-1979/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 14:20:04 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160173 This year was different from celebrations since 2021 when there were perhaps 5,000 people invited – this year there were about 50,000! It took place in the Plaza de la Fe where the July 19th celebrations were held for years and years with open attendance of hundreds of thousands and little organization. That changed in 2020 […]

The post The Strength of Peace: Nicaragua Celebrates its 46th Anniversary of July 19, 1979 first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
This year was different from celebrations since 2021 when there were perhaps 5,000 people invited – this year there were about 50,000! It took place in the Plaza de la Fe where the July 19th celebrations were held for years and years with open attendance of hundreds of thousands and little organization. That changed in 2020 with Covid. This time invitations were made and organized by the municipalities all over the country and those invited road in on Chinese buses down to the plaza. You can see from the photo, the organization was phenomenal to accommodate the 50,000.

Photos: Nan McCurdy

The fun began on July 17 when the country celebrates the day that the last Somoza president fled the country as well as most of the feared Somoza National Guard. It was clear that day that the Sandinista revolution had triumphed.

July 18 is filled with vigils in every neighborhood and town to welcome in July 19. At midnight beautiful fireworks displays are seen brightening the sky. I went to the vigils with family and friends first downtown to the Simon Bolivar avenue – named after the famous Venezuelan revolutionary leader whose dream was for all of Latin America to unify in order to resist colonizers like the United States and European nations. At the south end of the boulevard is a roundabout with a huge depiction of another Venezuelan revolutionary leader – Hugo Chavez – who came and spoke at a number of July 19 celebrations. I was fortunate to see him in 2004.

The atmosphere was like a huge party with dancing and singing and people just hanging out with family and friends. Then we went to another vigil nearby in the popular barrio known as San Antonio. They always go all out and this year was no exception. The Venezuelan band best known for Las Casas del Carton (the houses made out of cardboard) and No Basta Rezar (it’s not enough to pray) called the Guaraguao played at this vigil to thousands of people in this tiny neighborhood, filled up to overflowing with others like us who come to participate. Once again, at midnight there were fireworks everywhere.

July 19 begins with people all over the country carrying out “Dianas” which are car parades with FSLN (Frente Sandinista de Liberación Nacional) flags and signs and people chanting and singing. In every town and city there are festivities in commemoration of July 19 – the day celebrated as the culmination of the struggle against the Somoza (and US) dictatorship. The US supported 3 Somoza’s, a father and 2 sons, during 45 years of their governments’ imprisoning, torturing and killing anyone considered in opposition to their rule. My husband tells me that it was a crime to be a young man as the dictatorship assumed you were really a Sandinista.

As the 50,000 invited to the evening celebration are coming in by bus to the plaza down by lake Zolotlan, thousands of other people are lining roads – the roads that co-presidents Daniel Ortega and Rosario Murillo will pass to get to the Plaza del Fe. I drove down with my son and parked by a television station then walked about a half mile. We joined in the contagious anticipation. Daniel always drives himself – of course there are police cars in front and in back and police lining the road – but not getting in the way of onlookers who want to see their co-presidents. About six o’clock they slowly passed with windows down waving at everyone. I was particularly excited, like a kid on Christmas morning (even though I’m 70) and ran down about four blocks to get in front of the caravan in order to see them a second time – and I did (there is definitely a groupie atmosphere around Daniel – he started fighting for a free country at age 14, he was imprisoned and tortured for seven years and he’s won five elections, the last with more than 75% of the vote)!! Then families continue their parade and picnic-like evening accompanying the celebration and watching it on huge screens placed around the country. I was impressed that at every event I mainly saw families and friends – very few drunks!

Probably most Sandinistas spend the evening of the 19th at home with their families watching the incredible views of 50,000 mainly youth, dancing to the first 90 minutes of familiar revolutionary music. Then some of the special guests were introduced and given time to share a message. One of the things that Ana Kuznetsova the chairwoman of the Russian Duma said was “Under the leadership of our President Vladimir Putin, Russia fully supports those who defend their Freedom, their Values, their Children, their Future.” Then there was a joyful address by Ma Hui, Vice Minister of the International Department of the Central Committee of the Communist Party of China. He said “I would also like to convey the sincere greetings of all the 100 million members of the Communist Party of China to our Sandinista Compañeros and to the Heroic People of Nicaragua.” “In a world full of transformations and turbulence, the risks and challenges faced by all countries on the planet are growing. We are pleased to note that under the leadership of Co-Presidents Comandante Daniel Ortega and Compañera Rosario Murillo, the Nicaraguan people, closely grouped around the Sandinista National Liberation Front, firmly defend their Sovereignty and Dignity, and persist in following the path of development adapted to the realities of their own country, constantly reaching new achievements in your socio-economic development, for which we express our congratulations.” To read all the speeches, including those of the Co-presidents.

 Daniel spoke of many of the wars waged today by the US: “And that is no more nor less a plan, by [Israel], concocted with the Yankee government and with the complicity of the European governments to disappear the Palestinian State, as they have said it very clearly and openly. They are self-confessed criminals! There they are armed, given weapons by the Europeans, by the United States, because they want to take over the whole Region, and they are doing it….”

“They are murdering every day! Even media in the United States or in Europe are now beginning to report the crimes. And what does the United Nations do? The United Nations is nothing but an instrument of the imperialist countries which want to dominate the world, even if the World itself disappears with the risk of Humanity disappearing, because they have no qualms about bombing everywhere.”

“We have already seen how they launched the armed provocation, via a plan put together by the United States and Israel to bomb Iran on the pretext that what the Iranians were working on were atomic weapons. Iran is a huge nation, it used to be the Persian Empire, it has a population of 90 million inhabitants, it has great wealth, undertakes a great deal of work, with a lot of resources. And the Iranians, complying with the United Nations standards, had presented a plan so as to work the uranium and use it in peaceful activities as they have done so for some time and that’s why they have many plants generating nuclear energy with uranium, which are energy producing plants which are cheaper and safer than the plants that are installed via traditional networks.”

As always Co-President Ortega takes the opportunity to give a history lesson since so many attendees are teenagers. This time he talked about the Spaniards, the British and the United States; especially the invasion by William Walker and his men which was supported by the US government. Walker named himself president, reinstated slavery and made English the national language. Needless to say he was expelled with help from Nicaragua’s neighbors. Walker tried again a few years later and the Hondurans put him in front of a firing squad. This reminds me of a popular song written and sung often during the years of Reagan’s war against Nicaragua called El Yanqui se Va a Joder (the Yankees are going to get their butts kicked). In spite of US sanctions on Nicaragua which cut off much needed loans, the Nicaraguans overall support their government because it is the only one that has brought progress and development to the majority of the people with free education and healthcare; with 90% food security; with the best roads and infrastructure in the region, with one of the highest percentages of renewable energy in the world and 90.6% of the population have electricity; with parks and stadiums everywhere – a real emphasis on the right to recreation and sports and so much more. This country won’t be easy to beat through coup attempts like in 2018, hundreds of millions of dollars from US institutions like USAID, the NED, Freedom House going to the opposition to try to undermine the government. The Nicaraguan example will not easily be stopped and many countries will follow in its foot prints.

The post The Strength of Peace: Nicaragua Celebrates its 46th Anniversary of July 19, 1979 first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Nan McCurdy.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-strength-of-peace-nicaragua-celebrates-its-46th-anniversary-of-july-19-1979/feed/ 0 546176
The Civilized World Must Act Immediately over Mass Starvation in Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-civilized-world-must-act-immediately-over-mass-starvation-in-gaza/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-civilized-world-must-act-immediately-over-mass-starvation-in-gaza/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 13:32:38 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160204 Over 23 horrific months the people of Gaza  (47% children before the present Gaza Massacre) have suffered  bombing, shooting, burying under rubble, near-total devastation of homes and infrastructure, and substantial deprivation from water, food, shelter, fuel, electricity, medicine, and medical care. The mass murder of 680,000 Gazans by violence and imposed deprivation has now transmuted […]

The post The Civilized World Must Act Immediately over Mass Starvation in Gaza first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Over 23 horrific months the people of Gaza  (47% children before the present Gaza Massacre) have suffered  bombing, shooting, burying under rubble, near-total devastation of homes and infrastructure, and substantial deprivation from water, food, shelter, fuel, electricity, medicine, and medical care. The mass murder of 680,000 Gazans by violence and imposed deprivation has now transmuted to man-made famine and mass starvation that has galvanized the global conscience.

As estimated from data published by a succession of expert epidemiologists in the leading medical journal The Lancet, 136,000 Gazans died violently by 25 April 2025 with  a “conservatively estimated” 4 times that number (544,000) dying from imposed deprivation for a shocking total of 680,000 deaths that is under-reported 10 fold by Western Mainstream media. In impoverished countries  about 70% of avoidable deaths from deprivation are those of under-5 year old infants (see Gideon Polya, “Body Count. Global avoidable mortality since 1950” that includes an avoidable mortality-related history of every country). It is estimated that the 680,000 dead Gazans (28% of the pre-war Gaza population of 2.4 million) included  380,000 under-5 year old infants, 479,000 children in total, 63,000 women and 138,000 men (Gideon Polya, “Gaza Genocide By Numbers: Apply BDS Over 0.7 Million Gaza Deaths From Violence And Imposed Deprivation”, 4 July 2025 ).

Now the surviving Gazans are suffering man-made famine and mass starvation while the world looks on. This crime has been perpetrated many times in history, notably in the “forgotten” WW2 Bengali Holocaust  (WW2 Indian Holocaust, WW2 Bengal Famine; 6-7 million Indians deliberately starved to death in 1942-1945 for strategic reasons in Bengal, Bihar, Assam and Odisha by the British under fervent Zionist Winston Churchill with food-denying Australian complicity) (for details of this and some 70 other genocide and holocaust atrocities see Gideon Polya, “Jane Austen and the Black Hole of British History. Colonial rapacity, holocaust denial & the crisis in biological sustainability”).

The World’s major powers must (a) order Apartheid Israel to immediately leave  the Occupied Palestinian Territories (as demanded by the International  Court of Justice), (b) immediately provide life-sustaining  food and medical services to Gaza  (as demanded of any Occupier for its Occupied Subjects “to the fullest extent of the means available to it”  by Articles 55 and 56 of the  Fourth Geneva Convention), and (c) immediately impose rigorous Boycotts, Divestment and Sanctions (BDS) against Apartheid Israel and all its racist supporters, notably the US and neo-Nazi Germany, until reparations and war crimes trials are delivered.

28 countries (all European except for Japan) have  issued a statement demanding aid to Gaza, an immediate end to the killing and condemning the Zionist Israeli-imposed killing, deprivation, starving and ethnic cleansing of Gaza and Palestine. Words are cheap but something is better than nothing. Of these 28 countries (Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada, Cyprus, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and the UK) only 9 actually recognize the State of Palestine (Cyprus, Iceland, Ireland, Malta, Norway, Poland, Sweden, Slovenia, and Spain). France will recognize Palestine at the September UN General Assembly.

Notably absent from this list of 28 concerned countries were the Zionist-perverted and fervently pro-Apartheid Israel US, neo-Nazi Germany and the perpetrator, nuclear terrorist and genocidally racist Apartheid Israel itself. The US has supplied most of Israel’s weaponry, supplied the bombs and bullets that have killed 28% of Gaza’s pre-war population, and vetoed any action  by the UN Security Council. Neo-Nazi Germany has supplied 30% of Israel’s weapons imports and like the US, the UK and Australia has a rotten record of  persecuting humanitarians  demanding  human rights  for Palestinians.

Australia is second only to the US as a fervent supporter of Apartheid Israel and is complicit in the Gaza Genocide in 20 ways and lies for Apartheid Israel in 35 ways but has merely applied sanctions against 2 far-right Israeli extremist politicians – something is better than nothing.  The Zionist-perverted and fervently pro-Apartheid Israel US, UK, German and Australian Governments assiduously refrained from criticizing Apartheid Israel for the nearly 2 years of the Gaza Massacre and actively sought to hide  the horrors of the Gaza Genocide by hysterical and false  campaigns alleging “antisemitism” by anti-racist Jewish and non-Jewish humanitarians demanding equal and full human rights for the sorely oppressed Palestinians.

Australians are repeatedly told by Zionists and the fervently pro-Zionist Australian Labor Government and Coalition Opposition that there has been  an asserted increase in “antisemitism”  in Australia. A Jewish Zionist “Antisemitism Envoy” and a Christian  Egyptian Australian “Islamophobia Envoy” were appointed to inform the government. Antisemitism  occurs in 2 equally repugnant forms, anti-Jewish anti-Semitism and anti-Arab anti-Semitism  (including Islamophobia) but these 3 key terms (and indeed about 80 related terms) were not mentioned in the recently released “[Antisemitism] Special Envoy’s plan to combat antisemitism” sent to the Australian Government.

I individually addressed the following Letter to major Mainstream Australian media under the Subject heading “Aussie anti-Jewish anti-Semitism against anti-racist Jews” and copied it to all Federal and Victorian State MPs (however, it was not published and the Silence has been Deafening in Australia):

Dear Editor,

For 3 decades I have been researching “deaths from violence and imposed deprivation” of subjugated peoples in the global South due to European-imposed war and hegemony, with the findings reported in a thousand  huge and exhaustively referenced articles and 9 huge books (this including massively updating editions). However Google the phrase “deaths from violence and imposed deprivation” and you will find that the West simply doesn’t want to know, even though UN demographic data show that 1,500 million people have died avoidably from deprivation since 1950, 70% of them under-5 infants.

Data published by expert epidemiologists in the leading medical journal The Lancet indicate that 136,000 Gazans died violently by 25 April 2025 with  a “conservatively estimated” 4 times that number (544,000) dying from imposed deprivation for a shocking total of 680,000 deaths. In Australia (as well as the US and UK) this carnage has been under-counted by a factor of 10 and deliberately masked by a massive “antisemitism hysteria” campaign that now threatens a McCarthyist curb on free speech in Australia. Also ignored by Mainstream Australian media and politicians are 30 ways Aussie anti-Jewish anti-Semitism against anti-racist Jews (anti-Zionist Jews) is entrenched in Zionist-perverted Australia (cc Mps).

Yours sincerely, Dr Gideon Polya

The post The Civilized World Must Act Immediately over Mass Starvation in Gaza first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Gideon Polya.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/the-civilized-world-must-act-immediately-over-mass-starvation-in-gaza/feed/ 0 546142
False hope in the midterms #shorts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/false-hope-in-the-midterms-shorts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/false-hope-in-the-midterms-shorts/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 13:02:22 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=7355342cd27b14ac4434f26d02189280
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/false-hope-in-the-midterms-shorts/feed/ 0 546140
“Why Is the World Letting It Happen?”: U.K. Surgeon, Back from Gaza, on Starving Children https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/why-is-the-world-letting-it-happen-u-k-surgeon-back-from-gaza-on-starving-children/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/why-is-the-world-letting-it-happen-u-k-surgeon-back-from-gaza-on-starving-children/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 12:31:01 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5ab129b4aaac2b3985ec274ef96a3d18 Seg2 guest starvingchild

Dr. Nick Maynard, a surgeon who has just returned from volunteering in Gaza for the past month, describes a pattern reminiscent of “target practice” visible in the injuries medical staff are treating in Gaza. As evidence grows of deliberate massacres of Palestinians seeking aid at the U.S.- and Israeli-backed aid sites, Maynard says the pattern of injuries suggests that Israeli military forces and other security contractors staffing the sites are “playing some sort of game” in their targeting of civilians, shooting at the head one day, “the abdomen tomorrow, the testicles the day after that.” Because of Israel’s blockade on food and medicine outside of the sparse supplies available at these dangerous aid sites, Maynard continues, normally survivable injuries have become fatal. “Because they’re so malnourished, their tissues don’t heal. Their immune systems are suppressed. … They often end up breaking down, causing terrible infections inside the body, and frequently these patients die.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/why-is-the-world-letting-it-happen-u-k-surgeon-back-from-gaza-on-starving-children/feed/ 0 546182
ProPublica Updates Supreme Connections Database With Newly Released Financial Disclosures https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/propublica-updates-supreme-connections-database-with-newly-released-financial-disclosures/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/propublica-updates-supreme-connections-database-with-newly-released-financial-disclosures/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/propublica-supreme-connections-database-2024-filings by Sergio Hernández

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

We updated our Supreme Connections database with newly released financial disclosures from eight Supreme Court justices on Friday, covering the 2024 calendar year.

Supreme Connections is our database that makes it easy for anyone to browse justices’ financial disclosures and to search for connections to people and companies mentioned within them.

This update includes disclosures filed in May and made public late last month. Justice Samuel Alito received a 90-day extension, and his disclosure is expected later this summer.

The latest update details millions in book income, almost 40 trips and one gift.

Among the disclosures:

  • Justice Clarence Thomas’ 2024 disclosure listed no gifts or travel reimbursements. In 2023, a ProPublica investigation revealed that Thomas was a frequent recipient of luxury travel and gifts from billionaire benefactorsand that he often failed to disclose them.
  • Justice Ketanji Brown Jackson reported a $2.07 million advance from Penguin Random House for her memoir, “Lovely One,” published in 2024. She also disclosed more than a dozen reimbursed trips to cities including Los Angeles, New York, Miami, Seattle, Chicago and Boston, mostly in connection with her book tour.
  • Justice Sonia Sotomayor disclosed a $60,000 book advance and over $73,000 in additional royalty payments, also from Penguin Random House. She listed eight reimbursed trips from various universities, including international travel to Panama City, Zurich and Vienna, as well as a $1,437 gift from the Coterie Theatre in Kansas City, Mo.
  • Justice Neil Gorsuch reported $250,000 in royalties from HarperCollins, plus income from teaching at George Mason University. He took at least six paid-for trips, including international travel to Germany and Portugal, and domestic stops in Los Angeles, Dallas, Philadelphia, and Williamsburg, Virginia.
  • Justice Amy Coney Barrett received $31,815 in teaching income from the University of Notre Dame and reported three trips, including travel to Malibu, California, and two visits to Notre Dame.
  • Justice Brett Kavanaugh reported $31,815 in teaching income from Notre Dame and listed two trips there.
  • Justice Elena Kagan reported a trip to New York City for a speech at New York University.
  • Chief Justice John Roberts disclosed two reimbursed trips: one to Galway, Ireland, and another to West Point, New York, for events hosted by New England Law and the United States Military Academy, respectively.

We’ve also added new ways to view the justices’ investment holdings. Previously, investments were sorted by value. Now, you can group investments by account to see how justices structure their holdings, or you can sort investments by the order in which they appear on the original disclosure forms, making it easier to cross-reference our data to the original filings.

Browse the database to learn more.

Do you have any tips on the Supreme Court? Josh Kaplan can be reached by email at joshua.kaplan@propublica.org and by Signal or WhatsApp at 734-834-9383. Justin Elliott can be reached by email at justin@propublica.org or by Signal or WhatsApp at 774-826-6240.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Sergio Hernandez.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/propublica-updates-supreme-connections-database-with-newly-released-financial-disclosures/feed/ 0 546111
How musicians and concert venues are upping the tempo on climate action https://grist.org/arts-culture/how-musicians-and-concert-venues-are-upping-the-tempo-on-climate-action/ https://grist.org/arts-culture/how-musicians-and-concert-venues-are-upping-the-tempo-on-climate-action/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 08:30:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670887 It’s less than an hour before the Dave Matthews Band takes the stage on a sunny Thursday evening on the coast of Long Island — but the biggest crowds at the Northwell at Jones Beach Theater aren’t at the tequila bar. They’re in the “eco-village” operated by Reverb, a nonprofit focused on greening live music by inspiring fans to take action around climate change. 

As I wander through tents emblazoned with the logos of organizations like the Nature Conservancy and Generation180, volunteers explain how fans can reduce their carbon footprints and join the clean energy transition. The longest line emanates from Reverb’s flagship tent, where batches of limited-edition blue-and-yellow Nalgene bottles hang from tent poles like so many coconuts from a grove of palm trees. 

Fans acquire the bottles by making a $20 donation, which enters them into a raffle to win a guitar signed by Matthews; they can fill their bottles at a nearby filtered water station. It’s all part of “RockNRefill,” a partnership between Reverb, Nalgene, and the Nature Conservancy. The program has raised $5 million for climate and conservation nonprofits and eliminated an estimated 4 million single-use plastic bottles. 

“It’s cutting down on single-use plastics, so we hope everybody takes a bottle home or brings it back to another show,” says Dan Hutnik, Reverb’s onsite coordinator. “We’re trying to help save the planet — I like to say, one water bottle at a time.” (I bought one of the Nalgenes, but didn’t win a signed guitar.)

People mill around black pop-up tent labeled REVERB ECO-VILLAGE at an outdoor concert venue
Concertgoers wander around the Reverb eco-village at Dave Matthews’ show at the Northwell at Jones Beach Theater. Zack O’Malley Greenburg

With this year’s summer touring season in full swing, the Dave Matthews Band’s efforts are just one example of the increased focus on sustainability in live music over the past several years. Decades after trailblazers like Bonnie Raitt began to prioritize climate, more and more artists are embracing sustainability and pushing for change — both inside and outside the industry — with the help of organizations like Reverb. 

Founded in 2004 by environmentalist Lauren Sullivan and her husband Adam Gardner, a guitarist and vocalist of the alt-rock group Guster, Reverb has become a leading force in greening live music. The nonprofit sends staffers like Hutnik out on the road with acts from Matthews to Billie Eilish, setting up eco-villages and organizing volunteers. Reverb staffers serve as the bands’ de facto sustainability coordinators, allowing initiatives like RockNRefill to be scaled up, rather than every artist having to build something similar from scratch.

Reverb also coordinates with concert promoters and venues, which have their own sustainability teams and programs. As part of the recent renovation of Jones Beach, for example, Live Nation added a sorting facility out back where employees handpick recyclables and compostables out of the garbage. The company’s Road To Zero campaign, a partnership with Matthews, diverted 90 percent of landfill-bound waste at the majority of the band’s shows last summer.

Live music has grown immensely since the pandemic — the top 100 tours grossed roughly $10 billion last year, nearly double what they reached in 2019. (For various reasons unrelated to climate, the 2025 number will likely be lower.) 

If abandoning climate projects is the new normal in our current political moment, the music business hasn’t gotten the memo. According to a recent Reverb study, 9 out of 10 concertgoers are concerned about climate change and are prepared to take action — and artists are ready to lead the way.

“As more and more artists are asking for the same things, it makes sense for these venues to make it a permanent change and not something where they just say, ‘OK, put away all the Styrofoam and all that crap, we’ll save it for the next band,’” said Gardner. “And that’s where the power really starts coming into play.”


Five days after Donald Trump’s second inauguration, Coldplay played the biggest — and almost certainly the most overtly eco-friendly — stadium show of the 21st Century. A crowd of 111,000 streamed into Narendra Modi Stadium in Ahmedabad, India, to see the latest stop on the band’s Music of the Spheres Tour. Coldplay has grossed nearly $1.3 billion in the first three years of the tour, making it the second-most lucrative of all time behind Taylor Swift’s Eras Tour. 

Coldplay has notched quite a few firsts on the climate front. After the group’s 2016-2017 tour, front man Chris Martin and his bandmates were so concerned about their carbon footprint that they took a break from the road until they could forge a more sustainable path. They eventually began planning the Music of the Spheres Tour with a pledge to reduce CO2 emissions by 50 percent compared to their last tour, and to hold themselves accountable with transparent reporting.

Coldplay committed to offsetting unavoidable emissions as responsibly as possible, drawing on the Oxford Principles for Net-Zero Aligned Carbon Offsetting, a guide that aims to ensure the integrity of carbon credits. The group has also used a portion of its tour proceeds to support new green technologies and environmental causes. Above all, the band wanted to push the envelope industry-wide with a sustainability rider — a set of requests that artists make as a condition for performing — covering everything from venues’ power connections to free water for fans.

A massive crowd of people stands before a stage illuminated with multicolored lights, where Coldplay is performing
Coldplay performs at a Music of the Spheres tour stop in Las Vegas in June. The tour and album name references planets and outer space.
Ethan Miller / Getty Images

Concert promoters are accustomed to accommodating all manner of demands on big acts’ riders (ranging from peppermint soap to actual kittens) and have proven open to doing the same for climate initiatives.

“Any artist could add sustainability considerations to their rider and try to influence promoters and venues to do things in a lower-impact way,” said Luke Howell, the band’s head of sustainability. “While not all artists can change how a venue operates at the macro scale, they can all ask for no single-use plastics, more veggie options on menus, or make sure the kit they are using is efficient and specced correctly to minimize energy use. And they can all engage their fans.”

To that end, while operating at a scale that few other acts can approach, Coldplay has introduced a bevy of novel green touring concepts. The band partnered with BMW to develop the first mobile show battery, which can power 100 percent of a concert with renewable energy. These clean sources include solar panels that come along for the ride, as well as power-generating bicycles and kinetic floors that quite literally draw energy from dancing fans.


Coldplay, of course, isn’t the first group to care about its impact on the planet, or try to reduce it. Environmental activism in the modern pop music world dates back more than half a century to conservation-focused songs like Joni Mitchell’s “Big Yellow Taxi” and Marvin Gaye’s “Mercy Mercy Me (The Ecology).” 

Similarly, early benefit concerts — many organized by late folk singer Tom Campbell — focused on causes like protecting forests in the Pacific Northwest. After Bonnie Raitt and Jackson Browne played one such show in Oregon, their crews needed a police escort out of town to stave off a convoy of chainsaw-wielding loggers.

As the science around global warming went mainstream at the turn of the millennium, artists turned their focus toward climate change. Raitt’s 2002 summer tour launched Green Highway, a traveling eco-village where fans could learn about environmental issues and check out the newest hybrid vehicles from Honda. She and her manager, Kathy Kane, convinced tour bus companies to let them power their vehicles with biodiesel, booking the tour well in advance so as to route buses efficiently instead of wasting fuel hopscotching the country. 

At every venue, Raitt’s rider called for replacing disposable silverware with real cutlery, and she began bringing her own water bottle refill stations to reduce backstage plastic use. If there wasn’t a proper recycling system on-site, the crew would bring paper scraps on the bus and dispose of them properly in the next town. And Raitt inspired a new generation of artists who were concerned about live music’s environmental footprint.

“All I had to do was look at the ground when the lights came up at the end of the show to see all the plastic,” said Guster’s Gardner. “I just didn’t feel good about it.”

His wife, Lauren Sullivan, was working for the Rainforest Action Network when a venue refused to let them set up a table at a Dave Matthews show. Apparently, the nonprofit had been rallying against old growth woodcutting practices of one of the venue’s major sponsors. When Matthews threatened to skip the gig, the venue relented. 

The episode inspired Sullivan to team up with her husband to channel the power of live music into climate action. Sullivan reached out to Raitt, who was on the Rainforest Action Network’s board, and learned that the touring gear from Green Highway was in storage. Raitt offered it up — and pledged to incubate Sullivan’s project via her own nonprofit, until Reverb was officially launched in 2004.

Sullivan and Gardner wanted their new nonprofit to be an organization that all acts could use to make their tours greener. In their vision, fans walking into any venue would be greeted by a Reverb volunteer wearing a band-branded T-shirt, ready to engage on environmental issues. Concertgoers would be incentivized to take action — like reducing their own carbon footprint or pushing elected officials to enact eco-friendly legislation — with chances to win goodies like ticket upgrades and signed instruments. 

On the artists’ side, Reverb helped institutionalize practices that not only reduced waste, but saved dollars — like replacing single-use batteries with rechargeable battery packs for performers’ in-ear monitors. Over time, due to artist demand, these rechargeable packs became the norm.

It turned out that, when big acts demanded a certain standard of sustainability, the live music industry was willing to make meaningful changes. Adam Met, from the alt-pop band AJR, remembers realizing this while planning a tour five years ago and asking venues to eliminate single-use plastics.

“Every place we went, the venue [employees] said, ‘Oh, like Jack Johnson,’” recalled Met, who now serves on Reverb’s advisory board. “That was the artist bringing the requests to the table, and an organization like Reverb.”

As the nonprofit grew, one challenge was broadening its reach beyond alt-rock, whose artists and audiences skew heavily white, male, and middle-aged. To that end, Reverb worked increasingly with emerging artists to help them weave sustainability into their touring process from day one.  

Perhaps the best example is Billie Eilish, who started teaming up with Reverb six years ago when she rose to stardom with her 2019 album “When We All Fall Asleep, Where Do We Go?” On her 2022 Happier Than Ever Tour, Reverb helped her eliminate 117,000 single-use plastic bottles, save 8.8 million gallons of water, and push venues to offer plant-based meals — for the same prices as meat-based meals. She also introduced the pricier Changemaker Ticket, with proceeds supporting climate projects. Eilish even fueled her 2023 Lollapalooza set with solar-backed batteries.

Billie Eilish stands on a stage in Chicago Bulls attire, with flames behind her
Billie Eilish performs onstage at Lollapalooza in 2023 in Chicago.
Michael Hickey / Getty Images for ABA

Other young artists have also joined the movement. Last year, for the first time, solar panels fueled the batteries behind festivals in the world of country music (Tyler Childers’ Healing Appalachia) and hip-hop (Tyler, the Creator’s Camp Flog Gnaw). And concert promoters continue to step up to meet artist and fan demand. In 2022, Live Nation invested in Turn Systems, purveyor of a leading reusable cup setup; earlier this month, AEG hosted its first solar-backed battery-powered festival.

“As touring infrastructure becomes normalized where we don’t have to go out of our way to bring along our reusables and compostables, it’s just part of what’s happening at those venues,” said Gardner. “If that becomes the new normal, then there’s massive savings there, both with carbon and with dollars.”


On a bright Monday morning, I was walking through Central Park with AJR’s Met — discussing the future of green touring — when, appropriately, we happened upon the seasonal amphitheater at Rumsey Playfield. Perched on a hill overlooking Bethesda Fountain, it has hosted acts ranging from Pitbull to the Barenaked Ladies. The venue is largely constructed with repurposed shipping containers.

“So the infrastructure itself is already reused, which is great,” said Met, who then wondered aloud how this sort of space could be used during the venue’s downtime — perhaps as a seasonal solar farm. “There are all of these different ways to think about how to use the venue itself as a producer for sustainability initiatives.”

For Met, though, what’s even more powerful is the collective ability of fans to mobilize around the causes championed by their favorite artists. That’s the focus of his new book, Amplify: How to Use the Power of Connectivity to Engage, Take Action, and Build a Better World

He believes that, with a little encouragement, audiences can be particularly potent around local causes. For example, during last summer’s AJR tour stop in Phoenix — where temperatures reached 109 degrees — thousands of fans signed petitions to FEMA asking the agency to designate extreme heat as a type of emergency, thereby unlocking additional funds for response. In Salt Lake City, concertgoers phone-banked around increasing the Great Salt Lake’s water levels because of the economic benefits it provides to seven different states; Met noted that each state later voted for progressive climate policies, even the ones that went for Trump.

This sort of activity might strike some as preachy, but it turns out most fans don’t mind. According to a survey of 350,000 concertgoers organized by Met’s nonprofit, Planet Reimagined, most fans encourage it. A full 70 percent of respondents said they had no problem with musicians publicly addressing climate change; 53 percent believed artists had an obligation to do so.

Perhaps the most important thing an artist can do on the climate front is spotlight the collective carbon footprint of concertgoers — a facet that has more to do with advocating for a greener society than a greener music industry. As part of its Music Decarbonization Project, Reverb recently released a concert travel study that found the average amount of CO2 emissions generated by the thousands of fans getting to a given show is 38 times larger than that of the typical act — including artist and crew travel, hotel stays, and gear transportation. 

That makes sense: 80 percent of fans at the average show arrive in a personal vehicle, usually gasoline-powered. Yet the study also found that fans are hungry for greener ways to attend concerts — 33 percent would prefer to use public transit, but only 9 percent say they can and do.

Rock stars can’t make cities build more subways. But they can work with municipalities to run more routes on show nights, and keep trains and buses open later than usual. They can also team up with businesses like Rally and Uber that can offer deals on group shuttles. That’s something Raitt and her peers never had back in the day.

“I mean, what were you going to do, send postcards to people in the ’90s: ‘Let’s meet up at 8 o’clock and catch a ride to the show?’” said Raitt’s manager, Kane. “The development of technology has been able to allow fans to connect into a community, and artists to connect to their fans, in more real time.”

Music — and the special energy and sense of community that forms around a concert — has a unique power, whether that’s starting fashion trends or catalyzing social change. It shouldn’t be a stretch for acts to inspire fans to choose more sustainable options, especially if artists and venues do the work to make those options more accessible. 

At its best, live music can be a launching pad for all sorts of climate-friendly ideas — from the plant-based concessions championed by Eilish to the kinetic dance floors pushed by Coldplay — making them not only available, but desirable to the broader public.

In the meantime, back at Jones Beach, as Dave Matthews winds down his set, thousands of cars sit in the parking lot beyond the grandstand, dimly illuminated by a strawberry moon rising over the ocean. While many fans will be leaving with new reusable water bottles, they’ll still have to burn dinosaur bones to get home. But the singer offers a message of hope.

“The world is a little bit crazy at the moment,” Matthews tells the crowd. “We should take care of each other a little bit more.”

One Nalgene at a time.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline How musicians and concert venues are upping the tempo on climate action on Jul 25, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Zack O’Malley Greenburg.

]]>
https://grist.org/arts-culture/how-musicians-and-concert-venues-are-upping-the-tempo-on-climate-action/feed/ 0 546091
Muralist Chris Gazaleh on the duty of the artist https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/muralist-chris-gazaleh-on-the-duty-of-the-artist/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/muralist-chris-gazaleh-on-the-duty-of-the-artist/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/muralist-chris-gazaleh-on-the-duty-of-the-artist I mostly know you as a muralist. When did you first start painting murals? And when did you first paint murals in Palestine?

I started doing graffiti as a kid, hopping on the side of the freeway and doing pieces or just tagging on the Muni. That was my introduction to wanting to paint publicly. But around 2007, 2008, we put up the Edward Said mural at SF State. I was in the General Union of Palestine Students at SF State, and I was on the mural committee. The process of the mural had started before I had ever got to State, but it got interrupted by zionists who didn’t want us to put up a mural, so it was on hold for a while.

The administration tried to bring us in and say, “Hey, there are some images on your mural that we don’t approve of.” It was an image of Handala, who’s the cartoon character created by Naji al-Ali, a Palestinian artist who was assassinated in England. Naji al-Ali was a child refugee, and he created this character out of the story of a Palestinian refugee child with no shoes, always turning his back to the world because he felt abandoned. And the whole thing is that he’d never turn back around until Palestine is free. The name Handala means bitter. It’s like a type of bitterness that’s very bitter. That’s where the name came from. Handala is very representative of Palestinian culture, Palestinian refugees. We can’t talk about freedom or justice without talking about the refugees.

Eventually I helped paint a little bit of that mural, and it was at that time that I said “All right, you know what? This is really what I want to do. I want to pursue my art and I want to make the focus Palestine.”

The first wall I ever painted in public that was legal, was a wall given to me by an artist named Cuba, who was part of a bunch of crews… the Ex Vandals, and the TMC crew as well. He was one of the first graffiti writers in San Francisco, but he was from Baltimore. He was doing pieces in the ’80s. Some of my friends who are some of the most OG graffiti writers from San Francisco said in their own words that Cuba did the first piece in San Francisco. So I was very honored to know him. Rest in peace, Cuba.

For him to give me my first wall meant a lot. He cared a lot about Palestine. He saw me drawing one day in Muddy Waters on 16th and Valencia, and he hadn’t seen my art. He’s like, “This is what you do? Man, come with me” He made me get up and follow him, and he took me to Clarion Alley, and he’s like, “Here, man. You take this wall. Use this wall, man, but don’t fuck it up, just keep it going. You have to upkeep it if I’m going to give it to you.” I said, “Of course, man. I’ll never give this wall up.” So I’ve been working on painting on that wall for years. He catapulted me into taking muralism more seriously. He saw my vision and he appreciated it. He was a dope dude.

So your first wall was in Clarion Alley?

Yeah, my first space where I started painting consistently and on a legal wall. It was a good little space. It didn’t feel like a gentrifier space. Muralism in San Francisco can be tainted by gentrification. The gentrifiers, they like murals because it keeps graffiti away. But you can’t really separate muralism from graffiti. It’s like hip-hop and rap. It’s part of the same culture.

This piece located in Clarion Alley was painted in 2023 a depiction of a scene of resistance, honoring the Gilboa prison six, and Shireen Abu Akleh.

Sometimes it’s even the same painters. From what I can tell, skate culture in the city has been a source of inspiration for you, too.

Skateboarding was a big part of my early childhood. When I was about 12 years old, I started skateboarding and I just jumped into the culture. My older brother started skating a few years before me, and I fell in love with it because it was just a form of freedom. It was a form of expressing myself creatively. I was not into normative sports and stuff. I was not into sports, I was not into competitive sports. I didn’t like the culture at a young age.

I never felt included in anything that was typical American. I felt connected with skateboarding because it was kids who came from similar backgrounds to me. Even until this day, I still gravitate towards that culture.

A lot of the people who do graffiti are also skaters, so it all mixes together. When I was in Palestine in 2019 and 2022, I had the opportunity to paint at skate spots and the skateparks out there, which was something I always wanted to do as a Palestinian and as a skateboarder.

Tell me more about that experience. When were you there and what was that like?

When I went to Falastin in 2022, I was doing projects in Jerusalem and all over. I ended up hooking up with my friend Aram Sabag. He’s from Nablus, but he’s one of the skateboard movement leaders in Falastin. And he was like, “Yeah, come paint here, come paint there.” So I just hopped around with him and we brought paint and I would just paint walls that needed some love.

There were a lot of white kids from England who were all part of the Skate Pal thing. And even though they’re sweet kids… I shouldn’t even complain that they’re there because it’s dope, but it’s still kind of… bittersweet? Because we don’t get to go back. So it’s just tough when you see Europeans there. Like all my cousins who’ve never even been to Palestine, I’m like, “Man, I wish they were here.” It shouldn’t be a big deal, but I’m old school in this way. I wish I could see more of my people going there.

The first mural that I was introduced to of yours was the one in Oakland at the Solidarity Wall on 26th. Since then, you’ve done these really epic murals throughout San Francisco. What has that journey been like for you?

It’s taught me a lot about myself. It’s taught me a lot about the community here in San Francisco. You learn a lot when you put something out there that has to do with what’s happening in Palestine. The reaction tells you a lot. My first piece I ever painted in Clarion Alley was completely defaced. I thought it was this person I knew who was a tweaker, but it wasn’t them who messed up my piece. It was an actual zionist. It may seem like there’s a lot of people out there who feel like that, but the reality is, no, there’s not. But the few people who do have that strong anti-Palestinian sentiment, they have the audacity to destroy my work.

In 2020 during the pandemic era, it was like my work was getting messed with daily. These people were probably home all day and they had nothing else to do, so they’d just come out and try to destroy my work. I didn’t really get much support at that time from my community. People weren’t really checking in and I just didn’t really ask for it either.

During this genocide, my Instagram account was banned and I lost all my followers, and that was a big part of my platform. It allowed me to have enough traction to maybe sell a couple prints every week, or just have enough money to sustain. I was struggling then too, but it was nice to have that many followers because I had access to more folks.

This piece titled Imagination, Brigade Box is dedicated to the many tools of liberation, as well, the memory of our martyrs in particular Basel Al Araj, who’s poem was written in the bottom corner. Ink on paper 11 x 14.

Can you share a little bit more about that tension for you around not having community support for so long? What has it meant for you to struggle as an artist in the Palestinian diaspora?

I am a Palestinian. I’m born and raised here on this land, and my parents as well. Both my parents were the first kids to be born in the United States. I grew up knowing my culture to an extent, but my perspective was different because I also identified with other struggles. As an artist, I had a vision to educate through art. That’s why I started doing murals. I think a lot of other people who are involved in the struggle are thinking intellectually. I’d always get frustrated with that, because I believe intellectualism is only going to get us so far. When it comes to being in the streets, art connects us more. Poetry, music, visual art, all these things are so important for us. Which is why I get annoyed when they become tokenized and exploited.

There seems to be some thread around integrity, but also resources. Maybe it’s also coming from graffiti culture as well?

It’s just being part of underground cultures that are very, very opinionated. I’m definitely very opinionated about a lot of stuff, and I don’t want to come off as arrogant or being a hater, but I just think that it’s important for people who want to be involved in the arts to understand that you can’t just get into the arts without being an artist first. Don’t try to make art or try to make money off of art if you’re not a freakin’ artist. Then you’re just a curator, then you’re just a gallery owner. It’s exploitative in a way, because it takes away the space of artists. It takes away space from artists, to give us an opportunity to do stuff.

How have you been able to sustain yourself as an artist? Because you’ve been doing this for two decades?

In my 20s when I was doing mostly hip-hop performances, I would just do shows and I would never get paid. I’d just do shit for free. We were the early artists before social media, so we got taken advantage of a lot. In my late 20s, early 30s, I started getting more into my visual art. I didn’t start actually getting money for that basically until the Palestine Oakland mural. And we all got paid $700, but it was over a month-long project. That was the first time I got paid. That showed me that I need to keep getting paid because, if this is what I’m going to do, I have to sustain myself.

When I started to take my art more seriously I started making and selling prints and T-shirts, and now I’m making hats. It helps, but it’s been a struggle, especially during this high-intensity genocide. I don’t really feel fully comfortable promoting my work, selling my work, online if I’m not giving a lot of the money to my people. At the same time, it’s kind of ridiculous to feel like that because I got to survive, dude. No one’s going to take care of me.

Painted in 2022 at the Al Bireh skate park in Palestine. Next to the girls orphanage in the city of Al Bireh

Can you say more about that? Because that does feel like a real tension for a lot of people right now, specifically for Palestinian artists.

For me, it was a waste of my resources to focus on raising money when I know that’s not my strong point, and I know it’s not going to be easy for me to do. It’ll take me hella more resources.

I don’t have a lot of rich people following me. It’s mostly working-class people who follow my work and people who are not balling by all means. I don’t want to sound insensitive because it’s such a critical time… But they’re not even letting the trucks into Gaza. There’s hundreds of thousands, tons, of food, tons of resources just sitting there that are not getting in. And this is the result of probably a couple billion dollars that people donated.

I’m not going to lie, though. If there was a freaking donation box for M16s, then shit, I would fucking hit that. I would definitely, but then I would be on a fucking watch list.

It doesn’t sound insensitive to me. It seems like you’re very clear on what your role is.

Even saying all that with my chest, I still feel bad. I still feel bad that I’m not sending money to Palestine or to families. Because how can I not feel bad? We’re in a place of plenty. We have everything we need. But the reason they don’t have anything is by design. It’s not like it can’t get there. It can, but they won’t let it.

This is why our job here is to just keep the pressure [on] and keep Palestine in people’s minds and keep that name coming out of people’s mouths 24/7. Our solidarity is picking up. More and more people are waking up.

Do you feel that’s the role of your work? Keeping Palestine in people’s vision?

I always tell people I’m in this shit for the long haul. I’m not here for the moment. I’m here for the movement. I would say my role is a cultural role to help inspire my people who are artists to pursue their art or any creative means to tell their story. To educate others. To be unapologetically Palestinian.

Could you share a little more about your mural process? What does conceptualizing it versus actually getting it up on a wall look like?

It depends on the wall. Some murals I paint I’ll sketch out the idea. When I painted my mural on Cortland and Mission, it’s the one that’s been defaced multiple times, it says, “Resistance is justified when people are occupied.” That piece, I just freestyled it.

I kind of have these go-to images that I like to paint. I love painting cities. Cityscapes. I love painting trees. I love painting people. And when I want to make it strong and bold, I will add elements of the military occupation. Negative elements. Tanks and bombs and stuff like that. That’s when I just want to make things clear.

I’m using that piece as an example because it’s one of my favorite pieces creatively, I just did whatever I wanted to. That’s usually when my art comes out the best, when there’s no limitations.

I just wanted to draw the image of a kid with a rock slinging it toward tanks and helicopters and bombs dropping. I wanted to show that this is what the fight for Palestine is about. Just being an artist who paints what I paint, my work is going to be a counter message to, say, AIPAC. It’s counter propaganda. Because of the imagery I’m painting, it’s counter to all that.

How different were the choices you were making around what you painted in Palestine then? Because those are scenes they live daily, so I imagine you don’t need to remind people of the reality of the occupation.

That’s a good question. I thought about that a lot, especially in 2019, when I was painting in Balata Refugee Camp, which is the biggest refugee camp in the West Bank. They see a lot of violence.

I painted a mural with an elder man playing the oud and then a woman holding a tray in her hand. On top of the tray, instead of food or olives, was Jerusalem. Then I did a cityscape, and then I did some mountains, but I put words inside the mountains. Words like friendship. Solidarity. A bunch of positive words. It’s mostly for the kids because it was right on the UN school that was really dilapidated and run down. Those are the images I painted for them.

But some other kids were like, “Come here. Come here. I want you to paint my store.” And they would just grab me by the wrist and just pull me toward their house or their store. And they’re like, “Paint something hana.” And I’m like, “What do you want me to paint?” “Hatt sittash, hatt sittash.” They want me to paint an M16. So I would paint a character, with a Hatta, a Keffiyeh, and then I’ll paint some cactus, and he’ll be holding the M16.

That was for them because that’s what they wanted. And I couldn’t say no. So fuck, yeah, I painted it. Then another person took me to paint on their house and I painted a handala. That’s what they wanted to see. And then I painted two martyrs. Everybody was pulling me left and right, man. Because I was the only Palestinian painter. There was this girl from Brazil and this dude from Peru, but they’re in la-la land, painting elephants and shit. It was pretty funny, man. It was like this guy painted this psychedelic ass elephant and everybody was just staring at it. They had no idea what it was supposed to mean. They painted over it when he left.

This Mural titled Humanity Is the Key is located on the 101 Freeway exit in San Francisco at Octavia Street. 2018 dedicated to Freedom and Justice and Palestine.

I just painted what they wanted to see. I felt like it was more for them to tell me what they wanted to see, because I’m leaving in a month. I’m not going to be there. They’re going to be there. But I heard all of my art that I painted is still up and still riding, so they liked me. It made me feel good to have that respect from them, because I know that they’ve been through hell. Life is tough in the camp. They made me paint a couple martyrs and I learned a lot about the society back home.

I painted a guy who was killed by the Palestinian authority, Hasham. This mural was on the main street. So I felt a little bit shifty too. I was like, am I going to get in trouble for this shit? Somebody going to ride up on me? But the people really appreciated it. I was painting the guy’s leg, it was really funny, and some guy came up and said, “It doesn’t look like him at all, man. Who is that? It doesn’t look like anything like him.” And I was like, “Look, bro, I’m working with six spray cans. I don’t even have the right colors. I don’t have the right tips. I’m just doing this with very minimal resources. I’m sorry, man, if this is not exactly like him.”

He came up and he’s like, “Mish M’bayan Mish M’bayan.” I’m like, “Man,” I was like, “Bro, get the fuck out of here. I’ve been here for three hours, bro.” There’s no more light and I’m over here painting this freaking portrait and there’s like ten people crowded behind me. I couldn’t even back up to look at the painting, because everybody was on my ass. So they were really excited and they loved that I was doing it, but they were also just right up in it.

That’s hilarious. That honestly just feels so Arab.

Oh my god, so Arab man. It was hella funny, because I’d be on the wall painting and this one white dude, he was painting that big ass elephant, like I said. And the kids didn’t really like him, because he wasn’t being very nice to them. I caught him yelling at them one time, and I was like, “Don’t be yelling at the kids here, man. You’re here for them, bro. You’re not here for your elephant shit. You’re here for these kids.”

So the kids started stealing his cans. Maybe he noticed one or two, but they were taking a good amount. So the kids came up when I was painting and they thought they were going to be slick, and they took a few of my cans too, and they ran off. I chased them. It was so funny. And then some of the kids who were with me, hanging out with me all day, started chasing them with me. So I chase these kids all through the camp, from one side of the camp, literally all the way to the other main street.

And I kind of gave up at one point and I was like, all right, I’m just going to go back. I was with these other kids and they walked back with me and they were talking shit about the kids who stole the cans. They’re like, “Don’t worry, don’t worry. We’re going to get them back for you.” It was so funny, 20 minutes later, I’m sitting there and these kids come up and they have hella cans from those guys that stole them. They brought me back like cans and more cans, it was so funny. I’m like, “Good job, man, good job.” They were the best man, they’re so damn sweet. And just full of life, full of love.

Titled Shadia after Shadia Abu Ghazaleh, a Palestinian resistance fighter. Acrylic on canvas 16 x 20

What advice would you give to younger artists?

I’m going to use a System Of A Down song: Follow your inner vision. Follow whatever inspired you in the beginning. Never forget that and always stick with that feeling, because it’s like the feeling that you get when you’re a kid, that motivation or something you get excited about, that should never leave you as an artist. You should always have that.

I don’t know if there has been any other time in history that’s been this challenging to stay mentally, physically, and emotionally healthy, stable… It’s been tough. It’s almost unfathomable to imagine, to witness what we’re witnessing. This is not normal at all. We’ve been numb to it, but it is scary. It can be really draining to our creative senses. It kind of makes me feel like I want to isolate myself more. So it’s important to stay around good folks. Just stay around as much positivity as you can, and I hope that you are also taking care as much as you can.

Chris Gazaleh recommends:

Soul in Exile by Fawaz Turki

A Dying Colonialism by Frantz Fanon

The Revolt of the Cockroach People by Oscar Zeta Acosta

The Ballot or the Bullet speech by Malcolm X

Wisdom by Heather Neff


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sarah O'Neal.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/muralist-chris-gazaleh-on-the-duty-of-the-artist/feed/ 0 546086
Historic ICJ climate ruling ‘just the beginning’, says Vanuatu’s Regenvanu https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/historic-icj-climate-ruling-just-the-beginning-says-vanuatus-regenvanu/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/historic-icj-climate-ruling-just-the-beginning-says-vanuatus-regenvanu/#respond Fri, 25 Jul 2025 00:08:05 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117784 By Ezra Toara in Port Vila

Vanuatu’s Minister of Climate Change Adaptation, Ralph Regenvanu, has welcomed the historic International Court of Justice (ICJ) climate ruling, calling it a “milestone in the fight for climate justice”.

The ICJ has delivered a landmark advisory opinion on states’ obligations under international law to act on climate change.

The ruling marks a major shift in the global push for climate justice.

Vanuatu — one of the nations behind the campaign — has pledged to take the decision back to the UN General Assembly (UNGA) to seek a resolution supporting its full implementation.

Climate Change Minister Regenvanu said in a statement: “We now have a common foundation based on the rule of law, releasing us from the limitations of individual nations’ political interests that have dominated climate action.

“This moment will drive stronger action and accountability to protect our planet and peoples.”

The ICJ confirmed that state responsibilities extend beyond voluntary commitments under the UNFCCC and Paris Agreement.

It ruled that customary international law also requires states to prevent environmental and transboundary harm, protect human rights, and cooperate to address climate change impacts.

Duties apply to all states
These duties apply to all states, whether or not they have ratified specific climate treaties.

Violations of these obligations carry legal consequences. The ICJ clarified that climate damage can be scientifically traced to specific polluter states whose actions or inaction cause harm.

As a result, those states could be required to stop harmful activities, regulate private sector emissions, end fossil fuel subsidies, and provide reparations to affected states and individuals.

“The implementation of this decision will set a new status quo and the structural change required to give our current and future generations hope for a healthy planet and sustainable future,” Minister Regenvanu added.

He said high-emitting nations, especially those with a history of emissions, must be held accountable.

Despite continued fossil fuel expansion and weakening global ambition — compounded by the United States’ withdrawal from the Paris Agreement — Regenvanu said the ICJ ruling was a powerful tool for campaigners, lawyers, and governments.

“Vanuatu is proud and honoured to have spearheaded this initiative,” he said.

‘Powerful testament’
“The number of states and civil society actors that have joined this cause is a powerful testament to the leadership of Small Island Developing States (SIDS) and youth activists.”

The court’s decision follows a resolution adopted by consensus at the UNGA on 29 March 2023. That campaign was initiated by the Pacific Island Students Fighting Climate Change and backed by the Vanuatu government, calling for greater accountability from high-emitting countries.

The ruling will now be taken to the UNGA in September and is expected to be a central topic at COP30 in Brazil this November.

Vanuatu has committed to working with other nations to turn this legal outcome into coordinated action through diplomacy, policy, litigation, and international cooperation.<

“This is just the beginning,” Regenvanu said. “Success will depend on what happens next. We look forward to working with global partners to ensure this becomes a true turning point for climate justice.”

Republished from the Vanuatu Daily Post with permission.

Vanuatu's Climate The International Court of Justice (ICJ) delivers its historic climate ruling
The International Court of Justice (ICJ) delivers its historic climate ruling in The Hague on Tuesday. Image: VDP


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/25/historic-icj-climate-ruling-just-the-beginning-says-vanuatus-regenvanu/feed/ 0 546048
People For the American Way Responds to the Advancement of Jeanine Pirro’s Nomination for US Attorney https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/people-for-the-american-way-responds-to-the-advancement-of-jeanine-pirros-nomination-for-us-attorney/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/people-for-the-american-way-responds-to-the-advancement-of-jeanine-pirros-nomination-for-us-attorney/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 23:28:21 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/people-for-the-american-way-responds-to-the-advancement-of-jeanine-pirro-s-nomination-for-us-attorney In response to the Senate Judiciary Committee vote advancing the nomination of Jeanine Pirro for US Attorney for the District of Columbia, People For the American Way President Svante Myrick released the following statement:

“Jeanine Pirro is yet another nominee being put in a position of enormous power to serve the interests of Donald Trump. The Fox News host has repeatedly denied the results of the 2020 election, justified pardons of January 6 insurrectionists, and called for January 6 prosecutors to be investigated. This is not indicative of a qualified US Attorney, but rather a Trump collaborator who will serve Trump, not the American people.

This president must not be allowed to install corrupt prosecutors who will advance his interests at the expense of the American public and our freedom.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/people-for-the-american-way-responds-to-the-advancement-of-jeanine-pirros-nomination-for-us-attorney/feed/ 0 546058
Starvation in Gaza: Aid worker speaks from the front lines https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/starvation-in-gaza-aid-worker-speaks-from-the-front-lines/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/starvation-in-gaza-aid-worker-speaks-from-the-front-lines/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 22:01:09 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=79b20f567b86443b5979f24e4d72078b
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/starvation-in-gaza-aid-worker-speaks-from-the-front-lines/feed/ 0 546045
Eli Valley’s ‘Tough Stuff’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/eli-valleys-tough-stuff/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/eli-valleys-tough-stuff/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 21:57:46 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/eli-valley%E2%80%99s-tough-stuff/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Paul Von Blum.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/eli-valleys-tough-stuff/feed/ 0 546038
"Supporting AMAZON is supporting GENOCIDE": Chris Smalls speaks from #Gaza Freedom Flotilla https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/supporting-amazon-is-supporting-genocide-chris-smalls-speaks-from-gaza-freedom-flotilla/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/supporting-amazon-is-supporting-genocide-chris-smalls-speaks-from-gaza-freedom-flotilla/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 20:02:57 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=723ef4d2c236d74d4b2d0e965507e267
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/supporting-amazon-is-supporting-genocide-chris-smalls-speaks-from-gaza-freedom-flotilla/feed/ 0 546032
Executive Lawlessness: Leah Litman on the Supreme Court Enabling Trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/executive-lawlessness-leah-litman-on-the-supreme-court-enabling-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/executive-lawlessness-leah-litman-on-the-supreme-court-enabling-trump/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 17:51:57 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=c5f31bdf2899145492da7b7d93f8bb50
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/executive-lawlessness-leah-litman-on-the-supreme-court-enabling-trump/feed/ 0 546021
Israel is changing the legal system governing the West Bank to accelerate annexation: report https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/israel-is-changing-the-legal-system-governing-the-west-bank-to-accelerate-annexation-report/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/israel-is-changing-the-legal-system-governing-the-west-bank-to-accelerate-annexation-report/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 17:33:43 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335752 The Israeli army, which set up a checkpoint in Tulkarm Refugee Camp, allows Palestinians to take items from their homes after checking their identity cards in Tulkarm, West Bank on July 6, 2025. Photo by Nedal Eshtayah/Anadolu via Getty ImagesNetanyahu’s government is building on a long-standing legal matrix to accelerate Israel’s de facto annexation in the West Bank.]]> The Israeli army, which set up a checkpoint in Tulkarm Refugee Camp, allows Palestinians to take items from their homes after checking their identity cards in Tulkarm, West Bank on July 6, 2025. Photo by Nedal Eshtayah/Anadolu via Getty Images

This story originally appeared in Mondoweiss on July 24, 2025. It is shared here with permission.

Israel is accelerating its efforts to cement its permanent control over the West Bank through a number of sweeping legal and institutional changes, according to a new report from Adalah, The Legal Center for Arab Minority Rights in Israel.

The 87-page report, Legal Structures of Distinction, Separation, and Territorial Domination, describes the ways in which the Netanyahu government is rapidly building on a long-standing legal matrix that further threatens Palestinians’ right to self-determination. 

“These developments are not something new to us,” Dr. Suhad Bishara, Legal Director of Adalah and lead author of the report, told Mondoweiss. “All eyes are on Gaza, justifiably so,” she said. “However… it is important to highlight the intensity of the structural changes that have taken place since the current government took over in December 2022.”

“What is happening in the West Bank is dangerously fast-forwarding annexation policies in a blatant violation of international law,” Bishara said. “Israel is intensifying measures to change the status of the West Bank, the status of many Palestinians living in Area C who are subject to intensified displacement induced by settler violence and Israeli policies.” She said, “This is in addition to settler expansion and further restrictions on Palestinian development in the area.”

Thoroughly researched and footnoted, the report documents how the current extremist government has built on what Adalah describes as “foundational mechanisms through which Israel has entrenched a land regime that facilitates territorial domination and racial segregation.” 

Area C comprises over 60 percent of the West Bank, and is under full Israeli military control. 

Here are the mechanisms of territorial domination Adalah examines in these areas.

Civilian governance for Israeli settlers; military rule over Palestinians

Beginning in the late 1970s, Israel abandoned its security-based justifications for approving settlements and adopted a policy based on civil, not military grounds. The report describes how, soon after, the Civil Administration — the Israeli body governing the West Bank — was established to formalize the division between military and civilian affairs.

As a result, “Israel has steadily transferred governance over Israeli settlers in the West Bank from military to civilian control, entrenching permanent territorial dominance and greatly expanding the settlement enterprise,” according to the report.

Most recently, structural reforms — such as the appointment of Bezalel Smotrich to serve as both Finance Minister and a Minister in the Defense Ministry — have resulted in increasing legal authority for the pro-settler civil servants working with Smotrich in the West Bank. These reforms have cemented the two distinct legal structures that govern life in Palestinian villages and Israeli settlements: the former, in which the military rules, and the latter, administered according to Israeli law. 

1. Administration by local authorities

Adalah’s report dives into the weeds as it describes one of the more concerning mechanisms that reveals Israel’s intent to annex the whole of the West Bank. Having transitioned the settlements from military administration to civilian rule — and having handed over significant legal and administrative decision-making to pro-settler civil servants — Israel can argue that the settlements operate now under Israeli sovereignty. But applying Israeli law in occupied territory, Adalah maintains, is a violation of international human rights law and constitutes “a measure of de facto annexation.” 

2. Financial incentives for settlements 

Readers of the report won’t be surprised to learn that, as Adalah writes, “Israeli settlements receive extensive financial benefits through direct government subsidies, preferential policies, and financial incentives… [covering] multiple sectors, including land allocation, housing, infrastructure, and agriculture.” 

Still, it is remarkable—as documented in the Adalah report—how in contravention of international law, Israel continues each year to pour billions of shekels into the development of settlements in the West Bank. Readers of the report will learn of “the legal mechanisms behind these incentives and how Israeli law facilitates their distribution.” 

3. Declaring State land 

According to Adalah, Israel’s designation of State Land in the West Bank is “the primary legal mechanism through which Israeli authorities have taken possession of Palestinian land since the late 1970s.” Those already familiar with Israel’s use of this means of de facto annexation will be surprised by the extraordinary amount of Palestinian land so designated. The report includes information obtained by Peace Now through a Freedom of Information Act request that shows a shocking fact: in under a one-year period, Israel has designated more Palestinian land as State Land than it had in an 18-year period.

From 1998 to 2016, just over 21,000 dunams were declared as State Land. But in just over nine months (from the end of February 2024 through early December 2024), over 24,200 dunams were declared as State Land. This acceleration is historically unprecedented.

The planning system in Area C

Adalah includes an entire section on the legal and structural framework in place in Area C to further expand Israel’s settlement project, fulfilling one of the Netanyahu government’s guiding principles shared the day before his swearing-in as Prime Minister in December 2022: “The Jewish people have an exclusive and inalienable right to all parts of the Land of Israel,” promising to expand settlements throughout “Judea and Samaria,” the Israeli term for the occupied West Bank. 

Paralleling the judgments of the ICJ, UN experts, and international, Palestinian, and Israeli human rights groups, the report ends by listing the five international crimes that Adalah finds Israel guilt of: violations of International Humanitarian Law; the deepening of the illegal mechanism of de facto annexation; the denial of Palestinian people’s right to self-determination; the deepening of the apartheid system in the occupied Palestinian territory; and the commission of war crimes and crimes of aggression on the part of Israel.

The most recent newsletter from Ir Amim, an Israeli NGO, describes Israel’s expanding control over illegally annexed East Jerusalem. Asked to comment, Tess Miller, Public Outreach staff at Ir Amim (“City of Nations” or “City of Peoples” in Hebrew) told Mondoweiss that “the mechanisms of displacement that we monitor and advocate against within Jerusalem are not separate from the mechanisms seen today in Gaza and the West Bank.”

“What we are witnessing,” Miller said, “time after time, place after place, is violent control granted to those willing to advance the state’s agenda of expanding Jewish presence and diminishing Palestinian presence.” Ir Amim’s newsletter documents home demolitions, evictions, and starkly discriminatory housing and land confiscation policies.

“Together,” Miller said, “they all contribute to the accelerating erasure of the Palestinian people from their own cities, neighborhoods, and lands — enabled by the complicity of an increasingly radicalized Israeli public and the international community’s persistent refusal to take meaningful action.”

According to Adalah’s Dr. Bishara, it is hoped that the Adalah report, read by advocates for Palestinian rights, stakeholders, and states alike, “will generate international pressure against these long-term changes in the West Bank that violate international law and threaten the right of the Palestinian people to self-determination.”


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Jeff Wright.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/israel-is-changing-the-legal-system-governing-the-west-bank-to-accelerate-annexation-report/feed/ 0 546012
Journalist & aid worker back from Gaza describes reality on the ground https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-describes-reality-on-the-ground/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-describes-reality-on-the-ground/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 17:06:14 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=96997ebd5c510425528020664b8bfca3
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-describes-reality-on-the-ground/feed/ 0 546006
Inside the WILD World of Independent Journalism ft. Andrew Callaghan | Shane Smith Has Questions https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/inside-the-wild-world-of-independent-journalism-ft-andrew-callaghan-shane-smith-has-questions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/inside-the-wild-world-of-independent-journalism-ft-andrew-callaghan-shane-smith-has-questions/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 16:00:04 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a8601f4bd3e371e36ddd4e669cb61703
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/inside-the-wild-world-of-independent-journalism-ft-andrew-callaghan-shane-smith-has-questions/feed/ 0 546009
ECONOMIC TERROR AND THE TURBOCHUGGF*CK IN TEXAS https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/economic-terror-and-the-turbochuggfck-in-texas/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/economic-terror-and-the-turbochuggfck-in-texas/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 15:00:22 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46731 By Danbert Nobacon I don’t know what word in the English language—I can’t find one—that applies to people who are willing to sacrifice the literal existence of organized human life … so they can put a few more dollars into highly overstuffed pockets. The word ‘evil’ doesn’t begin to approach…

The post ECONOMIC TERROR AND THE TURBOCHUGGF*CK IN TEXAS appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/economic-terror-and-the-turbochuggfck-in-texas/feed/ 0 545970
"One Meal Every Three Days": Journalist & Aid Worker Back from Gaza on Stark Reality on the Ground https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/one-meal-every-three-days-journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-on-stark-reality-on-the-ground/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/one-meal-every-three-days-journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-on-stark-reality-on-the-ground/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 14:41:56 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a60d4b4124850a36ec13dfce44fd4a0a
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/one-meal-every-three-days-journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-on-stark-reality-on-the-ground/feed/ 0 545979
The Struggle for Power in Ukraine Has Begun https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/the-struggle-for-power-in-ukraine-has-begun/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/the-struggle-for-power-in-ukraine-has-begun/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 14:30:09 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160154 The failure of diplomatic attempts to reach peace agreements in Ukraine amid increased military support from the USA and the EU has led to a major reshuffle in the government. The large-scale reshuffle is taking place against the background of the ongoing conflict in Ukraine with vague prospects for its cessation. Volodymyr Zelensky, fearing failure […]

The post The Struggle for Power in Ukraine Has Begun first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

The failure of diplomatic attempts to reach peace agreements in Ukraine amid increased military support from the USA and the EU has led to a major reshuffle in the government. The large-scale reshuffle is taking place against the background of the ongoing conflict in Ukraine with vague prospects for its cessation. Volodymyr Zelensky, fearing failure in future presidential and parliamentary elections, is making active efforts to clean up the political field and discredit possible rivals for the post of the Ukrainian president.

Thus, on July 16, 2025, Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky nominated Economy Minister Yulia Sviridenko as the new prime minister with a simultaneous reshuffling of the majority of cabinet members1

As a result of the mass reshuffle, Ukraine’s military industry will be placed under the leadership of the Defense Ministry, which will be headed by former Prime Minister Denys Shmygal, who has held this position since March 4, 2020. Under pressure from Zelenskyy and the head of the Ukrainian president’s office, Andriy Yermak, Denys Shmygal was forced to tender his resignation on July 15, 2025. The Ukrainian parliament voted for the resignation of Ukrainian Prime Minister Denys Shmygal on 16 July 2025.

Topnews in UA

The decision to dismiss Shmygal, 49, was supported by 261 MPs, while the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine was also dissolved during the government reshuffle.

resignation letter of Prime Minister

In mid-July, Zelenskyy also said that he was considering acting Defense Minister Rustem Umerov as Ukraine’s ambassador to the USA. Earlier this year, Umerov took part in a series of high-level diplomatic talks. Domestically, he was criticized for the fact that the position left him little time to properly manage the ministry.

Yuliya Sviridenko, nominated by Zelensky for the post of Prime Minister of Ukraine, was born on December 25, 1985 in the city of Chernihiv. Until 2019, she worked in various positions in the administration of Chernihiv region, in 2019 she was appointed Deputy Minister of Economy of Ukraine, since 2020 she was deputy head of the office of the President of Ukraine, headed by Andriy Yermak. She is a member of the pro-presidential Servant of the People party.

Yuliya Sviridenko

According to Zelenskyy, the appointment of Yuliya Sviridenko as the new prime minister is based on her extensive experience in supporting Ukrainian industry and the urgent need to attract foreign funding for Ukraine’s military needs. Sviridenko gained influence thanks to the support of the head of the president’s office, Yermak, and her work with the USA, where she played a key role in signing an agreement with the USA on rare earth minerals in May 2025.

Ukraine's parliament

Next year, Ukraine will face the difficult task of financing its growing budget deficit amid cuts in foreign aid. The Ukrainian Finance Ministry estimates that the country’s financing needs from the US and the EU for 2026 amount to 40bn dollars.

According to Sergiy Marchenko – Minister of Finance of Ukraine, now the government does not know where to find these funds in case of a decrease in funding from the European Union and international funds. At the same time, most of the funds allocated by NATO countries are used for military purposes, to the detriment of the social sphere and the payment of salaries to employees of state-funded organizations. In mid-July, the Ukrainian parliament supported a bill on amending the 2025 budget, which envisages an increase in defense spending by 412 billion hryvnyas ($10 billion) this year.

Meanwhile, Russia has started signaling its desire for a third round of talks with Ukraine after US President Donald Trump said that the USA would supply Ukraine with more long-range weapons through NATO members. Trump also warned that if Russia did not agree to a ceasefire within 50 days, Washington would impose 500% duties on the country’s goods.

These circumstances against the background of widespread corruption, forced mobilization, deterioration of the social status of Ukrainian citizens, illegitimacy of the country’s leadership and disregard for the norms of national and international law contribute to the intensification of the internal political struggle for the future posts of the President and members of the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine.

Minister of Finance of Ukraine

Strange as it may seem, the first place in this internal political struggle is occupied by Andriy Yermak, the head of the Ukrainian president’s office and the shadow leader of Ukraine. Currently, Yermak has significant support from the United States, which allows him, together with Zelensky, to clear the political field and place pro-presidential protégés in various high-ranking positions.

Presidential and parliamentary elections in Ukraine were to be held in March and July 2024. However, due to another extension of martial law in May this year, these procedures have not been carried out.

Zelenskyy’s powers as president ended on May 21, 2024. At the same time, the decision of the Parliament of Ukraine – the Verkhovna Rada – to extend his powers in accordance with the national law No. 389-VIII dd. 12.05.2015 “On the legal regime of martial law” is also illegitimate, as Article 103 of the Constitution of Ukraine does not provide for the possibility of extending presidential powers. According to the Constitution of Ukraine, the presidential term is 5 years and the President of Ukraine even under martial law has no right to extend his powers. Only the Parliament has the right to extend the powers. Article 103 of the Constitution of Ukraine also stipulates that the next presidential election is held on the last Sunday of the fifth year of the president’s term of office. In the event of early termination of the powers of the President of Ukraine, elections are held within ninety days from the date of termination of his powers

According to the Ukrainian constitution, the prime minister’s candidacy should be proposed to the president by the parliamentary majority faction (currently, it is the pro-presidential Servant of the People party). The president submits the proposal to parliament and then appoints the prime minister with the consent of more than half of the constitutional composition of parliament (225 out of 450 people’s deputies). Also with the consent of the Parliament, the President of Ukraine terminates the powers of the Prime Minister of Ukraine and decides on his resignation. Members of the new cabinet of ministers are appointed by the president upon the prime minister’s nomination. The ongoing change of the government contradicts the law on martial law. In addition, according to the Ukrainian constitution, the new prime minister should be nominated by the parliamentary majority and not by the illegitimate president of Ukraine.

Zelenskyy

Many Ukrainian and international lawyers note that under national laws and international law, any agreements and legal acts signed and introduced by Zelenskyy into parliament after May 20, 2024 are effectively illegitimate, contradict Ukrainian legislation and can be canceled or easily legally challenged. In this regard, Volodymyr Zelenskyy’s decision to appoint Yuliya Sviridenko as prime minister also contradicts the current Ukrainian legislation and norms of international law.

As for the parliamentary elections in Ukraine, they were held on July 21, 2019, the deputies were elected for a term of 5 years and their powers ended in July 2024. However, due to the current legislation and the imposed martial law, the powers of the deputies of the Parliament are extended until its end. According to Article 20 of the Electoral Code of Ukraine No. 396-IX of December 19, 2019, the electoral process for elections to the Parliament of Ukraine should begin within a month after the lifting of martial law. Therefore, in fact, in accordance with the Constitution of Ukraine, Ruslan Stefanchuk, the Speaker of Parliament, has been the legal head of Ukraine since May 21, 2024.

For this reason, Zelensky’s decisions to extend martial law, appoint a new prime minister, Yuriy Sviridenko, reshuffle other members of the Ukrainian government, sign an agreement with the United States on rare earth minerals and transfer the port of Odessa to American companies are legally unauthorized and can be easily overturned both in Ukrainian legal proceedings and in international arbitration courts.

Realizing this legal precedent-casus, the leadership of the United States of America and a number of EU countries, primarily Great Britain, France and Germany, in cooperation with the Ukrainian side, are currently trying to develop a legal mechanism to give legitimacy to the legal acts already adopted by Mr. Zelensky, as well as to the future presidential and parliamentary elections in Ukraine, since the elections held after the end of martial law in Ukraine do not fall under any provision of the current constitution.

To this end, at the end of June 2025, the Chairman of the Parliament Ruslan Stefanchuk announced the preparation of a law on post-war elections, which is scheduled to be considered at the next sessions of the Ukrainian Parliament. Although Ruslan Stefanchuk himself notes that the said law will also be illegitimate if martial law is lifted in the country.

Against this background, the internal political struggle between various parties and candidates for the post of the future president of Ukraine is intensifying. The main direction of this interaction is the development of a normatively grounded strategy for future presidential and parliamentary elections in Ukraine. Allies of Volodymyr Zelensky from Great Britain and the USA announcing continuation of his support and new deliveries of weapons paid for by them realize that without interference in pre-election processes and vote counting procedure it is difficult to predict the results of future elections. That is why Volodymyr Zelensky has now started an active reshuffle of the government and clearing the political field of possible competitors in the upcoming elections.

The Economist previously wrote about the fact that the USA and EU countries are negotiating with Ukraine to start election processes after the ceasefire at the end of 2025 7 . However, in order to hold elections in Ukraine, martial law, which the authorities imposed on February 24, 2022 and extend every three months, must cease to be in force. The sixteenth extension for 90 days will come into force on August 7, 2025.

The Ukrainian mass media name Valeriy Zaluzhnyy, a former commander-in- chief of the Ukrainian Armed Forces who is currently ambassador to the UK, as Zelenskyy’s main rival.

From November 2024 to the end of June 2025 a number of sociological centers (KIIS – Kyiv International Institute of Sociology, SOCIS – Ukrainian Center for Sociological Studies) and the EU (Statista – German Statistical Data Center from February 5-11, 2025, June 6-11, 2025, Survation – English Polling and Marketing Research Agency from February 25-27, 2025) conducted opinion polls on the topic of presidential elections in Ukraine in order to determine the trust rating of Ukrainian citizens. According to the results of opinion polls as of the end of June 2025, more than 65.3% of respondents support holding presidential elections at the end of 2025.

According to the results of the conducted research, as of the end of June 2025, out of 14 possible candidates for the post of the future president of Ukraine, the highest results were shown by: V.Zelensky, V.Zaluzhny, P.Poroshenko, Y.Tymoshenko. If V.Zaluzhny and V.Zelensky make it to the second round of voting and there are no violations at the elections, the population of Ukraine will give preference to V.Zaluzhny. The candidacy of Andriy Yermak, the head of the Ukrainian president’s office, is also being considered as a gray cardinal and a dark horse. A number of experts do not rule out that if the USA agrees to support his candidacy as the future president of Ukraine, Yermak is capable of making efforts to physically remove Zelenskyy, for example, due to a sharp deterioration of his health, as was the case with the poisoning of the wife of Kyrylo Budanov, head of the main intelligence department of the Ukrainian Defense Ministry.

Against this background, many Ukrainian experts expect a large number of violations, scandals and kompromat at the future presidential election in Ukraine, as well as possible influence on the pre-election processes by the US, UK, Germany and France.

While the Ukrainian people are eagerly awaiting the resolution of the conflict, members of the Ukrainian parliament continue to scuffle. Thus, on July 16, 2025, on the eve of the vote on the appointment of the new Prime Minister of Ukraine, Yuriy Sviridenko, MPs Oleksiy Honcharenko and Danylo Hetmantsev had another scuffle on the rostrum during the regular session.

The post The Struggle for Power in Ukraine Has Begun first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Valeriy Krylko.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/the-struggle-for-power-in-ukraine-has-begun/feed/ 0 545968
This Day in Anarchist History: The Attempted Assassination of Henry Clay Frick https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/this-day-in-anarchist-history-the-attempted-assassination-of-henry-clay-frick/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/this-day-in-anarchist-history-the-attempted-assassination-of-henry-clay-frick/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 13:33:25 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160158 On This Day in Anarchist History, July 23rd 1892, we remember Alexander Berkman and his attempted assassination of the union-busting industrialist Henry Clay Frick. Frick was the chairman of the Carnegie Steel Company. He had recently used 300 Pinkerton agents to break up a picket line in Homestead, Pennsylvania sparking a fierce battle that killed […]

The post This Day in Anarchist History: The Attempted Assassination of Henry Clay Frick first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
On This Day in Anarchist History, July 23rd 1892, we remember Alexander Berkman and his attempted assassination of the union-busting industrialist Henry Clay Frick.

Frick was the chairman of the Carnegie Steel Company. He had recently used 300 Pinkerton agents to break up a picket line in Homestead, Pennsylvania sparking a fierce battle that killed at least 10, including 7 striking workers.

Berkman took a train to Pittsburgh where Emma Goldman wired him money for supplies for his attempt. His assassination would ultimately fail and Berkman spent 14 years in prison.

The post This Day in Anarchist History: The Attempted Assassination of Henry Clay Frick first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by subMedia.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/this-day-in-anarchist-history-the-attempted-assassination-of-henry-clay-frick/feed/ 0 545951
“One Meal Every Three Days”: Journalist & Aid Worker Back from Gaza on Stark Reality on the Ground https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/one-meal-every-three-days-journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-on-stark-reality-on-the-ground-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/one-meal-every-three-days-journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-on-stark-reality-on-the-ground-2/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 12:32:44 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=1621c63d653bee107eba7891ace98dd9 Seg2 guest emptypot split

The BBC, Associated Press, Reuters and Agence France-Presse have all called on Israel to allow journalists in and out of Gaza as starvation there becomes imminent. In a statement, the news outlets said, “We are desperately concerned for our journalists in Gaza, who are increasingly unable to feed themselves and their families.” We speak with Afeef Nessouli, a journalist who just returned from Gaza, where he volunteered as an aid worker. “It has been an incredibly awful experience to see people sort of become sicker and sicker from hunger,” says Nessouli, who describes visiting community kitchens in Gaza that have run out of food. “Many of us would just have one meal a day,” he says of his seven weeks in Gaza. Now his colleagues who remain in Gaza “are having one meal every three days.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/one-meal-every-three-days-journalist-aid-worker-back-from-gaza-on-stark-reality-on-the-ground-2/feed/ 0 545987
Palestinians fight for survival is at the forefront of a worldwide struggle against global fascism: An interview with Prof. David Klein https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/palestinians-fight-for-survival-is-at-the-forefront-of-a-worldwide-struggle-against-global-fascism-an-interview-with-prof-david-klein/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/palestinians-fight-for-survival-is-at-the-forefront-of-a-worldwide-struggle-against-global-fascism-an-interview-with-prof-david-klein/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 12:00:42 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160130 Q: How long did you teach mathematics at Cal State University, Northridge? DK:  I was there for a little more than three decades. Before that, I taught at UCLA and USC, and before that at Louisiana State University in Baton Rouge. There, I got into some trouble. I was arrested for taking over a U.S. […]

The post Palestinians fight for survival is at the forefront of a worldwide struggle against global fascism: An interview with Prof. David Klein first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Q: How long did you teach mathematics at Cal State University, Northridge?

DK:  I was there for a little more than three decades. Before that, I taught at UCLA and USC, and before that at Louisiana State University in Baton Rouge. There, I got into some trouble. I was arrested for taking over a U.S. Senator’s office along with half a dozen Quakers in protest of weapons to the Nicaraguan Contras. I also had a little run-in with the Ku Klux Klan and was sued by right-wing Central American students for bringing in speakers they didn’t like. They sued me for “mental anguish”. Of course, the suit was thrown out of court, but it was a distraction. So, when I got the position at CSUN, I was very happy to get a permanent position there.

Q:  So “mental anguish” …. that’s a recurring theme of the critics.

DK:  Yes, it’s one of their tools. Claiming to feel bad about what we talk about.

Q:  How did you become interested in Israel-Palestine?

DK:  Well, it was kind of gradual. When I was a kid, I was very pro-Israel. And then in college, I started to have doubts and talked to more people. And the more I learned, the more obvious it was that this was a settler colonial state that was engaged in pretty much what the United States did to the Native Americans. And then there was a real spike in my understanding and activity with the 2009  “Cast Lead” assault on Gaza by Israel. That really increased my activism. It was just a new level of outrage that I and many people felt.

Q:  I understand you didn’t talk about politics in your mathematics classes, but that you were otherwise active. What did you do, and what attacks or censorship did you experience?

DK: That’s right. I was careful not to bring it up in my classes since it didn’t really have direct relevance. But I was the faculty advisor for Students for Justice in Palestine and for the Student Green Party and a few other student groups. So, I created a webpage, a BDS resource webpage on the university server from my faculty webpage. Then, I wrote an open letter that was signed by many CSU faculty, administrators, and students to the chancellor of the entire CSU system, demanding that CSU end the study abroad program in Israel for a variety of reasons.

That got some news coverage and brought a lot of attention to my website. So, that was the start of a lot of attacks.

There were hundreds of calls to my university president that I be fired. There were some threats, some kind of death threats. There were some threats to the administration to withhold financial contributions. There was just lots of slander. Some of it came from the campus itself, but it was mostly outside from the Zionist Organization of America, a group called AMCHA, and other groups. And then there were some politicians who joined in the attacks. The local congressman, Brad Sherman, and a California assembly member, Bob Blumenfield, who later became a city council member.

An Israeli-supported law firm pressured then Attorney General Kamala Harris to prosecute me. And they separately asked the Los Angeles City attorney to do that. But those requests came to nothing. Still, I was required to produce massive amounts of emails, anything regarding Israel-Palestine, and regarding logistical planning to bring in guest speakers Ilan Pappe and Norman Finkelstein. These threats and demands went on and on for a long time. And on my website, I  posted a page of the threats, the nasty comments, and the calls for my removal. They were signed by doctors and other professionals, but used really low-level language.  The ugliness that it brought out was amazing.

Q: So you were part of organizing and hosting famous academics such as Norman Finkelstein and Ilan Pappe. How did those visits go, and what were the results?

DK: The Norman Finkelstein visit lasted a week. He gave three lectures, and there was a group of us who wanted to hire him at CSUN after he lost tenure at DePaul University. And so that included 30 faculty members from various departments, including the science departments and social studies, social science departments, and a wide range. And it was going well. We got the approval of a department that wanted to hire him, the journalism department, and it went up to the top, and we were all set to go. And then, at the last minute, it was vetoed by the campus president. Norman asked me to write an article about the whole thing, which I did.

The visit of Ilan Pappe came later in 2012.  We had to have campus police escorts because of the threats. But he was very persuasive and compelling. Both of these guests were. The students were very engaged and it went well.

Q:  I know that there was a big campaign to prevent the tour by Ilan Pappe, but ultimately, the presidents of several CSU universities defended his right to speak. Is that correct?

DK: Three of the campus presidents wrote a letter defending academic freedom. It was an open letter, but it went to the chancellor of the entire CSU system. The visits went smoothly logistically because of that. And it was pretty rare that campus presidents would stand up for academic freedom and freedom of speech for speakers like Ilan Pappe, who very strongly promotes Palestinian human rights.

Q: You’ve been an active supporter of the cultural and academic boycott of Israel. Why do you think this is important?

DK: It’s an important part of the general Boycott, Divestment, and Sanctions movement. Academics and culture are very important within Israel. And so this particular aspect of BDS lends what we think is special leverage to isolate the Zionist state because of its actions. Israeli universities are deeply complicit in the persecution and genocide of Palestinians. Maya Wind’s new book, “Towers of Ivory and Steel”, documents that very clearly. Focusing on academics is very pertinent to what’s going on. And the cultural boycott has a very large impact. Everybody recognizes when a famous artist, a singer, or a musician refuses to go to Israel and states the reasons.

Q: But critics of Israel and supporters of BDS are under attack. Do you think the censorship and attacks are the same as in the past? Or is it getting worse?

DK:  It’s getting much worse. The accusation of anti-semitism has been weaponized. Students, teachers, and professors are facing frivolous lawsuits. Students are facing expulsions. Faculty are facing job loss. Both are facing arrests and deportations for opposing genocide because it might hurt the feelings of the killers. Zionist students and outside advocates of genocide claim to feel unsafe because of demonstrations against Israel’s genocide. And they call human rights activists “anti-semitic”.  Even the Jewish activists. And so it’s much more intense now than in the past. They were just sort of getting warmed up on people like me, and now they’ve really sharpened their knives.

Q:  Do you have any strategy suggestions for campus activists who oppose the genocide happening in Gaza?

DK: Yes. I think we would do well to be less defensive and go on the offense. Pleading academic freedom and denying that we’re anti-semites is not really going very far. I think we need to move in the direction of accusing the accusers. Israeli soldiers are intentionally killing babies and children, shooting boys in their testicles, torturing doctors to death, and more broadly, carrying out the extermination of the entire Palestinian people. These are the worst of the worst. And we need to point to them, not just defend ourselves from their empty accusations.

By defining opposition to genocide as antisemitic, they’ve turned antisemitism into a virtue. Hitler could have only dreamed of this kind of linguistic transformation. And in this sense, the Zionists are the biggest antisemites on the planet. They’re the worst of humanity. So I think that the least vulnerable among us should take the lead, especially US-born tenured professors.

And we should focus on where the real power is.  For K-12 schools, it is the school boards. But for almost all colleges and universities in the United States, whether they’re public or private, the board of trustees is the institution’s highest decision-making or governance body.

Members of the board are typically very rich. They have a lot of political power within the country, not just in universities. To give one example, Miriam Adelson is on the USC Board of Trustees. Miriam Adelson was married to the late Sheldon Adelson. He was a very rich billionaire. Both of them are rich billionaires. And Miriam Adelson’s Foundation contributes $200 million each year to Israel. And she was one of the biggest Trump donors as well. So, there are a lot of university trustees like that. They come from weapons manufacturers, the oil and gas industry, and other major corporations. And they’re overwhelmingly Zionist.

University presidents, who appear to be in charge of their campuses, serve at the pleasure of the boards and can be hired and fired at the whim of these boards of trustees. So the boards of trustees are the real power at universities. They are behind the persecution of opponents of genocide. The college presidents who do cave in to the Zionist censors should face no-confidence votes from their faculty senate on campus. But, there really hasn’t been enough focus on the boards of trustees. And I think that’s the next step. There are a number of people who are coming to the same conclusion on campuses and universities.

A lot of research would be involved to find out who these people are, what their background is, expose them to the public, and show what they’re doing, and try to get them kicked out. Replace them with decent human beings. It’s like you’re either for genocide or against it. If you don’t care, that doesn’t say much good about you. So being anti genocide is the minimal criterion for human decency. After all, if they’re going after and attacking people who are trying to stop a genocide, that makes them horrible human beings, and they shouldn’t be in charge of anything.

Q: Do you have any final comments?

DK: I think the importance of the Palestinians’ fight for survival can hardly be overstated. Their struggle is not only for themselves, but it’s at the forefront of a worldwide struggle against global fascism. And that includes the climate catastrophe, because global fascism can only accelerate planetary suicide.

David Klein is Professor Emeritus of Mathematics at California State University, Northridge (CSUN). 

The post Palestinians fight for survival is at the forefront of a worldwide struggle against global fascism: An interview with Prof. David Klein first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Rick Sterling.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/palestinians-fight-for-survival-is-at-the-forefront-of-a-worldwide-struggle-against-global-fascism-an-interview-with-prof-david-klein/feed/ 0 545940
Why did Paramount cancel ‘The Late Show with Stephen Colbert’? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/why-did-paramount-cancel-the-late-show-with-stephen-colbert/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/why-did-paramount-cancel-the-late-show-with-stephen-colbert/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 11:00:21 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=8fc6cfb6073fc7161acda1c9769aa138
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/why-did-paramount-cancel-the-late-show-with-stephen-colbert/feed/ 0 545922
Gaza’s “last lifelines keeping people alive are collapsing," according to the UN https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/gazas-last-lifelines-keeping-people-alive-are-collapsing-according-to-the-un/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/gazas-last-lifelines-keeping-people-alive-are-collapsing-according-to-the-un/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 08:42:30 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6fb549e47dc3d13c1a02251cc2489265
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/gazas-last-lifelines-keeping-people-alive-are-collapsing-according-to-the-un/feed/ 0 545948
The national fight for public power comes to Oakland https://grist.org/energy/the-national-fight-for-public-power-comes-to-oakland/ https://grist.org/energy/the-national-fight-for-public-power-comes-to-oakland/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 08:30:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670738 Zoe Jonick didn’t think she was asking for much when she went before the Oakland City Council with what she considered a simple request: Urge the California state Senate to vote yes on a bill requiring the state to study the feasibility of ditching Pacific Gas & Electric and embracing public power.

It didn’t seem unreasonable, given that the nearby cities of San Francisco, Berkeley, and Richmond had done exactly that in recent months. What Jonick, an organizer with the climate organization 350 Bay Area, and others backing the move wanted the city to do was push state lawmakers to support SB 332. The legislation would explore alternatives to investor-owned utilities and introduce safety and equity measures to improve service. “We’re not being prescriptive and saying what exactly a not-for-profit system would look like,” she said. 

Yet this proved to be too much for the City Council, even if dozens of residents spoke out against the utility — which employs more than 8,000 people in Oakland — during a tense council meeting last week. The legislation, which also would have urged regulators to link utility executive compensation to power reliability and grid safety, was pulled from the agenda by a procedural maneuver. “It seems like a number of the council members have not had an opportunity to meet with both sides,” said Kevin Jenkins, the council president.

It was the latest setback in a nationwide campaign to replace investor-owned utilities with publicly owned operations. Advocates argue such a move would lead to cheaper, more reliable power and greater say for residents in how electricity is generated. Despite some victories here and there — Winter Park, Florida, and Jefferson County, Washington, have flipped the switch, and some nonprofit utilities, like California’s Sacramento Municipal Utility District, are many decades old — they’re fighting an uphill battle. Voters in Maine rejected switching to public power in 2023, an effort to do so in San Diego stalled amid skepticism from city leaders, and the city council in Ann Arbor, Michigan voted down a feasibility study proposal five months ago.

Those hoping to see Oakland join the fight come from the climate and environmental justice world. People of color comprise about 70 percent of the population, and almost 14 percent of the city’s 438,000 people live at or below the federal poverty line, leaving them burdened by utility debt. Critics of the utility, known locally at PG&E, also say the for-profit model disincentivizes maintenance and upgrades. That lack of upkeep contributed to faulty equipment sparking at least 31 fires, which killed 113 people, between 2017 and 2022.

Oakland council member Carol Fife sponsored the measure in support of Senate Bill 332, the Investor-Owned Utilities Accountability Act. Beyond calling for a feasibility study, the legislation caps rate hikes, prevents disconnections for vulnerable customers, and mandates periodic equipment audits and replacement. California’s utility bills are the second-priciest in the nation, and Fife said people in her district have experienced six rate hikes and frequent cutoffs in the past year — even as PG&E’s CEO earned $17 million.

“When I’m hearing that one ZIP code in my district in West Oakland has double-digit shutoffs for energy costs, I get concerned,” Fife said. “There are several neighborhoods in Oakland where at least 10 percent of the population has had their power cut off and remains without access to power.”

Critics say public power doesn’t necessarily mean cleaner power: Nebraska, the only state served entirely by a public utility, gets most of its electricity from coal. They also argue that the process of transforming a large utility system into a nonprofit would be time-intensive and expensive, and that they could cost electrical workers their jobs. But those weren’t the primary concerns constituents brought to Fife in voicing their reservations: She said Oaklanders were afraid that PG&E grant funding to local nonprofits would be cut off. 

The company, which provides power to about 16 million people throughout California, is Oakland’s second-largest employer, and it recently spent $900 million relocating to Oakland. The utility also is a big philanthropic player — it provided nearly 1,000 grants throughout the state totaling $36 million last year, and spent $3.5 million on Oakland nonprofits in particular.  Fife said nonprofit leaders she’s known for “two, three decades” said they supported her resolution but feared losing funding over it. (None of them spoke at the July 15 council meeting.) 

“The lobbyists for PG&E were telling people that I specifically was trying to push PG&E out of Oakland, that I would be responsible for a lack of charitable giving to nonprofits in my district and in the city,” she said. 

A PG&E representative, in an emailed statement, said the company “did not, and would not, suggest that we would pull our charitable support.” 

“We stand ready to continue to listen to the concerns of City Council members and citizens, and we look forward to continuing to work with city officials on tangible efforts to advance energy equity, climate resilience, and public safety.” 

The company representative did not comment on SB 332, but the company made the its thoughts clear during a Senate hearing in May: “SB 332 proposes sweeping changes without fully accounting for existing regulatory safeguards or the operational complexities of transforming the state’s energy infrastructure,” a PG&E lobbyist told lawmakers. 

PG&E’s response speaks to the vehemence with which investor-owned utilities fight to maintain their hold over energy. When advocates of public power in Maine managed to get a referendum on the ballot, the state’s two dominant utilities spent more than $40 million to oppose it, outspending its advocates 34 to 1 and handily defeating the measure.

Even if Oakland’s resolution is out of play for now, the city’s public-power advocates aren’t done. As SB 332 continues moving through the legislature, “We’re also building this movement from the ground up,” Jonick said. That might look like more community workshops, or more city council resolutions. Above all, it’ll look like neighbors talking to each other. “No matter what, we’re going to be pushing to build community understanding that another way is possible, and we can fight the utility monopolies’ hold on us.”

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The national fight for public power comes to Oakland on Jul 24, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Sophie Hurwitz.

]]>
https://grist.org/energy/the-national-fight-for-public-power-comes-to-oakland/feed/ 0 545909
Inside The Deadly Drone War Between Ukraine and Russia https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/what-deadly-drone-warfare-between-ukraine-and-russia-looks-like-right-now/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/what-deadly-drone-warfare-between-ukraine-and-russia-looks-like-right-now/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 07:00:04 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=290db93b6f2b528665a9e74512157640
This content originally appeared on Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty and was authored by Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/what-deadly-drone-warfare-between-ukraine-and-russia-looks-like-right-now/feed/ 0 545896
Musician Buzz Osborne (Melvins) on doing the things you’d like to see other people do https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/musician-buzz-osborne-melvins-on-doing-the-things-youd-like-to-see-other-people-do/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/musician-buzz-osborne-melvins-on-doing-the-things-youd-like-to-see-other-people-do/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-buzz-osborne-melvins-on-doing-the-things-youd-like-to-see-other-people-do You get up early in the morning to write music. When did that start, and why is it important to you to do it that way?

I definitely get up early, but it’s never a solid, particularly hardcore regime. I do get up early and usually write stuff every day, but it can vary. If I’m home, I’ll do something around the house, and then maybe go play golf and then be back around noon, then work on some guitar stuff. And usually if I’m playing guitar, I’m writing songs. I’m not just practicing playing guitar. So, that’s usually how that ends up happening, and I really can’t do it any other way. I just have to write a whole bunch of crap to find stuff that’s actually any good. It’s not like I sit down and only write good stuff. Most of it’s not good. That’s how it works—you force your way through it.

Do you know right away if something’s not working, or is it more of a feeling of, “This isn’t great right now, but maybe it could be something”?

Yeah, that’s more like it. And then stuff will sit there for a long time without being finished. I’ve said this before, but when you put a new album out and people think it’s new stuff, well, it’s actually not new. Some of it’s new—all of it’s new to you—but I actually wrote this a long time ago. Or at least the first half of it, and could never figure out what to do with it until later.

How close to finished does a song need to be before you get together with Dale to work on it?

I’ll make demos first, but I make fairly primitive demos. I don’t like spending a lot of time on demos. I’d rather put that effort towards when we actually record it. And plus, you don’t want to spend too much time on a demo and then have it be something that you fall in love with and then you want to replicate the demo. You don’t want to get too used to something that sounds too good, then blindsides you into what it’s going to sound like with the band. Most of my demos don’t have drums on them or anything. [Melvins drummer] Dale [Crover] will have some idea about what I want to do for drums, and then we’ll take it from there.

Do you play guitar every day, or do you make a point of taking breaks?

I don’t really take breaks. At my house, I’m pretty much ready to play anytime. I’ll just pick it up and go. I’ve got a lot of guitars I use in the studio or at home, but those aren’t ones I would play live because I need a specific thing for live. But I use all kinds of different guitars in the studio. On the Bad Mood Rising record, I kept track of every guitar and every effect and everything I used on every song. I’ll have to put that out sometime. I don’t think people would believe it.

So many guitar players tend to be gearheads and very particular about certain amps, guitars, or strings. It seems like you’re more open to experimentation, though.

I can make almost anything work. We’re at the point now, after all these albums, I could probably go in the studio and just use whatever gear they had there and still make a record without too much trouble. But live, I like to play a Les Paul style with the switch in the top, because I use it during the whole show. I use the three-position switch for three different sounds on the guitar without having to stomp on a lot of pedals for that. I’m really used to playing that way live, so I need it in that situation. But for the studio or writing songs, it doesn’t really matter. I like a variety of different guitars. I’ll have three or four guitars at any given time set up, ready to go, and then each of them will play different. And I’ll write a different kind of song on a certain guitar than I would on another guitar. I think each guitar has its own stories in it, and you’ll play different on it. I heard that somewhere, and I really liked that idea. Every guitar has its own stories.

You’ve made a ton of Melvins albums, you’ve done solo records, you’ve played in other bands, and you’re a photographer. Do you have a creative philosophy that you bring to all of those things?

Yeah, I guess so. It’s like Andy Warhol said: “While they’re figuring out the last thing you did, do more work.” I’m not very precious with that kind of thing. Do you want to be a photographer? Take pictures, and it doesn’t matter what kind. People get so caught up in this digital versus analog thing. I think it’s a mistake. My photography only got better with digital. I can see exactly what I just took. I don’t have to wait two weeks. I’m not building a fucking darkroom in my house, just like I’m not buying a two-inch Studer tape machine to use at home. I’m not going to do it. People have to get over that. “Well, it’s not real photography.” What is real photography? Just by using a film camera, you’re taking great pictures? What the fuck are you talking about?

They get so caught up, but that whole thing has nothing to do with creativity. My wife is a graphic designer, and she said she doesn’t give a shit how you do it if it’s good. If you just care about the medium, then you’re worrying about something that is not about art.

Have you always felt that way, or did you arrive at that conclusion through experience?

I’ve always loved photography, but I could never afford it. You have to buy film all the time and get it processed. And when you shoot a roll of film, you get one good picture or maybe nothing, because you can’t see. Once digital came along, I could see exactly what I was doing. So, what I do when I take pictures is I delete as I go. I don’t take 50 pictures and then try to decide. No, I decide right then. I want this one; delete the rest. I want that one; delete the rest. I don’t want to look through 100 pictures.

I spend a lot of time talking about what makes a good image because I’ve lived with a graphic designer for the last 30-plus years. We’ve spent a lot of time talking about why certain art or photography or movies are good. Even billboards: Why does this billboard work and that one doesn’t work? And, of course, album covers and so on. It’s really helped me as far as my perception of what a good picture is. But I was always pretty good at taking pictures for some reason. I don’t know why. But you can take a good picture with any camera. It’s not how you do it; it’s what you’re doing. I firmly believe that I can make a good recording with any kind of medium. We always laugh: Digital versus analog? I can make a recording with either.

You’ve worked in several musical collaborations over the years. The Melvins have had many lineups, you’ve played in Fantômas and Venomous Concept, and you’ve made guest appearances on other people’s records. But you’ve also made solo albums. What do you see as the pros and cons of collaborating versus working by yourself?

Well, Fantômas was not a collaboration. I just did whatever Mike [Patton] wanted me to do. I would’ve happily collaborated with him, but he had no interest in that. I added nothing to that stuff. His deal is, he’s very precious about the maestro type of situation: “I wrote all this, I did this.” And it’s like, “Okay, great.” It was nice to not write anything, but if it had been a collaboration, I think it would’ve only benefited. But I wasn’t asked what my opinion was on anything, so I didn’t bother offering. I wouldn’t have felt comfortable doing that. He invited me into this situation. I knew exactly what it was from the beginning, and I just left it that way.

But we did a new thing with Napalm Death, and I brought in songs, those guys brought in songs, and it was a true collaboration. I played guitar, bass—I played a bunch of different things on a wide variety of songs, as do they. I don’t even remember who played what, because a lot of it was done about a year ago. But that was a true collaboration where we really wrote songs together. So that was cool.

With the Melvins, I’m always happy to hear what they’re doing. I’ll make a suggestion, like, “I think maybe this bass part should be like this,” and then let Steven [McDonald] elaborate on it. That’s fine with me. He can make it better. I heard Bowie said something to Adrian Belew when Belew joined Bowie’s band: “Play the songs like this or make them better.” I agree.

I’m very much an accidentalist, too. I might think I know what I want, but then when I hear it a certain way, I go, “No, that’s better.” You have to be smart enough to know when to change things. You also have to be smart enough to know when a song is done. Because you can overcook it to where you’ve flung the life out of it completely. And it will sound like that on the recording.

How long did it take you to figure that out?

When we did our first few records, all we ever did was rehearse because there was nothing else to do. But I think that if we redid those songs now, we would do a much better job because it wouldn’t be over-thought. There’re songs on our records that we’ve rehearsed and songs we haven’t rehearsed. I dare you to try to figure out what’s what. There’re songs that we learned the same day we recorded them, as well as ones that we rehearsed a lot. And you can’t tell the difference.

The Melvins have had many lineup changes over the years. Some have been out of necessity, and some have been in the spirit of doing something different. In fact, a lot of what you do seems to be in the spirit of trying things a different way. Why is that important to you rather than, say, the Ramones or AC/DC approach of finding your thing and sticking with it?

It’s more like I behave in a way that I would appreciate other bands behaving. A lot of people hate it, but I really appreciated when Metallica did that album with Lou Reed. To me, it might be their best record. I think it’s really good. I’d heard so many bad things about it, I thought it was going to be terrible. When I heard it, I was like, “This actually doesn’t sound bad at all. I kind of like this.” I mean, do I need another straight Metallica record? Probably not.

But I can handle a lot of weird stuff. It doesn’t bother me. Pink Floyd doing Atom Heart Mother or Obscured by Clouds, those records don’t bother me at all. Or Meddle: “Echoes” takes up one whole side of the album. Is that a bad thing? Well, it’s different, but is it bad? No. It might be one of the best things they ever did—if not the best thing they ever did. Is it a hit single? No, but for some reason hit singles are a certain way, and I don’t understand that, either. None of it makes any sense to me.

When you say that you’re doing what you’d like to hear other bands do, do you also mean challenging yourself?

Well, it’s what I do. I make music for a living. I’m a professional musician, and so I feel like that’s what I should do. If you compare me to everybody else, then yeah, I look like I’m an incredible workaholic. But it might just be because they don’t do much at all. Most of them are sitting around doing nothing or taking decades between records. Even with five years between records, it’s like, “What were you doing that whole time? Isn’t this what you do?” I write songs and play guitar and sing and record albums and play live. I don’t find it to be that overbearing and that difficult. I’m not sure what the problem is most of the time. I think a lot of it has to do with laziness, lifestyle—things like that, I would guess.

You mentioned Metallica earlier. They started two years before the Melvins did. They’ve got 11 studio albums and you guys have 32. There’re clearly two different mentalities at work here.

I’m only prolific in comparison to them. I don’t feel like it’s way over the top, personally. I think I could probably do more if I pushed myself. I think I could do two albums a year without any trouble at all. I don’t see why not. People are like, “You should work harder on the records.” Well, you should shut up. Why don’t you let me do the driving? I don’t remember asking you what you thought, anyway. If you don’t like our records, don’t buy them. You’ll be one of millions and millions of people in the world who don’t buy our records. So what?

On this new Melvins 1983 record, Thunderball, you’re working with Mike Dillard, the original Melvins drummer. The one before that was with Steven McDonald, Roy Mayorga and Dale Crover. Years before that, you had the guys from Big Business in the band. I imagine the lineup shifts are creatively stimulating, but does it ever feel like you’re starting over again with each new arrangement?

Maybe a little, but not too bad. I’m not afraid of that, either. If I’m going to make a Melvins 1983 record, I’m going to write songs specifically for that. I’ll figure out or look at songs that I have that would work in that scenario. With Melvins 1983, I can’t quite do the exact same thing I can with the regular Melvins. It’s not possible because he’s not physically capable of playing that stuff. I have to come up with things that he can do. But they’re still good. Difficult doesn’t mean it’s better. Some of our best songs, like “Night Goat,” aren’t particularly hard to play. It doesn’t mean one thing or another.

Have you ever experienced writer’s block?

No. Not ever. What you do is, you just play through it. You just keep doing it. I think writer’s block comes from people wanting to do something specific. “I have to do this.” No, you don’t. Do something else. If you can’t come up with songs, come up with some other idea. Just think of something. What do you want to do? Look back through your demos; figure it out. And that all falls into place eventually.

So, you prefer to push through and make something happen rather than walking away for a while and coming back to it?

Well, it’s both. I record stuff on my phone, just sound memos, and I think I have about 700 on there right now. And those are just little riffs and ideas. I could probably not ever write anything again and have enough to keep putting out albums, but new ideas keep coming. I’ve just got to go back through them. A lot of it, I don’t even remember doing. And that’s just on my phone. I have my little recording devices that are filled with stuff, too. If I lost my phone or I lost all those recording devices? Oh, well—just move on. It’s part of the process.

Last but not least: To what do you attribute the longevity of the Melvins?

They asked Bob Dylan this question: “Why do you do what you do at this age? Why do you keep doing it?” He said, “That’s a deal I made. All I ever wanted to be was a musician. I never went to college. I never did any of those kinds of things. I wanted to play music. Now I get to do that. I work very hard at it, and I don’t take it lightly. And I have a ton of respect for the idea that I get to do that. So, I’m going to honor it by working as hard as I can.”

That’s it, really. It’s what I do. Would people ask a plumber or an architect, ”Why are you doing this?” It’s what I do. They design buildings or work on pipes. It’s all engineering and science, and the good ones understand that—and you can tell by their work. So, that’s the way I look at it. I heard this from a professional skateboarder, and I totally agree: You retire because you don’t want to do it anymore, or no one cares if you do it anymore.

Buzz Osborne Recommends:

A Cold Day in the Park – “This is a movie from 1969 that I watched last night. It was a really, really weird movie. Much weirder than I thought it was going to be. And I like that.”

Gang of Four – Solid Gold

Amy Winehouse – “I’ve been listening to her stuff a lot for the last three years.”

Lawrence of Arabia – “I always love watching this movie on tour.”

The Birthday Party – “Listen to their entire catalog.”


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by J. Bennett.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/musician-buzz-osborne-melvins-on-doing-the-things-youd-like-to-see-other-people-do/feed/ 0 545925
Musicians Julia Cumming and Nick Kivlen (Sunflower Bean) on not forcing it https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/musicians-julia-cumming-and-nick-kivlen-sunflower-bean-on-not-forcing-it/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/musicians-julia-cumming-and-nick-kivlen-sunflower-bean-on-not-forcing-it/#respond Thu, 24 Jul 2025 04:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musicians-julia-cumming-and-nick-kivlen-sunflower-bean-on-not-forcing-it There was a period of time where creative differences were causing some stress in the band’s relationship, but you guys have reconciled now. What lessons did you learn from that experience?

Julia Cumming: I think it’s a very complex thing. I think we reached an impasse. It’s like, you’re trying to get the car started, you have the key in there, you’re trying to get all the sparks going. We just couldn’t light them up in a way that felt authentic to any of us. It wasn’t this huge, huge blowout, thank god. I think it also spoke to how much we cared about the music and the process—that we couldn’t force something that wasn’t happening in that way. Once we realized we couldn’t force it, we just had to stop.

You never know where you are in the story. I say that to myself and I say that to my friends a lot. That was a moment where we were feeling very afraid about our creative collaboration. We didn’t know where it was going. Now, we’re a few days from this record being out, and I’m reading people say how the songs made them feel. Seeing everything that we were able to accomplish when we did come together, with that serendipity, I’m just grateful for all the different parts of the experience.

Because art adjacent stuff is fun, a lot of people think that the process of making the art should also be fun. Sometimes it’s really exciting and cool and sometimes it is fun. [But low points] just mean that I now have a way different perspective. I have more insight on how those lower and more challenging moments can actually mean really great things for the work eventually.

I know this is probably a bit of a sensitive topic. Julia, one of the songs you wrote on the new record is about being sexually abused. First off, I’m really sorry that happened to you. It’s very intense to make art about something like that. What made you realize you were ready to write about that experience?

Julia: Well, first of all, I want to thank you for your question because some people have brought this up to me in interviews in very crass and random ways.

I’m sure.

Which has been really surprising, actually. When that happens, I’m just like, “Fuck this, I’m not going to talk about it.” Context-wise, I didn’t expect that song to be a single. That was kind of chosen as a team. I thought that it was going to be a really powerful touchpoint on the record. I think the way that it musically came out helped tie in our other singles, and helped tie in the sound of the record. That was one of the reasons that it happened. I even talked to the label and I said, “Should we even put out a single that is dealing with something like this?” I have to thank Lucky Number for saying, “I think it’s good that this is a song that is actually saying something. It has a reason to exist.”

It was a song that I had worked on with Olive [Faber, the band’s drummer] a couple of years prior to making the record. I had gone to the studio one day with her and I had been playing with it for a while… I never expected to do anything with it. That’s the cool thing about having an ongoing creative process. Sometimes you have these feelings and they arrive in song form and then you make them, and sometimes there’s nowhere for them to go. That’s okay because you got to do it.

When we were putting this record together, we had started to get the idea of what we wanted it to sound like. We were looking at this kind of really naturalistic sound. I started looking for songs that had that quality. Along with this, these religious phrases kept coming up for us. I remembered that song and I remembered that line: “I just thought I was a kid who said the Lord’s Prayer every night when I went to bed with my parents.” There was something so funny to me about it, about turning it on its head, especially when you’re thinking about religion and how much violence gets used in the name of religion.

What I really like about that song is how direct the lyrics are. They’re very… I wouldn’t say juvenile, but you can kind of see them on paper, you know what I mean? You can just look at them and see exactly what they are. It’s not trying to weave any other kind of story for you. There are a lot of songs that are trying to be like, “Oh, I went through this and this is my fight song.” They’re really triumphant. I thought that it would be more interesting to do a song that was about not being triumphant. I thought that, hopefully, it would resonate with a lot of people. This is not a unique experience. Unfortunately it’s a very, very common experience.

When I thought about if I had something to say in that area, I thought it would be more interesting to create a song that allowed people to be angry and allowed people to be spiteful. Saying, “You don’t have to fix that spite. You don’t have to forgive everyone. You don’t have to appease everyone. You don’t have to pretend that everything is better every moment of your life.” Sometimes you can just say, “Wow, that was fucked, and I’m kind of fucked up about it, and maybe that’s just how it is for now. I’m just going to let that be.”

Yeah, that makes a lot of sense. Thank you. My next question is for you, Nick. You’ve talked about learning that you don’t need to suffer to make art. What was your journey to realizing that?

Nick Kivlen: Honestly, it was probably from being really depressed, and not being able to figure out what I’m supposed to be doing, what I’m trying to say—or romanticizing it. I’m always one foot in the door of falling into the trope of putting a special, otherworldly meaning onto artists that suffer. I just read this book that Julia had at her house about Nick Drake and his last album, and I’m like, “Oh, I’m getting sucked in again to this old trope of the tortured artist.” I don’t want to say it’s true, but you think that someone who has gone through that kind of thing somehow has this wisdom or special otherworldly ability now.

It’s not usually true that when you’re in that space, you’re creative or healthy or thriving in any sort of way… There’s nothing romantic about feeling terrible about the way you are with people that are really close to you. I also was thinking about the song [“There’s A Part I Can’t Get Back”] in terms of faith, because I’ve always been jealous of people who say they feel the love of god or the love of Jesus, because I’ve never been able to feel that myself. I don’t know what they’re talking about when they say that they have that feeling. I’d rather live my life with that feeling of love and faith, but it’s not something I’ve been able to find yet.

What is something that scares both of you about making art? How do you deal with that fear?

Nick: I would say nothing scares me about making art because making music—and creating in general—is my favorite thing to do. It’s the time in my life when I’m away from everything that causes me anxiety. It’s like playing in a world of make believe. I am never, ever, ever guided by any sort of fear when I’m making stuff.

Julia: I don’t know if it is fearful, but for me it involves having a conversation with my subconscious and working continuously on strengthening my relationship with my subconscious. Sometimes your subconscious is a very ugly and scary partner to have in this journey. It is not ruled by logic. It’s just totally ruled by something else. You can’t control what’s going to happen when you’re interacting with it… I think the further I go on my life path and this journey, the more I can look at it like a partner and less like an animal I’m trying to catch.

What excites you about being an artist?

Nick: So much.

Julia: Besides making something where you really know that you’ve grown, like being able to pull off that chorus you really want, the best part for me is seeing the threads of how the work permeates in the world. When you get to meet kids who say that your band made them want to start a band, or when people say, “Your song was my wedding song.” I think the world is a lot more non-physical than we give it credit for, especially working in a medium that is completely abstract. It’s sound. You buy stuff sometimes to make it physical, but it’s literally, like, a bird song in the wind. It’s something that is hard to pin down. But to get to experience it having real world effects on other people, it starts to look like the roots of a tree. It starts to make you feel really connected to everything. I think that is one of my favorite parts.

Nick: I think that sums it up pretty well, honestly. That’s such a good answer.

What do you think are the biggest challenges for you as artists right now? And how are you overcoming those challenges?

Nick: The most difficult thing for me creatively is the limitations of my recording setup, I would say. The main way that I found to work around it is focusing on lyrics and melody, and focusing on chord structure and emotion, and less on production.

Julia: I think I would say finding a balance. I’ve always kind of struggled with that: balancing the attention that I love to give to creativity and my career, and then how that balances into making sure that I have enough time for family. There’s so much that we’re so reliant for, on our community of friends, family, and creatives that we collaborate with. Sometimes I feel really guilty that I don’t have enough to give back to them. That can be tough. I think especially as you get older, there’s just more pressure in every direction—the people that need you and that you need.

The way that I deal with it now is that I’ve sort of stopped operating with this idea that my life needs to look any certain way. I’m allowing it to unfold [in a way] where I can be the most useful at whatever time. I’m not trying to uphold anything because I think I should. I’m just trying to show up where I can… I’ve let go of trying to do something because I thought that was the thing I was supposed to be doing, and that’s made it easier for me to actually show up for the people that I need to.


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sarah John.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/24/musicians-julia-cumming-and-nick-kivlen-sunflower-bean-on-not-forcing-it/feed/ 0 545905
Chris Smalls: Gaza Freedom Flotilla faces sabotage attempts, death threats, but presses on https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/chris-smalls-gaza-freedom-flotilla-faces-sabotage-attempts-death-threats-but-presses-on/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/chris-smalls-gaza-freedom-flotilla-faces-sabotage-attempts-death-threats-but-presses-on/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 20:40:23 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b4d4e78d5940548e3bebfedb76b9c790
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/chris-smalls-gaza-freedom-flotilla-faces-sabotage-attempts-death-threats-but-presses-on/feed/ 0 545844
The Evidence Lost in Idaho’s Death Investigations https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-evidence-lost-in-idahos-death-investigations/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-evidence-lost-in-idahos-death-investigations/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 20:18:30 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5e808de9e59fb44e555f9004cb920a99
This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by ProPublica.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-evidence-lost-in-idahos-death-investigations/feed/ 0 545841
Yes, goddamnit, it’s genocide!: A conversation with Norman Solomon https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/yes-goddamnit-its-genocide-a-conversation-with-norman-solomon/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/yes-goddamnit-its-genocide-a-conversation-with-norman-solomon/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 20:03:11 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335704 Palestinians carrying pans, gather to receive hot meals, distributed by a charity organization in Gaza City, where residents are struggling to access food due to the ongoing Israeli blockade and attacks in Gaza City, Gaza on July 23, 2025. Photo by Saeed M. M. T. Jaras/Anadolu via Getty ImagesPundits like Bret Stephens continue to deny the reality of Israel’s genocide against Palestinians in Gaza even as that genocide is unfolding in front of our eyes and on our screens.]]> Palestinians carrying pans, gather to receive hot meals, distributed by a charity organization in Gaza City, where residents are struggling to access food due to the ongoing Israeli blockade and attacks in Gaza City, Gaza on July 23, 2025. Photo by Saeed M. M. T. Jaras/Anadolu via Getty Images

“With only rare exceptions,” Norman Solomon writes, “US news media and members of Congress continue to dodge the reality of genocide against Palestinians in Gaza, normalizing atrocities on a mass scale.” How did we end up in this Orwellian situation, where the reality of genocide is so thoroughly denied by pundits and politicians even as that genocide is unfolding in front of our eyes? How do we combat this level of inhumane violence and propaganda? Solomon, co-founder of Roots Action, joins The Marc Steiner Show for an urgent discussion about Israel’s manufactured genocide of Palestinians and how the media manufactures consent to, at best, hide and, at worst, justify Israel’s heinous actions.

Guests:

Additional resources:

Credits:

  • Producer: Rosette Sewali
  • Studio Production: David Hebden
  • Audio Post-Production: Stephen Frank
Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Marc Steiner:

Welcome to The Marc Steiner Show here on The Real News. I’m Marc Steiner. It’s great to have you all with us again.

As we begin this conversation, let me give you the grim reality of what’s happening in Gaza as we tape this conversation. Over 58,000 Gazans, the vast majority of whom are non-combatants, women, and children, have been killed, 140,000 wounded, 370,000 buildings severely damaged, 79,000 destroyed altogether. And Gazans are being pushed into smaller and smaller corners of an already small land, no running water, illness spreading, and there’s mass starvation. As someone who over the last 57 years has been working for peace and a two-state solution or some form of dwelling together, this is absolutely devastating.

And as we see the right rising in the Holy Land, in Israel, it’s also taking hold here in the United States, and we’re on a precipice here in the good old United States of America where neofascism is rising. And our guest covers that deeply. He quotes Congressman Ro Khanna, who said, “What’s going on is chilling. They’re banning all international students from coming to Harvard. Think about that. All foreign students banned. They could do this in other universities. They have fired seven of the 18 directors of the NIH, totally dismantling future medical research in our country. It dismantled the FDA, firing people who approve new drugs. They’re systematically firing people at the FAA, the Arab Administration. They’re openly talking about defying the United States Supreme Court orders. J.D. Vance just said, justify the orders they’re calling the universities the enemy. This is very chilling.” That was Ro Khanna’s quote.

So today, we talk with Norman Solomon. Norman Solomon is the co-founder of rootsaction.org. He’s the executive director of the Institute for Public Accuracy and the author of numerous books, including War Made Easy: How Presidents and Pundits Keep Spinning us to Death, and War Made Invisible: How America Hides the Human Toll of the Military Machine. His website is www.normansolomon.com — That’s Solomon with all Os — And he has incredibly detailed well-written articles, and joins us now.

So great, Norman, it’s good to see you. Glad you’re here. Welcome.

Norman Solomon:

Thanks a lot, Marc.

Marc Steiner:

You’ve been doing — That’s what you do, you write. But you’ve been doing a lot of writing both about Israel-Palestine and about what’s going on with the Democrats, and it really feels as if, on both fronts, the state of the Democratic Party and the horrendous slaughter taking place in Gaza, that we are on a precipice, I think, in some ways deeper and more dangerous than ones that I’ve noticed in a long time.

Norman Solomon:

It’s hard to fathom. There are so many layers of it, to be in a country, the United States, that literally makes possible an ongoing genocide. It’s not a metaphor, it’s not an exaggeration. This is genocide going on. And yet, we’re living in that country that, under President Biden and now under President Trump, is literally enabling it, giving the weapons to make it all possible, and really the political support to enable it as well.

And then we have the domestic repression that, really, I’m in my mid-70s now, I can’t remember it ever being this bad, even in the depths of the Nixon administration and the crackdowns, the class war, the repression, the disappearances, the troops, I want to say, often with their faces covered, their identities. This is the kind of authoritarian regime that we would have nightmares for. It can’t happen here, but it is happening. So in terms of foreign policy, in terms of what’s happening in this country, it certainly is very upsetting if we’re paying attention. And at the same time, we know we can never give up. We have to organize and turn this around.

Marc Steiner:

So one of the things you just said, it took me back to my youth when I was a teenager as a civil rights worker in the South 16, 17, 18 years old. What we’re seeing now, to me, is akin to that, the terror that civil rights workers, the terror the Black community was under in the South is growing here in this country now, but in Israel it is a fact of life every day. 60,000 Palestinians killed so far in that teeny strip of land.

And I wonder how you begin to approach a couple of things, lemme just start here. We both come from the Jewish community. We both come from that world, and I grew up with people with numbers on their arms in my house. So how do we become those who oppressed us? It’s like the shift is turned. We’re doing exactly what was done to us. I guess that’s what I’ve been wrestling with and arguing, I spoke about it at a synagogue just the other week, for us to pay attention. How do we make us pay attention to that?

Norman Solomon:

This is so fundamental. What does “never again” mean?

Marc Steiner:

Right.

Norman Solomon:

Does it mean never again for all, any people or does it mean for our clan, our tribe, our self-identified ethnocentric group? And it’s a really basic question. And there’s also the matter of who we are and where the allegiances are tos so to speak, humanitys or some sort of self-identity.

It’s really stunning to me that so many progressives, whether Jewish or not, who were involved in supporting the Civil Rights Movement that took off in the ’60s, as you refer to, Marc, are now, unfortunately, in so many cases, winking, nodding, being silent about, or even supporting what, essentially, in the West Bank, for instance, is the Klan running everything, that is a clear parallel of people being terrorized, killed by extrajudicial means. And there’s no protection being provided, in that case, by the government, as a matter of fact, the Israeli government’s part of it.

And then as, you refer to, the horrendous slaughter going on daily in Gaza, and pretty soon it’s going to be the two-year mark, while there are some really terrible things going on in many parts of the world, the reality is that genocide is a very clearly internationally defined definition. So many people grew up with the belief, the understanding that that’s actually the worst possible thing that could go on, and yet it is going on. So that’s one just beyond upsetting reality.

And parallel to that and intertwined is that it is the United States of America that makes it all possible. And so, when you live in that United States of America, that constantly gives us the question: who the hell are we? And I know as somebody growing up in the United States in the ’50s and ’60s, I was very frightened by watching The Diary of Anne Frank. And that whole question really hovered, and sometimes it was explicit in the ’50s, in the ’60s and beyond: How could the German people stand by and allow that to happen?

And I got more than a glimmer of that during the escalation of the Vietnam War because there was so much acceptance, support, or just looking the other way, and more than 3 million people died in Vietnam as a result of that active and passive support. And so that question is still with us here in the summer of 2025: How could people allow genocide to happen when “their own government” is doing it?

Marc Steiner:

I want to jump on this one thing I think it’s important to talk about for a moment, because there’s a lot of pushback on the use of the word “genocide” when it comes to what’s going on in Gaza at the moment. Let’s talk about how we, how you define that word and why it’s being used in Gaza. People could say genocide is the Holocaust, genocide was what happened in Cambodia, genocide is what this country did to the Indigenous people. Talk about the use of that word in terms of Gaza, because there’s a lot of confusion and anger around the use of that word.

Norman Solomon:

There is, and I find it notable that a lot of politicians and others and activists who routinely, over the years and decades, have cited reports from Amnesty International, from Human Rights Watch, as authoritative, as telling us what was going on in Africa or elsewhere in the world, and citing, yeah, Amnesty International has said this or that, or Human Rights Watch. last December, both Human Rights Watch and Amnesty International issued hundreds of pages reports definitively, unequivocally saying that what Israel was doing in Gaza, and now is continuing to do, is genocide. There was no watering it down, there was no equivocation. So we have these gold standard human rights global organizations saying it without question. And part of, as I read about it and read the scholars part of it is the intent are the forces, the governments, the authorities intentionally trying to make it, for instance, very difficult or impossible for new births to take place, which is certainly the case in Gaza.

The destruction of all the hospitals, the filtering out and blocking of humanitarian aid, medicine, food, nutrition, water and so forth. And also polar in part, trying to destroy the culture and ethnic reality of a particular group. All of that falls directly in line with what Israel’s been doing. There are so many smoking guns in terms of what has been said by Israeli officials for almost two years now. This is what they’re doing. And unfortunately, Israeli society is mostly there. Hebrew University last month released the results of a poll among Jewish Israelis and found that upwards of 60%, almost two thirds said that they believe there are no innocence in Gaza. There are no innocent people in Gaza whatsoever. And I had to think of some interviews that were done, some of the most heinous, top Nazi criminals who were part of inflicting the Holocaust on Jews, on gays, on gypsies,

Marc Steiner:

Gypsies.

Norman Solomon:

And they were asked there children, you were sentencing to death in those camps. And some of the response was, yeah, but they would’ve grown up to be adult Jews or gypsies or homosexuals or communists, and we couldn’t have that. There’s a lot of resonance and echoing of that attitude among not just the right wing leadership of the Israeli government, but among the majority of the population. And one thing I’ve been thinking about Mark, is that at this point, Israeli society is a genocidal society, and the United States in terms of polling is not in favor of that genocide, but for almost two years now and up through the present moment, the US government is a genocidal government because it’s making all this possible.

Marc Steiner:

So there may not be a connection to what I’m saying with there may be, I’m curious, your thoughts. You’re seeing an impotent democratic party with no sea muscle or strength intellectually or politically just stand up to this or anything else and kind of going along with it all and not the entire group. I mean, there’s a growing strong progressive wing inside the Democratic party that are standing up. So how does that political dynamic play into this moment

Norman Solomon:

Really important? Because for one thing, if the Democratic party had been truly lowercase d Democratic and had responded to the viewpoints about Gaza during the first months of the war on Gaza, back when Biden was still running for president and then Kamala Harris, then the position at the top of the Democratic Party would’ve been for a cutoff of military aid. As long as the slaughter continued in Gaza, they would’ve said no, an arms embargo on Israel. The polling was clear by early of last year, but because the party is under a hammerlock of the pro-Israel, right or wrong forces, corporate forces and so forth, it basically countermanded and ignored what the public wanted, including the total US public, but certainly even more so among Democrats. So when you have a party that doesn’t even pay attention to its base, is afraid of its base, which cares more about the big donors, not the small donors, but the big ones, and also the punditocracy, which has been callous and with few exceptions willing to ratify or at least accept this genocide going on in Gaza, then you have a party that’s an elitist party at the top.

Marc Steiner:

As you were saying that, one of the things I thought about because as a bumper sticker I made some 40, 50 years ago when I used to make them called existence is contradiction. And I raise that because when we say the power of the Israeli lobby, the pro Zionist world, while it’s real, it also raises the spec of antisemitism, which is always bubbling below the surface just like racism. It’s always bubbling below the surface. So I’m curious in the midst of our struggles, I mean there was just a huge convention here in Baltimore with a lot of young Jewish people who were standing up to this, which was really heartening. But the question is how do you respond to that? How do you respond to the danger of antisemitism that could kind of leap out at any moment and what we’re facing and how to say we have to stop Israel from committing the slaughter against Palestinians.

Norman Solomon:

The strongest force for antisemitism is the Israeli government, and specifically in the last year and three quarters, the Israeli war on people in Gaza. And so there’s this ultimate, in many ways, big life scam that Zionism has more intensely propagated in the world. And that is the scam, is that the Israeli government equals Judaism. And once you buy that absurdity, then as Volter says, when you buy into an absurdity, any atrocity becomes possible because opposition to the Israeli government gets equated with antisemitism. And we’ve seen that with a vengeance in the last more than a year, the attacks on universities, the attacks on basically free speech where you criticize Israel, you do it fundamentally. You dare to say that the Israeli project has been suppressing the rights of Palestinian people, which is clearly true since the late 1940s. And then you get branded as antisemitic. And I think you’re referring to what I read about was a wonderful conference in Baltimore not long ago of a Jewish voice for peace.

Marc Steiner:

Yes.

Norman Solomon:

And here’s thousands and thousands of Jewish activists who’ve been doing civil disobedience and protesting the war on Gaza for almost two years now, and they’re accused of being anti-Semitic. And that really takes the mask off of the propaganda process that the Israeli government and its allies have been relying on for decades. The reality is that all sorts of bigotry is deadly against Jews, against Muslims, against all sorts of people around the world. So it’s really all of one cloth in a sense. We fight against that kind of

Marc Steiner:

Bigotry. One of the pieces I was reading today that you wrote, you’ve written so much really good stuff that we’ll be linking to here on the page. You can just go through it all. It’s worth taking time with it. But you’re right about Congressman Connor and about the neo fascism bubbling up right here and how it’s really connected, I think, to what’s happening in Israel. And you wrote, they’re banning all international students from coming to Harvard. Seven of the 18 directors of the NIH have been fired, dismantling medical research, dismantling the FDA, firing people to approve new drugs, firing people in the FAA, and then you have a right wing supreme court. And so moving to the states for a moment, that analysis is you, right? Where does that lead us? Where does that take us? What do you think we’re facing?

Norman Solomon:

We’re facing tremendous repression and an effort to stamp out the opposition to the bigotry, to the rule of the billionaires. And we’re facing autocracy. It’s a cult led by Trump. The stakes could not be higher in terms of what has survived and been incubated as democratic processes in this country. We have structures that, it may sound like a cliche, but it’s true. People died for the right to vote. People died for some ways that the voices and opinions and desires of people at the grassroots could overwhelm the power of the elites. I ran across a quote from the first chief justice of the US Supreme Court, John Jay, who said that people who own the country should run it. And that’s what we’re seeing in New York City right now. The rage ha hath no fury, like the corporate power scorned. I

Speaker 3:

Like that

Norman Solomon:

We have people like Michael Bloomberg and other gazillionaires, and they can’t fathom the idea that Ani who would challenge the power of the big banks and the real estate interests and so forth to run the city that they largely own. It’s just unfathomable to those who are in power that you could actually have democratic socialism. And on the one hand, we can say, well, as is true with foreign policy, there’s a ruling class and they’ve always, they’re the descendants of a long centuries long process of imperial adventure and enforced by military and economic power. So that’s who they are. At the same time, there’s a huge split in the ruling class, especially domestically. And while the Democratic and Republican parties are so often just in lockstep in foreign policy, when you get to domestic policy now more than ever, it is a huge difference. And there’s a sort of a fringe demagoguery that we hear sometimes on the left that there’s no significant difference between the Democratic and Republican party.

So tell that to a young woman in Texas who wants to get an abortion, tell it to people who are being disappeared. Just look at the dozens of Supreme Court decisions just in the last few months. And you see that the justices who have been appointed by Republicans are bringing the hammer down on the most basic aspects of civil liberties. So there is a huge, huge difference. And I think part of our challenge is to recognize, and you referred to this I think a few minutes earlier with different words, but it’s too bad. It sounds sort of stodgy and stuffy and academic, but dialectics that truths exist in contradiction to each other. And it’s our challenge to understand in this moment what those contradictions portend not only for the future that we can anticipate, but what the hell we should do. So while we fight against the US militarism that has so many terrible results overseas, and of course it rebounds here as Martin Luther King Jr.

Said what he called the demonic destructive suction tube. A military spending destroys lives here at home by diverting resources. The fact is that here in the United States, we have a fascistic party. It’s called the Republican Party, and we have the imperative to defeat it. And while ultimately electoral work is a subset of social movements, it really is crucial who is sitting in the White House, who is running the Congress, whose speaker of the house, who’s majority leader in the Senate. And it’s ironic when we hear people who are into protesting who say, it doesn’t really matter, or we don’t want to put energy into electoral results when everything we are demanding ultimately has to be implemented through government action or is being set aside and destroyed through government inaction. So it’s like walking on both legs. We have to fight for a strong social movement and build it. And at the same time, we need this electoral work. And concretely, that means we need to take control of the Congress away from Republicans next year.

Marc Steiner:

I can hear a lot of people listening to our conversation groaning when they hear that because of the lack of faith in Democrats. And I think about historically where we are now on two levels. If you look at what happened in Germany and Italy in the 1930s and how the neo fascists who were a minority in both countries, the fascists took over, they won the election, they took over the country, and they turned everything around, which is in some ways what’s happening before our eyes. And we’re not making that comparison just like the fascists because of the colonial heritage have taken over what’s called Israel. I mean, and that dynamic is at play. So where do you see the forces coming together to counter that?

Norman Solomon:

I think, yeah, we needed a united front. We needed a united front against the Republican party in terms of not only these terrible things being done daily that we see in the news from the Trump regime and from the Republican Congress, but also united front to defeat them in elections. And I think in terms of literature, magical thinking can be wonderful, but in politics, we should be really against magical thinking.

Speaker 3:

We

Norman Solomon:

Should really have our feet on the ground. And there is no way to take the Congress away from Republicans next year except through Democratic party candidates. That is just the reality, the idea that Democrats are inherently the epitome of evil. Well tell it to Ilhan Omar, tell it to Rashida Lib. These are wonderful people who would not be in Congress if they had run on any line other than the Democratic party line. So we have this challenge to keep fighting.

Marc Steiner:

I was thinking about what’s happening Israel Palestine and the fact that during the sixties in the Civil Rights Movement, which I was a part of, 60 to 70% of all the white people in the movement and giving their lives sometimes were Jews down south. And I think that we have to harken in some ways back to our labor and civil rights roots to make a battle, to save the future. I think we are on that precipice.

Norman Solomon:

We’re on a precipice that many people have already been pulled over and have been thrown over and are being destroyed as we speak. And it goes to so many questions of identity and what we believe in and what kind of society we can create. One of the notable things to me, which gets very little publicity is that, okay, you have what, 7 million Jews in this country, increasingly, especially the younger ones, identify as anti Zionist, right? A large proportion of Jews in this country surveyed are saying that they believe the Israeli government is committing genocide. And then the largest Christian Zionist organization in this country has 10 million members, way larger. So there’s this terrible bargain that has been struck because many of those Christian Zionists don’t like Jews. Some of them are virulently antisemitic, but they have a biblical narrative that says, well, the Jews in Israel and what’s called Israel is sort of a stepping stone to where they’re headed in terms of their holy journey.

Marc Steiner:

They want us dead so they can take over. Yeah,

Norman Solomon:

It’s very cynical, but very sincere. And that kind of alliance reminds me of what happened took shape 20 and 30 years ago where you had corporate power, which going way back to the 1970s, the infamous Lewis Powell memo that said, Hey, we have to really organize as right wingers to crush progressives to make sure that the rich and the corporate people keep running the country. Don’t let these black people have more power. And so that was really a blueprint that was effectively followed. And then you had the rise of the so-called moral majority. You had Jerry Falwell and people who were evangelical right-wing Christians. They opposed women’s rights, they opposed abortion rights. And those two tendencies that became so strong during the 1970s and eighties, they struck a bargain. And I think that the Wall Street people, the corporate forces, they didn’t particularly care about abortion rights one way or the other, or women’s rights.

What they cared about is maximizing profits, which is what they always care about, and not have labor unions or others get in the way. And then meanwhile, I think a lot of the hardcore evangelical Christians, they didn’t really care about Wall Street one way or the other, but they struck this tremendously powerful deal. And we’ve seen the results. Now we have this reality that a new configuration of alliances is in place. The Republican Party has its own splits, but there we are. And that’s I think we come back to again and again, the need for front, and this is I think, a form of dialectics. There are some people in that necessarily united front that I hope will gain more and more power and defeat Republicans next year. Some of we’re going to find odious and we need to keep fighting their militarism and their class war from the top down because the only antidote to that, so to speak, is class war that would be more effective from the bottom up for working people, for wannabe working people, for children, for the elderly. That’s the battle that needs to be joined. One of the first steps is you defeat the neo fascists that are already in power. I’ve heard of a parable attributed to Malcolm X that if you’re facing somebody who’s pointing a gun at you and you’re also facing somebody who’s trying to poison you, the first step is to knock the gun out of the hand. Who’s pointing the gun at you? We’re facing a gun right now, and it’s the fascistic Republican party.

Marc Steiner:

We have to have many more conversations. I think what you just outlined on both fronts, what’s happening in Israel Palestine at this moment and the rise of neo fascism here are really important. And I think you eloquently put it in a lot of your writing that we’ll be linking to, so people who can check out what you’re saying, because I think they need to read it. And I think that you raise the issue here, which we can come back to at another time, which is part of the root of this, which is the Powell memo that people have forgotten about. And I remember doing shows about that years back. And I think it’s important to understand this history, to understand what we face and how we organized the fight against it. And so I just want to thank you, Norman, for being here today, but also for all the work you’ve done and the writing you’ve done and the analysis you give us, it’s really important. I look forward to wrestling with more ideas with you very soon.

Norman Solomon:

Hey, thanks a lot, mark. And thanks for the Mark Steiner show and the Real News Network.

Marc Steiner:

We’re all in this together.

Norman Solomon:

Yeah,

Marc Steiner:

Once again, let me thank Norman Solomon for joining us today, and we’ll link to his work. You can Google it at www.norissmonsolmon.com. And that’s Solomon with o’s. And thanks to David Hebdon for running the program today, and our audio editor Steven Frank for working his magic Roset Ali for producing the Mark Steiner show and the tireless Keller Ra for making it all work behind the scenes. And everyone here through Real News for making this show possible. Please let me know what you thought about, what you heard today, what you’d like us to cover. Just write to me at m ss@therealnews.com and I’ll get right back to you. Once again, thank you to Norman Solomon for joining us today. But for the crew here at The Real News, I’m Marc Steiner. Dan Val, keep listening and take care.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Marc Steiner.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/yes-goddamnit-its-genocide-a-conversation-with-norman-solomon/feed/ 0 545847
The Men Trump Deported to a Salvadoran Prison https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-men-trump-deported-to-a-salvadoran-prison/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-men-trump-deported-to-a-salvadoran-prison/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 17:00:00 +0000 https://projects.propublica.org/venezuelan-immigrants-trump-deported-cecot/ by ProPublica, The Texas Tribune, Alianza Rebelde Investiga and Cazadores de Fake News

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

On March 15, President Donald Trump’s administration sent more than 230 Venezuelan immigrants to a maximum-security prison in El Salvador. Without providing evidence, Trump has called the men “some of the most violent savages on the face of the Earth.”

Last week, the men were released as suddenly as they’d been taken away. Now, the truth of all their stories — one by one — will begin to be told.

Starting here.

We’ve compiled a first-of-its-kind, case-by-case accounting of 238 Venezuelan men who were held in El Salvador.

ProPublica, The Texas Tribune and a team of Venezuelan journalists from Alianza Rebelde Investiga (Rebel Alliance Investigates) and Cazadores de Fake News (Fake News Hunters) spent the past four months reporting on the men’s lives and their backgrounds. We obtained government data that included whether they had been convicted of crimes in the U.S. or had pending charges. We found most were listed solely as having immigration violations. We also conducted interviews with relatives of more than 100 of the men; reviewed thousands of pages of court records from the U.S. and South America; and analyzed federal immigration court data.

Some of our findings:

  • We obtained internal data showing that the Trump administration knew that at least 197 of the men had not been convicted of crimes in the U.S. — and that only six had been convicted of violent offenses. We identified fewer than a dozen additional convictions, both for crimes committed in the U.S. and abroad, that were not reflected in the government data.

  • Nearly half of the men, or 118, were whisked out of the country while in the middle of their immigration cases, which should have protected them from deportation. Some were only days away from a final hearing.

  • At least 166 of the men have tattoos. Interviews with families, immigration documents and court records show the government relied heavily on tattoos to tie the men to the Venezuelan gang Tren de Aragua — even though law enforcement experts told us that tattoos are not an indicator of gang membership.

  • The men who were imprisoned range in age from 18 to 46. The impact of their monthslong incarceration extended beyond them. Their wives struggled to pay the rent. Relatives went without medical treatment. Their children wondered if they would see them again.

White House spokesperson Abigail Jackson did not respond to questions about the men in the database but said Trump “is committed to keeping his promises to the American people and removing dangerous criminal and terrorist illegals who pose a threat to the American public.” She referred questions to the Department of Homeland Security, which did not respond.

Read the men’s stories in our database.

Reporting by: Perla Trevizo, ProPublica and The Texas Tribune; Melisa Sánchez, ProPublica; Mica Rosenberg, ProPublica; Gabriel Sandoval, ProPublica; Jeff Ernsthausen, ProPublica; Ronna Risquez, Alianza Rebelde; Adrián González, Cazadores de Fake News; Adriana Núñez Moros, independent journalist; Carlos Centeno, independent journalist; Maryam Jameel, ProPublica; Gerardo del Valle, ProPublica; Cengiz Yar, ProPublica; Gabriel Pasquini, independent journalist; Kate Morrisey, independent journalist; Coral Murphy Marcos, independent journalist; Lomi Kriel, ProPublica and The Texas Tribune; Nicole Foy, ProPublica; Rafael Carranza, Arizona Luminaria; Lisa Seville, ProPublica

Design and development by: Ruth Talbot, ProPublica

Additional design and development by: Zisiga Mukulu, ProPublica

Additional data reporting by: Agnel Philip, ProPublica


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by .

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-men-trump-deported-to-a-salvadoran-prison/feed/ 0 545830
‘They Were Able to Pass These Bills Because of Anti-Trans Media Bias’: Documentary filmmaker Sam Feder on the backlash to trans visibility https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/they-were-able-to-pass-these-bills-because-of-anti-trans-media-bias-documentary-filmmaker-sam-feder-on-the-backlash-to-trans-visibility/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/they-were-able-to-pass-these-bills-because-of-anti-trans-media-bias-documentary-filmmaker-sam-feder-on-the-backlash-to-trans-visibility/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 16:41:36 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046636  

Sam Feder is the director of Heightened Scrutiny, a documentary that follows transgender ACLU lawyer Chase Strangio as he argues before the Supreme Court against Tennessee’s ban on gender-affirming care for trans youth. The film explores the crucial role centrist media played in driving legislation like Tennessee’s, and the broader cultural backlash against trans rights. FAIR senior analyst Julie Hollar, who appears in the film, interviewed Feder for FAIR.

 

Civil rights Lawyer Chase Strangio in Heightened Scrutiny.

Civil rights Lawyer Chase Strangio in Heightened Scrutiny: “It’s a playbook that will effectively take a misunderstood, maligned, small minority of people and place a larger population’s anxiety of a changing world onto them.”

Julie Hollar: You previously made a documentary, Disclosure (2020), about trans representation in film and television. You’ve said Heightened Scrutiny is something like a sequel to Disclosure. What drove you to make this film?

Sam Feder: Disclosure ends with a warning about the risks of increased visibility. I first met Chase when I interviewed him for Disclosure. He explained that while representation was important, it was crucial for trans people to be pushing for actual material redistribution, and to disrupt the systems that exclude most trans people, impacting their ability to survive. Without the deep, structural change Chase suggested, I worried that we were about to face a significant backlash to the media visibility we were witnessing at the time.

The backlash was even more drastic than I could have imagined. A year after Disclosure came out, hundreds of anti trans bills were being introduced. In just three years, from 2021–2024, we went from zero states banning gender-affirming care to 24 states. Now it’s up to 27 states.

I realized very quickly that anti-trans talking points that had once been confined to right-wing news outlets were now front-page stories in the mainstream media. My colleagues, who had always been strong allies, were parroting the mainstream media, questioning the legitimacy of trans healthcare. And they felt empowered by the coverage they were reading to speak with authority when debating trans rights, because the Paper of Record was saying it, and the Wall Street Journal, and the Atlantic, and on and on and on.

So I wanted to understand this shift, and I wanted to understand why reporters did not uphold the standards of journalism in coverage of trans people. Heightened Scrutiny examines the relationship between the media’s coverage of trans rights and the anti-trans legislation we have seen balloon in the backlash since 2021.

JH: Tell me more about the role of the media that you uncovered, and your focus on the New York Times.

Atlantic: Your child says she's trans. She wants hormones and surgery. She's 13.

Atlantic (7-8/18): “”Your Child Says She’s Trans. She Wants Hormones and Surgery. She’s 13.” (He’s 22, actually.)

SF: In the film we show that there was a clear shift starting in 2018, with the cover story in the Atlantic by Jesse Singal headlined “Your Child Says She’s Trans. She Wants Hormones and Surgery. She’s 13.”

We interviewed the cover model—he was 22 years old at the time of that article! Likewise, the rest of the story is full of misinformation and fearmongering. Fast forward to 2021, and misinformation about trans people is all over the Wall Street Journal, the Chicago Tribune, the LA Times, the Washington Post.

And people started to speak up and tell these outlets that they were publishing a lot of misinformation that was dangerous and harmful. And most outlets were willing to hear that criticism, and at least tried to do somewhat better—except the New York Times. They kind of dug in their heels and took it up a notch.

In a matter of six months or so, there were seven front-page stories questioning trans people’s right to healthcare in the New York Times. In early 2023, a group of Times contributors published an open letter about the anti-trans bias that had been steadily increasing. But the Times refused to acknowledge any wrongdoing, calling it legitimate and important journalism, and still to this day they promote the voices and ideas of well-known anti-trans thinkers, and perpetuate this anti-trans narrative.

And as Chase explains in the film, in the legal realm, this unprecedented thing was happening, which is that legal briefs were citing these articles. And that is incredibly uncommon with legal briefs about medical care; you usually see citations from scientists and medical experts, you don’t see them quoting articles from newspapers. And they were doing it because that was the only place they could draw on to support their anti-trans legislation.

And it was working; they were able to pass these bills because of the anti-trans media bias that was popping up everywhere. And the New York Times was central in that. There is a scene in the film where Fox News says look, even the New York Times is questioning this medical care, so it must be really bad for adolescents.

Julie Hollar in Heightened Scrutiny.

Julie Hollar in Heightened Scrutiny: “The news media really set the political agenda in many ways…. They establish what the national discourse is.”

JH: In the film, I talk briefly about FAIR’s 2023 study of New York Times trans coverage, which showed that over the course of a year, the paper devoted more front-page articles to framing trans people as some sort of threat to others’ rights—such as cisgender women and parents—than to the coordinated assault on trans people’s rights. FAIR just published an update to that study, which shows that the Times has gotten even worse in some ways than they were before, including fewer trans sources in front-page stories about trans issues, for instance, and including just as many sources peddling unchallenged anti-trans misinformation as trans sources. How are you as a filmmaker trying to hold the Times accountable? What do you hope audiences might do in response?

SF: When people watch the film, so many are surprised to learn about the trajectory from coverage to law, and how culpable the Times has been in spreading misinformation. This link between the articles and anti-trans bills is devastating; the film shows the direct connection from article to harm.

Just like Disclosure was a field study in representation that could be applied to any marginalized community, Heightened Scrutiny is a field study that can be applied to the ways in which the media has skewed the public’s perception of all marginalized people. At the end of the day, when anyone’s right to bodily autonomy is chipped away at, everyone’s rights are.

I think this is a way to show people an example of the harm. I also hope this film is a tool for supporting those who are on the ground fighting back against the harm—medical providers, lawyers, legislators, etc.

JH: The Times is getting worse, the Supreme Court isn’t saving us. In making the film, did you come across anything that gave you hope or inspiration?

SF: I learned from people I spoke with, in particular Lewis Wallace, who talks about how hope is a practice. Hope is something we have to work for relentlessly and rigorously.

I’m inspired by Mila, the 13-year-old trans girl in the film. She’s this brilliant person, empowered and unflappable in the face of immense struggle. Watching her fight gives me hope. And watching her family showing up to support her every step of the way teaches all of us what love can look like.

There’s still so much to protect. The Skrmetti decision is devastating, but queer and trans people know that we cannot rely on the law. Our ability to survive and thrive does not begin or end with the law. We know how to take care of each other. That also gives me hope.

You know, when Zohran Mamdani won the New York City mayoral primary, I also felt real hope, witnessing New Yorkers come together and do something that seemed so impossible. I hope people will rally around trans civil rights the same way.

JH: And media did their best to push misinformation in that case, too.

SF: Yes, the Times included. And seeing people be skeptical of the media, ignore the misinformation, take action together, and do what the media try to tell us is impossible or scary or “too woke”—we need to keep doing that, and giving each other hope.

Sam Feder

Filmmaker Sam Feder: “So many people were misled into thinking there is a legitimate debate about…whether trans people’s basic rights should be upheld, and it’s because of what they read or see in mainstream media.”

JH: What do you want people to walk away from your film with?

SF: I want people to see that the SCOTUS case is grounded in popular culture, in mainstream media and social media discourse. So many people were misled into thinking there is a legitimate debate about whether the risks of gender-affirming care outweighed the need for it, and whether trans people’s basic rights should be upheld, and it’s because of what they read or see in mainstream media. The legislation directly responds to the media climate.

Our existence is not a debate. As Jude [Ellison S. Doyle] says in the film: “Trans people are presented as one side of a debate on our lives. I hold the opinion that I exist, and you hold the opinion that I don’t.”

The outcome of this case is going to impact the constitutional rights of all people living in America. That’s lost on many people, but this is going to affect everyone’s access to privacy with their doctors.

JH: And that’s something that just wasn’t highlighted in most of the media coverage of the case, so that most people are not aware of it, based on the news reports.

SF: I absolutely think you’re right about that. There is still a lot we can protect. The fight is not over.


Heightened Scrutiny is screening in New York City at DCTV, July 18–24; in Los Angeles at Laemmle Theatres, July 26–27 and 29; and in San Francisco at the Roxie Theater, July 31 and August 2.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Julie Hollar.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/they-were-able-to-pass-these-bills-because-of-anti-trans-media-bias-documentary-filmmaker-sam-feder-on-the-backlash-to-trans-visibility/feed/ 0 545813
Four Years After Cop Was Filmed Slamming Black Woman to the Ground, Louisiana Passes Accountability Law https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/four-years-after-cop-was-filmed-slamming-black-woman-to-the-ground-louisiana-passes-accountability-law/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/four-years-after-cop-was-filmed-slamming-black-woman-to-the-ground-louisiana-passes-accountability-law/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 14:15:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/louisiana-police-shantel-arnold-law by Richard A. Webster, Verite News

This article was produced for ProPublica’s Local Reporting Network in partnership with Verite News. Sign up for Dispatches to get stories like this one as soon as they are published.

Louisiana passed a new police accountability law following allegations of civil rights violations against a sheriff’s deputy caught on video dragging a Black woman by her hair and slamming her head into the ground.

The woman, Shantel Arnold, sued the deputy and the sheriff, accusing the Jefferson Parish Sheriff’s Office of conspiring to cover up the 2021 assault. The Sheriff’s Office agreed in March to pay Arnold $300,000 after three days of trial but before jury deliberations began, Arnold’s attorney said.

After the incident, ProPublica, in partnership with WRKF, WWNO and The Times-Picayune, published an investigation detailing the long history of excessive-force complaints against Jefferson Parish sheriff’s Deputy Julio Alvarado. Alvarado, a 20-year veteran of the Sheriff’s Office, was employed by the department as of March.

Arnold’s attorney, state Sen. Gary Carter, D-New Orleans, said he introduced the legislation after it emerged that Alvarado had failed to write a report about his encounter with Arnold despite his department’s policy that officers document each time they use force. Jefferson Parish Sheriff Joseph Lopinto said during his testimony in the March trial over Arnold’s lawsuit that Alvarado’s commanders instructed him against writing such a report after video of his actions spread across social media.

Arnold’s run-in with Alvarado, which was captured in a 14-second video, left the woman with bruises and scratches across her body, a busted lip and recurring headaches, according to her subsequent account to police investigators.

“Had it not been for a bystander capturing how this officer beat up Shantel Arnold, there would be no report, there would be no evidence of it, there would be no indication that it ever happened,” Carter said in a recent interview.

The new law, passed unanimously by state legislators and signed by Gov. Jeff Landry in June, will require all law enforcement agencies to report every time an officer’s use of force results in serious injury. It directs the Council on Peace Officer Standards and Training, which certifies police officers, to adopt a policy on mandatory use-of-force reporting by Jan. 1. Details of how the process will work have not been spelled out, nor has the penalty for failing to comply.

The bill was introduced as “Shantel Arnold’s Law,” but Carter said that name was removed because “Sheriff Lopinto got very upset about that, and that almost killed the bill.”

Neither the Jefferson Parish Sheriff’s Office nor Alvarado’s attorney responded to requests for comment or an interview.

Alvarado came across Arnold in September 2021, when the officer responded to a 911 call about a fight among 25 people in Jefferson Parish. When the deputy pulled up in his patrol car, Alvarado saw Arnold, covered in dirt, walking down the street. Arnold told the deputy she was attacked by a group of boys who frequently bullied her. When Alvarado ordered her to stop, Arnold said she just wanted to go home and kept walking. That’s when the deputy jumped out of his vehicle, grabbed Arnold and slammed her into the sidewalk, according to several witnesses.

In a video taken by a bystander, Alvarado drags Arnold along the pavement, holds her by her braids and slams her repeatedly onto the pavement. Arnold was not charged with a crime and was later taken to a hospital. The Sheriff’s Office did not use body cameras at the time but has since begun using them.

The Jefferson Parish Sheriff’s Office denied wrongdoing. A 2022 internal investigation by the Sheriff’s Office determined Alvarado’s actions against Arnold were “both reasonable and acceptable.” Alvarado received an “approximately” 40-hour suspension for failing to file a written report, Lopinto said in his March testimony.

Arnold alleged in her 2022 lawsuit that the Sheriff’s Office knew Alvarado had a propensity for violence against Black people and other minority groups yet continued to have him patrol such communities, putting the public in danger.

Lopinto attributed Alvarado’s history of complaints to his working a high-crime beat, according to a 2022 Times-Picayune interview. “It’s not like he’s getting a complaint every month,” Lopinto said. During that same interview, Lopinto dismissed Arnold’s account and accused her of “looking for a paycheck.”

Alvarado’s alleged misdeeds fit a broader pattern in the Jefferson Parish Sheriff’s Office, as the yearlong investigation into the Sheriff’s Office by ProPublica, WRKF and WWNO found. Between 2013 and 2021, deputies disproportionately discharged guns against Black people. Of the 40 people shot at by Jefferson Parish deputies during that time, 73% were Black, more than double their share of the population. Twelve of the 16 people who died after being shot or restrained by deputies during that time were Black.

Alvarado has been named in at least 10 federal civil rights lawsuits since 2007, all involving the use of excessive force; eight of the plaintiffs were members of minority groups.

The Sheriff’s Office settled three of those lawsuits. Arnold’s $300,000 payout is the third — and largest — settlement involving Alvarado. Five other lawsuits were closed in favor of the Sheriff’s Office, one was dismissed on a legal technicality and one was indefinitely delayed.

The Sheriff’s Office said in filings responding to the eight lawsuits that were not dismissed or delayed that officers’ actions were “reasonable under the circumstances” and characterized the claims as “frivolous.”

Prior to the 2021 incident involving Arnold, the Jefferson Parish Sheriff’s Office had settled a 2016 lawsuit accusing Alvarado of grabbing a 14-year-old Hispanic boy by the neck and slamming his head against the concrete as the child screamed, “Why are you doing this to me?” A woman had called the police complaining that the boy and a friend were wrestling in a parking lot. Alvarado then threatened to have the boy and his family deported, according to the suit. The Sheriff’s Office, which paid the boy’s family $15,000, said in court filings that Alvarado’s actions were “reasonable under the circumstances.”

In 2018, another lawsuit claimed Alvarado and three deputies beat Atdner Casco, a Honduran native, and stole more than $2,000 from him during a traffic stop the year before, then conspired to have him deported. Casco claimed Alvarado beat and choked him until he agreed to keep silent about being robbed. The Sheriff’s Office denied wrongdoing but settled that case in 2020 for $50,000.

Both incidents were cited in Arnold’s lawsuit as evidence that Alvarado has exhibited a pattern of behavior throughout his career that made him unfit for duty. Carter, Arnold’s attorney, raised yet another incident during the March trial in which sheriff detectives in December 2019 witnessed Alvarado patronizing a massage parlor that was being investigated for suspected prostitution. Alvarado denied he went there to “have a sexual act performed on him.” He was demoted from sergeant to deputy for “bringing the Jefferson Parish Sheriff’s Office in disrepute” and for patronizing an “illegitimate business while on duty and neglecting your responsibilities to detectives under your command,” Carter said during the trial, citing an internal police report.

Carter said in an interview that Lopinto’s continued defense and employment of Alvarado represented a permissive attitude toward questionable behavior.

“He stood by” Alvarado, who “shows no contrition, no remorse,” Carter said.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Richard A. Webster, Verite News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/four-years-after-cop-was-filmed-slamming-black-woman-to-the-ground-louisiana-passes-accountability-law/feed/ 0 545799
Trump’s Latin American Policies Go South https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/trumps-latin-american-policies-go-south/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/trumps-latin-american-policies-go-south/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 14:00:03 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160123 With the Trump imperium passing the half-year mark, the posture of the US empire is ever clearer. Whether animated by “America First” or globalism, the objective remains “full spectrum dominance.” And now with the neocon capture of the Democrats, there are no guardrails from the so-called opposition party. Call it the “new cold war,” the […]

The post Trump’s Latin American Policies Go South first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
With the Trump imperium passing the half-year mark, the posture of the US empire is ever clearer. Whether animated by “America First” or globalism, the objective remains “full spectrum dominance.” And now with the neocon capture of the Democrats, there are no guardrails from the so-called opposition party.

Call it the “new cold war,” the “beginning of World War III,” or – in Trump’s words – “endless war,” this is the era that the world has entered. The US/Zionist war against Iran has paused, but no one has any illusions that it is over. And it won’t likely be resolved until one side decisively and totally prevails. Ditto for the proxy war with Russia in Ukraine. Likely the same with Palestine, where the barbarity of war worsened to genocide. Meanwhile, since Obama’s “pivot to Asia,” the empire is building up for war with China.

In Latin America and the Caribbean, the empire’s war on the world assumes a hybrid form. The carnage is less apparent because the weapons take the form of “soft power” – sanctions, tariffs, and deportations. These can have the same lethal consequences as bombs, only less overt.

Making the world unsafe for socialism

Some Western leftists vilify the defensive measures that Cuba, Venezuela, and Nicaragua must take to protect themselves from the empire’s regime-change schemes. In contrast, Washington clearly understands that these countries pose “threats of a good example” to the empire. Each subsequent US president, from Obama on, has certified them as “extraordinary threats to US national security.” Accordingly, they are targeted with the harshest coercive measures.

In this war of attrition, historian Isaac Saney uses the example of Cuba to show how any misstep by the revolutionary government or societal deficiency is exaggerated and weaponized. The empire’s siege, he explains, is not merely an attempt to destabilize the economy but is a deliberate strategy of suffocation. The empire aims to instigate internal discontent, distort people’s perception of the government, and ultimately erode social gains.

While Cuba is affected the worst by the hybrid war, both Venezuela and Nicaragua have also been damaged. All three countries have seen the “humanitarian parole” for their migrants in the US come to an end. Temporary Protected Status (TPS) was also withdrawn for Venezuelans and Nicaraguans. The strain of returning migrants, along with cuts in the remittances they had sent (amounting to a quarter of Nicaragua’s GDP), further impacts their respective economies.

Higher-than-average tariffs are threatened on Venezuelan and Nicaraguan exports to the US, together with severe restrictions on Caracas’s oil exports. Meanwhile, the screws have been tightened on the six-decade US blockade of Cuba with disastrous humanitarian consequences.

However, all three countries are fighting back. They are forming new trade alliances with China and elsewhere. Providing relief to Cuba, Mexico has supplied oil, and China is installing solar panel farms to address the now-daily power outages. High levels of food security in Venezuela and Nicaragua have strengthened their ability to resist US sanctions, while Caracas successfully defeated one of Washington’s harshest migration measures by securing the release of 252 of its citizens who had been incarcerated in El Salvador’s torturous CECOT prison.

Venezuela’s US-backed far-right opposition is in disarray. The first Trump administration had recognized the “interim presidency” of Juan Guaidó, followed by the Biden administration declaring Edmundo González the winner of Venezuela’s last presidential election. But the current Trump administration has yet to back González, de facto recognizing Venezuelan President Nicolás Maduro.

Nicaragua’s right-wing opposition is also reeling from a side-effect of Trump’s harsh treatment of migrants – many are returning voluntarily to a country claimed by the opposition to be “unsafe,” while US Homeland Security has even extolled their home country’s recent achievements. And some of Trump’s prominent Cuban-American supporters are now questioning his “maximum pressure” campaign for going too far.

Troubled waters for the Pink Tide

The current progressive wave, the so-called Pink Tide, was initiated by Mexican President Andrés Manuel López Obrador’s landslide victory in 2018. His MORENA Party successor, Claudia Sheinbaum, won by an even greater margin in 2024. Mexico’s first woman president has proven to be perhaps the world’s most dignified and capable sparring partner with the buffoon in the White House, who has threatened tariffs, deportations, military interdictions, and more on his southern neighbor.

Left-leaning presidents Gabriel Boric in Chile and Gustavo Petro in Colombia are limited to a single term. Both have faced opposition-aligned legislatures and deep-rooted reactionary power blocs. Chilean Communist Party candidate Jeanette Jara is favored to advance to the second-round presidential election in November 2025, but will face a challenging final round if the right unifies, as is likely, around an extremist candidate.

As the first non-rightist in Colombia’s history, Petro has had a tumultuous presidential tenure. He credibly accuses his former foreign minister of colluding with the US to overthrow him. However, the presidency could well revert to the right in the May 2026 elections.

Boric, Petro, Uruguay’s Yamandú Orsi, and Brazil’s Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva met in July as the region’s center-left presidents, with an agenda of dealing with Trump, promoting multilateralism, and (we can assume) keeping their distance from the region’s more left-wing governments.

With shaky popularity ratings, Lula will likely run for reelection in October 2026. As head of the region’s largest economy, Lula plays a world leadership role, chairing three global summits in a year. Yet, with less than a majority legislative backing, Lula has triangulated between Washington and the Global South, often capitulating to US interests (as in his veto of BRICS membership for Nicaragua and Venezuela). Regardless, Trump is threatening Brazil with a crippling 50% export tariff and is blatantly interfering in the trial of former right-wing President Jair Bolsonaro, accused of insurrection. So far, Trump’s actions have backfired, arousing anger among Brazilians. Lula commented that Trump was “not elected to be emperor of the world.”

In 2021, Honduran President Xiomara Castro took over a narcostate subservient to Washington and has tried to push the envelope to the left. Being constitutionally restricted to one term, Castro hands the Libre party candidacy in November’s election to former defense minister Rixi Moncada, who faces a tough contest with persistent US interference.

Bolivia’s ruling Movement Toward Socialism (MAS) Party is embroiled in a self-destructive internal conflict between former President Evo Morales and his former protégé and current President, Luis Arce. The energized Bolivian right wing is spoiling for the August 17th presidential election.

Israeli infiltration accompanies US military penetration

Analyst Joe Emersberger notes: “Today, all geopolitics relates back to Gaza where the imperial order has been unmasked like never before.” Defying Washington, the Hague Group met in Colombia for an emergency summit on Gaza to “take collective action grounded in international law.” On July 16, regional states – Bolivia, Cuba, Colombia, Nicaragua, and Saint Vincent and the Grenadines – endorsed the pledge to take measures in support of Palestine, with others likely to follow. Brazil will join South Africa’s ICJ complaint against Israel.

At the other end of the political spectrum are self-described “world’s coolest dictator” Nayib Bukele of El Salvador and confederates Javier Milei of Argentina and Daniel Noboa of Ecuador. As well as cozying up to Trump, they devotedly support Israel, which has been instrumental in enabling the most brutal reactionaries in the region. Noboa duly tells Israel’s Netanyahu that they “share the same enemies.”

In February, the US Southern Command warned: “Time is not on our side.” The perceived danger is “methodical incursion” into our “neighborhood” by both Russia and China. Indeed, China has become the region’s second-largest trading partner after the US, and even right-wing governments are reluctant to jeopardize their relations with Beijing. The empire’s solution is to “redouble our efforts to nest military engagement,” using humanitarian assistance as “an essential soft power tool.”

Picking up where Biden left off, Trump has furthered US military penetration, notably in Ecuador, Guyana, Brazil, Panama, and Argentina. The pandemic of narcotics trafficking, itself a product of US-induced demand, has been a Trojan Horse for militarist US intervention in Haiti, Ecuador, Peru, and threatened in Mexico.

In Panama, President José Mulino’s obeisance to Trump’s ambitions to control the Panama Canal and reduce China’s influence provoked massive protests. Trump’s collaboration in the genocide of Palestinians motivated Petro to declare that Colombia must leave the NATO alliance and keep its distance from “militaries that drop bombs on children.” Colombia had been collaborating with NATO since 2013 and became the only Latin American global partner in 2017.

Despite Trump’s bluster – what the Financial Times calls “imperial incontinence” – his administration has produced mixed results. While rightist political movements have basked in Trump’s fitful praise, his escalating coercion provokes resentment against Yankee influence. Resistance is growing, with new alliances bypassing Washington. As the empire’s grip tightens, so too does the resolve of those determined to break free from it.

The post Trump’s Latin American Policies Go South first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by John Perry and Roger D. Harris.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/trumps-latin-american-policies-go-south/feed/ 0 545784
Do You Have Information About the CECOT Deportations? Help ProPublica Report. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/do-you-have-information-about-the-cecot-deportations-help-propublica-report/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/do-you-have-information-about-the-cecot-deportations-help-propublica-report/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/getinvolved/help-propublica-report-venezuelans-deported-cecot by Perla Trevizo, Melissa Sanchez, Mica Rosenberg and Maryam Jameel

Leer en español.

The Trump administration sent more than 230 Venezuelan immigrants to CECOT, a maximum-security prison in El Salvador, and accused them of being members of the violent Tren de Aragua gang. For the past four months, ProPublica and The Texas Tribune have been reporting on these men, their backgrounds and how they ended up in custody. We’ve written about how the administration knew before removing them that the vast majority had not been convicted of any crimes in the U.S., contradicting its claims that the men were “the worst of the worst,” and how, by and large, they were abiding by the immigration system and not absconding from authorities. Now that they’ve been returned to Venezuela, we’re continuing to report on who the men are and what they went through.

Do you have information about the men or about the operation in which they were deported that you can share? Fill out this form or contact us via Signal at 917-512-0201 or WhatsApp at 917-327-4868.

We appreciate you sharing your story and we take your privacy seriously. We are gathering this information for the purposes of our reporting, and we will contact you if we wish to publish any part of your story.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Perla Trevizo, Melissa Sanchez, Mica Rosenberg and Maryam Jameel.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/do-you-have-information-about-the-cecot-deportations-help-propublica-report/feed/ 0 545771
The Untouchables: The Sexual Predators Within America’s Power Elite https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-untouchables-the-sexual-predators-within-americas-power-elite/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-untouchables-the-sexual-predators-within-americas-power-elite/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 12:00:27 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160116 “Now by coming in and being part of the cover-up, the Trump administration has become part of it.”—Alex Jones, InfoWars Once again, the American police state is choosing to protect predators, not victims. Jeffrey Epstein—the hedge fund billionaire/convicted serial pedophile and sex trafficker—may be dead, but the machinery that empowered and protected him is still very […]

The post The Untouchables: The Sexual Predators Within America’s Power Elite first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

Now by coming in and being part of the cover-up, the Trump administration has become part of it.”—Alex Jones, InfoWars

Once again, the American police state is choosing to protect predators, not victims.

Jeffrey Epstein—the hedge fund billionaire/convicted serial pedophile and sex trafficker—may be dead, but the machinery that empowered and protected him is still very much alive.

You see, the Epstein case was never just about Epstein—it was about the entire edifice of power that shields the ruling class, silences victims, and erases accountability.

Thus, the latest about-face declarations from the Trump administration—that Epstein had no client list, that he did, in fact, kill himself, and that there’s nothing more to discuss or investigate so we should just move on—have only reinforced what many have suspected all along: the system is rigged in order to protect the power elite because the power elite are the system.

In this age of partisan politics and a deeply polarized populace, corruption—especially when it involves sexual debauchery, depravity, and predatory behavior—has become the great equalizer.

With the reemergence of Jeffrey Epstein’s ghost in the public discourse, we are once again reminded of just how deep the rot goes.

Politics, religion, entertainment, business, law enforcement, the military—it doesn’t matter the arena or affiliation: all are riddled with the kind of seedy, depraved behavior that gets a free pass when it involves the powerful.

For years, the Epstein case has stood as a grotesque emblem of the depravity within America’s power elite: billionaires, politicians, and celebrities who allegedly trafficked in sex with young girls while insulated from accountability.

It is believed that Epstein, who died in jail after being arrested on charges of molesting, raping, and sex trafficking dozens of young girls, operated a sex trafficking ring not only for his own personal pleasure but also for that of his friends and business associates.

According to The Washington Post, “several of the young women…say they were offered to the rich and famous as sex partners at Epstein’s parties.”

Despite the government’s insistence that there’s nothing more to see, here’s what the public record already reveals:

  • Epstein ferried his friends about on his private plane, nicknamed the “Lolita Express” after the Nabokov novel, due to the presence of what appeared to be underage girls on board.
  • Both Bill Clinton and Donald Trump were counted among Epstein’s friends.
  • Both Clinton and Trump were at one time passengers on the Lolita Express.
  • Both Clinton and Trump are renowned womanizers who have been accused of sexual impropriety by a significant number of women over the years. In fact, The Rutherford Institute represented Paula Jones in her landmark sexual harassment lawsuit against then-President Clinton—a case that helped expose how far the political establishment will go to shield its own.

So you have to wonder… when President Trump, who has used his administration’s war on human trafficking to justify expanding the government’s police state powers, quietly dismantles the very government agencies tasked with investigating and exposing sex trafficking… what exactly is going on?

The message from the top is clear: there will be no accountability.

This isn’t justice. It’s a double standard—one set of rules for the untouchables, and another for everyone else.

If it looks like a cover-up, smells like a cover-up, and appears to benefit all the usual suspects, is it so far-fetched to suspect that the government is once again closing ranks to protect the members of its power elite?

We’ve seen it before: from the CIA’s MK-Ultra experiments and the FBI’s COINTELPRO operations to CIA black sites and NSA mass surveillance.

Each time, secrecy protected the powerful and betrayed the people.

And it will keep happening—again and again—unless we confront the truth hiding in plain sight: that abuse of power is not an aberration of the system—it is the system.

Nowhere is that more apparent than in the shadow economy of sex trafficking, where power, profit, and predation converge.

This is America’s seedy underbelly.

Child sex trafficking—the buying and selling of women, young girls, and boys for sex, some as young as 9 years old—has become big business in America. It is the fastest growing business in organized crime and the second most-lucrative commodity traded illegally after drugs and guns.

This is the darkness at the heart of the American police state: a system built to shield the powerful from justice.

While Epstein’s alleged crimes are heinous enough on their own, he is part of a larger narrative of how a culture of entitlement becomes a cesspool and a breeding ground for despots and predators.

Give any one person—or government agency—too much power and allow them to believe that they are entitled, untouchable, and will not be held accountable for their actions, and those powers will be abused.

We see this dynamic play out every day in communities across the United States.

A cop shoots an unarmed citizen for no credible reason and gets away with it. A president employs executive orders to sidestep the Constitution and gets away with it. A government agency spies on its citizens’ communications and gets away with it. An entertainment mogul sexually harasses aspiring actresses and gets away with it. The U.S. military bombs a civilian hospital and gets away with it.

It’s no coincidence that the same administration dismantling offices tasked with fighting human trafficking is also defunding the few agencies left to hold law enforcement accountable.

This is how the system works, protecting the untouchables—not because they’re innocent, but because the system has made them immune.

Abuse of power—and the ambition-fueled hypocrisy and deliberate disregard for misconduct that make those abuses possible—works the same whether you’re talking about sex crimes, government corruption, or the rule of law.

Unless something changes in the way we deal with these ongoing, egregious abuses of power, the predators of the police state will continue to wreak havoc on our freedoms, our communities, and our lives.

For too long now, Americans have tolerated an oligarchy in which a powerful, elite group of wealthy donors is calling the shots.

We need to restore the rule of law for all people, no exceptions.

The rule of law means no one gets a free pass—no matter their wealth, status, or political connections.

As I make clear in my bookBattlefield America: The War on the American People, and in its fictional counterpart, The Erik Blair Diaries, the empowerment of petty tyrants and political gods must come to an end.

The post The Untouchables: The Sexual Predators Within America’s Power Elite first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by John W. Whitehead and Nisha Whitehead.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-untouchables-the-sexual-predators-within-americas-power-elite/feed/ 0 545748
The Untouchables: The Sexual Predators Within America’s Power Elite https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-untouchables-the-sexual-predators-within-americas-power-elite-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-untouchables-the-sexual-predators-within-americas-power-elite-2/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 12:00:27 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160116 “Now by coming in and being part of the cover-up, the Trump administration has become part of it.”—Alex Jones, InfoWars Once again, the American police state is choosing to protect predators, not victims. Jeffrey Epstein—the hedge fund billionaire/convicted serial pedophile and sex trafficker—may be dead, but the machinery that empowered and protected him is still very […]

The post The Untouchables: The Sexual Predators Within America’s Power Elite first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

Now by coming in and being part of the cover-up, the Trump administration has become part of it.”—Alex Jones, InfoWars

Once again, the American police state is choosing to protect predators, not victims.

Jeffrey Epstein—the hedge fund billionaire/convicted serial pedophile and sex trafficker—may be dead, but the machinery that empowered and protected him is still very much alive.

You see, the Epstein case was never just about Epstein—it was about the entire edifice of power that shields the ruling class, silences victims, and erases accountability.

Thus, the latest about-face declarations from the Trump administration—that Epstein had no client list, that he did, in fact, kill himself, and that there’s nothing more to discuss or investigate so we should just move on—have only reinforced what many have suspected all along: the system is rigged in order to protect the power elite because the power elite are the system.

In this age of partisan politics and a deeply polarized populace, corruption—especially when it involves sexual debauchery, depravity, and predatory behavior—has become the great equalizer.

With the reemergence of Jeffrey Epstein’s ghost in the public discourse, we are once again reminded of just how deep the rot goes.

Politics, religion, entertainment, business, law enforcement, the military—it doesn’t matter the arena or affiliation: all are riddled with the kind of seedy, depraved behavior that gets a free pass when it involves the powerful.

For years, the Epstein case has stood as a grotesque emblem of the depravity within America’s power elite: billionaires, politicians, and celebrities who allegedly trafficked in sex with young girls while insulated from accountability.

It is believed that Epstein, who died in jail after being arrested on charges of molesting, raping, and sex trafficking dozens of young girls, operated a sex trafficking ring not only for his own personal pleasure but also for that of his friends and business associates.

According to The Washington Post, “several of the young women…say they were offered to the rich and famous as sex partners at Epstein’s parties.”

Despite the government’s insistence that there’s nothing more to see, here’s what the public record already reveals:

  • Epstein ferried his friends about on his private plane, nicknamed the “Lolita Express” after the Nabokov novel, due to the presence of what appeared to be underage girls on board.
  • Both Bill Clinton and Donald Trump were counted among Epstein’s friends.
  • Both Clinton and Trump were at one time passengers on the Lolita Express.
  • Both Clinton and Trump are renowned womanizers who have been accused of sexual impropriety by a significant number of women over the years. In fact, The Rutherford Institute represented Paula Jones in her landmark sexual harassment lawsuit against then-President Clinton—a case that helped expose how far the political establishment will go to shield its own.

So you have to wonder… when President Trump, who has used his administration’s war on human trafficking to justify expanding the government’s police state powers, quietly dismantles the very government agencies tasked with investigating and exposing sex trafficking… what exactly is going on?

The message from the top is clear: there will be no accountability.

This isn’t justice. It’s a double standard—one set of rules for the untouchables, and another for everyone else.

If it looks like a cover-up, smells like a cover-up, and appears to benefit all the usual suspects, is it so far-fetched to suspect that the government is once again closing ranks to protect the members of its power elite?

We’ve seen it before: from the CIA’s MK-Ultra experiments and the FBI’s COINTELPRO operations to CIA black sites and NSA mass surveillance.

Each time, secrecy protected the powerful and betrayed the people.

And it will keep happening—again and again—unless we confront the truth hiding in plain sight: that abuse of power is not an aberration of the system—it is the system.

Nowhere is that more apparent than in the shadow economy of sex trafficking, where power, profit, and predation converge.

This is America’s seedy underbelly.

Child sex trafficking—the buying and selling of women, young girls, and boys for sex, some as young as 9 years old—has become big business in America. It is the fastest growing business in organized crime and the second most-lucrative commodity traded illegally after drugs and guns.

This is the darkness at the heart of the American police state: a system built to shield the powerful from justice.

While Epstein’s alleged crimes are heinous enough on their own, he is part of a larger narrative of how a culture of entitlement becomes a cesspool and a breeding ground for despots and predators.

Give any one person—or government agency—too much power and allow them to believe that they are entitled, untouchable, and will not be held accountable for their actions, and those powers will be abused.

We see this dynamic play out every day in communities across the United States.

A cop shoots an unarmed citizen for no credible reason and gets away with it. A president employs executive orders to sidestep the Constitution and gets away with it. A government agency spies on its citizens’ communications and gets away with it. An entertainment mogul sexually harasses aspiring actresses and gets away with it. The U.S. military bombs a civilian hospital and gets away with it.

It’s no coincidence that the same administration dismantling offices tasked with fighting human trafficking is also defunding the few agencies left to hold law enforcement accountable.

This is how the system works, protecting the untouchables—not because they’re innocent, but because the system has made them immune.

Abuse of power—and the ambition-fueled hypocrisy and deliberate disregard for misconduct that make those abuses possible—works the same whether you’re talking about sex crimes, government corruption, or the rule of law.

Unless something changes in the way we deal with these ongoing, egregious abuses of power, the predators of the police state will continue to wreak havoc on our freedoms, our communities, and our lives.

For too long now, Americans have tolerated an oligarchy in which a powerful, elite group of wealthy donors is calling the shots.

We need to restore the rule of law for all people, no exceptions.

The rule of law means no one gets a free pass—no matter their wealth, status, or political connections.

As I make clear in my bookBattlefield America: The War on the American People, and in its fictional counterpart, The Erik Blair Diaries, the empowerment of petty tyrants and political gods must come to an end.

The post The Untouchables: The Sexual Predators Within America’s Power Elite first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by John W. Whitehead and Nisha Whitehead.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/the-untouchables-the-sexual-predators-within-americas-power-elite-2/feed/ 0 545749
🚨 William McNeil’s violent arrest in the U.S. has gone viral 🚨 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/%f0%9f%9a%a8-william-mcneils-violent-arrest-in-the-u-s-has-gone-viral-%f0%9f%9a%a8/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/%f0%9f%9a%a8-william-mcneils-violent-arrest-in-the-u-s-has-gone-viral-%f0%9f%9a%a8/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 11:35:27 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=4369a5548f0a3847d8628f7d1404ae8e
This content originally appeared on Amnesty International and was authored by Amnesty International.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/%f0%9f%9a%a8-william-mcneils-violent-arrest-in-the-u-s-has-gone-viral-%f0%9f%9a%a8/feed/ 0 546317
“Under the Microscope”: Activists Opposing a Nevada Lithium Mine Were Surveilled for Years, Records Show https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/under-the-microscope-activists-opposing-a-nevada-lithium-mine-were-surveilled-for-years-records-show/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/under-the-microscope-activists-opposing-a-nevada-lithium-mine-were-surveilled-for-years-records-show/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/thacker-pass-lithium-mine-nevada-indigenous by Mark Olalde

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up for Dispatches, a newsletter that spotlights wrongdoing around the country, to receive our stories in your inbox every week.

Ka’ila Farrell-Smith grew up in a community that was deeply involved in the fight for Indigenous rights, protesting broken treaties and other mistreatment of Native American people. Members of the movement, she said, understood that law enforcement agencies were surveilling their activities.

“I’ve been warned my entire life, ‘The FBI’s watching us,’” said Farrell-Smith, a member of the Klamath Tribes in Oregon.

Government records later confirmed wide-ranging FBI surveillance of the movement in the 1970s, and now the agency is focused on her and a new generation of Indigenous activists challenging development of a mine in northern Nevada. Farrell-Smith advises the group People of Red Mountain, which opposes a Canadian company’s efforts to tap what it says is one of the world’s largest lithium deposits.

Law enforcement agencies, including the FBI, have for years worked alongside private mine security to surveil the largely peaceful protesters who oppose the mine, called Thacker Pass, according to more than 2,000 pages of internal law enforcement communications reviewed by ProPublica. Officers and agents have tracked protesters’ social media, while the mining company has gathered video from a camera above a campsite protesters set up on public land near the mine. An FBI joint terrorism task force in Reno met in June 2022 “with a focus on Thacker Pass,” the records also show, and Lithium Americas — the main company behind the mine — hired a former FBI agent specializing in counterterrorism to develop its security plan.

“We’re out there doing ceremony and they’re surveilling us,” Farrell-Smith said.

“They treat us like we’re domestic terrorists,” added Chanda Callao, an organizer with People of Red Mountain.

All told, about 10 agencies have monitored the mine’s opponents. In addition to the FBI, those agencies include the Bureau of Land Management, Humboldt County Sheriff’s Office, Bureau of Indian Affairs, Nevada State Police Highway Patrol, Winnemucca Police Department and Nevada Threat Analysis Center, the records show.

Andrew Ferguson, who studies surveillance technology at the American University Washington College of Law, called the scrutiny of Indigenous and environmental protesters as potential terrorists “chilling.”

“It obviously should be concerning to activists that anything they do in their local area might be seen in this broad-brush way of being a federal issue of terrorism or come under the observation of the FBI and all of the powers that come with it,” Ferguson said.

The FBI did not respond to requests for comment. The Bureau of Land Management, which coordinated much of the interagency response, declined to comment. Most of the law enforcement activity has focused on monitoring, and one person has been arrested to date as a result of the protests.

Mike Allen, who served as Humboldt County’s sheriff until January 2023, said his office’s role was simply to monitor the situation at Thacker Pass. “We would go up there and make periodic patrol activity,” he said.

Allen defended the joint terrorism task force, saying it was “where we would just all get together and discuss things.” (The FBI characterizes such task forces, which include various agencies working in an area, as the front line of defense against terrorism.)

In this May 2022 email, an FBI special agent invites Nevada’s Humboldt County Sheriff’s Office to a joint terrorism task force meeting focused on Thacker Pass. (Records obtained by Siskiyou Rising Tide and Information for Public Use. Highlighted and redacted by ProPublica.)

Tim Crowley, Lithium Americas’ vice president of government and external affairs, said in a statement: “Protestors have vandalized property, blocked roads and dangerously climbed on Lithium Americas’ equipment. In all those cases, Lithium Americas avoided engagement with the protestors and coordinated with the local authorities when necessary for the protection of everyone involved.”

Crowley noted that Lithium Americas has worked with Indigenous communities near the mine to study cultural artifacts and is offering to build projects worth millions of dollars for the Fort McDermitt Paiute and Shoshone Tribe, such as a community center and greenhouse.

But individuals and the community groups opposed to the mine don’t want money. They worry mining will pollute local sources of water in the nation’s driest state and harm culturally significant sites, including that of an 1865 massacre of Indigenous people.

“We understand how the land is sacred and how much culture and how much history is within the McDermitt Caldera,” Callao said of the basin where Thacker Pass is located. “We know how much it means to not only the next generation, but the next seven generations.”

First image: Construction at Lithium Americas’ Thacker Pass mine near Orovada, Nevada. Second image: Nevada Gov. Joe Lombardo, center, and Rep. Mark Amodei, left, tour the site of a future housing facility for miners in Winnemucca, Nevada. (David Calvert/The Nevada Independent) A Familiar Conflict

Indigenous groups are increasingly at odds with mining companies as climate change brings economies around the globe to an inflection point. Greenhouse gas emissions from burning fossil fuels are contributing to increasingly intense hurricanes, heat waves, wildfires and droughts. The solution — powering the electrical grid, vehicles and factories with cleaner energy sources — brings tradeoffs.

Massive amounts of metals are required to manufacture solar panels, wind turbines and other renewable energy infrastructure. Demand for lithium will skyrocket 350% by 2040, largely to be used in electric vehicles’ rechargeable batteries, according to the International Energy Agency.

The U.S. produces very little lithium — and China controls a majority of refining capacity worldwide — so development of Thacker Pass enjoys bipartisan support, receiving a key permit in President Donald Trump’s first administration and a $2.26 billion loan from President Joe Biden’s administration. (Development ran into issues in June, when a Nevada agency notified the company that it was using groundwater without the proper permit. Company representatives have said they are confident that they will resolve the matter.)

Many minerals needed to produce cleaner energy are found on Indigenous lands. For example, 85% of known global lithium reserves are on or near Indigenous people’s lands, according to a 2022 study by researchers at the University of Queensland in Australia, the University of the Free State in South Africa and elsewhere. The situation has put Indigenous communities at odds with mining industries as tribes are asked to sacrifice land and sovereignty to combat climate change.

Luke Danielson is a mining consultant and lawyer who for decades has researched how mining affects Indigenous lands. “What I fear would be we set loose a land rush where we’re trampling over all the Indigenous people and we’re taking all the public land and essentially privatizing it to mining companies,” he said.

If companies or governments attempt to force mining on such communities, it can slow development, noted Ciaran O’Faircheallaigh, a professor emeritus of Australia’s Griffith University and author of “Indigenous Peoples and Mining.”

“If there are bulldozers coming down the road and they are going to destroy an area that is central to people’s identity and their existence, they are going to fight,” he said. “The solution is you actually put First Peoples in a position of equal power so that they can negotiate outcomes that allow for timely, and indeed speedy, development.”

Environmental activists Will Falk, left, and Max Wilbert led early opposition to the mine, after which the Bureau of Land Management fined them tens of thousands of dollars for the cost of monitoring them. (David Calvert/The Nevada Independent) “We’re Not There for an Uprising”

Most of the documents tracing law enforcement’s involvement at Thacker Pass were obtained via public records requests by two advocacy groups focused on climate change and law enforcement, Siskiyou Rising Tide and Information for Public Use. They shared the records with ProPublica, which obtained additional documents through separate public records requests to law enforcement agencies.

Given the monitoring of mining’s opponents highlighted in the records, experts raised questions about authorities’ role: Is the government there to support industrial development, protect civil liberties or act as an unbiased arbiter? At Thacker Pass, the documents show, law enforcement has helped defend the mine.

Protests have at times escalated.

A small group of more radical environmentalists led by non-Indigenous activists propelled the early movement, setting up a campsite on public land near the proposed mine site in January 2021. In June 2022, a protester from France wrote on social media, “We’ll need all the AR15s We can get on the frontlines!” Tensions peaked in June 2023, when several protesters entered the worksite and blocked bulldozers, leading to one arrest.

That group — which calls itself Protect Thacker Pass — argued that its actions were justified. Will Falk, one of the group’s organizers, said that, in any confrontation, scrutiny unfairly falls on protesters instead of companies or the government. “As a culture, we’ve become so used to militarized police that we don’t understand that, out of the group of people gathered, the people who are actually violent are the ones with the guns,” he said.

Falk and another organizer were, as a result of their participation in protests, barred by court order from returning to Thacker Pass and disrupting construction, and the Bureau of Land Management fined them for alleged trespass on public lands during the protest. The agency charged them $49,877.71 for officers’ time and mileage to monitor them, according to agency records Falk shared with ProPublica. Falk said his group tried to work with the agency to obtain permits and is disputing the fine to a federal board of appeals.

“None of us are armed. We’re not there for an uprising,” said Gary McKinney, a spokesperson for People of Red Mountain, which parted ways with Falk’s group before the incident that led to an arrest.

McKinney, a member of the Duck Valley Shoshone-Paiute Tribe, leads annual prayer rides, journeying hundreds of miles across northern Nevada on horseback with other Native American activists to Thacker Pass. He described the rides, intended to raise awareness of mining’s impact on tribes and the environment, as a way to exercise rights under the American Indian Religious Freedom Act, which protects tribes’ ability to practice traditional spirituality. Still, the group feels watched. A trail camera once mysteriously appeared near their campsite along the path of the prayer ride. They also crossed paths with security personnel.

Beyond the trail rides, the FBI tracks McKinney’s activity, the records show. The agency informed other law enforcement when he promoted a Fourth of July powwow and rodeo on his reservation, and it flagged a speech he delivered at a conference for mining-affected communities.

“We’re being watched, we’re being followed, we’re under the microscope,” McKinney said.

First image: Then-Humboldt County Sheriff Mike Allen questioned whether Raymond Mey, a Lithium Americas security contractor, had a state private investigator’s license in a June 2021 email. Second image: Mey pushed the Bureau of Land Management, the Humboldt County Sheriff’s Office and others for a coordinated law enforcement strategy to address protests at Thacker Pass in a June 2021 email. (Records obtained by Siskiyou Rising Tide and Information for Public Use. Highlighted, redacted and excerpted by ProPublica.)

The records show security personnel hired by Lithium Americas speaking as if an uprising could be imminent. “To date, there has been no violence or serious property destruction, however, the activities of these protest groups could change to a more aggressive actions and violent demeanor at any time,” Raymond Mey, who joined Lithium Americas’ security team for a time after a career with the FBI, wrote to law enforcement agencies in July 2022.

Mey also researched protesters’ activities, sharing his findings with law enforcement. In an April 2021 update, for example, he provided an aerial photograph of the protesters’ campsite. Law enforcement agencies worked with Mey, and he pushed to make that relationship closer, seeking “an integrated and coordinated law enforcement strategy to deal with the protestors at Thacker Pass.” The records indicate that the FBI was open to him attending its joint terrorism task force.

Mey is not licensed with the Nevada Private Investigators Licensing Board, which is required to perform such work in the state, according to agency records.

Mey said that he didn’t believe he needed a license because he wasn’t pursuing investigations. He said that his advice to the company was to avoid direct conflict with protesters and only call the police when necessary.

First image: Gary McKinney, spokesperson for People of Red Mountain. Second image: Members of the Reno-Sparks Indian Colony, People of Red Mountain, the Burns Paiute Tribe and others march in Reno, Nevada, to oppose the Thacker Pass mine. (David Calvert/The Nevada Independent) “We Shouldn’t Have to Accept the Burden of the Climate Crisis”

The battle over Thacker Pass reflects renewed strife between mining and drilling industries and Indigenous people. Two recent fights at the heart of this clash have intersected with Thacker Pass — one concerning an oil pipeline in the Great Plains and the other over a copper mine in the Southwest.

Beginning in 2016 and continuing for nearly a year, a large protest camp on the Standing Rock Indian Reservation sought to halt construction of the 1,172-mile Dakota Access Pipeline. Members of the Indigenous-led movement contended that it threatened the region’s water. The protest turned violent, leading to hundreds of arrests. Law enforcement eventually cleared the camp and the pipeline was completed.

Law enforcement agencies feared similar opposition at Thacker Pass, the records show.

In April 2021, Allen, then the local sheriff, and his staff met with Mark Pfeifle, president and CEO of the communications firm Off the Record Strategies, to discuss “lessons learned” from the Dakota Access Pipeline protests. Pfeifle, who helped the Bush administration build support for the second Gulf War, had more recently led a public relations blitz to discredit the Standing Rock protesters. This involved suggesting using a fake news crew and mocking up wanted posters for activists, according to emails obtained by news organizations. Pfeifle sent Allen presentations about the law enforcement response at Standing Rock, including one on “Examples of ‘Fake News’ and disinformation” from the protesters. “As always, we stand ready to help your office and your citizens,” he wrote to the sheriff.

The department appears not to have hired Pfeifle, although Allen directed his staff to also meet with Pfeifle’s colleague who worked on the Standing Rock response.

Around July 2021, the Humboldt County Sheriff’s Office held a meeting “to plan for the reality of a large-scale incident at Thacker Pass” similar to the Dakota Access Pipeline protests. Police referred to the ongoing protests on public land at Thacker Pass as an “occupation.”

Allen said he didn’t remember meeting with Pfeifle but said he wanted to be prepared for anything. “We didn’t know what to expect, but from what we understand, there were professional protestors up there and more were coming in,” he said.

Pfeifle didn’t respond to requests for comment.

Members of People of Red Mountain have also traveled to Arizona to object to the development of a controversial copper mine that’s planned in a national forest east of Phoenix. There, some members of the San Carlos Apache Tribe oppose the development because it would destroy an area they use for ceremonies. (In May, the Supreme Court handed down a decision allowing a land transfer, removing the final key obstacle to the mine.)

On these trips, Callao and others have frequently found a “notice of baggage inspection” from the Transportation Security Administration in their checked luggage. She provided ProPublica with photos of five such notices.

An agency spokesperson said that screening equipment does not know to whom the bag belongs when it triggers an alarm, and officers must search it.

To Callao, the surveillance, whether by luggage inspection, security camera or counterterrorism task force, adds to the weight placed on Indigenous communities amid the energy transition.

“We shouldn’t have to accept the burden of the climate crisis,” Callao said, “We should be able to protect our ancestral homelands.”


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Mark Olalde.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/under-the-microscope-activists-opposing-a-nevada-lithium-mine-were-surveilled-for-years-records-show/feed/ 0 545742
Author and organizer Leah Thomas on creative resilience https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/author-and-organizer-leah-thomas-on-creative-resilience/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/author-and-organizer-leah-thomas-on-creative-resilience/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/author-and-organizer-leah-thomas-on-creative-resilience What personal pillars are guiding you right now?

I would say crafting, radical imagination (as usual), and self-sustainability—making sure people are well within and sustaining themselves, which is different from the past.

What initially drew you to crafting?

I was entering my late 20s, single, and I was like, “You know what? I got to shake some stuff up.” So, I took a painting class and a ceramics class. It was just so nice to play. I was also experiencing writer’s block at the time—thinking about my second book. I wrote multiple proposals and they kept getting rejected. I really felt like I needed to just get creative to find myself. It made me feel like I was healing in a lot of ways. I feel like I was able to get through certain problems because I had this creative outlet—that’s been something I’ve wanted to share.

What is your go-to material language right now?

I like doing things with plants—a lot of floral dyeing and learning how to treat clothing so it receives plant color better. I’m also experimenting with learning how to make plant-based milks and things like that. Ceramics have also been so lovely.

What is the value add for you, personally, when it comes to crafting in community?

I want more friends. I have so many amazing, incredible friends that also have platforms, and I think it’s just connecting me to random people. I’m an introverted person but there’s a need that I have to get grounded, get back down to earth, and talk to people about their interests. It’s bringing me a lot of joy—getting grassroots. I feel really lucky that when I was building my platform, I got to just say whatever I wanted and people would listen. I’m like, “Why are you listening to me? I’m 25.” Now that I am older, I want to listen and learn from other people.

What have you learned about people from hosting events?

There’s such a need for third spaces. There was a wave in 2020, when I was really platformed on Instagram, where people were just wanting to be educated about everything from anti-racism to environmental justice. There was so much happening online because of the pandemic. I’ve realized from the craft club that so many people would like to do activities or mindfulness exercises… not only that, but do it with other people. There’s a need to be in community. It also just showed me that there are so many amazing crafters out there. Every event I go to, I basically meet the instructor of the next crafting club that I host. It’s introducing me to the topic of skill sharing, and how that’s really important for building resilient communities that aren’t reliant on huge corporations. It’s teaching me a lot about the importance of third spaces, the importance of learning how to skillshare, and learning these skills in community.

What is making craft club gatherings meaningful or transformative?

A lot of the work that I do is activism-adjacent at times—sustainability is either overtly or not so overtly infused into it. A lot of spaces that are about social good, understandably, can also be incredibly intense. I’ve been spending a lot of time researching Black feminist scholars and learning about radical activism in the ’60s and ’70s. There was always some sort of complimentary offering to the radical work. I want to show people that you can be interested in sustainability, or even activism, but you can also connect in those spaces over things that contribute to the wellbeing of the community. I’m learning that these kinds of complimentary third spaces are needed to support the work that people are doing to try to make a better world. Teaching people that self-care is not just bubble baths—I mean, it can be, but it can also be the radical act of being in community. I feel like a lot of movement spaces are starting to mirror capitalism by overworking people, bombarding them with information, and basically making them feel like they’re a cog in the machine—the very thing they’re trying to resist. That doesn’t feel right. We don’t also want to burn people out through activism. I’m trying to have something that actually resists capitalism, and those systems that say that we can’t rest, by showing people the importance of resting and being creative with one another.

You’re holding the intimacy of crafting alongside the scale of larger environmental issues. I’m curious how your crafting practice informs the way you think about waste and material?

I just did a workshop where people were making fruit syrups and learning how easy it can actually be. All the fruit was essentially farmer’s market waste from this really cool group called Anomaly Coffee Lab—they’re a waste reductive coffee, food, and cocktail lab. It’s cool to be able to work with people like them. It’s been a really nice way to reconnect with sustainability and infuse it into the programming without it being overt. I don’t necessarily market the craft club as an environmental club, but then people are making necklaces with beads made out of recycled glass found on the beach, and they’re learning those lessons in another way—how to repurpose things.

Do you consider crafting a form of activism?

Yes. Craftivism is the new wave. I’m going to make a video about it. I also want to help contextualize why I’m crafting for people who might be confused.

I love that term—you also coined the term intersectional environmentalism. What does intersectionality look like to you in everyday life?

It really does flow throughout the way that I interact with people—understanding that you really never know what someone’s going through or what their family life is like. Intersectionality, or intersectional thinking, just encourages me to tap into empathy a little bit more and understand that even with all of these differences, we are so alike in a lot of ways. I just know that multiple truths can exist at once. I think I know that because of intersectionality—because people’s identities are incredibly complex and layered, and to lean into empathy, not generalizations.

What was it like to write your first book proposal for The Intersectional Environmentalist, and has your crafting practice helped shape or influence your creative voice for your second proposal?

I feel like I didn’t realize that crafting was actually this meditative practice that was helping me feel a lot more confident in myself—especially hand building with ceramics. It’s just you, your hands, clay, and water making whatever you want to make. You can’t be a perfectionist. It’s teaching me about letting go of perfection, and then also getting something beautiful. I love my hand-built pieces even more because they’re all uniquely different. I just love that it’s like infusing bits and pieces of my personality into the work. I think that flows into how I’m approaching my second book proposal.

My first book was an intro to environmental justice, and only the introduction was written in first person. The rest of it is primarily data, and it’s used mostly in a classroom setting. With this book, I’m like, “No, I actually want to write in first person, infuse my personal story, and have more conversation.” My crafting practice has informed my writing a bit by teaching me to take up space—and then also teaching me to be okay with introducing myself into the work that I’m doing. For the last couple of years, I felt like the work I was doing was to represent a movement—to represent the environmental justice movement, and help people really understand the connections between social issues and environmentalism. Things are unfortunately ricocheting and changing right now. It got me thinking, “What do I want to do?” I want to introduce people to me, Leah—not just as an intersectional environmentalist, but as a person who’s doing all these other things and activism is just part of my interests—which I feel incredibly privileged to do. That’s a cool question because it made me realize how those two things did go together and inform my writing.

Can you share any themes you’re exploring in your second book?

It’s all about why we refer to the Earth as Mother Earth. I also love sci-fi, fantasy, and folklore, so the book is going to have a lot of that in it. I’m really leaning into ecofeminism lately, and how the treatment of women and the planet go hand in hand. I’m excited to just explore what an ecofeminist manifesto could look like. I’m going to be interviewing so many incredible researchers, musicians, and random people.

Are there any authors inspiring you right now?

Amanda Montell is one of my favorite writers. She wrote the book Cultish, The Magical Age of Overthinking, and she also has a podcast called Sounds Like A Cult. She’s a linguist, and is just one of the funniest people. I’m learning a lot from her writing—how she infuses her personality, and also includes pop culture references, which I find really inspiring.

Has anything surprised you about being a published author since The Intersectional Environmentalist came out?

It’s been out for a while, but I think it’s the fact that people are still reading it. I think something that surprised me is that I don’t resonate with the book anymore. Even the other day I was like, “What was I talking about?” I wonder if musicians ever feel that way… because, wow, I really had a lot to say. There’s a cognitive dissonance, or a separation, between the work and where I am as a person. That surprised me the most. I’m also still shocked that the book is being used in classrooms. That feels really good.

Cognitive dissonance is very real—especially when something becomes public. It can take on a life of its own and still be attached to you, even if you’ve grown beyond it. Social media can magnify that too. How have you been interacting with social media lately? Has your relationship with it shifted over the past five years, especially since becoming platformed in 2020?

I’m starting to showcase more bits and pieces of myself. I think when I started Intersectional Environmentalist, I really wanted that to be an educational platform, and then my personal platform could be a blog where I post whatever I want. I’ve started to embrace that more recently by sharing crafts. I realize that I am going to build a new audience of people and there are going to be some people who are like, “No, we want you to educate us on every possible system we need to dismantle.” I just don’t have it in me. I’ve had to really use Instagram like Pinterest in some ways. I’m still always going to share certain thoughts about social justice because that’s a part of who I am, but I think I’ve developed a healthier relationship with it. I don’t think I would be able to sustain myself if my presence on social media was educating people solely about all of the trauma that’s happening to the planet and people right now—it’s heartbreaking—and people are already being bombarded with that information.

I’m trying to experiment with how I can be a positive light in the midst of all of this chaos—not in a way that’s toxically positive. There are people online that think you don’t care if you’re not sharing this, or doing this. I want to show people that you can care, and because you care, you can give that care out to other people by posting things that hopefully make people feel a little tiny moment of joy, or feel held and connected.

How do you balance protecting your creative voice while navigating the demands for output on social media?

I started posting on TikTok more because you don’t have to be as serious—I just have hot takes and no makeup on. I’m still talking about the same things, but it just feels like there’s a little less pressure. I’m going to develop a Substack, which feels really fun. I’m also just grappling with the fact that social media is also my job to a certain extent. My dream is to be a professor, but right now some of my income is tied to my social media. I wouldn’t feel genuine if I didn’t admit that part of the reason I’m sharing is because I need to support myself as an artist. If I can post about craft club, and there’s a brand that wants to sponsor craft club, then there’s more crafts for the people. That feels like a worthy way to use my platform and redistribute money. In some ways, I do feel like I am playing the game when it comes to social media.

What do you wish your younger self knew?

I feel like I took a lot of things really personally when I was younger—I wanted everybody to like me. Then I just realized that with some people, it’s really not about you. Just show up the best that you can because social media is not the end all, be all. It’s crazy how this journey has taken me back to getting offline. You can still use it as a job, but it’s more important to touch grass, be in community with real people, and grassroots organizations. Some people are just meanies—let them be mean and move on.

Leah Thomas recommends:

SAYA, the album by Saya Gray

Cultish, by Amanda Montell

Good Earth, sweet & spicy tea

Hilltop Coffee + Kitchen

Moonstruck, the movie


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sammy Steiner.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/author-and-organizer-leah-thomas-on-creative-resilience/feed/ 0 545729
Amid Rise in Anti-Abortion Activism, Clinic Protections Are More Needed Than Ever https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/amid-rise-in-anti-abortion-activism-clinic-protections-are-more-needed-than-ever/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/amid-rise-in-anti-abortion-activism-clinic-protections-are-more-needed-than-ever/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 05:00:00 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/anti-abortion-activism-clinic-protections/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Eleanor J. Bader.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/amid-rise-in-anti-abortion-activism-clinic-protections-are-more-needed-than-ever/feed/ 0 545838
Israel Settlers Stage Violent Assaults on Palestinian Oscar Winner’s Hometown https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/israel-settlers-stage-violent-assaults-on-palestinian-oscar-winners-hometown/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/israel-settlers-stage-violent-assaults-on-palestinian-oscar-winners-hometown/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 05:00:00 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/middle-east/israel-settlers-stage-violent-assaults-on-palestinian-oscar-winner/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Sam Stein.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/israel-settlers-stage-violent-assaults-on-palestinian-oscar-winners-hometown/feed/ 0 545866
Israel Settlers Stage Violent Assaults on Palestinian Oscar Winner’s Hometown https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/israel-settlers-stage-violent-assaults-on-palestinian-oscar-winners-hometown-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/israel-settlers-stage-violent-assaults-on-palestinian-oscar-winners-hometown-2/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 05:00:00 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/israel-settlers-stage-violent-assaults-on-palestinian-oscar-winner/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Sam Stein.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/israel-settlers-stage-violent-assaults-on-palestinian-oscar-winners-hometown-2/feed/ 0 546748
Fire in Our Peace: The Power of Nonviolent Resistance https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/fire-in-our-peace-the-power-of-nonviolent-resistance/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/fire-in-our-peace-the-power-of-nonviolent-resistance/#respond Wed, 23 Jul 2025 03:11:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=730ac3f10a73e2ace1bafa3b15006dfb They want us to believe that silence is strength. That if we keep our heads down, the storm will pass. But we are the storm. And our storm doesn’t need fists. It needs strategy, courage, and the fire of militant nonviolence.

In the latest episode of Gaslit Nation, Jamila Raqib, the executive director of the Albert Einstein Institution, delivers a masterclass in radical defiance without a single weapon raised. Raqib doesn’t just talk resistance. She teaches the art of war, the nonviolent kind, built on discipline, planning, and unshakeable conviction.

She carries forward the torch of Gene Sharp, the quiet revolutionary whose writings, like From Dictatorship to Democracy, which the Gaslit Nation Book Club read in March, have armed movements from Serbia to Syria. His ideas are dangerous, not because they incite chaos, but because they illuminate how to take power back without bloodshed. And dictators fear that more than any rifle.

This is militant nonviolence. It’s strategic. It’s disruptive. And when practiced with precision, it brings regimes to their knees.

Blueprint for the Battle Ahead

Raqib outlines a crucial truth: power is not monolithic. It comes from the obedience of people, workers, civil servants, police, students. Withdraw that obedience, and even the strongest tyrant collapses.

Take Serbia. Take Bangladesh. The world keeps giving us proof that nonviolent action isn’t weak; it’s lethal to authoritarianism when wielded with discipline. These movements succeeded not because they were polite, but because they were strategic. Organized. Defiant.

This is how repression backfires. Every crackdown becomes fuel. Every jail cell, every bullet, every propaganda campaign becomes a rallying cry, if activists know how to use it.

Weapons of the Peaceful Warrior

Raqib reminds us that art is a weapon. Culture is armor. Community is infrastructure. And technology is a battlefield. Whether it empowers or undermines you depends on how well you understand it. Movements rise and fall on logistics, not just slogans.

Fear will always be there. That’s normal. But as Raqib insists, fear doesn’t mean stop. It means go smart. Fear is a compass, if it scares the regime, you're probably doing something right.

Nonviolence is Not Passive. It's Precision.

This conversation isn’t about kumbaya. It’s about battle-readiness. It’s about studying the terrain of power, exploiting the cracks, and toppling giants with the slow, grinding force of disciplined resistance.

Nonviolence doesn’t mean surrender. It means refusing to give your enemy the war they want. It means winning on your terms. And in a time of rising fascism, digital surveillance, and global despair, we must turn to the tools that have worked, again and again.

So study Gene Sharp. Listen to Raqib. Organize like your life depends on it, because it does.

This is not the time for feel-good hashtags. This is the time for public education, mass mobilization, and strategic action. Nonviolent resistance is not soft. It’s the hardest fight there is.

But it’s the one that wins.

EVENTS AT GASLIT NATION:

  • NEW DATE! Thursday July 31 4pm ET – the Gaslit Nation Book Club discusses Antoine de Saint Exupéry’s The Little Prince written in the U.S. during America First. 

  • Minnesota Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Vermont Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Arizona-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to connect, available on Patreon. 

  • Indiana-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to join, available on Patreon. 

  • Florida-based listeners are going strong meeting in person. Be sure to join their Signal group, available on Patreon. 

  • Have you taken Gaslit Nation’s HyperNormalization Survey Yet?

  • Gaslit Nation Salons take place Mondays 4pm ET over Zoom and the first ~40 minutes are recorded and shared on Patreon.com/Gaslit for our community

Want to enjoy Gaslit Nation ad-free? Join our community of listeners for bonus shows, exclusive Q&A sessions, our group chat, invites to live events like our Monday political salons at 4pm ET over Zoom, and more! Sign up at Patreon.com/Gaslit!


This content originally appeared on Gaslit Nation and was authored by Andrea Chalupa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/23/fire-in-our-peace-the-power-of-nonviolent-resistance/feed/ 0 545709
Trump’s Threat to Bilingual Education https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/trumps-threat-to-bilingual-education/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/trumps-threat-to-bilingual-education/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 21:16:48 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/trump%E2%80%99s-threat-to-bilingual-education-saxton-20250722/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Linnea Saxton.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/trumps-threat-to-bilingual-education/feed/ 0 545682
Starmer Come Clean! The British Public Deserve the Truth Over Deployment of US Nuclear Weapons https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/starmer-come-clean-the-british-public-deserve-the-truth-over-deployment-of-us-nuclear-weapons/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/starmer-come-clean-the-british-public-deserve-the-truth-over-deployment-of-us-nuclear-weapons/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 20:03:04 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/starmer-come-clean-the-british-public-deserve-the-truth-over-deployment-of-us-nuclear-weapons The Campaign for Nuclear Disarmament calls on the British government to make a formal statement on the return of US nuclear weapons to Britain and allow for a transparent debate and vote in Parliament on any such a deployment.

It follows reports in the media that high priority US transport aircraft designated for nuclear cargo, was detected landing at RAF Lakenheath last week. This appears to have been a “one-way drop-off” of B61-12 nuclear bombs. This means US nuclear weapons are on British soil for the first time since 2008.

Despite the government's secrecy, evidence has gradually emerged that the base has been primed for a new US nuclear weapons mission. This includes the doubling of nuclear-capable F-35A squadrons to RAF Lakenheath, upgrades to the base's special weapons storage bunkers to hold the B61-12, and the building of a 'Surety dormitory' - accommodation for the additional personnel needed for such a nuclear weapons mission.

Earlier this year, CND uncovered declassified Ministry of Defence documents which give US Visiting Forces across Britain an exemption from British nuclear safety regulations. This exemption means that local councils will never be told about the presence of nuclear weapons at these bases – and are therefore not obliged to produce their own emergency plans for a radiological accident.

Successive British governments have tried to obstruct debate on this deployment, hiding behind so-called ‘national security’. However, these bombs won’t keep us safe. Instead, they increase the risk of nuclear war. This is because the B61-12 have been designed by the US specifically for use on the battlefield alongside conventional weapons. It puts British people on the nuclear frontline of Donald Trump’s global wars – without any protection.

Polling from May 2025 found that 61% of people in Britain don't want US nuclear weapons in Britain. This is just another shameful example of the government ramming through its agenda without any consultation with the public they are supposed to represent the wishes of.

Those opposed to this dangerous development are invited to join the monthly vigil at the main gate of RAF Lakenheath, scheduled for this Saturday, from 12 noon to 2pm. More details here.

CND Chair Tom Unterrainer said:

“CND has been calling on the government to come clean about the return of US nuclear weapons to Britain since 2022 - with more evidence proving that RAF Lakenheath is being primed for such a mission gradually uncovered ever since.
It is completely inappropriate for the public to be finding out about such a major escalation in nuclear dangers via reports in British newspapers and the assessments of security experts. Starmer must make a public statement about this major change in Britain's security arrangements and allow for a transparent and democratic debate on this to be held in Parliament. Enough of the gaslighting and hiding behind national security - the public deserve the truth!”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/starmer-come-clean-the-british-public-deserve-the-truth-over-deployment-of-us-nuclear-weapons/feed/ 0 545689
How one Israeli company controls – and cuts off – Palestinians’ access to water in the West Bank https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/how-one-israeli-company-controls-and-cuts-off-palestinians-access-to-water-in-the-west-bank/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/how-one-israeli-company-controls-and-cuts-off-palestinians-access-to-water-in-the-west-bank/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 20:00:01 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335680 A girl pulls while a boy pushes a shopping-cart loaded with filled-up water containers past a mound of rubble and debris in Gaza City on December 11, 2024 amid the ongoing war in the Palestinian territory between Israel and Hamas. Photo by OMAR AL-QATTAA/AFP via Getty ImagesPalestinians in the West Bank are facing an unprecedented crisis in accessing enough water. But drying water resources isn’t the problem — it's the fact that Israel extracts and controls all of the water from under their feet.]]> A girl pulls while a boy pushes a shopping-cart loaded with filled-up water containers past a mound of rubble and debris in Gaza City on December 11, 2024 amid the ongoing war in the Palestinian territory between Israel and Hamas. Photo by OMAR AL-QATTAA/AFP via Getty Images

This story originally appeared in Mondoweiss on July 22, 2025. It is shared here with permission.

For 100 days, Palestinians in the occupied West Bank town of Idna have been surviving without running water. The town of some 40,000 inhabitants has been relying on rain reservoirs and water tanks sold by vendors. The town’s water crisis was provoked by the April decision of Israeli national water company Mekorot to reduce the daily provision of water to the Hebron governorate of the southern West Bank. The water supply shrank from 32,000 cubic meters to 26,000, which included completely shutting down Mekorot’s water line for Idna.

This water crisis isn’t new, and it isn’t limited to Idna. Every summer, multiple parts of the West Bank experience prolonged water cuts that can extend for up to a month, mainly due to the lack of water supply by Mekorot, which controls most of the water resources in Palestine.

In Idna, residents met in the municipality hall on Monday to discuss the crisis. The mayor of the town shared the Israeli company’s argument for cutting off their water: that some residents were “illegally stealing water.”

“The mayor said that it is not the municipality’s responsibility to look for those who steal water, but to provide water to residents, which is being made impossible,” Rami Nofal, a local journalist and resident of Idna, told Mondoweiss. “Every summer, we go through water cuts, and the argument that some individuals steal water from the main line is not an excuse to leave 40,000 people without water for three months,” he said. 

The mayor went on to assure the crowd that the Palestinian Authority is trying to fix the crisis with Mekorot, but no news of a solution was forthcoming. “In Idna, like in the rest of the West Bank, we receive water on specific days of the week, and my neighborhood’s turn was in April, just a few days before the complete cut was scheduled,” Nofal went on. “I bought a water tank of 13 cubic meters for 180 shekels, and this is the water that my family and I are saving to survive on.”

Tanks of this sort dot the roofs of all buildings in the West Bank, as water shortages are chronic. “We have to watch for every instance of water consumption,” Nofal explained. “Every time my children open the faucet, I tell them to close it back as soon as they can. We economize while washing and even when flushing the toilet.”

Palestinian people with empty jerrycans wait in long queues to receive clean water amid the ongoing Israeli attacks in Khan Yunis, southern Gaza on September 08, 2024. Photo by Abed Rahim Khatib/Anadolu via Getty Images

How the water system works on the West Bank

Mekorot was established in the 1930s under the British Mandate. After the establishment of the State of Israel, the company was given the exclusive right to explore and exploit water in the country. After 1967, that included the lands of the West Bank and Gaza, which Israel occupied. Mekorot expanded its operations and was assigned to build the national carrier, a line of water pipes that transports water from the northern part of the country, around the West Bank through Israel’s 1948 proper, to the southern dry areas of the Naqab desert. A large part of this water used to feed the Jordan river before the construction of the carrier in the 1960s.

Ihab Sweiti, of the Palestinian water authority, told Mondoweiss that “natural water sources in Palestine are mostly underground, and they classify into four natural reservoirs; the eastern and western acquifers on both sides of the central hill country, the Jordan Valley Basin, and the coastal acquifer, which is the main water source for Israel and the Gaza Strip. The eastern and Jordan Valley reservoirs are mainly in the West Bank, and the western reservoir extends into Israel, too.”

“Since the occupation of 1967, Mekorot dug more wells in the West Bank, ending up controlling about 25 wells, which it uses to provide water to Israeli settlements and to sell water to many Palestinian municipalities, like Idna,” Sweiti continued.

“When the Mekorot company informed us that they were cutting the water supply from the west Hebron area, including Idna, they said that the reason was that there were too many illegal extensions made by Palestinians along the water line.” 

Sweiti says that the Israeli company claims the stealing of water for the towns and villages in the area reduced the water share for the Israeli settlements. Sweiti admits that Palestinians make irregular extensions along Mekorot’s line, but the data belies the claim that the share of Israeli settlements has been reduced. 

According to the Palestinian Hydrology Group, Palestinians consume an average of 70 liters of water per person per day, while Israelis consume 300. For Israeli settlers in the West Bank, however, the average rises to 800 liters per person a day.

According to the World Health Organization, the healthy average for daily water consumption is 100 to 120 liters per individual per day, which is far above the Palestinian average consumption rate and much further below the daily average consumption of Israeli settlers. According to the Palestinian Central Bureau of Statistics figures from March 2023, the individual water share of Israeli settlers in the West Bank compared to that of Palestinians is seven to one.

Under international law, both Israeli settlements in the West Bank and Israel’s exploitation of the West Bank’s water are illegal. The 4th Geneva Convention, which regulates cases of occupation, explicitly prohibits both the transfer of the citizens of the occupying power to the occupied territory and the exploitation of natural resources of the occupied territory unless it is to the benefit of the occupied population.

When the Oslo Accords were signed in 1993 between the PLO and Israel, water rights were classified as part of the strategic “final status” negotiations phase, along with Palestinian refugees, borders, the status of Jerusalem, and Israeli settlements. The final status negotiations were supposed to conclude in Camp David in the year 2000, but the accords collapsed. Since then, the administration of water distribution continues to take place according to the Oslo Accords’ provisional mechanism: vastly unequal distribution, and total Israeli control.

This mechanism is based on the formation of a joint committee in which Israeli and Palestinian water authorities regularly review and update the number of wells that Palestinians are allowed to dig or exploit and the quantity of water they can extract and distribute based on population growth.

This regular meeting of the joint committee is supposed to take place every few years. According to Ihab Sweiti, the last meeting happened in 2023, before the war on Gaza started. “We, the Palestinian Water Authority, had several new wells  on the agenda that we wanted to get Israeli approval to dig and operate, and there were two other wells that had already received Israeli approval, including in the west of Hebron.” 

Only technical discussions were left, Sweiti says, but the war on Gaza paralyzed everything. “It is all still pending.”

Palestinians, including children, carry water jerry cans from mobile tanks as families who fled their homes to live in Nasser Hospital due to the Israeli attacks continue in Khan Yunis, Gaza on November 12, 2023. Photo by Abed Zagout/Anadolu via Getty Images

‘People will literally go thirsty’

In Idna, even the irregular extraction of water by Palestinians was cut short by the Israeli army. “On Sunday, occupation forces raided the area outside Idna where the water line passes, dug the ground, and destroyed all the irregular extensions made by some Palestinians,” Rami Nofal noted. “ As a result, now even water tanks are no longer available. If this continues, in two weeks the crisis will get out of control.” 

“People in Idna will literally go thirsty,” Nofal stressed.

Sweiti maintains that irregular extensions to the main line are a problem for Palestinians, not just Israeli settlements. “The water extracted, which is not accounted for, is eventually deducted from Palestinians’ share,” Sweiti says. “But the area where the line passes is located in Area C, where Israel doesn’t allow the Palestinian Authority to have any presence.” 

This means that the Palestinian Authority has no powers to impose order or maintain water infrastructure for Palestinian communities, Sweiti explains. 

“Cutting water off from an entire area or city is not a solution,” he says. “The solution is to allow us Palestinians to run our own water supply and have our own water sources.” 


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Qassam Muaddi.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/how-one-israeli-company-controls-and-cuts-off-palestinians-access-to-water-in-the-west-bank/feed/ 0 545673
The science behind the heat dome — ‘a mosh pit’ of molecules https://grist.org/extreme-heat/the-science-behind-the-heat-dome-a-mosh-pit-of-molecules/ https://grist.org/extreme-heat/the-science-behind-the-heat-dome-a-mosh-pit-of-molecules/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 19:08:30 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670696 From Texas clear to Georgia, from the Gulf Coast on up to the Canadian border, a mass of dangerous heat has started spreading like an atmospheric plague. In the days and perhaps even weeks ahead, a high-pressure system, known as a heat dome, will drive temperatures over 100 degrees Fahrenheit in some places, impacting some 160 million Americans. Extra-high humidity will make that weather even more perilous — while the thermometer may read 100, it might actually feel more like 110. 

So what exactly is a heat dome, and why does it last so long? And what gives with all the extra moisture? 

A heat dome is a self-reinforcing machine of misery. It’s a system of high-pressure air, which sinks from a few thousand feet up and compresses as it gets closer to the ground. When molecules in the air have less space, they bump into each other and heat up. “I think about it like a mosh pit,” said Shel Winkley, the weather and climate engagement specialist at the research group Climate Central. “Everybody’s moving around and bumping into each other, and it gets hotter.”

But these soaring temperatures aren’t happening on their own with this heat dome. The high pressure also discourages the formation of clouds, which typically need rising air. “There’s going to be very little in the way of cloudiness, so it’ll be a lot of sunshine which, in turn, will warm the atmosphere even more,” said AccuWeather senior meteorologist Tom Kines. “You’re just kind of trapping that hot air over one part of the country.”

In the beginning, a heat dome evaporates moisture in the soil, which provides a bit of cooling. But then, the evaporation will significantly raise humidity. (A major contributor during this month’s heat dome will be the swaths of corn crops across the central U.S., which could help raise humidity in states like Minnesota, Iowa, and Indiana above that of Florida.) This sort of high pressure system also grabs moisture from the Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico, which evaporate more water the hotter they get. And generally speaking, the warmer the atmosphere becomes, the more moisture it can hold. Once that moisture in the landscape is all gone, more heat accumulates — and more and more. A heat dome, then, essentially feeds off itself, potentially for weeks, a sort of giant blow drier pointed at the landscape. 

On their own, temperatures soaring over 100 are bad enough for human health. Such high humidity makes it even harder for the human body to cool itself, because it’s harder for sweat to evaporate. Hence 100 degrees on the thermometer feeling more like 110. The elderly and very young can’t cool their bodies as efficiently, putting them at higher risk. Those with heart conditions are also vulnerable, because the human body tries to cool itself by pumping more blood. And those with outdoor jobs — construction workers, garbage collectors, delivery drivers on bikes or scooters — have little choice but to toil in the heat, with vanishing few laws to protect them.

The humidity effect is especially pronounced in areas whose soils are soaked with recent rainfall, like central Texas, which earlier this month suffered catastrophic flooding. There’s the potential for “compound disasters” here: relief efforts in inundated areas like Kerr County now have to reckon with soaring temperatures as well. The Gulf of Mexico provided the moisture that made the flooding so bad, and now it’s providing additional humidity during the heat dome.

A heat dome gets all the more dangerous the longer it stagnates on the landscape. And unfortunately, climate change is making these sorts of heat waves longer and more intense. According to Climate Central, climate change made this heat dome at least five times more likely. “These temperatures aren’t necessarily impossible, but they’d be very hard to happen without a fingerprint of climate change,” Winkley said.

Summer nights are warming almost twice as fast as summer days, Winkley adds, which makes heat waves all the more dangerous. As this heat dome takes hold, nighttime low temperatures may go up 15 degrees above average. For those without air conditioning — or who can’t afford to run it even if they have AC — their homes will swelter through the night, the time when temperatures are supposed to come down and give respite. Without that, the stress builds and builds, especially for those vulnerable groups. 

“When you look at this heat wave, yes, it is going to be uncomfortable during the day,” Winkley said. “But it’s especially those nighttime temperatures that are the big blinking red light that this is a climate-change-boosted event.”


Grist has a comprehensive guide to help you stay ready and informed before, during, and after a disaster.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The science behind the heat dome — ‘a mosh pit’ of molecules on Jul 22, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Matt Simon.

]]>
https://grist.org/extreme-heat/the-science-behind-the-heat-dome-a-mosh-pit-of-molecules/feed/ 0 545667
The Leadership Conference Denounces Confirmation of Joshua Divine https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-leadership-conference-denounces-confirmation-of-joshua-divine/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-leadership-conference-denounces-confirmation-of-joshua-divine/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 19:02:23 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/the-leadership-conference-denounces-confirmation-of-joshua-divine Lena Zwarensteyn, senior director of the fair courts program and an advisor at The Leadership Conference on Civil and Human Rights, issued the following statement after the Senate confirmed Joshua Divine to serve on the U.S. District Courts for the Eastern and Western Districts of Missouri:

“Federal judges must be fair-minded and ethical, highly qualified, and committed to civil and human rights. The Senate’s confirmation of Joshua Divine to the federal bench in Missouri betrays these standards and instead installs into a lifetime judgeship an individual who does not possess the requisite experience to be a federal judge and who has time and time again demonstrated significant hostility to our civil and human rights. His limited legal career — which includes a record of intense opposition to reproductive rights, LGBTQ equality, student loan borrowers, and more — is disqualifying. Our courts, our communities, and our democracy deserve better. Senators must ensure that judicial nominees are fair-minded, actually qualified for the job, and faithful to the rule of law and Constitution rather than to an anti-civil rights agenda.”

Read The Leadership Conference’s letter in opposition to Joshua Divine’s confirmation here.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-leadership-conference-denounces-confirmation-of-joshua-divine/feed/ 0 545695
The Forest Service Claims It’s Fully Staffed for a Worsening Fire Season. Data Shows Thousands of Unfilled Jobs. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-forest-service-claims-its-fully-staffed-for-a-worsening-fire-season-data-shows-thousands-of-unfilled-jobs/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-forest-service-claims-its-fully-staffed-for-a-worsening-fire-season-data-shows-thousands-of-unfilled-jobs/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 18:45:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/forest-service-staff-fire-season by Abe Streep

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up for Dispatches, a newsletter that spotlights wrongdoing around the country, to receive our stories in your inbox every week.

Despite the Trump administration’s public pronouncements that it has hired enough wildland firefighters, documents obtained by ProPublica show a high vacancy rate, as well as internal concern among top officials as more than 1 million acres burn across 10 states.

Less than a month ago, Agriculture Secretary Brooke Rollins announced that the Trump administration had done a historically good job preparing the nation for the summer fire season. “We are on track to meet and potentially exceed our firefighting hiring goals,” said Rollins, during an address to Western governors. Rollins oversees the wildland firefighting workforce at the U.S. Forest Service, a subagency of the Department of Agriculture. Rollins had noted in her remarks that the administration had exempted firefighters from a federal hiring freeze, and she claimed that the administration was outdoing its predecessor: “We have reached 96% of our hiring goal, far outpacing the rate of hiring and onboarding over the past three years and in the previous administration.”

Since then, the Forest Service’s assertions have gotten even more optimistic: The agency now claims it has reached 99% of its firefighting hiring goal.

But according to internal data obtained by ProPublica, Rollins’ characterization is dangerously misleading. She omitted a wave of resignations from the agency this spring and that many senior management positions remain vacant. Layoffs by the Department of Government Efficiency, voluntary deferred resignations and early retirements have severely hampered the wildland firefighting force. According to the internal national data, which has not been previously reported, more than 4,500 Forest Service firefighting jobs — as many as 27% — remained vacant as of July 17. A Forest Service employee who is familiar with the data said it comes from administrators who input staffing information into a computer tool used to create organization charts. The employee said that while the data could contain inaccuracies in certain forests, it broadly reflects the agency’s desired staffing levels. The employee said the data showing “active” unfilled positions was “current and up-to-date for last week.”

The Department of Agriculture disputes that assessment, but the figures are supported by anecdotal accounts from wildland firefighters in New Mexico, Oregon, Washington, California and Wyoming. According to a recent survey by Forest Service fire managers in California, 26% of engine captain positions and 42% of engineer positions were vacant. A veteran Forest Service firefighter in California characterized the Trump administration’s current estimate of the size of its firefighting workforce as “grossly inaccurate.”

Last week, Tom Schultz, the chief of the Forest Service, circulated a letter to high-ranking officials in the agency that underscored the dire moment. “As expected, the 2025 Fire Year is proving to be extremely challenging,” wrote Schultz in the letter, a copy of which was obtained by ProPublica. “We know the demand for resources outpaces their availability.” Schultz at once directed staff to employ full suppression — stomping out fires as quickly as possible, instead of letting them burn for the sake of landscape management — and acknowledged that the resources necessary to pursue such an aggressive strategy were lacking. All options were on the table, he wrote, including directing human-resources employees to fight fires and asking recently departed employees with firefighting qualifications to return to work.

When asked about the discrepancy between Schultz’s memo and Rollins’ public statements on firefighting staffing at the Forest Service, an agency spokesperson said that Schultz was referring to employees who can be called on to bolster the agency’s response “as fire activity increases,” while Rollins was pointing only to full-time firefighters. “The Forest Service remains fully equipped and operationally ready to protect people and communities from wildfire,” the spokesperson said, noting that “many individuals that have separated from the Agency either through retirements or voluntary resignations still possess active wildland fire qualifications and are making themselves available to support fire response operations.”

The federal government employs thousands of wildland firefighters, but the precise number is opaque. Throughout the Department of the Interior, which is overseen by Secretary Doug Burgum, there are about 5,800 wildland firefighters in four agencies that have been impacted by cuts. An employee at a national park in Colorado that is threatened by wildfire said that they were “severely understaffed during the Biden administration on most fronts, and now it’s so much worse than it’s ever been.”

But the Forest Service is by far the largest employer of wildland firefighters, and it has long used gymnastic arithmetic to paint an optimistic picture of its staffing. Last summer, ProPublica reported that the Forest Service under President Joe Biden had overstated its capacity. Robert Kuhn, a former Forest Service official who between 2009 and 2011 co-authored an assessment of the agency’s personnel needs, recently said that the practice of selectively counting firefighters dates back years. “What the public needs to understand is, that is just a very small number of what is needed every summer,” he said. Riva Duncan, a retired Forest Service fire chief and the vice president of Grassroots Wildland Firefighters, a labor advocacy organization, said staffing is a constant frustration for managers on the ground. “We have engines that are completely unstaffed,” said Duncan, who remains active in wildland firefighting, having worked in temporary roles this summer. “We have vacant positions in management.”

That said, there is a difference this fire season from years past. Officials in the previous administration publicly acknowledged the danger presented by an exodus of experienced wildland firefighters. The Trump administration has taken a different approach — claiming to have solved the problem while simultaneously exacerbating it. When asked about the staffing cuts, Anna Kelly, a White House deputy press secretary, wrote, “President Trump is proud of all Secretary Rollins has accomplished to improve forest management, including by ending the 2001 Roadless Rule for stronger fire prevention, and Secretary Burgum’s great work protecting our nation’s treasured public lands.”

In March, Congress finally codified a permanent raise for federal wildland firefighters via the appropriations process, a change that advocates have sought for years. In her remarks in June, Rollins credited the president: “Out of gratitude for the selfless service of our Forest Service firefighters, President Trump permanently increased the pay for our federal wildland firefighters.”

But in February, the Trump administration laid off about 700 employees who support wildland fire operations, from human-resource managers to ecologists and trail-crew workers. Those employees possess what are known as red cards — certifications that allow them to work on fire crews. Many were subsequently rehired, but the administration then pushed Forest Service employees to accept deferred resignations and early retirements.

Last month, President Donald Trump issued an executive order directing the Forest Service and the Department of the Interior to combine their firefighting forces. For the moment, it’s unknown what form that restructuring will take, but many Forest Service firefighters are anticipating further staffing cuts. A spokesperson for the Department of the Interior wrote, “We are taking steps to unify federal wildfire programs to streamline bureaucracy.”

Administration officials have maintained that employees primarily assigned to wildland fire were exempted from the resignation offers this spring. But according to another internal data set obtained by ProPublica, of the more than 4,000 Forest Service employees who accepted deferred resignations and early retirements, approximately 1,600 had red cards. (A spokesperson for the Department of Agriculture wrote that the actual number was 1,400, adding that 85 of them “have decided to return for the season.”)

Even those figures don’t account for all the lost institutional knowledge. The departures included meteorologists who provided long-range forecasts, allowing fire managers to decide where to deploy crews. One of the meteorologists who left was Charles Maxwell, who had for more than 20 years interpreted weather models predicting summer monsoons at the Southwest Coordination Center in Albuquerque, New Mexico, an interagency office. The thunderstorms can fuel wildfire, with lightning and wind, and extinguish them, with great rains. Lately, according to Maxwell, the monsoons have become less and less reliable, and understanding their nuances can be challenging. Maxwell said that he’d already been planning to retire next year. But he also said he “was concerned with the degree of chaos, the potential degradation of services and what would happen to my job.”

Maxwell noted that his work had been covered by knowledgeable fill-ins from out of state. But another firefighter who worked on blazes in New Mexico said that Maxwell’s understanding of the monsoon had been missed. A spokesperson for the Department of the Interior, which oversees the interagency office where Maxwell worked, wrote, “We do not comment on personnel matters.”

The monsoon season is now here and has brought deadly flash flooding along old burn scars in Ruidoso, New Mexico, while distributing sporadic rain in the state’s Gila National Forest.

It is shaping up to be a severe fire season. On Monday, federal firefighters reported 86 new fires across the West; by Tuesday, there were 105 more. And there’s already been some criticism of the federal response. Arizona’s governor and members of Congress have called for an investigation into the Park Service’s handling of a blaze this month that leveled a historic lodge on the Grand Canyon’s North Rim. Last month, Rollins acknowledged, “Fires don’t know Republican or Democrat, or which side of the aisle you are on.” This much, at least, is true.

Ellis Simani contributed data analysis.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Abe Streep.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-forest-service-claims-its-fully-staffed-for-a-worsening-fire-season-data-shows-thousands-of-unfilled-jobs/feed/ 0 545676
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 22, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-22-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-22-2025/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fdff626efd0efffb11aaa6f1c376c9bf Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 22, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-22-2025/feed/ 0 545705
High TAXES, Low Returns: Where’s the VALUE? #CA #WildFires #losangeles #ViceNews #SSHQ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/high-taxes-low-returns-wheres-the-value-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/high-taxes-low-returns-wheres-the-value-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 16:01:24 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=9390a6af6eea424c97d863a95aebe1cc
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/high-taxes-low-returns-wheres-the-value-ca-wildfires-losangeles-vicenews-sshq/feed/ 0 545642
The Lucas Plan, explained #shorts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-lucas-plan-explained-shorts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-lucas-plan-explained-shorts/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 13:05:35 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=bc59f23a796da24137620bb264ac5034
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/the-lucas-plan-explained-shorts/feed/ 0 545582
Radio journalist Erwin Labitad Segovia shot dead in the Philippines https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/radio-journalist-erwin-labitad-segovia-shot-dead-in-the-philippines/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/radio-journalist-erwin-labitad-segovia-shot-dead-in-the-philippines/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 11:36:41 +0000 https://cpj.org/?p=499216 Bangkok, July 22, 2025—The Committee to Protect Journalists calls on Philippine authorities to launch a swift and credible investigation into Monday’s killing of Radio WOW FM journalist Erwin Labitad Segovia, who was shot by unidentified assailants while riding his motorcycle home after his morning broadcast.

Segovia was pronounced dead on arrival at a hospital in Bislig city in the southern province of Surigao del Sur, the Inquirer newspaper reported.

“Philippine authorities must leave no stone unturned in identifying and prosecuting those responsible for the murder of journalist Erwin Labitad Segovia,” said Shawn Crispin, CPJ’s senior Southeast Asia representative. “If President Ferdinand Marcos Jr.’s administration fails to act more decisively, the cycle of impunity will persist — and so will the media killings.”

The Presidential Task Force on Media Security, set up in 2016 to investigate media murders, said authorities had activated the Special Investigation Task Group on New Cases to look into the killing and were conducting a “hot pursuit operation” to apprehend the suspects.

Segovia, popularly known as “Boy Pana,” hosted a regular radio program on local governance and social issues, as well as a program to boost former local mayor Carla Lopez-Pichay’s campaign for May’s mid-term elections, the Inquirer reported.

The Philippines ranked ninth on CPJ’s most recent Impunity Index, a global ranking of countries where journalists’ murderers are most likely to go free. The country has appeared on the index every year since its launch in 2008.


This content originally appeared on Committee to Protect Journalists and was authored by CPJ Staff.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/radio-journalist-erwin-labitad-segovia-shot-dead-in-the-philippines/feed/ 0 545569
Own Goal: Throwing Spaghetti At the Desperate Wall https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/own-goal-throwing-spaghetti-at-the-desperate-wall/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/own-goal-throwing-spaghetti-at-the-desperate-wall/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 07:42:00 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/further/own-goal-throwing-spaghetti-at-the-desperate-wall

Flailing to distract once-loyal cultists who've turned unexpectedly unruly on the murky matter of bestie Jeffrey Epstein - "The people are revolting!" - Trump is busy shouting "Look! Over there!" about myriad other shiny objects: The "Redskins," the FBI files on MLK, his "Golden Age," star-turn at soccer, "Dollar-Tree-Versailles" Oval Office, more spray tan, less corn syrup, the deranged need to jail "Barack HUSSEIN Obama." Still, MAGA remains wary: "He’s wearing makeup on his hands, so things are just getting weird."

The people's fledgling revolt - Mel Brooks: "They stink on ice" - is reflected in news polls showing Trump's approval plummeting at least 16 points to hover around 40%. On immigration, only about 35% approve of his crackdowns; just 23% support his deportations of undocumented immigrants with no criminal record, a figure likely to drop with news his flunkies gave ICE access to the Medicaid records of nearly 80 million people in another bogus hunt for "illegals," who can't get Medicaid. More smoke and mirrors: For all their performative cruelty, Trump’s ICE raids have led to fewer deportations than under Obama and barely more than under Biden, and the whole gaudy, ghastly spectacle of disappearing hundreds of Venezuelans to CECOT ended in a swap for 10 Americans jailed, intoned Marco Rubio with no trace of irony, "without proper due process."

Americans also hate the tariffs, big ugly bill, rising prices. They're worried about health insurance, also those ankles. And now Dear Leader is calling them "losers" and "bad people" because they wanna know the story behind Jeffrey Epstein's file, which Pam Bondi just said was sitting on her desk, but then she said oops never mind, and Trump keeps saying it's all a "scam” by Dems except if it doesn't exist how could Dems have written it and they "don't understand why (he) would do this - it doesn't make sense." His former bestie Musk chimed in - "Wow, I can’t believe Epstein killed himself before realizing it was all a hoax” - and he even lost Nazi Nick Fuentes. "Fuck you," Fuentes screeched. "You're fat, you're a joke, you're stupid...This entire thing has been a scam. We're gonna look back at the MAGA movement as the biggest scam in history. The liberals were right." Yikes.

Improbably, with all the atrocities he's committed - pussy, racism, Nazis, sedition, grift, seven gazillion lies - the furor over Epstein seems to be sticking, at least for now. About 80% of Americans think the government should release all documents in the case, including 85% of Democrats and three-quarters of Independents and Republicans. Only 4% think it shouldn't. It didn't help when Bondi made a big deal about releasing "raw" video footage outside Epstein's prison cell the night he died to prove nobody offed him, only for Wired to reveal nearly three minutes were missing, sparking MAGA frenzy about a Deep State plot nicely dovetailing with QAnon's insistence Bill Clinton and other Dems lead a child porn cabal Trump will save them from - except maybe for that interview where he said, "I’ve known Jeff for 15 years. Terrific guy. He’s a lot of fun to be with."

Since then, he's kept trying to steer his conspiracy-addicted base away from the mess even as his agitation grows. At a recent Cabinet meeting, he rambled about flags, clocks, lamps. He raved Chuck Schumer has "become a Palestinian” and the bombers that attacked Iran "went skedaddle." Asked about Epstein, he lost it: "Are you still talking (about) this creep? When we have Texas, we have this, we have all of the things...It's a desecration." Then he veered to the Serious Topic of interior design. Having packed the Oval Office with so many crappy gold tchotchkes it "looks like Liberace threw up all over it," he moved to vaguely musing whether to gold-leaf or gold-paint the corners and moldings: “If you paint it, that's easy, but it won’t look good because they’ve never found a paint that looks like gold." On each side of him, Rubio and Hegseth did their deer-in-headlights routine.


But Epstein kept re-surfacing. Trump reportedly fought to kill it, but the Wall Street Journal went ahead with publishing their story about a lewd birthday card Trump sent Epstein for his 50th birthday in 2003: Several lines of text framed by the outline of a naked woman, signed by a squiggly “Donald” where her pubic hair would be. "We have certain things in common, Jeffrey," he wrote ominously. "May every day be another wonderful secret." Caught, he said it was fake. He said Obama and Biden made it up. He said, "These are not my words...Also, I don't make drawings." Online, 7,000 people helpfully posted images of his often-auctioned drawings, mostly of cityscapes drawn with a heavy marker. Straight-faced, the New York Times noted, "They are not dissimilar to how The Wall Street Journal describes the birthday note he sent Mr. Epstein."

Trump did what he always does: He threatened to sue for defamation: "Thank you for your attention to this matter." Then he did. In a complaint that misstated the WSJ story and "reads like a press release," he sued WSJ publisher Dow Jones & Co., its parent company News Corp, Rupert Murdoch and others for $10 billion in damages. Then, hoping to end "this SCAM," he asked Pam Bondi to release grand jury testimony on Epstein - "a meaningless trick" because courts tend to prohibit such disclosure, and even if it went ahead he asked the court for "appropriate redactions of victim-related and other personal identifying information." Still, The Good Liars jumped in to help foster transparency by stocking the gift shop display racks at Trump Tower with post cards of the famed image of the two smiling perverts, "up to no good." Next to them, Melania gazes out, robotic.

Sensing a losing fight, Trump's deflection campaign.grew ever more bonkers. Marking the six-month anniversary of "one of the most consequential periods of any President, including ending numerous wars" (say wut?), when "one year ago our country was DEAD" (ditto), he released a cheesy, cringey, AI-generated video declaring, "Day 179 of the “Trump Golden Age." Cue fireworks and fake eagles soaring over the White House while dropping dollar bills to the song Make It Rain Reviews: "Downright embarrassing,” "Really gross," "They need to use AI because we are not seeing tangible evidence of anything good." Musk’s Nazi chatbot Grok: "Where eagles crap cash and fireworks fix everything. Reality check: Golden parachutes for billionaires while the rest dodge inflation hailstones." And, “Why don’t you make it rain Epstein files?”

It got wilder Friday after Director of National Intelligence (sic) Tulsi Gabbard announced she's referring Obama officials to the DOJ for prosecution over allegations they “manufactured” intelligence about Russia in the 2016 election. Newly declassified documents show Obama et al "politicized intelligence to lay the groundwork for what was essentially a years-long coup against President Trump"; they must be punished "for the American people to have any sense of trust in the integrity of our democratic republic." MAGA piled on. It was "a pivotal fracture in American trust," it "makes Watergate look like Amateur Hour." Stephen Goebbels was feverish: Gabbard "has exposed the startling depths of a seditious coup against the republic. The forces behind (it) will do anything to protect their grasp (on) illegitimate power. Do not underestimate their capabilities or depravities." Whew.

On her Sunday show, Maria Bartiromo brought up Gabbard’s news 18 times. Epstein: 0. Trump posted about it 17 times; inspired, he's been tirelessly flinging spaghetti at the wall to see what'll stick. He proclaimed, with carefully curated images, "STACKING UP WINS": "Ice Cream makers pledge to remove artificial colors," "Consumer prices rise less than expected." He railed against "thief" Adam Schiff. He said Coke will replace their corn syrup with sugar. (Coke said, wait what?) He posted videos of wacky stunts. (A woman grabbing a snake was fake). Against the wishes of family and colleagues, he released 200,000 pages of records of FBI surveillance of MLK Jr., under seal since 1977. King's two surviving children called it “an invasive, predatory, and deeply disturbing” operation “to discredit, dismantle and destroy” King and the movement he led.

Speaking of "invasive, predatory, and deeply disturbing,” the fragile, petty, vengeful boy-king, feeling he hadn't gone quite far enough to offend and distract, also posted an AI compilation of fake mugshots, dubbed "The Shady Bunch, featuring Democrats - most notably "Barack Hussein Obama" - in orange prison jumpsuits. A day or so later, evidently feeling especially insecure, he went especially crass. The new AI video starts with multiple Democratic pols declaring, "No one is above the law." Then it goes to a fake scenario of FBI agents arresting Obama in the Oval Office as Trump sits, beams, gloats. It moves to Obama, jump-suited in a jail cell, all while the Village People sing YMCA. In response, at least one sick fan of this cretin urged Pam Bondi, "MAKE THIS A REALITY." Truly, you gotta wonder what malignant, hallucinatory reality these fucking creeps inhabit.

Meanwhile, their leader keeps flouting laws and probity; in a recent lawsuit brought by watchdog group CREW for refusing to disclose spending decisions as mandated by law - regime flunkies deemed it "an unconstitutional encroachment" on their tinpot's whims - U.S. District Judge Emmet Sullivana blasted the mob-boss' "extravagant and unsupported theory of presidential power" and declared, "Defendants are therefore required to stop violating the law!" Alas, arbitrary and often punitive rules still reign. Press Barbie just announced the Wall Street Journal will be banned from the press pool for an upcoming trip to Scotland for their "fake and defamatory conduct" - is fake conduct a thing? - aka committing journalism and reporting the ugly, pubic-doodling truth about the sexual predator now defiling our pimped-up Oval Office.

Still deflecting - and still racist - he also just demanded the Washington Commanders, along with Cleveland Guardians, return to their old, offensive names, Redskins and Indians, witlessly claiming, "Our great Indian people, in massive numbers, want this to happen." Ever the bully, he even threatened to renege on a plan to build the Washington team a new stadium in D.C. "Indians are being treated very unfairly," he blathered. "MAKE INDIANS GREAT AGAIN (MIGA)!!" Of course Native activists called bullshit on returning to names they fought for years to remove as "a slur." "We are language keepers, land protectors, survivors of attempted genocide and part of sovereign nations," said one. "To equate Native people with cartoonish mascots (is) a gross and ongoing tactic of dehumanization...We are being used as tools for a distraction."

In another cringe move, the sports wannabe made it all about himself at the World Cup Final at New Jersey's MetLife Stadium, where Chelsea won a surprise 3-0 victory against Paris Saint-Germain. The crowd booed Trump before he crashed the postgame ceremony, lumbering onstage to hand over the trophy and then staying put as Chelsea's Captain asked, “Are you going to leave?” and FIFA head Gianni Infantino tried to pull him away to allow the team their victory photo. In the end, there he was - fat, rumpled, cluelessly claiming "I've earned a spot in the shot" - as players whooped around him. The team didn't even get the real trophy; at an earlier photo-op at the White House, Trump claimed that too. But in sports as in life, strategy is key. For hours, no official photo of "the team moment” appeared on Chelsea's website; when it finally did, Trump had been scrubbed out.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Abby Zimet.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/own-goal-throwing-spaghetti-at-the-desperate-wall/feed/ 0 545552
Impotent Effusions: The Joint Statement on Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/impotent-effusions-the-joint-statement-on-gaza/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/impotent-effusions-the-joint-statement-on-gaza/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 07:04:36 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160112 Impotence takes various forms. Before the daily massacres, incidents of starvation and dispossession of Palestinians taking place in the Gaza Strip with primeval cruelty, international impotence in the face of actions by the Israeli state has become a mockery of itself. The calls to end the war in Gaza grow in number, even among Israel’s […]

The post Impotent Effusions: The Joint Statement on Gaza first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Impotence takes various forms. Before the daily massacres, incidents of starvation and dispossession of Palestinians taking place in the Gaza Strip with primeval cruelty, international impotence in the face of actions by the Israeli state has become a mockery of itself. The calls to end the war in Gaza grow in number, even among Israel’s allies, but little in substance is being done about it. What matters are statements that speak to a wounded conscience that do little to alter anything on the ground.

One such statement, released on July 21, proved to be yet another one of those flossy effusions made by, as Macbeth might have said, idiots, full of sound and fury, signifying nothing. The idiots numbered many: 28 international partners, including the foreign ministers of 27 states and, obviously not wanting to miss out, the EU Commissioner for Equality, Preparedness and Crisis Management. All, bar Australia, were from Europe. “We, the signatories listed below, come together with a simple, urgent message: the war in Gaza must end now.”

The statement goes on to mention the drearily obvious. “The Israeli government’s aid delivery model is dangerous, fuels instability and deprives Gazans of human dignity.” The “drip feeding of aid and inhumane killing of civilians, including children, seeking to meet their most basic needs of food and water” deserved condemnation. The deaths of over 800 Palestinians (the numbers are most certainly higher) while seeking aid was “horrifying”. Even here, the language lacked rage. Israel’s “denial of essential humanitarian assistance to the civilian population is unacceptable.” The government “must comply with its obligations under international humanitarian law.”

To that end, Israel was called upon to restore the flow of aid and enable the work of the United Nations and humanitarian NGOs to resume in the Strip. This is obviously something that the Netanyahu government is conscious of avoiding, given the systematic program of controlled starvation and deprivation being inflicted.

To add balance, the statement also notes the plight of the Israeli hostages still held by Hamas, their continued detention also something to be condemned. They were to be immediately and unconditionally released with a negotiated ceasefire being the best way of doing so.

The signatories do go so far as to acknowledge the dangers and intentions of Israel’s administrative measures that seek “territorial or demographic change in the Occupied Palestinian Territories. The E1 settlement plan announced by Israel’s Civil Administration, if implemented, would divide a Palestinian state in two, marking a flagrant breach of international law and critically undermine the two-state solution.” The West Bank is also recognised in similar light, with the signatories urging a cessation to the violence taking place against Palestinians and a halt to the building of settlements across the territory “including East Jerusalem”.

These statements are always interesting for what they omit. No toothy measures to address the maltreatment of Palestinian civilians are stipulated, other than an encouragement of “a common effort to bring this terrible conflict to an end”. A benign, most unthreatening promise is made: the prospect of taking “further action to support an immediate ceasefire and a political pathway to security and peace for Israelis, Palestinians and the entire region.” This may be code for recognition of a Palestinian state, fanciful given the systematic pulverisation of the people who would inhabit it. The signatory list also omits Germany and, most importantly of all, the United States, Israel’s arch guardian and evangelical sponsor.

The US ambassador to Israel, Mike Huckabee, gave us a flavour of feelings in Washington about the signatories in a post on X. “How embarrassing for a nation to side [with] a terror group like Hamas & blame a nation whose civilians were massacred for fighting to get hostages released.” In another post that made a vague shot at justifying the unjustifiable, the ambassador absolved Israel in its conduct; only the militant group Hamas deserved exclusive blame. The nations in question had “put pressure on @Israel instead of savages of Hamas! Gaza suffers for 1 reason: Hamas rejects EVERY proposal. Blaming Israel is irrational.”

The Israeli foreign minister Gideon Sa’ar, ever lurking in the twilight of alternative reality, reasoned the statement away, much as relatives would the views of a demented, unloved aunt. “If Hamas embraces you – you are in the wrong place.” Praise from the group was itself “proof of the mistake they [the signatory countries] made – part of them out of good intentions and part of them out of an obsession against Israel.”

While the various foreign ministers were flashing their plumage of principles and international humanitarian law, the Israeli Defense Forces had busily commenced an operation on a part of Gaza they have yet to level: Deir al-Balah. Given its importance as a humanitarian hub that still houses UN staff and guesthouses, more slaughter is imminent.

Till Israel assumes the status of a pariah state it seemingly craves to become, its rogue army confined and depleted, its economy humbled and isolated, the industrial appetite for slaughter and dispossession will only continue. The Palestinians will be left to be relics of moral anguish, banished to the footnotes of bloodied history along with many more statements of concern and sheer impotence.

The post Impotent Effusions: The Joint Statement on Gaza first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/impotent-effusions-the-joint-statement-on-gaza/feed/ 0 545533
Writer and artist Aiden Arata on dealing with dread https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/writer-and-artist-aiden-arata-on-dealing-with-dread/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/writer-and-artist-aiden-arata-on-dealing-with-dread/#respond Tue, 22 Jul 2025 04:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-and-artist-aiden-arata-on-dealing-with-dread Did you always want to be a writer?

I think I definitely always wanted to be a writer in some capacity, but I don’t think that I quite understood what was possible. I remember being a really little kid at the doctor’s office with my mom, and there were wildlife photos in the office, and she was like, “Oh, the doctor’s son took those. He’s a photographer.” And she was also like, “You know, he takes [these photos], but he also has another job.” It’s such a funny little thing that stuck with me. You cannot just be an artist. You have to have another job. I internalized that.

I interned at magazines. I’ve done a bunch of marketing work. There’s no shame in that. I do think you come back around; it is just a balance. I don’t think that it’s impossible to be a very fulfilled, great artist and have a day job. We all need to make money. That’s really valid. But it took a lot longer for me to actually write a book. The internet was the gateway for that, because the internet had no rules. I think I wanted to be a writer, but I don’t think that I gave myself permission to be a writer until many, many years later. And I was really unhappy and self destructive, because I was subverting what I really wanted to do.

In one of your newsletters you listed all the things you did instead of write when you were on deadline, which is deeply relatable. What is it about writing that breeds procrastination? Is procrastination just part of it? Why is writing so hard?!

I don’t want to fully buy into the tortured artist trope, because you can be happy. I want to believe in that for us. But I kind of don’t trust anyone who says that it’s easy. The dread… I do think that maybe it’s just part of the process. I feel like I’ve practiced a lot, and every time I have to write something, I will do anything to avoid it. I just feel such a deep pit in my stomach, thinking, “This is gonna be the thing that is bad.” I don’t even know if I can fully untangle what that feeling of anxiety is.

But nothing feels better than having written. Nothing feels better than having made something, even if it’s not great. Just having put words down, I can breathe out a little bit. You know? It’s like exercising. My brain is like one of those herding dogs that needs a job to do. And if you don’t take it out and give it a job, it’s just gonna chew up all the furniture. You need to do it, and also [you need] free fucking time. I guess it’s part of the process. And I’m trying to be kinder about that, and accept that everything is just gonna take three times as long as I think it will. Procrastination is actually an ideation process. I just started transcendental meditation, so I’m trying to get into quieting that part, assimilating that part—being like, okay, dread is there. It’s part of it. That means the process is working.

I don’t believe in laziness anymore. I just don’t think it’s a thing. You’re tired, or you’re feeling avoidant, or you have a very good reason for not wanting to do something, or you’re just weighed down by how sad the world is.

Yes! We’re allowed to be lazy. We’re allowed to take time to rest and figure it out… I read somewhere that to write well you have to be in a lucid state. Does that resonate with you?

I think so? I write emotionally and edit rationally. I tend to write twice as much, if not more, than I actually publish. It’s always a really nice compliment when someone is like, “Oh, your writing is so restrained—a light touch.” And I’m like, “Yes, that’s because I deleted half of it.” It never starts that way. I feel really lucky, working with a book editor for the first time who’s very hands on… She gave me this huge gift where she just deleted every time I started to sound like I was explaining myself, or apologizing for something.

What drew you to memes as an art form?

I started making memes when I was working as a TV assistant. It was a very large bummer, a thankless job. Your time doesn’t matter. Your body doesn’t matter. Your agency doesn’t matter. Especially in that environment, when you have low self esteem, the idea of ever creating anything that other people are going to see feels galactically out of reach. I have this impulse to say that I just fell into it. No, actually—I really, really, really wanted people to like it. I really wanted people to think that I was funny. I had a deep desperation to be seen and liked. And I think acknowledging that is important. People always talk about attention seeking as shameful. I’m human. Is it attention seeking, or is it maybe connection seeking?

What makes a good meme?

The meme itself is this weird folk art subversion of popular culture. It’s like, wait, does anyone else have this kind of strange, ugly response to this? Does anyone have the same fear or hope or anxiety? That’s the crazy magic of relatability. The meme is a balance between relatability and abstraction, because you have to be able to disseminate it… I don’t even think it has to have a very strong visual component or a very strong literary component, as long as those two things are in balance.

Is the meme an essay?

I think that it’s much closer to poetry than it is an essay, because it’s very much about playing with the signifier and the signified, and how those things are connected, and how they’re dissident. That little gap is where the humor is. I love that. I think that’s what makes it good.

I’ve actually been thinking a lot more about long-form writing. I think that what I make on the internet is kind of like a meta commentary on making things. My writing gets to the heart of it. That’s the work. And then [content] is this work that’s about the work. I need to see it that way. Because—and I don’t know if I’m supposed to say this—I feel like people who are very into growth, and engagement for engagement’s sake, are deeply mentally ill. Like, how can you not feel like a fraud? I’ve been in a tailspin the last two weeks. I don’t know if you saw this, but the official White House account posted this ASMR video of someone getting deported. It is so horrible. And as someone who specifically creates wellness content, I’m just like, how do you do this anymore? What are we doing here? That’s not a reason not to, I guess. But I need to take a beat, because this is evil.

You write about your struggles with mental health and how social media often exacerbates these issues. How do you stay off your phone and off “the narcissism app” (Instagram)?

Read a book. Get an analog alarm clock. Have your phone in another room. I like to keep my phone on Do Not Disturb all day. I’m always really upfront with people. As soon as I exchange numbers with someone, I’m like, “I will not text you back.” If it’s a logistics thing, for sure. But if someone texts, “How are you?” I’m never texting you back. I don’t have the bandwidth. We can talk about it in person, or not. I actually love the Instagram Story, because it’s just a really quick way to let everyone know how you’re doing. I love to check in with other people and see them at the state fair or somewhere like that…

I really appreciated that you wanted to meet in person. I wasn’t expecting that. I normally don’t do these in person. It does change the dynamic… In your book, You Have a New Memory, you write that we live in a world of a million conveniences. Do you think that this type of ease breeds bad art?

I think it’s incredibly important for people to make art. Typing shit into ChatGPT or whatever is not inherently “bad,” but it can be destructive. We live in a very sick society in that way, where anything that isn’t commodifiable is not viable. It brings us back to the conversation of laziness.

Is using ChatGPT lazy?

Laziness is a prism. There are so many ways to look at it. A million conveniences doesn’t necessarily mean that we’re going to be making bad art. It just means that we’re going to be making art in different ways, or reacting to different things.

I know you lost your childhood home in the devastating Los Angeles fires. How are you doing?

It still feels very unreal to me. It feels a little bit like I haven’t visited my parents’ house in a long time. I haven’t been back, but there’s nothing there. It’s very much a traumatic event. I lost all my childhood stuffed animals. Sentimentality is what makes us human.

I’m so sorry. What makes you wake up each morning and keep writing? Keep making art?

I’m one of those people who has never woken up refreshed. So sorry to answer that literally, but mornings are crazy. I went to a hypnotherapist to try and become a morning person, and it just didn’t take.

We’re swirling around in an ontological vertex. Is there meaning in this app? Is there meaning in being part of the internet? Is there meaning in writing? There’s commodified content and conservative propaganda everywhere. It’s fucked up and it’s depressing. Why keep doing things? I think violence is dehumanizing. Art is humanizing. So when you are making things in a real and authentic way, that’s humanizing. When you insist on community—that’s the difference. I think you can say something with honesty in a million different ways. I think you can say it very honestly in fiction. I think we can also say it with a silly little image of an animal.

What’s your take on the concept of creative process?

I don’t have a creative process or a schedule. When people talk about their process, they’re always sort of like, “Well, I rise at dawn every day and I write for two hours.” There’s so much discipline. And I do think that’s important. But I also think a discipline is anything we can do that requires personal accountability.

I feel like the people that create more sporadically never talk about it because it’s seen as shameful. It feels very important for me to say that I do not adhere to any schedule. Sometimes I wake up and write in bed on my laptop, and sometimes I won’t write until 5 PM, and some days I don’t write at all. I don’t believe you have to write every day to be a writer. Sometimes I make things while I’m watching The Bachelor, and I’m sitting on my laptop Photoshopping. Sometimes I’ll work for 16 hours straight, whispering to myself, because I’m editing a video that I’m really into. There’s no rhyme or reason to it. I used to feel like a failure because I couldn’t adhere to a strict schedule of creation. But at some point it’s like, why are you fighting yourself?

Aiden Arata recommends:

Labne

Calling the restaurant to place an order

Vintage Wedgwood trinket boxes

Do Not Disturb

“My First Ticonderoga” #2 pencils (the thick baby ones)


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Diana Ruzova.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/22/writer-and-artist-aiden-arata-on-dealing-with-dread/feed/ 0 545557
‘The Current Commercial System Will Always Fail Democracy’: CounterSpin interview with Victor Pickard on Paramount settlement https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/the-current-commercial-system-will-always-fail-democracy-counterspin-interview-with-victor-pickard-on-paramount-settlement/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/the-current-commercial-system-will-always-fail-democracy-counterspin-interview-with-victor-pickard-on-paramount-settlement/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 21:42:04 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046620  

Janine Jackson interviewed media scholar Victor Pickard about the Paramount settlement for the July 18, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

Washington Monthly: Shari Redstone Might Be Headed for Jail

Washington Monthly (6/2/25)

Janine Jackson: Faced with a groundless lawsuit claiming that an interview with Kamala Harris amounted to election interference in favor of Democrats, CBS News’ parent company, Paramount, could have struck a symbolic blow for press freedom by saying, “No,” pointing to any number of legal arguments, starting with the First (for a reason) Amendment.

But Paramount isn’t a journalistic institution. It’s a business with media holdings, and controlling shareholder Shari Redstone was in the middle of doing business, trying to sell the corporation to another Hollywood studio, a move that, perhaps quaintly, requires government approval. That now means approval of this government.

And so here we are, with a recent $16 million deal, which is being widely denounced as an outright bribe, and a cold wind blowing through every newsroom.

And yet here we are. The Paramount settlement, says Victor Pickard, is, yes, a stunning display of bribery, greed and cowardice. But we need to understand, it’s also a symptom of a deep structural rot in our media today, a system in which profit trumps democracy at every turn.

Victor Pickard is a professor of media policy and political economy at the University of Pennsylvania’s Annenberg School for Communication, where he co-directs the Media Inequality and Change Center. He’s the author, most recently, of Democracy Without Journalism?: Confronting the Misinformation Society from Oxford University Press. He joins us now by phone. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Victor Pickard.

Victor Pickard: It’s great to be back on the show, Janine.

JJ: Well, I hear that Paramount‘s market value has dropped since Shari Redstone threw press independence on the fire to warm shareholders’ hands. It’s almost as if folks thought it wasn’t a valuable journalistic institution.

Sumner Redstone

Forbes (4/7/20)

I want to launch you into the bigger picture of which this is emblematic, but I first want to insert: Shari Redstone inherited Paramount from her father, Sumner Redstone, who, while some of us were working to show there was a conflict, declared it openly.

In 2004, then-head of CBS and Viacom Sumner Redstone stated at a corporate leader confab that he didn’t want to denigrate then–Democratic presidential candidate John Kerry, but

from a Viacom standpoint, the election of a Republican administration is a better deal, because the Republican administration has stood for many things we believe in, deregulation and so on. The Democrats are not bad people, but from a Viacom standpoint, we believe the election of a Republican administration is better for our company.

And, later, CBS head Les Moonves—CounterSpin listeners will have heard me say many times—declared laughingly, “Donald Trump is bad for America, but he’s good for CBS, so let’s do it.”

So the structural conflict you’re describing, it’s not a theory. It’s not the stuff of smoke-filled rooms. It’s out there for everyone to see, every day in every way. So the questions have to do with, once we diagnose this problem, what do we do about it?

The Nation: The Problem With Our Media Is Extreme Commercialism

The Nation (1/30/17)

VP: Thank you for opening up with that softball question. I mean, that is the main problem before us, and everything you just said leading up to this question really lays out that this is a systemic problem that we’re facing, and it requires a systemic fix. It’s not just a case of a few bad apples, or a handful of bad corporations and perhaps a bad journalist, even, but it really is a systemic structural problem. And so we really need to move our frame of analysis from just condemning the latest media malfeasance to really condemning the entire hypercommercialized media system in which we are all immersed, and so clearly serves only commercial values and not democratic values.

So the first step, of course, would be to decommercialize our media, much easier said than done, but that’s something we need to place on our horizon. And not only that, we also need to radically democratize our media, from root to branch, and that means bringing it back down to the local level, making sure that our media are owned and controlled by the public. Even our public media, our so-called public media, aren’t actually owned by the people.

So this is something that we need to work towards. It won’t happen tomorrow, but it’s something we need to start thinking about now.

JJ: I love the idea of a long-term and a short-term plan, and eyes on the prize. So let’s go back to that. It’s not that we’re going to change things legislatively or politically tomorrow, but there are things on the ground locally. There are models we can build on, yeah?

The Nation: We Must Save Public Media to Change It

The Nation (4/15/25)

VP: That’s absolutely true. There’s a number of models that exist today, that have existed in our history and that exist around the world, and we really should be looking at some of those to expand our current imagination about what’s possible in the future. Obviously, we have some great independent local media, and those outlets, those institutions, we should be supporting in any way that we can, through donations, subscriptions, whatever we can, to help them. They’re all struggling, like all local media are right now.

We also, even though I made a sort of snarky comment about our public media a moment ago, I think we do need to look to, as I say, save our public media so that we can change it. As we know, the meager funds that we allocate to public media are currently on the chopping block. It comes out to about a $1.58 per person per year in this country, which is literally off the chart compared to most democratic countries around the world. So we need to look at how we can salvage that, but also, again, expand on it, and build, restructure our public media, so that it’s not just public in name but actually publicly owned.

There are other things that we could be doing, but we just have to start with recognizing that the current commercial system is failing democracy, and will always fail democracy.

JJ: When you talk about public media, and this is a thing, of course, folks are being encouraged to think about it now as “ideological” institutions. First of all, and you’ve said it, but they don’t get a lot of government support to begin with.

Neiman Lab: Distribution of countries by GDP-funding ratios

Neiman Reports (1/24/22): The US is virtually off the chart when it comes to its ratio of GDP to spending on public media.

But at the same time, progressives, we’ve had plenty of complaints about public broadcasting as it exists in this country. It had a beautiful ideal. It had a beautiful beginning. It hasn’t fulfilled that role.

We have complaints about it, but the complaints that we’re now hearing don’t have anything to do with the complaints that we have about it. So the idea of saving public media might land weird to some CounterSpin listeners, but there’s a reason that we need to keep that venue open.

VP: Absolutely. I mean, it is an ideal, just like democracy itself is an ideal, something that we have yet to actually achieve, but it’s something we can’t give up on just because the current iteration of this model that we have in the US, which is a kind of strange one, again, compared to other public media models around the world, it’s actually a misnomer. It’s mostly supported by private capital.

But if we were to actually fund it in accordance with global norms, we could have a very robust public media system that was not dependent on corporate sponsorships, that was not catering to higher socioeconomic groups, that, again, could actually spend more time engaging with and devoting programming for local communities.

So this is something that’s not inevitable. Like our entire media system, there was nothing inevitable with how we designed it. We need to understand the political economic structures that produce the kind of media that we’re constantly critiquing in order to change it, to create an entirely different kind of media system that’s driven by a different and democratic logic.

JJ: Let me just draw you out on that. We spoke last year, and I would refer interested people to that conversation, about separating capitalism and journalism, and talking about different ways of financing media in the service of the public.

And we understand complaints about “state media.” We hear all of that, and any kind of funding structure should be transparent, and we should talk about it.

But I want to ask you, finally, there are creative policy responses going on, and it’s not about kicking the final answers down the field; it’s really just about making a road while we walk it, and making examples of things, so that we can see that, yeah, they work, and they can move us towards a bigger vision.

CounterSpin: ‘What if We Use Public Money to Transform What Local Media Looks Like?’CounterSpin interview with Mike Rispoli on funding local journalism

CounterSpin (5/6/22)

VP: Absolutely. And as you already suggested, state media and public media are not the same thing. That we publicly subsidize media doesn’t mean it immediately has to become a mouthpiece for the state or the government.

And, indeed, government is always involved in our media. It’s a question of how it should be involved, whether it’s to serve corporate interests or public interests.

I think we can look to what’s happening at the state level, for example, in New Jersey, they’ve long had an Information Consortium network that’s focused on subsidizing various local journalistic initiatives. And it’s a proof of concept of how the state can make these public investments towards publicly accountable media. And we’re starting to see that in many states across the country.

A lot of experiments, some will survive, some won’t. The important thing is that we need to create these non-market means of support for the media that we need. I think that ideal of separating journalism and capitalism, which was always a match made in Hell, we need to find a way to do that, again, to be on our political horizon for the future.

Victor Pickard

Victor Pickard: “Much of what we’re talking about is really trying to figure out the structures that would allow journalists to be journalists.”

JJ: Well, I said that was my last question, but I want to ask you another one, because I think a mistake that folks make about FAIR, and possibly about you, is that we’re anti-journalism per se. But we are emphatically pro–good journalism that’s not public relations for power. It’s because we believe in the power of journalism that we are so concerned about these structural constraints.

VP: Exactly. I couldn’t agree more with that statement. And I think much of what we’re talking about is really trying to figure out the structures that would allow journalists to be journalists. Most journalists don’t go into the profession, they don’t follow the craft, to become rich, or to become mouthpieces of the already powerful. I think it’s generally a noble calling, and we just need to create the institutions and the structures that can allow them to be the great journalist they want to be.

JJ: All right, then. Victor Pickard is professor of media policy and political economy at the University of Pennsylvania’s Annenberg School for Communication. He co-directs the Media Inequality and Change Center, and his most recent book is called Democracy Without Journalism?. Victor Pickard, thank you so much for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

VP: Thanks so much for having me, Janine.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/the-current-commercial-system-will-always-fail-democracy-counterspin-interview-with-victor-pickard-on-paramount-settlement/feed/ 0 545494
Immigration Spying Has an Inglorious Past https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/immigration-spying-has-an-inglorious-past/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/immigration-spying-has-an-inglorious-past/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 20:18:59 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/immigration-spying-has-an-inglorious-past-drenka-20250721/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Stephanie Drenka.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/immigration-spying-has-an-inglorious-past/feed/ 0 545480
Texas Is Letting Parents Dictate What All Students Read https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/texas-is-letting-parents-dictate-what-all-students-read/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/texas-is-letting-parents-dictate-what-all-students-read/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 18:58:10 +0000 https://progressive.org/public-schools-advocate/texas-is-letting-parents-dictate-what-all-students-read-zahra-20250721/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Marium Zahra.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/texas-is-letting-parents-dictate-what-all-students-read/feed/ 0 545463
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 21, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-21-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-21-2025/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f4d9f6e8faa140371a51a53e11f3e6ca Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 21, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-21-2025/feed/ 0 545509
OSHA just reduced the value of a worker’s life https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/osha-just-reduced-the-value-of-a-workers-life/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/osha-just-reduced-the-value-of-a-workers-life/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 17:32:51 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335604 Workers exit the Marathon Galveston Bay Refinery on May 10, 2022 in Texas City, Texas. Photo by Brandon Bell/Getty ImagesThe Trump administration slashed fines for safety violations by small businesses and other employers and plans to reduce already rare workplace inspections. Experts say that will lead to more worker injuries, illnesses and deaths.]]> Workers exit the Marathon Galveston Bay Refinery on May 10, 2022 in Texas City, Texas. Photo by Brandon Bell/Getty Images

This article originally appeared on Inside Climate News, a nonprofit, independent news organization that covers climate, energy and the environment. It is republished with permission. Sign up for their newsletter here

The Department of Labor announced “updates to penalty guidelines” to improve worker safety on Monday that it said will support small businesses and eliminate workplace hazards. The announcement follows the release of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s budget for the next fiscal year, which includes a plan for nearly 10,000 fewer workplace hazard inspections amid an 8 percent funding cut and a more than 12 percent reduction in staffing.

The new guidelines reduce penalties for failing to comply with worker health and safety standards at small businesses and those of any size with no history of various serious violations. It also extends the time frame for quickly abating a hazard by redefining “immediately,” which used to mean during the inspection or on the day that it occurred, but now can take up to 15 days. 

These penalty reductions, combined with a drastic cut in the already rare inspections, will surely lead to more worker illnesses, injuries and deaths, experts say.

Penalties from OSHA for endangering workers’ health and lives are already “embarrassingly low” compared to those for other federal violations like harming wildlife, Jordan Barab, deputy assistant secretary of labor for the agency during President Barack Obama’s two terms, wrote on his blog about workplace health and safety. 

“We used to always say that you would get fined more for harassing a burro on federal land than for a serious OSHA violation,” Barab told Inside Climate News.

Penalties have gradually increased over the years, in keeping with inflation. The maximum fine for a serious violation is now $16,550 and about $165,500 for a willful violation.

But most penalties are reduced based on the company’s size, history of compliance, rapid remediation of a hazard and good-faith efforts to correct a problem. 

OSHA has an incentive to reduce penalties to encourage the employer to fix the problem rather than contesting the violation, said Barab. 

If an employer contests the violation, by law they don’t have to fix anything until that challenge is resolved, he said. “And that can be many months or even years after the initial violation.”

Before the new penalty policy changes, small businesses with 10 or fewer employers were eligible for a fine reduction of up to 70 percent, to encourage companies to apply their limited resources to mitigating hazards. The new rule extends that fee reduction to businesses with up to 25 employees, which previously qualified for a 60 percent reduction. 

The new rule also expands the 20 percent fee reduction for a history of compliance to companies that had never been cited because they’d never been inspected.

“We used to always say that you would get fined more for harassing a burro on federal land than for a serious OSHA violation.”

Jordan Barab, former OSHA deputy assistant secretary of labor

Granting a fee reduction to an employer that could have been running an unsafe workplace for decades just because OSHA never managed to get there for an inspection is a “major change” in OSHA’s policies, Barab said.

OSHA spokesperson Kristen Knebel did not answer questions about how the agency plans to keep workers safe by reducing the number of inspections and relaxing penalties for employers who violate worker health and safety standards.

Dying to Make a Living

Barab, who tracks worker deaths on his blog, told Inside Climate News about a particularly gruesome accident that happened nearly 25 years ago, when the penalties were less than half the current amounts.

On a broiling July afternoon in 2001, a work crew repairing a catwalk at an oil refinery in Delaware released a spark above a large storage tank containing spent sulfuric acid and highly flammable hydrocarbons. The spark ignited vapors from the tank, which burst into flames and collapsed. 

The fire burned for about a half hour and released 100,000 gallons of sulfuric acid into the nearby Delaware River, killing thousands of fish and crabs, according to official estimates at the time.

The explosion also killed Jeffrey Davis, a 50-year-old father of five, and sent eight of his co-workers to the hospital with serious injuries. Davis fell into the sulfuric acid, Barab said. “All they found was his boots.”

The OSHA citation amounted to about $200,000 while EPA issued a $10 million fine for Clean Water Act violations and criminal negligence, citing a long history of problems.

That was more than 20 years ago, but the situation is basically the same today, Barab said. There’s not just a much higher penalty for killing wildlife than for killing a worker, he said, but it’s also higher for lying to a federal OSHA inspector than for killing a worker.

Nearly 5,300 workers died from fatal injuries in 2023—one worker every 99 minutes—according to the most recent Bureau of Labor Statistics. Roughly 20 times that many die of occupational illnesses or diseases related to exposures that occurred years before their deaths, which are difficult to track.

Traumatic injuries sustained at work kill more than 100 workers, on average, every week. The week of July 7 alone, workers died in a fireworks warehouse explosion in Northern California, in a tanker explosion in Texas, on a highway crew in Michigan, while trimming trees in New York, of electrocution in an Alabama manufacturing plant, in vehicle accidents across the country, in shootings on the job in two states and in a cardiac event after responding to several calls while on firefighter duty in Missouri.

The changes made and planned by President Donald Trump’s OSHA will make conditions on the job even more hazardous, experts say. 

OSHA’s ability to protect workers has “greatly diminished” over the years, according to the latest Death on the Job report from the AFL-CIO, the largest federation of U.S. unions.

The agency was starved by budget cuts and hampered by staffing reductions and low penalty rates even before the Trump administration’s additional cuts, AFL-CIO Safety and Health Director Rebecca Reindel said at a hearing on OSHA compliance assistance Wednesday. While the agency’s budget and staff have steadily shrunk since 1991, the nation’s overall employment has grown substantially, she said.

Every year the AFL-CIO calculates how long it would take OSHA to inspect each workplace in its jurisdiction one time based on its resources. “Since 1991 that number has gone from once every 84 years to once every 185 years,” Reindel said. 

With the president’s proposed budget and 30 percent inspection reductions, it would be once every 266 years, she said. “The worst on record.”

The administration says the policy changes were made to minimize the burden on small businesses and increase prompt hazard abatement. 

“By lowering penalties on small employers, we are supporting the entrepreneurs that drive our economy and giving them the tools they need to keep our workers safe and healthy on the job while keeping them accountable,” said Deputy Secretary of Labor Keith Sonderling in a statement announcing the changes.

That’s not how Barab sees it. 

“They’re giving a free pass to employers who have never been inspected before,” Barab said. “And they’re making it much more likely that more employers will never be inspected by significantly cutting the number of inspections that OSHA is expected to conduct next year.”

By changing the criteria for penalty reductions, the Trump administration has removed the already weak deterrent for violating the nation’s worker safety and health laws, said Reindel. “This new policy just creates incentives for employers to take the low road and to not follow the law.”


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Liza Gross, Inside Climate News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/osha-just-reduced-the-value-of-a-workers-life/feed/ 0 545456
Humaira Asghar Ali in the Womb of Death https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/humaira-asghar-ali-in-the-womb-of-death/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/humaira-asghar-ali-in-the-womb-of-death/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 15:01:40 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160098 Model, theatre artist, media influencer, and actress Humaira Asghar Ali IMAGE/24 News IMAGE/Humaira Asghar Ali Twitter/Duck Duck Go IMAGE/The Nation IMAGE/Humaira Asghar Ali Twitter/Duck Duck Go Humaira Asghar Ali Chaudhry (1992 – 2025) was a Pakistani social media influencer, actress, model, reality TV star, and theatre artist who was linked with socially conscious theater groups. She was […]

The post Humaira Asghar Ali in the Womb of Death first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Model, theatre artist, media influencer, and actress Humaira Asghar Ali IMAGE/24 News IMAGE/Humaira Asghar Ali Twitter/Duck Duck Go IMAGE/The Nation IMAGE/Humaira Asghar Ali Twitter/Duck Duck Go

Humaira Asghar Ali Chaudhry (1992 – 2025) was a Pakistani social media influencer, actress, model, reality TV star, and theatre artist who was linked with socially conscious theater groups. She was also into sculpting and painting. She was a graduate of the prestigious National College of Arts (NCA) in Lahore with degrees in Fine Arts, TV, and Film. She earned her Masters in Philosophy from Punjab University.

Humaira last accessed her Facebook account on September 11, 2024  and her Instagram account on September 30. The last time she used her phone was on October 7 when she called 14 people but, none of them picked up her call. She left messages. One of them was an Islamabad-based famous director.

That was the last time she used her phone.

Humaira had been living alone in an apartment in Karachi’s Ittehad Commercial area of DHA Phase VI since 2018. According to Humaira’s landlord, the last rent she paid was in May 2024. The landlord complained to the courts of not receiving rent since then, a court-appointed bailiff with police joined him to visit the flat on July 8, 2025. When no one opened the door, it was broken into, and they found Humaira’s decomposed body lying on the floor. Electricity to her apartment had been cut-off since October 2024, for non-payment of bill. Humaira’s greatly decayed unrecognizable body was transported to Lahore to her family. She was buried on July 11. Her funeral was attended by only a few people.

Without being judgemental, actress Durefishan Saleem had a simple heartfelt message:

“Been thinking about life a lot lately. Not in terms of big dreams or loud success, but in the small, quiet moments.”

“I pray, with all my heart, that whenever [death] comes, for me or anyone, it doesn’t come in silence. Not in loneliness. Not in an empty room. But with love in the air. With familiar hands nearby. With someone who truly knew your heart.”

The police report was released on July 18, said chemical examination of her remains found no psychotropic drugs, intoxicants, tranquilizers, or any poisonous substances in her system.

She had three cellphones with over 2,000 saved contacts. With at least 75 people, she was in frequent contact and had had long conversations.

Stylist Danish Maqsood worked with Humaira on two photo-shoots, one in 2023 and the other on October 2, 2024. Maqsood’s request to Humaira for releasing images on social media didn’t receive an approval from her:

“When the request wasn’t approved, we tried calling her several times. After receiving no response, we messaged her on WhatsApp, but there was still no reply.”

He informed some digital publications about Humaira’s disappearance. After great efforts, he succeeded in a couple of them reporting her missing but, Maqsood regrets: it failed to garner attention of most people in the industry.

Humaira had not been in touch with her family for a long time. We don’t know if there were any family problems; speculation would probably be out of line.

But there remain several questions:

  • In the nine months of her absence, why did none of the 75 people she often talked to become worried about her whereabouts?
  • Did any of the last 14 people she contacted try to call her back? If they did, why didn’t they follow-up?
  • In the world of celebrities, parties are as common as regular people going to the dollar store, why did no one notice her disappearance?
  • In one of her last calls, she called a director which may have been work related, did that director think about what state she was in, and did he follow up on her missed call?

Entertainment industries worldwide do not have good reputation. Many people attracted to the glamor get exploited. The phrase rising Sun gets worshiped is very applicable to this industry. Once your star is down, you’re not allowed within the vicinity of the movie moguls’ sight; and you’re out of their mind. Then there are those who never find work which could lead to frustration, depression, and rejection that can lead to suicidal tendencies.

On 19 June, the dead body of another actress Ayesha Khan (1941 – 2025) was found as result of the neighbors complaint of a strong odor emanating from her place. She had been dead for a week! It’s tragic that people are lying dead for days and months without anyone knowing about it.

Most people working in the industry, including directors, actors, spot boys, lighting technicians, etc. don’t get paid on time.

Film and TV serial director Mehreen Jabbar:

“In the US, even with all their issues, there’s a fixed schedule for payments. People know when they’ll get paid. Here, you have to chase payments like beggars. Ask anyone and they’ll have horror stories. This is across every channel and production house. They [the crew members] do the hardest labour. But with no union, no rights, and no fair pay, they remain trapped. Working in Pakistan has become more disheartening. Compared to other places, the difference in professionalism and organization is stark.”

Many artists have the same complain including, senior artists who have now started voicing their grievances in the media.

(Renowned Indian singers Sunidhi Chauhan and Sonu Nigam said there are instances where they don’t get paid because Bollywood mafia controls things.)

There is no doubt Humaira was desperately looking for work. One of her two bank accounts had only Rs390,000 or about $1,375. The call to her close friend Dureshehwar revealed she was looking for work:

“I’m so sorry, I was traveling, caught up here and there. I’m so happy you’re in Makkah [on a pilgrimage]. Please pray a lot for me… Pray a lot from your heart for your cute friend/sister. For my career, please remember me in your prayers. You have to pray a lot for me.”

Pakistani society is very conservative and is rough on women, particularly on single women. The Global Gender Gap Index 2025 lists 148 countries of which Pakistan is ranked 148. Only 24% women are part of the labor force.

Sociologist Nida Kirmani gives an example of a woman named Saima who lived in a poor conservative neighborhood but found work in a very posh locality with a multinational department store where she made four times more money than most women, and even many men. She would put on an abaya (a loose overgarment) to cover her uniform but remove it once she reached her work because at work she would have seemed out of place in an abaya. Fortunately, her work company provided pick-and-drop service for their employees, otherwise, she would have faced verbal and or sexual harassment during her commute to work. Nevertheless, she still faced contempt from her neighbors and extended family members.

Coming back to Humaira, the cultural critic Aimun Faisal points out:

“It appears, at least to our moral gatekeepers, that there are no good women left in Pakistan.

“And so, perhaps understandably, people celebrate their deaths, leave their decaying bodies unclaimed, and repurpose their broken corpses as stark reminders — cautionary examples used to sermonize virtue. They preach goodness from behind their monetized YouTube accounts, from behind verified Twitter accounts, from the benches of the superior courts, from their pulpits, and from their news channels, and drawing rooms. And for their guidance, we are eternally grateful.”

Actor Osman Khalid Butt went after morality brigade and money makers:

“Stop turning people’s real trauma into content. Stop projecting your morality onto someone who’s not here to defend herself. Stop the speculation and the judgment, and the deflection. For God’s sake, just stop.”

Actress Mawra Hocane extended a helping hand:

“If you’re in trouble or caught in spiraling thoughts, if I have known you briefly or extensively, if you’re a friend or an acquaintance, if you’re from my fraternity and you feel I will understand your pressures, please reach out!”

Suggestion

What Mawra should do is get some of her fraternity on board to form a hotline service that artists in crisis, depression, and other problems are able to access. Also the service should try to reach artists who have been active but have suddenly vanished, like Humaira.

Humaira in the womb of death

for nine months,
life grows in the womb of a living being
it grows into a fetus
then turns into a human being
where as lifeless Humaira resided
nine months in the womb of death
when she was found,
one could say she was reborn but in a dead state
she was dead …
but became live fodder for news & social medias
many …
gossip-mongers, influencers, reporters, & others, cashed in
voyeuristic vloggers and commercial cameras not far behind
commercialism neither respects life, nor has regard for death
and custodians of morality too …
especially for a single woman from showbiz
why did it happen –
how can we stop more Humairas from happening?
for such questions,
the state has no interest,
nor any intention to pursue
the state resources are for
the ruling class’ families, friends, and donors …

VIDEO: Ahmad Ali Butt/ Youtube

The post Humaira Asghar Ali in the Womb of Death first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by B.R. Gowani.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/humaira-asghar-ali-in-the-womb-of-death/feed/ 0 545398
Revisiting Paul Baran’s The Political Economy of Growth for Today https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/revisiting-paul-barans-the-political-economy-of-growth-for-today/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/revisiting-paul-barans-the-political-economy-of-growth-for-today/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 15:00:28 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160035 And this brings me to what I referred to earlier as a reaffirmation of my views on the basic problem confronting the underdeveloped countries. The principal insights, which must not be obscured by matters of secondary or tertiary importance, are two. The first is that, if what is sought is rapid economic development, comprehensive economic […]

The post Revisiting Paul Baran’s The Political Economy of Growth for Today first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

And this brings me to what I referred to earlier as a reaffirmation of my views on the basic problem confronting the underdeveloped countries. The principal insights, which must not be obscured by matters of secondary or tertiary importance, are two. The first is that, if what is sought is rapid economic development, comprehensive economic planning is indispensable… if the increase in a country’s aggregate output is to attain the magnitude, of, say, 8 to 10 per cent per annum; if in order to achieve it, the mode of utilization of a nation’s human and material resources is to be radically changed, with certain less productive lines of economic activity abandoned and other more rewarding ones taken up; then only a deliberate, long range planning effort can assure the attainment of the goal…

The second insight of crucial importance is that no planning worth the name is possible in a society in which the means of production remain under the control of private interests which administer them with a view to their owners’ maximum profits (or security or other private advantage). For it is of the very essence of comprehensive planning for economic development – what renders it, indeed, indispensable – that the pattern of allocation and utilization of resources which it must impose if it is to accomplish its purpose, is necessarily different from-the pattern prevailing under the status quo…
— xxviii-xxix, Foreword to 1962 printing, The Political Economy of Growth, Paul A. Baran [emphasis added]

It is surely of some interest that the late Professor Baran — reassessing his important, insightful, and extremely influential 1957 book, The Political Economy of Growth — grounds his contribution to the liberation of the post-colonial world in two “insights”: 1. The necessity of “comprehensive” economic planning over the irrational decision-making of the market, and 2. The impossibility of having effective planning with the major productive forces in the hands of private entities operating for profits.

Put simply, Baran is arguing that the most promising humane and rational escape from the legacy of colonialism is for the developing countries to choose the socialist path going forward and adopt planning as a necessary, rational condition for achieving that goal.

It is of equal interest that many who consider Baran to be one of the fathers of dependency theory — the theory that development is most significantly hindered by the state-to-state structural barriers imposed by the “core” on the “periphery” or the “North” on the “South” — have abandoned Baran’s key “insights” for an approach that argues for open, unhindered “fair” exchange and the rationality of markets.

For many of today’s Western left, the locus of international inequalities is found in the economic relations between states. Exploitation — in the form of taking advantage of uneven development or resource differences — undoubtedly occurs in the relations between states, systematically in the colonial era, more indirectly today. That is just to say that competition between capitalist states within a global imperialist system will produce and reproduce various inequalities. It is popular to capture this as conflict between an advantaged North and a disadvantaged South — while the geographical reference is most inexact, it is widely understood. From Wallerstein, Arrighi, and Gunder Frank, through Amin, and an important consensus today, the central feature of imperialism is thought to be the vast differences in wealth between the rich and poor countries. Moreover, they share the belief that existing structures maintain those differences, structures established and protected by the richest countries.

Of course, they are right to object to these inequalities and the practices and institutions that preserve them. And Paul Baran was acutely aware of these structures, but also attendant to the specific historical conditions influencing the individual countries — their differences and similarities. He understands the trajectory of the post-colonial states:

Thus, the peoples who came into the orbit of Western capitalist expansion found themselves in the twilight of feudalism and capitalism enduring the worst features of both worlds, and the entire impact of imperialist subjugation to boot. To oppression by their feudal lords, ruthless but tempered by tradition, was added domination by foreign and domestic capitalists, callous and limited only by what the traffic would bear. The obscurantism and arbitrary violence inherited from their feudal past was combined with the rationality and sharply calculating rapacity of their capitalist present. Their exploitation was multiplied, yet its fruits were not to increase their productive wealth; these went abroad or served to support a parasitic bourgeoisie at home. They lived in abysmal misery, yet they had no prospect of a better tomorrow. They existed under capitalism, yet there was no accumulation of capital. They lost their time-honored means of livelihood, their arts and crafts, yet there was no modern industry to provide new ones in their place. They were thrust into extensive contact with the advanced science of the West, yet remained in a state of the darkest backwardness (p. 144).

At the same time, Baran is fully aware of the predatory nature of foreign capital, denying its “usefulness” and affirming its sole domestic benefit to the merchant class.

Perhaps his clearest statement of the logic of imperialism appears on pages 196-197:

To be sure, neither imperialism itself nor its modus operandi and ideological trimmings are today what they were fifty or a hundred years ago. Just as outright looting of the outside world has yielded to organized trade with the underdeveloped countries, in which plunder has been rationalized and routinized by a mechanism of impeccably ‘correct’ contractual relations, so has the rationality of smoothly functioning commerce grown into the modern, still more advanced, still more rational system of imperialist exploitation. Like all other historically changing phenomena, the contemporary form of imperialism contains and preserves all its earlier modalities, but raises them to a new level. Its central feature is that it is now directed not solely towards the rapid extraction of large sporadic gains from the objects of its domination, it is no longer content with merely assuring a more or less steady flow of these gains over a somewhat extended period. Propelled by well-organized, rationally conducted monopolistic enterprise, it seeks today to rationalize the flow of these receipts so as to be able to count on it in perpetuity. And this points to the main task of imperialism in our time: to prevent, or, if that is impossible, to slow down and to control the economic development of underdeveloped countries.

Notice that Baran acknowledges, along with today’s fashionable dependency theory, that imperialism’s “main task” is to impose underdevelopment. But imperialism’s agent is identified as the “monopolistic enterprise” and not specifically an antagonistic state or its government. Of course, the state hosting monopoly corporations does all it can to promote and protect their interests, but it should not be confused with either the exploiter or the beneficiary of exploitation: it is “the well-organized, rationally conducted monopolistic enterprise” that bleeds the workers of the developing countries. With monopoly capitalism dominating the state, the state plays a critical, essential role as an enabler for the most powerful monopolies in the global economy.

For Baran, the key to liberating the former colonies from the stranglehold of rapacious monopolies is not a reordering of international relations, not a campaign for a level international playing field, not alternative market institutions, nor a coalition of dissenters from the status quo, but a radical change in the social and economic structure of the oppressed country.

In this regard, Baran differs from many contemporary dependency theorists who pose multipolarity as an answer to the North-South inequalities and welcome the BRICS development as constituting an anti-imperialist stage. They believe that breaking the stranglehold of the dominant great power — the US — will somehow eliminate the logic of contemporary imperialism, that it will disable the “mechanism of impeccably ‘correct’ contractual relations” at the heart of “core” / “periphery” relations.

But this is not Baran’s thinking. He opts instead for an active engagement of the workers, peasants, and intellectuals on the periphery. His is a class approach. For Baran, working people are not dried leaves, blown this way and that by the powerful winds of great powers. Rather, they are the agents of their own liberation.

Baran draws out the potential of the post-colonial masses through his innovative concept of “surplus.”1 Baran asks revolutionaries in the emerging countries to realize the potential surplus that they may access for development provided that they engage in a “reorganization of the production and distribution of social output” and accept “far reaching changes to the structure of society.” (p. 24). Baran emphasizes four available sources for the surplus:

One is society’s excess consumption (predominantly on the part of the upper income groups…), the second is the output lost to society through the existence of unproductive workers, the third is the output lost because of the irrational and wasteful organization of the existing productive apparatus, and the fourth is the output foregone owing to the existence of unemployment caused primarily by the anarchy of capitalist production and the deficiency of effective demand. (p. 24)

By recovering this surplus, Baran contends that the post-colonial world can begin “the steep ascent” — the escape from the legacy of colonialism and the stranglehold of capitalism. At the same time, Baran concedes that a resource-poor country, an economy violently distorted by a close neighbor — a country like Cuba — will need assistance from the socialist community, an assistance that has been less forthcoming since the demise of the Soviet Union.

The Multipolaristas and the BRICS advocates do not share Baran’s confidence in working people. They cannot conceive a revolutionary answer to the problem of development. They relegate socialism to the far, far-off future, and argue for a more humane capitalism. Their vision ends with establishing a new regime of “structural adjustments” that will blunt the economic power of the US to make way for a plurality of powers competing for global markets, but in a “friendly” way. This is the social-democratic vision taken to the global level. But this is not Baran’s vision.

Like their national counterparts, these global social democrats envision a world in which reforming capitalist social relations — taming the worst monopoly scoundrels — will result in the proverbial arc bending toward justice. BRICS, they believe, will give us a level playing field for the monopoly corporations to roam more fairly.

*****
Is Baran’s 1957 (1962) recipe for development relevant to today’s world? Could the so-called global South escape the clutches of the imperialist system by applying the “insights” offered by The Political Economy of Growth?

A recent Oxfam report on inequality in Africa suggests that there is plenty of potential surplus available for building a developmental program based on a class-based approach of appropriation and surplus recovery:

● Africa’s four most affluent billionaires have $57.4 billion in wealth, which is greater than ~50% of the continent’s 1.5 billion people.

● While Africa had no billionaires in 2000, today, there are 23 with a combined wealth of $112.6 billion. The wealth of these 23 ultra-rich Africans has grown by 56% in the last 5 years.

● The richest 5% on the continent have accumulated almost $4 trillion in wealth, more than twice the wealth of the rest of the people in Africa (by comparison, the richest 10% of US households hold two-thirds of US wealth).

● Almost half of the world’s most unequal countries are in Africa.

● The bottom 50% of Africans own less than 1% of the wealth of the continent (by comparison, the bottom 50% of US households own 3% of US wealth).

Presumably, the report does not include the billionaires like Elon Musk, Patrick Soon-Shiong, Rodney Sacks, and many others who relocated and invested outside of Africa. Eight of the top foreign-born US billionaires are from Africa.

Clearly, class, and not state-to-state relations, is at the center of Africa’s human development problem. The “potential surplus” accumulated in the hands of so few would well serve a peoples’ development program that could reverse the concentration of wealth now starving the continent’s poor. Appropriated wealth could well serve an industrial drive and the rationalization of agriculture. More than enough wealth is available in Africa to implement Paul Baran’s twin insights that open this article.

The BRICS movement — a coalition of partners aligning to create a different international exchange network that would be less one-sided, less privileging wealthy nations– is not itself a bad thing. The proverbial level playing field — the fair and free marketplace — is a proper goal for capitalist participants competing internationally. But it is not a Left project. It moves the goal no closer in the struggle for justice for working people. It is not class-partisan, and thus ultimately will likely benefit those who gain from the proper functioning of capitalist economic relations in the various countries disadvantaged by existing relations. And we know from the Oxfam report who they are.

One can see the limitations of multipolarity from the recent Rio de Janeiro meeting of BRICS leaders. There is much talk of a “more equitable global order,” of state-to-state “cooperation,” of broader “participation,” even a pledge to fight disease and extreme poverty. The foreign ministers and heads of state dutifully denounce war and aggression. The current President, Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva “called BRICS a successor of the Non-Aligned Movement (NAM).” What he didn’t say was that NAM broke up when Cuba transcended toothless resolutions and declarations and actually defended Angola against apartheid South African aggression in a bloody war that brought the criminal regime to its knees. The BRICS response to the attack on Iran brings “toothlessness” back to mind.

Baran’s revolutionary path is not an easy one. Others have tried and failed. From Nkrumah and Lumumba to Thomas Sankara, revolutionaries in Africa have taken steps in this direction, only to be thwarted by powerful forces determined to snuff out even a beginning. That alone should tell the EuroAmerican left that it is the path worth following.

We should not pretend that reforming global market relations—any more than reforming national market relations– will secure justice for working people. That will come when the workers, peasants, and intellectuals of the global South decide that justice is impossible while “the means of production remain under the control of private interests which administer them with a view to their owners’ maximum profits.”

ENDNOTE:

The post Revisiting Paul Baran’s The Political Economy of Growth for Today first appeared on Dissident Voice.
1    While useful in this context, the concept of surplus is less successful as developed in Baran and Sweezy’s 1966 work, Monopoly Capital.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Greg Godels.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/revisiting-paul-barans-the-political-economy-of-growth-for-today/feed/ 0 545401
Kilmar Ábrego García returned to the U.S. #shorts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/kilmar-abrego-garcia-returned-to-the-u-s-shorts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/kilmar-abrego-garcia-returned-to-the-u-s-shorts/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 13:04:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d0a4133ea99638403b838af3ae81a62f
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/kilmar-abrego-garcia-returned-to-the-u-s-shorts/feed/ 0 545387
Keep fighting for a nuclear-free Pacific, Helen Clark warns Greenpeace over global storm clouds https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/keep-fighting-for-a-nuclear-free-pacific-helen-clark-warns-greenpeace-over-global-storm-clouds/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/keep-fighting-for-a-nuclear-free-pacific-helen-clark-warns-greenpeace-over-global-storm-clouds/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 11:00:11 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117768 Asia Pacific Report

Former New Zealand prime minister Helen Clark warned activists and campaigners in a speech on the deck of the Greenpeace environmental flagship Rainbow Warrior III last night to be wary of global “storm clouds” and the renewed existential threat of nuclear weapons.

Speaking on her reflections on four decades after the bombing of the original Rainbow Warrior on 10 July 1985, she said that New Zealand had a lot to be proud of but the world was now in a “precarious” state.

Clark praised Greenpeace over its long struggle, challenging the global campaigners to keep up the fight for a nuclear-free Pacific.

“For New Zealand, having been proudly nuclear-free since the mid-1980s, life has got a lot more complicated for us as well, and I have done a lot of campaigning against New Zealand signing up to any aspect of the AUKUS arrangement because it seems to me that being associated with any agreement that supplies nuclear ship technology to Australia is more or less encouraging the development of nuclear threats in the South Pacific,” she said.

“While I am not suggesting that Australians are about to put nuclear weapons on them, we know that others do. This is not the Pacific that we want.

“It is not the Pacific that we fought for going back all those years.

“So we need to be very concerned about these storm clouds gathering.”

Lessons for humanity
Clark was prime minister 1999-2008 and served as a minister in David Lange’s Labour government that passed New Zealand’s nuclear-free legislation in 1987 – two years after the Rainbow Warrior bombing by French secret agents.

She was also head of the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) in 2009-2017.

“When you think 40 years on, humanity might have learned some lessons. But it seems we have to repeat the lessons over and over again, or we will be dragged on the path of re-engagement with those who use nuclear weapons as their ultimate defence,” Clark told the Greenpeace activists, crew and guests.

“Forty years on, we look back with a lot of pride, actually, at how New Zealand responded to the bombing of the Rainbow Warrior. We stood up with the passage of the nuclear-free legislation in 1987, we stood up with a lot of things.

“All of this is under threat; the international scene now is quite precarious with respect to nuclear weapons. This is an existential threat.”


Nuclear-free Pacific reflections with Helen Clark         Video: Greenpeace

In response to Tahitian researcher and advocate Ena Manuireva who spoke earlier about the legacy of a health crisis as a result of 30 years of French nuclear tests at Moruroa and Fangataufa, she recalled her own thoughts.

“It reminds us of why we were so motivated to fight for a nuclear-free Pacific because we remember the history of what happened in French Polynesia, in the Marshall Islands, in the South Australian desert, at Maralinga, to the New Zealand servicemen who were sent up in the navy ships, the Rotoiti and the Pukaki, in the late 1950s, to stand on deck while the British exploded their bombs [at Christmas Island in what is today Kiribati].

“These poor guys were still seeking compensation when I was PM with the illnesses you [Ena] described in French Polynesia.

Former NZ prime minister Helen Clark .
Former NZ prime minister Helen Clark . . . “I remember one of the slogans in the 1970s and 1980s was ‘if it is so safe, test them in France’.” Image: Asia Pacific Report

Testing ground for ‘others’
“So the Pacific was a testing ground for ‘others’ far away and I remember one of the slogans in the 1970s and 1980s was ‘if it is so safe, test them in France’. Right? It wasn’t so safe.

“Mind you, they regarded French Polynesia as France.

“David Robie asked me to write the foreword to the new edition of his book, Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior, and it brought back so many memories of those times because those of you who are my age will remember that the 1980s were the peak of the Cold War.

“We had the Reagan administration [in the US] that was actively preparing for war. It was a terrifying time. It was before the demise of the Soviet Union. And nuclear testing was just part of that big picture where people were preparing for war.

“I think that the wonderful development in New Zealand was that people knew enough to know that we didn’t want to be defended by nuclear weapons because that was not mutually assured survival — it was mutually assured destruction.”

New Zealand took a stand, Clark said, but taking that stand led to the attack on the Rainbow Warrior in Auckland harbour by French state-backed terrorism where tragically Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira lost his life.

“I remember I was on my way to Nairobi for a conference for women, and I was in Zimbabwe, when the news came through about the bombing of a boat in Auckland harbour.

‘Absolutely shocking’
“It was absolutely shocking, we had never experienced such a thing. I recall when I returned to New Zealand, [Prime Minister] David Lange one morning striding down to the party caucus room and telling us before it went public that it was without question that French spies had planted the bombs and the rest was history.

“It was a very tense time. Full marks to Greenpeace for keeping up the struggle for so long — long before it was a mainstream issue Greenpeace was out there in the Pacific taking on nuclear testing.

“Different times from today, but when I wrote the foreword for David’s book I noted that storm clouds were gathering again around nuclear weapons and issues. I suppose that there is so much else going on in a tragic 24 news cycle — catastrophe day in and day out in Gaza, severe technology and lethal weapons in Ukraine killing people, wherever you look there are so many conflicts.

“The international agreements that we have relied are falling into disrepair. For example, if I were in Europe I would be extremely worried about the demise of the intermediate range missile weapons pact which has now been abandoned by the Americans and the Russians.

“And that governs the deployment of medium range missiles in Europe.

“The New Start Treaty, which was a nuclear arms control treaty between what was the Soviet Union and the US expires next year. Will it be renegotiated in the current circumstances? Who knows?”

With the Non-proliferation Treaty, there are acknowledged nuclear powers who had not signed the treaty — “and those that do make very little effort to live up to the aspiration, which is to negotiate an end to nuclear weapons”.

Developments with Iran
“We have seen recently the latest developments with Iran, and for all of Iran’s many sins let us acknowledge that it is a party to the Non-Proliferation Treaty,” she said.

“It did subject itself, for the most part, to the inspections regime. Israel, which bombed it, is not a party to the treaty, and doesn’t accept inspections.

“There are so many double standards that people have long complained about the Non-Proliferation Treaty where the original five nuclear powers are deemed okay to have them, somehow, whereas there are others who don’t join at all.

“And then over the Ukraine conflict we have seen worrying threats of the use of nuclear weapons.”

Clark warned that we the use of artificial intelligence it would not be long before asking it: “How do I make a nuclear weapon?”

“It’s not so difficult to make a dirty bomb. So we should be extremely worried about all these developments.”

Then Clark spoke about the “complications” facing New Zealand.

Mangareva researcher and advocate Ena Manuireva
Mangareva researcher and advocate Ena Manuireva . . . “My mum died of lung cancer and the doctors said that she was a ‘passive smoker’. My mum had not smoked for the last 65 years.” Image: Asia Pacific Report

Teariki’s message to De Gaulle
In his address, Ena Manuireva started off by quoting the late Tahitian parliamentarian John Teariki who had courageously appealed to General Charles De Gaulle in 1966 after France had already tested three nuclear devices:

“No government has ever had the honesty or the cynical frankness to admit that its nuclear tests might be dangerous. No government has ever hesitated to make other peoples — preferably small, defenceless ones — bear the burden.”

“May you, Mr President, take back your troops, your bombs, and your planes.

“Then, later, our leukemia and cancer patients would not be able to accuse you of being the cause of their illness.

“Then, our future generations would not be able to blame you for the birth of monsters and deformed children.

“Then, you would give the world an example worthy of France . . .

“Then, Polynesia, united, would be proud and happy to be French, and, as in the early days of Free France, we would all once again become your best and most loyal friends.”

‘Emotional moment’
Manuireva said that 10 days earlier, he had been on board Rainbow Warrior III for the ceremony to mark the bombing in 1985 that cost the life of Fernando Pereira – “and the lives of a lot of Mā’ohi people”.

“It was a very emotional moment for me. It reminded me of my mother and father as I am a descendant of those on Mangareva atoll who were contaminated by those nuclear tests.

“My mum died of lung cancer and the doctors said that she was a ‘passive smoker’. My mum had not smoked for the last 65 years.

“French nuclear testing started on 2 July 1966 with Aldebaran and lasted 30 years.”

He spoke about how the military “top brass fled the island” when winds start blowing towards Mangareva. “Food was ready but they didn’t stay”.

“By the time I was born in December 1967 in Mangareva, France had already exploded 9 atmospheric nuclear tests on Moruroa and Fangataufa atolls, about 400km from Mangareva.”

France’s most powerful explosion was Canopus with 2.6 megatonnes in August 1968. It was a thermonuclear hydrogen bomb — 150 times more powerful than Hiroshima.

Greenpeace Aotearoa executive director Russel Norman
Greenpeace Aotearoa executive director Russel Norman . . . a positive of the campaign future. Image: Asia Pacific Report

‘Poisoned gift’
Manuireva said that by France “gifting us the bomb”, Tahitians had been left “with all the ongoing consequences on the people’s health costs that the Ma’ohi Nui government is paying for”.

He described how the compensation programme was inadequate, lengthy and complicated.

Manuireva also spoke about the consequences for the environment. Both Moruroa and Fangataufa were condemned as “no go” zones and islanders had lost their lands forever.

He also noted that while France had gifted the former headquarters of the Atomic Energy Commission (CEP) as a “form of reconciliation” plans to turn it into a museum were thwarted because the building was “rife with asbestos”.

“It is a poisonous gift that will cost millions for the local government to fix.”

Greenpeace Aotearoa executive director Russel Norman spoke of the impact on the Greenpeace organisation of the French secret service bombing of their ship and also introduced the guest speakers and responded to their statements.

A Q and A session was also held to round off the stimulating evening.

A question during the open mike session on board the Rainbow Warrior.
A question during the open mike session on board the Rainbow Warrior. Image: Asia Pacific Report


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/keep-fighting-for-a-nuclear-free-pacific-helen-clark-warns-greenpeace-over-global-storm-clouds/feed/ 0 545956
The surprising reasons floods and other disasters are more deadly at night https://grist.org/extreme-weather/the-surprising-reasons-floods-and-other-disasters-are-more-deadly-at-night/ https://grist.org/extreme-weather/the-surprising-reasons-floods-and-other-disasters-are-more-deadly-at-night/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 08:45:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670476 It was 4 a.m. on July 4 at Camp La Junta in Kerr County when Kolton Taylor woke up to the sound of screaming. The 12-year-old boy stepped out of bed and straight into knee-deep floodwaters from the nearby Guadalupe River. Before long, the water had already risen to his waist. In the darkness, he managed to feel for his tennis shoes floating nearby, put them on, and escape to the safety of the hillside. All 400 people at the all-boys camp survived, even as they watched one of their cabins float away in the rushing river. But 5 miles downriver at Camp Mystic, 28 campers and counselors were killed.

The flash flooding in Texas would have been catastrophic at any time of day, but it was especially dangerous because it happened at night. Research shows that more than half of deaths from floods happen after dark, and in the case of flash floods, one study put the number closer to three-quarters. Other hazards are more perilous in the dark, too: Tornadoes that strike between sunset and sunrise are twice as deadly, on average, as those during the day. No one can stop the sun from rising and setting, but experts say there are simple precautions that can save lives when extreme weather strikes at night. As climate change supercharges floods, hurricanes, and fires, it’s becoming even more important to account for the added risks of nocturnal disasters.

Stephen Strader, a hazards geographer at Villanova University, said that at night, it’s not enough to rely on a phone call from a family member or outdoor warning sirens (which Kerr County officials discussed installing, but never did). The safest bet is a NOAA radio, a device that broadcasts official warnings from the nearest National Weather Service office 24/7. One major advantage is that it doesn’t rely on cell service. 

“That’s old school technology, but it’s the thing that will wake you up and get you up at 3 a.m.,” said Walker Ashley, an atmospheric scientist and disaster geographer at Northern Illinois University.

Even with warning, reacting in the middle of the night isn’t easy. When people are shaken awake, they’re often disoriented, requiring additional time to figure out what’s happening before they can jump into action. “Those precious minutes and seconds are critical a lot of times in these situations for getting to safety,” Strader said. 

The darkness itself presents another issue. People tend to look outside for proof that weather warnings match up with their reality, but at night, they often can’t find the confirmation they’re looking for until it’s too late. Some drive their cars into floodwaters, unable to see how deep it is, and get swept away. It’s also harder to evacuate — and try to rescue people — when you can barely see anything. “I invite anybody to just go walk around the woods with a flashlight off, and you find out how difficult it can be,” Ashley said. “Imagine trying to navigate floodwaters or trying to find shelter while you’re in rushing water at night with no flashlight. It’s a nightmare.”

The logic applies to most hazards, but the night problem appears the worst with sudden-onset disasters like tornadoes and earthquakes — and the early-morning flash floods in Texas, where the Guadalupe rose 26 feet in 45 minutes. A warmer atmosphere can hold more moisture, meaning that storms can dump more water more suddenly than they used to. 

“We have essentially, because of climate change, put the atmosphere on steroids,” Strader said. It’s on his to-do list to study whether other disasters, like hurricanes and wildfires, are deadlier at night. 

When Hurricane Harvey pummeled Texas with rain for days in 2017, people described waking up to water creeping into their homes; the Texas National Guard navigated rescue boats through neighborhoods in the dark, searching for survivors. In recent years, hurricanes have rapidly intensified before making landfall, fueled by warmer ocean waters. That shrinks the window in which forecasters can warn people a strong storm is coming. To compound the problem, at the end of July, the Pentagon plans to stop sharing the government satellite microwave data that helps forecasters track hurricanes overnight, leaving the country vulnerable to what’s called a “sunrise surprise.”

In the past, nighttime conditions have proved useful for slowing wildfires: Temperatures are cooler and the air has more moisture, reducing the likelihood of fires spreading quickly. But climate change is lessening these beneficial effects. The overall intensity of nighttime fires rose 7 percent worldwide between 2003 and 2020, according to a study in the journal Nature. That means fires are increasingly spreading late at night and early in the morning. It was an ultra-dry January night when the Eaton Fire began tearing through Altadena in Los Angeles County. Some residents were woken up in the predawn hours to smoke already in their homes, strangers pounding on their windows, or sheriff’s deputies and rescue volunteers driving by with loudspeakers.

While daytime tornado deaths have declined over time, nighttime fatalities are on the rise, Strader and Ashley have found in their research. (It’s still unclear as to how climate change affects tornadoes.) They found that tornadoes that touch down at night are statistically more likely to hit someone, simply because there are more potential targets scattered across the landscape. During the day, people are often concentrated in cities and sturdy office buildings versus homes, which may be manufactured and not as structurally resilient to floods or high winds. 

Night adds dimensions of danger to many types of disasters, but the darkness isn’t the only factor at play — and it doesn’t have to be as deadly, Ashley said, stressing the importance of getting a weather radio and making a plan in case the worst happens. “Have multiple ways to get information, and your odds of survival are extremely high, even in the most horrific tornado situation.”

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The surprising reasons floods and other disasters are more deadly at night on Jul 21, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Kate Yoder.

]]>
https://grist.org/extreme-weather/the-surprising-reasons-floods-and-other-disasters-are-more-deadly-at-night/feed/ 0 545365
Writer Maris Kreizman on offering and asking for help https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/writer-maris-kreizman-on-offering-and-asking-for-help/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/writer-maris-kreizman-on-offering-and-asking-for-help/#respond Mon, 21 Jul 2025 04:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-maris-kreizman-on-offering-and-asking-for-help You’ve published one book before, Slaughterhouse 90210, and your follow-up has been long awaited. Why was now the right time for I Want to Burn This Place Down?

Now is the right time because I’ve had a lot of opportunities to reflect on so many of the goals that I always seem to be striving for, that I don’t want to achieve anymore. It’s really about all of the broken systems that I thought were working for me and for others, and all of the liberal myths I held onto like facts.

Why don’t you want to achieve those goals?

My ambition essay came out during COVID. I was freelance writing and trying to get a job in digital media, which, as you know, can be very difficult. COVID had laid bare all our systemic problems that we were just kind of shoving aside. Everything from racism in the industry, to sexism, and even just the idea that if you work really hard, there will be rewards—which is just not always the case.

I feel like things are worse now. Do you think that’s fair to say?

I thought that when this book came out, I would be critiquing the left while the left was in power. Things have really changed since then. When Trump was elected, we kind of had to go back and think about how these essays would hit in this time.

Was there anything you changed then, based on that?

I didn’t change a thing. But I hadn’t considered that my frustration with the Democrats would be reflected in this past election. So it became more a book about standing for something. Standing for health equity for all, or for doing something to prevent global warming, or for any number of things [where] I think we’ve been in an in-between place for a long time.

How do you put blinders on to get down to work? How do you critique things that some people might assume don’t matter in the long run?

I think that’s one of the biggest problems of my lifetime: the devaluation of the things that I love and care about the most. Even in book publishing, there are so many problems. But the thing that I always come back to with books is that there’s always a new book I want to read, so something is going right in this terrible process. That’s always been my year-end philosophy: things have been shitty, but there have been some really good books, and isn’t that something?

Tell me about the process of the book, from idea to proposal to writing to publication.

After that essay about ambition went semi-viral, I thought I should write a book about all of the things that I no longer feel ambitious about. That very quickly evolved into, “Let me just write about all the shit that pisses me off.” And again, that could be endless, so I needed to put some sort of structure on it. I was very lucky to work with my agent, Sarah Burnes, who helped me narrow it down to a few of the topics that I was really hoping to tackle. As I worked on it, it did become clear that the book was about liberalism and my discontents with that, because, once again, if you get into conservatism and the current state of America, we could talk for ages. But it really became about speaking up for the people who get more progressive as we age, because I think the media likes to say that everyone gets more conservative.

I sold the book on proposal but with a detailed outline of what I wanted to write. And then the scariest part was getting that book deal and having to start actually going and writing them all. Of course, that was ultimately the most rewarding thing. To be perfectly honest, one of the great reliefs about publishing this book was that I had a couple of years to work on it—[although] not the money for a couple of years—and therefore didn’t have to apply for jobs. Because there aren’t that many out there, and freelance writing is an industry in which there have been no raises since the beginning of time. I wish I could be one of those writers who just loves every moment of sitting down and doing the thing.

What does your writing process look like, if you don’t enjoy sitting down at the desk and getting the words out?

One of the most helpful things I realized is that trying to do more than about two hours in a day is just never going to work for me. So I went to a writing space and sat there from 8 to 10 just about every morning, and that was the perfect way to start the day. I couldn’t believe that I was a morning person. I always thought that everything interesting happened at night, and then all of a sudden, I could only have a clear head at 7:30 AM.

It kind of reminds me of a quote from the book: “I’m a childless writer who is often selfish, but not in the good optimized art-making way.” Does that make you feel guilty at all?

It did. It did. I have this essay in the book about how the choice used to be whether you’re going to be a mother or a careerist. And then the question became, in the past 10 years or so, do you want to be a mother or an art monster? And feeling like those are the only two worthy things. In writing this book, it was nice to acknowledge that my path doesn’t look similar to a lot of people I know and that it’s okay to have different goals.

How has the publishing industry changed over two decades? Or, what’s the biggest difference between now and when you first started?

When I first got into publishing, I was really stuck in between two different worlds. There was the world of corporate publishing that was on the rise, but there was also what had been publishing, which was very much a gentleman’s agreement—a kind of rich people hobby industry where publishers were doing it for their own enjoyment for the most part, and didn’t hold themselves to such high standards, particularly of the spreadsheet kind. Since then, publishing has just become so much more corporate. When I started, it was the big six, or maybe there were seven, and now there are the big five.

Why did you make the move from working within the publishing industry to critiquing it?

I had so many different jobs in and around the book publishing industry. I thought I was going to be a book editor. I worked at Simon & Schuster, and I was sure there was a direct career path for me. If I just worked hard enough, I could get the corner office one day. And that is not what happened. I was laid off from a job and then couldn’t get back in.

After that, I was pursuing jobs that put me near books in some way. That includes working at Barnes & Noble Corporate, and also at Kickstarter, and trying to look at the publishing industry from a different angle. By the time I started critiquing the industry—much like when I started critiquing the systems in which I lived—it was because I had enough experience that I was able to see a bigger picture.

What advice would you have for people wanting to get into the publishing industry today?

Run! The advice that I wish I’d had in my 20s is: don’t let the job define you. Don’t let the employer define you. People are switching up jobs all the time in media, and things will be a little unstable all the time. What you have as a transferable skill is who you are—which I hate in the sense that it means that you’ve got to be your own brand because I find that crass, too. But I also kind of do believe it.

Your book is published through Ecco, which is an imprint of HarperCollins, where employees went on strike a few years ago, eventually securing a new contract. Did you feel any trepidation, or receive any pushback from your editors or higher-ups in the company?

I was terrified that that would be the case. But what happened was I sold the book on proposal with one sample chapter, and that sample chapter was about participating in the HarperCollins strike. I wanted to make it clear that no one was going to get off easy. It turns out that in the book that I finished, there is some criticism of HarperCollins. They’re owned by News Corp. They publish people who are pro book bans, which seems, I don’t know, not great for business! When the legal review happened, I had zero notes. I thought, “Okay, at least they’re being cool about this. There are so many other things I could nitpick about, but I’m glad that they allowed me to critique them a little bit.”

You’ve freelanced or been contracted as an editor at different books publications and verticals; I remember pitching you when you were editing for Vulture a few years ago. Is that an arrangement you’re happy with, or would you prefer to be full-time and there just aren’t many permanent positions out there?

I would like to [be working full-time]. My husband and I have figured out recently that we have another year or so of health insurance coverage under his union benefits. The moment that we don’t, I’ll be ready to find a full-time job. I’m diabetic, and I grew up [never thinking about] trying to be an artist or just a writer because I always knew I would have to have a full-time job that had the benefits that I needed.

There is an essay in the book about health insurance as a freelancer. Could you talk bit more about that?

When I married my husband, for the first time I was able to consider what it would be like if I wanted to try freelancing full-time because I could get on his health insurance. It was more difficult for me than I had realized, turning over that care of myself to him.

I was taught from the moment I was a little girl that I could do everything myself. I don’t need to depend on other people when I can take care of my health and my finances. So much of the book is coming to terms with the fact that it’s actually okay to accept help. It’s good to offer it, and it’s good to accept it. And those two things go hand in hand.

Why did you start, and eventually end, the Maris Review podcast?

I started it back in the day, when Twitter could still get you jobs. I tweeted about how my dream job would be to have a podcast where I interview authors, and Jonny Diamond from Lit Hub saw that and said, “Hey, want to do a podcast?” And I said, “Yes, please.” And it was the best, for four and a half years.

To be perfectly honest, the listenership wasn’t big enough to justify the expense that Lit Hub was paying to produce the show. I was told that I should either cut back to two episodes a month, or write instead. So I thought, “Well, after four and a half years of podcasting, maybe I could try writing a little bit more.” And I’ve been enjoying that, too.

I’m never going to get to the end of my podcast list or my book list. How do you decide what to read? Do you feel obligated to read everything you’re sent, or are you picking out what you want and giving the rest away or whatever? And also, let’s talk about schedule. How many hours a day do you read? How many books a week, a month, a year do you read?

My goal for right now is to read one book and listen to one book a week. I’ve found that is pretty manageable, given that my afternoons are very much devoted to reading. We adopted a new dog three months ago so any time I take her out for a long walk, I listen to an audiobook. Penguin Random House has its own audio app that reviewers can access audio galleys through. That has really changed the way that I consume books.

It gets really complicated and tricky in terms of choosing the next book to read because there are so many different things I’m weighing. Because I have been writing about books for so long, I’m familiar with lots of the authors whose new books are coming in. I always feel like I want to be caught up on any author whose other books I’ve enjoyed.

Do you ever feel guilty that you can’t feasibly get to all of them?

All the time. I have a stack of galleys in one location that’s for things that haven’t come out yet this year. And then I have a stack of galleys for the things that have come out this year that I haven’t read yet. Every couple of weeks, I have to look at the stack of galleys that I haven’t read yet and just kind of be like, “Well, you can’t allow these galleys to take over your entire apartment. Therefore, you have to make some tough decisions.” I put them out on the street, and my neighbors are very appreciative. It does feel a little bit like giving up each time, even though there are literally hundreds of them and absolutely no way that I could, as one person, get to them. I try to read the first 15 pages, and if it isn’t grabbing me, I put it down. But I feel guilty about that too.

Maris Kreizman recommends:

Great Black Hope by Rob Franklin

The new Pulp album, More

Dying for Sex on Hulu

Searches: Selfhood in the Digital Age by Vauhini Vara

Critical Thinking, a newsletter by Lindsey Adler


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Scarlett Harris.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/21/writer-maris-kreizman-on-offering-and-asking-for-help/feed/ 0 545360
Trump and the energy industry are eager to power AI with fossil fuels https://grist.org/energy/trump-and-the-energy-industry-are-eager-to-power-ai-with-fossil-fuels/ https://grist.org/energy/trump-and-the-energy-industry-are-eager-to-power-ai-with-fossil-fuels/#respond Sun, 20 Jul 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670492 AI is “not my thing,” President Donald Trump admitted during a speech in Pittsburgh on Tuesday. However, the president said during his remarks at the Energy and Innovation Summit, his advisers had told him just how important energy was to the future of AI.

“You need double the electric of what we have right now, and maybe even more than that,” Trump said, recalling a conversation with “David”—most likely White House AI czar David Sacks, a panelist at the summit. “I said, what, are you kidding? That’s double the electric that we have. Take everything we have and double it.”

At the high-profile summit on Tuesday—where, in addition to Sacks, panelists and attendees included Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei, Google president and chief investment officer Ruth Porat, and ExxonMobil CEO Darren Woods—companies announced $92 billion in investments across various energy and AI-related ventures. These are just the latest in recent breakneck rollouts in investment around AI and energy infrastructure. A day before the Pittsburgh meeting, Mark Zuckerberg shared on Threads that Meta would be building “titan clusters” of data centers to supercharge its AI efforts. The one closest to coming online, dubbed Prometheus, is located in Ohio and will be powered by onsite gas generation, SemiAnalysis reported last week.

For an administration committed to advancing the future of fossil fuels, the location of the event was significant. Pennsylvania sits on the Marcellus and Utica shale formations, which supercharged Pennsylvania’s fracking boom in the late 2000s and early 2010s. The state is still the country’s second-most prolific natural gas producer. Pennsylvania-based natural gas had a big role at the summit: The CEO of Pittsburgh-based natural gas company EQT, Toby Rice—who dubs himself the “people’s champion of natural gas”—moderated one of the panels and sat onstage with the president during his speech.

All this new demand from AI is welcome news for the natural gas industry in the US, the world’s top producer and exporter of liquefied natural gas. Global gas markets have been facing a mounting supply glut for years. Following a warm winter last year, Morgan Stanley predicted gas supply could reach “multi-decade highs” over the next few years. A jolt of new demand—like the demand represented by massive data centers—could revitalize the industry and help drive prices back up.

Natural gas from Pennsylvania and the Appalachian region, in particular, has faced market challenges both from ultra-cheap natural gas from the Permian Basin in Texas and New Mexico as well as a lack of infrastructure to carry supply out of the region. These economic headwinds are “why the industry is doing their best to sort of create this drumbeat or this narrative around the need for AI data centers,” says Clark Williams-Derry, an energy finance analyst at the Institute for Energy Economics and Financial Analysis. It appears to be working. Pipeline companies are already pitching new projects to truck gas from the northeast—responding, they say, to data center demand.

The industry is finding a willing partner in the Trump administration. Since taking office, Trump has used AI as a lever to open up opportunities for fossil fuels, including a well-publicized effort to resuscitate coal in the name of more computing power. The summit, which was organized by Republican senator (and former hedge fund CEO) Dave McCormick, clearly reflected the administration’s priorities in this regard: No representatives from any wind or solar companies were present on any of the public panels.

Tech companies, which have expressed an interest in using any and all cheap power available for AI and have quietly pushed back against some of the administration’s anti-renewables positions, aren’t necessarily on the same page as the Trump administration. Among the announcements made at the summit was a $3 billion investment in hydropower from Google.

This demand isn’t necessarily driven by a big concern for the climate—many tech giants have walked back their climate commitments in recent years as their focus on AI has sharpened—but rather pure economics. Financial analyst Lazard said last month that installing utility-scale solar panels and batteries is still cheaper than building out natural gas plants, even without tax incentives. Gas infrastructure is also facing a global shortage that makes the timescales for setting up power generation vastly different.

“The waiting list for a new turbine is five years,” Williams-Derry says. “If you want a new solar plant, you call China, you say, ‘I want more solar.’”

Given the ideological split at the summit, things occasionally got a little awkward. On one panel, Secretary of Energy Chris Wright, who headed up a fracking company before coming to the federal government, talked at length about how the Obama and Biden administrations were on an “energy crazy train,” scoffing at those administrations’ support for wind and solar. Speaking directly after Wright, BlackRock CEO Larry Fink admitted that solar would likely support dispatchable gas in powering AI. Incredibly, fellow panel member Woods, the ExxonMobil CEO, later paid some of the only lip service to the idea of drawing down emissions heard during the entire event. (Woods was touting the oil giant’s carbon capture and storage business.)

Still, the hype train, for the most part, moved smoothly, with everyone agreeing on one thing: We’re going to need a lot of power, and soon. Blackstone CEO Jonathan Gray said that AI could help drive “40 or 50 percent more power usage over the next decade,” while Porat, of Google, mentioned some economists’ projections that AI could add $4 trillion to the US economy by 2030.

It’s easy to find any variety of headlines or reports—often based on projections produced by private companies—projecting massive growth numbers for AI. “I view all of these projections with great skepticism,” says Jonathan Koomey, a computing researcher and consultant who has contributed to research around AI and power. “I don’t think anyone has any idea, even a few years hence, how much electricity data centers are gonna use.”

In February, Koomey coauthored a report for the Bipartisan Policy Center cautioning that improvements in AI efficiency and other developments in the technology make data center power load hard to predict. But there’s “a bunch of self-interested actors,” Koomey says, involved in the hype cycle around AI and power, including energy executives, utilities, consultants and AI companies.

Koomey remembers the last time there was a hype bubble around electricity, fossil fuels, and technology. In the late 1990s, a variety of sources, including investment banks, trade publications, and experts testifying in front of Congress began to spread hype around the growth of the internet, claiming that the internet could soon consume as much as half of US electricity. More coal-fired power, many of these sources argued, would be needed to support this massive expansion. (“Dig More Coal—The PCs Are Coming” was the headline of a 1999 Forbes article that Koomey cites as being particularly influential to shaping the hype.) The prediction never came to pass, as efficiency gains in tech helped drive down the internet’s energy needs; the initial projections were also based, Koomey says, on a variety of faulty calculations.

Koomey says that he sees parallels between the late 1990s and the current craze around AI and energy. “People just need to understand the history and not fall for these self-interested narratives,” he says. There’s some signs that the AI-energy bubble may not be inflating as much as Big Tech thinks: in March, Microsoft quietly backed out of 2GW of data center leases, citing a decision to not support some training workloads from OpenAI.

“It can both be true that there’s growth in electricity use and there’s a whole bunch of people hyping it way beyond what it’s likely to happen,” Koomey says.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Trump and the energy industry are eager to power AI with fossil fuels on Jul 20, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Molly Taft, WIRED.

]]>
https://grist.org/energy/trump-and-the-energy-industry-are-eager-to-power-ai-with-fossil-fuels/feed/ 0 545311
Is the international community finally speaking up about Israel’s Gaza genocide? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/20/is-the-international-community-finally-speaking-up-about-israels-gaza-genocide/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/20/is-the-international-community-finally-speaking-up-about-israels-gaza-genocide/#respond Sun, 20 Jul 2025 12:28:12 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117558 Al Jazeera

International public opinion continues to turn against Israel for its war on Gaza, with more governments slowly beginning to reflect those voices and increase their own condemnation of the country.

In the last few weeks, Israeli government ministers have been sanctioned by several Western countries, with the United Kingdom, France and Canada issuing a joint statement condemning the “intolerable” level of “human suffering” in Gaza.

Last week, a number of countries from the Global South — “The Hague Group” — collectively agreed on a number of measures that they say will “restrain Israel’s assault on the Occupied Palestinian Territories”.

Across the world, and in increasing numbers, the public, politicians and, following an Israeli strike on a Catholic church in Gaza, religious leaders are speaking out against Israel’s killings in Gaza.

So, are world powers getting any closer to putting enough pressure on Israel for it to stop?

Here is what we know.

What is the Hague Group?
According to its website, the Hague Group is a global bloc of states committed to “coordinated legal and diplomatic measures” in defence of international law and solidarity with the people of Palestine.

Made up of eight nations; South Africa, Bolivia, Colombia, Cuba, Honduras, Malaysia, Namibia and Senegal, the group has set itself the mission of upholding international law, and safeguarding the principles set out in the Charter of the United Nations, principally “the responsibility of all nations to uphold the inalienable rights, including the right to self-determination, that it enshrines for all peoples”.

Last week, the Hague Group hosted a meeting of about 30 nations, including China, Spain and Qatar, in the Colombian capital of Bogota. Australia and New Zealand failed to attend in spite of invitations.

Also attending the meeting was UN Special Rapporteur Francesca Albanese, who characterised the meeting as “the most significant political development in the past 20 months”.

Albanese was recently sanctioned by the United States for her criticism of its ally, Israel.

At the end of the two-day meeting, 12 of the countries in attendance agreed to six measures to limit Israel’s actions in Gaza. Included in those measures were blocks on supplying arms to Israel, a ban on ships transporting weapons and a review of public contracts for any possible links to companies benefiting from Israel’s occupation of Palestine.

Have any other governments taken action?
More and more.

Last Wednesday, Slovenia barred far-right National Security Minister Itamar Ben-Gvir and ultranationalist Finance Minister Bezalel Smotrich from entering its territory after the wider European Union failed to agree on measures to address charges of widespread human rights abuses against Israel.

Slovenia’s ban on the two government ministers builds upon earlier sanctions imposed upon Smotrich and Ben-Gvir in June by Australia, Canada, New Zealand, UK and Norway over their “incitement to violence”.

The two men have been among the most vocal Israeli ministers in rejecting any compromise in negotiations with Palestinians, and pushing for the Jewish settlement of Gaza, as well as the increased building of illegal settlements in the occupied West Bank.

In May, the UK, France, and Canada issued a joint statement describing Israel’s escalation of its campaign against Gaza as “wholly disproportionate” and promising “concrete actions” against Israel if it did not halt its offensive.

Later that month, the UK followed through on its warning, announcing sanctions on a handful of settler organisations and announcing a “pause” in free trade negotiations with Israel.

Also in May, Turkiye announced that it would block all trade with Israel until the humanitarian situation in Gaza was resolved.

South Africa first launched a case for genocide against Israel at the International Court of Justice in late December 2023, and has since been supported by other countries, including Colombia, Chile, Spain, Ireland, and Turkiye.

In January of 2024, the ICJ issued its provisional ruling, finding what it termed a “plausible” case for genocide and instructing Israel to undertake emergency measures, including the provision of the aid that its government has effectively blocked since March of this year.

What other criticism of Israel has there been?
Israel’s bombing on Thursday of the Holy Family Church in Gaza City, killing three people, drew a rare rebuke from Israel’s most stalwart ally, the United States.

Following what was reported to be an “angry” phone call from US President Trump after the bombing, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu’s office issued a statement expressing its “deep regret” over the attack. The International Criminal Court issued arrest warrants against Netanyahu and former Defence Minister Yoav Gallant for alleged war crimes and crimes against humanity.

To date, Israel has killed more than 62,000 people in Gaza, the majority women and children.

Has the tide turned internationally?
Mass public protests against Israel’s war on Gaza have continued around the world for the past 21 months.

And there are clear signs of growing anger over the brutality of the war and the toll it is taking on Palestinians in Gaza.

In Western Europe, a survey carried out by the polling company YouGov in June found that net favourability towards Israel had reached its lowest ebb since tracking began.

A similar poll produced by CNN last week found similar results among the American public, with only 23 percent of respondents agreeing Israel’s actions in Gaza were fully justified, down from 50 percent in October 2023.

Public anger has also found voice at high-profile public events, including music festivals such as Germany’s Fusion Festival, Poland’s Open’er Festival and the UK’s Glastonbury festival, where both artists and their supporters used their platforms to denounce the war on Gaza.

Has anything changed in Israel?
Protests against the war remain small but are growing, with organisations, such as Standing Together, bringing together Israeli and Palestinian activists to protest against the war.

There has also been a growing number of reservists refusing to show up for duty. In April, the Israeli magazine +972 reported that more than 100,000 reservists had refused to show up for duty, with open letters from within the military protesting against the war growing in number since.

Will it make any difference?
Netanyahu’s hard-right coalition has been pursuing its war on Gaza despite its domestic and international unpopularity for some time.

The government’s most recent proposal, that all of Gaza’s population be confined into what it calls a “humanitarian city”, has been likened to a concentration camp and has been taken by many of its critics as evidence that it no longer cares about either international law or global opinion.

Internationally, despite its recent criticism of Israel for its bombing of Gaza’s one Catholic church, US support for Israel remains resolute. For many in Israel, the continued support of the US, and President Donald Trump in particular, remains the one diplomatic absolute they can rely upon to weather whatever diplomatic storms their actions in Gaza may provoke.

In addition to that support, which includes diplomatic guarantees through the use of the US veto in the UN Security Council and military support via its extensive arsenal, is the US use of sanctions against Israel’s critics, such as the International Criminal Court, whose members were sanctioned by the US in June over the arrest warrants for Netanyahu and Gallant on war crimes charges.

That means, in the short term, Israel ultimately feels protected as long as it has US support. But as it becomes more of an international pariah, economic and diplomatic isolation may become more difficult to handle.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/20/is-the-international-community-finally-speaking-up-about-israels-gaza-genocide/feed/ 0 545313
Propaganda Siren: Silencing the Voice of America https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/20/propaganda-siren-silencing-the-voice-of-america/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/20/propaganda-siren-silencing-the-voice-of-america/#respond Sun, 20 Jul 2025 05:11:53 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160079 In March this year, the Trump administration effectively shuttered the Voice of America, a broadcasting vehicle for the selective promotion of US policy and culture for over eight decades. Nearly all of its 1,300 staff of producers, journalists and assistants, including those working at the US Agency for Global Media, were placed on administrative leave. […]

The post Propaganda Siren: Silencing the Voice of America first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
In March this year, the Trump administration effectively shuttered the Voice of America, a broadcasting vehicle for the selective promotion of US policy and culture for over eight decades. Nearly all of its 1,300 staff of producers, journalists and assistants, including those working at the US Agency for Global Media, were placed on administrative leave. Kari Lake, President Donald Trump’s appointment to lead the Voice, was unflattering about that “giant rot and burden to the American taxpayer.” Last month, Lake confirmed that layoff notices had been sent to 639 employees.

The motivations for attacking VOA were hardly budgetary. The White House cited a number of sources to back the claim that the organisation had become an outlet of “radical propaganda.” VOA veteran Dan Robinson features, calling it “a hubris-filled rogue operation often reflecting leftist bias aligned with partisan national media.” The Daily Caller moaningly remarks that VOA reporters had “repeatedly posted anti-Trump comments on their professional Twitter accounts, despite a social media policy requiring employee impartiality on social media platforms.” The Voice, not aligned with MAGA, had to be silenced.

The measure by Trump drew its inevitable disapproval. VOA director, Michael Abramowitz, stuck to the customary line that his organisation “promotes freedom and democracy around the world by telling America’s story and by providing objective and balanced news and information, especially for those living under tyranny.” Reporters Without Borders condemned the order “as a departure from the US’s historic role as a defender of free information and calls on the US government to restore VOA and urges Congress and the international community to take action against his unprecedented move.”

As with much criticism of Trump’s seemingly impulsive actions, these sentimental views proved misguided and disingenuous. Trump is on uncontentious ground to see the Voice as one dedicated to propaganda. However, he misunderstands most nuttily that the propaganda in question overwhelmingly favours US policies and programs. His quibble is that they are not favourable enough.

Prohibited from broadcasting in the United States, VOA’s propaganda role was always a full-fledged one, promoting the US as a spanking, virtuous brand of democratic good living in the face of garden variety tyrants, usually of the political left. Blemishes were left unmentioned, the role of the US imperium in intervening in the affairs of other countries considered cautiously. Loath to adequately fund domestic public service providers like National Public Radio (NPR), the US Congress was content to fork out for what was effectively an information arm of government sloganeering for Freedom’s Land.

The VOA Charter, drafted in 1960 and signed into law as Public Law 94-350 by President Gerald Ford on July 12, 1976, expressed the view that “The long-range interests of the United States are served by communicating directly with the peoples of the world by radio. To be effective, the Voice of America must win the attention and respect of listeners.” It stipulated various aspirational and at times unattainable aims: be reliable on the news, have authoritative standing, pursue accuracy, objectivity and be comprehensive. America was to be represented in whole and not as any single segment of society, with the VOA representing “a balanced and comprehensive projection of significant American thought and institutions.” US policies would be presented “clearly and effectively” as would “responsible discussions and opinion on these policies.”

The aims of the charter were always subordinate to the original purpose of the radio outlet. The Voice was born in the propaganda maelstrom of World War II, keen to win over audiences in Nazi Germany and its occupied territories. Authorised to continue operating by the Smith-Mundt Act of 1946, it continued its work during the Cold War, its primary task that of fending off any appeal communism might have. Till October 1948, program content was governed under contract with the NBC and CBS radio networks. This troubled some members of Congress, notably regarding broadcasts to Latin America. The US State Department then assumed control, authority of which passed on to the newly created United States Information Agency (USIA).

In such arrangements, the objective of fair dissemination of information was always subject to the dictates of US foreign policy. What mattered most, according to R. Peter Straus, who assumed the directorship of VOA in 1977, was to gather “a highly professional group of people and trying to excite them about making the freest democracy in the world understandable to the rest of the world – not necessarily loved by, nor even necessarily liked by but understood by the rest of the world.” The State Department left an enduring legacy in that regard, with the amalgamation of its Bureau of Educational and Cultural Affairs with the USIA in 1978 during the Carter administration. Furthermore, prominent positions at the Voice tended to be filled by career members of the diplomatic corps.

Given that role, it was rather rich to have the likes of Republican Congresswoman Young Kim of California question Trump’s executive order, worried that closing the Voice would effectively silence a body dedicated to the selfless distribution of accurate information. Accuracy in that sense, alloyed by US interests, would always walk to the dictates of power. Kim errs in assuming that reporting via such outlets, emanating from a “free” society, must therefore be more truthful than authoritarian rivals. “For a long time now, our reporting has not been blocked by adversaries like China, Russia, Iran and North Korea,” she claimed in March. “Now, we are ourselves shutting off the ability to get the information into those oppressed regimes to the people that are dying for the real truth and information.” As such truth and information is curated by an adjunct of the State Department, such people would be advised to be a tad sceptical.

The falling out of favour with Trump, not just of the Voice, but such anti-communist creations of the Cold War like Radio Free Europe, Radio Liberty and Radio Free Asia, is a loss for the propagandists. Arguments that stress the value of their continued existence as organs of veracity in news and accuracy, correctives to the disinformation and misinformation of adversaries, are deludedly slanted. All forms of disinformation and misinformation should be battled and neither the Voice’s critics, nor its fans, seem to understand what they are. VOA and its sister stations could never be relied upon to subject US foreign and domestic policy to rigorous critique. Empires are not in the business of truth but power and effect. Radio stations created in their name must always be viewed with that in mind.

The post Propaganda Siren: Silencing the Voice of America first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/20/propaganda-siren-silencing-the-voice-of-america/feed/ 0 545291
Can the Hague Group make a concrete impact? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/can-the-hague-group-make-a-concrete-impact/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/can-the-hague-group-make-a-concrete-impact/#respond Sat, 19 Jul 2025 21:59:41 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=efb3e7e414e84b47af979c401ef7fba0
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/can-the-hague-group-make-a-concrete-impact/feed/ 0 545266
“ICE out of Dena!”: CA community FIGHTS BACK against #ICE terror https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/ca-community-fights-back-against-ice-terror-ice-out-of-dena/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/ca-community-fights-back-against-ice-terror-ice-out-of-dena/#respond Sat, 19 Jul 2025 20:47:40 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=3f7fa8461985373da5ab743df7d68ef6
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/ca-community-fights-back-against-ice-terror-ice-out-of-dena/feed/ 0 545258
BBC isn’t Failing. Its Job is to Obscure the UK’s Partnership in Israel’s Genocide https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/bbc-isnt-failing-its-job-is-to-obscure-the-uks-partnership-in-israels-genocide/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/bbc-isnt-failing-its-job-is-to-obscure-the-uks-partnership-in-israels-genocide/#respond Sat, 19 Jul 2025 14:50:14 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160015 After months of a confected furore over a BBC documentary supposedly demonstrating pro-Hamas bias, followed by the shelving of a second film on Gaza, an independent review found last week that the broadcaster had not breached impartiality guidelines. A long list of complaints against Gaza: How to Survive a Warzone – all pushed for months […]

The post BBC isn’t Failing. Its Job is to Obscure the UK’s Partnership in Israel’s Genocide first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

After months of a confected furore over a BBC documentary supposedly demonstrating pro-Hamas bias, followed by the shelving of a second film on Gaza, an independent review found last week that the broadcaster had not breached impartiality guidelines.

A long list of complaints against Gaza: How to Survive a Warzone – all pushed for months by the Israel lobby, and amplified by the British establishment media – were dismissed one after the other by Peter Johnston, director of the editorial complaints and review body that reports to the BBC director general.

Not that you would know any of this from the eagerness of BBC executives to continue apologising profusely for the failings the corporation had just been cleared of. It almost sounded as if they wanted to be found guilty.

The row is now set to drag on for many months more after Ofcom, the UK’s communications regulator, announced it too would investigate the programme.

All of this is exactly what the Israel lobby and the billionaire-owned media had hoped for.

The aim of manufacturing this protracted storm in a teacup was twofold.

First, the furore was designed to distract from what the documentary actually showed: the horrors facing children in Gaza as they have had to navigate a tiny strip of land in which Israel has trapped them, bombed their homes, levelled their schools, exposed them to relentless carnage for 21 months, destroyed the hospitals they will need in time of trouble, and is starving them and their loved ones.

Second, it was intended to browbeat the BBC into adopting an even more craven posture towards Israel than it had already. If it was reluctant before to give Palestinians a voice, now it will avoid doing so at all costs.

True to form, executives hurriedly removed How to Survive a Warzone from its iPlayer catch-up service the moment the lobby went into action.

Dangerous consequences

The BBC’s ever greater spinelessness has real-world, and dangerous, consequences.

Israel will feel even freer to intensify what the International Court of Justice already suspected back in January 2024 was a genocide and what leading genocide and Holocaust scholars have subsequently concluded is a genocide.

There will be even less pressure on the British government to stop partnering Israel in its genocide by supplying weapons, intelligence and diplomatic cover.

The enduring row will also hand a bigger stick to Rupert Murdoch and other media moguls with which to beat the BBC, making it cower even further.

Signs of the BBC’s defensiveness were already all too evident. While it was waiting for the Johnston report, the corporation ditched a separate documentary, Gaza: Doctors Under Attack, on Israel’s systematic destruction of Gaza’s hospitals and murder of some 1,600 health workers.

It has since been shown by Channel 4.

The BBC argued that – even though this second programme had repeatedly passed its editorial checks – airing it risked contributing to a “perception of partiality”.

What that bit of BBC gobbledygook actually meant was that the problem was not “partiality”. It was the perception of it by vested interests – Israel, its apologists, the Starmer government and the British corporate media – who demand skewed BBC coverage of Gaza so that Israel can carry on with a genocide the British establishment is utterly complicit in.

In other words, truth and accuracy be damned. This is about Israel – and the Starmer government – dictating to the BBC the terms of what can be said about Israel’s treatment of Palestinians.

Caving in to pressure

Which brings us back to the Johnston report. The only significant finding against the BBC was on a single issue in its documentary on Gaza’s children, How to Survive a Warzone.

The film had not disclosed that its 13-year narrator was the son of an official in Gaza’s Hamas-run government.

Even in the current febrile atmosphere, Johnston found no grounds to uphold the manifold accusations of a breach by the BBC of impartiality rules. Nothing in the film, he concluded, was unfair to Israel.

Instead, he stated that it was a breach of “full transparency” not to have divulged the child-narrator’s tenuous connection to Hamas through his father’s governmental work.

Paradoxically, the BBC’s coverage of Johnston’s findings has been far more inaccurate about the child-narrator than the original documentary. But there has been no uproar because this particular inaccuracy from the BBC squarely benefits Israel.

On the News at Ten last week, reporting on the Johnston report, presenter Reeta Chakrabati claimed that the film’s narrator was “the son of an official in the militant group Hamas.”

He is nothing of the sort. He is the son of a scientist who directed agricultural policy in Gaza’s government, which is run by Hamas.

There is zero evidence that Ayman Alyazouri was ever a member of the militant wing of Hamas. He doesn’t even appear to have been a member of its political wing.

In fact, since 2018 Israel had set up a system to vet most officials in Gaza like Alyazouri to ensure they were not linked to Hamas before they were able to receive salaries funded by Qatar.

Johnston himself concedes as much, noting that the programme makers failed to inform the BBC of 13-year-old Abdullah’s background because their checks showed Alyazouri was a civilian technocrat in the government, not involved in its military or political arms.

The team’s only failing was an astounding ignorance of how the Israel lobby operates and how ready the BBC is to cave in to its pressure tactics.

In reality, Johnston’s finding against the BBC was over little more than an editorial technicality, one intentionally blown up into a major scandal.

Johnston himself gave the game away when he noted in his executive summary the need for “full transparency” when the BBC makes programmes “in such a contested setting”.

In other words, special, much stricter editorial rules apply when the corporation intends to make programmes likely to upset Israel.

From now on, that will mean that, in practice, such programmes are not made at all.

Glaring double standard

The double standard is glaring. The BBC aired a documentary last year, Surviving October 7: We Will Dance Again, offering eyewitness testimony from Israeli survivors of 7 October 2023 at the Nova music festival, where hundreds of Israelis were killed during Hamas’ one-day break-out from Gaza.

Did the BBC insist that the backgrounds of the Israelis interviewed were checked and disclosed to the audience as part of the broadcast? Were viewers told whether festivalgoers had served in the Israeli military, which for decades has been enforcing an illegal occupation and a system of apartheid over Palestinians, according to a ruling last year by the world’s highest court?

And what would it have indicated to audiences had the BBC included such contextual information about its Israeli eyewitnesses? That their testimonies had less validity? That they could not be trusted?

If it was not necessary to include such background details for Israeli eyewitnesses, why is it more important to do so for a 13-year-old Palestinian?

And even more to the point, if the BBC needs to give details of 13-year-old Abdullah Alyazouri’s background before he can be allowed to read a script written by the programme makers, why is the BBC not also required to give important background about Israeli prime minister Benjamin Netanyahu when he appears in reports: such as that he is wanted for arrest by the International Criminal Court for crimes against humanity.

Exactly how trustworthy a narrator of events in the devastated enclave does the BBC consider Netanyahu to be that it does not think this context needs including?

Both-sidesing genocide

The gain from this manufactured row for the Israel lobby – and for a Starmer government desperate to silence criticism of its complicity in genocide – were set out in stark detail last week by the makers of the second documentary, about Israel’s destruction of Gaza’s health sector.

In an article in the Observer newspaper, they recounted a series of startling admissions and demands from BBC executives made in script meetings.

The corporation insisted that Doctors Under Attack could not be aired so long as the award-winning investigative reporter leading the programme, Ramita Navai, was given top billing. They demanded that she be downgraded to a mere “contributor” – her role effectively disappeared – because she had supposedly made “one-sided” social media posts criticising Israel for breaking international law.

She was considered unacceptable, according to the BBC, because she had not been “supportive enough of the other side”: that is, of Israel and its military carrying out systematic war crimes by destroying Gaza’s hospitals, as documented in great detail in her film.

In a statement to Middle East Eye on its decision to shelve the documentary, the BBC spokesperson stated that, after Navai appeared on its Today radio programme and “called Israel a ‘rogue state that’s committing war crimes and ethnic cleansing and mass murdering Palestinians’, it was impossible for the BBC to broadcast the material without risking our impartiality.

“The BBC holds itself to the highest standards of impartiality and it would never be acceptable for any BBC journalist to express a personal opinion in this way. We believe this is one of the reasons we’re the world’s most trusted news provider. We were left with no choice but to walk away.”

Seen another way, offering apologias for genocide, as the BBC has been doing for the past 21 months, is apparently a requirement before the corporation is willing to give journalists a platform to criticise Israel.

Also revealing is who the state broadcaster looks to when deciding how to apply its editorial standards.

BBC executives told the film-makers they should not reference the United Nations or Amnesty International because they were supposedly not “trusted independent organisations”.

Meanwhile, the corporation openly and obsessively worried to the film-makers about what fanatically pro-Israel lobbyists – such as social media activist David Collier and Camera, a pro-Israel media monitoring organisation – would say about their film on Gaza.

The team were told BBC News executives were “very jumpy and paranoid” about coverage of Gaza.

This follows a long and dishonorable tradition at the state broadcaster. In their 2011 book More Bad News from Israel, media scholars Greg Philo and Mike Berry reported a BBC producer telling them: “We all fear the phone call from the Israeli embassy.”

If you had been wondering why the BBC has been reflexively both-sidesing a genocide, here is a large part of the answer.

Skewed coverage

A damning report by the Centre for Media Monitoring last month analysed in detail the BBC’s Gaza coverage in the year following Hamas’ one-day attack on 7 October 2023.

It found a “pattern of bias, double standards and silencing of Palestinian voices”.

These included the BBC running over 30 times more victim profiles of Israelis than Palestinians; interviewing more than twice as many Israelis as Palestinians; asking 38 interviewees to condemn Hamas but asking no one to condemn Israel’s mass killing of civilians, or its attacks on hospitals and schools; and shutting down more than 100 interviewers who tried to refer to events in Gaza as a genocide.

Only 0.5% of BBC articles provided any context for what was happening before 7 October 2023: that Israel had been illegally occupying the Palestinian territories for decades and besieging the enclave for 17 years.

Similarly, the BBC has barely reported the endless stream of genocidal statements from Israeli political and military leaders – a crucial ingredient in legally determining whether military actions constitute genocide.

Nor has it mentioned other vital context: such as Israel’s invocation of the Hannibal directive on 7 October 2023, licensing it to kill its own citizens to prevent them being taken captive; or its military’s long-established Dahiya doctrine, in which the mass destruction of civilian infrastructure – and with it, the likelihood of slaughtering civilians – is viewed as an effective way to deter resistance to its aggressions.

In the specified time period, the BBC covered Ukraine with twice as many articles as Gaza, even though the Gaza story was newer and Israeli crimes even graver than Russian ones. The corporation was twice as likely to use sympathetic language for Ukrainian victims than it was for Palestinian victims.

Palestinians were usually described as having “died” or been “killed” in air strikes, without mention of who launched those strikes. Israeli victims, on the other hand, were “massacred”, “slaughtered” and “butchered”.

None of these were editorial slip-ups. They were part of a systematic, long-term skewing of editorial coverage in Israel’s favour – a clear breach of the BBC’s impartiality guidelines and one that has created a permissive environment for genocide.

Journalists in revolt

Journalists at the BBC are known to be in revolt. More than 100 signed a letter – anonymously for fear of reprisals – condemning the decision to censor the documentary Doctors under Attack. They said it reflected a mix of “fear” and “anti-Palestinian racism” at the corporation.

The BBC told MEE: “Robust discussions amongst our editorial teams about our journalism are an essential part of the editorial process. We have ongoing discussions about coverage and listen to feedback from staff, and we think these conversations are best had internally.”

The journalists, it seems, would prefer that these discussions are had out in the open. They wrote: “As an organisation we have not offered any significant analysis of the UK government’s involvement in the war on Palestinians. We have failed to report on weapons sales or their legal implications. These stories have instead been broken by the BBC’s competitors.”

And they added: “All too often it has felt that the BBC has been performing PR for the Israeli government and military.”

They could have added, even more pertinently, that in the process the BBC has been doing PR for the British establishment too.

A former BBC press officer, Ben Murray, last week gave broader context to the meaning of the corporation’s famed editorial “impartiality”. His role, he wrote, had been a rearguard one to placate the Times, Telegraph, Sun, and most of all, the Daily Mail.

Those establishment outlets are owned by corporations and billionaires heavily invested in the very oil, “defence” and tech industries Israel is central to lubricating.

BBC executives, Murray noted, “were rightfully fearful of these publications’ influence, and often reacted in ways to appease them. Their task was to protect the BBC’s funding model, and by extension, their prestigious jobs and generous salaries.”

None of this went against the grain. As Murray pointed out, most senior BBC staff enjoyed private educations, have Oxbridge degrees, and have been “fast-tracked up the corporate ladder”. They see their job as being “to reinforce and maintain establishment viewpoints”.

Editorial smokescreen

If this weren’t enough, senior BBC staff also have to look over their shoulders to the British government, which sets the corporation’s funding through the TV licence fee.

The government, no less than the BBC, needs to keep its main constituencies happy.

No, not voters. Ministers, keen for favourable coverage, similarly dare not antagonise Israel-aligned media moguls. And equally they cannot afford to alienate powerful US administrations that pledge an undying, unshakeable bond to Israel as it projects western power into the oil-rich Middle East.

Which is precisely why Lisa Nandy, the culture secretary, was only too keen to jump on the Daily Mail bandwagon in calling for heads to roll at the BBC over the supposed “failings” in its Gaza coverage.

“It makes me angry on behalf of the BBC staff and the whole creative industries in this country,” she said, apparently oblivious to the fact that many BBC journalists’ fury is not over the confected scandals generated by the Israel lobby and billionaire-owned media.

They are appalled at the corporation’s refusal to hold Israel or Nandy’s own government accountable for the genocide in Gaza.

In such circumstances, the BBC’s professed commitment to “impartiality” serves as nothing more than a smokescreen.

In reality, the corporation acts as an echo chamber, amplifying and legitimising the interests of media tycoons, the British government and the Washington consensus, however much they flout the foundational principles of international law, human rights and basic decency.

Anybody who stands outside that circle of influence – such as the Palestinians and their supporters, anti-genocide activists, human rights advocates, and increasingly the UN and its legal organs, such as the International Criminal Court – is assumed by the BBC to be suspect.

Such voices are likely to be marginalised, silenced or vilified.

The BBC has not failed. It has done exactly what it is there to do: help the British government conceal the fact that there is a genocide going on in Gaza, and one that the UK has been knee-deep in assisting.

The post BBC isn’t Failing. Its Job is to Obscure the UK’s Partnership in Israel’s Genocide first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Jonathan Cook.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/bbc-isnt-failing-its-job-is-to-obscure-the-uks-partnership-in-israels-genocide/feed/ 0 545232
BBC isn’t Failing. Its Job is to Obscure the UK’s Partnership in Israel’s Genocide https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/bbc-isnt-failing-its-job-is-to-obscure-the-uks-partnership-in-israels-genocide-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/bbc-isnt-failing-its-job-is-to-obscure-the-uks-partnership-in-israels-genocide-2/#respond Sat, 19 Jul 2025 14:50:14 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=160015 After months of a confected furore over a BBC documentary supposedly demonstrating pro-Hamas bias, followed by the shelving of a second film on Gaza, an independent review found last week that the broadcaster had not breached impartiality guidelines. A long list of complaints against Gaza: How to Survive a Warzone – all pushed for months […]

The post BBC isn’t Failing. Its Job is to Obscure the UK’s Partnership in Israel’s Genocide first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

After months of a confected furore over a BBC documentary supposedly demonstrating pro-Hamas bias, followed by the shelving of a second film on Gaza, an independent review found last week that the broadcaster had not breached impartiality guidelines.

A long list of complaints against Gaza: How to Survive a Warzone – all pushed for months by the Israel lobby, and amplified by the British establishment media – were dismissed one after the other by Peter Johnston, director of the editorial complaints and review body that reports to the BBC director general.

Not that you would know any of this from the eagerness of BBC executives to continue apologising profusely for the failings the corporation had just been cleared of. It almost sounded as if they wanted to be found guilty.

The row is now set to drag on for many months more after Ofcom, the UK’s communications regulator, announced it too would investigate the programme.

All of this is exactly what the Israel lobby and the billionaire-owned media had hoped for.

The aim of manufacturing this protracted storm in a teacup was twofold.

First, the furore was designed to distract from what the documentary actually showed: the horrors facing children in Gaza as they have had to navigate a tiny strip of land in which Israel has trapped them, bombed their homes, levelled their schools, exposed them to relentless carnage for 21 months, destroyed the hospitals they will need in time of trouble, and is starving them and their loved ones.

Second, it was intended to browbeat the BBC into adopting an even more craven posture towards Israel than it had already. If it was reluctant before to give Palestinians a voice, now it will avoid doing so at all costs.

True to form, executives hurriedly removed How to Survive a Warzone from its iPlayer catch-up service the moment the lobby went into action.

Dangerous consequences

The BBC’s ever greater spinelessness has real-world, and dangerous, consequences.

Israel will feel even freer to intensify what the International Court of Justice already suspected back in January 2024 was a genocide and what leading genocide and Holocaust scholars have subsequently concluded is a genocide.

There will be even less pressure on the British government to stop partnering Israel in its genocide by supplying weapons, intelligence and diplomatic cover.

The enduring row will also hand a bigger stick to Rupert Murdoch and other media moguls with which to beat the BBC, making it cower even further.

Signs of the BBC’s defensiveness were already all too evident. While it was waiting for the Johnston report, the corporation ditched a separate documentary, Gaza: Doctors Under Attack, on Israel’s systematic destruction of Gaza’s hospitals and murder of some 1,600 health workers.

It has since been shown by Channel 4.

The BBC argued that – even though this second programme had repeatedly passed its editorial checks – airing it risked contributing to a “perception of partiality”.

What that bit of BBC gobbledygook actually meant was that the problem was not “partiality”. It was the perception of it by vested interests – Israel, its apologists, the Starmer government and the British corporate media – who demand skewed BBC coverage of Gaza so that Israel can carry on with a genocide the British establishment is utterly complicit in.

In other words, truth and accuracy be damned. This is about Israel – and the Starmer government – dictating to the BBC the terms of what can be said about Israel’s treatment of Palestinians.

Caving in to pressure

Which brings us back to the Johnston report. The only significant finding against the BBC was on a single issue in its documentary on Gaza’s children, How to Survive a Warzone.

The film had not disclosed that its 13-year narrator was the son of an official in Gaza’s Hamas-run government.

Even in the current febrile atmosphere, Johnston found no grounds to uphold the manifold accusations of a breach by the BBC of impartiality rules. Nothing in the film, he concluded, was unfair to Israel.

Instead, he stated that it was a breach of “full transparency” not to have divulged the child-narrator’s tenuous connection to Hamas through his father’s governmental work.

Paradoxically, the BBC’s coverage of Johnston’s findings has been far more inaccurate about the child-narrator than the original documentary. But there has been no uproar because this particular inaccuracy from the BBC squarely benefits Israel.

On the News at Ten last week, reporting on the Johnston report, presenter Reeta Chakrabati claimed that the film’s narrator was “the son of an official in the militant group Hamas.”

He is nothing of the sort. He is the son of a scientist who directed agricultural policy in Gaza’s government, which is run by Hamas.

There is zero evidence that Ayman Alyazouri was ever a member of the militant wing of Hamas. He doesn’t even appear to have been a member of its political wing.

In fact, since 2018 Israel had set up a system to vet most officials in Gaza like Alyazouri to ensure they were not linked to Hamas before they were able to receive salaries funded by Qatar.

Johnston himself concedes as much, noting that the programme makers failed to inform the BBC of 13-year-old Abdullah’s background because their checks showed Alyazouri was a civilian technocrat in the government, not involved in its military or political arms.

The team’s only failing was an astounding ignorance of how the Israel lobby operates and how ready the BBC is to cave in to its pressure tactics.

In reality, Johnston’s finding against the BBC was over little more than an editorial technicality, one intentionally blown up into a major scandal.

Johnston himself gave the game away when he noted in his executive summary the need for “full transparency” when the BBC makes programmes “in such a contested setting”.

In other words, special, much stricter editorial rules apply when the corporation intends to make programmes likely to upset Israel.

From now on, that will mean that, in practice, such programmes are not made at all.

Glaring double standard

The double standard is glaring. The BBC aired a documentary last year, Surviving October 7: We Will Dance Again, offering eyewitness testimony from Israeli survivors of 7 October 2023 at the Nova music festival, where hundreds of Israelis were killed during Hamas’ one-day break-out from Gaza.

Did the BBC insist that the backgrounds of the Israelis interviewed were checked and disclosed to the audience as part of the broadcast? Were viewers told whether festivalgoers had served in the Israeli military, which for decades has been enforcing an illegal occupation and a system of apartheid over Palestinians, according to a ruling last year by the world’s highest court?

And what would it have indicated to audiences had the BBC included such contextual information about its Israeli eyewitnesses? That their testimonies had less validity? That they could not be trusted?

If it was not necessary to include such background details for Israeli eyewitnesses, why is it more important to do so for a 13-year-old Palestinian?

And even more to the point, if the BBC needs to give details of 13-year-old Abdullah Alyazouri’s background before he can be allowed to read a script written by the programme makers, why is the BBC not also required to give important background about Israeli prime minister Benjamin Netanyahu when he appears in reports: such as that he is wanted for arrest by the International Criminal Court for crimes against humanity.

Exactly how trustworthy a narrator of events in the devastated enclave does the BBC consider Netanyahu to be that it does not think this context needs including?

Both-sidesing genocide

The gain from this manufactured row for the Israel lobby – and for a Starmer government desperate to silence criticism of its complicity in genocide – were set out in stark detail last week by the makers of the second documentary, about Israel’s destruction of Gaza’s health sector.

In an article in the Observer newspaper, they recounted a series of startling admissions and demands from BBC executives made in script meetings.

The corporation insisted that Doctors Under Attack could not be aired so long as the award-winning investigative reporter leading the programme, Ramita Navai, was given top billing. They demanded that she be downgraded to a mere “contributor” – her role effectively disappeared – because she had supposedly made “one-sided” social media posts criticising Israel for breaking international law.

She was considered unacceptable, according to the BBC, because she had not been “supportive enough of the other side”: that is, of Israel and its military carrying out systematic war crimes by destroying Gaza’s hospitals, as documented in great detail in her film.

In a statement to Middle East Eye on its decision to shelve the documentary, the BBC spokesperson stated that, after Navai appeared on its Today radio programme and “called Israel a ‘rogue state that’s committing war crimes and ethnic cleansing and mass murdering Palestinians’, it was impossible for the BBC to broadcast the material without risking our impartiality.

“The BBC holds itself to the highest standards of impartiality and it would never be acceptable for any BBC journalist to express a personal opinion in this way. We believe this is one of the reasons we’re the world’s most trusted news provider. We were left with no choice but to walk away.”

Seen another way, offering apologias for genocide, as the BBC has been doing for the past 21 months, is apparently a requirement before the corporation is willing to give journalists a platform to criticise Israel.

Also revealing is who the state broadcaster looks to when deciding how to apply its editorial standards.

BBC executives told the film-makers they should not reference the United Nations or Amnesty International because they were supposedly not “trusted independent organisations”.

Meanwhile, the corporation openly and obsessively worried to the film-makers about what fanatically pro-Israel lobbyists – such as social media activist David Collier and Camera, a pro-Israel media monitoring organisation – would say about their film on Gaza.

The team were told BBC News executives were “very jumpy and paranoid” about coverage of Gaza.

This follows a long and dishonorable tradition at the state broadcaster. In their 2011 book More Bad News from Israel, media scholars Greg Philo and Mike Berry reported a BBC producer telling them: “We all fear the phone call from the Israeli embassy.”

If you had been wondering why the BBC has been reflexively both-sidesing a genocide, here is a large part of the answer.

Skewed coverage

A damning report by the Centre for Media Monitoring last month analysed in detail the BBC’s Gaza coverage in the year following Hamas’ one-day attack on 7 October 2023.

It found a “pattern of bias, double standards and silencing of Palestinian voices”.

These included the BBC running over 30 times more victim profiles of Israelis than Palestinians; interviewing more than twice as many Israelis as Palestinians; asking 38 interviewees to condemn Hamas but asking no one to condemn Israel’s mass killing of civilians, or its attacks on hospitals and schools; and shutting down more than 100 interviewers who tried to refer to events in Gaza as a genocide.

Only 0.5% of BBC articles provided any context for what was happening before 7 October 2023: that Israel had been illegally occupying the Palestinian territories for decades and besieging the enclave for 17 years.

Similarly, the BBC has barely reported the endless stream of genocidal statements from Israeli political and military leaders – a crucial ingredient in legally determining whether military actions constitute genocide.

Nor has it mentioned other vital context: such as Israel’s invocation of the Hannibal directive on 7 October 2023, licensing it to kill its own citizens to prevent them being taken captive; or its military’s long-established Dahiya doctrine, in which the mass destruction of civilian infrastructure – and with it, the likelihood of slaughtering civilians – is viewed as an effective way to deter resistance to its aggressions.

In the specified time period, the BBC covered Ukraine with twice as many articles as Gaza, even though the Gaza story was newer and Israeli crimes even graver than Russian ones. The corporation was twice as likely to use sympathetic language for Ukrainian victims than it was for Palestinian victims.

Palestinians were usually described as having “died” or been “killed” in air strikes, without mention of who launched those strikes. Israeli victims, on the other hand, were “massacred”, “slaughtered” and “butchered”.

None of these were editorial slip-ups. They were part of a systematic, long-term skewing of editorial coverage in Israel’s favour – a clear breach of the BBC’s impartiality guidelines and one that has created a permissive environment for genocide.

Journalists in revolt

Journalists at the BBC are known to be in revolt. More than 100 signed a letter – anonymously for fear of reprisals – condemning the decision to censor the documentary Doctors under Attack. They said it reflected a mix of “fear” and “anti-Palestinian racism” at the corporation.

The BBC told MEE: “Robust discussions amongst our editorial teams about our journalism are an essential part of the editorial process. We have ongoing discussions about coverage and listen to feedback from staff, and we think these conversations are best had internally.”

The journalists, it seems, would prefer that these discussions are had out in the open. They wrote: “As an organisation we have not offered any significant analysis of the UK government’s involvement in the war on Palestinians. We have failed to report on weapons sales or their legal implications. These stories have instead been broken by the BBC’s competitors.”

And they added: “All too often it has felt that the BBC has been performing PR for the Israeli government and military.”

They could have added, even more pertinently, that in the process the BBC has been doing PR for the British establishment too.

A former BBC press officer, Ben Murray, last week gave broader context to the meaning of the corporation’s famed editorial “impartiality”. His role, he wrote, had been a rearguard one to placate the Times, Telegraph, Sun, and most of all, the Daily Mail.

Those establishment outlets are owned by corporations and billionaires heavily invested in the very oil, “defence” and tech industries Israel is central to lubricating.

BBC executives, Murray noted, “were rightfully fearful of these publications’ influence, and often reacted in ways to appease them. Their task was to protect the BBC’s funding model, and by extension, their prestigious jobs and generous salaries.”

None of this went against the grain. As Murray pointed out, most senior BBC staff enjoyed private educations, have Oxbridge degrees, and have been “fast-tracked up the corporate ladder”. They see their job as being “to reinforce and maintain establishment viewpoints”.

Editorial smokescreen

If this weren’t enough, senior BBC staff also have to look over their shoulders to the British government, which sets the corporation’s funding through the TV licence fee.

The government, no less than the BBC, needs to keep its main constituencies happy.

No, not voters. Ministers, keen for favourable coverage, similarly dare not antagonise Israel-aligned media moguls. And equally they cannot afford to alienate powerful US administrations that pledge an undying, unshakeable bond to Israel as it projects western power into the oil-rich Middle East.

Which is precisely why Lisa Nandy, the culture secretary, was only too keen to jump on the Daily Mail bandwagon in calling for heads to roll at the BBC over the supposed “failings” in its Gaza coverage.

“It makes me angry on behalf of the BBC staff and the whole creative industries in this country,” she said, apparently oblivious to the fact that many BBC journalists’ fury is not over the confected scandals generated by the Israel lobby and billionaire-owned media.

They are appalled at the corporation’s refusal to hold Israel or Nandy’s own government accountable for the genocide in Gaza.

In such circumstances, the BBC’s professed commitment to “impartiality” serves as nothing more than a smokescreen.

In reality, the corporation acts as an echo chamber, amplifying and legitimising the interests of media tycoons, the British government and the Washington consensus, however much they flout the foundational principles of international law, human rights and basic decency.

Anybody who stands outside that circle of influence – such as the Palestinians and their supporters, anti-genocide activists, human rights advocates, and increasingly the UN and its legal organs, such as the International Criminal Court – is assumed by the BBC to be suspect.

Such voices are likely to be marginalised, silenced or vilified.

The BBC has not failed. It has done exactly what it is there to do: help the British government conceal the fact that there is a genocide going on in Gaza, and one that the UK has been knee-deep in assisting.

The post BBC isn’t Failing. Its Job is to Obscure the UK’s Partnership in Israel’s Genocide first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Jonathan Cook.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/bbc-isnt-failing-its-job-is-to-obscure-the-uks-partnership-in-israels-genocide-2/feed/ 0 545233
‘The Last Class’ is a Glowing But Incomplete Portrait of Robert Reich https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/the-last-class-is-a-glowing-but-incomplete-portrait-of-robert-reich/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/the-last-class-is-a-glowing-but-incomplete-portrait-of-robert-reich/#respond Sat, 19 Jul 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/%E2%80%98the-last-class%E2%80%99-robert-reich-review-20250719/ The Last Class, he’s the subject of a salutary documentary about his retirement from teaching after more than four decades in the college classroom.


This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Michael Atkinson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/the-last-class-is-a-glowing-but-incomplete-portrait-of-robert-reich/feed/ 0 545217
Rick Rubin’s view on the SOURCE and SPIRITUALITY #spirituality #religion https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/rick-rubins-view-on-the-source-and-spirituality-spirituality-religion/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/rick-rubins-view-on-the-source-and-spirituality-spirituality-religion/#respond Sat, 19 Jul 2025 13:01:17 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6f025615e07affb5265750b114cd4d4c
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/rick-rubins-view-on-the-source-and-spirituality-spirituality-religion/feed/ 0 545202
The race to build solar and wind in New York before Trump’s tax credit deadline https://grist.org/energy/the-race-to-build-solar-and-wind-in-new-york-before-trumps-tax-credit-deadline/ https://grist.org/energy/the-race-to-build-solar-and-wind-in-new-york-before-trumps-tax-credit-deadline/#respond Sat, 19 Jul 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670464 As negotiations over President Donald Trump’s “Big Beautiful Bill” came down to the wire in early July, renewable energy developers were holding their breath. Until the eleventh hour, it looked like Congress was ready to make good on Trump’s promise of “terminating” key subsidies for wind and solar virtually overnight.

In the end, the industry breathed a small sigh of relief after the Senate reached a compromise that would, at least in principle, give new projects a slim window to go ahead. Under the final law, wind and solar projects that begin construction by July 4 of next year are eligible for the full federal tax credits. Halfway through that window, a new requirement kicks in: Projects that begin construction after January 1, 2026, can only keep the tax credits if they follow restrictions on the use of Chinese materials.

That could still upend New York’s renewable energy transition.

Federal tax credits have typically covered almost a third of the cost of building a solar or wind farm. That’s made them “critical to financing and ultimately building renewable energy projects,” said Carl Weatherley-White, interim chief financial officer at the development firm Greenbacker, which is currently building New York’s largest solar farm and has several smaller projects in the works. “It’s been a core part of the business for 20 years.”

The bill will also impact New York’s public power authority, NYPA, which this year issued a plan to put up more than three gigawatts’ worth of solar and batteries, and has been counting on federal tax credits to deliver.

Developers now have less than a year to start digging if they want the subsidies. The impending deadline is lighting a fire under the industry — and, developers hope, under New York’s leaders, too.

“Now, the game is in the states,” said Marguerite Wells, executive director of the renewable energy lobbying group Alliance for Clean Energy New York. “I would say there’s many thousands of megawatts’ worth of wind and solar in upstate that would be eligible to fall into that start of construction if we played the cards right.”

For a start, there are 26 permitted but unbuilt wind and solar projects in the state, which in total could unlock about 3,000 megawatts’ worth of energy — enough to power some half a million homes. Only two of the large projects the state has approved in the last four years have even started construction; one of them was completed in late 2024, more than six years after filing its first paperwork. (The most recent permit was issued last week, but most of the permits date back to 2023 or earlier.)

The problem? The state doesn’t make it easy to move quickly. It normally takes years for wind and solar projects just to get permits to begin construction in New York, despite reforms intended to speed up the process. The rest of the approval process can take years, too. More environmental reviews are required even after the main permit is approved. And it’s just as complicated getting approval to connect to the grid.

All told, at least three different sets of regulators have to weigh in before a company can put shovels in the ground. That makes New York far more restrictive than other states in allowing developers to start building.

There are things the state could do to speed things up, like allowing developers to start construction even while they finalize certain details of their projects, but it’s largely in Governor Kathy Hochul’s hands.

Jolting the process forward would require a concerted push across her agencies. Besides permits, building a wind or solar farm in New York requires a contract with the state’s energy research and development arm, NYSERDA, guaranteeing that the developer will get paid for the energy the facility produces. Sometimes it requires the state Department of Environmental Conservation to weigh in on water quality plans, with additional input from the US Army Corps of Engineers. And it requires the state’s grid operator — which acts independently — to assess the impact and cost of connecting the facility to the grid.

Developers need answers from all of those entities before they can break ground, Wells said: “Every last whisper of detail of the project has to be finalized before they generally let you start construction.”

In her eyes, improving coordination between all of New York’s energy regulators is the single biggest thing the state could do to help move construction forward.

It’s not yet clear how committed Hochul is to the effort.

“The Governor has directed the state’s energy agencies to conduct a high-level review of the federal legislation and specific impacts to New Yorkers,” spokesperson Ken Lovett told New York Focus, when asked whether the Hochul administration shared developers’ goal of accelerating construction.

A green field rimmed by trees is filled with rows of black solar panels
Greenbacker’s 20-megawatt “Albany 1” solar project, in Albany County, New York. Courtesy of Greenbacker Renewable Energy Company

Before most developers even had a chance to fully digest the changes coming down from Congress, Trump threw in another gut punch. Last week, he issued an executive order directing the Treasury Department, which enforces tax credit rules, to revisit how it defines a project’s “start of construction.”

That throws even the megabill’s one-year deadline into doubt. Historically, developers have been allowed to qualify for tax credits by proving either that they’ve started physical construction or spent a certain amount of money. Now, Trump has given federal regulators 45 days to revise those definitions.

The specific definitions that the Treasury adopts could prove decisive in some cases. But whatever exact language the administration lands on, the bottom line is that Trump still has significant leeway to kill wind and solar projects if he’s committed to it, said Advait Arun, senior associate for energy finance at the think tank Center for Public Enterprise.

“Simply, I think Trump is trying to use control over the IRS to exercise his judgment about what projects should proceed and what shouldn’t,” he said.

Trump will have even more sway after the end of this calendar year, when additional requirements kick in. Starting in January 2026, developers hoping to claim tax credits will have to abide by restrictions on sourcing from “Foreign Entities of Concern,” including those connected to the Chinese government. The megabill tasks the Treasury with updating those rules, giving Trump another opportunity to crack down on what he’s called the “Green New Scam.”

It all adds up to shaky terrain for renewable developers, even those who stand a chance of getting shovels in the ground within a year.

“The big concern … is that no matter what we do, someone in the Treasury is going to just say no,” said Weatherley-White, of Greenbacker, speaking to New York Focus a few hours before Trump issued his executive order last week. (Reporting earlier this month had already suggested that the construction rules could be in the crosshairs.)

Neither Weatherley-White nor Wells, of ACE NY, responded to follow-up inquiries about the order.

Unless the Trump administration completely upends what counts as the “start of construction,” there’s still a lot New York could do to help more projects get in under the one-year bar.

For example, in many states, wind and solar developers can begin construction on projects that don’t have all of their final approvals, but have the main elements of their design — like the location of roads and buildings — agreed upon, Wells said. But in New York, that initial green light is hard to get. It would make a big difference if the state were to adopt the practice more readily, she said.

New York could also jumpstart the contracting process for wind and solar projects. Close to half of the state’s permitted but unbuilt projects had contracts that were canceled after post-pandemic inflation upended their finances. Over the last year, the state has announced new contracts for dozens of projects in this situation, but others remain in limbo.

NYSERDA had plans to kick off a fresh round of wind and solar contracting by the end of June, but it’s behind schedule. A spokesperson said the agency would begin the process by the end of September.

Those nitty-gritty steps are unlikely to change, though, unless Hochul makes it a priority. The governor could direct agencies to fast track permitting or contracts, as she did with offshore wind a couple of years ago. She has lately shown a keen interest in cutting red tape for other forms of energy — specifically, a nuclear plant that she has tasked NYPA to build by 2040. (There, though, the key approvals need to come from the Trump administration rather than her own.)

Her Department of Environmental Conservation also appears to be speeding along a revived pipeline project that would bring gas into New York City and Long Island. The agency said earlier this month that it had received a complete application from the pipeline company and opened a 30-day comment period with no public hearing. The notice came just five weeks after it was revealed that the state would reconsider the previously abandoned project — reportedly as part of a deal with the Trump administration to allow a major offshore wind project to move ahead, though Hochul’s office has denied a quid pro quo.

Renewable developers, by contrast, can spend years applying and reapplying for permits before they’re allowed to proceed to a mandatory, 60-day public comment period.

“If we’re cutting red tape for other forms of energy, we should cut red tape for renewable energy, too,” Wells said.

Whether any wind or solar projects remain viable in New York after the federal tax credits expire remains an open question. Although Trump has framed his efforts as rolling back Biden-era policies, solar and wind tax credits date as far back as the 1970s, and have remained largely steady since 2005.

Some, like Weatherley-White, remain optimistic that the renewable industry can learn to live without them.

“The renewable energy industry has adapted to lots of changes over time,” he said, suggesting that developers could find ways to cut costs to cushion the blow from losing the tax credits.

“Unfortunately, there will be losers and winners,” Weatherley-White continued. “I think we’re going to see some short-term pain. But in the long run or medium term, let’s say, I think people will adapt and succeed.”

The labor coalition Climate Jobs NY struck a similarly bullish tone in a statement earlier this month. “With or without the support from our federal lawmakers, union workers in New York will find ways to build the pro-worker clean energy economy we need,” the group wrote.

Others see the glass half empty. Arun said that a key part of how the industry hoped to bring down costs was by using tax credits to build momentum and standardize the development process.

“If you can’t build, there’s no standardization or lowering costs through economies of scale,” he said. “And that’s what I’m really worried about.”

Hochul’s office, too, is striking a sober note.

“The federal budget bill slashes the very tools states need to achieve energy independence and economic growth,” Lovett said, “and no state will be able to backfill the massive cuts they face across so many key areas.”

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The race to build solar and wind in New York before Trump’s tax credit deadline on Jul 19, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Colin Kinniburgh.

]]>
https://grist.org/energy/the-race-to-build-solar-and-wind-in-new-york-before-trumps-tax-credit-deadline/feed/ 0 545200
Systematic bias: how Western media reproduces the Israeli narrative https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/systematic-bias-how-western-media-reproduces-the-israeli-narrative/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/systematic-bias-how-western-media-reproduces-the-israeli-narrative/#respond Sat, 19 Jul 2025 01:31:17 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117506 COMMENTARY: By Refaat Ibrahim

“If words shape our consciousness, then the media holds the keys to minds.”

This sentence is not merely a metaphor, but a reality we live daily in the coverage of the Israeli aggression on Gaza, where the crimes of the occupation are turned into “acts of violence”, the siege targeting civilians into “security measures”, and the legitimate resistance into “terrorist acts”.

This linguistic distortion is not innocent; it is part of a “systematic mechanism” practised by major Western media outlets, through which they perpetuate a false image of a “conflict between two equal sides”, ignoring the fact that one is an occupier armed with the latest military technology, and the other is a people besieged in their land for decades.

Here, the ethical question becomes urgent: how does the media shift from conveying truth to becoming a tool for justifying oppression?

Western media institutions promote a colonial narrative that reproduces the discourse of Israeli superiority, using linguistic and legal mechanisms to justify genocide.

But the rise of global awareness through social media platforms and documentaries like We Are Not Numbers, produced by youth in Gaza, exposes this bias and brings the Palestinian narrative back to the forefront.

Selective coverage . . .  when injustice becomes an opinion
“Terrorism”, “self-defence”, “conflict” . . . are all terms that place the responsibility for violence on Palestinians while presenting Israel as the perpetual victim. This linguistic shift contradicts international law, which considers settlements a war crime (according to Article 8 of the Rome Statute), yet most reports avoid even describing the West Bank as “occupied territory”.

More dangerously, the issue is reduced to “violent events” without mentioning their contexts: how can the Palestinian people’s resistance be understood without addressing 75 years of displacement and the siege of Gaza since 2007? The media is like someone commenting on the flames without mentioning who ignited them.

The Western media coverage of the Israeli war on Gaza represents a blatant model of systematic bias that reproduces the Israeli narrative and justifies war crimes through precise linguistic and media mechanisms. Below is a breakdown of the most prominent practices:

Stripping historical context and portraying Palestinians as aggressor

Ignoring the occupation: Media outlets like the BBC and The New York Times ignored the Israeli occupation of Palestinian territories since 1948 and focused on the 7 October 2023 attack as an isolated event, without linking it to the daily oppression such as home demolitions and arrests in Jerusalem and the West Bank.

Misleading terms: The war has often been described as a “conflict between Israel and Hamas”, while Gaza is considered the largest open-air prison in the world under Israeli siege since 2007. Example: The Economist described Hamas’s attacks as “bloody”, while Israeli attacks were called “military operations”.

Dehumanising Palestinians
Language of abstraction: The BBC used terms like “died” for Palestinians versus “killed” for Israelis, according to a quantitative study by The Intercept, weakening sympathy for Palestinian victims.

Victim portrayal: While Israeli death reports included names and family ties (like “mother” or “grandmother”), Palestinians were shown as anonymous numbers, as seen in the coverage of Le Monde and Le Figaro.

Israeli political rhetoric: Media outlets reported statements by Israeli leaders such as dismissed defence minister Yoav Gallant, who described Palestinians as “human animals”, and Benjamin Netanyahu, who called them “children of darkness”, without critically analysing this rhetoric that strips them of their humanity.

Distorting resistance and linking it to terrorism
Misleading comparisons: The October 7 attack was compared to “9/11” and described as a “terrorist attack” in The Washington Post and CNN, reinforcing the “war on terror” narrative and justifying Israel’s excessive response.

Fake news: Papers like The Sun and Daily Mail promoted the story of “beheaded Israeli babies” without evidence, a story even adopted by US president Joe Biden, only to be disproven later by videos showing Hamas’ humane treatment of captives.

Selective coverage and suppression of the Palestinian narrative
Silencing journalists: Journalists such as Zahraa Al-Akhras (Global News) and Bassam Bounni (BBC) were dismissed for criticising Israel or supporting Palestine, while others were pressured to adopt the Israeli narrative.

Defaming Palestinian institutions: The New York Times and The Wall Street Journal claimed the Palestinian death toll figures were “exaggerated”, ignoring UN and human rights organisations’ reports that confirmed their accuracy.

Manipulating legal and ethical terms
Denying war crimes: Deutsche Welle stated that Israeli attacks are “not considered war crimes”, despite the destruction of hospitals and the killing of tens of thousands of civilians.

Legal misinformation: The BBC referred to Israeli settlements in the West Bank as “disputed territories”, despite the UN declaring them illegal.

Double standards in conflict coverage
Comparison with Ukraine: Western media linked support for Ukraine and Israel as “victims of aggression”, while ignoring that Israel is an occupying power under international law. Terminology shifted immediately: “invasion”, “war crimes”, “occupation” were used for Ukraine but omitted when speaking of Palestine.

According to a 2022 study by the Arab Media Monitoring Project, 90 percent of Western reports on Ukraine used language blaming Russia for the violence, compared to only 30 percent in the Palestinian case.

This contradiction exposes the underlying “racist bias”: how is killing in Europe called “genocide”, while in Gaza it is termed a “complicated conflict”? The answer lies in the statement of journalist Mika Brzezinski: “The only red line in Western media is criticising Israel.”

False neutrality: Sky News claimed it “could not verify” the Baptist Hospital massacre, despite video documentation, yet quickly adopted the Israeli narrative.

Consequences: legitimising genocide and marginalising Palestinian rights
Western media practices have contributed to normalising Israeli violence by portraying it as “legitimate defence”, while resistance is labelled as “terrorism.”

Deepening Palestinian isolation: By stripping them of the right to narrate, as shown in an academic study by Mike Berry (Cardiff University), which found emotional terms used exclusively to describe Israeli victims.

Undermining international law: By ignoring reports from organisations like Human Rights Watch and Amnesty International, which confirm Israel’s commission of war crimes.

Violating journalistic ethics . . .  when the journalist becomes the occupation’s lawyer
Journalistic codes of ethics — such as the charter of the “International Federation of Journalists” — unanimously agree that the media’s primary task is “to expose the facts without fear”. But the reality proves the opposite:

In 2023, CNN deleted an interview with a Palestinian survivor of the Jenin massacre after pressure from the Israeli lobby (according to an investigation by Middle East Eye).

The Guardian was forced to edit the headline of an article that described settlements as “apartheid” after threats of legal action.

This self-censorship turns journalism into a “copier of official statements”, abandoning the principle of “not compromising with ruling powers” emphasised by the “International Journalists’ Network”.

Toward human-centred journalism
Fixing this flaw requires dismantling biased language: replacing “conflict” with “military occupation”, and “settlements” with “illegal colonies”.

Relying on international law: such as mentioning Articles 49 and 53 of the Fourth Geneva Convention when discussing the displacement of Palestinians.

Giving space to victims’ voices: According to an Amnesty report, 80% of guests on Western TV channels discussing the conflict were either Israeli or Western.

Holding media institutions accountable: through pressure campaigns to enforce their ethical charters (such as obligating the BBC to mention “apartheid” after the HRW report).

Conclusion
The war on Gaza has become a stark test of media ethics. While platforms like Al Jazeera and Middle East Eye have helped expose violations, major Western media outlets continue to reproduce a colonial discourse that enables Israel. The greatest challenge today is to break the silence surrounding the crimes of genocide and impose a human narrative that restores the stolen humanity of the victims.

“Occupation doesn’t just need tanks, it needs media to justify its existence.” These were the words of journalist Gideon Levy after witnessing how his camera turned war crimes into “normal news”.

If Western media is serious about its claim of neutrality, it must start with a simple step: call things by their names. Words are not lifeless letters, they are ticking bombs that shape the consciousness of generations.

Refaat Ibrahim is the editor and creator of The Resistant Palestinian Pens website, where you can find all his articles. He is a Palestinian writer living in Gaza, where he studied English language and literature at the Islamic University. He has been passionate about writing since childhood, and is interested in political, social, economic, and cultural matters concerning his homeland, Palestine. This article was first published at Pearls and Irritations social policy journal in Australia.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/19/systematic-bias-how-western-media-reproduces-the-israeli-narrative/feed/ 0 545163
Writing About the Oil Business and Ignoring the Fate of the Earth https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/writing-about-the-oil-business-and-ignoring-the-fate-of-the-earth/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/writing-about-the-oil-business-and-ignoring-the-fate-of-the-earth/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 21:51:40 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046596  

ABC: Texas flooding updates: Death toll reaches 134, search continues for missing

ABC (7/15/25) reports on the death toll of Texas’ fossil fuel–fueled floods.

In Texas, at least 134 people are dead, including 36 children, and a hundred are missing after a devastating flash flood swept through the central part of the state on July 4. A late June/early July heatwave in Europe claimed 2,300 lives across the continent. These events, of the kind made more extreme and frequent by climate change (ABC, 7/7/25; New York Times, 7/9/25), occur as EU leaders roll back climate policy and the Trump administration guts climate protections, staying true to the slogan of “Drill, baby, drill!

Despite this dire backsliding on climate policy, with consequences that are clear as day, it’s business as usual in the realm of business news. Recent pieces in the widely read business publications Bloomberg, the Wall Street Journal and the business section of Reuters misleadingly suggested the fossil fuel industry’s profits and losses happen in a vacuum.

A clear consensus

Global leaders ignoring the climate crisis clearly aren’t making its tragic effects go away. The scientific consensus has been unmistakable for years: Fossil fuels are the main driver of climate change. In order to avoid surpassing the Paris Agreement’s 1.5°C limit, beyond which the most devastating impacts from global heating will be felt, we need to phase out fossil fuels—and fast (Union of Concerned Scientists, 1/21/21).

Many journalists have expressed this urgency while covering extreme weather and other impacts, making the connection to human-caused climate change and fossil fuel emissions (FAIR.org, 5/17/24). While these in-depth stories serve as clear explainers in outlets’ science and environment sections, the connection is still being ignored when business is discussed.

If not for the grotesque profits of fossil fuel companies—which knew about their industry’s environmental impact since the 1970s—resistance to a clean energy transition would not exist.

Industry coverage

Reuters: Oil edges up to two-week high on lower US output forecast, renewed Red Sea attacks

Reuters (7/8/25) reported that “the US will produce less oil in 2025 than previously expected as declining oil prices have prompted producers to slow activity this year”—with no acknowledgment of the climate impact of this slowdown.

In early July, Exxon and Shell announced lower second-quarter profits from weaker oil and gas trading. Coverage in Bloomberg (7/7/25), the Wall Street Journal (7/7/25) and Reuters (7/7/25) discussed these announcements as indicative of how the rest of the fossil fuel industry will fare in Q2. Stories attributed these dips to Trump’s tariffs, Middle East tensions, excess supply and uncertain demand. Oil prices creeping up over the past two weeks were due to Houthi attacks in the Red Sea, projected lower US oil production and Trump tariffs, Reuters (7/8/25) reported.

Meanwhile, reports on renewable energy stocks dipping after the passing of Trump’s so-called “Big Beautiful Bill” also failed to mention the consequences of this backslide (Reuters, 7/7/25; Bloomberg, 7/8/25): If we keep our carbon emissions at current rates, we are poised to hit the 1.5°C threshold before 2030, leading to more deadly extreme weather events worldwide (Health Policy Watch, 5/6/24).

Discussing Chevron’s efforts to cut costs, Bloomberg (7/9/25) mentioned low oil prices and an “uncertain outlook for fossil fuels.” A passing mention of an “uncertain outlook” was the closest any of these pieces gets to hinting at the relevant need to phase out fossil fuels and invest in renewables, regardless of geopolitical events and market trends.

Increased demand

WSJ: Oil Age Is Far From Over, OPEC Says

The Wall Street Journal (7/10/25) euphemized Trump’s wholesale attack on renewable energy as “a rising tide of pushback and scrutiny over climate-transition plans.”

The Wall Street Journal (7/10/25) reported “Oil Age Is Far From Over, OPEC Says,” citing increased energy needs globally as a reason fossil fuels will continue to be extracted. Oil correspondent Giulia Petroni wrote:

Meanwhile, OPEC also said energy policies across major economies are shifting as countries grapple with a growing array of challenges. While ambitious policy goals remain in place, a rising tide of pushback and scrutiny over climate-transition plans is emerging, particularly in the US and other advanced economies, according to the cartel.

Petroni did not cite any scientists or climate activists to push back against OPEC’s claims, let alone any of the litany of studies, data and reports that warn that if we want life on earth as we know it to continue, we simply cannot keep drilling for more oil. The International Institute for Sustainable Development (9/25/24) explained:

Peer-reviewed science shows there is no room for new coal, oil and gas development under the 1.5°C global warming limit agreed in Paris. In 1.5°C-aligned scenarios, coal production declines by 95% by 2050, and oil and gas production by at least 65%.

Another Journal piece (7/9/25) discussed a decrease in diesel supply, which could increase transport and heating costs next winter. “Lack of refining capacity growth is also a problem in the US, where the green energy movement has turned some refiners away from making diesel, said Flynn of the Price Futures Group,”  Anthony Harrup reported—as if it’s a “problem” that green activists have succeeded in steering producers away from a climate-wrecking fuel. (No experts on renewable alternatives were cited.)

The argument that renewable energy sources can’t power the world is also not supported. According to the UN, renewables have the potential to meet 65% of the world’s energy demands by 2030 and 90% by 2050. And contrary to fossil fuel propaganda parroted by corporate media, renewable energy sources are already the cheapest power option in the majority of the world.

The AI boom

Bloomberg: Trump’s Tax Package Curbs Renewable Energy Just as AI’s Power Needs Soar

Bloomberg‘s report (7/4/25) worried that ending tax credits for renewable energy would fail to “quench the thirst of data centers that power artificial intelligence”—not that it would accelerate the climate catastrophe. 

Reports about AI’s profligate energy usage from Reuters and Bloomberg also largely left out discussions about its climate impact. Reuters (7/9/25) did a story on the crisis facing the largest power grid in the country due to AI demand, as chatbots “consume power faster than new plants can be built.” The piece reported Trump ordering two oil and natural gas power plants in Pennsylvania to continue operating through the summer, despite their scheduled retirement in May, without mentioning the effect on climate.

Bloomberg (7/4/25) reported on Trump’s tax package curbing renewables even as AI’s need for power increases. The piece discussed the economic implications of the policy, but left out the dire environmental consequences.

Another Bloomberg piece (7/7/25) about AI’s utility needs did briefly make the climate connection. Reporter Josh Saul alluded at the end of the article to the arguments of “critics,” who warn these data centers can “hurt climate efforts by extending the lives of carbon-emitting coal and gas plants.” But he did not quote or cite specific groups, scientists or activists.

Ironic omissions

Bloomberg: Fossil Fuels Set to Fill Europe’s Power Gap as Wind Plunges

“Europe’s fleet of coal and gas plants could come to the rescue,” Bloomberg (7/7/25) reported. “The likely comeback for the region’s legacy fossil-fuel plants shows just how important they are.”

More puzzling reporting discussed European countries needing to fill energy gaps with fossil fuels during June and July’s deadly heatwaves.

“Fossil Fuels Set to Fill Europe’s Power Gap as Wind Plunges” (Bloomberg, 7/7/25) quoted an energy strategist from Rabobank: “The longer the wind lull continues amid the scorching heat, the longer fossil fuels will have to fill the evening demand gap in power markets.”

“Europe is steadily refilling storage sites that ended last winter severely depleted after a colder-than-usual heating season triggered hefty withdrawals,” another Bloomberg piece (7/7/25) stated. “Still, the region remains vulnerable to sudden shifts in supply or demand—especially as hot weather drives up energy use for cooling.”

“Risks remain as most of July is expected to be hotter than usual across Europe, possibly boosting gas consumption to meet demand for cooling,” said another (Bloomberg, 7/10/25).

This “hotter than usual” weather in Europe has claimed thousands of lives, with research suggesting 1,500 of the 2,300 estimated heat deaths could be connected to climate change, which, as we know, is caused by the burning of fossil fuels (New York Times, 7/9/25). But this clear connection and ironic chicken-and-egg scenario is not explained in any of these articles.

WSJ: The Moment the Clean-Energy Boom Ran Into ‘Drill, Baby, Drill’

The Wall Street Journal (7/5/25) refers to the rolling back of “Biden’s climate law”—but never explains what energy and climate have to do with each other.

The Wall Street Journal (7/5/25) covered Trump’s rollback of President Joe Biden’s climate law, which offered subsidies for wind and solar power, electric vehicles and other green projects, in a piece headlined “The Moment the Clean-Energy Boom Ran Into ‘Drill, Baby, Drill.’”

The piece quoted Tracy Stone-Manning, president of the Wilderness Society and director of the Bureau of Land Management under Biden; Reagan Farr, chief executive of solar developer Silicon Ranch; and Cierra Pearl, a young Maine resident who recently lost her job building solar arrays. These sources decried Trump’s sabotage of the green energy transition, but none of them were cited discussing broader climate impacts.

“The clashing visions have left many developers and workers around the country in a lurch,” Journal oil reporter David Uberti wrote. Uberti made sure to quote a statement by Tom Pyle, president of the pro-fossil fuel American Energy Alliance: “If repealing these subsidies will ‘kill’ their industry, then maybe it shouldn’t exist in the first place.” (The $20 billion the fossil fuel industry receives annually in direct US government subsidies was not discussed.)

The impacts Trump’s anti–green energy policies will have on fossil fuel workers are certainly relevant, and it makes sense that business news articles would center broadly defined economic implications. But it is a glaring omission to discuss EVs, renewable energy and the possibility of oil drilling on public lands without any mention of environmental impacts and our all-but-guaranteed surpassing of the Paris Agreement threshold if we continue along this path.

Siloing the connection

Bloomberg: Extreme Heat Is Killing European Workers Despite Government Efforts

Bloomberg (7/10/15) puts a story about how climate change is killing Europeans in its special “Green” section.

These outlets have no shortage of resources to report on climate change—and the culpability of the fossil fuel industry for its ramifications. Some are already doing it in other sections of the paper.

“We need to start acting against climate change and this means, first, trying to reduce the heat in cities,” a Bloomberg piece (7/10/15) about Europe’s heatwave said, quoting environmental epidemiologist Pierre Masselot. “But at the end of the day, all these measures won’t probably be as efficient as just reducing climate change altogether, and so reducing our greenhouse gas emissions.” This article appeared in the site’s “Green” section.

In another  piece (7/7/25) regarding AI’s energy demands in the “Green” section, the outlet also makes the connection to climate change. Bloomberg quoted a statement from environmental law organization Earthjustice:

Coal, gas and oil fired power plants spew millions of pounds of health-harming and climate-warming pollution into the air each year, and cost consumers millions of dollars more than cleaner energy sources.

While thorough climate reporting and mentions of the fossil fuel industry’s responsibility for global heating are difficult to find in the Rupert Murdoch-owned Wall Street Journal, its “Sustainable Business” section (6/30/25) recently covered how companies are reporting fewer details about how climate change and extreme weather are impacting their business.

In its “Sustainability” section, Reuters (7/1/25) discussed the EU heatwave’s links to climate change and fossil fuel emissions. “Scientists say greenhouse gas emissions from burning fossil fuels are a cause of climate change, with deforestation and industrial practices being other contributing factors,” Clotaire Achi, Emma Pinedo and Alvise Armellini wrote. “Last year was the planet’s hottest on record.”

The ‘silent majority’

Recent studies have revealed that between 80–89% of people worldwide are concerned about climate change and want their governments to do more to address it. But this vast majority of global citizens is ignored by reporting that treats the relentless extraction of fossil fuels as a source of profit rather than an existential threat. The climate journalism resource group Covering Climate Now, of which FAIR is a partner, refers to these people as the “silent majority.” Public support is widespread, but public discourse is lagging behind.

Major publications should not relegate the causes of climate change to their science and environmental sections. They need to be front and center in pieces that focus on the industry responsible for driving it, profiting from it and lying to the public about it for decades.


This story is part of the 89 Percent Project, an initiative of the global journalism collaboration Covering Climate Now.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Olivia Riggio.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/writing-about-the-oil-business-and-ignoring-the-fate-of-the-earth/feed/ 0 545129
Nearly 43K Call on the DOJ and White House To Release the Epstein Files to the Public https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/nearly-43k-call-on-the-doj-and-white-house-to-release-the-epstein-files-to-the-public/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/nearly-43k-call-on-the-doj-and-white-house-to-release-the-epstein-files-to-the-public/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 21:39:56 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/nearly-43k-call-on-the-doj-and-white-house-to-release-the-epstein-files-to-the-public A new MoveOn Civic Action petition is calling on the Department of Justice and the Trump administration to release all files related to the Jeffrey Epstein case.

The petition argues that full transparency is essential to ensure that all individuals connected to Epstein’s criminal activities are held accountable. Without the release of these documents, powerful individuals who were associated with Epstein may evade justice and avoid facing the legal consequences of their actions.

The petition, just launched yesterday, has been signed by over 42,049 people and counting.

See the MoveOn petition here.

Public frustration over the handling of the Jeffrey Epstein files has sparked backlash from across the political spectrum — including MAGA influencers, conservative podcasters, and even some of Trump’s congressional allies. Despite this, President Trump has dismissed the growing demand for transparency as a "hoax," blaming Democrats and disparaging some of his own supporters as "weaklings."

Just three percent of Americans say they’re satisfied with the amount of information the federal government has released about the Epstein case, according to a new poll.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/nearly-43k-call-on-the-doj-and-white-house-to-release-the-epstein-files-to-the-public/feed/ 0 545465
Sanders: The March Toward Authoritarianism https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/sanders-the-march-toward-authoritarianism/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/sanders-the-march-toward-authoritarianism/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 21:35:37 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/sanders-the-march-toward-authoritarianism Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.) released the following statement today, on President Trump's steady march toward authoritarianism:

This is what the march toward authoritarianism looks like:

Stephen Colbert, the most popular late-night talk show host on television, has been taken off the air by CBS just days after he criticized the company for settling a bogus lawsuit with Trump. It’s pretty obvious why Paramount chose to surrender to Trump. The Redstone family, the major owners of the company, is in line to receive $2.4 billion from the sale of Paramount to Skydance, but they can only receive this money if the Trump administration approves this deal.

NPR and PBS, two of the most independent news outlets in the country, had their budgets slashed to the tune of $1 billion by Trump and Republicans in Congress. Why? Because Trump doesn’t like criticism. NPR and PBS, like other objective news outlets, are prepared to tell the truth — including the impact that Trump’s disastrous policies are having on the American people.

Sen. Adam Schiff, who led an impeachment inquiry into Trump during his last term in Congress, is now being targeted by the Justice Department. This is not unlike the criminal investigation launched into New York State Attorney General Letitia James, who won a fraud judgment against Trump's business and has challenged his policies in court. The president says Schiff should be "brought to justice."

Jerome Powell, chair of the Federal Reserve, is now being threatened with removal from his post because he has refused to lower interest rates and insists that the Fed maintain its independence from the White House. The Supreme Court says Trump needs a reason to fire Powell. So now Trump has come up with a ridiculous claim: that Powell mismanaged federal funds for an over-budget building renovation. Really?

All of this in just one week.

It is no great secret that our country is divided politically.

But I would hope that ALL Americans can come together to defend the rule of law, freedom of speech and our Constitution against a President who is moving this country aggressively toward authoritarianism.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/sanders-the-march-toward-authoritarianism/feed/ 0 545132
Trump Halts Clean Air Laws For Most of the Country https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/trump-halts-clean-air-laws-for-most-of-the-country/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/trump-halts-clean-air-laws-for-most-of-the-country/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 20:39:30 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/trump-halts-clean-air-laws-for-most-of-the-country President Donald Trump signedfourseparateproclamations granting blanket exemptions to over 100 facilities, including chemical plants, coal-fired power plants, commercial sterilizers, and taconite mills, allowing them to ignore clean air standards and release more toxic air pollution in most of the country, or over at least 30 states and U.S. territories.

The orders Trump signed Thursday evening are unprecedented and let facilities put off using better technology or even turn off the systems that filter out some of the most potent cancer-causing chemicals the Environmental Protection Agency regulates, including ethylene oxide, benzene, chloroprene and formaldehyde.

“Trump is illegally delaying clean air laws from his desk because polluters make more money when they just dump their toxic chemicals in our air,” said Patrice Simms, vice president of Litigation at Earthjustice’s Healthy Communities Program. "Trump’s action on behalf of big corporate polluters will cause more cancer, more birth defects, and more children to suffer asthma. The country deserves better.”

Now, more than 50 chemical facilities can turn off pollution controls or dodge recently strengthened emission limits, including those under the Hazardous Organic National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (HON) standards. Factories processing taconite iron ore, manufacturing chemical polymers and resins, and facilities using ethylene oxide, are also getting similar free passes to pollute, even though pollution controls are available.

EPA is also exempting over 30 commercial sterilization facilities. These include over half of the facilities that EPA already found to pose an exceptional cancer risk to their surrounding communities. Some facilities have cancer risk rates over 80 times EPA’s acceptable cancer risk rate, and are capable of causing a new cancer diagnosis every month and a half.

Neighborhoods next to chemical plants, power plants, commercial sterilizers, and metal processing sites in Texas, California, Utah, Louisiana, Ohio, Illinois, Michigan, Kentucky, and West Virginia, will face the worst of this continuing pollution, as these states are home to major facilities. Some of the protections being delayed, like the HON standards, prevent over 6,000 tons of toxic emissions each year and help protect more than 7 million people, many of them children, from breathing chemicals linked to cancer, asthma, and birth defects.

In April 2025, the Trump administration exempted 68 coal-fired power plants from pollution limits set in the strengthened MATS rule—even though pollution controls are widely available and already in use. These came after EPA Administrator Lee Zeldin invited corporations to email the agency to request exemptions from clean air standards. Companies were told they could cite “national security” or “lack of available technology” as justification.

Types of facilities exempt from clean air standards include:

  • Ethylene oxide commercial sterilizers: At least 39 facilities in 23 states and territories (Alabama, California, Colorado, Connecticut, Florida, Georgia, Indiana, Maryland, Massachusetts, Montana, Nebraska, New Mexico, New Jersey, New York, North Carolina, Oklahoma, Pennsylvania, Puerto Rico, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Virginia, West Virginia).
  • Chemical manufacturing facilities: 52 facilities in 13 states (Alabama, Arkansas, Florida, Georgia, Kentucky, Indiana, Illinois, Louisiana, Michigan, Mississippi, North Carolina, Texas, and Virginia).
  • Taconite iron ore processing facilities: Eight facilities in two states (Michigan and Minnesota)
  • Coal-fired power plants: Three facilities in three states (Colorado, Ohio, and Illinois)


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/trump-halts-clean-air-laws-for-most-of-the-country/feed/ 0 545136
Our Revolution Slams Congressional Passage of GENIUS Act as a Gift to Trump’s Corruption and the Crypto Lobby https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/our-revolution-slams-congressional-passage-of-genius-act-as-a-gift-to-trumps-corruption-and-the-crypto-lobby/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/our-revolution-slams-congressional-passage-of-genius-act-as-a-gift-to-trumps-corruption-and-the-crypto-lobby/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 20:34:34 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/our-revolution-slams-congressional-passage-of-genius-act-as-a-gift-to-trumps-corruption-and-the-crypto-lobby Today, Our Revolution, the nation's largest grassroots progressive organization, condemned the passage of the GENIUS Act by Congress, calling it a dangerous handout to crypto billionaires and a green light for Donald Trump’s growing web of self-dealing and corruption.

The bill, essentially written by the crypto industry itself, will deregulate stablecoins, legalize anonymous crypto donations in U.S. elections, and allow elected officials, including Trump, to personally profit from speculative assets. Its passage comes just days before Trump is set to host a private gala for the top buyers of his $TRUMP meme coin, a cryptocurrency venture already making his family millions.

As one of the most vocal national organizations warning about the risks posed by the GENIUS Act, Our Revolution has mobilized thousands of grassroots members to sign petitions, attend town halls, join national organizing calls with Senators Warren and Merkley, and protest outside Trump’s meme coin gala at his Virginia golf club.

“The passage of the GENIUS Act is a stark escalation of kleptocracy and oligarchy in America,” said Joseph Geevarghese, Executive Director of Our Revolution “This bill wasn’t just influenced by crypto billionaires, it was written for them, and passed with bipartisan complicity. While politicians normalize self-dealing and financial elites consolidate power, we hear almost nothing from the media about how this corrupt system is steamrolling democracy and deepening inequality. It’s working-class people who pay the price, while anonymous speculators and political insiders get richer and more unaccountable by the day.”

As Our Revolution previously warned, the GENIUS Act amounts to a billionaire-backed power grab—crafted to benefit Trump’s inner circle and the crypto elite. Crypto speculators spent more than $200 million on the 2024 election, making the industry the largest lobbying force in U.S. politics today. Now, they’re cashing in.

Our Revolution mobilized its national network against the bill, with over 10,000 grassroots members signing a petition demanding Democrats vote no. Despite this outcry, 16 Democrats joined Republicans in the House to advance the legislation—just as Trump prepares to reward anonymous investors with access to political power.

The organization warns that this legislation sets a dangerous precedent: one where political influence is auctioned off to unregulated and untraceable financial actors, and lawmakers on both sides of the aisle normalize profiteering from public office.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/our-revolution-slams-congressional-passage-of-genius-act-as-a-gift-to-trumps-corruption-and-the-crypto-lobby/feed/ 0 545138
‘ICE Operates Within a Broader Apparatus Around Criminalization and the Deportation Machine’: CounterSpin interview with Silky Shah on mass deportation https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/ice-operates-within-a-broader-apparatus-around-criminalization-and-the-deportation-machine-counterspin-interview-with-silky-shah-on-mass-deportation/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/ice-operates-within-a-broader-apparatus-around-criminalization-and-the-deportation-machine-counterspin-interview-with-silky-shah-on-mass-deportation/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 18:54:23 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046582  

Janine Jackson interviewed Detention Watch Network’s Silky Shah about mass deportation for the July 11, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

FAIR: Massive Expansion of Trump’s Deportation Machine Passes With Little Press Notice

FAIR.org (7/9/25)

Janine Jackson: As is being reported, including by Belén Fernández for FAIR.org, among the myriad horrors of Trump’s budget bill—though not his alone; everyone who voted for it owns it—is the otherworldly amount of money, $175 billion, slated to fund mass deportation. That exceeds the military budget of every country in the world but the US and China. And some $30 billion is to go to ICE, the masked goons that are descending on swap meets and workplaces to carry out what many are calling brazen midday kidnappings.

We knew that this White House would be horrible for Black and brown people, and for immigrants especially, and yet we can still be shocked at how bad and how fast things are happening. Despair might be understandable, but it’s not particularly useful. So what do we do? What can we do?

Joining us now is Silky Shah, executive director at Detention Watch Network. She joins us now by phone. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Silky Shah.

Silky Shah: Thank you for having me.

FAIR: Silky Shah on the Attack on Immigrants

CounterSpin (1/24/25)

JJ: We see the narrative shifting. “Hey, he said it was just going to be violent criminals, or criminals, or people whose crime is administrative, but now, this is getting weird.” What’s happening now, the rounding up of anyone brown, basically, including people who are actively engaged in the legal processes of securing citizenship—we can be outraged, but I’m less sure about surprised, just because there was no “decent” way to do what Trump telegraphed he wanted to do.

At the same time, though, I don’t know that anyone really expected masked men spilling out of vans to snatch up children off the street. So, just first of all, did you even imagine the particular situation we’re seeing right now? You explained back in January how the apparatus were set up, but is this surprising, even at your level of understanding?

SS: I think what’s so shocking about this moment is that the scale of what has happened before is becoming astronomical. So, as you mentioned, $175 billion for immigration enforcement, $30 billion for ICE agents in particular, $35 billion for immigration detention. These are just wild numbers, and I think that is really what is so shocking.

Public Books: “The Basic Liberal Narrative Is Gone”: Immigrant Rights and Abolition with Silky Shah

Public Books (3/20/25)

I do think—we’re speaking here on CounterSpin—one of the biggest challenges of the last 20, 30 years of immigration enforcement, and how it’s been portrayed, is that there is a constant framing of immigration as a public safety issue, immigration as a national security issue, which is really not true. Mostly immigration is about labor, it’s about family relationships, it’s about seeking refuge.

And I think what’s so frustrating is that, actually, for many, many years of having this narrative of “some immigrants are deserving and some immigrants aren’t,” the “good immigrant versus the bad immigrant,” what ends up happening is where we’re at now, which it’s like all immigrants are perceived as a problem. And there’s no question that there’s an underlying racism and xenophobia and classism and all the other things at play here.

I think what’s so important for us to understand now, when we’re talking about the way ICE is operating, is that it’s been enabled by that framework—that when you reinforce this idea that some people are deserving, then you kind of expect everybody to be in that category. And in reality, the way the system worked before, is that people were being funneled through the criminal legal system. And this really skyrocketed the number of people who are in deportation proceedings, especially under the Obama administration. So this framework of “we are going to target people who are criminals,” it’s a distraction; the goal is to scapegoat immigrants, and all immigrants, and ignore the crisis of mass incarceration, which ICE is inherently a part of.

JJ: Where is the law in all of this? Is it that there are laws that exist, but aren’t being enforced? Is it that the law has changed, such that what we’re seeing is terrible, but lamentably legal? Do laws need to be changed? I think a lot of folks see masked men spilling out of vans and snatching kids and think, “That can’t be legal.” But is it?

Silky Shah

Silky Shah: “They’re actually using immigration enforcement as a pretense to go after people who don’t agree with their ideas.”

SS: Well, I think there are some aspects of this that have been baked into the law for 30 years now, and some aspects that are new. And so I think it’s important to understand that. When you think about it, this initial framing of, “Oh, people are being disappeared and kidnapped,” came when a lot of students who had protested or expressed solidarity with Palestine were being targeted by ICE, many of whom had not had contact with the criminal legal system, many of whom had legal status in some form, including Green Cards and visas.

In that context, 30 years ago, when they passed the 1996 immigration laws, it actually started to expand the category of people who didn’t get due process, who didn’t have the right to due process; that included newly arriving immigrants, and also people who were legal permit residents, or had visas but had some crime, some conviction, that meant that they no longer had a right to make their case before a judge, and were required to be detained, required to be deported.

And so all of that stuff has been happening for decades now, and there are many aspects of what happened. Being separated from your family, even if you have a pregnant wife, all those things are quite normal. And also not having a warrant; I mean, ICE goes after immigrants all the time without a warrant. And a lot of our work has been to help people know their rights, know what is needed. But I think the thing that’s scary is that they’re actually using immigration enforcement as a pretense to go after people who don’t agree with their ideas, people who might be showing support for Palestine, or merely because they are Black and brown, and are an easy scapegoat for this administration.

So I think there are things that are happening outside of the scope of the law, and I think the test cases here are those students who were detained, and also the case of the many people who were sent to a mega-prison in El Salvador. I think those are instances where you’re just like, “Wow, that is definitely outside of law, and they’re operating in these ways that are really concerning.” But they’re also using these as strategies to change the law, which is what we saw recently with the men who are being deported to South Sudan, were stuck in Djibouti for many weeks, and now officially are in South Sudan. And the Supreme Court deeming that OK.

JJ: It’s bizarre.

You mentioned last time how much local- and state-level buy-in is required for this whole plan to work. Yes, there’s ICE. Yes, there is the Trump administration, but they do rely on state and local law enforcement, and other officials, to make this play out. Is that still a place to look for resistance, then?

SS: Absolutely. And I think it’s especially important now that we double down on those efforts because, yes, ICE is going to have $45 billion more over the next four years to build more detention centers, and our goal is to block that in every way, and make sure that isn’t permanent. And a lot of our strategy is getting local officials, state officials, to do that work, to say, “No, we don’t want a new ICE detention center in our community.” Once ICE detention exists in the community, people are much more likely to be targeted for deportation. Detention exists to facilitate deportation.

So in places like Illinois and Oregon, for instance, there are no detention centers. And that actually helps protect communities that much more.

NPR: In recorded calls, reports of overcrowding and lack of food at ICE detention centers

NPR (6/6/25)

And I think, unfortunately, a lot of Democratic governors are responding in ways that are not ideal. I think in places like California and Washington State and other places, there needs to be a lot of work to say no, we have to double down on these policies that have protected immigrant communities, and expand them, and make sure that those transfers to ICE aren’t happening, so that we can limit ICE’s reach as much as possible. It’s still the most effective way to prevent them from getting the scale of deportations they want. The easiest way for them to do this is through these ICE/police collaborations, and stopping that is essential.

But also, in places like Florida, where Ron DeSantis is doing everything possible to work with ICE, and building things like this Everglades detention camp, and having agreements with ICE at every county jail. There’s been numerous deaths, actually, in Florida already, of people who have been in ICE custody. And so it really shows you the harm that that sort of relationship between state and local law enforcement does to make ICE even that much stronger. So I think there is this constant attention on ICE, but we have to understand that ICE operates within a broader apparatus around criminalization and the deportation machine, that many, many law enforcement agencies, including sheriffs, are central to.

JJ: And just to add to that: It’s about money, as you’ve explained. It comes back to money. Prisons—we can call them “detention centers”—bring money to a locality. And so that is part of the unseen or underexplored aspect of this, is that when you build a holding cell, then you’re going to put people in it. And that is part of what explains what’s happening.

SS: Absolutely. I think that this is so about the political economy, and some people have referred to this new MAGA murder bill as a jobs program. If you have this much more money for ICE, this much more money for detention, that means more jobs in these communities. And this is what we saw for years and years during the prison boom, is that many rural communities that were struggling financially were seeing prison as a recession-safe economy, like an ability to bring in jobs.

And especially when it comes to the relationship between sheriffs and ICE, there’s a symbiosis there between the federal government and local counties, that local counties are really depending on its revenue. I think one of our biggest challenges when we’re trying to work to end a detention contract is that fear of losing jobs, and that fear of losing that revenue.

First Ten to Communities Not Cages

Detention Watch Network (2021)

JJ: Let me just ask you, feeding off of that, to talk about #CommunitiesNotCages. What is the vision there? What are you talking about there, and where can folks see another way forward?

SS: Yeah, we launched a #CommunitiesNotCages campaign many years ago, under Trump’s first term, and we’re actually about to relaunch, because the amount of money that’s going to the system, the scale of what’s going to happen, I think we need to bring a lot more people in.

But a lot of it was actually responding to local organizing against detention. So we were seeing, in places like Alabama and Georgia and Arizona and elsewhere, that people were calling attention to the existing detention system and the harm that it was doing, the number of deaths that were happening, people hunger-striking in facilities. We were trying to really do work to get resources to them, make sure people are strategizing together.

And then in places like the Midwest, for years, so many groups were doing work to stop a new detention center from coming in. ICE wanted to have one large detention center in Illinois or Indiana or elsewhere. And they tried to build it in nine or ten different sites, and at every site they were able to organize with local community, or work with the state legislature, to stop detention expansion.

And so what we did was bring a lot of these communities together, the people who are organizing this campaign, thinking about state legislation, thinking about strategies with local counties or city councils, to learn from each other, and figure out, “OK, what can we do?”

Because one of the things we discovered, and we did some research on this, is that when there’s a detention center in your community, so if you have, say, 50 beds for detention, somebody’s two times more likely to be targeted for deportation. If you have 800 beds, somebody’s six times more likely to be targeted for deportation. And so that ability to cut off the detention capacity actually prevented increased deportation.

New Yorker: The Emerging Movement for Police and Prison Abolition

New Yorker (5/7/21)

So we really see #CommunitiesNotCages as a part of the strategy to end this mass deportation agenda, and also really connect to that broader effort against the prison industrial complex and against the crisis of mass incarceration, which does so much harm and are really, I think Mariame Kaba has called them “death-making institutions.” I mean, we’re seeing that numerous deaths have just happened in the last few weeks.

And so we’re really concerned about the conditions right now. I’m the first person to say Trump is building on what’s a bipartisan agenda, for decades now, against immigrants. But the scale of what’s happening, and how abysmal these facilities are becoming, are even shocking to me, as somebody who’s been doing this work for 20 years.

So I think this is the time where we can’t give in. Yes, they got this $45 billion, but actually, we have a lot of ability to stop them from implementing their plans, and we really need to gear up and fight as much as we can.

JJ: Well, that sounds very much like an end, and yet I am going to push for one final question, because we need a positive vision. What we’re seeing, what’s passing for a positive vision on immigration right now is, “But he makes my tacos! He waters my lawn! Don’t come for him!” And it makes immigration feel like noblesse oblige. It’s very nice of “us” that we let “them” live here.

And we can debunk all day: Immigrants do pay taxes, they aren’t stealing jobs. It’s also mean and small as a vision. And I just feel that there’s a positive, forward-looking vision that we could be talking about.

CounterSpin: US ‘Intervention Has Directly Led to the Conditions Migrants Are Fleeing’

CounterSpin (6/25/21)

SS: I think one of the most challenging things about the way the mainstream immigrant advocacy efforts over the last 20 years have hurt our ability to make the case for immigrants is that they’ve really reinforced the idea of the good immigrant versus bad immigrant. And when they’re talking about the “good immigrant,” a lot of it really pushes this idea of immigrant exceptionalism or productivity, or immigrants are better than everyone else.

Often there’s this narrative of “immigrants commit less crimes than US citizens,” which just reinforces both anti-Black racism and the idea that immigration is about public safety, which it’s not.

And so again, as I was saying before, immigration is really largely about labor and family relationships, and also the root causes of migration. A lot of the narrative hasn’t allowed us to talk about US empire, and the role that the US has played in destabilizing a lot of other countries and conditions for people across the world.

So when I think about a vision—and I hope that we can move forward in a different way—is that actually part of the reason immigrants have been able to be scapegoated is because the US government and billionaires have created a crisis, an economic crisis, for so many people. And what we really need to understand is that immigrants are central to our community, that we are in this together—like having better healthcare; having better, more affordable housing; having better education opportunities, those things are going to make it easier for us to make the case for immigrants.

So I think, actually, we need to really deeply show that immigration is connected to every issue, whether it be climate, whether it be housing, etc., all these things, and see us in it together and think about this as a broader question of working people, working-class, poor people, and really not exceptionalizing immigrants.

And the other thing I would just say is that in so many ways, immigration detention in particular is being treated as an aside, as this other issue: small, not big, and whatever, there’s mass incarceration, there’s deportation. But now it’s being used as a testing ground for Trump’s authoritarianism. And so we really need to see that, actually, the way they’re operating around immigration creates risks for all of us. And, again, the reason why it’s so important that we see our struggles intertwined, and that we work together on this.

JJ: We’ve been speaking with Silky Shah from the Detention Watch Network. They’re online at DetentionWatchNetwork.org. Thank you so much, Silky Shah, for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

SS: Thanks so much for having me.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/ice-operates-within-a-broader-apparatus-around-criminalization-and-the-deportation-machine-counterspin-interview-with-silky-shah-on-mass-deportation/feed/ 0 545102
Who Will Fund the Massive Rallies in 50 States to Tell Tyrant Trump “YOU’RE FIRED”? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/who-will-fund-the-massive-rallies-in-50-states-to-tell-tyrant-trump-youre-fired/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/who-will-fund-the-massive-rallies-in-50-states-to-tell-tyrant-trump-youre-fired/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 17:00:26 +0000 https://nader.org/?p=6550
This content originally appeared on Ralph Nader and was authored by spicon@csrl.org.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/who-will-fund-the-massive-rallies-in-50-states-to-tell-tyrant-trump-youre-fired/feed/ 0 545123
"I’m a Jeffrey Epstein Survivor. The Documents Are an Opportunity" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/survivor-calls-for-release-of-epstein-files-ending-impunity-for-rich-powerful-abusers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/survivor-calls-for-release-of-epstein-files-ending-impunity-for-rich-powerful-abusers/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 15:54:42 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=9f2216dda8286d06006c5c36d88e4287
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/survivor-calls-for-release-of-epstein-files-ending-impunity-for-rich-powerful-abusers/feed/ 0 545067
He Came to the U.S. to Support His Sick Child. He Was Detained. Then He Disappeared. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/he-came-to-the-u-s-to-support-his-sick-child-he-was-detained-then-he-disappeared/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/he-came-to-the-u-s-to-support-his-sick-child-he-was-detained-then-he-disappeared/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 15:30:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/venezuelan-deportees-trump-immigration-asylum-el-salvador by Melissa Sanchez, ProPublica; Perla Trevizo, ProPublica and The Texas Tribune; Mica Rosenberg and Jeff Ernsthausen, ProPublica; Ronna Rísquez, Alianza Rebelde Investiga; and Adrián González, Cazadores de Fake News

Leer en español.

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published. This article is co-published with The Texas Tribune, a nonprofit, nonpartisan local newsroom that informs and engages with Texans, and Alianza Rebelde Investiga and Cazadores de Fake News.

On Feb. 15, José Manuel Ramos Bastidas called his wife from inside a Texas immigration detention facility.

He asked her to record a message so there would be some lasting evidence of his story.

“They detained me simply because of my tattoos. I am not a criminal.”

The Trump administration had sent dozens of Venezuelan immigrants to Guantanamo. He was afraid the same would happen to him.

“Just in case something happens to me, so you can be aware.”

Uncertain about his fate, Ramos wanted to make sure there was a record of what happened to him.

A month later, he was gone.

Ramos never set foot in the U.S. — at least not as a free man. He left Venezuela in January 2024, hoping to earn enough money to pay for his newborn son’s medical needs. Born with a respiratory condition, the family’s “milagrito,” or “little miracle,” had severe asthma and repeatedly needed to be hospitalized. The cost of treatment had become impossible to manage on the meager wages Ramos made washing cars in Venezuela’s collapsed economy, so he trekked thousands of miles through a half dozen countries to reach the U.S. border.

When Ramos arrived, he didn’t sneak into the country. He followed the rules established by the Biden administration for immigrants seeking asylum. He signed up for an appointment through a government app and, when he was granted one, turned himself in to request protection. An immigration official and a judge determined he didn’t qualify, and Ramos didn’t fight the decision.

The government kept him in detention until he could be deported back to Venezuela.

In the months that followed, Donald Trump was elected president for a second term and began his mass deportation campaign. Among his first actions was to fly groups of Venezuelan immigrants whom he had labeled dangerous gang members to a U.S. military base at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba.

Ramos, 30, panicked and called his wife to say he was worried that the same was going to happen to him. On a video call his wife recorded, he held up a document he said was proof that immigration authorities had agreed to deport him to Venezuela. But he worried that they would not honor that promise.

“I have a family,” he said, staring directly into the camera. “I am simply a hard-working Venezuelan. I haven’t committed any crimes. I don’t have a criminal record in my country nor anywhere else.”

A month later, a more upbeat Ramos called again. He seemed confident that U.S. officials would send him home. Ramos’ family started preparing for his return. They planned to bake him a cake, cook his favorite chicken dish and go to church together to thank God for bringing him home safely.

They never heard from him again.

First image: Bastidas rests with Ramos’ son and her grandson, Jared, at their home in Venezuela. Second image: Rodríguez holds her phone, showing a photo of her husband. (Adriana Loureiro Fernández for ProPublica and The Texas Tribune)

On March 15, a day after that call, Ramos and more than 230 other Venezuelan men were sent to the CECOT maximum-security prison in El Salvador, one of the most notorious in the Western Hemisphere. Without publicly providing evidence, the administration accused each of them of being members of Tren de Aragua, the Venezuelan prison gang it designated a terrorist organization.

In the months since the mass deportation — one of the most consequential in recent history — the Trump administration has released almost no details about the backgrounds of the people it deported, calling them “monsters,” “sick criminals” and the “worst of the worst.” Several news organizations have reported that most of the men did not have criminal records. ProPublica, The Texas Tribune and a team of Venezuelan journalists from Alianza Rebelde Investiga (Rebel Alliance Investigates) and Cazadores de Fake News (Fake News Hunters) went further, finding that the government’s own records showed that it knew the vast majority of the men had not been convicted of violent crimes in the U.S. We also searched records in South America and found that only a few had committed violent crimes abroad.

Now, a case-by-case examination of each of the deportees, along with interviews with their lawyers and family members, reveals another jarring reality: Most of the men were not hiding from federal authorities but were instead moving through the nation’s immigration system. They were either in the middle of their cases, which normally should have protected them from deportation, or they had already been ordered deported and should have first been given the option to be sent back to a country they chose.

Like Ramos, more than 50 of the men had used the government app called CBP One to make an appointment with border officials to try to enter the country. Others had crossed illegally and then surrendered to border agents, often the first step in seeking asylum in immigration court.

According to our analysis, almost half of the men were deported even though their cases hadn’t been decided yet. More than 60 of them had pending asylum claims, including several who were only days away from a hearing where a judge could have ruled on whether they would be allowed to stay. Judges or federal officials had issued deportation orders for about 100 of the men, and a handful had even agreed to pay their own way home. Others, like Ramos, had spent their entire time in the U.S. in detention. They had no opportunity to commit crimes in the U.S.

Meanwhile, many of those who were allowed into the country had been appearing at their court hearings and immigration check-ins. At least nine had been granted temporary protected status, which gives people from countries affected by disasters or other extraordinary conditions permission to live and work in the U.S.

By and large, these were men who had been playing by the rules of the country’s immigration system.

Then, the Trump administration changed the rules.

Rodríguez reviews the video she recorded of her husband before he was sent to CECOT, a maximum-security prison in El Salvador. (Alejandro Bonilla Suárez for ProPublica)

A day before the administration deported the men to El Salvador, Trump invoked an obscure 18th-century law called the Alien Enemies Act and declared that Tren de Aragua was invading the country. Administration officials argued that the declaration authorized them to take extraordinary measures to remove anyone it had determined was a member of the gang and to make sure they would not threaten the U.S. again.

Following the March 15 deportations, the Trump administration moved to shut down their pending immigration cases. Since then, more than 95 cases have been dismissed, terminated or otherwise closed by judges, according to our analysis. They disappear from the dockets, some marked as dismissed just hours before a scheduled hearing.

Michelle Brané, who served as a senior Department of Homeland Security official in the Biden administration, said it was “very un-American” to deport people who followed the immigration rules at the time. “You can’t retroactively say that those people were acting illegally and now punish them for that,” she added.

Lawyers for the Venezuelan men have filed several lawsuits against the administration, calling the summary removals from the country a gross violation of their clients’ rights. U.S. District Judge James Boasberg ruled in June that the move deprived the men of their constitutional rights and called their plight Kafkaesque. He wrote that the men “never had any opportunity to challenge the Government’s say-so,” and that they “languish in a foreign prison on flimsy, even frivolous, accusations.”

The government has appealed the ruling.

Meanwhile, Ramos’ mother, Crisálida del Carmen Bastidas de Ramos, waits anxiously for any news about her oldest child. “What is my son thinking? Is my son eating well? Is my son sleeping? Is he cold?”

“Is he alive?”

Rodríguez plays with her son at their home in Venezuela. (Adriana Loureiro Fernández for ProPublica and The Texas Tribune)

Although the Trump administration routinely describes the men as criminals and terrorists, it has not provided evidence to support the claim. Tricia McLaughlin, an assistant secretary at DHS, defended sending them to the Salvadoran prison. “They may not have criminal records in the U.S., beyond breaking our laws to enter the country illegally,” she said in a statement, “but many of these illegal aliens are far from innocent.”

For example, she said one of the TPS holders sent to El Salvador admitted he had previously been convicted of murder. We obtained Venezuelan court records confirming that the man had been convicted of murder and was sentenced to 15 years in prison. McLaughlin said his case proved that immigrants had been granted status in the U.S. under Biden without being thoroughly vetted. Three former DHS officials from the Biden administration said the vetting process has remained standard across administrations, including during the first Trump term, and that many governments do not share criminal background histories with U.S. officials.

Trump has moved to strip TPS protections from hundreds of thousands of people.

Ramos, McLaughlin said, was a terrorist who was flagged as a Tren de Aragua member in a law enforcement database at his CBP One appointment. His family denies he has anything to do with the gang. His lawyers said in court records that U.S. authorities wrongly identified him as a gang member based on his tattoos and an “unsubstantiated” report from Panamanian officials. A spokesperson for the Panamanian security ministry said he could not locate any documents about Ramos.

At least 163 men who were deported had tattoos, we found. Law enforcement officials in the U.S., Colombia, Chile and Venezuela with expertise in the Tren de Aragua told us that tattoos are not an indicator of gang membership.

Albert Jesús Rodríguez Parra had applied for asylum and worked at Chicago’s Wrigley Field before he was detained in November. He was deported to El Salvador in March, where he remains imprisoned. (Courtesy of the Cook County public defender’s office in Chicago)

Days before Albert Jesús Rodríguez Parra was whisked away, he appeared in immigration court and tried to convince a judge that his tattoos did not mean he was part of the gang.

He had come to the U.S. with a brother in 2023, applied for asylum and settled in Chicago. He told his mother that it was difficult to find work, but that he’d gotten an electric razor, learned to cut hair and offered trims on the street. In January 2024, he was arrested at a Walmart in the Chicago suburbs for shoplifting about $1,000 worth of food, laundry detergent, shampoo and other items. He pleaded guilty to a misdemeanor, served a two-day jail sentence and tried to move on.

Rodríguez Parra, 28, got a job working in concessions at Wrigley Field, moved in with his girlfriend and sent money home to his mother to buy a refrigerator and a stove. Then, in November, Immigration and Customs Enforcement agents picked him up at his apartment. McLaughlin said he was in the country illegally and was a Tren de Aragua member. Rodríguez Parra continued his asylum case from immigration detention in Indiana.

He told his family he believed he would be released soon. But in early March, he was transferred to a jail in Missouri, then to one in Central Texas, then another in Laredo, in South Texas, each move bringing him closer to the border. Uncertainty began creeping into his calls home.

Despite the transfers, Rodríguez Parra’s attorney, Cruz Rodriguez, who works for a small immigration unit at the Cook County public defender’s office in Chicago, said he was confident in the merits of the asylum case. He felt optimistic when he logged into his client’s virtual bond hearing before Judge Eva Saltzman on March 10.

At the hearing, a government attorney asked Rodríguez Parra about a TikTok video he’d made of himself dancing to a popular audio clip of someone shouting, “Te va agarrar el Tren de Aragua,” which means, “The Tren de Aragua is going to get you.” Close to 60,000 users on TikTok have shared the clip.

Rodríguez Parra scoffed at the notion that a real gang member would make such a video. “It would be like they were outing themselves,” he said in Spanish. The audio clip has been used by Venezuelans to ridicule the widespread suggestion that everyone from the country is a gangster.

The government attorney also asked Rodríguez Parra about the tattoos that covered his neck, arms and chest — a rose, a wolf, carnival masks and an angel holding a gun. “In my country, it’s very normal to have tattoos,” he responded. “Each one represents a story about my life.”

He was also questioned about a suspected Tren de Aragua gang member who had crossed the border at the same time as him. Rodríguez Parra said he did not know the man.

At the end of the hearing, he pleaded with the judge to free him on bond. “I’m a good person,” he told her. “If I was in a gang, I wouldn’t have applied for asylum. I came fleeing my country.”

Saltzman denied Rodríguez Parra’s request, citing his shoplifting conviction. But she offered him a sliver of hope, reminding him that his final hearing was just 10 days away. If she granted him asylum, he’d be released and could continue his life in the U.S.

“You’re not facing a particularly lengthy detention without a bond,” she told him.

Five days later, he was gone. At what was supposed to be his final asylum hearing on March 20, Rodríguez Parra’s lawyer sounded despondent. He had barely slept. He didn’t know where the authorities had taken his client, but he’d seen a video posted online of shackled men being frog-marched into CECOT. The attorney had visited El Salvador and was aware of that country’s reputation for mistreating prisoners. He feared his client would face a similar fate.

He felt powerless. At the hearing, he turned to the government lawyer on the call. “For his family’s sake,” he told her, “would you happen to know what country he was sent to?”

The government’s lawyer had little to say.

“I’m operating under the same information as you,” she responded. “I have no further information to provide.”

Design and development by Anna Donlan and Allen Tan of ProPublica. Agnel Philip of ProPublica contributed data reporting. Gabriel Sandoval of ProPublica contributed research. Adriana Núnez and Carlos Centeno contributed reporting.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by .

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/he-came-to-the-u-s-to-support-his-sick-child-he-was-detained-then-he-disappeared/feed/ 0 545073
Iman Abid on the Economy of Genocide, Victor Pickard on Paramount Settlement https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/iman-abid-on-the-economy-of-genocide-victor-pickard-on-paramount-settlement/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/iman-abid-on-the-economy-of-genocide-victor-pickard-on-paramount-settlement/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 15:11:07 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046570  

Right-click here to download this episode (“Save link as…”).

 

Palestinian Youth Movement and Jewish Voice for Peace protesters at the headquarters of Maersk, a shipping firm that helps support the Gaza genocide.

Truthout (6/11/25)

This week on CounterSpin: The US official stance about the UN is, basically, they’re not the boss of us. But: If it looks like they can make hay with it, then sure. That’s why Secretary of State Marco Rubio is declaring “sanctions” against Francesca Albanese, the UN special rapporteur for the West Bank and Gaza, following an unsuccessful pressure campaign to force the UN to remove her from her post. Albanese has long been clear in calling on the international community to halt Israel’s genocide of Palestinians—but the thing that broke US warmongers was her naming in a recent report of corporations that are profiting from that genocide. We’ll talk about why talking about profiteering is so key with Iman Abid, director of advocacy and organizing at the US Campaign for Palestinian Rights.

 

CBS News covering the 2024 Republican convention

New York Times (7/2/25)

Also on the show, and to the point: Victor Pickard will join us to talk about corporate actions that make sense as business deals—but, because this country has chosen to run the democratic lifeblood of journalism as just another business, affect everyone relying on news media to tell us about the world. Victor Pickard is professor of media policy and political economy at the University of Pennsylvania’s Annenberg School for Communication, where he codirects the Media, Inequality & Change Center. He’s the author, most recently, of Democracy Without Journalism? from Oxford University press.

 


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Fairness & Accuracy In Reporting.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/iman-abid-on-the-economy-of-genocide-victor-pickard-on-paramount-settlement/feed/ 0 545037
Zohran Mubarak: The Battle Begins https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/zohran-mubarak-the-battle-begins/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/zohran-mubarak-the-battle-begins/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 14:55:17 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159996 Saint Sun — a myth One day, a young prince died in the city of Unch in the Indian subcontinent. The boy had had great respect and love for a Shia Ismaili Pir Shams. (Pir means saint and Shams means Sun – Saint Sun.) The king was devastated; he ordered his magistrates and jurists to get […]

The post Zohran Mubarak: The Battle Begins first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

Saint Sun — a myth

One day, a young prince died in the city of Unch in the Indian subcontinent. The boy had had great respect and love for a Shia Ismaili Pir Shams. (Pir means saint and Shams means Sun – Saint Sun.) The king was devastated; he ordered his magistrates and jurists to get a descendant of the Prophet Muhammad because only he could revive the prince. Failure to do so would result in severe punishment for them and their families. They went to Pir Shams and begged him to come because otherwise they would be victims of the king’s wrath.

Pir Shams came to the palace and, without invoking Allah, held the prince by arm who then came back to life. The prince recognized Pir Shams and they both left the palace. The nonbelievers were stunned. They shamed Pir Shams and charged him with acting like God. Pir Shams and the boy left the town. When it dawned upon Pir Shams, while he was meditating, that he had played the role of God, he removed his skin from head to toe as penalty. He, with the boy, returned to the city and gave his skin to the people.

Pir Shams and the boy were hungry but no one wanted to give or sell them food. Eventually, Pir Shams was able to get raw mutton, but was unable to get fire to cook it, so he prompted the Sun to descend and thus was able to cook the mutton.

The people were terrified by the heat and started burning, and they thought the Day of Judgement had arrived.

Once the mutton was cooked, the Sun went back to its celestial abode.

(This Ismaili saint Pir Shams — died 1356 CE — should not be confused with Mawlana Rumi’s spiritual mentor Shams Tabrizi — 1185–1248 CE).

The People’s Sun — today’s reality

  • 350,000 people are homeless in NYC as of April 2025.
  • 53% of New Yorkers’ debt has gone up due to high food costs. The number is 62% for New Yorkers, with children, who are under more debt.
  • $4200 is the rent New Yorkers pay for 1 bedroom apartment — the highest in the country.
  • 123 billionaires with total net worth of $759 billion belong to NYC, the most of any city in the world.

Prior to losing the Democratic primary for NYC mayor in June 2025, Andrew Cuomo had been governor of New York state from 2011 to 2021. He was accused of cheating and screwing immigrant workers who cleaned the subways during the COVID 19 pandemic.

The people of New York City, when Cuomo was governor, suffered many cuts in Medicaid, public schools weren’t provided enough money because of austerity measures, and it was the same with the New York City’s subway system.

Corruption, inequality, injustice, police brutality, unemployment, underpaid, overworked, frustrated New Yorkers screamed enough is enough. They brought Zohran (means Sun) on the NYC mayoral platform making so many people happy. Zohran Kwame Mamdani, a member of the Democratic Socialists of America and the Democratic Party was also supported by the Working Families Party. He won the primary.

Zohran Mubarak

Zohran Mubarak to the US ruling class.

The word “mubarak” is of Arabic origin but is also used in many non-Arab countries and means “auspicious, blessed, lucky propitious, happy.” It is used in greetings such as Eid Mubarak,” “Diwali Mubarak,” Christmas Mubarak,” Wedding Mubarak,” “Ramzan Mubarak,” etc.

Gheraoe-d (Encircled or Besieged)

We were gheraoed by every Age,
No one ever came to our rescue!
Then, one day, we gheraoed them,
And every tyrant shouted his rage.
No reason to worry:
We shall rise soon despite the pain.
And every city which is now dark
Will see the light once again.

Revolutionary Pakistani poet Habib Jalib- Tariq Ali’s translation.

Jalib wrote the poem in solidarity with Indian workers.

The rise of a people’s Sun burned the tyrants badly. The tyrants — the elites, racists, and moneyed class of the Democratic Party and the Republican Party; the Israeli Lobby; Israeli assets; Israeli agents; the billionaires; the media moguls; corporate bosses; Modi’s Hindutva supporters; and so many others shouted their rage.

Mamdani’s parents Mira Nair, a filmmaker, and Mehmood Mamdani, an academic, are Indians. So why are Modi’s supporters opposing Mamdani? Well, answering a question, Mamdani uttered the truth: like Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi is a “war criminal” too.

Mamdani besieged

A 100% Communist Lunatic” is what President Donald Trump called Mamdani.

Trump is 50% wrong, Mamdani is not a communist otherwise he would have said: “Let’s nationalize all industries; tech companies; universities; pharmaceutical companies; all financial institutes, including banks; Trump Towers, and so on and make common people’s life easy and give each family a house, free education, free healthcare, 10 hour work week, etc.”

Trump is 50% correct on the lunatic thing. Mamdani is a lunatic because:

  • Only a lunatic would think about providing free bus service for the common people.
  • Only a lunatic would criticize the 24/7/365 Israeli genocide of Palestinians, and risk losing easy-election-campaign money and support from the Israel Lobby to win the New York Mayor’s election with free trips to Israel.
  • Only a lunatic like Mamdani would refuse to be an Israeli asset. He could have become one of the Israeli assets like Hillary Clinton, Donald Trump, Joe Biden, Nancy Pelosi, Andrew Cuomo, Kamala Harris, Hakeem Jeffries, and uncountable others in the Congress, US government, state governments, news media, universities, corporations, armed forces, and so many other organizations. Don’t be surprised, Israel is over the entire US body — like an end-of-life stage of cancer. Only people like Mamdani can save this sick state of affairs and people like Kshama Sawant and her Workers Strike Back can make it alive again.

In the first week of November 2026, Trump will most probably see 100% lunatic in the US House with the name of Kshama Sawant. The US desperately needs her, and many more like her.

“Zohran the Destroyer” is the title given by Fox TV’ reporter. Zohran is the destroyer, indeed. New York City is stinking with the Farts Of Xenophobes which he is going to eliminate and make it a nice smelling city.

Civilised people in America don’t eat like this,” says US House representative Brandon Gill (Republican from Texas). He was criticizing Mamdani for eating with hands rather than fork, knife, and spoon. A photo of Gill’s father-in-law Dinesh D’Souza, of Indian origin had been posted eating with his hands.

The “civilized people” use hands to accumulate all the money for themselves, to send arms and ammunition to Israel and other countries to kill people, to sign bills cutting Medicaid, etc., and so on.

Many more such criticisms have been hurled, suffice it to say much hatred has been spewed against Mamdani.

Interrogation by US-based Israeli agents

“Do you recognize Israel as a state? Does it have a right to exist?” and six other questions asked by Politico’s Jason Beeferman and Jeff Coltin were all related to Israel and antisemitism.

“Does the State of Israel have the right to exist?” was the question Steven Colbert asked on his show.

“The first foreign visit by a mayor of New York is always considered significant. Where would you go first?” was one of the questions asked by one of the moderators David Ushery during the June 4, 2025, NBC Democratic mayoral primary debate.

Mamdani’s reply: “I would stay in New York City. My plans are to address New Yorkers across the five Burroughs and focus on that.”

“Mr. Mamdani, can I just jump in? Would you visit Israel as mayor?” was the question by the Israeli agent Melissa Russo, pretending to be another moderator, who just couldn’t accept Mamdani’s concern for New Yorkers.

Mamdani’s reply: “I’ve said in a UJA [United Jewish Appeal? – Federation of Jewish Philanthropies of New York, Inc.] questionnaire that I believe that you need not travel to Israel to stand up for Jewish New Yorkers. And that is what I will be doing as the mayor. I’ll be standing up for Jewish New Yorkers and I’ll be meeting them wherever they are across the five Burroughs, whether that’s in their synagogues and temples or at their homes or at the subway platform because ultimately we need to focus on delivering on their concerns.”

Agent Russo was mad: “Answer just yes or no. Do you believe in a Jewish state of Israel?”

Mamdani: “I believe Israel has the right to exist …”

Agent Russo jumped in: “As a Jewish state?”

Mamdani:: “As a state with equal rights.”

Now Mamdani was attacked by Cuomo, an Israeli asset running for NYC mayor. Watch the entire video of this exchange after 1:56 here.

Israel has occupied Palestine and has been existing, expanding, and executing Palestinians regularly. So the question wasn’t: As a mayor, will you stop the genocide and end Palestinians’ misery?

The battle begins

All the forces arrayed against Mamdani are going to use full power with all means, right or wrong, available at their disposal to defeat Mamdani in the election. They’ll go to any extreme because, this time it’s a people’s candidate and not a billionaires’ candidate — which is never acceptable in the US.

Mamdani should counter his opponents as he did during the June 12 second and final debate. When Cuomo, whose PACs received $25 million from billionaires, went after Mamdani’s inexperience, Mamdani shot back:

“To Mr. Cuomo, I have never had to resign in disgrace, I’ve never cut medicaid, I’ve never stolen 100s of millions of dollars from the MTA, I’ve never hounded the 13 women who have credibly accused me of sexual harassment, I’ve never sued for their gynecological records, and I have not done those things because I am not you Mr. Cuomo. And further more the name is Mamdani, m-a-m-d-a-n-i, learn to get it right.”

Mamdani has a once in the US lifetime chance to change things, if not in the country, then at least in the most populated city.

The country’s major newspaper, the New York Times, during the 2024 presidential election, refused to publish hacked information on Donald Trump and his VP candidate JD Vance, but in case of Mamdani, it didn’t hold off on publishing hacked information, supplied by one “who opposes affirmative action and writes often about I.Q. and race.” The info was about Mamdani’s 2009 college admission form. The paper had stopped endorsing any candidates except presidential but it criticized Mamdani in an editorial which “effectively served as an anti-endorsement,” Gabe Whisnant noted in Newsweek.

Mamdani should always remember his middle name Kwame, named after independent Ghana’s first Prime Minister and then President Dr. Kwame Nkrumah, “Pan-Africanist visionary” who was voted as “Africa’s Man of the Millennium.” By the grace of Uncle Sam, in the form of President Lyndon B. Johnson, Nkrumah was overthrown, like many others before and after him, while he was on a state visit to China and Vietnam in February 1966.

Nkrumah wrote in his book Dark Days in Ghana what methods the US uses in ousting foreign leaders:

“It has been one of the tasks of the CIA and other similar organizations to discover … potential quislings and traitors in our midst, and to encourage them, by bribery and the promise of political power, to destroy the constitutional government of their countries.”

Former Reps. Cori Bush of Missouri and Jamaal Bowman of New York lost in 2024 when the AIPAC (American Israel Political Action Committee) poured in $20 million to help their opponents. Bush and Bowman had called for ceasefire in Gaza.

This happens regularly to many candidates. Cynthia McKinney and Earl Hilliard were the victims too. More than two decades back, Alexander Cockburn pointed out,

“Don’t you think that if Arab-American groups or African-American groups targeted an incumbent white liberal, maybe Jewish, congressperson, and shipped in money by the truckload to oust the incumbent, the rafters would shake with bellows of outrage.”

Mamdani should also stay away from the “Black Misleadership Class,” as Black Agenda Report constantly reminds us.

Professor Hamid Dabashi has a warning too:

“All the powers of predatory capitalism, militarised fascism and genocidal Zionism have entered into a holy alliance to exorcise this spectre.”

Don’t be Obama or Sanders

As President, Barack Obama had a great opportunity to change the course of ruthless capitalism that it has been on for many decades. He and his advisors instead strengthened those very forces who were responsible for the 2007-2008 financial crisis by bailing them out.

But the Obama team did not rescue the victims of those monster-sized companies: more than 16% of the homeowners lost their houses via foreclosure or some other method, that is, approximately ten million families were forced to vacate their houses.

Almost all the criminal bankers went scot-free.

Multimillionaire Obama is a system’s man who is making millions and is ever ready to protect it when he senses even slight danger as he did it in 2020 when it seemed Bernie Sanders might overtake Joe Biden.

Bernie Sanders, an independent (but works with the Democratic Party), had twice, in 2016 and 2020, a chance to form a third party when he lost the presidential candidacy to Hillary Clinton and Joe Biden, respectively. His supporters were crazy for him and he could have changed the course of history. But no, he betrayed his cause and his supporters, and supported Hillary and Biden, instead.

So Zohran, don’t be like Obama or Sanders. If the anti-people-forces succeed in derailing your pursuit, join hands with Kshama Sawant and Jill Stein to form a third party. If Elon Musk with his hundreds of billions could make a third party, America Party, you could do too with your millions of voters, as the following video of yours acknowledges the voting power of people. Even if you’re elected, the Israel Lobby, the New York Governor Kathy Hochul, and all others will try to make your victory as miserable as they can as Cuomo had done with former mayor Bill de Blasio during his 2014 – 2021 rule.

Let the battle begin. May the good for the people triumph this time.

The post Zohran Mubarak: The Battle Begins first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by B.R. Gowani.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/zohran-mubarak-the-battle-begins/feed/ 0 545019
CBP Agents Can Have Gang Tattoos — as Long as They Cover Them Up #politics #trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/cbp-agents-can-have-gang-tattoos-as-long-as-they-cover-them-up-politics-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/cbp-agents-can-have-gang-tattoos-as-long-as-they-cover-them-up-politics-trump/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 14:33:36 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=4d2c85f5581c37ccdfa098582403b40e
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/cbp-agents-can-have-gang-tattoos-as-long-as-they-cover-them-up-politics-trump/feed/ 0 545035
Epstein Survivor Calls for Accountability: Release the Files, End Impunity for Rich & Powerful Abusers https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/epstein-survivor-calls-for-accountability-release-the-files-end-impunity-for-rich-powerful-abusers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/epstein-survivor-calls-for-accountability-release-the-files-end-impunity-for-rich-powerful-abusers/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 12:29:39 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=0d8d8a7a26201e017abc122f44915824 Seg2 survivor2

We speak to a survivor of sexual abuse perpetrated by Jeffrey Epstein and enabled by his partner Ghislaine Maxwell. Teresa Helm was sexually assaulted by Epstein at what she was told was a job interview in the early 2000s. She now works as the survivor services coordinator for the National Center on Sexual Exploitation and joins many voices calling for the release of federal documents pertaining to Epstein’s criminal case, though Helm emphasizes that the goal of their release must be to promote accountability and justice for victims, not as a form of political score-settling. “I really urge everyone to focus their commitment, their intention, all this time, effort and energy onto … these survivors and their healing,” says Helm. “We’re talking about people’s lives, and it should not be weaponized either way, in any administration.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/epstein-survivor-calls-for-accountability-release-the-files-end-impunity-for-rich-powerful-abusers/feed/ 0 545027
The Most Interesting Email I Ever Received: Remembering the Incredible Life of DIY Geneticist Jill Viles https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/the-most-interesting-email-i-ever-received-remembering-the-incredible-life-of-diy-geneticist-jill-viles/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/the-most-interesting-email-i-ever-received-remembering-the-incredible-life-of-diy-geneticist-jill-viles/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/remembering-jill-viles-diy-geneticist-muscular-dystrophy-david-espstein by David Epstein

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

This article was adapted from David Epstein’s Substack newsletter, “Range Widely,” and references the story “The DIY Scientist, the Olympian, and the Mutated Gene” that he wrote for ProPublica in 2016. That story also became an episode of “This American Life.”

Jill Dopf Viles — self-taught genetic detective, the central figure in the most interesting story I’ve ever reported and my friend — passed away last month in Gowrie, Iowa, at 50.

I’m heartbroken that Jill did not live to see the publication of her book — “Manufacturing My Miracle: One Woman’s Quest to Create Her Personalized Gene Therapy — which came out last week. I know how much she treasured the fact that she would soon be able to call herself “author.”

Here is a paragraph from her book:

“Every gain I’d made in learning more about my genetic disease had involved some type of deception — to do my family’s underground blood draw in 1996 required that phlebotomy supplies be lifted from a hospital and a nurse secretly visit our home; gaining journalist David Epstein’s interest began with a wild exaggeration in my email subject line: ‘Woman with muscular dystrophy, Olympic Medalist—same mutation’; and I’d adopted the lexicon of a research scientist to gain a client rate for Priscilla’s genetic testing (the cost for clients was half what was charged to individual patients).”

If I was deceived, I’m grateful for it. In that paragraph, Jill is describing just a bit of the effort that went into figuring out that she had a rare form of muscular dystrophy called Emery-Dreifuss, which causes muscle wasting, and also an even rarer form of partial lipodystrophy, which causes fat to vanish from certain parts of the body. Jill had been told for years that she didn’t have either of these, never mind both.

After my first book, “The Sports Gene,” came out in 2013, I was on “Good Morning America” talking about genetics, and Jill happened to be within earshot of her TV. “I thought, oh, this is divine providence,” Jill later told me. So she sent me that email with the provocative subject line. She followed up by sending me a batch of family photos and a bound packet outlining her theory: that she and Canadian sprinter Priscilla Lopes-Schliep — bronze medalist in the 100-meter hurdles at the 2008 Olympics — shared a genetic mutation.

On the face of it, this seemed ridiculous. One could hardly find a picture of two more different women. Take a look at this page from the packet Jill sent me:

The packet outlined in granular detail why Jill thought, just from looking at pictures of Priscilla, that the two women shared a genetic mutation that caused the same fat wasting, but because Priscilla didn’t also have muscle wasting — quite the contrary — her body had found some way to “go around” muscular dystrophy.

If Jill was right, she thought, perhaps scientists could study both of them and figure out how to help people with muscles like Jill’s develop muscles a little closer to Priscilla’s end of the human physique spectrum. Jill was sharing all this with me because she wasn’t sure how best to contact Priscilla and hoped I would facilitate an introduction.

Jill’s hypothesis struck me as unlikely, to say the least. But her presentation in the packet was so interesting, and her knowledge of the underlying genetics and physiology so thorough, that I felt her idea deserved a hearing. I reached out to Priscilla; she agreed to meet Jill, and after comparing body parts in a hotel lobby, Jill convinced her to get a genetic test. Long story short, Jill turned out to be right. She and Priscilla had a mutation in the same gene, albeit at neighboring locations.

The discovery led Priscilla to get urgent care for a serious health condition that had previously been overlooked because of her obvious fitness. Jill and I shared this story in an episode of “This American Life” in 2016 — which was rerun last week in her honor.

After that story ran, Jill’s genome became the subject of research, exactly as she’d hoped. Today, in a lab in Iowa, there are fruit flies known as “Jill” flies, because they have been engineered to carry her same mutation. As expected, Jill flies have severely limited mobility. But just recently, a scientist conducted a genetic experiment in which she increased the production of a particular protein in the Jill flies. Suddenly, they began to move like normal fruit flies.

The breadth of life contained in Jill’s new book is incredible.

She was a child the first time she heard a doctor discussing her own death with her mother. The indignities of adolescence and young adulthood that she endured were legion, starting with spontaneous falls in school, followed by kids looping their fingers around her arms and legs and asking if her mother fed her.

Jill’s condition accelerated with puberty, so the bodily changes that are confusing for any teenager were absolutely harrowing for her. Almost overnight she lost the ability to do things she loved, like skate or ride a bike.

At one point in her early teen years, a doctor ordered pictures of Jill’s posture, which forced her into a strange and humiliating photo session that hadn’t been properly explained beforehand:

“I had seen these photos before — a stark, frozen moment of a patient’s greatest vulnerability, the body positioned in a way nature and the photographer dictate, all except for the eyes. The eyes cannot be manipulated or coaxed. It is often said that the eyes are the windows to the soul. Maybe that is why black bars are printed over the eyes of the patient. Perhaps this is done to protect the patient’s anonymity, but I wonder if it isn’t really done to shield the peering eyes of the medical community from the humanity before them.”

In college, when Jill rushed a sorority, she couldn’t keep up with fellow pledges as they walked across campus. When a man who had been following the group saw Jill lag behind, he crept up and exposed himself to her. “I had been targeted because I was weak,” Jill writes. “I had assumed the plight of the injured gazelle, the one separated from the herd with a lame leg. … Any normal eighteen-year-old would bolt for safety, but I remained glued in place, the shame of my predicament filling every cell of my being. I was trapped alongside a simple street curb, something I couldn’t climb, no matter my desperate need to get away.”

But even more powerful in “Manufacturing My Miracle” than the candid humiliations are the scenes of family, love and hope.

Jill’s wry humor comes through when she writes about dating. At one point she used a Match.com profile to come up with the estimate that at least 1% of men are open to dating a woman with a disability. In typical Jill fashion, rather than lamenting the other 99%, she was thrilled that this meant that if she got her profile in front of enough men, she could have a new date every week of the year.

Jill eventually met Jeremy, the man she would marry. She writes about aspects of their relationship with such tenderness that I frequently paused after a passage just to sit and think about her words for a few moments. “I recalled our first weeks of dating when Jeremy made a heartfelt observation,” Jill writes. “Previously, as a single man, he often went an entire weekend without saying even one word aloud. It was such a contrast to the way I lived my life. I was known to strike up a conversation with the caller of a misdialed number, banter with strangers in a bookstore, or chat freely with the checkout clerk at the grocery store.”

In their second month of dating, Jill and Jeremy attended the gigantic Iowa State Fair. Here’s how Jill remembered it:

“I lived ten years in a single night, clutching carnival booty tightly to my chest as Jeremy walked up and down the rows of carnival games, taking entirely too long to decide which to go for. ‘What’s taking you so long?’ I asked.

‘I’m trying to find one you can play,’ he said.

My eyes filled with tears.”

After our “This American Life” segment came out in 2016, Jill became a bit of a celebrity among people struggling to figure out their own mysterious illnesses.

She developed into a sort of clearinghouse for people with undiagnosed muscle conditions seeking help. She kept in constant touch with a man in rural Pakistan who sent her a video of his struggle to rise from his knees following daily prayers at a local mosque. She navigated immense cultural and logistical barriers to help him get a genetic test. “She was a worldwide person,” her mother, Mary, told me recently, “just out of her little office in Gowrie, Iowa.”

Jill became so fluent in genetics that she was perceived as a scientist when she called labs, lab supply companies or pharmaceutical companies. Toward the end of her life, that fluency allowed her to obtain an experimental gene therapy that isn’t actually available for nonresearch purposes. She knew the drug was both promising and potentially deadly, and with a loving husband and college student son in mind, she was hesitant. “I no longer had a fear of death,” Jill writes in her book, “but this did not imply that I wanted to die. My wish was the opposite, but without a life partner and a child, I wouldn’t need to consider anyone’s viewpoint but my own.”

As always, she did consider others, and at the time of her death she had not gone through with this final experiment.

In April, Jill and Jeremy drove to Chicago to attend a wedding. Mary shared photos with me, and it’s the same Jill I began talking to in 2013: dressed impeccably, every strand of blond hair in its right place. She took great care and pride in her appearance. Looking at the pictures, it is extremely hard to imagine that Jill was less than two months away from dying.

Her brother Aaron, afflicted with the same condition, had passed away in 2019. Four of the five siblings inherited the mutation, though the disease severity differed — likely moderated by other parts of the genome. In “Manufacturing My Miracle,” Jill writes of the difficult decision regarding whether or not to have a child, given the 50-50 chance of passing down her mutation. Her son, Martin, did not inherit the mutation.

Shortly before the “This American Life” episode ran, Jill got nervous and wondered if we should hit pause on it. She worried that listeners would only focus on her decision to have a child and criticize her for being selfish. We talked for hours about the potential outcomes. Jill and I had been in touch for three years by that time, and we were going to stick together as friends no matter what criticism came. She decided we should forge ahead. Fortunately, the response was the most overwhelmingly positive of any story I’ve ever been involved with.

Jill and I met up in Chicago after that so I could watch her give an invited lecture. We kept in touch over the years. Sometimes we went months without talking before a burst of calls back and forth.

By this spring, it had been an unusually long while since we last talked. We emailed, but no phone calls. Mary told me that Jill had recently bought a new dress that she planned to wear when giving talks about her book. At a visitation before the funeral, she’ll be wearing her book dress.

Mary added that, a few weeks before Jill passed, she caught pneumonia and never recovered. Mary told me her voice was weak. “I kept telling her to call you,” Mary said. “But she kept saying: ‘I want my voice to be stronger. I want my voice to be stronger before I call David.’”

I’m crestfallen that I didn’t hear from her again, but I think her voice was plenty strong.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by David Epstein.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/the-most-interesting-email-i-ever-received-remembering-the-incredible-life-of-diy-geneticist-jill-viles/feed/ 0 545001
The USDA Wouldn’t Let Her Give Up Her House When She Couldn’t Pay Her Mortgage. Instead, It Crushed Her With Debt. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/the-usda-wouldnt-let-her-give-up-her-house-when-she-couldnt-pay-her-mortgage-instead-it-crushed-her-with-debt/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/the-usda-wouldnt-let-her-give-up-her-house-when-she-couldnt-pay-her-mortgage-instead-it-crushed-her-with-debt/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/usda-maine-foreclosures-rural-homeowners by Sawyer Loftus, Bangor Daily News

This article was produced for ProPublica’s Local Reporting Network in partnership with The Bangor Daily News. Sign up for Dispatches to get stories like this one as soon as they are published.

Off a two-lane stretch of U.S. Route 1 in rural Caribou, Maine, sits a white ranch-style house that’s been consumed by weeds and vines.

The house was once the fulfillment of a dream. The owner had purchased it in 2006 through a federal mortgage program designed specifically for people like her: impoverished, first-time homeowners who live in the most rural parts of the United States. The loan, which came directly from the U.S. Department of Agriculture, required no down payment.

But things started going wrong from the day she moved in. First, the basement flooded. Then the furnace stopped working. As major repair costs accumulated over the next six years, the woman’s health deteriorated until she was forced to leave her job as a manager at Kmart. Her disability check was not enough to cover medical expenses and the upkeep required for the house — let alone the $855 monthly mortgage.

So in 2012 she drove to a USDA office 20 miles away and tried to give the house back. She said staff there would not accept her keys, telling her instead to call a toll-free number for help, as agency protocol requires. She left a message and did not hear back. She stopped paying her mortgage and moved out.

Her dream home sat abandoned for more than a decade.

USDA guidance says the agency should act quickly when borrowers fall behind on payments “to minimize any potential loss to the Government and to the borrower.” A prompt sale keeps the government from having to pay the legal and administrative costs associated with foreclosure down the road and may protect the borrower from incurring a major blemish on their credit history.

But that did not happen. Rather, 13 years passed before a sheriff’s deputy knocked on the door of the woman’s public housing apartment in May and served her with foreclosure papers on the now dilapidated ranch home that’s been overtaken by squatters. The government’s delay hurt the value of its investment and left the woman with a bill far greater than the cost of the loan she initially took out — with additional interest and other fees that had accumulated over those years.

The woman, now 68, declined to be interviewed, but her attorney, Tom Cox, said she allowed him to share her experience on the condition that she not be named to protect her privacy.

Since March, the USDA has filed 56 foreclosures in the federal court system against properties purchased with a rural development mortgage, also known as a Section 502 direct loan. All but one were in Maine. The borrowers have been in default for an average of nearly nine years.

As in the case of the Caribou homeowner, the USDA’s delays in those cases have resulted in borrowers racking up more debt because of the interest and fees that piled up in the intervening years, according to a Bangor Daily News and ProPublica examination of the foreclosure cases and interviews with former USDA officials and legal experts.

On average, borrowers in the 55 Maine cases owe $110,000 more than they would have had the agency moved to take possession of the properties when they first defaulted, the Bangor Daily News and ProPublica found. This includes what the USDA calls “preservation and inspection” fees, a broad category on the foreclosure filings that can include home repairs and yard maintenance, among other things.

Borrowers who can’t pay risk having the government garnish their wages or federal benefits such as Social Security. The Caribou woman had her disability checks garnished six times since 2015 to offset her debt before the USDA even foreclosed on her property, according to her lawyer. The best way to keep the government from garnishing federal benefits is to file for bankruptcy, attorneys said.

“It really undermines the concept of giving access to homeownership to a population who might not otherwise have been able to afford it,” said Rhiannon Hampson, former USDA rural development director for Maine who stepped down in January before President Donald Trump was inaugurated. “The irony, with all of these fees piled on, is that they can’t afford to get out of it.”

The recent wave of foreclosure filings in Maine underscores the government’s failure to monitor a mortgage program that since its founding in 1949 has poured tens of billions of tax dollars into giving the poorest Americans a shot at homeownership.

The USDA does not publicly report how often it files foreclosures. U.S. Rep. Chellie Pingree, a Maine Democrat and member of a House appropriations subcommittee overseeing the USDA’s direct loan program, has proposed language in the House agriculture appropriations report for the 2026 fiscal year calling on the agency to regularly report the number of foreclosures and abandoned properties related to the direct loan program. The bill awaits a vote before the full House of Representatives.

The USDA regularly filed foreclosures in Maine prior to the coronavirus pandemic but has rarely done so in recent years, according to Richard H. Broderick Jr., a Maine attorney with whom the agency had contracted to file foreclosures until 2022. Kevin Crosman, the Maine attorney now filing foreclosures on behalf of the USDA, would not comment on why the agency started doing so again.

Reporters visited 12 of the 55 homes in the Bangor Daily News’ core coverage area in May. At least five appeared to be abandoned and in disrepair — with windows boarded up or a sign affixed to the door saying it was being cared for by a New York company — raising doubts that the government will recoup its investments.

The USDA is supposed to take custody of properties purchased with a Section 502 direct loan and begin the foreclosure process when the homeowner becomes incapacitated, dies or has abandoned it, according to the agency’s handbook. Otherwise the properties may languish and lose value.

It really undermines the concept of giving access to homeownership to a population who might not otherwise have been able to afford it.

—Rhiannon Hampson, former USDA rural development director for Maine

Agency guidelines do not specify how soon the government should step in after a loan falls into delinquency, but under federal law, lenders cannot foreclose on a property until borrowers have been in default for 120 days.

Nearly a fifth of the USDA’s 159,208 Section 502 direct loans in its active national portfolio — 30,496 — were delinquent as of March, according to internal agency data obtained by the Bangor Daily News and ProPublica. That rate is double what a 1993 internal agency report said was acceptable. But neither the USDA nor the White House would say why the agency is focusing on foreclosures in Maine. Vermont is the only other state in which the USDA has filed a single foreclosure, according to federal court filings.

The foreclosures started just before Trump’s Justice Department sued the state of Maine in April over its inclusion of transgender athletes in girls’ sports, part of a larger spat between Trump and Maine Gov. Janet Mills. The White House would not say whether the foreclosures are connected in any way to those ongoing conflicts.

The Trump administration is seeking to eliminate the 76-year-old rural homeownership program in the White House’s budget proposal for the 2026 fiscal year. Some of his predecessors, including Barack Obama and George W. Bush, have also sought to cut back the $880 million direct mortgage program, which has bipartisan support in Congress.

A USDA spokesperson said the Trump administration is in the process of reviewing the loans to “understand the magnitude of the problems it has inherited.” The agency noted that in Maine alone, more than 800 properties are considered delinquent and nearly 400 homes are being tracked for foreclosure. The USDA did not respond to additional questions.

“Hopelessly in Debt”

In 2013, months after the Caribou woman had abandoned her property, she received a letter at her new residence from the USDA informing her that she had to pay the government $22,000 in missed mortgage payments and late fees or she’d lose the Caribou home, said Cox, her lawyer. He said she did not pay because she did not want the house anymore. The USDA sent her nearly a dozen letters between 2014 and 2015 claiming foreclosure was imminent, but a decade passed before she was served with foreclosure papers this spring.

A sign on the front door says the property is being maintained by a New York City company, which did not return calls seeking comment. A green tarp stretches across missing sections of the roof. Inside, piles of garbage and feces litter the floor.

The dilapidated state of the house a woman bought with a USDA mortgage in Caribou, Maine (Courtesy of Tom Cox)

A real estate broker who inspected the home in June with Cox estimated the value of the house to be around $40,000, a steep depreciation from the 2006 purchase price of $144,000.

During the time since she abandoned the property, what the woman owes USDA continued to balloon, Cox said.

His client now owes the government $393,463, according to court documents — nearly 10 times what the home is worth. Nearly 60% of that comprises interest that accumulated after she defaulted, as well as $91,304 in “preservation and inspection” fees.

“If the USDA had dealt with this back in 2012, they might have gotten most or all of their money back by selling the home” before it deteriorated, Cox said. “They’re not going to collect it now. It’s a huge waste of government resources and money to let this happen.”

Other USDA borrowers simply continue living in their homes long after they default on their loans, accumulating more debt with each passing year that the government does not move to collect.

It’s a huge waste of government resources and money to let this happen.

—Attorney Tom Cox

Christine Ogden had stopped paying the $465-a-month mortgage for her blue saltbox home in the coastal Maine town of Searsport in 2013, according to court documents. She said she told the USDA at the time to take her home after the agency threatened her with foreclosure if she did not pay.

But it took the government until 2019 to attempt to foreclose upon her property. The case was dismissed in 2020 amid the coronavirus pandemic. Five years later, in April, she received a summons to appear in federal court to start foreclosure proceedings again.

Ogden now owes $203,787 on what had been a $66,200 mortgage, according to court documents. Half of her debt comprises interest that accumulated after she defaulted, as well as other fees she would not have had to pay had the USDA addressed the delinquency sooner, an analysis by the Bangor Daily News and ProPublica found.

Ogden, who has lived rent-free in the house for 12 years, says she is unable to pay the burgeoning debt and does not know what will happen. The foreclosure will hurt her credit, making it harder for her to get another loan or find rental housing, she said.

“I'm 59,” Ogden said. “I’ll be homeless, basically.”

Little Government Oversight

The owners of another property, in Norridgewock in central Maine, also stopped paying their mortgage — and moved out of the house — years before the USDA foreclosed on the home this spring, court records show. The owners have not appeared to live at the property since at least 2014, according to property tax records, and defaulted on their loan in 2019 — but the government did not file for foreclosure until April.

The owners, it turned out, were violating USDA rules by renting out their home. The tenant, who answered the door when a reporter visited in May after the foreclosure was filed in federal court, would not share his name but estimated that he has paid $100,000 in rent to the owners during the 12 years he said he has lived there. USDA guidelines allow borrowers to rent their homes for up to three years, and only under very narrow circumstances.

Properties purchased under the 502 direct loan program are supposed to be the borrower’s permanent residence and not meant to generate income, according to USDA guidelines. Homeowners can rent out their properties only due to certain life events such as if their families outgrow their current home or if they are moving for a job. But the borrower must still pay the mortgage every month.

The USDA says the owners of the Norridgewock home owe the agency $276,191. The homeowners live in Tennessee, according to foreclosure summons and other court records filed this year by the USDA; they did not respond to calls made to phone numbers listed under their names.

USDA staff based in Maine who once were in close touch with borrowers when they ran into financial trouble now have little to no oversight of Section 502 loans. That’s because a major restructuring in the 1990s eliminated many of the county offices that had managed all aspects of the loans and centralized the servicing of these loans to an office in St. Louis, said Leslie Strauss, a senior policy analyst for the Housing Assistance Council, a Washington, D.C.-based nonprofit focused on affordable rural housing.

These changes came on the heels of an internal study in 1991 concluding that centralizing the administration of these loans would result in better service and a lower delinquency rate of about 10%, according to a 1993 report by the U.S. Government Accountability Office. More than three decades later, the delinquency rate for Section 502 direct loans has nearly doubled to 19%.

Hampson, Maine’s former USDA rural development official who now leads economic development for the Gulf of Maine Research Institute, said she had been pushing the agency to allow local staff to regain oversight of borrowers’ financial situations “so that we can go out and monitor what’s going on, so that we aren’t caught by surprise.”

But her effort did not gain traction, Hampson said.

As the foreclosures accumulated in Maine in recent months, the USDA website published an advisory directing struggling Maine borrowers to call the St. Louis office for help. But fewer staff members are available to respond after Trump’s recent cuts to the federal workforce.

As of early May, 1,536 employees — nearly a third of the rural development office — had taken the buyout, according to USDA documents outlining the results of the Trump administration’s two financial incentive offers to quit. Of those, 197 worked in the St. Louis office.

“We can’t afford failure,” Hampson said of the long-delayed foreclosures leading to insurmountable debt. “The onus is on the government to make sure that we’re providing the right kind of safety nets to prevent this sort of thing from happening.”

Michael Shepherd, Sasha Ray and Paula Brewer of BDN contributed reporting. Mariam Elba of ProPublica contributed research.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Sawyer Loftus, Bangor Daily News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/the-usda-wouldnt-let-her-give-up-her-house-when-she-couldnt-pay-her-mortgage-instead-it-crushed-her-with-debt/feed/ 0 545003
Standing Rock was an Indigenous-led movement. Why did Greenpeace take the fall? https://grist.org/project/indigenous/standing-rock-greenpeace-slapp-lawsuit-dakota-access-pipeline-dapl/ https://grist.org/project/indigenous/standing-rock-greenpeace-slapp-lawsuit-dakota-access-pipeline-dapl/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 08:45:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=c442c34ce4d529366cac6a3abf910da5 Loading…

The Kill Step

By

In March 2024, a jury ordered the environmental giant Greenpeace to pay $666 million to the companies behind the Dakota Access pipeline.

The companies argued that Greenpeace was responsible for protests near the Standing Rock Sioux Reservation nearly a decade ago that drew thousands.

But Indigenous leaders, water protectors, activists, and court records agree: Greenpeace played a bit part in the Standing Rock movement, at best.

“They’re trying to point the finger at Greenpeace,” said Honorata Defender, a Standing Rock Sioux tribal member who helped start the movement.

“Because God forbid some Indians think for themselves and make a decision to stand up for themselves and their water and their land.”

Raised fists, one holding a clipping of a plant, as part of a protest against the Dakota Access pipeline. Robyn Beck / AFP via Getty Images
This story is a partnership between Grist and Drilled, a global multimedia reporting project focused on climate accountability.

They called themselves “water protectors” and began protesting on the side of a highway near where construction was approaching the river. Most were Oceti Sakowin — Lakota, Dakota, and Nakota peoples. It was the early days of the #NoDAPL movement, in August 2016, and the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers had just granted a key permit for the Dakota Access pipeline to go under the Missouri River.

The company behind the pipeline, Energy Transfer, had originally considered building it upstream of the twin cities of Bismarck and Mandan in North Dakota, which are mostly populated by white people. But the Army Corps of Engineers rejected that route, in part because it had the potential to harm the cities’ drinking water supply. Instead, the pipeline was rerouted to cross the river just north of the Standing Rock reservation’s own drinking water intake.

To Dave Archambault, then-chairman of the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe, this was a case of environmental racism. He and other tribal leaders were worried, too, that culturally important sites located along the pipeline route could be destroyed.

It was also a matter of sovereignty. Two days after the Army Corps issued that key permit to Energy Transfer for the new route, the tribe sued. They argued that the Army Corps should not allow construction to continue without a deeper review of the route and substantial consultation — a cornerstone of federal Indian law that recognizes the nation-to-nation relationship between tribal governments and the United States.

When small protests began, the corps had still not issued an easement, a legal right that would allow Energy Transfer to build under the river on land that belonged to the U.S. government. However, there was nothing stopping Energy Transfer from building on private land. That’s when the trouble started.

Chairman Archambault was one of more than a dozen people arrested that August for attempting to block Dakota Access pipeline construction, but there was little attention paid by journalists. Online, however, in Indigenous digital spaces, protests were becoming very visible, very quickly. Facebook Live had launched that spring, and water protectors were broadcasting their actions on social media in real time for the world to see and attracting Indigenous peoples from around the country to stand with Standing Rock.

A group of people line up near bulldozers with a few law enforcement officials standing by
Activists protest against the Dakota Access pipeline near the Standing Rock Sioux Reservation in August 2016.
James MacPherson / AP Photo

As more and more water protectors made their way to North Dakota, Achambault realized he would need help. He put out a public call to action, asking people to stand with Standing Rock. He also called Nick Tilsen, an Oglala Lakota organizer who had helped found a collective called the Indigenous Peoples Power Project, or IP3, which offered nonviolent, direct-action trainings to Indigenous peoples working to protect their communities, including from unwanted industrial development.

“The training that we’re talking about is not some crazy training,” said Tilsen, who saw the protests as an extension of the Civil Rights Movement of the 1950s and ‘60s. “Some people think that Martin Luther King and Rosa Parks just one day sat on a bus and launched a movement. But the reality is, they went through training. And that training helped them be disciplined and helped them be effective and helped them change the course of history.”

With protests underway, Tilsen worked with the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe to develop a set of principles for nonviolent direct action — protest actions and acts of civil disobedience meant to disrupt activities. At times, nonviolent direct action involves trespassing or disregarding police orders. The principles were hand-painted on a sign that hung prominently in the growing camp. Among them: “We are nonviolent,” and “Property damage does not get us closer to our goals.”

Tilsen was close with a Greenpeace employee named Cy Wagoner who is Diné and also a member of IP3, and Tilsen said he invited Wagoner to bring Greenpeace to Standing Rock. “We asked them to help train people,” Tilsen recalled. Around the same time, Tom Goldtooth, who is Diné and Dakota, was also urging Greenpeace to come. The executive director of the nonprofit Indigenous Environmental Network, Goldtooth was watching as tensions between police, private security, and water protectors intensified throughout the month. “I’m afraid of escalation,” recalled Goldtooth. “They’re waiting for someone, you know, to wink.”

Like Tilsen, Goldtooth hoped that Greenpeace would reinforce trainings already in progress, and send support for water protectors, such as a solar trailer that could power laptops and cell phones so that broadcasts could continue across social media.

Wagoner put together a proposal and a budget request for Greenpeace, which was approved: About $15,000 would pay for five people from IP3 to go to Standing Rock for two to three weeks. Greenpeace agreed to pay the cohort $125 a day, plus expenses, to conduct trainings, while Wagoner went on his usual Greenpeace salary. They began arriving around the beginning of September.

Meanwhile, the week before Labor Day, Tim Mentz — Standing Rock’s former tribal historic preservation officer and one of the people responsible for reviewing federal projects that may impact historic areas, burial sites, and religious places — began a survey of an area Energy Transfer planned to bulldoze. He was looking to see if there were culturally important sites along the pipeline path.

Standing Rock Sioux Chairman Dave Archambault poses for a photo on the Standing Rock Sioux Reservation in 2016.
James MacPherson / AP Photo

Mentz is a highly respected elder, and the first tribal historic preservation officer in the U.S. thanks to his tireless work to amend the National Historic Preservation Act that created the role — one that is now used by over 200 Indigenous nations

As part of Standing Rock’s lawsuit against the Army Corps filed in July, Mentz had already submitted a statement to the court saying that “destruction of these sites will eventually destroy generations of family connections to these areas of spiritual power.” He added that protecting those sites wasn’t just about the past: It was about the future of the Oceti Sakowin.

“Steps taken to preserve sites like this are important to the survival and recovery of our spiritual traditions,” he wrote. “These sites still retain the ability to mend our people.” 

On a hot, bright day, with permission from the landowner, Mentz and his team drove onto the privately-owned buffalo ranch that included access to the area where Energy Transfer wanted to drill under the river, and Mentz got to work. Over the course of a few days, they documented 27 burial sites and 82 stone features — arranged in circles and other patterns for ceremonial purposes — all along a 2-mile corridor that Energy Transfer planned to dig up. 

On the Friday before Labor Day, he wrote up what he found, including a cluster of stones shaped like the Big Dipper, with a grave site attached to the cup, indicating an important leader. “This is one of the most significant archaeological finds in North Dakota in many years,” he wrote. The tribe’s attorney, who worked for a nonprofit public interest law organization called Earthjustice, filed the coordinates Mentz identified with a North Dakota Court.

The next morning, the Saturday before Labor Day, bulldozers were spotted at the sites Mentz had identified and that the tribe had filed in court. Water protectors rushed to stop them but private security guards stood waiting, and their dogs lunged at the pipeline opponents.

Despite their attempts, Energy Transfer graded the 2-mile corridor Mentz surveyed, digging a foot deep into the earth. “A significant portion of the site we’d surveyed had been cleared,” Mentz wrote in another declaration to court. “I do not believe that the timing of this construction was an accident or coincidence.”

A judge ruled soon after that he didn’t have the power to stop the company from continuing to build on private land. 

However, the images of security dogs attacking pipeline opponents transformed the movement. Recorded by nonprofit news organization Democracy Now!, the dog attacks were broadcast around the world and quickly went viral. People poured in, mushrooming new resistance camps across the prairie and filling them with Indigenous peoples, longtime environmental organizers, and everyday activists moved by the social feeds coming out of Standing Rock. Church members, community groups, and individuals donated money and supplies to keep the camps afloat. A school opened for families with children and kitchens opened to feed the growing number of water protectors.

Nonprofits began to join the fight too, including Tom Goldtooth’s Indigenous Environmental Network, 350.org, Bold Alliance, and Greenpeace.

A large camp on a grassy field with tents, teepees, and other structures
More than a thousand people gather at an encampment near North Dakota’s Standing Rock Sioux Reservation in September 2016. James MacPherson / AP Photo

The story of Standing Rock is relatively well-known from here: The governor of North Dakota called in the National Guard, which joined law enforcement officers from around the U.S. and private security contractors hired by the pipeline company in an effort to disperse protests. For more than six months, water protectors faced off against military-grade armored vehicles, surveillance drones, at least one sniper, police with semi-automatic rifles, a surface-to-air missile launcher, tear gas, rubber bullets, flash-bang grenades, and water cannons deployed in sub-freezing weather.

While a vast majority of water protectors, including Greenpeace employees, abided by the nonviolent, direct-action principles IP3 and the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe posted in camp, not all agreed. Some pipeline opponents set fire to bulldozers and vandalized construction equipment. Some fought back against police, throwing rocks, logs, water bottles, and even Molotov cocktails. 

In February 2017, soon after Donald Trump’s first presidential inauguration, the Army Corps gave the green light for Energy Transfer to begin drilling under the river. By late February, security forces moved in and removed water protectors camped near Standing Rock. Energy Transfer bored a hole underneath the Missouri River for the pipeline to be pushed through, effectively ending the fight.

A protester yells and holds their ground in front of a truck being driven toward them by a private security firm at a worksite for the Dakota Access pipeline Robyn Beck / AFP via Getty Images
Chapter 2

“What the hell is this bullshit?”

In February 2017, as security forces prepared to evict water protectors from their camps, TigerSwan — a private security firm contracted by Energy Transfer — began emailing with the law firm Gibson, Dunn, & Crutcher.

The firm had been representing Energy Transfer as it attempted to convince a federal court to dismiss the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe’s claims against the Army Corps. Gibson, Dunn, & Crutcher would eventually declare victory against Greenpeace in the $666 million lawsuit.

TigerSwan had spent months spying on water protectors by monitoring social media feeds, listening in on radio communications, flying drones, and monitoring camps by helicopter. It sent infiltrators — people pretending to be water protectors — into the anti-pipeline camps to gather information. Founded in 2008 by a former commander of an elite special operations unit known as Delta Force, TigerSwan’s security contractors had cut their teeth during the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq. At Standing Rock, it brought those “war-on-terror” tactics home.  

Files obtained through a public records request reveal that TigerSwan was not only providing the intelligence it collected to law enforcement, but it was also preparing to provide some of the information it gathered on water protectors to the law firm Gibson Dunn, including a set of spreadsheets listing crowdfunding pages, how much each had raised, and who was involved, as well as spreadsheets matching protest actions with individual water protectors, labeled “named conspirators.” The company asked one of its infiltrators to identify what groups pipeline opponents belonged to. And it asked another contractor to send over the makes and models of vehicles that showed up at certain protests.

A man holds a dog as unarmed protesters recoil in fear
Dogs held by private security guards lunge at protestors attempting to stop the bulldozing of land for the Dakota Access pipeline on September 3, 2016.
Robyn Beck / AFP via Getty Images

That record request also revealed a purpose of the communications between TigerSwan and Gibson Dunn: a RICO lawsuit. Gibson Dunn was considering using the Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act, or RICO — a law originally developed to go after the mafia — to target anti-pipeline activists and organizers, and had turned to Energy Transfer’s mercenary private security firm, TigerSwan, to help. TigerSwan did not respond to a request for comment.

Months later, in August of 2017, Deepa Padmanabha, the senior legal advisor for Greenpeace in the U.S., learned that Energy Transfer was suing the environmental organization in federal court, alleging violations of the RICO Act. “This one came as a very big surprise just because the Greenpeace entities had such little involvement with anything associated with Standing Rock,” she said.

Padmanabha called it a SLAPP suit — a Strategic Lawsuit Against Public Participation — which is designed not necessarily to win, but to drain opponents of resources and discourage them from speaking out. SLAPP suits are meant to set an example, and when successful they can be extremely effective.

Gibson Dunn is known to excel at aggressive lawsuits. The firm also has a history of helping big corporations avoid accountability for harming the environment or undermining Indigenous peoples’ rights — including arguing to gut the Indian Child Welfare Act in 2023.

In 2007, banana workers in Nicaragua won a multimillion-dollar lawsuit in the U.S. against the Dole fruit company for poisoning them with a pesticide called DCBP. To combat the win, Dole hired Gibson Dunn. They alleged a vast conspiracy in which the banana workers’ attorney had recruited fake banana workers to go after the fruit company. There were multiple holes in the story that later came to light, but to the American judge who presided over the conspiracy case, it didn’t matter: The money awarded to the workers was taken back.

Dole’s general counsel at the time gave the strategy a name: the “kill step.”

The kill step worked by not only targeting the plaintiffs, but also going after their lawyers, supporters, and media. It destroyed the story being told and replaced it with a new one. Perhaps the most well-known application of the kill step by the law firm was for Chevron. In Ecuador, the homelands of several tribes, including the Cofan, Secoya, and Kichwa, had been contaminated by abandoned pits of oil waste, and in 2011, they won an $18-billion lawsuit, holding the oil giant Chevron accountable. The settlement was reduced by the Ecuadorean Supreme Court to $9.5 billion in 2013. Chevron, in turn, filed a RICO complaint in the U.S. against the lawyers who argued the case, including attorney Steven Donziger, claiming that they had contaminated witnesses, behaved unethically, and maybe even bribed a judge.

There were a number of issues with Chevron’s case, but the company won. Over the next few years, Chevron and Gibson Dunn kept going after Donziger. He ended up on house arrest for two years and in jail for 45 days for a contempt of court charge. Meanwhile, the oil is still contaminating water in the Ecuadorian Amazon — and, like the banana workers in Nicaragua, the Ecuadorians still haven’t been able to collect the settlement awarded to them.

When Padmanabha got word Greenpeace was being sued, she wasn’t just confused as to why the organization was being sued, she was also confused by the timing. Oil was already flowing through the Dakota Access pipeline — the company had gotten what it wanted. But there was a clue: “We were already dealing with another massive SLAPP suit filed in federal court.”

A group of people in suits stand outside a courthouse
Greenpeace representatives talk with reporters on March 19 outside the Morton County Courthouse in Mandan, North Dakota.
Jack Dura / AP Photo

In 2016, before Standing Rock, a law firm called Kasowitz Benson Torres had filed a RICO suit against Greenpeace on behalf of a timber company called Resolute Forest Products. The lawsuit claimed that Greenpeace Canada’s anti-logging campaign, which targeted Resolute, amounted to racketeering, defamation, and tortious interference. In 2017, the Kasowitz law firm filed a second lawsuit against Greenpeace, this time on behalf of Energy Transfer.

“The complaints looked very similar,” said Padmanabha. “It was the same allegations of a RICO conspiracy, and it was the same attempt to scare us into silence and bankrupt us.”

Ultimately, the RICO suit didn’t live long. A federal judge dismissed it in the winter of 2019, writing: “This is far short of what is needed to establish a RICO enterprise.” But Energy Transfer quickly filed a new version of the lawsuit in North Dakota state court, using local conspiracy law to tie the claims together.

Gibson, Dunn, & Crutcher would eventually take over the case. In a statement, a spokesperson for Kasowitz, Shannon O’Reilly, wrote: “The firm spearheaded Energy Transfer’s suits against those who wrongfully targeted these projects, and we are gratified that Energy Transfer ultimately achieved such a successful result.”

In the North Dakota iteration, the lawsuit’s primary targets were Greenpeace, two individual pipeline opponents named Cody Hall and Krystal Two Bulls, and a group called the Red Warrior Society. All were accused of conspiring together to propel the anti-pipeline movement. The company also alleged that the conspiracy was spread throughout Greenpeace-affiliated organizations, including Greenpeace Inc., which carries out U.S. based campaigns; Greenpeace Fund, also based in the U.S., which raises money for certain Greenpeace efforts; and Amsterdam-based Greenpeace International, which licenses out the Greenpeace name to independently operated nonprofits around the world and coordinates some of their activities.

The lawsuit included three buckets of claims. There were on-the-ground, protest-related damages for things like trespassing and destruction of construction equipment. There were defamation claims, alleging that Greenpeace and the other defendants lied by accusing Energy Transfer of deliberately desecrating sacred sites and putting the pipeline on tribal lands, and accusing police and private security of being violent toward nonviolent water protectors. And finally, Energy Transfer alleged tortious interference — essentially, that those defamatory statements damaged the company’s relationship with banks.

Those accused weren’t the only ones impacted by the lawsuit. Subpoenas went out demanding people and organizations hand over documents or testify in front of lawyers. Energy Transfer subpoenaed Water Protectors Legal Collective, a group that provided legal support to pipeline opponents, and Unicorn Riot, a media collective that broadcast hours of footage of police violence. It also subpoenaed Standing Rock’s former tribal historic preservation officer Tim Mentz. Across the water protector community, fear began to spread that anyone and everyone could be dragged into the lawsuit.

However, two people at the heart of the case — Greenpeace’s alleged co-conspirators Cody Hall and Krystal Two Bulls — never received official notification of the lawsuit. Months went by, then years. In legal filings, Energy Transfer said they’d attempted to serve Hall at a home in South Dakota where his parents lived briefly a decade before, but the knock Hall expected at his door didn’t come. At one point, Hall got so stressed about it he called Energy Transfer. “I said, ‘You guys say you can’t serve me. I’m sitting here at home. Serve my ass. So what the hell is this bullshit?’” A receptionist took his number but he never heard back.

A canvas sign with multicolored hand prints hangs over an encampment with several tents on a snowy field Helen H. Richardson / The Denver Post via Getty Images
Chapter 3

“We’ll stand with you. You’re going to fight this.”

Greenpeace was founded just as the contemporary environmental movement was taking off in the 1970s. What set the organization apart from others at the time was dramatic protest actions at sea: Greenpeace activists zoomed little boats in between whaling ships and harpoons, risking their lives to save whales. From the very beginning, Greenpeace was ardently opposed to any kind of violence. Still, governments and companies began to label its activities as ecoterrorism.

“I don’t think there’s any credible examples of anything remotely like something you could describe as ecoterrorism in Greenpeace’s history,” said Frank Zelko, a historian at the University of Hawai‘i who wrote a book on the organization called Make It a Green Peace!. “Unless you reframe ecoterrorism as a bunch of people just blocking bulldozers or hanging a banner between a couple of chimneys.”

It’s important to note that Greenpeace’s efforts to save wildlife at times took aim at Indigenous peoples and practices. For example, an anti-seal-hunting campaign Greenpeace launched in the 1970s destroyed subsistence living for a number of Indigenous communities and a major income stream for many Indigenous nations. By the 1990s, activities like those began to get pushback. 

“We challenged the white organizations back in the early 1990s with environmental racism,” said Tom Goldtooth of the Indigenous Environmental Network. “Greenpeace stepped up.”

In 2017, when the RICO lawsuit hit Greenpeace, Goldtooth was in touch with the organization again. “We said: ‘Hey man, this is mucked up. We’ll stand with you. You’re going to fight this.’” But by 2024, as the lawsuit looked like it would go to trial, it became less and less clear that Greenpeace actually would fight Energy Transfer.

Management for Greenpeace in the U.S. assessed that they had a 5 percent chance of winning. If this went to trial, they determined that Greenpeace as they knew it might cease to exist.

Then, around the winter of 2024, Gibson, Dunn, & Crutcher reached out to Greenpeace with a settlement proposal: Energy Transfer would drop the lawsuit if the organization put out a statement. Greenpeace would have to indicate that there was violence during the Standing Rock movement, that the pipeline did not pass through the Standing Rock Sioux’s land, and that the company did not deliberately destroy sacred sites. In other words, they’d have to refute the statements that Energy Transfer had claimed as defamation. 

The statement Energy Transfer wanted Greenpeace to make “would have been a lie,” Goldtooth said.

Over the next few months, Greenpeace leadership deliberated over the settlement offer. A worst-case trial scenario could mean the loss of a 50-year legacy and could scuttle Greenpeace’s future impact. It could put up to 135 staff members out of work and risk dismantling the organization’s global network. It could cause reputational damage to the Standing Rock Sioux, allies, and other activists who would be forced to testify, and it could set a legal precedent for suing movement organizations out of existence. The best-case trial scenario: Greenpeace would lose, but would be able to say that it went down fighting. Some in the organization concluded that this trial scenario would be catastrophic. 

A worst-case settlement, on the other hand, didn’t seem quite as bad to some. It could cause a public relations crisis, and Greenpeace might lose a few million dollars a year in funding. Some staff might resign, and Indigenous peoples and nations might stop working with the organization. The statements that Greenpeace would have to sign could also be used by Energy Transfer to go after the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe. But Greenpeace would live to fight another day. 

Managing the worst-case scenario of a settlement became the option Ebony Twilley Martin, Greenpeace’s newly appointed executive director, and several senior managers supported.

A woman speaks at a rally against fossil fuels
Ebony Twilley Martin, then co-executive director of Greenpeace USA, speaks during a “Stop Dirty Banks” rally and protest in 2023.
Alex Brandon / AP Photo

However, the view was not shared by everyone, and the question of the settlement began to divide the organization. 

Multiple people high up in the organization strongly opposed Energy Transfer’s settlement proposal. For example, Deepa Padmanabha resigned as deputy general counsel because she disagreed with senior management’s position on the settlement, according to sources close to Greenpeace. Staff members who got wind of the possibility of settlement organized a letter to the board, expressing their own concerns. Meanwhile, Twilley Martin met with the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe about the possibility of settling.

“It would’ve hurt us, no doubt,” current Standing Rock Chairwoman Janet Alkire said of the settlement. “ We’d have to fight against that too. Again, lies. It’s not true.” However, she said she viewed the decision as Greenpeace’s to make.

Tom Goldtooth also spoke with Twilley Martin on the phone multiple times. He said he knew she was under a lot of pressure, but he was clear in his conversations with her about what it would mean for Greenpeace to accept Energy Transfer’s terms. “This would end our relationship with you, with Greenpeace,” he said he told her. “It was that serious. This is a life and death issue to our Indigenous peoples. This is a life and death issue to life itself, to water, to the river.”

Goldtooth said that Twilley Martin was quiet. “I feel it hit her hard.”

Ultimately, it was up to Greenpeace’s board to decide. “It was clear for us that it was a hell no,” recalled Niria Alicia Garcia, a Greenpeace Inc. board member. To Garcia, the survival of Greenpeace was not the most important thing on the line, but she said it made sense to her that certain people did want to accept the settlement.

“When you’re an eight-figure, big legacy, big green, you are going to have to hire people who know how to keep a 501(c)(3) viable and afloat,” she said, referring to nonprofit organizations that are tax-exempt under Section 501(c)(3). “And at the same time, you’re going to need to hire people who are fully aligned and ready to embody the mission. That is the forever tension in nonprofits that exist to be in service to the movement.”

In the spring of 2024, the board voted to reject the settlement proposal. It came at a cost: Ebony Twilley Martin, the first Black woman to serve as Greenpeace’s executive director, hailed as a “historic first” in the environmental movement, left the organization. Padmanabha ultimately rejoined the U.S. organizations as senior legal adviser.

A spokesperson for Greenpeace in the U.S., Madison Carter, wrote in a statement: “Difficult conversations are a common byproduct of risk assessment exercises, and this case is no different.” She added: “SLAPP lawsuits like the one we are facing from Energy Transfer are intended to divide movements and drain resources, which is why it is paramount that we remain as prepared as possible for any and all outcomes.”

Twilley Martin declined to comment. 

Garcia, the Greenpeace board member, said, “I’m proud that we stuck to our values and decided to stay true to the spirit and the mission and the purpose of why Greenpeace ever came to exist.” She added, “At the end of the day, nonprofits are discardable; they are revocable; they are replaceable — and the movement is not. Relationships are not.”

North Dakota’s Morton County District Court set a date for trial: February 24, 2025.

Protesters hold long, vertical mirrors toward security forces as part of a demonstration against the Dakota Access pipeline. Michael Nigro / Pacific Press / LightRocket via Getty Images
Chapter 4

“How many of you feel the same way?”

Jury selection began on a chilly morning last February. “I want to congratulate you on being chosen for jury duty,” said Judge James Gion to the pool of potential jurors. “It is one of the highest obligations and privileges of our democratic system.”

Gion, a judge of 10 years, presided over the Stark County District Court in rural western North Dakota, more than 90 miles away from Morton County, where the suit was filed. Every judge in the entire South Central Judicial District of North Dakota, in which Morton County sits, recused themselves from the case due to conflicts of interest.

Over the next two days, two sets of around 30 potential jurors, selected from the local populace, would answer questions from the lawyers. Each side of the lawsuit aimed to select jurors who would be most favorable to their case, and they sought to convince the judge to eliminate people too biased to be fair.

As lawyers questioned the jury pool, a pattern emerged: Multiple potential jurors said that hearing about the Standing Rock protests reminded them of what they called “the disruption in our community.” One woman put it plainly: “I think you’ll have a tough time finding people completely unbiased on that, because it affected everyone.”

Greenpeace’s lawyer, Everett Jack, asked the group: “How many of you feel the same way?”

All but a handful of people raised their hands. 

About five months before jury selection began, an unusual newspaper, Central ND News, began showing up in people’s mailboxes. Sandwiched between articles criticizing then-presidential candidate Kamala Harris and analyzing the dangers of “illegal aliens” were recollections about the Standing Rock protests a decade before. Most were unpleasant. 

One headline read, “Former Dakota Access pipeline protester: ‘We ended up creating a local ecological disaster.’”

Another said, “THIS MONTH IN HISTORY, OCTOBER 2016: Area schools locked down as authorities respond to pipeline protests.”

Central ND News is part of a company called Metric Media, which includes dozens of locally-oriented media sites that have been labeled as part of a “pay-for-play” network. For a price, that network has allowed corporate executives and political operatives to order up articles and have them distributed to specific audiences. These latest stories were apparently aimed at residents of Morton County, where the Standing Rock protests took place — and from which the jurors were selected. According to court filings, a murky trail of funds connects Energy Transfer’s board chair Kelcy Warren to the newspapers. Metric Media did not respond to a request for comment.

When Jack, Greenpeace’s lawyer, asked about the newspapers, a potential juror pulled out a copy he had brought with him. “I thought it was kinda weird that I got that,” he said. “It brought back memories. I agree with it that what happened down there wasn’t good.”

A man in a suit and a red tie talks while moving his hand
Kelcy Warren, CEO of Energy Transfer Partners, at a panel on the future of pipeline infrastructure in March 2018 in Houston.
Karen Warren / Houston Chronicle via Getty Images

Greenpeace had already attempted to get the trial moved to another county, arguing that the Morton County jury pool would be too biased to decide the case fairly. In a survey the organization commissioned from the National Jury Project, a consultancy that does jury research, 97 percent of respondents gave answers indicating bias against Greenpeace, or, in a few cases, Energy Transfer.

Many of the potential jurors also had financial links to the fossil fuel industry. One of them, labeled juror 14 by the court for the sake of anonymity, said he didn’t think the case was right for him because he worked in the petroleum industry. He added that he would be uncomfortable ruling against his industry, and that he would be less likely to believe Greenpeace’s witnesses than Energy Transfer’s. Juror 14 also revealed that he had a family member in law enforcement who policed the protests. When Greenpeace’s lawyers asked for him to be removed from the pool, Energy Transfer’s lawyer, Trey Cox, pushed back. 

“If the judge instructs you that the law requires you to only consider the evidence in this courtroom and to treat all the parties fairly, are you able to follow the judge’s instruction and be fair to all parties?”

“Yes, I believe I can be,” the man replied. 

Juror 14 was allowed to stay.

After two days, the jurors were announced: a man who worked at a gasification company; another who oversaw two power facilities and told lawyers that “my job depends on fossil fuels” during the selection process; a woman whose family received royalties for oil on their land; and three women whose husbands had ties to the oil and gas industry. One woman’s husband also worked for a security company hired by Energy Transfer, as well as the contractor that drilled under the Missouri River, though she added that she didn’t think he worked at those places during pipeline construction. 

In the end, seven of the 11 jurors and alternates revealed economic ties to the fossil fuel industry. Nobody on the jury identified themselves as Indigenous. 

Opening arguments began the next day.

People walk past a line of flags from different Indigenous nations in a large, grassy field. Robyn Beck / AFP via Getty Images
Chapter 5

“It’s part of the treaty.”

“Here they are,” explained the Gibson Dunn lawyer, Trey Cox, standing before a flat-screen television. “These are the Greenpeace six. Not a single one of them lives in this community. These people are professionals.”

On the screen flashed headshots of six people, all employees of Greenpeace Inc. 

“They embed in a location, then they escalate,” he said. “They thought they could do it in secret — they thought that we wouldn’t be smart enough to figure out what they did.”

“Today starts the day of reckoning,” he concluded.

Energy Transfer’s first witness was a towering bald man with an American flag pin on the lapel of his suit. Mike Futch was the project manager for the North Dakota section of the Dakota Access pipeline. Cox asked him about violence perpetrated by private security — like the now-infamous dog attacks.

“The only violence was when protesters came onto private property and attacked us,” Futch said. “We were always in retreat.”

According to Futch, the property damage that occurred at construction sites was intentionally violent: Pipeline opponents cut hydraulic hoses, booby-trapped equipment, filled gas tanks with sand and gravel, spray-painted cabin windows, and busted equipment gauges.

His testimony was backed up over the next few days by five law enforcement officers who agreed that the protesters were the violent ones, not security. “Violent” incidents ranged from water protectors blocking a road during a Thanksgiving Day protest in the town of Mandan, to death threats received by the now-deputy chief of the Bismarck Police Department, whose family eventually left home for a few days at the suggestion of the FBI. Captain Brian Steele testified that he got hit in the back with a big rock. Steele’s assessment: “We were probably too nice.”

It was defamation, according to Cox, for Greenpeace to say that police and private security used violence against nonviolent protesters.

A dog lunges at a line of protesters who are standing there with arms at sides
Private security guards allow attack dogs to lunge at pipeline protestors on September 3, 2016.
Robyn Beck / AFP via Getty Images

On day five, Energy Transfer started playing video depositions from Greenpeace employees. On screen, Davy Khoury, a Greenpeace warehouse worker, explained how he spent hours driving on country back roads following the proposed path of the pipeline. According to his deposition, he was scouting — collecting information about what was happening with construction and passing it back to Indigenous organizers in the camps.

Energy Transfer’s lawyers displayed one of Khoury’s emails, written to another Greenpeace employee in October 2016: “The company has a place where all their toys are stored near in the Bismarck area,” Khoury wrote. He suggested a protest strategy. “If the entrances were blocked, it would be very hard for them to get to the job sites.” 

The other Greenpeace employee responded, “I just sent 30 straight boxes down,” referring to lockboxes — plumbing pipes that protesters use to lock themselves to each other.

Greenpeace lawyers later pointed out that the protest Khoury suggested likely never happened.

In total, six Greenpeace employees visited Standing Rock during the protests — the Greenpeace Six, according to Cox — sometimes staying for a few days, sometimes for a few weeks. They all worked for Greenpeace Inc., and not the other two Greenpeace-affiliated organizations named in the suit — in fact, no one from either of the other Greenpeace groups even visited Standing Rock at all. 

During their time at Standing Rock, those six employees delivered supplies, built structures, and helped the Indigenous Peoples Power Project, or IP3, train people in nonviolent direct action. In his video testimony, Nick Tilsen estimated that IP3 trained somewhere between 5,000 and 10,000 people over the course of the Standing Rock protests. Lawyers also showed that Greenpeace employees did directly participate in some protest actions; however, Tilsen stated that no one from Greenpeace led those actions, while acknowledging that his friend from Greenpeace, Cy Wagoner, helped with some planning. Rather, it was people from the area who set the agenda.

Energy Transfer alleged that Greenpeace provided funding for Standing Rock to the tune of $55,000, and that the organization’s executive director at the time, Annie Leonard, helped direct a handful of foundations to donate an additional total of $90,000 to the movement.

The impact of that support, along with a defamatory information campaign, according to Gibson, Dunn, & Crutcher, was huge: Energy Transfer spent $7 million on PR firms to deal with the protests. An additional $8.5 million went toward buying the most controversial land: the ranch where Tim Mentz found the 27 burial sites and 82 stone features. The company paid contractors $14.5 million for changes to construction plans and lost another $96.4 million when Energy Transfer delayed the refinancing of loans associated with the pipeline. The pipeline was supposed to start pumping oil in January 2017 but couldn’t until June, costing the company another $80 million.

As the trial proceeded, none of the law enforcement witnesses or Energy Transfer personnel who had been on the ground seemed to know much about Greenpeace. According to public records and testimony in court, Greenpeace hardly ever appeared in the daily intelligence reports written by the private security firm TigerSwan. Of more than 1,700 pages of police operations briefings during Standing Rock, Energy Transfer’s lawyers pointed to only one that described a Greenpeace employee at a protest. 

According to Sheriff Kyle Kirchmeier, up to 10,000 people were in the camps at the height of the protest. In his testimony, Kirchmeier said he believed they showed up to Standing Rock because the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe’s chairman, Dave Archambault, put out a public call and invited people to the prairie — that the real catalysts were the dog attacks, the explosion of social media coverage, and that people believed the pipeline was located on the tribe’s unceded territory. 

“It’s part of the treaty,” Kirchmeier said.

a group of people in silhouette are blasted with a water cannon
Dakota Access protestors stand their ground on the bridge between Oceti Sakowin Camp and County Road 134 in North Dakota on November 20, 2016, while being sprayed with water cannons and tear gas. Paintballs, rubber bullets, and sound cannons were also used. Cassi Alexandra / The Washington Post via Getty Images

The tribe’s treaty is a big reason why the pipeline’s operation was delayed from January 2017 to June. The Standing Rock Sioux Tribe’s lawsuit against the Army Corps of Engineers was filed well before the camps began to grow. Under pressure from Standing Rock and other Indigenous nations, the Army Corps denied the easement that December, ordering a deeper environmental review first. In other words, for most of the months in which people protested, August 2016 to February 2017, Energy Transfer did not have permission to drill. That permission didn’t come until after Donald Trump came into office, in February 2017.

Energy Transfer and its lawyers were intimately familiar with this timeline. By November 2016, Gibson Dunn was representing the company as it attempted to push the Army Corps for permissions. And by December, the law firm had helped Energy Transfer draft a memorandum urging President Trump’s transition team to advance an executive order for the Army Corps to grant the easement.

In the end, Energy Transfer’s lobbyist in D.C. even prepared a draft of the executive order, and soon after Trump was inaugurated, he signed and issued it, directing the Army Corps to deliver an easement.

“Y’all were able to start drilling under the lake within minutes of getting that easement, right?” a Greenpeace lawyer asked Energy Transfer’s board president Kelcy Warren during a video deposition.

“Shortly thereafter, yes sir,” said Warren with a laugh.

The Standing Rock Sioux Tribe does play a major role in the true story of Energy Transfer’s Dakota Access pipeline easement. In the months after the pipeline was installed under the river, the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe and other Indigenous nations continued pushing for a federal court to shut the pipeline down. In June 2017, a judge ruled that the Army Corps would have to redo parts of its environmental review. The legal back-and-forth dragged on for years.

Energy Transfer’s banks took note. In court, Energy Transfer alleged that Greenpeace’s divestment campaign, and its defamatory lies, forced the company to delay refinancing a loan, which cost them $96.4. However, meeting minutes from Energy Transfer’s board of directors, described in court, indicate that the company actually decided to hold off on refinancing due to banks’ concerns about the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe’s ongoing legal battle — not Greenpeace.

“This is all a bunch of bullshit,” said Doug Crow Ghost, the tribe’s head of water resources, of the Greenpeace lawsuit. Crow Ghost noted that the tribe took in $11.7 million in donations related to the pipeline protests. Greenpeace’s $55,000 and $90,000 in foundation funding was meager by comparison.

But no Standing Rock member testified in the Greenpeace trial. As a rule, the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe doesn’t go to state court: The state has no jurisdiction over the nation due to federal Indian law.

Native American protesters and their supporters are confronted by security forces in front of a line of construction vehicles during a demonstration against work being done for the Dakota Access pipeline. Robyn Beck / AFP via Getty Images
Chapter 6

“We believed that to be true.”

Up until October 2023, Energy Transfer claimed that Greenpeace also committed defamation when it said the pipeline would poison the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe’s water and that the pipeline would catastrophically alter the climate. In order to prove those claims, Energy Transfer would have to turn over internal documents to show how safe the pipeline really was.

However, the company sought to avoid handing over the pipeline safety records and dropped the claims. But Greenpeace didn’t drop its requests for the files — and as they continued to fight about it, some documents became public record. 

A report commissioned by Greenpeace, based on field reports and completed in January 2024, found that Energy Transfer’s contractors allowed 1.4 million gallons of drilling mud to disappear into the hole they bored under the riverbed. Drilling mud is a clay and water mixture combined with chemical additives, used to lubricate a drill and carry away fragmented earth. Oil companies usually describe drilling mud as non-toxic, but at times it has been found to include harmful pollutants, and it can hurt delicate ecosystems. The authors, from an engineering firm called Exponent, found that the drilling mud was supposed to flow back out of the tunnel and onto the shore to be stored in an excavated pit. But some of it never did. Enough drilling mud to fill two Olympic-sized swimming pools disappeared into the environment.

A man wearing a water is life water protectors jacket holds his hands behind his back as he walks
Water protectors protest as police line the hill at Standing Rock during the ongoing dispute over the building of the Dakota Access pipeline in November 2016.
Jessica Rinaldi / Globe Staff via Getty Images

Energy Transfer has gotten in trouble in the past for using unapproved additives in its drilling mud. During pipeline construction in Pennsylvania, the company leaked thousands of gallons of drilling mud into wetlands, creating sinkholes and polluting tap water. Energy Transfer’s subsidiary Sunoco pleaded no contest to 14 criminal counts related to the spills. In Ohio, the same year the Dakota Access pipeline was completed, Energy Transfer leaked another 2 million gallons of drilling mud into the environment as it built a different pipeline — some was laced with diesel.

The spill described in the Exponent report was news to the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe, despite its years of raising questions and concerns about pipeline safety. So in October 2024, when the tribe filed its latest lawsuit against the Army Corps, the lawyers cited the drilling mud report as one of many reasons that the pipeline should finally be shut down. Standing Rock’s lawsuit was dismissed in March, although the tribe has appealed. 

Energy Transfer alleged that Greenpeace committed defamation by accusing the company of deliberately destroying sacred sites. At the heart of that claim is the word “deliberate” and whether or not, on September 3, 2016, the company intended to destroy the sites. Court documents, public records, and testimony at trial paint a hazy picture of just how those sites were handled.

Tim Mentz’s survey began by Tuesday, August 30, and lasted through Thursday, September 1. That same week, Energy Transfer emailed police to inform them that their construction crew was moving east toward the river, according to a record displayed during the trial. Because of the company’s concerns about protests, sharing construction information with police was a routine practice at the time. The company’s schedule, which it outlined in an email, suggested that the bulldozers wouldn’t arrive in the area with the sacred sites until after September 8. 

On September 2, 2016, after Mentz identified the sites, Mike Futch, the project manager for the North Dakota section of the Dakota Access pipeline, sent out his construction manager and a security guy to investigate. “We concluded that the features that Mr. Mentz had identified were outside the limits of the disturbance that we had planned,” Futch said on the stand. 

According to Futch, construction crews were able to avoid any stones on the edge of the right-of-way. That analysis, Futch said, allowed him to sidestep calling in the company’s archaeology specialists. The company saw no reason to call the Standing Rock Sioux, either. 

Energy Transfer’s bulldozers arrived at the site the next morning — Saturday, September 3, on Labor Day weekend — more than six days earlier than what it had indicated in the schedule sent to police days before. Public records obtained from the Morton County Sheriff’s Office confirm that that morning, the company moved its bulldozers at least 15 miles east to the area that Mentz had been working in. 

That the bulldozers were moved out of order on a holiday weekend is a key reason the tribe and water protectors believe that Energy Transfer deliberately destroyed the sites. So exactly when Energy Transfer decided to bulldoze the area matters. 

“Yes, we did advance and do some out of sequence work,” Futch told the court. Not because of the sacred sites, he said, but only to get ahead of a powwow planned for the area: The crews wanted to be out of way before new people arrived on top of the protesters already present.

A large group of people march and carry a sign that says 'defend the sacred'
Protesters march to the site of a sacred burial ground that was disturbed by bulldozers during construction of the Dakota Access pipeline on September 4, 2016.
Robyn Beck / AFP via Getty Images

Futch said several law enforcement officers, including Morton County Sheriff Kyle Kirchmeier, were notified of the change in plans — something Kirchmeier denied, saying he was unaware the bulldozers would be in that area. Normally, he added, his office was notified of construction plans, but not this time.

The dog handlers were surprised, too, according to police reports obtained from the sheriff’s office. The owner of Frost Kennels, Bob Frost, told police that Energy Transfer had asked the company to bring the dogs out around mid-September when a ruling in Standing Rock’s lawsuit against the Army Corps was expected. The security workers anticipated that the dogs would be patrolling a fence around a construction site, and one worker said he thought they’d be joined by two police officers per dog handler. Instead, Bob Frost found out in the middle of Friday night, only hours after Earthjustice filed the coordinates, that they needed to show up with dogs the next morning at 10 a.m. 

While Energy Transfer’s defamation claim focused on the word “deliberate,” the company has also disputed that there were any sacred sites at risk at all. “Apparently a guy named Mentz came up with a story,” the former Energy Transfer Vice President Joey Mahmoud said in an email at the time.

In court, Gibson Dunn lawyers and the company’s witnesses pointed to a report from the chief archaeologist of the North Dakota State Historic Preservation Office, Paul Picha, who concluded that “no cultural material was observed in the expected corridor. No human bone or other evidence of burials was recorded in the inventoried corridor.” 

Picha was deposed by lawyers, but the interview wasn’t shown in court. He said that his assessment didn’t actually mean much about the truth of Mentz’s claims.

“So if the North Dakota State Historic Preservation Society says something isn’t a cultural site, that doesn’t mean it isn’t a cultural site to the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe, correct?” asked one of the lawyers.

“Yes,” Picha replied.

Energy Transfer’s own archaeology contractor, Gray & Pape, concluded in a separate report, obtained via a public records request, that four of Mentz’s sites were in the path of the pipeline. The archaeologist, Jason Kovacs, reported that those four stones didn’t show signs of being archaeological sites and that there was no ground disturbance there — although one of the stones was covered in dirt.

However, Kovacs clarified what he meant when he was deposed for trial. He told lawyers, “I’m not qualified to assess what is cultural property or not,” and he confirmed that the company had no Indigenous specialists on staff.

“The vast majority of the times, we have no access to the tribal perspective,” said Kovacs. “My assessment of an archaeological site has to be on the archaeology itself, and that’s where I leave it. It may have further significance, but that’s, you know, not archaeological.”

His testimony was never aired for the jury. 

Energy Transfer’s lawyers presented what appeared to be its key evidence that Greenpeace International defamed the corporation. In November 2016, an organization called BankTrack asked banks to divest from the Dakota Access pipeline, noting that the company’s personnel deliberately desecrated documented burial grounds and other important cultural sites. The letter was signed by 500 organizations, including Greenpeace International.

“Does Greenpeace International stand by that?” Trey Cox asked Mads Christenson, Greenpeace International’s executive director.

“We believed that to be true at the time, and we still do,” Christensen replied.

“Wouldn’t you have to talk to Energy Transfer to understand their state of mind?” asked Cox.

“Our understanding was very clear from the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe and allies that a number of concerns about sacred sites had been pointed out that were later desecrated and destroyed.”

Christensen added, “If you’re aware of the fact and still go ahead, then it must be deliberate.”

A group of people silhouetted against bright lights face off with police or security forces at night. Stephen Olson / Getty Images
Chapter 7

“They’re scumbags.”

“Do you have any personal knowledge about anything Greenpeace did at all in relation to the protests?” a lawyer asked.

“No,” said Kelcy Warren, Energy Transfer’s board chair and largest shareholder — who was CEO when the Dakota Access pipeline was constructed.

Warren took the stand on March 13, via a pre-recorded video deposition. It was the final day of testimony.

While the board chair had no recollections about Greenpeace, he did have memories about the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe. In 2016, Warren approached Chairman Dave Archambault to make a deal. “I went there with the intention of working out a financial transaction,” Warren said. Long before Greenpeace went to court, before the conspiracy lawsuits began, and before Trump’s executive order greenlighting the pipeline, Energy Transfer tried to pay off the tribe.

At the height of the protests, Warren and Archambault sat down to talk. “I said, ‘David, I’m here to make a deal with you. Let’s go. Do you want cash? What do you want?’” Warren first offered Archambault the ranch the company bought, the one that held the sacred sites identified by Mentz. “We could build you a whole new school on your reservation. Let’s make a deal,’” Warren urged.

“And he says, ‘I can’t do it,’” Warren recalled. “He made it very clear he could not accept any offer from me that involved them backing down.”

“It was clear to me that he had struck a deal with the devil,” Warren said.

“And the devil being Earthjustice?” the lawyer replied.

“Yes,” said Warren.

A sign marks the Dakota Access Pipeline are posted north of Cannonball, North Dakota, and the Standing Rock Reservation
A sign marks the Dakota Access pipeline area north of Cannonball, North Dakota, and the Standing Rock Sioux Reservation. Matthew Brown / Getty Images

Earthjustice is a nonprofit public interest law organization that represented the Standing Rock Sioux Tribe in the early part of its court fight against the Army Corps of Engineers. It is not connected to Greenpeace: It is not an affiliate, a subsidiary, or even funded by the organization.

“They’re scumbags,” Warren said, of Earthjustice.

“I read between the lines, and I believe that they made a deal, and Archambault couldn’t make a deal with me,” he continued.

In a statement, Archambault explained the meeting. “I was there to discuss safety — not to negotiate an end to the protests.” When Warren asked what it would take to stop the movement, Archambault said, “I explained that it was no longer in my control. The fight against the pipeline had become much bigger than Standing Rock; it was about Indigenous rights and the long history of injustice faced by our people.”

In court, the lawyer asked, “Nothing was said about Greenpeace during that meeting, was it?” 

“Not that I recall,” Warren replied.

In Warren’s understanding, the Standing Rock Sioux were the entity to negotiate with when it came to ending the protests and pushing the pipeline through — not Greenpeace. According to his testimony, the tribe’s refusal to take a deal revealed that Standing Rock had sold out to its law firm, Earthjustice — not Greenpeace Inc., Greenpeace Fund, or Greenpeace International. 

On the next day of court, during closing statements, Cox revealed the true extent of what Energy Transfer was demanding from the Greenpeace organizations. The lawyers said that $266 million would compensate Energy Transfer for their expenses — but they wanted triple that, in order to set an example. 
Two days later, the jury returned its verdict. Greenpeace Inc. was liable for all of the on-the-ground damage claims. Greenpeace Inc. and Greenpeace International were guilty of conspiracy, and all three Greenpeace organizations committed tortious interference, as well as defamation when they made their assertions on police violence, tribal territory, and desecration of sacred sites.

The total damages amounted to over $666 million.

Outside the courtroom, Cox, the Energy Transfer lawyer, posed with a huddle of attorneys from Gibson Dunn. He wore an American flag pin on the lapel of his suit, while his colleagues wore sunglasses. “Greenpeace paid protesters and trained individuals to unlawfully disrupt the construction of the Dakota Access pipeline,” he said. “These are the facts, not the fake news of the Greenpeace propaganda machine.”

He added, “Peaceful protest is an inherent American right; however, violent and destructive protest is unlawful and unacceptable. This verdict clearly conveys that.”

The Greenpeace employees and water protectors looked on, stunned.

Energy Transfer and Gibson Dunn did not provide responses to detailed questions related to the case. Instead, they provided a statement saying that the verdict was a win for North Dakotans who faced disruption and harassment during the protests.

“That the disrupters have been held responsible is a win for all of us,” the spokesperson wrote. “It is also a win for all law-abiding Americans who understand the difference between the right to free speech and breaking the law.”

Greenpeace is preparing to appeal once the court issues a final judgment.

“ What this really is an attempt to do is to destroy the idea of solidarity,” said Deepa Padmanabha, the senior legal advisor for Greenpeace in the U.S., in an interview with Grist and Drilled. “By working together, by uplifting voices, by showing support, by showing up, by communications, you somehow could face hundreds of millions of dollars of lawsuit. Because this idea of a movement, of people working together in solidarity, is actually more powerful than the dollar.”

Asked if the organization regretted not taking the settlement, Padmanabha said, “There was no choice.”

“Is our existence our ultimate mission? Just the existence of an entity?” she asked. “Or is there something in our mission that’s bigger than that?”

An American flag flies upside down over teepees against a dark sky
An upside-down American flag flies above Oceti Sakowin Camp on the edge of the Standing Rock Sioux Reservation on November 30, 2016.
Scott Olson / Getty Images

The Center for Media and Democracy supported document review for this article.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Standing Rock was an Indigenous-led movement. Why did Greenpeace take the fall? on Jul 18, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Alleen Brown.

]]>
https://grist.org/project/indigenous/standing-rock-greenpeace-slapp-lawsuit-dakota-access-pipeline-dapl/feed/ 0 544991
Artist Hebru Brantley on reframing past stories with a fresh perspective https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/artist-hebru-brantley-on-reframing-past-stories-with-a-fresh-perspective/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/artist-hebru-brantley-on-reframing-past-stories-with-a-fresh-perspective/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/artist-hebru-brantley-on-reframing-past-stories-with-a-fresh-perspective Aviation and flight in general appear quite a bit in your work in very superheroic ways. How did you come to flight as a key motif for you? I’m especially curious since we’re talking about your FLYBOY comics project on Kickstarter, if there are any comic inspirations behind that?

A thousand percent, there’s comic inspiration behind it. It’s a loaded question, because there’s always the Donner Superman, which is like—I was reading comic books as a kid, but then seeing Donner’s Superman, it just crystallized everything in my mind because it jumps off the page and it’s so different seeing a real person, like real Superman. And I remember as a kid, it enhanced my love for the medium.

And then for me personally, I think it’s like it’s Nolan’s Batman, when they asked him why Bats and he’s like, “Bats scare me.” Right? I think for me, I’m a big chicken when it comes to flying. I don’t love to fly because turbulence and because who loves turbulence? But I think that there’s something profoundly powerful and almost spiritual at times with the idea of flight. And I don’t mean to sound like it’s corny or anything, but I just think it’s a real thing.

Again, it’s constantly a motif that I play with in my fine art due to the fact that there’s a freedom in it when you’re so high up and you can see the world and how small it really is. And it puts things in perspective, at least for me, of how small certain problems are. And just again, there’s a freeness to it. So yeah, I think again, that’s how flying correlates. It’s that question, too, if you could have any superpower, and my corny ass always would pick flight first over everything.

I mean, embracing the impossible and putting yourself in an uncomfortable situation can yield really interesting results. I think with flight, especially in comics, there’s always a bit of that learning curve.

With some of these characters, especially with my main character, FLYBOY, I try to infuse a bit of myself or a bit of the familiar in them so that they can feel relatable. I think that in the golden age, or the silver age of comics, there was thought given to some of these abilities or powers, but not … It didn’t go as in depth as it could or should in terms of what these powers really could mean for that bearer, the person that has to learn how to manipulate these things. And it’s the great power, great responsibility, blah, blah, blah, blah. But what if there is a person that can fly but is afraid of heights? Again, trying to get a little deeper than just the wish fulfillment aspect of it.

Your bio says that you’ve been on a quest with some of your art to readdress modern mythology. What other parts of our culture or history do you want to explore through your art, either through more sculpture or paintings or comics?

Comics are a great way to explore more because it’s always narrative first. And I think within the world of FLYBOY that I’ve created, there is a lot of revisionist history. This world isn’t necessarily ours, one for one, but it sort of parallels and I appreciate history, but also just this opportunity to re-contextualize certain moments and certain ideas.

In my work early on, I had this series, it was called the Negro Mythos, Black Mythos series. The simplest form of explanation was that it was me appropriating all of these white superheroes that I grew up with loving that were archetypal males and making them people of color. And when you do that, I think you reframe a lot. You change that story inherently.

I mean, think about, shit, a few years ago, the outrage that happened when Warner Brothers at one point was talking about Michael B. Jordan being the Black Superman or the next Superman, not the Black Superman, but he is Black and he was going to be Superman and what that means, but even how that changes from a historical context and then just a narrative context.

And so I think with comics you can obviously do a lot more directly, whereas in fine art, it’s a lot more subjective and you leave the audience to add in their own things within the work or the piece. And so again, I appreciate both paths, but I think having been on the path of fine art for so long, now being able to really just tell a story and be very direct with the narrative is something that I’m looking forward to.

Are there particular pieces of history or any stories or mythos that you have a direct change you want to make or a direct thing you want to say or explore? I know that FLYBOY draws a lot from the Tuskegee Airmen.

I won’t give too much up because hopefully we’ll create a new fan base and have some readers that are interested in following the journey. But yeah, I think it does start there. I don’t want anything that I do to feel like medicine. I don’t want it to feel like I’m trying to teach someone something. I want to entertain, I want to inform, but I don’t want to have it feel medicinal. And so in looking at this story and creating this story, I did look at the Tuskegee trials and things within American history and more specifically Black American history and pull from certain moments and elevate certain moments or change certain moments to benefit a character, whether negatively or positively as just this form of observation of history.

This is a history that we can never escape, and it’s one that continues to shape us, continues to shape our country. It’s a big part of our narrative, so just really leaning into it, I think in a way to, as a point of pride almost, right? What we are able to endure, what we’ve survived as a people, as Black Americans, as Americans. So yeah, just again, finding opportunities to explore these moments.

I think it’s not dissimilar to, excuse me, when you look at Hellboy in the context of using Nazi Germany, using the history of this character and infusing it with, again, the real big bads, which were Nazis and this war with America and all of the history that we share, but the embellishment of…. yeah, there was a double human hybrid that came down, and within this time, these things and these events happened around that. That’s always fun when you can mix history with a new narrative and a new twist.

I’m glad you brought up the directness of comics. It’s a great way to just either take a stance or follow a specific path and really have a point of view and a fun narrative on it. Congrats on taking this dive into the world of comics with the FLYBOY Kickstarter campaign. We touched on the impact Superman had on you earlier, but if you had your pick of the litter, say if DC or Marvel or Dark Horse even came to you and said, “Hebru, do whatever you want,” is there an existing character you would want to create for?

Oh man, this is the question that you have the conversation with your nerd homies over and over again. And then, of course, you ask me and I’m like, my mind goes blank, and it’s like, I don’t want to say the wrong thing because there’s so many. But I mean, my two favorites … Man, this is tough. Let me try and make this as hard as it needs to be. Yeah, dude, I think I’m going to throw a curve-ball here…

What’s that?

I’m going to go away from the Marvel cannons, the DC cannons. I’m going to say Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles.

When you look at stories like Ronin and where that arc goes and goes, I feel like there’s still so much to do with those characters, and that was a big part of my childhood. I was more of a Marvel fan because I fell in love with X-Men heavy duty, and then all of their offshoots, X-Factor, et cetera. But Turtles were something special. And I think that it sort of melded all of that because I found the black and white comics when I was a kid and I really liked them. That led me to Daredevil and then back to Turtles. They had the cartoon, they had the figures, the collectible just started that insatiable collecting thing for me.

But it’s always been like Turtles… It’s something about those guys. I think it’s the brotherhood, the camaraderie. It’s this idea of them not being wanted by society because of how they look, who they are, what they are, what they can do. It’s just a fun world, and it’s a world within worlds. There’s Dimension X, there’s different planes, and it’s so many different rich characters to play with. I would say definitely Turtles. Long-winded answer, but I would say Turtles first.

The worlds within worlds comment is great. Right now they have a crossover series with Naruto. I think there was a TV special where multiple versions of the characters across television met each other. Of the core four, do you have a favorite between Leonardo, Donatello, Raphael, or Michelangelo?

Oh, it’s Raph all day, baby. It’s Raph all day. It’s funny because I like Mikey. I like Don. Leo’s probably my least, just because I think he is most likely the Cyclops, like the leader who doesn’t get the credit. But I think with Donatello and Mikey, it’s all dependent upon which version of them. There’s some versions that are way stronger and way better than others, but I think that’s the beauty of the books and the series, the different series and the different writers that take on the challenge of writing for these characters. So yeah, Raph is pretty consistently an asshole, mean, tough, rough, and love it, love it, love it.

He’s a lovable asshole, though. We love to be frustrated by him.

Yes, 100 percent. 100 percent. With this process, it feels like a pinching moment. I’m really hopeful that we can hit our mark and this can be successful because this is really a childhood dream that I’ve had for a long time and everything in due time. It’s been a long road to this point, and I’m super, super, super excited and put in a ton of work in crafting this long form story that just has a lot of twists and turns and ways to go, and this being sort of the entry into that world. I’m just really excited for people to dig in and find it.

Hebru Brantley recommends:

The new GI Joe/ Transformer series.

Absolute Wonder Woman

28 Years Later (saw it twice)

Currently rewatching all Hayao Miyazaki films.

Lastly, because of my daughters—Bluey.


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sam Kusek.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/artist-hebru-brantley-on-reframing-past-stories-with-a-fresh-perspective/feed/ 0 545009
ICE ripped their mom from their arms and took her in an unmarked car https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/ice-ripped-their-mom-from-their-arms-and-took-her-in-an-unmarked-car/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/ice-ripped-their-mom-from-their-arms-and-took-her-in-an-unmarked-car/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 05:29:42 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=02c29d405e28a5e314acfe7c4dac0feb
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/ice-ripped-their-mom-from-their-arms-and-took-her-in-an-unmarked-car/feed/ 0 544967
Palestine Action – terrorists or the real heroes of our time? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/palestine-action-terrorists-or-the-real-heroes-of-our-time/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/palestine-action-terrorists-or-the-real-heroes-of-our-time/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 01:53:14 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117492 COMMENTARY: By Eugene Doyle

Nobody has a bad word to say about the French Resistance in the Second World War, right?  Who would criticise a group confronting fascism, right?

Yet this month the UK group Palestine Action has been proscribed as a “terrorist” organisation by their government for their non-violent direct action against UK-based industries supplying technology to fuel Israel’s destruction of the Palestinian people.

Are they terrorists or the very best of us in the West?

Stéphane Hessel, a leading member of the French Resistance, survived time in Nazi concentration camps, including Buchenwald. After the war he was one of the co-authors of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948), a pillar of international law to this day.

The Declaration affirms the inherent dignity and equal rights of all humans. In later years Hessel (d. 2013), who was Jewish, saw the treatment of the Palestinians as an affront to this and repeatedly called Israel out for crimes against humanity.

Hessel argued people needed to be outraged just as he and his fellow fighters had been during the war.

In 2010, he said: “Today, my strongest feeling of indignation is over Palestine, both the Gaza Strip and the West Bank. The starting point of my outrage was the appeal launched by courageous Israelis to the Diaspora: you, our older siblings, come and see where our leaders are taking this country and how they are forgetting the fundamental human values of Judaism.”

In his book Indignez-vous (Time for Outrage!) he called for a “peaceful insurrection” and pointed to some of the non-violent forms of protests Palestinians had used over the years.

Supporting Palestine Action
In Kendal, UK, this fellow wasn’t arrested. In Cardiff, this woman was. Perhaps the “terrorism” isn’t saying you support Palestine Action – it’s saying you oppose genocide?! Image: Private Eye/X/@DefendourJuries

“The Israeli authorities have described these marches as ‘nonviolent terrorism’. Not bad . . .  One would have to be Israeli to describe nonviolence as terrorism.”

How wrong Stéphane Hessel was on this point. The British Parliament has just proscribed Palestine Action as “terrorists” despite them having never attacked anyone, never used weapons, but only undertaken destruction of property linked to the arms industry.

Does Palestine Action really bear resemblance to Al Qaeda or ISIS, or Israel’s Stern Gang or the IDF? Or, like the French Resistance, will they eventually be recognised as heroes of our time? Will Hollywood romanticise them in their usual tardy way in 50 years time?

In respect to the Palestinians, Hessel was clear that resistance could take many forms: “We must recognise that when a country is occupied by infinitely superior military means, the popular reaction cannot be only nonviolent,” he said.

In his time, he lived by those words.

Resistance – a precious band of brothers and sisters
Here’s a statistic that should make you think.  In the Second World War less than 2 percent of French people played any active role in the Resistance.  Most people just sat back and got on with their lives whether they liked the Germans or didn’t.

The Jews and others were dealt to, stamped on and shipped out, while most of the French could trundle on unharassed.  The heavy lifting of resistance was done by a small band of brothers and sisters who took it to the enemy.

History salutes them, as we now salute the Suffragettes, the anti-Apartheid activists, the American civil rights groups and Irish liberation fighters. We’re living through something similar now — and our governments are the bad guys.

I first learned that shocking fact about the composition of the Resistance from my history teacher at l’Université de Franche-Comté, in France in the 1980s.  He was the distinguished historian Antoine Casanova, a specialist on Napoleon, Corsica and the Resistance.

Perhaps the low level of resistance is not surprising.  Most of the people who put their bodies on the line in Occupied France during the Second World War were either communists or Jews.  Good on them. Jewish people made up as much as 20 percent of the French Resistance despite numbering only about 1 percent of the population. This massive over-representation can, understandably, be explained as recognition of the existential threat they faced — but many were also passionate communists or socialists, the ideological enemies of the racist, fascist ideology of their occupiers.

Looking at the Israeli State today, many of those same Jewish Resistance fighters would instantly recognise the racism and fascism that they opposed in the 1940s.  We should remember our leaders tell us we share values with Israel.

For anyone not in the United Kingdom (where it is illegal to show any support for Palestine Action) I highly recommend the recently released documentary To Kill A War Machine which gives an absolutely riveting account of both the direct action the group has undertaken and the moral and ideological underpinnings of their actions.

Having seen the documentary I can see why the British Labour government is doing everything in its power to silence and censor them.  They really do expose who the true terrorists are.  Stéphane Hessel would be proud of Palestine Action.

This week a former Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Olmert made clear what is going on in Gaza.

The “humanitarian city” Israel is planning to build on the ruins of Rafah would be, in his words, a concentration camp. Others have described it as a Warsaw-ghetto or a “death camp”.  Olmert says Israel is clearly committing war crimes in both Gaza and the West Bank and that the concentration camp for the Gazan population would mark a further escalation.

It would go beyond ethnic cleansing and take the Jewish State of Israel shoulder-to-shoulder with other regimes that built such camps.  Israel, we should never forget, is our close ally.

Millions of people have hit the streets in Western countries.  A majority clearly repudiate what the US and Israel are doing.  But the political leadership of the big Western countries continues to enable the racist, fascist genocidal state of Israel to do its evil work. Lesser powers of the white-dominated broederbond, like Australia and New Zealand, also provide valuable support.

Until our populations in the West mobilise in sufficient numbers to force change on our increasingly criminal ruling elites, the heavy-lifting done by groups like Palestine Action will remain powerful forms of the resistance.

I grew up in the Catholic faith.  One of the lines indelibly printed on my consciousness was: “Greater love hath no man than this, that he lay down his life for his friends.”  Palestine Action is doing that.  Francesca Albanese is doing that.  Justice for Palestine and Palestine Solidarity Network Aotearoa are doing this.

The real question, the burning question each of us must answer is — given there is no middle ground, there is no fence to sit on when it comes to genocide — whose side are you on? And what are you going to do about it?  Vive la Resistance! Vive the defenders of the Palestinian cause!

Rest in Peace Stéphane Hessel. Le temps passe, le souvenir reste.

Eugene Doyle is a writer based in Wellington. He has written extensively on the Middle East, as well as peace and security issues in the Asia Pacific region. He contributes to Asia Pacific Report and Café Pacific, and hosts the public policy platform solidarity.co.nz


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/palestine-action-terrorists-or-the-real-heroes-of-our-time/feed/ 0 544955
Labor Change Will Hurt Workers, Spare Violators https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/labor-change-will-hurt-workers-spare-violators/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/labor-change-will-hurt-workers-spare-violators/#respond Fri, 18 Jul 2025 00:14:38 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/labor-change-will-hurt-workers-spare-violators-felsen-smith-20250717/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Michael Felsen.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/18/labor-change-will-hurt-workers-spare-violators/feed/ 0 544949
The Right to Be Bombarded with B.S. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/the-right-to-be-bombarded-with-b-s/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/the-right-to-be-bombarded-with-b-s/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 23:32:13 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/the-right-to-be-bombarded-with-bs-ervin-20250717/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Mike Ervin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/the-right-to-be-bombarded-with-b-s/feed/ 0 544951
CPJ, Freedom House urge U.S. gov to maintain Cameroon’s ineligibility for trade benefits https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/cpj-freedom-house-urge-u-s-gov-to-maintain-cameroons-ineligibility-for-trade-benefits/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/cpj-freedom-house-urge-u-s-gov-to-maintain-cameroons-ineligibility-for-trade-benefits/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 21:51:41 +0000 https://cpj.org/?p=498606 The Committee to Protect Journalists and Freedom House called on the U.S. government to maintain Cameroon’s ineligibility for preferential trade benefits ahead of its July 18 African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA) review hearing, citing Cameroon’s continued repression and imprisonment of journalists in a joint comment.

Cameroon is consistently among Africa’s worst jailers of journalists, with five journalists—Amadou VamoulkeManch BibixyThomas Awah Junior, Tsi Conrad, and Kingsley Fomunyuy Njoka—currently behind bars in violation of international law, according to CPJ’s annual prison census

To meet AGOA eligibility requirements, reviewed by the Office of the United States Trade Representative, sub-Saharan countries must meet statutorily defined criteria, several of which relate to human rights. Given the ongoing detention of the journalists and the country’s poor press freedom record, CPJ and Freedom House said that Cameroon does not fully meet these criteria.

Read a copy of the comment in English here.


This content originally appeared on Committee to Protect Journalists and was authored by CPJ Staff.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/cpj-freedom-house-urge-u-s-gov-to-maintain-cameroons-ineligibility-for-trade-benefits/feed/ 0 544940
[Stephen Kinzer] Iran: The 1953 American Coup https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/stephen-kinzer-iran-the-1953-american-coup/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/stephen-kinzer-iran-the-1953-american-coup/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 21:00:37 +0000 https://www.alternativeradio.org/products/kins001/
This content originally appeared on AlternativeRadio and was authored by info@alternativeradio.org.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/stephen-kinzer-iran-the-1953-american-coup/feed/ 0 544942
Why is the far right drawn to Israel? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/why-is-the-far-right-drawn-to-israel/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/why-is-the-far-right-drawn-to-israel/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 20:01:03 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=4f4271ec92b7ef51aa6de96e793eac9a
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/why-is-the-far-right-drawn-to-israel/feed/ 0 544929
Demand Progress Launches Release the Epstein Files Campaign https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/demand-progress-launches-release-the-epstein-files-campaign/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/demand-progress-launches-release-the-epstein-files-campaign/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 19:47:59 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/demand-progress-launches-release-the-epstein-files-campaign On Thursday, Demand Progress launched a campaign supporting an effort by Reps. Thomas Massie (R-KY) and Ro Khanna (D-CA) to force the release of all files related to Jeffrey Epstein. If Massie and Khanna’s discharge petition can get 218 signatures in the House, they can force a floor vote demanding that Attorney General Pam Bondi release all records related to Jeffrey Epstein. A new Reuters/Ipsos poll found that 69 percent of Americans believe the government was hiding details about Epstein's clients. Through Demand Progress’s campaign website, Americans can track which lawmakers are supporting the petition and also contact their representatives and demand that they support the effort.

The following is a statement from Demand Progress Senior Policy Advisor Cavan Kharrazian:

“It is so obviously in the public interest to release all government materials about a convicted sex trafficker with ties to some of the most powerful and wealthy individuals in the world, including the sitting president. But instead of living up to his campaign promises, President Trump is telling his supporters to just stop talking about it. With all this muddied water, the only reasonable solution is to release the Epstein files and let the American people decide for themselves. This transcends partisan politics, which is why we’re calling on all Americans—Republicans, Democrats and independents—to call their representative and demand to see what the government is hiding.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/demand-progress-launches-release-the-epstein-files-campaign/feed/ 0 544969
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 17, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-17-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-17-2025/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=700bb1369ea9d47e5f04e7dad4569f6a Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 17, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-17-2025/feed/ 0 544953
On the ground in Gaza – exposing another US ‘aid’ massacre https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/on-the-ground-in-gaza-exposing-another-us-aid-massacre/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/on-the-ground-in-gaza-exposing-another-us-aid-massacre/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 16:54:38 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=536d1a95ebcc06b04c6828011bffde8e
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/on-the-ground-in-gaza-exposing-another-us-aid-massacre/feed/ 0 544896
Former NYPD Commissioner Accuses Mayor Adams of Running “Criminal Enterprise” and Cites ProPublica Investigation https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/former-nypd-commissioner-accuses-mayor-adams-of-running-criminal-enterprise-and-cites-propublica-investigation/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/former-nypd-commissioner-accuses-mayor-adams-of-running-criminal-enterprise-and-cites-propublica-investigation/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 16:30:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/lawsuit-nyc-mayor-eric-adams-community-response-team-thomas-donlon by Eric Umansky

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

What Happened: Former New York Police Department Commissioner Thomas Donlon sued Mayor Eric Adams and other top police officials on Wednesday, accusing Adams of running the force as a “criminal enterprise” that the mayor used to “consolidate power, obstruct justice and punish dissent.”

In the 251-page complaint, Donlon said the mayor used the department’s Community Response Team for political gain. “CRT became the enforcement arm of Defendant Adams’ political strategy,” the complaint says, “a tool for projecting ‘tough on crime’ optics at the expense of civil rights and constitutional law.”

It also calls the CRT a “rogue” unit that answered “only to City Hall.”

The suit drew extensively from a recent ProPublica investigation, which detailed how the mayor championed the CRT despite concerns within the Police Department about the unit. Adams, former officials said, was so close to the unit he had access to a little-known livestream of the CRT’s body-worn camera footage, a detail that Donlon cited in his legal complaint.

What They Said: “The Community Response Team speaks to the culture under Adams of willfully violating the constitutional rights of civilians and officers,” John Scola, Donlon’s lawyer, told ProPublica. That culture is: “We’ll do whatever we want.”

Background: In 2023, a senior NYPD official wrote a scathing internal audit after finding that CRT officers were wrongfully stopping New Yorkers and failing to document the incidents. Weeks later, Adams took to Instagram to boost the unit. “Turning out with the team,” he wrote, showing a photo of him wearing a wide smile and khaki pants, CRT’s official uniform.

The official who wrote that audit was pushed out months later. He and other top former commanders recently sued Adams alleging favoritism and misconduct, charges the mayor denies.

Why It Matters: Donlon, a former FBI agent who held the job of police commissioner for only two months, from September to November 2024, lobbed his accusations against Adams as the mayor has been waging an uphill battle to keep his job. Adams was indicted last fall on federal charges of bribery, fraud and illegally taking campaign contributions from foreigners. He pleaded not guilty. He avoided trial by making a deal with President Donald Trump, who dropped the prosecution in exchange for Adams working with the administration on immigration enforcement. Still, he remains unpopular in the city and is running for reelection as an independent against a popular Democrat, Zohran Mamdani.

Response: In a statement, the mayor’s office dismissed Donlon’s claims.

“These are baseless accusations from a disgruntled former employee who — when given the opportunity to lead the greatest police department in the world — proved himself to be ineffective,” the statement said. “This suit is nothing more than an attempt to seek compensation at the taxpayer’s expense after Mr. Donlon was rightfully removed from the role of interim police commissioner.”

Previously, Adam has defended the CRT. Asked about the unit at a press conference this spring, the mayor said, “CRT is here.” He continued, “I support all my units.”

The NYPD did not respond to requests for comment about the suit.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Eric Umansky.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/former-nypd-commissioner-accuses-mayor-adams-of-running-criminal-enterprise-and-cites-propublica-investigation/feed/ 0 544902
All the Epstein’s men – The Grayzone live https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/all-the-epsteins-men-the-grayzone-live/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/all-the-epsteins-men-the-grayzone-live/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 16:15:44 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=13aeae05f6c36f23c3a90bf5cdc66b72
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/all-the-epsteins-men-the-grayzone-live/feed/ 0 544880
Further on Down the Road | Roberto Luti & Friends | Mark’s Park | Playing For Change https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/further-on-down-the-road-roberto-luti-friends-marks-park-playing-for-change/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/further-on-down-the-road-roberto-luti-friends-marks-park-playing-for-change/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 15:55:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=59e08c6fbc3bf6d1b18e298a5fdaa945
This content originally appeared on Playing For Change and was authored by Playing For Change.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/further-on-down-the-road-roberto-luti-friends-marks-park-playing-for-change/feed/ 0 544878
Writer Adam Shatz on How Oct. 7 & Israel’s Brutality in Gaza Reshaped the World https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/writer-adam-shatz-on-how-oct-7-israels-brutality-in-gaza-reshaped-the-world-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/writer-adam-shatz-on-how-oct-7-israels-brutality-in-gaza-reshaped-the-world-2/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 15:14:06 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fd9ab2638edd44d28491d13e69a33780
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/writer-adam-shatz-on-how-oct-7-israels-brutality-in-gaza-reshaped-the-world-2/feed/ 0 544874
“If you can’t find the job you want, create it.” – TEASER https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/if-you-cant-find-the-job-you-want-create-it-teaser/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/if-you-cant-find-the-job-you-want-create-it-teaser/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 15:11:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=ee4cf4c94a87c4f6043ebb762f9b90f6 Our opening clip featured the poet June Jordan reciting her powerful piece A Menace to My Enemies. Jordan is a sheroe of this week’s guest, the unstoppable Mona Eltahawy: journalist, feminist firebrand, and global truth-teller whose voice cuts through the noise like no one else.

Mona is the author of Headscarves and Hymens, The Seven Necessary Sins for Women and Girls, and her latest, Bloody Hell!: Adventures in Menopause From Around the World. Her work spans continents and revolutions, from the frontlines of Egypt’s Arab Spring to the ongoing fight against patriarchy, white supremacy, and fascism everywhere. She’s here to inspire rebellion, liberation, and the refusal to be silenced.

Want to be part of conversations like this? Join the Gaslit Nation Salon, live every Monday at 4pm ET on Zoom. Meet fellow listeners, trade insights, vent your rage, and help build a living archive of resistance.

Sign up at Patreon.com/Gaslit. Annual memberships are discounted, and to everyone who already supports the show—thank you. You make this space possible.

Looking for a summer read that pairs well with revolution? Pick up the Gaslit Nation graphic novel, Dictatorship: It’s Easier Than You Think! Follow our shady narrator, Judge Lackey, as he bumbles through the dark comedy of authoritarianism, dodging accountability and panicking over activists and journalists. Find it at your local library or at Bookshop.org.

EVENTS AT GASLIT NATION:

  • August 25 4pm ET – Join the Gaslit Nation Book Club for a powerful discussion on The Lives of Others and I’m Still Here, two films that explore how art and love endure and resist in the face of dictatorship.

  • Minnesota Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Vermont Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Arizona-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to connect, available on Patreon. 

  • Indiana-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to join, available on Patreon. 

  • Florida-based listeners are going strong meeting in person. Be sure to join their Signal group, available on Patreon. 

  • Have you taken Gaslit Nation’s HyperNormalization Survey Yet?

  • Gaslit Nation Salons take place Mondays 4pm ET over Zoom and the first ~40 minutes are recorded and shared on Patreon.com/Gaslit for our community

Want to enjoy Gaslit Nation ad-free? Join our community of listeners for bonus shows, exclusive Q&A sessions, our group chat, invites to live events like our Monday political salons at 4pm ET over Zoom, and more! Sign up at Patreon.com/Gaslit!

 

Show Notes:

June Jordan reciting her poem “A Menace to My Enemies” https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L898_qsfv7M


This content originally appeared on Gaslit Nation and was authored by Andrea Chalupa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/if-you-cant-find-the-job-you-want-create-it-teaser/feed/ 0 544866
"I’m a Genocide Scholar. I Know It When I See It": Prof Omer Bartov on the Growing Consensus on Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/im-a-genocide-scholar-i-know-it-when-i-see-it-prof-omer-bartov-on-the-growing-consensus-on-gaza-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/im-a-genocide-scholar-i-know-it-when-i-see-it-prof-omer-bartov-on-the-growing-consensus-on-gaza-2/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 15:10:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d76d0ddf4dd681ced58ce69d54992a4b
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/im-a-genocide-scholar-i-know-it-when-i-see-it-prof-omer-bartov-on-the-growing-consensus-on-gaza-2/feed/ 0 544876
Writer Adam Shatz on How Oct. 7 & Israel’s Brutality in Gaza Reshaped the World https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/writer-adam-shatz-on-how-oct-7-israels-brutality-in-gaza-reshaped-the-world/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/writer-adam-shatz-on-how-oct-7-israels-brutality-in-gaza-reshaped-the-world/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 12:42:25 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6be7b05a993ac4a057c47a42ba373494 Guest adam shatz

Israel launched airstrikes that destroyed part of the Syrian Defense Ministry and a facility near the presidential palace in Damascus on Wednesday, killing three people. This comes weeks after Israel launched unprovoked strikes on Iran, which led to a brief war that killed over 900 Iranians and 29 people in Israel. Adam Shatz, U.S. editor at the London Review of Books, says Israel’s motivation in the Middle East is to “settle accounts with any force in the region that might challenge its domination.” He also notes violent language around foreign policy has become “banal” in many Western countries. “It’s not simply Trump and the far right who speak blithely about overthrowing foreign governments, about bombing other foreign populations. It’s people who have a reputation … for being liberals and moderates,” says Shatz.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/writer-adam-shatz-on-how-oct-7-israels-brutality-in-gaza-reshaped-the-world/feed/ 0 544847
“I’m a Genocide Scholar. I Know It When I See It”: Prof. Omer Bartov on the Growing Consensus on Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/im-a-genocide-scholar-i-know-it-when-i-see-it-prof-omer-bartov-on-the-growing-consensus-on-gaza/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/im-a-genocide-scholar-i-know-it-when-i-see-it-prof-omer-bartov-on-the-growing-consensus-on-gaza/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 12:15:31 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=0554d7486ccabd05a1d7e49040051666 Guest omer bartov

We speak with leading Israeli American historian Omer Bartov about his latest essay for The New York Times, headlined “I’m a Genocide Scholar. I Know It When I See It.” Bartov cites the United Nations definition of “genocide,” which includes an intent to destroy a group of people that makes it impossible for the group to reconstitute itself. “This is precisely what Israel is trying to do,” he says. “Israel is trying to concentrate the population of Gaza in the southernmost parts of the strip, to enclose them and to enforce, eventually, either that they would just die out there or that they would be removed from the Gaza Strip altogether.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/im-a-genocide-scholar-i-know-it-when-i-see-it-prof-omer-bartov-on-the-growing-consensus-on-gaza/feed/ 0 544849
Flying the flags for Palestine – NZ protesters take message to Devonport https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/flying-the-flags-for-palestine-nz-protesters-take-message-to-devonport/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/flying-the-flags-for-palestine-nz-protesters-take-message-to-devonport/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 11:36:32 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117657 The Devonport Flagstaff

About 200 people marched in Devonport last Saturday in support of Palestine.

Pro-Palestine flags and placards were draped on the band rotunda at Windsor Reserve as speakers, including Green Party co-leader Chlöe Swarbrick and the people power manager of Amnesty International Aotearoa New Zealand Margaret Taylor, a Devonport local, encouraged the crowd to continue to fight for peace in the Middle East.

The Devonport Out For Gaza rally progressed up Victoria Rd to the Victoria Theatre, crossed the road, came down to the ferry terminal, then marched along the waterfront to the New Zealand Navy base.

Swarbrick said the New Zealand government and New Zealanders could not turn a blind eye to what was happening in Palestine.

The rally, organised by the Palestine Solidarity Network Aotearoa (PSNA), marked the 92nd consecutive week that a march has been held in Auckland in support of Palestine.

Republished with permission from The Devonport Flagstaff.

Call to action . . . Devonport peace activist Ruth Coombes (left) and Green Party co-leader Chlöe Swarbrick at the microphone (right). Image: The Devonport Flagstaff
Call to action . . . Devonport peace activist Ruth Coombes (left) and Green Party co-leader Chlöe Swarbrick at the microphone (right). Image: The Devonport Flagstaff


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/flying-the-flags-for-palestine-nz-protesters-take-message-to-devonport/feed/ 0 545567
12 countries agree to confront Israel collectively over Gaza after Bogotá summit https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/12-countries-agree-to-confront-israel-collectively-over-gaza-after-bogota-summit/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/12-countries-agree-to-confront-israel-collectively-over-gaza-after-bogota-summit/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 09:07:08 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117430 ANALYSIS: By Mick Hall

Collective measures to confront Israel’s genocide of the Palestinian people have been agreed by 12 nations after an emergency summit of the Hague Group in Bogotá, Colombia.

A joint statement today announced the six measures, which it said were geared to holding Israel to account for its crimes in Palestine and would operate within the states’ domestic legal and legislative frameworks.

Nearly two dozen other nations in attendance at the summit are now pondering whether to sign up to the measures before a September deadline set by the Hague Group.

New Zealand and Australia stayed away from the summit.

The measures include preventing the provision or transfer of arms, munitions, military fuel and dual-use items to Israel and preventing the transit, docking or servicing of vessels if there is a risk of vessels carrying such items. No vessel under the flag of the countries would be allowed to carry this equipment.

The countries would also “commence an urgent review of all public contracts, in order to prevent public institutions and public funds, where applicable, from supporting Israel’s illegal occupation of the Palestinian Territory which may entrench its unlawful presence in the territory, to ensure that our nationals, and companies and entities under our jurisdiction, as well as our authorities, do not act in any way that would entail recognition or provide aid or assistance in maintaining the situation created by Israel’s illegal presence in the Occupied Palestinian Territory”.

The countries will prosecute “the most serious crimes under international law through robust, impartial and independent investigations and prosecutions at national or international levels, in compliance with our obligation to ensure justice for all victims and the prevention of future crimes”.

They agreed to support universal jurisdiction mandates, “as and where applicable in our legal constitutional frameworks and judiciaries, to ensure justice for all victims and the prevention of future crimes in the Occupied Palestine Territory”.

This will mean IDF soldiers and others accused of war crimes in Palestine would face arrest and could go through domestic judicial processes in these countries, or referrals to the ICC.

The statement said the measures constituted a collective commitment to defend the foundational principles of international law.

It also called on the UN Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC) to commission an immediate investigation of the health and nutritional needs of the population of Gaza, devise a plan to meet those needs on a continuing and sustained basis, and report on these matters before the 80th session of the United Nations General Assembly in September.

Following repeated total blockades of Gaza since October 7, 2023, Gazans have been dying of starvation as they continue to be bombed and repeatedly displaced and their means of life destroyed.

The official death toll stands at nearly 59,000, mostly women and children, although some estimates put that number at over 200,000.

The joint statement recognised Israel as a threat to regional peace and the system of international law and called on all United Nations member states to enforce their obligations under the UN charter.

It condemned “unilateral attacks and threats against United Nations mandate holders, as well as key institutions of the human rights architecture and international justice” and committed to build “on the legacy of global solidarity movements that have dismantled apartheid and other oppressive systems, setting a model for future co-ordinated responses to international law violations”.

Countries face wrath of US
Ministers, high-ranking officials and envoys from 30 nations attended the two-day event, from July 15-16, called to come up with the measures. It is now hoped some of those attendees will sign up to the statement by September.

For countries like Ireland, which sent a delegation, signing up would have profound implications. The Irish government has been heavily criticised by its own citizens for continuing to allow Shannon Airport as a transit point for military equipment from the United States to be sent to Israel.

It would also face the prospect of severe reprisals by the US, as would others thinking of adding their names to the collective statement. The US is now expected to consult with nations that attended and warn them of the consequences of signing up.

The summit had been billed by the UN Rapporteur for Human Rights in the Occupied Palestinian Territories, Francesca Albanese, as “the most significant political development of the last 20 months”.

Albanese had told attendees that “for too long, international law has been treated as optional — applied selectively to those perceived as weak, ignored by those acting as the powerful”.

“This double standard has eroded the very foundations of the legal order. That era must end,” she said.

Co-chaired by Colombia and South Africa, the Hague group was established by nine nations in late January at The Hague in the Netherlands to hold Israel to account for its crimes and push for Palestinian self-determination.

Colombia last year ended diplomatic relations with Israel, while South Africa in late December 2023 filed an application at the International Court of Justice (ICJ) accusing Israel of genocide, which was joined by nearly two dozen countries.

The ICJ has determined a plausible genocide is taking place and issued orders for Israel to protect Palestinians and take measures to stop genocide taking place, a call ignored by the Zionist state.

Representatives from the countries arrived in Bogota this week in defiance of the United States, which last week sanctioned Albanese for attempts to have US and Israeli political officials and business leaders prosecuted by the ICC over Gaza.

Secretary of State Marco Rubio called it an illegitimate “campaign of political and economic warfare”.

It followed the sanctioning of four ICC judges after arrest warrants were issued in November last year for Israel Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu and former defence minister Yoav Gallant, for crimes against humanity and war crimes.

Ahead of the Bogota meeting, the US State Department accused The Hague Group of multilateral attempts to “weaponise international law as a tool to advance radical anti-Western agendas” and warned the US would “aggressively defend” its interests.

Signs of division in the West
Most of those attending came from nations in the Global South, but not all.

Founding Hague Group members Belize, Bolivia, Colombia, Cuba, Honduras, Malaysia, Namibia, Senegal and South Africa attended the Summit. Joining them were Algeria, Bangladesh, Botswana, Brazil, Chile, China, Djibouti, Indonesia, Iraq, Republic of Ireland, Lebanon, Libya, Mexico, Nicaragua, Oman, Pakistan, Palestine, Qatar, Saint Vincent and the Grenadines, Uruguay, and Venezuela.

However, in a sign of increasing division in the West, NATO members Spain, Portugal, Norway, Slovenia and Turkey also attended.

Inside the summit, former US State Department official Annelle Sheline, who resigned in March over Gaza, defended the right of those attending “to uphold their obligations under the UN Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide”.

“This is not the weaponisation of international law. This is the application of international law,” she told delegates.

The US and Israel deny accusations that genocide is taking place in Gaza, while Western media have collectively refused to adjudicate the claims or frame stories around Israel’s ethnic cleansing of the strip, despite ample evidence by the UN and genocide experts.

Since 7 October 2023, US allies have offered diplomatic cover for Israel by repeating it had “a right to defend itself” and was engaged in a legitimate defensive “war against Hamas”.

Israel now plans to corral starving Gazans into a concentration camp in the south of the strip, with many analysts expecting the IDF to exterminate anyone found outside its boundaries, while preparing to push those inside across the border into Egypt.

Asia Pacific and EU allies shun Bogota summit
Addressing attendees at the summit yesterday, Albanese criticised the EU for its neo-colonialism and support for Israel, criticisms that can be extended to US allies in the Asia Pacific region.

Independent journalist Abby Martin reported Albanese as saying: “Europe and its institutions are guided more by colonial mindset than principle, acting as vessels to US Empire even as it drags us from war to war, misery to misery.

“The Hague Group is a new moral centre in world politics. Millions are hoping for leadership that can birth a new global order, rooted in justice, humanity and collective liberation. It’s not just about Palestine. This is about all of us.”

The Australian Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade was asked why Foreign Minister Penny Wong did not take up an invite to attend the Hague Group meeting. In a statement to Mick Hall in Context, a spokesperson said she had been unable to attend, but did not explain why.

She said Australia was a “resolute defender of international law” and added: “Australia has consistently been part of international calls that all parties must abide by international humanitarian law. Not enough has been done to protect civilians and aid workers.

“We have called on Israel to respond substantively to the ICJ’s advisory opinion on the legal consequences arising from Israel’s policies and practices in the Occupied Palestinian Territories.

“We have also called on Israel to comply with the binding orders of the ICJ, including to enable the unhindered provision of basic services and humanitarian assistance at scale.”

When asked why New Zealand’s Foreign Minister Winston Peters had failed to take up the invitation or send any of his officials, a Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade (MFAT) spokesperson simply refused to comment.

She said MFAT media advisors would only engage with “recognised news media outlets”.

Australia’s Prime Minister Anthony Albanese and New Zealand’s Prime Minister Christopher Luxon, as well as a number of his ministers, have been referred to the ICC by domestic legal teams, accused of complicity in the genocide.

Evidence against Albanese was accepted into the ICC’s wider investigation of crimes in Gaza in October last year, while Luxon’s referral earlier this month is being assessed by the Chief Prosecutor’s Office.

Delegates told humanity at stake
Delegates heard several impassioned addresses from speakers on what was at stake during the two-day event in Bogota.

Palestinian-American trauma surgeon, Dr Thaer Ahmad, told the gathering that Palestinians seeking food were being met with bullets, describing aid distribution facilities set up by the US contractor-run Gaza Humanitarian Foundation (GHF) as “slaughterhouses”. More than 800 starving Gazans have been killed at the GHF aid points so far.

“People know they could die but cannot sit idly by and watch their families starve,” he said.

“The bullets fired by GHF mercenaries are just one part of the weaponisation of aid, where Palestinians are ghettoised into areas where somebody in military fatigues decides if you are worthy of food or not.”

Palestinian diplomat Riyad Mansour had urged the summit attendees to take decisive action to not only save the Palestinian people, but redeem humanity.

“Instead of outrage at the crimes we know are taking place, we find those who defend, normalise, and even celebrate them,” he said.

“The core values we believed humanity agreed were universal are shattered, blown to pieces like the tens of thousands of starved, murdered and injured civilians in Palestine.

“The mind and heart cannot fathom or process the immense pain and horror that has taken hold of the lives of an entire people. We must not fail — not just for Palestine’s sake — but for humanity’s sake.”

At the beginning of the summit, Colombian Deputy Foreign Minister Mauricio Jaramillo Jassir told summit delegates the Palestinian genocide threatened the entire international system.

Colombian President Gustavo Petro wrote in The Guardian last week: “We can either stand firm in defence of the legal principles that seek to prevent war and conflict, or watch helplessly as the international system collapses under the weight of unchecked power politics.”

Meanwhile, EU foreign ministers, as well as Israel’s Foreign Minister Gideon Sa’ar and Syrian counterpart, Asaad Hassan al-Shaibani, met in Brussels at the same time as the Bogota summit, to discuss Middle East co-operation, but also possible options for action against Israel.

At the EU–Southern Neighbourhood Ministerial Meeting, EU foreign policy chief Kaja Kallas put forward potential actions after Israel was found to have breached the EU economic cooperation deal with the bloc on human rights grounds. As expected, no sanctions, restricted trade or suspension of the co-operation deal were agreed.

The EU has been one of Israel’s most strident backers in its campaign against Gaza, with EU members Germany and France in particular supplying weapons, as well as political support.

The UK government has continued to supply arms and operate spy planes over Gaza over the past 21 months, launched from bases in Cyprus, while its military has issued D-Notices to censor media reports that its special forces have been operating inside the occupied territories.

Mick Hall is an independent Irish-New Zealand journalist, formerly of RNZ and AAP, based in New Zealand since 2009. He writes primarily on politics, corporate power and international affairs. This article is republished from his substack Mick Hall in Context with permission.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/12-countries-agree-to-confront-israel-collectively-over-gaza-after-bogota-summit/feed/ 0 544814
RFK Jr. Wants to Revolutionize a Program That Supports Childhood Immunizations. The Results Could Be Catastrophic. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/rfk-jr-wants-to-revolutionize-a-program-that-supports-childhood-immunizations-the-results-could-be-catastrophic/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/rfk-jr-wants-to-revolutionize-a-program-that-supports-childhood-immunizations-the-results-could-be-catastrophic/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/rfk-childhood-vaccines-vicp by Patricia Callahan

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

Five months after taking over the federal agency responsible for the health of all Americans, Robert F. Kennedy Jr. wants to overhaul an obscure but vital program that underpins the nation’s childhood immunization system.

Depending on what he does, the results could be catastrophic.

In his crosshairs is the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program, a system designed to provide fair and quick payouts for people who suffer rare but serious side effects from shots — without having to prove that drugmakers were negligent. Congress created the program in the 1980s when lawsuits drove vaccine makers from the market. A special tax on immunizations funds the awards, and manufacturers benefit from legal protections that make it harder to win big-money verdicts against them in civil courts.

Kennedy, who founded an anti-vaccination group and previously accused the pharmaceutical industry of inflicting “unnecessary and risky vaccines” on children for profits, has long argued that the program removes any incentive for the industry to make safe products.

In a recent interview with Tucker Carlson, Kennedy condemned what he called corruption in the program and said he had assigned a team to overhaul it and expand who could seek compensation. He didn’t detail his plans but did repeat the long-debunked claim that vaccines cause autism and suggested, without citing any evidence, that shots could also be responsible for a litany of chronic ailments, from diabetes to narcolepsy.

There are a number of ways he could blow up the program and prompt vaccine makers to stop selling shots in the U.S., like they did in the 1980s. The trust fund that pays awards, for instance, could run out of money if the government made it easy for Kennedy’s laundry list of common health problems to qualify for payments from the fund.

Or he could pick away at the program one shot at a time. Right now, immunizations routinely recommended for children or pregnant women are covered by the program. Kennedy has the power to drop vaccines from the list, a move that would open up their manufacturers to the kinds of lawsuits that made them flee years ago.

Dr. Eddy Bresnitz, who served as New Jersey’s state epidemiologist and then spent a dozen years as a vaccine executive at Merck, is among those worried.

“If his unstated goal is to basically destroy the vaccine industry, that could do it,” said Bresnitz, who retired from Merck and has consulted for vaccine manufacturers. “I still believe, having worked in the industry, that they care about protecting American health, but they are also for-profit companies with shareholders, and anything that detracts from the bottom line that can be avoided, they will avoid.”

A spokesperson for PhRMA, a U.S. trade group for pharmaceutical companies, told ProPublica in a written statement that upending the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program “would threaten continued patient access to FDA approved vaccines.”

The spokesperson, Andrew Powaleny, said the program “has compensated thousands of claims while helping ensure the continued availability of a safe and effective vaccine supply. It remains a vital safeguard for public health and importantly doesn’t shield manufacturers from liability.”

Since its inception, the compensation fund has paid about $4.8 billion in awards for harm from serious side effects, such as life-threatening allergic reactions and Guillain-Barré syndrome, an autoimmune condition that can cause paralysis. The federal agency that oversees the program found that for every 1 million doses of vaccine distributed between 2006 and 2023, about one person was compensated for an injury.

Since becoming Health and Human Services secretary, Kennedy has turned the staid world of immunizations on its ear. He reneged on the U.S. government’s pledge to fund vaccinations for the world’s poorest kids. He fired every member of the federal advisory group that recommends which shots Americans get, and his new slate vowed to scrutinize the U.S. childhood immunization schedule. Measles, a vaccine-preventable disease eliminated here in 2000, roared back and hit a grim record — more cases than the U.S. has seen in 33 years, including three deaths. When a U.S. senator asked Kennedy if he recommended measles shots, Kennedy answered, “Senator, if I advised you to swim in a lake that I knew there to be alligators in, wouldn’t you want me to tell you there were alligators in it?”

Fed up, the American Academy of Pediatrics and other medical societies sued Kennedy last week, accusing him of dismantling “the longstanding, Congressionally-authorized, science- and evidence-based vaccine infrastructure that has prevented the deaths of untold millions of Americans.” (The federal government has yet to respond to the suit.)

Just about all drugs have side effects. What’s unusual about vaccines is that they’re given to healthy people — even newborns on their first day of life. And many shots protect not just the individuals receiving them but also the broader community by making it harder for deadly scourges to spread. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention estimates that routine childhood immunizations have prevented more than 1.1 million deaths and 32 million hospitalizations among the generation of Americans born between 1994 and 2023.

To most people, the nation’s vaccine system feels like a solid, reliable fact of life, doling out shots to children like clockwork. But in reality it is surprisingly fragile.

There are only a handful of companies that make nearly all of the shots children receive. Only one manufacturer makes chickenpox vaccines. And just two or three make the shots that protect against more than a dozen diseases, including polio and measles. If any were to drop out, the country could find itself in the same crisis that led President Ronald Reagan to sign the law creating the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program in 1986.

Back then, pharmaceutical companies faced hundreds of lawsuits alleging that the vaccine protecting kids from whooping cough, diphtheria and tetanus caused unrelenting seizures that led to severe disabilities. (Today’s version of this shot is different.) One vaccine maker after another left the U.S. market.

At one point, pediatricians could only buy whooping cough vaccines from a single company. Shortages were so bad that the CDC recommended doctors stop giving booster shots to preserve supplies for the most vulnerable babies.

While Congress debated what to do, public health clinics’ cost per dose jumped 5,000% in five years.

“We were really concerned that we would lose all vaccines, and we would get major resurgences of vaccine-preventable diseases,” recalled Dr. Walter Orenstein, a vaccine expert who worked in the CDC’s immunization division at the time.

A Forbes headline captured the anxiety of parents, pediatricians and public health workers: “Scared Shotless.” So a bipartisan group in Congress hammered out the no-fault system.

Today, the program covers vaccines routinely recommended for children or pregnant women once Congress approves the special tax that funds awards. (COVID-19 shots are part of a separate, often-maligned system for handling claims of harm, though Kennedy has said he’s looking at ways to add them to the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program.)

Under program rules, people who say they are harmed by covered vaccines can’t head straight to civil court to sue manufacturers. First, they have to go through the no-fault system. The law established a table of injuries and the time frame for when those conditions must have appeared in order to be considered for quicker payouts. A tax on those vaccines — now 75 cents for every disease that a shot protects against — flows into a trust fund that pays those approved for awards. Win or lose, the program, for the most part, pays attorney fees and forbids lawyers from taking a cut of the money paid to the injured.

The law set up a dedicated vaccine court where government officials known as special masters, who operate like judges, rule on cases without juries. People can ask for compensation for health problems not listed on the injury table, and they don’t have to prove that the vaccine maker was negligent or failed to warn them about the medical condition they wound up with. At the same time, they can’t claim punitive damages, which drive up payouts in civil courts, and pain and suffering payments are capped at $250,000.

Plaintiffs who aren’t satisfied with the outcome or whose cases drag on too long can exit the program and file their cases in traditional civil courts. There they can pursue punitive damages, contingency-fee agreements with lawyers and the usual evidence gathering that plaintiffs use to hold companies accountable for wrongdoing.

But a Supreme Court ruling, interpreting the law that created the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program, limited the kinds of claims that can prevail in civil court. So while the program isn’t a full liability shield for vaccine makers, its very existence significantly narrows the cases trial lawyers can file.

Kennedy has been involved in such civil litigation. In his federal disclosures, he revealed that he referred plaintiffs to a law firm filing cases against Merck over its HPV shot in exchange for a 10% cut of the fees if they win. After a heated exchange with Sen. Elizabeth Warren during his confirmation proceedings, Kennedy said his share of any money from those cases would instead go to one of his adult sons, who he later said is a lawyer in California. His son Conor works as an attorney at the Los Angeles law firm benefiting from his referrals. When ProPublica asked about this arrangement, Conor Kennedy wrote, “I don’t work on those cases and I’m not receiving any money from them.”

In March, a North Carolina federal judge overseeing hundreds of cases that alleged Merck failed to warn patients about serious side effects from its HPV vaccine ruled in favor of Merck; an appeal is pending.

The Vaccine Injury Compensation Program succeeded in stabilizing the business of childhood vaccines, with many more shots developed and approved in the decades since it was established. But even ardent supporters acknowledge there are problems. The program’s staff levels haven’t kept up with the caseload. The law capped the number of special masters at eight, and congressional bills to increase that have failed. An influx of adult claims swamped the system after adverse reactions to flu shots became eligible for compensation in 2005 and serious shoulder problems were added to the injury table in 2017.

The quick and smooth system of payouts originally envisioned has evolved into a more adversarial one with lawyers for the Department of Justice duking it out with plaintiffs’ attorneys, which Kennedy says runs counter to the program’s intent. Many cases drag on for years.

In his recent interview with Carlson, he described “the lawyers of the Department of Justice, the leaders of it” working on the cases as corrupt. “They saw their job as protecting the trust fund rather than taking care of people who made this national sacrifice, and we’re going to change all that,” he said. “And I’ve brought in a team this week that is starting to work on that.”

The system is “supposed to be generous and fast and gives a tie to the runner,” he told Carlson. “In other words, if there’s doubts about, you know, whether somebody’s injury came from a vaccine or not, you’re going to assume they got it and compensate them.”

Kennedy didn’t identify who is on the team reviewing the program. At one point in the interview, he said, “We just brought a guy in this week who’s going to be revolutionizing the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program.”

The HHS employee directory now lists Andrew Downing as a counselor working in Kennedy’s office. Downing for many years has filed claims with the program and suits in civil courts on behalf of clients alleging harm from shots. Last month, HHS awarded a contract for “Vaccine Injury Compensation Program expertise” to Downing’s firm, as NOTUS has reported.

Downing did not respond to a voicemail left at his law office. HHS didn’t reply to a request to make him and Kennedy available for an interview and declined to answer detailed questions about its plans for the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program. In the past, an HHS spokesperson has said that Kennedy is “not anti-vaccine — he is pro-safety.”

While it’s not clear what changes Downing and Kennedy have in mind, Kennedy’s interview with Carlson offered some insights. Kennedy said he was working to expand the program’s three-year statute of limitations so that more people can be compensated. Downing has complained that patients who have certain autoimmune disorders don’t realize their ailments were caused by a vaccine until it’s too late to file. Congress would have to change the law to allow this, experts said.

A key issue is whether Kennedy will try to add new ailments to the list of injuries that qualify for quicker awards.

In the Carlson interview, Kennedy dismissed the many studies and scientific consensus that shots don’t cause autism as nothing more than statistical trickery. “We’re going to do real science,” Kennedy said.

The vaccine court spent years in the 2000s trying cases that alleged autism was caused by the vaccine ingredient thimerosal and the shot that protects people from measles, mumps and rubella. Facing more than 5,000 claims, the court asked a committee of attorneys representing children with autism to pick test cases that represented themes common in the broader group. In the cases that went to trial, the special masters considered more than 900 medical articles and heard testimony from dozens of experts. In each of those cases, the special masters found that the shots didn’t cause autism.

In at least two subsequent cases, children with autism were granted compensation because they met the criteria listed in the program’s injury table, according to a vaccine court decision. That table, for instance, lists certain forms of encephalopathy — a type of brain dysfunction — as a rare side effect of shots that protect people from whooping cough, measles, mumps and rubella. In a 2016 vaccine court ruling, Special Master George L. Hastings Jr. explained, “The compensation of these two cases, thus does not afford any support to the notion that vaccinations can contribute to the causation of autism.”

Hastings noted that when Congress set up the injury table, the lawmakers acknowledged that people would get compensated for “some injuries that were not, in fact, truly vaccine-caused.”

Many disabling neurological disorders in children become apparent around the time kids get their shots. Figuring out whether the timing was coincidental or an indication that the vaccines caused the problem has been a huge challenge.

Devastating seizures in young children were the impetus for the compensation program. But in the mid-1990s, after a yearslong review of the evidence, HHS removed seizure disorder from the injury table and narrowed the type of encephalopathy that would automatically qualify for compensation. Scientists subsequently have discovered genetic mutations that cause some of the most severe forms of epilepsy.

What’s different now, though, is that Kennedy, as HHS secretary, has the power to add autism or other disorders to that injury table. Experts say he’d have to go through the federal government’s cumbersome rulemaking process to do so. He could also lean on federal employees to green-light more claims.

In addition, Kennedy has made it clear he’s thinking about illnesses beyond autism. “We have now this epidemic of immune dysregulation in our country, and there’s no way to rule out vaccines as one of the key culprits,” he told Carlson. Kennedy mentioned diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis, seizure disorders, ADHD, speech delay, language delay, tics, Tourette syndrome, narcolepsy, peanut allergies and eczema.

President Donald Trump’s budget estimated that the value of the investments in the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program trust fund could reach $4.8 billion this year. While that’s a lot of money, a life-care plan for a child with severe autism can cost tens of millions of dollars, and the CDC reported in April that 1 in 31 children is diagnosed with autism by their 8th birthday. The other illnesses Kennedy mentioned also affect a wide swath of the U.S. population.

Dr. Paul Offit, a co-inventor of a rotavirus vaccine and director of the Vaccine Education Center at Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia, for years has sparred with Kennedy over vaccines. Offit fears that Kennedy will use flawed studies to justify adding autism and other common medical problems to the injury table, no matter how much they conflict with robust scientific research.

“You can do that, and you will bankrupt the program,” he said. “These are ways to end vaccine manufacturing in this country.”

If the trust fund were to run out of money, Congress would have to act, said Dorit Reiss, a law professor at University of California Law San Francisco who has studied the Vaccine Injury Compensation Program. Congress could increase the excise tax on vaccines, she said, or pass a law limiting what’s on the injury table. Or Congress could abolish the program, and the vaccine makers would find themselves back in the situation they faced in the 1980s.

“That’s not unrealistic,” Reiss said.

Rep. Paul Gosar, an Arizona Republican, last year proposed the End the Vaccine Carveout Act, which would have allowed people to bypass the no-fault system and head straight to civil court. His press release for the bill — written in September, before Kennedy’s ascension to HHS secretary — quoted Kennedy saying, “If we want safe and effective vaccines, we need to end the liability shield.”

The legislation never came up for a vote. A spokesperson for the congressman said he expects to introduce it again “in the very near future.”

Renée Gentry, director of the George Washington University Law School’s Vaccine Injury Litigation Clinic, thinks it’s unlikely Congress will blow up the no-fault program. But Gentry, who represents people filing claims for injuries, said it’s hard to predict what Congress, faced with a doomsday scenario, would do.

“Normally Democrats are friends of plaintiffs’ lawyers,” she said. “But talking about vaccines on the Hill is like walking on a razor blade that’s on fire.”


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Patricia Callahan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/rfk-jr-wants-to-revolutionize-a-program-that-supports-childhood-immunizations-the-results-could-be-catastrophic/feed/ 0 544816
Novelist Rufi Thorpe on embracing enthusiasm and taking big risks https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/novelist-rufi-thorpe-on-embracing-enthusiasm-and-taking-big-risks/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/novelist-rufi-thorpe-on-embracing-enthusiasm-and-taking-big-risks/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-rufi-thorpe-on-embracing-enthusiasm-and-taking-big-risks With the release of your latest book, MARGO’S GOT MONEY TROUBLES, your work went from being a more literary-upmarket style of fiction to more upmarket-commercial fiction. Was that an intentional shift you made as you were writing MARGO’S GOT MONEY TROUBLES, or did your publisher make those calls?

I certainly was not trying to write a more commercial book. The part of me that gets the ideas for books is unfortunately unable to learn worldly wisdom like that. I was kind of aware that it was a better log line than my other books. It’s kind of hard to describe what the other books are. It’s just like they don’t have a strong pitch, and I was aware that OnlyFans was timely or culturally relevant in some way, but I think that it really was kind of a surprise, honestly, to both me and to my publisher, that MARGO did so well. And I think that it was in part just because of the TV show and all of that happening, I think that Hollywood immediately was like, “OnlyFans? This is culturally relevant!” And I think we thought that the book was going to be too weird or too left of center to have a broad appeal. I was more involved in how this one was going to be marketed and I wasn’t really thinking about upmarket or low market.

All I was thinking about was trying to communicate. I wanted to communicate two things with the cover. I wanted it to be clear that some dark stuff was going to happen, but that overall, the book was going to be really fun.

A lot of times sex work is used as a flagellating-women plot: you’re there to watch a woman get punished, and then you get whatever pleasure you get out of that, I guess. I wanted it to be clear that it wasn’t going to be that kind of book. I wanted it to be clear that it was going to be weird, and I had long thought about MARGO as kind of a superhero, so I was the one pushing for an illustrated, comic-booky style because I felt like that would get across that it’s going to be fun and that she’s going to be kind of a superhero character who goes on these adventures.

You mentioned that you felt like MARGO’S GOT MONEY TROUBLES had a stronger log line than your previous books. Has that influenced your writing today? Do you want to have that piece kind of secured when you’re working on a project?

Well, unfortunately, like I said, it’s more that I will work harder trying to figure out what the log line could possibly be. But the project is kind of the project. You just don’t have that much choice over what you get obsessed with. Then it’s more like, how could I make somebody else understand what I’m talking about fastest?

I think I am much more patient at this point in my career with just understanding that nobody is going to understand how to position a book better than me, and also nobody is going to care as much. And so it behooves me to spend some time thinking about how to communicate about what kind of book this is and who it would appeal to.

I was very keenly aware of this after THE GIRLS FROM CORONA DEL MAR: the hardcover design had this beautiful black-and-white photograph. And I loved the photograph, and I loved the cover, but also I kind of knew that I wouldn’t necessarily go pick that book up in a bookshop because I’m usually looking for things that are a little bit more offbeat or weird looking than that. And then I saw in a bunch of the reviews for that book, which were from a lot of women being really upset that there’s a lot of the F word in it. I was like, “Oh, it’s like we tricked them into thinking this is going to be some sort of nice seaside girlhood memoir.” Since then, I think that I have gotten more confident in my own judgments in terms of how you communicate to a reader what this book is going to be.

It seems like your audience has grown a lot since MARGO’S GOT MONEY TROUBLES came out last year. Do you have any advice for writers about how to handle audience growth?

Oh, I don’t know. I mean, RuPaul said a beautiful thing, which is that all novels are beacons. And I think that it is counterintuitive at first that you find your widest audiences by being most idiosyncratically, passionately yourself. But I think that that’s true. I think that that’s the magic of it: it’s like when you figure out, “Oh, what I can contribute is my own warty, imperfect experience of reality. This little shit hill that is myself is what I’ve got, so I’m just going to work it.” And then you find out that the more you relax into being yourself instead of being who you think people want you to be, that’s when you start to appeal to more people, because you’re being authentic finally, and you’re not just peddling some heavily edited version of yourself.

It is scary to be perceived by a lot of people. It’s scary. I hated the emphasis on social media in the 2010s. It was very much seen as, like, “You’ve got to be on Twitter,” and I was so bad at all of it. I just am a fiercely private little weirdo. I’m not good at taking my personality and making it a product, and I just found it so nerve wracking to try and have these glib little conversations in this public way. And now I just try to not think about it at all. If I’m going to post something, I try and pretend that I’m only posting it for my friends.

If people don’t like me, I feel like that’s maybe a sacred right. I feel like I personally reserve the right to hate books that are even very good books. And honestly, a book that’s capable of pissing me off has really already achieved something magnificent. It’s better than being a book that you can’t remember what it was about a year later. I’ve just tried to let go of trying to control or cultivate how people think about me. And it turns out that it is safe. It’s okay for some people to not like you. You can’t write a book that’s going to please everybody. It’s okay to get some bad reviews. It’s okay. It’s even okay to write a book that’s not very good. You’ve got to try anyway.

It’s interesting hearing what you were just saying about not being a fan of sharing your life online, because I think you have one of the most creative marketing practices I’ve ever seen.

Really?

I mean, you have the most fun author website ever: I watched an interview you did with Emma Straub, and she said the exact same thing, and I was like, “thank God other people are noticing Rufi’s website.” And you made this hilarious video during the pandemic where you put on a wig and interviewed yourself about your novel THE KNOCKOUT QUEEN. I think a lot of writers get really intimidated by the idea of marketing their books, but you seem to lean into it in a way that’s, as you’re describing, extremely authentic.

I kind of came from this position of always feeling like an underdog. In grad school, a professor I idolized and worshiped took me aside and was like, “You’re never going to be a writer. You don’t have what it takes. Let’s brainstorm some other careers for you. You’re just not talented enough.” And I cried. I went home and cried, and then I was like, well, am I going to really literally give up my life’s dream because this lady told me? I thought: if God came down and God said, “Okay, you get to be a novelist, but you’re going to be the very worst one that’s ever lived in the history of literature, would you still want to do it?” I was like, yes. I still want to. More than anything, I want that.

I’m so moved by that. Wow.

I always was just like, “I’m just scrappily fighting to get to be the worst novelist ever.”

But I do think that the way that I took the tasks that felt the most alien and commercial, like social media, the way that I could figure out how to do it was to make it something I was interested in doing. To make a funny little video or, oh, I have to make an author website? How do I make it something that I like and think is fun? That’s been my approach for a decade. It didn’t seem like it was working at all, so I’m glad if now it appears to be paying dividends.

Across your fiction, I find that you place such an emphasis on setting really high stakes for your characters. Where does the writing process seem to get the most involved for you? Is it plot or character or something else?

I think that plot is the thing that I am weakest at and therefore have spent the most time trying to figure out. It was the first thing I found most baffling about fiction.

So I entirely became a fiction writer to impress a girl. I was kind of in love with my best friend, and she was dating a guy who was a fiction writer. And at that time, we were both poets, but so to not compete with her but then compete instead for her attentions with him, I switched to fiction writing, and I found it really baffling how you had to make things up. I kept trying to get people to describe to me how you do it. I was like, “So then you what? You close your eyes?” It was trying to describe to someone how to fall asleep or something.

And then similarly, I found all instructions relating to story to be absolutely unfollowable. I was like, “Beginning, middle, end: who can tell which one is which thing?” And Aristotle doesn’t help. Every single definition he offers is a tautology.

I literally read a bunch of books on screenwriting before I wrote THE KNOCKOUT QUEEN and kind of figured out how to make things like a crisis or a midpoint happen. And then I think I took a lot of that and started to feel like I had a little bit more control with MARGO so that I was able to figure out where the story started and started there.

You have four novels out. From a craft perspective, what do you think clicked for you between your first two books and your more recent two?

My second novel had sold, like, five copies. I was very aware that my editor really loved me and believed in me and would probably buy another book, but that if that book also did poorly, then I might not get to go on publishing. I was aware of wanting to swing for the fences: if this is the last thing that I get to say with the big world microphone, I’m like, give it to me. I’m going to say something good.

I’ve always kind of believed that there’s really no reason why we can’t use the toolkits from both high literature and from what we consider commercial fiction. I don’t know why you can’t have a plot and have compelling deep themes and philosophical questions. I really wanted THE KNOCKOUT QUEEN to have both of those layers and for it to be really propulsive. It also takes an incredible amount of processor speed simply to render people talking, let alone control what they’re talking about and write it in a pretty way with nice sentences. Your own awareness gets so stretched thin. It’s almost like you’re pulling something up out of a dark place, and you don’t even know what it is yet, and you’re just trying not to break it on its way out of you.

I got better at multitasking with each book that went along, where I was able to be in control of more of the process, able to be conscious of more of the process. Whereas I think in the beginning, you’re like, “I don’t know how I did it, but I did it. I got it out, but it’s this weird shape, and I don’t know how to fix it.”

I’m sure everyone’s been asking you about your interest in wrestling since MARGO’S GOT MONEY TROUBLES came out. The protagonist’s father is a professional wrestler. Can you share some wisdom about weaving an obsession into your work, particularly a pop culture obsession, without letting the minutiae completely take over and bog the story down?

You have to show people how high the ceiling is. I think you have to let yourself write it with all your enthusiasm, as though you’re writing to your friend who totally gets you and understands every weird joke, because you’re not going to be able to take the risks if you’re in a kind of defensive crouch. You’re not going to be able to really share the joy.

With MARGO specifically, the book was too long. It was almost 160,000 words at one point, and it published at 93,000 words, so fully 65,000 words were cut out of that book, and some of it was wrestling details. There were just maybe too many anecdotes. I think I just fell in love with those characters and I was willing to watch them go grocery shopping.

I want to ask you about a recurring theme I’m noticing across your books. You write about heroin addiction in quite a few of your novels, including MARGO’S GOT MONEY TROUBLES. That book taught me a lot about methadone and the stigmas and misunderstanding that surround it as a treatment. What keeps you returning to this specific addiction in your work?

It’s complicated. Obviously I have a personal relationship to addiction, specifically to opiate addiction. For me personally, I learned a lot of lessons about moral culpability, and a lot of the toolkit that I was given by a generalized worldview in the nineties, or whatever, was just not very useful for trying to actually dig yourself out of those particular holes or understand other people.

In my family, there was a lot of alcohol addiction. I had a lot of friends struggle with drug addiction. I struggled with drug addiction, and a lot of my work is centered around these questions of, what do you do when someone you love does something bad? What do you do with the part of yourself that did something bad? How do we metabolize harm and evil? Is there such a thing as evil? Are bad people bad? Are some bad people good? Is there such a thing as people who are all good, or does every good person just a bad person who’s trying really hard? I think it’s one of my central preoccupations for a number of reasons. I also just think it’s partially the opiate epidemic and the way that Oxycontin played out. I got to watch that unfurl throughout my twenties, and so it just feels very close at hand.

I got the most beautiful letter from the director of a methadone clinic, who was like, “I cried when I read MARGO because I never see methadone portrayed positively ever. I believe in what I do. I know I’m saving people’s lives, but most people look down on what I do and don’t think it’s really helping people.” It never occurred to me in a million years that someone working at a methadone clinic or directing a methadone clinic would read that book and feel moved by it. That’s sort of going back to the idea of a novel is a beacon: if you write about things as you see them, it’s going to resonate with other people who are also seeing the same little pieces of the puzzle that you’re seeing.

Rufi Thorpe recommends:

Stefan Milo’s YouTube channel

Rico Nasty’s album Lethal

The Antidote by Karen Russell

The Highest Altar by Patrick Tierney

Tietam Brown by Mick Foley (but only if you’re a die-hard wrestling fan)


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Hurley Winkler.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/novelist-rufi-thorpe-on-embracing-enthusiasm-and-taking-big-risks/feed/ 0 544797
Musician and writer Greta Morgan on resisting the expectations of others https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/musician-and-writer-greta-morgan-on-resisting-the-expectations-of-others/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/musician-and-writer-greta-morgan-on-resisting-the-expectations-of-others/#respond Thu, 17 Jul 2025 04:32:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-and-writer-greta-morgan-on-resisting-the-expectations-of-others You have said that your singing voice is how you’ve understood your inner world when it became inaccessible—and you spent a lot of time fighting to kind of get it back. How do you connect with your inner world now?

I do still connect with my inner world through playing music, and I do still connect with it through singing—although my voice has been very changed—but my meditation practice is such a huge part of my life. In addition to vocal dystonia, I’ve also been navigating long COVID over the last few years, but acutely over the last 18 months. And one of the symptoms of that is what mimics Chronic Fatigue Syndrome, so instead of just resting all day, I treat it as meditation time. I’m meditating between two and six hours a day. There’s a meme I saw recently of Lisa Simpson, and it’s like “what it looks like I’m doing,” and she’s laying in bed, and then it’s like, “what I’m actually doing,” and it shows Lisa surrounded in this golden, glowing orb, having an enlightening experience.

And when I saw that, I was like, “Yeah, that’s exactly how it feels.” So I connect with myself and with my inner world through meditation and through connecting with the part of me that imagines, and the part of me that plays, and the part of me that generates ideas, and the part of me that loves.

You spoke about the early pressures on you to sound different than you did naturally. What was the first time you felt like you weren’t using your own voice?

When we were making [the second Hush Sound] record, the producers kept pushing me to sing like Fiona Apple. I was a 17-year-old Catholic school virgin with a very whispery, quiet voice. I was a total late-bloomer, and my voice was as innocent as I was. They were telling me to sing like someone who had had a completely different life experience, who had a completely different vocal tenor.

One of the phrases the producer said was, “You have to sing with your balls. You’ve never felt it before, but it’s time to start singing with your balls.” At that time, my sense of self and my musicality were so completely merged that when they told me I wasn’t singing right, and I needed to sing like someone else, I just immediately thought, “Oh, well, I’m no good at anything,” or “I’m not worthy of anything.”

[Now] I teach writing workshops, and one of the things I’m always saying is keep the weirdness and beauty and originality of your voice. Do not impersonate anyone.

How do you make sure you don’t sideline yourself, and preserve your identity as an artist?

We live in a world where all art is touching all other arts, the same way that in nature, pollen in the air is touching every plant in the area. We will naturally start influencing each other’s art, and I think we will naturally start imitating in really subtle ways just by existing. It’s like we’re all breathing the same artistic air. But I do think as artists, we start to cultivate our own unique vision, and we need to move towards strangeness and towards what feels like us.

Let’s say every single choice you make, you can visualize yourself on two paths: Should the chorus be big and bright, or should the chorus be sad and drop down?

In my mind, I can close my eyes and imagine going one way and imagine going the other way. Whichever way lights up and whichever way feels expansive, I’m like, “Oh, that’s the way that’s the most me. That’s the way where I’m not imitating.”

What role can creativity play in healing?

For me, it’s everything. When I started playing music, it was like making my own medicine, like the way an herbalist would make a tincture. I would write a song that would give me the specific feeling I was seeking. But I do think big-picture creativity is a way to alchemize our experience into something beautiful, like the way that an oyster turns the sand into a pearl.

But I also think it’s a way to come back to oneself. When you’re making your art and you’re not thinking about who’s going to see it or what are they going to think about it, it’s a way of saying, “Oh, there I am.” Like, “Oh, that’s my spirit on the canvas.” “Oh, that’s my spirit in the song.” And in a world that is constantly trying to confuse us about who we are so we will shrink into a certain set of other people’s expectations, it’s really important to make art as a way of remembering who we are.

How did your experience in national parks affect your sense of identity?

I really love imagining that nature is a mirror for unexplored aspects in our own psyche.

When I was in the desert, my voice had shorted out, but I didn’t quite know the diagnosis yet. I just knew something was really wrong. And also, these were the relatively early days of the pandemic when … it just felt like the world we knew was gone, and everything felt strange. I felt so desolate and raw and ravaged.

Being in the desert, I would notice the Navajo sandstone, I would notice these gorgeous lush hanging gardens with ferns and orchids, and all these beautiful plants that were growing out of what looked like solid rock. And it was because they were able to root down and suck moisture from very deep in the rock. [In] one of the mirroring moments, I thought, “I need to do that. I am going to root down to a place in myself deeper than I have known, and find a kind of nourishment I haven’t found before.”

I had been moving so fast and conversing so much and flying all over the world and playing millions and millions of shows, and all of a sudden, being in silence—it was like drinking from a deep well. I had learned so many lessons from togetherness and collaboration and it was time to learn some lessons from just being in silence.

In one of your national park trips, you befriended a woman who said, “You lost your voice. I’m so happy for you.”

It’s funny. I remember her saying that line exactly.

She is an incredible wilderness guide and IFS therapist, a brilliant, brilliant person, and she has noticed in the lives of all the people she works with that often there is a major eruption in the timeline of someone’s life, and that wounding becomes the access point for whatever the greatest healing is.

In a way, I lost my literal voice, and my literal voice has been challenged and changed. But I do feel like I found my voice: my book, the way I communicate in relationships, the way I move through the world.

With my literal voice, I was shrinking constantly. I was not articulating my truth. I was not speaking up to bullies. I was not standing within my integrity as far as expressing my truth as much as I could. Now, my literal voice has changed, but I feel so much more confident in those areas of life.

I think in some ways she knew: “You lost your voice. This might be part of the mythic, poetic journey of your life.”

Day to day, where are you finding joy?

I live in the Catskills in New York, and this is one of the most enchanting places I’ve ever been. This winter, I found a lot of joy by crunching on ice and snow after every snowstorm, because every single snowstorm created a different soundscape. If the wind was faster one night, or if it was colder one night, the ice would sound and look and feel totally different.

I have a lot of joy from just engaging with my immediate environment, a lot of joy reading by the creek. I have a lot of joy being with my friends here. I do have a lot of joy writing and still a lot of joy playing music. It’s interesting—there was just a Chicago NPR story that came out about long COVID, and I hadn’t talked about my health journeys beyond my voice publicly, and I got tons of messages from people saying a version of like, “Oh, this is such a tragedy. I’m so sorry. You’re so sick.” And I was like, “Yeah, it’s been hard.”

But also even on a bad day, I have so much joy. Even on a challenging health day, I’m living in one of the most beautiful places I could ever imagine, and I’m dreaming, and I have a great support system, and I’m able to have a lot of happiness within whatever context I’m in.

Greta Morgan recommends:

Hug people for mental health

Practice embodied imagination

Candlelight before bed, sunlight in the eyes upon rising

Think like Mary Oliver: “May I be the tiniest nail in the house of the universe, tiny but useful.”

More analog time (phone off, holding books, making crafts, cooking, being in the really real world)


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Caitlin Wolper Phillips.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/17/musician-and-writer-greta-morgan-on-resisting-the-expectations-of-others/feed/ 0 544799
The New Mason-Dixon Line: How the Ruling on Nationwide Injunctions Takes Us Back to the Past https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-new-mason-dixon-line-how-the-ruling-on-nationwide-injunctions-takes-us-back-to-the-past/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-new-mason-dixon-line-how-the-ruling-on-nationwide-injunctions-takes-us-back-to-the-past/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 21:33:44 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/the-new-mason-dixon-line-how-the-ruling-on-nationwide-injunctions-takes-us-back-to-the-past-sullivan-20250716/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Terrance Sullivan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-new-mason-dixon-line-how-the-ruling-on-nationwide-injunctions-takes-us-back-to-the-past/feed/ 0 544764
The New York Times Finally Stops Avoiding The G-Word https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-new-york-times-finally-stops-avoiding-the-g-word/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-new-york-times-finally-stops-avoiding-the-g-word/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 21:08:38 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159957 The New York Times has published an op-ed by a genocide scholar who says that he resisted acknowledging the truth of what Israel is doing in Gaza for as long as he could, but can no longer deny the obvious. It’s an admission that may as well have come from The New York Times itself. […]

The post The New York Times Finally Stops Avoiding The G-Word first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The New York Times has published an op-ed by a genocide scholar who says that he resisted acknowledging the truth of what Israel is doing in Gaza for as long as he could, but can no longer deny the obvious.

It’s an admission that may as well have come from The New York Times itself.

In an article titled “I’m a Genocide Scholar. I Know It When I See It.”, a Brown University professor of Holocaust and genocide studies named Omer Bartov argues that “Israel is literally trying to wipe out Palestinian existence in Gaza,” and denounces his fellow Holocaust scholars for failing to acknowledge reality.

“My inescapable conclusion has become that Israel is committing genocide against the Palestinian people,” Bartov writes. “Having grown up in a Zionist home, lived the first half of my life in Israel, served in the I.D.F. as a soldier and officer, and spent most of my career researching and writing on war crimes and the Holocaust, this was a painful conclusion to reach, and one that I resisted as long as I could. But I have been teaching classes on genocide for a quarter of a century. I can recognize one when I see one.”

https://x.com/rcbregman/status/1945171514682114535

And resist he did. In November 2023, Bartov wrote another op-ed for The New York Times saying, “As a historian of genocide, I believe that there is no proof that genocide is currently taking place in Gaza, although it is very likely that war crimes, and even crimes against humanity, are happening.”

Apparently, he is seeing the proof now and has stopped resisting what has been clear from the very beginning. And it would seem the editors of the Gray Lady have ceased resisting as well.

The New York Times, which has an extensively documented pro-Israel bias, has frenetically avoided the use of the g-word on its pages from the very beginning of the Gaza onslaught. Even in its opinion and analysis pieces the NYT Overton window has cut off at framing the issue as a complex matter of rigorous debate, with headlines like “Accused of Genocide, Israelis See Reversal of Reality. Palestinians See Justice.” and “The Bitter Fight Over the Meaning of ‘Genocide’” representing the closest thing to the pro-Palestinian side of the debate you’d see. During the same time, we’ve seen headlines like “From the Embers of an Old Genocide, a New One May Be Emerging” used in reference to Sudan.

In an internal memo obtained by The Intercept last year, New York Times reporters were explicitly told to avoid the use of the word “genocide”, as well as terms like “ethnic cleansing” and “occupied territory”.

“‘Genocide’ has a specific definition in international law,” the memo reads. “In our own voice, we should generally use it only in the context of those legal parameters. We should also set a high bar for allowing others to use it as an accusation, whether in quotations or not, unless they are making a substantive argument based on the legal definition.”

https://x.com/AssalRad/status/1877181727447142846

Earlier this year, the American Friends Service Committee cancelled its paid advertisement in The New York Times calling for an end to the genocide in Gaza, saying the outlet had wanted them to change the word “genocide” to “war” in order for their ad to be published.

So there has been a significant change.

To be clear, this analysis by Omer Bartov is not significant in and of itself. He is only joining the chorus of what has already been said by human rights organizations like Amnesty InternationalHuman Rights WatchUnited Nations human rights experts, and the overwhelming majority of leading authorities on the subject of genocide.

What is significant is that even experts who’ve been resisting acknowledging the reality of the genocide in Gaza because of their bias toward Israel have stopped doing so, and that even the imperial media outlets most fiendishly devoted to running propaganda cover for that genocide have run out of room to hide.

The Israel apologists have lost the argument. They might not know it yet, but they have. Public sentiment has turned irreversibly against them as people’s eyes are opened to the truth of what’s happening in Gaza, and more and more propagandists are choosing to rescue what’s left of their tattered credibility instead of going down with the sinking ship.

Truth is slowly beginning to get a word in edgewise.

Keep pushing. Keep fighting. Keep resisting.

It’s working.

The post The New York Times Finally Stops Avoiding The G-Word first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Caitlin Johnstone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-new-york-times-finally-stops-avoiding-the-g-word/feed/ 0 544757
There Is No Baby Formula Left in Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/there-is-no-baby-formula-left-in-gaza/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/there-is-no-baby-formula-left-in-gaza/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 20:28:49 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/there-is-no-baby-formula-left-in-gaza-shnino-20250716/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Nourdine Shnino.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/there-is-no-baby-formula-left-in-gaza/feed/ 0 544753
Why is Donald Trump afraid of the BRICS? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/why-is-donald-trump-afraid-of-the-brics/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/why-is-donald-trump-afraid-of-the-brics/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 19:35:40 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335527 Journalists work on long tables in the press center of the BRICS Summit on Sunday, July 6, in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, while Brazilian President Luiz Inácio Lula da Silvia speech to the leaders of the BRICS nations is livestreamed into the press center. Credit: Michael FoxBRICS is a group of the world’s most powerful developing nations, including Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa. Their latest summit made one thing clear: They want to reform the global order from the bottom up. And the US is not happy about it.]]> Journalists work on long tables in the press center of the BRICS Summit on Sunday, July 6, in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, while Brazilian President Luiz Inácio Lula da Silvia speech to the leaders of the BRICS nations is livestreamed into the press center. Credit: Michael Fox

At 11:26PM, Sunday night, July 6, I received a text from my producers. 

I was in Rio de Janeiro, covering the BRICS summit for an international news agency. They wanted me to go live. The summit was only halfway done, but US President Donald Trump had already posted on Truth Social in retaliation.

“Any Country aligning themselves with the Anti-American policies of BRICS, will be charged an ADDITIONAL 10% Tariff,” he wrote. “There will be no exceptions to this policy. Thank you for your attention to this matter!” Why was the president of the most powerful nation in the world worried about a group of a dozen countries meeting in Brazil? Because that bloc comprises some of the most powerful developing nations in the world, including Trump adversaries like China—but also Iran, who joined BRICS last year as a partner member, alongside Egypt, Ethiopia, Indonesia, and the United Arab Emirates. And because, as the world seems to be unraveling, the BRICS group is moving to reform world governance and global trade. And they likely have the best chance of doing it.

“I can affirm that if they keep with the agenda, and they implement what they put down on paper, we don’t see any block in the world that’s pushing much more than the BRICS,” Maureen Santos, the coordinator of the BRICS Policy Center’s Socio-Environmental Platform, told me.

The Summit

“For the fourth time, Brazil is hosting a BRICS Summit,” said Brazilian President Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva to kick off the summit on Sunday morning, “Of all the summits, this one is taking place in the most adverse global scenario. The UN turned 80 on June 26, and we have witnessed an unparalleled collapse of multilateralism.”

In Lula’s 10-minute opening speech, he denounced the “genocide” in Gaza and called for a two-state solution. He condemned the “violations of Iran’s territorial integrity” and reminded those in attendance that the BRICS was the heir of the non-aligned movement—the group of 121 nations that did not align with neither the US nor Russia during the Cold War. 

These sentiments were included in the final “BRICS Leader’s Declaration,” which was released on Sunday July 6—the first day of the summit—before Trump’s threats over social media.  The document didn’t explicitly mention the United States, but it rejected “unilateral protectionist measures” and condemned the violence in Gaza and Iran. 

Among the 126 final resolutions in the document were agreements on promoting peace, strengthening cooperation on health and sustainable development, combating climate change, battling hunger, reforming global governance and ensuring equal access to—and global regulation of  artificial intelligence. 

“A collective global effort is needed to establish an AI governance that upholds our shared values, addresses risks, builds trust, and ensures broad and inclusive international collaboration and access, in accordance with sovereign laws,” read the document. The common theme across all these issues was how to build a more equitable global system.

The leaders were vocal about a need to overhaul the global system of governance, where the United States, the EU, and the G7 countries are at the top, and everyone else is picking up the scraps.

The BRICS leaders called in the declaration for a “comprehensive reform of the United Nations, including its Security Council, with a view to making it more democratic, representative, effective and efficient.”

“They are demanding multipolarity—financial, cultural, and political multipolarity. And the United States is fighting to maintain a hegemony that is in crisis. It’s US hegemony that is in crisis. And in that sense, the BRICS represents a threat to the US.”

“The BRICS represents a proposal against hegemony,” BRICS Policy Center Director Marta Fernandez told me at a cafe in Rio de Janeiro. “They are demanding multipolarity—financial, cultural, and political multipolarity. And the United States is fighting to maintain a hegemony that is in crisis. It’s US hegemony that is in crisis. And in that sense, the BRICS represents a threat to the US.”

Probably the top issue of concern for the US president are calls to democratize the currency used in trade amongst BRICS countries. Currently, more than half of global transactions are in the US dollar. De-dollarization, or moving away from the US dollar as the top reserve currency, would mean a huge hit for the United States and a big win for democratizing global trade and finance.

Shortly after winning the November 2024 presidential elections, Trump fired off a warning to the BRICS countries.

“We are going to require a commitment from these seemingly hostile countries that they will neither create a new BRICS currency, nor back any other currency to replace the mighty US dollar or, they will face 100% Tariffs,” Trump posted on Truth Social. “There is no chance that BRICS will replace the US dollar in international trade, or anywhere else, and any country that tries should say hello to tariffs, and goodbye to America!”

The BRICS nations were not deterred. In the final declaration they called for the increased use of “local currencies,” and the incorporation of the use of these currencies in the BRICS interbank system in order to “facilitate and expand innovative financial practices” and “support greater trade and investment flows.” The head of the BRICS New Development Bank, former Brazilian President Dilma Rousseff announced last week that already a quarter of the bank’s lending portfolio was in local currencies and that they are looking to hit 30% by next year. 

“Obviously, the big BRICS demand is for monetary multipolarity, which goes against the hegemony of the dollar, which has become the reserve currency since World War II,” says Fernandez. “So it’s a direct attack on this system, controlled by the dollar.”

BRICS has many challenges, in part due to the diverse makeup of the cultures, countries, and governments that make up the eclectic, yet powerful international alliance.

The group is not looking to upend the global capitalist system. It’s not proposing socialism. The BRICS countries aren’t going to usher in revolutionary change. But they are pushing to alter the balance of power in the world to move from the hegemony of the United States and the European powers toward something more equal.

“Can anyone tell me why India can’t be included in the UN Security Council? Or a country like Brazil? Or Mexico?” Lula said during the summit. “Or Nigeria or Ethiopia, which has a population of just over 120 million people, or Egypt, which has over 100 million, or South Africa? Why not? There’s no reason why.”

Currently only China, France, Russia, the UK, and the United States have veto power in the Security Council. This structure was implemented at the end of World War II and has remained in place ever since—something the BRICS countries say has to change.

The BRICS summit did not occur in a vacuum. Representatives say that ahead of the meeting, negotiators from the BRICS countries—which they call “sherpas”—met hundreds of times over the last year to come to agreement on such a wide range of topics.

This past year also saw the creation of a new Popular Council. The council was created last year as a space for grassroots groups to contribute to the BRICS agenda, policies, and future. Representatives from 120 groups from across the BRICS countries met in the months leading up to the summit.

“The majority of the BRICS countries, right now, are very conservative and some of them even undemocratic and don’t have the civil space inside their countries. So bringing this agenda for the BRICS, it’s pushing the other countries to open space for civil society.”

“The existence of this Popular Council is amazing,” said Santos. “Because you know that the majority of the BRICS countries, right now, are very conservative and some of them even undemocratic and don’t have the civil space inside their countries. So bringing this agenda for the BRICS, it’s pushing the other countries to open space for civil society.”

Members of social movements and representatives of the BRICS Popular Council close a special two-day forum in the Rio de Janeiro’s Carlos Gomes Theater on Saturday, July 5, the day before the start of the official BRICS Summit. Credit: Michael Fox

For two days before the official BRICS summit, members of social movements, civil society, and academia from across the BRICS countries met in a large hall in Carlos Gomes Theater, in downtown Rio de Janeiro, for the Popular Council Forum.

Colorful banners from diverse social and labor movements, including Brazil’s Landless Workers’ Movement (MST), were laid out in front of the stage, where panels were held throughout the day. 

They delivered their recommendations to BRICS leaders on Sunday. Delegates of the Popular Council presented their findings, analysis and process during a press conference following the Popular Council forum.

Raymond Matlala, from the BRICS Youth Association of South Africa, said, “What I like about BRICS and why I think BRICS is so appealing to the global majority, the Global South is the principles of BRICS, the mutual respect. The people are leveled. No one comes with superior power. It’s also the respect of one country’s sovereignty. BRICS does not enter in domestic issues.”

How will BRICS respond to Trump?

Early on Monday morning, I responded to the text from my producers and went live at both 1AM and 2AM.

The presenter asked me how BRICS would respond to Trump’s late-night threat over social media. I said it was unclear, but I was sure it was not going to make them change course.

At a press conference the next day, following the close of the summit, Lula stood at a microphone in front of the hall in white shirt and a black suit. Blue carpeted floors. Blue wall behind him, “BRICS – Brasil 2025″ written across it. Journalists packed in rows of chairs before him. Camera shutters clicking. Cold air pumped into the room from two huge air conditioning units.

The first three questions were variations on the same theme: How would BRICS respond?

The answer: They wouldn’t. They didn’t have to.

“The world has changed. We don’t want an emperor,” said Lula, referring to Trump. “We are sovereign countries.” He said Trump’s threat of raising tariffs on BRICS countries wasn’t brought up at all during their meetings that day. It was not even an issue.

“At the moment the United States declares ‘America First,’ the BRICS are saying ‘we all come first,’”

This is a subtle, but important point. Trump wants to be the center of attention. That’s how he derails and wins debates, with ever-more shocking statements, actions, decrees, and threats. In Trump’s world, the United States—backed by the US dollar and the US military—should be first, with the rest of the countries of the world revolving around it. That is exactly what the BRICS countries want to change. And the more Trump pushes, the more they are going to look the other way.

“At the moment the United States declares ‘America First,’ the BRICS are saying ‘we all come first,’” international relations analyst Pedro Costa Junior told me at the summit. “The Global South comes first. The community comes first. Not for one. But for everyone.”


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/why-is-donald-trump-afraid-of-the-brics/feed/ 0 544740
Main Street Action Joins $50M Battleground Alliance to Flip the House https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/main-street-action-joins-50m-battleground-alliance-to-flip-the-house/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/main-street-action-joins-50m-battleground-alliance-to-flip-the-house/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 18:48:23 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/main-street-action-joins-50m-battleground-alliance-to-flip-the-house Main Street Action is bringing a powerful new voice to the 2026 elections: small business owners who are tired of watching Washington wreck their communities and walk away.

Today, Main Street Action announced its role as a grassroots partner in the Battleground Alliance, a $50 million effort to flip control of the U.S. House by organizing in more than 35 key districts. The campaign will focus on places where the GOP’s brutal budget cuts, especially to healthcare, are hitting families hard.


Main Street Action will lead organizing efforts in Wisconsin, Virginia, North Carolina, Iowa, Minnesota, and Michigan, where small business owners are stepping up as trusted messengers and community anchors.

“We’re not here to play pundit. We’re here because Americans can’t afford their meds, the employees of small businesses are losing healthcare coverage, and our communities are barely hanging on,” said Richard Trent, Executive Director of Main Street Action. “Small business owners talk to hundreds of people a week—and when they speak out, people listen. They’re perfectly positioned to ensure politicians can’t hide behind spin while working families pay the price.”

The Battleground Alliance, a coalition of more than 30 labor and grassroots organizations, is tapping directly impacted people to lead this fight—workers, caregivers, immigrants, and small business owners who’ve watched Congress put billionaires and lobbyists ahead of everyday Americans.

Main Street Action’s contribution to the coalition is clear: cutting through the noise with the kind of local credibility no TV ad can buy.

“Small business owners aren’t political insiders—they’re the folks running the coffee shop, the barber shop, the corner store,” said Shawn Phetteplace, National Campaigns Director of Main Street Action. “But we see what these policies do in real life, and we’re done staying quiet. If our Representatives vote to gut Medicaid or reward corporations while the rest of Main Street struggles, we’re gonna make sure every voter knows it.”

With this bold new partnership, Main Street Action is doubling down on what they do best: turning the voices of everyday entrepreneurs into political power. By organizing in the communities where small businesses are most vital and most vulnerable. Main Street Action is not just fighting for votes, they are fighting for a future where working families shape our democracy.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/main-street-action-joins-50m-battleground-alliance-to-flip-the-house/feed/ 0 544730
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 16, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-16-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-16-2025/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=29728a890320827843ff3cddcb43f96b Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 16, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-16-2025/feed/ 0 544776
Fighting fascists in Spain: The Abraham Lincoln Brigade https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/fighting-fascists-in-spain-the-abraham-lincoln-brigade/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/fighting-fascists-in-spain-the-abraham-lincoln-brigade/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 17:01:34 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335522 Members of the XV International Brigade (aka the Abraham Lincoln Brigade) returning to the US on the French Liner Champlain, July 1938. The men of the brigade fought for the Spanish Republic in the Spanish Civil War as a part of the International Brigades.Thousands left their homes in the United States to stand against Spanish General Franco and fascism. This is episode 58 of Stories of Resistance.]]> Members of the XV International Brigade (aka the Abraham Lincoln Brigade) returning to the US on the French Liner Champlain, July 1938. The men of the brigade fought for the Spanish Republic in the Spanish Civil War as a part of the International Brigades.

On July 17, 1936, the Nazi-backed Spanish General Federico Franco led an armed rebellion against the Spanish government. It began a bloody civil war that would last for years. 

Thousands of people left their homes and traveled to Spain to stand up and defend its democratically elected government against Franco and fascism.

Roughly 35,000 people from more than 50 countries would join the Spanish International Brigade. Of those internacionalistas, roughly 3,000 men and women came from the United States and volunteered to fight. They founded the Abraham Lincoln Brigade.

This is episode 58 of Stories of Resistance—a podcast co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, we’ll bring you stories of resistance like this. Inspiration for dark times.

If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment, or leave a review. 

And please consider signing up for the Stories of Resistance podcast feed, either in Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Spreaker, or wherever you listen.

Please consider supporting this podcast and Michael Fox’s reporting on his Patreon account: patreon.com/mfox. There you can also see exclusive pictures, video, and interviews. 

Written and produced by Michael Fox.

Resources

Transcript

The year is 1936. July. The Nazi-backed Spanish General Federico Franco leads an armed rebellion against the democratically elected Spanish government. That government is a union of leftist political parties. It’s called the Popular Front.

It is the beginning of the Spanish Civil War.

Thousands of people leave their homes in countries around the world and travel to Spain to stand up and defend its democratically elected government against Franco and fascism. Roughly 35,000 people from more than 50 countries would join the Spanish International Brigade.

Their slogan: No Pasarán — They will not pass.

Of those internacionalistas, roughly 3,000 men and women would come from the United States and volunteer to fight and aid the effort starting in late 1936. They would found the Abraham Lincoln Brigade. They came from almost every US state. And they came with a conviction. They came for a cause. And they would fight for it. 

This was a time of segregation in the United States, but in Spain, the Lincoln Battalion was integrated. Everyone fought beside each other. African Americans, Jewish, Protestants, Catholics. United for one cause. United for hope. In defense of a free and democratic Spain. 

But it was not easy. They were often on the front lines. And Franco’s forces had support. Both Germany’s Adolf Hitler and Italian fascist dictator Benito Mussolini backed Franco during the civil war. They provided ground troops. Air support. Bombing raids. 

“We were fighting against fascism. And we were political enough to understand that.”

That is the late Abraham Lincoln veteran Clarence Kailin, during an interview with Democracy Now!’s Amy Goodman many years ago. He passed away in 2009.

“So it wasn’t for an adventure. And it wasn’t for money. It was fighting against Italy and Italian fascism and German Nazism. That’s what it was about. And we felt that if we lost the war, then World War II, was pretty much inevitable, which is pretty much what happened.”

Kailin went to Spain with five friends. He was the only one to return home. 

Many of the survivors and veterans of the Abraham Lincoln brigade would go on to fight in World War II. Despite their sacrifice against fascism and in defense of Spain and later the United States and the allied countries, the House Un-American Activities Committee would blacklist members of the Abraham Lincoln brigade in the United States during the red scare and Joseph McCarthy’s Communist witch hunt of the 1950s Cold War.

But the Abraham Lincoln brigade would continue to inspire. It still does today. 

It is estimated that roughly 15,000 members of the International Brigade lost their lives in the war. Almost a quarter of those who volunteered to fight from the United States with the Abraham Lincoln Brigade did not return home. Many more were injured. 

Delmer Berg, the last known member of the Lincoln Battalion, died in 2016 at the age of 100.

Hi folks, thanks for listening. I’m your host Michael Fox.

The international brigade and the Abraham Lincoln Brigade, in particular, is such an important history that is too often lost and forgotten in the past. 

If you’d like to learn more about the members of the International Brigade who went and fought in defense of Spain, I’m adding some links in the shows as well as a link to the Democracy Now! episode featuring Veteran Clarence Kailin.

As always, if you like what you hear and enjoy this podcast, please consider becoming a subscriber on my Patreon. It’s only a few dollars a month. I have a ton of exclusive content there, only available to my supporters. And every supporter really makes a difference.

This is episode 58 of Stories of Resistance, a podcast series co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, I bring you stories of resistance and hope like this. Inspiration for dark times. If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment, or leave a review.

Thanks for listening. See you next time.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/fighting-fascists-in-spain-the-abraham-lincoln-brigade/feed/ 0 544712
The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy: NATO Invades the Classroom https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy-nato-invades-the-classroom/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy-nato-invades-the-classroom/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 16:11:59 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159940 During President Donald Trump’s second term, education has remained a central battleground in American politics. Republicans claim that classrooms have become hotbeds of “woke” indoctrination, accusing educators of promoting progressive agendas and tolerating antisemitism. In contrast, Democrats argue that conservatives are systematically defunding and dismantling public and higher education precisely because it teaches values like diversity, equity, and inclusion. […]

The post The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy: NATO Invades the Classroom first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
During President Donald Trump’s second term, education has remained a central battleground in American politics. Republicans claim that classrooms have become hotbeds of “woke” indoctrination, accusing educators of promoting progressive agendas and tolerating antisemitism. In contrast, Democrats argue that conservatives are systematically defunding and dismantling public and higher education precisely because it teaches values like diversity, equity, and inclusion. While these partisan skirmishes dominate headlines, they obscure a much deeper and more enduring issue that encompasses all of these issues and more: the influence of corporate and military power on public education.

For decades, scholars have warned that corporations have steadily infiltrated the classroom—not to promote critical thinking or democratic values, but to cultivate ideologies that reinforce capitalism, nationalism, and militarism. Critical media literacy educators, in particular, have drawn attention to the convergence of tech firms and military entities in education, offering so-called “free” digital tools that often serve as Trojan horses for data collection and ideological control.

One striking example is the rise of programs like NewsGuard, which uses public fears over fake news to justify increased surveillance of students’ online activity. Relatedly, in 2018, the Atlantic Council partnered with Meta to perform “fact-checking” on platforms such as Facebook. In 2022, the US Marine Corps discussed developing media literacy training. It remains to be seen what training, if any, they will develop. However, what is known is that a large global player has entered the media literacy arena: the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO). While NATO presents its initiatives as supportive of media literacy and democratic education, these efforts appear to be oriented more toward reinforcing alignment with its strategic and political priorities than to fostering critical civic engagement.

NATO was created in 1949, during the Cold War, as a military alliance to contain communism. Although the war officially ended in 1991, NATO has expanded both its mission and membership. Today, it encompasses more than thirty member nations and continues to frame itself as a global force for peace, democracy, and security. But this self-image masks real conflicts of interest.

NATO is deeply intertwined with powerful nation-states and corporate actors. It routinely partners with defense contractors, tech firms, think tanks, and Western governments—all of which have a vested interest in maintaining specific political and economic systems. These relationships raise concerns when NATO extends its reach into education. Can a military alliance—closely linked to the defense industry and state propaganda—credibly serve as a neutral force in media education?

In 2022, NATO associates collaborated with the US-based Center for Media Literacy (CML) to launch a media literacy initiative framed as a strategic defense against misinformation. The initiative included a report titled Building Resiliency: Media Literacy as a Strategic Defense Strategy for the Transatlantic, authored by CML’s Tessa Jolls. It was accompanied by a series of webinars featuring military personnel, policy experts, and academics.

On the surface, the initiative appeared to promote digital literacy and civic engagement. But a closer look reveals a clear ideological agenda. Funded and organized by NATO, the initiative positioned media literacy not as a means of empowering students to think critically about how power shapes media, but as a defense strategy to protect NATO member states from so-called “hostile actors.” The curriculum emphasized surveillance, resilience, and behavior modification over reflection, analysis, and democratic dialogue.

Throughout their webinars, NATO representatives described the media environment as a battlefield, frequently using other war metaphors such as “hostile information activities” and “cognitive warfare.” Panelists argued that citizens in NATO countries were targets of foreign disinformation campaigns—and that media literacy could serve as a tool to inoculate them against ideological threats.

A critical review of NATO’s media literacy initiative reveals several troubling themes. First, it frames media literacy as a protectionist project rather than an educational one. Students are portrayed less as thinkers to be empowered and more as civilians to be monitored, molded, and managed. In this model, education becomes a form of top-down, preemptive defense, relying on expert guidance and military oversight rather than democratic participation.

Second, the initiative advances a distinctly neoliberal worldview. It emphasizes individual responsibility over structural analysis. In other words, misinformation is treated as a user error, rather than the result of flawed systems, corporate algorithms, or media consolidation. This framing conveniently absolves powerful actors, including NATO and Big Tech, of their role in producing or amplifying disinformation.

Third, the initiative promotes a contradictory definition of empowerment. While the report and webinars often use the language of “citizen empowerment,” they ultimately advocate for surveillance, censorship, and ideological conformity. Panelists call for NATO to “dominate” the information space, and some even propose systems to monitor students’ attitudes and online behaviors. Rather than encouraging students to question power—including NATO itself—this approach rewards obedience and penalizes dissent.

Finally, the initiative erases the influence of corporate power. Although it criticizes authoritarian regimes and “hostile actors,” it fails to examine the role that Western corporations, particularly tech companies, play in shaping media environments. This oversight is especially problematic given that many of these corporations are NATO’s partners. By ignoring the political economy of media, the initiative offers an incomplete and ideologically skewed version of media literacy.

NATO’s foray into media literacy education represents a new frontier in militarized pedagogy. While claiming to promote democracy and resilience, its initiative advances a narrow, protectionist, and neoliberal approach that prioritizes NATO’s geopolitical goals over student empowerment.

This should raise red flags for educators, policymakers, and advocates. Media literacy is not a neutral practice. The organizations that design and fund media literacy programs inevitably shape the goals and methods of those programs. When a military alliance like NATO promotes media education, it brings with it a strategic interest in ideological control.

Educators must ask: What kind of media literacy are we teaching—and whose interests does it serve? If the goal is to produce informed, critically thinking citizens capable of questioning power in all its forms, then NATO’s approach falls short. Instead of inviting students to explore complex media systems, it simplifies them into a binary struggle between “us” and “them,” encouraging loyalty over literacy.

True media literacy must begin with transparency about who and what is behind the curriculum. It must empower students to question all forms of influence—governmental, corporate, and military alike. And it must resist the creeping presence of militarism in our classrooms. As educators, we must defend the right to question, not just the messages we see, but the institutions that shape them.

This essay was originally published here:

The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy

 

The post The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy: NATO Invades the Classroom first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Nolan Higdon and Sydney Sullivan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy-nato-invades-the-classroom/feed/ 0 544702
The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy: NATO Invades the Classroom https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy-nato-invades-the-classroom-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy-nato-invades-the-classroom-2/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 16:11:59 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159940 During President Donald Trump’s second term, education has remained a central battleground in American politics. Republicans claim that classrooms have become hotbeds of “woke” indoctrination, accusing educators of promoting progressive agendas and tolerating antisemitism. In contrast, Democrats argue that conservatives are systematically defunding and dismantling public and higher education precisely because it teaches values like diversity, equity, and inclusion. […]

The post The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy: NATO Invades the Classroom first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
During President Donald Trump’s second term, education has remained a central battleground in American politics. Republicans claim that classrooms have become hotbeds of “woke” indoctrination, accusing educators of promoting progressive agendas and tolerating antisemitism. In contrast, Democrats argue that conservatives are systematically defunding and dismantling public and higher education precisely because it teaches values like diversity, equity, and inclusion. While these partisan skirmishes dominate headlines, they obscure a much deeper and more enduring issue that encompasses all of these issues and more: the influence of corporate and military power on public education.

For decades, scholars have warned that corporations have steadily infiltrated the classroom—not to promote critical thinking or democratic values, but to cultivate ideologies that reinforce capitalism, nationalism, and militarism. Critical media literacy educators, in particular, have drawn attention to the convergence of tech firms and military entities in education, offering so-called “free” digital tools that often serve as Trojan horses for data collection and ideological control.

One striking example is the rise of programs like NewsGuard, which uses public fears over fake news to justify increased surveillance of students’ online activity. Relatedly, in 2018, the Atlantic Council partnered with Meta to perform “fact-checking” on platforms such as Facebook. In 2022, the US Marine Corps discussed developing media literacy training. It remains to be seen what training, if any, they will develop. However, what is known is that a large global player has entered the media literacy arena: the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO). While NATO presents its initiatives as supportive of media literacy and democratic education, these efforts appear to be oriented more toward reinforcing alignment with its strategic and political priorities than to fostering critical civic engagement.

NATO was created in 1949, during the Cold War, as a military alliance to contain communism. Although the war officially ended in 1991, NATO has expanded both its mission and membership. Today, it encompasses more than thirty member nations and continues to frame itself as a global force for peace, democracy, and security. But this self-image masks real conflicts of interest.

NATO is deeply intertwined with powerful nation-states and corporate actors. It routinely partners with defense contractors, tech firms, think tanks, and Western governments—all of which have a vested interest in maintaining specific political and economic systems. These relationships raise concerns when NATO extends its reach into education. Can a military alliance—closely linked to the defense industry and state propaganda—credibly serve as a neutral force in media education?

In 2022, NATO associates collaborated with the US-based Center for Media Literacy (CML) to launch a media literacy initiative framed as a strategic defense against misinformation. The initiative included a report titled Building Resiliency: Media Literacy as a Strategic Defense Strategy for the Transatlantic, authored by CML’s Tessa Jolls. It was accompanied by a series of webinars featuring military personnel, policy experts, and academics.

On the surface, the initiative appeared to promote digital literacy and civic engagement. But a closer look reveals a clear ideological agenda. Funded and organized by NATO, the initiative positioned media literacy not as a means of empowering students to think critically about how power shapes media, but as a defense strategy to protect NATO member states from so-called “hostile actors.” The curriculum emphasized surveillance, resilience, and behavior modification over reflection, analysis, and democratic dialogue.

Throughout their webinars, NATO representatives described the media environment as a battlefield, frequently using other war metaphors such as “hostile information activities” and “cognitive warfare.” Panelists argued that citizens in NATO countries were targets of foreign disinformation campaigns—and that media literacy could serve as a tool to inoculate them against ideological threats.

A critical review of NATO’s media literacy initiative reveals several troubling themes. First, it frames media literacy as a protectionist project rather than an educational one. Students are portrayed less as thinkers to be empowered and more as civilians to be monitored, molded, and managed. In this model, education becomes a form of top-down, preemptive defense, relying on expert guidance and military oversight rather than democratic participation.

Second, the initiative advances a distinctly neoliberal worldview. It emphasizes individual responsibility over structural analysis. In other words, misinformation is treated as a user error, rather than the result of flawed systems, corporate algorithms, or media consolidation. This framing conveniently absolves powerful actors, including NATO and Big Tech, of their role in producing or amplifying disinformation.

Third, the initiative promotes a contradictory definition of empowerment. While the report and webinars often use the language of “citizen empowerment,” they ultimately advocate for surveillance, censorship, and ideological conformity. Panelists call for NATO to “dominate” the information space, and some even propose systems to monitor students’ attitudes and online behaviors. Rather than encouraging students to question power—including NATO itself—this approach rewards obedience and penalizes dissent.

Finally, the initiative erases the influence of corporate power. Although it criticizes authoritarian regimes and “hostile actors,” it fails to examine the role that Western corporations, particularly tech companies, play in shaping media environments. This oversight is especially problematic given that many of these corporations are NATO’s partners. By ignoring the political economy of media, the initiative offers an incomplete and ideologically skewed version of media literacy.

NATO’s foray into media literacy education represents a new frontier in militarized pedagogy. While claiming to promote democracy and resilience, its initiative advances a narrow, protectionist, and neoliberal approach that prioritizes NATO’s geopolitical goals over student empowerment.

This should raise red flags for educators, policymakers, and advocates. Media literacy is not a neutral practice. The organizations that design and fund media literacy programs inevitably shape the goals and methods of those programs. When a military alliance like NATO promotes media education, it brings with it a strategic interest in ideological control.

Educators must ask: What kind of media literacy are we teaching—and whose interests does it serve? If the goal is to produce informed, critically thinking citizens capable of questioning power in all its forms, then NATO’s approach falls short. Instead of inviting students to explore complex media systems, it simplifies them into a binary struggle between “us” and “them,” encouraging loyalty over literacy.

True media literacy must begin with transparency about who and what is behind the curriculum. It must empower students to question all forms of influence—governmental, corporate, and military alike. And it must resist the creeping presence of militarism in our classrooms. As educators, we must defend the right to question, not just the messages we see, but the institutions that shape them.

This essay was originally published here:

The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy

 

The post The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy: NATO Invades the Classroom first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Nolan Higdon and Sydney Sullivan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy-nato-invades-the-classroom-2/feed/ 0 544703
Inside the movement to recognize nature as an artist https://grist.org/looking-forward/inside-the-movement-to-recognize-nature-as-an-artist/ https://grist.org/looking-forward/inside-the-movement-to-recognize-nature-as-an-artist/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 15:19:23 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fe90a4826ae5aa2bae0e8d3ce170c5bc

Illustration of a microphone in the middle of a lush forest

Have you ever listened to a recording of birdsong? Or ocean waves? The howling of wolves, or thunder and rain? If you have, did you ever wonder whether nature was getting any compensation for producing that acoustic art that found its way to your speakers?

A number of musicians and environmentalists have begun raising that last question — and trying to ensure that its answer is yes. Nature sounds have long been sampled in musical tracks of all genres, but over the past few years, artists and cultural leaders have created a movement viewing nature as more than just a source of inspiration, but as a collaborator — one who deserves both credit and compensation.

One such initiative formally launched in mid-May, on the day of the full flower moon: a new record label and platform called Future Sound of Nature, dedicated to “blending the soul of electronic music with the rhythms of the Earth.” The platform is the brainchild of Eli Goldstein and Lola Villa, two electronic artists who connected as part of the group DJs for Climate Action.

“Having experienced what happens on the dance floor and the type of magic that happens there, we always believed that it was a very special place for community building around climate and acknowledging the Earth,” said Villa. “Eli and I wanted to create an organization or a platform where music could speak to that notion. And then also, how do we give nature a role in our storytelling and in our business model?”

In Future Sound of Nature’s model, 20 percent of the revenue from each release will go toward conservation or stewardship projects for the habitats featured in the recordings. The plan is for every release to have a theme, Villa said, whether that’s a location, a type of habitat, or even perhaps a single species. The first release under the new label was an EP of her own, titled Amazonía. Its eight tracks are built on field recordings she took during two visits to the Peruvian and Colombian Amazon, and 20 percent of the proceeds will go directly to the Indigenous Bora people who hosted her there.

The cover art for Villa’s Amazonía EP, showing an artistic image of a hand holding a caterpillar

The cover art for Villa’s Amazonía EP. Courtesy of FSON, design by Claudia Smith

That direct connection is an important part of what Goldstein and Villa are trying to create for artists and listeners alike. “It’s not just like, ‘Here’s some nature sounds, make some music,’” said Goldstein. “It’s really all about trying to create a deeper connection with the land and the communities where the music is being recorded, where nature is being collaborated with.”

Every time she has played the Amazonía set live, Villa said, she has given her audience context about the landscapes and animals that are represented in what they’re listening to — including the threats that they face. For instance: “Some of these birds are endangered. What does that do to you?” she posed. “What does that do to the listening experience?”

. . .

Future Sound of Nature is not the only initiative aimed at lifting up nature as an artist, and channeling the power of music back into her protection. On Earth Day last year, an initiative called Sounds Right officially launched in partnership with Spotify, putting “NATURE” as a creator on the platform for the first time. With nearly 2 million monthly listeners, NATURE’s artist page includes EPs of purely natural sounds — like Colombian rainforests and Nepalese rivers — and a playlist of more than 60 collaborations, where NATURE is listed as a contributor on tracks by artists ranging from Ellie Goulding to Aurora to Brian Eno.

Two months ago, the singer-songwriter Hozier became one of the latest to join this initiative. He released a new version of a song from his first album, “Like Real People Do,” incorporating the sounds of birds, crickets, thunder, and rain recorded in his home of Wicklow, Ireland. (Much to my heartbreak, Hozier could not be reached for an interview.)

“Everyone has a nature story,” said Iminza Mbwaya, the global program manager for the Sounds Right initiative, which is spearheaded by the Museum for the United Nations. As a musician herself, she has always been inspired by nature, she said. “Being able to credit it, being able to go through this creative challenge of like, ‘OK, what nature sound would I include in my song, and why would I do that?’ It opens up a world of possibility.”

A group of people pose for a photo on stage, holding an award

Mbwaya (center) and rest of the Sounds Right team took home a Grand Prix for Innovation at the Cannes Lions International Festival of Creativity in France last month. Courtesy of Iminza Mbwaya

That includes processing experiences with nature that aren’t necessarily positive. Rozzi, an L.A.-based singer-songwriter, got connected with Sounds Right when she was looking for a way to give back in the aftermath of the catastrophic L.A. fires earlier this year. Her brother and sister-in-law lost their home in Altadena, one of the neighborhoods that suffered the worst impacts.

“Altadena is just so special,” she said. “It’s this magical place where you can live right up against the mountains … hence why it’s a little bit vulnerable.” While it was emotionally difficult to see the charred landscape after the fire, and the place where her brother’s home once stood — only the chimney remaining — she was also surprised to find a sense of hope as she listened.

“I stood there with my phone, and it had been raining all day, so there was water dripping and so many birds and the wind in the trees,” she described. “I’m a natural optimist, so maybe this is just me — but I have to say, it felt like I was so aware of nature’s ability to come back. And I took that to be a metaphor for us as people as well. If we’re a part of nature, we must also have resilience inside of us.”

The track she created with those sounds, “Orange Skies – Chapter 2,” is also a reimagining of an old song she released in 2020, in the wake of another record-breaking fire season. Sadly, she said, the song’s message only grows more relevant. And while she has heard from a number of fans who have found it cathartic, she did not want to profit off that message. “I wanted to use that song to give back.”

Sounds Right requires that at least 50 percent of royalties from tracks featuring NATURE must go to conservation and restoration projects — although not necessarily in the places where the recordings are from. In its first year, the initiative raised $225,000, which was channeled through the foundation EarthPercent into projects in Colombia and other parts of the tropical Andes. That area was determined to be a priority, as a biodiversity hot spot that is also under significant threat. In its second year, Mbwaya said, the project will focus half its grantmaking in the Amazon Basin and half in the Congo Basin.

. . .

The idea of crediting and compensating nature as an artistic collaborator has some elements of the rights of nature movement, an effort to extend legal rights to natural entities as a means of protecting them from exploitation and harm. Both Future Sound of Nature and Sounds Right attempt to represent nature’s interests in their decisionmaking. For Future Sound of Nature, that will involve giving nature a seat on the board of directors — filled by a human representative who will change over each year. Similar mechanisms have been proposed for how we might give nature a voice in governance.

But both groups stop short of suggesting a legal framework for giving nature credit and payment beyond their individual initiatives. “Sounds Right exists primarily as an initiative within the pop culture and nature conservation space. So it’s anchored in that creative world first, and then could extend into some of the legal world,” Mbwaya said. “But our aim, our purpose, is not really to step into the legalities of establishing nature’s ownership or nature’s rights in that sense.”

Still, she is hopeful that the model could eventually spread to other creative industries — or even something like pharmaceuticals, where many ingredients are derived from plants and animals.

For the time being, both Future Sound of Nature and Sounds Right are focused on getting more artists on board and reaching more listeners. In addition to the money that every stream generates for conservation, Future Sound of Nature’s Villa is hopeful the music will help listeners connect more deeply with nature.

“I think that the beauty of music is that it can give us a language that we don’t yet have in words — as to like, how do we describe our relationship with nature?” Villa said. “In our words, it’s still very divided. Whereas music doesn’t need words for it to convey this notion that there is actually no division. You can just feel it. And that’s the goal of our work, to convey that feeling of connection.”

— Claire Elise Thompson

More exposure

A parting shot

While I sadly did not get to speak to Hozier for this story (I know he’s busy tending to his bees, OK), we can all enjoy this serene video of him singing “Like Real People Do” live by a lake in Wicklow.

A photo of a Hozier sitting with a guitar by a pristine lake

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Inside the movement to recognize nature as an artist on Jul 16, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Claire Elise Thompson.

]]>
https://grist.org/looking-forward/inside-the-movement-to-recognize-nature-as-an-artist/feed/ 0 544696
Man seen with Rahul Gandhi in viral selfie is not the judge who granted him bail but a lawyer https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/man-seen-with-rahul-gandhi-in-viral-selfie-is-not-the-judge-who-granted-him-bail-but-a-lawyer/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/man-seen-with-rahul-gandhi-in-viral-selfie-is-not-the-judge-who-granted-him-bail-but-a-lawyer/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 13:33:22 +0000 https://www.altnews.in/?p=302337 On July 15, 2025, a special magistrate court for members of Parliament (MPs) and Legislative Assemblies (MLAs) in Lucknow granted bail to Congress leader and MP Rahul Gandhi in a...

The post Man seen with Rahul Gandhi in viral selfie is not the judge who granted him bail but a lawyer appeared first on Alt News.

]]>
On July 15, 2025, a special magistrate court for members of Parliament (MPs) and Legislative Assemblies (MLAs) in Lucknow granted bail to Congress leader and MP Rahul Gandhi in a 2022 defamation case. Soon after this, a photo of him with a man in a black robe and white shirt with a collar—worn by those associated with the legal fraternity—began circulating on social media. The image was shared with claims that the judge who granted Gandhi bail was taking a selfie with him. While some raised concerns about fairness and whether judges should endorse politicians or fraternise with them, others (supporting the Congress) claimed that the judge took a selfie with Gandhi because he was convinced of his innocence.

Gandhi was booked for his comments about the Indian army during the Bharat Jodo Yatra in 2022 that were allegedly derogatory. After missing the last five hearings in the case, he surrendered in the court of the Additional Chief Judicial Magistrate, Alok Verma, who approved his bail. The Congress MP was also told to furnish two personal bail bonds of Rs 20,000 each and provide two sureties of the same amount for being absent in previous hearings.

Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) IT cell head, Amit Malviya, who has spread misinformation on several occasions in the past, was among those who shared the image on social media, claiming the man in black robes seen in the image was a judge. In his post on X, Malviya wrote, “This is the judge who is supposed to be hearing the case against Rahul Gandhi for insulting our Army and brave soldiers. He should immediately recuse himself.” Malviya later deleted his post.

National media panellist of the Congress, Surendra Rajput (@ssrajputINC), also posted the same image with a caption in Hindi that translates to: “This lone selfie of Shri Rahul Gandhi @RahulGandhi is enough to answer the countless allegations against him. Even the judge would only take a selfie if he truly believed in Rahul Ji’s innocence.” (Archive)

However, Rajput later updated the caption and removed the word “Judge”.

Several other X users such as @ravibhadoria, @MrSinha_, @JaipurDialogues, @arvindgunasekar, @ActivistSandeep, Congress spokesperson @priyanka81_INC, advocate and former AICC member @ashokbasoya, Congress Amroha district social media chairman @Afsarali190, journalist @arvindchotia, Congress UP state co-ordinator @akram_premiar, @AvkushSingh (who has often amplified pro-BJP content on X), were among those who posted the aforementioned image saying that it shows Gandhi with the judge who granted him bail in the defamation case. We also noticed that journalist Rohini Singh had reshared one of these posts.

Click to view slideshow.

Fact Check

The same day, we found a post with the same image shared by X user @Delhiite_  claiming that the individual in the image with Gandhi is an advocate, not a judge, and that his name is Syed Mahmood Hasan.

We then did a Google search for Additional Chief Judicial Magistrate Alok Verma, who was the judge in the MP/MLA  special magistrate court in Lucknow that granted the Leader of Opposition in the Lok Sabha bail. We found his details and image on the Allahabad High Court’s website. As is clear from the screenshot of the web page attached below, Justice Verma is not the man seen in the viral photo with Gandhi.

Taking a cue from @Delhiite_’s post, we looked for a Syed Mahmood Hasan to verify whether he was the one in the photo with Gandhi.

We found Hasan’s X account, where his bio reads: “Syed Mahmood Hasan (Advocate), civil court, Lucknow high court, Lucknow bench, Lucknow”. However, the last post by Hasan on X was from May 25, 2020, wishing his followers for Eid.. The post also included a screenshot where he had shared his contact information.

Alt News reached out to Hasan, who confirmed that he was no judge but an advocate.

We also verified that the number we called was actually Hasan’s by double-checking his contact information on his advocate profile on the website soolegal.com. The last four digits of his contact number on the website matched the number we contacted.

Hasan’s pictures on his X profile also match the man seen with Rahul Gandhi in the viral image.

Additionally, if he were a judge, then there would be a record of judgments he passed. However, all records found under Syed Mahmood Hasan pointed to him being an advocate/lawyer.

We also came across a Facebook post made by Hasan where he clarified that he is not a judge, but an advocate.

Thus, claims that LoP Rahul Gandhi clicked a selfie with a judge are completely false. The man in the viral image is Syed Mahmood Hasan, an advocate.

The post Man seen with Rahul Gandhi in viral selfie is not the judge who granted him bail but a lawyer appeared first on Alt News.


This content originally appeared on Alt News and was authored by Oishani Bhattacharya.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/man-seen-with-rahul-gandhi-in-viral-selfie-is-not-the-judge-who-granted-him-bail-but-a-lawyer/feed/ 0 544661
Louise Lancaster | BBC Radio 4 | Crossing the Line | 29 June 2025 | Just Stop Oil https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/louise-lancaster-bbc-radio-4-crossing-the-line-29-june-2025-just-stop-oil/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/louise-lancaster-bbc-radio-4-crossing-the-line-29-june-2025-just-stop-oil/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 11:58:28 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=eb9a9746d68d47ce1ff984fff353465b
This content originally appeared on Just Stop Oil and was authored by Just Stop Oil.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/louise-lancaster-bbc-radio-4-crossing-the-line-29-june-2025-just-stop-oil/feed/ 0 544671
Texas Officials Say They Didn’t See the Flood Coming. Oral Histories Show Residents Have Long Warned of Risks. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/texas-officials-say-they-didnt-see-the-flood-coming-oral-histories-show-residents-have-long-warned-of-risks/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/texas-officials-say-they-didnt-see-the-flood-coming-oral-histories-show-residents-have-long-warned-of-risks/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/texas-floods-oral-histories by Logan Jaffe

In late September 2000, longtime Kerr County, Texas, resident W. Thornton Secor Jr. sat down with an oral historian to tell his story. Like many of the residents recorded as part of a decadeslong effort by the Kerr County Historical Commission to document the community’s history, Secor had a lot to say about the area’s floods.

“It always seems to happen at night too,” Secor said of local floods he and his family had experienced. “Can’t see most of it.”

Secor, who died in 2022, was a third-generation manager of a lodge that still operates along the Guadalupe River. His oral history shares family memories of floods going back to 1932 — like the time a flood that year washed away most of the cabins his grandfather built.

Now, Secor’s daughter, Mandi Secor Lipscomb, is left considering the future of the lodge in the aftermath of another devastating flood, on July 4. Secor Lipscomb is the fourth-generation owner and operator of the same lodge, Waltonia on the River.

Often when I try to understand a place or process a big news event, I look for records kept by local historical societies and libraries. In archived documents, preserved photographs and oral history collections, one can start to see how a community understands itself. So, as news reports about the floods in the Central Texas Hill Country poured in throughout the week, I went looking for historical context. What local knowledge is held by people who live, or have lived, in what’s repeatedly described as “Flash Flood Alley”? How have people in Kerr County’s past contended with floods of their own time?

A trove of more than 70 oral histories recorded by the Kerr County Historical Commission begins to answer those questions. The recordings document memories of floods going back to 1900, but oral histories alone rarely tell a full or accurate story. Still, there’s at least one conclusion to draw: Everything has a history. The flood that killed more than 130 people in the Kerr County area this month is not the first time a flash flood on the Guadalupe River took lives of people, including children.

The front page of a local newspaper, the Kerrville Daily Times, on July 20, 1987. A flash flood killed 10 campers as they tried to evacuate. (Kerrville Daily Times via Newspapers.com)

I keep this history in mind when I hear local and state officials say no one could have seen this coming. Take this exchange between a reporter and Kerr County Judge Rob Kelly:

Reporter: Why weren’t these camps evacuated?

Kelly: I can’t answer that. I don’t know.

Reporter: Well you’re the judge. I mean you’re the top official here in this county. Why can’t you answer that? There are kids missing. These camps were in harm’s way. We knew this flood was coming.

Kelly: We didn’t know this flood was coming. Rest assured, no one knew this kind of flood was coming. We have floods all the time. This is the most dangerous river valley in the United States. And we deal with floods on a regular basis. When it rains, we get water. We had no reason to believe that this was gonna be anything like what’s happened here. None whatsoever.

My colleague Jennifer Berry Hawes wrote last week about the uncanny similarities between the Texas floods and Hurricane Helene, which struck North Carolina last year. In both disasters, weather forecasts predicted the potential devastation, yet people were left in harm’s way.

And as another colleague, ProPublica editor Abrahm Lustgarten, pointed out in a piece about how climate change is making disasters like the flood in Texas more common, “there will be tireless — and warranted — analysis of who is to blame for this heart-wrenching loss” in the weeks to come.

“Should Kerr County, where most of the deaths occurred, have installed warning sirens along that stretch of the waterway, and why were children allowed to sleep in an area prone to high-velocity flash flooding?” Lustgarten wrote. “Why were urgent updates apparently only conveyed by cellphone and online in a rural area with limited connectivity?”

As we wait for answers — or as journalists dig for them — the oral histories show Kerr County residents have warned one another, as well as newcomers and out-of-towners, about flooding for a long time. In his 2000 oral history, Secor said he remembered a time in the spring of 1959 when his father tried to warn one new-to-town woman about building a house so close to the river.

“He took her out and showed her the watermarks on the trees in front of our house and all,” Secor said, likely referring to the watermarks from the flood of 1932, which a local newspaper described at the time as “the most disastrous flood that ever swept the upper Guadalupe Valley.” The flood killed at least seven people.

“‘Oh,’ she says, ‘that will never happen again,’” Secor recalled.

He said her body was found in a tree a few months later after a flood swept her and the roof she stood on away.

“It’s going to surprise newcomers when we get another flood like the ’32 flood,” Secor said in 2000.

“It’ll get us again someday.”

As the Guadalupe River rose over the July 4 weekend, the 16-cabin lodge his daughter owns was sold out and full of guests. All of them escaped the floods, said Secor Lipscomb. They ran, some barefoot in the mud, up a steep hill beyond the property’s retaining wall. They took shelter in a barn.

Later, Secor Lipscomb assessed the damage to her family property. What she saw left her in tears: Four cabins had water up to the ceiling. Another two had flooded about 5 feet. But among the wreckage was a crew of nearly 40 volunteers, ready to help with the cleanup.

By the time I reached out to her to ask her about her father’s oral history, six cabins and the main camp office were already demolished.

The cabin her great-grandfather and grandfather built together more than 100 years ago still stood. But it won’t for much longer. It is so damaged with water that it, too, will have to go.

“This is our family history, our family legacy,” Secor Lipscomb told me. “Of course we’re going to rebuild.”

When they do, their customers will be ready. Many of the families who survived the flood already told her they’ll be first in line to book for the next available July 4.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Logan Jaffe.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/texas-officials-say-they-didnt-see-the-flood-coming-oral-histories-show-residents-have-long-warned-of-risks/feed/ 0 544626
David Robie: New Zealand must do more for Pacific and confront nuclear powers https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/david-robie-new-zealand-must-do-more-for-pacific-and-confront-nuclear-powers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/david-robie-new-zealand-must-do-more-for-pacific-and-confront-nuclear-powers/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 09:11:22 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117400 By Susana Suisuiki, RNZ Pacific Waves presenter/producer, and Lydia Lewis, RNZ Pacific presenter/bulletin editor

The New Zealand government needs to do more for its Pacific Island neighbours and stand up to nuclear powers, a distinguished journalist, media educator and author says.

Professor David Robie, a recipient of the New Zealand Order of Merit (MNZM), released the latest edition of his book Eyes of Fire: The last voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior (Little Island Press), which highlights the nuclear legacies of the United States and France.

Dr Robie, who has worked in Pacific journalism and academia for more than 50 years, recounts the crew’s experiences aboard the Greenpeace flagship the Rainbow Warrior in 1985, before it was bombed in Auckland Harbour.

At the time, New Zealand stood up to nuclear powers, he said.

“It was pretty callous [of] the US and French authorities to think they could just carry on nuclear tests in the Pacific, far away from the metropolitan countries, out of the range of most media, and just do what they like,” Dr Robie told RNZ Pacific. “It is shocking, really.”

The bombed Rainbow Warrior next morning
The bombed Rainbow Warrior next morning . . . as photographed by protest photojournalist John Miller. Image: Frontispiece in Eyes of Fire © John Miller

Speaking to Pacific Waves, Dr Robie said that Aotearoa had “forgotten” how to stand up for the region.

“The real issue in the Pacific is about climate crisis and climate justice. And we’re being pushed this way and that by the US [and] by the French. The French want to make a stake in their Indo-Pacific policies as well,” he said.

‘We need to stand up’
“We need to stand up for smaller Pacific countries.”

Dr Robie believes that New Zealand is failing with its diplomacy in the region.

Rongelap Islanders on board the Greenpeace flagship Rainbow Warrior travelling to their new home on Mejatto Island in 1985
Rongelap Islanders on board the Greenpeace flagship Rainbow Warrior travelling to their new home on Mejatto Island in 1985 — less than two months before the bombing. Image: ©1985 David Robie/Eyes of Fire

He accused the coalition government of being “too timid” and “afraid of offending President Donald Trump” to make a stand on the nuclear issue.

However, a spokesperson for New Zealand Foreign Minister Winston Peters told RNZ Pacific that New Zealand’s “overarching priority . . . is to work with Pacific partners to achieve a secure, stable, and prosperous region that preserves Pacific sovereignty and agency”.

The spokesperson said that through its foreign policy “reset”, New Zealand was committed to “comprehensive relationships” with Pacific Island countries.

“New Zealand’s identity, prosperity and security are intertwined with the Pacific through deep cultural, people, historical, security, and economic linkages.”

The New Zealand government commits almost 60 percent of its development funding to the region.

Pacific ‘increasingly contested’
The spokesperson said that the Pacific was becoming increasingly contested and complex.

“New Zealand has been clear with all of our partners that it is important that engagement in the Pacific takes place in a manner which advances Pacific priorities, is consistent with established regional practices, and supportive of Pacific regional institutions.”

They added that New Zealand’s main focus remained on the Pacific, “where we will be working with partners including the United States, Australia, Japan and in Europe to more intensively leverage greater support for the region.

“We will maintain the high tempo of political engagement across the Pacific to ensure alignment between our programme and New Zealand and partner priorities. And we will work more strategically with Pacific Governments to strengthen their systems, so they can better deliver the services their people need,” the spokesperson said.

The cover of the latest edition of Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior
The cover of the latest edition of Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior. Image: Little Island Press

However, former New Zealand prime minister Helen Clark, writing in the prologue of Dr Robie’s book, said: “New Zealand needs to re-emphasise the principles and values which drove its nuclear-free legislation and its advocacy for a nuclear-free South Pacific and global nuclear disarmament.”

Dr Robie added that looking back 40 years to the 1980s, there was a strong sense of pride in being from Aotearoa, the small country which set an example around the world.

“We took on . . . the nuclear powers,” Dr Robie said.

“And the bombing of the Rainbow Warrior was symbolic of that struggle, in a way, but it was a struggle that most New Zealanders felt a part of, and we were very proud of that [anti-nuclear] role that we took.

“Over the years, it has sort of been forgotten”.

‘Look at history’
France conducted 193 nuclear tests over three decades until 1996 in French Polynesia.

Until 2009, France claimed that its tests were “clean” and caused no harm, but in 2010, under the stewardship of Defence Minister Herve Morin, a compensation law was passed.

From 1946 to 1962, 67 nuclear bombs were detonated in the Marshall Islands by the US.

The 1954 Bravo hydrogen bomb test at Bikini Atoll, the largest nuclear weapon ever exploded by the United States, left a legacy of fallout and radiation contamination that continues to this day.
The 1 March 1954 Bravo hydrogen bomb test at Bikini Atoll, the largest nuclear weapon ever exploded by the United States, left a legacy of fallout and radiation contamination that continues to this day. Image: Marshall Islands Journal

In 2024, then-US deputy secretary of state Kurt Campbell, while responding to a question from RNZ Pacific about America’s nuclear legacy, said: “Washington has attempted to address it constructively with massive resources and a sustained commitment.”

However, Dr Robie said that was not good enough and labelled the destruction left behind by the US, and France, as “outrageous”.

“It is political speak; politicians trying to cover their backs and so on. If you look at history, [the response] is nowhere near good enough, both by the US and the French.”

This article is republished under a community partnership agreement with RNZ.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/david-robie-new-zealand-must-do-more-for-pacific-and-confront-nuclear-powers/feed/ 0 544622
How reducing the U.S. military budget would also reduce emissions https://grist.org/climate/how-reducing-the-us-military-budget-would-also-reduce-emissions/ https://grist.org/climate/how-reducing-the-us-military-budget-would-also-reduce-emissions/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 08:30:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670291 The next time you’re on a flight worrying about destroying the planet, rest easy knowing that at least you’re not in a fighter jet. The airline industry is responsible for 2.5 percent of global CO2 emissions, but the world’s militaries are responsible for more than double that, at 5.5 percent. 

When nations boost military budgets, they also boost their carbon emissions. With a bump of $157 billion, thanks to the budget the Trump administration passed earlier this month, the United States now spends $1 trillion each year on defense. That’s more than three times as much as China, the next highest spender, as well as the entire European Union. If combined, the world’s armed forces would have the fourth highest carbon footprint, behind India, the U.S., and China. 

Yet it’s been maddeningly difficult for researchers to monitor the emissions of militaries, which aren’t required to report these things. “There’s a guessing game involved,” said Nick Buxton, who has coauthored reports on military emissions from the Transnational Institute, an international research and advocacy group. “One of the overwhelming calls for everyone working in the sector is just for more open and transparent data, so we can come up with some reliable figures.”

To that end, using what data the Department of Energy has made publicly available between 1975 to 2022, researchers have calculated that if the U.S. consistently decreased military spending — by even a little — instead of increasing it, it’d be saving as much energy as Delaware and Slovenia use in a year. A decrease of less than 7 percent each year over about a decade would theoretically reduce energy consumption from about 640 trillion to 394 trillion British thermal units (a measurement of heat energy produced from burning fuels).

The study gives observers not just a better idea of how much carbon the American military is spewing, but also how effective it would be to reduce its funding. “We realize that the feasibility of military spending reductions taking place anytime soon within the U.S. context is probably quite questionable, to put it mildly,” said Andrew Jorgenson, professor of sociology and founding director of the University of British Columbia’s Climate and Society Lab and coauthor of the study, which was published June 2 in the journal PLOS Climate. “But it does highlight that it is a possible pathway to decarbonization and climate mitigation, just with very modest reductions in military spending.”

The researchers note that between 2010 and 2019, the Department of Defense’s emissions were over 636 million metric tons of atmosphere-warming emissions. (The DOD did not respond to a request to comment for this story.) And that’s a conservative and necessarily incomplete estimate, Jorgenson said. Fuel use can give researchers a general idea of how much carbon the armed forces are directly sending into the atmosphere, but there are also all kinds of indirect emissions that come with operating a military. Vegetables, for instance, took energy to grow and ship to bases, to say nothing of all the other supplies flowing around a military’s supply chain: bullets, blankets, boots. 

“If anything, our findings are then perhaps undercounting and underestimating the actual scope of the U.S. military’s contribution to energy consumption and carbon emissions and climate change,” Jorgenson said. “That’s a speculative statement — I just want to be clear about that.”

All these variables not only make it difficult for researchers to accurately determine the climate costs of war — governments themselves can be in the dark too. “Militaries are decades behind in their ability to even understand their emission sources and where they’re coming from,” said Ellie Kinney, military emissions campaigner at the nonprofit Conflict and Environment Observatory. “There is this lag compared to other industries, because no one’s asked them to.”

Calculations get even more complicated when a military actually goes to war. More jet flights require more fuel, and even missiles produce their own emissions. The resulting fires in conflict zones, like the ones that have been devastating Ukraine’s forests, release still more carbon into the atmosphere. While the U.S. spends an outsized amount of money on its armed forces, other nations, particularly those involved in active wars, seem intent to catch up. Russia is now spending a third of its federal budget on defense as its invasion of Ukraine drags on. Last year, Israel’s military spending jumped by 65 percent to $46.5 billion as the country assaulted Gaza. 

Last month, at President Trump’s urging, NATO allies committed to investing 3.5 percent of their gross domestic product each year on defense, and a further 1.5 percent on domestic security like new infrastructure, by 2035. That combined 5 percent is more than double their previous agreement to spend 2 percent of GDP. And on Monday, NATO secretary general Mark Rutte joined Trump in the Oval Office to announce a deal in which “billions of dollars’ worth of military equipment” will be purchased from the U.S. and delivered to Ukraine to support its defense against Russia. 

According to a Transnational Institute report, if every NATO state actually reaches its new military spending goal, by 2030 the alliance’s annual military carbon footprint would be 2.3 billion metric tons CO2 equivalent. (The group published the report prior to the formalization of the June agreement, hence the discrepancy of using 2030 in their modeling instead of 2035.) That’s nearly 700 million metric tons extra than if 2024 levels of military spending were sustained until that time. 

“We’re moving to a world which is readying itself constantly for war, which often makes war much more inevitable,” Buxton said. “And when war happens, emissions just skyrocket.”

All this additional military investment can create a feedback loop, Buxton and Kinney warn. Military leaders in the U.S. and elsewhere recognize climate change as a “threat multiplier,” meaning that it exacerbates existing hazards and conflicts. But with more investment in defense comes more emissions, and more warming, and more threats, which encourages more investment in armed forces. That also means less money for investing in renewable energy and adaptation measures: The richest nations are spending 30 times more on their militaries than on climate finance for the world’s most vulnerable countries.

“An escalation beyond control feels like the situation that we’re heading into,” Kinney said. “This is obviously deeply concerning from a broader security perspective, but really concerning from a climate perspective.”

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline How reducing the U.S. military budget would also reduce emissions on Jul 16, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Matt Simon.

]]>
https://grist.org/climate/how-reducing-the-us-military-budget-would-also-reduce-emissions/feed/ 0 544624
First-hand view of peacemaking challenge in the ‘Holy Land’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/first-hand-view-of-peacemaking-challenge-in-the-holy-land/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/first-hand-view-of-peacemaking-challenge-in-the-holy-land/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 08:06:19 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117387 Occupied West Bank-based New Zealand journalist Cole Martin asks who are the peacemakers?

BEARING WITNESS: By Cole Martin

As a Kiwi journalist living in the occupied West Bank, I can list endless reasons why there is no peace in the “Holy Land”.

I live in a refugee camp, alongside families who were expelled from their homes by Israel’s violent establishment in 1948 — never allowed to return and repeatedly targeted by Israeli military incursions.

Daily I witness suffocating checkpoints, settler attacks against rural towns, arbitrary imprisonment with no charge or trial, a crippled economy, expansion of illegal settlements, demolition of entire communities, genocidal rhetoric, and continued expulsion.

No form of peace can exist within an active system of domination. To talk about peace without liberation and dignity is to suggest submission to a system of displacement, imprisonment, violence and erasure.

I often find myself alongside a variety of peacemakers, putting themselves on the line to end these horrific systems — let me outline the key groups:

Palestinian civil society and individuals have spent decades committed to creative non-violence in the face of these atrocities — from court battles to academia, education, art, co-ordinating demonstrations, general strikes, hīkoi (marches), sit-ins, civil disobedience. Google “Iqrit village”, “The Great March of Return”, “Tent of Nations farm”. These are the overlooked stories that don’t make catchy headlines.

Protective Presence activists are a mix of about 150 Israeli and international civilians who volunteer their days and nights physically accompanying Palestinian communities. They aim to prevent Israeli settler violence, state-sanctioned home demolitions, and military/police incursions. They document the injustice and often face violence and arrest themselves. Foreigners face deportation and blacklisting — as a journalist I was arrested and barred from the West Bank short-term and my passport was withheld for more than a month.

Reconciliation organisations have been working for decades to bridge the disconnect between political narratives and human realities. The effective groups don’t seek “co-existence” but “co-resistance” because they recognise there can be no peace within an active system of apartheid. They reiterate that dialogue alone achieves nothing while the Israeli regime continues to murder, displace and steal. Yes there are “opposing narratives”, but they do not have equal legitimacy when tested against the reality on the ground.

Journalists continue to document and report key developments, chilling statistics and the human cost. They ensure people are seen. Over 200 journalists have been killed in Gaza. High-profile Palestinian Christian journalist Shireen Abu-Akleh was killed by Israeli forces in 2022. They continue reporting despite the risk, and without their courage world leaders wouldn’t know which undeniable facts to brazenly ignore.

Humanitarians serve and protect the most vulnerable, treating and rescuing people selflessly. More than 400 aid workers and 1000 healthcare workers have been killed in Gaza. All 38 hospitals have been destroyed or damaged, with just a small number left partially functioning. NGOs have been crippled by USAID cuts and targeted Israeli policies, marked by a mass exodus of expats who have spent years committed to this region — severing a critical lifeline for Palestinian communities.

All these groups emphasise change will not come from within. Protective Presence barely stems the flow.

Reconciliation means nothing while the system continues to displace, imprison and slaughter Palestinians en masse. Journalism, non-violence and humanitarian efforts are only as effective as the willingness of states to uphold international law.

Those on the frontlines of peacebuilding express the urgent need for global accountability across all sectors; economic, cultural and political sanctions. Systems of apartheid do not stem from corrupt leadership or several extremists, but from widespread attitudes of supremacy and nationalism across civil society.

Boycotts increase the economic cost of maintaining such systems. Divestment sends a strong financial message that business as usual is unacceptable.

Many other groups across the world are picketing weapons manufacturers, writing to elected leaders, educating friends and family, challenging harmful narratives, fundraising aid to keep people alive.

Where are the peacemakers? They’re out on the streets. They’re people just like you and me.

Cole Martin is an independent New Zealand photojournalist based in the occupied West Bank and a contributor to Asia Pacific Report. This article was first published by the Otago Daily Times and is republished with permission.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/first-hand-view-of-peacemaking-challenge-in-the-holy-land/feed/ 0 544611
Writer Boris Fishman on balancing passion and practicality https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/writer-boris-fishman-on-balancing-passion-and-practicality/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/writer-boris-fishman-on-balancing-passion-and-practicality/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-boris-fishman-on-balancing-passion-and-practicality I would love to hear a little bit about your journey. How did you come to be a writer?

My mom loved going to the theater. My dad loved strumming the guitar. But these were not artistic people. Not questioners. Where does this need to question come from? I have no idea.

Well, two things. One is: immigration is so intense and dramatic and traumatic that you can’t help being left with stories. But I know lots of other immigrants who have not chosen to channel [their stories] into writing. So, then there’s the fact of being an only child and having four adults – because my maternal grandparents were almost a second set of parents – really dote on you. I was spoiled attentionally by these people. When I wanted to say something, they listened. What a great gift to receive from your family, right? I never took that responsibility lightly.

So, I feel like some combination of that explains two thirds of it. And the third third is just that mysterious thing that takes hold of us.

I’ve tried to write about things that are true to me, while hopefully being of relevance to others. And some of [my work] has been greeted with great interest and attention, and other work has been greeted with indifference. And I think managing that indifference, to say nothing of the rejection that you frequently encounter, is just a major part of being an artist. It gets easier but you never become fully indifferent to the indifference. At least I didn’t.

I love what you said about being an only child. I can relate to that. There’s something about being an only child where you feel like you’re part of the decision making process, one of the adults. So I do feel like there’s this responsibility that you develop, the confidence that you mentioned, and a desire to speak your mind.

I became an ambassador for my parents. I’m sure you did, too. You had to call the places that they were too nervous to call. You had to stand up for them at the offices where they were too nervous to stand up. And it teaches you to keep prodding and keep asking and keep speaking and keep offering. So many of my non-immigrant friends so often take what they hear for the answer. I don’t. I ask again.

The questioning.

Yeah. And very often the second time, the answer is different, but sometimes it’s not. I don’t necessarily go on endlessly, that can be annoying and disrespectful, but this instinct to keep speaking is easy for us immigrants to take for granted, as it’s such a central part of who we are. But it’s a learned instinct.

What is something you wish someone told you when you began to write?

I was very nervous about becoming a writer. As an immigrant kid, I was surrounded by expectations of financial stability, but writing was like an ailment. I couldn’t manage to do anything else. I tried. I spent a summer interning for a personal injury attorney. There’s no hope of me ever doing anything in finance. And somehow I just couldn’t imagine myself as a urologist. Maybe law was something I could do, because it involves speaking and arguing. But that one summer was enough to convince me otherwise. My eyes were glued to the clock. What other signs do you need?

But I was, nonetheless, because of my [parents’] expectations, very anxious about turning to writing and trying to make a living from it. Because my parents are Jews from the Soviet Union, their perspective was, “Well, what if it doesn’t work out?” Very sensible perspective, I should add. One of my dad’s favorite phrases is, “So, what’s your plan?” There has to be a plan.

I wish they could have said, “Hey, this is risky, but we believe in you. And you know what, you’re 22–you’ve got plenty of time to figure it out. Let it rip.” Instead, they said: “We understand you have to soar, but keep one foot on the ground.” And I didn’t have what it takes to ignore them. You could say that there’s some way in which I have failed my writing by keeping one foot on the ground.

Like playing it safe?

I passionately believe in the power of realist fiction. But perhaps that claim is suspect, because I’ve just never allowed myself to go wild. This is a subconscious issue. Maybe I have never cast practicality aside sufficiently to learn just how wild I could get? I’m always paying very close attention to my reader. I think authors who are paying attention only to themselves can feel very solipsistic. There are people who are able to do both. We were just reading Blood Meridian by Cormac McCarthy in class. There’s no doubt that his feet were off the ground as he was writing that book.

How did you manage to create a path outside the traditional expectations?

I have always done the pure passion thing, and then I’ve always done an extremely practical thing alongside it. I’m proud of every part of that. That’s how you make money as a writer. Early on, I wrote college promotional brochures. I did research for a maker of temporary concrete. I have edited more manuscripts than you can count. I’ve even–this wasn’t for income, this was for passion–worked on the line in a restaurant kitchen. I didn’t do it for money, but I appreciated the money it gave me. But my kids have paid for this. My mental sanity has paid for this because there’s only 24 hours in the day, and I’m really thorough, so everything I do, I do completely. And other things pay for it, emotionally and time-wise. If you ask me, “What are your hopes for yourself as somebody who has just entered his middle second half of his 40s?” My answer is to stop living this way so that I can focus on my kids.

I would love to hear a bit more about how you balance your writing practice with teaching. Does one ever inform the other? Do they ever get in each other’s way?

Of course, in some sense [teaching] drains your battery, but in another sense, it really, really sharpens your excitement for craft, for storytelling. It puts you back in touch with certain authors you’ve loved. It sort of forces you to realize certain things when you’re preparing for class, because there’s no better way to understand something than to have to teach it. Your students reveal things about the books to you, too, all the time.

Writers who teach love to pretend that teaching leaves time for writing. “I’ll just be more disciplined. I’ll get up at five instead of six.” No.* You went to bed at one. *You answered every email that you got from a student, every single request you got from a student, the 50 other things you do. You never want to say no to students. You want to encourage. But it often leaves you with nothing for yourself.

With writing you need massive blocks of uninterrupted time where you can start to flow freely and inhabit that space, especially if you’re trying to start something. So summers are the only time. And if you want to take a vacation with your kids, you’re basically talking about eight weeks when you can work. It’s not a lot of time. I live in two places right now, so there’s that transition as well.

There are some people whom I went to graduate school with, incredibly talented and promising writers, but for one reason or another, they have stopped writing as a professional way of life. Then there are those other people who are literary superstars, who will be feted no matter what they write. But there are so many of us who are somewhere in the middle: 46 years old, with two kids, with four books. And we are still living multiple lives. We’re still contriving ways to find time to write in between our other obligations. We don’t have the freedom to be one or the other.

A lot of your journalistic work is about food and wine.

[Wine is] pristinely expressive. Smell bypasses the cortex and goes straight to the thalamus. When I put my nose into a glass of well-made wine, it’s mind travel. I go to certain places I’ve never been to. Like I put my nose into one kind of glass and I’m in some arcadian meadow on some sun-swept day with the wind just so. Other times, you’re in a wet wood right after a rain. It’s like therapeutic MDMA–you find yourself in places that if you’ve gone there, you’ve only gone there in past lives. And then it’s over. An iconic example for me is something that I mentioned in this piece I had about wine in The New York Times last fall. My wife and I took our daughter to Istanbul, and we went to a bar that focuses on indigenous Turkish grapes. I was poured a glass of a varietal called Kalecik Karasi. It sometimes has a raspberry-heavy aroma. When I put my nose in it, for the most fleeting second, I was in my grandmother’s kitchen in Minsk while she made her raspberry jam. For a nanosecond, I got my grandmother back. I’m getting goosebumps saying this. I’ve told the story before, goosebumps every time. I want that joy. I want that connection to the land. I want that connection to tradition. I want that incredible precision and meticulousness and artisanship. I want that transport.

What a contrast to academia…

Yes, which can be an utterly joyless, grievance-filled environment, and anybody who pretends otherwise is full of it. For me, wine is also a connection to Europe. It’s a connection to time moving in a different way. Wine will never become instantaneous. Wine doesn’t care about AI. All those things feel very salutary.

As for food, it’s very elemental, right? In the sense that something that was inedible 15 minutes before is not only edible, but nourishing now because of things we’ve done to it. Something is elementally satisfying about providing that nourishment. People’s conditions–emotionally, physically, spiritually, psychologically–transform on a dime if you feed them properly when they are hungry, when they are without that nourishment. The power of food to do that is astounding. You can move people with novels, but it works at a very different speed.

What is it about hunger that defines the Post-Soviet immigrant experience? All immigrant experiences. Even after years of assimilation, pounds of pineapple, why are we all still so hungry?

That’s a great title, “Pounds of Pineapple.” Why are we still so hungry? Well, it’s a learned habit, and it’s learned in formative years. And so it’s very hard to ease into a sense of comfort and luxury. I had every opportunity to let go of this part of myself, because I came here at nine, but I didn’t really come here at nine. I moved out on my own at 24, so I really came here at 24, and by then, I was a deeply shaped human being who had spent 24 years living with his parents. That whole time, you’re imbibing their ideals. My wife comes from non-Jews in Seattle, not immigrants. Their means were less modest than ours, and there’s just a different level of hunger and searching there, whereas for us the security belt could never be robust enough. There was always one more thing you could do, one more angle you could try to calculate, one more sandbag you could add to your barricade, so to speak, because you’re barricading against the kinds of bad things that happen more frequently for us–or used to, but we can’t believe we’re clear of them–than they do for people in Seattle.

Do you have any writing rituals? Superstitions?

I have fewer superstitions than you think. My superstitions are, perhaps over-responsibly, the central elements of a good writing practice. For the three hours that I’m in the chair, I try not to get up, except to go to the bathroom. No food. I’m never hungrier than when I’m writing, but I try very hard to ignore it. No internet. You have to be in the chair. Of course, sometimes physical movement helps you enter a scene. So I might walk back and forth in the room. But other than that, there’s just making sure to [write] as regularly as possible at the time of day when you are at your best. We all know the temptation to reward ourselves by folding a couple of T-shirts and vacuuming a little bit and checking out one email. But if you can do this, this kind of humble, monastic expression of the task, your work will thank you. It’s like going to the gym. The more you do it, the sooner it’ll be over. And it’ll feel great.

How do you know when a project is done or when you have to abandon a project?

I have to tell you that I have never let anything [long] go, ever. Not these four books. I’ve let go of lots of short stories. I haven’t become a seasoned enough short story writer to practice it. I’ve let many of those go, and almost don’t do it anymore. But in terms of longer work, for whatever reason, I’m properly calibrated to that length.

I’d love to hear a little bit more about the hunger you experience while writing. Why do you think that happens? Why are we so hungry when we write?

It’s fascinating to me. Your brain is just working so, so hard. And it’s working in such a different way. I’m famished. I could have just eaten before I started and all of a sudden, I’m famished again. It’s like, you’re watching yourself deplete mental calories as you go. It’s so cool to observe. It feels like a supernatural event because you’re literally sitting still, you’re not exercising, but you’re shedding something so intensely and you need refueling so badly.

It’s really beautiful to think about. What is your approach to starting a project?

There isn’t anything particularly talismanic about beginning. Some idea, some flicker takes hold of you. In order for it to be a novel, it has to have connection to larger issues that have no resolution. And if something feels all of a sudden like it has a concrete situation, but it also has that reach, you might sit down one day and just go there. A part of you is quietly chanting: “I’m ignoring the intensity of this blank page. I’m ignoring the fact that it’s the first page. I’m ignoring the question of, could this be it? Could this be it? Could this be a new one?” Because it only happens so many times in your life that something goes from page one to page 336.

I tend to have a bigger desire to write when I don’t have time to write. I don’t know if you feel that way. I trick myself into note taking, which is not writing.

I don’t know. But you’re making me realize that as soon as you have an idea, you’ve got to have a proper writing day, because notes, as you know, are a pale alternative. They sustain the illusion that there’s a possibility there, waiting for you, but it’s a hologram until you try to write it.

Boris Fishman recommends:

Give Me Liberty. It is twice the film that Anora was. (Interestingly, Darya Ekamasova was in Give Me Liberty, too.)

Finland. I just took my daughter there to learn how to skate on the wild ice I never learned to skate on as a boy in Soviet Belarus. Maybe it was the silencing effects of winter and jet-lag, but I experienced a profound quietness that, considering the noise in America, felt like a miracle. I think it was the quietness of things working as they should, and people largely getting along. Finns are always called the happiest people on earth, but I think it’s actually that they’re the most secure-feeling.

Wine. There’s a lot of anti-alcohol talk now, and to each his own, but for me, the aroma and taste of well-made wine can turn into mind travel.

Dancing to electronic music. For me, progressive house rather than EDM, but otherwise, it is the cure for all ills.

The French spy series “The Bureau.” Very instructive about the degree of ethical and geopolitical complexity a European viewer can be counted on to withstand, versus an American.


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Diana Ruzova.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/writer-boris-fishman-on-balancing-passion-and-practicality/feed/ 0 544617
Confronting the biggest genocide cheerleader in Congress https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/confronting-the-biggest-genocide-cheerleader-in-congress/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/confronting-the-biggest-genocide-cheerleader-in-congress/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 04:36:02 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=ef5910817bee5eb9ba95a619195bf44d
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/confronting-the-biggest-genocide-cheerleader-in-congress/feed/ 0 544599
Tax the Rich, Save Democracy: The Truth They Don’t Want You to Know https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/tax-the-rich-save-democracy-the-truth-they-dont-want-you-to-know/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/tax-the-rich-save-democracy-the-truth-they-dont-want-you-to-know/#respond Wed, 16 Jul 2025 03:11:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=26a101cb11e4294a43deb5125d407db7 We are told that if we tax the rich, that jobs will disappear. That prosperity will dry up. But the numbers tell a different story. In the latest Gaslit Nation, Amber Wallin, executive director of the State Revenue Alliance, joins Andrea to expose the lie at the heart of our economic system. The rich are not fleeing. They are flourishing. And when we make them pay their fair share, everyone flourishes. 

Wallin comes armed with data and clarity. She dismantles the disinformation that has allowed the ultra-wealthy to hoard billions while public schools crumble and hospitals close. States that tax high-income earners are not bleeding millionaires. They are gaining revenue and creating more millionaires. They are investing in their people. They are proving what we already know deep down: we can tax the rich and build a society that works for everyone.

The Battle Behind the Budget

For decades, tax policy in America has been a weapon wielded against working people. It has been shaped by lobbyists, shielded by myths, and sold to the public as necessary sacrifice. But history shows us something else. It shows how tax codes have been intentionally designed to protect wealth at the top and starve communities at the bottom.

Wallin makes it clear. We are not fighting numbers. We are fighting a system that tells us scarcity is natural while billionaires pay less in taxes than teachers.

Tax Justice Is Democracy in Action

Economic inequality is a threat to democracy. When wealth concentrates, power concentrates. And when power concentrates, freedom erodes. That is why taxing the rich is not a fringe idea. It is a democratic emergency.

Wallin also emphasizes something often ignored in these conversations: gender equity. Women, especially women of color, are hit hardest by unfair tax systems. Correcting that is not just about fairness. It is about building systems that’s humane. 

No One Is Coming to Save Us. We Are the Movement.

This conversation is a call to action. States hold tremendous power to reshape the economy. Community organizing, public pressure, and clear messaging can push forward tax reforms that fund schools, roads, housing, and healthcare. Essential services are not luxuries. They are rights. And the money to pay for them exists.

The only question is whether we have the courage to demand it.

Wallin says it best: free markets are not free. They are designed by and for the wealthy, unless we intervene. Tax policy is not boring. It’s political warfare. And the sooner we treat it that way, the sooner we win.

We are in a moment of extraordinary possibility. Trust your instincts. Trust the data. And above all, trust the power of the people to build wealth and power for everyone.

EVENTS AT GASLIT NATION:

  • NEW DATE! Thursday July 31 4pm ET – the Gaslit Nation Book Club discusses Antoine de Saint Exupéry’s The Little Prince written in the U.S. during America First. 

  • Minnesota Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Vermont Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Arizona-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to connect, available on Patreon. 

  • Indiana-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to join, available on Patreon. 

  • Florida-based listeners are going strong meeting in person. Be sure to join their Signal group, available on Patreon. 

  • Have you taken Gaslit Nation’s HyperNormalization Survey Yet?

  • Gaslit Nation Salons take place Mondays 4pm ET over Zoom and the first ~40 minutes are recorded and shared on Patreon.com/Gaslit for our community

Want to enjoy Gaslit Nation ad-free? Join our community of listeners for bonus shows, exclusive Q&A sessions, our group chat, invites to live events like our Monday political salons at 4pm ET over Zoom, and more! Sign up at Patreon.com/Gaslit!


This content originally appeared on Gaslit Nation and was authored by Andrea Chalupa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/16/tax-the-rich-save-democracy-the-truth-they-dont-want-you-to-know/feed/ 0 544593
Some Texas Officials Didn’t Respond to Flood Alerts, Echoing the Tragedies of Hurricane Helene https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/some-texas-officials-didnt-respond-to-flood-alerts-echoing-the-tragedies-of-hurricane-helene-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/some-texas-officials-didnt-respond-to-flood-alerts-echoing-the-tragedies-of-hurricane-helene-2/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 22:00:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=668d0ad295b2069e2e55ed2025349d54
This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by ProPublica.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/some-texas-officials-didnt-respond-to-flood-alerts-echoing-the-tragedies-of-hurricane-helene-2/feed/ 0 544582
The Wearables Trap: How the Government Plans to Monitor, Score, and Control You https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/the-wearables-trap-how-the-government-plans-to-monitor-score-and-control-you/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/the-wearables-trap-how-the-government-plans-to-monitor-score-and-control-you/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 21:32:32 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159937 Bodily autonomy—the right to privacy and integrity over our own bodies—is rapidly vanishing. We are entering a new age of algorithmic, authoritarian control, where our thoughts, moods, and biology are monitored and judged by the state. This is the dark promise behind the newest campaign by Robert F. Kennedy Jr., President Trump’s Secretary of Health […]

The post The Wearables Trap: How the Government Plans to Monitor, Score, and Control You first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Bodily autonomy—the right to privacy and integrity over our own bodies—is rapidly vanishing.

We are entering a new age of algorithmic, authoritarian control, where our thoughts, moods, and biology are monitored and judged by the state.

This is the dark promise behind the newest campaign by Robert F. Kennedy Jr., President Trump’s Secretary of Health and Human Services, to push for a future in which all Americans wear biometric health-tracking devices.

Under the guise of public health and personal empowerment, this initiative is nothing less than the normalization of 24/7 bodily surveillance, ushering in a world where every step, heartbeat, and biological fluctuation is monitored not only by private companies but also by the government.

In this emerging surveillance-industrial complex, health data becomes currency. Tech firms profit from hardware and app subscriptions, insurers profit from risk scoring, and government agencies profit from increased compliance and behavioral insight.

This convergence of health, technology, and surveillance is not a new strategy—it’s just the next step in a long, familiar pattern of control.

Surveillance has always arrived dressed as progress.

Every new wave of surveillance technology—GPS trackers, red light cameras, facial recognition, Ring doorbells, Alexa smart speakers—has been sold to us as a tool of convenience, safety, or connection. But in time, each became a mechanism for tracking, monitoring, or controlling the public.

What began as voluntary has become inescapable and mandatory.

The moment we accepted the premise that privacy must be traded for convenience, we laid the groundwork for a society in which nowhere is beyond the government’s reach—not our homes, not our cars, not even our bodies.

RFK Jr.’s wearable plan is just the latest iteration of this bait-and-switch: marketed as freedom, built as a cage.

According to Kennedy’s plan, which has been promoted as part of a national campaign to “Make America Healthy Again,” wearable devices would track glucose levels, heart rate, activity, sleep, and more for every American.

Participation may not be officially mandatory at the outset, but the implications are clear: get on board, or risk becoming a second-class citizen in a society driven by data compliance.

What began as optional self-monitoring tools marketed by Big Tech is poised to become the newest tool in the surveillance arsenal of the police state.

Devices like Fitbits, Apple Watches, glucose trackers, and smart rings collect astonishing amounts of intimate data—from stress and depression to heart irregularities and early signs of illness. When this data is shared across government databases, insurers, and health platforms, it becomes a potent tool not only for health analysis—but for control.

Once symbols of personal wellness, these wearables are becoming digital cattle tags—badges of compliance tracked in real time and regulated by algorithm.

And it won’t stop there.

The body is fast becoming a battleground in the government’s expanding war on the inner realms.

The infrastructure is already in place to profile and detain individuals based on perceived psychological “risks.” Now imagine a future in which your wearable data triggers a mental health flag. Elevated stress levels. Erratic sleep. A skipped appointment. A sudden drop in heart rate variability.

In the eyes of the surveillance state, these could be red flags—justification for intervention, inquiry, or worse.

RFK Jr.’s embrace of wearable tech is not a neutral innovation. It is an invitation to expand the government’s war on thought crimes, health noncompliance, and individual deviation.

It shifts the presumption of innocence to a presumption of diagnosis. You are not well until the algorithm says you are.

The government has already weaponized surveillance tools to silence dissent, flag political critics, and track behavior in real time. Now, with wearables, they gain a new weapon: access to the human body as a site of suspicion, deviance, and control.

While government agencies pave the way for biometric control, it will be corporations—such as insurance companies, tech giants, and employers—who act as enforcers for the surveillance state.

Wearables don’t just collect data. They sort it, interpret it, and feed it into systems that make high-stakes decisions about your life: whether you get insurance coverage, whether your rates go up, whether you qualify for employment or financial aid.

As reported by ABC News, a JAMA article warns that insurers could easily use wearables to deny coverage or increase premiums based on personal health metrics, such as calorie intake, weight fluctuations, and blood pressure.

It’s not a stretch to imagine this bleeding into workplace assessments, credit scores, or even social media rankings.

Employers already offer discounts for “voluntary” wellness tracking and penalize nonparticipants. Insurers give incentives for healthy behavior—until they decide unhealthy behavior warrants punishment. Apps track not just steps, but mood, substance use, fertility, and sexual activity—feeding the ever-hungry data economy.

We now face the quiet erosion of autonomy through the normalization of constant monitoring.

We must ask: when surveillance becomes a condition of participation in modern life—such as employment, education, and healthcare—are we still free? Or have we become, as in every great dystopian warning, conditioned not to resist, but to comply?

That’s the hidden cost of these technological conveniences: today’s wellness tracker is tomorrow’s corporate leash.

Once health tracking becomes a de facto requirement for employment, insurance, or social participation, it will be impossible to “opt out” without penalty. Those who resist may be painted as irresponsible, unhealthy, or even dangerous.

This is not merely an expansion of healthcare. It is the transformation of health into a mechanism of control—a Trojan horse for the surveillance state to claim ownership over the last private frontier: the human body.

Once biometric data becomes currency in a health-driven surveillance economy, it’s only a matter of time before that data is used to determine whose lives are worth investing in—and whose are not.

This isn’t a left or right issue.

The conquest of physical space—our homes, cars, public squares—is nearly complete.

What remains is the conquest of inner space: our biology, our genetics, our psychology, our emotions. As predictive algorithms grow more sophisticated, the government and its corporate partners will use them to assess risk, flag threats, and enforce compliance in real time.

The goal is no longer simply to monitor behavior but to reshape it—to preempt dissent, deviance, or disease before it arises.

As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, now is the time to draw the line—before the body becomes just another piece of state property.

The post The Wearables Trap: How the Government Plans to Monitor, Score, and Control You first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by John W. Whitehead and Nisha Whitehead.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/the-wearables-trap-how-the-government-plans-to-monitor-score-and-control-you/feed/ 0 544576
A tribe in Florida joins the fight against the “Alligator Alcatraz” immigrant detention center https://grist.org/indigenous/a-florida-tribe-joins-the-fight-against-the-alligator-alcatraz-immigrant-detention-center/ https://grist.org/indigenous/a-florida-tribe-joins-the-fight-against-the-alligator-alcatraz-immigrant-detention-center/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 19:35:37 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670278 The Miccosukee Tribe in Florida joined environmental groups on Tuesday to sue the federal and state agencies that constructed an immigrant detention center known as the “Alligator Alcatraz” and located in the Everglades National Park. 

In a motion to join a lawsuit, as one of the first tribes to potentially sue against the detention center, the case argues that the Department of Homeland Security, U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement, Miami-Dade County, and the Florida Division of Emergency Management did not seek an environmental review.

The filing alleges the center’s proximity to Miccosukee villages, ceremonial sites, and access to traditional hunting grounds, and “raises significant raises significant concerns about environmental degradation and potential impacts.”

“We are going to make sure that we fight this facility on whatever front is available to us,” said William “Popeye” James Osecola, who is the secretary of the Miccosukee tribal council. He hopes the lawsuit will “signify that the tribe will continue fighting to do what it’s always done, which is protect the land and save the land that saved us.”

According to Osecola, since the facility’s operation began, tribal members have been restricted from gathering plants and roots for uses such as medicine. “Obviously, that’s not an option for us right now,” he said. “At the moment, it’s the first time we’ve ever seen gates like that there, so it’s very jarring for us.” 

Nearby the facility, 15 active tribal villages reside inside Big Cypress National Preserve, located within the Everglades. 

During the 19th century, the Seminole Wars, which the Seminole Nation and Miccosukee Nation view as one continuous conflict against the U.S., many members fled into the wetlands and used their natural environment as refuge. 

Protestors stand outside detention center as vehicles drive by
Protestors stand outside a makeshift detention center for immigrants known as the “Alligator Alcatraz” as government vehicles drive by, in the Florida Everglades. Betty Osceola

In a press conference at the detention center last month, Florida Governor Ron DeSantis said there would be  “zero impact” on the wetland’s environment. The site is located on an abandoned airstrip, once a controversial project that aimed to be the world’s largest airport. Observers outside the facility said they could see lights on at all hours, attracting mosquito swarms. Recent satellite images also reveal that a freshly paved road has been laid down. 

Last year, the tribe and the National Park Service signed a co-stewardship agreement for Everglades National Park. The partnership aimed to collaborate on protecting tribal practices, restoration efforts for the land’s vegetation, and protection. 

In these cypress swamps and toothy sawgrass marshes, wildlife alongside alligators includes bats, turtles, and panthers. Because species such as the panther are critically endangered, Osecola implied that the continuous traffic at Alligator Alcatraz will “see more deaths with the wildlife”. “It’s taken decades just to get Everglades restoration going like it is now,” he said.

While the Department of Homeland Security distanced itself after promoting the facility for weeks, claiming Florida controls the facility under state hands, critics are not convinced. Elise Bennett, Florida and Caribbean director at the Center for Biological Diversity, an organization that filed alongside Friends of the Everglades in the case last month, noted that “setting aside the funding for detaining immigrants is essentially a federal function. This is a federal project, regardless of what they say in their court filings.”

Last week, the Center for Biological Diversity filed a legal notice with an intent to sue that the construction also violates the Clean Water Act and Endangered Species Act, raising concerns such as light pollution and the use of insecticide to mitigate mosquitoes on-site that could affect the area’s wildlife and surrounding water. 

Each day since its opening, protestors and groups have noticed trucks coming in carrying diesel, generators, and caged vehicles holding detainees. There are currently 3000 beds inside the facility and at least 400 security personnel on-site. 

After state legislators were blocked from entering the Alligator Alcatraz’s premises, Governor DeSantis invited legislators and the state’s members of Congress to tour the facility over the weekend. According to Osecola, the Governor of Florida did not extend that invitation to tribes. 

Some Republican members claimed that the detention center was clean and safe. Others, such as Democratic State Representative Anna Eskamani, reported that, “The environmental impact of this facility cannot be overstated — there is new asphalt, thousands of gallons of water used every day and gas tanks powering generators. No alligators seen, but plenty of mosquitoes.”

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline A tribe in Florida joins the fight against the “Alligator Alcatraz” immigrant detention center on Jul 15, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Miacel Spotted Elk.

]]>
https://grist.org/indigenous/a-florida-tribe-joins-the-fight-against-the-alligator-alcatraz-immigrant-detention-center/feed/ 0 544566
Climate Denial Paved the Way for the Texas Flooding https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/climate-denial-paved-the-way-for-the-texas-flooding/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/climate-denial-paved-the-way-for-the-texas-flooding/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 18:41:51 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/climate-denial-paved-the-way-for-the-texas-flooding-mazur-20250715/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Laurie Mazur.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/climate-denial-paved-the-way-for-the-texas-flooding/feed/ 0 544557
The IRS Is Building a Vast System to Share Millions of Taxpayers’ Data With ICE https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/the-irs-is-building-a-vast-system-to-share-millions-of-taxpayers-data-with-ice/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/the-irs-is-building-a-vast-system-to-share-millions-of-taxpayers-data-with-ice/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 15:45:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/trump-irs-share-tax-records-ice-dhs-deportations by William Turton, Christopher Bing and Avi Asher-Schapiro

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

The Internal Revenue Service is building a computer program that would give deportation officers unprecedented access to confidential tax data.

ProPublica has obtained a blueprint of the system, which would create an “on demand” process allowing Immigration and Customs Enforcement to obtain the home addresses of people it’s seeking to deport.

Last month, in a previously undisclosed dispute, the acting general counsel at the IRS, Andrew De Mello, refused to turn over the addresses of 7.3 million taxpayers sought by ICE. In an email obtained by ProPublica, De Mello said he had identified multiple legal “deficiencies” in the agency’s request.

Two days later, on June 27, De Mello was forced out of his job, people familiar with the dispute said. The addresses have not yet been released to ICE. De Mello did not respond to requests for comment, and the administration did not address questions sent by ProPublica about his departure.

The Department of Government Efficiency began pushing the IRS to provide taxpayer data to immigration agents soon after President Donald Trump took office. The tax agency’s acting general counsel refused and was replaced by De Mello, who Trump administration officials viewed as more willing to carry out the president’s agenda. Soon after, the Department of Homeland Security, ICE’s parent agency, and the IRS negotiated a “memorandum of understanding” that included specific legal guardrails to safeguard taxpayers’ private information.

In his email, De Mello said ICE’s request for millions of records did not meet those requirements, which include having a written assurance that each taxpayer whose address is being sought was under active criminal investigation.

“There’s just no way ICE has 7 million real criminal investigations, that’s a fantasy,” said a former senior IRS official who had been advising the agency on this issue. The demands from the DHS were “unprecedented,” the official added, saying the agency was pressing the IRS to do what amounted to “a big data dump.”

In the past, when law enforcement sought IRS data to support its investigations, agencies would give the IRS the full legal name of the target, an address on file and an explanation of why the information was relevant to a criminal inquiry. Such requests rarely involved more than a dozen people at a time, former IRS officials said.

Danny Werfel, IRS commissioner during the Biden administration, said the privacy laws allowing federal investigators to obtain taxpayer data have never “been read to open the door to the sharing of thousands, tens of thousands, or hundreds of thousands of tax records for a broad-based enforcement initiative.”

A spokesperson for the White House said the planned use of IRS data was legal and a means of fulfilling Trump’s campaign pledge to carry out mass deportations of “illegal criminal aliens.”

Taxpayer data is among the most confidential in the federal government and is protected by strict privacy laws, which have historically limited its transfer to law enforcement and other government agencies. Unauthorized disclosure of taxpayer return information is a felony that can carry a penalty of up to five years in prison.

The system that the IRS is now creating would give ICE automated access to home addresses en masse, limiting the ability of IRS officials to consider the legality of transfers. IRS insiders who reviewed a copy of the blueprint said it could result in immigration agents raiding wrong or outdated addresses.

“If this program is implemented in its current form, it’s extremely likely that incorrect addresses will be given to DHS and individuals will be wrongly targeted,” said an IRS engineer who examined the blueprints and who, like other officials, spoke on condition of anonymity for fear of retribution.

The dispute that ended in De Mello’s ouster was the culmination of months of pressure on the IRS to turn over massive amounts of data in ways that would redefine the relationship between the agency and law enforcement and reduce taxpayers’ privacy, records and interviews show.

In one meeting in late March between senior IRS and DHS officials, a top ICE official made a suggestion: Why doesn’t Homeland Security simply provide the name and state of its targets and have the IRS return the addresses of everyone who matches that criteria?

The IRS lawyers were stunned. They feared they could face criminal liability if they handed over the addresses of individuals who were not under a criminal investigation. The conversation and news of deeper collaboration with ICE so disturbed career staff that it led to a series of departures in late March and early April across the IRS’ legal, IT and privacy offices.

They were “pushing the boundaries of the law,” one official said. “Everyone at IRS felt the same way.”

The Blueprint

The technical blueprint obtained by ProPublica shows that engineers at the agency are preparing to give DHS what it wants: a system that enables massive automated data sharing. The goal is to launch the new system before the end of July, two people familiar with the matter said.

The DHS effort to obtain IRS data comes as top immigration enforcement leaders face escalating White House pressure to deport some 3,000 people per day, according to reports.

One federal agent tasked with assisting ICE on deportations said recent operations have been hamstrung by outdated addresses. Better information could dramatically speed up arrests. “Some of the leads that they were giving us were old,” said the agent, who spoke on condition of anonymity because he was not authorized to speak with the press. “They’re like from two administrations ago.”

In early March, immigrants rights groups sued the IRS hoping to block the plan, arguing that the memorandum of understanding between DHS and the IRS is illegal. But a judge in early May ruled against them, saying the broader agreement complied with Section 6103, the existing law regulating IRS data sharing. That opened the door for engineers to begin building the system.

The judge did not address the technical blueprint, which didn’t exist at the time of the ruling. But the case is pending, which means the new system could still come under legal review.

Until now, little was known about the push and pull between the two agencies or the exact technical mechanics behind the arrangement.

The plan has been shrouded in secrecy even within the IRS, with details of its development withheld from regular communications. Several IRS engineers and lawyers have avoided working on the project out of concerns about personal legal risk.

Asked about the new system, a spokesperson for IRS parent agency the Treasury Department said the memorandum of understanding, often called an MOU, “has been litigated and determined to be a lawful application of Section 6103, which provides for information sharing by the IRS in precise circumstances associated with law enforcement requests.”

At a time when Trump is making threats to deport not only undocumented immigrants but also U.S. citizens, the scope of information-sharing with the IRS could continue to grow, according to documents reviewed by ProPublica and sources familiar with the matter: DHS has been looking for ways to expand the agreement that could allow Homeland Security officials to seek IRS data on Americans being investigated for various crimes.

Last month, an ICE attorney proposed updating the MOU to authorize new data requests on people “associated with criminal activities which may include United States citizens or lawful permanent residents,” according to a document seen by ProPublica. The status of this proposal is unclear. De Mello, at the time, rejected it and called for senior Treasury Department leadership to personally sign off on such a significant change.

The White House described DHS’ work with the IRS as a good-faith effort to identify and deport those who are living in the country illegally.

“ProPublica continues to degrade their already terrible reputation by suggesting we should turn a blind eye to criminal illegal aliens present in the United States for the sake of trying to collect tax payments from them,” White House spokesperson Abigail Jackson said in a statement after receiving questions about the blueprint from ProPublica.

She pointed to the April MOU as giving the government the authority to create the new system and added, “This isn’t a surveillance system. … It’s part of President Trump’s promise to carry out the mass deportation of criminal illegal aliens — the promise that the American people elected him on and he is committed to fulfilling.”

In a separate statement, a senior DHS official also cited the court’s approval of the MOU, saying that it “outlines a process to ensure that sensitive taxpayer information is protected while allowing law enforcement to effectively pursue criminal violations.”

How the System Works

The new system would represent a sea change, allowing law enforcement to request enormous swaths of confidential data in bulk through an automated, computerized process.

The system, according to the blueprint and interviews with IRS engineers, would work like this:

First, DHS would send the IRS a spreadsheet containing the names and previous addresses of the people it’s targeting. The request would include the date of a final removal order, a relevant criminal statute ICE is using to investigate the individual, and the tax period for which information is sought. If DHS fails to include any of this information, the system would reject the request.

The system then attempts to match the information provided by the DHS to a specific taxpayer identification number, which is the primary method by which the IRS identifies an individual in its databases.

If the system makes a match, it accesses the individual’s associated tax file and pulls the address listed during the most recent tax period. Then the system would produce a new spreadsheet enriched with taxpayer data that contains DHS’ targets’ last known addresses. The spreadsheet would include a record of names rejected for lack of required information and names for which it could not make a match.

Tax and privacy experts say they worry about how such a powerful yet crude platform could make dangerous mistakes. Because the search starts with a name instead of a taxpayer identification number, it risks returning the address of an innocent person with the same name as or a similar address to that of one of ICE’s targets. The proposed system assumes the data provided by DHS is accurate and that each targeted individual is the subject of a valid criminal investigation. In effect, the IRS has no way to independently check the bases of these requests, experts told ProPublica.

In addition, the blueprint does not limit the amount of data that can be transferred or how often DHS can request it. The system could easily be expanded to acquire all the information the IRS holds on taxpayers, said technical experts and IRS engineers who reviewed the documents. By shifting a single parameter, the program could return more information than just a target’s address, said an engineer familiar with the plan, including employer and familial relationships.

Engineers based at IRS offices in Lanham, Maryland, and Dallas are developing the blueprint.

“Gone Back on Its Word”

For decades, the American government has encouraged everyone who makes an income in the U.S. to pay taxes — regardless of immigration status — with an implicit promise that their information would be protected. Now that same data may be used to locate and deport noncitizens.

“For years, the IRS has told immigrants that it only cares that they pay their taxes,” said Nandan Joshi, an attorney with the Public Citizen Litigation Group, which is seeking to block the data-sharing agreement in federal court. “By agreeing to share taxpayer data with ICE on a mass basis, the IRS has gone back on its word.”

The push to share IRS data with DHS emerged while Elon Musk’s DOGE reshaped the engineering staff of the IRS. Sam Corcos, a Silicon Valley startup founder with no government experience, pushed out more than 50 IRS engineers and restructured the agency’s engineering priorities while he was the senior DOGE official at the agency. He later became chief information officer at Treasury. He has also led a separate IRS effort to create a master database using products from Silicon Valley giant Palantir Technologies, enabling the government to link and search large swaths of data.

Corcos didn’t respond to a request for comment. The White House said DOGE is not part of the DHS-IRS pact.

Sen. Ron Wyden, the ranking Democrat on the Senate Committee on Finance, which oversees the IRS, told ProPublica the system being built was ripe for abuse. It “would allow an outside agency unprecedented access to IRS records for reasons that have nothing to do with tax administration, opening the door to endless fishing expeditions,” he said.

The Treasury Inspector General for Tax Administration, the department’s internal watchdog, is already probing efforts by Trump and DOGE to obtain private taxpayer data and other sensitive information, ProPublica reported in April.

The Trump administration continues to add government agencies to its deportation drive.

DOGE and DHS are also working to build a national citizenship database, NPR reported last month. The database links information from the Social Security Administration and the DHS, ostensibly for the purpose of allowing state and local election officials to verify U.S. citizenship.

And in May, a senior Treasury Department official directed 250 IRS criminal investigative agents to help deportation operations, a significant shift for two agencies that historically have had separate missions.

McKenzie Funk contributed reporting, and Kirsten Berg and Alex Mierjeski contributed research.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by William Turton, Christopher Bing and Avi Asher-Schapiro.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/the-irs-is-building-a-vast-system-to-share-millions-of-taxpayers-data-with-ice/feed/ 0 544544
Just Count the Deep Slippage in Services, Frayed Safety Nets, Dwindling Public Goods, Negative Community Health Outcomes and the Fabric of a Society in Your Neighborhood Up in Flames https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/just-count-the-deep-slippage-in-services-frayed-safety-nets-dwindling-public-goods-negative-community-health-outcomes-and-the-fabric-of-a-society-in-your-neighborhood-up-in-flames/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/just-count-the-deep-slippage-in-services-frayed-safety-nets-dwindling-public-goods-negative-community-health-outcomes-and-the-fabric-of-a-society-in-your-neighborhood-up-in-flames/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 14:30:48 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159844 The Neoliberal Predatory Penury Polluting Starving Terror Capitalism is putting our lives in the proper place — D.O.A. The tools for participatory democracy and FIGHTING city/state capital Hall have been degraded to nothing more than performative no kings day and indivisible concerts. Just the Lincoln County, Oregon, where I live — Taking out our transportation […]

The post Just Count the Deep Slippage in Services, Frayed Safety Nets, Dwindling Public Goods, Negative Community Health Outcomes and the Fabric of a Society in Your Neighborhood Up in Flames first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The Neoliberal Predatory Penury Polluting Starving Terror Capitalism is putting our lives in the proper place — D.O.A.

The tools for participatory democracy and FIGHTING city/state capital Hall have been degraded to nothing more than performative no kings day and indivisible concerts.

Just the Lincoln County, Oregon, where I live — Taking out our transportation because of unpaid fucking parking tickets?

And, of course, the outrage, man, the fucking marching on the streets, the burning Trump and Company in Effigy, nah, because collectively, the society, this fucking one I am a part of, that one, has been brainwashed, and/or lobotomized, and/or colonized, and/or habituated to pain and buggering, and/or Stockholm Syndromed into prostration, and/or amnesia fed, and/or dumb-downed, and/or miseducated, and/or divided and conquered.

Giant Donald Trump Effigy Burned at UK Bonfire

We can’t even have stormwater mitigation in a coastal tourist-dependent community without shit in the water, on the fucking beaches.

And so the pigs are enlisted as enforcers against people wanting to make a fucking living by helping citizens move their stuff? This is the state of Inverted Totalitarianism in the little county of Lincoln:

And so the tourist season is upon us, and even though it is in the 60s and foggy and we have all these green temperate rainforest stands, we have no mitigation efforts to store water, to rethink those tens of thousands of tourists coming into the county and flushing toilets, showering, and all the food prepping and bussing that increases water consumption.

And, of course, the state of the State of Oregon, what great work opportunities — changing IV’s, cleaning bedpans, wiping drool off of old granny’s chin and putting compression socks on the old guy.

Oh, the local rag is almost 50 percent “if it bleeds it leads”.

Always looking to put people in jail and hit them with tens of thousands of dollars worth of fines, penalties, fees, etc.

And the radio station where I broadcast my show, Finding Fringe, well, bye-bye, it just might happen:

The bill didn’t pass. Ten percent of the transportation department will be laid off.

Mister Rogers? Our Neighborhood, man. Again, all the money for Kushners and the Genocides.

Ahh, the rangers? Cuts cuts cuts:

Back at it, as if houselessness isn’t on the rise with the Rapist-Pedophile Epstein Tapes Vice President Trump at the Helm.

Portland:

ICE in our WINE:

They don’t give a damn, Mister Rogers:

How do the kiddos make those last calls for help when those active shooters come to campus, Mister Rogers?

We are on our own, thanks to Rapist/Pedophile in Chief Vice President Trump.

There you go, solving our high energy costs and lack of water issues and lack of food and housing and shit in our water issues —

Oh, shit, us PNW, Blue States WA and OR: Manager: ODOT cuts will make Cascade highways ‘impassable for weeks and months’ in winter

Highways 230, 62 and 138 in Oregon would become impassable during winter if cuts to ODOT go forward as expected, an ODOT manager said.

Mister Rogers, how do we get our Safeway and Costco trucks through?

Mister Rogers, some of the protestors are in Portland and Eugene, Oregon. What do we do?

DHS investigated over 5,000 student protesters listed on doxxing website: Official

A trial is examining the administration’s removal of pro-Palestinian scholars.

Well, Mister Rogers, just one last word on the 51st state’s situation.

The prevalence of ALS among Israeli combat soldiers is 2.5 times higher than among those who served in non-combat roles, according to a new study by Hadassah Medical Center. Among combat troops, the highest rates of ALS were found in soldiers who completed the IDF’s parachuting course.

Israel’s mental health services can’t cope with the mass trauma of October 7. Volunteers are trying to plug the gaps.

Mister Rogers? Remembering Gaza?

Fred Rogers, best known for his television show Mr. Rogers Neighborhood, once told his young audience:

“When I was a boy and I would see scary things in the news my mother would say to me, ‘Look for the helpers. You will always find people who are helping.’”

These words of wisdom are comforting to the young and old alike—when bad things happen, it is reassuring to remember that there are good and kind people in the world. Since the start of the conflict in Gaza, LHI has learned there is another reason to look for the helpers: those who respond in times of crisis are likely to need help themselves.

Doctors, nurses, first responders, and other aid workers in Gaza are not only responding to situations that are dangerous, stressful, and frightening, but they and their families are also living in those same situations. These helpers in Gaza are at an increased risk for developing post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD). The symptoms of PTSD, which include chronic pain, dizziness, headaches, irritability, sleep problems, and difficulty concentrating, can get in the way of these helpers doing their jobs. And, unfortunately, in Gaza where borders and movement in and out are tightly controlled, Gazan first responders are the most consistent deliverers of aid and services in the region.

The post Just Count the Deep Slippage in Services, Frayed Safety Nets, Dwindling Public Goods, Negative Community Health Outcomes and the Fabric of a Society in Your Neighborhood Up in Flames first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Paul Haeder.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/just-count-the-deep-slippage-in-services-frayed-safety-nets-dwindling-public-goods-negative-community-health-outcomes-and-the-fabric-of-a-society-in-your-neighborhood-up-in-flames/feed/ 0 544505
Burying Genocide – The BBC, Gaza And The Role Of The UK https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/burying-genocide-the-bbc-gaza-and-the-role-of-the-uk/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/burying-genocide-the-bbc-gaza-and-the-role-of-the-uk/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 12:30:47 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159906 One might naively think that a national public-service broadcaster would inform the public about matters of national interest. Surely no reasonable person would deny that the public has a right to know what the government is doing in our name. But, over and above this basic requirement, a responsible public-service broadcaster should also scrutinize the government’s […]

The post Burying Genocide – The BBC, Gaza And The Role Of The UK first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
One might naively think that a national public-service broadcaster would inform the public about matters of national interest. Surely no reasonable person would deny that the public has a right to know what the government is doing in our name. But, over and above this basic requirement, a responsible public-service broadcaster should also scrutinize the government’s actions and statements, and challenge them robustly.

Instead, as Declassified UK has reported, Britain’s ‘obedient’ defence correspondents, including BBC journalists, are covering up British spy flights for Israel. The RAF has carried out more than 500 surveillance flights over Gaza since December 2023. The Ministry of Defence insists that the flights, undertaken by aircraft based at RAF Akrotiri in Cyprus, are solely to assist in providing information about Israeli hostages taken by Hamas on 7 October 2023. But the British ‘mainstream’ media, which largely serves state-corporate interests, not the public interest, have not carried out a single investigation into the extent, impact, or legal status of these flights.

Action on Armed Violence (AOAV), a London-based charity that records, investigates, and disseminates evidence of armed violence against civilians worldwide, has analysed flight-tracking data over or close to Gaza. They found that between 3 December 2023 and 27 March 2025, the RAF carried out at least 518 Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance (ISR) flights in or near Gaza’s airspace.

AOAV found that the RAF conducted 24 flights in the two weeks leading up to and including the day of Israel’s deadly attack on the Nuseirat refugee camp on 8 June 2024, which reportedly killed 274 Palestinians and injured over 700. Four Israeli hostages were rescued in the operation.

Iain Overton, the Executive Director of AOAV, noted that:

‘This is not the only instance where UK ISR flights have coincided with major Israeli military assaults. In the two weeks leading up to Israel’s attack on Rafah on 12 February 2024, which killed at least 67 Palestinians, the RAF flew 15 ISR missions over Gaza. Flights continued even during the so-called “limited ceasefire” in early 2025, with six flights recorded in February alone.’

He added:

‘With no parliamentary oversight or public scrutiny, it remains unclear how much British intelligence gathered from these flights has been shared with Israel.’

This is surely a significant question that responsible journalists should be raising, particularly the national broadcaster. But, as Declassified UK has observed, the BBC has essentially remained ‘silent’ on whether these flights are contributing to the UK’s complicity in Israel’s genocide and war crimes in Gaza.

In an article jointly published by Declassified UK and The National newspaper in Scotland, Des Freedman, Professor of Media & Communications at Goldsmiths, University of London, wrote:

‘thanks to dogged work by campaigners, independent journalists and pro-Palestine MPs, we know both that the flights are continuing to operate (as they did even throughout the ceasefire) and that spikes in the number of flights have coincided with especially deadly Israeli attacks on Gaza.

‘The lack of curiosity on the part of mainstream media is perhaps not surprising but it is deeply troubling.’

He added:

‘It’s hard to reconcile this silence with the energy with which mainstream media have investigated Russian spy planes flying over Ukraine and other military manoeuvres related to Putin’s invasion.’

On 7 July, we challenged Jonathan Beale, the BBC’s defence correspondent, via X, linking to Freedman’s article:

‘Hello @bealejonathan,

‘As @BBCNews defence correspondent, why are you covering up British spy flights for Israel?’

Beale was clearly irked and posted this reply:

‘Why are you claiming “cover-up” – without a shred of evidence of what’s supposed to have been covered up? I’m curious as to how a media lecturer at Goldsmiths seems to have knowledge of “intelligence” that no other journalist has seen?’

A few minutes later, having now been alerted to the Declassified UK article, he confronted Freedman:

‘Please tell us Des as to how we can get the classified intelligence only you seem to know about. Why teach media studies when you can clearly scoop us all?’

Freedman responded reasonably:

‘As you know Jonathan, I don’t have access to classified files but to open news databases. Is any of the story incorrect? Instead of a snippy response, surely it would be better to use your contacts to investigate a story that’s in the public interest?’

As Declassified UK said in a follow-up post on X:

‘In a bizarre admission he [Beale] suggests that open source information on military flights is “classified”, raising the question – how do BBC journalists investigate the British military?’

The answer, of course, is that BBC journalists, along with other state stenographers, have learned not to investigate too deeply if they are to retain their privileged position.

When Declassified UK challenged Richard Burgess, the BBC’s director of news content, he gave this response befitting a senior news apparatchik:

‘I don’t think we should overplay the UK’s contribution to what’s happening in Israel.’

Why did Burgess say, ‘in Israel’? Did he just erase Palestine? Is he actually unaware that Gaza is an occupied Palestinian territory?

As if that was not already a bizarre and misleading form of words, consider this. Nobody is asking the BBC to ‘overplay’ what the UK is doing; but simply to report it, rather than bury it to the point of invisibility. Whitewashing genocide as ‘what’s happening in Israel’ is wretched BBC newspeak.

Jeremy Corbyn, the former Labour Party leader, has called for a public inquiry to determine what the UK government is hiding about its role in Israel’s genocide, including RAF flights from Cyprus. In an article for the Morning Star, he wrote:

‘We have also repeatedly asked for the truth regarding the role of British military bases in Cyprus, concerning the transfer of arms and the supply of military intelligence.

‘When the Prime Minister visited RAF Akrotiri in December 2024, he was filmed telling troops: “The whole world and everyone back at home is relying on you.” He added: “Quite a bit of what goes on here can’t necessarily be talked about all of the time. We can’t necessarily tell the world what you’re doing.” What does the government have to hide?’

Corbyn continued:

‘Over the past 18 months, our questions have been met with evasion, obstruction and silence, leaving the public in the dark over the ways in which the responsibilities of government have been discharged. Transparency and accountability are cornerstones of democracy. The British public deserves to know the full scale of Britain’s complicity in crimes against humanity.’

And the British public-service broadcaster, along with the UK’s other major news outlets, should have been reporting this since October 2023. As Mark Curtis, co-director of Declassified UK, commented:

‘Britain’s national media are doing a wonderful job covering up the extent of British support for Israel during a genocide. It’s their most impressive performance since destroying the prospects of a decent government under Jeremy Corbyn in 2015-19.’

A Devastating Indictment Of BBC ‘Impartiality’

The BBC’s Richard Burgess, quoted above, was speaking in parliament at the launch of a study by the Centre for Media Monitoring (CfMM) into the BBC’s coverage of Israel and Gaza. The report examined BBC content from 7 October 2023 to 7 October 2024. A total of 3,873 BBC articles and 32,092 segments broadcast on BBC television and radio were analysed.

CfMM’s key findings were:

  • Palestinian deaths treated as less newsworthy: Despite Gaza suffering 34 times more casualties than Israel, BBC gave Israeli deaths 33 times more coverage per fatality and ran almost equal numbers of humanizing victim profiles (279 Palestinians vs 201 Israelis).
  • Systematic language bias favouring Israelis: BBC used emotive terms four times more for Israeli victims, applied ‘massacre’ 18 times more to Israeli casualties, and used ‘murder’ 220 times for Israelis versus once for Palestinians.
  • Suppression of genocide allegations: BBC presenters shut down genocide claims in over 100 documented instances whilst making zero mention of Israeli leaders’ genocidal statements, including Netanyahu’s biblical Amalek reference (see below).
  • Muffling Palestinian voices: The BBC interviewed significantly fewer Palestinians than Israelis (1,085 v 2,350) on television and radio, while BBC presenters shared the Israeli perspective 11 times more frequently than the Palestinian perspective (2,340 v 217).

These findings show that the BBC values the lives of Israelis much more than the lives of Palestinians. This is part of a bigger picture of BBC News coverage conforming to the Israeli narrative, a key feature of BBC journalism going back decades. The CfMM report is a devastating indictment of the BBC’s endlessly repeated, robotic claim of ‘impartiality’.

At the parliamentary launch of the CfMM report, Burgess was also challenged by Peter Oborne, the former chief political commentator of the Daily Telegraph. The exchange was filmed by someone at the meeting. Oborne robustly confronted Burgess with as many as six ways in which BBC News has misled its audiences. Independent journalist Jonathan Cook helpfully detailed these six points, while providing crucial context, which can be summarised as follows:

1. The BBC has never mentioned the Hannibal directive, implemented by Israel on 7 October 2023, that permitted the Israeli killing of Israeli civilians, often by Apache helicopter fire, to prevent them from being taken captive by Hamas. See our media alert about this from February 2025.

2. The BBC has never mentioned Israel’s Dahiya doctrine, which underlies Israel’s murderous ‘mowing the lawn’ Gaza strategy over the past two decades: repeated devastating assaults on the Palestinians in Gaza to weaken their resistance to the brutal and illegal Israeli occupation, and to make it easier to ethnically cleanse them.

3. The BBC has not reported the many dozens of genocidal statements from Israeli officials since 7 October. In particular, the BBC buried Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu’s biblically-inspired comparison of the Palestinians to ‘Amalek’ – a people the Jews were instructed by God to wipe from the face of the earth.

4. By contrast, as reported in the CfMM study, on more than 100 occasions when guests have tried to refer to what is happening in Gaza as genocide, BBC staff have immediately shut them down on air.

5. The BBC has largely ignored Israel’s campaign of murdering Palestinian journalists in Gaza.

6. Finally, Oborne observed that the distinguished Israeli historian Avi Shlaim, who lives in the UK and teaches at Oxford University, has never been invited to appear on the BBC.

Cook noted:

‘Unlike the Israeli spokespeople familiar to BBC audiences, who are paid to muddy the waters and deny Israel’s genocide, Shlaim is both knowledgeable about the history of Israeli colonisation of Palestine and truly independent. […] His research has led him to a series of highly critical conclusions about Israel’s historical and current treatment of the Palestinians. He calls what Israel is doing in Gaza a genocide.’

Cook added:

‘He is one of the prominent Israelis we are never allowed to hear from, because they are likely to make more credible and mainstream a narrative the BBC wishes to present as fringe, loopy and antisemitic. Again, what the BBC is doing – paid for by British taxpayers – isn’t journalism. It is propaganda for a foreign state.’

The BBC Is Being led by A ‘PR Person’

When the BBC dropped the powerful documentary, ‘Gaza: Doctors Under Attack’, it compounded its complicity in Israel’s genocide. The Corporation’s earlier withdrawal of ‘Gaza: How to Survive a Warzone’, had already epitomised how much the UK’s national broadcaster is beholden to the Israel lobby (see our media alert here).

‘Gaza: Doctors Under Attack’ details how Israel has systematically targeted hospitals, health care centres, medics themselves, and even their families. Doctors told the filmmakers of how they had been detained, beaten, and tortured by the Israelis, as confirmed by an anonymous Israeli whistleblower. The nonsensical reason given by the BBC for cancelling the film, which it had itself commissioned from Basement Films, was the risk that broadcasting it would create ‘a perception of partiality’. Reporting the truth about Israel’s crimes would be ‘partial’? Such inversion of reality has become standard for the national broadcaster.

The film was instead shown by Channel 4 on 2 July. After watching it, Gary Lineker, who had essentially been pushed out of the BBC for his honesty on Gaza and other issues, said that, ‘The BBC should hang its head in shame.’

Yanis Varoufakis, the economist and former Greek finance minister, said:

‘I can’t see how the BBC will ever recover from its headlong leap into this ethical void, all in the name of not upsetting the perpetrators of the most horrific genocide since the end of the 2nd World War.’

Ben de Pear, the documentary’s executive producer for Basement Films and a former Channel 4 News editor, accused the BBC of trying to gag him and others over its decision not to show the documentary. In a statement that he posted to LinkedIn, de Pear said the film had passed through many ‘BBC compliance hoops’ and that the BBC were now attempting to stop him talking about the film’s ‘painful journey’ to the screen:

‘I rejected and refused to sign the double gagging clause the BBC bosses tried multiple times to get me to sign. Not only could we have been sued for saying the BBC refused to air the film (palpably and provably true) but also if any other company had said it, the BBC could sue us.

‘Not only could we not tell the truth that was already stated, but neither could others. Reader, I didn’t sign it.’

At a conference in Sheffield, de Pear criticised Tim Davie, the BBC director-general, over the BBC’s decision to drop the film:

‘All the decisions about our film were not taken by journalists, they were taken by Tim Davie. He is just a PR person. Tim Davie is taking editorial decisions which, frankly, he is not capable of making.’

De Pear added:

‘The BBC’s primary purpose is TV news and current affairs, and if it’s failing on that it doesn’t matter what drama it makes or sports it covers. It is failing as an institution. And if it’s failing on that then it needs new management.’

Of course, as Media Lens has long argued and demonstrated with copious examples since our inception in 2001, the BBC isn’t ‘failing’. It is doing precisely what it was set up to do: namely, act as a mouthpiece for establishment power and as an enabler of state crimes.

The post Burying Genocide – The BBC, Gaza And The Role Of The UK first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Media Lens.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/burying-genocide-the-bbc-gaza-and-the-role-of-the-uk/feed/ 0 544453
Burying Genocide – The BBC, Gaza And The Role Of The UK https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/burying-genocide-the-bbc-gaza-and-the-role-of-the-uk-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/burying-genocide-the-bbc-gaza-and-the-role-of-the-uk-2/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 12:30:47 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159906 One might naively think that a national public-service broadcaster would inform the public about matters of national interest. Surely no reasonable person would deny that the public has a right to know what the government is doing in our name. But, over and above this basic requirement, a responsible public-service broadcaster should also scrutinize the government’s […]

The post Burying Genocide – The BBC, Gaza And The Role Of The UK first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
One might naively think that a national public-service broadcaster would inform the public about matters of national interest. Surely no reasonable person would deny that the public has a right to know what the government is doing in our name. But, over and above this basic requirement, a responsible public-service broadcaster should also scrutinize the government’s actions and statements, and challenge them robustly.

Instead, as Declassified UK has reported, Britain’s ‘obedient’ defence correspondents, including BBC journalists, are covering up British spy flights for Israel. The RAF has carried out more than 500 surveillance flights over Gaza since December 2023. The Ministry of Defence insists that the flights, undertaken by aircraft based at RAF Akrotiri in Cyprus, are solely to assist in providing information about Israeli hostages taken by Hamas on 7 October 2023. But the British ‘mainstream’ media, which largely serves state-corporate interests, not the public interest, have not carried out a single investigation into the extent, impact, or legal status of these flights.

Action on Armed Violence (AOAV), a London-based charity that records, investigates, and disseminates evidence of armed violence against civilians worldwide, has analysed flight-tracking data over or close to Gaza. They found that between 3 December 2023 and 27 March 2025, the RAF carried out at least 518 Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance (ISR) flights in or near Gaza’s airspace.

AOAV found that the RAF conducted 24 flights in the two weeks leading up to and including the day of Israel’s deadly attack on the Nuseirat refugee camp on 8 June 2024, which reportedly killed 274 Palestinians and injured over 700. Four Israeli hostages were rescued in the operation.

Iain Overton, the Executive Director of AOAV, noted that:

‘This is not the only instance where UK ISR flights have coincided with major Israeli military assaults. In the two weeks leading up to Israel’s attack on Rafah on 12 February 2024, which killed at least 67 Palestinians, the RAF flew 15 ISR missions over Gaza. Flights continued even during the so-called “limited ceasefire” in early 2025, with six flights recorded in February alone.’

He added:

‘With no parliamentary oversight or public scrutiny, it remains unclear how much British intelligence gathered from these flights has been shared with Israel.’

This is surely a significant question that responsible journalists should be raising, particularly the national broadcaster. But, as Declassified UK has observed, the BBC has essentially remained ‘silent’ on whether these flights are contributing to the UK’s complicity in Israel’s genocide and war crimes in Gaza.

In an article jointly published by Declassified UK and The National newspaper in Scotland, Des Freedman, Professor of Media & Communications at Goldsmiths, University of London, wrote:

‘thanks to dogged work by campaigners, independent journalists and pro-Palestine MPs, we know both that the flights are continuing to operate (as they did even throughout the ceasefire) and that spikes in the number of flights have coincided with especially deadly Israeli attacks on Gaza.

‘The lack of curiosity on the part of mainstream media is perhaps not surprising but it is deeply troubling.’

He added:

‘It’s hard to reconcile this silence with the energy with which mainstream media have investigated Russian spy planes flying over Ukraine and other military manoeuvres related to Putin’s invasion.’

On 7 July, we challenged Jonathan Beale, the BBC’s defence correspondent, via X, linking to Freedman’s article:

‘Hello @bealejonathan,

‘As @BBCNews defence correspondent, why are you covering up British spy flights for Israel?’

Beale was clearly irked and posted this reply:

‘Why are you claiming “cover-up” – without a shred of evidence of what’s supposed to have been covered up? I’m curious as to how a media lecturer at Goldsmiths seems to have knowledge of “intelligence” that no other journalist has seen?’

A few minutes later, having now been alerted to the Declassified UK article, he confronted Freedman:

‘Please tell us Des as to how we can get the classified intelligence only you seem to know about. Why teach media studies when you can clearly scoop us all?’

Freedman responded reasonably:

‘As you know Jonathan, I don’t have access to classified files but to open news databases. Is any of the story incorrect? Instead of a snippy response, surely it would be better to use your contacts to investigate a story that’s in the public interest?’

As Declassified UK said in a follow-up post on X:

‘In a bizarre admission he [Beale] suggests that open source information on military flights is “classified”, raising the question – how do BBC journalists investigate the British military?’

The answer, of course, is that BBC journalists, along with other state stenographers, have learned not to investigate too deeply if they are to retain their privileged position.

When Declassified UK challenged Richard Burgess, the BBC’s director of news content, he gave this response befitting a senior news apparatchik:

‘I don’t think we should overplay the UK’s contribution to what’s happening in Israel.’

Why did Burgess say, ‘in Israel’? Did he just erase Palestine? Is he actually unaware that Gaza is an occupied Palestinian territory?

As if that was not already a bizarre and misleading form of words, consider this. Nobody is asking the BBC to ‘overplay’ what the UK is doing; but simply to report it, rather than bury it to the point of invisibility. Whitewashing genocide as ‘what’s happening in Israel’ is wretched BBC newspeak.

Jeremy Corbyn, the former Labour Party leader, has called for a public inquiry to determine what the UK government is hiding about its role in Israel’s genocide, including RAF flights from Cyprus. In an article for the Morning Star, he wrote:

‘We have also repeatedly asked for the truth regarding the role of British military bases in Cyprus, concerning the transfer of arms and the supply of military intelligence.

‘When the Prime Minister visited RAF Akrotiri in December 2024, he was filmed telling troops: “The whole world and everyone back at home is relying on you.” He added: “Quite a bit of what goes on here can’t necessarily be talked about all of the time. We can’t necessarily tell the world what you’re doing.” What does the government have to hide?’

Corbyn continued:

‘Over the past 18 months, our questions have been met with evasion, obstruction and silence, leaving the public in the dark over the ways in which the responsibilities of government have been discharged. Transparency and accountability are cornerstones of democracy. The British public deserves to know the full scale of Britain’s complicity in crimes against humanity.’

And the British public-service broadcaster, along with the UK’s other major news outlets, should have been reporting this since October 2023. As Mark Curtis, co-director of Declassified UK, commented:

‘Britain’s national media are doing a wonderful job covering up the extent of British support for Israel during a genocide. It’s their most impressive performance since destroying the prospects of a decent government under Jeremy Corbyn in 2015-19.’

A Devastating Indictment Of BBC ‘Impartiality’

The BBC’s Richard Burgess, quoted above, was speaking in parliament at the launch of a study by the Centre for Media Monitoring (CfMM) into the BBC’s coverage of Israel and Gaza. The report examined BBC content from 7 October 2023 to 7 October 2024. A total of 3,873 BBC articles and 32,092 segments broadcast on BBC television and radio were analysed.

CfMM’s key findings were:

  • Palestinian deaths treated as less newsworthy: Despite Gaza suffering 34 times more casualties than Israel, BBC gave Israeli deaths 33 times more coverage per fatality and ran almost equal numbers of humanizing victim profiles (279 Palestinians vs 201 Israelis).
  • Systematic language bias favouring Israelis: BBC used emotive terms four times more for Israeli victims, applied ‘massacre’ 18 times more to Israeli casualties, and used ‘murder’ 220 times for Israelis versus once for Palestinians.
  • Suppression of genocide allegations: BBC presenters shut down genocide claims in over 100 documented instances whilst making zero mention of Israeli leaders’ genocidal statements, including Netanyahu’s biblical Amalek reference (see below).
  • Muffling Palestinian voices: The BBC interviewed significantly fewer Palestinians than Israelis (1,085 v 2,350) on television and radio, while BBC presenters shared the Israeli perspective 11 times more frequently than the Palestinian perspective (2,340 v 217).

These findings show that the BBC values the lives of Israelis much more than the lives of Palestinians. This is part of a bigger picture of BBC News coverage conforming to the Israeli narrative, a key feature of BBC journalism going back decades. The CfMM report is a devastating indictment of the BBC’s endlessly repeated, robotic claim of ‘impartiality’.

At the parliamentary launch of the CfMM report, Burgess was also challenged by Peter Oborne, the former chief political commentator of the Daily Telegraph. The exchange was filmed by someone at the meeting. Oborne robustly confronted Burgess with as many as six ways in which BBC News has misled its audiences. Independent journalist Jonathan Cook helpfully detailed these six points, while providing crucial context, which can be summarised as follows:

1. The BBC has never mentioned the Hannibal directive, implemented by Israel on 7 October 2023, that permitted the Israeli killing of Israeli civilians, often by Apache helicopter fire, to prevent them from being taken captive by Hamas. See our media alert about this from February 2025.

2. The BBC has never mentioned Israel’s Dahiya doctrine, which underlies Israel’s murderous ‘mowing the lawn’ Gaza strategy over the past two decades: repeated devastating assaults on the Palestinians in Gaza to weaken their resistance to the brutal and illegal Israeli occupation, and to make it easier to ethnically cleanse them.

3. The BBC has not reported the many dozens of genocidal statements from Israeli officials since 7 October. In particular, the BBC buried Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu’s biblically-inspired comparison of the Palestinians to ‘Amalek’ – a people the Jews were instructed by God to wipe from the face of the earth.

4. By contrast, as reported in the CfMM study, on more than 100 occasions when guests have tried to refer to what is happening in Gaza as genocide, BBC staff have immediately shut them down on air.

5. The BBC has largely ignored Israel’s campaign of murdering Palestinian journalists in Gaza.

6. Finally, Oborne observed that the distinguished Israeli historian Avi Shlaim, who lives in the UK and teaches at Oxford University, has never been invited to appear on the BBC.

Cook noted:

‘Unlike the Israeli spokespeople familiar to BBC audiences, who are paid to muddy the waters and deny Israel’s genocide, Shlaim is both knowledgeable about the history of Israeli colonisation of Palestine and truly independent. […] His research has led him to a series of highly critical conclusions about Israel’s historical and current treatment of the Palestinians. He calls what Israel is doing in Gaza a genocide.’

Cook added:

‘He is one of the prominent Israelis we are never allowed to hear from, because they are likely to make more credible and mainstream a narrative the BBC wishes to present as fringe, loopy and antisemitic. Again, what the BBC is doing – paid for by British taxpayers – isn’t journalism. It is propaganda for a foreign state.’

The BBC Is Being led by A ‘PR Person’

When the BBC dropped the powerful documentary, ‘Gaza: Doctors Under Attack’, it compounded its complicity in Israel’s genocide. The Corporation’s earlier withdrawal of ‘Gaza: How to Survive a Warzone’, had already epitomised how much the UK’s national broadcaster is beholden to the Israel lobby (see our media alert here).

‘Gaza: Doctors Under Attack’ details how Israel has systematically targeted hospitals, health care centres, medics themselves, and even their families. Doctors told the filmmakers of how they had been detained, beaten, and tortured by the Israelis, as confirmed by an anonymous Israeli whistleblower. The nonsensical reason given by the BBC for cancelling the film, which it had itself commissioned from Basement Films, was the risk that broadcasting it would create ‘a perception of partiality’. Reporting the truth about Israel’s crimes would be ‘partial’? Such inversion of reality has become standard for the national broadcaster.

The film was instead shown by Channel 4 on 2 July. After watching it, Gary Lineker, who had essentially been pushed out of the BBC for his honesty on Gaza and other issues, said that, ‘The BBC should hang its head in shame.’

Yanis Varoufakis, the economist and former Greek finance minister, said:

‘I can’t see how the BBC will ever recover from its headlong leap into this ethical void, all in the name of not upsetting the perpetrators of the most horrific genocide since the end of the 2nd World War.’

Ben de Pear, the documentary’s executive producer for Basement Films and a former Channel 4 News editor, accused the BBC of trying to gag him and others over its decision not to show the documentary. In a statement that he posted to LinkedIn, de Pear said the film had passed through many ‘BBC compliance hoops’ and that the BBC were now attempting to stop him talking about the film’s ‘painful journey’ to the screen:

‘I rejected and refused to sign the double gagging clause the BBC bosses tried multiple times to get me to sign. Not only could we have been sued for saying the BBC refused to air the film (palpably and provably true) but also if any other company had said it, the BBC could sue us.

‘Not only could we not tell the truth that was already stated, but neither could others. Reader, I didn’t sign it.’

At a conference in Sheffield, de Pear criticised Tim Davie, the BBC director-general, over the BBC’s decision to drop the film:

‘All the decisions about our film were not taken by journalists, they were taken by Tim Davie. He is just a PR person. Tim Davie is taking editorial decisions which, frankly, he is not capable of making.’

De Pear added:

‘The BBC’s primary purpose is TV news and current affairs, and if it’s failing on that it doesn’t matter what drama it makes or sports it covers. It is failing as an institution. And if it’s failing on that then it needs new management.’

Of course, as Media Lens has long argued and demonstrated with copious examples since our inception in 2001, the BBC isn’t ‘failing’. It is doing precisely what it was set up to do: namely, act as a mouthpiece for establishment power and as an enabler of state crimes.

The post Burying Genocide – The BBC, Gaza And The Role Of The UK first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Media Lens.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/burying-genocide-the-bbc-gaza-and-the-role-of-the-uk-2/feed/ 0 544454
Violence in the name of cows: The ‘animal welfare’ groups that beat up truck drivers in India https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/violence-in-the-name-of-cows-the-animal-welfare-groups-that-beat-up-truck-drivers-in-india/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/violence-in-the-name-of-cows-the-animal-welfare-groups-that-beat-up-truck-drivers-in-india/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 09:54:03 +0000 https://www.altnews.in/?p=302267 This story was originally published on Bellingcat and has been republished by Alt News as part of an editorial collaboration between the two organisations. They describe themselves as “cow protectors”...

The post Violence in the name of cows: The ‘animal welfare’ groups that beat up truck drivers in India appeared first on Alt News.

]]>
This story was originally published on Bellingcat and has been republished by Alt News as part of an editorial collaboration between the two organisations.

They describe themselves as “cow protectors” or “gau rakshaks” in Hindi. On social media, they often post about carrying out charitable work such as operating ambulances for sick or injured cows, feeding stray animals and distributing food to people.

But in the dark of the night, their work takes on a more violent edge. Multiple photos and videos show members of “cow protection” groups chasing, shooting at and beating up truck drivers they claim are “smuggling” cows for slaughter. 

Stills from videos of a car chase (left), shooting at a truck (centre) and assaulting truck drivers (right). Source: Instagram/ @shivadahiya92, @gau_raksha_dalmathura and @parveenvashisth1414/

Cows are considered sacred in Hinduism, the dominant religion in India. Many states in the country prohibit the slaughter of cows and have strict laws on the transportation, sale and purchase of cattle. These laws have become more stringent since the Hindu nationalist Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) came into power in 2014.

The vigilantes attacking truck drivers tend to be closely aligned with hardline Hindu nationalist organisations, and a majority of their victims are Muslims. And while they claim to be doing this for the sake of the cows, in some of the videos, the animals can also be seen injured from vehicles overturning during aggressive chases. 

Elaine Pearson, Asia director at Human Rights Watch, told Bellingcat that cow protection has become part of the political agenda of leaders of the BJP and, in some cases, they have backed the alleged actions of the suspects “while the police have failed to take action against them”.

Alt News and Bellingcat found videos on social media showing violent assaults by members of five self-described animal welfare groups, mainly operating in the states of Uttar Pradesh and Haryana, where incidents involving cow-related violence have frequently been reported

(Editor’s note: We are not sharing links to these videos to avoid amplifying content depicting violent attacks seemingly targeting minority groups. However, if you are a journalist or researcher interested in obtaining this dataset, please email inquiries@bellingcat.com.)

Some of the leaders of these vigilante groups, when we reached out to them, claimed that they were working closely with the local police. One even received an award for “cow and social service” from a cabinet minister, alongside police officers. Senior police officers from the districts that these groups operate in did not answer questions about alleged police support for the cow vigilantes when we could reach them. 

While these groups most likely only represent a small fraction of the “cow vigilantes” in India, who have been reported on by the media and human rights groups in the country for years, our investigation sheds more light on how they informally work together to carry out mob violence against truck drivers.

Akhil Bharatiya Gau Seva Samiti (ABGS)

In a video uploaded in February this year, several men in cars are seen chasing a truck down a highway at night. A man from one of the cars pulls out a shotgun and fires at the truck. Police sirens can be heard in the background but law enforcement does not appear to interfere. 

Still from the video of cars chasing a truck. Source: akhil_bharatiya_gauseva_samiti / Instagram

Akhil Bharatiya Gau Seva Samiti (ABGS), which uploaded the car chase video, is a trust – a non-profit organisation (NPO) formed to promote charitable activities. It was established in 2022, according to the Indian government’s non-profit database. ABGS is based in Vrindavan, Mathura district in the state of Uttar Pradesh. 

While its day job may seem to be “animal welfare”, videos of its members terrorising truck drivers at night are routine and oftentimes, promoted by the trust itself. 

ABGS’s president Bharat Gautam shared a post in November 2024 that shows a smashed-up car, with a sign for “Akhil Bhrataiya Gau Seva Samiti” on top of it, after what he described in Hindi as a “heavy encounter with cow smugglers”. 

Bharat Gautam’s Instagram post describing a car chase that damaged an ABGS car; “Akhil Bhrataiya Gau Seva Samiti” written on the car in Hindi highlighted in red. Source: Instagram/ @team_bharat_gautam

Alt News spoke to Gautam, who said that cows are “not an animal”, but a mother figure in Hinduism.

Gautam claimed that his team works closely with Vrindavan police to save cows from being slaughtered for meat. “We either pass on the information we receive [about trucks transporting cattle] to the police and they accompany us in our pursuit or we patrol areas we know are frequented by cow smugglers,” he said, adding that the police register cases against the drivers based on complaints filed by his team once the vehicle is caught. Multiple calls by Alt News to the Vrindavan police station’s general line, as well as to the direct lines of senior police officials from the district, to request for comment on ABGS’s claims went unanswered. 

“We help the administration but they can’t do everything so it’s also our duty to protect our religion, our mother,” said Gautam.

However, videos shared by his team reveal that the cows they claim to rescue are also frequently injured during their car chases. For example, a video from February last year shows a pick-up truck that had overturned apparently as a result of being pursued, causing the cattle inside to fall onto the road. The video shows three men sitting on the ground, looking gravely injured, and several people hitting them while posing for photos. Meanwhile, the cows can be seen sprawled on the side of the road, also apparently injured.

Click to view slideshow.

Gautam’s team operates in Uttar Pradesh, which is one of at least 20 out of 28 states in India that either partially or completely bans the slaughter of cows and the sale of beef. When Alt News asked Gautam about his team’s use of violence, he shifted the blame onto the truck drivers. “Cow smugglers collide with our cars … shoot at us,” he said.

ABGS’s headquarters are located in Vrindavan city’s Venkatesh Temple. When Alt News contacted the temple, they claimed to have no connection with the group. “We only rent out a space,” a temple staff member said. 

Gautam told Alt News that the temple does offer some support to his team, including manpower and financial assistance. But he maintained that most of their work was self-funded and denied receiving any government aid or donations, despite the trust having appealed for donations on social media.

His “cow protection” activities have also won him recognition from the Uttar Pradesh government. In January last year, he received an award for “cow and social service” from a cabinet minister in the state. For this, he was congratulated in the presence of the district magistrate of Mathura city, who is responsible for maintaining law and order in the district, and Mathura police. 

Bharat Gautam posing with the police with his award. Blurring by Bellingcat. Source: Facebook/ @bharat.gautam.3388

Multiple calls made to senior police officers in Mathura district went either unanswered or the officers did not comment when asked about the Mathura police’s relationship with Gautam and whether they supported cow vigilantism.

Team Sonu Hindu Palwal

While ABGS’s vigilante activities have been particularly visible on social media, our investigations found it is part of a network of local groups based in Uttar Pradesh and Haryana. In a video uploaded on June 27, Gautam says that cow vigilantes have been working under the guidance of one “Sonu Hindu Palwal” the past five years. 

In March, videos shared by ABGS and several related cow vigilante groups show cars chasing a truck, and two men being brutally beaten and kicked.

Bellingcat geolocated the incident to a location outside a police station in Beri in the state of Haryana based on the trees, lamp posts and a temple seen in one of these videos, posted by a member of “Team Sonu Hindu Palwal”.

Click to view slideshow.
Left: Screenshot from Instagram video by the account robin_singh_chattha, with Sonu shown in black; Right: Location on Google Maps in Beri, Haryana

This location matches reports of an attack that took place in Beri on March 9, where eight men  were arrested after a police officer on the scene filed a complaint. The officer’s complaint stated that the mob shouted “we will not leave you Muslims alive today” while beating up the two men from the truck. 

A man who goes only by one name, Sonu – his official name listed on court documents – was among the eight arrested. He operates a team named after himself called “Team Sonu Hindu Palwal”. Palwal is the district in Haryana state where his team primarily operates.

Sonu told Bellingcat that he is the Palwal district president of Gau Raksha Dal (GRD) – literally “cow protection” unit – an NPO established in 2012. The GRD is one of the largest cow protection networks in India, and its leader told Human Rights Watch in 2017 that the network’s volunteers have a presence in nearly every state.

When asked about the incident in Beri, Sonu said that while they were chasing the truck drivers, the truck collided with another car, and the passengers of that car beat up the truck drivers. “We were blamed”, he said – even though videos of the assault were shared by members of his own team.  

Bellingcat also showed Sonu several videos posted by cow vigilante groups including Team Bharat Gautam that either tagged Team Sonu Hindu or mentioned them in their captions. These videos showed men surrounded by members of the cow vigilante groups, who were hitting them or otherwise treating them roughly. Sonu was personally seen posing for a group photo in one of these videos, even though he wasn’t shown assaulting anyone. When shown these videos, Sonu denied that his team beat people up.

The cow vigilante leader did not directly respond to our questions about what he thought about violence committed by members of his team, but said: “Do whatever you want. Our job is to save cows and we will continue to do so.”

The day after his arrest in Beri, videos of Sonu’s supporters celebrating his release began circulating on Instagram. He and others from his team were paraded in a car with garlands around their necks and a procession followed them while dancing to “Hindutva pop”, a genre of music associated with the Hindu far-Right which carries lyrics with anti-Muslim rhetoric.

Still from a video of celebrations after the release of Sonu (centre with garlands around the neck). Blurring by Bellingcat. Source: Instagram/robin_singh_chattha

The men beaten up by Sonu and his team in March were arrested after a counter-complaint under animal cruelty and cow protection laws was filed against them.

When Alt News called the police station’s number, the police personnel who answered did not seem to know whether the two men seen being attacked in the video were still in jail. One of them said that the case has been transferred to the crime unit but was unable to provide any details of the investigating officers. 

However, bail orders for the two men who were beaten up, which Bellingcat found on the district court website of Palwal, indicated that they each spent at least two months in custody before being released on bail.

Alt News spoke to Sonu who said that his team is tipped off by “informants” whenever cows are being transported, receiving details such as the vehicle’s route and licence plate number. 

According to Sonu, the rescued cows are taken to shelters, while the people transporting them are handed over to the police. He said that the police sometimes show up after a vehicle is intercepted, but at other times the police are with the gau rakshaks during these incidents. 

Alt News’s questions to the Additional Superintendent of Police, Palwal about Sonu’s claim that the police accompanies his team in their pursuits of truck drivers went unanswered.

Bellingcat also found links between Team Sonu and a Mumbai-registered charitable trust, through a photo Sonu posted showing a large truck which he described as an “ambulance for sick or injured cows in Palwal”. There is a Google Pay number shown on the vehicle for receiving donations.

A photo of a large truck, described as an ambulance for cows, with a Google Pay number for donations (blurred by Bellingcat). Source: Facebook/ @Sonu Hindu

The signage on the ambulance says the service is “courtesy of” an organisation called “Shri Mahesh Chand Dalmia Charitable Trust”, which appears to be a misspelling of “Shri Mahesh Chandra Dalmia Charitable Trust”, a registered trust based in Mumbai. 

Sonu told Alt News that Shri Mahesh Chandra Dalmia Charitable Trust supported his team’s ambulance after local priests in Vrindavan introduced the organisation to his work. 

According to the government’s NPO database, the trust works in the sectors of “Education & Literacy, Any Other, Health & Family Welfare”. The trustee, or person who manages the trust, is listed as Satyadeo Banka. 

Banka is regularly tagged on Facebook in videos of Team Sonu’s attacks on truck drivers. His posts on the platform also frequently promote ideas in line with Hindutva, a nationalist ideology that advocates for establishing India as a Hindu nation-state. 

Satyadeo Bank’s post on a Facebook group

We attempted to contact Banka on social media but did not receive any response. Alt News contacted the trust’s president, Rahul Dalmia, on the phone and emailed him about his organisation’s relationship with Team Sonu Hindu Palwal, asking whether he was aware of the group’s violent activities and Banka being tagged in their “cow protection” videos. Dalmia declined to be quoted when asked about the trust’s work over the phone, and did not respond, as of the time of publication, to further questions over email about whether the trust supported cow vigilantes in any way

Live For Nation

In 2021, Sonu congratulated someone he referred to as “LFN’s Parveen” for joining the Haryana government’s cow protection force, in a post on Facebook. LFN is the abbreviation of “Live For Nation”, a registered NPO in Haryana’s Faridabad which aims to “save cows”. This group was also involved in a car chase last year that resulted in the death of a 20-year-old man.

On Aug. 23, 2024, Aryan Mishra, 20, was out with his friends on a drive when five cow vigilantes – all LFN members – allegedly “mistook” them to be cattle smugglers and began chasing their car before firing at them. Mishra was killed in the incident. 

One of the accused who was arrested, Anil Kaushik, reportedly told Mishra’s father that he thought the boy was Muslim and regretted killing a Brahmin, the highest ranking caste in the Hindu caste system. Kaushik identified himself as a member of Haryana government’s special cow protection task force, which Parveen is also a part of. 

In a Facebook post, Sonu (right, in yellow) congratulated Parveen Vashisth (second from left, indicated by the arrow in the original post) for becoming a member of Haryana govt’s cow protection task force. Govind Singh, the leader of Gau Seva Mission – another group linked to cow vigilantism – is also in the same picture (left). Source: Facebook/ @Sonu Hindu

His full name is Parveen Vashisth and his Facebook bio says that he is a member of the Haryana government’s “special cow protection task force”. Vashisth also names the task force while sharing videos on Instagram of cow vigilantes from Team Sonu Hindu chasing trucks. 

Alt News reached out to the “Haryana Gau Seva Aayog”, the government body responsible for overseeing the task force. Its chairman, Sharwan Garg, said that anyone can engage in cow protection work independently, provided they stay “within the limits of the law and coordinate with the authorities”.

However, Vashisth’s videos on Instagram showing Team Sonu Hindu chasing after trucks, shooting at them and assaulting drivers appear to show that these “limits” are often breached.

Gau Seva Mission

Another organisation that claims to work for cow welfare and operates in the same network uploaded a video on Jan. 9, 2025, showing vigilantes capturing a man they claimed was a “cow smuggler”. In multiple videos, the man looks gravely injured and bloody. His vehicle is also badly damaged. 

Click to view slideshow.

The organisation, “Gau Seva Mission”, is based in Vrindavan, like ABGS. Its leader, Govind Singh, is frequently tagged in videos of attacks on alleged “cow smugglers” along with Bharat Gautam, Sonu and Parveen Vashisth. 

Singh told Alt News that he is a veterinary doctor by profession and bears most of Gau Seva Mission’s expenses through his private work. 

Gau Seva Mission appears to be known to the Uttar Pradesh government. In November last year, Singh uploaded photos and videos of the chairperson of the Uttar Pradesh government’s cow service commission visiting his office. 

Singh told Alt News he used to be a member of the GRD – the NPO that Sonu is a member of – but left the organisation to start his own group, although he did not say when this was. One of Singh’s Facebook posts from three years ago gives the helpline number of GRD’s Vrindavan branch – the same number is now the helpline number of Gau Seva Mission. Its office also used to be at the same address as the office of the Vrindavan branch of GRD at least until March 2022, according to older images of the location on Singh’s Facebook account. 

Gau Vansh Sewa Dham

Another organisation that claims to be involved in animal welfare but whose leader has been involved in cow-related violence is “Gau Vansh Sewa Dham”, in Haryana’s Faridabad. It is run by Shiva Dahiya, who told Alt News that the group runs a hospital for cows.

Videos of injured cows being treated are all over the Facebook page of the organisation, and Gau Vansh Sewa Dham makes regular appeals for donations to support their rescue and relief efforts. Dahiya said that the money for his organisation’s work is raised from the community. 

Posts on Instagram that tag Dahiya show him seemingly participating in or being present at the scene of vigilante attacks targeting those transporting cattle. For example, one post from February shows him holding tire puncture spikes to stop a truck. In another, he is seen pulling an injured man, who was slumped over, up by his hair so his face was visible as a group of vigilantes – also including Sonu – posed for a picture with several captured men. 

Shiva Dahiya (extreme right) and Sonu (sitting down) posing with men that were shown being assaulted by cow vigilantes in a video posted on social media. Blurring by Bellingcat. Source: team_bharat_gautam / Instagram

However, when Alt News asked if the car chases ever got violent, Dahiya said, “We don’t want to do any wrong by our hands”. And when asked if he had ever done anything wrong, he replied, “By the grace of God, never.”

Dahiya denied there was any violence committed by “cow protectors”.

“We never beat anyone,” he told Alt News.

(Shalaka Shinde contributed research to this piece.)

(Story featured image from Canva.)

The post Violence in the name of cows: The ‘animal welfare’ groups that beat up truck drivers in India appeared first on Alt News.


This content originally appeared on Alt News and was authored by Pooja Chaudhuri.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/violence-in-the-name-of-cows-the-animal-welfare-groups-that-beat-up-truck-drivers-in-india/feed/ 0 544447
A Little-Known Microsoft Program Could Expose the Defense Department to Chinese Hackers https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/a-little-known-microsoft-program-could-expose-the-defense-department-to-chinese-hackers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/a-little-known-microsoft-program-could-expose-the-defense-department-to-chinese-hackers/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/microsoft-digital-escorts-pentagon-defense-department-china-hackers by Renee Dudley, with research by Doris Burke

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

Microsoft is using engineers in China to help maintain the Defense Department’s computer systems — with minimal supervision by U.S. personnel — leaving some of the nation’s most sensitive data vulnerable to hacking from its leading cyber adversary, a ProPublica investigation has found.

The arrangement, which was critical to Microsoft winning the federal government’s cloud computing business a decade ago, relies on U.S. citizens with security clearances to oversee the work and serve as a barrier against espionage and sabotage.

But these workers, known as “digital escorts,” often lack the technical expertise to police foreign engineers with far more advanced skills, ProPublica found. Some are former military personnel with little coding experience who are paid barely more than minimum wage for the work.

“We’re trusting that what they’re doing isn’t malicious, but we really can’t tell,” said one current escort who agreed to speak on condition of anonymity, fearing professional repercussions.

The system has been in place for nearly a decade, though its existence is being reported publicly here for the first time.

Microsoft told ProPublica that it has disclosed details about the escort model to the federal government. But former government officials said in interviews that they had never heard of digital escorts. The program appears to be so low-profile that even the Defense Department’s IT agency had difficulty finding someone familiar with it. “Literally no one seems to know anything about this, so I don’t know where to go from here,” said Deven King, spokesperson for the Defense Information Systems Agency.

National security and cybersecurity experts contacted by ProPublica were also surprised to learn that such an arrangement was in place, especially at a time when the U.S. intelligence community and leading members of Congress and the Trump administration view China’s digital prowess as a top threat to the country.

The Office of the Director of National Intelligence has called China the “most active and persistent cyber threat to U.S. Government, private-sector, and critical infrastructure networks.” One of the most prominent examples of that threat came in 2023, when Chinese hackers infiltrated the cloud-based mailboxes of senior U.S. government officials, stealing data and emails from the commerce secretary, the U.S. ambassador to China and others working on national security matters. The intruders downloaded about 60,000 emails from the State Department alone.

With President Donald Trump and his allies concerned about spying, the State Department announced plans in May to “aggressively revoke visas for Chinese students” — a pledge that the president seems to have walked back. The administration is also trying to arrange the sale of the popular social media platform TikTok, which is owned by a Chinese company that some lawmakers believe could hand over sensitive U.S. user data to Beijing and fuel misinformation with its content recommendations. But experts told ProPublica that digital escorting poses a far greater threat to national security than either of those issues and is a natural opportunity for spies.

“If I were an operative, I would look at that as an avenue for extremely valuable access. We need to be very concerned about that,” said Harry Coker, who was a senior executive at the CIA and the National Security Agency. Coker, who also was national cyber director during the Biden administration, added that he and his former intelligence community colleagues “would love to have had access like that.”

It is difficult to know whether engineers overseen by digital escorts have ever carried out a cyberattack against the U.S. government. But Coker wondered whether it “could be part of an explanation for a lot of the challenges we have faced over the years.”

Microsoft uses the escort system to handle the government’s most sensitive information that falls below “classified.” According to the government, this “high impact level” category includes “data that involves the protection of life and financial ruin.” The “loss of confidentiality, integrity, or availability” of this information “could be expected to have a severe or catastrophic adverse effect” on operations, assets and individuals, the government has said. In the Defense Department, the data is categorized as “Impact Level” 4 and 5 and includes materials that directly support military operations.

John Sherman, who was chief information officer for the Department of Defense during the Biden administration, said he was surprised and concerned to learn of ProPublica’s findings. “I probably should have known about this,” he said. He told the news organization that the situation warrants a “thorough review by DISA, Cyber Command and other stakeholders that are involved in this.”

In an emailed statement, the Defense Information Systems Agency said that cloud service providers “are required to establish and maintain controls for vetting and using qualified specialists,” but the agency did not respond to ProPublica’s questions regarding the digital escorts’ qualifications.

It’s unclear whether other cloud providers to the federal government use digital escorts as part of their tech support. Amazon Web Services and Google Cloud declined to comment on the record for this article. Oracle did not respond to requests for comment.

Microsoft declined to make executives available for interviews for this article. In response to emailed questions, the company provided a statement saying its personnel and contractors operate in a manner “consistent with US Government requirements and processes.”

Global workers “have no direct access to customer data or customer systems,” the statement said. Escorts “with the appropriate clearances and training provide direct support. These personnel are provided specific training on protecting sensitive data, preventing harm, and use of the specific commands/controls within the environment.” In addition, Microsoft said it has an internal review process known as “Lockbox” to “make sure the request is deemed safe or has any cause for concern.” A company spokesperson declined to provide specifics about how it works but said it’s built into the system and involves review by a Microsoft employee in the U.S.

Over the years, various people involved in the work, including a Microsoft cybersecurity leader, warned the company that the arrangement is inherently risky, those people told ProPublica. Despite the presence of an escort, foreign engineers are privy to granular details about the federal cloud — the kind of information hackers could exploit. Moreover, the U.S. escorts overseeing these workers are ill equipped to spot suspicious activity, two of the people said.

Even those who helped develop the escort system acknowledge the people doing the work may not be able to detect problems.

“If someone ran a script called ‘fix_servers.sh’ but it actually did something malicious then [escorts] would have no idea,” Matthew Erickson, a former Microsoft engineer who worked on the escort system, told ProPublica in an email. That said, he maintained that the “scope of systems they could disrupt” is limited.

The Defense Department requires anyone working with its most sensitive data to be a U.S. citizen, U.S. national or permanent resident. “No Foreign persons may have such access,” according to the department’s cloud security requirements. Microsoft, however, has a global workforce, so it created the digital escort system as a work-around. Here’s an example of how it works and the risk it poses:

Tech support is needed on a Microsoft cloud product.

A Microsoft engineer in China files an online “ticket” to take on the work.

A U.S.-based escort picks up the ticket.

The engineer and the escort meet on the Microsoft Teams conferencing platform.

The engineer sends computer commands to the U.S. escort, presenting an opportunity to insert malicious code.

The escort, who may not have advanced technical expertise, inputs the commands into the federal cloud system.

Illustrations for ProPublica

A Microsoft contractor called Insight Global posted an ad in January seeking an escort to bring engineers without security clearances “into the secured environment” of the federal government and to “protect confidential and secure information from spillage,” an industry term for a data leak. The pay started at $18 an hour.

While the ad said that specific technical skills were “highly preferred” and “nice to have,” the main prerequisite was possessing a valid “secret” level clearance issued by the Defense Department.

“People are getting these jobs because they are cleared, not because they’re software engineers,” said the escort who agreed to speak anonymously and who works for Insight Global.

Each month, the company’s roughly 50-person escort team fields hundreds of interactions with Microsoft’s China-based engineers and developers, inputting those workers’ commands into federal networks, the employee said.

In a statement to ProPublica, Insight Global said it “evaluates the technical capabilities of each resource throughout the interview process to ensure they possess the technical skills required” for the job, and provides training. The company noted that escorts also receive additional cyber and “insider threat awareness” training as part of the government security clearance process.

“While a security clearance may be required for the role, it is but one piece of the puzzle,” the company said.

Microsoft did not respond to questions about Insight Global.

“The Path of Least Resistance”

When modern cloud technology emerged in the 2000s, offering on-demand computing power and data storage via the internet, it ushered in fundamental changes to federal government operations.

For decades, federal departments used computer servers owned and operated by the government itself to house data and power networks. Shifting to the cloud meant moving that work to massive off-site data centers managed by tech companies.

Federal officials believed that the cloud would provide greater power, efficiency and cost savings. But the transition also meant that the government would cede some control over who maintained and accessed its information to companies like Microsoft, whose employees would take over tasks previously handled by federal IT workers.

To address the risks of this revolution, the government started the Federal Risk and Authorization Management Program, known as FedRAMP, in 2011. Under the program, companies that wanted to sell their cloud services to the government had to establish how they would ensure that personnel working with sensitive federal data would have the requisite “access authorizations” and background screenings. On top of that, the Defense Department had its own cloud guidelines, requiring that people handling sensitive data be U.S. citizens or permanent residents.

This presented an issue for Microsoft, given its reliance on a vast global workforce, with significant operations in India, China and the European Union. So the company tapped a senior program manager named Indy Crowley to put federal officials at ease. Known for his familiarity with the rules and his ability to converse in the government’s acronym-heavy lingo, colleagues dubbed him the “FedRAMP whisperer.”

In an interview, Crowley told ProPublica that he appealed directly to FedRAMP leadership, arguing that the relative risk from Microsoft’s global workforce was minimal. To make his point, he said he once grilled a FedRAMP official on the provenance of code in products supplied by other government vendors such as IBM. The official couldn’t say with certainty that only U.S. citizens had worked on the product in question, he said. The cloud, Crowley argued, should not be treated any differently.

Crowley said he also met with prospective customers across the government and told ProPublica that the Defense Department was the “one making the most demands.” Concerned about the company’s global workforce, officials there asked him who from Microsoft would be “behind the curtain” working on the cloud. Given the department’s citizenship requirements, the officials raised the possibility of Microsoft “hiring a bunch of U.S. citizens to maintain the federal cloud” directly, Crowley told ProPublica. For Microsoft, the suggestion was a nonstarter, Crowley said, because the increased labor costs of implementing it broadly would make a cloud transition prohibitively expensive for the government.

“It’s always a balance between cost and level of effort and expertise,” he told ProPublica. “So you find what’s good enough.” Hiring virtual escorts to supervise Microsoft’s foreign workforce emerged as “the path of least resistance,” Crowley said.

Microsoft did not respond to ProPublica’s questions about Crowley’s account.

When he brought the concept back to Microsoft, colleagues had mixed reactions. Tom Keane, then the corporate vice president for Microsoft’s cloud platform, Azure, embraced the idea, according to a former employee involved in the discussions, as it would allow the company to scale up. But that former employee, who was involved in cybersecurity strategy, told ProPublica they opposed the concept, viewing it as too risky from a security perspective. Both Keane and Crowley dismissed the concerns, said the former employee, who left the company before the escort concept was deployed.

“People who got in the way of scaling up did not stay,” the former employee told ProPublica.

Crowley said he did not recall the discussion. Keane did not respond to requests for comment.

On its march to becoming one of the world’s most valuable companies, Microsoft has repeatedly prioritized corporate profit over customer security, ProPublica has found. Last year, the news organization reported that the tech giant ignored one of its own engineers when he repeatedly warned that a product flaw left the U.S. government exposed; state-sponsored Russian hackers later exploited that weakness in one of the largest cyberattacks in history. Microsoft has defended its decision not to address the flaw, saying that it received “multiple reviews” and that the company weighs a variety of factors when making security decisions.

A Skills Gap From the Start

The idea of an escort wasn’t novel. The National Institute of Standards and Technology, which serves as the federal government’s standards-setting body, had established recommendations on how IT maintenance should be performed on-site, such as in a restricted government office. “Maintenance personnel that lack appropriate security clearances or are not U.S. citizens” must be escorted and supervised by “approved organizational personnel who are fully cleared, have appropriate access authorizations, and are technically qualified,” the guidelines state.

The government at the time specified the intent of the recommendation: to deny “individuals who lack appropriate security clearances ... or who are not U.S. citizens, visual and electronic access to” sensitive government information.

But escorts in the cloud wouldn’t necessarily be able to meet that goal, given the gap in technical expertise between them and the Microsoft counterparts they would be taking direction from.

That imbalance, though, was baked into the escorting model.

Erickson, the former Microsoft engineer who worked on the model, told ProPublica that escorts are “somewhat technically proficient,” but mainly are “just there to make sure the employees don’t accidentally or intentionally view” passwords, customer data or personally identifiable information. “If there are problems with the underlying” cloud services, “then only the people who work on those services at Microsoft would have the requisite knowledge to fix it,” he said.

Advanced threats from foreign adversaries weren’t on the radar for Erickson, who said he didn’t “have any reason to suspect someone more just based on their country of origin.”

“I don’t think there is any extra threat from Microsoft employees based in other countries,” he said.

(Illustration by Andrea Wise/ProPublica. Source images: Bevan Goldswain/Getty Images, kontekbrothers/Getty Images, amgun/Getty Images.)

Pradeep Nair, a former Microsoft vice president who said he helped develop the concept from the start, said that the digital escort strategy allowed the company to “go to market faster,” positioning it to win major federal cloud contracts. He said that escorts “complete role-specific training before touching any production system” and that a variety of safeguards including audit logs, the digital trail of system activity, could alert Microsoft or the government to potential problems.

“Because these controls are stringent, residual risk is minimal,” Nair said.

But legal and cybersecurity experts say such assumptions ignored the massive cyber threat from China in particular. Around the time that Microsoft was developing its escort strategy, an attack attributed to Chinese state-sponsored hackers resulted in the largest breach of U.S. government data up to that point. The theft initially targeted a government contractor and eventually compromised the personal information of more than 22 million people, most of them applicants for federal security clearances.

Chinese laws allow government officials there to collect data “as long as they’re doing something that they’ve deemed legitimate,” said Jeremy Daum, senior research fellow at the Paul Tsai China Center at Yale Law School. Microsoft’s China-based tech support for the U.S. government presents an opening for espionage, “whether it be putting someone who’s already an intelligence professional into one of those jobs, or going to the people who are in the jobs and pumping them for information,” Daum said. “It would be difficult for any Chinese citizen or company to meaningfully resist a direct request from security forces or law enforcement.”

Erickson acknowledged that having an escort doesn’t prevent foreign developers “from doing ‘bad’ things. It just allows for there to be a recording and a witness.” He said if an escort suspects malicious activity, they will end the session and file an incident report to investigate further.

How much of this information federal officials understood is unclear.

A Microsoft spokesperson said the company described the digital escort model in the documents submitted to the government as part of cloud vendor authorization processes. However, it declined to provide those records or to tell ProPublica the exact language it used in them to describe the escort arrangement, citing the potential security risk of publicly disclosing it.

In addition to a third-party auditor, Microsoft’s documentation theoretically would have been reviewed by multiple parties in the government, including FedRAMP and DISA. DISA said the materials are “not releasable to the public.” The General Services Administration, which houses FedRAMP, did not respond to requests for comment.

The “Right Eyes” for the Job?

In June 2016, Microsoft announced that it had received FedRAMP authorization to work with some of the government’s most sensitive data. Matt Goodrich, then FedRAMP director, said at the time that the accreditation was “a testament to Microsoft’s ability to meet the government’s rigorous security requirements.”

Around the same time, Microsoft put the escort concept into practice, engaging contacts from defense giant Lockheed Martin to hire cloud escorts, two people involved in the contract told ProPublica.

A project manager, who asked for anonymity to describe confidential discussions, told ProPublica that they were skeptical of the escort arrangement from the start and voiced those feelings to their Microsoft counterpart. The manager was especially concerned that the new hires would not have the “right eyes” for the job given the relatively low pay set by Microsoft, but the system went ahead anyway.

Lockheed Martin referred questions to Leidos, a company that took over Lockheed’s IT business following a merger in 2016. Leidos declined to comment.

As Microsoft captured more of the government’s business, the company turned to additional subcontractors, typically staffing companies, to hire more digital escorts.

Analyzing profiles on LinkedIn, ProPublica identified at least two such firms: Insight Global and ASM Research, whose parent company is consulting giant Accenture. While the scope of each firm’s business with Microsoft is unclear, ProPublica found more workers identifying themselves as digital escorts at Insight Global, many of them former military personnel, than at ASM. ASM and Accenture did not respond to requests for comment

Concerns About China

Some Insight Global workers recognized the same problem as the former Lockheed manager: a mismatch in skills between the U.S.-based escorts and the Microsoft engineers they are supervising. The engineers might briefly describe the job to be completed — for instance, updating a firewall, installing an update to fix a bug or reviewing logs to troubleshoot a problem. Then, with limited inspection, the escort copies and pastes the engineer’s commands into the federal cloud.

“They’re telling nontechnical people very technical directions,” the current Insight Global escort said, adding that the arrangement presents untold opportunities for hacking. As an example, they said the engineer could install an update allowing an outsider to access the network.

“Will that get caught? Absolutely,” the escort told ProPublica. “Will that get caught before damage is done? No idea.”

The escort was particularly concerned about the dozens of tickets a week filed by workers based in China. The attack targeting federal officials in 2023 — in which Chinese hackers stole 60,000 emails — underscored that fear.

The federal Cyber Safety Review Board, which investigated the attack, blamed Microsoft for security lapses that gave hackers their opening. Its published report did not mention digital escorts, either as playing a role in the attack or as a risk to be mitigated. Sherman, the former chief information officer for the Defense Department, and Coker, the former intelligence official, who both also served as members of the CSRB, told ProPublica that they did not recall the board ever discussing digital escorting, which they said they now consider a major threat. The Trump administration has since disbanded the CSRB.

In its statement, Microsoft said it expects escorts “to perform a variety of technical tasks,” which are outlined in its contracts with vendors. Insight Global said it evaluates prospective hires to ensure they have those skills and trains new employees on “all applicable security and compliance policies provided by Microsoft.”

But the Insight Global employee told ProPublica the training regimen doesn’t come close to bridging the knowledge gap. In addition, it is challenging for escorts to gain expertise on the job because the type of work they oversee varies widely. “It’s not possible to get as trained up as you need to be on the wide array of things you need to look at,” they said.

The escort said they repeatedly raised concerns about the knowledge gap to Microsoft, over several years and as recently as April, and to Insight Global’s own attorneys. They said the digital escorts’ relative inexperience — combined with Chinese laws that grant the country’s officials broad authority to collect data — left U.S. government networks overly exposed. Microsoft repeatedly thanked the escort for raising the issues while Insight Global said it would take them under advisement, the escort said. It is unclear whether Microsoft or Insight Global took any steps to address them; neither company answered questions about the escort’s account.

In its statement, Microsoft said it meets regularly with its contractors “to discuss operations and surface questions or concerns.” The company also noted that it has additional layers of “security and monitoring controls” including “automated code reviews to quickly detect and prevent the introduction of vulnerabilities.”

“Microsoft assumes anyone that has access to production systems, regardless of location or role, can pose a risk to the system, whether intentionally or unintentionally,” the company said in its statement.

Another Warning, a Growing Risk

Last year, about three months after government investigators released their report on the 2023 hack into U.S. officials’ emails, a former Insight Global contractor named Tom Schiller contacted a Defense Department hotline and wrote to several federal lawmakers to warn them about digital escorting. He had become familiar with the system while briefly working for the company as a software developer. By last July, Schiller’s complaints wound their way to the Defense Information Systems Agency Office of the Inspector General. Schiller told ProPublica that the office conducted a sworn interview with him, and separately with three others connected to Insight Global. In August, the inspector general wrote to Schiller to say it had closed the case.

“We conducted a preliminary analysis into the complaint and determined this matter is not within the avenue of redress by DISA IG and is best addressed by the appropriate DISA management,” the assistant inspector general for investigations said in the letter. “We have referred the information you provided to management.”

A spokesperson for the inspector general — whose office is supposed to operate independently in order to investigate potential waste, fraud and abuse — told ProPublica they were not authorized to speak about the issue and directed questions to DISA public affairs.

“If the public information office contacts me and wants to collaborate to formulate a response through their office, I’ll be more than happy to do that,” the spokesperson said. “But I will not be responding to any kind of media request concerning OIG business without speaking with the public information office.”

DISA public affairs did not answer questions about the matter. After a spokesperson initially said that he couldn’t find anyone who had heard of the escort concept, the agency later acknowledged in a statement to ProPublica that escorts are used “in select unclassified environments” at the Defense Department for “advanced problem diagnosis and resolution from industry subject matter experts.” Echoing Microsoft’s statement, it continued, “Experts under escort supervision have no direct, hands-on access to government systems; but rather offer guidance and recommendations to authorized administrators who perform tasks.”

It is unclear what, if any, discussions have taken place among Microsoft, Insight Global and DISA, or any other government agency, regarding digital escorts.

But David Mihelcic, DISA’s former chief technology officer, said any visibility into the Defense Department’s network poses a “huge risk.”

“Here you have one person you really don’t trust because they’re probably in the Chinese intelligence service, and the other person is not really capable,” he said.

The risk may be getting more serious by the day, as U.S.-China relations worsen amid a simmering trade war — the type of conflict that experts say could result in Chinese cyber retaliation.

In testimony to a Senate committee in May, Microsoft President Brad Smith said the company is continually “pushing Chinese out of agencies.” He did not elaborate on how they got in, and Microsoft did not respond to follow-up questions on the remark.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Renee Dudley, with research by Doris Burke.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/a-little-known-microsoft-program-could-expose-the-defense-department-to-chinese-hackers/feed/ 0 544436
Writer, publisher, and podcaster Elly Blue on following a nontraditional path https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/writer-publisher-and-podcaster-elly-blue-on-following-a-nontraditional-path/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/writer-publisher-and-podcaster-elly-blue-on-following-a-nontraditional-path/#respond Tue, 15 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-publisher-and-podcaster-elly-blue-on-following-a-nontraditional-path Between Microcosm, Working Lit, the podcast, your own writing and editing, and presumably a smidge of life outside of publishing, you do so much. Can we start by talking about how you make time for it all?

A few years ago I went down this rabbit hole of reading interviews with women about how they make time for it all. And all these highly successful women (with the exception of Marie Kondo, who refuses to be rushed)—all of them were just frantic. One of them literally said she would microwave everything for 2 minutes and 22 seconds, or 3 minutes and 33 seconds, so she could save time by not having to press multiple buttons. So anyway, I’ve dedicated myself to never living that way.

My strategy used to be what many busy people do: they just pile on more things until you have no flexibility, so your time winds up managing itself. That was me for a while: I was just saying yes to everything. And I did get a lot done! But then I would just crash and burn. I refuse to live that way any longer. My philosophy now is about focusing on priorities rather than deadlines. If something does have a hard deadline, I will try to make that, but I’m never going to be doing it, I hope, the night before in a panic. There’s no worse feeling to me than that kind of pressure. Instead I’m like, What are the most important things that I need to do? I’m going to do those first, deadlines be darned.

Do you include self-care, or some time for protecting your creative heart in there, or not so much?

I do try to do that. I succeed sometimes. I mean, I do protect my time off work very fiercely. I prioritize that over everything else because I’ve burnt out so many times. But as far as my own creative work, that can very easily fall to the bottom of the pile if I’m not careful.

It seems like everything about your life, your creative practice, and your career have been geared toward leading a nontraditional life. How did you figure out how to create those paths outside of established systems?

I’m not sure that’s something I’ve ever done intentionally. Those established systems just never seemed available to me. I was a weird kid. I dropped out of high school, and I’ve kind of continued to say no thank you to systems that don’t seem like they have a purpose or have my best interests or goals at heart. Me and my partner Joe Biel, who founded Microcosm—we’re both business and life partners—we’re on the same page about this. We look at things that we see most people doing and we’re like, Would that work for us? Sometimes really traditional things do work for us—owning a house seems kind of magical to be able to do. But other things, like getting married or having kids or owning a car… for us, what’s the point? Other people might find great joy in all these things, but we don’t.

As Microcosm has matured and does begin in some ways to look a bit traditional, how did that ethos serve you and the press?

Back in 2011, Joe and I went to New York where Joe was interviewed by Calvin Reid at Publishers Weekly. Calvin asked Joe, “Why have I never heard of you?” Which is basically what everybody said at the time. Microcosm was already selling hundreds of thousands of books a year, had a staff of eight or nine, and was kind of too big to be flying under the radar, but nobody in publishing knew who we were.

Now it seems like that was our greatest superpower because we weren’t selling books to bookstores very much. We were selling books to places where other publishers weren’t trying to sell books at all. As we’ve grown, it has become easier to go into more mainstream channels, and the challenge is doing that only intentionally, only in ways that serve us. Because every time we do too much of what we’re “supposed” to do, our business goes down, and when we start having fun again, it goes back up. Our readers recognize that, and our stores recognize that. They can see when we’re having fun and they want to be part of it. We want that, too! Books belong wherever anyone wants books.

I was reading on your blog about your experience going to a coffee conference and thinking through how you had assumed people at coffee shops would just want books about coffee, but that turns out not to be the case. Can you talk a little bit about that, and your thoughts on all the nontraditional places people buy books?

When Microcosm first started, bookstores wouldn’t give us the time of day. We love booksellers—they are the greatest, sweetest people on earth. But there is so much competition for every inch of bookstore shelf space. Every single other publisher is our competition in a bookstore. So for us, selling to bookstores was the final boss, the biggest challenge. Whereas I remember the first time Joe and I were on a trip together and had a box of books in the trunk of the car, we walked into the record store and Joe was just like “hello!” and then started laying books out on the counter. The person working there started picking them up as if hypnotized, and he ended up spending $400 or something to stock all these different titles. So that’s how we got our start, in what we now call “specialty markets”—record stores, grocery stores, apothecaries, sex toy shops, therapist’s offices, places that use our books to educate their customers and tell the story of their own values and their own brand—are still our bread and butter and the majority of our sales. We have more than 12,000 accounts that stock our books.

It’s such a unique way of coming at the book-buying marketplace. In addition to this creative approach to sales, Microcosm has an innovative structure for basically everything you do. Can you talk some about how that was all set up, and how it’s evolved?

I guess it started when we really tried to go mainstream in about 2011. We signed with Independent Publishers Group for distribution, which worked well until the person who brought us in moved to a new distributor and brought us with them. This happens all the time in publishing but it is so, so much paperwork and logistics to change distributors. We went through that two or three times, with the companies getting bought and sold and morphed, and then we decided to go on our own. One of the big things we wanted to do was stop selling to Amazon, because those were all money-losing sales. Amazon is a retailer, but they take the same discount as wholesalers, and they charge all sorts of additional fees. So we decided, let’s leave Amazon and put all that effort into independent bookstores instead. It was such a successful strategy, it blew our minds! We expected to lose business but instead our sales grew 65% that year. Then the pandemic hit, our sales quintupled over the next three years, we grew our team from 13 to 35 people, and that’s where we are now. We did all that by taking a chance on doing things in ways that fit our values rather than doing what we were “supposed” to do.

How does that Microcosm philosophy translate into the choices you make about what to publish? What’s a quintessentially Microcosm book?

We publish mostly nonfiction on a range of topics. The core of it all is self-empowerment, giving the reader tools to live the life they want, to change their life in the way they want, to change their community for the better, to change the world for the better, or to think about the world differently. And we also publish queer smut and feminist bicycle science fiction.

Which goes back to your own roots as a writer, right?

Yes! Before I was with Microcosm, I published a feminist bike zine called Taking the Lane. One of the issues was all feminist bicycle sci-fi, which was so much fun to do that I spun it off into its own series. This fall we’re going to do volume 13, which has a queer Halloween theme and is called What Rides at Night. Look for it on Kickstarter soon!

Speaking of Kickstarter—thank you for the perfect segue. You’re currently running Microcosm’s 100th campaign, a zine celebrating 30 years of Microcosm called The Underground Is Bigger than the Mainstream. You all have been on Kickstarter for 15 years—longer than any current employee. What brought you to the platform all those years ago, and what keeps you here?

Fifteen years ago, Joe and I were living in a camping trailer in a friend’s backyard. A buddy emailed me and said, “Did you hear about this new app where the world funds your project?” And I was like, “I’ve got to try that!” I had just written this big blog post about the sexism I’d encountered in the bicycle world, which got more engagement than anything else I’d ever written. So I decided to expand that post into a zine and put it up on Kickstarter and see what happened. I think I asked for $350 and raised $500, which was so exciting! It seemed like an impossibly high amount of money for me at the time—it was enough for me to pay the anarchist printshop to produce it and buy enough postage to mail it out. Microcosm’s first project was for a book called Scam, and it raised about $5k. That was probably what made the difference between Microcosm continuing to exist and not that month. Very different times! It felt so exciting, those early days on Kickstarter.

What has kept you on the platform all this time? What has Kickstarter meant for you and for Microcosm?

Well the beautiful thing for me is that now we have other brilliant people who run our campaigns so I don’t have to. Abby Rice, our Marketing Manager, does such a good job, and I do not allow myself to ever look at the page unless the project is in trouble or something, because I would spend my whole day just doing that. The feeling of seeing a new person back a project—like, this whole person with their own whole life that is totally unbeknownst to me came and found my project and chose to believe in it—it never gets old, it’s this unbelievable magic. And the folks we’ve worked with at Kickstarter over the years have been incredible supportive collaborators, and some of them have become friends. It feels like Kickstarter wants us to succeed, which is not how we feel with a lot of platforms that we do business with. And you’re also willing to hold us accountable to do better, and we feel the same way about you. It feels a little weird to say this about a business, but we do business with a lot of companies and our relationship with Kickstarter has always been really unique and special.

Your hundredth campaign seems in so many ways to be a celebration of everything that makes Microcosm so special. Tell me how that all came together.

This was all Abby’s idea. They demanded that me and Joe come up with something special for this, so we said sure, we’ll go back to our roots and write a zine. The title, “The Underground Is Bigger than the Mainstream,” is a quote of Joe’s from that 2011 PW interview that people have always quoted back to us over the years, and the whole thing really summarizes what we’re all about. Microcosm was never designed to become a mainstream company. It was started to build something parallel to the mainstream that worked for the people who didn’t fit into the mainstream, like us. The zine is going to be crammed full of a whole bunch of wild, rambunctious content that may or may not totally fit together, but we want to give people a flavor of what it’s like to do this work.

And what is it like to do this work? What are the rewards for you, for your life?

Getting to do this all the time is just really fun. I love working with a ton of different authors, I love reading all the things that we get to put out, I love our customers. The best thing about the job, honestly, is there’s something new to learn every day. It’s never, ever boring.

As a publisher, a lot of your work is in service of other people’s creativity. How do you balance that with your own creative life?

As the company has grown, my job has gotten a lot less creative. When I first started, I might spend an entire day editing a book or spend a whole afternoon looking out the window and thinking up marketing slogans, and now I hardly get to do any of that. At the end of last summer, Joe and I wrote a zine as a gift for a friend who was in the hospital, which was so much fun to do together. So we decided to do one of those every month for a year. It’s been less than six months, and I think we’ve already written fifteen! So clearly there was a creative wellspring that was ready to burst forth.

If you had nothing but time, what would you want to write or do or create or think about next?

My gosh, that’s such a fun question. There’s so many different versions of myself that I’ve imagined over the years and it can be hard to let go of them—even though I now know that I would definitely not be happy as a publicist for NASA. But if money were no object and I could choose to spend my time doing whatever I wanted, I think it would involve a lot of writing. Like maybe I’d write young adult fantasy, or marketing copy for activist movements, or more zines where I could taste all different parts of the world and write about them.

Elly Blue Recommends:

Bike Summer is a three-month long community-sourced bicycle happening every year in Portland that’s been going on for more than 20 years. It’s an all-volunteer-led crowdsourced platform where anyone can post a themed ride. All summer you’ll see groups of people riding around in costumes blasting music, or bent on eating tacos all over town, or riding 500 times around one neighborhood traffic circle.

Speaking of rad stuff happening on bikes in Portland, Street Books is a bike-based library serving (and largely run by) people who live outside and on the margins. They’re real ones.

Binc Foundation provides a financial safety net to bookstores and booksellers. Bookselling is a scrappy, low-paid passion job; most folks who choose this life don’t have a rich aunt to bail them out in a jam. Binc will pay your electric bill while you’re in the hospital and never judge you for who you are.

Futel is a motley bunch of former phreakers who grew up and got IT jobs and now provide free public telephones (and operator service) around Portland and in a few other spots. We publish their zine, “Party Line,” which is absolutely worth reading. There may or may not be a connection with original freak bike gang C.H.U.N.K. 666.

The all-ages music scene in Minot, ND. Since at least the 1980s, Minot’s been a welcoming oasis for touring punk bands and it’s a truly kind, special scene. So many punk kids who grow up in Minot stay there and make it better for the next generation. (We have a zine about this too.)


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Oriana Leckert.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/15/writer-publisher-and-podcaster-elly-blue-on-following-a-nontraditional-path/feed/ 0 544423
Smash the Oligarchy. Smash the Patriarchy. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/smash-the-oligarchy-smash-the-patriarchy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/smash-the-oligarchy-smash-the-patriarchy/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 22:47:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=9448f89d5f8e625640b70b7d7c93900c On July 14, 1789, ordinary French citizens stormed the Bastille, shattering the myth of royal divine right. Three months later, thousands of women marched on Versailles, demanding bread, justice, and dignity, driving the revolution forward with courage and resolve. As Ursula K. Le Guin reminds us, “We live in capitalism. Its power seems inescapable. So did the divine right of kings. Any human power can be resisted and changed by human beings.”

Gaslit Nation Presents: Smash the Oligarchy. Smash the Patriarchy. Our summer series features women on the frontlines of the far-right assault on our democracy, our bodies, and our minds. Hear from:

  • Amber Wallin – Economic justice advocate explaining why taxing the rich benefits all.

  • Jamila Raqib – Leader in nonviolent resistance, training movements worldwide against authoritarianism.

  • Erin Reed – Journalist tracking anti-trans legislation and arming communities to fight back.

  • Kate Manne – Philosopher exposing misogyny’s corrupting power in culture and politics.

  • Mona Eltahawy – Queer Arab feminist, author, and survivor confronting patriarchy and tyranny globally.

  • Marci Shore – Historian illuminating resistance and revolution lessons from Eastern Europe.

  • Erica Smiley – Labor organizer championing collective power and workplace democracy for economic justice.

Our summer bonus shows prove rest is resistance. Join our fearless guests on Gaslit Nation’s Self-Care Q&A for inspiring ways to recharge. 

We win by being the sand in their gears, and we will win! Our special summer series shows you how. Tune in all summer long at Gaslit Nation. For the hottest of hot takes, see you at the Monday salons, only on Patreon. 

Want an exclusive look at the film the Kremlin fears? Fact Checker Patreon members and higher get a two-hour, behind-the-scenes audio guide to Mr. Jones. 

Subscribe at Guardian of the Fourth Estate or higher for a signed copy of this summer’s must-read, Dictatorship: It’s Easier Than You Think! Limited signed copies available. 

Join Gaslit Nation on Patreon at various levels for ad-free shows, bonus episodes, Monday salons, chat groups, and more. Annual subscriptions are discounted, and memberships make great gifts.

Thanks to all who support our independent journalism. We could not make Gaslit Nation without you! 


This content originally appeared on Gaslit Nation and was authored by Andrea Chalupa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/smash-the-oligarchy-smash-the-patriarchy/feed/ 0 544388
Evo Morales to The Grayzone: "We are fighting the second coup d’etat" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/evo-morales-to-the-grayzone-we-are-fighting-the-second-coup-detat/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/evo-morales-to-the-grayzone-we-are-fighting-the-second-coup-detat/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 20:17:11 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=1d24509d3f4efe09e20e705fb347b96e
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/evo-morales-to-the-grayzone-we-are-fighting-the-second-coup-detat/feed/ 0 544369
Michael Ansara’s Legacy of Hope https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/michael-ansaras-legacy-of-hope/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/michael-ansaras-legacy-of-hope/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 20:02:43 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/michael-ansaras-legacy-of-hope-bader-20250714/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Eleanor J. Bader.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/michael-ansaras-legacy-of-hope/feed/ 0 544352
The Human Cost of Solitary Confinement https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/the-human-cost-of-solitary-confinement/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/the-human-cost-of-solitary-confinement/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 19:50:07 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/the-human-cost-of-solitary-confinement-chorzempa-20250714/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Meg Chorzempa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/the-human-cost-of-solitary-confinement/feed/ 0 544354
Ed Miliband MP | State of the Climate Report | House of Commons | 14 July 2025 | Just Stop Oil https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/ed-miliband-mp-state-of-the-climate-report-house-of-commons-14-july-2025-just-stop-oil/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/ed-miliband-mp-state-of-the-climate-report-house-of-commons-14-july-2025-just-stop-oil/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 18:22:13 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=ee70679233fbd8075c02474b62f15063
This content originally appeared on Just Stop Oil and was authored by Just Stop Oil.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/ed-miliband-mp-state-of-the-climate-report-house-of-commons-14-july-2025-just-stop-oil/feed/ 0 544674
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 14, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-14-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-14-2025/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=c5f7cf44c3ce935c44fb455d0dae0036 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 14, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-14-2025/feed/ 0 544393
What keeps activist Laura Hernandez fighting for the rights of immigrants in the US? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/what-keeps-activist-laura-hernandez-fighting-for-the-rights-of-immigrants-in-the-us/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/what-keeps-activist-laura-hernandez-fighting-for-the-rights-of-immigrants-in-the-us/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 16:00:21 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=09e942705a998290aa3362c38ecdecad
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/what-keeps-activist-laura-hernandez-fighting-for-the-rights-of-immigrants-in-the-us/feed/ 0 544305
Israel’s Demographic Project in Gaza An Assault on the Palestinian Future https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/israels-demographic-project-in-gaza-an-assault-on-the-palestinian-future/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/israels-demographic-project-in-gaza-an-assault-on-the-palestinian-future/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 15:06:54 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159901 Twenty years ago, Israel unilaterally disengaged from Gaza after the post-1967 years of occupation and settlement. An overriding factor governing the decision to withdraw was the issue of demography. With a population of over two million Palestinians, Gaza has always represented a significant part of a broad demographic problem facing the self-declared ‘only democracy in […]

The post Israel’s Demographic Project in Gaza An Assault on the Palestinian Future first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Twenty years ago, Israel unilaterally disengaged from Gaza after the post-1967 years of occupation and settlement. An overriding factor governing the decision to withdraw was the issue of demography. With a population of over two million Palestinians, Gaza has always represented a significant part of a broad demographic problem facing the self-declared ‘only democracy in the Middle East.’ Within Israel and the occupied territories (the area that has been under direct or indirect Israeli control for 58 years) there are over 14 million people. Approximately half are Israeli Jews, the other half, Palestinians. This underreported reality stands sharply at odds with the notion of a Jewish and democratic state, especially one which aspires to the land borders of a Greater Israel.

Twenty-one months after Israel re-entered, Gaza stands in ruins — obliterated, to use the current Trumpian term. The State of Israel has unleashed terror upon the Strip on an unprecedented scale. The different elements of the collective punishment of Gaza have become familiar but still make for shocking reading: the indiscriminate bombing; the sniper and drone attacks; the withholding of aid; the domicide; the ongoing forced displacement; the restriction of access to water, food, healthcare; the targeting of civilians and razing of infrastructure.

That these things add up to genocide is hardly a matter for debate anymore. Instead, we need to ask where all this is headed. We can’t simply accept the hasbara narrative that Israel only wants the return of the hostages and the destruction of Hamas. The current state of the Strip cannot support this. There is no access to Gaza, but we can look at satellite photographs. We can look at the footage provided by Palestinians. We can also listen to Israelis in public, political and media spaces. More is going on here. This is a war that is going way beyond the oft-repeated objectives.

It seems perverse on the part of many Western commentators not to link the devastation of Gaza to current public discourse in Israel and to Zionist concerns about demography and Palestinian fertility. There are two aspects of this genocidal tragedy that suggest a renewed drive on Israel’s part to tackle a perceived ‘demographic timebomb.’ Firstly, Israel is manifestly engaged with the idea of the ethnic cleansing of the population and secondly, it is waging a war on the Palestinian future through the daily targeting of women and children.

The forced transfer of the Gazan population is now openly discussed, an entirely possible endgame legitimized by Trump’s plan. A new infrastructure of resettlement (with a nomenclature betraying a nostalgia for Gush Katif) is being prepared by the IDF’s D9 Caterpillar bulldozers. Palestinians have been uprooted and are continually being displaced within the Strip. The GHF aid ‘system’ is exacerbating this. Their homes have been destroyed and the areas that Palestinians can move in are now extremely limited, the conditions intolerable. It is in this context that we are presented with the current idea of a ‘humanitarian city.’ As Trump himself has put it, Gaza is a ‘hellhole.’ It might seem to some that the world will not stand by and let the ethnic cleansing of Gaza happen but, of course, it’s already happening. The uncomfortable optics of forced transfer won’t be an issue when conditions have become so bad that people beg to leave and their ejection from their own land can be spun as an act of mercy.

Bad enough, you may think. But what should be equally as outrageous to the outside world is Israel’s sustained assault on Palestinian children and women. At the point of writing, a figure of over 57,000 fatalities in Gaza includes 17,000 children and 9,000 women.

South Africa’s ongoing case at the ICJ includes the accusation that Israel, in contravention of the Genocide Convention, is imposing measures intended to prevent births within the Gazan population. A recent U.N. report by the Commission of Inquiry on the Occupied Palestinian Territory criticizes Israel for deliberately targeting health facilities in Gaza, destroying ‘in part the reproductive capacity of the Palestinians in Gaza as a group.’ The WHO has warned of a health system at breaking point. Cesarean sections are being performed without anesthetic in those few hospitals still operating and newborn children are dying due to a scarcity of incubators and medical staff. The weaponization of aid means that, according to UNICEF, 17,000 pregnant and breastfeeding women currently require treatment for acute malnutrition in Gaza. Doctors have described a critical shortage of baby formula as being a direct result of Israeli aid restrictions.

This onslaught on children and mothers is a key component of this genocide which can be linked to a long-held Zionist obsession with Palestinian birthrates. Mandate Palestine was not, of course, a land without a people, as pioneers of the state such as Israel’s first Prime Minister, Ben Gurion, knew. The country has always worried about the need to manufacture and maintain a Jewish majority. A chief architect of the 2005 withdrawal from Gaza, Arnon ‘the Arab Counter’ Soffer, long warned of the danger for the Jewish state of the Palestinian womb, Arafat’s ‘biological weapon.’

Evidence of the intent to target women and children can be seen in statements by Israeli public figures, collated in South Africa’s petition to the ICJ and freely available elsewhere. These senior figures include not just the usual suspects like Ben Gvir and Smotrich but also the President of Israel, Isaac Herzog who responded to Oct 7 with the declaration that there are no uninvolved civilians in Gaza, ‘an entire nation’ is responsible.’ This normalization of genocidal discourse, particularly in relation to women and children, is enabled by a national political consensus and an indifferent Israeli public. It seems that there is not one righteous man in Gaza, or indeed, woman or child. ‘The children… have brought this upon themselves’, as one opposition member of the Knesset put it.

Barring international intervention, it seems certain that at the end of this latest phase in Gaza there will be fewer Palestinians. The demographic facts will have changed; they have already changed. The numbers are appalling enough, with 57,000 fatalities likely being an underestimate. But there are also names. For those who care to seek them out.

Indiscriminate blanket bombing has killed thousands of civilians and rendered Gaza unlivable. This is a war of homicidal excess, not one that is being waged to recover hostages and eliminate a terrorist organization. It is difficult not to conclude that it is part of a longer-term project to change the ethnic balance between the river and the sea.

Such are the ongoing demands of Zionism and its insatiable hunger for land, that it is not enough to erase the Palestinian past and present. Ethnic cleansing can only be part of a wider strategy. The demographic threat of tomorrow must also be addressed.

The facts are available, as is the evidence of intention. If the hostage situation is resolved, if Hamas is somehow ‘defeated’, who seriously believes that the expansionist, frontier state of Israel will leave Gaza alone? Or the West Bank? If Zionism is to avoid a death spiral, the demographic timebomb must be defused. The project demands land, and it demands a Jewish majority on that land.

The post Israel’s Demographic Project in Gaza An Assault on the Palestinian Future first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Anthony Fulton.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/israels-demographic-project-in-gaza-an-assault-on-the-palestinian-future/feed/ 0 544292
Challenging the Media Myth of Latino Machismo https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/challenging-the-media-myth-of-latino-machismo/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/challenging-the-media-myth-of-latino-machismo/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 15:00:40 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159882 Patriarchy is alive and well throughout the world. But the English-language media flatters itself by one-sidedly portraying machismo as a particularly Latin American malady, all the while overlooking significant feminist gains made in the region. Take, for instance, the entry under “machismo” in the latest edition of Britannica which asserts: “It has for centuries been […]

The post Challenging the Media Myth of Latino Machismo first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Patriarchy is alive and well throughout the world. But the English-language media flatters itself by one-sidedly portraying machismo as a particularly Latin American malady, all the while overlooking significant feminist gains made in the region.

Take, for instance, the entry under “machismo” in the latest edition of Britannica which asserts: “It has for centuries been a strong current in Latin American politics and society.” But the encyclopedia makes no such recognition for its own Anglo society.

An article in the AP on sexual bias in Mexico blames “Mexico’s ‘machismo’ culture and strong Catholic roots,” calling out patriarchy as a defining and harmful feature for the whole of Latin American culture.

Citing the attacks on feminism by the ultra-right president of Argentina, Javier Milei, The Guardian generalizes, how misogyny is “a very serious problem for Latin America.” The article continues: “Of course, Latin women continue to learn from those in the west,” implying that benighted Latinas should take tips from their more enlightened western sisters. The article concludes: “Women in Latin America need women in the west to work with us to put an end to this violent oppression.”

In a worldwide report on last International Women’s Day, Al Jazeera first highlighted Latin America with the examples of Argentina, Ecuador, and Bolivia as places plagued by gendered violence and only then added: “In many European countries, women also protested against violence.”

Verywell Mind, a US-based health website, targets “Latino culture” as patriarchal. They report on “generations of women who live or grew up in Latin American and immigrated to the United States truly believing that their happiness depends on a man.”

The Washington Post, describing Mexico as a “bastion of machismo,” marveled how it got their first woman president before the US.

Mexico

Feminists celebrated Claudia Sheinbaum’s electoral victory in June 2024, making her the first female to accede to the presidency in Mexico. However, had she lost to the nearest runner-up, Xóchitl Gálvez, Mexico would still have had its first woman as chief of state. Gender was simply not an issue in the contest, with both main challengers female.

Digging deeper into the stereotype of Latin American machismo, we see that Mexico having women as the top two contenders for the presidency is notable but not anomalous. In fact, women have held presidencies in several Latin American countries over the past half century.

Most Latin American countries have been influenced by the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women. This international treaty was adopted in 1979 by the UN General Assembly and unanimously ratified or adhered to by all of the Americas with the notable exception of the US, which signed but did not ratify it.

That international treaty had been catalyzed by Mexico, which held the World Conference on Women back in 1975. Marking a significant moment in the global movement for gender equality, this UN meeting was the first to focus exclusively on women’s rights and equality. It produced the World Plan of Action for legal and institutional reforms to combat discrimination against women.

Some revealing comparative statistics reflect differences in the social realities in the US and in Mexico. For example, as of 2025, Mexico achieved gender parity in both chambers of its national legislature. In comparison, women hold only 29% of the House seats and 26% of the Senate in the US.

Since 2014, Mexico has constitutionally mandated gender parity in candidacies for federal and local legislative elections. Going back further to the Mexican Revolution, there were literally thousands of soldaderas, female combatants. And even further back, women held leadership roles among the Zapotecs, Mixtecs, and Maya.

Fast forward to June 1, Mexico popularly elected five women and four men to their 9-person supreme court, consistent with the 2019 constitutional reform known as paridad en todo (parity in everything).

Electoral gender parity

Mexico is not alone in promoting electoral gender parity. A number of other countries in Latin America has established “gender quotas” in electoral lists. The gender quota is 50% in Bolivia, Costa Rica, Ecuador, Mexico, Nicaragua, Peru, Panama, and Venezuela. Honduras, El Salvador, Haiti, and Paraguay have lesser quotas. However, lax enforcement and loopholes to circumvent them continue.

Cuba does not have mandatory statutory gender electoral quotas. Rather, the socialist country has a strong commitment to equity, where its Communist Party promotes women, youth, and racial minorities. Fully 56% of its national assembly is composed of women.

A recently published chart (below) from Latinometrics shows that Cuba, Nicaragua and Mexico are indeed the leaders in female parliamentary representation, not only regionally but globally.

Contrary to what the English-language media’s hype about machismo would have you believe, Latin America has made great strides in gender equality in recent years and now leads the world in female political representation.

Nicaragua

“Women are not fighting for space anymore,” declares Nicaraguan National Assembly Deputy Flor Avellán. “Now we have that space and we are empowered every day.”

Nicaragua may be one of the region’s smallest nations and came just 19th out of 23 Latin American countries in a recent “prosperity” ranking, but it is one of the leaders in establishing the role of women in public life. Just last year it was judged by the World Economic Forum (WEF) to be sixth in its global index for closing the gender gap. This was the highest in the region (WEF does not include Cuba) and was higher than many “developed” countries such as the US and UK.

Since that index was compiled, Nicaragua has taken a further step in creating a unique male/female co-presidency. Nevertheless, and with little explanation, the 2025 gender gap index dropped Nicaragua from sixth to 18th, putting it third in the region, behind Barbados and Costa Rica. This may be because metrics used by bodies such as the WEF are rooted in first-world metric inapplicable to Nicaragua. For example, firms with female majority ownership and female top managers are metrics, but there is no metric for women running their own businesses, let alone micro-businesses, which is Nicaragua’s strength.

Nicaragua is ranked first in parliament and in political institutions by the WEF, achieving parity between male and female representatives. The 2012 law requiring this was initially met with hostility from some men. But now it has become accepted as successful: “having so many women in leading positions has changed the culture,” according to Nicaraguan feminist Abigail Espinoza (pers.com). Nicaragua’s unique approach mandates 50% female leadership at all levels – from city council to municipal leaders to parliament and right up to the presidency.

Empowering women is seen not only in terms of political participation, but as a multidimensional process to achieve societal change, and in particular to improve women’s daily circumstances. There are many instances of this.

For example, over 23,400 small businesses have been formalized in 15 years, the majority owned by women; over 500 new women’s cooperatives have been formed. The “Zero Hunger” program has significantly improved women’s earnings. The program provides livestock, seeds, fertilizers, and building materials to women in rural areas, benefitting one in every six families in the country. Contributing to the nation’s food sovereignty, Nicaragua now produces 90% of the food it consumes.

In the field of health, maternal deaths have fallen by almost 80%, while infant mortality dropped by 58% between 2006 and 2024. Credit is due to the government’s massive extension of health services; specifically the establishment of 201 casas maternas, where women can go in the weeks immediately prior to giving birth.

Until recently, Nicaragua had the highest teen pregnancy rate in the region. Now most Nicaraguan women are having their first child at age 27, and Nicaragua ranks number one in the world for educational attainment for women and girls. Those young women who do get pregnant now have many options for continuing their education while also raising their child.

Violence against women remains a problem, but Nicaragua has reduced its incidence to the lowest in Central America, having established more than 400 women’s police commissions where only female police officers (40% of the national force) attend women and children exclusively. They even make home visits to identify and help resolve domestic abuse. Nicaragua has passed laws against femicide and violence against women, allowing for stricter sentencing and swifter justice.

The feminist movement in Nicaragua, mobilized mainly through the Sandinista National Liberation Front, is a class-based feminism that fights not only against patriarchy but also for an anti-imperialist and socialist class consciousness.

Nicaragua’s “National Plan to Combat Poverty and Promote Human Development 2022-2026” is fundamental to this goal. Its detailed programs, backed by nearly 60% of the national budget, aim to establish women’s rights by guaranteeing access to free, quality education at all levels and in all modalities, access to health care, access to the means and forms of production, and food security. Reduction of poverty and inequality is therefore seen as absolutely key to women’s empowerment.

The geopolitics of machismo

 To characterize Latino machismo as mythic is in no way intended to suggest that it does not have a basis in reality; it does. Despite achievements, Latin America still has a long way to go to end patriarchy.

For instance, femicide, the intentional killing of women or girls because of their gender, has been identified as a particular abomination in Guatemala, El Salvador, and Honduras, where “incredibly high rates” prevail. It is no coincidence that this gendered form of viciousness is found in societies that suffered from the US-backed dirty wars in the 1980s and onward, which left a culture of impunity. Guatemala and El Salvador were targets of counter insurgencies and Honduras was a base of operations. Conversely, revolutionary Cuba, followed by Chile and Nicaragua, has the lowest rate of femicide.

Progressive administrations in Mexico, Honduras, Cuba, Venezuela, and Nicaragua have launched campaigns against machismo. Reactionary administrations, such as El Salvador and Argentina – both fully backed by the US – are dismantling feminist advances.

Regionally, feminist gains are being advanced under progressive administrations pursuing greater independence from the US. In contrast, reactionary, Washington-aligned regimes are actively rolling back those gains. As a result, the struggle against machismo in Latin America cannot be separated from the broader struggle against imperialism.

This dynamic helps explain why feminist advances in countries like Cuba, Mexico, and Nicaragua are often ignored by corporate media – or when acknowledged, are reduced to the actions of individual leaders like President Sheinbaum. What is overlooked is the broader social transformation taking place – one that challenges patriarchal norms and offers a model from which others might learn. Once again, it is the “threat of a good example”– this time led by women.

The post Challenging the Media Myth of Latino Machismo first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Roger D. Harris, Becca Renk, and John Perry.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/challenging-the-media-myth-of-latino-machismo/feed/ 0 544294
Russophobia by the Collective West Opens the Doors of the Cold War 2.0 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/russophobia-by-the-collective-west-opens-the-doors-of-the-cold-war-2-0/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/russophobia-by-the-collective-west-opens-the-doors-of-the-cold-war-2-0/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 14:55:54 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159850 The 2018 Skripal Attack Case The current orchestrated Western policy of total Russophobia, directed by Collective West, can be recorded to start by the British Cabinet of Theresa May – the focal servant-dog to US global imperialism, followed by the creation of the War Cabinet of the US President Donald Trump (first administration), was a […]

The post Russophobia by the Collective West Opens the Doors of the Cold War 2.0 first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The 2018 Skripal Attack Case

The current orchestrated Western policy of total Russophobia, directed by Collective West, can be recorded to start by the British Cabinet of Theresa May – the focal servant-dog to US global imperialism, followed by the creation of the War Cabinet of the US President Donald Trump (first administration), was a nothing else than a jumping to the new stage of the post-WWII Cold War (2.0) which was originally started (1.0) by the US and never was over as its main task of total economic, political, and financial subordination or/and occupation of Russia still is not realized. The Russian, at that time just diplomatic, an exodus from the Western jaw was a “punishment for Russia’s alleged nerve gas poisoning of a former Russian/MI6 double-agent, Sergei Skripal (66) and his daughter Yulia (33), who was visiting her father from Moscow”i (March, 2018).

However, it was quite obvious that “blaming Russia for Skripal attack is similar to ‘Jews poisoning our wells’ in the Middle Ages”.ii In other words, the 2018 Skripal Attack Case was just another Western “false flag” in international relations with a very precise geopolitical purpose – to continue the Cold War 1.0 against revived post-Yeltsin’s Russia. We have to remember that originally American administration started the Cold War 1.0 as it was “the Truman administration (1945−1953) used the myth of Soviet expansionism to mask the nature of American foreign policy, which included the creation of a global system to advance the interests of American capitalism”.iii However, the current Western virus of total Russophobia (the Cold War 2.0) is a natural continuation of historical Western anti-Russian policy, which looked like to be over with the peaceful dismemberment of the USSR in 1989−1991.

S. P. Huntington’s Warnings and International Relations (IR)

Samuel P. Huntington was quite clear and correct in his opinion that the foundation of every civilization is based on religion (i.e., on metaphysical irrational beliefs).iv S. P. Huntington’s warnings about the future development of global politics that can take the form of a direct clash of different cultures (in fact, separate and antagonistic civilizations) are, unfortunately, already on the agenda of international relations. Here we came to the crux of the matter in regard to the Western relations with Russia from both historical and contemporary perspectives: the Western civilization, as based on the Western type of Christianity (the Roman Catholicism and all Protestant denominations) has traditional animosity and hostility toward all nations and states of the East Christian (Orthodox) confession. As Russia was and is the biggest and most powerful Christian Orthodox country, the Eurasian geopolitical conflicts between the West and Russia started from the time when the German Teutonic knights and the Sweds from the Baltic were constantly attacking northern Russian territories up to the fateful battle in 1240, which the Sweds lost to the Russian Prince of Novgorod Alexander Nevski at the Battle of Neva. However, only three decades later, the ruler of the Grand Duchy of Lithuania, Algirdas (1345‒1377), started to occupy the Russian lands – the process to be continued by the Roman Catholic common state of the Kingdom of Poland and the Grand Duchy of Lithuania when it launched its confessional-civilizational imperialistic wars against the Grand Duchy of Moscow at the very end of the 14th century; i.e., after 1385 when Poland and Lithuania became united as a personal union of two sovereign states (the Union of Krewo).v

A Role of the Vatican

The present-day territories of Ukraine (which at that time did not exist under this name) and Byelorus (Belarus, White Russia) became the first victims of Vatican policy to proselytize the Eastern Slavs. Therefore, the biggest part of present-day Ukraine became occupied and annexed by Lithuania till 1569vi and after the Polish-Lithuanian 1569 Lublin Union by Poland. In the period from 1522 to 1569, there were 63% of the East Slavs lived on the territory of the Grand Duchy of Lithuania out of its total population.vii From the Russian perspective, an aggressive Vatican policy of reconversion of the Christian Orthodox population and their denationalization could be prevented only by military counterattacks to liberate the occupied territories. However, when it happened from the mid-17th century till the end of the 18th century, a huge number of the former Christian Orthodox population had already become Roman Catholics and the Uniates, losing their original national identity.

A conversion to the Roman Catholicism and making the Union with the Vatican on the territories occupied by the Polish-Lithuanian common state till the end of the 18th century divided the Russian national body into two parts: the Christian Orthodox, who remained to be the Russians and the pro-Western oriented converts who, basically, lost their initial ethnonational identity. This is especially true in Ukraine – a country with the biggest number of Uniates in the world due to the Brest Union signed in 1596 with the Vatican.

The Uniate Church in (West) Ukraine openly collaborated with the Nazi regime during WWII and for that reason, it was banned after the war till 1989. Nevertheless, it was exactly the Uniate Church in Ukraine which propagated an ideology that the “Ukrainians” were not (Little) Russians but instead a separate nation who are in no ethnolinguistic and confessional connection with the Russians. Therefore, a way was opened to the successful Ukrainization of the Little Russians (and Minor Russia), Ruthenians, and Carpatho-Russians during Soviet (anti-Russian) rule. After the dissolution of the USSR, the Ukrainians became an instrument of the realization of the Western anti-Russian geopolitical interests in Eastern Europe.viii

The unscrupulous Jesuits became the fundamental West European anti-Russian and anti-Christian Orthodox hawks to propagate the idea that a Christian Orthodox Russia is not belonging to a real (Western) Europe. Due to such Vatican propaganda activity, the West gradually became antagonistic to Russia, and Russian culture was seen as disgusting and inferior, i.e., barbaric, as a continuation of the Byzantine Christian Orthodox civilization. Unfortunately, such a negative attitude toward Russia and the East Christianity is accepted by a contemporary US-led Collective West for whom Russophobia has become an ideological foundation for its geopolitical projects and ambitions.ix Therefore, all real or potential Russia’s supporters became geopolitical enemies of a Pax Americana, like the Serbs, Armenians, Greeks, Byelorussians, etc.

Western Defeats and Russian Blowback

A new moment in the West-Russia geopolitical struggles started when the Protestant Sweden became directly involved in the Western confessional-imperialistic wars against Russia in 1700 (the Great Northern War of 1700−1721) which Sweden lost after the Battle of Poltava in 1709 when Russia of Peter the Great finally became a member of the concert of the Great European Powers.x

A century later, that was a Napoleonic France to take a role in the historical process of “Eurocivilizing” of “schismatic” Russia in 1812, that also finished by the West European fiascoxi, similar to Pan-Germanic warmongers during both world wars.

However, after 1945 up to the present, the “civilizational” role of the Westernization of Russia is assumed by NATO and the EU. The Collective West, immediately after the dissolution of the USSR, by imposing its client satellite Boris Yeltsin as the President of Russia, achieved an enormous geopolitical achievement around Russia, especially in the territories of the former Soviet Union and the Balkans.

Nevertheless, the Collective West started to experience a Russian geopolitical blowback from 2001 onward when the B. Yeltsin’s time pro-Western political clients (Russian liberals) became gradually removed from the decision-making positions in Russia’s governmental structures. What a new Russia’s political establishment correctly understood is that a Westernization policy of Russia is nothing else but just an ideological mask for economic-political transformation of the country into the colony of the Collective West led by the US Neocon administrationxii alongside with the task of the US/EU to externalize their own values and norms permanently. This „externalization policy“ is grounded on the thesis of The End of History by Francis Fukuyama:xiii

“…that the philosophy of economic and political liberalism has triumphed throughout the world, ending the contest between market democracies and centrally planned governance”.xiv

Therefore, after the formal ending of the Cold War 1.0 in 1989/1990, the fundamental Western global geopolitical project was The West and The Rest, according to which the rest of the world was obliged to accept all fundamental Western values and norms according to the Hegemonic Stability Theory of a unipolar system of the world security.xv Nevertheless, behind such doctrinal unilateralism as a project of the US hegemony in global governance in the new century clearly stands the unipolar hegemonic concept of a Pax Americana, but with Russia and China as the crucial opponents to it.

Stability Theories and IR

According to the Hegemonic Stability Theory, a global peace can occur only when one hegemonic center of power (state) acquires enough power to deter all other expansionist and imperialistic ambitions and intentions. The theory is based on a presumption that the concentration of (hyper) power will reduce the chances of a classical world war (but not and local confrontations) as it allows a single hyperpower to maintain peace and manage the system of international relations between the states.xvi Examples of ex-Pax Romana and Pax-Britannica clearly offered support by the American hegemons for an imperialistic idea that (the US-led) unipolarity will bring global peace and, henceforth, inspired the viewpoint that the world in a post-Cold War 1.0 era under a Pax Americana will be stable and prosperous as long as the US global dominance prevails. Therefore, a hegemony, according to this viewpoint, is a necessary precondition for economic order and free trade in a global dimension, suggesting that the existence of a predominant hyperpower state willing and able to use its economic and military power to promote global stability is both a divine and rational order of the day. As a tool to achieve this goal the hegemon has to use a coercive diplomacy based on the ultimatum demand that puts a time limit on the target to comply and a threat of punishment for resistance as, for example, it was a case in January 1999 during the “negotiations” on Kosovo status between the US diplomacy and Yugoslavia’s Government in Rambouillet (France).

However, in contrast to both the Hegemonic Stability Theory and the Bipolar Stability Theory, a post-Yeltsin Russian political establishment advocates that a multipolar system of international relations is the least war-prone in comparison with all other proposed systems. This Multipolar Stability Theory is based on a concept that a polarized global politics does not concentrate power, as it is supported by the unipolar system, and does not divide the globe into two antagonistic superpower blocs, as in a bipolar system, which promote a constant struggle for global dominance (for example, during the Cold War 1.0). The multipolarity theory perceives polarized international relations as a stable system because it encompasses a larger number of autonomous and sovereign actors in global politics, which as well as giving rise to a greater number of political alliances. This theory is, in essence, presenting a peace-through model of pacifying international relations as it is fundamentally based on counter-balancing relations between the states in the global arena. Under such a system, an aggressive policy is quite hard to implement in reality as it is prevented by the multiple power centers.xvii

A New Policy of Russia and Cold War 2.0

A new policy of international relations adopted by Moscow after 2000 is based on a principle of a globe without hegemonic leadership – a policy which started to be implemented at the time when the global power of the US as a post Cold War 1.0 hegemon declines because it makes costly global commitments above ability to fulfill them followed by the immense US trade deficit – even today the cancer of American economy which the current US President desperately wants to heal. The US share of global gross production has been in the process of constant decline since the end of WWII. Another serious symptom of American erosion in international politics is that the US share of global financial reserves has drastically declined, especially in comparison to the Russian and Chinese shares. The US is today the largest world debtor and even the biggest debtor that ever existed in history (36.21 trillion dollars or 124 percent of the GDP), mainly, but not exclusively, due to huge military spending, alongside tax cuts that reduced the US federal revenue. The deficit in the current account balance with the rest of the world (in 2004, for instance, it was $650 billion), the US administration is covering by borrowing from private investors (mostly from abroad) and foreign central banks (most important are those of China and Japan). Therefore, such US financial dependence on foreigners to provide the funds needed to pay the interest on the American public debt leaves the USA extremely vulnerable, especially if China and/or Japan decide to stop buying the US bonds or sell them. Subsequently, the world’s strongest military power is at the same time the greatest global debtor, with China and Japan being direct financial collaborators of the US hegemonic leadership’s policy of a Pax Americana after 1989/1990.

It is without any doubts that the US foreign policy after 1989/1990 is still unrealistically following the French concept of raison d’état that indicates the Realist justification for policies pursued by state authority, but in the American eyes, first and foremost of these justifications or criteria is the US global hegemony as the best guarantee for the national security, followed by all other interests and associated goals. Therefore, the US foreign policy is still based on a realpolitik concept that is a German term referring to the state foreign policy ordered or motivated by power politics: the strong do what they will, and the weak do what they must. However, the US is becoming weaker and weaker, and Russia and China are more and more becoming stronger and stronger.

Final Words

Finally, it seems to be true that such a reality in contemporary global politics and international relations is, unfortunately, not properly understood and recognized by the current US President Donald Trump as he is going to be just another Trojan horse of the US Neocon concept of a Pax Americana followed by the megalomanic Zionist concept of a Greater Israel of “From the River to the River”xviii, and, therefore, there are no real chances to get rid of the US imperialism in the recent future and to establish international relations on a more democratic and multilateral foundation. Therefore, the US-led Western turbo Russophobia since 2014 has already driven the world into a new stage of the post-WWII Cold War–2.0.

ENDNOTES:

i Peter Koenig, “Russian Exodus from the West”, Global Research – Centre for Research on Globalization, 2018-03-31: https://www.globalresearch.ca/russian-exodus-from-the-west/5634121.

ii John Laughland, “Blaming Russia for Skripal Attack is Similar to ‘Jews Poisoning our Wells’ in Middle Ages”, Ron Paul Institute for Peace and Prosperity, 2018-03-16: http://www.ronpaulinstitute.org/archives/featured-articles/2018/march/16/blaming-russia-for-skripal-attack-is-similar-to-jews-poisoning-our-wells-in-middle-ages/.

iii David Gowland, Richard Dunphy, The European Mosaic, Third Edition, Harlow, England−Pearson Education, 2006, 277.

iv Samuel P. Huntington, The Clash of Civilization and the Remaking of World Order, London: The Free Press, 2002.

v Zigmantas Kiaupa, Jūratė Kiaupienė, Albinas Kuncevičius, The History of Lithuania Before 1795, Vilnius: Lithuanian Institute of History, 2000, 106‒131.

vi On the Lithuanian occupation period of the present-day Ukraine, see: [Alfredas Bumblauskas, Genutė Kirkienė, Feliksas Šabuldo (sudarytojai), Ukraina: Lietuvos epocha, 1320−1569, Vilnius: Mokslo ir enciklopedijų leidybos centras, 2010].

vii Ignas Kapleris, Antanas Meištas, Istorijos egzamino gidas. Nauja programa nuo A iki Ž, Vilnius: Leidykla “Briedas”, 2013, 123.

viii About this issue, see more in [Зоран Милошевић, Од Малоруса до Украјинаца, Источно Сарајево: Завод за уџбенике и наставна средства, 2008].

ix Срђан Перишић, Нова геополитика Русије, Београд: Медија центар „Одбрана“, 2015, 42−46.

x David Kirbz, Šiaurės Europa ankstyvaisiais naujaisiais amžiais: Baltijos šalys 1492−1772 metais, Vilnius: Atviros Lietuvos knyga, 2000, 333−363; Peter Englund, The Battle that Shook Europe: Poltava and the Birth of the Russian Empire, London: I.B.Tauris & Co Ltd, 2003.

xi On Napoleon’s military campaign on Russia in 1812 and its fiasco, see [Paul Britten Austin, The Great Retreat Told by the Survivors, London−Mechanicsburg, PA: Greenhill Books, 1996; Adam Zamoyski, 1812: Napoleon’s Fatal March on Moscow, New York: Harper Press, 2005].

xii The US-led NATO bombing of the Federal Republic of Yugoslavia in 1999 is only one example of a gangster’s policy of a violation of the international law and the law on war when the civilian objects became legitimate military targets. Therefore, the attack on Serbia’s television station in the downtown of Belgrade on April 23rd, 1999 attracted criticism by many human rights activists as it was apparently selected for bombing as „media responsible for broadcasting propaganda“ [The Independent, April 1st, 2003]. By the same gangsters the same bombing policy was repeated in 2003 in Iraq when the main television station in Baghdad was hit by cruise missiles in March 2003 followed next day by the destruction of the state radio and television station in Basra [A. P. V. Rogers, Law on the Battlefield, Second edition, Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2004, 82−83]. According to the international law expert Richard Falk, the 2003 Iraq War was a „crime against Peace of the sort punished at the Nuremberg trials“ [Richard Falk, Frontline, India, No. 8, April 12−25th, 2003].

xiii Francis Fukuyama, The End of History and the Last Man, Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1992.

xiv Charles W. Kegley, Jr., Eugene R. Wittkopf, World Politics: Trend and Transformation, Tenth edition, USA: Thomson−Wadsworth, 2006, 588; Andrew F. Cooper, Jorge Heine, Ramesh Thakur (eds.), The Oxford Handbook of Modern Diplomacy, New York: Oxford University Press, 2015, 54−55.

xv David P. Forsythe, Patrice C. McMahon, Andrew Wedeman (eds.), American Foreign Policy in a Globalized World, New York−London: Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group, 2006, 31−50.

xvi William C. Wohlforth, „The Stability of a Unipolar World“, International Security, No. 24, 1999, 5−41.

xvii Charles W. Kegley, Jr., Eugene R. Wittkopf, World Politics: Trend and Transformation, Tenth edition, USA: Thomson−Wadsworth, 2006, 524.

xviii On the policy of Zionist movement, see [Ilan Pappe, Ten Myths about Israel, London‒New York: Verso, 2024, 23‒49.

The post Russophobia by the Collective West Opens the Doors of the Cold War 2.0 first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Vladislav B. Sotirovic.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/russophobia-by-the-collective-west-opens-the-doors-of-the-cold-war-2-0/feed/ 0 544296
Fight ICE. Build the Union. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/fight-ice-build-the-union/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/fight-ice-build-the-union/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 14:53:15 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335447 SEIU and care workers, joined by over a dozen local and national partner organizations, faith leaders, and local allies, march through downtown during a Justice Journey March and Rally on July 01, 2025 in New Orleans, Louisiana. Photo by Sean Gardner/Getty Images for SEIUWhile the vast majority of workers targeted by ICE have no union, some unions are mobilizing to defend not only their own members, but non-union workers and communities that are under attack.]]> SEIU and care workers, joined by over a dozen local and national partner organizations, faith leaders, and local allies, march through downtown during a Justice Journey March and Rally on July 01, 2025 in New Orleans, Louisiana. Photo by Sean Gardner/Getty Images for SEIU
Labor Notes logo

This story originally appeared in Labor Notes on July 08, 2025. It is shared here with permission.

It was the morning of June 9, and Genie Kastrup, president of Service Employees Local 1, stood in front of Chicago’s Daley Plaza and bellowed into a microphone. “What is happening right now is about silencing voices,” she said, flanked by members of her union holding signs that read “Free David Huerta.”

“It’s about dividing working people,” she continued. “It’s about dividing our communities against the have and have nots. It is abusing power.”

The demonstration was one of 37 taking place that day across the country to protest the June 6 Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) assault and detention of Huerta, the president of SEIU California and SEIU-United Service Workers West. Huerta had shown up to defend members of his Los Angeles community from federal raids. Images of the long-time labor leader with his head pressed to a curb by ICE agents touched off anger—and mobilization. Huerta was released after three days and hit with charges of felony conspiracy.

Facing an emboldened Trump administration, union members across the country are in an intensifying battle to keep their members—and all workers, whether or not they are in unions—free and safe from federal immigration authorities. They are holding emergency rallies, organizing in their workplaces, knocking doors in their communities, using contracts to defend members, and building coalitions that can respond rapidly to detentions and raids.

While unions cannot guarantee workers’ safety, many are mobilizing to protect them against an administration that is increasingly targeting workplaces and labor leaders themselves.

“We’re on the line, we’re targets,” Minnesota AFL-CIO President Bernie Burnham said about labor leaders and organizers. It was June 9, and she was addressing a rally on the steps of the Minnesota State Capitol in St. Paul. “They’ll come after anybody if you disagree with them. I think it’s just a matter of time. Watch where you’re at. You’re stronger in numbers than you are on your own.”

David Huerta is not the only unionist who has been targeted by ICE. At least three other people affiliated with SEIU were also recently detained, though have since been freed: Lewelyn Dixon, a member of SEIU 925; Rümeysa Öztürk, a member of SEIU Local 509; and Cliona Ward, a member of SEIU 2015. Alfredo “Lelo” Juarez Zeferino, a farmworker and leader in the militant union Familias Unidas por la Justicia, is still in detention, as is Kilmar Abrego Garcia, a member of SMART Local 100, and Maximo Londonio, a member of Machinists (IAM) Local Lodge 695.

The vast majority of workers targeted by ICE have no union. They are day laborers, textile workers, and caregivers, or work in other parts of the informal economy.

But some unions are mobilizing to defend not only their own members, but non-union workers and communities that are under attack. SEIU, for example, is calling for an end to “the brutal ICE raids terrorizing our neighborhoods and tearing families apart.” This points to the underlying reality: Whether the Trump administration is targeting labor leaders or workers who are perceived to be powerless and unable to fight back, their attacks intimidate workers and undermine their fights for better wages and conditions.

At events across the country, union leaders and members have emphasized that detaining workers—whether or not they are union members—is unjust. But the Trump administration’s targeting of organized labor might reveal something about how it is trying to consolidate power.

“It’s not a surprise to me that a fascist government starts their crackdown by going after labor first, undocumented workers, and going into work sites,” Sheigh Freeberg, secretary-treasurer of UNITE HERE 17 told the crowd in St. Paul. Freeberg’s union represents hospitality and food service workers in Minnesota. “They know the real power in this country is labor, and they’re afraid of us.”

‘KIDNAPPED OFF THE STREET’

On June 30, SEIU members and Starbucks baristas gathered from across the country to protest outside of the Central Louisiana ICE Processing Center. “We cannot wait for things to be happening to us to start fighting, because when we wait for that level, then we’re left with no one to fight with,” said Siti Pulcheon, a barista and shift supervisor who attended the demonstration.

In response to immigration raids across the country, Starbucks Workers United recently offered a Know Your Rights training open to all Starbucks baristas. “A lot of really important questions were asked, like ‘How can we protect not just the baristas in our store, but also our customers?’” Pulcheon said.

The Trump administration has portrayed its widening ICE dragnet as targeting dangerous criminals, but that has turned out to mean legal permanent residents with traffic citations, nonviolent crimes committed 20 years ago (like Londonio), misdemeanors like vending too close to the curb, or no record at all. And with no opportunity for detainees to make a case before a judge, and an ICE quota of 3,000 arrests a day, no one is safe.

“Anybody who thinks we have to ignore certain issues or avoid certain political conversations in order to grow the base, they don’t understand what it means to grow the base,” said Ryan Andrews, an English teacher and member of the United Teachers of Los Angeles (UTLA). Organizing around immigrant justice has actually pushed some members to engage more closely with their union, he said.

Andrews pointed to a student walkout in February protesting President Trump’s immigration policies. After protesting students were assaulted by two adult men, teachers and students met to discuss a path forward. Teachers circulated a petition demanding that the district denounce the attacks, meet with students and their families when attacked, ensure the safety of students at student-led actions, and provide mental health resources for affected students.

“Almost every co-worker signed the petition,” Andrews said, including those who felt left behind by their union. “After careful organizing conversations, those co-workers signed because they care about their students and are open to perspectives that differ from their own.”

Andrews’ union is now building on past contract wins. UTLA’s 2019 strike resulted in the creation of an immigrant defense fund. Workers are now trying to further expand collective defense, said Andrews: They’re fighting to protect members who need to take a leave due to their immigration status and pushing the district to invest in legal and mental health support for immigrant students.

MOBILIZING AGAINST THE RAIDS

Beyond organizing on the job, workers are joining mass mobilizations in the streets. UTLA members have been canvassing their neighborhoods with door hangers informing residents of their rights if ICE agents come to the door. “Teachers are connected to the very fabric of the communities where we work,” Andrews said. “These things are not abstractions. We are seeing our students and their family members kidnapped off the street.”

Workers in major cities across the country are organizing against workplace raids. After the Trump administration set an aggressive new quota late May demanding that ICE officers arrest 3,000 people per day, agents began flooding federal buildings, said Ben Mabie, a staffer with IFPTE Local 98 in New York City. “It was horrific to watch the [lack of] of personal dignity [afforded to] the people that were getting caught up, and it was also a really grave safety issue. These people weren’t identifying themselves as law enforcement,” he said.

On June 25, federal workers in New York, Chicago, and Seattle held informational pickets demanding an end to ICE’s workplace raids.

“It is a profound attack on our civil institutions,” said Colin Smalley, president of IFPTE Local 777 and a co-founder of the Federal Unionists Network who attended the ICE OUT demonstration in Chicago.

Smalley’s job at the Army Corps of Engineers is to ensure environmental compliance. He said that ICE’s presence in federal buildings affects his work: “If we have ICE agents that are conducting these raids without identification, without showing their face, without warrants, that makes it more risky for me to do my job,” he said. “If folks feel like submitting a permit application to us makes it more likely that they’ll get targeted in a raid, they’re not going to do it. Then, by not engaging in our permit process, they are less likely to do the work in a way that balances the needs of economic development with the best practices for environmental protection.” Smalley stressed that he was not speaking on behalf of his employer.

UNIONS FIGHT FOR IMMIGRANT WORKERS

Even as the Trump administration cracks down on immigrant workers, union members continue to face the day-to-day challenges of organizing against the boss and fighting for a good contract. And sometimes that includes fighting to protect immigrants in the workforce.

More than 100 Teamsters Local 705 members at Mauser Packaging Solutions in Chicago are on strike, supported by fellow union members in Los Angeles and Minnesota. Protections for immigrant workers are part of what they are fighting for. The Chicago workers want contract language that protects immigrant workers from intimidation, modeled on language Seattle workers won three years ago. “Local 705 is fighting to win similar protections for our immigrant brothers and sisters that live in the very community where Mauser’s Chicago facility is located,” reads a press statement from the local.

In Chicago, labor, community groups, and workers’ centers have been holding “Know Your Rights” trainings since before the Trump administration came to power, prompting Trump’s “border czar,” Tom Homan, to complain in late January that Chicagoans were too well educated “on how to defy ICE.”

This work is more critical than ever, says Shelly Ruzicka, communications director for Arise Chicago, a workers’ center. “One of the biggest things we’re telling people is to be informed and be connected,” Ruzicka explains. “Know what your rights are, have conversations with your family, and practice so that if there is an altercation, you are prepared.”

CHICAGO’S COORDINATED RESPONSE

The Trump administration has repeatedly threatened to target Chicago, because it is a sanctuary city, where laws restrict collaboration between the police department and ICE. Labor has been part of the effort to defend the city’s sanctuary status, established in the 2006 Welcoming City Ordinance, against recent attempts to weaken its provisions.

Chicago has an extensive network of labor and community groups that rapidly respond to the presence of immigration authorities in the city. “We are trying to deepen and strengthen our capacity to do coalition work here in Chicago,” said Jackson Potter, the vice president of the Chicago Teachers Union (CTU). “Labor and the community are coordinating responses to ICE in real time, because the attacks are becoming heightened, and putting a drain on our existing infrastructure and resources.” The coalition includes elected leaders, like Alderman Byron Sigcho Lopez, who serves in the 25th Ward, often a port of entry for migrants and refugees.

In recent months, these coalitions have been tested—labor has had to quickly mobilize in response to reports of ICE. In late February, parents reported that they had “witnessed law enforcement agents… arrest a father in front of his children as he dropped them off for school at Idar Elementary,” according to a CTU press release. Parents had already been planning to hold a vigil to oppose the proposed closure of three schools. But after the alleged detention, the vigil expanded to incorporate opposition to ICE, and CTU members and elected officials joined in the demonstration February 26.

Potter said that the rally was intended to provide a layer of safety in case ICE carried out more raids in the area. “We had multiple conversations with a number of moms expressing fear, and they decided along with us that we should move forward to make sure people felt defended and protected in this terrifying incident and the aftermath,” he said.

“I don’t care what agency they turn out to be, targeting a father as he tries to provide an education to his children at their place of learning is a deliberate act of terror on behalf of this government,” said CTU President Stacy Davis Gates in a press statement about the vigil. “Chicagoans have already shown that we are who keep each other safe by knowing our rights and by organizing to have each others’ backs.”

The aim of ICE’s dragnet is not to deport every undocumented worker: Trump himself has acknowledged that many industries rely on their labor. The aim is to spread terror, and in the process, scare workers from pushing back against the boss. The Trump administration’s strategy is poised to intensify. The president’s budget bill, signed into law on July 4, allocates $170 billion towards the immigration crackdown, an amount that exceeds the funding of most of the world’s armies.

The labor movement can keep its head down, as the Trump administration hopes it will, and watch standards for every worker erode. Or it can fight—and grow stronger in the process.

A WIN FOR IMMIGRANT STREET VENDORS

In one case, that fight looked like winning legislation that reduces interactions between a largely immigrant workforce and law enforcement, a reduction that keeps workers safer. In 2022, 800 NYC street vendors discussed their shared struggles through the Street Vendor Project. After six months of discussion, they voted on issues they wanted to see addressed through legislation, creating the Street Vendor Reform Package, bills that would help protect NYC’s 20,000 street vendors.

For years, street vendors have reported abuses at the hands of the NYPD: from being ticketed hundreds of times in one year to having their food carts illegally crushed before their eyes.

Criminal charges for minor violations like standing a few inches too close to the curb can have life-altering immigration consequences, and fear of deportation has pushed many to cease vending altogetheroften with no back up plan.

In May, more than 100 vendors and advocates gathered on the streets of City Hall demanding that City Council advance the reforms. On June 30, New York City Council passed a key part of the reform package which replaces criminal misdemeanor charges for street vending with civil penalties.

“I’m so thankful that this new law passed,” said Ahmed Fouda, a halal food vendor who organized with other Midtown Manhattan food vendors who felt beleaguered by constant police presence in the tourist-heavy areas they serve. “I hope that the police will respect the law and respect the vendors and treat us for who we are.”

This article is a joint publication of Labor Notes and Workday Magazine. Amie Stager contributed reporting.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Natascha Elena Uhlmann and Sarah Lazare.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/fight-ice-build-the-union/feed/ 0 544265
Mass Killings, Media Control, and the Machinery of US Soft Power https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/mass-killings-media-control-and-the-machinery-of-us-soft-power/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/mass-killings-media-control-and-the-machinery-of-us-soft-power/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 14:50:19 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159865 Dismantling the ideological architecture of the U.S. empire by exposing how atrocity becomes infrastructure and propaganda becomes profession. From the Ford Foundation’s role in Indonesia’s Cold War genocide to the rise of figures like Orville Schell and Johnny Harris, KJ unpacks how soft power functions as a weapon: manufacturing consent, laundering imperial violence, and shaping global […]

The post Mass Killings, Media Control, and the Machinery of US Soft Power first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Dismantling the ideological architecture of the U.S. empire by exposing how atrocity becomes infrastructure and propaganda becomes profession. From the Ford Foundation’s role in Indonesia’s Cold War genocide to the rise of figures like Orville Schell and Johnny Harris, KJ unpacks how soft power functions as a weapon: manufacturing consent, laundering imperial violence, and shaping global narratives. How US think tanks, journalism schools, and digital platforms are not just media ecosystems, but actually, ideological battlegrounds built atop bloodshed.

The post Mass Killings, Media Control, and the Machinery of US Soft Power first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by K.J. Noh.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/mass-killings-media-control-and-the-machinery-of-us-soft-power/feed/ 0 544298
Disturbing the Simplicity of Life https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/disturbing-the-simplicity-of-life/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/disturbing-the-simplicity-of-life/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 14:45:23 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159876 What changes could could make life so hard?

The post Disturbing the Simplicity of Life first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

The post Disturbing the Simplicity of Life first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Allen Forrest.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/disturbing-the-simplicity-of-life/feed/ 0 544300
Why the federal government is making climate data disappear https://grist.org/language/trump-administration-climate-data-disappear-national-climate-assessment/ https://grist.org/language/trump-administration-climate-data-disappear-national-climate-assessment/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 08:45:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670036 For 25 years, a group of the country’s top experts has been fastidiously tracking the ways that climate change threatens every part of the United States. Their findings informed the National Climate Assessments, a series of congressionally mandated reports released every four years that translated the science into accessible warnings for policymakers and the public. But that work came to a halt this spring when the Trump administration abruptly dismissed all 400 experts working on the next edition. Then, on June 30, all of the past reports vanished too, along with the federal website they lived on.

A lot of information about the changing climate has disappeared under President Donald Trump’s second term, but the erasure of the National Climate Assessments is “by far the biggest loss we’ve seen,” said Gretchen Gehrke, who monitors federal websites with the Environmental Data and Governance Initiative. The National Climate Assessments were one of the most approachable resources that broke down how climate change will affect the places people care about, she said. The reports were also used by a wide swath of stakeholders — policymakers, farmers, businesses — to guide their decisions about the future. While the reports have been archived elsewhere, they’re no longer as easy to access. And it’s unclear what, if anything, will happen to the report that was planned for 2027 or 2028, which already existed in draft form.

So why did the reports survive Trump’s first term, but not his second? You could view their disappearance in a few different ways, experts said — as a flex of executive power, an escalation in the culture war over climate change, or a strategic attempt to erase the scientific foundation for climate policy. “If you suppress information and data, then you don’t have the evidence you need to be able to create regulations, strengthen regulations, and even to combat the repeal of regulations,” Gehrke said. 

This isn’t climate denial in the traditional sense. The days of loudly debating the science have mostly given way to something quieter and more insidious: a campaign to withhold the raw information itself. “I don’t know if we’re living in climate denial anymore,” said Leah Aronowsky, a science historian at Columbia Climate School. “We have this new front of denial by erasure.”

By cutting funding for research and withholding crucial data, the Trump administration is making it harder to know exactly how the planet is changing. In April, the administration pulled nearly $4 million in funding from a Princeton program to improve computer models predicting changes in the oceans and atmosphere, claiming the work created “climate anxiety” among young people. That same month, the Environmental Protection Agency failed to submit its annual report to the United Nations detailing the country’s greenhouse gas emissions. In May, the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration ended its 45-year tradition of tracking billion-dollar weather disasters. Trump also hopes to shut down the Mauna Loa laboratory in Hawaiʻi, which has measured the steady rise in atmospheric levels of carbon dioxide since the 1950s — the first data to definitively show humans were changing the climate. 

“This kind of wholesale suppression of an entire field of federally sponsored research, to my knowledge, is historically unprecedented,” Aronowsky said.

In a response to a request for comment, the EPA directed Grist to a webpage containing past greenhouse gas emissions reports, as well as a version of what was supposed to be this year’s report obtained by the Environmental Defense Fund. However, the agency confirmed that the latest data has not been officially released. The White House declined to comment, and neither NASA nor NOAA responded in time for publication.

Last year, a leaked training video from Project 2025 — the policy roadmap organized by The Heritage Foundation, a conservative think tank — showed a former Trump official declaring that political appointees would have to “eradicate climate change references from absolutely everywhere.” The strategy appears to be designed to boost the fossil fuel industry at a time when clean energy has become competitive and the reality of climate change harder to dismiss, as floods, fires, and heat waves have become perceptibly worse. “We will drill, baby, drill,” Trump said in his inauguration speech in January.

The administration hasn’t exactly been subtle about its endgame. Lee Zeldin, the head of the EPA, doesn’t deny the reality of climate change (he calls himself a “climate realist”), but he’s zealously dismantled environmental programs and has recommended that the White House strike down the “endangerment finding,” the bedrock of U.S. climate policy. It comes from a 2007 Supreme Court ruling on the Clean Air Act that required the EPA to regulate greenhouse gases as pollutants since they endanger public health. If the administration can convince the courts that climate change isn’t a health consideration, it could end that regulatory obligation. 

“If you’re removing information about climate change, its reality, and its impact on people, then I think it’s a lot easier to make the case that it’s not an environmental health issue,” Gehrke said.

There’s a word for the idea that ignorance can serve political ends: agnotology (from the Greek “agnosis,” or “not knowing”), the study of how knowledge is deliberately obscured. What Trump is doing to information about climate change fits squarely in that tradition, according to Aronowsky: “If you remove it, then in a certain sense, it no longer exists, and therefore, there’s nothing to even debate, right?”

Climate denial first took off in the 1990s, when the oil and gas companies and industry-friendly think tanks started sowing doubt about climate science. Over the decades, as the evidence became rock-solid, those who opposed reducing the use of fossil fuels gradually shifted from outright denying the facts to attacking solutions like wind and solar power. What the Trump administration is doing now marks a radical break from this long-term trend, said John Cook, a climate misinformation researcher at The University of Melbourne in Australia. “This is a 180, not just a turn, but diving into something we’ve never even seen before,” he said. On the other hand, Cook said, the administration is taking a classic climate denial tactic — painting scientists as “alarmists” or conspirators who can’t be trusted — and turning it into government policy.

Half a year in, the second Trump administration’s treatment of climate information hasn’t yet reached the “eradication” levels that Project 2025 aspired to, at least on government websites. The EPA’s climate change website, for instance, is still up and running, even though all references to the phenomenon were erased on the agency’s home page. Most of the website deletions so far have served to isolate climate change as an issue, erasing its relationship to topics such as health and infrastructure, Gehrke said. Up until the National Climate Assessments disappeared, she would have said that “climate erasure” was an inappropriate characterization of what’s happening. “But now, I’m really not so sure,” she said.

Rachel Cleetus, the senior policy director with the Union of Concerned Scientists, thinks that the administration’s actions actually go beyond erasure. “They’re literally trying to change the basis on which a lot of policymaking is advanced — the science basis, the legal basis, and the economic basis,” she said. Her biggest concern isn’t just what facts have been removed, but what political propaganda might replace them. “That’s more dangerous, because it really leaves people in this twilight zone, where what’s real, and what’s important, and what is going to affect their daily lives is just being obfuscated.”

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Why the federal government is making climate data disappear on Jul 14, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Kate Yoder.

]]>
https://grist.org/language/trump-administration-climate-data-disappear-national-climate-assessment/feed/ 0 544233
Musician Ela Minus on having more power over your work https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/musician-ela-minus-on-having-more-power-over-your-work/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/musician-ela-minus-on-having-more-power-over-your-work/#respond Mon, 14 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-ela-minus-on-having-more-power-over-your-work The last time we talked was right before your first album came out. It’s been five years. How has making music shifted for you over those five years as your project’s grown?

You’re right. I think it might be exactly 5 years. Well, everything has changed. [laughs] It feels like we live in a different world. So similar to the old, but with something eerily off.

Making music for me has shifted in the most banal ways and also in the most profound. I learned a lot from that first record. Both from the process of making it, as well as the process of it coming out in the world, working with a label for the first time, my career growing, getting attention, etc. I learned a lot about myself and about how people feel about me, about what I make, and how I make it. And that makes me feel. How I feel about how they feel. It’s a constant feedback loop.

Having a real, tangible reaction to a solo body of work for the first time changed how I work now. It’s hard to keep the external voices out, and in a way a big part of the work has become about guarding what I allow to come into the music.

I keep thinking of the analogy of wearing different hats when I talk about the process of making my solo music. I’m a songwriter, producer, engineer and performer, and I believe all of those jobs are very different from each other. So I imagine myself changing “hats” to do each individual job. When I put on my “producer hat,” in many ways, the job is accurately perceiving where certain musical and lyrical ideas come from. With lyrics: “Is this honest? Do I actually feel this way?” or “Is this coming from insecurities because x review said x thing about my lyrics?” or because “x friend said x thing about my lyrics”?

Same with production. Am I producing to flex my skills? Is this sound design for the sake of sound design and flexing or is this making me feel things in my stomach? I guess, ultimately, it all comes down to stomach, instinct and truly “Am I doing whatever the fuck I want?” or “Am I fooling myself into thinking I’m doing whatever the fuck I want, but I’m really just trying to fit in?” Five years ago I knew, without a doubt, I was always doing what I wanted. Now, sometimes I have to actively question myself, take time to check in with the intentions of my work, listen, and steer. I’d say that has been the biggest shift in the creative process since you and I last spoke.

When we first met, you lived in Brooklyn. You’ve moved around a bit since we last spoke. Has that also changed the process?

Yes. I don’t work out of my apartment that much anymore, I go into studios more. I have been living a bit of a nomad life in the past few years so that has naturally shifted the process and the physical context of how and where I work. Now, internally, how much energy I spend in protecting the process is a new thing. I have seen the things in the past that have allowed me to create—or to create in a certain way—and so now I’m aware and I deliberately bring those in, or keep them out. And, of course, as you and I have spoken so much about, the process becomes an instrument. It is another instrument, and with practice, time and discipline, you get better at playing it.

And, yeah, it’s hard to navigate growth. As teams grow, there are so many more people offering input and, in general, just so many things to process: reviews, social media, etc. Really, sometimes having more folks offering input isn’t helpful—it just means more noise to filter out.

Absolutely. At least every other day I ask myself “Is this what I want?” “Is this my life becoming what I want it to be?” It is hard, and confusing at times, to navigate the growth.

On one hand, I have always known exactly what I want: music. I belong with the music…in the music. But on the other hand, I had absolutely no idea about anything else: What type of career I wanted to have? Did I want to make money out of it? So on that second side, for me, it’as been about trying things and adjusting according to how they make me feel. A lot of trial and error, on the go.

All I’ve ever known is that I belong with the music. With sound. With instruments. Period. Music for me has never been a way to acquire something else, or to arrive at something, like attention, fame, or money. It has always just been about music. It’s an end to itself. It has always been. So I wasn’t really prepared for the pressure because it had never been part of my imaginary future. In the past few years, finding myself in this very fortunate position, I’ve been forging my own place in the context of my work and of the industry that surrounds it.

It has been interesting and also exhausting. Like, the simple but important decision of quitting my day job years ago, to completely live off the music, what that entails, the people that I surround myself with, what I need, what I don’t need, the type of team that works for me, the type that doesn’t, what helps me be better, what makes me be worse, etc…. I had never dreamt about any of it, so I’ve had to figure out what feels right to me as I go. Trying, observing, then steering. It’s been an interesting project in exercising will.

I’ve never had specific dreams and, honestly, sometimes I wish I had, because I think that would make things so much easier. I found a lot of my colleagues do have hyper specific goals and dreams. I’m talking about things like signing to a specific label, playing a specific festival, selling out shows. Before accomplishing some of those things myself, I had never even thought about them. And if i’m really honest, I still don’t feel butterflies in my stomach when I see my name billed on a festival lineup. The butterflies for me come from the music and other human beings experiencing it. From your smiles, your dancing with your eyes closed, your tears at a show. The subs tickling us all.

The music itself. I feel so much with it. It’s all indescribable. All that has no words, but exists in the sound. We all have felt it when surrounded by music and sound. And so, yes, I’m always trying to protect that and keep it about that. And, like you say, it’s hard work. And, of course, with the team inevitably growing, the pressure inevitably grows, and it becomes even harder. It’s already hard to stay focused ourselves, and then you add more people and try to keep them focused. That alone is a full time job really. But of course, it should not be.

Sometimes it feels like its all pushing us in a direction that makes everything be so much harder than it should be. Don’t you think? It’s not a very good system.

The system doesn’t work. It’s a good time to be questioning it and starting to figure out different approaches. People are sending 100s of emails, and countless hours in one e-mail thread to make a $50. It’s so cluttered. And, fewer people are making money from just selling records or touring.

Definitely. I cannot emphasize this enough: The system does not work and it needs to change. We need to change it. It starts with questioning it but it has to be followed by action, by artists exercising their will, by us, the artists saying no, way more often. We need to say no when no needs to be said and then figure out new ways.

Recently I’ve been thinking about how much it matters that I actually speak about the decisions I make privately, something I never do. But maybe I should be outspoken, share more, so that publicly you know more about me and the decisions I make privately. So that it’s more clear what I stand for, and what I think are better ways of doing things, or at least what I think are not the way to do things.

For example: I got an offer for a very, very big festival. I think it’s the biggest in the world and it was a ridiculously low offer, like less that I’ve been paid to play Baby’s All right… literally impossible to make it work financially without losing a lot of money. And, keep in mind im a single person on stage, the smallest show I can make work decently, it’s two of us flying. It’s a tiny touring party. And I’m like, “This offer is silly.” I talked to a lot of my musician friends about it and they all said, “That is how that festival is, we all get gutted.” But every single one of them was playing it. They all took the offers! They are all playing it.

So, I said “no,” kind of on principle. Like it was possible for me to invest a little money for the “exposure” of being on the lineup, of posting it, of crossing that festival name on the list of things a “successful album release year” should have, but my gut was like: no. It’s not about what they are selling, it’s what we are buying, right? The only reason the festival works that way is because the artists are all saying yes. Like even headliners spend more than they get paid in production. I don’t have to say more about it, it’s just, it is not a good system.

Now, some of the people that listen to my music probably think “Why isn’t she at that festival?” Industry people probably think I didn’t get an offer and so maybe the record isn’t actually doing so well, but I’m not sure if anybody in the audience or working in the industry thinks there is the possibility one can get an offer and reject it. You know? It’s not a widely considered possibility. Why?

We have been saying yes for far too long to far too many things. Saying “no” is powerful. Less is more. Doing fewer, more intentional things is powerful. Less is power. I think we, as artists, need to regain our wills. We have a will and we can exercise it, and it is not career suicide. We owe nothing to no one and we don’t really need anybody (not really) except the audience. We owe everything to our audiences, and they are the only ones that deserve our sacrifices.

So, yes, the system does not work. Very few people are making money, and the ones that are making a lot are not very transparent about how they make it, so they are creating false hope for the generations to come.

Right. If you have generational wealth, or whatever, it’s different. If you’re responsible for every cost, with no safety net, it gets very tricky. If you have a band—you along with three people playing our music, or whatever—once all the flights are purchased, this and that, you’re losing money. And that’s even if everything else goes right.

Yes. Everyone is losing money. I am terrified for a future without bands, but I genuinely don’t know how a band that is starting out is gonna be able to keep going in this time.

I guess, in general, I’m terrified of a future without live music, which is where we are headed if this doesn’t change. It’s terrifying to me.

I play live music, and I still enjoy live music more than anything, and we need to protect it, all of us. And put our money where our mouths are, all of us.

When we were talking earlier, you coined a term, “horizontal growth.” It’s a kind of pushing back against the need to always be accruing more… that constant escalation. Like, maybe you have a day job, but you’re able to make some time for creative work, and that’s enough. Or, you’re paying your bills with your creative work—which is a gift—and you’re happy where you are with that, and don’t feel the need to keep expanding. It’s different for each person. What if you get to a spot, a spot you love, and you just keep refining things at that level?

Yes. Why is there only one way? Why is it that we all think the same thing about what we need to acquire, the things, the festival bills, the team or whatever? That’s definitely one way, and definitely nothing wrong with it. But it is not the only way. It is so important to choose our own way. To choose what it is that we want and to know when to stop and enjoy.

You know? Like so many people are so clear about it in other aspects of their lives, like with kids: not everybody has to have six kids. You can be like, “Well, maybe I want one kid.” Or “maybe i don’t want to have kids” it’s the same thing but with an artistic career. You don’t have to fit a mold. Just ask the question. You can do whatever feels better to you, and you can also change your mind as many times as you want.

Horizontal growth can also often be the thing that, in the end, makes money, too. If you take your time and believe in what you do, versus just pushing for endless escalation.

In the past, we’ve talked about Fugazi. They ended up doing so well, financially, in part because they cut out so many barriers and so many commissions: no booking agent, their own label, etc.

It’s a different time and different space, perhaps, and there are some other factors, but something I see in the music industry that’s often a mistake of younger artists is paying too many people too soon. It’s so many commissions! At the end of the day, they’re spending beyond their means. And, it’s hard to get out of that once you’re in it.

It is heartbreaking and It’s really hard. That is part of what I mean, when I said there are a lot of assholes out there. Like, if you are a manager and are working with a young artist, make a budget before you suggest hiring a bunch of other people. And they will say—because they said it to me—you don’t have to pay them, they just make a percentage of the work they bring in, but yes, when you add it all up, you are left with nothing and are the one working the most. Why does everybody else make money before the artist does? And, like you said, once you are in it it, is very hard to get out of that, and it is heartbreaking. It’s like credit card companies giving credit cards to young people as soon as they get their first job, without any education on how credit works.

But you know what? I see that happening less when people come from a DIY background. Like you very rightly said about Fugazi… Like, if you listened to Fugazi as a teenager, even if you didn’t have a band yourself, you knew about their way of doing things, it was an education, in a way, on independence and on economics. Or, if you were in a band and you have done all the jobs because you had to do all the jobs, then you grow up and if you end up needing to hire people to do those jobs, then your experience will be useful to both choose the right person for the job and also know more accurately what the job cost, because you did it yourself.

Experience is really important in this. Knowledge and experience demystifies. Something is mysterious when you don’t understand it. When it comes to jobs and money, a way to understand is to experience. You do it so you know how much time, effort, and money it takes. And maybe that is a way to not fall into those traps of spending over your means, especially when you are starting out.

When I first was pitching TCI, my original inspiration for it was Maximum Rock and Roll, which is like the old punk scene. They used to have an annual thing called Book Your Own Fuckin’ Life, that was like, “Here are the DIY spaces in each city. Here’s a place you can get zines printed,” etc. You could book your own stuff. This is what I wanted TCI to be without explicitly doing that, a way to learn how to do your own stuff and have a more power over your work. It’s demystifying because a lot of people just don’t know. And why would they? People like to keep it mysterious. Which is gatekeeping. But what if we answered questions clearly and generously? Like, “How does a person get a booking agent?” Or, “How does publishing work?” “Should I hire a publicist?” “Should I try to get press on my own?” “Do I really need a team of 10 people who are all getting a commission?

It’s so important, demystification. Asking questions! I think that’s when you realize the most that we are a community, every time I’ve reached out to anybody that I know or don’t (online) asking a real question I have always gotten answers. It is so helpful and so important for people starting out: Don’t be shy about asking questions. None of us knew anything when we were starting out, we all learned by asking others. Or, by trying it out ourselves.

I guess I would say before you hire anybody else, ask questions, ask anything to everyone. Or, just go ahead and try doing the job yourself, you will also learn so much from doing that, even if only for a short period of time. Try doing every single job that you think you need around you, and then, once you know what it takes, what the job actually is, go out and find people to do it, if you have found after all of this, that you still need to.

Thinking about questions, I did a run of listening events for DIA back in December before it came out. In Bogotá, Medellín, Mexico City and London. A big part of those events was a Q&A section. It was my favorite part. It’s such an intimate thing. I find people are so interesting, and when we meet in these spaces where we share something in common, the love for music, it feels safe and adequate to speak about things that matter. I loved it and I want to do that more.

I always try to come out after a show to speak with the audience. Also, around some of these listening events in December, I hosted music production workshops only for women or women-identified people. That ended up being one of the most fulfilling things I’ve done. Now, teaching (or answering questions about your work) makes you speak differently, think differently. The processes and the information is so internalized that when you have to externalize it, another side of your brain lights up. It has made me think a lot about how I communicate, in general.

At the production workshops, I could see in the student;’s faces how they kept feeling empowered and freer as the time together progressed, with knowledge to make things, it’s like you’re giving the the power to be free. I know because I feel it, too. Simply the fact that someone you trust and respect tells you confidently, “You can do it,” and shows you ways to can be life changing. It’s so simple, but that’s something that also comes with growth. It’s good to have a voice that more people hear, because I know I will only use it for good. So I’m glad people want to listen to what I say, because I care. I care deeply.

I remember, actually, the only teacher I had that was still a working musician while i was at Berklee was my drumset teacher. Terri, I’m sure I’ve talked to you about her, Terri Lyne Carrington. She was the only one that would sometimes miss classes for a month because she was on tour. She would come back with all of this wisdom from being on tour, full of real life experiences. Her teaching style was absolutely the opposite to all of the other teachers i had, not only, but in part because she was out there. She was so real, she would share both the struggles as well as the joys, the technical knowledge as well as the knowledge to not let the industry eat you alive. So, I experienced first hand the power of a working, active artist who simultaneously teaches, and I believe we need more of that.

When you are a student and the teacher works in the arts, currently working and creating new work and they choose to spend time teaching you, it absolutely changes the dynamic. Art teachers tend to be jaded artists, like if they had the choice they would have chosen anything but teach. Whereas, this is, “I’m choosing because you the students are important. You’re teaching me as much as I’m teaching you.” It’s powerful, it will make a difference for the future of music.

All of that, to speak about demystification. Ask questions, always, ask questions.

Are there things when you were a student, or first starting out, that you wish you had known you could’ve just avoided in the first place?

I guess two things: Keep your eyes open. Keep your eyes open in regards to yourself, check in with how you are feeling, do it often. Look at the people around you, notice how they make you feel. But mostly take care of yourself. Of your heart and take care of your love for the music. Don’t let the love for the music rot. Take care of it. That is the only thing that will keep you going, if you don’t take care of that you will have a short career. So take care of that first and foremost: your love for the music, and the joy you find in making it, playing it, hearing it.

Trust yourself and always follow your intuition. It’s important to listen to others, but it’s equally important to listen to yourself. Be patient, and don’t try to rush making or releasing music. Or better, don’t rush anything. Be disciplined, but don’t rush. Be disciplined and always thrive to be better. Time always benefits art, I feel everybody’s in a rush now. Just take your time. With whatever it is you’re making, with how it sounds, and looks, and feels, and with finding the right people to surround yourself with. There’s no rush.

Ela Minus recommends

Small is beautiful.

There are many different ways in which to grow.

You can always say no.<br

Exercise your will often.

The space in which you can carve your own path is infinite


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Brandon Stosuy.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/14/musician-ela-minus-on-having-more-power-over-your-work/feed/ 0 544238
Five Things You Can Do When ICE Comes To Your Neighborhood #politics #trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/13/five-things-you-can-do-when-ice-comes-to-your-neighborhood-politics-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/13/five-things-you-can-do-when-ice-comes-to-your-neighborhood-politics-trump/#respond Sun, 13 Jul 2025 20:53:53 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a2d8128db4d32969f07b630693086d6c
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/13/five-things-you-can-do-when-ice-comes-to-your-neighborhood-politics-trump/feed/ 0 544206
The POWER of Admitting "I Don’t Know" #psychology #physics https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/13/the-power-of-admitting-i-dont-know-psychology-physics/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/13/the-power-of-admitting-i-dont-know-psychology-physics/#respond Sun, 13 Jul 2025 13:00:19 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=7af42dab7207daede56420c13b705a26
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/13/the-power-of-admitting-i-dont-know-psychology-physics/feed/ 0 544186
Trump’s Budget Is a Huge Giveaway For the Private Prison Industry #politics #trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/trumps-budget-is-a-huge-giveaway-for-the-private-prison-industry-politics-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/trumps-budget-is-a-huge-giveaway-for-the-private-prison-industry-politics-trump/#respond Sat, 12 Jul 2025 18:52:54 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=982d9168237e306d463b9fe59ad74184
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/trumps-budget-is-a-huge-giveaway-for-the-private-prison-industry-politics-trump/feed/ 0 544131
Is the universe CONSPIRING on our BEHALF? #universe #psychology https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/is-the-universe-conspiring-on-our-behalf-universe-psychology/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/is-the-universe-conspiring-on-our-behalf-universe-psychology/#respond Sat, 12 Jul 2025 13:00:49 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f66eddf6fc9a4e4c71e84ca0f7531663
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/12/is-the-universe-conspiring-on-our-behalf-universe-psychology/feed/ 0 544114
The Lucas Plan at 50: A Radical Investment in Society, Not the War Machine https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-lucas-plan-at-50-a-radical-investment-in-society-not-the-war-machine-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-lucas-plan-at-50-a-radical-investment-in-society-not-the-war-machine-2/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 23:12:47 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=c9b6edb8de86d4dadd2ebe6e8e76c10d
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-lucas-plan-at-50-a-radical-investment-in-society-not-the-war-machine-2/feed/ 0 544062
The Lucas Plan at 50: A Radical Investment in Society, Not the War Machine https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-lucas-plan-at-50-a-radical-investment-in-society-not-the-war-machine/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-lucas-plan-at-50-a-radical-investment-in-society-not-the-war-machine/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 21:00:06 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=da140c5863ebbb2444081f88b38447a5
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-lucas-plan-at-50-a-radical-investment-in-society-not-the-war-machine/feed/ 0 544054
‘Media and Corporate Power Structures See Genuine Democracy as a Terrible Danger’: CounterSpin interview with Jeff Cohen and Norman Solomon on Mamdani and the Democrats https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/media-and-corporate-power-structures-see-genuine-democracy-as-a-terrible-danger-counterspin-interview-with-jeff-cohen-and-norman-solomon-on-mamdani-and-the-democrats/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/media-and-corporate-power-structures-see-genuine-democracy-as-a-terrible-danger-counterspin-interview-with-jeff-cohen-and-norman-solomon-on-mamdani-and-the-democrats/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 19:26:09 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046460  

Janine Jackson interviewed RootsAction’s Jeff Cohen and Norman Solomon about Zohran Mamdani and the Democratic Party for the July 4, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

New York: Zohran Mamdani Crashes the Party

New York (5/20/25)

Janine Jackson: In early June, Raina Lipsitz explained for FAIR.org how media can write about a political candidate in a way that sows doubt about their fitness without attacking them directly. “How to Subtly Undermine a Promising Left-Wing Candidate,” it was headlined.

Since then, Zohran Mamdani, who New York magazine described as “Crash[ing] the Party,” has won the Democratic mayoral primary here in New York City, and things have got a lot less subtle. We have billionaire hedge fund manager Bill Ackman declaring that he will bankroll anyone—you hear that? anyone—who will keep Mamdani out of office. Breaking news as we record, Ackman has said current Mayor Eric Adams will be recipient of his riches—not, as he’s declared, due to any particular fitness on Adams’ part, but because he fills the brief of not being Zohran Mamdani.

Suffice to say, fissures are being revealed, lines are being drawn. And whatever you think of Mamdani or New York City in particular, the question of whether the Democratic Party, as it is, wants to be a part of the future or not is on the table.

And here’s the thing: Plenty of people are not being scared off by the idea that things could change. Elite media have no place in their brain for this concept, and we can expect to confront coverage reflecting that.

Joining me now to talk about this revealing, interesting moment are two people near and dear. Jeff Cohen is the founder of FAIR, founding director of the Park Center for Independent Media at Ithaca College, author of Cable News Confidential and many other things.

Norman Solomon, also in at FAIR’s founding, is executive director of the Institute for Public Accuracy, and author of numerous titles, including War Made Invisible: How America Hides the Human Toll of Its Military Machine, out in a new paperback edition.

They are, together, co-founders of the independent initiative RootsAction, where Jeff is policy director and Norman is national director. They both join me now by phone from wherever they are. Jeff and Norman, welcome back to CounterSpin.

Norman Solomon: Thanks a lot, Janine.

Jeff Cohen: Great to be with you.

New York Times: Our Advice to Voters in a Vexing Race for New York Mayor

New York Times (6/16/25)

JJ: They’re talking about Mamdani, but they’re telling us about themselves, and the values they represent all the time. I’m talking about news media.

So it’s worth taking a second to breathe in this New York Times editorial; I call it the “sniff heard round the world”: “He is a democratic socialist who too often ignores the unavoidable trade-offs of governance.”

There’s just one sentence, but there’s a lot to unpack. The “trade-offs” for good governance: It’s hard to think of a clearer example of media’s transmission of the idea that somehow politics isn’t really for people. So, Jeff, Norman, why would anyone ask why people are disaffected with electoral politics, when this is the smart person’s explanation of how they work?

JC: It’s pretty revealing when you look at New York Times editorials, because I think middle-of-the-road news consumers, liberal news consumers, they know not to trust Fox News, owned by Rupert Murdoch, or Murdoch’s New York Post. People understand that’s right-wing propaganda.

The moment we’re in, Janine, as you’re suggesting, it’s a teachable moment. Now people are realizing you can’t trust the New York Times, either. You can’t trust these corporate centrist news outlets.

You bring up a Times editorial. Last August, the Times said that they were no longer going to make endorsements in local or state races, but eight days before this primary election, they wrote an editorial that you would’ve thought they wrote so that the billionaires who were funding Cuomo, with this dark money Super PAC known as Fix the City, that was funded by Michael Bloomberg, it was funded by DoorDash, it was funded by Bill Ackman, the hedge fund guy….

It’s almost like the New York Times wrote an editorial attacking Mamdani, after they said they would no longer be making endorsements in local races, it’s almost like they were writing it so they could provide ad copy to Fix the City and attack ads.

Norman Solomon

Norman Solomon: “Chief Justice John Jay…said, ‘Those who own the country ought to govern it.’ And that’s really the tacit assumption and belief from the huge media.” (Photo: Cheryl Higgins.)

And I watched the NBA, the pro basketball playoffs, on WABC, channel 7 New York City, and they kept quoting the editorial in the attack ads against Zohran Mamdani. And one of the quotes was, “He’s got an agenda uniquely unsuited to the city’s challenges.” Another quote, “He shows little concern about the disorder of the past decade.” And then, “We do not believe Mr. Mandani deserves a spot on New Yorker’s ballots.” So you had quote after quote.

When the editorial writers of the New York Times are writing an attack on a mayoral candidate like Zohran Mamdani, and they know that there’s a dark money PAC that’s spending millions of dollars to attack him—basically, they were writing copy. And every time a coach during the NBA playoffs called a timeout, I cringed, because I knew there’d be another attack ad that I’d be watching against Mamdani.

NS: To get into the sports metaphor, in the news department, they’re supposed to be referees; they don’t have their hands on the scale. They’re simply reporting the news. But the tonality of coverage, not just in the New York Times, but elite media generally, has been skeptical to alarmed to setting off the sirens that something terrible might be about to happen if the New York City voters don’t wake up.

And when the New York Times editorials talk about something like trade-offs, what they mean is that there is a transactional world that they believe is about democracy, or should be, their version of democracy. I recalled the statement from the first Supreme Court Chief Justice John Jay, who said, “Those who own the country ought to govern it.” And that’s really the tacit assumption and belief from the huge media that, after all, have billions of dollars in assets. That’s what they are accustomed to trying to look out for and protect. I think it’s notable that there’s a long pattern, I mean this has been going for decades.

NYT: The Jobs We Need

New York Times (6/24/20)

And, again, we’re talking about Fox News and so forth, we’re talking about the New York Times, and in its editorials, the wisdom of its handpicked and, we’re told, very well-informed, erudite editorial board—-a few years ago when Bernie Sanders was surging in the primaries, and it looked like he might be the Democratic presidential nominee, the New York Times went into overdrive of alarm. They published a very big editorial saying Bernie Sanders is just not qualified to be president. He’s dangerous. These socialistic ideas just won’t work.

And after that, years went by, and the New York Times ran a huge editorial about how horrible it is that there’s so much income inequality in the United States, and it’s getting worse and worse, the gap between the very wealthy and the middle class and the poor.

And I think that is really a replica of the split screen approach of the New York Times and the media establishment, which is, on the one hand, to make sure that progressive candidates don’t get very far, if they have anything to say about it as news media outlets. And on the other hand, it’s sort of victims without victimizers, the moaning that there’s poverty and there’s income inequality that’s become so extreme, but there are no victimizers, and certainly Wall Street should be protected rather than attacked.

JC: The beauty of the Mamdani campaign—multiethnic, multigenerational—is there were thousands and thousands of volunteers knocking on doors, and many of them are young. This reminds me of the Bernie Sanders campaign that Norman brought up. Many of them are getting a real education that you can’t trust the right-wing media, and you also can’t trust the media that sees itself as corporate center or corporate liberal.

I love, in the editorial of the Times, eight days before the primary: “Many New Yorkers are understandably disappointed by the Democratic field.” Well, there were some New Yorkers disappointed: It was the New York Times editorial board, which was blasting Mamdani, but they couldn’t, as they usually do, endorse the corporate centrist Cuomo, or be nice to him, because of all of his scandals.

But when it comes to New Yorkers as a whole, they were pretty enthused by the Democratic field, because voter turnout was the biggest in 36 years. So I think what we’re getting here is a real education about how the media spectrum is center-right, including from the New York Times to the New York Post, from the Washington Post to the Washington Times, from MSNBC to Fox News, it’s basically a center-right spectrum. And when a candidate is outside of that spectrum, proposing ideas that are rarely heard inside the center-right spectrum, and is popular, that’s when even the corporate liberal, the corporate centrist media, freak out.

Truthout: Democratic Senator Gillibrand Goes on Islamophobic Rant Against Mamdani

Truthout (6/27/25)

JJ: The first tool in the quiver is blatant Islamophobia. Folks will have seen Senator Gillibrand’s unhinged rant. And we see the distortion and the weaponization of antisemitism. And I just wonder, Norman, Jeff, what you have to say about the idea of using antisemitism as somehow a go-to to attack a candidate who has made very clear—and I mean, again, it’s not about Mamdani, it’s just about the utility of this tool to pull out against anyone who’s trying to do anything different.

NS: It’s really a very strong, powerful and pernicious combination of the zeal to, at all costs, protect corporate power and to protect Israel, which, after all, Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch both unequivocally reported last December, continues to engage in genocide in Gaza. So this is a very powerful and I think dangerous confluence of the concentration of power in the United States.

And all you have to do is read the screed that was put out, hours after Zohran Mamdani won the primary, by Bill Ackman, whose net worth is upward of $9 billion. And the accusation, and I’m quoting here, was “socialism has no place in the economic capital of our country,” and also accusing Mamdani of being anti-Israel and antisemitic. And so that combination is really part of the—I won’t say witches brew, it’s a warlock’s brew of the power structure in the capital of capitalism in the United States, in New York City.

And we’re seeing this in so many different guises, certainly in media, it is pervasive, whether it is the New York Times or the Washington Times or the Wall Street Journal, that’s a part of the theme. And it’s also coming from the power structure of the Democratic Party. The two most prominent New Yorkers in Congress, both, as we speak, are refusing to endorse Zohran Mamdani, even though they are Democrats, he’s a Democrat.

And we’ve had, for instance, the House minority leader, Hakeem Jeffries, of course from New York City, saying that when he’s asked whether he’s going to endorse, the reply is, Well, Mamdani has to show New Yorkers that his Jewish residents of New York City are people who he wants to protect. Well, that’s preposterous, and it’s really a way of saying that if you are not supporting Israel with its genocide, then we have reasons to think that you wouldn’t protect Jews, which is an absurdity with an agenda. It’s part of a decades-long scam in media and politics in the United States that equates Israel with Judaism, and Israel with quote “the Jewish people.”

JJ: And that erases masses of New York Jewish people and Jewish people around the country; they’re completely erased in this conversation, as though they were not speaking their truth and their values and their opposition to Israeli actions.

NYT: A New Political Star Emerges Out of a Fractured Democratic Party

New York Times (6/25/25)

JC: Janine, there was a New York Times news story the day after Mamdani won the primary, and it had this reference that Mamdani’s “running on a far-left agenda, including positions that once were politically risky in New York—like describing Israel’s actions in Gaza as genocide, calling for new taxes on business.”

Well, FAIR has pointed out that, for decades, the polls have shown that even though we have a very narrow debate in mainstream media between center and right, that on economic issues, the public is very progressive. So Pew did a poll in March, 63% of all US adults want taxes raised on large businesses and corporations. It’s been that way for decades. And the New York Times is telling us that’s “far-left” or “politically risky”?

And then, on the issue of Israel, the Jerusalem Center for Public Affairs did a poll of US Jews 14 months ago, May of last year, and found that back then, 30% of US Jews and 38% of US Jews under the age of 44, they were calling what Israel was doing in Gaza genocide. Those numbers are much huger now. So there are a couple million Jews in the US that are calling what Israel is doing in Gaza “genocide.”

And yet in so many Mamdani articles, I see this comment, “He has emphatically denied accusations that he is antisemitic,” but yet the New York Times and other news coverage keeps emphasizing it.

We have evidence from Trump’s comments and Trump’s policies about his racism; but you don’t see, in every other article or every third article, “Mr. Trump has emphatically denied accusations that he is a racist.” But you keep hearing this in Mamdani coverage, and there’s no evidence at all that he’s antisemitic. He’s just critical of Israeli action in Gaza and elsewhere, as are millions of Jews in this country and around the world.

NYT: Chuck Schumer Isn’t Jewish Like the Pope Isn’t Catholic

New York Times (3/18/25)

NS: And very much, this kind of media coverage and messaging, it’s a toxic combination of Islamophobia and willingness to promote Israel as some kind of paragon of virtue, even while the genocide continues. I think there’s no clearer incarnation of this mix than Chuck Schumer, the minority leader in the Senate, the most powerful Democrat, arguably, in the country. And a few months ago, Chuck Schumer, in an interview with a very approving Bret Stephens, the columnist of the New York Times, said, and I quote, “My job is to keep the left pro-Israel.” Well, if that’s Chuck Schumer’s job, he clearly is falling short; he’s falling down on the job. And there’s a real panic here.

And then the other clearer aspect of what Chuck Schumer is providing nationally, in terms of politics and media, is his well-earned nickname, “the senator from Wall Street.” And that has been a nickname that he got decades ago. It got new heights just after the financial crisis of 2008. By the following year, the fall of 2009, he had received more than 15% of all the year’s contributions to every senator, from Wall Street.

And when you look at the last year’s donations, when the Schumer campaign committee had to report to the FEC, the six-year donor total for Schumer was $43 million. And more than a quarter of that just came from the financial sector, the real estate interest and law firms and lawyers.

Well, clearly, the real estate interests are going crazy right now, because they’re afraid of a rent freeze. They’re afraid of social justice. They want their outlandish profits to be remaining in full force. So this is really a class war being waged, through media and politics, from the top down.

JJ: And the energy that we get is very much “let’s you and him fight,” you know? Racism, Islamophobia and, yes, antisemitism are all tools that powerful rich people take up to protect their power and riches. It’s much beyond Mamdani, it’s beyond Bernie Sanders. It’s beyond any individual candidate. They will pit us against one another, and then maybe we won’t notice that we’re being robbed blind. That’s the big picture, in some ways.

JC: Agreed. The threat of Mamdani is he’s such a unifier, and that people of various ethnicities, generations, they’ve united behind him. They heard his message, in spite of the millions of dollars of attack ads, and mainstream media seem to be freaking out, from right to center.

Rising Up: Mamdani’s Winning Socialist Vision

Rising Up (7/2/25)

JJ: I think it’s important to understand that he’s not a unicorn. Sonali Kolhatkar had a show the other day: Across the country, there are people, there are candidates, rising up. There are people who are unapologetic, and they’re resisting the nightmare that you can put Trump’s face on, but it’s not his alone. We know it’s a bigger systemic problem.

We’re talking about Mamdani. Mamdani is not alone. There are folks rising up.

And let me just say, finally, we’re talking about a void, in terms of public understanding and information and energy, and it’s a void that you both have long identified. And that’s why RootsAction exists, right? It’s like people are tired of “Democrat versus Republican,” and want a place to put their energy that is neither of those.

NS: Yeah. Well, the media and corporate power structures, that are so interlaced, to put it mildly, they see genuine democracy as a terrible danger, and any semblance of horizontal discourse in media and politics, and people organizing and communicating with each other, that’s just a terrible threat to the hold that the gazillionaires have on the political process.

Jeff Cohen

Jeff Cohen: “These billionaires believe that there should be only two choices, and they should both be acceptable to the billionaires.” (Creative Commons photo: Jim Naureckas.)

JC: These billionaires believe that there should be only two choices, and they should both be acceptable to the billionaires.

So you had AIPAC, powerful Israel-right-or-wrong lobby, intervening in Democratic primaries with Republican money, and knocking out progressive congressmembers like Jamaal Bowman in New York and Cori Bush in Missouri. And once you knock out the progressive candidate, and you’ve chosen the Democrat and you’re a right-wing lobby, AIPAC, which loves the Republicans, well, you have both candidates in the race, you cannot lose. That’s not democracy.

And mainstream media understands that’s not democracy when they’re always pointing out, accurately, that the supreme leader of Iran gets to choose and sanction who gets to run for president, who doesn’t. Well, if you’re these billionaires, they believe they should choose both choices for you, and limit those choices, and they freak out when there’s more than just the two choices that they like.

JJ: And then I would say, media make it their job to pretend that, actually, you’re choosing from all the available, reasonable options.

JC: Yeah, if ever there was a time for news media, and thank God we have independent news outlets in New York and elsewhere, and we have nonprofit news outlets in New York and elsewhere. This is a really educational moment about how flawed the democratic system is, how the democracy is so constrained by this money.

And who never complains about campaign finance? The television channels that get all the money from the billionaires to attack a Mamdani in favor of a Cuomo. And now we’re going to get millions of dollars of ads against Mamdani in favor of a very corrupt incumbent Mayor Eric Adams.

But, again, this should be an educational moment about how limited democracy is, and journalists should be explaining the problems of democracy, when the billionaires can have this much power over every aspect of the race.

NS: As we’ve been saying, this is a teachable moment, and it’s a learnable moment. And so many people are learning that the gazillionaires are freaking out.

JJ: We’ve been speaking with authors, activists, RootsAction’s co-founders Jeff Cohen and Norman Solomon. You can start with their work online at RootsAction.org. It will not end there. Thank you, both Jeff and Norman, for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

JC: Thank you, Janine.

NS: Thanks a lot, Janine.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/media-and-corporate-power-structures-see-genuine-democracy-as-a-terrible-danger-counterspin-interview-with-jeff-cohen-and-norman-solomon-on-mamdani-and-the-democrats/feed/ 0 544032
Firing Line: Robert Greenwald Chronicles the Killing of Combat Correspondents and Children in Gaza https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/firing-line-robert-greenwald-chronicles-the-killing-of-combat-correspondents-and-children-in-gaza/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/firing-line-robert-greenwald-chronicles-the-killing-of-combat-correspondents-and-children-in-gaza/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 19:24:43 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/firing-line-robert-greenwald-chronicles-the-killing-of-combat-correspondents-and-children-in-gaza-rampell-20250711/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Ed Rampell.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/firing-line-robert-greenwald-chronicles-the-killing-of-combat-correspondents-and-children-in-gaza/feed/ 0 544039
The Real Reason Churches Advocate for Vouchers https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-real-reason-churches-advocate-for-vouchers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-real-reason-churches-advocate-for-vouchers/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 19:11:03 +0000 https://progressive.org/public-schools-advocate/the-real-reason-churches-advocate-for-vouchers-repino-20250711/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Robert Repino.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-real-reason-churches-advocate-for-vouchers/feed/ 0 544015
Brazil: Thousands protest Trump’s tariffs and interference in Brazilian courts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/brazil-thousands-protest-trumps-tariffs-and-interference-in-brazilian-courts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/brazil-thousands-protest-trumps-tariffs-and-interference-in-brazilian-courts/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 18:05:34 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335415 On Thursday, thousands protested in Brazil against US President Donald Trump and his attempt to interfere in Brazil’s judicial system. This is episode 57 of Stories of Resistance.]]>

Thousands on the streets of Brazil, Sao Paulo’s Paulista Avenue packed, angry and protesting US President Donald Trump and his imposition of 50% tariffs on Brazilian products. Trump’s new tariffs on Brazil are in response to the country’s trial against Trump ally, former far-right Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro. 

Bolsonaro is accused of leading a “criminal organization” that looked to stop his successor Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva from assuming the presidency after he won the 2022 elections. The Brazilian courts will decide. Trump has other plans. But Brazilian leaders say they won’t back down. 

“If there’s one thing a government cannot tolerate, it’s interference by one country in the sovereignty of another,” said Brazilian President Lula. “And even more seriously, interference by a president of another country in the Brazilian justice system.”

This is episode 57 of Stories of Resistance—a podcast co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, we’ll bring you stories of resistance like this. Inspiration for dark times.

Sign up for the Stories of Resistance podcast feed, either in SpotifyApple PodcastsSpreaker, or wherever you listen.

Please consider supporting this podcast and Michael Fox’s reporting on his Patreon accountpatreon.com/mfox. There you can also see exclusive pictures, video, and interviews. 

Written and produced by Michael Fox.

RESOURCES

Transcript

Thousands on the streets of Brazil, Sao Paulo’s Paulista Avenue packed, angry and protesting US President Donald Trump and his imposition of 50% tariffs on Brazilian products.

“We are so profoundly indignant against US imperialism, represented by Donald Trump,” says a man on the microphone. “This is shocking interference in Brazilian affairs.”

They light an effigy of Trump on fire. The Brazilians in the streets will not be silent. Trump’s new tariffs on Brazil are in response to the country’s trial against Trump ally former far-right Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro. Bolsonaro is accused of leading a “criminal organization” that looked to stop his successor Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva from assuming the presidency after he won the 2022 elections.

Bolsonaro’s supporters took the streets for months after Lula won. They invaded buildings in the Brazilian capital on January 8, 2023… in a copycat performance of the January 6 Capitol invasion in Washington. According to a 900-page Federal Police report, Bolsonaro and the coup plotters allegedly planned to assassinate Lula, his vice president, and the Brazilian Supreme Court judge Alexandre de Moraes.

The Brazilian courts will decide the legal channel for responding to one of the most serious threats on the country’s democracy in years.

But Trump has other plans. He doesn’t want legal channels. He wants maximum pressure. And he doesn’t mind interfering in the affairs of a foreign country. So, this week, he called the trial against Bolsonaro a “witch hunt” and levied a 50% tariff on the country. 

But Brazil is not about to back down.

“If there’s one thing a government cannot tolerate, it’s interference by one country in the sovereignty of another,” said Brazilian President Lula. “And even more seriously, interference by a president of another country in the Brazilian justice system.”

Lula promised a reciprocal tariff on US goods if Trump’s Brazil tariffs go into effect. And Brazilians are angry and in the streets. International resistance against foreign US intervention on behalf of Trump defending his far right political allies.

Bolsonaro is already banned from holding office in Brazil until 2030 for spreading disinformation and lies against the country’s electoral system.

Hi folks, thanks for listening. I’m your host Michael Fox.

As you may have noticed, today’s episode is a little different. This news is hot off the presses this week. The protests were just yesterday. But I thought it was really important to highlight this moment right now.

I did a series of reporting for my podcast Brazil on Fire on the pro-Bolsonaro protests following Lula’s 2022 electoral victory and the Brazilian capitol invasion on January 8. You can check those out in my podcast Brazil on Fire. I’ll add some links in the show notes. 

Also, if you like what you hear and enjoy this podcast, please consider becoming a subscriber on my Patreon. It’s only a few dollars a month. I have a ton of exclusive content there only available to my supporters. Including exclusive pictures, videos and interviews. Every supporter really makes a difference. Please check it out. You can find that on patreon.com/mfox. I’ll also add a link in the show notes.

This is episode 57 of Stories of Resistance, a podcast series co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, I bring you stories of resistance and hope like this. Inspiration for dark times. If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment or leave a review.

Thanks for listening. See you next time.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/brazil-thousands-protest-trumps-tariffs-and-interference-in-brazilian-courts/feed/ 0 544007
Brazil: Thousands protest Trump’s tariffs and interference in Brazilian courts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/brazil-thousands-protest-trumps-tariffs-and-interference-in-brazilian-courts-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/brazil-thousands-protest-trumps-tariffs-and-interference-in-brazilian-courts-2/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 18:05:34 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335415 On Thursday, thousands protested in Brazil against US President Donald Trump and his attempt to interfere in Brazil’s judicial system. This is episode 57 of Stories of Resistance.]]>

Thousands on the streets of Brazil, Sao Paulo’s Paulista Avenue packed, angry and protesting US President Donald Trump and his imposition of 50% tariffs on Brazilian products. Trump’s new tariffs on Brazil are in response to the country’s trial against Trump ally, former far-right Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro. 

Bolsonaro is accused of leading a “criminal organization” that looked to stop his successor Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva from assuming the presidency after he won the 2022 elections. The Brazilian courts will decide. Trump has other plans. But Brazilian leaders say they won’t back down. 

“If there’s one thing a government cannot tolerate, it’s interference by one country in the sovereignty of another,” said Brazilian President Lula. “And even more seriously, interference by a president of another country in the Brazilian justice system.”

This is episode 57 of Stories of Resistance—a podcast co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, we’ll bring you stories of resistance like this. Inspiration for dark times.

Sign up for the Stories of Resistance podcast feed, either in SpotifyApple PodcastsSpreaker, or wherever you listen.

Please consider supporting this podcast and Michael Fox’s reporting on his Patreon accountpatreon.com/mfox. There you can also see exclusive pictures, video, and interviews. 

Written and produced by Michael Fox.

RESOURCES

Transcript

Thousands on the streets of Brazil, Sao Paulo’s Paulista Avenue packed, angry and protesting US President Donald Trump and his imposition of 50% tariffs on Brazilian products.

“We are so profoundly indignant against US imperialism, represented by Donald Trump,” says a man on the microphone. “This is shocking interference in Brazilian affairs.”

They light an effigy of Trump on fire. The Brazilians in the streets will not be silent. Trump’s new tariffs on Brazil are in response to the country’s trial against Trump ally former far-right Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro. Bolsonaro is accused of leading a “criminal organization” that looked to stop his successor Luiz Inacio Lula da Silva from assuming the presidency after he won the 2022 elections.

Bolsonaro’s supporters took the streets for months after Lula won. They invaded buildings in the Brazilian capital on January 8, 2023… in a copycat performance of the January 6 Capitol invasion in Washington. According to a 900-page Federal Police report, Bolsonaro and the coup plotters allegedly planned to assassinate Lula, his vice president, and the Brazilian Supreme Court judge Alexandre de Moraes.

The Brazilian courts will decide the legal channel for responding to one of the most serious threats on the country’s democracy in years.

But Trump has other plans. He doesn’t want legal channels. He wants maximum pressure. And he doesn’t mind interfering in the affairs of a foreign country. So, this week, he called the trial against Bolsonaro a “witch hunt” and levied a 50% tariff on the country. 

But Brazil is not about to back down.

“If there’s one thing a government cannot tolerate, it’s interference by one country in the sovereignty of another,” said Brazilian President Lula. “And even more seriously, interference by a president of another country in the Brazilian justice system.”

Lula promised a reciprocal tariff on US goods if Trump’s Brazil tariffs go into effect. And Brazilians are angry and in the streets. International resistance against foreign US intervention on behalf of Trump defending his far right political allies.

Bolsonaro is already banned from holding office in Brazil until 2030 for spreading disinformation and lies against the country’s electoral system.

Hi folks, thanks for listening. I’m your host Michael Fox.

As you may have noticed, today’s episode is a little different. This news is hot off the presses this week. The protests were just yesterday. But I thought it was really important to highlight this moment right now.

I did a series of reporting for my podcast Brazil on Fire on the pro-Bolsonaro protests following Lula’s 2022 electoral victory and the Brazilian capitol invasion on January 8. You can check those out in my podcast Brazil on Fire. I’ll add some links in the show notes. 

Also, if you like what you hear and enjoy this podcast, please consider becoming a subscriber on my Patreon. It’s only a few dollars a month. I have a ton of exclusive content there only available to my supporters. Including exclusive pictures, videos and interviews. Every supporter really makes a difference. Please check it out. You can find that on patreon.com/mfox. I’ll also add a link in the show notes.

This is episode 57 of Stories of Resistance, a podcast series co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, I bring you stories of resistance and hope like this. Inspiration for dark times. If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment or leave a review.

Thanks for listening. See you next time.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/brazil-thousands-protest-trumps-tariffs-and-interference-in-brazilian-courts-2/feed/ 0 544008
Some Texas Officials Didn’t Respond to Flood Alerts, Echoing the Tragedies of Hurricane Helene https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/some-texas-officials-didnt-respond-to-flood-alerts-echoing-the-tragedies-of-hurricane-helene/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/some-texas-officials-didnt-respond-to-flood-alerts-echoing-the-tragedies-of-hurricane-helene/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 17:45:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/texas-flooding-evacuations-hurricane-helene by Jennifer Berry Hawes

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up for Dispatches, a newsletter that spotlights wrongdoing around the country, to receive our stories in your inbox every week.

Nine months ago, Hurricane Helene barreled up from the Gulf of Mexico and slammed into the rugged mountains of western North Carolina, dumping a foot of rain onto an already saturated landscape. More than 100 people died, most by drowning in floodwaters or being crushed by water-fueled landslides.

“We had no idea it was going to do what it did,” said Jeff Howell, the now-retired emergency manager in Yancey County, North Carolina, a rural expanse that suffered the most deaths per capita.

A week ago, the remnants of Tropical Storm Barry slipped up from the coast of Mexico, drawing moisture from the Gulf, then collided with another system and inundated rivers and creeks in hilly south central Texas. More than 100 people are confirmed dead, many of them children, with more missing.

“We had no reason to believe that this was going to be anything like what’s happened here — none whatsoever,” said County Judge Rob Kelly, the top elected official in Kerr County, Texas, where most of the deaths occurred.

The similarities between North Carolina and Texas extend beyond the words of these two officials. In both disasters, there was a disconnect between accurate weather alerts and on-the-ground action that could have saved lives.

Officials in each of those places were warned. The National Weather Service sent urgent alerts about potentially life-threatening danger hours in advance of the flash floods, leaving time to notify and try to evacuate people in harm’s way.

In Texas, some local officials did just that. But others did not.

Similarly, a ProPublica investigation found that when Helene hit on Sept. 27, some local officials in North Carolina issued evacuation orders. At least five counties in Helene’s path, including Yancey, did not. Howell said the enormity of the storm was far worse than anyone alive had ever seen and that he notified residents as best he could.

The National Weather Service described Helene’s approach for days. It sent out increasingly dire alerts warning of dangerous flash flooding and landslides. Its staff spoke directly with local emergency managers and held webinar updates. A Facebook message the regional office posted around 1 p.m. the day before Helene hit warned of “significant to catastrophic, life-threatening flooding” in the mountains. “This will be one of the most significant weather events to happen in the western portions of the area in the modern era.”

Similarly, in Texas, the weather service warned of potential for flash flooding the day before. Also that day, the state emergency management agency’s regional director had “personally contacted” county judges, mayors and others “in that area and notified them all of potential flooding,” Lt. Gov. Dan Patrick later said at a press conference.

AccuWeather, a commercial weather forecasting service, issued the first flash flood warnings for the area at 12:44 a.m. on July 4, roughly three hours before the catastrophic flooding. A half-hour later, at 1:14 a.m., the National Weather Service sent a similar warning to two specific areas, including central Kerr County, where the Guadalupe River’s banks and hills are dotted with vacation homes, summer camps and campgrounds — many filled with July 4 vacationers slumbering in cabins and RVs.

“Flash flooding is ongoing or expected to begin shortly,” the weather service alert said. Impacts could include “life threatening flash flooding of creeks and streams.”

A severity descriptor on that alert sent it to weather radios and the nation’s Wireless Emergency Alerts system, which blasts weather warnings to cellphones to blare an alarm.

AccuWeather’s chief meteorologist, Jonathan Porter, was dismayed to hear news later that all the children attending youth camps in Kerr County had not been ushered to higher ground despite those warnings.

At Camp Mystic, a beloved century-old Christian summer camp for girls, at least 27 campers and counselors were killed. Six still haven’t been found. Its director also died, while trying to rescue children. (People at the camp said they received little to no help from the authorities, according to The New York Times.)

“I was very concerned to see that campers were awoken not by someone coming to tell them to evacuate based on timely warnings issued but rather by rapidly rising water that was going up to the second level of their bunkbeds,” Porter said.

In the area, known as Flash Flood Alley, Porter called this “a tragedy of the worst sort” because it appeared camps and local officials could have mobilized sooner in response to the alerts.

“There was plenty of time to evacuate people to higher ground,” Porter said. “The question is, Why did that not happen?”

But Dalton Rice, city manager of Kerrville, the county seat, said at a press conference the next day that “there wasn’t a lot of time” to communicate the risk to camps because the floodwaters rose so rapidly.

Rice said that at 3:30 a.m. — more than two hours after the flash flood warnings began — he went jogging near the Guadalupe River to check it out but didn’t see anything concerning.

But 13 miles upriver from the park where he was jogging, the river began — at 3:10 a.m. — to rise 25 feet in just two hours.

At 4:03 a.m., the weather service upgraded the warning to an “emergency”— its most severe flash flood alert — with a tag of “catastrophic.” It singled out the Guadalupe River at Hunt in Kerr County: “This is a PARTICULARLY DANGEROUS SITUATION. SEEK HIGHER GROUND NOW!”

The local sheriff said he wasn’t made aware of the flooding until 4 to 5 a.m. He has declined to say whether the local emergency manager, who is responsible for alerting the public to approaching storms, was awake when the flash flood warnings went out starting at 1 a.m. The Texas Tribune reported that Kerrville’s mayor said he wasn’t aware of the flooding until around 5:30 a.m., when the city manager called and woke him up.

Local officials have refused to provide more details, saying they are focused on finding the more than 100 people still missing and notifying loved ones of deaths.

First image: Hurricane Helene’s aftermath in Asheville, North Carolina, last September. Second image: A search-and-rescue worker looks through debris on July 6 after flash flooding in Hunt, Texas. (First image: Sean Rayford/Getty Images. Second image: Jim Vondruska/Getty Images)

One challenge as disasters approach is that weather alerts often don’t reach the people in harm’s way.

In rural areas across Texas and North Carolina alike, cellphone service can be spotty on the best of days, and some people turn off alert notifications. In North Carolina’s remote mountains, many people live at least somewhat off the grid. The cell service isn’t great everywhere, and many aren’t glued to phones or social media. In Texas, Kerr County residents posted on Facebook complaints that they didn’t receive the weather service’s alerts while others said their phones blared all night with warnings.

Many counties also use apps to send their own alerts, often tailored to their specific rivers and roads. But residents must opt in to receive them. Kerr County uses CodeRed, but it isn’t clear what alerts it sent out overnight.

Pete Jensen has spent a long career in emergency management, including responding to the Sept. 11, 2001, terrorist attack. He served as an official at the Federal Emergency Management Agency during Hurricane Katrina and often ponders why more people don’t receive – and heed – weather alerts.

“There’s an awful lot of denial,” Jensen said. “Disasters happen to someone else. They don’t happen to me.” That can include local officials who “don’t always understand what their responsibilities are. They very often react like most humans do – in denial.”

There is one big difference between the disasters in Texas and North Carolina. In Texas, residents, journalists and others have demanded accountability from local officials. Gov. Greg Abbott has called the Legislature into special session starting July 21 to discuss flood warning systems, flood emergency communications and natural disaster preparation.

But that hasn’t happened in North Carolina. The state legislature has yet to discuss possible changes, such as expanding its Know Your Zone evacuation plan beyond the coast, or boost funding for local emergency managers. (Instead, lawmakers went home in late June without passing a full budget.) Many emergency managers, including in Yancey County, operate in rural areas with small tax bases and skeleton staffs.

“There still has not been an outcry here for, How do we do things differently?” said state Sen. Julie Mayfield, a Democrat from Asheville. “It still feels like we’re very much in recovery mode.”

North Carolina’s emergency management agency commissioned a review of its handling of the disaster. The report found the state agency severely understaffed, but it didn’t examine issues such as evacuations or local emergency managers’ actions before Helene hit.

Erika Andresen also lives in Asheville, a mountain city in the heart of Helene’s destruction, where she helps businesses prepare for disasters. A lawyer and former Army judge advocate, she also teaches emergency management. After Helene, she was among the few voices in North Carolina criticizing the lack of evacuations and other inactions ahead of the storm.

“I knew right away, both from my instinct and from my experience, that a lot of things went terribly wrong,” Andresen said. When she got pushback against criticizing local authorities in a time of crisis, she countered, “We need accountability.”


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Jennifer Berry Hawes.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/some-texas-officials-didnt-respond-to-flood-alerts-echoing-the-tragedies-of-hurricane-helene/feed/ 0 544016
Journalist shoved to the ground by police at immigration protest https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/journalist-shoved-to-the-ground-by-police-at-immigration-protest/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/journalist-shoved-to-the-ground-by-police-at-immigration-protest/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 17:36:05 +0000 https://pressfreedomtracker.us/all-incidents/journalist-shoved-to-the-ground-by-police-at-immigration-protest/

Freelance journalist Sean Beckner-Carmitchel was knocked to the ground by police and then struck in the back with a baton in Whittier, California, while documenting immigration protests on June 11, 2025.

The protests began June 6 in response to federal raids in and around LA of workplaces and areas where immigrant day laborers gathered, amid the Trump administration’s larger immigration crackdown. After demonstrators clashed with local law enforcement officers and federal agents, President Donald Trump called in the California National Guard and then the U.S. Marines over the objections of California Gov. Gavin Newsom and LA Mayor Karen Bass.

Beckner-Carmitchel told the U.S. Press Freedom Tracker that he was freelancing for the Los Angeles Public Press, reporting on demonstrations at the DoubleTree Hotel in Whittier, where protesters believed federal immigration officials were staying as they carried out raids throughout Los Angeles County.

In a post on the social platform Bluesky, Beckner-Carmitchel wrote that Whittier Police Department officers arrived after a window was broken. In photos and footage he posted, the officers appear to be positioned to prevent protesters from entering the hotel.

He told the Tracker that officers then came rushing out of the hotel to push back the crowd.

“When Whittier PD surged out of the hotel, an officer pushed me with his baton and I lost my balance and fell,” Beckner-Carmitchel said. “While I was on the ground, I also had an officer put his hand on me. I don’t necessarily want to call it a punch, but there was force.”

In footage he posted to Bluesky, officers can be seen charging forward, pushing the crowd with their batons and shouting “Back! Get the fuck back!” It appears that two officers pushed Beckner-Carmitchel, knocking him to the ground. As he begins to get up, another officer seems to rush toward him, striking and pushing the journalist back down despite him shouting, “Press! Press! Press!”

Beckner-Carmitchel told the Tracker he was able to get up once the officers had moved past him, but he was left with bruises on his left arm and hip.

In a statement posted on Instagram, the city of Whittier and the Whittier Police Department said that the claims that federal agents were staying at the hotel were incorrect.

“In response to an urgent plea from hotel management, a regional law enforcement response, led by the Whittier Police Department, was activated to help restore safety,” the statement said. “The crowd was safely dispersed around 2:00 a.m., with no injuries reported and no arrests made.”

Whittier police did not respond to a request for further comment.


This content originally appeared on U.S. Press Freedom Tracker: Incident Database and was authored by U.S. Press Freedom Tracker: Incident Database.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/journalist-shoved-to-the-ground-by-police-at-immigration-protest/feed/ 0 544030
What the government can do to you without due process https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/what-the-government-can-do-to-you-without-due-process/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/what-the-government-can-do-to-you-without-due-process/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 17:21:02 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335406 Demonstrators hold a rally in support of Kilmar Abrego Garcia outside federal court during a hearing in Greenbelt, Maryland on July 7, 2025, as a judge considers whether Garcia should be transferred from Tennessee to Maryland. Photo by JIM WATSON/AFP via Getty ImagesThe Trump administration is pushing immigrants into a legal black hole created by America’s failed drug war.]]> Demonstrators hold a rally in support of Kilmar Abrego Garcia outside federal court during a hearing in Greenbelt, Maryland on July 7, 2025, as a judge considers whether Garcia should be transferred from Tennessee to Maryland. Photo by JIM WATSON/AFP via Getty Images

“What Kilmar Abrego Garcia’s family is going through is just unimaginable,” says Baltimore-based journalist Baynard Woods, “but it is also what we’ve all allowed to happen over generations of letting the drug war and our deference to police departments erode the Fourth Amendment of the Constitution, which should protect us all from illegal search and seizure, such as these seizures that ICE is committing all around the country right now.” In this episode of Rattling the Bars, Mansa Musa and Woods discuss the US government’s case against Abrego Garcia—whom the Trump administration finally returned to US soil from El Salvador in June—and what the government can do to citizens and non-citizens alike when our right to due process is taken away.

Guest:

Additional resources:

Credits:

  • Producer / Videographer / Post-Production: Cameron Granadino
Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Mansa Musa:

Welcome to this edition of Rattling the Bars. I’m your host, Mansa Musa. Kilmar Abrego Garcia is a household name, and what makes him a household name is the manner in which he was kidnapped from this country and taken to El Salvador prison under the pretense that he was a gang member.

Where did the information come from to say he was a gang member? You’ll be surprised. Joining me today is Baynard Woods, a writer and journalist based in Baltimore. His work has appeared in the New York Times, the Guardian and the Washington Post, Oxford American Magazine, and many other publications.

He’s the co-author with Brandon Soderberg of I Got A Monster: The Rising Fall of America’s Most Corrupt Police Squad.

Thanks for joining me, Baynard.

Baynard Woods:

Great to be here. A long-time fan of the show.

Mansa Musa:

And so, you heard when I opened up. And the reason why I opened up because you was the one that reported on Garcia, Kilmar Garcia and the pretext that was used to initially say that he was a gang member. Talk about that.

Baynard Woods:

Yeah, so it was a couple months, actually, I think already into early May after he was first taken in mid-March off the streets, leaving a work site in Baltimore, headed down home to Prince George’s County. Pulled over into the Ikea right by the Ikea down there, parking lot. And then his family never saw him again.

And the federal government was citing a 2019 case in which he was pulled. He was stopped with three other men at a Home Depot. And one of the cops, Ivan Mendez is his name, identified and claimed that Kilmar Abrego Garcia was a gang member of MS-13.

And that was the case that banned him from being sent to El Salvador. The judge said that he couldn’t, and this was months later. He was locked up for months before the judge ruled that he couldn’t be sent back there because there was a good chance he could be tortured or harmed by a gang that he had refused to join there. Another irony of the story.

But three days later, it was only three days after writing that report that Ivan Mendez remained a police officer. He was suspended after those three days. He had already committed a crime in giving information about an investigation to a sex worker that he had a relationship with to help them avoid a police sting.

And so, he was ultimately criminally charged. The New Republic did some great reporting that revealed his name. And so, once we had that name, I was able to go in and find the do-not-call list of the Prince George’s County [inaudible 00:03:15]-

Mansa Musa:

State’s Attorney, yeah.

Baynard Woods:

… Prosecutor, State’s Attorney, and his name was on that list as someone that’s not allowed to testify.

And what that means is if they stop you for a traffic stop or anything else, their word isn’t good enough to hold you on or to be used in court. And so, the federal government was using the word of this cop that couldn’t stand up in traffic court to justify sending a man with no due process whatsoever to a offshore Gulag in the CECOT prison in El Salvador.

Mansa Musa:

And so, do you think it was in terms of that right there, because this was public information, so do you think that this was premeditated on part of federal government, one? And two, in your investigation, did they ever contact Prince George’s County State’s Attorney Aisha Braveboy to see why she put him on do-not-call list? Because they’re relying on the report of this officer. To your knowledge, one, why did they ignore it? And two, to your knowledge, did they ever contact Prince George’s County [inaudible 00:04:31]?

Baynard Woods:

I don’t think they did contact Braveboy or, I tried to speak with her and got a comment from her office, but I did get a copy. Part of it was one of the charges was redacted, but with Brandon Soderberg, who I wrote the book with, got a copy of his disciplinary, Mendez’s disciplinary charges from before.

And so, we do know that was why he was put on the do-not-call list. I don’t think that Homeland Security looked at that at all. I think they were all covering afterwards. I think they were just, we’ve over the last decades, as you well know, we’ve given up the Fourth Amendment in this country in many ways by allowing a racist drug war, making the worst assumptions about people that are arrested, newspapers running police allegation. Police say stories all the time.

And so, we have so little transparency around policing and so little accountability that I don’t think they ever bothered to look at who the cop was who wrote this. They had on paper that he was a gang member, and that’s all they wanted or needed.

Mansa Musa:

And let’s talk about that, because United States Senator Van Hollen, he had went to Visit Garcia. But he said, initially he went down there and tried to find out why, try to get them to send him back. And they pretty much ignored him because they saying, “Well, this is under Salvadoran jurisdiction. United States don’t have nothing to do with this no more.”

As it worked its way out, they just became more and more ridiculous in how they dialed down on hold on to the abuse. But he said, and I want you to address this, he said that Garcia’s, this is not unique case, that this is a particular practice that’s going on in the United States as they round up and kidnap people that they consider illegal aliens or undocumented workers.

In your investigation, have you seen that or have you maybe get a sense of that this particular mythology, and the mythology being, “Oh, you’re a gang member. You got locked up for and because of that, we can send you out.”

Not saying how the resolution of the case nor the fact that they saying, “I’m going to take you before the court and let the court, was supposed to make the determination on whether or not you had probable cause to proceed with this act.”

Have you in your investigation or do you see this as something that’s developing as we speak?

Baynard Woods:

Yeah, absolutely. I mean, it’s both a new strategy and the same old strategy of criminalizing street culture and street fashion. One of the reasons he was deemed a gang member was because he was wearing Chicago Bulls hat and jacket. And there’s been some great reporting on all of the Venezuelan… The signs of Venezuelan street culture that don’t necessarily have anything to do with gangs have been used as evidence to deport the hundreds of Venezuelans that have been just snatched up in exactly that same way.

The real difference with Abrego Garcia’s case is that there was a protective order prohibiting him from being sent to El Salvador. So, when they sent the Venezuelans to El Salvador, many of them thought they were being sent home, and so their mothers were preparing their rooms for him. They called, “I’m coming home,” and then they get sent to a prison for indeterminate length of time in El Salvador instead.

The reason that we know Abrego Garcia’s name, one of the main reasons is that it was illegal to send him to El Salvador, which was his country of origin because he had to flee from threats on his life for not joining a gang.

Mansa Musa:

And I read in your article where you cited that his family had a business. The gang was extorting them. They was paying. The gang wasn’t satisfied with that. They wanted the family members to join. Eventually he wound up in the United States. And Garcia, they paid to try to prevent him from being recruited by the gang.

When that didn’t work, they sent him them to the United States. So, all this information came out. All this was evidence initially, but let’s talk about now fast-forward. Okay, so after all this, they finally, in the face of being cited for contempt and possibly being the consequences of that being more severe than maintaining this farce, they finally sent him back. Where’d they send him back to?

Baynard Woods:

So, they sent him back to Tennessee, central Tennessee district, which is a pretty white and very conservative district, federal court district, much more so than Maryland where Judge Xinis is the one who’s been really at war with the administration to make sure that they facilitate his return. The Supreme Court agreed with Judge Xinis. So, the last thing they wanted to do was give him a fair due process in Maryland.

He was pulled over and videotaped in Tennessee in 2021 with a car of people. And the troopers believed that they were undocumented and that he was transporting them. They’re now using that. Just the same way that they used his earlier encounter in Maryland, they’re now using that as part of a two-count criminal indictment, charging him with trafficking. With transporting, not trafficking, they keep using the word, but of transporting undocumented people.

What they did, though, as they do in so many federal prosecutions especially, and they made it a conspiracy case, so it’s much harder for him to beat, and then they threw out all of these allegations and the indictment that they’re not charging him with, which means that they don’t have the evidence. They claim that he was transporting children. So, then they bring up both, child trafficker. They say that he was alleged to have abused women.

No evidence for any of these things. And this is what they do, as you know, in so many, especially in federal conspiracy cases, they’ll just load the indictments with other information that the press can pick up and use. And it colors our understanding of not only the individual case, but the way that justice works.

And so, it’s a real miscarriage. And they say they’ll be trying him in Tennessee, and they want him to remain incarcerated there until the trial.

Mansa Musa:

Right. And that right there, to your point, that discourages people from wanting to participate in the process. That discourage people from supporting people like Garcia because the arbitrary nature of the charges, one. And for the benefit of our audience, it’s standard procedure in this country that you be having the right due process of the law, the 14th Amendment.

It’s standard procedure that once you’re allegedly charged with something, then in order to be charged, they have to bring evidence, information to support those charges. This is standing practice in the country. You can’t just come up and say, “Oh, a person is a pick-pocketer or a shoplifter,” and then put me on a plane to El Salvador or put me or take me to a prison in California.

You have to have bring me before someone that’s going, and the accusing party got to submit their information to say, “This is why we believe that he fit this criteria to be sent to El Salvador.”

But they avoided that and avoided detention because they could never present that information. So, going forward, how do you think it’s going to play out now? Because now seem like, well, initially the reports were, and President Trump and the president of El Salvador, Bukele, I think is, pronounce his name, they was in the White House. And both of them was like, “Well, he not coming back,” or, “He’s not a United States citizen.”

I mean, so therefore we’re entitled to it. But going forward, how you think it’s going to play out in terms of what I just said? Because now it comes down to, okay, he had a day in court where he pled not guilty, but now it comes down to is he going to be allowed to submit information to exonerate him of this? Is the information that they had going to be looked at in order to exonerate him? Or are they going to still play this tape out and just keep throwing paint at the wall, and paint at the wall in this case be just different narrative, different charge narrative. What you think?

Baynard Woods:

I think they’re going to do the latter there. I mean, his lawyers are really fighting here in Maryland to have the case that they sued the government to bring him home not dropped, and to have sanctions brought against the government because of discovery violations, not giving them the information that they need to be able to work on their client’s behalf.

And I suspect, as is so often the case in our criminal system, that there will continue to be discovery violations. But it’s ultimately to say when they’re charging him simply with transporting undocumented people, I think they’ll be able to prove that relatively easy, that he had a car that had people in it, including himself, that were undocumented.

And so, they made it a charge that would be a really difficult charge for him to beat while then making all of these other unfounded insinuations. And so, I think what they’ll try to do is, especially with probably a white conservative jury in central Tennessee there, and then I think they will try to just deport him. And instead of deporting him to El Salvador, because there is that rule against deporting him there, I think they’ll try to deport him to-

Mansa Musa:

Somalia or something.

Baynard Woods:

Yeah, one of the other places that they’re looking to prisons that they’re setting up. And I think it’s a really good example of how the xenophobia of this administration is really mixed with some of the worst surveillance state techniques of the Bush administration with extraordinary renditions and sites that are off the country to use for all kinds of torture and stuff.

And so, I know his family are still quite concerned about his safety.

Mansa Musa:

As they should be.

Baynard Woods:

And there was, in Tennessee, there was a riot in one of the private prisons there last week because people were being on lockdown for 21 hours a day because they’re not paying enough guards to be there, COs to deal with the prison conditions. The food is terrible. And so, there was a big protest last week. So, it’s another prison for profit system just like Bukele is doing in El Salvador with the Trump administration that’s happening to him in Tennessee.

Mansa Musa:

And even further, these private prisons, all of them have always been cited for being inhuman and dehumanized. And because the prison industry is heavily regulated in this country, they were taking shortcuts.

But now because of this roundup call on behalf of the president saying that he want over 3,000 undocumented or illegal aliens or whatever he called them, locked up. He want ICE to lock up 3,000 of them a day. And he targeted New York, California and Chicago as blue states saying that that’s the area he going to go in.

But even with Trump doing what he doing, Obama was considered, he was the forerunner for Trump because he was sending people out left and right. And it was like it’s a standard practice. I think with this administration recognized because it was done, I think this administration and Trump being a lightning rod, I think this administration’s position is not going to, it’s no pretense, “We are not pretending that we are doing anything other than what we’re doing. We’re arbitrarily rounding people up. We are sending them to where we want to send them at. We investing a lot of money in private prisons.”

In theory it’s a private prison, but in fact it’s a place where they’re warehousing people, and because they don’t have no oversight, they’re able to get away with it. But talk about when they initially got, because I was reading an article about how when they got him at the Home Depot. Talk about who was in the car with him when they initially arrested him and how that played out so we can give our viewers a sense of how vicious this whole thing is. It’s not just no, somebody just put handcuffs on and round them up.

Baynard Woods:

Yeah. So, the initial case goes back to 2019, and he was going to the Home Depot to do day labor, wait out, and get picked up for a job. And so, he was standing with four other guys. And the same as they’re doing now, like you say, and it was in Trump’s first term, but they came through and just rounded these guys up and then brought them in and started questioning them.

As so often happens, an unnamed confidential informant was the person who said, “Oh, he’s a high ranking member of a gang.” His hoodie and hat linked him, they said with a clique of MS-13 that operated in upstate New York, where he’d never been before. So, not a very good informant there.

Mansa Musa:

Right, right.

Baynard Woods:

But as so often happens, whatever you get someone to say, that’s all you need is to have someone say it. In this recent case, they say they have six co-conspirators that they have their word that I guess they’ve been talking to, but of course none of them are named.

Mansa Musa:

Right, right.

Baynard Woods:

So, in both cases there’s no ability to face your accuser. And that’s just a problem that is so, about law enforcement in general of course, is the reliance on confidential informants in which you can basically make up what they say.

Mansa Musa:

Right, right, right.

Baynard Woods:

If you’re the officer because there’s so little scrutiny if you just say they’re a reliable confidential informant. So, they held them for, he was held at that time for a number of weeks in prison waiting to finally get this trial. His son was born. He got married. His wife was pregnant. They got married in the Howard County Detention Center so that they would be married before the son was born.

And so, he wasn’t able to see his son. His son has special needs and is nonverbal. And the most heartbreaking thing, in his wife’s court documents is that the son is not being verbal, hasn’t been able to express how much he misses Abrego. And so, he just holds his shirts up to his face to smell them and get the scent of them.

And that’s his son who’s now not seen him since March the 15. So, it’s been three months now. And people who’ve never been taken away from their families and stuff might think, “Oh, only three months.” But that’s a tremendous amount of time.

Mansa Musa:

Nah, trauma.

Baynard Woods:

And tremendous number of things can happen within your life in that amount of time that you’re not there for, and you’re not able to help your family in any of the ways that you need to.

And so, yeah, that one allegation by an officer that was only going to be an officer for three more days, acting as an officer, has trailed him now for six years and has led to all of this, which just gave them, and the gang databases, they do this in so many cities all the time. They’ll come through, take pictures of people. And then if you’re seen with another person that’s in those pictures, then you have gang affiliations.

Mansa Musa:

Right, right.

Baynard Woods:

Then if someone else is seen with you, then they have it, even if it’s never been proven that you were a member of a gang in any way. And so, we’re really using that as a way to just criminalize entire populations.

Mansa Musa:

And I was reading in the article when they arrested him for this or kidnapped him for this, he had his child with him in his car. And he told ICE, said, “Look, I’ve got my kid in the car with me. He’s special needs.”

So, they called. They in turn called the wife and gave her a timetable, “You’ve got five minutes to come and get your kid or we going to send them to protective services.”

This right here, okay, you are locking someone up for allegedly being in this country illegally. This is what you’re saying, that they’re in this country illegally or they’re affiliated with element that this country don’t recognize. You’re not saying nothing other than that. And so much so you’re saying that, “Because of this we’re going to send you up to another country.”

But you’re not saying that this person represents that much danger, that you can’t allow for his wife to have ample enough time to come and get their child and find out what’s going on with him. You made it where as though, and this is the attitude that I think they’re creating in this whole system, is the fear mechanism, where, “I’m coming ti your neighborhood, I’m coming deep, I’m taking whoever I want to take. I’m going to the elementary school, I’m grabbing the elementary kid. I’m going to the church, I’m grabbing your grandparents, whoever I got to grab to put the fear of you all in to be more inclined to cooperate with us,” as opposed to giving me due process of law.

But closing out, what do you want to tell our audience about this system? Because you done did, you dealt with the police, you’re real familiar with the lack of what they call law enforcement. But I’m calling it the lack of enforcement. And you deal real well with that. Talk about what you think about that.

Baynard Woods:

To me, this case hits at a lot of the problems with policing and authority and authoritarianism, which policing is a variety, in America because we’re so used to, we see it here in Baltimore all the time where the police say, “If I have to follow the Constitution, then everything’s just going to be crazy. Everyone will kill each other.”

And they take their violation of the Constitution as a minor matter. They’re broken windows on everything else except the Constitution. And then you can violate it with impunity. And that’s what the Trump administration did here, violated the most foundational principles of this country of due process. And snatched people up without any due process, without even habeas corpus and send them away.

And you act like the issue of coming here to save your own life is a worse crime than you kidnapping someone and sending them away to a concentration camp in a country where they’ve been prohibited by a judge to go, then defying a Maryland federal judge and then defying the US Supreme Court, while joking with the proud dictator of El Salvador, who called himself the world’s coolest dictator.

While you all joke about how neither of you can bring him back, it’s a special atrocity. And what Kilmar Abrego Garcia’s family is going through is just unimaginable and irreducible, but it is also part of what we’re all facing here and what we’ve all allowed to happen over generations of letting the drug war and our deference to police departments erode the Fourth Amendment of the Constitution, which should protect us all from illegal search and seizure such as these seizures that ICE is committing all around the country right now.

Mansa Musa:

There you have it. Illegal search and seizures. We look at this case of Garcia, and we think that, oh, that’s just his situation. But the reality is that this president unleashed the ICE and weaponized the Justice Department to go out and round up anybody and everybody, regardless of what your situation is, and not allow you to have a right to a hearing before you’re being punished.

Because this what’s happening now. You’re being punished, and then you had to fight your way back to get a hearing to undo what they did to you. We ask that you look at what’s going on, Garcia. Garcia is just, not the case in of itself. You’ve got Garcias throughout this country that they rounding up. You’ve got Garcias throughout this world that they rounding up. The xenophobia mentality of this country has become indefinite.

We ask that you look at this and you evaluate. We thank Baynard for coming in to educate us on this issue. Get up, stand up. Don’t give up the fight. Get up, stand up, fight for your rights. That’s what we ask that you do today.

And guess what? We ask that you continue to watch and listen to the Real News and Rattling the Bars because after all, we are the real news.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Mansa Musa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/what-the-government-can-do-to-you-without-due-process/feed/ 0 543996
How the ‘war on drugs’ set the stage for Trump’s authoritarianism today https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/how-the-war-on-drugs-set-the-stage-for-trumps-authoritarianism-today/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/how-the-war-on-drugs-set-the-stage-for-trumps-authoritarianism-today/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 16:55:30 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=c9eef2b121687bade0b0570ede3b219f
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/how-the-war-on-drugs-set-the-stage-for-trumps-authoritarianism-today/feed/ 0 543990
US media ignores yet another unhinged, racist attack from GOP because the target is Muslim https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/us-media-ignores-yet-another-unhinged-racist-attack-from-gop-because-the-target-is-muslim/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/us-media-ignores-yet-another-unhinged-racist-attack-from-gop-because-the-target-is-muslim/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 15:43:51 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335398 Florida's Republican state Sen. Randy Fine greets people after winning the 6th District race to replace GOP former Rep. Michael Waltz, who is now President Donald Trump’s national security adviser, on April 01, 2025 in Ormond Beach, Florida.NYT, WaPo, CNN, and ABC, NBC, and CBS Network News have not seen fit to mention a sitting member of Congress is leading a racist incitement campaign against his colleagues.]]> Florida's Republican state Sen. Randy Fine greets people after winning the 6th District race to replace GOP former Rep. Michael Waltz, who is now President Donald Trump’s national security adviser, on April 01, 2025 in Ormond Beach, Florida.

Another day, another unhinged racist screed from Republicans in Congress that results in virtually no mainstream media coverage because the target is a Muslim-American. 

Fine’s latest rant—in concert with the killing of Minnesota progressives last month—appears to have been a bridge too far, even for the normally silent and cynical Democratic leadership.

Tuesday night, in response to a post on X/Twitter from Rep. Ilhan Omar (D-MN) that echoed the International Criminal Court’s designation of Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu as a war criminal, Rep. Randy Fine (R-FL) posted on X/Twitter. “I’m sure it is difficult to see us welcome the killer of so many of your fellow Muslim terrorists,” he wrote. “The only shame is that you serve in Congress.” 

The statement follows a long pattern of targeted racist harassment and incitement from Reps. Fine and Nancy Mace (R-SC). And, just like all previous racist attacks, it did not merit coverage in the New York Times, Wall Street Journal, Washington Post, NBC, ABC, or CBS network news, or on-air coverage at CNN. The only coverage Fine’s bigoted rant solicited were short write-ups in Politico, Reuters, and CNN.com, and NBC News web only, and the only substantive coverage was from MSNBC’s Chris Hayes, who did an 8 minute, 41 second segment detailing Fine’s long history of incitement.

Adding urgency to the violent rhetoric is the fact that Omar was among the Minnesota officials who appeared on target lists compiled by accused murderer Vance Boelter, who allegedly assassinated Democrats in a shooting spree last month.

Unlike Fine’s previous racist screeds, this one at least resulted in condemnation from Democratic leadership in the House. Previous racist social media posts merited no such response. But Fine’s latest rant—in concert with the killing of Minnesota progressives last month—appears to have been a bridge too far, even for the normally silent and cynical Democratic leadership. 

In the past, Fine has called Rep. Rashida Tlaib (D-MI) ​“a terrorist” who ​“shouldn’t be American.” (Tlaib was born in Detroit, Michigan). He said Tlaib and Omar ​“might consider leaving before I get [to Congress]. #BombsAway.” He has advocated running over and killing pro-Palestine protesters, called Palestinians ​“animals,” referred to Muslims as ​“rapists,” and openly cheered starving civilians in Gaza. In May, Fine attacked Tlaib on X/Twitter, writing in response to her condemnation of Israel’s starvation campaign in Gaza, ​“Tell your fellow Muslim terrorists to release the hostages and surrender. Until then, #StarveAway.” In June, Fine’s colleague Mace told the PBD Podcast she wanted to “send Ilhan Omar Back To Somalia,” in response to Omar’s criticisms of Trump’s immigration crackdowns. She later doubled down on X/Twitter: “Omar clearly has more loyalty to the corrupt hellhole she came from than to the country she was elected to serve.” 

None of these attacks merited any mainstream media coverage—much less any sustained outrage or condemnation. The only reason the latest round of incitement got a handful of blurbs in Politico and CNN.com and (belatedly) a segment on MSNBC is likely because Democrats finally condemned them. And that’s all. Crickets from the New York Times, Washington Post network news, and CNN.

This raises the question: What would Fine or Mace have to say to justify actual media outrage? Actual sustained coverage? These attacks are not subtle or reliant on dog whistles. They’re out in the open, proudly hateful, and an invitation for their proudly bigoted social media followers to double down. 

Contrast this media silence after months of sustained racist incitement against Reps. Omar and Tlaib with the week-long media meltdown last September when Tlaib suggested that Michigan Attorney General Dana Nessel filed charges against pro-Palestinian activists at the University of Michigan because she was potentially biased against pro-Palestine protesters. ​“We’ve [protested for] climate, the immigrant rights movement, for Black lives, and even around issues of injustice among water shutoffs,” Tlaib told the Detroit Metro Times. ​“But it seems that the attorney general decided if the issue was Palestine, she was going to treat it differently, and that alone speaks volumes about possible biases within the agency she runs.”

“Antisemitism” scandals in our media are almost never about combating the very real dangers of antisemitism. They’re about disciplining critics of Israel.

This comment turned out to be entirely correct. The Nessel-led prosecution arrested seven pro-Palestine protesters in a pre-dawn raid in April and the charges were later dropped after Nessel was pressured to recuse herself for anti-Palestinian bias. But at the time, despite the interviewer himself defending Tlaib, the congresswoman’s remarks solicited a full-blown “antisemitism” scandal meriting coverage in USA Today, Newsweek, Fox News and The Free Press, and culminating in a smear campaign by CNN’s Jake Tapper and Dana Bash, which outright asserted Tlaib was an anti-Jewish bigot. This was is addition to the countless articles and segments in the New York Times, Washington Post, Politico, Axios, CNN, MSNBC, NBC News, CBS News, and ABC News in late 2023 lamenting Tlaib’s alleged “antisemitism” because she defended the term ​“from the River to the Sea” as a call for equality and freedom in Palestine.

Tapper, who hosts two influential cable news shows—his daily weekday show The Lead, and the Sunday morning agenda-setting news program State of the Union—is the most nakedly hypocritical commentator in all of media. He effectively manufactured the “antisemitism” scandal targeting Tlaib last September out of whole cloth, outright lying about her in an interview with Michigan Gov. Gretchen Whitmer. “Congresswoman Tlaib is suggesting,” Tapper somberly said on air, “that [AG Nessel] shouldn’t be prosecuting these individuals that Nessel says broke the law and that she’s only doing it because she’s Jewish”—which is not at all what Tlaib said. A smear neither Bash nor Tapper ever apologized for or retracted, only opaquely saying they “misspoke” in a throwaway line days later. 

Since this shameful, false smear of Tlaib, there’s been a half-dozen racist attacks on Tlaib and her Muslim colleague in Congress by Fine and others, and has Tapper done a single segment on it? He has not. He did, however, find time last night to platform the  head of pro-Israel pressure group ADL Jonathan Greenblatt so he could (again) defend Musk’s neo-Nazi gesture from Trump’s inauguration and accuse the largest union in the country, the National Education Association, of “antisemitism” for cutting ties with the ADL over its promotion of anti-Palestinian racism and Israeli foreign policy. Tapper also conspicuously failed to ask Greenblatt about a recent high profile rebuke of Greenblatt by Yehuda Cohen, father of Israeli captive Nimrod Cohen, who accused Greenblatt of fabricating a story about his family to promote “cheap patriotism” and “endless war in Gaza.”

Defending the expression “from the River to the Sea” and noting allegations—entirely correct, it turns out—of anti-Palestinian bias from a state prosecutor results in weeks-long media scandal, meltdowns, cable news mentions, pundit commentary, and congressional censures. Yet out-in-the-open anti-Muslim bigtory and calls for violence against sitting members of Congress are barely mentioned at all. The double standard—which, as Zeteo’s Prem Thakker notes, isn’t really a double standard since only one side is actually being bigoted—could not be more obvious. The question is, why? 

The reason is that “antisemitism” scandals in our media are almost never about combating the very real dangers of antisemitism. They’re about disciplining critics of Israel. They’re about using the language of liberalism against liberalism, protecting US and Israeli regional hegemony by attacking anyone undermining its ideological underpinnings. Meanwhile, actual racism, actual incitement, and actual defamation of Muslim-Americans solicits a yawn because it poses no challenge to US and Israeli national security interests and, in key ways, assists them by stoking the anti-Muslim racism essential for its maintenance. It’s an inconsistency that has always been present, but with the latest crop of cartoonishly racist MAGA trolls in Congress, the glaring double standard has grown wider and more obvious. The question is whether anyone in mainstream media, beyond a one-off segment on MSNBC, will note it, much less gin up a scandal over it.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Adam Johnson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/us-media-ignores-yet-another-unhinged-racist-attack-from-gop-because-the-target-is-muslim/feed/ 0 543984
NFIP activists, advocates to open nuclear-free Pacific exhibition https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/nfip-activists-advocates-to-open-nuclear-free-pacific-exhibition/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/nfip-activists-advocates-to-open-nuclear-free-pacific-exhibition/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 15:38:13 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117197 Asia Pacific Report

Nuclear-free and independent Pacific advocates are treating Aucklanders to a lively week-long exhibition dedicated to the struggle for nuclear justice in the region.

It will be opened today by the opposition Labour Party’s spokesperson on disarmament and MP for Te Atatu, Phil Twyford, and will include a range of speakers on Aotearoa New Zealand’s record as a champion of a nuclear-free Pacific and an independent foreign policy.

Speaking at a conference last month, Twyford said the country could act as a force for peace and demilitarisation, working with partners across the Pacific and Asia and basing its defence capabilities on a realistic assessment of threats.

The biggest threat to the security of New Zealanders was not China’s rise as a great power but the possibility of war in Asia, Twyford said.

Although there have been previous displays about the New Zealand nuclear-free narrative, this one has a strong focus on the Pacific.

it is called the “Legends of the Pacific: Stories of a Nuclear-free Moana 1975-1995” and will run from tomorrow, July 13 until Friday, July 18.

Veteran nuclear-free Pacific spokespeople who are expected to speak at the conference include Reverend Mua Strickson-Pua; Bharat Jamnadas, an organiser of the original Nuclear-Free and Independent Pacific (NFIP) conference in Suva, Fiji, in 1975; businessman and community advocate Nikhil Naidu, previously an activist for the Fiji Anti-Nuclear Group (FANG) and Dr Heather Devere, peace researcher and chair of the Asia Pacific Media Network (APMN).

A group of Cook Islands young dancers will also take part.

Knowledge to children
One of the organisers, Nik Naidu, told Asia Pacific Report, it was vital to restore the enthusiasm and passion around the NFIP movement as in the 1980s.

“It’s so important to pass on our knowledge to our children and future generations,” he said.

“And to tell the stories of our ongoing journey and yearning for true independence in a world free of wars and weapons of mass destruction. This is what a Nuclear-Free and Independent Pacific is.”

One of the many nuclear-free posters at the exhibition
One of the many nuclear-free posters at the exhibition. Image: APR

The exhibition is is coordinated by the APMN in partnership with the Heritage New Zealand Pouhere Taonga, with curator Tharron Bloomfield and coordinator Antony Phillips; Ellen Melville Centre; and the Whānau Communty Centre and Hub.

It is also supported by Pax Christi, Quaker Peace and Service Fund, and Women’s International League for Peace and Freedom (WILPF).

It recalls New Zealand’s peace squadrons, a display of activist tee-shirt “flags”, nuclear-free buttons and badges, posters, and other memorabilia. A video storytelling series about NFIP “legends” is also included.

Timely exhibition
Author Dr David Robie, deputy chair of the APMN, who wrote the book Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior just published on Thursday, and dedicated to the NFIP movement, said the the exhibition was timely.

“It is a sort of back to the future situation where the world is waking up again to a nuclear spectre not really seen since the Cold War years,” he said.

“With the horrendous Israeli genocide on Gaza — it is obscene to call it a war, when it is continuous massacres of civilians; the attacks by two nuclear nations on a nuclear weapons-free country, as is the case with Iran; and threats against another nuclear state, China, are all extremely concerning developments.”

"Heroes" and "Villains" of the Pacific . . . part of the exnhibition
“Heroes” and “Villains” of the Pacific . . . part of the exhibition. Image: APR


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/nfip-activists-advocates-to-open-nuclear-free-pacific-exhibition/feed/ 0 543987
When Fate Knocks at the Door, Take It by the Throat https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/when-fate-knocks-at-the-door-take-it-by-the-throat/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/when-fate-knocks-at-the-door-take-it-by-the-throat/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 15:00:29 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159814 It is getting harder and harder to breathe. The world grows smaller as storms gather. All night the storm raged furiously, the lightning, thunder, rain, and wind locking us in and away from the world. No one expected it to be this bad. The dogs howled like wolves. At most they said it would hinder […]

The post When Fate Knocks at the Door, Take It by the Throat first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
It is getting harder and harder to breathe. The world grows smaller as storms gather. All night the storm raged furiously, the lightning, thunder, rain, and wind locking us in and away from the world. No one expected it to be this bad. The dogs howled like wolves.

At most they said it would hinder us, and we, wanting to believe the experts who daily warn of something to fear – overripe bananas, marginal risks of severe weather, squirrel flu, spiders in tight pants, the wrong mascara, fear of falling in loose pants – accepted. Now we are huddled against the onslaught, gasping at the fury that imprisons us.

No one can sleep with the roar and rapping all around. Dawn comes slowly and dark. We huddle around our dinguses to link us to a world we cannot see or hear. They don’t ding. We have lost power. Someone wonders if the satellites are still up, but the sky is too dark for auguries. We listen to the clatter of an eerie silence. Our silence. We are all unknowingly holding our breaths. Another says, I think our phones are wasted, it feels like digital death. The dogs nod.

It is getting harder and harder to hear. Beethoven was so young to become deaf to the world. Someone says this for some unknown reason. She is old. She then says he said, “I will take fate by the throat, it shall not overcome me … I feel that I am not made for a quiet life.” The kids laugh. The windows and roof shake, the dogs howl, I think how true. For me, at least.

Yesterday the Israelis killed 104 Palestinians in Gaza. Par for the course, a daily occurrence. Many children among them. Did those kids hear the bombs and bullets coming? Were they gasping for breath? They are no longer breathing.

Did they call out to God? Do hundreds call out? Thousands call? Millions? Which God? The slaughterer’s made them dead on prayers to their genocidal God who lives in Tel Aviv.

God help us. How? The phones are wasted. Where is the Good God hiding? How can we call him?

The immigrant grandmother, hiding here from Trump’s masked thugs, says through her tears, do any of you remember how in Columbia 25,000 people, 8,00 children, all innocent, died, none of whom are calling out now, as the survivors did when they asked the great good God, why these savage deaths, after the Nevado del Ruiz volcano erupted and stuffed their mouths with mud, courtesy of Vulcan, the God of fire, courtesy of God Almighty.

No one answers her. Her prayers are singed with a cynicism that she hates. We can’t answer. Most don’t remember. Who will tell her why the good God, the good Earth, their mother rose up to bury so many in mud? Who can tell the survivors’ families why Our Lady of Guadalupe rose and drowned their loved ones recently?

Who is this person called Fate who knocks at our doors? Mother Nature? Father Grinning Jackal in suit and tie with blood oozing through his fake teeth, talking casually about nuclear war and slaughtering the innocent?

An old man says, let’s listen, we must defy fate. He puts a record on the battery operated record player. The wind is howling hideously so he turns the sound up to full volume. Beethoven’s Fifth Symphony in C minor rocks the room, the walls shake like dice in a cup, tossing us on such swells of feeling that time is arrested in its turning. One hears the call to revolution.

Suddenly it is October 1962, a man is time-travelling. The Cuban Missile Crisis – real fear everywhere. Fate knocking on the door, obedient men propped at flashing boards, in Moscow and Washington, D.C., awaiting orders. They are still waiting.

There was a call then. A few men heard it. It was soul deep. In those days there were humans who could recite poetry, grasp the meaning of madness. We survived and have moved on. They call it progress. Technological progress. The machines have the answers to all our questions, except the important ones.

Who will answer the wailing voices seeking answers? Who can tell them why the good God, the good earth their mother rose up to bury them in mud and water? Who dare answer the 1,000,000 Pakistani dead, drowned on November 13, 1970 beneath a cyclone driven tidal wave? Or maybe it was two or three million. Who knows? Who cares to ask: Was it an act of Mother Nature, of God the Father Almighty, maker of heaven and earth? Tell me, who the hell is responsible?

It is getting harder and harder to breathe. The world grows smaller as storms gather. We have been wasted by the phones, dinguses that will not save us from the nuclear weapons that the jackals with polished faces have prepared. Dead men sit at flashing boards awaiting orders. It is depressing but true, and while naturally we cannot stop nature from devouring her children, we can stop the human killers from their appointed task to close down the world and engender all a silent void.

Long later, hours, years – who knows when? – the unexpected storm abated, the roads out were cleared. It was still hazardous to try. The old man who played Beethoven said as we were leaving that we must take fate by the throat and hear the silent cries of all the people desperate for peace on earth.

“Oh, it is so beautiful to live – to live a thousand times. I feel that I am not made for a quiet life.”

The post When Fate Knocks at the Door, Take It by the Throat first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Edward Curtin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/when-fate-knocks-at-the-door-take-it-by-the-throat/feed/ 0 543949
Matriarchy, Witchery and the Great Goddess https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/matriarchy-witchery-and-the-great-goddess/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/matriarchy-witchery-and-the-great-goddess/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 14:47:41 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159803 A Heart-Felt Story In the beginning men and women lived in harmony and peace. We were once one with nature and there were few differences between us in social power or wealth. Women had a special place in early tribal societies: their motherhood was revered, they held positions of authority, and they practiced forms of […]

The post Matriarchy, Witchery and the Great Goddess first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

A Heart-Felt Story

In the beginning men and women lived in harmony and peace. We were once one with nature and there were few differences between us in social power or wealth. Women had a special place in early tribal societies: their motherhood was revered, they held positions of authority, and they practiced forms of magic centered on the worship of a monotheistic Goddess. Figurines of Goddesses have been discovered, proving there was once a great women’s religion. At the end of the Bronze Age, hunters and pastoralists from Central Asia invaded these peaceful societies creating social hierarchies, wars, and the beginnings of male dominance. All of this was later sanctioned by the worship of otherworldly, transcendent male deities that eventually coalesced to become a monotheistic God. The Goddess was discredited and went underground, being kept alive in later years by peasant communities in the magical practice of witchcraft. Today the Goddess has resurfaced as a focus of women’s spirituality. 

These are the claims about history and social evolution made by many Neo-Pagan or spiritual feminists. To be sure, not all people associated with the Goddess movement believe all of these claims. However, the summary above is probably a fair one, in that each of its elements is repeated in the writings of nearly all of the movement’s leaders. How plausible are these contentions in the light of anthropology, archaeology, macrosociology, political science, world history, mythology studies, and comparative religion? Were there once matriarchies or matrifocal societies? Does reverence for goddesses go all the way back to the Paleolithic Era? Can all or most of the figurines found by archaeologist Marija Gimbutas and others be classified as goddesses? If, in our society, a male god goes with male dominance, is it fair to infer that if we find evidence of goddesses in the ancient world this must indicate female dominance or at least the high status of women? Was motherhood revered in ancient societies? Is all magic goddess-centered? Is all witchcraft synonymous with goddess reverence? Were ancient tribal societies peace-loving before being invaded? Does the movement from polytheism to monotheism involve a battle among male gods, or between male and female gods? Here is a summary of the Goddess movement’s claims.

Common Claims or Assumptions Made by the Goddess Movement

  • There were once matriarchies or matrifocal societies
  • All or most of the figurines discovered by archeologists are goddesses
  • Goddess reverence goes all the way back to the Paleolithic Age
  • All magic is synonymous with goddess reverence
  • All witchcraft is synonymous with goddess reverence
  • Ancient People revered a monotheistic goddess
  • Motherhood is the leading function of goddesses 
  • There is a direct connection between the presences of goddesses in ancient societies and the prosperous material status of women 
  • The rise of institutionalized male dominance was caused by invasions of pastoral  nomads
  • Tribal societies were peace-loving before being invaded by patriarchal societies
  • The movement from polytheism to monotheism involved battles between male gods and female goddesses

In addition to addressing these contentions about history, it is important to make explicit the underlying values of the Goddess movement. I agree with Philip Davis (1998) that the Goddess movement is part of a larger Romantic movement that began during the Renaissance and sustained itself through the Enlightenment, the Industrial Revolution, and the twentieth century. I will paint as sympathetic picture as I can of the Romantic movement’s perspective on the world.

The Goddess movement is generally critical of Western-style political centralization and the globalization of the human community because Western civilization is not now and never has been truly democratic. The movement’s members tend to believe that all state societies, even those predating capitalism, serve the interests of the wealthy. They do not believe that real democracy can ever work when power is centralized. Furthermore, they resist attempts to universalize different groups of people into a universal humanity because this grouping in the past has, in practice, excluded many groups from the wealth they produced because of their class, race, or gender. At the same time, the movement is generally critical of the competitive values of capitalism and is suspicious of the preoccupation with material wealth, the accumulation of commodities, and high technology. Finally, the Goddess movement is critical of science as a way of knowing because, while proclaiming to be neutral, it actually serves the interests of the elite classes by providing the methodological base by which technologies of war may be built. For these reasons, the movement looks to the political organization of pre-state societies as a model for participatory democracy, pre-capitalists ways of conducting economic relations, and pre-scientific ways of knowing how the world works.

Because the Goddess movement often contrasts the values of tribal societies with those of state societies, it must also challenge the way world history has been presented. According to the Goddess movement, the dominant social order has placed a value judgment on social evolution by claiming that it constitutes “progress”. This means that the more complex societies are, the more they have improved life for everyone. Because the movement challenges this assumption, it must either try to revise history as written or, in more extreme cases, claim that the struggle to discover an objective history is futile. Here the Goddess movement joins forces with the extreme relativism of the Postmodernists, who say that one version of history is as good as another, and that competing ways of knowing about the past are equally relevant. One common approach is to fuse the study of history with mythology. Much of the work of the Goddess movement vacillates between the attempt to revise views of what really happened in history, and the effort to reinterpret history based on ancient mythology. For obvious reasons, this latter strategy garners little sympathy from those historians that aspire to using a scientific methodology.

The system of industrial capitalism has impacts not just on the economy and political structure of societies, but also on their sacred traditions, their ideas about non-human nature, and the collective psyche or mentality of the people. The Goddess movement believes that there is a direct connection between the nature of the perceived sacred sources and the manner in which people treat the natural world. The movement’s members believe that an otherworldly, transcendental God, because he is out of the world, neglects this world and effectively colludes with elites who exploit and pillage the natural world. Conversely, when sacred sources are understood as immanent and worldly, nature is more likely to be treated with respect. According to spiritual feminists, the distant sky-god acts as if he were an absentee landlord. If Goddess advocates are skeptical about centralization and globalization in the political world, they will take the same attitude toward the spiritual world. Rather than believing in a universal monotheistic deity, many people in the Goddess movement prefer a decentralized polytheism, though this is a bone of contention within the movement, as we shall see.

Patriarchal religions and atheistic non-believers have tended to use mechanistic metaphors to describe nature. The Goddess movement rejects the idea of nature-as-machine and believes that nature is alive, that the world is an organism. Even in patriarchal religions nature is often conceived of metaphorically as “mother”. The Goddess movement builds on this theme, viewing human beings and the rest of the animal kingdom as part of “her” body. Just as nature is not separate from sacred sources, so humanity is not separated from other creatures. Other animals are at least the equals of humans and we humans have no business trying to get away from nature or to improve her with scientific techniques. We need to merge with, or get back to, nature. There are also implications for our sense of time. One symptom of humanity’s problems, according to Goddess advocates, is our linear concept of time. This has caused us great problems in understanding how change occurs. Nature, for the Goddess movement, works in cycles. For humanity to merge with nature we would need to understand society and our individual lives as following the cycles of nature. Because the relationship between humanity and the rest of nature must be immanent, people do not need mediators and specialists to interpret sacred experience. We are all explorers together with no need for chaperones.

There are two kinds of nature—external and internal. Our bodies are an internal, microcosmic slice of the external macrocosm of nature. This has deep psychological implications. For the Goddess movement, rationality, analysis, planning, and striving to be objective are the psychological skills an individual uses to dualize or separate our bodies from the rest of nature. These rational skills lead to other dualisms: God vs. nature, nature vs. society, society vs. the individual, and the mind vs. the body. These separations are partly responsible for the problems of the modern world.

It is the non-rational part of the psyche—the part of the mind that synthesizes rather than divides—that is the true source of wisdom. The emotions, sensuality, intuition, and spontaneity are understood as virtuous. The Goddess movement believes that women have these skills more than men do and, generally speaking, though they would probably not claim this explicitly, most members act and talk as though women are inherently better than men.

There are at least two tension points which are worth pointing out. While the Goddess movement opposes traditional female roles and supports experimenting with being simply more human, there is a tension between those who want to develop the skills that men have traditionally been encouraged to claim, and those who want to elevate traditional female skills as inherently superior to male skills.

There is also a tension between the value of innocence in contrast to the value of experience. For the most part, the Goddess movement values experience over innocence but, in their contrast between tribal and state societies, they tend to romanticize tribal societies as innocent and uncorrupted. In the first chapter, I criticized the theory of progress as a way to understand history. Taken in its extreme, New-Age form, the Goddess view of history is a degeneration theory of social evolution. Instead of suggesting, as progress theorists do, that the further we go in history the better it gets, this theory argues that the earlier in time we go the better it gets. A summary chart of these Romantic values follows:

List of Twenty One Composite Values of Ancient Goddess Supporters

SOCIAL STRUCTURES

  • Simple, pre-state societies are an ideal to strive for (small is beautiful).
  • Complex, large societies are inherently bad, because they are impersonal.
  • Innocence is more noble than experience when it comes to social evolution.
  • What comes earlier in time must be better. Tribal societies are the ideal.
  • Material wealth, objects/commodities and technology are likely to be corrupting influences.
  • Science is alienating, cold, unfeeling and doesn’t address what is important in life.
  • Cooperation and communalism are better than competition as a way to organize social life.
  • Modern society perpetrates a false unity of humanity, ignoring gender, ethnic and class inequalities.
  • Myth is at least as important as history.
  • Historians reduce myth to illusionary or naive history. Support of a real “people’s history,” while retaining the value of mythic stories as a valuable sacred activity.

NATURE/SACRED

  • Spirit is immanent in nature and the individual rather than transcendent and separate from nature. Nature is all there is. Behind nature there is only more undiscovered nature.
  • There are many goddesses and gods – polytheism – there is no single source which “unites them all.*
  • Nature is understood as an organism, rather than a machine.
  • Goddesses are inseparable from female physiology: menstruation and childbirth.
  • Neither organized religion nor atheism provide meaningful answers to the big questions of life.
  • Other animals are at least the equal of or superior to human beings.
  • Human beings should merge with nature. We have no business thinking or trying to improve her.
  • Generally, sacred communion is experiential and not mediated by secular or sacred authorities based on faith.
  • Change happens in cycles, rather than linearly.

PSYCHOLOGY

  • Emotions, sensuality, intuition and the non-rational are at least as good as reason or empiricism as ways of knowing.
  • What is subjective and personal is better than impartiality and striving to be objective.
  • Spontaneity is more in touch with what matters in life than planning.
  • Experimental gender roles are better than traditional male and female roles.
  • When it comes down to it, women are inherently better than men.

* There is a counter-argument which claims that there is a single goddess.

According to Goodison and Morris (1998), the controversy between the supporters of Goddess theory and those who dismiss it is made worse because the two sides do not speak to each other. Those who support the theory are non-specialists, artists, psychotherapists, Neo-pagans, and amateur historians. They accuse academics—archaeologists, ancient historians, and anthropologists—of intentionally ignoring evidence of a powerful female presence in ancient history. This supposed intentional hiding or overlooking of evidence of the Goddess is usually described as being part of a male conspiracy to hide real history. Contemporary specialists in relevant fields ignore the Goddess claims, dismissing them as too far-fetched to take seriously. They also suspect that the movement is motivated by an ideology of feminist reform that attempts to rewrite history in the service of that ideology.

Defining Matriarchy

Victorian anthropologists, in attempting to understand the past, sometimes proposed the existence of tribal societies in which women were at least the equals of men. Part of the feminist movement has latched on to these claims to show the relativity of “patriarchal” institutions today. However, before we address specific arguments, we need a working definition of the term “matriarchy. Both the words patriarchy and matriarchy share the same suffix—archy, from the Greek –archos, which means “rule by.” Therefore, in simple terms patriarchy means the rule of men over women in the areas of technology, economics, politics and religion, art, science. To be consistent with the meaning of the suffix, matriarchy would have to be the reverse of patriarchy—i.e., the rule of women over men in these areas. Matriarchy would mean the control of technological, political, and economic power—the right to control production and distribution beyond the household. Women would have the military power to force men to go along with social policy, and they would control the myths by which the society lives. Have societies with these characteristics actually existed? Presumably, if they have, we should look for evidence among the Paleolithic hunter-gatherers, the Neolithic horticulturists, and the Bronze-Age agricultural states.

Before proceeding, it is important to refine our definitions of patriarchy and matriarchy a little further. It is highly unlikely that any sociologist (man or woman) would define patriarchy or matriarchy as referring to “all men” or “all women.” In the case of rank and stratified societies, there is no question that those in power are men. However, the percentage of men with political, economic and technological power is small. The rest of the male population—the middle classes, the working class artisan and peasant men—are subordinate to them. All men have some privileges over women but privilege is not the same as power. A refined definition of patriarchy therefore would be, the power and control exercised by a few men over all women and most men throughout the infrastructure, structure, and superstructure of society, with all men having some privileges over all women. If we want to be consistent with what we know of patriarchal rank and stratified societies, then a matriarchy would be defined as the power and control exercised by a few women over all men and most women throughout the infrastructure, structure, and superstructure of society, with all women having some privileges over all men. Virtually everyone familiar with the evidence archaeology, anthropology, and history agrees that matriarchies have never existed.

What are the implications? If women did not once dominate in the sacred, political, and economic dimensions of society, does this mean that patriarchies have always existed? The hidden assumption of those who ask us to choose between matriarchy and patriarchy as the mode of dominance in ancient societies is that rule over others was always the case. We are simply asked to choose whether it was women or men who were doing the ruling. But in hunting-and-gathering and simple horticultural societies everyone was doing the ruling. This means that these societies were neither matriarchal nor patriarchal.

If matriarchy is simply defined as the reverse of patriarchy, then the notion of its prevalence in early societies is fairly easy to dismiss. However, some sectors within the pagan-feminist community have defined matriarchal societies differently, calling them “matrifocal.” What they mean by this is the existence of egalitarian political and economic relations between men and women in material culture and the predominance of a Goddess or goddesses in sacred culture.

Most anthropologists, archaeologists, and macro-sociologists agree that hunting-and-gathering and simple horticultural societies were politically and economically egalitarian. Here Goddess advocates are on solid ground. But Goddess advocates confuse the issue by insisting that the superstructure of these societies was characterized by reverence for goddesses. This presumed predominance of goddesses, together with a presumed reverence for motherhood, seem to be the major justifications for calling these societies “matrifocal.”

Positive Conclusions

There are at least five positive conclusions to be drawn from the Goddess theorists and their claims with regard to history. First, they are right to point to a time in history when gender relations were politically and economically equal. Second, some of the figurines found by Gimbutas are likely to have been goddesses. Third, goddesses had many positive functions in Bronze Age societies, more than they did once the universalistic religions emerged. Fourth, the practice of magic, including goddess magic, long predated the rise of the great religions. Fifth and last, tribal societies did not engage in mass killings the way state societies did.

Negative Conclusions

In most other instances, however, as we have seen, the Neo-pagan goddess theorists overstate their case or are simply wrong. First, there have never been any matriarchal societies, as we have defined “matriarchy.” This does not mean that all ancient societies were patriarchal: tribal societies were neither patriarchal nor matriarchal. Second, many of the figurines discovered were probably not goddesses; some were male, some were non-gendered, and some were used as dolls, toys, or lucky charms. Third, there is no good evidence for goddess reverence going all the way back to the Paleolithic Age. It is more likely that it began in the Bronze Age.

In terms of sacred practices, while all goddess practices were magical, magical practices were not tied necessarily to goddesses. Magic was conducted with earth spirits, totems, and ancestor spirits long before goddesses came on the scene. Correspondingly, while some elements of witchcraft have existed in all ancient societies, witchcraft was practiced in Paleolithic and Neolithic societies before goddess reverence emerged.

Further, the goddesses within Bronze Age societies were polytheistic, not monotheistic. There was never a single monotheistic Great Goddess who was regarded as presiding over all of society. Further, motherhood was not the leading function of goddesses. While goddesses had many functions, motherhood was not a leading one. This is because most ancient societies did not think much of motherhood.

In addition, there was no direct relationship between reverence for goddesses and high material status for women. At the time Bronze Age civilizations appeared, goddesses already had subordinate status, and this justified the low status of women in these societies. In the Iron Age, with the rise of the great religions, the status of women improved slightly despite the marginalization of goddesses. In societies that can be characterized as egalitarian (hunter-gatherer and simple horticultural societies) there were no goddesses. Therefore, so far “matrifocal” means egalitarian relations between men and women in material culture and the predominance of goddesses in the sacred dimension, ancient societies were not matrifocal. Women’s positive material and sacred status have never coexisted within the same society. When women lived material lives more or less on a par with men—in foraging and simple horticultural societies—the evidence for goddess reverence is absent. When goddesses emerged in agricultural states, women’s material status had already deteriorated (with the exception of queens and priestesses who constituted an insignificant proportion of the population).

The rise of institutionalized male dominance was not caused by pastoral invasions, but rather by processes internal to pre-state societies. Tribal societies were far from peace loving. Their homicide rates and frequency of war were greater than in Bronze and Iron Age State civilizations, in which institutionalized male dominance emerged. Last, the transition/crisis from polytheism to monotheism did not involve conflict between gods and goddesses, but rather between male gods. Table 1 presents these conclusions in chart form.

Goddess theorists either have not studied the anthropological literature fully (reading selectively), or they believe that there was such a thing as matriarchal dominance, at least in the sacred realm, as a kind of article of faith. In the case of child-rearing, it is generally admitted that this was the province of women, but Goddess theorists have projected romanticized notions of motherhood back in time. As a whole, motherhood and child rearing were rarely if ever held as sacred activities in the ancient world. To the extent that male dominance in tribal societies is admitted, it is generally attributed to external sources—male-dominated herders or patriarchal colonialists attacking hunter-gatherers and simple horticulturists—rather than seen as emerging from within societies.

I call Goddess theorists “idealists” because they generally try to explain changes in material institutions—ecology, technology, the economy, and politics—from changes in spiritual beliefs, from the Goddess to the God.

Holding Out the Olive Branch

In denying most of the historical claims of the Goddess movement my intention is descriptive, not proscriptive. I am arguing not for what ought to have happened in gender history, but what is likely actually to have happened. It is certainly comforting and inspiring to believe that there was a time when women were respected in all areas of cultural life. If that were the case, it would be easier to believe that women can again achieve full equality with men in all aspects of society today and in the future. Even if most of the historical claims of the Goddess movement are mistaken we still can use the myths and rituals of pagan people to help build our future. More women have a better life today, at least in industrialized societies, than they ever did in agricultural states when goddesses first arose. The improvement in the life of most women in industrial societies is a solid basis for making a closer connection between women’s material and sacred status in the future. To me, that project offers the best prospect for achieving the Goddess theorists’ ultimate aims.

This article is a summary of a thirty page chapter I wrote from my book Power in Eden: The Emergence of Gender Hierarchies in the Ancient World.

Critique of the Goddess Movement Model of Ancient History

Neopagan Matriarchy, 

Goddess Claims

Neopagan Marxist Claims Christian Progress Implications

(which are not being implied)

There were once matriarchies Tribal societies were neither 

matriarchal nor patriarchal

Patriarchies have always

existed

All female figurines found were 

Goddesses

Some figurines were goddesses,

Others’ gods, non-gendered dolls,

Toys or lucky charms

Figurines were erotic toys for

Pagan heathens

Goddesses go all the way back 

to the Paleolithic

Spirits, totems and ancestor

spirits preceded all goddesses

and gods

(goddesses and gods are

products of stratified

agricultural states)

There was God before there

were goddesses

All magic was Goddess 

centered

While all goddess reverence is

magic centered, not all magic

is goddess centered

Religion preceded magic

Magic is degenerate religion

All witchcraft is Goddess

centered 

While goddess

practitioners use magic

witchcraft has been used

w/o references to goddesses

All goddess practitioners use

witchcraft

Goddess practice was 

monotheistic

With the exception of modern

feminist Neopaganism,

goddess reference was

polytheistic – only male gods

were monotheistic

Monotheism was the original

sacred form

Motherhood was the leading 

function of goddesses

Goddesses had many public

functions which were more

important. Motherhood not as

important in hunting and

gathering societies

Fatherhood was revered
There is a direct correspondence between the presence of goddesses and high material status of women There is a connection between the perceived source of resource supply and the gender of the source, not between sacred status and the status of women. Women have always had a second class identity
When goddesses were present, the status of women was low. When earth-spirits, totems or ancestor spirits were present, women were roughly equal to men
Invasions by pastoralists caused institutionalized male dominance Institutionalized male dominance was caused by processes internal to chiefdoms and agricultural states before the invasions of pastoralists Institutionalized male dominance has always existed
Pre-state societies were peaceful All pre-state societies were violent

Most were warlike

There were few warless societies

Wars are caused by male aggression
The movement from polytheism to monotheism was between gods and goddesses The emergence of monotheism was played out mythologically between male gods rather than between and female goddesses Goddesses had no power in mythology

 

The post Matriarchy, Witchery and the Great Goddess first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Bruce Lerro.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/matriarchy-witchery-and-the-great-goddess/feed/ 0 543951
The cost to solidarity #shorts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-cost-to-solidarity-shorts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-cost-to-solidarity-shorts/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 13:03:26 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f310eb46cdab5033ed1644b21bf98378
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-cost-to-solidarity-shorts/feed/ 0 543924
George Mason Is the Latest University Under Fire From Trump. Its President Fears an “Orchestrated” Campaign. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/george-mason-is-the-latest-university-under-fire-from-trump-its-president-fears-an-orchestrated-campaign/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/george-mason-is-the-latest-university-under-fire-from-trump-its-president-fears-an-orchestrated-campaign/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/george-mason-university-antisemitism-investigation-trump by Katherine Mangan, special to ProPublica

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

When the Education Department’s Office for Civil Rights notified George Mason University on July 1 that it was opening an antisemitism investigation based on a recent complaint, the university’s president, Gregory Washington, said he was “perplexed.”

Compared with other campuses, where protesters had ransacked buildings and hunkered down in encampments, George Mason had been relatively quiet over the past year, he said. His administration had taken extensive steps to improve relations with the Jewish community, had enacted strict rules on protests and had communicated all of that to the OCR during a previous antisemitism investigation that remained open.

By the next day, though, there were signs that the new investigation was part of a coordinated campaign to oust him.

One piece of evidence: the speed with which conservative news outlets reported on the OCR’s action, which hadn’t been publicly announced. The OCR letter was embedded in a July 2 article published by a right-wing news outlet, The Washington Free Beacon. The next day, the City Journal, published by the influential and conservative Manhattan Institute, ran an opinion essay headlined “George Mason University’s Disastrous President.” The article accused Washington, the university’s first Black president and a first-generation college graduate, of backing “racially discriminatory DEI programs” — referring to diversity, equity and inclusion efforts — and failing to address campus antisemitism. It concluded that “Washington’s track record warrants his resignation or dismissal.”

The similarities to recent events at another public university in Virginia were hard to ignore. The OCR’s George Mason investigation was opened just four days after the University of Virginia’s president, James E. Ryan, announced that he was resigning to help settle a federal probe into the university’s DEI commitments.

That happened after a group of conservative University of Virginia alumni, the Jefferson Council, published blog entries and newspaper ads decrying the president — in part for focusing too heavily on diversity efforts — and demanding that he resign. The council’s connections to board members and Justice Department lawyers led many observers in higher education to conclude that Ryan’s forced resignation was the result of a coordinated assault.

Now, Washington is feeling the same heat coming from similar sources.

The temperature cranked up several degrees Thursday morning, when the Education Department notified George Mason that it’s opening a second investigation — this one alleging the university illegally considers race in hiring and promoting employees. The department said it was acting on complaints from “multiple professors” at GMU.

In a press statement Thursday, Craig Trainor, the Education Department’s acting assistant secretary for civil rights, suggested that the agency has already reached sweeping conclusions about the university’s hiring practices. “Despite the leadership of George Mason University claiming that it does not discriminate on the basis of race, it appears that its hiring and promotion policies and practices from 2020 to the present, implemented under the guise of so-called ‘Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion,’ not only allow but champion illegal racial preferencing in violation of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. This kind of pernicious and wide-spread discrimination — packaged as ‘anti-racism’ — was allowed to flourish under the Biden Administration, but it will not be tolerated by this one,” he wrote.

The university rebutted those accusations in a statement saying it is complying with all federal and state mandates and does not discriminate. The university “received a new Department of Education letter of investigation this morning as it was simultaneously released to news outlets, which is unprecedented in our experience,” the statement said. “As always, we will work in good faith to give a full and prompt response.”

Meanwhile, dozens of Jewish faculty members at GMU have signed on to a statement condemning “an attack on our university community and our GMU President that is quickly intensifying under a false, racially divisive, and deeply cynical claim of combating antisemitism.”

Even before Thursday’s announcement, Washington said he had detected a pattern that’s been playing out at other universities targeted by President Donald Trump’s administration: Multiple investigations are filed in quick succession and word leaks to news organizations.

“It seems like this is orchestrated,” Washington said during an interview Wednesday. “The same people who are kind of aligned that got rid of Jim Ryan are aligned against me.”

He finds the timing of the attacks against him and his university troubling.

“Given that the Office for Civil Rights doesn’t publicly announce who is under investigation, we were wondering how these conservative outlets even got the information in the first place,” Washington said. The “almost hateful discussions of me” in the City Journal article looked like “a concerted effort to try to paint the institution in a negative light.”

Washington said the piece seemed to be urging the Trump administration to take the investigation to the next level, the Department of Justice, which could levy punishments against the university.

Many faculty members at George Mason agree. They worry that despite the OCR’s insistence in its letter to the university that its investigation will be unbiased, the Trump administration has already reached a verdict on the institution’s president and wants him out. As evidence, they point to a web of ties between right-wing news organizations and politicians — including Virginia’s Republican governor, Glenn Youngkin — as well as some George Mason board members.

“The same unfounded and coordinated attacks that pushed Ryan out of UVa are now being leveled at GMU President Greg Washington,” the campus chapter of the American Association of University Professors wrote in an online post. “We think the DOJ, Governor Youngkin, and Youngkin’s appointees” to GMU’s governing board “are trying to force President Washington out so they can hire an ideological ally who will impose the Governor’s political ideologies on Mason’s governance and curriculum.”

Late Wednesday, Virginia’s two Democratic U.S. senators, Mark R. Warner and Tim Kaine, doubled down on those warnings, publishing an opinion piece in the Richmond Times-Dispatch saying that the Trump administration “appears to be eyeing its next target” with George Mason’s president.

“The accusations — which are pushed by bloggers with ties to ultra-conservative groups with histories of false claims about Mason and advocacy for the removal of university presidents — are eerily similar to those lodged against Ryan,” they wrote. “They include vague and politically charged accusations centered around ‘DEI’ and suggestions that the university’s administration has been insufficiently responsive to concerns raised by Jewish students about their safety on campus. That’s despite the fact that the university’s leaders have repeatedly and publicly condemned antisemitism and actually been praised by the local Jewish Relations Council and campus Hillel for their leadership and commitment to Jewish members of Mason’s community.”

The education department’s July 1 letter notified George Mason that it was investigating a complaint, filed in June, that Jewish students and faculty members faced a hostile environment at the Virginia university between October 2023 and the end of the 2024-2025 academic year. It gave the university until July 21 to turn over voluminous information about its response to antisemitism complaints.

It also assured the university it would take a neutral stance in evaluating the information.

Warner and Kaine are skeptical that the investigation will be fair and impartial: In their opinion piece, they said it’s more likely “to serve as yet another smokescreen to punish universities and leaders who don’t align with their ideological goals.”

Some George Mason faculty members share these concerns.

“When you start seeing these hit pieces come out one after another in a matter of days, you know it’s coordinated,” Bethany L. Letiecq, a professor in the College of Education and Human Development, said in an interview.

Indeed, higher education leaders have accused the Department of Justice’s Task Force to Combat Anti-Semitism, which officially oversees investigations by several federal agencies, of ignoring procedures intended to provide due process, racing toward predetermined results, and then punishing universities by stripping them of billions of research dollars.

Washington’s critics have ties to right-wing advocates of eliminating diversity efforts and other examples of what they see as higher education’s “woke” policies. The author of the essay calling Washington a “disastrous” president, Ian Kingsbury, has co-published articles promoting conservative causes with Jay P. Greene, a senior research fellow with The Heritage Foundation. Christopher F. Rufo, one of the nation’s most aggressive and influential opponents of diversity, equity and inclusion initiatives, is among the contributing editors at City Journal.

Such critics are well represented in George Mason’s leadership as well.

Youngkin, the governor, appointed most of GMU’s governing board, known as the board of visitors. The university’s general counsel, Anne Gentry, is married to a longtime conservative activist and executive with the Koch Foundation, Letiecq pointed out. “At Mason, the foxes are in the henhouse,” she said. “It’s an inside job.”

Letiecq worries that Youngkin might exert the same kind of influence that Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis, a fellow Republican, has in trying to reshape higher education to fit a conservative playbook. Neither Youngkin nor the board of visitors immediately responded to requests for comment.

“I have suspected that Youngkin, in his quest for political capital, has been following the DeSantis playbook and sees Mason as a potential New College that they can take over and take down,” she said. New College of Florida, once a progressive institution, underwent substantial changes to its curriculum and staff beginning in 2023 when DeSantis stacked its board with conservative members.

Neither Kingsbury, the author of the City Journal piece, nor the Department of Education responded to inquiries about the patterns Washington saw. Eliana Johnson, editor of the Washington Free Beacon, said in a statement that “our reporting speaks for itself.” City Journal did not respond to requests for comment.

Washington defended his record in a public statement on July 3. “As we prepare a response to the complaint, it is important that we all have an accurate understanding of how safe and welcoming the George Mason community is, particularly as we prepare to welcome tens of thousands of students to campus in just a few short weeks,” he wrote.

“George Mason has not been marred by the sort of violence that has rocked so many other campuses elsewhere in Virginia and around the nation following the Hamas attacks of 2023. It is a distinction we are proud of, and work hard each day to maintain.”

In 11 messages that were sent to the campus community detailing the university’s responses to the Hamas attacks and that were shared with The Chronicle of Higher Education, his office denounced “craven acts of terrorism as we have seen in Israel,” urged “civil discourse, understanding, and peaceable assembly” on campus and denounced the “disgusting behavior” of those who were attempting to distribute antisemitic leaflets. University leaders coordinated with law enforcement to respond to two violent antisemitic actions.

It’s been more than a year since the last campus demonstration related to Gaza, Washington said. That protest remained safe and legal and did not disrupt university business. “No encampments have ever formed at George Mason, and we will not permit them in the future,” Washington said. The university was one of the first to introduce a comprehensive safety and well-being plan, which remains in effect.

“Our data continues to show that our environment has dramatically improved since the horrific Hamas attacks of 2023, so we are perplexed to be receiving this investigation at this time. Nevertheless, we will respond in a forthright, direct, and timely manner to this and any inquiry.”

In the 2023-2024 academic year, the university received 31 bias-incident reports based on antisemitism, according to Rose Pascarell, vice president for university life. Last year, that number dropped to 12.

Plus, she said, the university “responded fully” to a previous OCR complaint related to antisemitism — but never heard back from the government.

Letiecq said that, in her view, Washington has overreacted, not underreacted, to complaints of antisemitism, instituting restrictions on protests and punishments for protesters that she considers “oppressive.”

“This is an insatiable campaign on the right and it seems there’s nothing you can do to satisfy them,” she said.

George Mason, with more than 40,000 students, is the most racially diverse public research university in the state, university officials say. To comply with Trump’s executive orders, the university has repurposed its DEI office to focus on compliance and community. It has cut six positions, eliminated diversity training and expanded a program in constructive dialogue. All of those changes are outlined in a lengthy report to the board. Washington insists, though, that the university won’t abandon its commitments to the underlying principles its diversity efforts support.

“When you are a diverse institution, you have to operate from that diverse framework,” Washington said. “I don’t run away from that. I run toward it.”

DEI expenditures represent 0.1% of the university’s budget, GMU officials say.

Asked why he agreed to speak out publicly when so many presidents have stayed silent to avoid angering the administration, Washington said the attacks were too personal to avoid.

“My philosophy is: Sunlight is disinfectant. We’re going to be transparent with the community throughout the process,” including the back-and-forth with OCR, he said.

Washington says if the university is asked to make significant changes without a standard investigation and discussion of the facts, it will deal with that as necessary. “We will work in good faith to move through this,” Washington said. “We will know if we’re given due process by how they manage our particular case.”

Katherine Mangan is a senior writer at The Chronicle of Higher Education.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Katherine Mangan, special to ProPublica.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/george-mason-is-the-latest-university-under-fire-from-trump-its-president-fears-an-orchestrated-campaign/feed/ 0 543913
The oceans may contain much, much more plastic than previously thought https://grist.org/science/oceans-contain-more-plastic-than-previously-thought/ https://grist.org/science/oceans-contain-more-plastic-than-previously-thought/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 08:30:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=670010 In the oceans, the most widespread type of plastic pollution may be the kind you can’t see.

A new study published Wednesday in the journal Nature estimates that the North Atlantic Ocean alone contains 27 million metric tons of nanoplastic — plastic particles 100 times smaller than the width of a human hair. That figure is 10 times higher than previous estimates of plastic pollution of all sizes across all the world’s oceans, according to the study’s authors. 

The research represents one of the first attempts to quantify marine nanoplastic pollution; previous efforts were constrained by limitations in detection technology. The study suggests that the mass of nanoplastics in the North Atlantic is greater than that of their much larger counterparts, microplastics and macroplastics. Microplastics range in width between 0.001 millimeters and 5 millimeters, making them up to 5 million times bigger than nanoplastics. Macroplastics are even larger.

Helge Niemann, a researcher at the Royal Netherlands Institute for Sea Research, a professor of geochemistry at Utrecht University, and one of the study’s authors, said the findings are concerning for marine biology and human health. Nanoplastics are “not conducive, generally, for life,” he told Grist. He emphasized that the study’s findings are limited to the North Atlantic, but said it is “likely the case” that nanoplastics are widespread across other oceans as well.

Studies suggest that nanoplastics cause inflammation to living cells when ingested, though it’s unclear whether this is because of the particles themselves, the plastic chemicals they can release, or pathogens that they pick up while floating around in the environment. Due to their tiny size, nanoplastics can more easily traverse biological membranes than their larger counterparts. 

Tracey Woodruff, a professor of reproductive health and the environment at the University of California, San Francisco, who was not involved in the new research, said she expects that nanoplastics will be linked to many of the same health risks as microplastics. In animals, these include reproductive issues, intestinal problems, and colon and lung cancer. Microplastics also bioaccumulate, meaning they travel up the food chain as larger animals eat smaller ones. 

A large blue and white research ship, docked and photographed from the side. White letters on its side read "sea research" and "Pelagia," the ship's name.
The study authors collected samples during a 2020 cruise aboard the Pelagia, a research vessel. Courtesy of NIOZ

“Our hypothesis is that … nanoplastics could travel more widely in the body even than microplastics, and therefore could have more adverse health consequences,” Woodruff said. It’s also possible that future research will discover that nanoplastics are present in the human body at even higher concentrations than microplastics.

The study’s authors obtained their data during a research cruise in 2020. They collected water samples at 12 locations of varying depths across the North Atlantic Ocean. Five samples were taken from within the North Atlantic gyre, one of the world’s five circular ocean currents that has become famous for its “garbage patch,” an enormous collection of plastic trash and other waste.

The researchers looked at nanoplastic concentrations at three different depths at each location: a layer just 10 meters below the surface, a middle layer at 1,000 meters deep, and 30 meters above the seafloor. Back in the lab, they used a novel type of mass spectrometry — an analysis that can identify different kinds of plastic — to distinguish between three polymers. Polyethylene terephthalate, or PET, the type of plastic used in water bottles, was the most widespread at every depth, followed by polyvinyl chloride, used in water pipes, upholstery, children’s toys, and other products; and polystyrene, used in plastic foam. 

Overall, nanoplastic concentration was the highest closer to the surface at 18 milligrams per square meter and lowest near the seafloor at about 5.5 milligrams per square meter. The researchers suspect that this distribution is due to the deterioration of bigger pieces of plastic that are suspended near the surface, which may sink slowly unless transported downward by, for example, animals that have eaten plastic and then died.

Labeled glass vials in a row, with salt residue visible at the bottom of each
Glass vials containing nanoplastic samples from each of the 12 locations tested. Salt residue is visible at the bottom of each. Courtesy of NIOZ

Eighteen milligrams per square meter might not seem like much. But, it’s the equivalent of containing seven mosquitoes in a 3-foot by 3-foot box, assuming each mosquito weighs roughly 2.5 milligrams. Multiply that by the vast volume of an ocean, and you end up with a whole lot of plastic. 

“I would argue as a toxicologist that if you see something in micrograms per liter in the open ocean, that’s quite a high concentration,” said Martin Wagner, a biology professor at the Norwegian University of Science and Technology who was not involved in the study.

Wagner cautioned that the study’s major extrapolation — that there are 27 million metric tons of nanoplastic in the North Atlantic, more than the weight of 26,000 Eiffel towers — relies on “very few samples.” Still, Wagner said it makes sense that there would be an exorbitant amount of nanoplastic given the high volume of larger plastic fragments that end up in the oceans each year. According to the United Nations, roughly 20 million tons of plastic enter aquatic ecosystems each year. This includes lakes, rivers, and streams, as well as oceans, but for much of that pollution, the ocean is the final destination.

“We’ve basically been dumping plastic in the ocean for decades,” Woodruff said. “It doesn’t go away, it just breaks down into smaller plastics, so it does make sense that you would find more nanoplastics than macro and microplastics.”

Notably, the type of analysis that the study’s authors used was unable to detect the world’s two most common plastic polymers: polyethylene and polypropylene, meaning their estimate for overall nanoplastics is likely conservative. Still, the study’s findings could provide more realistic data for researchers who are trying to model the real-world impacts and toxicity of nanoplastic pollution.

Niemann said more research is needed on nanoplastics, including on their prevalence globally. He recently won a grant to research what happens to nanoplastics once they’re in the ocean, including whether any types of bacteria can naturally break them down. Manually trying to clean them from the global oceans’ more than 330 million cubic miles of water is “not really a good idea,” he said.

Both Wagner and Woodruff said the research adds to the growing body of  evidence supporting limits on global plastic production — rather than allowing it to triple by 2050, as projected by the United Nations Environment Programme. World leaders are expected to continue debating plastic production limits during the next round of negotiations over the U. N.’s plastics treaty, scheduled to take place next month in Geneva, Switzerland. 

“This reinforces how important it is to cap [plastic production], leave fossil fuels in the ground, and look to alternatives,” Woodruff said.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The oceans may contain much, much more plastic than previously thought on Jul 11, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Joseph Winters.

]]>
https://grist.org/science/oceans-contain-more-plastic-than-previously-thought/feed/ 0 543889
Singer-songwriter Laura Stevenson on the beauty of ambiguity https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/singer-songwriter-laura-stevenson-on-the-beauty-of-ambiguity/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/singer-songwriter-laura-stevenson-on-the-beauty-of-ambiguity/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/singer-songwriter-laura-stevenson-on-the-beauty-of-ambiguity You’ve spent the last few years getting your masters in music therapy. How do you find that that’s influenced your songwriting?

Because I work with a lot of people who are non-verbal, you really just have to be in the music with them, and that’s how you’re in conversation with them or in communication with them. So I’m able to enter that music-only zone and really immerse myself in it in a way that I’ve never been able to do before. I’m not self-conscious when I’m improvising with people anymore, because my job involves a lot of improvisation. I was always worried that I wasn’t skilled enough as a technical player to do that, but I’m finding that I’m stepping into the music experience intentionally and I’m bringing that home with me, which is good.

I feel like I am also more keenly aware of the neurological processes of entering flow state. I’m finding that I’m able to create an environment in which all is conducive to going into that. I have such limited time. I became a mother, and I have these very short bursts of time and I feel like I’m able to maximize it now, which is cool.

When you have a block of free time, how do you maximize that and force yourself into the flow state?

If the inspiration’s not coming, I can’t force it. I kind of just walk away. But I think my new thing is that I open myself up to more opportunities to let it overtake me. I think my heart is just more open and I’m a better listener now that I’ve been doing this work in music therapy. It’s very spiritual, where you see music as this amazing way for us all to be connected. So I think that I am just embracing music in a way that I haven’t before.

Have you noticed your songwriting change since you became a mother?

I feel like I’ve grown a lot as a person, kind of like the Grinch at the end of the movie, when his heart expands. I think my openness and my empathy has increased massively, and also [because of] the work that I’m doing. So I think I’m able to be more open and maybe censor myself a little bit less, to be kinder to myself, and to welcome all these crazy experiences and feelings. I’m also just getting older, so I can’t really tell what it is, if it’s just age and wisdom or if it’s motherhood that’s increased my wisdom.

Your new record is your seventh album in the last 15 years, and they’ve all been very autobiographical. How has it felt putting your life out there in your music and your listeners witnessing your life changing over that time? There are people who have grown and changed with you. Do you think about that a lot?

I think about it when people get in touch with me and they talk about where they were when they were listening to a specific record and how they were going through the same thing. I guess I don’t think about it enough. It is weird to have everybody know basically exactly what’s happening with me and how I feel at all times. But it’s also kind of beautiful because I connect with people that I’ve never met before, because they can put themselves right there [with me]. When I meet fans or people who like my music and have for a long time, it feels like we’re old friends, even though I don’t know them at all and they have just an idea of me.

Late Great in particular is incredibly personal and I find it very painful to listen to sometimes. I actually find myself having a hard time getting through it. How do you feel in these days right now, right before the release, knowing that soon everyone is going to hear something very heavy that you wrote?

I think I was trying not to think about it. I was like, “Oh, it’s fine. It’s just a record.” But it’s really intense! I’ve been thinking about it more lately and I’m pretty freaked out about it. But what are you going to do?

What part of it freaks you out the most?

I don’t know. I just worry. I tell stories very vaguely and I want to keep it that way. I worry that people are going to try to get more out of me than I put out with the record. People are going to have questions. And that’s what freaks me out, because it is about my life, but I also wrote about my life, so I was kind of putting myself in that position.

Do you feel like people’s perception censors you as a songwriter? How do you balance wanting to be honest in a song versus maintaining real-life relationships with people?

There are some writers [for whom] the matter-of-fact details of everyday life is like beautiful poetry. But for me, I find that it takes a little bit away from the beauty of something if you can’t paint it in your mind the way you want to see it, if it’s all written out for you. So I prefer to be a little bit more interpretive. There have been songs in the past where I was like, “Oh, I better not say that because that’s obviously a clear finger-pointing at a specific person.” But I actually think it’s more personal for me if I can see all the imagery in my mind and am just drawing the outline of it.

Your touring schedule has decreased over the years with your school workload, becoming a mom, and with it just being increasingly prohibitive for anybody to tour now. Is the live performance aspect of being a musician essential to you? Where does it fit in with your career as a musician?

That’s the part that I like the least. I like writing. I don’t even like recording, but now that I work with John [Agnello, producer], I do, because we have a beautiful friendship and so it is really nice. But I have to work really hard to make playing shows feel good. So, I sometimes just have to very carefully listen to the way the room is and get lost in the music. I just don’t like people watching me. And that’s the job! If I could be invisible, that’d be cool.

Has it gotten better or worse over the years?

I can’t tell. I go through phases. When I was little, I was in A Christmas Carol. I was one of the angels in the angel chorus. So I was in a thing that was performed at Madison Square Garden, because my elementary school had a good chorus, so we got picked to be the chorus that goes in. I remember not being scared at all, because I was in a chorus, so nobody was looking at me. There were bright lights but I could just exist and play and sing and experience it and not even think about the people watching me, just be in the music. I loved it. So I try to bring myself back to that, because when I start thinking about everybody watching me, then I start thinking about how I’m going to make a mistake. And then I inevitably make the mistake. And then I get in my own way and feel super self-conscious. I’m a human being. It’s awful to stand in front of people. I can’t public speak at all. I get so nervous public speaking, it makes me feel awful and I freak out. I think music is a good thing to try to get lost in, to forget that people are watching you. But I’m not a person who is looking at people in the crowd and trying to hand them the microphone and Bruce-Springsteen it.

What, for you, is the greatest motivation for releasing new music? Is it internal or external?

It’s very singularly interpersonal. It’s the very small connections that I make with people over the music and the fact that it can help people get through stuff, individuals. Just having those little interactions at the merch table really makes me want to keep doing it. That, for me, is the most important thing. And that’s why I got into music therapy, I guess, because making even just the slightest difference in one person’s life is important.

My supervisor was talking the other day about that parable about the starfish on the beach. There’s a thousand starfish that washed up on the shore, and there was a guy who was throwing them back in, one by one. Some guy came up to him and he was like, “You’re not going to be able to help all these starfish. You’re not going to be able to make a difference. What are you doing?” So then he throws one and he says, “I just made a difference for that one.” The little individual connections are good.

I feel like you have all but given up on social media. What was it about social media that was rubbing you wrong?

I was just getting lost in it and it was always making me feel bad about myself. When I was really still doing music, and that was my only thing, I just felt like a failure all the time. It made me feel like I wasn’t doing enough and nobody cared. I was doing a lot of comparing myself to other people and that was yucky. And then it started happening to me with parenting stuff. [My daughter] was born during COVID, so I wasn’t leaving the house. There were a lot of experiences that she didn’t have. I was seeing other people doing things with their kids, but I was not doing those things because I was too scared. And then I started second-guessing myself as a mother and feeling bad. So I was like, “Nothing can poison this. I can’t allow anything to poison this experience of having a little person. I don’t want to have any sort of negativity coming from the outside world about that.”

Do you ever get ideas from your daughter? I feel like when I’m around my nieces, I carry a notebook because they will drop a one-liner that comes purely from their ids.

She does ask really beautiful questions and we have to talk about death and life and why death happens and if it hurts. It’s heavy. You want to make it developmentally appropriate, but she asks existential and beautiful questions and it kind of reminds you how special life is. You get so caught up in life and having to go to fucking Target, and then she’s like, “Why does a butterfly fly?” It gets you back to just thinking about how wonderful everything is or just having a sense of wonder.

I don’t know that I’ve ever met someone whose music bears so little resemblance to the personality behind it. Your songs are so beautiful and delicate and intimate, and then in between songs you will drop the goofiest one-liner or joke on an audience. Do you think of Laura Stevenson, the musician, as a different person? Does Laura Stevenson behind the mic say things that you would not normally say? Is there a separation?

In life, I’m the same. I can’t be sweet. I can’t just be sincere without making a joke. I can say something that is the most vulnerable thing in the world, but I have to punctuate it with a joke because I’m an idiot. I think it’s just being afraid of your own vulnerability. But humor has always been a defense mechanism. I don’t like to be serious, but I also have big feelings. When I’m playing live, if I had a slide whistle on stage with me at all times, I feel like that would be a perfect way to end every song.

Laura Stevenson recommends:

Late July multigrain chips with sea salt (a great chip)

Laying down alone (have you tried this?)

The Burpee Seeds catalog (just for browsing, what I buy I kill quickly)

Musicozy sleep headphones (for blasting white noise)

NY Times Crossword puzzle app (for fun!)


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Dan Ozzi.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/singer-songwriter-laura-stevenson-on-the-beauty-of-ambiguity/feed/ 0 543891
How union organizing can change your life and the world: A conversation with Jaz Brisack https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/how-union-organizing-can-change-your-life-and-the-world-a-conversation-with-jaz-brisack/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/how-union-organizing-can-change-your-life-and-the-world-a-conversation-with-jaz-brisack/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 02:04:26 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335369 Author and organizer Jaz Brisack with a copy of their new book, "Get on the Job and Organize," at The Real News Network studio in Baltimore, MD, on June 21, 2025.“I think it’s really important to present an idea of what the world could look like if we win and talk to people about what they could really change [by organizing] and how their lives would be different.”]]> Author and organizer Jaz Brisack with a copy of their new book, "Get on the Job and Organize," at The Real News Network studio in Baltimore, MD, on June 21, 2025.

After getting a job as a barista at the Elmwood Starbucks in Buffalo, New York, Jaz Brisack became a founding member of Starbucks Workers United and helped organize the first unionized Starbucks in the US in December of 2021. In their new book, Get on the Job and Organize, Brisack details the hardwon lessons they and their coworkers have learned from building one of the most significant and paradigm-shifting worker organizing campaigns in modern history. In this extended episode of Working People, TRNN Editor-in-Chief Maximillian speaks with Brisack about their book, the facts and fictions characterizing today’s “new labor movement,” and why union organizing is essential for saving democracy and the world.

Guests:

  • Jaz Brisack is a union organizer and cofounder of the Inside Organizer School, which trains workers to unionize. After spending one year at Oxford as a Rhodes Scholar, Jaz got a job as a barista at the Elmwood Starbucks in Buffalo, New York, becoming a founding member of Starbucks Workers United and helping organize the first unionized Starbucks in the United States in December of 2021. As the organizing director for Workers United Upstate New York & Vermont, they also worked with organizing committees at companies ranging from Ben & Jerry’s to Tesla.

Additional links/info:

Featured Music:

  • Jules Taylor, “Working People” Theme Song

Credits:

  • Audio Post-Production: Jules Taylor
Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Alright. Welcome everyone to Working People, a podcast about the lives, jobs, dreams, and struggles of the working class today. Working People is a proud member of the Labor Radio Podcast Network and is brought to you in partnership within in these Times Magazine and the Real News Network. This show is produced by Jules Taylor and made possible by the support of listeners like you. My name is Maximillian Alvarez and we’ve got a really special extended episode for y’all. Today I got the chance to sit down here at the Real News Network studio in Baltimore and chat in person with someone that I’ve been really wanting to have on the show for a long time. Jaz Brisack is a union organizer and co-founder of the Inside Organizer School, which trains workers to unionize. After spending one year at Oxford as a Rhodes Scholar, Jaz got a job as a barista at the Elmwood Starbucks in Buffalo, New York, becoming a founding member of Starbucks, workers United and helping organize the first unionized Starbucks in the United States in December of 2021.

As the organizing director for Workers United, upstate New York and Vermont, they also worked with organizing committees at companies ranging from Ben and Jerry’s to Tesla. Now, Jaz wrote a really incredible and raw, funny and just deeply insightful book that was just published, and the book is called Get On the Job and Organize Standing Up for a Better Workplace and a Better World. And it is just chock full of wisdom and firsthand experience from one of the many powerful diverse voices of what so many out there have been calling the new Labor Movement. And just to give you a taste in the introduction of their book, Jaz writes, in theory, organizing a union is straightforward. Workers decide they want to organize sign union cards, declaring that they want to join an organization and file for an election. Once they reach a large enough majority, the NLRB or National Labor Relations Board then schedules an election in which workers vote by secret ballot on whether to unionize.

If 50% plus one of the voters vote to unionize the union wins and the NLRB certifies the organization as the official representative of the workers for the purpose of collective bargaining, then the company is required to meet with the union to bargain a first contract. In practice, the process is far more complicated. Companies try a variety of methods, some legal others to prevent, dissuade, or intimidate workers from unionizing. The NLRB process is riddled with loopholes and delays. If a company fires a union leader, it can take years to win their reinstatement and companies can appeal NLRB decisions. In federal court, there are no meaningful penalties for breaking labor law beyond paying back wages and posting an admission, companies can get away with nearly any violation. The consequence for refusing to bargain with a union is a letter ordering the company to bargain with no enforcement mechanism.

Despite this workers’ enthusiasm for organizing unions in their workplace is surging today. There is a growing awareness of the necessity of unions. Organizing allows workers to take action against structural and societal injustices, including the soaring income inequality that has eroded many workers’, prospects of career advancement along with any possibility of retirement. It is also the only means of bringing democracy to the workplace and altering power dynamics in favor of workers rather than corporations. So listen, if you listen to this show, I can pretty much guarantee that you will find a lot to love and even more to wrestle with in Jaz’s book. So seriously, go check it out and let us know what you think about it and let us know what you think of today’s episode, which we recorded in late June. And without further ado, here it is my conversation with organizer and author Jaz Brisack

Jaz Brisack:

Yeah, thanks so much for having me. My name is Jaz Brisack. I am a union organizer. I’ve worked on campaigns ranging from Nissan and Mississippi to Starbucks, workers United where I was assault at the first store to unionize in Buffalo, New York to the spectrum of Ben and Jerry’s to Tesla. And now I’m working with the Inside Organizer School to expand organizing, insulting, and I just have a book out on one signal press called Get On the Job and Organize Standing Up for a Better Workplace and a Better World about how folks can take the lessons that I’ve learned and we’ve learned on campaigns and translate that into their own jobs and lives.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Hell yeah. Well, Ja, thank you so much for sitting down with me here in the Real News studio in Baltimore. Welcome to Baltimore. It’s great to have here. And like I was telling you before we got rolling here, I’ve wanted to talk to you for a number of years, and I know I’m not the only one, but obviously we were following reporting on the Starbucks unionization campaign in Buffalo very closely. Ever since then, we’ve been talking to Starbucks worker organizers at different stores across the country, California, Mississippi, Louisiana here in Baltimore. I was in the room when the first Baltimore Starbucks won their vote.

Jaz Brisack:

Oh, amazing.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Yeah, so it’s really been something incredible to behold. And of course all of us in the labor media world, and I guess the broader media world, everyone’s been talking about the Starbucks campaign for the past few years. People have been talking about it online, people have been, it’s gained a lot of symbolic meaning for folks. And I guess I have participated in and born witness to so many folks who are not involved in the organizing, like trying to make a narrative out of the organizing that y’all did, we’ve been talking about this resurgence of American organized labor, right? We’ve been talking about this new young labor movement from Starbucks to Chipotle to grad workers, to all over the place. I’ve been dying to ask you for the past few years to just tell that story through your eyes from Buffalo to now. What do you see when you look at the landscape of worker organizing in America today, and where does the Starbucks Workers United campaign fit into that?

Jaz Brisack:

Well, I think I’m a labor history nerd. That’s how I got into the labor movement. I can

Maximillian Alvarez:

Tell from reading the book

Jaz Brisack:

And there other parts of the book that were cut like my 10 page dissertation on the Remington Rand typewriter strike in the Mohawk Valley formula, which RIP to my excerpt. But I think for me as a nerd and as a labor history student, there’s always been these threads and these currents either in previous organizing campaigns or latent within workers. So in a lot of ways, the Starbucks Workers United campaign and the industry project that it came out of in Buffalo where we weren’t just trying to unionize Starbucks, we were trying to unionize the entire coffee industry from give me a coffee in Ithaca to spot coffee in Rochester and Buffalo to Perks Coffee. And we didn’t turn down little shops, but we also didn’t bulk at going after the Starbucks monolithic companies. And so for me, that was very much a continuation of what the industrial workers of the world had tried to do and their philosophy of you don’t just organize one hot shop or try to build a relationship with one company.

You organize the entire industry and then you could have a strike across the sector and truly change conditions in the industry. And I think a lot of folks in the labor movement, especially on the SEIU side and some other unions that are really into lobbying and legislative advocacy think that sectoral bargaining means creating legislative reforms or fast food councils where you can shortcut organizing store by store or workplace by workplace. I think there’s no substitute for workplace democracy where workers are actually organizing their workplaces and sitting across the table from the boss on an equal footing. I think that process transforms the workplace, but I think it also transforms people’s lives. I do think especially among young workers today, the red baiting that has characterized the American dominant narratives around unions doesn’t really work anymore. And people have not just an intersectional view of organizing and the struggle for social justice, but also a deeply felt personal connection to the ways that we’re not going to have queer liberation and trans liberation until we actually have full union rights, full economic justice.

Trans workers aren’t marginalized to certain jobs or facing economic discrimination. We’re not going to have racial justice because a bunch of companies endorse Black Lives Matter with half-hearted words, or in the case of Starbucks X, like a Bullhorn picket sign t-shirt, that workers had to fight to even get that. But we’re actually only going to get it when workers are truly in control of their lives and have a much broader say in society and so on for every other issue, whether it’s the climate or Palestine, et cetera. So I do think we’ve tried a lot of other approaches to organizing society or reforming corporations. We’ve seen the rise of pink washing and then the fall of pink washing. And I think people have seen that unions are the only place where workers can really build power that is fully independent from capital and from the state. At least when it’s done.

I think that’s really attractive to folks. The other thing I think is really fascinating is I came into the labor movement reading about Eugene Debs and Joe Hill and Mother Jones and Lucy Parsons, so many other folks who’ve been organizing or coming in with their own experiences and also their own canon of radical influences. And so in Buffalo, so many of my organizing coworkers were reading Stone Butch Blues, Starbucks, workers United did an event in New York City and everybody wanted to go to Stonewall. I think people have a much broader view than I did at 18 of how the labor movement connects to all these other issues. And I do think that’s responsible for seeing kind of an expansion of the labor movement from the post red scare wages, benefits and working conditions kind of union advocacy into a much broader true social justice movement.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Well, and I mean that really hits me in my core because I try not to lose sight of that fact because I remember myself as a 18-year-old low wage worker who grew up quite conservative, but also grew up just one hair of a generation behind or in front of you. And I think my childhood in the nineties in Southern California was like spent believing that, still believing the residual points about that red scare narrative that unions were important in the past, but not anymore that unions were outdated bureaucratic institutions that limited of individual workers’ ability to excel and succeed in their job. All of that was stuff that I grew up with and what it translated to on the job, whether I was working at retail pizza delivery guy or factories and warehouses, was that when I was enduring and my coworkers were enduring really shitty conditions and bad treatments, there were only two options in our mind, stay and just grin and bear it or leave and go find another job.

So I am constantly amazed by anyone, whether they’re young or old, any worker who takes that step to say there’s another way and to stay and fight for what they deserve and to band together with their coworkers to achieve it. And so I say all that to say that when we’re assessing where we are now in the movement in this country, I really don’t want anyone to lose sight of that fact that if there are more people and new generations taking that step, that in itself is a huge win for working people in this country. That being said, I want to drill down a little deeper and ask how we would realistically assess where that movement is right here, right now in the year of our Lord 2025. Because again, from the media side, I’ve noticed as someone who’s constantly trying to get these workers stories out there and get people to commit to them and invest their energy, their hope, their solidarity in these worker struggles, I’m very open about the fact that, yeah, I’m a journalist, but when workers are fighting for a better life, I want them to win.

Jaz Brisack:

Objectivity serves the boss, not us.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Exactly. It really, really does. And these are our fundamental basic rights and human rights. I don’t think saying that and defending that compromises my position as a journalist in the least.

Jaz Brisack:

But during the legal review for the book, I was asked how I had taken all the notes for the campaign, and a lot of it was based on conversations that I had with workers during these campaigns. And the reviewers were like, well, did you ask Nissan for comment? Did you call them and ask them if they were racist? And I was like, what do you think Nissan would say if I called him up? And I was like, hello, remember me also, were you racist? So yeah, I think we have to actually just call it like it is instead of doing the both sides thing.

Maximillian Alvarez:

I wholeheartedly agree. And again, that applies to folks who are not the bosses as well, like all of us people on the, I guess we could call the progressive lefts. People who have, I think for good reasons really cheered on the Starbucks Workers United campaign. People who have, I’ve seen firsthand every time we share a new story of another store voting to unionize, people get really amped up again, that narrative builds that this is a new labor movement, a resurgence of labor. We’re storming, storming the castles of corporate America and taken shit over. But those same people I’ve found over the years, it’s really hard to get them to share that same commitment and excitement and investment in the stories of workers getting fired for organizing stores getting shut down for ostensibly nont retaliatory reasons. But I think very obviously for retaliatory reasons, and I’ve interviewed those folks too, I’ve interviewed the young people like you who led unionization campaigns at Home Depot in Philly or Chipotle in Maine who lost their jobs.

Their story fell out of the news cycle, but the narrative that people online have been using them for still persists, right? And I feel like we’re not taking into account that this is a long struggle that the bargaining for Starbucks work is united is still ongoing. It’s not like we haven’t won the whole kitten caboodle yet, but people are sort of talking about it as if we have. So it’s a very long roundabout way of asking where would you place the current union upsurge the labor movement over the past few years? Is it what people online are saying?

Jaz Brisack:

Well, I think we’re in a crisis point. I think there’s a huge surge in people wanting to organize and wanting to form unions and seeing unions as a fundamental force for democracy in their workplace, for building a better life, for transforming society. And so I think that momentum is there and is spreading. I write in the book about how no organizing effort is ever wasted. I think that’s true. A campaign like Bessemer at Amazon in Alabama transformed the way that people were thinking about union busting made people, they got so close that people were like, wait a second, you can take on Amazon. And then a LU was able to have a slightly easier path, I think, to having organizing conversations. Folks in Buffalo, Starbucks stores were watching this and being like, Hey, if they could do it, we can do it. And so I think there is this, if they can do it, we can do it Mentality, which is really core to this organizing is contagious.

Once people understand, Hey, I don’t have to tolerate this treatment. Hey, I should actually have a respectful work environment. Hey, I should have a say in my life. People don’t want to go back to relinquishing that. And I think that’s also, especially in a high turnover industry, folks are going from one campaign to the next. And so for example, the person who helped launch the Tesla campaign in Buffalo had worked at Perks Coffee and then it spot Coffee and take in their experiences of organizing as a barista into a different sector, but it’s not organizing across sectors isn’t that different. So I think we’ll keep seeing that desire building, but at the same time, I think the labor movement isn’t fully meeting this moment. I think the workers need advice. There’s an oversimplification sometimes I think of worker to worker organizing where it’s like this is all spontaneous.

This doesn’t take planning. Workers have this innately, and I think it’s true that workers, as soon as you tell people, Hey, it doesn’t have to be like this. We have power actually, despite everybody saying we don’t. People do typically want to organize and are willing to take on the risks in order to be part of something so much bigger. But the Starbucks campaign wouldn’t have worked if it was fully spontaneous. We needed to use salts, which means folks who get jobs with the goal of organizing. We needed folks who’d been through union campaigns before, including I was drawing on my own experiences. We had Richard Bensinger who’s an amazing organizer and mentor and who’d been organizing for 50 years. And if we’d just tried to do it totally spontaneously, it probably wouldn’t have worked. People have tried to do that before. Starbucks has responded by firing workers and the same kinds of union busting that we saw later in the campaign.

But the role of the big unions or the parent unions isn’t so much controlling every little detail of the organizing effort. That should be a democratic process within the organizing committee, but it should be to actually bring down the hammer and put the leverage and pressure on a company to force them to respect workers’, right, to organize. And so our core demand on all these campaigns from Nissan to Starbucks to test the Divin and Jerry’s was sign the fair Election principles, which are a code of corporate conduct that set a higher standard labor law in this country is terrible, super weak, no penalties doesn’t, the process moves so slowly that workers are still waiting on reinstatement years and years later.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Are you

Jaz Brisack:

Still waiting? I’m still waiting on reinstatement. Good luck to me with the new Labor Board, but the old Labor Board wasn’t so great either. So if we’re looking to the law for victory, we are going to keep looking for a long time. We have to find the ways outside of the law to hold companies accountable at Ben and Jerry’s. They didn’t just recognize the union out of the goodness of their hearts. No company recognizes a union out of the goodness of their hearts unless it’s, we had a coffee shop or a restaurant campaign in Rochester where an adjunct professor who taught labor studies was like, I want to open a restaurant and I will voluntarily recognize you. That was one in a million or a billion. Ben and Jerry’s has busted unions in the past, but they read the room and they were like, it’s more compatible with our image to just recognize this than risk the brand damage they would do by union busting.

And they were very aware of what was going on with Starbucks. They were like, we want headlines. And they got headlines that were B, Ben and Jerry’s don’t be Starbucks. And so they were thrilled about that. They were fist bumping us in negotiations over that. But all of that to say that’s what moves companies is pressure and potential damage to their brand. And that’s what these unions must do. If the Teamsters had actually tried to hold Chipotle accountable after they closed the store in Maine and retaliated against workers in other places. And also after workers at the Lansing, Michigan store successfully formed a union despite management’s attempts to stop them from organizing, I think we might have a very different scenario where you could actually hold a company accountable and then organize the rest of the company. That was what we did at Spot Coffee in Buffalo.

The company went from firing workers for organizing through a grassroots community, boycott into signing the para election principles, reinstating the fired workers, and signing a really good first contract. That was the idea that we were going to take to Starbucks was if they violated workers’ right to organize, they would face a similar boycott that would call the question on will the public and the labor movement allow a company to get away with this so much longer story. The International Union was never terribly interested in calling a boycott. They had alternative ideas and Berlin Rosen press consultants and other advisors who had a very different view of the world and of how you win a union campaign. But the reason that Starbucks ended up facing enough pressure to at least nominally come back to the bargaining table was a global grassroots boycott of the company over attacking the union when we took a stand in solidarity with Palestine. And so I think that proved that boycotts do work even though unions are not always the most proactive in calling them.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Well, and just on that note, I know there’s so much here beyond Starbucks to talk about, but maybe to just sort of round us out here in the first part of the conversation, I know folks listening are probably dying to note where do things stand with Starbucks Workers United and that whole effort right now?

Jaz Brisack:

Yeah, I mean, I think it’s complicated. I’m no longer working for Workers United. I’m still awaiting my reinstatement at Starbucks, but I think we had a lot of momentum when Starbucks under the gun of the boycott was like, Hey, we want to come back to the Bargainy table. I think things have dragged on for a long time and that only benefit Starbucks, that delays do not ever benefit a union. And so they were able to replace the CEO who had been perhaps more conciliatory with the guy from Chipotle who had been overseeing that Union vesting, and they were able to wait for the Trump administration to come into place. And it’s not like the previous administration had been so great, but now they have full control probably over that process.

Maximillian Alvarez:

If that doesn’t tell you where we are now, nothing will. Right? Because my mind goes to the Pittsburgh Post Gazette strikers who I’ve been interviewing on this show for the two and a half years that they’ve been on strike longest running strike in the country right now that has now straddled both the Biden and the second Trump administration. And the point of fact is that under both administrations, these workers who have been on an unfair labor practice strike, have had rulings in their favor, multiple rulings in their favor, offering total clarity of the fact that the Pittsburgh Post Gazette owners are not bargaining in good faith, not abiding by their legal duties. And still the workers remain on strike still. They wait still the slow death by a thousand cuts of people forgetting about them and bills piling up. That’s the reality that they’re going through while still heroically holding the line. And now we are facing an NL Rrb that has been defunct for months while Trump has been illegally removing keyboard members. But looking ahead, a functional NL rrb under this administration, as you rightly pointed out, gives none of us any realistic hope.

Jaz Brisack:

It’s better if we just wait it out. They can’t roll badly if they’re not doing anything

Maximillian Alvarez:

Right. Nothing’s better than what

Jaz Brisack:

I would prefer that the administration does not roll in me case and just kicks the can down the road.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Yeah, I think that’s fair. Well, and in that vein, I kind of want to, in the grand tradition of this show, maybe dig a little deeper into your story and then we’ll carry that story through to this book and all the other critical insights in there. But yeah, I was curious to know where your path as an organizer began and what that path looked like as you got more invested and interested in labor history, more involved in real life labor organizing, and to the point that you got hired at Starbucks as assault someone who was going in with the explicit intention to work and help workers organize there. So yeah, where did that path begin for Jasper’s act?

Jaz Brisack:

Well, I am originally from Houston, Texas. My parents are a strange combination. My dad is an immigrant from India and worked in the intersection of the tech industry and marketing and communications at companies like Bechtel. And so there was not a lot of union activism where organizing going on in that sector. He was never a union member. It wasn’t a topic of conversation. And then my mom was sort of a southern populist in ways that could be left wing, like some of UA long’s platform and then could be right wing other parts of the same platform or Ross Perot’s candidacy, et cetera. So I had this very unusual mix of looking up to people like Anne Richards and Barbara Jordan, and then also hearing anti-immigrant messaging, watching documentaries like Waiting for Superman, which was one of the first Koch brother funded documentaries about teachers unions. That was one of the first messages that I heard about unions in the current day.

So my pathway was down this weird rabbit hole of I became an atheist, not a very popular move. And my household, especially with my mother and I was really into the history of free thought, especially in the South, got very into the Scopes Monkey trial. We were living in East Tennessee at the time. I was in four H where people were like, oh, you believe in evolution? That’s devil worshiping. So I was very present in the world that I was in as a homeschooled kid in the south. And so the lawyer who had represented the teacher during the Scopes Monkey trial was named Clance Darrow. I read his autobiography and the thing that really struck me in his autobiography was the way he talked about Eugene Debs and was like Eugene Debs was the greatest guy I ever met. He really believed in all of these things.

So I googled Eugene Debs. The first search result was the Marxist Internet archive and Deb’s speech to the court that was sentencing him to jail for encouraging draft resistance during World War I. And it was your honor, years ago I made up my mind that I was not one bit better than the meanest on earth. And I said then, and I say now that while there is a lower class, I am in it, while there is a criminal element, I am of it. While there is a soul in prison, I am not free. So some might say I had not actually become quite as atheist as I professed to be, and in fact just transferred my loyalty to the Christian Trinity, to Eugene Debs and Joe Hill and

All of my labor heroes. But I think it was a better path for my zeal to embark on. And at that time, I was working at a Panera Bread in East Tennessee. It was not a good job. We were making seven 50 an hour and I was seeing my coworkers going through really tough times. I was experiencing the really physical nature of these jobs and working 10 hour days, and I was like, wait a second. Didn’t the Haymarket martyrs give their lives for the eight hour day? But we don’t have the eight hour day. But I didn’t know that union organizing existed. I thought it was an amazing chapter in history and that it had kind of subsided with the World War I purges of the Wobblies. I hadn’t heard or seen anything really since. And so I was in that state of affairs when I got to the University of Mississippi and met a journalism professor named Joe Atkins who I had lobbied to get into his class.

I was like, I love labor. You cover labor. Please let me in your class. I got in after somebody dropped the class, and then he was like, Hey, this exists. He was the first person who was like, this isn’t just something you read about. This is something you can do. And so he connected me to Richard Bensinger who had been organizing for 50 years. He had been the former organizing director of the A-F-L-C-I-O before they fired him for organizing too much and pushing unions to do too much. He was the former organizing director of the UAW, and this was an interesting moment. Bob King had just been age limited out of office, and Dennis Williams who would end up going to jail had taken over. And so the Nissan campaign was in full swing in Canton, Mississippi. Richard was living mostly in Canton working on the campaign. And I got involved in what was really literally a life and death struggle for workers. There were huge health and safety issues going on in that plant. It was also kind of a final push to organize in the south, but one that didn’t meet with full support from the union leadership who didn’t really believe in organizing and hammers

Maximillian Alvarez:

Well, and just for listeners, about what time was this and how old were you at this point?

Jaz Brisack:

I was 18 when I first got involved in 2016, and we went to a vote in the summer of 2017. And so at first my job was organizing student support for the campaign as part of an attempt to hold the company accountable by organizing everything from community groups to civil rights, environmental groups, et cetera, to students who would Tougaloo students in Jackson were having occupations of the plant headquarters, and Nissan was scared of these things. They trialed a dealership leafleting trial run for a boycott, and it was remarkably effective. Nissan marketed itself as a very progressive company. They were marketing to black customers, young people, queer people. They were sponsoring pride parades, cutting checks to the naacp, the Merley and Medgar Evers Foundation, the Sierra Club, anything that they could find. And so the leverage to expose what they were doing in the plant versus what they said they were doing was there. But Dennis Williams was building his little golf course mansions with workers’ dues money and was not exactly interested in committing to that fight.

Maximillian Alvarez:

When did the compass lead you to Buffalo?

Jaz Brisack:

Well, after we lost Nissan, which was really heartbreaking, I remember driving back to Oxford, Mississippi just crying the whole way and listening to S on repeat. I really believed and still believe in the labor movement as the most useful thing that people can do to try to change the world and to try to get people on a really fundamental level, greater humanity, greater life, greater ability to actually be people outside of the workplace, which is designed to strip as much of your individuality and autonomy away from you as possible. And so I didn’t want to give up on that fight. I had two more years of school I wanted to drop out every day. Richard was like, please stay in school. So I instead did political work and Jackson was an abortion clinic defender, but I was just waiting to graduate and be able to get back into the labor movement.

There was and is a longstanding problem in the South where unions are like, it’s hard to organize in the South, therefore we don’t organize in the south, therefore there is no union density in the south. And so it’s this kind of self-defeating prophecy. Of course, companies historically have fought unions harder and view organizing, especially militant interracial organizing as a threat to their entire social structure because it is, I mean, even in the 1880s when the Knights of Labor were trying to organize sugar cane workers, the bosses who were the plantation owners were also the KKK. And so they massed the black workers who were participating in this really cool interracial militant effort. And so workers in the south have always had more of an uphill battle, but that doesn’t mean that we can’t do it. It means that we have to do it and we can’t walk away from not organizing store by store because we’re in a right to work state, not organizing, because some folks will say, oh, labor law is racist.

That means we can’t do it. And it’s like, guys, labor law sucks everywhere. Yes, it does have racist origins, but that doesn’t mean that you can’t organize inside and outside the law but toward the same goals. So I think that was an excuse that a lot of unions made and make at that time. And so I ended up going to Buffalo in 2018. Richard asked me to be part of a collective of organizers who are setting up a program called the Inside Organizer School, and that brought together folks from all kinds of different unions, including unions that historically had a lot of beef with each other like Workers United and Unite here to meet on common ground, not argue about turf wars and jurisdiction, and actually focus on how do we organize the unorganized union density has been dropping the right to organize is not a real fact at best.

It’s something that’s on paper and unenforceable. And so this school was designed to teach people how to organize within their own workplaces, whether they were already working at a company or whether they were getting a job with the goal of organizing. And so we set out to recruit salts who would get jobs and start campaigns. And I was involved initially with some of the recruiting for Workers United in upstate New York on the coffee shop program and on other campaigns. And then I ended up working, or I ended up moving to Buffalo because workers at Spot Coffee got fired after the store in Rochester, had unionized workers in Buffalo, reached out management, found out about this and fired half of the workers who came to the first meeting. Nobody else could stay in Buffalo to help with picketing the next day. And so I was like, I can stay. This is fine. Two weeks later I was stuck in Buffalo and Richard was like, now you’re the lead organizer. And I was like, no one asked me. I did not agree to be the lead organizer. In fact, this is terrifying. That’s a lot of responsibility I have to get these workers jobs back. But that was the beginning of my deep involvement in the Buffalo Coffee Project.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Well, you said you wanted to get back into the labor movement, like alright, the labor movement sucked you right into the thick of things. And I’m curious to learn a bit more about the need for the inside organizing school and to help folks who are listening to this understand what it has been bringing to the table that wasn’t there before, the problems that y’all are kind of working to solve within the organized labor movement. Could you talk a bit more about the sort of need that the Inside Organizer school grew out of and sort of the path that it’s been charting for workers and organizers over the past seven years and how that’s different from maybe the more traditional models of organizing?

Jaz Brisack:

Yeah, for sure. I mean, I think the NSAID Organizer School is really based on the idea that organizers are going to be most effective when they’re in the workplace. Labor law is pretty weak on giving union organizers access. If a company wants to campaign against the union, they can require people to go to anti-union meetings, plaster the workplace with vote no signs. And other propaganda have people in one-on-one meetings with their managers who they have relationships with and often like or trust or the managers have power over their job. And so their word carries a lot of weight. The union does not have access to the plant. The organizers cannot just pull people off of the line and have a meeting about why they should unionize. And so you’re reduced to leafleting at the sidewalk or trying to house call workers and talk to people when they’re not working at their houses.

And so that’s a really unequal playing field in addition to the fact that the union exists to give workers more democracy, but it doesn’t have control over people’s livelihoods. And so companies know that they hold the cards of who gets fired, who gets promoted, how the workplace is functioning, and they will use all of those things to try to crush organizing. Salting is the best way for workers who want to organize to get a headstart on what the company is going to try to do. Just about every single company will try to bust the union and the labor Professor John Logan is always saying companies will do anything lawful and unlawful to crush unions. And that’s been the case on just about every single campaign I’ve ever worked on

Maximillian Alvarez:

Can confirm from this side too. I’ve also seen the truth of that statement

Jaz Brisack:

Up against all of those odds. Salting gives workers who want to organize the training on how to have an organizing conversation, how to connect with a union ahead of time so that you’re not having organizing conversations in the workplace and then scrambling to find a union who will take you on, which is often uphill battle, so that you’re not just going in and being like, Hey guys, have y’all thought about unionizing? I

Maximillian Alvarez:

Fell out. Kids

Jaz Brisack:

Was actually, nine times out of 10, the company finds out about organizing campaigns because someone is really excited about unionizing and goes back to the workplace and it’s like, guys, look what we are going to do. And then often folks get fired before there’s any way to prove that the company knew what they were doing. So salting means quietly building relationships, quietly getting things in order to be able to launch the campaign with enough workers, support a big enough committee that when you go public and the company finds out about it, they can’t crush the momentum and you have a better chance of getting through. And then instead of listening to captive audience meetings on tape afterwards or debriefing with workers, folks who are interested in organizing are inside the workplace, able to talk to their coworkers, able to present the union’s side. It’s still an unequal footing as somebody who’s tried to play this role in captive audience meetings, but it’s much better than just letting management dominate the narrative and then having to do damage control after.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Right? I mean, again, I remember being in Bessemer, Alabama, outside of the Amazon facility there and standing on the sidewalk at the intersection where people would drive up to park at the Amazon facility, but there were our WDSU organizers there standing there hoping to just have at most a minute while people were waiting at the red light to give them some pamphlets to ask them how it went in there, if there was anything they wanted to talk about or learn about the union. That’s what we’re talking about is inside that building that organizers were not allowed into. Amazon could require workers to sit in these captives audience meetings and just be berated by lies and half-truths about what the union was, what it was going to mean, issue, all these sorts of threats to workers about what would happen to them if they did try to unionize compared to one minute or less at a traffic light on their way out of work.

That’s the uneven playing field that we’re talking about. And that was apparently still too much for Amazon because as the great Kim Kelly also reported at that time, Amazon pressured the city to change the timing of those traffic lights so that workers actually had less time to talk to organizers there. That was a proven story. So just trying to give some more meat to what jazz is saying, the playing field is so incredibly uneven, and that does really speak to the need for models like salting, like you’re talking about, where workers who have a knowledge of organizing and a goal to organize can get inside the walls as it were. And I also know that you mentioned this in the book, and another point to just make is that as assault, you also, you have to earn your keep. You got to, yes, you’re in closer proximity to people and you can talk to them and build relationships, but part of that is also doing the work being taken seriously as a fellow worker who knows what the hell you’re talking about.

Jaz Brisack:

No, exactly. You have to be a good coworker. You also have to be normal. And there are many who would insinuate or say directly that I was not actually that good at being normal. Elli, one of my very close friends who was part of the Tesla campaign tried to tell me that I was not to talk to the Tesla committee about random labor, history, fact, and that I should do advanced reading on anime and video games to have more to relate to people on. But my experience in my workplace was, of course, I didn’t talk much about labor because I was undercover and didn’t want to expose that I was a labor nerd. But if you lead with caring about people and caring about their lives and sharing cat photos, you can get a long way so you don’t have to fundamentally change your personality besides kind of knowing when to back off how to build relationships and really participate in the workplace comradery.

If you’re bad at your job, obviously you’re not going to build that kind of trust in those kind of relationships. But I worked at Starbucks for eight months before ever saying the word union, and my role wasn’t to be the vanguard of the revolution. It was to find people, whether it was Michelle Eisen, whose family were coal miners in Harlan County, Kentucky, who had a deep sense of social justice and a deep commitment to unions and who quickly saw that her legacy at Starbucks could be helping build a union for everybody who would come after her. And Hazel Dickens fire in the hole started playing in my head as we were talking because it’s like, I’m going to make a union for the ones I’ll leave behind. And so it was this very full circle poetic moment, which I did not share with her because I actually can keep my labor back to myself sometimes

Maximillian Alvarez:

Again, be normal,

Jaz Brisack:

Be normal. But my coworker, Angela, who had been working jobs since she was I think 13 or 14 before we had any conversations about the union, while all that was deep underground, she was like, we could catalyze a revolution. And so you’re on the lookout for people who have it within them and have the desire. And then it’s like, Hey, what if we actually did what you talked about? I wanted to talk to you because you said this, and I think I know a guy in that case, Richard, but in any case, there’s a way that we could actually put this into practice and there’s a union that would back us up that is the difference often between people throwing Karl Mark’s birthday parties and chatting about unionizing and actually doing it.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Let’s keep tugging on that thread because I could genuinely talk to you for hours, but I know I only have you for maybe another 10 minutes or so, and I want to make sure that we round out the conversation really bringing things back to your vital new book, which as you mentioned is called Get on the Job and Organize. And it really pulls together a lot of these critical lessons that you have learned firsthand through your experience as a worker organizer, but also that you’ve learned through your history nerd research and all the conversations that you’ve had with folks. It’s a really critical book, and I would highly encourage anyone who’s even remotely interested in organizing and wants to understand why folks like us are constantly championing organizing and saying, this is your right. You should exercise it.

There are a lot of really deep philosophical existential things there, like you even mentioned, to organize for a better life and work towards a better life is to be more human. It’s to fight against the dehumanization that we experience day in, day out in this crushing capitalist system of working just to live. So I want to ask if we could talk about some of the key themes that you’re bringing together in this book, key lessons that you’re offering for folks. Let’s start, since we were talking about the captive audience meetings, you have one chapter with a very eye-catching title called Corporate Terrorism. I was wondering if maybe we could start there and you can expand a bit on what you mean by that. I think it’s a very powerful way to put it.

Jaz Brisack:

So I should say I should give some credit to the folks where I got some of these lines, get on the job and organize was the slogan of the industrial workers of the world in 1917. And it reflects their philosophy that there’s not this sharp distinction between a union organizer and the rank and file that they didn’t have a big budget. And so a lot of folks who were leading organizing were getting jobs, either migrant jobs, farm worker jobs, factory jobs, anything with the goal of helping organize and build union density. And so I think that philosophy of the labor movement and the idea that union organizers should be working in the industries that they’re organizing and familiar with, what workers are actually going through and not just having their sweet pie cards jobs and becoming kind of pundits or talking heads ironic that now I’m maybe becoming appendant more to self criticize leader, but I think I wanted to get a job at Starbucks because I didn’t just want to go into a staff job without experiencing organizing a workplace myself. And then the corporate terrorism line comes from how Richard would describe what companies were doing, and terrorism is instilling fear for political reasons and trying to terrorize people out of taking a stand or with some kind of agenda. And that’s exactly what corporations are doing. Terrorism is usually a slur directed at people who are resisting oppression by the powers that are in place that are practicing the oppression. I think highly recommend Patrice CU Colors when they call you a terrorist. I think we see this obviously with Freedom Fighters around the world.

Maximillian Alvarez:

One of our highest, most viewed videos in the time that I’ve been the editor-in-chief of the Real News Network is an incredible documentary piece that we shot in the West Bank of Occupied Palestine. And the title of that is a direct quote from one of the women that we interviewed. They call us terrorists, is the name of the documentary. And the whole documentary is showing this oppressed, brutally unimaginably, repressed population of Palestinians in a refugee camp displaced from their homes 50 years prior, just living a bear life where the walls are constantly closing in, where family members are constantly dying and talking to them about what it means to be called a terrorist and what actually they are fighting for. And just like I’m seeing images of that documentary as you’re talking about this, and it really does, I think force and has forced a lot of us to think critically about how that term’s thrown around and how we have been conditioned to see certain people, especially people of certain skin colors and certain parts of the world as owning that term and not looking at things like the tactics of corporations weaponizing fear to prevent people from exercising their rights as also and in fact, more so a truer understanding and definition of what terrorism really is.

Jaz Brisack:

No, exactly. I mean, the terrorists aren’t people like he La Ked. They’re people who are responsible for the oppression that people are facing. And so I use corporate terrorism very intentionally because I think it is potentially controversial and I want people to think about how they define terror and terrorism in their own heads. And I mean, it’s not exactly the same narrative, but it’s very similar to how companies are like since the Civil War and certainly since the Civil Rights movement, the biggest trope about union organizing, but it’s not exclusive to the South, is these outside agitators coming in, stirring up these workers who would otherwise be totally happy and contented. And then Howard Schultz continued that by saying about me and the other salts in Buffalo, if that’s not a nefarious thing to do to get a job at Starbucks and try to unionize from within, I don’t know what it is.

And so when we use unconventional tactics to try to advance our organizing and trying to fight for humanity, we’re called nefarious or shady or terrorists. And when companies fire workers and make people lose their jobs and drive people to mental breakdowns and even to suicide because of the retaliation that people are facing, that’s just the way it is. That’s fine. That’s when people are under occupation or facing occupation and state repression and brutal policing and all of these other things. That’s the way it is. And if you resist that, you’re a terrorist, which is why I intentionally put lines trying to compare what we were doing with only having to win one Starbucks to the IRA, only having to be lucky once. I think we need to make these connections because the forces in power connect all of these struggles against oppression. And you have Palantir making contracts with every repressive regime, whether it’s the US government and ICE and their recent new contract to make a dossier on every person and surveil everyone or their longstanding behaviors and profiting off of the apartheid and genocide and Palestine. They’re using these AI tools to decide who to kill and how. And automating a genocide aside,

Maximillian Alvarez:

And they’ve been doing it like Palestine has been a laboratory to develop technologies of repression for quite some time. Again, we’ve also published powerful documentaries that’s like children of men in real life, where we filmed one that was just at a checkpoint in the West Bank at like three in the morning working people waiting for hours in the dead of night to pass through this Orwell in checkpoint that is cameras tracking their faces, facial recognition technology. I mean all manner of surveillance has been developed and tested out in the most repressive parts of the world.

Jaz Brisack:

And our police departments are all going over there to train on exactly how the IOF is repressing people. And then coming back and doing that same thing in Atlanta or in Ferguson, Missouri or anywhere in Baltimore.

Maximillian Alvarez:

You’re sitting here in our studio right across the street and all over downtown here, there are signs on Lampposts saying this camera is an eye witness.

Jaz Brisack:

Wow.

Maximillian Alvarez:

And every time I pass by one of those, I think of something I heard Chelsea Manning say when she was speaking in Ann Arbor when I was living there, and she said, I got out of prison and all I see is more prison. And you mentioned Palantir, you mentioned the way the Trump administration is sort of using it’s connections to big tech and this massive interlocking apparatus of surveillance to build dossiers on American

Jaz Brisack:

Citizens. You get a terror charge for keying a Tesla and the Tesla is the one filming you do it to the Tesla.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Well, and not to spitball too much about this, but just to really drive home that point about the need to use terms like terrorism and to see the double standards by which the powerful weaponize those terms to achieve their political ends. I’ve been interviewing folks back home in LA where the protests are happening as we speak. We’re recording this near the end of June, 2025. As the National Guard and active duty military are stomping around my home as ice is abducting people off the street, many of these armed agents of the state wearing face masks jumping out of unmarked cars, while at the same time Trump and other officials are saying that it’s a crime for protestors to wear masks to protest. So that again, should just really underscore for you that you should not take these terms at face value. You should always understand how they’re being deployed by the powerful to maintain their power and to reduce hours.

But I don’t want to go off on too big of a tangent there. I think your point is very, very well made and really important. What are some of the other, by way of rounding, like some of the other kind of key takeaways in this book, again, we’re not going to be able to sum up this whole rich text in an hour conversation. The hope is that folks after listening to this will go read the damn book. But I guess for folks out there listening, folks who have maybe wanted to organize their workplace, folks who have seen on social media and your victories in the Starbucks Workers United effort, they’ve seen victories elsewhere in the past few years, and they’ve had that same thought that you mentioned earlier. If they can do it, why can’t we? What are some other kind of key points that folks will find in this book to help them continue down that path?

Jaz Brisack:

Yeah, I mean, I think one of the main takeaways besides it’s not rocket science, anybody can do this. We were literally a sleep deprived band of 20 year olds crashing on each other’s couches and going to drag bars to sign up our coworkers between their numbers, and then going to open our stores at five in the morning the next morning. If we could take on this multinational corporation, it can be done. We were not geniuses. We were pretty normal, pretty ragtag people, and we did it. I think another takeaway I really want people to get from this is I, if you have a job, you should have a union. I think there’s often a conception that people are unionizing jobs that they hate or unionizing jobs in response to really terrible conditions. And I think pushing back on both of those things is really important.

I mean, people who are putting in the work, you talked earlier about folks typically think they have two choices, either suck it up and bear it or quit. And I think people who don’t care about their jobs or are just doing their job, getting a paycheck and going home aren’t going to put in all of the effort that it takes to dedicate yourself to a union campaign. It can absorb your whole life for a while. And I think the folks who are willing to take that on are the most committed to the company, are the ones who are really trying to hold the company accountable. I mean, we had a leaflet during the Starbucks campaign that was the company’s mission and values, and every way that forming a union was upholding these values that Starbucks doesn’t truly believe in. And so I think positivity is more unifying than negativity, especially when you have a company trying to terrify everyone out of organizing.

I think it’s really important to present an idea of what the world could look like if we win and talk to people about what they could really change and how their lives would be different. But I think trying to change that narrative of the disgruntled union organizer is really important. And then I think the other takeaway is you can’t separate out all these threads. And so we’ve just been talking about all of these connections between the oppression that we’re facing. I think the Starbucks campaign was led by folks who were active in all kinds of other struggles, whether they had been protestors for racial justice, whether they were queer workers and trans workers who were seeing the stripping away of their rights every day, especially folks in places like Oklahoma City or Tennessee or Florida who were organizing a union to be able to have self-defense and collective self-defense against these structures. And yeah, I mean, I think our stance with Palestine was we were slammed for doing it. People were like, that’s a liability. That’s a black eye for the labor movement. You are using your platform of being on this union campaign to express your own politics that don’t relate to union organizing. And I think,

Maximillian Alvarez:

Again, those politics being you shouldn’t slaughter people.

Jaz Brisack:

No, exactly. And they hadn’t said the same thing when we were taking stances around trans rights. They hadn’t said the same thing when we were taking stances for the most part around kicking cop unions out of our labor federations. And they were like, well, these things affect our members. So does genocide. So even if you’re not Palestinian or not part of the group that’s being facing the genocide, which many of our members and workers were and are, being in a country and having your tax dollars and your government massacring people learning how to do that better and more effectively against you by their experiences over there, it’s not disconnected. It’s fundamentally important. And if we don’t have solidarity on one issue, then why should we expect anybody else to have solidarity with us? And I think without getting too deep into this, that’s a lesson that a lot of the labor movement that’s flirting with Trump, whether it’s the Teamsters and Sean O’Brien or the UAW being like, oh, we’re going to negotiate about tariffs with the Trump administration. It’s like, guys, you can’t pick and choose what parts of a fascist agenda you want because your goal as a union should not be to unionize the guards in the concentration camp. It should be to actually overthrow the fascist dictatorship. And we’re not exactly moving fast enough in that direction. So

Maximillian Alvarez:

No, we are not, and I want to way of asking a last question really drive this point home, right? I think this is where your path and mine meet. I mean, we’re physically sitting in the same room right now. We’ve had very different paths that have led us to being in this room. But I think for me at base, this show from the very first episode I ever recorded with my dad to everything I’ve done since then for this show and at the Real News and beyond, I was telling you, I didn’t start this as a union show. I didn’t know shit about unions when I started it. And I’ve learned a lot by talking to folks like yourself over the years. But I think what it really comes down to and why I wanted to record that very first episode with my dad, who means so much to me and who I love dearly, is I tell people I started this show because I wanted to get my dad to talk about what he was going through.

And I did not want him to go to his grave feeling like a failure. And when all is said and done, everything that I’m trying to do and that I want to do is lifting up the value of life and fighting for life as such. Right? And the message at the core of every interview I’ve done is, your life’s worth more than this, than you deserve better than this. You are beautiful and you are worthy, and you can be more than just a victim of your circumstances. You can do something to change it and fight for and win that world that you and every other working person on this planet deserves. And just reading your book, hearing your interviews, seeing the passion with which you throw yourself into all these endeavors, I know that you feel the same. And I wanted to sort of end on that note because you end on that note in the book. This is not just about workers having more power to negotiate over their wages and working conditions. It is that too. But like you said, there’s a vision here for and a path through organizing to a better world, a better life, a fuller humanity. I wanted to ask you if you could just expand on that by way rounding us out.

Jaz Brisack:

Yeah, for sure. I mean, I start the book with Starbucks corporate in captive audience meetings telling us that the union wouldn’t be able to change any of these other aspects of our life, our communications with the company, our role within the company that we could only negotiate over this very limited group of issues, everything else that was the company’s prerogative. And I think if that had been true, people wouldn’t have taken this on. I mean, certainly higher wages and better benefits do translate to greater life if people can afford to live and not die or suffer for lack of healthcare or dental care, et cetera. That’s really fundamentally important. But I think it is so tied in with pushing back against a system that’s designed to strip away the humanity of everybody that’s more profitable to dispose of than to actually protect and ensure has the chance to have a full life. And I get so annoyed with people who are like, well, socialism sounds good, or Communism sounds good, but our freedom or we have to be able to protect people’s freedom. Freedom to do what it’s like during the Civil War. It’s like it’s not state’s rights to do what? It’s to have slavery and it’s

Maximillian Alvarez:

Freedom to choose from 20 different toothpaste brands while all the toothpaste are locked behind plastic doors in A CVS.

Jaz Brisack:

No, exactly. Exactly. So it’s freedom for a few to maim and enslave and destroy the lives of everybody else. And I think in the US International Union tends to mean a union that represents folks in the US and maybe Canada, but you can’t separate it out. And so companies that are killing workers who are organizing on banana plantations or coffee workers or folks who are mining lithium and cobalt for our phone batteries and powering the just transition, all of these things are connected. The same systems that are trying to oppressed people in Palestine or sweep homeless encampments in California or any other thing that’s designed to make people ice obviously, and rounding up people who are not considered worthy of being here or having a social safety net. All of these things are designed to condition us to accept that some people aren’t fully human and the only way that we can actually achieve liberation is if everybody actually is treated as fully human has the same opportunities.

Yes, we can’t maintain the American standard of life in the way that it currently is if we actually transform society, but we shouldn’t be living in a society where our life and our comfort is predicated on the literal death of so many other people around the world. And I go back to the Eugene Debs lines, I’m not one bit better than the meanest on earth, but everything in society is designed to make us feel like we are, or we get numb to it after seeing genocide on TikTok for two years. So yeah, I mean, I think maybe it goes back to we’re not going to win every fight because this is a fight that’s gone on from the beginning of time in a lot of ways for people to actually have true freedom, true ability to achieve their full potential. But whether it’s James Connolly’s Easter Rising or revolts among enslaved people or union organizing campaigns, the R-W-D-S-U at Bessemer faced so much criticism for losing, but everything that proves that we can fight back and that we can build the experience and the skills needed to take that into future fights. That’s the only way we’re going to break through the system.

Maximillian Alvarez:

All right, gang, that’s going to wrap things up for us this week. Once again, I want to thank our guest organizer and author, jazz Brisac. Go check out Jazz’s new book, get on the Job and organize Standing up for a Better Workplace and a Better World. And I want to thank you all for listening, and I want to thank you for caring. We’ll see you all back here next week for another episode of Working People. And if you can’t wait that long, then go explore all the great work that we’re doing at The Real News Network where we do grassroots journalism that lifts up the voices and stories from the front lines of struggle. Sign up for the Real News newsletter so you never miss a story and help us do more work like this by going to the real news.com/donate and becoming a supporter today. I promise you guys, it makes all the difference. And we need your support now more than ever. I’m Maximilian Alvarez. Take care of yourselves. Take care of each other, solidarity forever.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Maximillian Alvarez.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/how-union-organizing-can-change-your-life-and-the-world-a-conversation-with-jaz-brisack/feed/ 0 543856
The Sanctuary Movement for Monkeys https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-sanctuary-movement-for-monkeys/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-sanctuary-movement-for-monkeys/#respond Fri, 11 Jul 2025 00:16:19 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/the-sanctuary-movement-for-monkeys-kerwin-20250710/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Amy M. Kerwin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/11/the-sanctuary-movement-for-monkeys/feed/ 0 543847
Taiwan’s future will shape the whole global economy. Will Taiwanese people have a say in that future? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/taiwans-future-will-shape-the-whole-global-economy-will-taiwanese-people-have-a-say-in-that-future/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/taiwans-future-will-shape-the-whole-global-economy-will-taiwanese-people-have-a-say-in-that-future/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 20:37:00 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335385 Protesters gather outside the Presidential Office to call President Lai Ching-te to step down during a demonstration in Taipei on April 26, 2025. Photo by I-HWA CHENG/AFP via Getty ImagesThe island nation of Taiwan has been a battleground for competing empires for centuries. Now, as the world’s leading producer of advanced microchips, Taiwan and its people are caught in the crosshairs of two imperial rivals: the US and China.]]> Protesters gather outside the Presidential Office to call President Lai Ching-te to step down during a demonstration in Taipei on April 26, 2025. Photo by I-HWA CHENG/AFP via Getty Images

Today, Taiwan is caught in the crosshairs of two imperial rivals: the US and China. This is nothing new for the island nation, which has been a battleground for competing empires for centuries, but what is new is the critical role Taiwan plays in the 21st-century world economy. For example, Taiwan manufacturers 90% of the world’s most advanced microchips—the key component in everything from consumer electronics to the US military’s F-35 fighter jets. In this episode of Solidarity Without Exception, co-host Ashley Smith speaks with Brian Hioe, journalist and editor of New Bloom magazine, about the history of Taiwanese struggles for self-determination, the country’s position in the contemporary US-China rivalry, the increasing threat of imperial war, and the urgency of building solidarity among working-class people in Taiwan, the US, and China.

Guests:

  • Brian Hioe is a freelance journalist, translator, and one of the founding editors of New Bloom, an online magazine featuring radical perspectives on Taiwan and the Asia-Pacific. A New York native and Taiwanese-American, Hioe has an MA in East Asian Languages and Cultures from Columbia University and graduated from New York University with majors in History, East Asian Studies, and English Literature. He was Democracy and Human Rights Service Fellow at the Taiwan Foundation for Democracy from 2017 to 2018 and is currently a Non-Resident Fellow at the University of Nottingham’s Taiwan Studies Programme, as well as board member of the Taiwan Foreign Correspondents’ Club.

Additional resources:

Credits:

  • Pre-Production: Ashley Smith
  • Stdio Production / Post-Production: TRNN
Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Ashley Smith:

Welcome to Solidarity Without Exception. I’m Ashley Smith. Blanca m and I are co-hosts of this ongoing podcast series. It is sponsored by the Ukraine Solidarity Network and produced by the Real News Network. Today we’re joined by Brian Hioe. Brian is a writer, editor, translator and activist based in Taipei during Taiwan’s Sunflower movement in 2014, he helped found New Bloom Magazine, which covers activism and politics in Taiwan and the Asia Pacific. New Bloom is also an organization that sponsors events at Taipei’s community space daybreak. Today Taiwan is caught in the crosshairs of two imperial rivals, the US and China. This is nothing new for the island nation. It has been a battleground between empires For centuries, its indigenous inhabitants where Austronesian people who had lived on the island for thousands of years in the 17th century, various capitalist and Prelist empires fought for control over Taiwan and its people.

The Netherlands seized most of it in the early 16 hundreds, while Spain established a small outpost in the north. The Dutch eventually drove out Spain and brought in Han Chinese settlers to farm the land and police the island’s indigenous people and the resistance to colonization. China’s Ming and Ching dynasties ousted the Dutch and incorporated the island in 1683, opening the door to Han in migration that marginalized the indigenous population. But China did not make Taiwan a province until 1885, only to lose it 10 years later to Japan, which claimed control of it. In 1895 during the Sino-Japanese war, Japan ruled the island until its defeat. In World War ii, the victorious allied powers granted Taiwan to the rulers of the Republic of China. Chiang Kai-shek Kang the KMT after Chiang’s defeat at the hands of Ma Zedong’s Chinese Communist Party. In 1949, the KMT fled the mainland to Taiwan where it imposed dictatorial rule against the wishes of the island’s people until they won democratization.

In 1987 on the mainland, Mao established the people’s Republic of China. During the Cold War, the US backed Chang’s Taiwan against Mao’s China, Washington used it to project its power over the Asia Pacific using its military bases on the island for its wars in Korea and Vietnam. The KMT oversaw development later becoming one of the so-called Asian tigers, a high-tech manufacturer, and today the 22nd largest economy in the world. Richard Nixon upset this arrangement when he seemingly changed sides and struck an alliance with Mao against the Soviet Union. In the 1970s, Washington adopted a one China policy formally recognizing the people’s republic and giving it China’s seat at the United Nations. But the US hedged its bets on China. It maintained defacto relations with Taiwan, arming it against Beijing and maintaining strategic ambiguity as to whether it would defend the island. US normalization and China’s opening up to global capitalism transformed relations between these three countries.

Despite repeated crises in the Taiwan Straits, US Taiwanese and Chinese capital have become intertwined and so have the working classes. They exploit the US multinational. Apple exemplifies their integration. It designs iPhones, Taiwan’s Foxconn exploits Chinese workers and mainland China to make them. And the Chinese state oversees its workers and ensures labor peace. That period of integration is ending with the rise of China as a capitalist power. The US now sees it as its main economic, geopolitical and military adversary. Taiwan has become the key flashpoint of their rivalry. China claims the island as a renegade province and threatens it with invasion while the US arms it and increasingly hints that it would defend it against Beijing. The stakes of their conflict are not just geopolitical Taiwan manufacturers, 90% of the world’s most advanced microchips. The key component in everything from consumer electronics to Washington’s F 35 fighter bomber lost amidst the two great powers conflict is Taiwan’s people who now see themselves primarily as Taiwanese and as such have the right to self-determination. In this episode, Brian Hugh explains the history of Taiwan its position in the US-China rivalry and the urgency of building solidarity among workers against their common exploitation by all three ruling classes and states and against the threat of Imperial war. Now onto the discussion with Brian Hugh.

So since World War ii, the US has been the Asia Pacific’s main hegemonic imperial power. Now China is challenging Washington supremacy and the two are in an intensifying standoff over Taiwan. China has increased its military exercises against the island while the US has responded in kind with an increasing buildup in the region. What’s the situation as it stands today in Taiwan?

Brian Hioe:

Yeah, so interesting enough, Taiwan does not react very strongly to the Chinese threats directed at it because of the fact they’ve gone on so long, there are many decades of Chinese threats. People are quite used to it. And so oftentimes while there’s discussion as though war may break out tomorrow in the us, in Europe, in other Western contexts in Taiwan, life goes on. That being said, the Chinese threats against Taiwan are intensified. Since the Pelosi visit to Taiwan in 2022, the threats have escalated to your daily basis. And so things have become riskier in the region and yet life is still feeling about the same for most people. But people are aware of example, the rising tensions between the US and China as well as for example, when Trump announces tariffs on the rest of the world outside of the us. And so it is a question of what happens next in Taiwan?

Ashley Smith:

What are the particular things that China has done that’s different recently? And in particular, how has the US responded? Like when defense secretary Pete Haze was in at the Shangrila dialogue and threatened all sorts of responses to the Chinese aggression against Taiwan. So how is that playing out?

Brian Hioe:

I think actually the Chinese threats against Taiwan, people feel not very acutely. In fact, it’s often filtered through the news media to see a diagram, for example, of the amount of Chinese planes that have incurred in incursions in Taiwan’s kind of aerospace. In the meantime, the US says they’ll escalate their support for Taiwan through armed sales and so forth, but that’s not really felt by the majority of people. And so you have a lot of rhetoric. Actually the rhetoric is definitely escalating and there is a sense of that there is a rising threat, but I think that’s filtered much more through, for example, events in Ukraine or Hong Kong, seeing as images of where there has been warfare or where it has been protest against, for example, China holding control of the government. And so that has occurred and there’s a sense of I think rising awareness of that Taiwan could be caught in the crosshairs of the US and China, but in the meantime, it does still feel a bit remote sometimes. But there’s awareness perhaps that we are facing more threats.

Ashley Smith:

So despite Taiwan being in the news all the time in the us, most people know very little about the island’s long history in the past, various imperial powers have contested for control over it. Can you give us a brief history of its pre-colonial people, European colonization and subsequent seizure by China, Japan, then Chen Kai shek ang the KMT after its defeat at the hands of Mao’s communist party in 1949 and connected to that, how has the US used Taiwan for its own purposes since the Cold War to today?

Brian Hioe:

Yeah, I think what’s very interesting is that particularly many people in western context are aware of Taiwan is producing the majority of the world semiconductor. And that’s in fact a very recent phenomenon. But Taiwan has long been fought over by imperial powers because of where it’s located, because of the fact that if you want to have hegemony over the age Pacific, Taiwan is at the crucial note of that. And so that has included Japan in terms of the Japanese empire in terms of various premodern, Chinese empires and so forth. And that is something that I think really is why Taiwan is at this center of contestation between the US and China today. The fact that Taiwan produces the majority of the world semiconductors that power everything from iPhones, PlayStations to electric vehicles, that’s actually very relatively recent. And so Taiwan’s first and abs are indigenous, they are in, it is actually a thought that many aian countries, their ancestors were in Taiwan before, but then after that it was colonized by many Western powers, Spanish, Dutch, Portuguese and so forth.

And then after that by the Japanese empire, Taiwan was part of pre-modern Chinese empires, but it was often thought of as an hinterland. They were not really cared about actually as a crucial part of the territory. Taiwan was only ever a province of the Ching dynasty, in fact, for a total of seven years, seven or eight years depending on how you counted. And then after I became part of the Japanese empire for 50 years. So today when we talk about it, Taiwan, in fact as a part of China since time Memorial, it’s actually a very recent development. Maldon himself for example, suggests that Taiwan should become independent the way that Korea was, for example. And he did not necessarily think about it that much until the KMT came to Taiwan after his defeat in the Chinese Civil War. After that though becomes this notion that Taiwan is part of China since time Memorial, and it’s a very interesting to think about how it became that way, but it points these contradictions I think, of being caught between empires of having people here. They’re not say part of the Chinese empire who are indigenous or from previous waves of migration from China, but not necessarily when Taiwan’s part of any Chinese empire, any pre-modern Chinese empire. And that’s part of the reason why it’s fought over today. But I think it really goes back to geopolitics that it’s like this crystal node of trade and commerce in the region. That is why it is desired by empires historically and also today.

Ashley Smith:

One thing if you could elaborate a little bit more about is two things that are related to that flesh out a little bit more how the US used Taiwan against China during the Cold War and then how that shifts with the normalization of relations between the US and mainland China with the people’s Republic. So how has it shifted and how do the majority of people in Taiwan conceptualize their identity as Chinese or as Taiwanese?

Brian Hioe:

Yeah, I think what is interesting is that Taiwan fits the classical pattern of a right wing dictatorship that’s backed by the US for the purposes of anti-communism because China is right there for example, also that occurred for example in the context of the Vietnam War. And so it is actually very much along that pattern, and yet I think people do not think about it enough in fact, because I think Asia conceptually people don’t pay attention as much to that this part of this global US strategy at the time. And I think that it is really that dynamic still persistent in this day in fact, because you still have American Republicans, for example, talking about this rhetoric of needing to oppose communist China and interesting enough using this rhetoric of the authoritarian KMT because of the fact that they just don’t know what Taiwan is. In fact, today that is democratized against the US batched right-wing dictatorship of Chiang Kai-shek and it Islam Chen quo.

And so the question is then how can leftists, for example, I think worldwide think of Taiwan its own terms. That’s always been a challenge. And so I think that that is still a conceptual challenge for many people. But what has changed in the decade since then of course is democratization in that then Taiwan has become a place in which people have an impex of identity. And I think that people often do not realize, for example, that before Shang Kai Sha and his son Ang quo established a dictator from Taiwan, 90% of the population is descended from those who are already here. Descendants of those that came at the KMT, the Chinese nationals party of Taiwan are only around 10% of the population, which does include myself for example. But then the majority of the population are indigenous or they’re from prior waves of Han migration from China during times in which Taiwan was not necessarily part of a Chinese empire. And so that leads to a very different sense of identity.

Ashley Smith:

Now Taiwan has undergone a massive political and economic transformation after decades of martial law that you just described. It underwent democratization, significant economic development, neoliberal and the rise of its tech industry, particularly the production of high-end computer chips. So it now ranks about 22nd globally in GDP right below Switzerland. What is the role of Taiwan now in the world economy? How would you characterize its position in the order of Imperial states and what are the main political parties in the country and how has democratization and neoliberal development impacted its working people and oppressed people?

Brian Hioe:

Taiwan is a very interesting context in that sense because for example, many of the factories that were built up in China in the 1990s and two thousands were in fact Tommy’s investment. And so it is often categorized as part of the quote, east Asian tigers economies that rose up after World War II are often backed by enormous amounts of USAID as a bulwark mans unquote communist China. And that is what leads to the temporary semiconductor dominance of Taiwan, for example, relative to China because of the fact that the advanced trips are produced in Taiwan, but the chips in fact are put together in China, for example. iPhones are put together in China, but the advanced chips are in Taiwan. And it very much fits the pattern then of how the US created or sought to build up the economies in East Asia as a bull war against the economic political threats of face during the Cold War.

But then in fact, you had odd development in which there is dependence upon each other in the sense that for example, advanced ships are built in Taiwan, but then in the 1990s when it seen China and the Soviet Union for example, disintegrated, there’s a shift towards the global capitalism. There’s a notion then that for example, there would no longer be such rivalries, and that is why for example, Taiwan could rise to this industry in the kind of very possible Cold War era. And in this sense, I think that Taiwan now exists at a very strange place in which at times in which the US and China are against at odds with each other. I think that now there is this notion that the Taiwan is caught between the trade war between the US and China, which is true also technology war reflects how the Cold War in that sense, the shadow of it is backed. And so many talk about this, the new Cold War and Taiwan is very caught between these different places and there doesn’t seem to be a way out because it seems like many of the old geopolitical rivalries of Cold War have resurfaced.

Ashley Smith:

And what impact has all this had on working people and oppressed people on the island? How has the economic development and in particular the kind of neoliberal and opening up an export of manufacturing into China done to working people’s standard of living oppressed groups, their experienced migrant labor forces, what is the reshaping of Taiwanese capitalism done to the majority of its people?

Brian Hioe:

I think the interesting thing is that many people are not actually totally aware of it because what happened actually in the past few decades is that the so-called 3D job, the dirty, dangerous, demeaning jobs were outsourced to southeast migrant workers who are often in Taiwan working in Taiwan’s factories. But then in spite of the rising tensions and people actually do not necessarily feel in terms of the working class, I think the era in which Taiwan capital really owned many factories in China has sort of passed. There definitely is still case, but rising tensions between Taiwan and China, actually many capitals have relocated elsewhere, mostly to southeast Asia or perhaps India. And so I think that people have not really felt it in that sense. It has not really affected life. I think actually the capital labor relations in Taiwan have not been that much affected. But then I think there’s still this issue in which Taiwan is not aware enough of that the so-called 3D jobs, the dirty dangerous city meeting jobs have gone to aka migrant Muslims. And so that has also occurred and Taiwan can be in between. Then I think in terms of that, once these went to China and now they’ve gone to southeast Asia, Taiwan is both exploited in that sense, but also an exploiter, and I think that’s something that Taiwan could reflect on much more.

Ashley Smith:

So what does that mean for Taiwan’s position in the structure of Imperial states? Because some people talk about it as an oppressed nation, other people talk about it as a regional power. How do you think it fits in because that’s important conceptually to figure out how the left should respond to the situation.

Brian Hioe:

Absolutely, and I think that’s very important to think about the various East Asian states, for example, whether it’s South Korea or Japan or Taiwan because they are oppressors, but also in that sense caught between the US and China. And so perhaps there’s a certain degree of economic level that for example, Taiwan has risen to. But in term then Taiwan becomes oppressor of other nations because at one point, for example, when there’s the error of made in Taiwan, those Chinese factory workers are taking on all these jobs. But after moving up to so-called value chain, then now Taiwan outsources these jobs to other nationalities, whether within Taiwan itself, in factories in Taiwan or outsources in directly to so Asia factories for example. And so Taiwan is caught between, and I think actually we need to think beyond these binaries of victim and victimizer in terms of capitalism because it is this endless chain in which you are at different points in the so-called value chain. And so Taiwan is somewhere in between there. And that sense, to be honest, Taiwan is I think comparatively relatively privileged, but then it is in meantime caught between the contention of geopolitical rivals. And I think there’s unfortunate fact Taiwan is caught geopolitically at the certain nexus in which it has often been the object of contestation between empires. So I think there’s a lot of layers I think through there. There’s no good versus evil, for example, narrative here.

Ashley Smith:

So now let’s just dive into the relationship between in this triangle of the us, Taiwan and China Taiwan’s trapped between global capitalism’s two main powers, the US and China. China claims. Taiwan is a renegade province while the US supports an arms Taiwan while maintaining strategic ambiguity as to whether it would come to its defense. In the case of an invasion by Beijing, how have the country’s main parties, the capitalist parties, the KMT, the DPP and the TPP positioned themselves amids this conflict?

Brian Hioe:

Yeah, so I think what the fundamental splits in Taiwan between the two major parties, the DPP and the KMT is that one is the party of domestic Taiwanese capital, let’s say the bourgeoisie, whereas the other one at the KMT, the former authoritarian party is the party of the cross street hopping at bourgeoisie, which you jump between Taiwan and China in order to, that’s how you operate actually, you’re operating on the interests of those two countries or two entities rather. And so that is the source of conflict between the parties. And so the DPP has really doubled down on strengthening ties to the US building up domestic Taiwan capital. In the meantime, the KMT claims that for example, times prosperity is built on economic relations to China that instead in the era in which US power is potentially reigning that Taiwan should go in the direction of China.

And so there’s that contestation. The T PPP in the meantime is a party that tries to track swing voters, those who are between the KMT and the DP, but has generally drifted much towards the KMT in past years, which is kind of strategy I think on their part, but I don’t actually think it’s totally successful. I think the all along run, they will eventually become absorbed back into the KMT. And so that is the source of tension between the two. The DPP calls a stronger ties with the us, the KMT calls a stronger ties with China, but I feel that in this present era in which for example, Chinese young people increase to identify as Taiwanese rather than Chinese, for example, even someone like myself who’s descended from those who came to Taiwan with A KMT and defined more as Taiwanese rather than Chinese. And so I don’t think the KMT really has a long-term future, but it’s still doubling down on that path. And so it is to be seen actually what happens going forward.

Ashley Smith:

So what is the current DPP government doing? What’s their strategy? What’s their political and economic strategy amidst this conflict?

Brian Hioe:

Part of it actually interesting is Trump throws a wrench into things because of the fact that there is this tariffs that are imposed in the world. He has created a lot of faith, a lack of faith in US power and so forth. And so there is that, but the DPP has tried to reassure or stabilize the us which honestly enough they cannot actually do. In the meantime, the KT has tried to reassure of that China will continue to grow that also pass the US inevitably based on demographics, based on economy, but also I don’t think people really have faith in that either. And so there’s a question and if the left is stronger in Taiwan, there could be a third path that emerges, but unfortunately the left is not that strong currently in Taiwan. And so attempts to articulate a third path have usually not succeeded. It’s to be seen well for allows for that in the future, but I’m not terribly optimistic currently.

Ashley Smith:

So let’s dive into that a little bit because we’ve talked mainly about geopolitics and politics from above in Taiwan and in the region and with these imperial powers. But let’s dive in a little bit to the history of militant popula struggles of workers and oppress people against their Taiwanese bosses and exploiters and oppressors. How do people give us a sense of the history of that struggle in the democratization of the country and how do people in such struggles view the us? How do they view China as well as the workers in those countries and in the region?

Brian Hioe:

I think it’s a very important question. I think that in the past, during democratization that occurred in a context in which there are many struggles in the region that were from democratization, the Philippines for example, or South Korea, and there’s this knowledge of a global struggle against authoritarian leaders that are usually US backed. And of course the KMT was US backed, but in the decades since, that is receded and in favor of capitalist struggle. And so you have people that were part of the DPP, which is interesting enough, did have a current that was closer to the left wing that has very poor labor in the past, but that’s now received in terms of this kind of national self strengthening. Actually the idea of building up the nation is taking precedence over, for example, building ties to workers movements in the region. And I think that’s a real challenge actually already against that narrative that there’s a need to actually resist capital rather than just become another capitalist power.

But I think that is also in fact what happened with other left movements in the region as well in terms of South Korea and the Philippines that has led to this issue. There’s a desire even for Taiwan to become this powerful Catholic exploiter. And that is the vision of then articulating self-determination I think rather than connecting with other workers’ movements. And I think that that is still something to be worked on. I think that people have not thought that through that history is really seeded and that has actually been very visible recently. For example, with regards let’s say Palestine, that there are people that are DPB aligned that are very supportive of Ukraine for example, but then desire to align with Israel because Israel is of course a much more important economic, let’s say, trading partner compared to Palestine. And so a lot of the movements of the past have also fragmented.

They do not have that power as in the past or the movement leader, let’s say even something like the 2014 slim fire movement, which I was part of a student movement against the KMT, which had taken power and sought to sign trade agreements with China. A lot of these people have also entered government and they don’t think about this desire to build ties with movements for example, but to build up Taiwan as a national power in the region. And actually we haven’t seen this tilt towards the very top down narrative rather than bottom of struggle. In the meantime, the third parties that did emerge after Sunfire mostly have petered out and have lost strength as time because of gone on because I think maybe they have not managed and play this game of how to appeal to voters when people focus disproportionately on the geopolitics or the condensation between the two parties.

Ashley Smith:

So what has that done to people’s attitude towards these ruling parties? I know there’s enormous questions about the cost of living, the conditions of work not only of migrant workers like you described in the 3D jobs, but of regular labor under the conditions right now in Taiwan. So is there an opening there between the sentiments of the majority and dissatisfaction with these mainstream capitalist parties?

Brian Hioe:

I think actually it is quite a challenge there because the two parties both agree on many of the economic woes facing the Tommy’s electorate, which is that their long hours for low pay, the cost living is rising, housing is unaffordable. And so they don’t differ too much in fact based on their platform apart from the independence versus unification platform or whether they should be closer to the US versus whether they should be closer to China. And so that actually is this further Chinese society being further admired in these issues in fact. And so I think that’s actually, it’s a challenge because basically both parties do not alter alternatives. They offer basically the same platform, and in fact on social policy, they don’t differ substantially. And so it’s actually quite interesting. I think that being said, Taiwan, both parties do support in fact a welfare state. And so for example, both parties are rather in favor of universal healthcare which does exist and they do not differ on that respect. And so the main difference is then do you want a welfare state that is more in terms of foreign policy closer to China or close to the us and that ends up being the difference between voting.

Ashley Smith:

So now let’s turn to the kind of position of Taiwan in geopolitics because there are two major events that have set ominous precedence for Taiwan, first Hong Kong and then second Ukraine. In the case of Hong Kong, China crushed its pro-democracy movement, an outcome that would likely befall Taiwan in the events of an invasion. In the case of Ukraine, Russia, Russian imperialism invaded the country to rebuild its old empire while the US backed the country’s resistance for its own imperial purposes. How have Taiwan’s capitalist parties and its people viewed these events?

Brian Hioe:

Interesting. And there’s a lot of interest in Ukraine because that was viewed as a offering, a template of what could occur to Taiwan, the event of warfare. I think there was a lot of similarities, for example, between Taiwan and Ukraine in terms of how, for example, China or Russia have claimed that Taiwan or Ukraine have no independent culture or language or that’s always in part of China or Russia. And so people really saw themselves in that. But then I think in terms of how people imagine scenarios and warfare, it is along those lines and how to actually have a much more nuanced understanding of, for example, where Ukraine is caught between Russia and the US for example. That’s not been arrived at because I think Taiwan has historically been very pro us. It’s a very interesting paradox of the fact that despite the democratization moving opposing a US backed authoritarian regime for example, there was not this awareness of that.

Well, that’s why they could actually maintain power in so long because many of the democracy activists were in fact educated in the us. They only learned about the history that’s banned from being taught in Taiwan because they studied in the us. And so that actually has led to this blindness. And so I think that there’s a need for the Taiwan left to learn from Ukrainian left in terms of dealing with these challenges, but there’s not been a lot of dialogue on those lines. That’s something that for example, my organization has tried to do, but it’s much easier I think for Taiwanese to look to state actors. I think even though Taiwanese left has often looked much more to state actors to look it in terms of understanding Ukraine. And so various lefting actors example have only focused on the actions of Ukrainian government, for example, rather than building ties with Ukrainian leftists that are also dealing with similar challenges.

Ashley Smith:

Flesh out a little bit more about the impact of the crushing of the democracy movement in Hong Kong because I know lots of Hong Kongers fled to Taiwan in the aftermath of the crushing of the democracy movement. So how do people view what happened in Hong Kong? How do the mainstream parties view it, and then how do regular people view the threat that Hong Kong as a crushed democratic area? How do people view that?

Brian Hioe:

Yeah, there’s a protest slogan which was that today, Taiwan, tomorrow, Hong Kong we see the opposite as well today, Hong Kong, tomorrow, Taiwan. And so Hong Kong is seen as offering a potential of what would occur if Taiwan fell under Chinese governance. But that has passed already in terms of five years since 2019 protests and Hong Kong is then viewed as a kind of lost struggle. So for example, in Taiwan there was a lot of sympathy towards Hong Kong asylum seekers. People are activists that sought a flee to Taiwan. And now there actually is a view as though Hong Kong is yet to cut out of entering Taiwan as though Hong Kong has become part of China and so that they should not be thought of. I think it’s the usual kind of anti-Islam sentiment that one sees after initial wave of wanting to support a cause. And it’s actually quite unfortunate because I think actually this is quite a thing as well because Taiwan and Hong Kong in the age of the East Asian tigers I alluded to or in terms of the 1990s and two thousands were always actually economic rivals.

And so there’s a halo around Hong Kong because of the shared threat of China, but that has since faded. And so that has led to a shift since then. And now Hong Kong has just thought of as scary place as though we were China. And so there actually is a much more visible population of Hong Kong is in Taiwan now that are much more active in social movements and civil society. But then I think in the meantime, the majority of China civil society just views Hong Kong as a kind of lost cause. It’s quite unfortunate, I think in terms of even the fact there’s a wave of solidarity towards Ukraine. One has seen a similar sentiment in which basically there has been a receding of that enthusiasm, for example, Ukraine.

Ashley Smith:

What does that mean in terms of solidarity with other struggles for self-determination? You’ve talked about it a little bit in the case of Hong Kong and in Ukraine. How about in the question of Palestine, not just more from the left. How has the Taiwanese left seen that struggle and has there been an ability to raise awareness of from Ukraine to Palestine, occupation is a crime. Is there a kind of resonance of that viewpoint?

Brian Hioe:

Unfortunately not. Basically there’s one left group which is in support of Hong Kong, Ukraine and Palestine is near bloom. There has been this issue in which the nominal support of China for Palestine has led to this tarring of Palestine in Taiwan in which Palestine is associated with China. And so people will view Palestine as, especially with China, therefore not supported and see Taiwan as potentially needing to be in alignment with Israel, which I think is absurd as a self-determination struggle. And in the meantime, because the US is ally in support of Ukraine, then for example, Taiwan be supportive of Ukraine. And so very much the view of the world that emerges from Taiwan is in fact very campus, not in terms of the campus we talk about in terms of leftists that see the world according to geopolitical blocks and according to nation suits. And so there are very few groups that are actually in support of Hong Kong, Ukraine and Palestine.

And New Bloom is maybe one of the only few. It’s very unfortunate because I think it should be self-evident, but then I think the imagination, the political imagination many times people is still according to this very Cold war imagination of camps against each other of geopolitical blocks against each other and has been very occluding to solidarity, I think. And so I think that really remains to be worked on the ways to build ties or to point to actual connection between empires or the fact that for example, China will have Namal support Palestine. But of course similarly Israel is a much larger economic trading partner or in terms of technology and so forth, it is much more important than that also leads to this perspective. And so actually it’s still a challenge I think how to convince Israel, I think not from the perspective of states, but from the perspective of people is

Ashley Smith:

Now let’s turn to the unfortunate reality that Donald Trump is president of the United States and despite all the chaos of the new Trump administration, its policy documents, especially those issued by the Heritage Foundation have made Washington’s imperial conflict with China and support for Taiwan. Its top priority. And he’s trying, albeit unsuccessfully to bring Russia’s imperialist war in Ukraine and Israel’s genocidal war in Palestine to some kind of closure so that the US can focus on China. Pete Hegseth has made this very clear, the heritage documents make it very clear how have Trump’s policies impacted Taiwan’s politics, economy, and military? What are the patterns of response among its working and oppressed people to it?

Brian Hioe:

Interesting enough, the first Trump administration, that’s the rise of what is termed US skeptic discourse, this discourse which is sometimes conspiratorial and sometimes realistic that Taiwan cannot trust us. There’s obvious fact that us cannot be trusted. It did back in the right winging authoritarian dictatorship in Taiwan and of course it major Taiwan under the Boston order to build tide with China. But some of it is on the vering conspiratorial, for example, saying the US engineered COVID destroy the world and that kind of thing. And so this mixture of sentiments have emerged some which I think can actually be productive for left in calling, for example, criticality of the us. The US is of course not alive as an ally. But then of course I don’t think the US created COVID or I don’t think China did either for that matter as a way to destroy the world or this kind of conspiratorial.

And so I think particularly with Trump 2.0 that’s returned. And I think if anything compared to Trump 1.0, there’s some more competence there because he’s held the leverage of powers once. And so having this desire to go in and tear down the state and rebuild in his own image that has occurred in the meantime. I’m not sure if Taiwan is always so aware of it because the coverage of US politics that does occur in Taiwan is through very specific filters. It’s very self-selective and not the whole picture of things. But I do hope that more people are aware of this deterioration of free speech or freedom of assembly or the freedom protests in the US because Taiwan has long looked at the US as this representation of democracy, which maybe it was not always often has not been, but Taiwan is often ideal as the US in a sense.

And I think that perhaps things can change now, but in the meantime, I think it’s still a question. I think Taiwan often is thinking much more about itself and how to navigates relation with the us, how to keep the US happy rather than thinking in terms of, for example, how are we against what we’re chain actors or how is, for example, things in the US reminiscence of Taiwan’s passing for terrorism. But I do see some interesting phenomenon of, for example, people who are part of the democracy movement in Taiwan that have since immigrated to us. Usually elders that are actually present in the streets in the US protesting often with slogans are taken from Taiwan’s democratization.

Ashley Smith:

Like what? Flesh that out a little bit. That’s fascinating to hear.

Brian Hioe:

So some of the, so slogans for example, there’s a slogan that’s popular which is taken from Portugal’s Carnation revolution when dictatorship is a fact, resistance is a revolution, is a duty. And so I’ve seen that actually in traditional Chinese and older people, older Taiwanese people holding up in signs in the US in fact. And that’s been really interesting to see. And so I think that actually perhaps there is some potential to work with there. And I think that is in fact also there’s potential to erode this idealization in the US idealization of the US empire through that in fact witnessing this change in the us. And it’s another way in which I think many of the struggles that we see worldwide are in fact by LinkedIn.

Ashley Smith:

I wanted to get a sense from you how Trump’s trade tariffs are impacting Taiwan and in particular the pressure to disconnect investment in China and mainland China and redirect it elsewhere in particular to the United States. How is the economic shift that Taiwan is undergoing? Is that just economic, is it under the pressure of the US and how does that fit into this conflict?

Brian Hioe:

Yeah, actually I personally think that it hasn’t figured too much because the tariffs are packed everywhere in the world and they were eventually scaled back. But before that, there was already the pattern of Chinese businesses trying to get out of China, which did not necessarily to do with the us. China itself was targeting Taiwan, agriculture, construction industry, mining industry, and labeling businesses as in pro independence and targeting them. And oftentimes the business where in fact had nothing to do with poor independence dances. So the Chinese market was already starting to be viewed as politically risky, could be arbitrarily targeted. So I felt a lot of times corporations are moving to Southeast Asia because China was viewed as risky. The US and its current moves do add more incentive to that move out of China, but I think that is already happening. So actually I don’t think it’s had so much impact. It’s also possible though it’s too early to the outcome.

Ashley Smith:

And what do people think about this then at a popular level? What’s the reaction and what is it doing to the political space for the left?

Brian Hioe:

I think that there’s a view that Trump is just seeking what is Maximalist self-interest to the us. I think there’s not a sense of this kind of moving back and forth and this chaos and this lack of coordination, the fact that they’re just shifting back and forth within positions. But the left in particular I think is still very bifurcated between the independence camp and the inpatient camp. And the Eacian camp will just look at that and point to that, well, this just says that China will rise in fact, and that the US is declining and the independence camp will sometimes just paper over. In fact. In fact, there are so many things happen in the us. And so actually I think it points to that the left in Taiwan is between the independence camp and the immigration camp are still very much trapped in the narrative nation states. They thought beyond that. And so I think that there’s still this inability to get around that. And so this crisis of American imperial power I think has really shown that. But I don’t see critical discourses rising yet. I mean, for example, in my organization we do try to articulate that, but I think it’s not really catching on.

Ashley Smith:

Let’s turn to the political response of the left to this situation. So Taiwan is obviously the key flashpoint in the US-China rivalry with enormous geopolitical and economic stakes as well as high stakes life and death for the working classes and oppressed peoples in Taiwan, China and the entire region including the United States. So how has the Taiwanese left responded to this dangerous situation? What are the main patterns of politics and how can the left combine opposition to both imperial powers defense, Taiwan’s right to self-determination and at the same time build solidarity with working people in the region against militarism and war?

Brian Hioe:

I think this is the million dollar question, so to speak. And I think that the issue is that I find a lot of left, whether purification or pro independence still caught between the narrative nation states. And so from someone that is from a more independence leading organization, I mean we often will point to that we stand in solidarity with Chinese workers or resisting their bosses. And in the meantime, the pronation left, we’ll not talk about this ever because of the fact that they’re still living this narrative of nation states. And so they don’t want to talk about the wrong the Chinese state does because they still have this kind of fixation on that. And I think there’s still this challenge in which there are very status narratives that exist among the left leftism is thought of as just having a strong, powerful state that can regulate the market rather than thinking beyond that.

And so I think thinking beyond basically the US China contention, I think also aspiring towards something that is having, for example, opposition towards the international capitalists, international working class uniting us inter capitalists, that narrative is still very difficult because people are still caught in this. And in the meantime, I don’t see enough discussion of this among the Taiwan he’s left, there’s a powerful left liberal civil society that does exist and can be critical, but then they still will, I think at the end of day slide it with the US over China and there’s a ation left that in the meantime I think lives in a very delusional world in which they don’t ever talk about the Chinese working class or oppression that occurs in China, and they have a cultural fixation on China, but they actually know very little about China in the meantime for the region. Even the recent social media uprisings, whether in the Philippines or Indonesia or South Korea, they just don’t pay attention to that. And I think that’s actually still very isolating. And so they’re trying to build a way to think about international solidarity of peoples of the working class rather than nation states. That’s still, I think, something that needs to be articulated. And so there’s still a long way to go, I think.

Ashley Smith:

What do you think in terms of workers in the United States in particular, what do you want to communicate to working people in the United States about why to build solidarity with Taiwanese working class people and oppressed people and Chinese working class people? Because I think the danger all around the world is nationalism in its various forms, great power nationalism, sub imperial nationalism. It’s different with oppressed nations, but still there’s a task of building solidarity from below among working people. So how does new bloom and how do you articulate that in Taiwan?

Brian Hioe:

Yeah, I think that the working class of different countries in the world have more common with each other than with the capitalists in the world. But then there’s the identification of nation states, of peoples with states over the nation state itself. And so then the workers of another country are viewed as competition rather than actually that you should align together with them against interests of capital. And that’s a challenge. I think that particularly America, having spent much time in America, it’s very hard to build international solidarity because of the fact that America views itself as itself enclosed because it is a very large agency. It is the world power and Taiwan though not the world power. It is an island. And so you have that island mentality. It’s also feels very enclosed. And so there’s always this challenge I think you get when you bring this up, why should we think about this thing happening so far away from us?

It’s remote from us. It’s remote for our everyday concerns. And so people dismiss attempts at international solidarity using that kind of argument. But then how do you work against that? Because I think at the end of the day, it is these large and powerful interests of capital that affect our lives. And so having a protest in one country is not going to actually be able to change the structural world capital because capitalism itself international. And so we need to be internationalist in order to oppose how internationalized capital itself is. And I think there’s no way to have just a country by country struggle for against the interest of capital. And I think that’s why people really need to understand. It’s a challenge. I think the left has faced forever a century because of the fact that we often lose to nationalism rather than anything else.

Ashley Smith:

One other question is are there signs of hope in this struggle? I know for example, there have been labor conferences that have tried to pull together workers and trade unions regionally in Asia. Is there a sign of the building blocks of the kind of internationalism that you’re talking about taking place?

Brian Hioe:

I hope so. I think actually a lot of it’s reacting against those that view the strong dance capitalism only in terms of nation states, a k, a campus or kenkey and so forth. And so I think the reaction to that, I do see some hope because for example, how do you bring together Taiwanese and Chinese leftists in the same room to discuss this? And when I have been in those situations, that gives me a great deal of hope, but it’s easier said than done. I think that right now it’s still a long ways to go about to become the mainstream, but when that does occur, that is I think what is helpful. I just think also the spaces to have those meetings have become increasingly more difficult because connecting across distances is so difficult, even in spite of the internet technologies we have today. And in terms of the repression in the region, it’s harder and harder to have those meetings, for example, because of the fact that getting people in a room together we can talk freely is actually more and more difficult in the age of rising repression, whether from states, whether from digital technology and so forth.

And so I think it’ll require a lot of creativity to think about that, but I hope there are ways to do that.

Ashley Smith:

Thanks to Brian Hugh for that revealing discussion of Taiwan. It’s entrapment in the US China rivalry, the challenges its working people face, and the urgency of building solidarity from below between the region’s, working classes against the us, Beijing and Taipei. To hear about upcoming episodes of solidarity without exception, sign up for the Real News Network newsletter. Don’t miss an episode.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Ashley Smith.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/taiwans-future-will-shape-the-whole-global-economy-will-taiwanese-people-have-a-say-in-that-future/feed/ 0 543828
Why So Many People At My New Jersey Prison Support Trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-so-many-people-at-my-new-jersey-prison-support-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-so-many-people-at-my-new-jersey-prison-support-trump/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 19:59:32 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/why-so-many-people-at-my-new-jersey-prison-support-trump-maqbool-20250710/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Tariq MaQbool.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-so-many-people-at-my-new-jersey-prison-support-trump/feed/ 0 543820
Why did the Trump administration sanction this U.N. expert? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-did-the-trump-administration-sanction-this-u-n-expert/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-did-the-trump-administration-sanction-this-u-n-expert/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 19:45:37 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b2346b8c5edb8c806354ec87e11ff1a6
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-did-the-trump-administration-sanction-this-u-n-expert/feed/ 0 543826
A Doctor Challenged the Opinion of a Powerful Child Abuse Specialist. Then He Lost His Job. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/a-doctor-challenged-the-opinion-of-a-powerful-child-abuse-specialist-then-he-lost-his-job-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/a-doctor-challenged-the-opinion-of-a-powerful-child-abuse-specialist-then-he-lost-his-job-2/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 17:59:03 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=5313db2d90de561bab4778e5f801f8b1
This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by ProPublica.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/a-doctor-challenged-the-opinion-of-a-powerful-child-abuse-specialist-then-he-lost-his-job-2/feed/ 0 543802
The rise of the religious right in Brazil https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/the-rise-of-the-religious-right-in-brazil/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/the-rise-of-the-religious-right-in-brazil/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 17:05:22 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a33d129aa20da4bc343b9ce8f7de61ea
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/the-rise-of-the-religious-right-in-brazil/feed/ 0 543793
"Apocalypse in the Tropics": Brazilian Filmmaker on Evangelicals, Bolsonaro & Trump’s Tariff Threat https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/apocalypse-in-the-tropics-brazilian-filmmaker-on-evangelicals-bolsonaro-trumps-tariff-threat-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/apocalypse-in-the-tropics-brazilian-filmmaker-on-evangelicals-bolsonaro-trumps-tariff-threat-2/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 15:24:42 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=ede264e86d7cd775b9da5721d07ea049
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/apocalypse-in-the-tropics-brazilian-filmmaker-on-evangelicals-bolsonaro-trumps-tariff-threat-2/feed/ 0 543779
The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 15:00:23 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46699 Nolan Higdon and Sydney Sullivan This Dispatch is informed by our forthcoming 2025 article, “Media Literacy in the Crosshairs: NATO’s Strategic Goals and the Revival of Protectionist Pedagogy,” from the Journal of Media Literacy Education, Volume 17, Issue 2. During President Donald Trump’s second term, education has remained a central…

The post The Militarization and Weaponization of Media Literacy appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/the-militarization-and-weaponization-of-media-literacy/feed/ 0 543733
“Apocalypse in the Tropics”: Brazilian Filmmaker on Evangelicals, Bolsonaro & Trump’s Tariff Threat https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/apocalypse-in-the-tropics-brazilian-filmmaker-on-evangelicals-bolsonaro-trumps-tariff-threat/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/apocalypse-in-the-tropics-brazilian-filmmaker-on-evangelicals-bolsonaro-trumps-tariff-threat/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 12:29:10 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a590198c7caf064b61c7dc5d24d74612 Seg2 brazil1

Brazilian filmmaker Petra Costa’s latest documentary, Apocalypse in the Tropics, explores the impact of evangelical Christianity on Brazil’s political landscape. Once a small minority, evangelicals now constitute about 30% of Brazil’s population and played a key role in the rise of former far-right President Jair Bolsonaro. “It’s one of the fastest-growing religious shifts in the history of mankind,” Costa tells Democracy Now! She says right-wing evangelicalism in Brazil is largely a U.S. import, after Washington sought to undermine the influence of left-wing Catholic teachings during the Cold War.

U.S. President Donald Trump on Wednesday threatened to impose 50% tariffs on Brazil, partly as retribution for what he calls the “witch hunt” against Bolsonaro, now facing trial in Brazil for an alleged coup attempt following his defeat in the 2022 presidential election to Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva.

Apocalypse in the Tropics is available on Netflix starting July 14. Costa’s previous film, The Edge of Democracy, was nominated for an Academy Award for Best Documentary Feature.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/apocalypse-in-the-tropics-brazilian-filmmaker-on-evangelicals-bolsonaro-trumps-tariff-threat/feed/ 0 543763
‘Storm clouds are gathering’: 40 years on from the bombing of the Rainbow Warrior https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/storm-clouds-are-gathering-40-years-on-from-the-bombing-of-the-rainbow-warrior/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/storm-clouds-are-gathering-40-years-on-from-the-bombing-of-the-rainbow-warrior/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 10:44:57 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117189 From the prologue of the 40th anniversary edition of David Robie’s seminal book on the Rainbow Warrior’s last voyage, former New Zealand prime minister Helen Clark (1999-2008) writes about what the bombing on 10 July 1985 means today.

By Helen Clark

The bombing of the Rainbow Warrior in Auckland Harbour on 10 July 1985 and the death of a voyager on board, Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira, was both a tragic and a seminal moment in the long campaign for a nuclear-free Pacific.

It was so startling that many of us still remember where we were when the news came through. I was in Zimbabwe on my way to join the New Zealand delegation to the United Nations World Conference on Women in Nairobi. In Harare I met for the first time New Zealand Anglican priest Father Michael Lapsley who, in that same city in 1990, was severely disabled by a parcel bomb delivered by the intelligence service of the apartheid regime in South Africa. These two bombings, of the Rainbow Warrior and of Michael, have been sad reminders to me of the price so many have paid for their commitment to peace and justice.

It was also very poignant for me to meet Fernando’s daughter, Marelle, in Auckland in 2005. Her family suffered a loss which no family should have to bear. In August 1985, I was at the meeting of the Labour Party caucus when it was made known that the police had identified a woman in their custody as a French intelligence officer. Then in September, French prime minister Laurent Fabius confirmed that French secret agents had indeed sunk the Rainbow Warrior. The following year, a UN-mediated agreement saw the convicted agents leave New Zealand and a formal apology, a small amount of compensation, and undertakings on trade given by France — the latter after New Zealand perishable goods had been damaged in port in France.

Both 1985 and 1986 were momentous years for New Zealand’s assertion of its nuclear-free positioning which was seen as provocative by its nuclear-armed allies. On 4 February 1985, the United States was advised that its naval vessel, the Buchanan, could not enter a New Zealand port because it was nuclear weapons-capable and the US “neither confirm nor deny” policy meant that New Zealand could not establish whether it was nuclear weapons-armed or not.

In Manila in July 1986, a meeting between prime minister David Lange and US Secretary of State George Schultz confirmed that neither New Zealand nor the US were prepared to change their positions and that New Zealand’s engagement in ANZUS was at an end. Secretary Schultz famously said that “We part company as friends, but we part company as far as the alliance is concerned”.

New Zealand passed its Nuclear Free Zone, Disarmament and Arms Control Act in 1987. Since that time, until now, the country has on a largely bipartisan basis maintained its nuclear-free policy as a fundamental tenet of its independent foreign policy. But storm clouds are gathering.

Australia’s decision to enter a nuclear submarine purchase programme with the United States is one of those. There has been much speculation about a potential Pillar Two of the AUKUS agreement which would see others in the region become partners in the development of advanced weaponry. This is occurring in the context of rising tensions between the United States and China.

Many of us share the view that New Zealand should be a voice for deescalation, not for enthusiastic expansion of nuclear submarine fleets in the Pacific and the development of more lethal weaponry.

Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior
Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior . . . publication 10 July 2025. Image: David Robie/Little Island Press

Nuclear war is an existential threat to humanity. Far from receding, the threat of use of nuclear weapons is ever present. The Doomsday Clock of the Bulletin of Atomic Scientists now sits at 89 seconds to midnight. It references the Ukraine theatre where the use of nuclear weapons has been floated by Russia. The arms control architecture for Europe is unravelling, leaving the continent much less secure. India and Pakistan both have nuclear arsenals. The Middle East is a tinder box with the failure of the Iran nuclear deal and with Israel widely believed to possess nuclear weapons. North Korea continues to develop its nuclear weapons capacity. An outright military conflict between China and the United States would be one between two nuclear powers with serious ramifications for East Asia, South-East Asia, the Pacific, and far beyond.

August 2025 marks the eightieth anniversary of the nuclear bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. A survivors’ group, Nihon Hidankyo, was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize last year. They bear tragic witness to the horror of the use of nuclear weapons. The world must heed their voice now and at all times.

In the current global turbulence, New Zealand needs to reemphasise the principles and values which drove its nuclear-free legislation and its advocacy for a nuclear-free South Pacific and global nuclear disarmament. New Zealanders were clear — we did not want to be defended by nuclear weapons. We wanted our country to be a force for diplomacy and for dialogue, not for warmongering.

The multilateral system is now in crisis — across all its dimensions. The UN Security Council is paralysed by great power tensions. The United States is unlikely to pay its dues to the UN under the Trump presidency, and others are unlikely to fill the substantial gap which that leaves. Its humanitarian, development, health, human rights, political and peacekeeping, scientific and cultural arms all face fiscal crises.

This is the time for New Zealand to link with the many small and middle powers across regions who have a vision for a world characterised by solidarity and peace and which can rise to the occasion to combat the existential challenges it faces — including of nuclear weapons, climate change, and artificial intelligence. If our independent foreign policy is to mean anything in the mid-2020s, it must be based on concerted diplomacy for peace and sustainable development.

Movement back towards an out-of-date alliance, from which New Zealand disengaged four decades ago, and its current tentacles, offers no safe harbour — on the contrary, these destabilise the region within which we live and the wide trading relationships we have. May this new edition of David Robie’s Eyes of Fire remind us of our nuclear-free journey and its relevance as a lode star in these current challenging times.

  • The 40th anniversary edition of Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior by David Robie ($50, Little Island Press) can be purchased from Little Island Press


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/storm-clouds-are-gathering-40-years-on-from-the-bombing-of-the-rainbow-warrior/feed/ 0 543860
Remembering Cornelius Castoriadis, the only French Intellectual with Humor https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/remembering-cornelius-castoriadis-the-only-french-intellectual-with-humor/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/remembering-cornelius-castoriadis-the-only-french-intellectual-with-humor/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 09:45:40 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159790 Cornelius Castoriadis reflected on man. And he decided that the role of each person in the social-historical is so important. Philosopher with an intellect of many carats. Castoriadis was in awe of the ideas. And ideas are what in time brought about his faith in man. He is a Greek (—French) who honors our ancestors. […]

The post Remembering Cornelius Castoriadis, the only French Intellectual with Humor first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Cornelius Castoriadis reflected on man. And he decided that the role of each person in the social-historical is so important. Philosopher with an intellect of many carats.

Castoriadis was in awe of the ideas. And ideas are what in time brought about his faith in man. He is a Greek (—French) who honors our ancestors. Where was Castoriadis’ house in Athens? How did he spend his childhood? Behind what shadow was he growing?

Castoriadis therefore lived in three cities: Constantinople (Istanbul today), Athens, and Paris. He was born in the first in 1922, grew up in Athens and, he left for France at the age of 23. In the latter city he was educated and died in 1997.

Castoriadis competed from a young age and read a lot. In Athens, he studied law and philosophy. Cornelius’ house – as the author Mimika Kranaki, a friend of his youth, informs us – was located behind the Metropolis (main Cathedral) of Athens, 5 Hypatias Street. The volume of the temple will become a forerunner, years later, of his thinking against God and all religions. So, Cornelius grew up ‘in the shadow of God.’ In this house, at the age of only six, he “attempted to kill himself”, grabbing an electricity cable with wet hands… From a young age, Cornelius was interested in many areas of thought. He himself began to read early and learned how to promote thought. It was inspired by Max Weber’s work on bureaucracy. Karl Marx’s texts were read by him inside this house.

This is where he returned after school and later after the lectures of the neo-Kantian philosopher K. Despotopoulos at the university. He was also a brave young man. At the age of just 13 he lost all his hair, and his mother, Sophia Castoriadis, went insane and died a few months later. His father, Caesar Castoriadis, who made sure that he did not miss anything – there was also a phonograph in the house – is a Voltairean, who because he did not allow his son to stay up all night to complete the written punishment that the school had imposed on him, almost caused Cornelius to grab the wet cable as mentioned above.

At the same time, the loss of hair gave him strength at a very tender age. His friends now call him “globos” [“light bulb”]. In his first steps, he also sees the power that “small circles or small groups” have in the evolution of History and ideas.

The Odyssey of Castoriadis

The journey – the Odyssey… – of 1945 will be of a colossal importance! Paris with its libraries, its students, the groups that write history and the ‘biggest A’ in the world… He also read a lot. In Paris, in 1948, Castoriadis with co-founder Claude Lefort, and together with other friends/partners, created the group and the magazine, Socialism or Barbarism (1949-65 the magazine, until ΄66 the group) for the battle of ideas – the Iliad…– and in this magazine, under various pseudonyms, Castoriadis published many theoretical texts.

At the same time, Cornelius Castoriadis also started working as a professional economist at the OECD and his writings were another reason to be written under various pseudonyms, such as Paul Gardan, etc. Through each line ‘that he composes like a musician’, Paris is the city that strengthens his thinking. In Paris, Sigmund Freud will influence him decisively. Reading Freud, he saw clearly what it was missing from Marx. That was, the human subject… His work is a continuous critique, to which it can be given a critical interpretation. The two pillars of the Castoriadian creation, are: “the imaginary institution of society” and “autonomy”. Castoriadis contributed to many areas of thought.

The personal acquaintance

 Here, let me just add that I knew him in person, we had exchanged a few letters, and I had spoken to him on the phone. I sent him the first letter when I was 18 years old, and he replied. And above all his kindness! He was extremely polite in our meetings, in his office or, when we went for a swim the other day. He radiated a light and had a sophisticated sense of humor.

With him, there was no chance not to smile or laugh at something he would say or, at a remark he would make. He was an active man, who did a lot of stuff in a single day. I saw him swimming in the Greek sea, he could easily swim from island to island in the Aegean Sea. I have never forgotten the image of him swimming… He was also moving his hands a lot, not in the water, but mostly out of it. His thought has an experiential depth/ethos that I saw with my own eyes.

 Castoriadis, who has always been exuberant in expression and strong in spirit, is constantly evolving. On a personal level: Women, gambling, cigars, whiskey, the stock market and songs with a sad theme (moirologia, traditional Greek laments for the dead]) also play their crucial part. He had a very strong personality, and because of this, his path was lonely and outside the intellectual fashions of Paris. He stood out.

Cornelius Castoriadis had a love for dialogue and for every new thought that entered his mind. He liked ideas, and he told me when we met in his office, “when a new idea comes to my mind I feel a great surprise.” Awe for ideas, and from this awe, he started and reflected on the uniqueness that every human being deserves / every human being has. The uniqueness, let’s say, of the militant Nikitaras (Greek War of Independence hero, 1821), who was shouting to the Turks, “Persians, let’s fight”! The ‘only theory’ left behind by Cornelius Castoriadis is his imprint as a Human. An imprint that marked those who mostly knew him up close.

 Exuberant and powerful spirit

When asked how he knows that the cow appearing before them is wild, he answers in a lively voice, “but it has an expression on its face.” (It was, apparently, the peculiar breed of cow of the Greek island of Tinos.) Thus, he impresses the listener, and imparts knowledge hand in hand with humor. How did I find myself in the car driven by Castoriadis himself in 1996? This is the “Personal testimony” that I developed in the humble book of 2014. The rare gift of humor that the ‘atheist Castoriadis’ had is like the strong stings you receive when you read him. He had a sense of humor and like a person as I said. And the ‘bites of humor’ make you say, “the West/Hellenism gave birth to a genius”.

The legacy of Cornelius Castoriadis is priceless. And although we are separated from ancient Greece by 130,000 weeks, Castoriadis was, “an ancient Greek in Paris” as I often say. Man dies at some point, but his ideas remain standing. I think, he will continue to inspire… just like the Parthenon.

In conclusion, the above thoughts/‘pictures’ published here, in a highly summarized form, are those delivered in a humble lecture in the Greek language (it’s the first forty minutes) that took place on Sunday, October 13, 2024 (Institute of Research and Study Thucydides, President Mr. Dimitris Trapeziotis). An ‘early manuscript’ of this speech was read by the excellent expatriate intellectual and professor, Mr. Vrasidas Karalis, in Sydney, Australia, and this fact, as well as his apt observations, honor him in particular.

The post Remembering Cornelius Castoriadis, the only French Intellectual with Humor first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Dimitris Eleas.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/remembering-cornelius-castoriadis-the-only-french-intellectual-with-humor/feed/ 0 543697
Louisiana is the latest state to greenwash gas https://grist.org/language/louisiana-latest-state-greenwash-gas-law/ https://grist.org/language/louisiana-latest-state-greenwash-gas-law/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 08:45:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=669967 In Louisiana, natural gas — a planet-heating fossil fuel — is now, by law, considered “green energy” that can compete with solar and wind energy projects for clean energy funding. The law, signed by Republican Governor Jeff Landry last month, comes on the heels of similar bills passed in Ohio, Tennessee, and Indiana. What the bills have in common — besides an “updated definition” of a fossil fuel as a clean energy source — is language seemingly plucked straight from a right-wing think tank backed by oil and gas billionaire and activist Charles Koch.

Louisiana’s law was based on a template created by the American Legislative Exchange Council, or ALEC, a conservative organization that brings legislators and corporate lobbyists together to draft bills “dedicated to the principles of limited government, free markets and federalism.” The law maintains that Louisiana, in order to minimize its reliance on “foreign adversary nations” for energy, must ensure that natural gas and nuclear power are eligible for “all state programs that fund ‘green energy’ or ‘clean energy’ initiatives.” 

But natural gas, also known as methane gas, is no more “natural” than any other fossil fuel. Its primary ingredient is methane, an intense heat-trapping gas that is far more potent than the carbon pollution produced by coal and oil, though it doesn’t stay in the atmosphere as long. It’s often marketed as a “bridge fuel” — a less harmful fossil fuel that can be used as communities transition away from coal — but studies have found that over the long term, the planet-warming impact of the natural gas industry may be equivalent to that of coal. That’s because gas pipelines often leak; according to an Environmental Defense Fund analysis, natural gas pipelines in the U.S. allow between 1.2 million and 2.6 million tons of methane to escape into the atmosphere each year. 

Louisiana State Representative Jacob Landry first introduced a near-identical bill to the model posted on ALEC’s website and to the other bills that have passed in Ohio, Tennessee, and Indiana. (The Washington Post reported in 2023 that ALEC was involved in Ohio’s bill; ALEC denies involvement.) Landry, who represents a small district in the southern part of the state, is the recipient of significant fossil-fuel-industry funding — and co-owns two oil and gas consulting firms himself. During his campaign for the state Legislature, Landry received donations from at least 15 fossil-fuel-affiliated companies and PACs, including Exxon Mobil (which has also funded ALEC) and Phillips 66. Those donations alone totaled over $20,000. 

Representative Landry did not respond to multiple requests for comment. ALEC did not get back to Grist in time for publication.

While Louisiana has one of the least reliable grids in the country, that lack of reliability is in large part due to the state’s reliance on natural gas, which provides most of its electricity, according to a 2025 report from the Louisiana Legislative Auditor’s Office. 

“Best practices have found that gas plants are susceptible to large-scale failures during extreme weather,” the auditors wrote. “Diversifying the energy sources used for electricity generation is a priority.” 

Bills that benefit both the fossil fuel industry and the individual lawmakers who introduce them aren’t exactly a new genre in Louisiana, said Laura Peterson, a senior analyst with the Union of Concerned Scientists. What’s less standard is that this one is dressed up in climate-friendly language. 

“Louisiana is a classic example of a captured state,” Peterson said. “Their state economy is just so dependent on fossil fuels and petrochemicals.” (The amount of money the fossil fuel industry brings to Louisiana’s people, though, has been on the decline since the turn of the century.) 

The state accounts for about 10 percent of the country’s natural gas production and holds about 6 percent of U.S. natural gas reserves. Natural gas is already used to generate about three-quarters of the state’s electricity, and building out more pipeline projects to carry liquefied natural gas, or LNG, won’t necessarily make electricity bills cheaper for residents, Peterson said.

“Building LNG infrastructure is not going to lower anyone’s energy prices in the short term,” since it takes many years to build a pipeline, Peterson said. “And there’s a lot of research that shows that overreliance on gas leaves power grids vulnerable to extreme weather, which Louisiana has a lot of.” 

Jeffrey Clark, president of the Louisiana Advanced Power Alliance — an industry group representing both renewable and fossil fuel energy companies and investors — testified in opposition to the bill in early June. 

“This legislation is being promoted as a solution to Louisiana’s reliability challenges. But with all due respect, it is a solution in search of a problem,” Clark said. “We support fossil fuels as a key part of the nation’s energy mix, but codifying them as the only acceptable path forward dismisses a growing body of evidence that grid reliability depends on resource diversity.” 

Fossil fuel advocacy groups lauded the move. Larry Behrens of the nonprofit Power the Future wrote that the legislation turns Louisiana into an “energy sanctuary state,” taking “a direct shot at the China-backed solar and wind lobby.”

Reclassifying natural gas as “green” energy means that proposed natural gas pipelines may be able to access funding that would otherwise have gone to new solar or wind projects; it may also make natural gas companies more appealing to environmentally conscious investors. ALEC, the right-wing think tank that provided the template language for Landry’s bill, noted in a press release that resolutions like this could pave the way for more AI data centers in the state, too. “Redefining ‘green energy’ allows utilities to continue using natural gas while fulfilling state ‘green energy’ or ‘clean energy’ initiatives,” ALEC staffer Mark Lucas wrote. 

Over the years, ALEC has succeeded in getting laws that benefit fossil fuel companies passed across the country. Recently the group, which was founded in the 1970s, has helped draft legislation criminalizing grassroots protest against pipelines, gas terminals, and other fossil fuel infrastructure — versions of that bill had passed in 17 states by 2022. They have also drafted bills aiming to punish economic boycotts of the oil industry. And there are currently 114 different model policies related to energy on their website, 23 of which specifically address “green energy.” 

“It’s classic greenwashing, right?” said Peterson of the new Louisiana law — using the language of sustainability to describe an activity that’s actually not sustainable at all. “The intent of these laws is to allow the buildout of fossil fuel infrastructure, which will perpetuate the use of fossil fuels for decades to come.” 

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline Louisiana is the latest state to greenwash gas on Jul 10, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Sophie Hurwitz.

]]>
https://grist.org/language/louisiana-latest-state-greenwash-gas-law/feed/ 0 543692
Indie comics publisher Zach Clemente on sustaining a life-long project https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/indie-comics-publisher-zach-clemente-on-sustaining-a-life-long-project/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/indie-comics-publisher-zach-clemente-on-sustaining-a-life-long-project/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/indie-comics-publisher-zach-clemente-on-sustaining-a-life-long-project Where did the name Bulgilhan come from?

It’s a Korean word, so it’s typically challenging for most people I interact with to pronounce. By my understanding, in Korean, the B is pronounced with a B and a P sound, so it can have a stronger plosive. As far as speaking in Korean, this is the most I speak, it’s just this one word. It’s funny how random it seems, but it does come from my own roots. Even though the Press kind of obfuscates who I am; I tend to speak about it in the third person, for example. I say “we” a lot in posts and online. I try to keep it professional. The entirety of the Press, the business and its whole mission, it built around me. I can’t deny that.

Essentially, I’m left handed and I was thinking like, “Okay, let’s dive into that a little bit.” I was looking into the typical associated terms. I love Left-Hand Press, Southpaw Press, but these all exist. There are dozens of them across the world, so I’m like, “Okay, let me try something more specific.” I’m thinking, I’m thinking, I’m like, “Wait a minute.” I remember growing up, my dad would tell me that if I was born in Italy or I was born in a more traditional Italian family, I probably would’ve been forced to be right-handed, because for a long time left-handed people were considered to possess the hand of the devil, so you didn’t want to be left-handed. So in Italy you would be called sinistra or “sinister.” I’m like, “Oh, shit. That’s cool. ‘Sinister,’ that’s a really awesome name, but I don’t want to call it ‘Sinister Press.’” It promises something that I won’t be delivering, frankly.

It’s ratcheting up the gore and zaniness to 11 and that’s not quite my bag.

And I was like, “Okay, what’s ‘sinister’ in Korean?” I was checking on different words. I was asking friends and “Bulgilhan” was the one to stick. Once I picked the name, I remember I told my mom and she was kind of mad at me. She’s like, “Why’d you pick a word you can’t pronounce?” and I said “Why didn’t you teach me Korean?” It was not a very fair dig at her, there were a lot of reasons why she wasn’t really able to teach me Korean growing up, but during the first Kickstarter I ran in 2021, I wanted to do an intro video. Then I realized that I would finally need to pronounce “Bulgilhan” live on camera and started to panic. So I would text my mom voice memos of me pronouncing it, and based on her emojis, I would learn if I was getting hotter or colder, and by the end I got a bunch of gymnastics emojis, which told me I was doing great. She loves the gymnastics emoji.

Has this sparked an interest in you learning more of the language?

A little bit, but it hasn’t happened yet. What really sparked it is, I think I told you this, but at the end of the year, my partner and I are going to Korea and are going to Asia for three weeks. So I’ll be in Korea for two weeks. I am learning a little bit of Korean to get by while I’m there. I think it’s “yes” and “no.” Ultimately, in my mind, picking this name is a way to represent my uniqueness instead of my Korean heritage. I consider those as two different things.

I wouldn’t actually consider myself Korean the same way a person from Korea would and I’m very at peace with that difference. It’s not like I’ve not met another Korean-Italian person. I’ve met other Asian-Italian people. I’ve met other European-Korean people, but I’ve never met another Korean-Italian person. So I feel it’s a very unique aspect about me worth celebrating. I’m sure there’s just only a handful of us in the US, so it’s exciting to just have this name that represents so specifically to me.

As you noted, you’re the sole person working at the Press. Every book you produce is really colorful and lush—it’s really beautiful work. How did you go about defining your taste? Your taste drives so much of what you publish, right?

I’ve received pitches by artists whose comic became famous on Instagram, providing this whole pitch around here’s how many followers they have, here’s what the “reader-to-buyer” conversion rate should be, etc. It’s all very professional and it’s like, I have zero interest in this.

But really, there’s a couple of different things here, and one is when it comes to the physical book itself. I really want to make beautiful books or interesting books or tactile books or books that people want to pick up and want to read.

I read digital comics at the time. It’s just that’s not what I wanted to make. I knew that in a decade’s time I wouldn’t feel satisfied looking at a collection of PDFs that I’ve helped create. I need to see them on a shelf. I need to see it in person around other books. I’ve long had this vision of having my books alongside publications by small press publishers who I really admired and who greatly inspired me. So I thought, “I want to make something that stands up to that sort of aesthetic. It stands up to that crowd.” So that was part of it. I’m a very tactile person. I love textures, I love weights, I love physicality, so I wanted to also make books that I would be excited by finding in a shop.

One of my favorite things is when someone picks up a copy of Stray by Molly Mendoza, for instance, which is printed with a textured felt-weave cover. People often go, “Oh, I love it.” I get an, “Oooh,” out of somebody when they pick it up, and then I get to show them that the little smoke trail on the cover is embossed so they can just feel it when they run their finger over it. I just love showing readers that. I am that person as well!

What especially helped me when I launched Bulgilhan, was that I working at a design studio at the time. It gave me a lot of insight to the way in which designers approach creating physical items: products, paper, goods, what-have-you. It really opened the door for me and gave me a bit of confidence to learn and explore what got me excited about book design and printing. So I was already thinking about that process when I launched the Press.

As far as my taste goes though, man, that’s the hardest thing. I get the question a lot at shows and festivals, especially in the form of people asking, “Oh, what are you looking for?” Typically my response has been, “It’s more like what I’m not looking for,” but I also think there’s a critical difference in what my personal tastes as a reader are and what they are as a publisher. I would say it’s like a square, rectangle situation. Everything I publish is within my tastes but I don’t publish everything within my tastes. For instance,I’m probably not going to license a manga anytime soon or perhaps ever.

That’s not really something I’m equipped to do. Or if I was, it’d have to be a really special project that I really think wouldn’t fit anywhere else. It would have to be a project that for some reason wouldn’t fit at publishers that specialize in indie manga like Denpa, Glacier Bay Books, or Starfruit. It would have to be something really unique, and I actually don’t know what that would be! I’m not actually that plugged into the indie manga world. While I would love it, I think that it would come about by such a bizarre scenario, I just can’t envision it.

But as far as the kinds of comics I’m going to leap for as a publisher, I think, this is why I ended up with “self-indulgent” as the Press’s primary motivator to bind the books together; it’s purposely vague and is very much up for interpretation. Ideally the mysterious pit of vaguery is meant to encourage the cartoonist to fill it with something I can connect my artistic desires to. It all sounds fairly metaphysical I suppose, but something I’ve learned about me reading comics is that I have a great desire to be moved by individual stories, so that desire expresses itself with what I’d like to publish.

So I don’t usually go for books that are going to be a series, although we’re gonna bend that rule for Die Horny, but that wasn’t by design. I also tend not to publish overly long books, because I think that a very successful version of a story can be and sometimes should be accomplished in a hundred pages or less. I ultimately find that size really appealing. It’s just enough for you to sink your teeth in and start feeling the emotions radiating from the comic, and then you have to let go and ideally get a very ethereal emotional moment. I resonate with books, with stories and comics that, even if the artist isn’t intending for it, have a very strong motivation and drive to instill a feeling within the reader.

One of my favorite feelings is when I finish reading a short comic and I put it down—I sit there and I breathe out and that exhalation is a reminder to my body that I’m alive. I’m in the world. This may be just a piece of fiction, yet it is a piece of fiction that affects me greatly and deeply, and both things are true. I get to live in that cognitive dissonance, and this is such a ridiculous answer to the question “what defines my tastes?”. It’s tough to answer! It’s stuff that makes me feel things in a way that’s hard for me to describe, and I don’t always know what that is until I read through it.

I have a similar sort of feeling of exhalation that you’ve talked about where if I have a moment with a book where I’ll see something and go, “Oh, fuck.”

That’s the best description of it. It’s an “oh, fuck” moment, and there’s so many different versions of, “oh, fuck,” and that’s one of them. That’s one of the best ones.

You talked a lot about what you look for in terms of what you want to publish. There’s also a working relationship that comes along with your artists based on what you and I have talked about and what you’re very public about: You offer a very good deal for your artists. It’s a collaborative working arrangement, as I understand it, but correct me if I’m wrong there…

I would disagree with the term “collaborative.” I would say that “collaborative” would require a higher level of creative function from me. I would say a very supportive relationship is the goal. I’m ultimately here to help the artist make the best version of the comic they’re trying to make. Really help them fine tune it.

That’s what I was thinking as well. You’re lending your expertise as a publisher to collaborate and take something that maybe had a nebulous shape and help form it into a more beautiful state. What do you look for in collaborators? What makes you want to publish somebody outside of what you’ve already said?

It’s really just like I don’t necessarily think of my artists as collaborators. I think of them as my artists. I think of them as people I’m supporting and helping hone their craft as they need it and stuff like that. When I was writing comics and self-publishing them with artists like Ricardo López Ortiz, K.L Ricks, and Grim Wilkins. I was a collaborator for sure. In this situation I would think maybe the closest I’ve gotten to being a “collaborator” is maybe on Stray with Molly because we were talking about what ended up becoming that book for maybe four years and really that’s just because we were friends.

We were chatting about it for a long time, well before it became the version of Stray you can read now a much more personal book about their own struggles with vices or their own journey with regard to looking at the ways those vices and how they view them has colored their life, both negatively and positively. It was very interesting but it sort of turned into a more fictionalized story, navigating these themes and whatnot. That might’ve been the closest I got, but honestly it was still kind of just editorial. What I look for in my artists, that’s a good question. I can’t say it’s strictly the working relationship because obviously, I get excited about certain artists before I work with them.

The times I’ve reached out to artists directly asking if they want it to be published by me, I’ve been very grateful when they say, yes, like with Huahua who made The King’s Warrior, which we Kickstarted last year. She’s an artist I’ve been following for a very long time and have been in huge admiration of. On a whim, I just cold emailed her to tell her how much I liked her work and if she ever wanted to send a pitch my way, the door was open and I think she got back to me the same day!

Sometimes I’m just excited about the artists, I need to find their storytelling really compelling. A big consideration is that I, like anyone, can be hooked into someone’s art through one illustration, but what I really, really need to see is storytelling chops, the ability to convey a story through their illustration and make it meld really beautifully. That’s one of the reasons why I pretty much exclusively want to work with solo cartoonists; in my mind illustration is a form of communication. Another aspect of this is that I want to give cartoonists a real shot at being their own writer. Perhaps not every comic artist is suited to write a script but I trust my intuition to figure out which artists to trust. So much of comics publishing is built around pairing writers with artists - why not be different?

I know they have a story in them and I know they want to tell it, and that’s sort of where Bulgilhan becomes a desirable and exciting publisher to work with; I’m there for their ideas. I really want to help them shine not only as artists but as storytellers.

I also think it’s about curiosity because exploration is such a key part of art making and mark making and the craft of making comics. I don’t need someone to level up their cartooning when they’re working with me, but I love the idea that my artists get time and room to explore. The way the publishing agreement is built, it’s sort of designed for that. I don’t really give deadlines and I try to be really flexible with them, stuff like that, but ultimately I seek out artistic motivation.

I want my artists to have, even if just a gut feeling, a vision. I need that to exist. My understanding of their vision purely comes through conversation. Sure, I can get a little bit of that from the pitch and by emailing with them, but I really like to speak with my artists, at least once. I gotta have that human-to-human connection so I know who I’m publishing.

Looking ahead, what are your hopes for Bulgilhan and for indie comics in general?

I’ll start with the hope that is impossible, or nearly impossible, which is I hope to win the lottery. That’d be great, and then I could just take Bulgilhan to wherever I wanted, without any concerns about being “profitable.” It’s extraordinarily unlikely, but it’d be cool as hell.

That said, my hope as a publisher, is to be doing this until I die. I’ve been joking about this lately, but the more I say it, the more true it becomes. I don’t know if it means I’m going to be editing when I’m 88 or something. It could be a thing where I sort of pass it on to somebody else if they’re interested in it. I have no idea what this looks like. I don’t think it’s going to “scale” very much, at least not its current form. Bulgilhan was not designed to be a business that takes up my entire time.

If I was independently wealthy and didn’t have to worry about anything else, I would absolutely publish full-time. I would 100% let it eat up a lot more of my time and be very happy for it, but that’s not the reality right now. So the Press is sort of like a consistent crank I turn, ideally at a normal rate. Put out a few comics each year and just keep doing that until the wheels fall off. That’s what sustainability looks like for me and the Press.

It’s meant to essentially break even financially, reinvesting whatever extra funds we have into keeping books in print. That and also being able to pay our artists a little bit more each time are the closest Bulgilhan has to “growth” as a business. I have hopes for something to change in creative industries or something to make people suddenly go “wait, this could be more viable for X, Y, Z reasons” and invest out of interest and excitement, not out of short-term IP extraction.

I don’t know what that answer is. I feel like there needs to be a colossal cultural shift that moves comics readership, and appreciation in western audiences to something more akin to the kind of appreciation you get in France and Belgium. That said, they have their own problems no matter how much people look up to them. Same with Japan. I don’t know if I’d feel okay publishing in their model. But I do love the fact that comics is such a foundational medium for people to access stories, and that’s something I would love for the US and Western countries to adopt and see flourish within our communities.

As for being a publisher, I just wish for it to keep going. I want to be able to keep this a thing that I retain near-absolute control over. I’m grateful for the high level of trust I have with my artists and the business partners that I work with. I just want to keep that going. I love it. It’s sort of funny, I currently have no plans for kids. I often half-joke that all my artists, all the books I’ve published, those are my children. That’s where I’m putting my energy. That’s the legacy I want to leave to the world. This is a life-long project in my mind.

Zach Clemente Recommends:

Tokyo These Days by Taiyō Matsumoto (magnificent 3 volume manga series)

Friends at the Table podcast (specifically their current “Realis” & “Perpetua” arcs)

Balatro (on mobile, I’ve invested too much time to play on another platform)

Beta-testing my friend’s incredible Gentleman Magician TTRPG based on Jonathan Strange & Mr Norrell by Susanna Clarke

Re-reading the Sam Vimes-centric books from the Discworld series by Terry Pratchett


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sam Kusek.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/indie-comics-publisher-zach-clemente-on-sustaining-a-life-long-project/feed/ 0 543677
Writer Stephanie Wambugu on speaking across generations https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/writer-stephanie-wambugu-on-speaking-across-generations/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/writer-stephanie-wambugu-on-speaking-across-generations/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 04:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-stephanie-wambugu-on-speaking-across-generations You were born in 1998, but you write like you’ve been alive forever.

In a good way?

In a great way, like an old soul. You have so much wisdom in your writing… I was curious who your influences are and what you might attribute to this wise voice.

I read many coming-of-age novels while writing this book, but I’d say generally my big influences are Gary Indiana, Jean Rhys, and Toni Morrison. Similarly, I feel like their books could have been written at any time. Even though my book is historical fiction, I tried to strip it of temporal markers that would make it feel stuck in a particular period. Obviously the world and historical events intrude into the narrative, but I like books where that’s tangential to the story and there’s something timeless about the quality of the writing. I also really love Barbara Comyns for the same reason. Her fiction has a lot to do with class and downward mobility. There’s a sense in her novels that artists take a vow of poverty, maybe unintentionally, and that’s very different from how it’s treated in Lonely Crowds, where art makes them upwardly mobile.

As far as sounding older than I am, the way my parents speak certainly seeps into my writing. There’s something idiomatic and old-fashioned about the way they talk. I don’t say that in a disparaging way; I think that the quality of the conversations I heard from adults during my childhood was very high. It just seemed so out of step with the way Americans speak, because [my parents] are not American. I always want to express in my writing the friction between generations. Listening to older people speak has been a huge inspiration for my writing.

Like your influences, your novel explores class, especially within the context of New York’s art world. Given that the character Maria’s upbringing was even harder than Ruth’s, why do you think Maria is better at assimilating to that social class?

Maria’s very chameleonic and has less reservations about moving from one world into another. I don’t think she feels as beholden to her past as Ruth does. She’s a bit more ruthless, coincidentally, than Ruth because she needs it more. Her life has been so precarious. In the book Maria is always characterized as being more beautiful and more capable, but all that information is delivered to us through Ruth’s subjectivity. It’s never really clear that Maria is any more beautiful or talented or actually charismatic than Ruth is; it’s what Ruth projects onto her. I wonder now if it’s Ruth’s admiration for her that makes Maria feel entitled to outsized praise and attention, because she’s always gotten it from this one person.

Lonely Crowds** reminded me a lot of Elena Ferrante’s My Brilliant Friend and Toni Morrison’s Sula, stories told from the perspective of the friend who’s more meek or less bold, and seeing the other friend on this sort of pedestal.**

Thank you.

Both Maria and Ruth rely on romantic partners as their patrons later on. Is this out of necessity, or is this just something you’ve noticed in the art world?

In a tongue in cheek way, people always give artists the advice to marry someone wealthy. Not that I’m necessarily taking advice from Bret Easton Ellis, but he had a recent Louisiana Channel interview where he was asked, “What advice would you give young writers?” And he laughed and said, “Marry someone rich.”

Ruth and Maria are definitely thinking about marriage and relationships in this strategic way. It’s pragmatic to date someone who has generational wealth and Maria is very aware of this. Whereas Ruth sees herself as more moralistic and as someone coupling up for love or coupling up in spite of her own desires. It actually ends up being an advantageous relationship for her. I was thinking a lot about the evolving value we attach to marriage and that maybe now it’s the first time where people are marrying primarily for love. These practical questions of, “Is this marriage viable in terms of how much money we have?” are crass to talk about, but that is what marriage has been for so long.

It’s interesting to me that there’s something going unspoken, this arithmetic people are doing in their minds when they enter into a relationship. Because I think everyone is doing it implicitly, even though that’s maybe not the reason you stay with someone or fail to stay with someone. I think Ruth and Maria are making practical choices about the lives they want to live. And, at their core, they’re both equally ambitious and materialistic. Maria is just unapologetic about expressing it; she’s willing to say, “I want nice clothes, I want a nice apartment. I feel entitled to certain things.” Whereas Ruth just conveniently does the same thing but is unwilling to talk about it for a host of reasons. I relate more to Ruth in this way.

I noticed that, whenever Ruth was longing to return to her apartment with her nice bedspread and set-up. I was like, “Oh girl, you want it too.”

Yeah, of course. I think that’s true of many artists.

You said that your novel is historical fiction but it doesn’t really have time markers. I was thinking does it take place in the ’90s or early aughts?

It begins in the mid-‘80s, when the girls first go to the Catholic school they receive scholarships to attend. By the end, I would say it’s unclear, and purposefully so, because I wanted it to feel like, after certain events in the book, time stops mattering, in a way. Or you see that the characters’ lives are so cemented, since everything that’s consequential has taken place in their childhood and adolescence. But the novel ends during the early aughts.

Did you have to do much research into that timeframe or did you just imagine a world without internet?

It was a relief when I finally decided this was not going to be set in contemporary time, because I didn’t want to have any social media in my book. I really didn’t want to write about Instagram, about Twitter. I think that this desire to write something that’s hopefully timeless was one of the motivations for setting it in this period.

There were interesting parallels between that period in the art world and what happened just after the death of George Floyd, in that there was a boom in the market for Black artists. Initially I wanted to write about that: the tension of obviously wanting to make money from your art, and making representational art, and accepting—maybe begrudgingly—this task of doing auto-ethnography and making work that’s seen as being about your group. Art about oneself is often mistaken for art about one’s group.

In 1993, there was a Whitney Biennial that was very controversial, as it was one of the first biennials where white male artists were not foregrounded. And you can imagine the criticism was very concerned with how “overrepresented” non-white artists were in the show. I thought about that being a meaningful moment in terms of the professional possibilities that were available to young, non-white artists such as Ruth and Maria, and how it seemed artists at that time were contending with similar questions and very real grievances [around] violence being done to members of your group. Though it’s typically the most educated and the wealthiest members of an ethnic group who become pundits or spokespeople—to be the faces of grievances that are actually not happening to them, but which are felt indirectly.

Simply put, George Floyd dies and then you sell a painting for more than you would otherwise. And obviously it’s not one-to-one. I don’t think people were cynically cashing in. Still, I wanted to capture some of what was happening when I got out of college in art and in culture without having to write about being 22 and about the internet.

My thesis advisor in undergrad told me not to do any research when writing a novel, the idea being that you can fact check it later. That gave me a lot of permission to speculate and then fill in the blanks.

Were you at all worried about it selling because it is an historical novel? I mean, I know it’s not that historical, but was that a concern that you had regarding the market?

No, because I had no expectations that it would sell.

Really?

It’s not that I think it’s a bad book, but you don’t know what you don’t know. It was my first time doing all of this. I mean, I imagined it would eventually sell to someone. But at the time that I was writing it, I was just writing it as a student and as someone who wanted to write, and I didn’t think about those things at all until they were happening. I don’t think that’s something you should care about because you can’t anticipate what will be marketable in two years or three years or five years, or however long it takes to write a book. Trend forecasting is so detrimental because you have to like what you’re writing. If it fails, it’s still yours.

Your author bio and novel share some parallels: a Rhode Island upbringing, Kenyan ancestry, Bard for undergrad, current residence in New York. In what ways do you draw inspiration from your own lived experiences, and when do you decide to completely fictionalize?

I usually like to do one Kenyan-American stand-in. It’s interesting to do a self-insert that’s deceptive and that’s not me, although it signals something about where I’m from and my background. I think the conflation between narrator and author is interesting. In most of my fiction the characters are not me at all. But I’m interested in the culture I come from. It is more religious, much more collectivist. A school like Bard is the exact opposite. There was a huge emphasis on self-discovery, self-inquiry, what kind of person you want to be, the real possibility of being an artist if you wanted to be one. And so I thought, “I could invent a place like this.” But why invent it if I know what it’s like and I can reconstruct it in fiction?

Aside from money, what are the rewards of your creative practice and what do you get out of this work?

Aside from money. I love the way you start with “aside from money.” I think it would be being part of a lineage of writers, or doing something that you find aspirational. It’s a wonderful thing to encounter a book that maybe went through a long period of obscurity, or a book written by an author who died penniless and the manuscript was posthumously found. It seems like a gift to be able to speak to people across generations and talk to people when you’re dead.

I know that the tone of Lonely Crowds is fairly somber. I mean, obviously there are moments of levity. But I laugh so much when I write. I find it incredibly funny. I find writing dialogue very funny. It reminds me of this anecdote I heard about Kafka, where he was reading The Trial to a friend and he was laughing to the point of tears reading it. Even if something ends up being fairly heavy or grim or severe, there’s something so pleasurable about writing that I can’t help but laugh and feel happy that what I spend most of my days doing is something that I did when I was a kid: to sit down and think about language and invent.

For a time I was doing a lot of readings, and I really liked when people would laugh and when people would come up to me and tell me, “Something like that happened to me, too,” even though the stories are not biographical at all. I loved being a container, a vessel for that feeling where people are able to have these unboundaried interactions. I wrote a story once where this woman goes to a funeral and she has this very strange threesome and this really sad, come-to-alter moment. Someone approached me after I read and said, “Oh my god, I had a very similar experience.” And I was like, “Well, I’ve never had this experience, but it doesn’t matter. That’s wonderful. I’m glad you could tell me that.”

Stephanie Wambugu recommends:

East Village Acupuncture

Dr. Singha’s Mustard Bath

Buying a bottle of wine at Discovery Wines and bringing it down the street to V-Nam Cafe, which is a perfect BYOB Vietnamese restaurant

My Dinner with André

Donny Hathaway’s cover of “Yesterday” by The Beatles


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Shy Watson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/writer-stephanie-wambugu-on-speaking-across-generations/feed/ 0 543679
PERSPECTIVE: Why Vietnam’s To Lam moved so quickly to restructure the government https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/07/10/vietnam-administrative-reform-to-lam/ https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/07/10/vietnam-administrative-reform-to-lam/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 01:58:41 +0000 https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/07/10/vietnam-administrative-reform-to-lam/ Read about this topic in Vietnamese

In less than a year as general secretary of the Communist Party of Vietnam, To Lam has made moves likened to the drastic cuts that U.S. President Donald Trump and Elon Musk have implemented to U.S. federal agencies through the Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE).

To Lam has merged ministries and central government agencies, reduced the number of provinces and cities by half, and dismantled district-level administrative units.

Why did To Lam move so fast with reforms, and what are the political, social, and economic impacts?

Vietnam's General Secretary of the Communist Party To Lam in Hanoi, May 26, 2025.
Vietnam's General Secretary of the Communist Party To Lam in Hanoi, May 26, 2025.
(Ludovic Marin/AFP)

Zachary Abuza is a professor at the National War College in Washington and an adjunct at Georgetown University. The views expressed here are his own and do not reflect the position of the U.S. Department of Defense, the National War College, Georgetown University, or Radio Free Asia.

Below is a transcript of an interview with Zach Abuza by Truong Son from the RFA Vietnamese service:

RFA: What are your thoughts on the administrative reform in Vietnam that Secretary General To Lam just carried out? How significant is the government reshuffle in terms of its social, economic, and political impact, because we know that this is a massive change in Vietnam?

Zach Abuza: The changes in the government are really significant and they shouldn’t be underestimated. And we have to understand that they’re happening at multiple levels. There was the reform of central government ministries. Five were folded in, and some hundred thousand civil servants were either fired or retired.

At the provincial level, they went from 63 provinces or provincial-level cities down to 34. So that’s almost a 50% reduction — a huge consolidation there. And then they eliminated an entire level of governance at the district level. So it used to go province, district, and then down to the commune level. And they got rid of that mid-level. So they’re hoping for more efficiency.

Now, all three of those reforms at each level of government have important economic, social, and political implications. Let’s start with the government. Those reforms were done in part because the government is notoriously bureaucratic. It’s slow. And I think the general secretary really feels that Vietnam has to just be much more responsive, much more accountable, to respond to a rapidly changing international environment, in order to grow the economy, to attract foreign investment. Just had to get rid of red tape.

Some of the ministries that were eliminated really were legacy issues. They reflected much more of the government structure at the time of Doi Moi, not all these years into it. You know, the Vietnamese economy is fundamentally different than it was before.

And that’s why I think you really start to see some of the consolidation, especially in the economic ministries. I think now there are really three key ministries to pay attention to. The Ministry of Public Security, the Ministry of National Defense, and the Ministry of Finance. These are kind of the three heavy hitters.

At the provincial level, it’s important to understand that this consolidation will have economic effects. And I think one thing that maybe we need to think about is, with the exception of the provinces

in the northwest which is landlocked, you know, bordering Lao and the Chinese frontier, almost every other province now has a piece of coastline.

And this is important because it was always the coastal provinces that were more advanced because they had access to ports, harbors and it was easier to get products to international markets. And so the reorganization at that level, certainly makes it easier. No province now, other than those northwestern landlocked ones, has an excuse that they cannot get goods to market anymore.

Now, I think the provincial reforms have very significant political implications. And let me explain this at several levels. The first is the Central Committee of the Communist Party in the era of Doi Moi has basically had about one third of their members coming from, you know, the provinces.

So provincial party chiefs, all of a sudden that is going to change. And we might see at the next Party Congress expected in January 2026 that we see a smaller central committee overall. And that’s one thing that I am looking for.

There are other political implications. And that is, you now have almost a 50% reduction in the number of governors in the number of party chiefs.

And so the general secretary, through this consolidation actually got to choose winners and losers, right? Going into the next Party Congress, To Lam clearly has the support of those who have kept their jobs. They owe him, right? They could have lost everything.

But, more importantly, the year before a party congress, normally nothing happens. And I mean, nothing happens. People are afraid to make decisions. People are afraid to make investments. Often, provinces or cities have funding allocated to them, but they’re afraid to use it because they just don’t know what’s going to happen at the Party Congress.

They don’t know who’s going to emerge on top. They’re afraid of implementing policies that then get reversed. So there’s traditionally a lot of caution. To Lam has completely thrown that off. He has pushed through the most radical reforms I can think of.

And he did it right ahead of a Party Congress. So that to me, says he is very confident that he has the full backing of the Central Committee and that he is very confident that he will be reelected to a full term at the 14th Party Congress.

Let me just make one quick point about eliminating the district level of administration. I think this is going to have an interesting impact down the line.

I don’t see it having a short term political impact, but for Communist Party cadres — they might have been in the cities working their way up, but, you know, all of a sudden you’ve eliminated a very important pathway to be selected and to be noticed, by the higher echelons of the party.

And I think that there is going to be a lot of unhappiness that this real, important level, maybe not administratively, maybe it’s not the most important for the functioning of government and efficiency, but for people looking for their career pathway to senior party membership. That is an important stepping stone that has been eliminated.

RFA: You just said that Secretary General To Lam is certainly very confident politically. That’s why he’s carried out this unprecedented reform, I must say, the year before the party Congress, and as you said, which traditionally has been a very quiet year.

And not just that he did this in the year prior to the Congress, but also, if we look into the manner in which he carried out this reform, which was really quick. The finish line was achieved within a few months.

So, if we look at the scale of the project and the pace it was done this begs the question: Why did he do it in such a manner? Why do you think he has to achieve this reform within such a short period of time?

Zach Abuza: The Vietnamese government and Communist Party are not known for quick decision making. They tend to be very slow, deliberative, and cautious. But these reforms happened at lightning speed. And I think that pace took everyone by surprise.

Part of the answer is it took everyone by surprise. He made the announcement. And for the government ministries, for example, they had less than three months to implement these major restructuring, government reshuffle, 100,000 civil servants, either being retired or found redundant.

Part of the reason he moved quickly is before there could be real resistance to it. He wanted to make sure that no one had time to kind of dig in their heels and resist these reforms, because people, these reforms, create winners and losers, and that was clearly a concern of his.

I think that To Lam — and while I certainly find the way he came to power, as the minister of Public Security who completely weaponized the anti-corruption campaign, eliminated all of his rivals on the Politburo in just absolute Machiavellian fashion — I actually think that he is maybe the right man for the job right now.

I think he really does understand that Vietnam has this very narrow window of opportunity to push through major economic restructuring and reforms.

Vietnam’s demographics have peaked. The country will start to see its population decline and fairly rapidly, especially with the rapid urbanization, the increased number of women in the workforce, higher education levels.

All those three factors always lead to sharp declines in demographics. So Vietnam has the challenge of soon it’s going to start getting old before it gets rich. You know, it’s one thing for Japan to get old because it’s already rich.

Thailand has had a little harder time, and I think Vietnamese policymakers do look to Thailand as a country that has gotten old before it got rich. The second thing is that To Lam is very fearful of being caught in the middle income trap, where Vietnam simply assembles. It does not produce; it doesn’t have those ecosystems there.

In the current trade negotiations with the United States, the Americans always pointed to the fact that Vietnam’s trade deficit with China was very close to its trade surplus with the United States. Now, the United States’ thinking was that Vietnam was simply being used as a transshipment point for Chinese goods.

To a degree, yes, but that doesn’t explain all of it. What explains it is the fact that things that are produced in Vietnam, whether it’s Samsung, mobile phones or VinFast cars, are made with components imported from China. So Vietnam hasn’t developed that ecosystem.

To Lam is very interested in getting the higher value added foreign investment. We hear a lot about semiconductors and other high-end manufacturing.

He needs a much more efficient government structure to attract foreign investment. One of the reasons we know foreign investors — there’s often a delta between pledged investment and actual shovel in the ground building something is because of bureaucratic red tape.

I think To Lam is really concerned that foreign investors are going to get frustrated and move on to the next place because Vietnam’s labor costs are going up. It has shortages of electricity. You know, it’s been a darling of foreign investors, but that is not a given. That foreign investors can be very fickle. We have watched them leave Vietnam in the past.

And let me just make one last point about why he did it so fast. I think this is To Lam really asserting himself politically. He has done what many of us probably would have said, “Impossible.”

No way is he going to get through such momentous restructuring in a quick period of time. There will be too much, you know, resistance to it. He really showed that he has full control over the Central Committee. Now, he still has his former deputy minister, now the Minister of Public Security. He’s got another former deputy minister of Public Security in charge of the Central Inspection Commission.

He has many levers of power that he can wield against people who are opposed to him. He can still investigate corruption and destroy careers, but I think he really has won over this Central Committee with his vision.

One last point we should probably make about these reforms. There is going to be a major shift in power to the South.

You have created a huge megacity now. Ho Chi Minh City, all the way out to Vũng Tàu around Bien Hoa.

This is now a massive place. Under the former General Secretary Nguyễn Phú Trọng there was a real attempt to crush any southern autonomy. I think we understand that the South is the driver of the economy. To Lam knows that he has to empower the South. He knows that legitimacy is coming from economic development.

RFA: I guess he got what he wanted. He restructured the entire governance system not just at the central level, but also the local level as well.

So the entire country now is basically governed under a new system that looks very different from when he took power in August 2024. But I’m curious because we understand that this kind of project has massive implications and consequences. And usually people do it with great caution because they need to study.

They need to experiment to find the best model. But the way To Lam carried it out was that it was just too quick, too rapid. There was no opportunity for experimentation, for research at all. He just said, “This is what we are going to do,” and he achieved that within a few months.

So what do you think would be the consequences and the challenges that he has to face, given that he has done this too quickly and gave no room for deliberation, for experiment, for research, for debate.

Zach Abuza: No doubt there will be growing pains. And a lot of this was rushed. And I imagine in many cases, you are not going to only see some resistance to this and kind of pushback.

But just complications and everything from accounting and getting bank accounts and tax collection and all these things are going to be very different. Now, from the central government’s position, this is hopefully easier. There are now almost 50% fewer provinces to basically negotiate with. And should make some coordination a little bit easier. But without a doubt this was pretty rushed.

Now, I would go back to a point I made earlier, and that is the party chiefs that are in power today after the restructuring owe To Lam — they owe him their jobs and I imagine they will be very responsive, because they’re all interested in climbing up the ladder and those who do not perform well and have problems are going to find their political careers might not last much longer than January.

So I think he’s using the clock very effectively, you know, like a good football coach uses the clock in a game. I think he is doing that. But yeah, there will be problems, and we just haven’t seen them yet.

There are going to be issues with spending and infrastructure development. You now have these party chiefs that are going to think about which part of the province, these larger provinces to invest in.

You know, there are going to be rural communes that are going to feel they’re being left behind because the emphasis will be on more development to the coast and where industry is. And so, yeah, without a doubt, we will see how this plays out.

Edited by Charlie Dharapak


This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Truong Son for RFA Vietnamese.

]]>
https://rfa.org/english/vietnam/2025/07/10/vietnam-administrative-reform-to-lam/feed/ 0 543660
Why Vietnam’s Tô Lâm moved so quickly to restructure the government | RFA Perspectives https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-vietnams-to-lam-moved-so-quickly-to-restructure-the-government-rfa-perspectives/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-vietnams-to-lam-moved-so-quickly-to-restructure-the-government-rfa-perspectives/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 01:41:42 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=36cbf0c5f18deb6632f6731b922af226
This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Radio Free Asia.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/why-vietnams-to-lam-moved-so-quickly-to-restructure-the-government-rfa-perspectives/feed/ 0 543658
Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior is a timely reminder https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/eyes-of-fire-the-last-voyage-and-legacy-of-the-rainbow-warrior-is-a-timely-reminder/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/eyes-of-fire-the-last-voyage-and-legacy-of-the-rainbow-warrior-is-a-timely-reminder/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 00:18:11 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117166 By Aui’a Vaimaila Leatinu’u of PMN News

I didn’t know much about the surrounding context of the infamous Rainbow Warrior bombing 40 years ago on Thursday. All I knew was that we, as a country, have not forgotten.

I was born in 1996, and although I didn’t know much about the vessel’s bombing, which galvanised anti-nuclear sentiment across Aotearoa further, the basics were common knowledge growing up.

So, when I got the opportunity to read the Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior (40th Anniversary edition) by veteran journalist David Robie, who was on board the ship during its mission to the Marshall Islands, I dove in.

On 10 July 1985, French secret agents destroyed the Rainbow Warrior at Marsden Wharf in Auckland, killing Portuguese-born Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira and sparking global outrage.

The Rainbow Warrior protested nuclear weapons testing in the Pacific, specifically targeting French atmospheric and underground nuclear tests at Moruroa and Fangataufa atolls.

Their efforts drew international attention to the environmental devastation and human suffering caused by decades of radioactive fallout.

There’s plenty to learn from this book in terms of the facts, but what I took away from it most is its continued relevance since its original publication in 1986.

The opening prologue is former New Zealand Prime Minister Helen Clark’s reflection on the Warrior’s bombing, Pereira’s death and the current socio-political climate of today in relation to back then.

Clark makes remarks on AUKUS, nuclear weapons and geopolitical pressures, describing it all as “storm clouds gathering again”.

The Nuclear Free Pacific banner on the Rainbow Warrior. Image: David Robie
The Nuclear Free Pacific banner on the Rainbow Warrior. Image: David Robie

Nuclear fallout
It has been a tumultuous period for the Pacific region in the political realm, between being at the mercy of a tug-of-war between global superpowers and the impending finality of climate change to the livelihoods of many.

With EOF’s 40th Anniversary edition, it is yet another documentation of these turbulent times for the Pacific, which have never really stopped since colonial powers first made contact.

Between 1946 and 1958, the United States conducted 67 atmospheric and underwater tests in the Marshall Islands. Then, in 1966, the French launched 46 atmospheric tests between 1966 and 1974, followed by 147 underground bombs from 1975 to 1996 after widespread international protest and scrutiny.

Specifically, the US 1954 Castle Bravo nuclear test, the largest atmospheric hydrogen bomb test, resulted in the fallout’s ash coating Rongelap Atoll. Though the US evacuated residents days later, they returned them in 1957, leaving them to suffer from health effects like miscarriages, cancer, and birth deformities.

Eventually, the Rainbow Warrior helped evacuate the Rongelap people in 1985 over several trips, where the locals packed down their homes and brought them onboard.

Throughout history to today, there’s a theme of constant disregard and dehumanisation of my people by the West.

PMN News interview with Dr David Robie on 20 May 2025
PMN News interview with Dr David Robie on 20 May 2025.

When does it stop?
A decade prior to the Rongelap evacuation, the infamous Dawn Raids occurred, where it wasn’t until 1986 that a Race Relations investigation found Pacific people comprised roughly a third of overstayers yet represented 86 per cent of all prosecutions.

The 506-day Bastion Point protest also occurred between 1977 and 1978, where Ngāti Whātua, led by Joe Hawke, pushed back against a proposed Crown sale of that land.

In the end, around 500 NZ police and army forcefully evicted the peaceful protestors.

So, while this was all happening, the Pacific, specifically the Marshall Islands and French Polynesia region, were reeling from the decades of nuclear testing and consequential sickness, pain and death.

Today, the Pacific is stuck between geopolitical egos, the fear of being used as a resource stepping stone, internal struggles, economic destabilisation and pleas for climate change to be made a priority not to save sinking islands but the world.

Amid this “political football”, it constantly feels like Pacific and Māori end up being the ball.

Robie’s book tells heartfelt moments with its facts, which helps connect to its story at a deeper level beyond sharing genealogy with the people involved.

Voices within it don’t hold back their urgency or outrage towards what happened, especially how that past negligence by bodies of power continues today.

When I read books like EOF 40th, whether it’s about my tangata Māori or Tagata Moana, I often close them and wonder: When do we get a break? When does it stop?

I wish I had an answer, but I don’t. At least we will always have answers on what happened to the Rainbow Warrior and why.

No matter what, it is indisputable that an informed generation will navigate the future better than their predecessors, and with EOF 40th, they’ll be well-equipped.

Republished from PMN News with permission.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/eyes-of-fire-the-last-voyage-and-legacy-of-the-rainbow-warrior-is-a-timely-reminder/feed/ 0 543643
Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior is a timely reminder https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/eyes-of-fire-the-last-voyage-and-legacy-of-the-rainbow-warrior-is-a-timely-reminder-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/eyes-of-fire-the-last-voyage-and-legacy-of-the-rainbow-warrior-is-a-timely-reminder-2/#respond Thu, 10 Jul 2025 00:18:11 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117166 By Aui’a Vaimaila Leatinu’u of PMN News

I didn’t know much about the surrounding context of the infamous Rainbow Warrior bombing 40 years ago on Thursday. All I knew was that we, as a country, have not forgotten.

I was born in 1996, and although I didn’t know much about the vessel’s bombing, which galvanised anti-nuclear sentiment across Aotearoa further, the basics were common knowledge growing up.

So, when I got the opportunity to read the Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior (40th Anniversary edition) by veteran journalist David Robie, who was on board the ship during its mission to the Marshall Islands, I dove in.

On 10 July 1985, French secret agents destroyed the Rainbow Warrior at Marsden Wharf in Auckland, killing Portuguese-born Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira and sparking global outrage.

The Rainbow Warrior protested nuclear weapons testing in the Pacific, specifically targeting French atmospheric and underground nuclear tests at Moruroa and Fangataufa atolls.

Their efforts drew international attention to the environmental devastation and human suffering caused by decades of radioactive fallout.

There’s plenty to learn from this book in terms of the facts, but what I took away from it most is its continued relevance since its original publication in 1986.

The opening prologue is former New Zealand Prime Minister Helen Clark’s reflection on the Warrior’s bombing, Pereira’s death and the current socio-political climate of today in relation to back then.

Clark makes remarks on AUKUS, nuclear weapons and geopolitical pressures, describing it all as “storm clouds gathering again”.

The Nuclear Free Pacific banner on the Rainbow Warrior. Image: David Robie
The Nuclear Free Pacific banner on the Rainbow Warrior. Image: David Robie

Nuclear fallout
It has been a tumultuous period for the Pacific region in the political realm, between being at the mercy of a tug-of-war between global superpowers and the impending finality of climate change to the livelihoods of many.

With EOF’s 40th Anniversary edition, it is yet another documentation of these turbulent times for the Pacific, which have never really stopped since colonial powers first made contact.

Between 1946 and 1958, the United States conducted 67 atmospheric and underwater tests in the Marshall Islands. Then, in 1966, the French launched 46 atmospheric tests between 1966 and 1974, followed by 147 underground bombs from 1975 to 1996 after widespread international protest and scrutiny.

Specifically, the US 1954 Castle Bravo nuclear test, the largest atmospheric hydrogen bomb test, resulted in the fallout’s ash coating Rongelap Atoll. Though the US evacuated residents days later, they returned them in 1957, leaving them to suffer from health effects like miscarriages, cancer, and birth deformities.

Eventually, the Rainbow Warrior helped evacuate the Rongelap people in 1985 over several trips, where the locals packed down their homes and brought them onboard.

Throughout history to today, there’s a theme of constant disregard and dehumanisation of my people by the West.

PMN News interview with Dr David Robie on 20 May 2025
PMN News interview with Dr David Robie on 20 May 2025.

When does it stop?
A decade prior to the Rongelap evacuation, the infamous Dawn Raids occurred, where it wasn’t until 1986 that a Race Relations investigation found Pacific people comprised roughly a third of overstayers yet represented 86 per cent of all prosecutions.

The 506-day Bastion Point protest also occurred between 1977 and 1978, where Ngāti Whātua, led by Joe Hawke, pushed back against a proposed Crown sale of that land.

In the end, around 500 NZ police and army forcefully evicted the peaceful protestors.

So, while this was all happening, the Pacific, specifically the Marshall Islands and French Polynesia region, were reeling from the decades of nuclear testing and consequential sickness, pain and death.

Today, the Pacific is stuck between geopolitical egos, the fear of being used as a resource stepping stone, internal struggles, economic destabilisation and pleas for climate change to be made a priority not to save sinking islands but the world.

Amid this “political football”, it constantly feels like Pacific and Māori end up being the ball.

Robie’s book tells heartfelt moments with its facts, which helps connect to its story at a deeper level beyond sharing genealogy with the people involved.

Voices within it don’t hold back their urgency or outrage towards what happened, especially how that past negligence by bodies of power continues today.

When I read books like EOF 40th, whether it’s about my tangata Māori or Tagata Moana, I often close them and wonder: When do we get a break? When does it stop?

I wish I had an answer, but I don’t. At least we will always have answers on what happened to the Rainbow Warrior and why.

No matter what, it is indisputable that an informed generation will navigate the future better than their predecessors, and with EOF 40th, they’ll be well-equipped.

Republished from PMN News with permission.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/10/eyes-of-fire-the-last-voyage-and-legacy-of-the-rainbow-warrior-is-a-timely-reminder-2/feed/ 0 543644
Dawn service held 40 years on from Rainbow Warrior bombing https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/dawn-service-held-40-years-on-from-rainbow-warrior-bombing/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/dawn-service-held-40-years-on-from-rainbow-warrior-bombing/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 22:52:06 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117174 TVNZ 1News

The Greenpeace flagship Rainbow Warrior has sailed into Auckland to mark the 40th anniversary of the bombing of the original Rainbow Warrior in 1985.

Greenpeace’s vessel, which had been protesting nuclear testing in the Pacific, sank after French government agents planted explosives on its hull, killing Portuguese-Dutch photographer Fernando Pereira.

Today, 40 years on from the events on July 10 1985, a dawn ceremony was held in Auckland.

Author Margaret Mills was a cook on board the ship at the time, and has written about her experience in a book entitled Anecdotage.

Author Margaret Mills tells TVNZ Breakfast about the night of the Rainbow Warrior bombing 40 years ago
Author Margaret Mills tells TVNZ Breakfast about the night of the Rainbow Warrior bombing 40 years ago. Image: TVNZ

The 95-year-old told TVNZ Breakfast the experience on board “changed her life”.

“I was sound asleep, and I heard this sort of bang and turned the light on, but it wouldn’t go on.

She said when she left her cabin, a crew member told her “we’ve been bombed”.

‘I laughed at him’
“I laughed at him, I said ‘we don’t get bombs in New Zealand, that’s ridiculous’.”

She said they were taken to the police station after a “big boom when the second bomb came through”.

“I realised immediately, I was part of a historical event,” she said.

TVNZ reporter Corazon Miller talks to Greenpeace Aotearoa executive director Russel Norman and journalist David Robie after the Rainbow Warrior memorial dawn service today
TVNZ reporter Corazon Miller talks to Greenpeace Aotearoa executive director Russel Norman (centre) and journalist David Robie after the Rainbow Warrior memorial dawn service today. Image: TVNZ

Journalist David Robie. who travelled on the Rainbow Warrior and wrote the book Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior published today, told Breakfast it was a “really shocking, shocking night”.

“We were so overwhelmed by the grief and absolute shock of what had happened. But for me, there was no doubt it was France behind this.”

“But we were absolutely flabbergasted that a country could do this.”

He said it was a “very emotional moment” and was hard to believe it had been 40 years since that time.

‘Momentous occasion’
“It stands out in my life as being the most momentous occasion as a journalist covering that whole event.”

Executive director of Greenpeace Aotearoa Russel Norman said the legacy of the ship was about “people who really stood up for something important”.

“I mean, ending nuclear testing in the Pacific, imagine if they were still exploding bombs in the Pacific. We would have to live with that.

“And those people back then they stood up and beat the French government to end nuclear testing.

“It’s pretty inspirational.”

He said the group were still campaigning on some key environmental issues today.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/dawn-service-held-40-years-on-from-rainbow-warrior-bombing/feed/ 0 543842
The Movement to Excommunicate Misogyny From the Catholic Church https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-movement-to-excommunicate-misogyny-from-the-catholic-church/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-movement-to-excommunicate-misogyny-from-the-catholic-church/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 21:39:10 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/the-movement-to-excommunicate-misogyny-from-the-catholic-church-20250709/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Jared Hillel.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-movement-to-excommunicate-misogyny-from-the-catholic-church/feed/ 0 543635
The Project Censored Newsletter—June 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-project-censored-newsletter-june-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-project-censored-newsletter-june-2025/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 20:52:36 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46703 Introducing Project Censored’s Summer 2025 Student Interns Project Censored is pleased to announce our stellar cohort of summer 2025 interns, Jayden Henry (Vanderbilt University), Elizabeth Insuasti (University of Florida), Ella Mrofka (North Central College), Caitlin Suda (North Central College), and Jackie Vickery (Ithaca College). They are already hard at work…

The post The Project Censored Newsletter—June 2025 appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-project-censored-newsletter-june-2025/feed/ 0 543630
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 9, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-9-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-9-2025/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=65b8942adb9abb42f7bcdbaba578069d Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 9, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-9-2025/feed/ 0 543655
America, ‘nation of immigrants,’ turns on immigrants w/ Viet Thanh Nguyen https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/america-nation-of-immigrants-turns-on-immigrants-w-viet-thanh-nguyen/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/america-nation-of-immigrants-turns-on-immigrants-w-viet-thanh-nguyen/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 17:50:18 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=18f8ffdb0d9e47b4582572ac251c5763
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/america-nation-of-immigrants-turns-on-immigrants-w-viet-thanh-nguyen/feed/ 0 543612
Karipuna Resistance: Defending the Amazon https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/karipuna-resistance-defending-the-amazon/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/karipuna-resistance-defending-the-amazon/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 17:21:39 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335346 The young chief of the Karipuna people, Andre Karipuna, surveys the damage of a fire intentionally to a parcel of their jungle territory by land invaders in October 2022. Photo by Michael Fox.The Karipuna people say they will stand their ground. In defense of the Amazon. In defense of their people and their future. This is episode 56 of Stories of Resistance.]]> The young chief of the Karipuna people, Andre Karipuna, surveys the damage of a fire intentionally to a parcel of their jungle territory by land invaders in October 2022. Photo by Michael Fox.

There are less than a hundred members of the Karipuna tribe. They live on their land in the Brazilian state of Rondonia. Their territory is demarcated, which means that it’s legally theirs.

But many outsiders don’t care. Land invaders have been pushing in, hauling off hardwood and big trees and carving out pieces of their land, and dividing them up to sell.

The Karipuna are resisting.

This is episode 56 of Stories of Resistance—a podcast co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, we’ll bring you stories of resistance like this. Inspiration for dark times.

If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment, or leave a review. 

And please consider signing up for the Stories of Resistance podcast feed, either in Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Spreaker, or wherever you listen.

You can see exclusive pictures of the Mapuche community playing palín in this story on Michael’s Patreon. Please consider supporting this podcast and Michael Fox’s reporting on his Patreon account.

Written and produced by Michael Fox.

Resources

Transcript

This is the sound of the Amazon. The lush thick jungle just behind the main village on Karipuna Indigenous Territory, in Western Brazil.

And this is just a short drive away… Former Amazon rainforest. Cut. Slashed. Burned. And converted into fields for cattle. This is what the Karipuna people are up against. Their resistance is life or death.

There are less than a hundred members of the Karipuna tribe. They live on their land in the Brazilian state of Rondonia. Their territory is demarcated, which means that it’s legally theirs. But many outsiders don’t care. Land invaders have been pushing in, hauling off hardwood and big trees. Sometimes, the residents of the Karipuna village can hear the tractors and the machines working at night. 

But that is just the tip of the iceberg. Land grabbers are cutting into their territory. Carving out pieces of their jungle, pieces of their land, and dividing them up to sell.

The Karipuna are resisting. But they do not have the resources or the numbers to constantly police the borders of their territory. And the people who are invading their land are not doing so peacefully. The Karipuna community leaders have faced death threats. Warnings.

A few years ago, they decided to set up an outpost alongside the Formoso River, on the southern end of their land. They built a small home. Planted seeds. They planned to have some community members move there, to help protect against invasions of their territory. But warning messages were left on the building. And just behind it, a square stretch of lush forest was felled and burned, the fallen trees still smoldering from the fire.

[Andre Karipuna]

But they will not give up. They say they will not give in. They will not leave. They are what is left of the Karipuna people. And they will stand their ground. In defense of their village. In defense of their land. In defense of the Amazon rainforest. In defense of their people, their future, and the generations to come. 

Hi folks, thanks for listening. I’m your host Michael Fox.

I visited the Karipuna people and their territory a couple of years. It was a tremendous experience. First to spend time with them and also to see up close the tremendous devastation happening all across the Amazon today. 

I’ll add some links in the show notes to some of my stories on this, the final episode of my podcast Brazil on Fire, which is a deep dive into the attack on the Amazon under the Bolsonaro administration, and much more.

You can also see exclusive pictures from my trip to visit with the Karipuna on my Patreon. That’s patreon.com/mfox. I’ll add a link in the show notes.

Also, if you like what you hear and enjoy this podcast, please consider becoming a subscriber on my Patreon. It’s only a few dollars a month. I have a ton of exclusive content there, only available to my supporters. And every supporter really makes a difference.

This is episode 56 of Stories of Resistance, a podcast series co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, I bring you stories of resistance and hope like this. Inspiration for dark times. If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment or leave a review.

Thanks for listening. See you next time.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/karipuna-resistance-defending-the-amazon/feed/ 0 543600
How sanitation workers won the public relations battle https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/how-sanitation-workers-won-the-public-relations-battle/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/how-sanitation-workers-won-the-public-relations-battle/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 16:08:25 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=3ec56e0c445b4b8f84d4c585c94b7959
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/how-sanitation-workers-won-the-public-relations-battle/feed/ 0 543585
The Rise of the Prison State: Trump’s Push for Megaprisons Could Lock Us All Up https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-rise-of-the-prison-state-trumps-push-for-megaprisons-could-lock-us-all-up/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-rise-of-the-prison-state-trumps-push-for-megaprisons-could-lock-us-all-up/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 15:58:02 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159756 America is rapidly becoming a nation of prisons. Having figured out how to parlay presidential authority in foreign affairs in order to sidestep the Constitution, President Trump is using his immigration enforcement powers to lock up—and lock down—the nation. Under the guise of national security and public safety, the Trump administration is engineering the largest federal […]

The post The Rise of the Prison State: Trump’s Push for Megaprisons Could Lock Us All Up first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
America is rapidly becoming a nation of prisons.

Having figured out how to parlay presidential authority in foreign affairs in order to sidestep the Constitution, President Trump is using his immigration enforcement powers to lock up—and lock down—the nation.

Under the guise of national security and public safety, the Trump administration is engineering the largest federal expansion of incarceration and detention powers in U.S. history.

At the center of this campaign is Alligator Alcatraz, a federal detention facility built in the Florida Everglades and hailed by the White House as a model for the future of federal incarceration. But this is more than a new prison—it is the architectural symbol of a carceral state being quietly constructed in plain sight.

With over $170 billion allocated through Trump’s megabill, we are witnessing the creation of a vast, permanent enforcement infrastructure aimed at turning the American police state into a prison state.

The scope of this expansion is staggering.

The bill allocates $45 billion just to expand immigrant detention—making ICE the best-funded federal law enforcement agency in American history.

Yet be warned: what begins with ICE rarely ends with ICE.

Trump’s initial promise to crack down on “violent illegal criminals” has evolved into a sweeping mandate: a mass, quota-driven roundup campaign that detains anyone the administration deems a threat, regardless of legal status and at significant expense to the American taxpayer.

Tellingly, the vast majority of those being detained have no criminal record. And like so many of the Trump administration’s grandiose plans, the math doesn’t add up.

Just as Trump’s tariffs have failed to revive American manufacturing and instead raised consumer prices, this detention-state spending spree will cost taxpayers far more than it saves. It’s estimated that undocumented workers contribute an estimated $96 billion in federal, state and local taxes each year, and billions more in Social Security and Medicare taxes that they can never claim.

Making matters worse, many of these detained immigrants are then exploited as a pool of cheap labor inside the very facilities where they’re held.

The implications for Trump’s detention empire are chilling.

At a time when the administration is promising mass deportations to appease anti-immigrant hardliners, it is simultaneously constructing a parallel economy in which detained migrants can be pressed into near-free labor to satisfy the needs of industries that depend on migrant work.

What Trump is building isn’t just a prison state—it’s a forced labor regime, where confinement and exploitation go hand in hand. And it’s a high price to pay for a policy that creates more problems than it solves.

As the enforcement dragnet expands, so does the definition of who qualifies as an enemy of the state—including legal U.S. residents arrested for their political views.

The Trump administration is now pushing to review and revoke the citizenship of Americans it deems national security risks—targeting them for arrest, detention, and deportation.

Unfortunately, the government’s definition of “national security threat” is so broad, vague, and unconstitutional that it could encompass anyone engaged in peaceful, nonviolent, constitutionally protected activities—including criticism of government policy or the policies of allied governments like Israel.

In Trump’s prison state, no one is beyond the government’s reach.

Critics of the post-9/11 security state—left, right, and libertarian alike—have long warned that the powers granted to fight terrorism and control immigration would eventually be turned inward, used against dissidents, protestors, and ordinary citizens.

That moment has arrived.

Yet Trump’s most vocal supporters remain dangerously convinced they have nothing to fear from this expanding enforcement machine. But history—and the Constitution—say otherwise.

Our founders understood that unchecked government power, particularly in the name of public safety, poses the most significant threat to liberty. That’s why they enshrined rights like due process, trial by jury, and protection from unreasonable searches.

Those safeguards are now being hollowed out.

Trump’s detention expansion—like the mass surveillance programs before it—is not about making America safe. It’s about following the blueprints for authoritarian control in order to lock down the country.

The government’s targets may be the vulnerable today—but the infrastructure is built for everyone: Trump’s administration is laying the legal groundwork for indefinite detention of citizens and noncitizens alike.

This is not just about building prisons. It’s about dismantling the constitutional protections that make us free.

A nation cannot remain free while operating as a security state. And a government that treats liberty as a threat will soon treat the people as enemies.

This is not a partisan warning. It is a constitutional one.

We are dangerously close to losing the constitutional guardrails that keep power in check.

The very people who once warned against Big Government—the ones who decried the surveillance state, the IRS, and federal overreach—are now cheering for the most dangerous part of it: the unchecked power to surveil, detain, and disappear citizens without full due process.

Limited government, not mass incarceration, is the backbone of liberty.

The Founders warned that the greatest threat to liberty was not a foreign enemy, but domestic power left unchecked. That’s exactly what we’re up against now. A nation cannot claim to defend freedom while building a surveillance-fueled, prison-industrial empire.

Trump’s prison state is not a defense of America. It’s the destruction of everything America was meant to defend.

We can pursue justice without abandoning the Constitution. We can secure our borders and our communities without turning every American into a suspect and building a federal gulag.

But we must act now.

History has shown us where this road leads. As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, once the machinery of tyranny is built, it rarely stays idle.

If we continue down this path, cheering on bigger prisons, broader police powers, and unchecked executive authority—if we fail to reject the dangerous notion that more prisons, more power, and fewer rights will somehow make us safer—if we fail to restore the foundational limits that protect us from government overreach before those limits are gone for good—we may wake up to find that the prisons and concentration camps the police state is building won’t just hold others.

One day, they may hold us all.

The post The Rise of the Prison State: Trump’s Push for Megaprisons Could Lock Us All Up first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by John W. Whitehead and Nisha Whitehead.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-rise-of-the-prison-state-trumps-push-for-megaprisons-could-lock-us-all-up/feed/ 0 543593
PREPARED REMARKS: Sanders Keeps Sounding the Alarm on Health Care Emergency Worsened by Trump Budget Bill https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/prepared-remarks-sanders-keeps-sounding-the-alarm-on-health-care-emergency-worsened-by-trump-budget-bill/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/prepared-remarks-sanders-keeps-sounding-the-alarm-on-health-care-emergency-worsened-by-trump-budget-bill/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 15:35:13 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/prepared-remarks-sanders-keeps-sounding-the-alarm-on-health-care-emergency-worsened-by-trump-budget-bill Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), Ranking Member of the Senate Committee on Health, Education, Labor, and Pensions (HELP), today delivered remarks on the impact of the Republican reconciliation bill — which passed the Senate by one vote and will throw nearly 17 million Americans off the health care they have.

There is no question that cybersecurity and protecting the privacy of Americans’ health care records are important issues that we need to deal with.

But, Mr. Chairman, let me be very clear. That is not the issue that is right now on the minds of the American people. What people are worried about is the catastrophic impact that the reconciliation bill that was passed last week will have on the health and well-being of the American people. And that is the issue that I'm going to be focused on today.

That legislation, passed by one vote here in the Senate, will be making the largest cut to Medicaid in American history to pay for the largest tax break for billionaires in American history.

At a time when our current health care system is broken, dysfunctional and cruel — 85 million today are uninsured or underinsured. This bill will make a horrible situation even worse.

This legislation will cut Medicaid and the Affordable Care Act by more than $1.1 trillion.

The nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office has estimated that this bill, along with the expiration of the enhanced premium tax credits, will cause 17 million people to lose their health insurance.

Researchers at the Yale School of Public Health and health care economists at the University of Pennsylvania have found that these health care policies would cause over 50,000 people in our country to die unnecessarily every year. That's what happens when you can't get to a doctor.

I am delighted that one of the lead researchers of this report, Dr. Alison Galvani, is here with us today to talk more about that study.

Mr. Chairman: it is not rocket science. You're a doctor, you know this. If people don’t have access to health care, if they can’t get to a doctor when they need to, people will suffer and tens of thousands will die. It happens today and it will only get worse.

Make no mistake about it: This bill is a death sentence for working-class and low-income Americans.

Further, as a result of this bill, more than 300 rural hospitals are now at risk of closing down altogether or substantially reducing their services. That is not my estimate. That’s what the Center for Health Services Research at the University of North Carolina recently estimated.

And we are already beginning to see the devastating impact this bill will have on rural America: The Curtis Medical Center in Southwest Nebraska has already announced that it will be shutting down because it cannot withstand the cuts to Medicaid contained in this bill.

It’s not just rural hospitals that are now in crisis as a result of this legislation.

According to a recent survey from the American Health Care Association, as a result of this bill, 27% of nursing homes have indicated that they will be forced to close their doors and 58% will have to reduce staff. And it’s not just nursing homes.

Health care researchers at the Milken Institute School of Public Health at George Washington University have found that this bill will be a disaster for community health centers.

They have estimated that as a result of the passage of this bill, over 40% of community health center sites will shut down. Today, there are over 15,000 community health center clinics throughout America. This could result in the shutting down of some 9,000 of them.

And it's not just community health centers, it's not just nursing homes and it's not just individuals.

This legislation will substantially increase the uninsured rate in every state in this country.

As a result of this bill, the uninsured rate in my own state of Vermont would go up from 3.3% to 6%.

In Louisiana, the Chairman's state, the uninsured rate will go up from 6.7% to 12.4%.

In Florida, the uninsured rate will go up from 10.4% to 18.8%.

In Texas, the second largest state in this country, the uninsured rate will go up to 20% — in the United States, in the richest country in the history of the world.

Mr. Chairman, this is an issue that needs to be explained to the American people, and I look forward to discussing it with all of our panelists.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/prepared-remarks-sanders-keeps-sounding-the-alarm-on-health-care-emergency-worsened-by-trump-budget-bill/feed/ 0 543609
New Analysis of Five Major U.S. LNG Export Projects Finds Every One Fails the “Climate Test” https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/new-analysis-of-five-major-u-s-lng-export-projects-finds-every-one-fails-the-climate-test/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/new-analysis-of-five-major-u-s-lng-export-projects-finds-every-one-fails-the-climate-test/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 15:31:20 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/new-analysis-of-five-major-u-s-lng-export-projects-finds-every-one-fails-the-climate-test “Failing the ‘Climate Test’: LNG Projects Awaiting Final Investment Decision Do Not Stand Up to U.S. Government Analysis” shows that U.S. LNG exports displace renewable energy and drive up emissions – making them incompatible with a habitable climate.

As the Trump administration barrels forward with its pro-fossil fuel agenda, and European and Asian governments and financial institutions debate whether to increase investments in U.S. liquified natural gas (LNG) projects, a report published today by Greenpeace USA, Earthworks, and Oil Change International highlights the climate threats and financial risks posed by five major new liquefied gas export projects proposed for the US Gulf Coast, all but one of them still awaiting a final investment decision.

“What we found was crystal clear – any further investment in LNG is not compatible with a livable climate,” says Andres Chang, Senior Research Specialist at Greenpeace USA and lead author of the report. “The massive growth in infrastructure along the Texas and Louisiana Gulf Coast has already created significant public health and ecosystem impacts, threatening entire coastal communities. But it doesn’t stop there. This report shows that if built, these projects would put global climate goals even further out of reach.”

The report analyzes five major U.S. LNG projects – Venture Global CP2, Cameron LNG Phase II, Sabine Pass Stage V, Cheniere Corpus Christi LNG Midscale 8-9, and Freeport LNG Expansion – and finds that each and every one fails a “climate test” derived from models in the DOE’s 2024 LNG Export public interest studies. Contrary to industry claims, the report shows that decreasing methane venting and leaking during gas drilling, transportation, and liquefaction is not enough to make these projects “climate neutral.”

“Focusing the Department of Energy’s model on individual US LNG terminals that are yet to be built, we found that they all result in increased greenhouse gas emissions because they pollute the climate, displace renewable energy, and drive up gas demand,” says Lorne Stockman, Oil Change International Research Director and report co-author. “It is very clear that governments, investors, and insurers must stop supporting the reckless LNG buildout now and instead invest in a rapid and just transition to renewable energy that will protect our communities from toxic pollution and climate-fueled superstorms.”

Future administrations could revoke export authorizations that were rubber-stamped under Trump based on their failure to pass the DOE “climate test,” which introduces a new layer of uncertainty to these already-risky projects. This report adds to a rapidly growing body of evidence that financing U.S. LNG is not a sound decision for insurers, investors, or purchasers – something the EU and America’s Asian allies must keep in mind as President Trump pressures them to increase their imports of U.S. LNG under threat of sweeping tariffs. “Countries with climate commitments, such as those in the EU, should be very wary of the climate cost of importing US LNG,” says Dr. Dakota Raynes, Senior Manager of Research, Policy, and Data at Earthworks and report co-author.

“Fossil fuel dependency has long externalized its true costs, forcing communities to bear the burden of pollution, sickness, and economic instability,” says James Hiatt, founder and director of For a Better Bayou. “For decades the oil and gas industry has known about the devastating health and climate impacts of its operations, yet it continues to expand, backed by billions in private and public financing. These harms are not isolated – they’re systemic, and they threaten all of us. This report is a call to conscience. It’s time we stop propping up deadly false solutions and start investing in a transition to energy systems that sustain life, not sacrifice it.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/new-analysis-of-five-major-u-s-lng-export-projects-finds-every-one-fails-the-climate-test/feed/ 0 543591
Cartoonists Can Compare Victims of Genocide to Nazis—But Not the Perpetrators https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/cartoonists-can-compare-victims-of-genocide-to-nazis-but-not-the-perpetrators/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/cartoonists-can-compare-victims-of-genocide-to-nazis-but-not-the-perpetrators/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 15:22:51 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046394  

Image of men in front of a US/Israeli flag drinking blood from glasses, saying of the dove of peace: 'Who invited that lousy antisemite?'

This Mr. Fish cartoon (Scheer Post, 12/5/23) was called antisemitic because in calling attention to the Israeli army’s ongoing and very real killing of more than 17,000 children, it might evoke associations with the false trope used across centuries that Jews killed children in religious rituals.

Cartoonist Mr. Fish (real name Dwayne Booth) posted an update to his Patreon on March 20 headed “Fish: Laid Off!” Fish’s work has accompanied columns by Chris Hedges, appeared in Harper’s Magazine and currently can be found on ScheerPost. He collaborated with Ralph Nader to create The Day the Rats Vetoed Congress, a fable of a citizen uprising against Washington corruption. Fish announced he had been laid off from the Annenberg School of Communication at the University of Pennsylvania after teaching there for 11 years. Fish states that, officially, “the reason for the termination was budgetary.”

Unofficially, Fish has been subject to an assault stoked by right-wing media since last February. The Washington Free Beacon (2/1/24) fired the starting gun with its piece, “Penn Lecturer Is Behind Grotesque Antisemitic Cartoons.” Writer Jessica Costescu freely conflates criticism of Israel with antisemitism in her piece. She includes as antisemitic a cartoon of accused war criminal Benjamin Netanyahu as a “butcher holding a long knife and a crumpled Palestinian flag,” and another showing “an Israeli holding a gun to a hospitalized baby’s head.”

Even more serious is the charge Costescu makes that Fish evokes the “blood libel,” the myth that Jews murdered Christian children to use in religious rituals, via a cartoon of American and Israeli leaders drinking cups of blood labeled “Gaza.” Fish maintains he was “playing off of the New Yorker style” in drawing “upper-crust power brokers,” and that he was unaware of the blood libel myth (Real News Network, 5/6/25).

Costescu claims that other Fish cartoons are antisemitic because they compare Israeli policies to those of Nazi Germany. She cites one showing soldiers marching under a combination Nazi and Israeli flag, and another showing prisoners in a concentration camp holding signs reading “Gaza, the World’s Biggest Concentration Camp” and “Stop the Holocaust in Gaza.”

‘A Holocaust in Gaza’

An IDF soldier holds a gun to the head of a baby.

Another cartoon by Mr. Fish (Scheer Post, 11/11/23) was called antisemitic because it depicted an IDF soldier holding a gun to the head of a baby. Medical personnel in Gaza report frequently treating children who have been shot in the head by Israeli snipers (Guardian, 4/2/24).

It’s hard to maintain that comparing Israeli policies to Nazism is antisemitic when Israeli Prime Minister Yitzhak Shamir belonged to Lehi, a Zionist militant group so sympathetic to fascism that it offered to ally with Germany during World War II. In 1948, Albert Einstein, Hannah Arendt and others wrote a letter to the New York Times (12/4/48) criticizing the right-wing Freedom Party (Herut), home of future Prime Minister Menachem Begin, for similarity “in its organization, methods, political philosophy and social appeal to the Nazi and Fascist parties.” The Freedom Party was one of the major parties that allied to form Likud in 1973, the faction that has governed Israel for most of the last 50 years.

Pre–October 7, an editorial in Haaretz (10/3/23) warned that “neo-fascism in Israel seriously threatens Israelis and Palestinians alike.”

Israeli politicians and public figures have not shied away from using genocidal rhetoric that compares with Nazi propaganda during the Final Solution. Yitzhak Kroizer of the Jewish Power party (Guardian, 1/3/24) proclaimed: “The Gaza Strip should be flattened, and for all of them there is but one sentence, and that is death.”

Israeli parliamentarian Moshe Feiglin (Middle East Eye, 5/21/25) said in May: “Every child in Gaza is the enemy. We need to occupy Gaza and settle it, and not a single Gazan child will be left there. There is no other victory.”

Israeli TV presenter Elad Barashi (New Arab, 5/5/25) made the parallels explicit when he called for “a Holocaust in Gaza.” He maintained he couldn’t “understand the people here in the State of Israel who don’t want to fill Gaza with gas showers…or train cars.”

‘Antisemitism forever!’

Nazi officers gathered around Hitler, who has been promised a student visa by Columbia.

Cartoonist Henry Payne (Andrews McMeel, 3/17/25) responded to the Trump administration’s arrest of Mahmoud Khalil for protesting genocide by suggesting that Khalil was akin to Hitler.

If Israeli military and political actions are off-limits to comparisons to the Nazis in the field of cartoons, the same is not true for Palestinians. This creates a situation where the Israeli government perpetrating a genocide, per Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch, cannot be compared to the Nazis, but the Palestinians—the victims of the same genocide—can.

Since our last survey of anti-Palestinian cartooning (FAIR.org, 3/27/25), some of those profiled have continued to paint pro-Palestine protests as Nazi-like or inherently antisemitic.

Henry Payne (Andrews McMeel, 3/17/25) made reference to the Trump administration’s deportation proceedings against student protester Mahmoud Khalil. He drew a despondent Adolf Hitler poring over a military map, lamenting battlefield reverses. He takes consolation in that “Columbia U. has offered [him] a student visa.”

Kirk Walters (King Features Syndicate, 5/29/25) drew a college president side-by-side with George Wallace. As the segregationist yells out, “Segregation now…Segregation tomorrow… Segregation forever!!” the college president yells out, “Antisemitism now… Antisemitism tomorrow… Antisemitism forever!!” The cartoon is a reference to colleges who have been accused by the Trump administration of not doing enough to crack down on pro-Palestinian protests (Politico, 4/6/25).

‘Generated threats of personal violence’

Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu covered with blood and holding a knife.

A Mr. Fish cartoon (Scheer Post, 12/1/23) was called antisemitic because it depicted Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu—who has overseen the killing of more than 57,000 people in Gaza—as a butcher covered in blood and holding a knife.

Within two weeks of the Free Beacon article, the University of Pennsylvania chapter of the American Association of University Professors felt compelled to release a statement on the targeted harassment of Fish. The AAUP stated that the article “generated threats of personal violence against him and calls for the university to discipline him,” and that by publishing the date and time of his next class, the Free Beacon “endangered the physical safety of both [Fish] and his students.” The AAUP also criticized the interim president of the university for publicly calling Fish’s cartoons “reprehensible” and saying that Fish should not have published them.

Fish himself has long opposed censorship, writing in the Comics Journal (Summer–Fall/20), “I don’t believe there are images that are so problematic and so hurtful they should be censored, for the same reasons why I don’t believe in censoring the written word.”

After Fish announced his firing, the Free Beacon (3/22/25) could barely contain its glee. It included a quote from the AAUP crediting the publication with launching a campaign of “targeted harassment” against Fish.

It’s clear that right-wing media and pro-Israel pressure groups still have the capacity to threaten the employment of cartoonists who do not toe the pro-Israel line. There is no such organized push-back against anti-Palestinian cartoonists, even though they are targeting the victims of an ongoing genocide.


Featured image: This Mr. Fish cartoon (Scheer Post, 12/31/23) was called antisemitic because it imagined that victims of Nazi genocide were opposed to Israeli genocide.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Hank Kennedy.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/cartoonists-can-compare-victims-of-genocide-to-nazis-but-not-the-perpetrators/feed/ 0 543578
Cartoonists Can Compare Victims of Genocide to Nazis—But Not the Perpetrators https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/cartoonists-can-compare-victims-of-genocide-to-nazis-but-not-the-perpetrators-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/cartoonists-can-compare-victims-of-genocide-to-nazis-but-not-the-perpetrators-2/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 15:22:51 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046394  

Image of men in front of a US/Israeli flag drinking blood from glasses, saying of the dove of peace: 'Who invited that lousy antisemite?'

This Mr. Fish cartoon (Scheer Post, 12/5/23) was called antisemitic because in calling attention to the Israeli army’s ongoing and very real killing of more than 17,000 children, it might evoke associations with the false trope used across centuries that Jews killed children in religious rituals.

Cartoonist Mr. Fish (real name Dwayne Booth) posted an update to his Patreon on March 20 headed “Fish: Laid Off!” Fish’s work has accompanied columns by Chris Hedges, appeared in Harper’s Magazine and currently can be found on ScheerPost. He collaborated with Ralph Nader to create The Day the Rats Vetoed Congress, a fable of a citizen uprising against Washington corruption. Fish announced he had been laid off from the Annenberg School of Communication at the University of Pennsylvania after teaching there for 11 years. Fish states that, officially, “the reason for the termination was budgetary.”

Unofficially, Fish has been subject to an assault stoked by right-wing media since last February. The Washington Free Beacon (2/1/24) fired the starting gun with its piece, “Penn Lecturer Is Behind Grotesque Antisemitic Cartoons.” Writer Jessica Costescu freely conflates criticism of Israel with antisemitism in her piece. She includes as antisemitic a cartoon of accused war criminal Benjamin Netanyahu as a “butcher holding a long knife and a crumpled Palestinian flag,” and another showing “an Israeli holding a gun to a hospitalized baby’s head.”

Even more serious is the charge Costescu makes that Fish evokes the “blood libel,” the myth that Jews murdered Christian children to use in religious rituals, via a cartoon of American and Israeli leaders drinking cups of blood labeled “Gaza.” Fish maintains he was “playing off of the New Yorker style” in drawing “upper-crust power brokers,” and that he was unaware of the blood libel myth (Real News Network, 5/6/25).

Costescu claims that other Fish cartoons are antisemitic because they compare Israeli policies to those of Nazi Germany. She cites one showing soldiers marching under a combination Nazi and Israeli flag, and another showing prisoners in a concentration camp holding signs reading “Gaza, the World’s Biggest Concentration Camp” and “Stop the Holocaust in Gaza.”

‘A Holocaust in Gaza’

An IDF soldier holds a gun to the head of a baby.

Another cartoon by Mr. Fish (Scheer Post, 11/11/23) was called antisemitic because it depicted an IDF soldier holding a gun to the head of a baby. Medical personnel in Gaza report frequently treating children who have been shot in the head by Israeli snipers (Guardian, 4/2/24).

It’s hard to maintain that comparing Israeli policies to Nazism is antisemitic when Israeli Prime Minister Yitzhak Shamir belonged to Lehi, a Zionist militant group so sympathetic to fascism that it offered to ally with Germany during World War II. In 1948, Albert Einstein, Hannah Arendt and others wrote a letter to the New York Times (12/4/48) criticizing the right-wing Freedom Party (Herut), home of future Prime Minister Menachem Begin, for similarity “in its organization, methods, political philosophy and social appeal to the Nazi and Fascist parties.” The Freedom Party was one of the major parties that allied to form Likud in 1973, the faction that has governed Israel for most of the last 50 years.

Pre–October 7, an editorial in Haaretz (10/3/23) warned that “neo-fascism in Israel seriously threatens Israelis and Palestinians alike.”

Israeli politicians and public figures have not shied away from using genocidal rhetoric that compares with Nazi propaganda during the Final Solution. Yitzhak Kroizer of the Jewish Power party (Guardian, 1/3/24) proclaimed: “The Gaza Strip should be flattened, and for all of them there is but one sentence, and that is death.”

Israeli parliamentarian Moshe Feiglin (Middle East Eye, 5/21/25) said in May: “Every child in Gaza is the enemy. We need to occupy Gaza and settle it, and not a single Gazan child will be left there. There is no other victory.”

Israeli TV presenter Elad Barashi (New Arab, 5/5/25) made the parallels explicit when he called for “a Holocaust in Gaza.” He maintained he couldn’t “understand the people here in the State of Israel who don’t want to fill Gaza with gas showers…or train cars.”

‘Antisemitism forever!’

Nazi officers gathered around Hitler, who has been promised a student visa by Columbia.

Cartoonist Henry Payne (Andrews McMeel, 3/17/25) responded to the Trump administration’s arrest of Mahmoud Khalil for protesting genocide by suggesting that Khalil was akin to Hitler.

If Israeli military and political actions are off-limits to comparisons to the Nazis in the field of cartoons, the same is not true for Palestinians. This creates a situation where the Israeli government perpetrating a genocide, per Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch, cannot be compared to the Nazis, but the Palestinians—the victims of the same genocide—can.

Since our last survey of anti-Palestinian cartooning (FAIR.org, 3/27/25), some of those profiled have continued to paint pro-Palestine protests as Nazi-like or inherently antisemitic.

Henry Payne (Andrews McMeel, 3/17/25) made reference to the Trump administration’s deportation proceedings against student protester Mahmoud Khalil. He drew a despondent Adolf Hitler poring over a military map, lamenting battlefield reverses. He takes consolation in that “Columbia U. has offered [him] a student visa.”

Kirk Walters (King Features Syndicate, 5/29/25) drew a college president side-by-side with George Wallace. As the segregationist yells out, “Segregation now…Segregation tomorrow… Segregation forever!!” the college president yells out, “Antisemitism now… Antisemitism tomorrow… Antisemitism forever!!” The cartoon is a reference to colleges who have been accused by the Trump administration of not doing enough to crack down on pro-Palestinian protests (Politico, 4/6/25).

‘Generated threats of personal violence’

Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu covered with blood and holding a knife.

A Mr. Fish cartoon (Scheer Post, 12/1/23) was called antisemitic because it depicted Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu—who has overseen the killing of more than 57,000 people in Gaza—as a butcher covered in blood and holding a knife.

Within two weeks of the Free Beacon article, the University of Pennsylvania chapter of the American Association of University Professors felt compelled to release a statement on the targeted harassment of Fish. The AAUP stated that the article “generated threats of personal violence against him and calls for the university to discipline him,” and that by publishing the date and time of his next class, the Free Beacon “endangered the physical safety of both [Fish] and his students.” The AAUP also criticized the interim president of the university for publicly calling Fish’s cartoons “reprehensible” and saying that Fish should not have published them.

Fish himself has long opposed censorship, writing in the Comics Journal (Summer–Fall/20), “I don’t believe there are images that are so problematic and so hurtful they should be censored, for the same reasons why I don’t believe in censoring the written word.”

After Fish announced his firing, the Free Beacon (3/22/25) could barely contain its glee. It included a quote from the AAUP crediting the publication with launching a campaign of “targeted harassment” against Fish.

It’s clear that right-wing media and pro-Israel pressure groups still have the capacity to threaten the employment of cartoonists who do not toe the pro-Israel line. There is no such organized push-back against anti-Palestinian cartoonists, even though they are targeting the victims of an ongoing genocide.


Featured image: This Mr. Fish cartoon (Scheer Post, 12/31/23) was called antisemitic because it imagined that victims of Nazi genocide were opposed to Israeli genocide.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Hank Kennedy.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/cartoonists-can-compare-victims-of-genocide-to-nazis-but-not-the-perpetrators-2/feed/ 0 543579
Fueling Genocide: Inside the Global Supply Chain that Delivers Jet Fuel to Israel’s Military https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/fueling-genocide-inside-the-global-supply-chain-that-delivers-jet-fuel-to-israels-military/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/fueling-genocide-inside-the-global-supply-chain-that-delivers-jet-fuel-to-israels-military/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 15:17:20 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159753 Israel’s genocidal bombing campaign in Gaza has been fueled by a surge in deliveries of military-grade jet fuel from U.S. providers. In this visual, we expose the companies and governments complicit in this supply chain, while highlighting grassroots efforts to track and disrupt this deadly cargo through direct action, boycott campaigns, and community resistance.

The post Fueling Genocide: Inside the Global Supply Chain that Delivers Jet Fuel to Israel’s Military first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Visualizing Palestine.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/fueling-genocide-inside-the-global-supply-chain-that-delivers-jet-fuel-to-israels-military/feed/ 0 543568
"Netanyahu Is the Problem": Ex-Bernie Adviser Matt Duss on Why Gaza Ceasefire Remains Elusive https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/netanyahu-is-the-problem-ex-bernie-adviser-matt-duss-on-why-gaza-ceasefire-remains-elusive/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/netanyahu-is-the-problem-ex-bernie-adviser-matt-duss-on-why-gaza-ceasefire-remains-elusive/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 14:38:54 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=76d49f128ecad295ceb5920234e8ed71
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/netanyahu-is-the-problem-ex-bernie-adviser-matt-duss-on-why-gaza-ceasefire-remains-elusive/feed/ 0 543564
“Netanyahu Is the Problem”: Sanders’s Former Adviser Matt Duss on Why Gaza Ceasefire Remains Elusive https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/netanyahu-is-the-problem-sanderss-former-adviser-matt-duss-on-why-gaza-ceasefire-remains-elusive/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/netanyahu-is-the-problem-sanderss-former-adviser-matt-duss-on-why-gaza-ceasefire-remains-elusive/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 12:13:42 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=98fadb87c3d8da4d974fb663d1f49a56 Seg1 trump netanyahu duss

President Trump met with Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu at the White House for a second straight day Tuesday, as Trump’s Middle East envoy, Steve Witkoff, claimed Israel and Hamas were nearing a breakthrough on a ceasefire agreement. Israeli media are reporting Netanyahu is under “extreme” pressure to reach a 60-day ceasefire deal, but Netanyahu’s “interests and the interests of his government remain to make this a perpetual, ongoing war,” says Matt Duss, executive vice president at the Center for International Policy. The U.S.-Israeli proposal would see 10 living Israeli hostages released, along with the bodies of deceased hostages, in exchange for the release of Palestinian prisoners held in Israeli jails. Hamas negotiators are also seeking the withdrawal of Israeli forces, guarantees for an end to the war, the resumption of humanitarian aid shipments overseen by the U.N. and the International Committee of the Red Cross, and an end to the operations of the so-called Gaza Humanitarian Foundation.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/netanyahu-is-the-problem-sanderss-former-adviser-matt-duss-on-why-gaza-ceasefire-remains-elusive/feed/ 0 543558
Author David Robie tells of outrage over sinking of the Rainbow Warrior 40 years ago https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/author-david-robie-tells-of-outrage-over-sinking-of-the-rainbow-warrior-40-years-ago/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/author-david-robie-tells-of-outrage-over-sinking-of-the-rainbow-warrior-40-years-ago/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 11:36:15 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117267 RNZ News Nights

Tomorrow marks 40 years since the bombing and sinking of the Rainbow Warrior — a moment that changed the course of New Zealand’s history and reshaped how we saw ourselves on the world stage.

Two French agents planted two explosives on the ship, then just before midnight, explosions ripped through the hull killing photographer, Fernando Pereira and sinking the 47m ex-fishing trawler.

The attack sparked outrage across the country and the world, straining diplomatic ties between New Zealand and France and cementing the country’s anti-nuclear stance.

Few people are more closely linked to the ship than author and journalist Dr David Robie, who spent eleven weeks on board during its final voyage through the Pacific, and wrote the book, Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior, which is being published tomorrow. He joins Emile Donovan.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/author-david-robie-tells-of-outrage-over-sinking-of-the-rainbow-warrior-40-years-ago/feed/ 0 544182
The Texas Flash Flood Is a Preview of the Chaos to Come https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-texas-flash-flood-is-a-preview-of-the-chaos-to-come/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-texas-flash-flood-is-a-preview-of-the-chaos-to-come/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/texas-flash-flood-camp-mystic-climate-change-trump-noaa-fema by Abrahm Lustgarten

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

On July 4, the broken remnants of a powerful tropical storm spun off the warm waters of the Gulf of Mexico so heavy with moisture that it seemed to stagger under its load. Then, colliding with another soggy system sliding north off the Pacific, the storm wobbled and its clouds tipped, waterboarding south central Texas with an extraordinary 20 inches of rain. In the predawn blackness, the Guadalupe River, which drains from the Hill Country, rose by more than 26 vertical feet in just 45 minutes, jumping its banks and hurtling downstream, killing 109 people, including at least 27 children at a summer camp located inside a federally designated floodway.

Over the days and weeks to come there will be tireless — and warranted — analysis of who is to blame for this heart-wrenching loss. Should Kerr County, where most of the deaths occurred, have installed warning sirens along that stretch of the waterway, and why were children allowed to sleep in an area prone to high-velocity flash flooding? Why were urgent updates apparently only conveyed by cellphone and online in a rural area with limited connectivity? Did the National Weather Service, enduring steep budget cuts under the current administration, adequately forecast this storm?

Those questions are critical. But so is a far larger concern: The rapid onset of disruptive climate change — driven by the burning of oil, gasoline and coal — is making disasters like this one more common, more deadly and far more costly to Americans, even as the federal government is running away from the policies and research that might begin to address it.

President Lyndon B. Johnson was briefed in 1965 that a climate crisis was being caused by burning fossil fuels and was warned that it would create the conditions for intensifying storms and extreme events, and this country — including 10 more presidents — has debated how to respond to that warning ever since. Still, it took decades for the slow-motion change to grow large enough to affect people’s everyday lives and safety and for the world to reach the stage it is in now: an age of climate-driven chaos, where the past is no longer prologue and the specific challenges of the future might be foreseeable but are less predictable.

Climate change doesn’t chart a linear path where each day is warmer than the last. Rather, science suggests that we’re now in an age of discontinuity, with heat one day and hail the next and with more dramatic extremes. Across the planet, dry places are getting drier while wet places are getting wetter. The jet stream — the band of air that circulates through the Northern Hemisphere — is slowing to a near stall at times, weaving off its tracks, causing unprecedented events like polar vortexes drawing arctic air far south. Meanwhile the heat is sucking moisture from the drought-plagued plains of Kansas only to dump it over Spain, contributing to last year’s cataclysmic floods.

We saw something similar when Hurricane Harvey dumped as much as 60 inches of rain on parts of Texas in 2017 and when Hurricane Helene devastated North Carolina last year — and countless times in between. We witnessed it again in Texas this past weekend. Warmer oceans evaporate faster, and warmer air holds more water, transporting it in the form of humidity across the atmosphere, until it can’t hold it any longer and it falls. Meteorologists estimate that the atmosphere had reached its capacity for moisture before the storm struck.

The disaster comes during a week in which extreme heat and extreme weather have battered the planet. Parts of northern Spain and southern France are burning out of control, as are parts of California. In the past 72 hours, storms have torn the roofs off of five-story apartment buildings in Slovakia, while intense rainfall has turned streets into rivers in southern Italy. Same story in Lombok, Indonesia, where cars floated like buoys, and in eastern China, where an inland typhoon-like storm sent furniture blowing down the streets like so many sheafs of paper. Léon, Mexico, was battered by hail so thick on Monday it covered the city in white. And North Carolina is, again, enduring 10 inches of rainfall.

There is no longer much debate that climate change is making many of these events demonstrably worse. Scientists conducting a rapid analysis of last week’s extreme heat wave that spread across Europe have concluded that human-caused warming killed roughly 1,500 more people than might have otherwise perished. Early reports suggest that the flooding in Texas, too, was substantially influenced by climate change. According to a preliminary analysis by ClimaMeter, a joint project of the European Union and the French National Centre for Scientific Research, the weather in Texas was 7% wetter on July 4 than it was before climate change warmed that part of the state, and natural variability alone cannot explain “this very exceptional meteorological condition.”

That the United States once again is reeling from familiar but alarming headlines and body counts should not be a surprise by now. According to the World Meteorological Organization, the number of extreme weather disasters has jumped fivefold worldwide over the past 50 years, and the number of deaths has nearly tripled. In the United States, which prefers to measure its losses in dollars, the damage from major storms was more than $180 billion last year, nearly 10 times the average annual toll during the 1980s, after accounting for inflation. These storms have now cost Americans nearly $3 trillion. Meanwhile, the number of annual major disasters has grown sevenfold. Fatalities in billion-dollar storms last year alone were nearly equal to the number of such deaths counted by the federal government in the 20 years between 1980 and 2000.

The most worrisome fact, though, may be that the warming of the planet has scarcely begun. Just as each step up on the Richter scale represents a massive increase in the force of an earthquake, the damage caused by the next 1 or 2 degrees Celsius of warming stands to be far greater than that caused by the 1.5 degrees we have so far endured. The world’s leading scientists, the United Nations panel on climate change and even many global energy experts warn that we face something akin to our last chance before it is too late to curtail a runaway crisis. It’s one reason our predictions and modeling capabilities are becoming an essential, lifesaving mechanism of national defense.

What is extraordinary is that at such a volatile moment, President Donald Trump’s administration would choose not just to minimize the climate danger — and thus the suffering of the people affected by it — but to revoke funding for the very data collection and research that would help the country better understand and prepare for this moment.

Over the past couple of months, the administration has defunded much of the operations of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, the nation’s chief climate and scientific agency responsible for weather forecasting, as well as the cutting-edge earth systems research at places like Princeton University, which is essential to modeling an aberrant future. It has canceled the nation’s seminal scientific assessment of climate change and risk. The administration has defunded the Federal Emergency Management Agency’s core program paying for infrastructure projects meant to prevent major disasters from causing harm, and it has threatened to eliminate FEMA itself, the main federal agency charged with helping Americans after a climate emergency like the Texas floods. It has — as of last week — signed legislation that unravels the federal programs meant to slow warming by helping the country’s industries transition to cleaner energy. And it has even stopped the reporting of the cost of disasters, stating that doing so is “in alignment with evolving priorities” of the administration. It is as if the administration hopes that making the price tag for the Kerr County flooding invisible would make the events unfolding there seem less devastating.

Given the abandonment of policy that might forestall more severe events like the Texas floods by reducing the emissions that cause them, Americans are left to the daunting task of adapting. In Texas, it is critical to ask whether the protocols in place at the time of the storm were good enough. This week is not the first time that children have died in a flash flood along the Guadalupe River, and reports suggest county officials struggled to raise money and then declined to install a warning system in 2018 in order to save approximately $1 million. But the country faces a larger and more daunting challenge, because this disaster — like the firestorms in Los Angeles and the hurricanes repeatedly pummeling Florida and the southeast — once again raises the question of where people can continue to safely live. It might be that in an era of what researchers are calling “mega rain” events, a flood plain should now be off-limits.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Abrahm Lustgarten.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/the-texas-flash-flood-is-a-preview-of-the-chaos-to-come/feed/ 0 543520
Musician Liam Benzvi on taking risks that pay off https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/musician-liam-benzvi-on-taking-risks-that-pay-off/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/musician-liam-benzvi-on-taking-risks-that-pay-off/#respond Wed, 09 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-liam-benzvi-on-taking-risks-that-pay-off When did you first know you were a singer?

I was sung to a lot by my family, which was nice. My dad is a bassist who plays recreationally, and my mom was a singer-actor. She stopped doing that and went to nursing school when I was eight, but she was always singing. I was made to participate. I harmonized with my parents to James Taylor songs, or I sang showtunes to lull myself to sleep.

I understood the gravitas of being a performer because it was so revered by my family. I listened to a lot of Cyndi Lauper, Siouxsie and the Banshees, and the B-52s. Those are all really vibrant front people—I was exposed to that energy young.

I’m curious about what your life was like when your first band, Strange Names, came together. What was going on that helped make that happen?

I was in Minneapolis, in college to be an actor. I met [my bandmates] in the dorms. I was reckoning with wanting total creative agency over what I was making, and not wanting to say other people’s words. Even more so than the regular plight of auditioning and rejection, and how tiring that can be for lots of people, I felt conflicted and annoyed by having to recite things that I didn’t believe in.

I came to a crossroads where I could continue acting, or I could throw my all into this band. I chose the band. It was a way to interact with an audience, but more aggressively, and, obviously, with my own compositions. It felt scarier and more challenging. Way more exciting.

In Minneapolis, they’re a really insular, prideful community of artists. They let my band become a big fish in a little pond, which made us feel good. That was also one of the reasons that I chose [music over acting]: instant gratification.

Minneapolis is one of the most special cities in the US. I love to be there, breathing Paul Westerbergian air and thinking about Prince. Going dancing at First Avenue.

Paul Westerberg’s sister, Mary Lucia, was one of the main public radio hosts. She’s a super-cool lady, and she was one of my champions. It was her job to know who every single local artist was, and almost all of the local shows were “brought to you by NPR,” or whatever the muckamuck media company was there. It felt like you were a big deal, even if you weren’t.

You grew up in New York and live here now. How did changing cities affect your work?

In 2014, I stayed for an extra year out of college to keep the band going. We came here because we signed to a label based in New York. It was a very quick fall from grace. We were so championed in the Midwest, then it was, “We’re starting from absolutely square one in New York.” Emotionally, I have my family anchor here—I’m from here, I grew up here, and I always knew I would probably die here. Artistically, we were playing the 6 p.m. show at the Whatever Bar.

Did you sense an opportunity in that?

I was so high on the choice to not be an actor anymore that it didn’t matter. I was consumed by that risky decision that I made [to be a musician]. It was so fun.

I wonder if you brought any of your acting skill set into that risk, and into singing your own words.

The way I move on stage is a direct correlation to how I was mostly a character actor in school. I played old men and monsters, and those are the most fun characters to play. I have these jerky, pelvic go-tos when I’m on stage that I got from playing crazy people. I’ve just scaled it down to a rock and roll level.

You were thinking about scaling things down to a rock and roll level?

It felt really good. When you’re a gay guy in acting school, you’re very conscious of being castable, and not being typecast as always playing a gay character. Saying my own words and performing my own music was a very liberating thing for my sexuality, [one] that I hadn’t allowed myself to explore while I was trying to fit into boxes.

I can imagine how that freedom might radiate into the rest of your life. What else have you learned about yourself from writing and performing music?

It’s weird—when I was in high school in New York City, I was going out all the time. I had an older boyfriend when I was 15 years old. I lived quite a lot. I decided to go to this buttoned-up theater school in the Midwest, which was an act of rebellion against my rebellious phase. And then I had to unlearn all of that stuff that I had internalized in [acting] school to re-characterize myself as this cool guy.

I read something about how you compose lyrics—sometimes, from this remove of imagining someone else looking at you, then thinking, Who do they see?

It all comes down to storytelling, and the best way to tell a story is to embellish. If you’re writing it yourself: taking elements of your life, but not necessarily saying exactly what happened, and making some creative choices with where the story goes. And adding elements that are entirely false.

I’ve always quoted a Björk interview where she talks about “emotional coordinates.” That’s how she writes songs: the first verse can be about a real experience she had. The second verse can be about a movie that she saw, but with a similar emotional provocation as the life experience. The third verse can be about a completely made-up character that is in that same emotional world. You see it kind of on a map. Like historiography, as opposed to history. You see the coordinates of where it is.

Her using those words made a lot of sense to me. Writing from the perspective of me watching myself, or from the perspective of the person that I’m talking to, is within those coordinates. One verse, it’s me; one verse, it’s the person that I’m talking to; then it’s the total objective point of view, floating above all of it.

Do you find that, over time, you’re situated at some sets of coordinates repeatedly? What do you come back to?

For most of the music that I like and listen to, I like pretty melodies and hooks. What goes hand in hand with hooks are elements of yearning and excitability and love and whatnot. That being said, I’m now at a point where I want to very consciously and specifically write from my perspective, and write more testimonially than I have in the past.

What prompted that change?

Being on tour and singing my songs over and over again, there were always parts I felt way more hooked up singing than I would other parts. I knew why. Those parts were closer to my real experience. When Marianne Faithfull died, I was listening to a lot of her music, especially Broken English. She’s so mad on that record—so raw and angry. I was in awe listening to it after I hadn’t in a while, and jealous. Like, “I want to feel that way and write that way.” Whatever I make next, I want it to be direct.

Like the antithesis of when you were acting and having to say other people’s words.

Exactly. I still want to use poetic imagery to illustrate what I’m feeling, but I want it to come from a real place. I’ve had friends ask, “When are you going to make an angry record? When are you going to make a spiky record?” I want to challenge myself to do that.

I want to ask about your day-to-day art practice. What do you need in order to make your work?

I need to walk around a lot. It’s extremely physical, as far as I can’t sit down and write anything, ever, lyrically—even melodically, I have to be walking. That’s the only way I meditate. I have voice memos and notes filled with little humming melodies and words that I think of, and street signs that I see. I need to be able to actively observe and fantasize. The only time I can achieve that is not in stillness.

Then I need someone… well, it’s me ultimately, but I need someone to hold me down and force me to pick up my instrument and execute it, because I could live in the fantasizing period forever. But just like when you’re reading a book or watching a slow, artsy movie, you need to get through the first 30 minutes, and then you’re hooked.

Then you’re home free.

Oftentimes, drugs help with that. If not, that first 30 minutes of reckoning with your skills is the most tedious, horrible thing. Picking up the guitar or opening a session to actually start writing a song, I’m confronted with my skill set, as opposed to my more ambient creative process. It’s suddenly, “What are you actually capable of executing? Can you play this? Can you figure out the software?” That’s when I get into my head. “It took you too long to figure this out. You’re not a real artist. You’re not as much of a genius as you think you are.”

Doesn’t it suck that that’s part of the art job, no matter what you’re making? Given that feeling, it’s a wonder anything gets done. Who helps hold you down?

My boyfriend is extremely helpful. He writes fiction, and he’s really good at telling me to focus, and I do the same for him. That’s been nice. Otherwise, nobody is telling me to do anything. I’m telling myself to do everything.

So much of my last record […And His Splash Band] was an attempt to grow my sounding board. I’m so used to working alone that it was a very aggressive pursuit of community. It was feature-heavy, and I had friends in my band. When I listen to the record, it feels less like a totally cohesive piece of work and more like an Uber Pool, where one friend hops in—they have no relation to the next friend—then they hop out, and then the next one hops in.

I wanted community around me when I was releasing music—I wanted my friends there, and I wanted my friends invested. That was absolutely my armor. The most stressful, maddening time to make music is once the singles start rolling out. You have that weird rollercoaster several months before the record actually comes out, and you’re thinking about press and tour. Because I had accumulated this group of people, I felt very, very held by my peers during that time. I didn’t have to think so much about labels and PR and whatever—I could just call my friend who I worked on the song with and be like, “It’s out, huh?” It made it fun.

When you mounted this aggressive pursuit of collaborators, how did you go about it?

It was a very concerted, conceptual effort. For my band, none of them played instruments before we started playing together. Creating the Splash Band was my attempt at industry-plant aesthetics: what it looks like to be a band that’s been handpicked not necessarily based on skill, but on chemistry, looks, and style. I wanted that artificial element to exist on the surface, but then have the music actually mean something. My initial idea was, “It’s going to be a stage show where I’m actually singing, but you’re all miming. I want you in the pictures, but I want this to be fully just a show—I want it to be something different.” But once we got together to rehearse, it made sense for them to just learn the song, and suddenly we were just rehearsing for real, for real.

I’m not a trained musician—I’m self-taught. I’ve often felt like an imposter because I don’t have the lingo that a lot of musicians have. I consciously brought in these people that didn’t have that vocabulary so that I could feel more comfortable, and we could all feel comfortable. Because I wasn’t surrounded by session or touring musicians, we were all using the same onomatopoeia to get where we needed to go.

How do you define success and failure in your work?

It’s always been the validation of my art practice over financial things. I want to be admired by artists that I admire. Success, for me, is depth. Failure is phoning it in, and making something that you don’t totally believe in. Granted, I cringe when I hear some of my older music—even if I did really believe in it. But that’s where the work you make means different things to you at different points in your life. I don’t hate any of it.

The goalpost for success moves constantly. The grass is absolutely always greener for me. I’ve been doing this for a little while, and there have been times when I’ve felt gatekept from music journalism. I’ve often thought that it’s because I’m a gay guy. While there are a million horrible things that are happening in the world and it seems a bit trite, there’s still a lot of homophobia in music. As a gay musician, you kind of have to win the lottery with journalists in order to get to the next level. I talk about this a lot with my other gay-guy musician friends who experience the same thing.

This is all under this success-failure thing. Success is what I said before—having work that means something to you recognized—and failure is moral compromise.

Do you have any creative advice that took you a minute to find out for yourself?

The landscape of music is so different now than it was when I first started, as far as how to hawk your songs palatably for consumers, like TikTok dances and whatever. If this is your lifeblood, then you will continue to do it no matter what, and you can be comforted by that notion of your character. No matter what happens, or no matter what obstacles you come up against, you are a sick individual, and you will never not do this.

There’s something really liberating about that. I can’t imagine living unless I’m doing this. Sometimes I lean too much into that, and that’s when I spiral. When I’m not leaning into it in a dark way, it’s really quite nice. That’s what I needed to tell myself as a kid: just trust in your being insatiable.

Liam Benzvi recommends:

rearrange your furniture

tremor your limbs

phone your loved ones

mute your frenemies

french your exits


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Amy Rose Spiegel.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/09/musician-liam-benzvi-on-taking-risks-that-pay-off/feed/ 0 543524
Breaking down MAGA imperialism: Trump and the lower-middle class https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/breaking-down-maga-imperialism-trump-and-the-lower-middle-class/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/breaking-down-maga-imperialism-trump-and-the-lower-middle-class/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 23:00:50 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=52ceeeab6d3e024329b42fede248bf02
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/breaking-down-maga-imperialism-trump-and-the-lower-middle-class/feed/ 0 543473
‘The Goal Is to Put the Words “Iran” and “Nuclear” in the Same Sentence’: CounterSpin interview with Adam Johnson on media in war mode https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-goal-is-to-put-the-words-iran-and-nuclear-in-the-same-sentence-counterspin-interview-with-adam-johnson-on-media-in-war-mode/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-goal-is-to-put-the-words-iran-and-nuclear-in-the-same-sentence-counterspin-interview-with-adam-johnson-on-media-in-war-mode/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 20:15:54 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046377  

Janine Jackson interviewed Citations Needed‘s Adam Johnson about media in war mode for the June 27, 2025, episode of CounterSpin. This is a lightly edited transcript.

 

PBS: Pentagon lays out details about military tactics used in U.S. strikes on Iran

AP (via PBS, 6/26/25)

Janine Jackson: We are recording June 26 in medias res, but AP’s latest gives us enough to start:

Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth and Gen. Dan Caine doubled down Thursday on how destructive the US attacks had been on Iran’s nuclear facilities, and described in detail the study and planning behind the bombing mission, but they stopped short of detailing how much the attack set back the nation’s nuclear program.

We hear also Trump saying, “I’m not happy with Israel because they have broken the ceasefire” that he, we hear, created, adding that Iran and Israel have been fighting “so long and so hard that they don’t know what the fuck they’re doing.” I can’t say that word on the radio, says the FCC, but Trump can say it because—well, you and I don’t know.

The US went to war with Iran last week without congressional, much less public, approval. But most of us only know what we know through corporate news media, and that’s a problem.

Joining us now is Adam Johnson, media analyst and co-host of the podcast Citations Needed. He’s coauthor, with In These Times contributing editor Sarah Lazare, of a couple of recent relevant pieces in In These Times. And he joins us now by phone from Illinois. Welcome back to CounterSpin, Adam Johnson.

Adam Johnson: Thank you for having me.

JJ: So we don’t know what’s going to happen with Iran. Maybe we’re not at war, that would be great, but sadly, we do know what corporate news media will do, because they’ll do what they do. We saw them pull out the playbook, scratch out Iraq, Afghanistan, Eastasia, and write in Iran; or maybe scratch down deeper to get to Iran 1953, and here we go again. It’s many things, but one thing for sure that it is is predictable.

Column: Lawmakers and Pundits Speed Run Iraq WMDs-Level Lies About Iran

Column (6/22/25)

AJ: So the primary thing that the news media keep doing, pundits and reporters alike, specifically Jake Tapper at CNN, which we wrote about, is they keep saying “nuclear weapons program.” And the goal, generally, is just to put the words “Iran” and “nuclear” in the same sentence, over and over and over again.

The public will largely fill in the blanks, and the media make no effort to even really point out that they, in fact, don’t have a nuclear weapon, or a nuclear weapons program, which is a really important piece of context to know, but it’s almost never mentioned. And this is according to the US intelligence’s own assessment, DNI, CIA, 19 other different intelligence agencies, all came to the same conclusion, and have since 2007.

However, pundits repeatedly say “nuclear weapons program,” but it’s not a nuclear weapons program. And there’s several instances, like I said, of Jake Tapper saying it, several people in Congress have said it. You could say maybe it’s a slip of the tongue by accident, but when basically no one else on CNN but Jake Tapper does it, it doesn’t really seem like an accident; it seems like he’s very clearly making an assertion. Now, if Jake Tapper has access to secret, proprietary intelligence that the CIA doesn’t have, maybe he should tell them?

And what we saw in the buildup to Trump’s bombing of Iran, which we now know was largely theatrical, thank God, was that the sort of ticking time bomb scenario, that he and JD Vance and others were going to the media with, was obviously, by their own admission, and by the New York Timesown reporting, not based on any new intelligence. It was “a reassessment of old intelligence,” I believe is how the New York Times put it. There’s another name for that: It’s called ideologically motivated bullshit.

But repeatedly, the CIA, which weirdly was pushing back on this, I guess to their credit, in the Wall Street Journal and CNN, was saying, No, no, no, no. Iran’s increased enriched uranium, but it’s just a bargaining chip. It’s a way of getting the US to come to the table so they can relieve these sanctions which have crippled their economy, the only mechanism they plausibly have to do that. But they made no decision. And even if they did make a decision to build a bomb, it would take upwards of three years.

So this is the context that is completely missing or overshadowed, and there’s going to be a poll coming out. I asked one of these progressive polling groups to add it, and I don’t know when it’s going to come out, but what I’d be curious to know is, what percentage of the American public thinks that Iran currently has a nuclear weapon? I suspect it’s probably 70-some odd, 80%.

Because, again, if you say the word “nuclear” and “Iran” over and over again, people are going to have that impression. They don’t believe—why would they have a civilian program? Even though, of course, over 30 countries have a civilian nuclear program but don’t have nuclear weapons; it’s pretty common. And that is just not part of how the public interprets it.

So the public is widely misled on this issue, which, again, gives the impression of some radical cartoon “terrorist” who’s going to blow up Tel Aviv or Manhattan.

NYT: More Powerful Than Bombs

New York Times (6/28/25)

Second to that, you have a lot of the New York Times opinion section, for example, rushing to delegitimize the government, citing a very dubious poll saying 80% of Iranians want regime change, when all other polls show the number is probably closer to 40 or 50.

And, of course, how that regime change happens is very contestable; a lot of people hate Trump, but they don’t want China to come bomb us. That’s a totally different claim, right?

You had laundering of the Foundation for Defense of Democracies, which is a pro-Israel think tank, you had laundering of their claims that Iran is now housing the head of Al Qaeda. This is all a rehash, word for word, of Iraq War stuff.

So the New York Times was doing its part, as were some other outlets. But for the most part, the White House seems to have wanted a “cool bombing” PR thing. And then what some suspect, and I don’t know, this is just idle speculation, is that Israel was suffering more damage than people knew. And unlike bombing South Lebanon or Gaza,  Iran can actually fight back, and Israel couldn’t sustain or couldn’t maintain its defense posture.

And so they basically used this as a way of getting a ceasefire that they needed anyway. But not by lack of trying on the part of the Washington Post, which actually called for Trump to keep bombing Iran in their editorial board.

NYT: NYT Gave Green Light to Trump’s Iran Attack by Treating It as a Question of When

FAIR.org (6/23/25)

JJ: There are so many questions that are under the table in this conversation, which is what makes me so upset with media. Media pretend they’re posing questions, and so we’re supposed to imagine that they’ve considered them deeply, but to just draw us back to basics: If the question is, “Should the US bomb Iran?” well, the answer is no, because that’s an overt violation of domestic and international law. The Constitution forbids it, the War Powers Resolution forbids it. But for corporate media, it’s like Bryce Greene just wrote for FAIR.org, the New York Times editorial board says, “America Must Not Rush Into a War Against Iran.” Of course we can do it, but let’s keep it cute, right? These are illegal actions.

AJ: They did the exact same thing in Iraq on March 2003. They published “No War With Iraq,” But if you read it, it says no war until you let the weapons inspectors do their job.

And then in the month prior, they published an editorial in February 2003, saying if Saddam Hussein doesn’t hand over his biological and chemical weapons, that the US has to use military force. Now that’s an argument for war, because of course Saddam Hussein didn’t have biological and chemical weapons.

JJ: So he can’t show them.

NYT: Iran Is Breaking Rules on Nuclear Activity, U.N. Watchdog Says

New York Times (6/12/25)

AJ: So, yeah, this is the scope of debate. The scope of debate is not, “Is it justified or moral? Why is Israel not a member of the Non-Proliferation Treaty? Why do they not have IAEA inspectors?” There’s this kind of faux-liberal world order narrative.

And that’s why the IAEA report was so powerful. It was a 19 to 16 vote, it was almost along party lines, kind of pro-US/Israel, pro-Russia/pro-China.

And then, quickly, the head of the IAEA says, “Oh, no, no, don’t interpret this as us saying that in any way Iran has made a decision or is somehow accelerating an actual nuclear program.” But that’s not how it was interpreted. Like the New York Times, which had it as a head story the day Israel started bombing Iran, to give it this veneer of liberal rules enforcement, which is obviously absurd, because Israel is not subject to any of these rules. It has an estimated 100 to 300 nukes.

So the scope of debate in these editorials and these opinion sections is not “Do we have any legitimacy to be bombing Iran?” but, “Is bombing Iran the best way to stop them from enriching uranium?” which, again, is entirely within their rights under international law. They have a right to a civilian nuclear program, like any other country does.

JJ: And this is the implicit undergirding of corporate media’s debate, that some countries are “good,” and they can have world-destroying weapons—declared, undeclared, whatever. And some countries are, as Van Jones put it on CNN, “not normal.” Because, if we are looking for “normal,” we got Donald Trump! We got masked agents abducting people off the street…

Adam Johnson

Adam Johnson: “The scope of debate…is not ‘Do we have any legitimacy to be bombing Iran?’ but ‘Is bombing Iran the best way to stop them from enriching uranium?’”

AJ: And we have the US and Israel openly operating a mass starvation campaign through human genocide, not even euphemism. So I guess this is what normal countries do. They have a daily ritual killing of scores, sometimes hundreds of Palestinians that are desperately lining up for grains of rice and wheat. That’s what normal countries do.

And, again, it’s very weird. There’s this zombie liberal “rules-based order” framing that is still going on, despite the fact that there’s an unfolding genocide that’s lost all pretense of international law. And so there’s this “Oh, the US has to be a policeman and police the world” faux-liberal framework that Trump doesn’t take seriously, Netanyahu doesn’t take seriously, but the media, especially the kind of prestige editorial pages and opinion pages, the New York Times and Washington Post, have to maintain that this is still a thing.

And, of course, people like Van Jones and Jake Tapper at CNN, this idea that there’s normal countries, there’s the goodies and then there’s the baddies. And so even though the goody countries are carrying out this almost cartoon evil, completely removing a people in whole or in part from Earth, and an actual explicit starvation campaign, not even hiding it—that’s what they’re calling it; it’s very weird.

In 2003, when they did this, there was a little more kind of post–Cold War credibility, and now there’s zero. And it’s very strange to watch the vestiges of that framework still go on, regardless of the new facts, and the fact that the majority of Americans think that there’s a genocide going on. No one outside of the Washington Post editorial board and the New York Times editorial board buys any of this shit.

JJ: Exactly. And just, finally, when you try to intervene, you find yourself making arguments at a level that you don’t accept. Like, “Well, they shouldn’t attack Iran’s nuclear capacities, nuclear facilities.” They said “nuclear weapons,” but then they can suck weapons out of it, and they know that it’s still going to be read the same way.

AJ: Yeah, it’s implied.

JJ: And then you also want to say, “Well wait, there’s no evidence of Iran having weaponry.” And then you want to say, “Well, Iran’s allowed to have nuclear weaponry.” And then you have to say, “If we acknowledged Israel’s nuclear weaponry, we wouldn’t legally be allowed to arm them.” So there’s all of these unspoken things, and yet, to silence them is the price of admission to get into “serious people conversation.” And that’s obviously why a lot of people clock out of elite media, because the price of admission is too high.

AJ: It is just not credible, to sit there and talk about international law; you have to have some kind of ostensibly high-minded liberal reason why you’re bombing a country. It’s just not credible, with what we’ve seen over the last two years. It’s very strange. And there’s a kind of think tank/media nexus that has to maintain this fiction, and watching them talk about Iran in such a way that was, again, every kind of terrorist cartoon, every “war on terror” framing, ticking time bomb…. Again, it doesn’t have to make any sense. It’s supposed to just be vaguely racist and vaguely feels true.

But the question in a lot of these panels was like, “What’s the best way to overthrow the regime?” You’d have a liberal on being like, “Well, we need to do the kind of meddling NED stuff and promote groups and this and that, and maybe even arm some ethnic minority groups, and maybe some Kurdish rebels.” And they’re openly just discussing how you overthrow a government.

It’s like, well, OK, so you see them as being illegitimate, can you just provide a list of the legitimate and illegitimate governments for us, and then we can figure out how the US is supposed to take out all the illegitimate ones? The whole thing is so casually chauvinist and casually imperial, they don’t even think about what they’re doing.

JJ: Exactly. Well, where do you see hope, as you are still contributing to media? You believe in journalism; where do you see daylight?

AJ: You know, I don’t. I think social media helps in some ways. Obviously I think it democratized how people receive news coming out of Gaza, but even that’s been manipulated. They see social media CEOs get dragged in front of Congress, and they get disciplined under the auspices of fighting polarization or hate speech or fake news, but it’s all to prevent media that doesn’t fall within that national security directive, quite explicitly.

So I don’t know. I think those algorithms are easily manipulated. I think that the ways in which, even though very few people actually read the New York Times editorial board or watch the Sunday shows, but the ways in which those ideological, agenda-setting institutions still manage to trickle down, and promote seriousness and the concept of seriousness and what is serious and what isn’t, is still very effective. And I don’t really see that changing anytime soon.

JJ: Corporate news media are so many steps removed from human understanding, but they convey so powerfully the air that this is how smart people think. And you can think differently, but that will make you marginal. And even critics are stuck at, like, “don’t drop bombs.” And it becomes this very stale, rehearsed conversation, and we already know where it leads.

And what corporate media won’t do is show the vigor and the work and the intelligence of diplomacy. Media could make peacemaking a heroic effort. Kristi Noem could cosplay as a negotiator. They could sell a different story if they wanted to, is my feeling. So I don’t feel like journalism per se is broken. I feel like it’s being mal-used.

Joy Reid (with Jamie Metzl) on CNN

Joy Reid (with Jamie Metzl) on CNN (6/25/25)

AJ: Yeah, I think to the extent to which they have done that, there’s been people saying, “Oh, the Obama deal was working.” And that’s true to an extent, but the Obama deal was still predicated on a totally arbitrary and unfair sanctions regime that is not applied to other countries. But it is correct that it was working, I mean, if one assumes that “working” is Iran not having enriched uranium. So there were some people saying that.

And Joy-Ann Reid I would like to highlight as someone who did a good job pushing back on a lot of the stuff on CNN. She was fired because of her reporting on Gaza at MSNBC. But she’s reappeared as a pundit on CNN to, I guess, play devil’s advocate, as it were. And she’s done a tremendous job, actually, going on CNN and punching down these idiots. That was kind of nice to see. It’s very rare, though. Who knows if they’ll ask her back after that.

But the debate is like, “how much should we sanction Iran?” on the far left end of the spectrum. The other end of the spectrum is “should we go for regime change and kill hundreds of thousands of people?” Instead of saying, well, OK, if we do believe in these high-minded liberal concepts of an international rules-based order, then why don’t we go back to the drawing table and come up with rules, and actually apply them equally? Come up with a system where the US allies and US client states and to a great extent the US—which of course doesn’t sign a bunch of different treaties, cluster munitions, the ICC, the International Criminal Court—why don’t we come up with an actual rules-based order, instead of just whatever the US State Department and its buddies in Tel Aviv and Riyadh think?

That would be something that would maybe be worth pursuing, but it’s not. It’s this kind of weird, zombie, fake-consistent order, where if you’re deemed as being hostile to US and Israeli and Saudi security architecture in the Middle East, you are seen as per se ontologically evil, and in urgent need of disciplining, and in urgent need of either regime change or bombing or crippling sanctions that ruin your economy.

And that’s just taken for granted. And this is not particularly liberal or very thoughtful or very worldly. It’s knee jerk. It’s chauvinist. It’s obviously oftentimes racist, and that’s what narrows the debate. There’s no sense that we should apply any of these standards to any other country.

JJ: All right then. Well, we’ll end there for now. We’ve been speaking with media analyst Adam Johnson. He’s co-host, with Nima Shirazi, of the podcast Citations Needed. His substack is called the Column, and his work on Iran and other issues, co-authored with Sarah Lazare, can be found at InTheseTimes.com. Thank you so much, Adam Johnson, for joining us this week on CounterSpin.

AJ: Thank you.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Janine Jackson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-goal-is-to-put-the-words-iran-and-nuclear-in-the-same-sentence-counterspin-interview-with-adam-johnson-on-media-in-war-mode/feed/ 0 543448
How Solitary Confinement Kills https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/how-solitary-confinement-kills/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/how-solitary-confinement-kills/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 18:51:50 +0000 https://progressive.org/magazine/how-solitary-confinement-kills-quandt-20250708/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Katie Rose Quandt.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/how-solitary-confinement-kills/feed/ 0 543440
Thes vets swore to defend the Constitution against all enemies—including Donald Trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/thes-vets-swore-to-defend-the-constitution-against-all-enemies-including-donald-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/thes-vets-swore-to-defend-the-constitution-against-all-enemies-including-donald-trump/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 18:18:36 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335320 Protestors including veterans and military families gather at the U.S. Supreme Court to protest the upcoming parade for the Army’s 250th anniversary, which falls on President Donald Trump's birthday, on June 13, 2025 in Washington, DC. Photo by Leigh Vogel/Getty Images for About Face: Veterans Against the War“We need to unite across the spectrum to push back. Veterans like us need to continue to speak out, so that we can motivate other veterans to speak out, and also show them the hypocrisy of this administration.”]]> Protestors including veterans and military families gather at the U.S. Supreme Court to protest the upcoming parade for the Army’s 250th anniversary, which falls on President Donald Trump's birthday, on June 13, 2025 in Washington, DC. Photo by Leigh Vogel/Getty Images for About Face: Veterans Against the War

On June 13, military veterans and their families and supporters protested in front of the US Supreme Court in Washington, DC, demanding that taxpayer dollars for Donald Trump’s ill-fated military parade and decision to send troops to Los Angeles should be used for housing, healthcare, food, and taking care of veterans. Around 60 demonstrators were arrested by Capitol police. In this episode of The Marc Steiner Show, Marc speaks with veterans Michael T. McPhearson, Kevin Benderman, and Amber Mathwig, two of whom were arrested on June 13, about the duty they feel to oppose the Trump admistration’s actions and the vital role veterans have to play in the larger fight against the Trump agenda.

Guests:

  • Michael T. McPhearson enlisted in the US Army Reserve while in high school at age 17 in 1981. A distinguished military graduate, McPhearson received an ROTC commission from Campbell University. He served five years on active duty as a field artillery officer in the 24th Mechanized Infantry Division during Operation Desert Shield/Storm (the Gulf War). McPhearson separated from the US Army as a Captain in 1992. He is a member and the Executive Director of Veterans for Peace. He lives in Seattle, Washington.
  • Kevin Benderman served in the US Army for ten years of active duty, eventually reaching the rank of E-5. He deployed to Iraq in 2003. He became opposed to the continued occupation of Iraq after his initial deployment, and he filed for conscientious objector status and was eventually court-martialed. He is a disabled veteran and lives in Augusta, Georgia. Kevin is a longtime member of About Face: Veterans Against the War.
  • Amber Mathwig enlisted in the US Navy in 2002, serving 10 years in various duty stations, including a deployment to Baghdad, Iraq, in 2008-2009 and a deployment to the Middle East in 2010-2011 on a ship that participated in the bombing of Libya.
  • These experiences, combined with what she witnessed in regards to the culture of sexism and sexual assault in the military, sparked her journey to understanding the stranglehold the military-industrial complex has on our country. In addition to being a longtime member of About Face: Veterans Against the War, she is a member of Teamsters Local 638, and an organizer who focuses on the intersection of labor and the military-industrial complex.

Additional resources:

Credits:

  • Producer: Rosette Sewali
  • Studio Production: David Hebden
  • Audio Post-Production: Stephen Frank
Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Marc Steiner:

Welcome to the Marc Steiner Show here on The Real News. I’m Marc Steiner. It’s great to have you all with us. Back in the 1960s, the war in Vietnam created serious resistance among those who served over 25,000 men and women who served in numb came back to lead the end the war movement creating Vietnam veterans against the war. And today, men and women who served in Iraq and Afghanistan are standing up to end these endless wars and to stand up for the future. So today we talk with members of about face veterans against the war. Michael T. McPherson enlisted in the US Army while he was in high school at 17 years old in 1981, he served five years on active duty as a field artillery officer. He fought during the Operation Desert Storm in the Gulf War. He left the army as a captain in 1992 and is now executive director of Veterans for Peace.

Kevin Benjamin was a sergeant in the US Army. He served for 10 years and was deployed to Iraq in 2003, his service in Iraq and the continued occupation of that nation moved him to file for conscious objector and eventually he was court-martialed. He’s a disabled veteran, a longtime member of about face veterans against the war. Amber Mathwig served 10 years in the United States Navy. She deployed to Iraq in 2008, 2009, and then in 2010, 2011, it was on a ship that participated in the bombing of Libya. Those experiences and the culture of sexism and sexual assault in the military sparked our journey to understand the stranglehold of the military industrial complex on our country as a longtime member of about faced veterans against war. And she’s a member of Teamster’s, local 6 38 organizing on the axis of labor and the military industrial complex. A new generation of veterans stand up for justice in our future. Well then welcome. It’s good to have the three of you with us. It really is.

Amber Mathwig:

Thank you, Marc.

Michael T. McPhearson:

Thank you.

Kevin Benderman:

Thank you.

Marc Steiner:

So tell us a bit about what happened at the last event you did. The two of you got arrested, right? You got arrested. Amber, am I correct? And Michael?

Amber Mathwig:

Yes,

Michael T. McPhearson:

Yes.

Marc Steiner:

Lemme start with you then, Amber, and just let’s go around the room here and talk about that event and why you were arrested. What was the purpose? What was going on?

Amber Mathwig:

Yeah. As many folks know on June 14th, there was an Army birthday parade, also billed as Trump’s birthday parade. That costs estimated somewhere between 90 to a hundred million of our taxpayer dollars. And at the same time, we were seeing lifesaving benefits being cut, social programs for veterans, military families. We’re hearing about how PCS or permit change of station changes are being impacted, all those sorts of things. And we’re also seeing a lot of our veterans who work in government services losing their jobs because supposedly there’s no money for this. And we’re also looking at a $1.01 trillion 20, 25, 26 fiscal year budget for the Department of Defense, but they don’t have money for us. And so about face Veterans for Peace joined forces, cross generational impact. It was actually really amazing. We had folks going from 17 to 87 years old. I love it. Involved in I know, right? Just so impressive. But yeah, so we went to DC to call attention to what was going on, why we at about face and Veterans for Peace, take the stances and the actions that we do. We held a press conference on the steps of the Supreme Court and then we walked over to the Capitol and sat down on the steps. There was about 67 of us who sat down calling for benefits, not bullshit.

Marc Steiner:

I like that line. Is that going to be one of your lines?

Amber Mathwig:

That is literally one of our lines. That was one of our chants. I believe it’s going on some gear. I love it. That great. For upcoming campaign, the response from Capitol Police was almost instantaneous arresting us, throwing people to the ground. One of our members barely made it, I think five feet and got his face flooded by the force that was presented against him. And just really, really kind of amazing to see how they responded. Not just that they responded, that can be expected, but how fiercely they responded to veterans, essentially walking and sitting down.

Marc Steiner:

And Michael, you were there as well.

Michael T. McPhearson:

Yes, yes, I was. So the reason I went, I’m the executive director of Veterans for Peace, so I wanted to be there with my people and I helped organize ’em there. But when you look at the person who’s president of the United States today, there’s such a hypocrisy and lawlessness and this person wants to use any opportunity that they can to uplift their profile and to try to feed his bait, their base. And I saw this parade as another one of those times where this person is using people, but this time it’s veterans, or I should say the US military and veterans by extension for some legitimacy. And he has none whatsoever. And he doesn’t care about us. He doesn’t care about the US military, he doesn’t care about veterans. So if we had decided to do an action or not, I had decided I was going to Washington DC to be visible as a person who wasn’t going to stand by and just let this guy pretend like he has some moral standing to pretend like he cares about us. I just couldn’t do that. It was just one of those moments where I had to be seen and heard.

Marc Steiner:

What were you about to say?

Kevin Benderman:

Oh, well, I was there with him in a support role. I didn’t get arrested, but I wanted to be there. And along the lines of what Michael and Amber both have said this time in our country, we need to stand together like we are as a multi-generational, multi background unified front to prevent all of this militarization of this country. I mean, we do not need to have big parades wasting millions of dollars when the points they both brought up veterans are going without education could be paid for with some of that money. I mean some housing could be paid for with some of that money. There’s plenty of things that we could use that money for other than self-gratifying or self-aggrandizing parade for a opposer.

Marc Steiner:

I want to explore something about what pushed you all to this place. As we talked about, we went on the air together, the war of my generation was Vietnam. During that period, most people were drafted, they didn’t join. Your ass has to come, is gone. But in today’s military, you all volunteered. You wanted to be in the military, you went, you wanted to serve. This country made no bones about having to face whether you faced to join the military and be in whatever war was being fought. So what switched, what changed for you all?

Kevin Benderman:

Firstly, it was my 2003 deployment to Iraq and I saw what we were doing and what they were saying on the news and telling everybody back home about how great we were and how we were helping defend democracy and protecting everyone’s rights. That’s not true. And the big turning point for me was getting over there and learning that hey, these are just normal everyday people that are trying to get by in a situation that they had nothing to do with creating. And they were really, I believe they were tired of the Saddam Hussein and the US too, playing tug of war with their country and their lives. So meeting some of the people that I did when I was there, Mr. Sad Doula was a school teacher of a girl school. And there was this young kid that lived in that town called Conan where we were set for a while. And I met him when we were in the town once and he came up to me wanting to sell us sodas and bring his cookies and stuff like that. And just realizing that most of the people there were just normal everyday human beings trying to earn a living and take care of their families the best way they could. And I realized that what we were doing was not helping them in the least. And so I couldn’t continue to take part in that after my first deployment to Iraq in 2003.

Marc Steiner:

So to go co, which is conscious of objector while you’re in the military, really sets you up for some attacks. I mean, it’s not something that they take lightly.

Kevin Benderman:

Well, yeah, I mean they really put me through the wringer over it because I mean, I was a NCO and I was a little bit older than most of the people that I was 40 years old at the time when I filed for CEO. And that was one of their sticking points being an NCO. They were like, we can’t let him do this. We have to set the example for everybody else who may be thinking of doing this. I heard that said, but it wasn’t in the official paperwork, but that was the tone they set when I decided to file for CO so I wouldn’t have to go back over there and continue to destroy and hurt people that had nothing to do with hurting us.

Marc Steiner:

That’s amazing. That’s a story in itself, Amber. And what was your turning point?

Amber Mathwig:

I grew up in rural Minnesota, very small town just quintessentially small town USA where honoring veterans and their sacrifices is pretty normal. While people are also either ignoring or being ignorant of what US policy overseas, what the military has actually done, that’s just kind of the norm. And so I was compelled to join the military by September 11th, 2001. And I say that I was compelled by the rhetoric of we have to protect ourselves. It always feels weird to me because I definitely didn’t have a hatred of Muslims. I had a weird little bit more understanding of some of the history, but apparently not enough because I chose to join the military and I joined in 2002 and it was just an absolutely hellacious 10 years. When I deployed to beg that Iraq for an administrative position in 2008, 2009, I was seeing the stuff on paper that Kevin’s talking about and I’m just like, what is our purpose here? And that would’ve been at six years, six and seven years at that point. And then in 2011 I was on a ship deployment, my ship aided in bombing Libya. And at the same time on that deployment, I was just seeing an intense amount of sexism, the way that people talked about sexual assault, people who had been victimized by gender discrimination and all those sorts of things. And that was actually kind of my impetus to start understanding the military.

Why can’t women succeed in the military? Why is sexual assault misogyny, all of that so rampant? And if you just read far enough that that is all essential to the military industrial complex itself, you have to be able to dehumanize and hold this hierarchy over the people right next to you because it then makes it easier to do it to people who have already been demonized as the other and our enemy. Once I started really exploring that as a way to heal myself, it just quickly became the next step of we actually have to address the military industrial complex as a whole.

Marc Steiner:

Michael?

Michael T. McPhearson:

Yeah, I grew up in a family that has a long history of service in the military and I grew up in Fayetteville, North Carolina where Fort Bragg is located. And while I was well aware, I know black history, my mother’s a school teacher, so she taught us quite a bit about our history. So it wasn’t like I didn’t understand that the US was problematic at home. I didn’t fully understand our foreign policy. I knew a little bit about Vietnam, but I used to think that war was a necessary evil and that going in the military was something that you did growing up in Fayetteville.

Marc Steiner:

It’s a military town, right?

Michael T. McPhearson:

Yeah, it’s a military town. So it’s super normalized and I decided that I was going to get out. I didn’t like why we were in Iraq at the time. I was married to a woman who grew up in Kuwait and her mother was there when Saddam invaded. So I had this weird kind of relationship with Saddam, but I decided I was going to get out and just doing more research and looking at the things that were happening here at home as it related to what was happening abroad, it pushed me to realize the war is more of a choice, not a necessary evil, especially US foreign policy. And after September 11, knowing that we were going to go to war in a big way, I started getting involved in the anti-war movement and I found veterans for peace.

Marc Steiner:

From your perspectives, as people who served, I think it’s important for people to hear from you what you think we’re facing right now. This parade that was thrown out to all of us, the military parade by a guy who doesn’t even know what the military is and the dangers we face in terms of pushing the wars that we’re pushing at this moment for the future of our country and for the future of the world. So what role do you all play as veterans in that? Do you fight against that and what do you have to say to the people of America about that?

Kevin Benderman:

Okay. I would say that based on our experiences, I mean 10 years, Michael was in for a while and I believe, how many years were you in Michael?

Michael T. McPhearson:

I’m active duty and reserve 11,

Kevin Benderman:

11 years. So you’re looking at 30 years of experience, both in combat time and peace time.

You cannot discount what we can tell the young people that are facing these issues that we see today and how it affects them and that peace would be a much better way for them to live their lives and not bring violence and destruction to other people who are just trying to live their lives and make a living. So I believe that we have valuable insights that they can listen to. And if they have a moral conflict, there are resources that we have available that we will put out so they can reach out to the people. And if they are morally conflicted about any illegal orders or any orders at all, that conflict with their conscience, we want to be able to help them achieve their goals and not be living the same nightmare that we all live when we know that all those resources can be better used for education, housing, food, anything but more destruction and harm to other people.

Marc Steiner:

Michael, where do you then take this struggle? Where does it go? How do you make this fight?

Michael T. McPhearson:

Well, let me say in 2003, I went back to Iraq as part of a peace delegation. Yeah, it was late 2003. So we had just really invaded a rock. And what Kevin was saying earlier about people being regular people, not that different from us. I mean they speak a different language and they might eat different foods pretty much other than that, they’re the same. And I really saw that because they were so kind to me. They asked me to come into their homes and give me tea and fed me while we were invading. And I say we as I’m a US citizen, so our country was invading their country and they were treating me well. Yes, they were treating me very well. So the reason I bring that up is because I want to help people understand that the interests that they claim that we’re defending is not for regular people and that the wars that we’re conducting we’re killing people who are just like us, who don’t have much choice in the matter, and we shouldn’t participate in that. We need to figure out ways to build peace rather than war. And then you asked about this moment here at home.

Yes. We have a person who’s basically authoritarian, who only uses the law when it’s works for him and his people. And then when it doesn’t, he ignores it. He took the same oath that we took to defend the constitution. This is where the veteran part gets in and he’s not alright. He’s abusing the constitution. So I just ask service members and regular citizens to think about what does that mean? We don’t have to agree politically, but at the same time we understand that the constitution has meaning. It has lot to do with the condemn of nation that we are. So if we really believe in those things, we have to look at what’s happening in our country today and push back on that. There’s nothing about us than any more special than anybody if we can’t adhere to those basic principles. The only thing that makes us different than any other place is those basic principles.

Marc Steiner:

So as veterans, as people who serve in the militaries for this country, it’s all wars. How do you see the struggle for change really happening and the role that you have to play? I’m going to let you go, Embry. You got it. I don’t have to say more.

Amber Mathwig:

Speaking of sometimes we disagree, I’m going to disagree with just one teeny thing that Kevin said, which is that we have not had any peace time before the Civil War, the United States Army was being utilized to commit genocide against the indigenous people of this land that continued after the civil War. And then, let’s see, I believe 1898 is when we started our wars of imperialism against other countries. Even when we’re not in an active world war, we are engaging in destruction of other people’s countries in land in order to get profit. We don’t get that education in our schools. And so I know we were going to mention our campaign coming up, but some of the apparatus of the campaign will be engaging our communities in this education about what were some of these wars or invasions or conquests or we need to go defend women and L-G-B-T-Q people in another country. And it really comes down to how are we defending them if we are taking away everything that is available to them to organize and fight against the systems themselves. If they don’t have food and water, they can’t spend their time worrying about the safety of a queer person in their community because they are struggling to have their most basic needs met. And I think that is one of the things that I really, really want service members to be aware of when you’re thinking about, oh, I’m joining to go bring democracy abroad. We don’t even have democracy here.

And that the other thing is that when we as military members and veterans are out fighting for our benefits, we have to understand that those benefits were only guaranteed to us if we took a little part of ourselves away that pulled us to act humane and with empathy towards other people. And so getting housing, healthcare, we shouldn’t have to kill in order to get those, those should just be guaranteed as part of our society. So you see, Kevin has the feed, the people, not the war machine. I have healthcare, not warfare. Michael’s calling for a ceasefire now because these are all things that we care about well beyond our own VA and military benefit.

Marc Steiner:

So as we kind of wind down, I want to see where three of you think as veterans where historical goes. Now two of you who have been arrested on the last action and you got more things coming up. So talk a bit about what your next steps are, where you take this struggle, where you take this battle and where do you see it going?

Kevin Benderman:

I see it as getting information out to a new generation of service members, whether they be active duty, national guard or reserves, that there are things available to them if they feel that their moral conscience being, they are violating that conscience. And so there are things available to them where they can use in a legal manner in order to not have to participate in the destruction of innocent people. And I can’t emphasize that enough. I mean the people that I met in Iraq, the majority of them, the feeling that I got from them is like they were tired of Saddam Hussein, that they were tired of the United States playing tug of war with them and their lives and their country because we had been involved in them since at least 1983. They were sick of it. And I think we need to look at the human aspect of it. Everybody’s over there, they have a family, they’re trying to make a living and they want to live in peace just like you and I do right here at home. And I think we should be able to respect that and not force any other actions on people that they don’t want to participate in.

Marc Steiner:

Well said. What are your closing thoughts on this, Michael?

Michael T. McPhearson:

Ask Google, how many years has the US been at peace? And it says 17 out of 17 out of 204 9.

Marc Steiner:

That is a perspective. I mean, think about that.

Michael T. McPhearson:

Yeah, so if you believe there’s no years or only 17 years that both of them say a lot, either 249 years, 17 years that the US has not been at war. So just take that as you will. So there’s at least two things happening, at least from my perspective, that need to be dealt with. There’s peace being anti-war, but there’s also what’s happening here in this country right now when it comes to this authoritarian surge and movement towards fascism. Okay, I’m concerned about both of them. So here at home, people on the so-called left, whatever it is,

Marc Steiner:

Whatever that is

Michael T. McPhearson:

Yeah, whatever that is, I need to unite across that spectrum because the right whatever that is has united and they’re not distinguishing between any of us. So we need to unite across the spectrum to push back. Veterans like us need to continue to speak out so that we can motivate other veterans to speak out and also show them the hypocrisy of this administration. And then particularly white people need to be reaching out to the right to that side because white people overwhelmingly voted for Trump. Many people of color did. Black people overwhelmingly did not vote for him because we understood that this is white supremacy rising using fascism and authoritarianism. So if we want to really break what is happening here in the United States of America at this moment, then white people have to talk to other white people and help them figure out how to change so that we can deal with the issues many of them are upset about when it comes to not having a job, when it comes to opioids, when it comes to all the things that impact their life. But they got to let go of this white supremacy idea in order for us really to be able to change that. Then the other thing is war itself. How are people going to think about peace abroad when in their own communities they’re not seeing peace? So we have to work here at home to help people find peaceful ways to solve problems here at home, and then people might be able to have a better vision of peace abroad.

Marc Steiner:

A closing thought from you in a few minutes. We have,

Amber Mathwig:

Yeah, I am white people. I come from a community that at one point in my lifetime was almost 100% white rural, voted 70% for Trump in this last election, and even with a lockdown two weekends ago because a political assassin could not be found and was somewhere in the neighborhood of my hometown.

People are not talking about the violent rhetoric that is always on display either through signs or just through the belief systems that people have. It is a very strong Trump community as most of Minnesota is. I live in the suburbs where we’re pretty heavy blue transitioning into purple about where I’m at. But I think that you brought up the arrest. I have no fear of being arrested if I get charges. Yeah, it really sucked. Don’t get that twisted. It really sucked and we were absolutely treated harshly on purpose, but it is a tool of the state to try to instill fear into the people, to not stand up for what we need and deserve from our communities and from our government. So I have no fears of getting arrested. I’m union, so I can’t get fired for being arrested for stuff that I did off duty or off work off duty.

See how militarized I get sometimes the second I get with my people and that, yeah, Michael is absolutely right. White people have just such a tremendous role to play in continuing to be around and talk with fellow white people into, I don’t want to say necessarily meet them where they’re at because that can be really frustrating, but just to be direct, why do you believe that way? How do you think this is making things better? One thing I’m rolling over in my brain a lot lately is like, oh, you don’t pay attention to politics or what’s going on, but then you go vote and you don’t pay attention to your impact. How can you go out and vote for Trump and not have any clue what the impact on other people like the people that you work next to, live next to are? And I don’t want to say that I’m a pariah in my hometown because a lot of people are actually really supportive of how I speak out, but it’s just the fact that that support is still kind of quiet

Is part of the problem, is that they have a legitimate fear around how they will be treated in the communities. And I think white people just, you need to give that up. You have no fear in being racist or misogynistic. Why are you afraid to speak up in support of others? And so that’s where I’m at, just when folks are really trying to figure out what to do when service members, active duty National Guard are trying to figure out, can I disobey this order? Can I refuse to do X? And we have resources for that by the way, just go with the fear. Because once you get over that fear, you’re going to feel so much better about it in the end. You may also need some therapy, but you will be better off once you confront those fears.

Marc Steiner:

So this has been a great conversation and I want to thank you all as well for standing up and doing what you’ve done in your lives and standing up to expose what’s going on to really fight for the kind of freedom and democracy we deserve. So thank all three of you so much. It’s been really great to have you here. Michael May Ferrison and Kevin Benjamin Amber Wig. Thank you all so much. Let’s stay in touch. I want to hear more about what veterans are doing and as they struggles unfold, I want to hear more about what you all are doing for standing up for democracy in a different way. So thank you all so much.

Amber Mathwig:

Yeah, thank you, Marc. We’d love to come back on and talk more about our campaign after it launches on July 4th.

Marc Steiner:

July 4th is the date. Alright, thank you. Thank you all. Thank you. Once again, thank you to Michael T. McPherson, Amber Math Week, and Kevin Beman for joining us today. And thanks for David Hebdon for running and editing our program and producer Tali for making it all happen behind the scenes. And everyone here at The Real News making this show possible. Please let me know what you thought about, what you heard today, what you’d like us to cover. Just write to me at MS s@therealnews.com and I’ll get right back to you. Once again, thank you to our guests for joining us today. We’ll be linking to Veterans for Peace. You can check out all their work at veteransforpeace.org. So for the crew here at the Real News, I’m Marc Steiner. Stay involved. Keep listening, and take care.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Marc Steiner.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/thes-vets-swore-to-defend-the-constitution-against-all-enemies-including-donald-trump/feed/ 0 543442
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 8, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-8-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-8-2025/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=91a843bb2be03a81b1df96682f0f8378 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 8, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-8-2025/feed/ 0 543478
Zohran Mamdani and the pro-Palestine vibe shift https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/zohran-mamdani-and-the-pro-palestine-vibe-shift/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/zohran-mamdani-and-the-pro-palestine-vibe-shift/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 17:58:04 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6074f3dbf63fe1680dd894a36769fdd7
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/zohran-mamdani-and-the-pro-palestine-vibe-shift/feed/ 0 543435
‘Our Hands Are Loud’: Documentary Creates a New Visual Language to Tell a Trailblazer’s Story https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/our-hands-are-loud-documentary-creates-a-new-visual-language-to-tell-a-trailblazers-story/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/our-hands-are-loud-documentary-creates-a-new-visual-language-to-tell-a-trailblazers-story/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 17:41:27 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/our-hands-are-loud-documentary-creates-a-new-visual-language-minton-20250708/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Matt Minton.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/our-hands-are-loud-documentary-creates-a-new-visual-language-to-tell-a-trailblazers-story/feed/ 0 543424
The Trump Administration Is Refusing to Enforce an Air Travel Disability Regulation https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-trump-administration-is-refusing-to-enforce-an-air-travel-disability-regulation/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-trump-administration-is-refusing-to-enforce-an-air-travel-disability-regulation/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 17:40:05 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/the-trump-administration-is-refusing-to-enforce-an-air-travel-disability-regulation-ervin-20250708/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Mike Ervin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-trump-administration-is-refusing-to-enforce-an-air-travel-disability-regulation/feed/ 0 543426
Big Beautiful Bunco – The Grayzone live https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/big-beautiful-bunco-the-grayzone-live/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/big-beautiful-bunco-the-grayzone-live/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 17:16:50 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a9afc5f2dc7b2263a0564c19704fe1fa
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/big-beautiful-bunco-the-grayzone-live/feed/ 0 543429
The Holocaust in Gaza Enabled by Corporate and Public Service Media https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-holocaust-in-gaza-enabled-by-corporate-and-public-service-media/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-holocaust-in-gaza-enabled-by-corporate-and-public-service-media/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 16:21:31 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46696 By Emil Marmol On October 7, 2023, Hamas and other resistance groups launched an attack that resulted in the deaths of approximately 741 Israeli civilians, 68 foreign nationals, and 314 members of Israeli military forces, with approximately an additional 252 people taken to Gaza as hostages. This, according to the…

The post The Holocaust in Gaza Enabled by Corporate and Public Service Media appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/the-holocaust-in-gaza-enabled-by-corporate-and-public-service-media/feed/ 0 543420
What Is the Trump Doctrine? John Bellamy Foster on U.S. Foreign Policy & the "New MAGA Imperialism" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/what-is-the-trump-doctrine-john-bellamy-foster-on-u-s-foreign-policy-the-new-maga-imperialism-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/what-is-the-trump-doctrine-john-bellamy-foster-on-u-s-foreign-policy-the-new-maga-imperialism-2/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 14:51:36 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=f446eabad82bca0a5f319d29c8283552
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/what-is-the-trump-doctrine-john-bellamy-foster-on-u-s-foreign-policy-the-new-maga-imperialism-2/feed/ 0 543409
Gunfire Communication with “Zombie Hordes”: The Gaza Humanitarian Foundation and the IDF https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/gunfire-communication-with-zombie-hordes-the-gaza-humanitarian-foundation-and-the-idf/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/gunfire-communication-with-zombie-hordes-the-gaza-humanitarian-foundation-and-the-idf/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 13:00:18 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159740 It’s made to order. First, eliminate the aid system after creating circumstances of enormous suffering. Then, kill, starve, vanquish, and displace those in need of that aid.  Finally, give the pretence of humanity by ensuring some aid to those whose suffering you created in the first place. As things stand, the system of aid distribution […]

The post Gunfire Communication with “Zombie Hordes”: The Gaza Humanitarian Foundation and the IDF first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
It’s made to order. First, eliminate the aid system after creating circumstances of enormous suffering. Then, kill, starve, vanquish, and displace those in need of that aid.  Finally, give the pretence of humanity by ensuring some aid to those whose suffering you created in the first place.

As things stand, the system of aid distribution in the Gaza Strip is intended to cause suffering and destruction to recipients. Since May 26, the Gaza Humanitarian Foundation, an opaque entity with Israeli and US backing, has run the distribution of parcels from a mere four points, a grim joke given the four hundred or so outlets previously operated by the United Nations Palestinian relief agency. The entire process of seeking aid has been heavily rationed and militarized, with Israeli troops and private contractors exercising murderous force with impunity. Opening times are not set, rendering the journey to the distribution points even more precarious. When they do open, they do so for short spells.

Haaretz has run reports quoting soldiers of the Israeli Defense Forces claiming to have orders to deliberately fire upon unarmed crowds on their perilous journey to the food sites. In a June 27 piece, the paper quotes a soldier describing the distribution sites as “a killing field.”  Where he was stationed, “between one and five people were killed every day.” Those seeking aid were “treated like a hostile force – no crowd-control measures, no tear gas – just live fire with everything imaginable: heavy machine guns, grenade launchers, mortars. Then, once the center opens, the shooting stops, and they can approach. Our form of communication is gunfire.”

The interviewed soldier could recall no instance of return fire. “There’s no enemy, no weapons.” IDF officers also told the paper that the GHF’s operations had provided a convenient distraction for continuing operations in Gaza, which had been turned into a “backyard”, notably during Israel’s war with Iran. In the words of a reservist, the Strip had “become a place with its own set of rules. The loss of human life means nothing. It’s not even an ‘unfortunate incident’ like they used to say.”

An IDF officer involved in overseeing security at one of the distribution centers was full of understatement. “Working with a civilian population when your only means of interaction is opening fire – that’s highly problematic, to say the least.” It was “neither ethically nor morally acceptable for people to have to reach, or fail to reach, a [humanitarian zone] under tank fire, snipers and mortar shells.”

Much the same story can be found with the security contractors, those enthusiastic killers following in the footsteps of predecessors who treat international humanitarian law as inconvenient if not altogether irrelevant. Countries such as Afghanistan and Iraq can attest to the blood-soiled record of private military contractors, with the killing of 14 Iraqi civilians in Baghdad city’s Nisour Square by Blackwater USA employees in September 2007 being but one spectacular example. While those employees faced trial and conviction in a US federal court in 2014 on an assortment of charges – among them murder, manslaughter, and attempted manslaughter – such a fate is unlikely for any of those working for the GHF.

On July 4, the BBC published the observations of a former contractor on the trigger-happy conduct of his colleagues around the food centers. In one instance, a guard opened fire on women, children, and elderly people “moving too slowly away from the site.” Another contractor, also on location, stood on the berm overlooking the exit to one of the GHF sites, firing 15 to 20 bursts of repetitive fire at the crowd. “A Palestinian man dropped to the ground motionless. And then, the other contractor who was standing there was like, ‘damn, I think you got one’. And then they laughed about it.”

The company had also failed to issue contractors any operating procedures or rules of engagement, except one: “If you feel threatened, shoot – shoot to kill and ask questions later.” No reference is made to the International Code of Conduct for Private Security Service Providers. To journey to Gaza was to go to a land unencumbered by laws and rules. “Do what you want” is the cultural norm of GHF operatives. And this stands to reason, given the reference of “team leaders” to Gazans seeking aid as “zombie hordes”.

The GHF, in time-honored fashion, has denied these allegations. Ditto the IDF, that great self-proclaimed stalwart of international law. It is, therefore, left to such contributors as Anas Baba, NPR’s producer in the Gaza Strip, to enlighten those who care to read and listen. As one of the few Palestinian journalists working for a US news outlet in the strip, his observations carry singular weight. In a recent report, Baba neatly summarised the manufactured brutality behind the seeking of aid in an enclave strangled and suffering gradual extinction. “I faced Israeli military fire, private US contractors pointing laser beams at my forehead, crowds with knives fighting for rations, and masked thieves – to get food from a group supported by the US and Israel called the Gaza Humanitarian Foundation”.

If nothing else, it is high time that the GHF scraps any pretense of being humanitarian in its title and admits to its true role: an adjutant to Israel’s program of extirpating Gaza’s Palestinian population.

The post Gunfire Communication with “Zombie Hordes”: The Gaza Humanitarian Foundation and the IDF first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/gunfire-communication-with-zombie-hordes-the-gaza-humanitarian-foundation-and-the-idf/feed/ 0 543368
What Is the Trump Doctrine? John Bellamy Foster on U.S. Foreign Policy & the “New MAGA Imperialism” https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/what-is-the-trump-doctrine-john-bellamy-foster-on-u-s-foreign-policy-the-new-maga-imperialism/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/what-is-the-trump-doctrine-john-bellamy-foster-on-u-s-foreign-policy-the-new-maga-imperialism/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 12:47:09 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=9c6daf6853a6570807d16da561c9971a Seg3 trump4

What is MAGA imperialism? Monthly Review editor John Bellamy Foster says that, despite its feints toward anti-imperialist isolationism, President Donald Trump’s foreign policy has coalesced into a “hyper-nationalist” form of populism that rejects the U.S.'s post-WWII adherence to liberal internationalism and promotes dominance over other countries via military power rather than through economic globalization. Foster explains that this “Trump doctrine is opposed to multi-ethnic empires and multi-ethnic nations,” operating under a “racial definition of foreign policy, with the notion that the United States is a white country and other ethnicities don't belong.” And while some analyses of the Trump coalition locate its base in the “white working class,” in reality this ideology is rooted in the lower middle class, which owns more property and is less opposed to the wealthy capitalist class. “If you go back to the 1930s, to Italy and Germany, it’s the same constituency that drove the fascist movement, but it’s a result of an alliance between big capital … and the lower middle class.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/what-is-the-trump-doctrine-john-bellamy-foster-on-u-s-foreign-policy-the-new-maga-imperialism/feed/ 0 543391
Utah Sen. Mike Lee Says Selling Off Public Lands Will Solve the West’s Housing Crisis. Past Sales Show Otherwise. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/utah-sen-mike-lee-says-selling-off-public-lands-will-solve-the-wests-housing-crisis-past-sales-show-otherwise/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/utah-sen-mike-lee-says-selling-off-public-lands-will-solve-the-wests-housing-crisis-past-sales-show-otherwise/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/utah-mike-lee-public-lands-sell-off by Abe Streep

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up for Dispatches, a newsletter that spotlights wrongdoing around the country, to receive our stories in your inbox every week.

On Monday, June 23, a crowd of about 2,000 people surrounded the Eldorado Hotel & Spa in Santa Fe, New Mexico, where members of President Donald Trump’s Cabinet had come for a meeting of the Western Governors’ Association. “Not for sale!” the crowd boomed. “Not one acre!” There were ranchers and writers in attendance, as well as employees of Los Alamos National Laboratory, all of whom use public land to hike, hunt and fish. Inside the hotel ballroom where the governors had gathered, Michelle Lujan Grisham, the New Mexico governor, apologized for the noise but not the message. “New Mexicans are really loud,” she said.

On the street, one sign read “Defend Public Lands,” with an image of an assault rifle. Others bore creative and bilingual profanities directed at Trump, Secretary of the Interior Doug Burgum, who oversees most of the country’s public acreage, and Sen. Mike Lee, the Republican from Utah, who on June 11 had proposed a large-scale selloff of public lands. Lee, who chairs the Senate Committee on Energy and Natural Resources, was not in Santa Fe, so the crowd focused on Burgum, who earlier that afternoon had addressed the governors about energy dominance and artificial intelligence. “Show your face!” the crowd chanted. But he had already departed the hotel through a back door. That night, a hunting group projected an image of him on the exterior wall of the hotel. “Burgled by Burgum,” it read.

In the weeks before the meeting, the possibility of selling off large swaths of public lands had seemed as likely as at any time since the Reagan administration. On June 11, Lee had introduced an amendment to the megabill Congress was debating to reconcile the national budget. The amendment mandated the sale of up to 3 million acres of land controlled by the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management, with the vast majority of proceeds going to pay for tax cuts. Although Lee had framed his measure as a solution to the West’s acute lack of affordable housing, it would have allowed developers to select the land they most desired. Under the amendment’s original language, the ultimate power to nominate parcels for sale fell to Burgum and Brooke Rollins, head of the Department of Agriculture, which oversees the U.S. Forest Service.

In the days after the Santa Fe protest, the outcry from hunting and outdoor recreation groups escalated across the West and the Senate parliamentarian ruled that Lee’s amendment violated the chamber’s rules. Republican lawmakers from Montana opposed the amendment; Burgum also distanced himself from it. (“It doesn’t matter to me at all if it’s part of this bill,” he told a reporter on June 26.)

By the time Burgum made his comments, Lee’s effort seemed doomed, and days later he announced that he was removing the amendment; public land advocates celebrated. “This win belongs to the hunters, anglers, and public landowners,” wrote Patrick Berry, the president of Backcountry Hunters and Anglers. But the celebration may have been premature. In a social media post announcing his decision, Lee indicated that he would revisit the issue: “I continue to believe the federal government owns far too much land,” he wrote. And powerful forces still support privatization. At the Santa Fe gathering, Rollins had been asked during a press conference about the effort to sell federal land. She told reporters she wasn’t familiar with the specifics of Lee’s amendment but supported his broader vision and suggested such efforts will continue regardless of the fate of the amendment. “Half of the land in the West is owned by the federal government,” said Rollins. “Is that really the right solution for the American people?”

Protestors gather outside the Eldorado Hotel & Spa in Santa Fe, New Mexico, where the Western Governors’ Association conference was held in June. (Dave Cox/Searchlight New Mexico)

The circumstances that led to Lee’s proposal continue to simmer. The American West has an acute lack of affordable and attainable housing. According to the National Low Income Housing Coalition, Colorado, with a population of 6 million, is lacking 175,000 rental units for people who earn up to 50% of area median income. New Mexico, which has one-third of Colorado’s population, is lacking 52,000 such rentals; Utah, 61,000. But nowhere is the issue as acute as in Nevada, where Las Vegas and Reno are encircled by public land. The state of 3.27 million is estimated to lack 118,000 such rentals.

The lack of housing emerged as a lever for Lee, who has sought to challenge federal control of public lands since he was first elected to the Senate in 2010. A year after winning his seat, he introduced a bill to sell a limited amount of public land, saying, “There is no critical need for the federal government to hold onto it.” In 2013, he and others in his state’s delegation wrote a letter demanding the transfer of federal lands to Utah and angrily accusing the Bureau of Land Management, which manages 245 million acres nationwide, of “obvious abuse.” And in a 2018 address at a think tank, he compared federal land managers — and people who recreate on public acreage — to feudal lords, ruling from far-off kingdoms on the coasts. He also denounced “elite publications” that advocated for the protection of public lands, and he used the language of political war to describe the conflict over federal land: “It will take years, and the fight will be brutal.” (Lee’s office did not respond to detailed questions from ProPublica.)

But this spring, Lee found support from unlikely places: the coastal elites he previously railed against seemed open to some of his ideas. The arguments in favor of privatization and development use a word of the season: abundance. Ezra Klein and Derek Thompson’s bestselling book of the same name argues that burdensome regulatory processes have crushed the American housing market. While the authors focus on increasing supply in urban areas, in April, The New York Times ran an op-ed calling for building housing on public lands. That same week, the Times Magazine, in a piece titled “Why America Should Sprawl,” framed outward growth, including through the sale of public lands, as all but inevitable. The American Enterprise Institute, a free-market think tank, has estimated that the nation could build 3 million homes by opening federal land. In December, AEI leaders advocated for federal land sales in the Las Vegas Review-Journal, promising that disposal could “usher in housing abundance and prosperity.”

When pitching his land-sale bill, Lee adopted a more moderate tone than in years past, focusing squarely on housing. On June 20, he posted on X, “This is to help American families afford a home.” On June 23: “Housing prices are crushing families.” The next day: “This land must go to American families.”

But it’s challenging to build affordable housing on public land for a host of reasons, among them the high cost of infrastructure such as water pipelines and the cumbersome bureaucratic processes involving land agencies. But a primary obstacle is the price of that land itself: When it’s sold at market rate, it’s extremely difficult for developers to create affordable homes. “High land costs alone can kill an otherwise great affordable housing project,” said Waldon Swenson, vice president of corporate affairs for Nevada HAND, which builds affordable rental housing.

In fact, past public land sales have created very little affordable housing. There’s just one prominent test case, in Nevada, where a 1998 law enables the sale of federal land at market rate in the Las Vegas Valley and at steeply discounted prices throughout the state if it’s to be used for affordable housing. Though municipalities can buy BLM land at $100 per acre to create affordable housing, the law has so far created just about 850 affordable units on 30 acres of land. By contrast, the law’s market-value mechanism has enabled the sale of more than 17,000 acres of land at an average of more than $200,000 per acre. In March, the BLM sold 42 acres for $16.6 million. Meanwhile, according to a recent analysis, rents in Clark and Washoe counties have respectively risen by 56% and 47% since 2018.

Lee’s amendment did little to address these issues and lacked any definition of affordable or attainable housing. Furthermore, it allowed private developers to nominate parcels for sale — at market rate only. “It would be an unmitigated disaster,” wrote Mark Squillace, a professor of natural resources law at the University of Colorado law school. John Leshy, a former solicitor for the Department of the Interior during the Clinton administration and an emeritus professor at the University of California College of the Law, San Francisco, said that the bill was “not a well-designed scheme to get more acres out there built with affordable houses.” Leshy, the author of “Our Common Ground: A History of America’s Public Lands,” added, “I think it is just a ploy to get your toe in the door to start selling off lots of federal land.”

New houses were going up in Henderson, Nevada, in February. A 1998 law allows the sale of federal land at market rate in the Las Vegas Valley and at deep discounts throughout the state if it’s to be used for affordable housing, which has led to the construction of some new units. (Sam Morris/Las Vegas Review-Journal/Tribune News Service/Getty Images)

Congress’ stance toward public land shifted as settlers moved westward, violently displacing tribal nations. During the homesteading era, the General Land Office — a precursor to the BLM — was tasked with disposing of federal lands to states. But in the late 19th century, states began to request that Congress set aside lands for national forests. As a condition of its statehood, in 1896 Utah relinquished any claim to ownership of “unappropriated public lands” — an acknowledgment that appears in its state Constitution. As the conservation movement took off in the early 20th century, lawmakers and presidents set aside more public land. In 1976, Congress passed the Federal Land Policy and Management Act, which codified the BLM’s role in stewarding lands and declared that they would remain public unless their sale served “the national interest.”

Lee has lamented the impact of those historic changes on Utah, where 42% of the state is BLM land, saying in a 2018 speech, “Manifest destiny had left us behind, in some respects.”

A movement in the 1970s tried to reverse those historical currents when Western ranchers and lawmakers calling themselves “Sagebrush Rebels” sought to claim federal lands for states. They found sympathetic ears in Washington, D.C.: Ronald Reagan, during a 1980 campaign stop in Salt Lake City, said, “Count me in as a rebel.” Once elected, he nominated as secretary of the Interior James Watt, an attorney who favored transfer of public lands to the states. Reagan also came to rely on an economic adviser named Steve H. Hanke, who arrived at the White House from Johns Hopkins University. Hanke was more strident about getting rid of public lands than Watt; he has written that public lands “represent a huge socialist anomaly in America’s capitalist system.”

Hanke helped drive an ambitious effort to dispose of national forests and grazing lands, and in 1982 the Interior Department announced plans to sell millions of acres — as much as 5% of the public estate — in order to reduce the national debt. Hanke later joined The Heritage Foundation, entrenching the idea of privatizing lands at the conservative think tank and predicting that Americans would come around to his way of thinking. Since then, the foundation has regularly advocated for selling public lands. (The foundation did not respond to inquiries from ProPublica.)

Lee is deeply tied into The Heritage Foundation, which he has called “a guiding light for generations.” In 2016, The Heritage Foundation suggested that Trump nominate Lee to the Supreme Court. Among Utah’s leadership, his positions on federal land are widely held. Last year, the state attorney general filed suit to the United States Supreme Court, seeking to seize 18.5 million acres of federal public land. The court declined to hear the case.

Public lands are popular, especially among hunters, hikers and off-roaders, and periodic efforts to sell them have incurred wrath. In 2017, Jason Chaffetz, the former Utah representative, retracted a disposal bill after a backlash. Last December, a survey of 500 Utah voters commissioned by the nonprofit Grand Canyon Trust found that a majority of both Democrats and Republicans supported preserving national monuments in the state. In its preelection policy recommendation known as Project 2025, The Heritage Foundation called for the privatization of everything from public education, using school-choice programs, to Medicare, by automatically enrolling patients in insurer-run plans. But it notably didn’t call for the privatization of the public estate.

Instead, Lee has recently focused the debate on affordable housing. In 2022 and 2023, Lee introduced legislation to sell Western lands called the HOUSES Act. The bill was more prescriptive than his reconciliation amendment: It only allowed states and municipalities to nominate lands for disposal, rather than developers, and it required that 85% of nominated parcels be developed as residential housing, at a minimum of four homes per acre, or as parks. But like his amendment to the reconciliation bill, Lee’s HOUSES Act lacked a definition of affordable housing, and critics suggested that it would lead to the building of mansions. In both 2022 and 2023, when Lee reintroduced the bill, it did not pass out of committee.

But it caught the attention of Kevin Corinth, then the staff director on the Joint Economic Committee, which advises Congress on financial matters. After leaving the Capitol, Corinth joined the American Enterprise Institute, which began focusing on building housing on federal lands. This March, AEI held an event with powerful developers to discuss its ideas, which it called “Homesteading 2.0.” Edward Pinto, a former Fannie Mae executive who helps oversee AEI’s housing research, said during the event that the proposal “grew out of an effort that Sen. Lee undertook with the HOUSES Act.”

AEI advocates for dense development of single-family homes, but its ultimate vision remains opaque: The group has spoken of creating unregulated “freedom cities” far from existing infrastructure, and its proposals for 3 million houses seem ambitious. Headwaters Economics, a nonprofit group in Montana, published an analysis finding that existing public land could support less than 700,000 new homes; Nicholas Irwin, the research director for the University of Nevada, Las Vegas’ Lied Center for Real Estate, said he found Headwaters’ numbers more convincing.

When I asked Pinto for a real-world example that illustrates his hopes for the West, he pointed to Summerlin, a planned community in Las Vegas, and Teravalis, a forthcoming development in Buckeye, Arizona, a rapidly expanding city at Phoenix’s edge. Both are owned by Howard Hughes Holdings, a developer based in Texas.

Housing in Summerlin is not easily attainable — its median home price approaches $700,000. Teravalis, meanwhile, was first proposed more than 20 years ago and has been beset by delays, in part due to ongoing litigation with the state, which claims that the developer has not proven that it can obtain a sufficient water supply. A spokesperson for Howard Hughes Holdings, which bought the development in 2021, wrote that the company is “working with local stakeholders around long-term water policy to support the full build out of Teravalis for more than 300,000 residents over several decades.”

Earlier this year, Pershing Square Holdings, which is controlled by the billionaire hedge fund manager Bill Ackman, purchased $900 million of stock in the company. (Ackman, a prominent supporter of Trump’s 2024 campaign, is now the executive chairman of Hughes’ board of directors. Through a spokesperson, he declined to comment for this article.)

Teravalis’ first lots sold for a steep $777,000 per acre without homes on them, and Hughes’ plans are for 2.8 dwellings per acre — less than a quarter of the figure that Pinto cited as ideal for naturally affordable housing. Hughes is currently planning a grand opening for November. The company did not say how much homes would cost, but a spokesperson wrote in a statement, “The need for new housing in the Phoenix West Valley is urgent, and Teravalis will help meet that demand.”

Edward Pinto of the American Enterprise Institute cited Teravalis, a planned community in Buckeye, Arizona, as the kind of development that could be built with sales of more public lands. (Adriana Zehbrauskas/The Washington Post/Getty Images)

When given the option, developers often pursue the profit margins of high-end housing. In 1998, Congress passed a law, the Southern Nevada Public Lands Management Act, that allows any of the state’s municipalities to request the sale of federal lands for affordable housing. (SNPLMA relies on the Department of Housing and Urban Development to define affordable housing, which it says are units within reach of those making up to 80% of the area’s median income.) Still, to date, only about 900 acres have been set aside for affordable housing projects under the law — and only 30 of those acres have been developed into homes where low-income residents can actually live.

It’s unclear why so few affordable housing projects have been built at a time when they are so desperately needed. Clark County Commissioner Marilyn Kirkpatrick attributed it to bureaucratic delays: “It’s taken a long time to get through the process with the BLM.” According to Maurice Page, executive director of the Nevada Housing Coalition, the average time the BLM takes to review projects has recently dropped — from between three and five years to one. Only at that point can a developer close a deal. Tina Frias, CEO of the Southern Nevada Home Builders Association, said such delays can be crippling.

In 2023, the BLM began selling Nevada land for affordable housing for $100 per acre. (Previous SNPLMA affordable housing sales had averaged nearly $35,000 per acre.) Still, local authorities have not requested the transfer of many parcels in recent years. According to the BLM, only three new affordable housing projects are moving toward approval.

In a statement, a spokesperson for the agency wrote, “BLM Nevada can only offer land after it has been nominated by an eligible entity and BLM has confirmed that there are no encumbrances or restrictions on the parcel. In many cases, the restrictions referenced by stakeholders originate with the nominating entities themselves.”

SNPLMA’s affordable housing mechanism is also poorly understood. Alexis Hill, the chair of Washoe County’s board of commissioners, which includes Reno, told me she didn’t know whether the affordable housing provision applied there. (It does.) When I asked Biden’s former BLM director, Tracy Stone-Manning, who now leads The Wilderness Society, whether the $100-per-acre provision was applicable statewide, she said she did not know. Squillace, the Colorado law professor, also admitted he wasn’t sure how widely the provision applied.

Steve Aichroth, the administrator of the Nevada Housing Division, acknowledged a disconnect between agencies. His office is hiring an official to work with municipalities and the BLM. “If you came back to us in about a year we’d have better answers,” he said.

In the meantime, both of the state’s Democratic senators, Jacky Rosen and Catherine Cortez Masto, have proposed legislation that would open federal acreage for housing and transfer it to trust land for tribal nations — while protecting other territory for conservation. The governor, Joe Lombardo, a Republican, recently signed a bill to invest $183 million of state money in developing housing for lower- and middle-class residents. Elsewhere in the West, New Mexico is leasing state lands to develop apartments. In Utah, the state housing office is encouraging cities to change zoning requirements to increase density; it is also using public funds to finance private developments and looking to build on state lands. Before Lee pulled his amendment, I spoke with Steve Waldrip, who directs housing strategy for Utah Gov. Spencer Cox. During our conversation, Waldrip expressed concern that the hyperpoliticized debate around a broad federal land sell-off was hampering focused efforts to alleviate the region’s housing crisis. “There’s no silver bullet that’s going to solve the affordability crisis,” he said.

But some continue to believe a simple solution exists. After Lee’s amendment died, I spoke with Pinto, who directs AEI’s efforts to push for housing on federal lands. He struck a conciliatory tone, given the political climate. (The sweeping GOP bill passed Thursday without Lee’s amendment.) At the moment, Pinto said, there doesn’t appear to be an easy route to sell large swaths of public land for development. “The path forward is to have a much more targeted approach.”

In Nevada, such a thing is already happening. Last year Clark County bought 20 acres from the BLM for $2,000, and the county’s plan is to turn that land into single-family houses for first-time homebuyers. This spring, a new affordable housing development opened in Las Vegas — an apartment complex for people 55 and older with rent starting at $573. The project was built by a developer called Ovation on former public land that was transferred through SNPLMA. It had taken a while — the deal was first proposed in February 2020. But recently, the pace of transfers has picked up. Ovation says it’s also working on a similar project in the city of Henderson. It was nominated for BLM approval last February and, according to Jess Molasky, the company’s chief operating officer, “We hope to be in the ground in the first quarter of next year.”

Gabriel Sandoval contributed research.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Abe Streep.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/utah-sen-mike-lee-says-selling-off-public-lands-will-solve-the-wests-housing-crisis-past-sales-show-otherwise/feed/ 0 543349
Writer and artist Jade Song on redefining perfection https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/writer-and-artist-jade-song-on-redefining-perfection/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/writer-and-artist-jade-song-on-redefining-perfection/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-and-artist-jade-song-on-redefining-perfection You’re speaking to me from your first residency, at Vermont Studio Center. How has it been for you and your writing?

It’s been really nice. The first day I just sat in the chair in the studio and stared out the window because I couldn’t believe that this exists—that you are allowed to just come here for three weeks and have all your meals taken care of. All you have to do is sit here and do whatever you want. You honestly don’t even have to write. Of course you’re going to write or make art because that’s why you’re here, but there’s no expectation, really. And it’s all for free. I was like, “Why didn’t I apply to [residencies] earlier?” And then I was like, “Oh, right, because I was working.” You can’t take off three weeks of your life like that with a full-time job, usually. I’m trying to read a lot for sure, because when I was in New York recently, I didn’t have that much time to. I’ve also been trying to finish the first draft of my fourth book here.

How did you first identify as an artist and how has that identity evolved since then?

I was always making art, since I was young, but it was just my own paintings or these silly little art projects that my friends would support. I think in 2020, I was like, “It would be nice to try something new. I’ve always loved reading, so let me try writing.” I wrote my first short story and it got published, and it was a nice feeling to create this whole world through words. Then I just kept going.

Do you think about going back to painting?

I feel like my writing is interdisciplinary because I am inspired by different forms of art, from film to paintings. In an ideal world, in 10 or 20 years I can have my own studio in New York where I’m just painting and I don’t have to worry about money or anything like that. because it gives you plenty of time to experiment and try new things. But I’m not at that point yet, so we’ll see.

You were a very accomplished swimmer growing up, which has obviously influenced your writing. I imagine that you spend the same amount of time writing now as you did training as a teenager.

I think growing up being such a serious swimmer, and spending three to five hours a day in swim practice while being in school and just trying to be a teenager, really makes you better at organizing your time and structuring your life so that you can get everything done. I think that helped me a lot when I was working full time—knowing how to structure my day-to-day so I was able to get some writing in while not getting fired at my day job, and also having a life. Even though it would be really easy for me to just be super depressive and introverted, I’m like, “No, I have to go see my friends.” Friends are what keep you human.

You’re in a transitional phase right now, no longer working full-time in art direction. Are you planning to write full-time or are you open to other avenues?

I’d love to write full-time as long as it’s financially feasible. I have been freelancing for a friend who’s a creative director at a startup. Book advances and the random foreign sale have been keeping me afloat. I’ll do it for as long as it’s financially feasible. I can do this because I don’t have kids and my parents don’t need a caretaker yet. There’s a lot that contributes to me being able to do this that’s not just money-based.

You know how a lot of people say, “I’m nervous to make the art that I love my main source of income”? I think that when I was working full-time, I was like, “I don’t believe that. That sounds really nice because you don’t have to work full-time and you get to do what you love.” After I got laid off and writing became my main source of income, I was like, “Okay, I get what people mean now.” Before, I didn’t have to think about [if the project was] going to get sold or going to be read. I was purely writing for myself and my friends and because it was fun. Now I do [worry], “Okay, shit, do I want to work on this or do I want to work on this?” I want to work on both, but I’m going to choose the one that I think has the most viability of getting sold or earning me some form of income. I think part of me resents the fact that I do have to think about capital in this way. But I also think it’s irrational to pretend that I don’t have to think about things like this, especially because I don’t have family wealth or anything. I am a working artist. I think I struggle a lot with talking about capital and thinking about it, while also wanting to make art that’s not soiled by that thought. I still haven’t figured out the right balance or the way to do that yet. I don’t know if any working artist has, to be honest.

Do you know where a project is going to end up? Or do you allow yourself to follow an idea and trust that an ending will come?

It depends on the project. For my first two novels, I got these visions in my head and then was like, “Okay, how did they get there?” That’s what I’m writing to figure out. So I really don’t know what’s happening when I write the first draft. Then I started writing screenplays. Because they’re a lot more plot-based and there’s less interiority, I have to outline them out in a way that I don’t for my books.

The fourth book I’m working on now I’m calling “an involuntary memoir” after [Proust’s concept] of involuntary memory, but I think it’s definitely more autofiction… I wanted to try writing it because it’s based on my everyday, in a way. I don’t know what I’m going to do tomorrow. I don’t know what’s going to happen. But I’m going to write about it. It’s completely switching the way that I’ve been writing books, which is always knowing the ending and figuring out how we got there. I don’t know the ending of this book. I don’t know where it’s going, but that’s the whole point.

You’ve written a lot about being a voracious reader and writer, which I can attest to—you’re one of the most widely read people I know. How are you with revision? Are you gentle with yourself or hard on yourself, or both?

I’m not a perfectionist, which I think is how I’m able to write so much. I do kind of wish I was more of a perfectionist, but at the same time, I recognize that that’s impossible. Your writing is never going to be perfect, but the point is to get as close as you can. Perfect is subjective. Re-visualize. I recognize that that’s where the real writing is. That’s where the real story comes out. And I think revising is a pleasure because that’s when you realize, “Oh, this is what I’m trying to say. This is where the story is.” It’s just so much harder than vomiting out your first draft that I resent it, but I do know it’s probably the best part of writing.

You’ve talked about forming an artistic lineage for your first novel, Chlorine. You made an incredible Instagram for it, as well as for your upcoming books. Can you talk about your connection to writing and the internet? You were on Tumblr, right?

I never made that connection, but maybe it is true that the Instagrams I make for my books to hold all the inspirations [for them] really are based from that Tumblr era. I was on Tumblr, but I’m not anymore. It’s really joyful and fun to be able to scroll through and remember all the inspirations.

The internet was the first place where I met my writing friends, through online groups. At that time, I didn’t have community in the way that I do now, so I think it was really helpful and useful for meeting people. But I think that transitioning from online to offline is what really changed my life, so I guess that [the internet] was more like a tool for me to use to meet people. Real-life community has been offering me a lot of sustenance and joy. I am trying to not use social media as much… I think that there are pros and cons. Social media and the internet are really great for staying aware about the world and what’s going on and sharing how you feel. But I also think proximity to community is really important, and the best way to nourish that is to be there in person.

You recently adapted your novel into a screenplay that got you into the Black List Writers Lab last year. What was it like to adapt your own work into a new medium?

I actually think the screenplay for Chlorine is better than the novel because I was so inspired by the body horror movies of Julia Ducournau, David Cronenberg, and Ginger Snaps. Now I’ve written a few other feature-length screenplays and I’m able to recognize in my head what’s a better story for a novel and what’s a better story for a screenplay. After concentrating on one form for a really long time, I think that screenplays feel very mechanical. You have to follow a certain structure and you don’t put as much emotion into it. It’s a lot more concise than a novel, where you have a lot of room and freedom to play with structure, with language, with a character’s point of view. I think it’s just been fun to bounce back and forth.

Jade Song recommends:

Supporting and sharing your friends’ work:

The Way Spring Arrives and Other Stories, especially the story “New Year Painting, Ink and Color on Rice Paper, Zhaoqiao Village” by Chen Qian, translated by Emily Xueni Jin

The poem “Good Grief” by Laetitia Keok

The short story “Adrift in the South” by Xiao Hai, translated by Tony Hao

新新人类 Pixel Perfect, a Chinese-language podcast about living with technology

The comics of Christina Chung


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Ruth Minah Buchwald.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/writer-and-artist-jade-song-on-redefining-perfection/feed/ 0 543341
Writer and artist Jade Song on redefining perfection https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/writer-and-artist-jade-song-on-redefining-perfection-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/writer-and-artist-jade-song-on-redefining-perfection-2/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-and-artist-jade-song-on-redefining-perfection You’re speaking to me from your first residency, at Vermont Studio Center. How has it been for you and your writing?

It’s been really nice. The first day I just sat in the chair in the studio and stared out the window because I couldn’t believe that this exists—that you are allowed to just come here for three weeks and have all your meals taken care of. All you have to do is sit here and do whatever you want. You honestly don’t even have to write. Of course you’re going to write or make art because that’s why you’re here, but there’s no expectation, really. And it’s all for free. I was like, “Why didn’t I apply to [residencies] earlier?” And then I was like, “Oh, right, because I was working.” You can’t take off three weeks of your life like that with a full-time job, usually. I’m trying to read a lot for sure, because when I was in New York recently, I didn’t have that much time to. I’ve also been trying to finish the first draft of my fourth book here.

How did you first identify as an artist and how has that identity evolved since then?

I was always making art, since I was young, but it was just my own paintings or these silly little art projects that my friends would support. I think in 2020, I was like, “It would be nice to try something new. I’ve always loved reading, so let me try writing.” I wrote my first short story and it got published, and it was a nice feeling to create this whole world through words. Then I just kept going.

Do you think about going back to painting?

I feel like my writing is interdisciplinary because I am inspired by different forms of art, from film to paintings. In an ideal world, in 10 or 20 years I can have my own studio in New York where I’m just painting and I don’t have to worry about money or anything like that. because it gives you plenty of time to experiment and try new things. But I’m not at that point yet, so we’ll see.

You were a very accomplished swimmer growing up, which has obviously influenced your writing. I imagine that you spend the same amount of time writing now as you did training as a teenager.

I think growing up being such a serious swimmer, and spending three to five hours a day in swim practice while being in school and just trying to be a teenager, really makes you better at organizing your time and structuring your life so that you can get everything done. I think that helped me a lot when I was working full time—knowing how to structure my day-to-day so I was able to get some writing in while not getting fired at my day job, and also having a life. Even though it would be really easy for me to just be super depressive and introverted, I’m like, “No, I have to go see my friends.” Friends are what keep you human.

You’re in a transitional phase right now, no longer working full-time in art direction. Are you planning to write full-time or are you open to other avenues?

I’d love to write full-time as long as it’s financially feasible. I have been freelancing for a friend who’s a creative director at a startup. Book advances and the random foreign sale have been keeping me afloat. I’ll do it for as long as it’s financially feasible. I can do this because I don’t have kids and my parents don’t need a caretaker yet. There’s a lot that contributes to me being able to do this that’s not just money-based.

You know how a lot of people say, “I’m nervous to make the art that I love my main source of income”? I think that when I was working full-time, I was like, “I don’t believe that. That sounds really nice because you don’t have to work full-time and you get to do what you love.” After I got laid off and writing became my main source of income, I was like, “Okay, I get what people mean now.” Before, I didn’t have to think about [if the project was] going to get sold or going to be read. I was purely writing for myself and my friends and because it was fun. Now I do [worry], “Okay, shit, do I want to work on this or do I want to work on this?” I want to work on both, but I’m going to choose the one that I think has the most viability of getting sold or earning me some form of income. I think part of me resents the fact that I do have to think about capital in this way. But I also think it’s irrational to pretend that I don’t have to think about things like this, especially because I don’t have family wealth or anything. I am a working artist. I think I struggle a lot with talking about capital and thinking about it, while also wanting to make art that’s not soiled by that thought. I still haven’t figured out the right balance or the way to do that yet. I don’t know if any working artist has, to be honest.

Do you know where a project is going to end up? Or do you allow yourself to follow an idea and trust that an ending will come?

It depends on the project. For my first two novels, I got these visions in my head and then was like, “Okay, how did they get there?” That’s what I’m writing to figure out. So I really don’t know what’s happening when I write the first draft. Then I started writing screenplays. Because they’re a lot more plot-based and there’s less interiority, I have to outline them out in a way that I don’t for my books.

The fourth book I’m working on now I’m calling “an involuntary memoir” after [Proust’s concept] of involuntary memory, but I think it’s definitely more autofiction… I wanted to try writing it because it’s based on my everyday, in a way. I don’t know what I’m going to do tomorrow. I don’t know what’s going to happen. But I’m going to write about it. It’s completely switching the way that I’ve been writing books, which is always knowing the ending and figuring out how we got there. I don’t know the ending of this book. I don’t know where it’s going, but that’s the whole point.

You’ve written a lot about being a voracious reader and writer, which I can attest to—you’re one of the most widely read people I know. How are you with revision? Are you gentle with yourself or hard on yourself, or both?

I’m not a perfectionist, which I think is how I’m able to write so much. I do kind of wish I was more of a perfectionist, but at the same time, I recognize that that’s impossible. Your writing is never going to be perfect, but the point is to get as close as you can. Perfect is subjective. Re-visualize. I recognize that that’s where the real writing is. That’s where the real story comes out. And I think revising is a pleasure because that’s when you realize, “Oh, this is what I’m trying to say. This is where the story is.” It’s just so much harder than vomiting out your first draft that I resent it, but I do know it’s probably the best part of writing.

You’ve talked about forming an artistic lineage for your first novel, Chlorine. You made an incredible Instagram for it, as well as for your upcoming books. Can you talk about your connection to writing and the internet? You were on Tumblr, right?

I never made that connection, but maybe it is true that the Instagrams I make for my books to hold all the inspirations [for them] really are based from that Tumblr era. I was on Tumblr, but I’m not anymore. It’s really joyful and fun to be able to scroll through and remember all the inspirations.

The internet was the first place where I met my writing friends, through online groups. At that time, I didn’t have community in the way that I do now, so I think it was really helpful and useful for meeting people. But I think that transitioning from online to offline is what really changed my life, so I guess that [the internet] was more like a tool for me to use to meet people. Real-life community has been offering me a lot of sustenance and joy. I am trying to not use social media as much… I think that there are pros and cons. Social media and the internet are really great for staying aware about the world and what’s going on and sharing how you feel. But I also think proximity to community is really important, and the best way to nourish that is to be there in person.

You recently adapted your novel into a screenplay that got you into the Black List Writers Lab last year. What was it like to adapt your own work into a new medium?

I actually think the screenplay for Chlorine is better than the novel because I was so inspired by the body horror movies of Julia Ducournau, David Cronenberg, and Ginger Snaps. Now I’ve written a few other feature-length screenplays and I’m able to recognize in my head what’s a better story for a novel and what’s a better story for a screenplay. After concentrating on one form for a really long time, I think that screenplays feel very mechanical. You have to follow a certain structure and you don’t put as much emotion into it. It’s a lot more concise than a novel, where you have a lot of room and freedom to play with structure, with language, with a character’s point of view. I think it’s just been fun to bounce back and forth.

Jade Song recommends:

Supporting and sharing your friends’ work:

The Way Spring Arrives and Other Stories, especially the story “New Year Painting, Ink and Color on Rice Paper, Zhaoqiao Village” by Chen Qian, translated by Emily Xueni Jin

The poem “Good Grief” by Laetitia Keok

The short story “Adrift in the South” by Xiao Hai, translated by Tony Hao

新新人类 Pixel Perfect, a Chinese-language podcast about living with technology

The comics of Christina Chung


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Ruth Minah Buchwald.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/writer-and-artist-jade-song-on-redefining-perfection-2/feed/ 0 543342
Game Developer Karla Reyes on fostering an empathetic creative vision https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/game-developer-karla-reyes-on-fostering-an-empathetic-creative-vision/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/game-developer-karla-reyes-on-fostering-an-empathetic-creative-vision/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/game-developer-karla-reyes-on-not-compromising-your-creative-vision Let’s start at the beginning, tell me a little bit about Take Us North and how it came to life.

So, the whole ethos of my studio, Anima Interactive, is focused on socially conscious storytelling, and trying to harness the power of interactive media and video games for good, because I really believe that video games are the most immersive art form, and you can foster empathy and shift hearts and minds around specific topics.

So, when I was thinking about the first, the debut game that I wanted to work on, I settled on write what you know. Migration is something that has always interested me as a first generation immigrant here in the US. My father’s from Guatemala, my mother’s from the Philippines, and my father actually made the border crossing and a lot of my family did, so this was always a subject matter that I was interested in.

I had played games like Bury Me, My Love and there was also this VR experience called CARNE y ARENA, which was done by the Mexican filmmaker, Alejandro Inarritu. And that was a really powerful experience, too, that kind of reinforced this possibility that we can use this medium to try to humanize stories and be able to capture the nuance that you can’t really capture in other platforms or mediums.

Before the game took shape or form, what was the feeling or atmosphere you were trying to chase? Was there a moment when you knew this was the kind of story you wanted to tell?

I’ve always been really interested in audiovisual immersion and really just creating an ambiance, the vibes, essentially. And so, I know that might be a take that not that many game designers focus on. Traditional game designers really focus on mechanics and that kind of thing, which is obviously essential. But I think I like living in a world, and so I want people to feel what that world is and what is the emotional impact created. So I think a lot of the pillars that we focus on are rooted in emotions, since that is what we are trying to get the audience to take away from the experience.

I love that. How did you and your team decide to utilize the video game narrative to tell such an important story specifically? I know you spoke a little bit about how great of a medium it is, but whenever you were deciding, even just the style of video game as well, how did you come to that conclusion to use it?

I definitely wanted to focus on making sure that this was sensitive and authentic. And I felt like photorealism, given the constraints that we’re indeed developers, we didn’t really want to go the photorealistic route. Because there’s a lot of abstract ideas and emotion, I think that I really like abstract art and I think there’s a lot that—going back to the emotional impact piece—that you can take away from it.

And so when we were thinking about the style, the art style, for example, we knew that we wanted to focus on the beauty of the natural landscapes because the settings of this journey are actually really beautiful. You go through these deserts, but they’re very lush, so there’s a lot of beautiful vegetation, the jungle, like the Darién Gap, the rivers, these places in Latin America that aren’t really captured much in video games. And so we really saw that as an exciting opportunity.

And then beyond the actual art style, the characters, for example are faceless, and that was actually intentional. The 3D models are faceless because there’s also this kind of poetic intention behind that, which is that unfortunately a lot of these migrants have to be in the shadows, and so they are faceless, but at the same time we do want to show the humanity that they have. And so that’s why we have voiceover because that connects people. I think voice translates emotion really well. And we have 2D character portraits as well, so you can see expression. But yeah, that’s just a little bit about what the thinking was.

I think it’s really interesting that there’s a juxtaposition between the really beautiful atmosphere that’s captured in the art style as far as the terrain that’s traversed and such a challenging kind of endeavor that so many people face, but at the same time, the general public doesn’t really understanding all that well.

Yeah, and I think that’s a theme that’s really been a throughline in a lot of the research that I’ve conducted. There is always this juxtaposition of this harrowing danger, the trauma, but also the beauty and spirituality is a huge part of it as well. And so we lean into surrealism and magical realism, and that is kind of the more artistic elements that we can include. We’ve talked about the things like the shrines and the more meditative aspects of the experience, and juxtaposing that with the physical adversity of what’s happening is kind of the intention.

I know that you drew from lots of sources, but you also interviewed people that had experienced migrating. How do you protect your creative vision while also keeping those real elements at the emotional core of the story as well? How do you stay open to that feedback while also collaborating with the team and then also making a narrative that has to follow certain plot points and beats?

Yeah, I think that’s why we’ve gotten a lot of the folks with lived experience and the experts involved very early in the process, because we’re co-evolving and co-writing the story, essentially. So I had a vision of what broadly I wanted to cover as far as the themes, but the nuance and the granularity and the detail of it I think is very much informed by the stories.

And as far as compromising creative vision, it hasn’t really had to happen yet. Truly, the research piece has only been additive, because I think that’s part of what we’re doing that I think is a little bit unique to other experiences. Obviously, it’s been done before, but because we are really drawing a lot of real world artifacts and real world environments and real world stories, and translating them into this game. It is fictionalized, but it’s inspired by real world. The story has written itself in a way because they exist.

It’s interesting that you said that you haven’t really had to compromise your creative vision at all, which I think is great to hear, but was that something that you anticipated at all or are you surprised of how kind of smoothly it has gone?

Oh, well, it hasn’t been smooth. I think indie game development is very challenging. And one of the reasons why we’re launching the Kickstarter is because we’re hoping to build community and get feedback from the community. I think one of the reasons why a lot of indie developers end up having to compromise their creative vision is maybe because of external forces like publishers.

And certainly, in some of those conversations that I’ve had with publishers, people have been like, “Well, why aren’t you scoping it differently or considering different genres? Why isn’t it a roguelike because of replay ability?” And intriguingly, this type of story can lend itself to a roguelike, but again, because we want to be sensitive to it, I think having a more linear authored experience and taking people on a journey that is a little bit more controlled so that people can’t just run around and kind of abstract themselves from, again, that emotional impact that we’re trying to create.

So with that in mind too, games often go through a long period of iteration. What has stayed the same from the very first beginning, and then what has changed dramatically

Well, this game has evolved so much, honestly. It’s been really cool to watch, but I think the core ethos and philosophy behind it is really what has stayed the same. It’s been nice to kind of check in with the team, because we’ll do these intermittent check-ins, like, “Are we all aligned on what the vision of this game is and the direction that we’re taking?”. In game development, it’s kind of like baking, you never know what you’re going to get, what’s going to come out on the other side.

I think as far as what has remained the same is the general themes like, “Okay, well, we know that traversing this desert is a core part of this experience that we want to capture because the Sonoran Desert specifically is one of the deadliest migrant trails in the world, and it’s really fascinating because of the demographics of the migrants that come through this desert.”

And then initially we were like, “Is it just going to be in the desert?” But there are all of these other parts of the migrant trail that we think are important and enrich the story. And so, I always had the vision to include aspects of the trail, like The Beast, which is the freight train that runs through Mexico, and the Darién Gap, which is another very dangerous but beautiful trail.

But I think that desert piece was really important as well as the walking aspect, because even though you’re on a freight train and you take this long journey, there’s something about the challenge of walking for miles through a desert and having to face extreme heat and extreme cold. And that impact, it’s biblical in a way.

Do you and your team have a core takeaway or just experience or feeling that you’re hoping people will experience whenever they play Take Us North?

I think the primary goal has always really been empathy. And I know that’s kind of maybe a cliché response, but that is truly what I think we need, an understanding. I take for granted, obviously now, the fact that I possess a lot of this [understanding]. And I’m still learning every day, there’s so much to learn about these things, but because I’ve been so deeply rooted in research on the subject matter for a few years now, and have personal ties to it, I know a lot about it. That said, I’m mindful that the broader population might not. And even people who are first generation immigrants don’t really know that much.

One of the things that’s come out of this development process has been the fact that some of our team members have been able to become closer to their families because they start talking about it and then the stories come out. My father didn’t tell me about his border crossing story until I was an adult because he was ashamed of it. And I think it’s opening up conversations. And that’s been an interesting thing that’s come in some of our research, where people are like, “I want to play this game with my parents or even my grandparents,” and that’s really exciting. We also did a showcase in London, and I can’t remember if we talked after that or not, but it was just fascinating to see the reactions.

Because it’s a culture that’s so far removed, people in the UK?

Exactly. Which means it is validating and encouraging because it means that it’s being conveyed. Obviously, there’s still a lot of work to do, but at the bare minimum, people are learning and they are opening their hearts and minds to what’s happening.

Take Us North is kind of a story that never ends really, because there are always going to be people that are experiencing this.

I’m curious how have you and your team come up with an ending point for the game? What did that look like and what did that process kind of feel like? How do you decide when a story that never really ends is finished?

Well, I think there are ways and motifs to show that it hasn’t ended or this is not a finite thing. So in the game, you play the role of a migrant guide, and so it’s literally their job to do this trip multiple times and to go through this journey multiple times. And so, this is just one journey, but then obviously I don’t want to spoil things for the ending, but it is hinted at that it doesn’t really end necessarily.

And that is something that we do want to show, because migration, even if you make it to your dream destination, the adversities that you experience, and what we know about what it is to be an immigrant and the challenges, that doesn’t end. And sometimes you have to go through this, right?

That’s been, again, going back to the whole biblical thing, humans have been migrating for centuries. It’s an interminable journey. It’s just a part of humanity and society, and I think being able to highlight that is certainly something that we want to focus on. And then there are potential multiple endings that are in play, but there is an overarching kind of end note that we want folks to take away from it.

There’s always this challenge of perfectionism in game development, and people sometimes don’t want to show early, because what you show the audience, they’ll react to. And you’ll get these reviews immediately, and it’s a binary response. People either like it or they won’t. And if they don’t, then that’s it.

But in our case, especially with Kickstarter, a lot of creators are showing their work early and showing work in progress.

There’s this Japanese philosophy, wabi sabi, it’s all about finding beauty in imperfection. And I embrace that, because I decided even though it is hard, you have to just know that. There’s also a quote that I’ve seen where it’s like, “Just make the art exist and then you can improve it later.” And so that’s been the approach to the development process. And with games, it’s always iterative.

So, really I don’t think anything is ever truly finished, but I like setting this external accountability structure and having deadlines, because otherwise we will get stuck.

Karla Reyes Recommends:

Paprika by Satoshi Kon (film)

Walter by Lorenzo Fresta (animated short)

Dance Dance Dance by Haruki Murakami (book)

Rise” by Richard Earnshaw, Ursula Rucker, and Roy Ayers (song)

The Inner Landscape of Beauty” - Conversation between Krista Tippett and John O’Donohue (podcast episode)


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Asia Prieto.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/game-developer-karla-reyes-on-fostering-an-empathetic-creative-vision/feed/ 0 543345
Game Developer Karla Reyes on fostering an empathetic creative vision https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/game-developer-karla-reyes-on-fostering-an-empathetic-creative-vision-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/game-developer-karla-reyes-on-fostering-an-empathetic-creative-vision-2/#respond Tue, 08 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/game-developer-karla-reyes-on-not-compromising-your-creative-vision Let’s start at the beginning, tell me a little bit about Take Us North and how it came to life.

So, the whole ethos of my studio, Anima Interactive, is focused on socially conscious storytelling, and trying to harness the power of interactive media and video games for good, because I really believe that video games are the most immersive art form, and you can foster empathy and shift hearts and minds around specific topics.

So, when I was thinking about the first, the debut game that I wanted to work on, I settled on write what you know. Migration is something that has always interested me as a first generation immigrant here in the US. My father’s from Guatemala, my mother’s from the Philippines, and my father actually made the border crossing and a lot of my family did, so this was always a subject matter that I was interested in.

I had played games like Bury Me, My Love and there was also this VR experience called CARNE y ARENA, which was done by the Mexican filmmaker, Alejandro Inarritu. And that was a really powerful experience, too, that kind of reinforced this possibility that we can use this medium to try to humanize stories and be able to capture the nuance that you can’t really capture in other platforms or mediums.

Before the game took shape or form, what was the feeling or atmosphere you were trying to chase? Was there a moment when you knew this was the kind of story you wanted to tell?

I’ve always been really interested in audiovisual immersion and really just creating an ambiance, the vibes, essentially. And so, I know that might be a take that not that many game designers focus on. Traditional game designers really focus on mechanics and that kind of thing, which is obviously essential. But I think I like living in a world, and so I want people to feel what that world is and what is the emotional impact created. So I think a lot of the pillars that we focus on are rooted in emotions, since that is what we are trying to get the audience to take away from the experience.

I love that. How did you and your team decide to utilize the video game narrative to tell such an important story specifically? I know you spoke a little bit about how great of a medium it is, but whenever you were deciding, even just the style of video game as well, how did you come to that conclusion to use it?

I definitely wanted to focus on making sure that this was sensitive and authentic. And I felt like photorealism, given the constraints that we’re indeed developers, we didn’t really want to go the photorealistic route. Because there’s a lot of abstract ideas and emotion, I think that I really like abstract art and I think there’s a lot that—going back to the emotional impact piece—that you can take away from it.

And so when we were thinking about the style, the art style, for example, we knew that we wanted to focus on the beauty of the natural landscapes because the settings of this journey are actually really beautiful. You go through these deserts, but they’re very lush, so there’s a lot of beautiful vegetation, the jungle, like the Darién Gap, the rivers, these places in Latin America that aren’t really captured much in video games. And so we really saw that as an exciting opportunity.

And then beyond the actual art style, the characters, for example are faceless, and that was actually intentional. The 3D models are faceless because there’s also this kind of poetic intention behind that, which is that unfortunately a lot of these migrants have to be in the shadows, and so they are faceless, but at the same time we do want to show the humanity that they have. And so that’s why we have voiceover because that connects people. I think voice translates emotion really well. And we have 2D character portraits as well, so you can see expression. But yeah, that’s just a little bit about what the thinking was.

I think it’s really interesting that there’s a juxtaposition between the really beautiful atmosphere that’s captured in the art style as far as the terrain that’s traversed and such a challenging kind of endeavor that so many people face, but at the same time, the general public doesn’t really understanding all that well.

Yeah, and I think that’s a theme that’s really been a throughline in a lot of the research that I’ve conducted. There is always this juxtaposition of this harrowing danger, the trauma, but also the beauty and spirituality is a huge part of it as well. And so we lean into surrealism and magical realism, and that is kind of the more artistic elements that we can include. We’ve talked about the things like the shrines and the more meditative aspects of the experience, and juxtaposing that with the physical adversity of what’s happening is kind of the intention.

I know that you drew from lots of sources, but you also interviewed people that had experienced migrating. How do you protect your creative vision while also keeping those real elements at the emotional core of the story as well? How do you stay open to that feedback while also collaborating with the team and then also making a narrative that has to follow certain plot points and beats?

Yeah, I think that’s why we’ve gotten a lot of the folks with lived experience and the experts involved very early in the process, because we’re co-evolving and co-writing the story, essentially. So I had a vision of what broadly I wanted to cover as far as the themes, but the nuance and the granularity and the detail of it I think is very much informed by the stories.

And as far as compromising creative vision, it hasn’t really had to happen yet. Truly, the research piece has only been additive, because I think that’s part of what we’re doing that I think is a little bit unique to other experiences. Obviously, it’s been done before, but because we are really drawing a lot of real world artifacts and real world environments and real world stories, and translating them into this game. It is fictionalized, but it’s inspired by real world. The story has written itself in a way because they exist.

It’s interesting that you said that you haven’t really had to compromise your creative vision at all, which I think is great to hear, but was that something that you anticipated at all or are you surprised of how kind of smoothly it has gone?

Oh, well, it hasn’t been smooth. I think indie game development is very challenging. And one of the reasons why we’re launching the Kickstarter is because we’re hoping to build community and get feedback from the community. I think one of the reasons why a lot of indie developers end up having to compromise their creative vision is maybe because of external forces like publishers.

And certainly, in some of those conversations that I’ve had with publishers, people have been like, “Well, why aren’t you scoping it differently or considering different genres? Why isn’t it a roguelike because of replay ability?” And intriguingly, this type of story can lend itself to a roguelike, but again, because we want to be sensitive to it, I think having a more linear authored experience and taking people on a journey that is a little bit more controlled so that people can’t just run around and kind of abstract themselves from, again, that emotional impact that we’re trying to create.

So with that in mind too, games often go through a long period of iteration. What has stayed the same from the very first beginning, and then what has changed dramatically

Well, this game has evolved so much, honestly. It’s been really cool to watch, but I think the core ethos and philosophy behind it is really what has stayed the same. It’s been nice to kind of check in with the team, because we’ll do these intermittent check-ins, like, “Are we all aligned on what the vision of this game is and the direction that we’re taking?”. In game development, it’s kind of like baking, you never know what you’re going to get, what’s going to come out on the other side.

I think as far as what has remained the same is the general themes like, “Okay, well, we know that traversing this desert is a core part of this experience that we want to capture because the Sonoran Desert specifically is one of the deadliest migrant trails in the world, and it’s really fascinating because of the demographics of the migrants that come through this desert.”

And then initially we were like, “Is it just going to be in the desert?” But there are all of these other parts of the migrant trail that we think are important and enrich the story. And so, I always had the vision to include aspects of the trail, like The Beast, which is the freight train that runs through Mexico, and the Darién Gap, which is another very dangerous but beautiful trail.

But I think that desert piece was really important as well as the walking aspect, because even though you’re on a freight train and you take this long journey, there’s something about the challenge of walking for miles through a desert and having to face extreme heat and extreme cold. And that impact, it’s biblical in a way.

Do you and your team have a core takeaway or just experience or feeling that you’re hoping people will experience whenever they play Take Us North?

I think the primary goal has always really been empathy. And I know that’s kind of maybe a cliché response, but that is truly what I think we need, an understanding. I take for granted, obviously now, the fact that I possess a lot of this [understanding]. And I’m still learning every day, there’s so much to learn about these things, but because I’ve been so deeply rooted in research on the subject matter for a few years now, and have personal ties to it, I know a lot about it. That said, I’m mindful that the broader population might not. And even people who are first generation immigrants don’t really know that much.

One of the things that’s come out of this development process has been the fact that some of our team members have been able to become closer to their families because they start talking about it and then the stories come out. My father didn’t tell me about his border crossing story until I was an adult because he was ashamed of it. And I think it’s opening up conversations. And that’s been an interesting thing that’s come in some of our research, where people are like, “I want to play this game with my parents or even my grandparents,” and that’s really exciting. We also did a showcase in London, and I can’t remember if we talked after that or not, but it was just fascinating to see the reactions.

Because it’s a culture that’s so far removed, people in the UK?

Exactly. Which means it is validating and encouraging because it means that it’s being conveyed. Obviously, there’s still a lot of work to do, but at the bare minimum, people are learning and they are opening their hearts and minds to what’s happening.

Take Us North is kind of a story that never ends really, because there are always going to be people that are experiencing this.

I’m curious how have you and your team come up with an ending point for the game? What did that look like and what did that process kind of feel like? How do you decide when a story that never really ends is finished?

Well, I think there are ways and motifs to show that it hasn’t ended or this is not a finite thing. So in the game, you play the role of a migrant guide, and so it’s literally their job to do this trip multiple times and to go through this journey multiple times. And so, this is just one journey, but then obviously I don’t want to spoil things for the ending, but it is hinted at that it doesn’t really end necessarily.

And that is something that we do want to show, because migration, even if you make it to your dream destination, the adversities that you experience, and what we know about what it is to be an immigrant and the challenges, that doesn’t end. And sometimes you have to go through this, right?

That’s been, again, going back to the whole biblical thing, humans have been migrating for centuries. It’s an interminable journey. It’s just a part of humanity and society, and I think being able to highlight that is certainly something that we want to focus on. And then there are potential multiple endings that are in play, but there is an overarching kind of end note that we want folks to take away from it.

There’s always this challenge of perfectionism in game development, and people sometimes don’t want to show early, because what you show the audience, they’ll react to. And you’ll get these reviews immediately, and it’s a binary response. People either like it or they won’t. And if they don’t, then that’s it.

But in our case, especially with Kickstarter, a lot of creators are showing their work early and showing work in progress.

There’s this Japanese philosophy, wabi sabi, it’s all about finding beauty in imperfection. And I embrace that, because I decided even though it is hard, you have to just know that. There’s also a quote that I’ve seen where it’s like, “Just make the art exist and then you can improve it later.” And so that’s been the approach to the development process. And with games, it’s always iterative.

So, really I don’t think anything is ever truly finished, but I like setting this external accountability structure and having deadlines, because otherwise we will get stuck.

Karla Reyes Recommends:

Paprika by Satoshi Kon (film)

Walter by Lorenzo Fresta (animated short)

Dance Dance Dance by Haruki Murakami (book)

Rise” by Richard Earnshaw, Ursula Rucker, and Roy Ayers (song)

The Inner Landscape of Beauty” - Conversation between Krista Tippett and John O’Donohue (podcast episode)


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Asia Prieto.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/08/game-developer-karla-reyes-on-fostering-an-empathetic-creative-vision-2/feed/ 0 543346
Do you know what the 709 Crackdown is? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/do-you-know-what-the-709-crackdown-is/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/do-you-know-what-the-709-crackdown-is/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 23:00:12 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=296cb8ba34026acb3aa0e3a7c5af3eb8
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/do-you-know-what-the-709-crackdown-is/feed/ 0 543302
The science behind Texas’ catastrophic floods https://grist.org/climate/the-science-behind-texas-catastrophic-floods/ https://grist.org/climate/the-science-behind-texas-catastrophic-floods/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 22:29:30 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=669825 Rescue crews are scrambling to find survivors of catastrophic flooding that tore through Central Texas on the Fourth of July. It’s already one of the deadliest flood events in modern American history, leaving at least 95 people dead, 27 of whom were girls and counselors at a Christian summer camp in Kerr County, which was inundated when the nearby Guadalupe River surged 26 feet in just 45 minutes. 

“It’s the worst-case scenario for a very extreme, very sudden, literal wall of water,” said Daniel Swain, a climate scientist at the University of California, Los Angeles, during a livestream Monday morning. “I don’t think that’s an exaggeration in this case, based on the eyewitness accounts and the science involved.”

It will take some time for scientists to do proper “attribution” studies here, to say for instance how much extra rain they can blame on climate change. But generally speaking, this disaster has climate change’s marks all over it — a perfect storm of conspiring phenomena, both in the atmosphere and on the ground. “To people who are still skeptical that the climate crisis is real, there’s such a clear signal and fingerprint of climate change in this type of event,” said Jennifer Francis, senior scientist at the Woodwell Climate Research Center.

This tragedy actually started hundreds of miles to the southeast, out at sea. As the planet has warmed, the gulf has gotten several degrees Fahrenheit hotter. That’s turned it into a giant puddle of fuel for hurricanes barreling toward the Gulf Coast, since those storms feed on warm seawater. 

Even when a hurricane isn’t brewing, the gulf is sending more moisture into the atmosphere — think about how your bathroom mirror fogs up when you draw a hot bath. This pushes wet, unstable air higher and higher into the atmosphere, condensing into clouds. As these systems release heat, they grow even more unstable, creating a towering thundercloud that can drop extreme amounts of rainfall. Indeed, preceding the floods, the amount of moisture above Texas was at or above the all-time record for July, according to Swain. “That is fairly extraordinary, in the sense that this is a place that experiences very moist air this time of year,” Swain said. 

That meant the system both had the requisite moisture for torrential rainfall, plus the instability that creates the thunderstorms that make that rain fall very quickly. This storm was dumping two to four inches of rain an hour, and it was moving very slowly, so it essentially stalled over the landscape — a gigantic atmospheric fire hose soaking Central Texas.

Making matters worse, the ground in this part of Texas is loaded with limestone, which doesn’t readily absorb rainwater compared to places with thick layers of soil at the surface. Rainwater rapidly flowed down hills and valleys and gathered in rivers, which is why the Guadalupe rose so fast. “That means that not very much of the rain is going to soak into the ground, partly because the soil is shallow and partly because there’s steep slopes in the terrain, so that water is able to run off fairly quickly,” said John Nielsen-Gammon, Texas’ state climatologist and director of the Southern Regional Climate Center at Texas A&M University

This is exactly the kind of precipitation event that’s increasing fastest in a warming climate, Swain added. In California, for instance, alternating periods of extremely wet conditions and extremely dry ones are creating “weather whiplash.” As the world’s bodies of water heat up, more moisture can evaporate into the atmosphere. And due to some basic physics, the warmer it gets, the more moisture the atmosphere can hold, so there’s more potential for heavier rainfall. 

“The Gulf of Mexico has been going through several marine heat waves recently, and so it’s just adding that much more heat to the atmosphere, loading it up for more extreme rainfall events,” said Brett Anderson, senior meteorologist at AccuWeather. “A lot of these places, 1-in-100-year floods may be becoming more like 1-in-50, even 1-in-10.” AccuWeather’s preliminary estimate puts the economic damage of the flooding at between $18 billion and $22 billion.

The Trump administration did make deep staffing cuts to the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration earlier this year, but it’s too early to tell why some people didn’t get warnings in time. The National Weather Service did indeed provide multiple flood warnings, and some people are reporting they got alerts on their cell phones, prompting them to escape. Still, with so many people dead or missing, they either didn’t get the alerts or didn’t adequately understand the danger they were in. Officials in Kerr County previously considered a more robust warning system for Guadalupe River floods, but rejected it as too expensive.

For the girls and staff at the summer camp, the deluge arrived at the worst possible time, in the early hours of the morning while they slept. “In my view — and this seems to be the consensus view of meteorologists — this is not really a failure of meteorology here,” Swain said. “To my eye, the Weather Service predictions, they certainly weren’t perfect, but they were as good as could have been expected given the state of the science.”

Swain warns that if the administration follows through on its promises of further more cuts to NOAA, forecasts of flooding could well suffer. “That really could be catastrophic,” he said. “That will 100 percent be responsible for costing lives.” 


Grist has a comprehensive guide to help you stay ready and informed before, during, and after a disaster.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The science behind Texas’ catastrophic floods on Jul 7, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Matt Simon.

]]>
https://grist.org/climate/the-science-behind-texas-catastrophic-floods/feed/ 0 543304
On Learning To Be Inclusive https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/on-learning-to-be-inclusive/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/on-learning-to-be-inclusive/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 22:21:33 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/on-learning-to-be-inclusive-monifa-20250707/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Akilah Monifa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/on-learning-to-be-inclusive/feed/ 0 543300
I Covered the Intifada. It’s Wrong to Say It Means Violence Against Jews. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/i-covered-the-intifada-its-wrong-to-say-it-means-violence-against-jews/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/i-covered-the-intifada-its-wrong-to-say-it-means-violence-against-jews/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 20:44:56 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046360  

Meet the Press: Kristen Welker interview Zohran Mamdani

Zohran Mamdani to Kristen Welker (Meet the Press, 6/29/25): “Freedom and justice and safety are things that, to have meaning, have to be applied to all people, and that includes Israelis and Palestinians as well.”

Meet the Press host Kristen Welker (6/29/25) showed courage by interviewing Zohran Mamdani, the winner of the Democratic mayoral primary for New York, after he’d been widely attacked by corporate media. But unfortunately, she fell into a trap that has been set repeatedly in recent months to smear Mamdani. She asked him to condemn the phrase “globalize the intifada,” claiming—without offering evidence—that the term “intifada” refers to “violence against Jews.”

I doubt Welker is an Arabic linguist. But as a Palestinian journalist who covered the Intifada and helped introduce the term to Western media, I am appalled by this misrepresentation. Not only is the translation wrong, it’s an insult to the thousands of New York Jews who voted for Mamdani.

For the record, intifada translates to “shake off.” Palestinians used the term to describe their popular resistance against an Israeli occupation of their land that had no end in sight. It emerged amid a steady expansion of illegal settlements, which were systematically turning the occupied territories into a Swiss cheese–like landscape, precisely designed to prevent the establishment of a Palestinian state.

As someone who reported on the Intifada and explained its meaning to international audiences, I can say unequivocally: Intifada was used by Palestinian activists to describe a civil resistance movement rooted in dignity and national self-determination.

Metaphor for liberation

The US Holocaust Museum (photo: Phil Kalina)

The Arabic-language version of the website of the US Holocaust Museum translated the Warsaw Ghetto “Uprising” as “Intifada”—until blogger Juan Cole (5/1/24) pointed this out. (Creative Commons photo: Phil Kalina.)

Let’s begin with the word’s literal meaning. As noted, in Arabic, intifada simply means “shaking off.” Since many—including Jewish leaders, Christian Zionists and GOP officials—have distorted the peaceful intentions behind the word, I turned to a source that might resonate more clearly with people of faith: the Bible.

In the Arabic version of the Old Testament, the word intifada appears three times, both as a noun and a verb. Looking at its English equivalents in the New International Version (though other translations are similar) offers enlightening context:

  • Judges 16:20: “Samson awoke from his sleep and thought, ‘I’ll go out as before and shake myself free.’”
  • Isaiah 52:2: “Shake off your dust; rise up, sit enthroned, Jerusalem. Free yourself from the chains on your neck, Daughter Zion, now a captive.”
  • Psalm 109:23: “I fade away like an evening shadow; I am shaken off like a locust.”

Each of these examples uses the term intifada—shaking off oppression, captivity or anguish—as a metaphor for liberation, not violence.

While Google Translate and other modern tools often render intifada as “popular uprising,” its literal meaning—“to shake off”—captures the spirit with which Palestinians adopted the term. When they launched the first Intifada in 1987—after 20 years under a foreign military occupation—it was an expression of a desire to wake up, rise and throw off the chains of subjugation. It is not inherently antisemitic, nor does it refer by default to terrorism or violence.

While accompanying international journalists covering the protests, I often discussed this with them. In Jerusalem, I explained to LA Times bureau chief Dan Fisher, the  Washington Post’s Glenn Frankel and the New York Times’ John Kifner what Palestinians meant by the word. I told them that throughout Palestinian patriotic literature and slogans, two distinctions were always made: The Intifada was a protest against the Israeli occupation, not against Jews or the existence of Israel, and that the ultimate goal was to achieve an independent Palestinian state alongside Israel.

Fisher, Frankel and Kifner included these clarifications in their reports, helping the Arabic term intifada enter the global lexicon with its intended meaning.

‘Bringing terror to the streets of America’

Fox News; 'Intifada' means bringing terror to the streets of America, Douglas Murray says

To define “intifada,” Fox News (5/23/25) brought on Douglas Murray, who calls Islam an “infection” and declares that “all immigration into Europe from Muslim countries must stop.”

But today, as protests against Israel’s devastating war on Gaza mount, the word is being twisted. When Rep. Elise Stefanik grilled the presidents of UPenn, Harvard, and MIT in December 2023 about pro-Palestinian chants invoking “intifada,” she equated the term with “genocide of Jews.”

The university presidents faltered. They should have said clearly: Genocide against Jews—or any people—is abhorrent. But intifada is not synonymous with genocide. To equate a call to end the Israeli military occupation with a call for genocide or violence against Jews is a gross distortion—a bizarre reversal that paints the victims as aggressors.

And yet this distortion persists. [Gillibrand] Former Secretary of State Mike Pompeo labeled Mamdani antisemitic. Anti-Defamation League CEO Jonathan Greenblatt—who likely doesn’t speak Arabic—claimed on X that intifada is “explicit incitement to violence.” Rep. Dan Goldman (D-N.Y.) added that the word is “well understood to refer to the violent terror attacks.” Sen. Kristen Gillibrand (D-N.Y.) told WNYC public radio (6/26/25), “The global intifada is a statement that means destroy Israel and kill all the Jews.”

Media echoed the politicians’ misrepresentations of intifada. “Many Jews see it as a call to violence against Israeli civilians,” ABC (6/29/25) reported. “Many Jews consider it a call to violence, a nod to deadly attacks on civilians in Israel by Palestinians in uprisings in the 1980s and 2000s,” wrote the New York Times (6/25/25). Of course, “many Jews” do not hear the word that way—but the more important question is, what is the accurate understanding of the word as used by Palestinians?

Fox News (5/23/25) didn’t mince words: “‘Intifada’ Means Bringing Terror to the Streets of America,” it said in a headline, citing notorious Islamophobe Douglas Murray. To the New York Times‘ Bret Stephens (7/1/25), “What Intifada Really Means” is “giving moral comfort to people who deliberately murder innocent Jews.”

Even liberal podcast host Donny Deutsch repeated the same claim while speaking on MSNBC (Morning Joe, 6/30/25):

I’m outraged that we have a candidate for mayor of New York, Mr. Mamdani, that cannot walk back or cannot condemn the words “globalize the intifada” and his nuance of, “Well, it means different things for different people.” Well, let me tell you what it means to a Jew—it means violence.

Brutal suppression of protest

The Intifada in the Gaza Strip, December 21, 1987 (photo: Efi Sharir)

The First Intifada in the Gaza Strip, December 21, 1987 (photo: Efi Sharir).

The first Intifada embraced principles of nonviolent resistance championed by Martin Luther King Jr. and Mahatma Gandhi. My cousin, Mubarak Awad, who established the Palestinian Center for the Study of Nonviolence, encouraged boycotts of Israeli products, labor strikes and grassroots economic development in preparation for statehood. He translated, printed and distributed Arabic translations of Gene Sharp’s writings on nonviolence throughout the occupied territories. Mubarak was deported on the eve of the Intifada by then–Israeli Prime Minister Yitzhak Shamir.

After Shamir came Yitzhak Rabin, who called publicly to “break the bones” of Palestinian stone throwers. During the first Intifada, Israeli soldiers and settlers responded to the nonfatal protests with extreme violence. In the first phase of the uprising—a little more than a year—332 Palestinians were killed, along with 12 Israelis (Middle East Monitor, 12/8/16).

This brutality did not suppress the protests, but merely escalated the violence: At the end of six years, more than 1,500 Palestinians, including more than 300 children, and 400 Israelis—18 of whom were children—were dead, according to the Israeli human rights group B’tselem.

The same pattern recurred in the second Intifada: Only after the initial protests were met with massively disproportionate force did Palestinians, led by Hamas, turn to suicide bombing as a desperation tactic (Al Jazeera, 9/28/20). To treat the response to the brutal suppression of protest as though it represented the essential nature of intifada is intellectually lazy and politically cynical.

Zohran Mamdani never used the words “global intifada.” But he refused to denounce calls for the world to wake up and speak out against atrocities in Gaza. His victory in the Democratic primary—supported in part by Jewish New Yorkers—shows he is neither antisemitic nor willing to renounce an Arabic word that has been hijacked and misused by people who would rather Palestinians remain silent and submissive under occupation.


Research assistance: Shirlynn Chan


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by Daoud Kuttab.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/i-covered-the-intifada-its-wrong-to-say-it-means-violence-against-jews/feed/ 0 543289
Governments are not powerless in the face of deep sea miners colluding with Trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/governments-are-not-powerless-in-the-face-of-deep-sea-miners-colluding-with-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/governments-are-not-powerless-in-the-face-of-deep-sea-miners-colluding-with-trump/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 18:30:56 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/governments-are-not-powerless-in-the-face-of-deep-sea-miners-colluding-with-trump Governments still have a chance to protect the future of the deep ocean as the 30th Session of the International Seabed Authority (ISA) resumes today, with 37 now calling for a moratorium on deep sea mining – the only credible path to decisively resist predatory corporate seizure and prevent the irreversible harm the industry could unleash.

This is the first time governments have gathered to discuss deep sea mining since The Metals Company (TMC) submitted the first ever application to commercially mine the international seabed. The move was encouraged by an executive order signed by US President Donald Trump aimed to fast-track deep-sea mining operations in both US and international waters, and has bolstered opposition to deep sea mining, not only to protect the environment but also to defend international cooperation and international law.[1]

Greenpeace International campaigner Louisa Casson, who is attending the meeting, said: “We are witnessing the dangers that arise when nations take unilateral action without regard for collective consequences. We should learn from nature that ecosystems collapse without cooperation; our global systems are at risk when we fail to work together for the common good. The deep sea must not fall victim to predatory corporate seizure. It is time for governments at the ISA to commit to a moratorium—this is the only viable path to prevent the irreversible harm that deep-sea mining would unleash.”

Nearly 200 governments have signed the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), often referred to as the “constitution of the ocean”, which establishes a global legal framework that prevents states from taking unilateral action to exploit them.

In its latest financial filings, TMC acknowledged that many governments and the ISA are likely to view any deep sea mining permit issued under the Trump administration as a violation of international law.[2] This could result in lawsuits, being unable to sell minerals, and companies refusing to work with TMC throughout the supply chain.

Pressure is already mounting on Allseas, a company headquartered in Switzerland with significant presence in the Netherlands, who own the deep sea mining ship and machinery that TMC intends to rely on for commercial operations, and are also one of its largest shareholders. Last week, Greenpeace activists hung a banner from Allseas office in Delft, urging the company to break ties with Trump.[3]

Recently, Dutch media reported that Climate Minister Sophie Hermans is raising concerns directly with Allseas over their involvement with TMC, while the Swiss government outlined its expectations for companies registered or active in Switzerland to follow international law and norms.[4][5] Allseas’ CEO has stated that the company “would not do anything illegal”.

Moreover, TMC’s strategic collaboration with PAMCO is coming under new scrutiny, with the Japanese metal processing company admitting that it “consider(s) the establishment of the business via a route that has earned international credibility to be a material issue”.[6]

The ISA risks caving in to corporate pressure with the President of the Council, H.E. Duncan Laki, circulating instructions to ISA parties to speed up discussions in an attempt to finalize a Mining Code by this year, which would pave the way for commercial deep sea mining to begin in the international seabed.[7] These included strong limitations of intervention times or recourse to smaller meetings where observers were excluded. In response, Greenpeace has sent a letter to Secretary General Leticia Carvalho, warning that the ISA must not reward industry-led efforts to rush the adoption of the Mining Code.[8] Several governments have also voiced strong opposition, stating, “We categorically disassociate ourselves from any suggestion or interpretation that the Council is bound, legally or politically, to adopt the regulations by the end of the year.”[9] Other NGOs, Indigenous peoples and some States also addressed the issue.

Louisa Casson added: “Governments are not powerless in the face of deep sea miners doing a doomed deal with Trump. They have both the authority and, now more than ever, the responsibility to act. With growing scientific concern, mounting public pressure, and unprecedented risks to fragile marine ecosystems, the time for courageous leadership is now”.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/governments-are-not-powerless-in-the-face-of-deep-sea-miners-colluding-with-trump/feed/ 0 543279
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 7, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-7-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-7-2025/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a529cc5679cf784a836963adcd3c49d3 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 7, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-7-2025/feed/ 0 543314
EXCLUSIVE: Lawyer for Mahmoud Khalil reveals how he won his freedom https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/exclusive-lawyer-for-mahmoud-khalil-reveals-how-he-won-his-freedom/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/exclusive-lawyer-for-mahmoud-khalil-reveals-how-he-won-his-freedom/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 17:50:08 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fc9916f5f4f1746094d48d5a3807bb74
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/exclusive-lawyer-for-mahmoud-khalil-reveals-how-he-won-his-freedom/feed/ 0 543263
“Thou Shalt Not Kill”: The World’s Silence Is Complicity https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/thou-shalt-not-kill-the-worlds-silence-is-complicity/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/thou-shalt-not-kill-the-worlds-silence-is-complicity/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 14:30:48 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159717 I do not write from comfort. I write from the salt of grief. From the agony of watching the world orchestrate its distractions while an entire people are burned, buried, and erased. The world has failed the Palestinian people. Utterly and entirely. This is not a political crisis—it is a moral apocalypse. Since October 2023, […]

The post “Thou Shalt Not Kill”: The World’s Silence Is Complicity first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
I do not write from comfort. I write from the salt of grief. From the agony of watching the world orchestrate its distractions while an entire people are burned, buried, and erased.

The world has failed the Palestinian people. Utterly and entirely.

This is not a political crisis—it is a moral apocalypse.

Since October 2023, more than 64,000 Palestinians—the vast majority women and children—have been killed in Gaza. That figure, cited by the Watson Institute, only scratches the surface. A 2024 Lancet study estimated that up to 186,000 deaths may be attributable to the ongoing conflict—caused not only by direct violence but by famine, trauma, disease, and a shattered healthcare system. At that time, Ralph Nader placed the number closer to 200,000.

These are not numbers. These are obliterated lineages. Neighborhoods razed. Babies recovered from beneath rubble in what were meant to be shelters—not graves. Hospitals bombed. Schools incinerated. Families starved. Children turned to ash inside classrooms. Elders murdered in wards they once trusted as safe.

And how has the world responded? With silence. With vague “regrets.” With weapons shipments.

Where is the United Nations and its so-called peacekeeping mandate? Where is the Arab League? Where are the global faith leaders who quote “Thou shalt not kill” from the pulpit—but seem deaf to the cries from Gaza?

“Thou shalt not kill.” Inscribed in the Bible, Qur’an, Torah, Gita—yes. But also enshrined in international law, the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, and the charters of the United Nations. It is sacred. It is legal. It is universal. And it has been violated. Repeatedly. Brazenly. Unforgivably.

Those who sponsor this genocide sleep beside holy texts while investing in weapons and war stocks. They pray with one hand and push missile buttons with the other.

Yet those sponsoring this genocide sleep beside these holy texts while investing in war stocks and boasting defense profits. They pray with one hand and press missile buttons with the other.

This is not just genocide—it is infanticide, ecocide, scholacide, culturecide, and medicide.

Let us name it fully:

  • Infanticide: Babies buried under bombed maternity wards.
  • Scholacide: Teachers and students turned to ash inside classrooms.
  • Ecocide: Farmland poisoned, aquifers drained, trees reduced to cinders.
  • Medicide: The annihilation of healthcare, as ambulances are shelled and doctors are slaughtered in their scrubs.

These are not metaphors. They are facts. And the so-called international community is not watching helplessly—it is watching profitably.

Let us not be deceived: silence is not neutrality. Silence is a moral alignment with power.

A carpenter does not build chairs to store under the bed. A tailor does not sew garments just to hide them away. And the arms industry does not make weapons for decoration. These machines of death must be sold. And sold they are—through wars.

The children of Gaza were not accidental casualties. They were sacrificed at the altar of empire, profit, and political cowardice.

So I ask:

To the architects of this violence: What crime did the Palestinian children commit? What sin warranted this obliteration?

To the silent majority: When does neutrality become complicity? What will you tell your children when they read of this— —or will even that history be erased?

This is not only about Gaza. It is about all of us. About what we become when we no longer act. About the future we construct through our indifference.

I offer this piece not just as protest, but as lament. Not just as lament, but as sacred indictment.

In the name of every holy book used to bless bombs, In memory of every mother whose child was stolen by missiles, In the name of all prophets who warned us against such evil: Let it be known— The world has failed the Palestinians.

We are called not only to pray but to protest. Not only to mourn but to move. Not only to witness, but to refuse— Refuse to accept that this is the world we inherit or pass down.

But we, the people of conscience, will not be silent.

And to my fellow activists, faith leaders, citizens of truth and resistance, I say this:

The silence of the world is not passive. It is participation. And it will be remembered that the entire world stood by while Palestinians were genocided—generation after generation.

The post “Thou Shalt Not Kill”: The World’s Silence Is Complicity first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Sammy Attoh.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/thou-shalt-not-kill-the-worlds-silence-is-complicity/feed/ 0 543198
Progressive Comradeship During the Trump Times https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/progressive-comradeship-during-the-trump-times/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/progressive-comradeship-during-the-trump-times/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 14:25:21 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159731 I’ve noticed over the last couple of years younger progressive/revolutionary organizers using the word, “comrade,” to refer to other organizers. Is this a good idea? During the days of McCarthyism in the 1950s, and probably before then, self-righteous conservatives used this word as a smear against people on the political Left. “Comrade” was a word […]

The post Progressive Comradeship During the Trump Times first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
I’ve noticed over the last couple of years younger progressive/revolutionary organizers using the word, “comrade,” to refer to other organizers. Is this a good idea?

During the days of McCarthyism in the 1950s, and probably before then, self-righteous conservatives used this word as a smear against people on the political Left. “Comrade” was a word used before and after the Russian Revolution in 1917 by members of the Bolshevik Party which led that revolution and dominated the USSR government for decades afterwards. I suspect, without knowing for sure, that members of the Communist Party in the USA from the 1920s on, at least until McCarthyite repression in the 50s, used that term also, given the CPUSA’s very close connection to the Soviet CP during that time.

George Orwell’s Animal Farm, published in 1945, had a lot to do with the comrade word becoming much more widely discredited. Animal Farm is the story of a revolution gone bad, corruption of once-revolutionary and brave leadership upon gaining power, and even as those bad things happen and demoralization sets in among many of the animals, use of the word comrade is continued by those in power.

As a young person growing up in the 1950s and 60s, I absorbed much of the dominant conservative ideology of those days and as a result never used, and still don’t use, the comrade word in any way. To me, it has been seen as a problematic word.

But there are other-than-leftist groups in the USA that use the word. Doing some google searching I learned that it is in use in both the US military and among veterans groups, which is surprising. Why would that be the case?

In a Random House dictionary published in 1966, they give three definitions for the word: “1) a person who shares closely in one’s activities, occupation, interests, etc: intimate companion, associate, or friend. 2) a fellow member of a fraternal group, political party, etc. 3) a member of the Communist Party or someone with strongly leftist views.”

I think it’s telling that the US military and veterans groups apparently use the word. Clearly, their doing so would fall under definitions 1 and 2, not 3. There is something about the word, something about the idea of comradeship, that connects people who are working “closely” together in a shared task, shared “interests.”

Many of us today, literally millions, are standing up and taking action against the Trumpfascists. 5 million or more took part in 2,200 local actions in all 50 states on June 14, No Kings! Day. Probably millions are going to take part in local “Good Trouble Lives On” actions on July 17, the 5th anniversary of the death of longtime freedom fighter John Lewis; there are already over 1,000 planned. And I feel a sense of comradeship, progressive comradeship, with this so-very-important mass political force, this popular resistance movement.

“Progressive comradeship:” that’s a phrase I’m comfortable with. It fits with definitions 1 and 2 above. It clarifies that this movement is broadly-based, representing tens of millions of people, going from “strong leftists,” including communists, on one pole to decent, concerned people on the other who believe in “one nation, indivisible, with liberty and justice for all.”

During Hakeem Jeffries’ record-breaking, 8 hour and 44 minutes, impressive speech right before the Big Ugly Bill was narrowly passed in the House of Representatives on July 3rd, he quoted more than once a passage from the Bible that clearly resonated with the many Democratic Congresspeople sitting, and sometimes standing in loud applause, behind him. That passage? Matthew 25: 35-40. It’s one that should undergird all that we do as we keep building and strengthening the Resistance.

“For I was hungry and you gave me food, I was thirsty and you gave me something to drink, I was a stranger and you welcomed me, I was naked and you gave me clothing, I was sick and you took care of me, I was in prison and you visited me. Then the righteous will answer him, ‘Lord, when was it that we saw you hungry and gave you food, or thirsty and gave you something to drink? And when was it that we saw you a stranger and welcomed you, or naked and gave you clothing? And when was it that we saw you sick or in prison and visited you?’ And the king will answer them, ‘Truly I tell you, just as you did it to one of the least of these who are members of my family, you did it to me.”

We must do all we can as long as we are alive to try to bring into existence a world motivated by these words in Matthew. It’s a certainty that the warped and twisted, pro-oligarch, obscene policies of the current federal government, combined with the day-to-day organizing of the millions of us, is going to lead to many more millions joining with us in this profoundly important task history has placed before us.

Our mass democracy movement is now and must continue to be characterized by progressive comradeship in the way we interact and a deep, abiding love for others and the natural world. Nothing can defeat that kind of movement, nothing. We really can change the world.

The post Progressive Comradeship During the Trump Times first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Ted Glick.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/progressive-comradeship-during-the-trump-times/feed/ 0 543200
Zelensky’s surprising career in the entertainment industry #shorts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/zelenskys-surprising-career-in-the-entertainment-industry-shorts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/zelenskys-surprising-career-in-the-entertainment-industry-shorts/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 13:03:51 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=2b3bfe5430e695b4de90210a2f91f818
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/zelenskys-surprising-career-in-the-entertainment-industry-shorts/feed/ 0 543189
Writer Andrew Aydin on being persistent with your vision https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/writer-andrew-aydin-on-being-persistent-with-your-vision/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/writer-andrew-aydin-on-being-persistent-with-your-vision/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-andrew-aydin-on-being-persistent-with-your-vision You worked with John Lewis and created the graphic novel series March with him after learning he was inspired by a comic about Martin Luther King. I want to talk about your own comic inspirations because you’ve worked in a lot of different parts of the business. What’s your earliest comic memory? What comics inspired you to want to work in the medium?

I think my earliest memory of comics is my grandmother letting me read my uncle’s old comics at her house when she didn’t quite know what else to do with me. It was kind of an absurd experience, when you think back on it, to read these vintage comics from the early to mid ’60s as your first experience. But if you know anything about my family, it’s that we save everything. Then she bought me my first comic book here in Western North Carolina at the old Piggly Wiggly off Hendersonville Highway. It was Uncanny X-Men 317, the “Phalanx Covenant” with the lenticular cover. That was really my earliest memory.

The idea of working in comics never really seemed like something I would get to do because I needed health insurance. You grow up poor and you’re like, “I need a regular paycheck.” There’s no savings for those years where you really struggle to break in. But I remember going to Dragon Con when I was maybe 13, and meeting creators for the first time, and that was a tremendously formative experience for me. One of the people I always think about is Mike Wieringo, who was illustrating The Flash run that I had started reading on the newsstand. This would’ve been about issue 94 is where I started. And then, getting issue 92 with the first Impulse appearance was like a grail for me.

He was so kind. He did this beautiful head sketch of The Flash on the back of a backer board for me when I brought him my comics to get signed. I remember being so impressed with the idea that these people were able to make a living with things that they could dream up. The power of their ideas and their creativity allowed them to earn a living. And that really stayed with me.

I think comics were something my mother at first tolerated and then later embraced as at least I was reading. Also, it was better than a lot of the other trouble that some of her friends’ children were getting into. I think she appreciated that I really did enjoy the art and the storytelling and that, as I showed her things that I was reading later on, that they were not just literary, but also meaty.

I talked to her about some of the plots and things that were happening in X-Men and it dispelled the impression she had that these were lightweight stories. She saw the power of me seeing people trying to do the right thing, because it was the right thing to do. She saw it was having an impact on my outlook on life. Over time, she really warmed to it.

And then I went into government because, one, I felt very strongly about what I could do in that space. But two, it was a steady paycheck and a slightly more reliable job with insurance and some benefits and things like that. That was just the decision I had to make as I was looking at careers.

I was the guy in the office who was always talking about comics. When we had to give gifts at the end of the year for Christmas or the holidays, I would give everybody a graphic novel or a comic that I thought spoke to who they were. My first job out of college was working for Lieutenant Governor of Connecticut and I gave him Pride of Baghdad. The initial reaction as everybody got their present was like, “Comic book, that’s cute.” But then, Kevin went and read it and he was like, “This is really good.” It was the height of the Iraq war, and what Brian K. Vaughan did with that was so innovative and particularly uniquely successful in the comics medium. That’s a story that works because it’s a comic. I think it changed his mind a little bit about what comics were at that time.

And so, that’s how it carried into my life over time.

What is it about comics that makes it such a powerful medium?

Fundamentally, comics are sequential narrative as a language. It is the most universal human way to communicate. From cave paintings to cuneiform and hieroglyphics to the Twelve Labors of Hercules to what we think of as the modern comics. Pictures telling a story in order has been how we’ve always communicated. As we develop the written language, words and pictures together are the way to reach the most people with the most information the most quickly. And it allows, essentially, information to transfer from one brain to another, or from one medium into a brain more quickly and more efficiently than anything else. think we’ve only begun to scratch the surface of what it can be used for.

There’s this idea that it’s just superheroes and that’s what they’re for, but that’s just one piece. I think about Will Eisner making manuals for repairing planes and other machines during World War II. The military saw very clearly in those moments, where preconceptions or prejudgments were dangerous, that to survive they had to move quickly, move fast, and be right. In those moments, that’s when they throw all that aside and embrace it and it works and it keeps planes in the air. It keeps people alive because people are able to learn more quickly using the medium.

In my own work, the research on Martin Luther King and the Montgomery story and how it was used to inspire some of the earliest acts of civil disobedience of the movement is another example where the medium grew and served yet another purpose within that framework of teaching people more efficiently. But it also added this other element that, in my graduate thesis, I called “manufacturing lightning.” The idea being, How do you manufacture a lightning bolt moment? Would you change someone’s mind?

These are not just tools for information dissemination, they’re tools for inspiration. And comics—because of how wholly they engage the senses, stimulating both the art brain and the analytical brain—can help people unlock greater understandings, which then influence their actions and their decision making.

I wonder what moments are happening right now, where comics are lighting people up, especially with all the protests that are happening globally.

I think the most immediate example we have is March. When John Lewis and I first published March, following the procedure or the rules of nonviolent civil disobedience, we wrote out our objectives, which we said were twofold. One was to educate the young people on the history of what happened during the movement. And two was to give them a roadmap to inspire a new nonviolent revolution. We wrote this out in 2013. By 2019, March became one of the most widely taught graphic novels in America. You had the first generation of students growing up with civil rights education pervasively taught in their schools because of March.

So, it came as no surprise that, by 2020, you saw the uprisings happening. You saw Black Lives Matter written down the streets of Washington, just like the cover of March Book 3 emulating it. You saw places like the March For Our Lives come out of this tragedy with the Marjory Stoneman shooting. We had, just weeks before that tragic incident, been in Miami-Dade County doing a reading program where the Knight Foundation gave out thousands of copies of March to the students.

There’s no coincidence that these things happened as they did. It shows the power of the medium. Like we were just saying, it shows the power to inspire. I think the unique thing about comics is that it is an inherently positive medium. It is very difficult to teach hate through comics, but it is very easy to teach love through comics.

What is your advice to young writers and comics creators today?

I think the first rule, if you want to make comics, is to make comics. My small publishing company is releasing a comic in a few weeks called Comics of the Movement. It pairs Martin Luther King and the Montgomery Story with comics made by SNCC in 1966. And they were used to educate and inspire people to participate in the first election after the Voting Rights Act was passed, which was particularly challenging for these Black voters who’ve never been allowed to vote, who were scared to vote, who didn’t know what that process was like. And so, they wanted to reach as many people as they could, and it was the most cost-effective way they could come up with.

But the reason we wanted to bring them back into print for the first time is that we wanted to show how simple they were, that they were just drawings and very simple layouts. But the information, the sequential narrative of it, made them incredibly informative and incredibly useful. I think sometimes we get a little wrapped up in what a comic should look like. And I think a comic looks like whatever you want it to look like, whether it’s six and a half inches by 10 and a half inches, or whether it’s three inches by six inches, it is a piece of paper with drawings and words, and you can make that canvas into anything you want it to be. And the best way to start is just to start.

If we really want to get into it, don’t be afraid to pitch. I think the story of my career is rejection. Every time I come up with an idea, I spend I don’t know how long having everyone tell me, “No, it’s a terrible idea.” But then, you find that one person or you start it on your own and then it becomes March. And if you listen to those people who don’t have the vision or the understanding that you do, you’re allowing them to determine your future. And you can’t do that because everyone sees the world differently. And we all have something that gives our perspective a unique element.

It’s like Appalachia Comics, which was inspired by a graduate thesis that I read by a woman named Elon Justice, who published it in 2021 through the MIT Media Lab. In it, she made some critical observations about the depiction of Appalachia and popular media, and that it is being used to perpetuate stereotypes that take away the power of the people of this region.

What we’re trying to do through the Appalachia Comics Project is to change that, to give the power back to the people of this region, to control their own depiction so that they are able to find their voice, but also to reemerge as an important culture within the United States that is more diverse than people understand, that has a rich and complicated history that people don’t understand, and that has tremendous value that has influenced this country for generations.

With that, when I went around to a lot of the foundations at first, they all looked at me like I had three heads. I’m pointing at March saying, “Trust me.” And they didn’t necessarily see it. But you keep pitching, you keep pitching. And I hope what we can do is be a vehicle for that sort of change so that people can find as many creators as we can who wouldn’t otherwise have the opportunity to tell their stories, to be creators, so that they can show the unique and special things that they see in Appalachia, in their history, in their community and in their culture.

That’s how I came to Kickstarter and y’all got it, y’all understood the importance of what we were doing and the potential for what it could become. And you get those people, the people who see the future, the people who understand the world a little bit differently—find them and work with them and be grateful for their help.

And then, the sky’s the limit. As long as you’re willing to be persistent, to have resilience, to not be frustrated just because someone else doesn’t understand your vision. You just have to be dogged. Then, one day you look up and people are like, “It was an overnight success.” And you’re like, “Yeah. That was like a 10-year night in that case.” It’s just the way it is. And it’s very rare that anyone’s going to hand you a golden opportunity. You have to make that opportunity for yourself.

I’ve talked to a number of creators who have a specific vision, where they want to explore a particular piece of media or have a specific thing to say that, from a larger perspective, probably doesn’t gel with the majority. But like I always tell them, just fuck them. Just make what you want to make and you’ll find the people who get it. The peole who are interested in it will come find you and be adamant about it and supportive of it and excited about it.

I have a writing or mentor friend who’s older, who’s been around a long time and done a lot of things that I looked up to as a kid. He has this unbelievable attitude where he’s just always happy to be there, it all rolls off his back like water off of a duck’s back. And I asked him, after watching him for a little while and being like, “How do you stay like that?” And he’s like, “fuck ‘em, man.” And now, over the years now, whenever I’m having one of those moments or he’s having one of those moments or something works, we’ll text back and forth, “fuck ‘em.” And then, the other one will be like, “Hell, yeah.”

And that’s it, right? Just because they don’t see it doesn’t mean you’re wrong. If everybody could see reality or see the future or see the potential, our world would be a better place because there would be more understanding. But if anything is evident in this world, it is that there’s a tremendous amount of misunderstanding. And so, You can’t rely on other people’s opinion to set your course. You have to be your own navigator, and you have to do what you believe in. And if they don’t believe in it too, fuck ‘em.

I make role-playing games. Most of mine are Power Rangers focused, but it’s more about the character development and relationships rather than the action. And a lot of people don’t like that because they want the action. They want to punch and kick. I’m like, “Great, go make your own game. If you want that, go do it. I made this thing that I’m interested in and my thing is valid. Your thing can be valid, too.”

I’m trying to take the attitude with criticism of saying, “I took the time to make the game, and you can, too.” Everything we make is valid and we can have a better society if we’re all making stuff that we’re interested in.

You’re making a key point here, which is that just because you don’t like something or you don’t see the potential in something, maybe keep that to yourself. We don’t need to go around policing everybody else’s actions or what they make or what their art is. Art is a personal expression. Storytelling is a personal expression. Making comics or anything else, it’s a personal expression. And I think there’s too many people out there who get too much of their self-worth off of criticizing other people, and these people doing the criticizing aren’t making any works themselves. If we get past that, if we can get to a place where we’re just, “Great, I’m really proud of you. You finished something. You tried…” That’s where we have great discoveries. That’s where new ideas come about. We’ve got to get to a place where we appreciate people creating and not denigrating people because it’s not what we would’ve created.

That’s something I try really hard to do because people ask me for advice and what I think they should do, and I tell them what I think, but that’s my opinion. That’s how I would do it. You have to do it your way and it will be different. It will inevitably be something else because it is through your prism, your experiences, your ideas, your loves, your hates, all these sorts of things. But it goes back to what we said earlier where comics are so good at teaching love, and not very good at teaching hate. I think if we all approach the medium and the industry with a perspective, which is that love everyone who is doing the work, that is the hard part.

And be grateful that they are participating in this medium as well. Because you never know, it may be that person who inspires the first reader that then becomes the reader for your work and the advocate for it that helps get it out into the world. We’re an ecosystem. We’re dependent on each other. It’s a very fragile ecosystem. And so, we should be lifting all of each other up and trying to find a way to help everyone make a living and being honest with each other and just try and make more cool things.

Andrew Aydin Recommends:

Alan Tudyk’s web show “Con Man

Demon Copperhead by Barbara Kingsolver

The Pedestrian by Joey Esposito and Sean Von Gorman

The Food Lab by J. Kenji Lopez-Alt

Start Here by Sohla El-Waylly


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sam Kusek.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/writer-andrew-aydin-on-being-persistent-with-your-vision/feed/ 0 543172
‘Happy 90th Birthday’ to the Dalai Lama as thousands celebrate in Dharamsala | Radio Free Asia (RFA) https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/happy-90th-birthday-to-the-dalai-lama-radio-free-asia-rfa/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/happy-90th-birthday-to-the-dalai-lama-radio-free-asia-rfa/#respond Mon, 07 Jul 2025 02:43:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=0d681c7a3cf0ea20ce3d8bc34e48f3e5
This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Radio Free Asia.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/07/happy-90th-birthday-to-the-dalai-lama-radio-free-asia-rfa/feed/ 0 543093
Mahmoud Khalil describes the moment he missed his son’s birth https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/mahmoud-khalil-describes-the-moment-he-missed-his-sons-birth/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/mahmoud-khalil-describes-the-moment-he-missed-his-sons-birth/#respond Sun, 06 Jul 2025 17:57:37 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=48f5e747c562c9996fd8a7159fb3810f
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/mahmoud-khalil-describes-the-moment-he-missed-his-sons-birth/feed/ 0 543078
The Rainbow Warrior saga. Part 2: Nuclear refugees in the Pacific – the evacuation of Rongelap https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-part-2-nuclear-refugees-in-the-pacific-the-evacuation-of-rongelap/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-part-2-nuclear-refugees-in-the-pacific-the-evacuation-of-rongelap/#respond Sun, 06 Jul 2025 13:58:11 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117097 COMMENTARY:  By Eugene Doyle

On the last voyage of the Rainbow Warrior prior to its sinking by French secret agents in Auckland harbour on 10 July 1985 the ship had evacuated the entire population of 320 from Rongelap in the Marshall Islands.

After conducting dozens of above-ground nuclear explosions, the US government had left the population in conditions that suggested the islanders were being used as guinea pigs to gain knowledge of the effects of radiation.

Cancers, birth defects, and genetic damage ripped through the population; their former fisheries and land are contaminated to this day.

Denied adequate support from the US – they turned to Greenpeace with an SOS: help us leave our ancestral homeland; it is killing our people. The Rainbow Warrior answered the call.

Human lab rats or our brothers and sisters?
Dr Merrill Eisenbud, a physicist in the US Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) famously said in 1956 of the Marshall Islanders:  “While it is true that these people do not live, I might say, the way Westerners do, civilised people, it is nevertheless also true that they are more like us than the mice.”

Dr Eisenbud also opined that exposure “would provide valuable information on the effects of radiation on human beings.”  That research continues to this day.

A half century of testing nuclear bombs
Within a year of dropping nuclear bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki, the US moved part of its test programme to the central Pacific.  Bikini Atoll in the Marshall Islands was used for atmospheric explosions from 1946 with scant regard for the indigenous population.

In 1954, the Castle Bravo test exploded a 15-megaton bomb —  one thousand times more deadly than the one dropped on Hiroshima.  As a result, the population of Rongelap were exposed to 200 roentgens of radiation, considered life-threatening without medical intervention. And it was.

Part of the Marshall Islands, with Bikini Atoll and Rongelap in the top left
Part of the Marshall Islands, with Bikini Atoll and Rongelap in the top left. Image: www.solidarity.co.nz

Total US tests equaled more than 7000 Hiroshimas.  The Clinton administration released the aptly-named Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), report in January 1994 in which it acknowledged:

“What followed was a program by the US government — initially the Navy and then the AEC and its successor agencies — to provide medical care for the exposed population, while at the same time trying to learn as much as possible about the long-term biological effects of radiation exposure. The dual purpose of what is now a DOE medical program has led to a view by the Marshallese that they were being used as ‘guinea pigs’ in a ‘radiation experiment’.

This impression was reinforced by the fact that the islanders were deliberately left in place and then evacuated, having been heavily radiated. Three years later they were told it was “safe to return” despite the lead scientist calling Rongelap “by far the most contaminated place in the world”.

Significant compensation paid by the US to the Marshall Islands has proven inadequate given the scale of the contamination.  To some degree, the US has also used money to achieve capture of elite interest groups and secure ongoing control of the islands.

Entrusted to the US, the Marshall Islanders were treated like the civilians of Nagasaki
The US took the Marshall Islands from Japan in 1944.  The only “right” it has to be there was granted by the United Nations which in 1947 established the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, to be administered by the United States.

What followed was an abuse of trust worse than rapists at a state care facility.  Using the very powers entrusted to it to protect the Marshallese, the US instead used the islands as a nuclear laboratory — violating both the letter and spirit of international law.

Fellow white-dominated countries like Australia and New Zealand couldn’t have cared less and let the indigenous people be irradiated for decades.

The betrayal of trust by the US was comprehensive and remains so to this day:

Under Article 76 of the UN Charter, all trusteeship agreements carried obligations. The administering power was required to:

  • Promote the political, economic, social, and educational advancement of the people
  • Protect the rights and well-being of the inhabitants
  • Help them advance toward self-government or independence.

Under Article VI, the United States solemnly pledged to “Protect the inhabitants against the loss of their lands and resources.”  Very similar to sentiments in New Zealand’s Treaty of Waitangi.  Within a few years the Americans were exploding the biggest nuclear bombs in history over the islands.

Within a year of the US assuming trusteeship of the islands, another pillar of international law came into effect: the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948) — which affirms the inherent dignity and equal rights of all humans. Exposing colonised peoples to extreme radiation for weapons testing is a racist affront to this.

America has a long history of making treaties and fine speeches and then exploiting indigenous peoples.  Last year, I had the sobering experience of reading American military historian Peter Cozzens’ The Earth is Weeping, a history of the “Indian wars” for the American West.

The past is not dead: the Marshall Islands are a hive of bases, laboratories and missile testing; Americans are also incredibly busy attacking the population in Gaza today.

Eyes of Fire – the last voyage of the Rainbow Warrior
Had the French not sunk the Rainbow Warrior after it reached Auckland from the Rongelap evacuation, it would have led a flotilla to protest nuclear testing at Moruroa in French Polynesia.  So the bookends of this article are the abuse of defenceless people in the charge of one nuclear power — the US —  and the abuse of New Zealand and the peoples of French Polynesia by another nuclear power — France.

Senator Jeton Anjain (left) of Rongelap and Greenpeace campaign coordinator Steve Sawyer on board the Rainbow Warrior
Senator Jeton Anjain (left) of Rongelap and Greenpeace campaign coordinator Steve Sawyer on board the Rainbow Warrior . . . challenging the abuse of defenceless people under the charge of one nuclear power. Image: David Robie/Eyes of Fire

This incredible story, and much more, is the subject of David Robie’s outstanding book Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior, published by Little Island Press, which has been relaunched to mark the 40th anniversary of the French terrorist attack.

A new prologue by former prime minister Helen Clark and a preface by Greenpeace’s Bunny McDiarmid, along with an extensive postscript which bring us up to the present day, underline why the past is not dead; it’s with us right now.

Between them, France and the US have exploded more than 300 nuclear bombs in the Pacific. Few people are told this; few people know this.

Today, a matrix of issues combine — the ongoing effects of nuclear contamination, sea rise imperilling Pacific nations, colonialism still posing immense challenges to people in the Marshall Islands, Kanaky New Caledonia and in many parts of our region.

Unsung heroes
Our media never ceases to share the pronouncements of European leaders and news from the US and Europe but the leaders and issues of the Pacific are seldom heard. The heroes of the antinuclear movement should be household names in Australia and New Zealand.

Vanuatu’s great leader Father Walter Lini; Oscar Temaru, Mayor, later President of French Polynesia; Senator Jeton Anjain, Darlene Keju-Johnson and so many others.

Do we know them?  Have we heard their voices?

Jobod Silk, climate activist, said in a speech welcoming the Rainbow Warrior III to Majuro earlier this year:  “Our crusade for nuclear justice intertwines with our fight against the tides.”

Nuclear-Free and Independent Pacific . . . the Rainbow Warrior
Nuclear-Free and Independent Pacific . . . the Rainbow Warrior taking on board Rongelap islanders ready for their first of four relocation voyages to Mejatto island. Image: David Robie/Eyes of Fire

Former Tuvalu PM Enele Sapoaga castigated Australia for the AUKUS submarine deal which he said “was crafted in secret by former Prime Minister Scott Morrison with no public discussion.”

He challenged the bigger regional powers, particularly Australia and New Zealand, to remember that the existential threat faced by Pacific nations comes first from climate change, and reminded New Zealanders of the commitment to keeping the South Pacific nuclear-free.

Hinamoeura Cross, a Tahitian anti-nuclear activist and politician, said in a 2019 UN speech: “Today, the damage is done. My people are sick. For 30 years we were the mice in France’s laboratory.”

Until we learn their stories and know their names as well as we know those of Marco Rubio or Keir Starmer, we will remain strangers in our own lands.

The Pacific owes them, along with the people of Greenpeace, a huge debt.  They put their bodies on the line to stop the aggressors. Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira, killed by the French in 1985, was just one of many victims, one of many heroes.

A great way to honour the sacrifice of those who stood up for justice, who stood for peace and a nuclear-free Pacific, and who honoured our own national identity would be to buy David Robie’s excellent book.

You cannot sink a rainbow.

Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira
Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira being welcomed to Rongelap Atoll by a villager in May 1985 barely two months before he was killed by French secret agents during the sabotage of the Rainbow Warrior. Image: David Robie/Eyes of Fire


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-part-2-nuclear-refugees-in-the-pacific-the-evacuation-of-rongelap/feed/ 0 543063
Legends of a Nuclear-Free and Independent Pacific – Octo Mote https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/legends-of-a-nuclear-free-and-independent-pacific-octo-mote/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/legends-of-a-nuclear-free-and-independent-pacific-octo-mote/#respond Sun, 06 Jul 2025 11:25:59 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=117083 Pacific Media Watch

West Papuan independence advocate Octovianus Mote was in Aotearoa New Zealand late last year seeking support for independence for West Papua, which has been ruled by Indonesia for more than six decades.

Mote is vice-president of the United Liberation Movement for West Papua (ULMWP) and was hosted in New Zealand by the Green Party, which Mote said had always been a “hero” for West Papua.

He spoke at a West Papua seminar at the Māngere Mountain Education Centre and in this Talanoa TV segment he offers prayers for the West Papuan solidarity movement.

In a “blessing for peace and justice”, Octo Mote spoke of his hopes for the West Papuan struggle for independence at lunch at the Mount Albert home of New Zealand activist Maire Leadbeater in September 2024.

He gave a tribute to Leadbeater and the Whānau Community Centre and Hub’s Nik Naidu, saying:

“We remember those who cannot eat like us, especially those who oppressed . . . The 80,000 people in Papua who have had to flee their homes because of the Indonesian military operations.”

Video: Nik Naidu, Talanoa TV


Blessings by Octo Mote.               Video: Talanoa TV

On Saturday, 12 July 2025 Te Atatu MP Phil Twyford will open the week-long Nuclear Free and Independent Pacific (NFIP) exhibition at the Ellen Melville Centre Women’s Pioneer Hall at 3pm.

https://www.facebook.com/events/1856900961820487/

Poster for the Legends of the Pacific: Stories of a Nuclear-Free Moana 1975-1995 exhibition
Poster for the Legends of the Pacific: Stories of a Nuclear-Free Moana 1975-1995 exhibition, July 13-18.


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/legends-of-a-nuclear-free-and-independent-pacific-octo-mote/feed/ 0 543050
Louis Theroux and the West Bank Settlers https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/louis-theroux-and-the-west-bank-settlers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/louis-theroux-and-the-west-bank-settlers/#respond Sun, 06 Jul 2025 04:14:46 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159704 He has made it his bread and butter for years: finding society’s kooky representatives, the marginal, the crazed and the touched. But what makes Louis Theroux’s The Settlers troubling is its examination of a seemingly inexorable process in the West Bank, one that has, at its core, a religious, nationalist goal of cleansing and violent […]

The post Louis Theroux and the West Bank Settlers first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
He has made it his bread and butter for years: finding society’s kooky representatives, the marginal, the crazed and the touched. But what makes Louis Theroux’s The Settlers troubling is its examination of a seemingly inexorable process in the West Bank, one that has, at its core, a religious, nationalist goal of cleansing and violent purification. The documentary captures Israel’s modern colonial project in real time, and it is one most ugly.

The target of the cleansing and eradication – the Palestinians in the West Bank – is awesomely horrific, rationalised by suffocating checkpoints, brooding military posts and endless harassing points of invigilation. Having already made The Ultra Zionists, a documentary on the same subject in 2011, Theroux finds, notably after the attacks by Hamas on Israel on October 7, 2023, a missionary project of hardened purpose. The edge on the “ultra” has been taken off. The fringe has moved to the centre.

Sanitised areas (the language of ethnic scrubbing) pullulate with armed settlers holding forth with pious defiance in outposts of a land seen as promised to them. One figure interviewed, the gun-toting Texas-born settler Ari Abramowitz, sees the Bible as supplying Jews “a land deed to the West Bank.” Palestinian shopfronts remain closed for security reasons, and Palestinians barred from visiting designated areas without appropriate approval. Theroux’s guide and local peace activist Issa Amro is unable to accompany him to areas in Hebron where settlers are offered continuous military protection.

When Theroux and his guides visit a ruined Palestinian home in Tuwuni in the night, an IDF patrol with laser sights is not far behind. At one checkpoint, Theroux is accosted by a balaclava-wearing Israeli soldier, provoking him to bark “Don’t touch me”. They are solid reminders to Palestinians living in the West Bank that they are living on borrowed time, a measure that diminishes with each day.

Daniella Weiss emerges as a central character, a figure who has led the Israeli settler movement for half a century. She reveals being clandestinely escorted by the sympathetic soldiers of the Israeli Defense Forces into Gaza to scout for possible future settlements. (800 families, goes the proud claim, await moving into them.) She grins, mocks and scorns, but does, at some point, demonstrate to Theroux her view about settler violence. For her, it does not exist. In that familiar pattern, even if it did exist, it would be justifiable because of Palestinian violence. When Theroux says he had seen a video of a Palestinian being shot, Weiss retorts that the Israel shooter was merely retaliating. She proceeds to shove him, hoping he returns the serve. He considers the display sociopathic. Yet sociopathy and the limitless well of self-defence are firm friends for Weiss and any number of IDF personnel and lawyers who see their cause as worthy. All are incapable of violence, incapable of genocide.

Critics have taken issue with the lens of the documentary, suggesting that the camera can deceive because of its sharp focus. The sampling of settlers shows them as almost comically villainous, their fanaticism icy and cruelty assured. The British-Palestinian writer and activist John Aziz was frustrated by the “selection of nasty extremists who lurched between denying the existence of Palestinians and expressing the desire to conquer more land and drive out the Arab inhabitants.” He even takes issue with the keen interest in Weiss, curious given that any program about Israeli settlements would look bare without her starring role.

Aziz misses the point in his demand for an elusive nuance. People once seen as marginalised pioneers seeking land in the West Bank have become the spear of the government of Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu. After October 7, 2023, it has become modish to entertain notions of expulsion, dispossession and seizure, to finally bury Palestinian notions of self-determination. National security minister Itamar Ben-Gvir, leader of the far-right Otzma Yehudit party and follower of the teachings of Meir Kahane, a Brooklyn rabbi who, after moving to Israel, declared “the idea of a democratic Jewish state [a] nonsense”, is symptomatic of this shift. Convicted on eight charges, among them supporting a terrorist organisation and incitement to racism, Ben-Gvir regularly advocates ethnic cleansing of both the West Bank and Gaza.

In May this year, the Israeli Security Cabinet initiated the land registration process in Area C in the West Bank, a process which determines final ownership of land and extinguishes other claims. The Ministry of Defense was unequivocal about the goal of this move in a statement: “to strengthen, consolidate, and expand Jewish settlement in Judea and Samaria.”

While the Israeli settlers seem to fail to see the Palestinians as human beings with valid territorial claims, international law has little time for the legality of the settlements. They are structures of a colonising project, and one regarded as unlawful. In its advisory opinion from July 2024, the International Court of Justice found that Israel’s continued presence in the Occupied Palestinian Territory was “a wrongful act of a continuing character which has been brought about by Israel’s violations, through its policies and practices, of the prohibition on the acquisition of territory by force and the right to self-determination of the Palestinian people.”

The settler project can also count on abundant support from the private sector. In her report to the UN Human Rights Council From economy of occupation to economy of genocide Francesca Albanese, the Special Rapporteur on the situation of human rights in the Palestinian territories occupied since 1967, lashes “corporate entities” international and local who have been enriched by “the Israeli economy of illegal occupation, apartheid and now genocide.” This includes heavy investments in the West Bank colonising enterprise, be it through supplying logistics, construction equipment and building materials. With the Israeli settlers being the shock troops of the Israeli State, Weiss’s boast captured by Theroux is being realised: “We do for governments what they can’t do for themselves.”

See also:

Theroux’s Film on Israel’s Violent Settlers Was a Mirror
by Jonathan Cook / May 13th, 2025

Jewish Settler-Colonialists
by Kim Petersen / May 2nd, 2025

The post Louis Theroux and the West Bank Settlers first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/06/louis-theroux-and-the-west-bank-settlers/feed/ 0 543031
Greed: The Survival of a Primitive Emotion https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/greed-the-survival-of-a-primitive-emotion/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/greed-the-survival-of-a-primitive-emotion/#respond Sat, 05 Jul 2025 15:15:56 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159685 Congressional passage of Donald Trump’s “Big, Beautiful Bill” provides the latest evidence that human greed, despite its primitive nature, remains alive and well. Perhaps most noticeably, the legislation provides for over $3 trillion in tax cuts that disproportionately help the wealthy and their corporations. This largesse is facilitated by slashing over $1.4 trillion in healthcare […]

The post Greed: The Survival of a Primitive Emotion first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Congressional passage of Donald Trump’s “Big, Beautiful Bill” provides the latest evidence that human greed, despite its primitive nature, remains alive and well.

Perhaps most noticeably, the legislation provides for over $3 trillion in tax cuts that disproportionately help the wealthy and their corporations. This largesse is facilitated by slashing over $1.4 trillion in healthcare and food assistance for low-income Americans and increasing the national debt by $3.3 trillion. Estimates reveal that at least 16 million Americans will lose health care coverage and 7 million people (including 2 million children) will lose food aid or have their food aid cut significantly. Meanwhile, according to the Yale Budget Lab, the nation’s top 0.1 percent―people with an annual income over $3.3 million―will receive tax cuts of $103,500 on average. Condemning the legislation, the president of the U.S. Conference of Catholic Bishops declared simply that it “takes from the poor to give to the wealthy.”

Other measures in the legislation supporting the wealthy and their businesses at public expense include financial subsidies for coal, oil, and gas companies, the opening of opportunities for oil and gas corporations to drill on public lands (including the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge and the National Petroleum Reserve), and the reduction of royalty fees for such fossil fuel drilling.

Of course, this kind of class legislation and the greed that inspires it are nothing new. Throughout history, some people have amassed great fortunes, often with the assistance of governments and other powerful entities. Kings, princes, and their courtiers provided themselves with castles, vast landed estates, and other perquisites of wealth, while millions of their subjects lived in miserable huts and dug a few potatoes out of their fields in a desperate effort to survive. In later years, this situation was replicated to some extent as business titans garnered great wealth by exploiting workers in factories, mines, and fields.

Although this pattern of economic inequality was viewed as immoral by every great religious and ethical system, it did have a brutal logic to it. After all, in these situations of overall scarcity, some people would be poor and some would surely die. By contrast, growing rich helped guarantee survival for oneself and one’s family.

But with the advent of the industrial revolution, these tragic circumstances began to dissipate, for human beings increasingly possessed the knowledge, skills, and resources that had the potential to produce decent lives for everyone. Indeed, as science, technology, and factory output advanced and produced unprecedented abundance, there was no longer any morally justifiable basis for the existence of hunger, homelessness, and mass sickness.

In these altered conditions, avarice has become increasingly irrational―the driving force behind irrational men like Donald Trump and his billionaire friends, who, even as millions of people live and die in poverty and misery, seek to wallow in great wealth.

Gandhi put it concisely when he declared, decades ago: “The world has enough for everyone’s need, but not enough for everyone’s greed.”

Fortunately, over the course of human history, humane thinkers, social movements, and political parties have worked to rein in untrammeled greed in the interest of a better life for all humanity. In recent centuries, they have recognized the fact that sharing the wealth is not only a moral stance, but a feasible one.

Let’s hope, then, that despite this brazen and regressive move by the Trump administration to bolster economic privilege at the expense of human needs, the forces favoring human equality and compassion will ultimately prevail.

The post Greed: The Survival of a Primitive Emotion first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Lawrence S. Wittner.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/greed-the-survival-of-a-primitive-emotion/feed/ 0 543014
Greed: The Survival of a Primitive Emotion https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/greed-the-survival-of-a-primitive-emotion-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/greed-the-survival-of-a-primitive-emotion-2/#respond Sat, 05 Jul 2025 15:15:56 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159685 Congressional passage of Donald Trump’s “Big, Beautiful Bill” provides the latest evidence that human greed, despite its primitive nature, remains alive and well. Perhaps most noticeably, the legislation provides for over $3 trillion in tax cuts that disproportionately help the wealthy and their corporations. This largesse is facilitated by slashing over $1.4 trillion in healthcare […]

The post Greed: The Survival of a Primitive Emotion first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Congressional passage of Donald Trump’s “Big, Beautiful Bill” provides the latest evidence that human greed, despite its primitive nature, remains alive and well.

Perhaps most noticeably, the legislation provides for over $3 trillion in tax cuts that disproportionately help the wealthy and their corporations. This largesse is facilitated by slashing over $1.4 trillion in healthcare and food assistance for low-income Americans and increasing the national debt by $3.3 trillion. Estimates reveal that at least 16 million Americans will lose health care coverage and 7 million people (including 2 million children) will lose food aid or have their food aid cut significantly. Meanwhile, according to the Yale Budget Lab, the nation’s top 0.1 percent―people with an annual income over $3.3 million―will receive tax cuts of $103,500 on average. Condemning the legislation, the president of the U.S. Conference of Catholic Bishops declared simply that it “takes from the poor to give to the wealthy.”

Other measures in the legislation supporting the wealthy and their businesses at public expense include financial subsidies for coal, oil, and gas companies, the opening of opportunities for oil and gas corporations to drill on public lands (including the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge and the National Petroleum Reserve), and the reduction of royalty fees for such fossil fuel drilling.

Of course, this kind of class legislation and the greed that inspires it are nothing new. Throughout history, some people have amassed great fortunes, often with the assistance of governments and other powerful entities. Kings, princes, and their courtiers provided themselves with castles, vast landed estates, and other perquisites of wealth, while millions of their subjects lived in miserable huts and dug a few potatoes out of their fields in a desperate effort to survive. In later years, this situation was replicated to some extent as business titans garnered great wealth by exploiting workers in factories, mines, and fields.

Although this pattern of economic inequality was viewed as immoral by every great religious and ethical system, it did have a brutal logic to it. After all, in these situations of overall scarcity, some people would be poor and some would surely die. By contrast, growing rich helped guarantee survival for oneself and one’s family.

But with the advent of the industrial revolution, these tragic circumstances began to dissipate, for human beings increasingly possessed the knowledge, skills, and resources that had the potential to produce decent lives for everyone. Indeed, as science, technology, and factory output advanced and produced unprecedented abundance, there was no longer any morally justifiable basis for the existence of hunger, homelessness, and mass sickness.

In these altered conditions, avarice has become increasingly irrational―the driving force behind irrational men like Donald Trump and his billionaire friends, who, even as millions of people live and die in poverty and misery, seek to wallow in great wealth.

Gandhi put it concisely when he declared, decades ago: “The world has enough for everyone’s need, but not enough for everyone’s greed.”

Fortunately, over the course of human history, humane thinkers, social movements, and political parties have worked to rein in untrammeled greed in the interest of a better life for all humanity. In recent centuries, they have recognized the fact that sharing the wealth is not only a moral stance, but a feasible one.

Let’s hope, then, that despite this brazen and regressive move by the Trump administration to bolster economic privilege at the expense of human needs, the forces favoring human equality and compassion will ultimately prevail.

The post Greed: The Survival of a Primitive Emotion first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Lawrence S. Wittner.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/greed-the-survival-of-a-primitive-emotion-2/feed/ 0 543015
We Will Never Forget that the BBC Has Helped to Enable a genocide https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/we-will-never-forget-that-the-bbc-has-helped-to-enable-a-genocide/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/we-will-never-forget-that-the-bbc-has-helped-to-enable-a-genocide/#respond Sat, 05 Jul 2025 15:10:45 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159681 A damning report has now confirmed what many of us already knew: that the BBC’s reporting of Israel’s war on Gaza is far from impartial. The Centre for Media Monitoring (CfMM) analysed the BBC’s coverage of the 12 months following Hamas’ one-day attack on 7 October 2023. Their huge report reveals a clear dynamic: “the marginalisation of […]

The post We Will Never Forget that the BBC Has Helped to Enable a genocide first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
A damning report has now confirmed what many of us already knew: that the BBC’s reporting of Israel’s war on Gaza is far from impartial.

The Centre for Media Monitoring (CfMM) analysed the BBC’s coverage of the 12 months following Hamas’ one-day attack on 7 October 2023. Their huge report reveals a clear dynamic: “the marginalisation of Palestinian suffering and the amplification of Israeli narratives.”

The report showed that, despite the killing of 34 times more Palestinians, the BBC gave Israeli deaths 33 times more coverage, interviewed more than twice as many Israelis as Palestinians (1,085 v 2,350), and shared the Israeli perspective 11 times more frequently than the Palestinian one (2,340 v 217).

Complicit in genocide

The report, which examined over 35,000 pieces of content produced by “the world’s most trusted broadcaster,” is full of similarly shocking evidence. But perhaps the most deplorable is the BBC’s failure to report confessions of genocidal intent by Israel’s leaders. Not a single BBC article reported Israel’s prime minister Netanyahu’s biblical “Amalek” reference – a people the Jews were commanded by God to annihilate – or president Herzog’s claim of Palestinian collective responsibility. Just 12 out of 3,873 articles bothered to mention former defence minister Gallant’s statement in which he referred to Palestinians as “human animals”, ordered “a complete siege on the Gaza strip”, and promised “we will eliminate everything”. Genocidal intent is notoriously difficult to prove when classifying an act as genocide, yet here are Israel’s own leaders, readily admitting their intention to wipe out an entire people.

Peter Oborne, one of several journalists to question the BBC about the findings in the report during a parliamentary meeting, said: “You never educated your audience about the genocidal remarks, and according to this report, on one hundred occasions, one hundred occasions, you’ve closed down the references to genocide by your guests. This makes you complicit.”

Lack of crucial context

Oborne’s brilliant tirade, which can be viewed here, also flagged the BBC’s failure to report on two Israeli military doctrines – the Hannibal directive and the Dayiha doctrine – which provide essential context to understanding Israel’s response to the 7 October attacks.

The Hannibal directive allows the Israeli military to use any force necessary to prevent its soldiers from being captured and taken into enemy territory – even if that means opening fire on those captives. A major investigation by Israeli newspaper Haaretz revealed that the procedure was activated during the 7 October attacks, and a UN report concluded that at least 14 Israeli civilians were deliberately killed by their own army on that day as a result of the directive. But as Israel refused to cooperate with the UN investigation – and barred medical professionals and others from doing so – we do not know the true figure. A year-long investigation by Electronic Intifada, however, found it to be in the hundreds.

The BBC has also never mentioned Israel’s Dahiya doctrine. Named after a Beirut suburb that was decimated by Israel in 2006, the Dahiya doctrine is the use of disproportionate force to destroy civilians and everything that supports them so that they will never again contemplate resistance. It is a form of collective punishment – and unquestionably a war crime – that has been applied to Gaza over the past 20 months. The BBC’s decision not to ever mention this doctrine is, as Oborne calls it, “a grotesque omission”, for it provides fundamental context to Israel’s devastating assault on Gaza following 7 October.

No desire to change

You only have to look at the representative the BBC chose to respond to the accusations in the report and defend its Gaza coverage to see how little it cares – and how unlikely it is to change. Richard Burgess, executive news editor at the BBC, admitted he’s “not a Middle East expert” and doesn’t claim to understand the doctrines. A rightly exasperated Oborne responded, “Then send someone along who does!” When a senior news editor is asked to justify their organisation’s coverage of what is widely considered a genocide, ignorance of the full facts is truly an appalling defense.

Soon after the report was released – as if to demonstrate its complete unwillingness to modify its pattern of bias – the BBC announced that its long-awaited documentary, Gaza: Doctors Under Attack, would not be aired. The film explores the systematic destruction of Gaza’s health service by Israeli forces as well as the abuse suffered by Palestinian medics. The BBC claimed that broadcasting the film could create “a perception of partiality”. But as former BBC journalist and news presenter Karishma Patel tweeted: “How? This film shows the reality of Israel’s actions. You can’t fling the accusation of bias at realities you simply don’t want on air.” Just as the harrowing documentary on life in Gaza seen through the eyes of Palestinian children was pulled by the BBC months previously, the BBC’s silencing of Palestinian voices appears to be institutional. It’s simply what it does.

Israel apologists

And just when you think it couldn’t get any worse, it does. On 27 June, the Israeli newspaper Haaretz published a horrific article about the Gaza Health Foundation (GHF) – the controversial Israeli-controlled aid distribution centres. The IDF soldiers Haaretz interviewed confirmed what Palestinians have been claiming for weeks: that soldiers are being ordered to massacre desperate, starving civilians queuing up for food. “It’s a killing field,” one soldier said. “Where I was stationed, between one and five people were killed every day. They’re treated like a hostile force – no crowd-control measures, no tear gas – just live fire with everything imaginable: heavy machine guns, grenade launchers, mortars.” Another added, “Sometimes we just charge at them from close range. But there’s no danger to the forces…I’m not aware of a single instance of return fire.”

Did the BBC pick up on this story? Of course it didn’t. It did however publish an ‘explainer’ about the shootings at GHF sites via its Verify service. BBC Verify calls itself a “specialist team of journalists” who “fact-check information, verify video, counter disinformation, and analyse data to separate fact from fake.” But rather than using actual testimony from IDF soldiers to corroborate reports of shootings, their specialist journalists looked at some video footage and concluded that they paint a murky picture: “While the videos show an overall picture of danger and chaos, they do not definitively show who is responsible for firing.”

The rest of the article reads like a PR piece for the government of Israel: Israeli government spokesman David Mencer is quoted saying that the reports of hundreds of civilians being killed is “another untruth”; Hamas are of course likely responsible; while a GHF spokesperson is “pleased” with its first month of operations. We know the BBC Verify journalists will have read the Haaretz article. That they chose to completely ignore it and concoct this pile of Israel apologia is frankly appalling.

The truth is coming out

The BBC obviously has no intention of reforming and will continue to provide cover for Israel’s crimes for as long as it possibly can. But despite their best efforts, the truth about Israel is finding its way out. The documentary that the BBC refused to air has now found a home on Channel 4 in the UK and on Zeteo News worldwide. And the BBC’s attempt to control their Glastonbury coverage by barring pro-Palestinian band Kneecap from their live broadcast, failed spectacularly when punk duo Bob Vylan chose to use their set to condemn Israel’s war crimes, live on air. Lead singer Bobby called out the UK and US for being “complicit in war crimes” and led chants of “free Palestine” and “death to the IDF”, which the crowd enthusiastically shouted back. The crowd’s response, and the fact that a huge number of other artists also spoke out in support of Palestine, suggests the tide is shifting.

True to form, the BBC swiftly removed Bob Vylan’s performance from iPlayer and released a grovelling statement expressing regret that it hadn’t pulled the live stream and describing Vylan’s words as “deeply offensive” and “utterly unacceptable.” That our state broadcaster is so quick to condemn words but ignores a massacre of unarmed civilians tells you everything you need to know about the BBC – and you can’t help but sense that it is losing control of the narrative. Anyone with any conscience simply cannot agree that calling out a genocide is worse than committing one.

History will not be kind to the genocide enablers. And thanks to reports like CfMM’s, we will always remember on whose side the BBC stood.

The post We Will Never Forget that the BBC Has Helped to Enable a genocide first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Sylvia Monkhouse.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/we-will-never-forget-that-the-bbc-has-helped-to-enable-a-genocide/feed/ 0 543001
We Will Never Forget that the BBC Has Helped to Enable a genocide https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/we-will-never-forget-that-the-bbc-has-helped-to-enable-a-genocide-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/we-will-never-forget-that-the-bbc-has-helped-to-enable-a-genocide-2/#respond Sat, 05 Jul 2025 15:10:45 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159681 A damning report has now confirmed what many of us already knew: that the BBC’s reporting of Israel’s war on Gaza is far from impartial. The Centre for Media Monitoring (CfMM) analysed the BBC’s coverage of the 12 months following Hamas’ one-day attack on 7 October 2023. Their huge report reveals a clear dynamic: “the marginalisation of […]

The post We Will Never Forget that the BBC Has Helped to Enable a genocide first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
A damning report has now confirmed what many of us already knew: that the BBC’s reporting of Israel’s war on Gaza is far from impartial.

The Centre for Media Monitoring (CfMM) analysed the BBC’s coverage of the 12 months following Hamas’ one-day attack on 7 October 2023. Their huge report reveals a clear dynamic: “the marginalisation of Palestinian suffering and the amplification of Israeli narratives.”

The report showed that, despite the killing of 34 times more Palestinians, the BBC gave Israeli deaths 33 times more coverage, interviewed more than twice as many Israelis as Palestinians (1,085 v 2,350), and shared the Israeli perspective 11 times more frequently than the Palestinian one (2,340 v 217).

Complicit in genocide

The report, which examined over 35,000 pieces of content produced by “the world’s most trusted broadcaster,” is full of similarly shocking evidence. But perhaps the most deplorable is the BBC’s failure to report confessions of genocidal intent by Israel’s leaders. Not a single BBC article reported Israel’s prime minister Netanyahu’s biblical “Amalek” reference – a people the Jews were commanded by God to annihilate – or president Herzog’s claim of Palestinian collective responsibility. Just 12 out of 3,873 articles bothered to mention former defence minister Gallant’s statement in which he referred to Palestinians as “human animals”, ordered “a complete siege on the Gaza strip”, and promised “we will eliminate everything”. Genocidal intent is notoriously difficult to prove when classifying an act as genocide, yet here are Israel’s own leaders, readily admitting their intention to wipe out an entire people.

Peter Oborne, one of several journalists to question the BBC about the findings in the report during a parliamentary meeting, said: “You never educated your audience about the genocidal remarks, and according to this report, on one hundred occasions, one hundred occasions, you’ve closed down the references to genocide by your guests. This makes you complicit.”

Lack of crucial context

Oborne’s brilliant tirade, which can be viewed here, also flagged the BBC’s failure to report on two Israeli military doctrines – the Hannibal directive and the Dayiha doctrine – which provide essential context to understanding Israel’s response to the 7 October attacks.

The Hannibal directive allows the Israeli military to use any force necessary to prevent its soldiers from being captured and taken into enemy territory – even if that means opening fire on those captives. A major investigation by Israeli newspaper Haaretz revealed that the procedure was activated during the 7 October attacks, and a UN report concluded that at least 14 Israeli civilians were deliberately killed by their own army on that day as a result of the directive. But as Israel refused to cooperate with the UN investigation – and barred medical professionals and others from doing so – we do not know the true figure. A year-long investigation by Electronic Intifada, however, found it to be in the hundreds.

The BBC has also never mentioned Israel’s Dahiya doctrine. Named after a Beirut suburb that was decimated by Israel in 2006, the Dahiya doctrine is the use of disproportionate force to destroy civilians and everything that supports them so that they will never again contemplate resistance. It is a form of collective punishment – and unquestionably a war crime – that has been applied to Gaza over the past 20 months. The BBC’s decision not to ever mention this doctrine is, as Oborne calls it, “a grotesque omission”, for it provides fundamental context to Israel’s devastating assault on Gaza following 7 October.

No desire to change

You only have to look at the representative the BBC chose to respond to the accusations in the report and defend its Gaza coverage to see how little it cares – and how unlikely it is to change. Richard Burgess, executive news editor at the BBC, admitted he’s “not a Middle East expert” and doesn’t claim to understand the doctrines. A rightly exasperated Oborne responded, “Then send someone along who does!” When a senior news editor is asked to justify their organisation’s coverage of what is widely considered a genocide, ignorance of the full facts is truly an appalling defense.

Soon after the report was released – as if to demonstrate its complete unwillingness to modify its pattern of bias – the BBC announced that its long-awaited documentary, Gaza: Doctors Under Attack, would not be aired. The film explores the systematic destruction of Gaza’s health service by Israeli forces as well as the abuse suffered by Palestinian medics. The BBC claimed that broadcasting the film could create “a perception of partiality”. But as former BBC journalist and news presenter Karishma Patel tweeted: “How? This film shows the reality of Israel’s actions. You can’t fling the accusation of bias at realities you simply don’t want on air.” Just as the harrowing documentary on life in Gaza seen through the eyes of Palestinian children was pulled by the BBC months previously, the BBC’s silencing of Palestinian voices appears to be institutional. It’s simply what it does.

Israel apologists

And just when you think it couldn’t get any worse, it does. On 27 June, the Israeli newspaper Haaretz published a horrific article about the Gaza Health Foundation (GHF) – the controversial Israeli-controlled aid distribution centres. The IDF soldiers Haaretz interviewed confirmed what Palestinians have been claiming for weeks: that soldiers are being ordered to massacre desperate, starving civilians queuing up for food. “It’s a killing field,” one soldier said. “Where I was stationed, between one and five people were killed every day. They’re treated like a hostile force – no crowd-control measures, no tear gas – just live fire with everything imaginable: heavy machine guns, grenade launchers, mortars.” Another added, “Sometimes we just charge at them from close range. But there’s no danger to the forces…I’m not aware of a single instance of return fire.”

Did the BBC pick up on this story? Of course it didn’t. It did however publish an ‘explainer’ about the shootings at GHF sites via its Verify service. BBC Verify calls itself a “specialist team of journalists” who “fact-check information, verify video, counter disinformation, and analyse data to separate fact from fake.” But rather than using actual testimony from IDF soldiers to corroborate reports of shootings, their specialist journalists looked at some video footage and concluded that they paint a murky picture: “While the videos show an overall picture of danger and chaos, they do not definitively show who is responsible for firing.”

The rest of the article reads like a PR piece for the government of Israel: Israeli government spokesman David Mencer is quoted saying that the reports of hundreds of civilians being killed is “another untruth”; Hamas are of course likely responsible; while a GHF spokesperson is “pleased” with its first month of operations. We know the BBC Verify journalists will have read the Haaretz article. That they chose to completely ignore it and concoct this pile of Israel apologia is frankly appalling.

The truth is coming out

The BBC obviously has no intention of reforming and will continue to provide cover for Israel’s crimes for as long as it possibly can. But despite their best efforts, the truth about Israel is finding its way out. The documentary that the BBC refused to air has now found a home on Channel 4 in the UK and on Zeteo News worldwide. And the BBC’s attempt to control their Glastonbury coverage by barring pro-Palestinian band Kneecap from their live broadcast, failed spectacularly when punk duo Bob Vylan chose to use their set to condemn Israel’s war crimes, live on air. Lead singer Bobby called out the UK and US for being “complicit in war crimes” and led chants of “free Palestine” and “death to the IDF”, which the crowd enthusiastically shouted back. The crowd’s response, and the fact that a huge number of other artists also spoke out in support of Palestine, suggests the tide is shifting.

True to form, the BBC swiftly removed Bob Vylan’s performance from iPlayer and released a grovelling statement expressing regret that it hadn’t pulled the live stream and describing Vylan’s words as “deeply offensive” and “utterly unacceptable.” That our state broadcaster is so quick to condemn words but ignores a massacre of unarmed civilians tells you everything you need to know about the BBC – and you can’t help but sense that it is losing control of the narrative. Anyone with any conscience simply cannot agree that calling out a genocide is worse than committing one.

History will not be kind to the genocide enablers. And thanks to reports like CfMM’s, we will always remember on whose side the BBC stood.

The post We Will Never Forget that the BBC Has Helped to Enable a genocide first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Sylvia Monkhouse.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/we-will-never-forget-that-the-bbc-has-helped-to-enable-a-genocide-2/feed/ 0 543002
CNN Anchor BOTCHES progressive candidate takedown, MSM has ‘knives out’ for Zohran Mamdani! https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/cnn-anchor-botches-progressive-candidate-takedown-msm-has-knives-out-for-zohran-mamdani/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/cnn-anchor-botches-progressive-candidate-takedown-msm-has-knives-out-for-zohran-mamdani/#respond Sat, 05 Jul 2025 11:01:15 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a8df669a53e9b1ff0aa97eb308138ada
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/cnn-anchor-botches-progressive-candidate-takedown-msm-has-knives-out-for-zohran-mamdani/feed/ 0 542976
The Pro-Palestine Speech Harvard Didn’t Want You To See https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/the-pro-palestine-speech-harvard-didnt-want-you-to-see/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/the-pro-palestine-speech-harvard-didnt-want-you-to-see/#respond Sat, 05 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=906530eb2ad5286b0d6b7ec7774095eb
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/the-pro-palestine-speech-harvard-didnt-want-you-to-see/feed/ 0 542974
Chicagoans tell #Trump "Go to hell!" on #independenceday https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/chicagoans-tell-trump-go-to-hell-on-independenceday/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/chicagoans-tell-trump-go-to-hell-on-independenceday/#respond Sat, 05 Jul 2025 00:37:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=78c3eb63492d898b3025a43d05ceeb19
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/05/chicagoans-tell-trump-go-to-hell-on-independenceday/feed/ 0 542950
Mark Carney’s Quiet Capitulations to Trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/mark-carneys-quiet-capitulations-to-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/mark-carneys-quiet-capitulations-to-trump/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 22:33:43 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/mark-carneys-quiet-capitulations-to-trump-schalk-20250703/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Owen Schalk.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/mark-carneys-quiet-capitulations-to-trump/feed/ 0 542940
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 4, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-4-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-4-2025/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=2f78192b1f79b26884b1d20b6a1d9efe Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 4, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-4-2025/feed/ 0 542954
The Silent https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-silent/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-silent/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 15:10:35 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159655 It would be over now. This Holocaust would be over now if all of you who privately claim to care publicly chose to do something – anything. If you could bring yourself to march and chant. If you could fly a flag. If you could wear a badge. If you could post a poster or […]

The post The Silent first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
It would be over now. This Holocaust would be over now if all of you who privately claim to care publicly chose to do something – anything. If you could bring yourself to march and chant. If you could fly a flag. If you could wear a badge. If you could post a poster or stick a sticker. If you could just turn up.

The polls say that most of you are on our side. Why do you leave us feeling alone? Why do you let the people who hate and murder feel so normal and accepted?

You came out of the woodwork to tell me I was brave for going to the other side of the world for the Global March to Gaza. I wasn’t brave, I was privileged. Millions would have joined if they could. They would have joined because we are all desperate to find ways of breaking through. Millions of people pour their hearts and souls and time and money beyond measure into this – this desperate screaming attempt to raise the alarm over things that can never be undone. The dead will never not be dead. Each day the number grows and these indelible violent acts will live in memory for generations of sorrow and generations of guilt. We are all sick of banging our heads against the brick wall of public immobility.

Oceans of tears are shed by a those brave enough to open their eyes and hearts to the sorrow. Many feel that they must bear witness to the graphic horrors even if it rips them to shreds. And you wont even click on a post, like a post, or share a post, let alone make a comment. Some force themselves to face nightmares, and you literally will not raise a finger for what you claim to believe in.

It has been so long and so lonely. The argument was won over a year ago, but the cruelty, the killing, the maiming, the starving, the destruction goes on. The polls show that most people know this is wrong, you just don’t care enough to do anything.

I was asked what I did over the summer for the work newsletter. I told them that I did Palestine solidarity activism. They told me it couldn’t be included in the newsletter because they didn’t want to be political. You asked what I did and I told you. Do you think censoring that is not political? Do you think your silence is not political? Do you think your inaction is not political? Do you think avoiding learning more because it might make you sad and angry isn’t a fucking political choice? Do you think history will look kindly on this generation of Western genocide enablers? It will not.

If everyone who tells pollsters that they are against the killing in Gaza took that tiny step further and said that they support Palestinian freedom because Palestinians are humans with human rights; and if every one of those people just wore that on a badge or put that on a bumper sticker it would change everything. It is such a small thing for each individual, but together the visual signal of where people stand would radically change the crucial presumptions of journalism and politics.

A ceasefire in Gaza will not end the genocide, it will merely lead to slow killing through deprivation and broken aid promises peppered with the violent ceasefire violations that Israel always practices. If Palestine is not liberated then in a few years another pretext will be found for another major massacre. This issue is not going away. It is time to choose to stand with what you believe, or to continue being a traitor to yourself.

Taking action is not hard. Facing reality is hard. Finding out that everything is worse than you thought. Finding out that the news media has to censor most of the newsworthy stories so they can maintain “balance”. Finding out that your leaders aren’t merely selfish and myopic, they are actively working to make the world safe for mass murder. Taking action ends the horrible tension of guilt, but it must be real action.

Don’t give money to seek some facile absolution. Money to people in Gaza does not make one morsel of food enter. Money fuels inflation, and inequality. Money pays bandits and profiteers. Real action means becoming active. Real action means taking on an identity and owning it.

No one can ever do enough. The small enjoyments and large privileges we have in life will always create dissonance and discomfort, but a clear conscience doesn’t require perfection, it requires earnest and vulnerable commitment. It requires that you make it part of who you are and deal with the social consequences as best you can. Once you do a burden will fall from you.

And for those who already are taking a stand it is time we stop making excuses for others. Our low expectations are not kindness nor humility, they are a type of arrogance. We are letting our society fall into an evil that demeans the individual and increases the tyranny of the state. Their choice to be silent now will lead to the end of choice for all of us in the future.

The post The Silent first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Kieran Kelly.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-silent/feed/ 0 542901
The Playbook for America: We Thought We Saw it All with Freedom Torches and Edward Bernays Fomenting Regime Change in Guatemala, Chile https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-playbook-for-america-we-thought-we-saw-it-all-with-freedom-torches-and-edward-bernays-fomenting-regime-change-in-guatemala-chile/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-playbook-for-america-we-thought-we-saw-it-all-with-freedom-torches-and-edward-bernays-fomenting-regime-change-in-guatemala-chile/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 14:50:09 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159579 Another rousing talk with a true socialist, Dan Kovalik, from Pittsburgh, here, pre-airing on my Radio Show, Finding Fringe on kyaq.org. Here’s today’s (July 1) link to the show which will air Sept. 10 —LISTEN: Dan Kovalik and Paul Haeder talking about Syria, regime change, all those spooks and kooks. Surprisingly, it all comes down […]

The post The Playbook for America: We Thought We Saw it All with Freedom Torches and Edward Bernays Fomenting Regime Change in Guatemala, Chile first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Another rousing talk with a true socialist, Dan Kovalik, from Pittsburgh, here, pre-airing on my Radio Show, Finding Fringe on kyaq.org. Here’s today’s (July 1) link to the show which will air Sept. 10 —LISTEN: Dan Kovalik and Paul Haeder talking about Syria, regime change, all those spooks and kooks.

Surprisingly, it all comes down to Oscar Romero for Dan who voted for or supported Ronald Ray-Gun the first terrorist go-around:

Catholics participate in a Mass celebrating the beatification of Salvadorean Archbishop Oscar Romero at San Salvador's main square on Saturday.

Coming of age, he stated, at age 19 when he traveled to Nicaragua, and he’s been on that socialist and communist path since, now at age 57 with kiddos living the life in Pittsburgh.

He’s written books that will get anyone in trouble if they showed up at a mixed company event , or No Kings rally staffing a table with his books piled up high.

The Plot to Scapegoat Russia: How the CIA and the Deep State Have Conspired to Vilify Russia

The Plot to Overthrow Venezuela

We talked about the Syria book, for sure, but then the case of regime change, well, Vietnam, anyone? El Salvador, folks?

President Ronald Reagan in 1982; Archbishop Oscar Romero, assassinated in March 1980, and the four American Catholic missionaries murdered in the same year by the Salvadoran National Guard: Maura Clarke, Jean Donovan, Ita Ford, and Dorothy Kazel.

Óscar Romero in 1979.

Reagan’s legacy: President Ronald Reagan in 1982; Archbishop Oscar Romero, assassinated in March 1980, and the four American Catholic missionaries murdered in the same year by the Salvadoran National Guard: Maura Clarke, Jean Donovan, Ita Ford, and Dorothy Kazel. (Reagan: Michael Evans / The White House / Getty Images; Romero: Bettmann; bottom: courtesy of the Maryknoll Sisters.)

Dan told me he has a lifesized statue of Saint Oscar Romero in his house, and the Catholic kid from Pittsburgh transformed into a Columbia University graduate of law and running into the Belly of the Beast of one of Many Proxy Chaos countries of the Monroe Doctrine variety — Colombia.

I’m 11 years older than Dan, and so my baseline is much different, for sure, and this prick, man, this prick was always a prick to me: Carter’s administration rejected Saint Óscar Romero’s pleas not to provide military aid to the Salvadoran junta before he was assassinated.

Jimmy Carter (left). Saint Óscar Romero (right). (Photos: Jessica McGowan/Getty Images; Leif Skoogfors/Getty Images)

From the CIA pages of Wikipedia: He/Kovalik worked on the Alien Tort Claims Act cases against The Coca-Cola CompanyDrummond Company and Occidental Petroleum over human rights abuses in Colombia.[3] Kovalik accused the United States of intervention in Colombia, saying it has threatened peaceful actors there so it may “make Colombian land secure for massive appropriation and exploitation”.[6] He also accused the Colombian and United States governments of overseeing mass killings in Colombia between 2002 and 2009.[7]

Oh, remember those days, no, when I was young teaching college at age 25: Oh yeah, BDS CocaCola? Right brothers, right sisters:

“If we lose this fight against Coke,
First we will lose our union,
Next we will lose our jobs,
And then we will all lose our lives!”

“If it weren’t for international solidarity,
We would have been eliminated long ago. That is the truth.”

— Sinaltrainal VP Juan Carlos Galvis

Note: More Stream of Consciousness on my part: Sickly Sweet: The Sugar Cane Industry and Kidney Disease/ Ariadne Ellsworth | June 7, 2014

We are the world’s supreme terrorists, Dan and I agree. And, while we have BDS for Israel, think about it = BDS for UnUnited Snake$ of AmeriKKKa? How’s that Coke doing for you? Boycotting Walmart, Starbucks, Exxon, BP, Coke, etc. Ain’t going to have a revolution boycotting plastic bottles of water.

Almost Thirty Years ago, this book, School of Assassins, was published: The atrocities perpetrated on hundreds of thousands of Latin Americans by graduates of the US Army’s School of the Americas will not come as a surprise to many. For the uninitiated, however, this book is sure to be an eye-opener. How many of us remember, every time we read of plunder, torture, and murder by corrupt military regimes in Central and South America, that almost all of them employ officers trained in these “arts” at Fort Benning’s SOA, and that their clandestine education is funded by our tax dollars? In School of Assassins — vital reading for anyone who still harbors delusions about America’s role abroad — the author records the history of the school and its graduates. More important, he shows how the school’s very existence is a hidden consequence of the imperialistic foreign policy shamelessly pursued by our government for decades, all with the express purpose of maintaining world dominance. Nelson-Pallmeyer offers ideas for ways to work toward closing the school, but he suggests that the true task ahead of us is continual, active opposition to the death-bringing hunger for power and control — not only in the public arena, but in our personal lives.

*****
Moving back into Dan’s new book, with coauthor Jeremy Kuzmarov.

Table of Contents

Foreword by Oliver Stone

Introduction

Chapter 1: The First U.S. Regime Change in Syria—The Early Cold War

Chapter 2: Back to the Future: Long-Term U.S. Regime-Change Strategy

Chapter 3: The Arab Spring and U.S. Interference in Syria

Chapter 4: Voices from Syria

Chapter 5: Charlie Wilson’s War Redux? Operation Timber Sycamore and Other Covert Operations in Syria

Chapter 6: Strange Bedfellows: The Multi-National Alliance Against Syria

Chapter 7: Shades of the Gulf of Tonkin: Chemical Weapons False Flag

Chapter 8: A War by Other Means: Sanctions and the U.S. Regime-Change Operation

Chapter 9: The White Helmets: Al Qaeda’s Partner in Crime

Chapter 10: The Liberal Intelligentsia Plays Its Role

Chapter 11: Syria After the Western-backed Al Qaeda Triumph—As Witnessed by Dan Kovalik

Epilogue

A grey-haired man in dark suit and tie stands at a podium, holding up two small placards, both with maps. One says ‘The Curse’ and the other says ‘The Blessing’

Here’s the first paragraphs of Oliver Stone’s forward:

Foreword by Oliver Stone

Another nation has fallen to the predations of Western interventionism. This time, it is Syria, a once beautiful and prosperous country, which has been home to peoples of different religions and ethnicities who lived together peacefully for centuries. That peaceful coexistence was purposefully destroyed by the U.S. and its allies who decided to effectuate regime change by inciting sectarian violence and supporting terrorist groups whose explicit plan was to set up an extremist religious Caliphate intolerant of all other religions.

Quite tragically, the terrorist group Al Qaeda, now named HTS, has taken over Syria and is now in the process of setting up such a Caliphate. Part of this process entails the mass slaughter of religious minorities, such as Alawites and Christians, and the kidnapping of young women from these groups who are raped and enslaved.

It would be shocking to know that this is all happening with the full connivance of modern, Western nations, except for the fact that we have seen this all before—most notably, in Afghanistan where the U.S. supported religious extremists to overthrow a secular, socialist government and to lure the USSR into the “Afghan trap,” in the words of Zbigniew Brzezinski. Years later, the Soviet Union is gone, Afghanistan is now being ruled by the Taliban, and the offspring of the terrorist groups the U.S. supported in Afghanistan—namely, Osama bin Laden’s Al Qaeda—is now flourishing more than ever as the ruling group of a major country.

Oil oil oil, and anti-USSR and anti-socialist fervor, man: Here, those 9 steps toward regime change deployed in Syria — bloody sanctions kill more than physical bombs.

War-for-Oil Conspiracy Theories May Be Right - Our World

 

From Dan and Jeremy’s first chapter:

Direct Quoting: The U.S. State Department actually took credit for Assad’s overthrow. Spokesman Matthew Miller stated on December 9, 2024 that U.S. policy had “led to the situation we’re in today.” It “developed during the latter stages of the Obama administration” and “has largely carried through to this day.”[1] The regime-change operation in Syria was openly advertised even earlier, when General Wesley Clark was told during a visit at the Pentagon after 9/11 that “we’re going to attack and destroy the governments in seven countries in five years—we’re going to start with Iraq, and then we’re going to move to Syria, Lebanon, Libya, Somalia, Sudan and Iran.”[2]

The methods that were utilized to oust Assad fit a long-standing regime-change playbook that had been applied in many of the countries listed by Clark. This playbook involves:

a) a protracted demonization campaign that spotlights the dastardly human rights abuses allegedly committed by the target of U.S. regime change. This demonization campaign enlists journalists and academics and highlights the viewpoint of pro-Western dissidents while maligning politicians, journalists or academics who voice criticism of U.S. foreign policy or who are against the regime-change operation (the latter being derided as “dictator lovers” or “apologists”).[3]

b) National Endowment for Democracy (NED) and United States Agency of international Development (USAID) funding of civil society and opposition groups and opposition media with the aim of mobilizing support of students and young people against the government.

c) a program of economic warfare designed to weaken the economy and facilitate hardship for the population that will push them to turn against their leader.

d) CIA financing of rebel groups and fomenting of protests or an uprising that aims to elicit a heavy-handed government response that can be used to further turn domestic and world opinion against the government.

e) a false flag is often necessary in which paid snipers dressed up in army or police uniforms fire on protesters. Blame is cast on the targeted government when it urges restraint. Chemical or biological warfare attacks are also staged in order to rally Western opinion in support of “humanitarian” military intervention.

f) drone warfare, bombing, and clandestine Special Forces operations using Navy Seals and private mercenaries. The light U.S. footprint approach will avert antiwar dissent at home.

g) enlisting third country nationals and proxy forces to carry out a lot of the heavy lifting and many of the military or bombing operations to ensure plausible deniability.

g) enlistment of disaffected minority groups who are paid to fight against government forces.

h) whitewashing of the background of rebel forces who are presented in the media as “freedom fighters” or “moderate rebels” and not the terrorists and Islamic extremists or fascists that they usually are.

i) accusing the government of enlisting foreigners to put down the rebellion when the rebellion itself has been triggered by foreign mercenaries financed by MI6/CIA/Mossad.

The targets for U.S. regime change are inevitably leaders who are independent nationalists intent on resisting U.S. corporate penetration of their countries and challenging U.S. global hegemony. Bashar al-Assad fit the bill for the latter because he backed Palestinian resistance groups and stood up to Israel, aligned closely with Iran and Russia, and adopted nationalistic economic policies.[4] Assad was also growing economic relations with China and refused to construct the Trans-Arabian Qatari pipeline through Syria, endorsing instead a Russian approved “Islamic” pipeline running from Iran’s side of the gas field through Syria and to the ports of Lebanon. According to Robert F. Kennedy Jr., this latter pipeline would make “Shiite Iran, not Sunni Qatar, the principal supplier to the European energy market” and “dramatically increase Iran’s influence in the Middle East and world”—which the U.S. and Israel would not allow.[5]


Oh, that dude who pushed cancer sticks onto women:

Edward Bernays and the Guatemalan Coup:

  • In the early 1950s, the UFC, facing land reform policies in Guatemala that threatened their interests, hired Bernays to counter the government’s actions.
  • Bernays led a “fact-finding” trip to Guatemala, cherry-picking information to portray the Guatemalan government as communist and a threat to American interests.
  • He launched a misinformation campaign to discredit the Guatemalan government, framing the UFC as the victim of a “communist” regime.
  • This campaign helped to create a climate of fear and suspicion about communism in Guatemala, which was used to justify the CIA-orchestrated coup.
  • The coup, known as Operation PBSuccess, involved the CIA, the UFC, and the dictator of Nicaragua, Anastasio Somoza, according to Wikipedia.
  • President Árbenz was overthrown and replaced by a military regime led by Carlos Castillo Armas, backed by the US.

Blood For Bananas: United Fruit’s Central American Empire

On March 10, 2014, Chiquita Brands International announced that it was merging with the Irish fruit company, Fyffes. After the merger, Chiquita-Fyffes would control over 29% of the banana market; more than any one company in the world today. However, this is not the first time in history these companies have been under the same name. Chiquita Brands and Fyffes were both owned by United Fruit Company until 1986. The modern merger marks their reunion and continued takeover of the banana market [1]. United Fruit Company was known for its cruelty in the workplace and the racist social order they perpetuated. Though Chiquita and Fyffes are more subtle in their autocratic tendencies, they continue many of the same practices of political and social manipulation as their parent company once did [2].

Advertising has been one of the most prominent forms of manipulation conducted by both the two modern companies and United Fruit. In the mid-twentieth century, United Fruit Company embarked on a series of advertising campaigns designed to exploit the emotions and sense of adventure of a growing American middle class and furthered the racial polarization and political tension between the U.S. and Central America, all for the sake of selling their bananas.

United Fruit initiated its first advertising campaign in 1917. By this time the company had well establish plantations in various countries in Central and South America. All they needed now was to interest the American people in trying new, exotic things in order to sell the bananas they were producing. At this time in American history, it was thought that advertisements should target consumers’ rationale, not their emotions, so United Fruit hired scientists to author positive reviews about bananas whether they were true or not. One of these publications, Food Value of the Banana: Opinions of Leading Medical and Scientific Authorities, offered a collection of articles by prominent scientists that promoted the nutrition value, health benefits, and even taste of the banana [3]. Today we know that bananas are good for us, but in the early 1900s, there was no way for these scientists to determine the nutrition value and other properties they claimed to have researched. However, Americans appear to have believed the scientists, for United Fruit’s banana sales began to soar.

Beginning in the 1920s, everything began to change. A successful young propagandist named Edward Bernays changed American advertising forever [4]. Bernays discovered that targeting people’s emotions instead of their logic caused people to flock to a product. His first experiment in this type of advertising was for the American Tobacco Company. Bernays thought that cigarette sales would sky rocket if it was socially acceptable for women to smoke, so at an important women’s rights march in New York City, Bernays had a woman light a cigarette in front of reporters and call it a “Torch of Freedom” [5]. Soon, women all over the United States were smoking cigarettes. After this initial public relations stunt, companies all over America began using emotionally-loaded advertising. United Fruit was no different. They launched an advertising campaign revolving around their new cruise liner called “The Great White Fleet” [6]. This cruise liner sailed civilians to the United Fruit-controlled countries in Central and South America to appeal to Americans’ sense of adventure and foster a good corporate reputation with the American people. When the cruise liner docked in a country, cruisers often toured one of United Fruit’s plantations. During this tour, the tourists would only be shown small areas of the banana plantations, theatrically set up to present the plantation as a harmonious place to work, when, in reality, it was a place of harsh conditions and corruption [7]. Their advertisements were key in swaying the American people to set out on an exotic adventure with the Great White Fleet. The flyer to the right (Fig. 1) describes Central America as a land of pirates and romance. The advertisement even portrays it as the place where “Pirates hid their Gold.” By giving the American tourists a false sense of the romanticism of Central America, they sold more cruise tickets, and through association, more bananas.

United Fruit’s unethical practices extended far beyond their manipulative advertising. They were also well known for their extremely racial politics in the workplace. They had employees from many different racial groups, and they would pit them against one another to control revolts that would otherwise be aimed at the company [8]. American whites would get the most prestigious jobs, like managers and financial advisers, while people of color got the hard labor. The company made a rigid distinction between Hispanics and West Indian workers. They administered different privileges and punishments to each ethnic group , and if one group were rewarded, the managers told them it was because they worked harder than the other group. If a punishment was administered, management would say it was the other group’s fault [9]. This gave the two groups something to focus their anger on, so they didn’t revolt against the company due to poor working conditions. United Fruit used the Great White Fleet to further these racial tensions. If the name was not obvious enough, all the ships were painted bright white and all the crew members wore pristine white uniforms [10]. The Fleet went so far as to encourage the passengers to wear white. The advertisement to the left (Fig. 2) further embodies the racial tensions experienced by the Americans and the United Fruit laborers. The large, white, American ship dwarfed the small, run-down, brown ship, symbolizing the power and prestige the whites had over the locals. The Central Americans in the corner of the picture are looking in awe of the massive ship, and are dressed in tropical garb to satisfy the need to appeal to the American people’s idealized version of the tropics. This is not only an advertisement, but a work of propaganda.

 

The United Fruit Company continued to advertise throughout the mid twentieth century until they found a new use for their public relations skills. A politician named Jacobo Arbenz was elected president in Guatemala, one of the Central American countries occupied by United Fruit [11]. Arbenz was a strict nationalist, and all he wanted was for his people to stop suffering in poverty. One of the most prominent issues in Guatemala, at the time, was scarcity of land. When United Fruit invaded Guatemala, they bought out many of the local farmers to acquire land for their plantations. This did not leave room for the peasants, who relied on farming as the sole source of their income. Arbenz created an agrarian reform that took land from the company and gave it back to the poor farmers that needed it [12]. United Fruit was outraged by this reform. They immediately launched a propaganda campaign led by Edward Bernays to convince the United States government and its people that Arbenz was a communist dictator [13]. In a 1953 article by the New York Times, Guatemala was described as “operating under increasingly severe Communist-inspired pressure to rid the country of United States companies” [14]. United Fruit was manipulating the media to make it sound like the agrarian reform was only created because Arbenz was being influenced by the Soviet government to sabotage America’s economic imperialism in Central America. Since it was during the Cold War, association with communists was a serious accusation. The United States’ aggressive stance toward communism encouraged them to take immediate action. The CIA hired civilian militias from Honduras to come into Guatemala and start a war against Arbenz and his followers. United Fruit also convinced U.S. President Dwight Eisenhower to threaten Arbenz because Eisenhower and many other prominent American government officials had stock in United Fruit [15]. With these pressures, Arbenz feared for his life and submitted his resignation.

However, this did not satisfy United Fruit. They wished to make an example of Guatamala, so their other host nations wouldn’t dare oppose them. They had the CIA pay off the Guatemalan military so they would let the Honduras militia win [16]. After the victory, the leader of the Honduran militia, Castillo Armas, was appointed as president of Guatemala and Armas was a puppet of United Fruit Company for the rest of his term [17]. He returned all of United Fruit’s confiscated land, and gave them preferential treatment in all Guatemalan ports and railways. The company continued to influence the media of North and Central America to justify what they had done. They called Armas the “Liberator” and told the inspiring tale of how he freed Guatemala from its communist ties. They also destroyed what was left of Arbez’s reputation by calling him “Red Jacobo,” further tying him to the Soviets [18]. A New York Times article written in 1954 states that, “President Castillo Armas is continuing to act with moderation and common sense,” and “Jacobo Arbenz, anyway, is a deflated balloon, hardly likely to cause any more trouble” [19]. The media praised Armas for his good policy making, yet most of his policies were proposed by United Fruit or the American government. United Fruit and American controlled media also made Armas into a war hero to increase his acceptance and popularity with the Guatemalan people. Arbenz was made to look like an easy defeat to give the American people confidence in the ability of their government to eliminate communist threats.

*****

Back on track with Dan and Haeder. And so we discussed the genocide, the mass murder, the shifting baseline of acceptance, and how Israel and their Jewish Project for a Greater Tyrannical Israel has set down a new set of abnormalities in the aspect of guys like Dan and Jeremy having to bear witness, research the roots of these tyrannical empire building plots, and then write about it and publish books, which for all intents and purposes might be read by the choir.

Again, Dan lost his faculty job at the University of Pittsburg, why?

Russia. Putin Stoogery.

Dan and I talked off the mic about adjunct faculty organizing: He was interviewed 13 years ago on that accord: Interview with an Adjunct Organizer: “People Are Tired of the Hypocrisy”

The debate over the working conditions for adjunct faculty was recently reignited by the death of Margaret Mary Vojtko, a longtime adjunct professor at Duquesne University who was fired in the last year of her life and died penniless. Moshe Marvit talks to Dan Kovalik, a labor lawyer who knew Votjko and has helped to publicize her story.

The debate over working conditions for adjunct faculty was recently reignited by the death of Margaret Mary Vojtko on September 1. Vojtko, who had a long career as an adjunct professor at Duquesne University in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, died penniless after being fired from the university in the last year of her life. Her story served as a reminder of what has become a massive underclass of underpaid contingent labor in academia.

Dan Kovalik, senior associate general counsel of the United Steelworkers, wrote an article in the Pittsburgh Post-Gazette that brought news of Votjko’s death to a wider audience. Kovalik has been working with Duquesne adjunct faculty for several years, helping them organize a union and fight for better working conditions. At the time of Votjko’s death, he was assisting her in a legal fight to keep her job and her independence. I spoke with Kovalik in his office in the United Steelworkers building in Pittsburgh. The interview has been edited for clarity.

Moshe Marvit: Can you describe the working conditions of adjunct faculty?

Dan Kovalik: As I’ve come to learn, and I didn’t realize it until about a year and a half ago when adjuncts approached us to organize, the conditions are just abysmal. The folks that came to me at that time were making $3,000 for a three-credit course. So say you teach a load of two courses a semester, and you have two semesters a year, then that’s $12,000 right there. No benefits. Maybe you get a summer course in there, so maybe you make $15,000 per year. That’s barely enough to live on, especially if you have a family. I know a guy who teaches seven courses per semester to make ends meet at three different universities. They call it a “milk run.”

It had always been my perception that going into the academy would be a great life. You would get a good salary; you would get benefits; you would get the benefit where your kids could go to school for free there or at a reduced rate. Adjuncts don’t get that. I’ve come to learn that 75 percent of all faculty around the country are adjuncts. It’s this kind of dirty secret of the academy.

Meanwhile there are just a few at the top who are doing well. It looks a lot more like the corporate world than like nonprofit education. — DK

I knew about Mary before her firing and her death, and alas, Dan and I are brothers in arms when it comes to freeway fliers, just-in-time adjunct faculty, precarious teachers, 11th hour appointed non-tenure track and non-contracted instructors.

*****

Get the book, ASAP. Preorder at Baraka Books here.

I will use one chapter from their book, about a person Dan met in Syria, who is a journalist and is emblematic of the power of being Syrian, and in fact, Dan stated that the best and friendliest folk in the world are Syrians, and Lebanese and Palestinian. My experience that the Diaspora of those same folk for me absolutely resonates the same over my 6.6 decades. He dedicated the book to Yara:

In 2021, I twice visited both Lebanon and Syria. What I learned there was quite at variance with what we were being told in the mainstream press. One of the first people I met in Damascus, Syria, was Yara Saleh, a lovely and affable woman who was serving as a reporter and anchor for the Syrian News Channel, an official state news agency.

Yara, while working for this channel back in 2012, was kidnapped by the Free Syria Army (FSA) just outside Damascus, and held for six days until rescued in a daring mission by the Syrian Arab Armed Forces (SAA). Yara’s kidnapping and rescue became the subject of a movie which the delegation I was with were invited to watch for its premier. I contacted Yara afterwards to hear her story in her words.

Yara still seemed shaken by her abduction years before. She was thin, almost to the point of emaciation, ate nothing, but chain smoked as she told her story. As Yara explained, she was traveling with a driver (Hussam Imad), a camera man (Abdullah Tabreh) and an assistant (Hatem Abu Yehya) to do a report on the clashes between the SAA and forces which she described as “armed terrorist groups.” She specifically wanted to report on the impact of the burgeoning war and terrorist threats upon the civilian population.

However, while traveling on the road to their destination (a Damascus suburb known as al-Tell), they were stopped by armed men. These armed men detained them, took their possessions, including their phones and money, and beat all of them, including Yara. Yara, a quite small woman, explains that the beatings upon her were quite hurtful. Yara said they decided to kidnap them after discovering that they were with the Syrian News Channel.

They were driven into town and to a location with hundreds of other armed militants. While en route, one of the armed captors held Yara’s head down between her legs.

One of the first questions Yara and her colleagues were asked was about their religious background. All of them were of “mixed” traditions in Yara’s words, and Yara stood out because she wore makeup and did not wear any head covering. I just found out recently that Yara is an Alawite. Yara, like many of her fellow Syrians, sees herself as a Syrian first and that is more important to her identity than being an Alawite. Before the sectarian violence brought to Syria from the outside, Syrians did not wear their religions on their sleeve and didn’t go around asking others what their religion is; that would be considered rude.

The sheikh told them that they all were to be executed because they worked with the Syrian government and because of their mixed religious affiliations. In response to the sheikh’s words, two of Yara’s colleagues, Hussam and Hatem, were taken away to a nearby location. Yara then heard the sound of gun fire. She believed that both of her associates were killed at that time. However, Hussam was shortly brought back, and he told Yara, with tears in his eyes, that he witnessed Hatem murdered in a spray of bullets.

Notably, Yara explained that the fighters who held them openly told them that they were taking orders from someone in Turkey and that they had been told to move them to Turkey. The fighters explained that the plan was to negotiate their freedom with the Syrian Arab Army, and that if the SAA did not give in to their demands, they would kill them. However, when Yara asked one of the fighters if they would be released if the SAA gave them what they wanted, he answered in the negative, saying that they would continue to hold them for leverage to gain more concessions.

In addition, according to Yara, a significant number of the fighters were not Syrian. They were not certain where they all were from, but they could tell by their accents that some were from Saudi Arabia and Libya. (from the unpublished manuscript, Syria: An Anatomy of Regime Change.)

*****

Listen to the interview I had with Dan. He fielded my more unconventional questions, with an open mind and grace and in the end this radio interview is an organic discussion, or in Dan the Lawyer’s words, “I have no problem with stream of consciousness.”

The post The Playbook for America: We Thought We Saw it All with Freedom Torches and Edward Bernays Fomenting Regime Change in Guatemala, Chile first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Paul Haeder.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-playbook-for-america-we-thought-we-saw-it-all-with-freedom-torches-and-edward-bernays-fomenting-regime-change-in-guatemala-chile/feed/ 0 542906
Marah’s Story, or The Disintegration of a Country Family https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/marahs-story-or-the-disintegration-of-a-country-family/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/marahs-story-or-the-disintegration-of-a-country-family/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 14:45:44 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159640 In this miserable country love stories end too soon and families fall apart in the blink of an eye.  This is how Marah Kamal begins her life story and if you know anyone from Gaza, you know how much they love the land they live on. They literally ‘worship the ground they walk upon.’ Only […]

The post Marah’s Story, or The Disintegration of a Country Family first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
In this miserable country love stories end too soon and families fall apart in the blink of an eye. 

This is how Marah Kamal begins her life story and if you know anyone from Gaza, you know how much they love the land they live on. They literally ‘worship the ground they walk upon.’ Only God is loved more than the land. So, for Marah to call her country miserable, is to admit that after a year and a half of war, there is nothing left. Even pregnancy is a curse.

Here, in Gaza, a woman becomes pregnant and rejoices, endures the pain of labor and gives birth, then breastfeeds, cares for her baby and loses sleep. She pours her life into raising her children, all so she can watch them grow up. Then the Occupation decides to bomb a house and it’s as if a mother’s son never even existed. There isn’t even a body left for burial. This country is not fit for marriage, pregnancy or childbirth. Ditto education and work. It’s a land of orphans and widows, of the dead and the wounded, of tarps and tents and shattered streets.

These are the dilemmas we will never have to face. How long does it take you to recall all the names of loved ones who have been murdered? How many of us have watched our children die? Or our brothers and sisters, mothers and fathers, aunts and uncles, husbands or wives? This is how Israel practices birth control on Palestinians. All we worry about is Roe vs. Wade.

I want the world to hear my story and stand by me however it can. I want to find a glimmer of hope for a simple, peaceful life filled with the warmth of family and friends. I want to live like the simplest of people. I want my children to be able to do what they wish, eat what they crave and play whenever they like. I just want to live a life free from death and destruction. Am I asking for too much? 

Simple requests from a widowed young woman who studied genetic engineering and IVF fertilization in college. Now, she raises her orphaned children, three-year-old Sana and baby Adam, as they play games of dodging bullets from the sky. No one needs fertility help in Gaza anymore. They’re all waiting to die instead.

Marah’s Husband Bahaa

This war has devastated my life. It stole my name, my life, my hope—everything. First and foremost, I lost my husband Bahaa. Just a week before the war started, on October 1st, Bahaa bought a car. He had recently gotten a degree in accounting but finding work is hard in Gaza, so he decided to become a taxi-driver. Even after October 7th, after we fled our home, he kept working, driving anyone who needed to be evacuated from northern Gaza to the south. There were infants, the elderly, people with disabilities, the wounded and the sick. He helped many people evacuate to safer areas without charging them a single shekel. He said to me, “This is all I can offer to people… how could I withhold it?” I remember him once saying, “A man once rode with me all the way from the far north to the far south. He had no money for the fare and was ashamed. He had a bag of lemons, and I told him, ‘Give me a lemon, so you don’t feel embarrassed.’”

Bahaa died on November 3, 2023, while driving his taxi with his brother-in-law Mohammed to reunite with his family. They died the usual way people have died in Gaza since October 7th: as casualties of war. In this case, shot to death.

Have you grown tired of my story, or shall I go on? Marah asks me.

To me, Bahaa was a hero who stood by his people until the very last moment with everything he had. He didn’t lock himself away in fear. He lived his life with courage, and to this day, I feel pride every time someone tells me how kind and humane Bahaa was. Now, I have to be everything for my two small children. I have to bury this heavy sorrow deep in my heart and keep on living, even with a knife pressed against it…for the sake of these two little hopes, to secure a life for them.

Marah’s tragedy is not unique. As you probably already know, it is commonplace in Gaza. With every good turn comes bad news. After nearly three months of blockading humanitarian aid, the embargo was lifted, only for the Occupation to massacre hundreds of people waiting to be fed. Marah thinks of her children when she feels like giving up.

I remember one time, my daughter Sana told me after waking up at dawn that she had dreamt of her father. He came to her and gave her red jelly with sugar. Sugar has become so expensive in Gaza, and she refuses to drink milk without it. I’m sorry, my love, on behalf of this entire world. And my baby Adam, who lost his father before he ever got to hear him say “Baba” has now started saying it to his grandfather instead.

As I finish Marah’s story on July 1st, 2025 I hear, yet again, there is talk of another cease-fire deal. Will it ever be over? Or is this the new way of war? Designed to string us along because the people in power don’t want it to end?

The post Marah’s Story, or The Disintegration of a Country Family first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Eros Salvatore.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/marahs-story-or-the-disintegration-of-a-country-family/feed/ 0 542908
The Choice https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-choice/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-choice/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 14:35:56 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159637 Why should one choose between Left and Right?

The post The Choice first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

The post The Choice first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Allen Forrest.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-choice/feed/ 0 542909
Jeff Cohen and Norman Solomon on Mamdani and the Democrats https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/jeff-cohen-and-norman-solomon-on-mamdani-and-the-democrats/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/jeff-cohen-and-norman-solomon-on-mamdani-and-the-democrats/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 14:22:43 +0000 https://fair.org/?p=9046346  

Right-click here to download this episode (“Save link as…”).

 

Zohran for Mayor posters in Manhattan's Alphabet City

(photo: Jim Naureckas)

This week on CounterSpin: White supremacy, Islamophobia and antisemitism are irreducible dangers in themselves. They are also tools that powerful, wealthy people take up to protect their power and wealth, and to deflect everyone’s attention from who is, actually, day to day, threatening all of our well-being. That brazenness (everything is in peril!)—and that skullduggery (you know who’s the problem? your different-looking neighbor!)—are both in evidence in corporate media’s hellbent, throw-it-all-at-the-wall campaign against democratic socialist New York City mayoral candidate Zohran Mamdani.

We’ll talk about how elite news media are Trojan-horsing their hatred for any ideas that threaten their ill-gotten gains, via very deep, very serious “concerns” about Mamdani as a person, with Jeff Cohen and Norman Solomon, longtime political activists, writers and co-founders of the emphatically nonpartisan group RootsAction.

 

Plus Janine Jackson takes a quick look at recent press coverage of Gaza massacres.


This content originally appeared on FAIR and was authored by CounterSpin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/jeff-cohen-and-norman-solomon-on-mamdani-and-the-democrats/feed/ 0 542890
Journalist Karen Hao on Sam Altman, OpenAI & the "Quasi-Religious" Push for Artificial Intelligence https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/journalist-karen-hao-on-sam-altman-openai-the-quasi-religious-push-for-artificial-intelligence-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/journalist-karen-hao-on-sam-altman-openai-the-quasi-religious-push-for-artificial-intelligence-2/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 14:01:36 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=ece939b742675bd02cea0dd863a44ae1
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/journalist-karen-hao-on-sam-altman-openai-the-quasi-religious-push-for-artificial-intelligence-2/feed/ 0 542899
James Earl Jones Reads Frederick Douglass Speech "What to the Slave Is the Fourth of July?" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/james-earl-jones-reads-frederick-douglass-speech-what-to-the-slave-is-the-fourth-of-july/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/james-earl-jones-reads-frederick-douglass-speech-what-to-the-slave-is-the-fourth-of-july/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 13:02:09 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=67a93330e6df39f31a10a38117fed68c
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/james-earl-jones-reads-frederick-douglass-speech-what-to-the-slave-is-the-fourth-of-july/feed/ 0 542886
Journalist Karen Hao on Sam Altman, OpenAI & the “Quasi-Religious” Push for Artificial Intelligence https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/journalist-karen-hao-on-sam-altman-openai-the-quasi-religious-push-for-artificial-intelligence/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/journalist-karen-hao-on-sam-altman-openai-the-quasi-religious-push-for-artificial-intelligence/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 12:23:35 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fd2b4a5e4fc399800ad40bce81db0143 Karenhao2

As part of our July Fourth special broadcast, we continue our extended interview with Karen Hao, author of Empire of AI: Dreams and Nightmares in Sam Altman’s OpenAI. The book documents the rise of OpenAI and how the AI industry is leading to a new form of colonialism. “One of the things that you really have to understand about AI development today is that there are what I call quasi-religious movements that have developed within Silicon Valley,” says Hao. “The concept of artificial general intelligence is not one that’s scientifically grounded.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/journalist-karen-hao-on-sam-altman-openai-the-quasi-religious-push-for-artificial-intelligence/feed/ 0 542871
“What to the Slave Is the 4th of July?”: James Earl Jones Reads Frederick Douglass’s Historic Speech https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/what-to-the-slave-is-the-4th-of-july-james-earl-jones-reads-frederick-douglasss-historic-speech-11/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/what-to-the-slave-is-the-4th-of-july-james-earl-jones-reads-frederick-douglasss-historic-speech-11/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 12:01:54 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=7c17e98b91b6f732c60b626bf42b4a54 Douglas earljones

We begin our July Fourth special broadcast with the words of Frederick Douglass. Born into slavery around 1818, Douglass became a key leader of the abolitionist movement. On July 5, 1852, in Rochester, New York, Douglass gave one of his most famous speeches, “What to the Slave Is the Fourth of July?” He was addressing the Rochester Ladies’ Anti-Slavery Society. The late actor James Earl Jones read the historic address during a performance of Voices of a People’s History of the United States, which was co-edited by Howard Zinn.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/what-to-the-slave-is-the-4th-of-july-james-earl-jones-reads-frederick-douglasss-historic-speech-11/feed/ 0 542875
The Dalai Lama at 90 — a look back at his life as Tibet’s spiritual leader in exile (RFA) https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-dalai-lama-at-90-a-look-back-at-his-life-as-tibets-spiritual-leader-in-exile-rfa/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-dalai-lama-at-90-a-look-back-at-his-life-as-tibets-spiritual-leader-in-exile-rfa/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 12:00:13 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=56f915472046dbfcbadd37d1efe3247f
This content originally appeared on Radio Free Asia and was authored by Radio Free Asia.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/the-dalai-lama-at-90-a-look-back-at-his-life-as-tibets-spiritual-leader-in-exile-rfa/feed/ 0 542878
Visual artist Brian Jungen on embracing the unknown https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/visual-artist-brian-jungen-on-embracing-the-unknown/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/visual-artist-brian-jungen-on-embracing-the-unknown/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/visual-artist-brian-jungen-on-embracing-the-unknown You work across a different mediums with a number of different approaches. When you have an idea, how do you know which way to take it? Is it something where the idea comes first, or do you see an object and you want to transform it? I’m curious how you go about making the spark of an idea into a work of art.

Well, I think the idea is the easy part. I come up with ideas daily, but really it depends on where the destination is, if it’s for an exhibition or if it’s just for my own investigation. And if I have the space and time to develop an idea, I guess. For years I had a very big studio, when I was ranching, I had basically two studios. One was just a workshop, so that afforded me a lot of space and I was able to try out a lot of things there.

Sometimes I get invited for thematic exhibitions. I did that a lot when I was young and getting started in my art career. I just dove into these things and I would work with the curator and curatorial team on their theme and try to come up with work around it. I don’t really do that anymore because I’ve never really enjoyed that. A lot of times for that I would make the work on-site. So that’s a young man’s game. It’s stressful, but it’s exciting, too, because it’s very immediate.

We met through Compound. a project we did together at Matthew Barney’s studio. From my understanding, you had an idea, but in order to make this happen, you needed the space to bring it to fruition.

Yeah.

The piece involved shooting hundreds of arrows into a full-sized play piano. This is not a thing that takes up a small amount of space.

Right. And I don’t have a studio right now, I haven’t had a studio since my ranch burned down. I’ve been living in a cabin in Northern BC [British Columbia] where I grew up. I enjoy archery, but there’s no real indoor place for me to actually use that skill to make art with it. There’s archery ranges here, but I can’t just go and set up a bunch of furniture in there, fire into it.

I did the first archery stuff at the Walla Walla Foundry while I was working with them to develop the first of this archery work for Prospect in New Orleans [in 2024]. That was the start of it. Then Matthew came to visit BC last year. I showed him the work I was doing at the Foundry. He thought it was great, so I suggested that maybe this should be something that’s live. He really liked that. But he comes from a performance and art video background.

That was new for me. I’ve never been part of a performance or done live performance like that before. So it was exciting and it was a great way to meet you, but I didn’t know if a lot of it would work. Although it can be very scary, having that unknown is also very exciting.

I remember when Matthew and I first started doing those events fifteen years ago or so, one thing he told me was that he liked that you could fail with live performance. He was saying to me that, with film, everything could be edited and it could appear perfect. Doing something live, though, meant that it might not always work. You’re operating without a safety net.

One of the early pieces in the studio involved trying to get a bull to mount a car, and the bull just wouldn’t do it. Everyone’s watching, and it failed—but even though it didn’t work, the people in the space were still so engaged by this performance. Plus, they didn’t know what the plan was, and it definitely succeeded on another level.

I come from an agriculture background, so I know that bulls are very difficult to work with. It’s more human in a way, it’s more real because it’s live and there’s small mistakes.

I was working with a bunch of archers I’d never met before and there were some issues with some of the arrows because they’re all handmade and the archers had never really fired arrows like that before, so there was a bit of a learning curve for them to figure it out while it’s happening live. We had a loose script that started to go out the window pretty quickly—you just have to think on your feet. Even though it was scary at the time, it worked out. But even if it didn’t work out, like you say, it’s pretty cool seeing the audience react to just the environment. I never had people watching me in my studio, so it was unusual in some ways. We were very much in a workspace.

That’s something funny. [My son] Jake [who who was in the performance] was saying, “Man, people really like watching me and analyzing what I was doing.” I said, “Well I think part of it is, it’s just an unfamiliar space for them,” and they’re watching a kid shoot clay pigeons into a wall. Even if they don’t know what it means, they’re like, “All right, this is interesting. We left work and now we’re here.” It feels like they’re in this magic space, something different.

Since the ranch burned down and moved into the cabin, has it been harder to make work? Do you have ideas that you can’t do at this point in the smaller space? Has it changed the way you’re thinking of making art?

The first little while I was just dealing with practical things, insurance claims and whatnot. And then I realized I needed a bit of a sabbatical from my art practice, so I took time out. I got recruited to be on the volunteer fire department here, which I was very reluctant to do at first. Eventually I agreed to go and it was very therapeutic, actually.

That took my interest in a very different direction. It’s very different from anything I’ve done before. And it really gave me a sense of community involvement but also this appreciation for the elements of water and fire. That’s all you’re really doing, is putting out fires. That occupied a lot of my time because really this is a very small cabin and I had to refocus how I wanted to make art after having a very big ranch and a huge studio. My footprint became way smaller. When you lose a lot of stuff to catastrophe like that, including artwork and all of your archive, you have to look at it as a rebirth to keep going.

So I thought, “What could I do here?”

I was doing a little bit of drawing and I took on some public art projects, then just turned my attention to thinking about where I wanted to relocate to and what studio set up I’d like to have in the future. I am largely a studio-based artist, I would like to have a studio again. It was really great to see how Matthew works and see his space, but I’m a country guy at heart.

Was it therapeutic learning how to put out fires after you lost so many things due to fire?

Yeah, just learning about hydraulics and how fires behave and differences between wild land fires and structural fires, and also the chain of command and systems… It’s so different from anything art related. There’s people that I would never necessarily hang out with who I’m working with. So we may disagree on things politically, or whatever, but we’re all working together for the community and I think that’s very important.

We also respond to traffic accidents and stuff, too. It’s hard work and I have immense respect for people who choose this as a career. I just volunteer.

I’m not sure if something I’m going to continue with, because it’s a very small community here, and there’s very basic training to get people involved. Which is what I’ve done. Anything that’s beyond that you have to really get involved in terms of going in more of a career direction.

I’m also not sure I want to have a giant place anymore. Especially the way the climate is going, it’s just becoming drier and drier. Having to worry about fires every summer, especially out west and north, it’s not necessarily something I enjoy.

You’ve done drawings and other more traditional work. How did you move into using objects and mass-produced things, transforming them and shifting them around?

Growing up and in art school and even after art school, I mainly was interested in drawing and painting. I never really started making objects until I did a residency at the Banff Center, in Alberta in 1998. I was also in New York City that summer. I went to a Nike Town store and I saw all their Air Jordan shoes that they had in vitrines and museum-like displays.

That’s where I noticed a resemblance to Northwest Coast indigenous art. So that’s where all that started. I decided to buy some for my residency at the Banff Center and I cut them up and pinned them together and took photographs of them. I thought that the final work would actually just be a photograph. I did that the first week and there were six more weeks to go in the residency. So I decided to take them apart properly and reassemble them. I got way more of a charge out of doing that than I did with just making an image of the work. That was very important to me, not even necessarily the object itself, but what happened to my thinking in terms of moving away from 2D and going into more of a 3D direction.

Then I stopped drawing for a while. I was making objects and became much more known as a sculptor. Like I was saying earlier, I started getting invited to do these site-specific projects where I would make everything else, like all the whale skeleton I made with the stacking chairs, those were all made for exhibitions on location because those chairs you could buy anywhere. It was really something I could make universally. I like making objects more than drawing images.

How many ideas do you come up with that just don’t turn into anything? Do you abandon ideas or do you try to follow through and make them happen?

You kind of archive them. I’ve talked with musician friends about this, too, who they know might be strumming a song or tune or something that they like, but it never goes anywhere. But they remember it, they remember a part of it. I think with me it’s very similar. I look at something, I see something in the world… a lot of the times I’ll see some things that are broken and then they’re liberated from their use.

You usually see people throw them out or try to fix them. I find it fascinating when I see things that aren’t being used for what they’re supposed to be. I’m more interested in how things don’t work than how they’re supposed to work. I’ll see stuff that might spark me to investigate that material or look at how these two things aren’t working and how they might go together with something else.

Sometimes different things in my life come into play with that. Whether it be my interest in modernism, or my background as an indigenous person, or my life in agriculture. I’m not always coming at it from the same place. Now because I hang out with all these firefighters, there’s things I see in that realm that I find very fascinating. Or stuff that I learned when I was doing a lot of irrigation when I was ranching.

What is success to you? It feels like a project is successful if you get that charge you’d mentioned and follow the idea through to completion. Is success, at all, you make something and someone buys it?

Maybe if I feel like I’ve reached some closure with the material. I try not to look at the commercial side of art production. I’ve never really been entirely comfortable with that world. I’m very truant in the commercial art world, but I’m tangled up in it, it pays the bills. But I don’t like being put in a position where I’m having to make art to pay bills. I try to keep my interests very wide so I’m not doing the same thing over and over and over again. But no, if I’ve resolved a use for a material, then I feel like that’s success.

I tried making other things with the white plastic stacking chairs I wasn’t entirely satisfied with. I made these really odd, very ’60s geodesic domes with them at first. And it was fun at the time, but it wasn’t until I developed a use for them as whale bones that I felt like that was more the direction that they belong. But again, having a studio is very important for making objects.

Do you ever work on multiple projects at the same time?

I love working on multiple things at the same time. That’s my favorite way of working, where there’s no real destination for the object. Because I was ranching and funding this ranch from a lot of art production, I thought when I moved to the ranch that it would be more freeing, but it was the opposite. I wound up making a lot of stuff that was just going immediately out to the commercial art world. It was my other work that was more investigative, and experimental, that was getting smaller and smaller.

Actually one of the last things I did at the ranch before the fire was start on the archery stuff. I set up a course inside the studio and was shooting arrows into pieces of furniture that I had leftover from this giant bronze piece I’d made. That was several months before the fire.

I’m probably going to have a new studio within the next several months back down in southern BC just lining all that up now. I’m really excited.

Have you been storing up ideas for when you get into this new space? It’s going to be like when they have a bucking bronco behind the gate and the cowboy opens up the gate and it just runs out the chute and into the ring…

I’m going to be running faster. I have notebooks and I write things down, but I edit them fairly regularly. So we’ll see. I do like to have some structure with things in terms of whether it be a material that I’m interested in that has some limitations that I have to work with, that I find a good challenge. What I find most difficult is when I’m given complete freedom of things or when I have to build something from scratch. I can’t just take clay and make something. I find it boring. I need some challenge or limitations added to it to make it more of a challenge, let’s say.

Do you get creative blocks, or because you’re doing enough stuff, can you move on from one thing to the next if something’s not working?

You can move on, or if something gets overworked and you can put it down, cover it up, or something, and then come back to it and take it back to a place where you were still excited about it. I’m excited about having that opportunity again. I’m probably going to buy some land, but I don’t want to have agriculture be such a huge part of my life. As much as I believe in agriculture—and I think it’s very important that people know how to grow their own food—it’s another thing to take it on as another business and try do that at the same time as having an art career. I would not recommend it.

I get that. It wasn’t your decision, but you’ve had to whittle everything down to the barest essentials. Has this intense scaling back been at all helpful?

I think so. There’s expansion and contraction in everyone’s life. I went through this quite big period of expansion and then now it’s reducing that. It’s also been good for me to move back north where I grew up. Initially I bought this place before the fire as a summer place, and I never intended to live here year round. Because it’s very small, it changed my thinking in terms of what I wanted to do. I spend a lot of time out in the bush, too. I like being out on the land, so it’s very important to me. I’m alone a lot and I’ve always been comfortable with that, even as a kid. So when I lived at the ranch, that was during Covid and I didn’t even really notice that there was a pandemic because I was already living way out there and it wasn’t that much of a change for me.

Artists and creative people spend a lot of time in our heads, so we drop out of the physical world in a lot of ways. I think that’s why I really enjoyed the fire department because it’s the complete opposite of that. All your attention is out in front of you. You have to deal with the crisis.

So, in a way, it was a really good exercise for me, because it pulled me out of my head. As an artist in the world today, especially with things like Instagram, the idea of self-promotion is becoming so dominant and it’s changing the way we interact with our own art. For artists who are more introverted, or their process is more about thought, that place of having to promote yourself on social media is daunting.

I’ve enjoyed this bit of a sabbatical. One year turned into four, but a lot of that was because I had been looking for the right space to relocate to, and I did start working again last year, technically. It was nice to get invited to the Prospect in New Orleans because I hadn’t made work for an art Biennale in years. It was nice to get back in the saddle there.

Brian Jungen recommends:

I shut my cell phone off most of the time, I recommend everyone reading this do the same.

I live near three large hydro electric dams. Sometimes I go visit them to hear the sound of the electrical energy produced there as I feel like it is the closest I can get to any sense of the force of the creation of the universe that exists on our planet.

I have been living at this northern BC lake next to the Rockies the past four years. It has been good as it got me back into lake fishing and making new fishing friends. Northern Pike is plentiful in the lake but I never thought it was particularly tasty until a friend showed me how to simmer it in 7up soda and then toss the pieces in melted butter. He called this dish “poor mans lobster” which I don’t quite agree with, as it is not too similar to lobster but it certainly was an improvement on the previous Pike meals I have had.

Volunteer in your community. It will help you keep that cell phone shut off and you will get to know your fellow citizens in ways that a cell phone will never offer.

A Chinookan prayer: “May all I say and all I think, be in harmony with thee, God within me, God beyond me, maker of the trees.”


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Brandon Stosuy.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/visual-artist-brian-jungen-on-embracing-the-unknown/feed/ 0 542852
Israel and the Albanese Report https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/israel-and-the-albanese-report/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/israel-and-the-albanese-report/#respond Fri, 04 Jul 2025 05:36:25 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159647 It makes for stark and dark reading. The report for the UN Human Rights Council titled From economy of occupation to economy of genocide makes mention of “corporate entities” who have been enriched by “the Israeli economy of illegal occupation, apartheid and now genocide.” Authored by the relentless Francesca Albanese, the Special Rapporteur on the […]

The post Israel and the Albanese Report first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
It makes for stark and dark reading. The report for the UN Human Rights Council titled From economy of occupation to economy of genocide makes mention of “corporate entities” who have been enriched by “the Israeli economy of illegal occupation, apartheid and now genocide.” Authored by the relentless Francesca Albanese, the Special Rapporteur on the situation of human rights in the Palestinian territories occupied since 1967, it is unflinching in its assessments and warnings to companies doing business with Israel.

What makes the investigative undertaking by Albanese useful is its examination of the corporate world and its links to the colonial, settler program of removing and displacing a pre-existing population. The machinery of conquest of any state necessarily involves not only the desk job occupants in civilian bureaucracies and high-ranking military commanders, but those in the corporate sector, eager to make a profit. “Colonial endeavours and associated genocides,” writes Albanese, “have historically been driven and enabled by the corporate sector. Commercial interests have contributed to the dispossession of Indigenous peoples of their lands – a mode of domination known as ‘colonial racial capitalism’.”

Eight private sectors come in for scrutiny: arms manufacturers, tech firms, building and construction entities, those industries concerned with extraction and services, banks, pension funds, insurers, universities and charities. “These entities enable the denial of self-determination and other structural violations in the occupied Palestinian territory, including occupation, annexation and crimes of apartheid and genocide, as well as a long list of ancillary crimes and human rights violations, from discrimination, wanton destruction, forced displacement and pillage to extrajudicial killing and starvation.”

Central to the multifaceted economy of genocide, the report charges, is the military-industrial complex that forms “the economic backbone of the State.” Albanese cites a stellar example: the F-35 fighter jet, developed by US-based Lockheed Martin, in collaboration with hundreds of other companies “including Italian manufacturer Leonardo S.p.A, and eight States.”

Since October 2023, the process of colonisation and displacement has assumed an air of urgency, aided by the private sector. In 2024, US$200 million was advanced for “colony construction”. Between November 2023 and October 2024, 57 new colonies and outposts were established “with Israeli and international companies supplying machinery, raw materials and logistical support.” Examples include the maintenance and expansion of the Jerusalem Light Rail Red Line, the construction of the new Green Line, encompassing 27 kilometres of new tracks and 50 stations in the West Bank. The infrastructure has proven to be invaluable in linking the colonial project to West Jerusalem. Despite some companies withdrawing from the project “owing to international pressure”, an entity such as the Spanish/Basque Construcciones y Auxiliar de Ferrocarriles has been a keen participant, along with suppliers of excavating machinery (South Korea’s Doosan and Sweden’s Volvo Group), and providers of materials for the light-rail bridge (Germany’s Heidelberg Materials AG).

Beyond the structural and physical program of construction and displacement, all designed to extinguish any semblance of self-determination on the part of the Palestinians, come other features of the colonial project. A prominent feature of this, Albanese notes, is that of “surveillance and carcerality”. Repressing Palestinians has become a “progressively automated” affair, with tech companies feeding Israel’s voracious security appetite with “unparalleled developments in carceral and surveillance devices”, some of which include closed-circuit television networks, biometric surveillance, advanced tech checkpoint networks, drone surveillance and cloud computing.

Palantir Technologies Inc., a specialist in software platforms, comes in for a special mention. “There are reasonable grounds to believe Palantir has provided automatic predictive policing technology, core defence infrastructure for rapid and scale-up construction and deployment of military software, and its Artificial Intelligence Platform, which allows real-time battlefield data integration for automated decision making.”

With the report released, the dance of dissimulation began. Lockheed Martin told the Middle East Eye that foreign military sales were not their preserve as far as accountability or cause of concern was, a lofty, business-like attitude unshackled from a moral compass. Such sales took place between governments, meaning that the US government would be best placed to answer any questions. Hand washing and deferrals of guilt is a private sector speciality after all.

In a more direct fashion, both Israel and the United States have continued their “Hate Albanese” campaign, boringly reiterating old accusations while adopting novel interpretations of international law. Given the obvious loathing of international human rights conventions by Israeli officials and their US backers, this is decidedly rich, even more so given such jurisprudence as that of the International Court of Justice’s Advisory Opinion of July 2024, and the International Criminal Court arrest warrants for Israeli officials, including Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu. (These developments figure prominently in Albanese’s assessment.)

According to the ICJ, all States were under an obligation to “cooperate with the United Nations” on ensuring “an end to Israel’s illegal presence in the Occupied Territory and the full realization of the right of the Palestinian people to self-determination”. Israel’s continued presence in the OPT was illegal. “It is a wrongful act of a continuing character which has been brought about by Israel’s violations, through its policies and practices, of the prohibition on the acquisition of territory by force and the right to self-determination of the Palestinian people.”

From Israel came the view that the report was “legally groundless, defamatory and a flagrant abuse of [Albanese’s] office.” A June 20 letter to UN Secretary-General António Guterres from the Trump administration obtained by The Washington Free Beacon took issue with Albanese’s supposed record of “virulent antisemitism and support for terrorism”, bitchily sniping at her legal qualifications. Little is actually mentioned of international law in the bilious missive by US Ambassador Dorothy C. Shea, acting representative to the UN, other than a snotty dismissal of UN General Assembly resolutions and advisory opinions by the International Court of Justice as lacking any binding force “on either States or private actors”.

Shea claims Albanese “misrepresented her qualifications for the role by claiming to be an international lawyer despite admitting publicly that she has not passed a legal bar examination or been licensed to practice law.” A fabulous accusation, given the surfeit of allegedly qualified legal members working in the Israeli Defense Forces and other offices executing their program of displacement, starvation and killing.

The accusations against various corporate entities, notably over 20 US entities, were “riddled with inflammatory rhetoric and false accusations”, making such daring claims of “gross human rights violations”, “apartheid” and “genocide”. These charges, ventured through letters of accusation, constituted “an unacceptable campaign of political and economic warfare against the American and worldwide economy.”

It comes as little surprise that the security rationale – one that says nothing of the Palestinian right to self-determination, let alone rights to life and necessaries – marks the entire complaint against Albanese’s apparent lack of impartiality. “Business activities specifically targeted by Ms. Albanese contribute to and help strengthen national security, economic prosperity, and human welfare across the Middle East, North Africa, and Europe.” Just don’t mention the Palestinians.

The post Israel and the Albanese Report first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/04/israel-and-the-albanese-report/feed/ 0 542835
Outrage pours in after House GOP approves ‘one of the most catastrophic bills passed in modern history’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/outrage-pours-in-after-house-gop-approves-one-of-the-most-catastrophic-bills-passed-in-modern-history/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/outrage-pours-in-after-house-gop-approves-one-of-the-most-catastrophic-bills-passed-in-modern-history/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 21:40:57 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335238 US Speaker of the House Mike Johnson (C) alonside US Republican lawmakers, shows the final tally of the vote on US President Donald Trump's tax bill, One, Big, Beautiful Bill Act during a press conference US Capitol in Washington, DC, on July 3, 2025. Photo by ALEX WROBLEWSKI/AFP via Getty ImagesDemocratic Rep. Ilhan Omar called the Republican budget package "one of the most cruel, immoral pieces of legislation that Congress has ever voted on."]]> US Speaker of the House Mike Johnson (C) alonside US Republican lawmakers, shows the final tally of the vote on US President Donald Trump's tax bill, One, Big, Beautiful Bill Act during a press conference US Capitol in Washington, DC, on July 3, 2025. Photo by ALEX WROBLEWSKI/AFP via Getty Images
Common Dreams Logo

This story originally appeared in Common Dreams on July 03, 2025. It is shared here with permission.

House Republicans on Thursday put the final stamp of approval on budget legislation that will inflict devastating cuts on Medicaid, federal nutrition assistance, clean energy initiatives, and other programs to help finance another round of tax breaks for the rich—an unparalleled upward transfer of wealth that’s expected to have cascading effects across the United States for years to come.

The sprawling legislation passed in a mostly party-line vote, with just two House Republicans—Reps. Brian Fitzpatrick (R-Pa.) and Thomas Massie (R-Ky.)—joining every Democrat in opposition to the bill, which now heads to President Donald Trump’s desk.

Following the 218-214 vote, Rep. Ilhan Omar (D-Minn.) called the reconciliation package “one of the most cruel, immoral pieces of legislation that Congress has ever voted on.”

“Not only did this bill get worse from the last time the House voted on it, it will be remembered as one of the most catastrophic bills passed in modern history,” said Omar.

The following is a sample of reactions from lawmakers and advocacy groups decrying the legislation’s attacks on healthcare, the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program, reproductive rights, the climate, and more.

A Tax Giveaway to the Ultra-Rich and Corporations at the Expense of Working People

People take part in a protest against the Republican tax bill in Los Angeles, California on December 4, 2017.Photo by Ronen Tivony/NurPhoto via Getty Images

April Verrett, president of SEIU:

What the Republicans just did. It’s outrageous, it’s despicable, it’s immoral, itss anti-American. But SEIU members won’t forget. We will never forget that children will go hungry because of what they’ve done.

We will never forget that people will suffer because of what they’ve done. And why? For the biggest steal of taxpayer money, of working people’s money – not just poor people, but senior citizens. Every American will feel the repercussions of this horrible bill, but we won’t forget and we will get our just due.

Joseph Geevarghese, executive director of Our Revolution:

“Republicans have passed the most dangerous legislation of our lifetimes. This bill hands billionaires and corporations a trillion-dollar tax break, paid for by ripping health care from 17 million people, gutting funding for rural hospitals, slashing clean energy investments, and cutting food assistance for millions of children.

“This reckless sellout to the billionaire class will trigger the largest transfer of wealth from working- and middle-class Americans to the ultra-wealthy in our nation’s history. This isn’t just bad policy — it’s a moral failure that will cost an untold number of lives. Every lawmaker who voted for this shameful legislation must be held accountable at the ballot box.”

Robert Weissman, co-president of Public Citizen:

“Trump and Congressional Republicans have certainly delivered for the billionaire class.

“There are 800 billionaires in the United States and 12 100-billionaires. They don’t need any financial help. But that’s precisely what Trump and Congressional Republicans have done, with a monstrosity of a bill that may constitute the single biggest upward transfer of wealth in American history.”

Amy Hanauer, executive director of the Institute on Taxation and Economic Policy:

This abominable bill will make history—in appalling ways. Never before has legislation taken so much from struggling families to give so much to the richest. It makes the biggest cuts to food aid for hungry families, executes the largest cuts to health care ever, adds trillions to the national debt – all to give $117 billion to the richest 1 percent in a single year. It’s no wonder that this bill is also extremely unpopular. Historians – and voters – will look back at this as a dark day in U.S. history.

David Kass, executive director of Americans for Tax Fairness:

This bill represents a massive transfer of wealth from the working class to the top 1%. It enacts the largest Medicaid and SNAP cuts in history while adding over $3 trillion to the national debt. Furthermore it makes the tax code more complex with new special interest tax breaks and handouts to the ultra wealthy. In the coming years, Democrats must prioritize repealing and replacing these disastrous policies to protect American families from rising costs and loss of healthcare coverage. We need to create a truly fair tax system and an economy that works for all Americans, not just the wealthy few.

A Historic Blow to Medicaid, SNAP, Social Security, and other Anti-Poverty Programs

Care workers with the Service Employees International Union (SEIU) participate in a living cemetery protest to denounce the impact to patients, families and workers if Republicans cut Medicaid, healthcare and SNAP to pay for tax cuts for the wealthy at the US Capitol June 23, 2025 in Washington, DC. Photo by Tasos Katopodis/Getty Images for SEIU

Bishop William Barber, co-founder Repairers of the Breach:

Today, Congress passed one of the most morally-bankrupt pieces of legislation in our nation’s history. This big ugly bill is the largest cut to healthcare and food assistance for children in our nation’s history, and it funds a war on immigrant communities. All the while, the bill gives tax breaks to the wealthiest among us—on the backs of our most vulnerable neighbors.

By passing this bill, lawmakers have officially codified the deaths of thousands of people. It’s policy murder in plain sight.”

Many of the people who passed this bill also consistently profess to be led by religious values. There is no religion that supports the degradation of humans. Policymakers can’t just claim their religious values in one breath, and then turn around and approve legislation that’s guaranteed to kill people.
The passage of this bill is deadly, but it is not a defeat. We must meet it with a resurrection. We will organize voters in every impacted community to push legislators who voted for this bill out of office and build a movement together that can reconstruct our democracy.

Americans for Tax Fairness:

Today, President Trump and his billionaire-backed Republican-controlled Congress successfully passed their reconciliation bill, passing the largest cuts in Medicaid and SNAP history while slashing billions from other essential programs to fund massive tax giveaways for billionaires and large corporations. The bill will raise average Americans’ costs by causing 17 million Americans to lose their health insurance and 2 million to lose access to food assistance. Throughout the opaque legislative process, the Republican majority in both houses didn’t hold a single hearing on their legislative proposals, and forced their members to vote under the cover of night and during weekend sessions, reflecting the GOP majority’s pattern of minimizing public attention to a wildly unpopular legislative package.Richard Fiesta, executive director of the Alliance for Retired Americans:

Today, the House turned its back on the very people they were elected to serve. This bill isn’t about lowering prices or helping everyday Americans — it’s about lining the pockets of billionaires and big corporations while ripping away essential health care and support from seniors, people with disabilities, and working families.

Congressional Republicans have just voted for tax giveaways for the wealthy while throwing millions of people off of Medicaid, slashing half a trillion dollars from Medicare, and driving hundreds of nursing homes and local hospitals into crisis. All of this will make it harder for older Americans to get the health care they need at a price they can afford.

To add insult to injury, this bill hastens the depletion of the Social Security Trust Fund’s reserves by one year. It’s a slap in the face to every family who paid into Social Security and Medicare over a lifetime of work.

We will not forget how our representatives voted today. We will make sure every older American knows what is in this legislation — and who to hold accountable for this debacle.

Tony Carrk, executive director of Accountable.US:

Today’s party-line vote by House Republicans to rip healthcare away and raise grocery costs for tens of millions of Americans is as devastating as it is enraging. For months, a decisive number of House Republicans voiced their concerns, acknowledging that this bill would make people poorer and sicker, only to vote in favor of this bill. It’s a cruel betrayal and proof positive you cannot trust career politicians who will put their interests over those of their own constituents’ health care and wallets.

Bobby Mukkamala, M.D., president of the American Medical Association (AMA):

Today is a sad and unnecessarily harmful day for patients and health care across the country, and its impact will reverberate for years. Care will be less accessible, and patients may simply forego seeing their physician because the lifelines of Medicaid and CHIP are severed.

This is bad for my patients in Flint, Michigan, and it is devastating for the estimated 11.8 million people who will have no health insurance coverage as a result of this bill.

The American Medical Association’s mission is promoting the art and science of medicine and the betterment of public health. This bill moves us in the wrong direction. It will make it harder to access care and make patients sicker. It will make it more likely that acute, treatable illnesses will turn into life-threatening or costly chronic conditions. That is disappointing, maddening, and unacceptable.

Max Richtman, president & CEO of the National Committee to Preserve Social Security and Medicare:

In enacting President Trump’s ‘Unfair, Ugly Bill,’ House Republicans have voted to rip health coverage away from as many as 16 million Americans and food assistance from millions more. Make no mistake, the deepest cuts in history to Medicaid and SNAP will devastate older Americans who depend on both programs for health coverage, long-term care, and nutrition. 7.2 million seniors are dually enrolled in Medicare and Medicaid; 6.5 million rely on SNAP benefits to stay healthy and make ends meet. The bill could even trigger automatic cuts to Medicare down the road.

These beneficiaries are some of the most vulnerable members of our society — and Republicans have put them at risk in order to pay for another tax cut mainly for the rich. Republicans have passed this mean-spirited legislation with little regard for public opinion or well-being. Recent polling suggests that Americans who know about the bill are against it 2 to 1. No matter. Republicans are enacting a craven agenda to shower their wealthy donors with tax cuts at the expense of seniors and lower-income Americans.

This bill has rightly been called ‘downright regressive and cruel’ — and ‘the largest transfer of wealth from the poor to the rich in U.S. history.’ President Trump was planning to sign the bill on July 4th. We can’t think of anything LESS patriotic than depriving millions of Americans of health coverage to further enrich the already wealthy. This is not responsible leadership. It’s just the opposite. Make no mistake: older Americans and their advocates WILL NOT FORGET. Republicans will be held accountable — now and during the 2026 elections. If our response were boiled down to one word, it simply would be SHAME!

National Nurses United:

This is among the darkest days in the history of U.S. health care. People will suffer and die because of the cuts in this legislation to fund tax cuts for billionaires — certainly in the short term and potentially for decades to come if nothing is done. The policy goal here is clear: Take away everyday people’s health care coverage. Every politician who supports this legislation has blood on their hands and only themselves to blame when the impacts of these cuts devastate a health care system already in a near-constant state of crisis. These cuts will hurt these lawmakers’ constituents, our patients, who are already dealing with a broken health care system.

Lawmakers have effectively signed the death warrants for millions today. It will steal money from safety-net community hospitals and reproductive health care clinics, like Planned Parenthood. It will kick people off their health insurance. It will effectively punish people for getting sick or injured, making us all sicker and less healthy.

While we will only understand the larger impacts of this law as they unfold, experts have made clear that the potential is devastating: Millions will lose insurance coverage, and hundreds of hospitals will see critical hits to their funding. Meanwhile, the rich will get richer.

A Gut Punch to Environmental Protections, Clean Energy, and the Effort to Confront the Climate Crisis

Protestors hold up a sign reading “Trump Climate Disaster” as they demonstrate during a rally opposing the inauguration of the 47th US President Donald Trump, outside Downing Street on January 20, 2025 in London, England. Photo by Leon Neal/Getty Images

Beth Lowell, Oceana vice president for the United States:

“Thriving and abundant oceans should not be bargaining chips at the Congressional table. This big, terrible bill is the worst environmental legislation in American history, unraveling safeguards and investments that Americans — and coastal economies — rely on and need. This disastrous bill would require the largest expansion of offshore oil and gas lease sales by area ever in the United States. We should be protecting our coasts and oceans, not opening the floodgates to more offshore drilling and increasing the risk of dangerous oil spills.”

Manish Bapna, president of NRDC (Natural Resources Defense Council):

Every lawmaker who voted for this cynical measure chose tax cuts for the wealthiest over Americans’ health, pocketbooks, public lands and waters — and a safe climate. They should be ashamed.

This measure gives the wealthiest a tax break while the rest of us will pay more on our electric bills and at the pump. So much for President Trump’s promise to save Americans money on their energy bills.

This Trump energy tax will cost electricity customers billions of dollars in higher bills. Drivers will need to fill up more often at the pump. And costs for things like cleaner cars, solar energy and efficient air conditioners will skyrocket.

We urgently need more clean, affordable energy, but this measure would bring the renaissance in American clean energy production to a halt and send good, domestic manufacturing jobs to our foreign rivals.

Oil executives, industrial loggers and coal CEOs can all celebrate today as they gain unprecedented access to drill, log and mine on our public lands. The rest of us will soon find no trespassing signs on lands that have belonged to all of us for more than a century.

John Noël, Greenpeace USA deputy climate program director:

This is a vote that will live in infamy. This bill is what happens when a major political party, in the grips of a personality cult, teams up with oil company CEOs, hedge fund donors, and climate deniers. All you need to do is look at who benefits from actively undercutting the clean energy industry that is creating tens of thousands of jobs across political geographies.

The megabill isn’t about reform—it’s about rewarding the super rich and doling out fossil fuel industry handouts, all while dismantling the social safety nets on which millions depend for stability. It is a bet against the future.

Ben Jealous, executive director of the Sierra Club:

“This is a sad and scary day for all who work to build up our communities, care for our friends and neighbors, and wish to leave this planet in a better place for future generations. Instead of working to make life better for American families and communities, what Donald Trump and his loyalists in Congress have delivered today will mean higher energy costs for working families and small businesses, the end of life-saving health care that millions rely on, and ceding the race to build the clean energy economy of tomorrow to China. Trump and Congressional Republicans have advanced the most anti-environment, anti-job, and anti-American bill in history. The Sierra Club will not forget it. America will not forget it.

Gretchen Goldman, president of the Union of Concerned Scientists:

Our country will be paying the price for these reckless policies for decades to come.

In passing this bill, lawmakers repeatedly overrode the needs and interests of their constituents. When benefits are lost, when energy prices spike, when major clean energy and clean transportation investments are canceled, when jobs are cut, when climate-exacerbated extreme weather disasters hit, people should know who they have to thank.

This bill is a damning indictment of Congress’ priorities and values. Our country needs policymakers willing to confront the challenges of our time and fight for a better tomorrow, not sell out America for the benefit of a few.

An Assault on Reproductive Freedom and Health

Women hold signs during a protest against recently passed abortion ban bills at the Georgia State Capitol building, on May 21, 2019 in Atlanta, Georgia. Photo by Elijah Nouvelage/Getty Images

Kelly Baden, vice president for public policy at the Guttmacher Institute:

The reconciliation bill is a sweeping attack on the health, rights and autonomy of millions of people across the country. It would strip health coverage from those who need it most, gut access to reproductive health care, and impose dangerous restrictions that disproportionately harm low-income communities, people of color, and those already facing systemic barriers to care.”

One of the most egregious provisions in the bill would block Planned Parenthood and other providers of abortion care from receiving Medicaid reimbursement for contraceptive services and other care for an entire year. This politically motivated exclusion could force one in three Planned Parenthood health centers to close their doors, cutting off access to contraception, STI testing and treatment, cancer screenings and abortion care for countless patients. These are not just numbers—these are real people whose lives and futures are being put at risk.

On top of that, the bill’s broader Medicaid cuts represent a direct attack on the health and economic security of people with low incomes. Medicaid is not a luxury—it’s a lifeline. It ensures access to essential care, including sexual and reproductive health services, for millions of people. Slashing this program to finance tax cuts for the wealthy is not just wrong—it’s cruel.

Let’s be clear: this bill is about advancing an extreme ideological agenda that prioritizes control over compassion, and politics over public health.

Alexis McGill Johnson, president and CEO of Planned Parenthood Federation of America:

The reconciliation bill is a targeted attack on Planned Parenthood health centers and patients that cannot stand. Everyone deserves access to high-quality, affordable health care. That’s what we’ve been fighting for the last century — and we’ll never stop. We’ll be suing the Trump administration to stop this unlawful attack. See you in court.

Dr. Jamila Perritt, Physicians for Reproductive Health president and CEO:

Federal programs like Medicaid, CHIP, SNAP, as well as funding for full spectrum sexual and reproductive health care are all left at the mercy of cowardly, out of touch lawmakers who value junk science over the evidence-based practices that keep our communities safe. Limitations on these essential programs will have horrible consequences for tens of millions of people and for our entire health care landscape. In contrast of its name, this bill is one of the ugliest actions we have seen from the Trump Administration to date.

Only six months into a second Trump term, we have seen Title X funding be stripped away, the continued criminalization of those seeking lifesaving health care like abortion, as well as politically motivated attacks on those in support of full spectrum sexual and reproductive health care. This is not a coincidence – it is intentional. This is not, nor has it ever been acceptable.

Progressive Lawmakers Weigh In

Rep. Ilhan Omar (D-MN) speaks during the Hands Off! day of action against the Trump administration and Elon Musk on April 05, 2025 in Washington, DC. Photo by Paul Morigi/Getty Images for Community Change Action

Rep. Ilhan Omar (D-Minn.):

Because my Republican colleagues cowered to special interests and their billionaire donors, 17 million Americans will lose their health coverage. This passage could cause 50,000 Americans to die each year because Republicans shamefully voted to kick millions off Medicaid and failed to extend the premium tax credits in the Affordable Care Act. It will also increase healthcare costs and endanger access to care for all Americans. Rural hospitals will be forced to shut down. Nursing homes and community health centers will be gravely impacted.

This bill is the biggest transfer of wealth from the poor to the rich in history. While working people will be devastated, billionaires will receive massive tax cuts. Not only are the tax cuts permanent for the ultra-wealthy, any benefit to low-income families is only temporary. It will deepen the wealth and income inequality gap.

In poll after poll, the American people are clear in their disdain for this bill. From cuts to nutrition assistance to increasing the cost of college to higher utility bills – the American people are clear-eyed in opposing it. Donald Trump and Republicans know this, which is why they rammed this bill through. Every single American will remember who chose to side with billionaires instead of working people.

This bill is morally bankrupt and an attack on working people. For those reasons, I voted NO.”

Congressional Progressive Caucus Chair Greg Casar (D-Texas):

“This bill is a betrayal of working Americans. So that billionaires can buy bigger yachts, millions of working people will be unable to afford to go to the doctor, put food on the table, or keep the lights on.

For years, Washington Republicans have talked a big game about becoming the party of working people. This vote should be the final nail in the coffin of that idea. In the end, Washington Republicans will simply betray the working class people they won over in the last election. They’ve done what they always do: take from the working class to give to the rich.

As Democrats, we must make sure they never live that down.”

Rep. Rashida Tlaib (D-Mich.):

“This bill is an act of violence against our communities. At a time of extreme income and wealth inequality, while 60% of Americans are living paycheck to paycheck, this budget is absolutely devastating for the working families we represent.”

Rep. Summer Lee (D-Pa.):

“Republicans just passed one of the most harmful bills in modern history that will devastate our communities for years to come.”

Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.):

“Republicans in the House just cheered as they voted to kick 17 million people off their healthcare.”

Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D-N.Y.):

“I don’t think anyone is prepared for what they just did w/ICE. This is not a simple budget increase. It is an explosion—making ICE bigger than the FBI, U.S. Bureau of Prisons, DEA, and others combined. It is setting up to make what’s happening now look like child’s play. And people are disappearing.”

Rep. Ayanna Pressley (D-Mass.):

“Republicans have passed a bill that will be a death sentence—denying millions medical care, denying children food, and violently deporting immigrant families to destabilized countries. This is unforgivable.”

Rep. Pramila Jayapal (D-Wash.):

“Republicans passed Trump’s Big Bad Betrayal Bill to kick 17 million Americans off their healthcare for a billionaire tax cut. Cruel, horrifying, and outrageous. But we must not lose hope. Democrats will not only fight back—we’ll fight forward, press on, and justice will be won.”

Rep. Becca Ballint (D-Vt.):

“The House shamefully passed Trump’s big ugly, horrific, terrible bill that will leave 17 million people without health insurance. I, like every Democrat, voted HELL NO. People are going to suffer. I’m horrified that Congress would pass such a harmful piece of legislation.”

“I never want to hear a Republican say they care about ‘fiscal responsibility’ ever again. This bill is the largest increase in our national debt in history.”

Rep. Maxwell Alejandro Frost (D-Fla.):

House Republicans just passed Trump’s evil, Big Ugly Budget. They caved, voting to take health care away from 17 million people, slash food aid, and rob the poor to reward the ultrarich. It’s the largest transfer of wealth from the working class to billionaires in history. This is a dark day in America and a shameful betrayal to those we serve. Our people deserve better and I will always fight like hell to get it. The fight continues.

Turbo-charging Trump’s Mass Deportation Machine and Anti-Immigrant Agenda

California National Guard stands guard as protesters clash with law enforcement in downtown Los Angeles at the Metropolitan Detention Center due to the immigration raids roil L.A. on Sunday, June 8, 2025 in Los Angeles, CA. Jason Armond / Los Angeles Times via Getty Images

Joanna Kuebler, chief of programs at America’s Voice:

Americans are already recoiling against the harm done by this administration’s deportation agenda—the masked ICE agents running amok; the industries and small businesses worried about their future viability; the fear spreading in American communities and the separations tearing apart American families.

Sadly, we fear it will get all the worse with the new and unprecedented infusion of tens of billions of dollars for Stephen Miller to fully scale the personal mass deportation crusade he’s dreamed about since his teenage years. Earlier this week, Vice President JD Vance admitted that slashing Medicaid, the tax cuts for the wealthiest Americans, the fiscal recklessness and all of the other unpopular and damaging provisions of this bill were ‘immaterial’ compared to the ICE and immigration enforcement money.

Yet Stephen Miller’s and MAGA’s dreams are most Americans’ nightmares. Turbocharging mass deportation endangers our economy, our families, our communities, and our history as a nation of immigrants.

Roots Action:

The expansion of fascism is here:
– $74.9 billion for ICE detention and removal
– $65.6 billion for CBP infrastructure, hiring, tech
– $10 billion DHS slush fund
– $3.5 billion for state enforcementAnd more!

Hamilton Nolan, independent journalist :

This bill contains enough money to build a new system of immigration detention centers far bigger than the entire federal prison system. The American Immigration Council says that it will be enough to facilitate the “daily detention of at least 116,000 non-citizens.” It will let ICE hire more field agents than the FBI. Its $170 billion in funding for Stephen Miller’s rabid campaign to purge America of brown people is comparable to the total annual funding for the United States Army.

Donald Trump envisions himself as an all-powerful leader whose will is equal to law. He is bent on revenge against his political enemies. He has installed extreme loyalists in the Justice Department, the FBI, the Defense Department, the Department of Homeland Security, and all other security departments. The courts have declined to meaningfully restrain his abuses of these departments. This budget will give him the final piece of the puzzle that he needs to achieve his fever dream: a nationwide army of masked, unaccountable armed agents empowered to snatch anyone they like off the streets, and the physical infrastructure to imprison or deport those people at will. Thousands of men with guns, unrestrained by judges or local police, who do not answer to Congress, who point guns at the press, who arrest whoever they want, for reasons they do not share, and do whatever they wish with those people. The implications of this are going to make America a much darker place.

Aaron Reichlin-Melnick, American Immigration Council senior fellow:

With this vote, Congress makes ICE the highest-funded federal law enforcement agency in history, with more money per year at its disposal over the next four years than the budgets of the FBI, DEA, ATF, U.S. Marshals, and Bureau of Prisons combined.

Astra Taylor, author and Strike Debt co-founder:

The debt, deportation, and death bill has passed. Congress further decimates care work to fund violence work. ICE becomes the highest-funded federal law enforcement agency ever known. It hasn’t been sold this way, but it’s a massive public jobs program for fascists.

Uzra Zeya, CEO of Human Rights First:

“As millions of Americans lose access to health insurance, this bill forks over more than $150 billion to supercharge the policies of grave harm we’ve seen these past six months. It will fund more disappearances of people seeking asylum in our country, more masked agents in our courtrooms and neighborhoods to detain and manhandle those following the rules to be here, and more prisons where families, including infants, can now be incarcerated indefinitely due to this Big, Ugly, Betrayal of a bill.”


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Common Dreams staff.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/outrage-pours-in-after-house-gop-approves-one-of-the-most-catastrophic-bills-passed-in-modern-history/feed/ 0 542784
Patriotic Millionaires: Another nail in the coffin of democratic capitalism https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/patriotic-millionaires-another-nail-in-the-coffin-of-democratic-capitalism/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/patriotic-millionaires-another-nail-in-the-coffin-of-democratic-capitalism/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 21:18:35 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/patriotic-millionaires-another-nail-in-the-coffin-of-democratic-capitalism After returning to the House of Representatives following its passage in the Senate on Tuesday, House Republicans voted today to pass their party’s massive tax and spending bill—the One Big Beautiful Bill Act—by a vote of 218-214. The legislation now moves to President Trump for his official signature ahead of the July 4th holiday.

In response, Erica Payne, Founder and President of Patriotic Millionaires, said:

“As Patriotic Millionaires predicted back in January, this bill was always going to pass. Since then, we have seen cynical acts of performative politics, only for elected officials to sell out working people and hand over tax cuts to their wealthy donors and benefactors. This is another nail in the coffin for democratic capitalism. Lawmakers have no issue taxing working people into poverty as the cost of living continues to skyrocket if it means ensuring the investor class does not pay their share of taxes. This legislation just handed oligarchs the keys they needed to drive policy decisions and to subvert American democracy for their own financial gain, and we will all be worse off for it.”

Morris Pearl, Chair of Patriotic Millionaires and a former Managing Director at BlackRock, said:

“Republicans placed their bets on corporations and the ultra-wealthy over working people, most of whom will suffer from the outrageously uneven playing field they have created. Throughout all of these changes to the tax code and beyond, wealthy people will be fine in the short term, but the damage done to working people, and eventually to our whole society, will be irreparable.
By passing this bill, Republicans caused and created real harm that cannot be understated. They put us further down a path towards oligarchy that will now be much harder to get off. Republicans must come to terms and realize that in their pursuit to give the ultra-wealthy tax cuts, they also co-signed onto the beginning of the end of American democracy. We cannot and will not let them absolve themselves of the economic ruin they will bring to working people across the country.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/patriotic-millionaires-another-nail-in-the-coffin-of-democratic-capitalism/feed/ 0 543097
Megabill Is On its Way to Trump: Here’s What its Tax Changes Mean for Families Across the U.S. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/megabill-is-on-its-way-to-trump-heres-what-its-tax-changes-mean-for-families-across-the-u-s/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/megabill-is-on-its-way-to-trump-heres-what-its-tax-changes-mean-for-families-across-the-u-s/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 21:16:38 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/megabill-is-on-its-way-to-trump-heres-what-its-tax-changes-mean-for-families-across-the-u-s The House of Representatives today narrowly passed a massive tax and spending reconciliation bill that now heads to President Trump’s desk. Please see below for a statement from ITEP and our latest updated analysis of how the bill’s tax provisions will affect families at different income levels nationally and in every state.

STATEMENT from AMY HANAUER, EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR OF THE INSTITUTE ON TAXATION AND ECONOMIC POLICY:

“This abominable bill will make history – in appalling ways. Never before has legislation taken so much from struggling families to give so much to the richest. It makes the biggest cuts to food aid for hungry families, executes the largest cuts to health care ever, adds trillions to the national debt – all to give $117 billion to the richest 1 percent in a single year. It’s no wonder that this bill is also extremely unpopular. Historians – and voters – will look back at this as a dark day in U.S. history.”

BY THE NUMBERS:

Analysis of Tax Provisions in the Senate Reconciliation Bill: National and State Level Estimates

The megabill’s tax impact is highly regressive, a regressivity that is amplified by the legislation’s deep cuts to health care, food assistance, and other services:

  • More than 70 percent of the net tax cuts would go to the richest fifth of Americans in 2026, only 10 percent would go to the middle fifth of Americans, and less than 1 percent would go to the poorest fifth.
  • The richest 5 percent alone would receive 45 percent of the net tax cuts next year.
  • The richest 1 percent of Americans would receive an average net tax cut of $66,000, many, many times more than the average tax cut received by other income groups.
  • The richest 1 percent of Americans would receive a total of $117 billion in net tax cuts in 2026. The middle 20 percent of taxpayers on the income scale, a group that has 20 times the number of taxpayers as the richest 1 percent, would receive less than half that much, $53 billion in net tax cuts that year.
  • The $117 billion in net tax cuts going to the richest 1 percent next year would exceed the amount going to the entire bottom 60 percent of taxpayers (about $77 billion).
  • The effects of President Trump’s tariff policies alone offset most of the tax cuts for the bottom 80 percent of Americans. For the bottom 40 percent of Americans, the tariffs impose a cost that is greater than the tax cuts they would receive under this legislation.
  • Even foreign investors who own shares in U.S. companies would benefit more than many Americans. These foreign investors would enjoy $32 billion in tax cuts in 2026 compared to just $1.5 billion for the bottom 20 percent of Americans.
  • The legislation provides the greatest rewards to high-income people living in states that have low state and local taxes on the wealthy. In these states, high-income people are not much affected by the cap on deductions for state and local taxes, which the Senate bill would make permanent. The states where the richest 1 percent of residents receive the largest average net tax cuts would mostly be states that have particularly unfair tax systems because they have no personal income tax.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/megabill-is-on-its-way-to-trump-heres-what-its-tax-changes-mean-for-families-across-the-u-s/feed/ 0 543101
The ‘Big, Beautiful’ Blunder: a bill that will live in infamy https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-big-beautiful-blunder-a-bill-that-will-live-in-infamy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-big-beautiful-blunder-a-bill-that-will-live-in-infamy/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 21:10:41 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/the-big-beautiful-blunder-a-bill-that-will-live-in-infamy In response to the passage of the “Big Beautiful Bill” in the United States Senate, Greenpeace USA Deputy Climate Program Director, John Noël, said: “This is a vote that will live in infamy. This bill is what happens when a major political party, in the grips of a personality cult, teams up with oil company CEOs, hedge fund donors, and climate deniers. All you need to do is look at who benefits from actively undercutting the clean energy industry that is creating tens of thousands of jobs across political geographies.

“The megabill isn’t about reform—it’s about rewarding the super rich and doling out fossil fuel industry handouts, all while dismantling the social safety nets on which millions depend for stability. It is a bet against the future.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-big-beautiful-blunder-a-bill-that-will-live-in-infamy/feed/ 0 542779
[Chris Hedges, Gabor Maté] Palestine: The Moral Issue of Our Time https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/chris-hedges-gabor-mate-palestine-the-moral-issue-of-our-time/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/chris-hedges-gabor-mate-palestine-the-moral-issue-of-our-time/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 21:00:22 +0000 https://www.alternativeradio.org/products/hedc-matg001/
This content originally appeared on AlternativeRadio and was authored by info@alternativeradio.org.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/chris-hedges-gabor-mate-palestine-the-moral-issue-of-our-time/feed/ 0 542787
They told him his sign was illegal. What happened next shows cops don’t know the law. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/they-told-him-his-sign-was-illegal-what-happened-next-shows-cops-dont-know-the-law/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/they-told-him-his-sign-was-illegal-what-happened-next-shows-cops-dont-know-the-law/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 20:38:12 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=ad455f6e9f13c05a409c89609706617b
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/they-told-him-his-sign-was-illegal-what-happened-next-shows-cops-dont-know-the-law/feed/ 0 543471
The Project 2025 Bill https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-project-2025-bill/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-project-2025-bill/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 20:04:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6c4a1ee6df24c8b03adafb0527be45df Trump’s “Big Evil Bill” sped through Congress, to sell off public lands, gut healthcare, destroy rural hospitals, outlaw state AI regulation for a decade, make it harder to take out loans to go to college, and unleash an immigration enforcement regime bigger than anything we’ve ever seen. ICE will now have a budget bigger than the FBI, DEA, U.S. Bureau of Prisons combined. This is an oligarchy fever dream that will painfully backfire on everyone.

Trump’s Big Evil Bill is the blueprint of Project 2025 in action: a theocratic, authoritarian takeover of our democracy. This bill will expand presidential powers, weaken the lower courts, and crush humanitarian protections and put our already militized police state on Russian Olympian super steroids. Russell Vought, Trump’s OMB Director and the architect of Project 2025, made sure the money was there to turn July 4th into a funeral for the American Revolution by installing a mad king. 

But here’s the truth hiding in the despair: the more pain this bill causes, the more people it radicalizes. Just as past generations rose up during times of injustice, many Americans, especially those who embraced Trump’s con, like those manosphere-brain rotted Gen Z men, will be forced to wake up. They’ll see the betrayal. They’ll feel it. And some will finally fight back.

The far-right had a 40-year plan. We need ours. One model: The Gay Revolution by historian Lillian Faderman. It's the story of how love, courage, and relentless organizing by small groups of determined people, many forced to become activists because of state cruelty like the kind we’re now seeing, and won against impossible odds. The Gay Revolution is our roadmap of hope, and it pays tribute to the countless men and women, many who risked everything, many whose names we may never know, to cast out the darkness with love and defiance. 

Go to the Gaslit Nation’s Action Guide and choose action. Choose empathy. Choose to be the liberation this moment demands.

EVENTS AT GASLIT NATION:

  • NEW DATE! Thursday July 31 4pm ET – the Gaslit Nation Book Club discusses Antoine de Saint Exupéry’s The Little Prince written in the U.S. during America First. 

  • Minnesota Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Vermont Signal group for Gaslit Nation listeners in the state to find each other, available on Patreon. 

  • Arizona-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to connect, available on Patreon. 

  • Indiana-based listeners launched a Signal group for others in the state to join, available on Patreon. 

  • Florida-based listeners are going strong meeting in person. Be sure to join their Signal group, available on Patreon. 

  • Have you taken Gaslit Nation’s HyperNormalization Survey Yet?

  • Gaslit Nation Salons take place Mondays 4pm ET over Zoom and the first ~40 minutes are recorded and shared on Patreon.com/Gaslit for our community

Want to enjoy Gaslit Nation ad-free? Join our community of listeners for bonus shows, exclusive Q&A sessions, our group chat, invites to live events like our Monday political salons at 4pm ET over Zoom, and more! Sign up at Patreon.com/Gaslit!

 

Show Notes:

The song featured in this episode is First They Came for Queers by Mr. Madam Adam. Find more of their music here: https://music.apple.com/us/album/first-they-came-for-queers/1690696748?i=1690696753

How to Protect Your Community from ICE: https://www.teenvogue.com/story/ice-watch-programs-immigrants-how-to-start

How Trump’s bill will supercharge mass deportations by funneling $170bn to Ice https://www.theguardian.com/us-news/2025/jul/02/immigration-trump-big-beautiful-bill

Donald Trump’s weapons freeze on Ukraine could bring catastrophe https://www.washingtonpost.com/opinions/2025/07/02/ukraine-russia-war-trump-weapons-freeze-missiles/

Pardoned Jan. 6 Rioter Who Threatened Police Joins Justice Dept. https://www.nytimes.com/2025/07/01/us/politics/justice-department-rioter-weaponization.html

House taking key vote on Trump's "big, beautiful bill," after GOP holdouts threaten final passage https://www.cbsnews.com/news/house-vote-big-beautiful-bill-rules-committee/


This content originally appeared on Gaslit Nation and was authored by Andrea Chalupa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-project-2025-bill/feed/ 0 542762
The Impeachment Problem https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-impeachment-problem/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-impeachment-problem/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 19:25:58 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159624 I wish U.S. academics would spend less time fantasizing choices between various murders with trollies, or playing games with theories about how greedy robots might do diplomacy, and more time on the impeachment problem. The United States has an impeachment problem. Impeachment was put into a Constitution that made no mention of, allowance for, or […]

The post The Impeachment Problem first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
I wish U.S. academics would spend less time fantasizing choices between various murders with trollies, or playing games with theories about how greedy robots might do diplomacy, and more time on the impeachment problem.

The United States has an impeachment problem. Impeachment was put into a Constitution that made no mention of, allowance for, or plans to survive the existence of political parties. Presidents are now generally not impeached for any abuse or outrage unless there is one party that doesn’t itself engage in that same abuse or outrage and that party is in the majority in the House. The use of a sex scandal for the impeachment of Bill Clinton was part of the process of destroying the impeachment power, but we’re now probably past sex scandals, for better or worse. We’re reduced to obscure or even fictional offenses, or physical attacks on Congress Members. And even those can be impeachable only when the non-presidential party has a House majority. And even then, the same party would have to have a two-thirds majority in the Senate to get a conviction, since a president’s party’s members will do virtually anything a president commands.

This impeachment problem, unless it is solved, effectively means that a popular nonviolent movement to oust a lawless dictator from the throne on Pennsylvania Avenue must turn out the entire government and start over. The reason the proper course is not the one everyone has been conditioned to mindlessly follow, namely waiting for a distant election, is the same reason impeachment was put into the Constitution: some abuses and outrages should never be tolerated. They do too much massive damage, and they set precedents that are very hard to undo. When Bush-Cheney and then Obama were allowed to finish out and not be removed, warmaking became more acceptable than ever, as did warrantless spying, lawless imprisonment, torture, murder by missile, etc. Criminal thuggery became firmly a policy choice, not an impeachable or prosecutable offense — unless of course you’re not the president. The top impeachable offenses by Bush are in this list of 35. Partway into the Obama presidency, I documented his continuation of 27 of those 35.

The Trump-Biden-Trump era has iced the cake of acceptable and legalistic monstrosities.  In 2019, RootsAction put together a list of 25 articles of impeachment for Trump:

Violation of Constitution on Domestic Emoluments
Violation of Constitution on Foreign Emoluments
Incitement of Violence
Interference With Voting Rights
Discrimination Based On Religion
Illegal War
Illegal Threat of Nuclear War
Abuse of Pardon Power
Obstruction of Justice
Politicizing Prosecutions
Collusion Against the United States with a Foreign Government
Failure to Reasonably Prepare for or Respond to Hurricanes Harvey and Maria
Separating Children and Infants from Families
Illegally Attempting to Influence an Election
Tax Fraud and Public Misrepresentation
Assaulting Freedom of the Press
Supporting a Coup in Venezuela
Unconstitutional Declaration of Emergency
Instructing Border Patrol to Violate the Law
Refusal to Comply With Subpoenas
Declaration of Emergency Without Basis In Order to Violate the Will of Congress
Illegal Proliferation of Nuclear Technology
Illegally Removing the United States from the Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces Treaty
Seeking to Use Foreign Governments’ Resources Against Political Rivals
Refusal to Comply with Impeachment Inquiry

One could go on piling up the articles of impeachment or documenting their continuation and expansion. But what’s missing is not the documentation. Here’s a guy who incited violence at his campaign events prior to his first stint on the throne. RootsAction proposed his impeachment for open financial corruption on his first inauguration day. The case was beyond solid, and has been built up ever since. Every weapons shipment for genocide by Biden, Trump, or a harmoniously bipartisan Congress violates numerous U.S. laws. The corruption is gradiose, fantastic, megalithic. The wars, the lies, the kidnappings by masked thugs, the environmental destruction, the promotion of bigotry and hatred — it’s a festival of flagrantly overly justified grounds for removal from office. But what’s missing is the will to make removal happen. On June 24, a huge, happy, bipartisan majority voted not to impeach Trump for making himself a king, just 10 days after huge demonstrations all across the country denouncing Trump for having made himself a king.

I’m afraid of what will happen instead of impeachment. President Kennedy said that those who make peaceful revolution impossible make violent revolution inevitable. And there is nobility in that idea. But there is no such thing as making nonviolent revolution impossible. And the powers of nonviolent action are virtually unknown in U.S. culture. Mildly objecting to mass murdering foreign people is a lot for us. The notion that we might actually learn from the successes of foreign people could be asking too much. And so the vast panoply of options between demanding impeachment and hitting Capitol Police officers with flag poles may be lost on too many of us. It may be lost on us beyond our ability to recognize the absurd insufficiency of choosing between two disastrous candidates every four years. We may realize what a scam this so-called democracy is, but not realize our latent power to take it over without counterproductive violence. That does not bode well.

The post The Impeachment Problem first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by David Swanson.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-impeachment-problem/feed/ 0 542754
July 4 and the long tradition of US protest https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/july-4-and-the-long-tradition-of-us-protest/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/july-4-and-the-long-tradition-of-us-protest/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 18:50:33 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335213 Eagle River, Alaska.July 3, 2024. Hasan Akbas/Anadolu via Getty Images.Today, we look at the long history of July 4 resistance and protest in the United States. This is episode 55 of Stories of Resistance.]]> Eagle River, Alaska.July 3, 2024. Hasan Akbas/Anadolu via Getty Images.

Over the last two and a half centuries people in the US have used July 4 to make their stand against injustice, inequality, and oppression, and demand their rights. From an infamous speech by Frederick Douglass to women suffragists demanding the right to vote, civil rights protests, and a historic farm workers’ march, today we look at moments of July 4 resistance.

This is episode 55 of Stories of Resistance—a podcast co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, we’ll bring you stories of resistance like this. Inspiration for dark times.

If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment, or leave a review. 

And please consider signing up for the Stories of Resistance podcast feed, either in Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Spreaker, or wherever you listen.

Please consider supporting this podcast and Michael Fox’s reporting on his Patreon account: patreon.com/mfox. There you can also see exclusive pictures, videos and interviews from these stories and follow Michael Fox’s work. 

Written and produced by Michael Fox.

Resources

Most of these stories were taken from the Zinn Education Project. We highly recommend you check it out.

Transcript

July 4. Independence Day. A time for fireworks and BBQs, parades and celebrations. A time to remember the birth of a great nation. And a time to demand that it be as great as it can be.

See, if July 4, 1776, was the culmination of years of resistance against oppressive British rule, over the last two and a half centuries people in the US have also used this day to also make their stand against injustice, inequality, and oppression and demand their rights in the United States.

July 5, 1852, abolitionist Frederick Douglass gives his speech “The Meaning of July Fourth for the Negro.” 

“What, to the American slave, is your 4th of July? I answer; a day that reveals to him, more than all other days in the year, the gross injustice and cruelty to which he is the constant victim.”

This is actor Danny Glover reading part of his speech, during an event in Los Angeles, on October 5, 2005. 

“To him, your celebration is a sham; your boasted liberty, an unholy license; your national greatness, swelling vanity; your sound of rejoicing are empty and heartless; your denunciation of tyrants brass fronted impudence; your shout of liberty and equality, hollow mockery; your prayers and hymns, your sermons and thanks-givings, with all your religious parade and solemnity, are to him, mere bombast, fraud, deception, impiety, and hypocrisy—a thin veil to cover up crimes which would disgrace a nation of savages.

“There is not a nation on the earth guilty of practices more shocking and bloody than are the people of the United States, at this very hour.”

July 4, 1876. Independence Hall, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. Women suffragists, including Susan B. Anthony, disrupt the 100th anniversary celebrations of the Declaration of Independence. They demand that women also be given the right to vote. They present a “Declaration of Rights of the Women of the United States.”

“We ask of our rulers, at this hour, no special favors, no special privileges, no special legislation.”

This is a clip of their declaration, read by Betty Wolfanger in 2017. 

”We ask justice, we ask equality. We ask that all the civil and political rights that belong to citizens of the United States, be guaranteed to us and our daughters forever.”

Women would have to wait another 50 years until they were finally given the right to vote. 

July 4, 1963. Baltimore, Maryland. Hundreds of civil rights activists amass at Gwynn Oak Amusement Park. They’re there to protest the park’s policies of segregation. The park’s refusal to allow African Americans entrance. 300 people were arrested, including 20 faith leaders.

The New York Times wrote that it was “the first time that so large a group of important clergymen of all three major faiths had participated together in a direct concerted protest against discrimination.”

This protest came just a month before Dr. Martin Luther King Jr.’s historic 1963 march on Washington.

July 4, 1966. Rio Grande City, Texas. The Independent Workers’ Association, made up of largely Mexican American farmworkers, begin a march that would take them 490 miles from Rio Grande City to the Texas state capital, Austin.

“La Marcha,” as they called it, would take nearly two months and pass through Corpus Christi and San Antonio, through intense summer heat. They demanded a $1.25 minimum wage and an eight-hour work day. State officials denied their demands, but farmworkers would continue to protest into the following year. Their months-long journey across Texas would go down in history as the largest march in the state’s history.

Hi folks, thanks for listening. I’m your host Michael Fox.

As you may have noted, the story today was a little different. It looked back at many moments of July 4 resistance in US history. All of these tiny vignettes were taken from historian Howard Zinn’s incredible “People’s History of Fourth of July.” That is part of the Zinn Education Project, which is based on his People’s History of the United States. Their work looks to promote and support the teaching of people’s history in classrooms across the country. 

If you don’t know these incredible resources yet, please check them out. There are even more stories of July 4 resistance that I didn’t have time to dive into today. I’ll add a link in the show notes.

Folks, also, if you like what you hear and enjoy this podcast, please consider becoming a subscriber on my Patreon at Patreon.com/mfox. It’s only a few dollars a month. I have a ton of exclusive content there, only available to my supporters. And every supporter really makes a difference. 

This is episode 55 of Stories of Resistance, a podcast series co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, I bring you stories of resistance and hope like this. Inspiration for dark times. If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment or leave a review.

Thanks for listening. See you next time.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/july-4-and-the-long-tradition-of-us-protest/feed/ 0 542741
Countering an Authoritarian Takeover with the Labor Movement: Alex Han & Tarso Ramos https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/countering-an-authoritarian-takeover-with-the-labor-movement-alex-han-tarso-ramos/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/countering-an-authoritarian-takeover-with-the-labor-movement-alex-han-tarso-ramos/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 16:29:02 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b86b6d563df6dc56f29b2cd61232fe7e
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/countering-an-authoritarian-takeover-with-the-labor-movement-alex-han-tarso-ramos/feed/ 0 542731
Countering an Authoritarian Takeover with the Labor Movement: Alex Han & Tarso Ramos https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/countering-an-authoritarian-takeover-with-the-labor-movement-alex-han-tarso-ramos-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/countering-an-authoritarian-takeover-with-the-labor-movement-alex-han-tarso-ramos-2/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 16:29:02 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b86b6d563df6dc56f29b2cd61232fe7e
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/countering-an-authoritarian-takeover-with-the-labor-movement-alex-han-tarso-ramos-2/feed/ 0 542732
What Human Rights Watch is demanding at the 4th International Financing for Development Conference https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/what-human-rights-watch-is-demanding-at-the-4th-international-financing-for-development-conference/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/what-human-rights-watch-is-demanding-at-the-4th-international-financing-for-development-conference/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 15:49:45 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=863a683a6ff34d8b691877d8193e96ec
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/what-human-rights-watch-is-demanding-at-the-4th-international-financing-for-development-conference/feed/ 0 542708
What Human Rights Watch is demanding at the 4th International Financing for Development Conference https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/what-human-rights-watch-is-demanding-at-the-4th-international-financing-for-development-conference-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/what-human-rights-watch-is-demanding-at-the-4th-international-financing-for-development-conference-2/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 15:49:45 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=863a683a6ff34d8b691877d8193e96ec
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/what-human-rights-watch-is-demanding-at-the-4th-international-financing-for-development-conference-2/feed/ 0 542709
GOP Budget Bill Slashes Medicaid for Millions, Cuts Taxes for the Rich, Funds ICE at Historic Levels https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 14:39:40 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=e21ce1ba825a8a0f4f693870695ceeb3
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels/feed/ 0 542696
"ICE Is Just Driving Around Los Angeles And Racially Profiling People." #politics #trump https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/ice-is-just-driving-around-los-angeles-and-racially-profiling-people-politics-trump/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/ice-is-just-driving-around-los-angeles-and-racially-profiling-people-politics-trump/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 14:28:51 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=dd91356783d58496ac09d0a276d354c2
This content originally appeared on The Intercept and was authored by The Intercept.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/ice-is-just-driving-around-los-angeles-and-racially-profiling-people-politics-trump/feed/ 0 542692
Photojournalist hit in the arm with projectile shot by LAPD https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/photojournalist-hit-in-the-arm-with-projectile-shot-by-lapd/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/photojournalist-hit-in-the-arm-with-projectile-shot-by-lapd/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 14:06:16 +0000 https://pressfreedomtracker.us/all-incidents/photojournalist-hit-in-the-arm-with-projectile-shot-by-lapd/

Independent photojournalist Ron Haviv was shot in the arm by a Los Angeles Police Department officer on June 14, 2025, while documenting a protest for The New Republic.

Haviv, the co-founder of documentary producer VII Foundation, told the U.S. Press Freedom Tracker via email that he was in downtown Los Angeles to photograph a “No Kings” rally, one of more than 2,000 held across the country to protest the actions of President Donald Trump and his administration, and planned to coincide with a military parade held in Washington, D.C., and Trump’s birthday.

The rally also followed days of protests in Los Angeles and nearby towns against recent federal raids, part of the Trump administration’s larger immigration crackdown.

After the protest ended, Haviv said, he witnessed confrontations around City Hall and the Metropolitan Detention Center between protesters and law enforcement, which included LAPD and Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department officers, with LAPD officers attempting to push protesters off the streets.

Haviv was close to the police line, not near any protesters and “not much was happening on either side,” he said, when he was hit in the arm by a 40 mm crowd-control projectile shot by an LAPD officer — the first time, he said, that he’s been shot or shot at by U.S. law enforcement while working.

Haviv was wearing press credentials, he said, but didn’t know if he had been targeted as a journalist. None of his equipment was damaged, but he had to seek medical help for the injury, which weeks after the incident was still bruised and in the process of healing.

He said he is considering his legal options.

Haviv noted that the protesters were mostly peaceful and that law enforcement’s response therefore seemed disproportionate. “The combination of horses, tear gas and rubber bullets seemed to be a higher amount than necessary for what was happening on the ground,” he said.


This content originally appeared on U.S. Press Freedom Tracker: Incident Database and was authored by U.S. Press Freedom Tracker: Incident Database.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/photojournalist-hit-in-the-arm-with-projectile-shot-by-lapd/feed/ 0 542695
The Perfect Islamophobic Storm https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-perfect-islamophobic-storm/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-perfect-islamophobic-storm/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 13:45:17 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159609 A familiar violence is brewing in the heart of Europe. The numbers reveal only what has surfaced so far. A quarter of the voting population now openly support the AfD, a party classified by the security services as ‘right-wing extremist’ due to their Islamophobic rhetoric and white-supremacist affiliations. Boosted by the mainstream press and the endorsement from the Nazi-saluting billionaire, the xenophobic […]

The post The Perfect Islamophobic Storm first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
A familiar violence is brewing in the heart of Europe. The numbers reveal only what has surfaced so far. A quarter of the voting population now openly support the AfD, a party classified by the security services as ‘right-wing extremist’ due to their Islamophobic rhetoric and white-supremacist affiliations. Boosted by the mainstream press and the endorsement from the Nazi-saluting billionaire, the xenophobic message is broadcast across Germany once more.

Traditional conservative parties, the CDU and CSU, while reluctantly distancing themselves from the AfD, have adopted the same Islamophobic stance wrapped in a more ‘respectable’ language. In complete disregard for the lessons etched into their own Grundgesetz, the CSU have declared that Islam has no place in Germany. The CDU, having finally shed their liberal skin, publicly declared any calls for a ‘Free Palestine’ as terrorist sympathies. Their violence is sanitised and bureaucratic as they push legislation to strip dual nationals of citizenship based on their political views. So effortless is their rejection of civil rights that it would send their oligarch friends in the White-house into a jealous frenzy.

A more unexpected xenophobic turn came from the centre-left alliance under former chancellor Scholz’s Social Democratic Party (SPD). After a stabbing incident in Solingen, afraid to lose votes to the anti-immigrant wave sweeping the country, Scholz promised Germany mass deportations. This concession gave the racists all the proof they needed for the otherwise unfounded narrative of ‘the violent immigrant’. Riding this wave into right-wing populism, he promised to strengthen the borders of the fortress Europe – borders which already claim the lives of 8 000 migrants every year. And as if reading from the Trump script, the SPD oversaw the deportation orders for several EU citizens for participating in peaceful demonstrations – no charges, no trial and no global outrage.

Across the German political spectrum, in a mixture of performative Holocaust guilt and opportunism, parties have embraced the settler colonial hierarchy on which Israel was founded, with Arabs and Muslims at the bottom of their order. With revisionist logic and wishful thinking, the Bundestag passed a resolution that frames anti-Semitism as an imported middle-eastern issue. By adopting the fictional IHRA definition of anti-Semitism, which includes all criticism of the state of Israel, they got the outcome they were looking for. The resolution was sharply criticised by human rights monitors as antagonistic to Arabs and Muslims and simultaneously anti-Semitic for conflating Judaism with the state of Israel. The resolution was passed with over 95% of votes.

In Germany, to wear a keffiyeh is to risk arrest and deportation. To publicly mourn the Nakba is illegal and yet when the AfD march through immigrant neighbourhoods to intimidate they call it freedom of speech. The message to the Arabs and Muslims of Germany is clear – you are at the bottom of our racial order, our human rights do not apply to you. Germany now records 5 Islamophobic incidents every day.

This perfect storm of Islamophobia and anti-Arab sentiment has thrown Europes largest economy back on a path of institutional racism. The wider fallout from alienating 5 million Muslims in Germany from their civil rights will undoubtedly be felt in the coming decades.

But the selective repentance, this weaponisation of Holocaust memory, serves not only to justify the suspension of civil liberties at home. It conveniently forms a theatre of morality to mask ongoing imperialist projects and to evade historical responsibilities. True atonement for the horrors of the Holocaust would include taking responsibility for the over 300 000 Europeans that moved to Palestine after World War Two and the Nakba that followed, displacing 750 000 Palestinians from their land. The victims of German genocides in Africa know not to hold their breath waiting for justice.

Colonial Amnesia

In Namibia, the German legacy of genocide is not forgotten. In a blueprint for the Gaza genocide, the pretext for this genocide was an anti-colonial uprising that killed 100 German settlers. The mass murder that followed wiped out 80% of the Herero and 50% of the Nama people, over 70 000 killed, for daring to resist colonial rule. Germany’s recognition of these atrocities, more than a century later, was embarrassingly absent of any formal reparations or land redistribution. To this day, Namibia remains in an apartheid-like inequality with 48% of Namibia’s land in the hands of just 5000 white settlers – 0.3% of the population.

The suppression of the Maji Maji rebellion in Tanzania reeks of a similar stench. Deliberate starvation was weaponised against the Muslim communities that rebelled against the colonisers. Captain Wangenheim’s words—“Only hunger and want can bring about final submission”—echo in the blockade of Gaza and in Germany’s vetoes in contempt of international law. 300 000 murdered, no reparations on the horizon, no memorial in Berlin.

When Elon Musk, the settler son of apartheid capital, fans the flames of European fascism and demands that Germany “move beyond its past guilt”, what he means is this: that Germany must stop pretending, and embrace its role in the white empire once again. And the disenfranchised Germans are listening.

In defence of genocide

In April 2025, the ICJ announced an extension of Israel’s deadline to submit a defence against the allegations of genocide brought by South Africa and supported by the majority of the world’s countries. Germany as one of the passionate defenders of Israel has been proudly diluting, stalling and vetoing calls for immediate ceasefire and sanctions on Israel. While the ruling is inevitably not going to be in Israels favour, with German sponsorship the killing can continue for another year.

The international order that was implemented after WWII, once meant to protect vulnerable groups, is now being subdued. The right to armed resistance against occupation, the blanket ban on collective punishment and withholding of aid are all conveniently ignored by the German political establishment, left to right. Amnesty InternationalHuman Rights WatchEuro-Med Monitor are all screaming ‘Genocide in Gaza’ and calling out German complicity. They fell for the theatrics of ‘Nie Wieder’.

At home, repression became policy and civil rights monitors took note. Palestinian flags are banned, solidarity groups outlawed, Jewish activists arrested, Arab youth surveilled. These tactics are not new to us in the Kurdish liberation struggle. The banning of Kurdish resistance symbols and closing of book publishers, what should have triggered a constitutional crisis, was casually gifted by the German state to their friend in Türkiye. Add it to the list of ethnic cleansing campaigns sponsored by Germany.

Germany’s Islamophobic turn cannot be divorced from its colonial past or its present-day imperial commitments. The AfD’s rise, the CDU’s xenophobic mimicry, and the SPD’s repressive populism are symptoms of a deeper pathology: a state apparatus that has never abandoned the hierarchies of race and empire. While the world’s gaze is fixed on the Trump administration, it is time to recognise Germany once again as a powerful xenophobic and authoritarian force in Europe.

The post The Perfect Islamophobic Storm first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Kaveh Najafi.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-perfect-islamophobic-storm/feed/ 0 542683
The Perfect Islamophobic Storm https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-perfect-islamophobic-storm-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-perfect-islamophobic-storm-2/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 13:45:17 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159609 A familiar violence is brewing in the heart of Europe. The numbers reveal only what has surfaced so far. A quarter of the voting population now openly support the AfD, a party classified by the security services as ‘right-wing extremist’ due to their Islamophobic rhetoric and white-supremacist affiliations. Boosted by the mainstream press and the endorsement from the Nazi-saluting billionaire, the xenophobic […]

The post The Perfect Islamophobic Storm first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
A familiar violence is brewing in the heart of Europe. The numbers reveal only what has surfaced so far. A quarter of the voting population now openly support the AfD, a party classified by the security services as ‘right-wing extremist’ due to their Islamophobic rhetoric and white-supremacist affiliations. Boosted by the mainstream press and the endorsement from the Nazi-saluting billionaire, the xenophobic message is broadcast across Germany once more.

Traditional conservative parties, the CDU and CSU, while reluctantly distancing themselves from the AfD, have adopted the same Islamophobic stance wrapped in a more ‘respectable’ language. In complete disregard for the lessons etched into their own Grundgesetz, the CSU have declared that Islam has no place in Germany. The CDU, having finally shed their liberal skin, publicly declared any calls for a ‘Free Palestine’ as terrorist sympathies. Their violence is sanitised and bureaucratic as they push legislation to strip dual nationals of citizenship based on their political views. So effortless is their rejection of civil rights that it would send their oligarch friends in the White-house into a jealous frenzy.

A more unexpected xenophobic turn came from the centre-left alliance under former chancellor Scholz’s Social Democratic Party (SPD). After a stabbing incident in Solingen, afraid to lose votes to the anti-immigrant wave sweeping the country, Scholz promised Germany mass deportations. This concession gave the racists all the proof they needed for the otherwise unfounded narrative of ‘the violent immigrant’. Riding this wave into right-wing populism, he promised to strengthen the borders of the fortress Europe – borders which already claim the lives of 8 000 migrants every year. And as if reading from the Trump script, the SPD oversaw the deportation orders for several EU citizens for participating in peaceful demonstrations – no charges, no trial and no global outrage.

Across the German political spectrum, in a mixture of performative Holocaust guilt and opportunism, parties have embraced the settler colonial hierarchy on which Israel was founded, with Arabs and Muslims at the bottom of their order. With revisionist logic and wishful thinking, the Bundestag passed a resolution that frames anti-Semitism as an imported middle-eastern issue. By adopting the fictional IHRA definition of anti-Semitism, which includes all criticism of the state of Israel, they got the outcome they were looking for. The resolution was sharply criticised by human rights monitors as antagonistic to Arabs and Muslims and simultaneously anti-Semitic for conflating Judaism with the state of Israel. The resolution was passed with over 95% of votes.

In Germany, to wear a keffiyeh is to risk arrest and deportation. To publicly mourn the Nakba is illegal and yet when the AfD march through immigrant neighbourhoods to intimidate they call it freedom of speech. The message to the Arabs and Muslims of Germany is clear – you are at the bottom of our racial order, our human rights do not apply to you. Germany now records 5 Islamophobic incidents every day.

This perfect storm of Islamophobia and anti-Arab sentiment has thrown Europes largest economy back on a path of institutional racism. The wider fallout from alienating 5 million Muslims in Germany from their civil rights will undoubtedly be felt in the coming decades.

But the selective repentance, this weaponisation of Holocaust memory, serves not only to justify the suspension of civil liberties at home. It conveniently forms a theatre of morality to mask ongoing imperialist projects and to evade historical responsibilities. True atonement for the horrors of the Holocaust would include taking responsibility for the over 300 000 Europeans that moved to Palestine after World War Two and the Nakba that followed, displacing 750 000 Palestinians from their land. The victims of German genocides in Africa know not to hold their breath waiting for justice.

Colonial Amnesia

In Namibia, the German legacy of genocide is not forgotten. In a blueprint for the Gaza genocide, the pretext for this genocide was an anti-colonial uprising that killed 100 German settlers. The mass murder that followed wiped out 80% of the Herero and 50% of the Nama people, over 70 000 killed, for daring to resist colonial rule. Germany’s recognition of these atrocities, more than a century later, was embarrassingly absent of any formal reparations or land redistribution. To this day, Namibia remains in an apartheid-like inequality with 48% of Namibia’s land in the hands of just 5000 white settlers – 0.3% of the population.

The suppression of the Maji Maji rebellion in Tanzania reeks of a similar stench. Deliberate starvation was weaponised against the Muslim communities that rebelled against the colonisers. Captain Wangenheim’s words—“Only hunger and want can bring about final submission”—echo in the blockade of Gaza and in Germany’s vetoes in contempt of international law. 300 000 murdered, no reparations on the horizon, no memorial in Berlin.

When Elon Musk, the settler son of apartheid capital, fans the flames of European fascism and demands that Germany “move beyond its past guilt”, what he means is this: that Germany must stop pretending, and embrace its role in the white empire once again. And the disenfranchised Germans are listening.

In defence of genocide

In April 2025, the ICJ announced an extension of Israel’s deadline to submit a defence against the allegations of genocide brought by South Africa and supported by the majority of the world’s countries. Germany as one of the passionate defenders of Israel has been proudly diluting, stalling and vetoing calls for immediate ceasefire and sanctions on Israel. While the ruling is inevitably not going to be in Israels favour, with German sponsorship the killing can continue for another year.

The international order that was implemented after WWII, once meant to protect vulnerable groups, is now being subdued. The right to armed resistance against occupation, the blanket ban on collective punishment and withholding of aid are all conveniently ignored by the German political establishment, left to right. Amnesty InternationalHuman Rights WatchEuro-Med Monitor are all screaming ‘Genocide in Gaza’ and calling out German complicity. They fell for the theatrics of ‘Nie Wieder’.

At home, repression became policy and civil rights monitors took note. Palestinian flags are banned, solidarity groups outlawed, Jewish activists arrested, Arab youth surveilled. These tactics are not new to us in the Kurdish liberation struggle. The banning of Kurdish resistance symbols and closing of book publishers, what should have triggered a constitutional crisis, was casually gifted by the German state to their friend in Türkiye. Add it to the list of ethnic cleansing campaigns sponsored by Germany.

Germany’s Islamophobic turn cannot be divorced from its colonial past or its present-day imperial commitments. The AfD’s rise, the CDU’s xenophobic mimicry, and the SPD’s repressive populism are symptoms of a deeper pathology: a state apparatus that has never abandoned the hierarchies of race and empire. While the world’s gaze is fixed on the Trump administration, it is time to recognise Germany once again as a powerful xenophobic and authoritarian force in Europe.

The post The Perfect Islamophobic Storm first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Kaveh Najafi.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-perfect-islamophobic-storm-2/feed/ 0 542684
The UNWINNABLE Political War and the Path to Unity #energy #globaleconomy #economy https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-unwinnable-political-war-and-the-path-to-unity-energy-globaleconomy-economy/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-unwinnable-political-war-and-the-path-to-unity-energy-globaleconomy-economy/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 13:00:54 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=772e4de059ccfc58b435b91f541a2ac3
This content originally appeared on VICE News and was authored by VICE News.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-unwinnable-political-war-and-the-path-to-unity-energy-globaleconomy-economy/feed/ 0 542670
GOP Budget Bill Slashes Medicaid for Millions, Cuts Taxes for the Rich, Funds ICE at Historic Levels https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels-2/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 12:49:07 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=86a287938ef34f3ca56f9b51633b616f 1920 1080 maxp

As we broadcast, the House was soon set to vote on the so-called big, beautiful bill before the July 4 deadline imposed by President Trump. Should the House pass the legislation, the bill would be sent to Trump’s desk to be signed into law. The bill massively increases funding for ICE, cuts $1 trillion from Medicaid over a decade and adds $3.3 trillion to the nation’s debt.

“It makes people in the country who are in the bottom 30%, working hard to pay their bills, poorer, because it’s stripping away healthcare from them, stripping away food assistance from them. And it is all in the name of giving tax breaks to the wealthiest. … The top 20% in this country get 60% of the benefits,” says Democratic Congressmember Ro Khanna.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/gop-budget-bill-slashes-medicaid-for-millions-cuts-taxes-for-the-rich-funds-ice-at-historic-levels-2/feed/ 0 542714
Elon Musk Hired a Dozen Texas Lobbyists This Year. State Law Keeps the Extent of Their Influence Under Wraps. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/elon-musk-hired-a-dozen-texas-lobbyists-this-year-state-law-keeps-the-extent-of-their-influence-under-wraps/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/elon-musk-hired-a-dozen-texas-lobbyists-this-year-state-law-keeps-the-extent-of-their-influence-under-wraps/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/elon-musk-texas-lobbyists-influence-law by Lauren McGaughy, The Texas Newsroom

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

This article is co-published with The Texas Newsroom and The Texas Tribune as part of an initiative to report on how power is wielded in Texas.

Elon Musk’s team of Texas lobbyists during the 2025 legislative session did not rival those of huge energy and telecommunications companies, which typically employ dozens of people to represent them. But Musk and his companies still hired more lobbyists this year than any other since 2021, according to data from the Texas Ethics Commission.

Musk, the billionaire businessman behind carmaker Tesla and aerospace company SpaceX, influenced several new Texas laws this year. How his lobbyists came about these wins, however, is more of a mystery.

His lobbyists, who represented Tesla, SpaceX and the social media giant X Corp., spent tens of thousands of dollars on things like gifts and meals for Texas elected officials and others during the session, according to an analysis of state ethics data. In most cases, Texas transparency laws do not require lobbyists to disclose which politicians they wined and dined or on behalf of which clients.

The Texas Newsroom reached out to all 12 of Musk’s lobbyists registered with the state this session. Only one, Carrie Simmons, a lobbyist who counts Tesla among her clients, responded, but she declined to be interviewed. She said only Musk’s companies could comment on their work this session.

Emails sent to Musk’s companies and to Musk himself were not returned.

The Texas Newsroom was able to find hints of some of their actions in records obtained from Lt. Gov. Dan Patrick and state Sen. Adam Hinojosa. Other documents detailing their deeper connections are hidden from disclosure by state laws.

Ethics experts said the responsibility to improve transparency lies with Texas lawmakers. State law provides a “base level of transparency” for the public on who lobbyists are and who they represent, said Andrew Cates, a former lobbyist who wrote a guide on state ethics rules.

“Beyond that, the Legislature simply has not prioritized enough transparency in how the dollars are actually being spent on legislators on a regular basis. But that’s not the lobby’s fault, it’s the Legislature’s,” Cates said.

Tom Forbes, president of the Professional Advocacy Association of Texas, a statewide lobbyist organization, said while lobbyists sometimes get a bad rap, they play a critical role for lawmakers trying to make decisions on complex policies. He told The Texas Newsroom that his group is “agnostic” about making reporting requirements more stringent but will follow any changes the state implements.

“Our association is going to comply with whatever law the Legislature passes,” Forbes said.

Who did Musk hire and who did they lobby?

Eight of Musk’s lobbyists worked for SpaceX, according to filings with the Ethics Commission. Tesla had four, one of whom also worked for X.

Musk’s lobbyists include former advisers and staffers for Gov. Greg Abbott, among them Mike Toomey and Reed Clay. Another lobbyist, Will McAdams, once sat on the Public Utility Commission of Texas, which regulates the state’s electric, telecommunications, and water and sewer utilities.

All but one lobbyist had other clients for whom they were also working, making it more difficult to track exactly how much spending went to further Musk’s agenda. Benjamin Lancaster, a former legislative staffer, was only on SpaceX’s payroll.

Lobbyists are not required to report their exact salaries, only a pay range. According to Ethics Commission data, Musk pledged to pay somewhere between about $400,000 to nearly $1 million in total to his lobbyists for their work this year. Half of them could rake in more than $110,000 each working for Musk’s companies.

Each month, lobbyists report their total spending. But state rules don’t require them to disclose who was on the receiving end unless the lobbyist shelled out more than $132.60 on one person in a single day. This includes food and beverages, transportation, lodging or entertainment. Taxes and tips are not counted. The disclosure threshold for gifts is $110.

Lobbyists also don’t need to disclose exactly who attended events to which all legislators were invited, like catered lunches for the entire Texas House of Representatives or happy hours hosted off-site.

In practice, these rules mean a lobbyist could buy the same elected official a steak dinner every night. As long as the daily cost stays under that amount, they don’t need to say who got the free meal.

Musk’s lobbyists spent more than $46,000 on food and drink alone for elected officials and their staff, family and guests this year, according to state ethics records. None of them detailed which elected officials may have been on the receiving end, implying all of their spending remained beneath the daily threshold.

Jim Clancy, the former chair of the Ethics Commission, said it’s common for multiple lobbyists to divide a single bill in order to stay below the reporting threshold.

“They have 15 different credit cards in the deal to make sure that it’s all below the limit,” Clancy told The Texas Newsroom. “The Legislature has to change it. And if they did, they wouldn’t get to eat for free.”

A slate of ethics bills, including several to require transparency into who funds mass text messages for political campaigns, failed to become law this year, according to The Texas Tribune. Meanwhile, legislators approved a new law that will reduce the fine for former lawmakers who engage in illegal lobbying activity.

What do other records show?

While lobbyists are not required to disclose which bills they discuss in private meetings with officials and their staff, they must note their position if they choose to testify on a piece of legislation. This is how The Texas Newsroom identified the 13 bills on which Musk’s lobbyists took a public stance.

The Texas Newsroom was able to glean some additional insight on lobbyist influence from records received through public information requests.

Calendars for Hinojosa, a newly elected South Texas Republican who authored multiple bills that would benefit SpaceX and other aerospace companies, showed he or his staff had meetings scheduled with lobbyists or representatives from Musk’s rocket company at least three times in two months. Emails showed Patrick penned a letter to the Federal Aviation Administration supporting SpaceX’s ability to increase the number of launches at its South Texas rocket site.

Patrick was also invited to take a tour of the Tesla Gigafactory outside Austin, these records showed, but it’s unclear if he went.

Neither Hinojosa nor Patrick responded to requests for an interview.

The Texas Senate declined to release other documents that could have shed light on how Musk’s companies interacted with elected officials. In denying their release, Senate Secretary Patsy Spaw said communications between state lawmakers and Texas residents are “confidential by law.”

The reason, she said, is “to ensure the right of citizens of the state to petition their state government without fear of harassment, retaliation or public ridicule.”

This could include emails with lobbyists.

Lauren McGaughy is a journalist with The Texas Newsroom, a collaboration among NPR and the public radio stations in Texas. She is based at KUT in Austin. Reach her at lmcgaughy@kut.org. Sign up for KUT newsletters.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Lauren McGaughy, The Texas Newsroom.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/elon-musk-hired-a-dozen-texas-lobbyists-this-year-state-law-keeps-the-extent-of-their-influence-under-wraps/feed/ 0 542642
Elon Musk Hired a Dozen Texas Lobbyists This Year. State Law Keeps the Extent of Their Influence Under Wraps. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/elon-musk-hired-a-dozen-texas-lobbyists-this-year-state-law-keeps-the-extent-of-their-influence-under-wraps-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/elon-musk-hired-a-dozen-texas-lobbyists-this-year-state-law-keeps-the-extent-of-their-influence-under-wraps-2/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/elon-musk-texas-lobbyists-influence-law by Lauren McGaughy, The Texas Newsroom

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

This article is co-published with The Texas Newsroom and The Texas Tribune as part of an initiative to report on how power is wielded in Texas.

Elon Musk’s team of Texas lobbyists during the 2025 legislative session did not rival those of huge energy and telecommunications companies, which typically employ dozens of people to represent them. But Musk and his companies still hired more lobbyists this year than any other since 2021, according to data from the Texas Ethics Commission.

Musk, the billionaire businessman behind carmaker Tesla and aerospace company SpaceX, influenced several new Texas laws this year. How his lobbyists came about these wins, however, is more of a mystery.

His lobbyists, who represented Tesla, SpaceX and the social media giant X Corp., spent tens of thousands of dollars on things like gifts and meals for Texas elected officials and others during the session, according to an analysis of state ethics data. In most cases, Texas transparency laws do not require lobbyists to disclose which politicians they wined and dined or on behalf of which clients.

The Texas Newsroom reached out to all 12 of Musk’s lobbyists registered with the state this session. Only one, Carrie Simmons, a lobbyist who counts Tesla among her clients, responded, but she declined to be interviewed. She said only Musk’s companies could comment on their work this session.

Emails sent to Musk’s companies and to Musk himself were not returned.

The Texas Newsroom was able to find hints of some of their actions in records obtained from Lt. Gov. Dan Patrick and state Sen. Adam Hinojosa. Other documents detailing their deeper connections are hidden from disclosure by state laws.

Ethics experts said the responsibility to improve transparency lies with Texas lawmakers. State law provides a “base level of transparency” for the public on who lobbyists are and who they represent, said Andrew Cates, a former lobbyist who wrote a guide on state ethics rules.

“Beyond that, the Legislature simply has not prioritized enough transparency in how the dollars are actually being spent on legislators on a regular basis. But that’s not the lobby’s fault, it’s the Legislature’s,” Cates said.

Tom Forbes, president of the Professional Advocacy Association of Texas, a statewide lobbyist organization, said while lobbyists sometimes get a bad rap, they play a critical role for lawmakers trying to make decisions on complex policies. He told The Texas Newsroom that his group is “agnostic” about making reporting requirements more stringent but will follow any changes the state implements.

“Our association is going to comply with whatever law the Legislature passes,” Forbes said.

Who did Musk hire and who did they lobby?

Eight of Musk’s lobbyists worked for SpaceX, according to filings with the Ethics Commission. Tesla had four, one of whom also worked for X.

Musk’s lobbyists include former advisers and staffers for Gov. Greg Abbott, among them Mike Toomey and Reed Clay. Another lobbyist, Will McAdams, once sat on the Public Utility Commission of Texas, which regulates the state’s electric, telecommunications, and water and sewer utilities.

All but one lobbyist had other clients for whom they were also working, making it more difficult to track exactly how much spending went to further Musk’s agenda. Benjamin Lancaster, a former legislative staffer, was only on SpaceX’s payroll.

Lobbyists are not required to report their exact salaries, only a pay range. According to Ethics Commission data, Musk pledged to pay somewhere between about $400,000 to nearly $1 million in total to his lobbyists for their work this year. Half of them could rake in more than $110,000 each working for Musk’s companies.

Each month, lobbyists report their total spending. But state rules don’t require them to disclose who was on the receiving end unless the lobbyist shelled out more than $132.60 on one person in a single day. This includes food and beverages, transportation, lodging or entertainment. Taxes and tips are not counted. The disclosure threshold for gifts is $110.

Lobbyists also don’t need to disclose exactly who attended events to which all legislators were invited, like catered lunches for the entire Texas House of Representatives or happy hours hosted off-site.

In practice, these rules mean a lobbyist could buy the same elected official a steak dinner every night. As long as the daily cost stays under that amount, they don’t need to say who got the free meal.

Musk’s lobbyists spent more than $46,000 on food and drink alone for elected officials and their staff, family and guests this year, according to state ethics records. None of them detailed which elected officials may have been on the receiving end, implying all of their spending remained beneath the daily threshold.

Jim Clancy, the former chair of the Ethics Commission, said it’s common for multiple lobbyists to divide a single bill in order to stay below the reporting threshold.

“They have 15 different credit cards in the deal to make sure that it’s all below the limit,” Clancy told The Texas Newsroom. “The Legislature has to change it. And if they did, they wouldn’t get to eat for free.”

A slate of ethics bills, including several to require transparency into who funds mass text messages for political campaigns, failed to become law this year, according to The Texas Tribune. Meanwhile, legislators approved a new law that will reduce the fine for former lawmakers who engage in illegal lobbying activity.

What do other records show?

While lobbyists are not required to disclose which bills they discuss in private meetings with officials and their staff, they must note their position if they choose to testify on a piece of legislation. This is how The Texas Newsroom identified the 13 bills on which Musk’s lobbyists took a public stance.

The Texas Newsroom was able to glean some additional insight on lobbyist influence from records received through public information requests.

Calendars for Hinojosa, a newly elected South Texas Republican who authored multiple bills that would benefit SpaceX and other aerospace companies, showed he or his staff had meetings scheduled with lobbyists or representatives from Musk’s rocket company at least three times in two months. Emails showed Patrick penned a letter to the Federal Aviation Administration supporting SpaceX’s ability to increase the number of launches at its South Texas rocket site.

Patrick was also invited to take a tour of the Tesla Gigafactory outside Austin, these records showed, but it’s unclear if he went.

Neither Hinojosa nor Patrick responded to requests for an interview.

The Texas Senate declined to release other documents that could have shed light on how Musk’s companies interacted with elected officials. In denying their release, Senate Secretary Patsy Spaw said communications between state lawmakers and Texas residents are “confidential by law.”

The reason, she said, is “to ensure the right of citizens of the state to petition their state government without fear of harassment, retaliation or public ridicule.”

This could include emails with lobbyists.

Lauren McGaughy is a journalist with The Texas Newsroom, a collaboration among NPR and the public radio stations in Texas. She is based at KUT in Austin. Reach her at lmcgaughy@kut.org. Sign up for KUT newsletters.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Lauren McGaughy, The Texas Newsroom.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/elon-musk-hired-a-dozen-texas-lobbyists-this-year-state-law-keeps-the-extent-of-their-influence-under-wraps-2/feed/ 0 542643
The Rainbow Warrior saga: 1. French state terrorism and NZ’s end of innocence https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-1-french-state-terrorism-and-nzs-end-of-innocence/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-1-french-state-terrorism-and-nzs-end-of-innocence/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 06:09:09 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=116949 COMMENTARY: By Eugene Doyle

Immediately after killing Fernando Pereira and blowing up Greenpeace’s flagship the Rainbow Warrior in Auckland harbour, several of the French agents went on a ski holiday in New Zealand’s South Island to celebrate.

Such was the contempt the French had for the Kiwis and the abilities of our police to pursue them.  How wrong they were.

To mark the 40th anniversary of the French terrorist attack Little Island Press has published a revised and updated edition of Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior, first released in 1986.

A new prologue by former prime minister Helen Clark and a preface by Greenpeace’s Bunny McDiarmid, along with an extensive postscript which bring us up to the present day, underline why the past is not dead; it’s with us right now.

Written by David Robie, editor of Asia Pacific Report, who spent 11 weeks on the final voyage of the Warrior, the book is the most remarkable piece of history I have read this year and one of those rare books that has the power to expand your mind and make your blood boil at the same time. I thought I knew a fair bit about the momentous events surrounding the attack — until I read Eyes of Fire.

Heroes of our age
The book covers the history of Greenpeace action — from fighting the dumping of nuclear and other toxic waste in European waters, the Arctic and the Pacific, voyages to link besieged communities across the oceans, through to their epic struggles to halt whaling and save endangered marine colonies from predators.

The Rainbow Warrior’s very last voyage before the bombing was to evacuate the entire population of Rongelap atoll (about 320 people) in the Marshall Islands who had been exposed to US nuclear radiation for decades.

This article is the first of two in which I will explore themes that the book triggered for me.

Neither secret nor intelligent – the French secret intelligence service

Jean-Luc Kister was the DGSE (Direction-générale de la Sécurité extérieure) agent who placed the two bombs that ripped a massive hole in the hull of the Warrior on 10 July 1985. The ship quickly sank, trapping Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira inside.

Former colonel Kister was a member of a large team of elite agents sent to New Zealand. One had also infiltrated Greenpeace months before, some travelled through the country prior to the attack, drinking, rooting New Zealand women and leaving a trail of breadcrumbs that led all the way to the Palais de l’Élysée where François Mitterrand, Socialist President of France, had personally given the order to bomb the famous peace vessel.

Robie aptly calls the French mission “Blundergate”. The stupidity, howling incompetence and moronic lack of a sound strategic rationale behind the attack were only matched by the mendacity, the imperial hauteur and the racist contempt that lies at the heart of French policy in the Pacific to this very day.

Thinking the Kiwi police would be no match for their élan, their savoir-faire and their panache, some of the killers hit the ski slopes to celebrate “Mission Accompli”. Others fled to Norfolk Island aboard a yacht, the Ouvéa.

Tracked there by the New Zealand police it was only with the assistance of our friends and allies, the Australians, that the agents were able to escape. Within days they sank their yacht at sea during a rendezvous with a French nuclear submarine and were evenually able to return to France for medals and promotions.

Two of the agents, however, were not so lucky. As everyone my age will recall, Dominique Prieur and Alain Mafart, were nabbed after a lightning fast operation by New Zealand police.

With friends and allies like these, who needs enemies?
We should recall that the French were our allies at the time. They decided, however, to stop the Rainbow Warrior from leading a flotilla of ships up to Moruroa Atoll in French Polynesia where yet another round of nuclear tests were scheduled. In other words: they bombed a peace ship to keep testing bombs.

By 1995, France had detonated 193 nuclear bombs in the South Pacific.

David Robie sees the bombing as “a desperate attempt by one of the last colonial powers in the Pacific to hang on to the vestiges of empire by blowing up a peace ship so it could continue despoiling Pacific islands for the sake of an independent nuclear force”.

The US, UK and Australia cold-shouldered New Zealand through this period and uttered not a word of condemnation against the French. Within two years we were frog-marched out of the ANZUS alliance with Australia and the US because of our ground-breaking nuclear-free legislation.

It was a blessing and the dawn of a period in which New Zealanders had an intense sense of national pride — a far cry from today when New Zealand politicians are being referred to the International Criminal Court (ICC) in The Hague for war crimes associated with the Gaza genocide.

Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior . . . publication next week. Image: ©  David Robie/Eyes Of Fire/Little Island Press

The French State invented the term ‘terrorism’
I studied French History at university in France and did a paper called “La France à la veille de révolution” (France on the eve of revolution). One of the chilling cultural memories is of the period from September 1793 to July 1794, which was known as La Terreur.

At the time the French state literally coined the term “terrorisme” — with the blade of the guillotine dropping on neck after neck as the state tried to consolidate power through terror. But, as Robie points out, quoting law professor Roger S. Clark, we tend to use the term today to refer almost exclusively to non-state actors.

With the US and Israel gunning down starving civilians in Gaza every day, with wave after wave of terror attacks being committed inside Iran and across the Middle East by Mossad, the CIA and MI6, we should amend this erroneous habit.

The DGSE team who attached limpet mines to the Rainbow Warrior did so as psychopathic servants of the French State. Eyes of Fire: “At the time, Prime Minister David Lange described the Rainbow Warrior attack as ‘nothing more than a sordid act of international state-backed terrorism’.”

Don’t get me wrong. I am not “anti-French”. I lived for years in France, had a French girlfriend, studied French history, language and literature. I even had friends in Wellington who worked at the French Embassy.

Curiously when I lived next to Premier House, the official residence of the prime minister, my other next door neighbour was a French agent who specialised in surveillance. Our houses backed onto Premier House. Quelle coïncidence. To his mild consternation I’d greet him with “Salut, mon espion favori.” (Hello, my favourite spy).

What I despise is French colonialism, French racism, and what the French call magouillage. I don’t know a good English word for it . . .  it is a mix of shenanigans, duplicity, artful deception to achieve unscrupulous outcomes that can’t be publicly avowed. In brief: what the French attempted in Auckland in 1985.

Robie recounts in detail the lying, smokescreens and roadblocks that everyone from President Mitterrand through to junior officials put in the way of the New Zealand investigators. Mitterrand gave Prime Minister David Lange assurances that the culprits would be brought to justice. The French Embassy in Wellington claimed at the time: “In no way is France involved. The French government doesn’t deal with its opponents in such ways.”

It took years for the bombshell to explode that none other than Mitterrand himself had ordered the terrorist attack on New Zealand and Greenpeace!

Rainbow Warrior III at Majuro
Rainbow Warrior III . . . the current successor to the bombed ship. Photographed at Majuro, the capital of the Marshall Islands in April 2025. Image: © Bianca Vitale/Greenpeace

We the people of the Pacific
We, the people of the Pacific, owe a debt to Greenpeace and all those who were part of the Rainbow Warrior, including author David Robie. We must remember the crime and call it by its name: state terrorism.

The French attempted to escape justice, deny involvement and then welched on the terms of the agreement negotiated with the help of the United Nations secretary-general.

A great way to honour the sacrifice of those who stood up for justice, who stood for peace and a nuclear-free Pacific, and who honoured our own national identity would be to buy David Robie’s excellent book.

I’ll give the last word to former Prime Minister Helen Clark:

“This is the time for New Zealand to link with the many small and middle powers across regions who have a vision for a world characterised by solidarity and peace and which can rise to the occasion to combat the existential challenges it faces — including of nuclear weapons, climate change, and artificial intelligence. If our independent foreign policy is to mean anything in the mid-2020s, it must be based on concerted diplomacy for peace and sustainable development.”

You cannot sink a rainbow.

Eugene Doyle is a writer based in Wellington. He has written extensively on the Middle East, as well as peace and security issues in the Asia Pacific region. He contributes to Asia Pacific Report and Café Pacific, and hosts the public policy platform solidarity.co.nz


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-1-french-state-terrorism-and-nzs-end-of-innocence/feed/ 0 542602
The Rainbow Warrior saga: 1. French state terrorism and NZ’s end of innocence https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-1-french-state-terrorism-and-nzs-end-of-innocence-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-1-french-state-terrorism-and-nzs-end-of-innocence-2/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 06:09:09 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=116949 COMMENTARY: By Eugene Doyle

Immediately after killing Fernando Pereira and blowing up Greenpeace’s flagship the Rainbow Warrior in Auckland harbour, several of the French agents went on a ski holiday in New Zealand’s South Island to celebrate.

Such was the contempt the French had for the Kiwis and the abilities of our police to pursue them.  How wrong they were.

To mark the 40th anniversary of the French terrorist attack Little Island Press has published a revised and updated edition of Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior, first released in 1986.

A new prologue by former prime minister Helen Clark and a preface by Greenpeace’s Bunny McDiarmid, along with an extensive postscript which bring us up to the present day, underline why the past is not dead; it’s with us right now.

Written by David Robie, editor of Asia Pacific Report, who spent 11 weeks on the final voyage of the Warrior, the book is the most remarkable piece of history I have read this year and one of those rare books that has the power to expand your mind and make your blood boil at the same time. I thought I knew a fair bit about the momentous events surrounding the attack — until I read Eyes of Fire.

Heroes of our age
The book covers the history of Greenpeace action — from fighting the dumping of nuclear and other toxic waste in European waters, the Arctic and the Pacific, voyages to link besieged communities across the oceans, through to their epic struggles to halt whaling and save endangered marine colonies from predators.

The Rainbow Warrior’s very last voyage before the bombing was to evacuate the entire population of Rongelap atoll (about 320 people) in the Marshall Islands who had been exposed to US nuclear radiation for decades.

This article is the first of two in which I will explore themes that the book triggered for me.

Neither secret nor intelligent – the French secret intelligence service

Jean-Luc Kister was the DGSE (Direction-générale de la Sécurité extérieure) agent who placed the two bombs that ripped a massive hole in the hull of the Warrior on 10 July 1985. The ship quickly sank, trapping Greenpeace photographer Fernando Pereira inside.

Former colonel Kister was a member of a large team of elite agents sent to New Zealand. One had also infiltrated Greenpeace months before, some travelled through the country prior to the attack, drinking, rooting New Zealand women and leaving a trail of breadcrumbs that led all the way to the Palais de l’Élysée where François Mitterrand, Socialist President of France, had personally given the order to bomb the famous peace vessel.

Robie aptly calls the French mission “Blundergate”. The stupidity, howling incompetence and moronic lack of a sound strategic rationale behind the attack were only matched by the mendacity, the imperial hauteur and the racist contempt that lies at the heart of French policy in the Pacific to this very day.

Thinking the Kiwi police would be no match for their élan, their savoir-faire and their panache, some of the killers hit the ski slopes to celebrate “Mission Accompli”. Others fled to Norfolk Island aboard a yacht, the Ouvéa.

Tracked there by the New Zealand police it was only with the assistance of our friends and allies, the Australians, that the agents were able to escape. Within days they sank their yacht at sea during a rendezvous with a French nuclear submarine and were evenually able to return to France for medals and promotions.

Two of the agents, however, were not so lucky. As everyone my age will recall, Dominique Prieur and Alain Mafart, were nabbed after a lightning fast operation by New Zealand police.

With friends and allies like these, who needs enemies?
We should recall that the French were our allies at the time. They decided, however, to stop the Rainbow Warrior from leading a flotilla of ships up to Moruroa Atoll in French Polynesia where yet another round of nuclear tests were scheduled. In other words: they bombed a peace ship to keep testing bombs.

By 1995, France had detonated 193 nuclear bombs in the South Pacific.

David Robie sees the bombing as “a desperate attempt by one of the last colonial powers in the Pacific to hang on to the vestiges of empire by blowing up a peace ship so it could continue despoiling Pacific islands for the sake of an independent nuclear force”.

The US, UK and Australia cold-shouldered New Zealand through this period and uttered not a word of condemnation against the French. Within two years we were frog-marched out of the ANZUS alliance with Australia and the US because of our ground-breaking nuclear-free legislation.

It was a blessing and the dawn of a period in which New Zealanders had an intense sense of national pride — a far cry from today when New Zealand politicians are being referred to the International Criminal Court (ICC) in The Hague for war crimes associated with the Gaza genocide.

Eyes of Fire: The Last Voyage and Legacy of the Rainbow Warrior . . . publication next week. Image: ©  David Robie/Eyes Of Fire/Little Island Press

The French State invented the term ‘terrorism’
I studied French History at university in France and did a paper called “La France à la veille de révolution” (France on the eve of revolution). One of the chilling cultural memories is of the period from September 1793 to July 1794, which was known as La Terreur.

At the time the French state literally coined the term “terrorisme” — with the blade of the guillotine dropping on neck after neck as the state tried to consolidate power through terror. But, as Robie points out, quoting law professor Roger S. Clark, we tend to use the term today to refer almost exclusively to non-state actors.

With the US and Israel gunning down starving civilians in Gaza every day, with wave after wave of terror attacks being committed inside Iran and across the Middle East by Mossad, the CIA and MI6, we should amend this erroneous habit.

The DGSE team who attached limpet mines to the Rainbow Warrior did so as psychopathic servants of the French State. Eyes of Fire: “At the time, Prime Minister David Lange described the Rainbow Warrior attack as ‘nothing more than a sordid act of international state-backed terrorism’.”

Don’t get me wrong. I am not “anti-French”. I lived for years in France, had a French girlfriend, studied French history, language and literature. I even had friends in Wellington who worked at the French Embassy.

Curiously when I lived next to Premier House, the official residence of the prime minister, my other next door neighbour was a French agent who specialised in surveillance. Our houses backed onto Premier House. Quelle coïncidence. To his mild consternation I’d greet him with “Salut, mon espion favori.” (Hello, my favourite spy).

What I despise is French colonialism, French racism, and what the French call magouillage. I don’t know a good English word for it . . .  it is a mix of shenanigans, duplicity, artful deception to achieve unscrupulous outcomes that can’t be publicly avowed. In brief: what the French attempted in Auckland in 1985.

Robie recounts in detail the lying, smokescreens and roadblocks that everyone from President Mitterrand through to junior officials put in the way of the New Zealand investigators. Mitterrand gave Prime Minister David Lange assurances that the culprits would be brought to justice. The French Embassy in Wellington claimed at the time: “In no way is France involved. The French government doesn’t deal with its opponents in such ways.”

It took years for the bombshell to explode that none other than Mitterrand himself had ordered the terrorist attack on New Zealand and Greenpeace!

Rainbow Warrior III at Majuro
Rainbow Warrior III . . . the current successor to the bombed ship. Photographed at Majuro, the capital of the Marshall Islands in April 2025. Image: © Bianca Vitale/Greenpeace

We the people of the Pacific
We, the people of the Pacific, owe a debt to Greenpeace and all those who were part of the Rainbow Warrior, including author David Robie. We must remember the crime and call it by its name: state terrorism.

The French attempted to escape justice, deny involvement and then welched on the terms of the agreement negotiated with the help of the United Nations secretary-general.

A great way to honour the sacrifice of those who stood up for justice, who stood for peace and a nuclear-free Pacific, and who honoured our own national identity would be to buy David Robie’s excellent book.

I’ll give the last word to former Prime Minister Helen Clark:

“This is the time for New Zealand to link with the many small and middle powers across regions who have a vision for a world characterised by solidarity and peace and which can rise to the occasion to combat the existential challenges it faces — including of nuclear weapons, climate change, and artificial intelligence. If our independent foreign policy is to mean anything in the mid-2020s, it must be based on concerted diplomacy for peace and sustainable development.”

You cannot sink a rainbow.

Eugene Doyle is a writer based in Wellington. He has written extensively on the Middle East, as well as peace and security issues in the Asia Pacific region. He contributes to Asia Pacific Report and Café Pacific, and hosts the public policy platform solidarity.co.nz


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by APR editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/the-rainbow-warrior-saga-1-french-state-terrorism-and-nzs-end-of-innocence-2/feed/ 0 542603
Musician Alysha Brilla on surrender as the first step https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/musician-alysha-brilla-on-surrender-as-the-first-step/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/musician-alysha-brilla-on-surrender-as-the-first-step/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 04:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-alysha-brilla-on-surrender-as-the-first-step You’d previously mentioned that music was your first access point for alkalizing the density that you had been carrying as a child. Where does that inner child live within your current arts practice?

My inner child, she is always with me. I may have this experience now, and all these years behind me, but ultimately I’m the same vulnerable, sensitive, curious, wondrous, exalted little being that first wandered this earth 36 years ago. And every time I am moved by music or by what someone says—like what you just said about alkalizing density—I’m the same child who’s feeling just as grateful and excited for the sensory experience of that revelation.

When it comes to music, every time I play my guitar or piano or sing with someone else, it feels as magical as the first time that I knew music existed. And it offers the same access point as it did when I was a child… Music really does connect all those dots for me.

In my experience of listening to your music, you invite in this medicinal, raw catharsis. Instrumentally, you bring in beautiful percussions from a very particular part of the world, then I’m taken to a whole other part of the world through strings. There are melodies that feel very nostalgic, and lyrics that reorient me towards the future. How do you channel this vastness in your music and how do you approach creating a multi-layered landscape?

Thank you so much for those beautiful affirmations and reflections. I’m struck by this whole conversation so far. I’ve been tearing up because I feel very seen by you, so I really appreciate it.

I think being a dynamic being is something we can all relate to. We all have so many layers, and a spectrum of emotions and aspects of ourselves that are brought out by different people, different environments. In terms of my music, the rhythms, tones, frequencies, and even the underlying lyrics and textures are portraits of different times in my life as well as different emotional containers. Some songs are meant to help you access and be with joy, and some are meant to help you cry and help you release those tears. I love creating across that spectrum because, thankfully, my life has given me those multitudes and those many different emotions to channel… Being a conduit in the sense of being open to being a channel for art, or whatever else might come through. We must be deep listeners. We must listen deeply to the earth. We must listen deeply to the people around us. We must also listen to our own thoughts and idiosyncrasies. When I’m receiving melodies and then crafting songs, it’s often like I’m seeing this higher perspective. It’s from having listened deeply to something, and then distilling it into a shareable medicine of sorts.

I always give credit and thanks to Spirit no matter what I’m doing. If it’s waking up and having air in my lungs, thank you for that. Especially for something as magical as writing a song or creating something from this physical realm—how could I not be so grateful for that and not give reverence to something bigger than myself for being able to do that? Even if it’s just to soothe myself; even if I’m not necessarily sharing it. The fact that I’m able to do that, I feel that is certainly a gift. Also, so much of my music feels like it comes through me when I’m around water. Water is a big one, actually.

I was just thinking about water at this very moment.

Really? Being near the ocean, it feels like songs flow right into me. Similarly, if I’m near the river, songs are flowing in. Even with a human-made shower or a bathtub—because the water is there, songs will so often come to me that way.

Water came up for me when you described this process of essentially surrendering to what wants to be channeled through you. Being in bodies of water requires so much surrender and trust, as does the process of being an artist. Within my own practice, surrender and trust are cultivated practices, which I am always ebbing and flowing between. There are times where I’m utterly depleted and then there are times where I’m oozing with openness and connection. What tools do you use in order to hold both ends?

That’s such a beautiful thing to think about. I do believe surrender is one of the first connection points of creating. When you think back to being a child, children are so good at that. They’re so good at coloring what they want, saying what they want, singing when they want, moving like [how we moved] before we learned how to walk a certain way down the sidewalk. Children are skipping and they’re doing twirls and they’re dancing.

I think that trust and surrender are natural modes of curiosity and faith that we’re born into this world with. Some of our systems strip them from us, whether it’s our education systems or in many of our familial lines, with this intergenerational passing down of certain colonial values or social customs. As artists, trust and surrender are the first step. It’s the first step to believing that something you have to sing or say or paint is worth materializing, even for oneself. Having an idea and then saying, “I want that to be not just in here, but out there,” takes trust and surrender to be able to do.

I’m thinking about those artists who are on the precipice of wanting to share their art with the world but are moving through that thick blockage of fear over how their art will be received, or are moving past any of the limitations that capitalism confines us to. Capitalism tries to tell us that artistry is only valid when consumed, whereas so many of the creative prophets of our time and beyond show us that we’re not meant to be palatable. And if we try to be, we’ll lose the plot. The plot being the core essence of who we are, our authentic coding. So how do you keep to the plot? How do you stay in your integrity as an artist, even when you feel blocked and even when it feels unsafe to share with the world?

I do believe that some of the funniest people you’ve ever met might not ever be on a stage. Similarly, some of the most talented musicians you will ever hear are playing in a little house somewhere across the world. Some of the most profound exchanges of words happen between two people who are channeling an intimacy and depth of humanity which not all of us will hear.

When it comes to sharing, especially in this world that is so capitalistic, it’s important for artists who feel like their art is part of a deeper mission to remember that what you’re creating and putting out there will impact the collective in any small or big way. I think we know when we’ve created something that we want to share—when we believe that it’s for the collective, when it’s messaging that we genuinely feel strongly about.

In terms of moving past that initial blockage, we have to remember that we’re not alone. There are artists all over the world who want to share what they’re creating because they feel that it can have some kind of a ripple effect… I think as artists, we’re just wearing a giant sign that says, “I’m a sensitive human being.” To be a bleeding heart artist who says, “I feel a lot and I want to share”—I just think it’s cool.

I studied herbalism for a while and some plants act as sort of a panacea. They help with a lot of things, but so many of them actually are for certain things and for certain people. And I think that of art, too. I think your art is going to reach the people it needs to because that’s how wise and intelligent that greater energy is that makes us want to create in the first place. It might not be that all 8 billion humans on this earth will necessarily resonate with what you’re creating. But it will be that there are people out there for whom what you’re creating is going to help them on their path as a human being.

This connection between plants and artists reminds me of something Alok Vaid-Menon poignantly said in an interview: the natural world templates change, yet humans are uniquely resistant to change and to our growing edges. This brings me to queerness, because queerness offers nonlinear, wayward, fractal ways of existing. I know queerness to be an integral part of both our artistries, and so I’m curious as to how queerness, fluidity and nonlinearity has shown up in your creative process as well as in how you live your life as a creative act?

Yes, yes, exactly. I think that for me, queerness and being able to see life through this dialectical perspective has been the biggest gift I could have had, because it keeps my mind and my spirit fertile. It keeps the soil of all those spaces ready for what may come, because there are generally less preconceived notions or containers or fixed ways that things ought to be.

And so in everything—be it pre-scripted genres in music, how one might dress, the way a person might dance—queerness allows you to step outside of those prescriptions. I think it’s really important—especially now, when we live in this uniquely globalized era of human civilization where many of us are connected to people who are in many different places in the world—we have a diversity of relationships we can co-create with. The idea that we would have these fixed ways of being and relating to one another is antiquated. We are of each other. That’s how we must move. Queerness feels ancient and inevitable as a future template for our beings.

That wording felt like poetry moving through my blood. Thank you… How do you, in your creative process, give roots to all of the messaging that is moving through you?

I would say bringing it back to nature, because nature always harmonizes. If I’m kind of floating away, nature makes me feel so held… Also my conversations with artist friends. It’s the same feeling. I think knowing what elements or people or foods or things help you ground is important, especially if you are a person who’s getting those otherworldly signals often.

What about when you have to convene with technology to transfer that messaging? If I’m in front of my laptop for too long, it feels so invasive to my creative spirit. Yet it’s also the easiest way to transfer my ideas at times, and to organize myself and so on. We’re all constantly contending with the invasiveness of technology while trying to stay rooted in our bodies.

We live in this technological world and it’s ubiquitous. It’s just everywhere all the time. But I will say, I’ve also been thinking about the word itself: technology. It’s a Greek word from the 17th century, and it can be broken into two words: techno and ology. Techno just means an art or a craft. And then ology is the study of something. So technology was here before we started using computers and phones.

I’ve been thinking lately about how certain technologies are given so much credence and so much respect and admiration because they are fields that are dominated by mostly men and white people. But there are all these other technologies that exist and have been developed by so many women, trans people, non-binary people, queer people, Black and Indigenous people. And they are technologies that we can use to help us in our artistic practice as well. For example, I think cooking is a technology. Any time I need to detox myself—let’s say from what a computer or a phone will do to the body and to the brain—cooking will always move me back to all my senses. Anything can be a technology when you break that word down—from the way that you dance, the way that you put furniture together.

What you’re speaking about, it sounds like the Indigenous worldview of animism. If we are to believe that everything carries information, and that technology is, in essence, the way in which information is transmuted, then everything can be technology. Our bodies are our foremost technology, and within that, our breath is also technology.

100%.

I’ll ask one more question to close us out. When I’m listening to you speak, and when I watched your profile on CBC Arts, there is such a strong sense of liberation coming through. Not just in your own practice, but in what you hope for this world. How do you maintain being a liberated artist and human being, while also living within the confines of these colonial, narrow, violent systems? The dissonance is so often jarring.

I’ve been an artist my whole life. I’ve been creating, singing, and writing songs since I was little. But I’ve also been engaged in a more capitalist professional world of arts since I was 13 or 14. Before, I would call myself an independent artist. Sometimes it still might come out that way, as a way of differentiating myself from the machine of major labels and this big machine that exists in the music industry. But now I like to call myself an “interdependent artist.” And that is because I am in mycelial networks and relationships with other interdependent or independent artists who are now in network with me. It’s through these relationships that I’ve been able to unlearn colonial frameworks and lean into the safety of imagining and co-creating something different.

Alysha Brilla recommends:

Putting your hand on a tree

Laying directly on the earth

Falling asleep in the sun

Holding your favorite mug of your favorite tea in between your palms

Humming and singing to soothe your own nervous system


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sania Khan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/musician-alysha-brilla-on-surrender-as-the-first-step/feed/ 0 542613
Musician Alysha Brilla on trusting yourself as the first step https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/musician-alysha-brilla-on-trusting-yourself-as-the-first-step/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/musician-alysha-brilla-on-trusting-yourself-as-the-first-step/#respond Thu, 03 Jul 2025 04:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-alysha-brilla-on-trusting-yourself-as-the-first-step You’d previously mentioned that music was your first access point for alkalizing the density that you had been carrying as a child. Where does that inner child live within your current arts practice?

My inner child, she is always with me. I may have this experience now, and all these years behind me, but ultimately I’m the same vulnerable, sensitive, curious, wondrous, exalted little being that first wandered this earth 36 years ago. And every time I am moved by music or by what someone says—like what you just said about alkalizing density—I’m the same child who’s feeling just as grateful and excited for the sensory experience of that revelation.

When it comes to music, every time I play my guitar or piano or sing with someone else, it feels as magical as the first time that I knew music existed. And it offers the same access point as it did when I was a child… Music really does connect all those dots for me.

In my experience of listening to your music, you invite in this medicinal, raw catharsis. Instrumentally, you bring in beautiful percussions from a very particular part of the world, then I’m taken to a whole other part of the world through strings. There are melodies that feel very nostalgic, and lyrics that reorient me towards the future. How do you channel this vastness in your music and how do you approach creating a multi-layered landscape?

Thank you so much for those beautiful affirmations and reflections. I’m struck by this whole conversation so far. I’ve been tearing up because I feel very seen by you, so I really appreciate it.

I think being a dynamic being is something we can all relate to. We all have so many layers, and a spectrum of emotions and aspects of ourselves that are brought out by different people, different environments. In terms of my music, the rhythms, tones, frequencies, and even the underlying lyrics and textures are portraits of different times in my life as well as different emotional containers. Some songs are meant to help you access and be with joy, and some are meant to help you cry and help you release those tears. I love creating across that spectrum because, thankfully, my life has given me those multitudes and those many different emotions to channel… Being a conduit in the sense of being open to being a channel for art, or whatever else might come through. We must be deep listeners. We must listen deeply to the earth. We must listen deeply to the people around us. We must also listen to our own thoughts and idiosyncrasies. When I’m receiving melodies and then crafting songs, it’s often like I’m seeing this higher perspective. It’s from having listened deeply to something, and then distilling it into a shareable medicine of sorts.

I always give credit and thanks to Spirit no matter what I’m doing. If it’s waking up and having air in my lungs, thank you for that. Especially for something as magical as writing a song or creating something from this physical realm—how could I not be so grateful for that and not give reverence to something bigger than myself for being able to do that? Even if it’s just to soothe myself; even if I’m not necessarily sharing it. The fact that I’m able to do that, I feel that is certainly a gift. Also, so much of my music feels like it comes through me when I’m around water. Water is a big one, actually.

I was just thinking about water at this very moment.

Really? Being near the ocean, it feels like songs flow right into me. Similarly, if I’m near the river, songs are flowing in. Even with a human-made shower or a bathtub—because the water is there, songs will so often come to me that way.

Water came up for me when you described this process of essentially surrendering to what wants to be channeled through you. Being in bodies of water requires so much surrender and trust, as does the process of being an artist. Within my own practice, surrender and trust are cultivated practices, which I am always ebbing and flowing between. There are times where I’m utterly depleted and then there are times where I’m oozing with openness and connection. What tools do you use in order to hold both ends?

That’s such a beautiful thing to think about. I do believe surrender is one of the first connection points of creating. When you think back to being a child, children are so good at that. They’re so good at coloring what they want, saying what they want, singing when they want, moving like [how we moved] before we learned how to walk a certain way down the sidewalk. Children are skipping and they’re doing twirls and they’re dancing.

I think that trust and surrender are natural modes of curiosity and faith that we’re born into this world with. Some of our systems strip them from us, whether it’s our education systems or in many of our familial lines, with this intergenerational passing down of certain colonial values or social customs. As artists, trust and surrender are the first step. It’s the first step to believing that something you have to sing or say or paint is worth materializing, even for oneself. Having an idea and then saying, “I want that to be not just in here, but out there,” takes trust and surrender to be able to do.

I’m thinking about those artists who are on the precipice of wanting to share their art with the world but are moving through that thick blockage of fear over how their art will be received, or are moving past any of the limitations that capitalism confines us to. Capitalism tries to tell us that artistry is only valid when consumed, whereas so many of the creative prophets of our time and beyond show us that we’re not meant to be palatable. And if we try to be, we’ll lose the plot. The plot being the core essence of who we are, our authentic coding. So how do you keep to the plot? How do you stay in your integrity as an artist, even when you feel blocked and even when it feels unsafe to share with the world?

I do believe that some of the funniest people you’ve ever met might not ever be on a stage. Similarly, some of the most talented musicians you will ever hear are playing in a little house somewhere across the world. Some of the most profound exchanges of words happen between two people who are channeling an intimacy and depth of humanity which not all of us will hear.

When it comes to sharing, especially in this world that is so capitalistic, it’s important for artists who feel like their art is part of a deeper mission to remember that what you’re creating and putting out there will impact the collective in any small or big way. I think we know when we’ve created something that we want to share—when we believe that it’s for the collective, when it’s messaging that we genuinely feel strongly about.

In terms of moving past that initial blockage, we have to remember that we’re not alone. There are artists all over the world who want to share what they’re creating because they feel that it can have some kind of a ripple effect… I think as artists, we’re just wearing a giant sign that says, “I’m a sensitive human being.” To be a bleeding heart artist who says, “I feel a lot and I want to share”—I just think it’s cool.

I studied herbalism for a while and some plants act as sort of a panacea. They help with a lot of things, but so many of them actually are for certain things and for certain people. And I think that of art, too. I think your art is going to reach the people it needs to because that’s how wise and intelligent that greater energy is that makes us want to create in the first place. It might not be that all 8 billion humans on this earth will necessarily resonate with what you’re creating. But it will be that there are people out there for whom what you’re creating is going to help them on their path as a human being.

This connection between plants and artists reminds me of something Alok Vaid-Menon poignantly said in an interview: the natural world templates change, yet humans are uniquely resistant to change and to our growing edges. This brings me to queerness, because queerness offers nonlinear, wayward, fractal ways of existing. I know queerness to be an integral part of both our artistries, and so I’m curious as to how queerness, fluidity and nonlinearity has shown up in your creative process as well as in how you live your life as a creative act?

Yes, yes, exactly. I think that for me, queerness and being able to see life through this dialectical perspective has been the biggest gift I could have had, because it keeps my mind and my spirit fertile. It keeps the soil of all those spaces ready for what may come, because there are generally less preconceived notions or containers or fixed ways that things ought to be.

And so in everything—be it pre-scripted genres in music, how one might dress, the way a person might dance—queerness allows you to step outside of those prescriptions. I think it’s really important—especially now, when we live in this uniquely globalized era of human civilization where many of us are connected to people who are in many different places in the world—we have a diversity of relationships we can co-create with. The idea that we would have these fixed ways of being and relating to one another is antiquated. We are of each other. That’s how we must move. Queerness feels ancient and inevitable as a future template for our beings.

That wording felt like poetry moving through my blood. Thank you… How do you, in your creative process, give roots to all of the messaging that is moving through you?

I would say bringing it back to nature, because nature always harmonizes. If I’m kind of floating away, nature makes me feel so held… Also my conversations with artist friends. It’s the same feeling. I think knowing what elements or people or foods or things help you ground is important, especially if you are a person who’s getting those otherworldly signals often.

What about when you have to convene with technology to transfer that messaging? If I’m in front of my laptop for too long, it feels so invasive to my creative spirit. Yet it’s also the easiest way to transfer my ideas at times, and to organize myself and so on. We’re all constantly contending with the invasiveness of technology while trying to stay rooted in our bodies.

We live in this technological world and it’s ubiquitous. It’s just everywhere all the time. But I will say, I’ve also been thinking about the word itself: technology. It’s a Greek word from the 17th century, and it can be broken into two words: techno and ology. Techno just means an art or a craft. And then ology is the study of something. So technology was here before we started using computers and phones.

I’ve been thinking lately about how certain technologies are given so much credence and so much respect and admiration because they are fields that are dominated by mostly men and white people. But there are all these other technologies that exist and have been developed by so many women, trans people, non-binary people, queer people, Black and Indigenous people. And they are technologies that we can use to help us in our artistic practice as well. For example, I think cooking is a technology. Any time I need to detox myself—let’s say from what a computer or a phone will do to the body and to the brain—cooking will always move me back to all my senses. Anything can be a technology when you break that word down—from the way that you dance, the way that you put furniture together.

What you’re speaking about, it sounds like the Indigenous worldview of animism. If we are to believe that everything carries information, and that technology is, in essence, the way in which information is transmuted, then everything can be technology. Our bodies are our foremost technology, and within that, our breath is also technology.

100%.

I’ll ask one more question to close us out. When I’m listening to you speak, and when I watched your profile on CBC Arts, there is such a strong sense of liberation coming through. Not just in your own practice, but in what you hope for this world. How do you maintain being a liberated artist and human being, while also living within the confines of these colonial, narrow, violent systems? The dissonance is so often jarring.

I’ve been an artist my whole life. I’ve been creating, singing, and writing songs since I was little. But I’ve also been engaged in a more capitalist professional world of arts since I was 13 or 14. Before, I would call myself an independent artist. Sometimes it still might come out that way, as a way of differentiating myself from the machine of major labels and this big machine that exists in the music industry. But now I like to call myself an “interdependent artist.” And that is because I am in mycelial networks and relationships with other interdependent or independent artists who are now in network with me. It’s through these relationships that I’ve been able to unlearn colonial frameworks and lean into the safety of imagining and co-creating something different.

Alysha Brilla recommends:

Putting your hand on a tree

Laying directly on the earth

Falling asleep in the sun

Holding your favorite mug of your favorite tea in between your palms

Humming and singing to soothe your own nervous system


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sania Khan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/03/musician-alysha-brilla-on-trusting-yourself-as-the-first-step/feed/ 0 542635
Faramarz Farbod in Conversation with Yves Engler on Canada, the US, and Imperialism https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/faramarz-farbod-in-conversation-with-yves-engler-on-canada-the-us-and-imperialism/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/faramarz-farbod-in-conversation-with-yves-engler-on-canada-the-us-and-imperialism/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 23:21:38 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159612 Faramarz Farbod speaks with Yves Engler, a Canadian activist and author of 13 books, including most recently Canada’s Long Fight Against Democracy and Stand on Guard for Whom? (A People’s History of Canadian Military). The conversation explores Canada’s role in the world, its relationship with US capitalism and imperialism, Canada’s policies toward Iran and Cuba, misperceptions of Canada in the US, […]

The post Faramarz Farbod in Conversation with Yves Engler on Canada, the US, and Imperialism first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Faramarz Farbod speaks with Yves Engler, a Canadian activist and author of 13 books, including most recently Canada’s Long Fight Against Democracy and Stand on Guard for Whom? (A People’s History of Canadian Military). The conversation explores Canada’s role in the world, its relationship with US capitalism and imperialism, Canada’s policies toward Iran and Cuba, misperceptions of Canada in the US, and the concept of Canadianism.

The post Faramarz Farbod in Conversation with Yves Engler on Canada, the US, and Imperialism first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Faramarz Farbod.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/faramarz-farbod-in-conversation-with-yves-engler-on-canada-the-us-and-imperialism/feed/ 0 542562
Zimbabwe authorities arrest newspaper editor on charges of insulting the president https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/zimbabwe-authorities-arrest-newspaper-editor-on-charges-of-insulting-the-president/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/zimbabwe-authorities-arrest-newspaper-editor-on-charges-of-insulting-the-president/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 20:42:39 +0000 https://cpj.org/?p=494703 New York July 2, 2025—The Committee to Protect Journalists calls on Zimbabwean authorities to release newspaper editor Faith Zaba, who was arrested on July 1. She is facing charges of “undermining or insulting the authority of the president” in connection with a satirical column.

“This case sends the message that Zimbabwe’s President Emmerson Mnangagwa and his administration are so fragile that they are easily threatened by a critical column,” said CPJ Africa Program Coordinator Muthoki Mumo. “It’s also a reminder of this government’s willingness to waste public resources by throwing journalists behind bars. Authorities in Zimbabwe must release Faith Zaba unconditionally and without delay.”

Police summoned Zaba to appear at the central police station in the capital, Harare, on July 1, where they charged her over the June 27 satirical column about Mnangagwa’s government published in her newspaper, the business weekly Zimbabwe Independent, according to her lawyer, Chris Mhike. Mhike told CPJ that Zaba has been unwell and was “severely ill” at the time of her arrest.

On July 2, Zaba appeared at the magistrate’s court in Harare, where her bail hearing was deferred to July 3 after the state requested more time to verify her medical history, according to multiple local news reports.

The “Muckracker” column linked to Zaba’s arrest said that Zimbabwe was a “mafia state,” citing the administration’s alleged interference in the politics of neighboring countries, and said that the current government was “obsessed with keeping itself in power.” Under Zimbabwe’s  Criminal Law (Codification and Reform) Act, Zaba could face a $300 fine or imprisonment not exceeding one year, or both, if convicted.

CPJ has documented an ongoing crackdown on dissent in Zimbabwe, amid political tension. In February, authorities arrested Blessed Mhlanga, a journalist with Alpha Media Holdings, and held him for over 10 weeks on baseless charges of incitement in connection with his coverage of war veterans who demanded Mnangagwa’s resignation. The Zimbabwe Independent is a subsidiary of Alpha Media Holdings.

A spokesperson for the Zimbabwe Republic Police, Paul Nyathi, did not answer CPJ’s calls and a query sent via messaging app requesting comment.


This content originally appeared on Committee to Protect Journalists and was authored by Lauren Wolfe.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/zimbabwe-authorities-arrest-newspaper-editor-on-charges-of-insulting-the-president/feed/ 0 542550
Reasons to Celebrate the Fourth of July https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/reasons-to-celebrate-the-fourth-of-july/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/reasons-to-celebrate-the-fourth-of-july/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 20:20:15 +0000 https://progressive.org/op-eds/reasons-to-celebrate-the-fourth-of-july-lueders-20250702/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Bill Lueders.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/reasons-to-celebrate-the-fourth-of-july/feed/ 0 542545
The Plot Against Iran https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-plot-against-iran/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-plot-against-iran/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 20:01:06 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/the-plot-against-iran-benjamin-davies-20250702/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Medea Benjamin.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-plot-against-iran/feed/ 0 542548
STRIKE ALERT: 9k #philadelphia City workers walk off the job, Mayor’s office ‘scrambling" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/strike-alert-9k-philadelphia-city-workers-walk-off-the-job-mayors-office-scrambling/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/strike-alert-9k-philadelphia-city-workers-walk-off-the-job-mayors-office-scrambling/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 19:05:12 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=954b5cad401da6552d86deda071a01f5
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/strike-alert-9k-philadelphia-city-workers-walk-off-the-job-mayors-office-scrambling/feed/ 0 542527
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 2, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-2-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-2-2025/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=c4560501cc877ec54061d1359aa5e841 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 2, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-2-2025/feed/ 0 542578
‘There were massive revolts’: The history of the 1970 Kent State massacre you haven’t heard https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/there-were-massive-revolts-the-history-of-the-1970-kent-state-massacre-you-havent-heard/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/there-were-massive-revolts-the-history-of-the-1970-kent-state-massacre-you-havent-heard/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 17:29:22 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335195 View, from behind, of Ohio National Guardsmen in gas masks and with rifles as they advance up Blanket Hill to back Kent State University students during an antiwar demonstration on the university's campus, Kent, Ohio, May 4, 1970. Photo by Howard Ruffner/Getty Images“The whole history of the massacre was suppressed… And then they suppressed the whole history of the anti-war movement at Kent. They've tried to erase the history.”]]> View, from behind, of Ohio National Guardsmen in gas masks and with rifles as they advance up Blanket Hill to back Kent State University students during an antiwar demonstration on the university's campus, Kent, Ohio, May 4, 1970. Photo by Howard Ruffner/Getty Images

It’s been 55 years since the Ohio National Guard opened fire on students at Kent State University who were protesting the US war in Vietnam. Four students were murdered at the Kent State Massacre: Allison Krause, Jeffrey Miller, Sandra Lee Scheuer, and William Schroeder. In this episode of The Marc Steiner Show, Marc speaks with Mike Alewitz, who was a student at Kent State in 1970, about what it was like to witness the massacre firsthand, and about how the true history of this critical moment in US history has been whitewashed ever since.

Guest:

  • Mike Alewitz is an internationally renowned muralist and Professor Emeritus of censorship, art, and politics at Central Connecticut State University. Alewitz was the founder and chairman of the Kent Student Mobilization Committee Against the War in Vietnam and an eyewitness to the May 4, 1970, Kent State massacre.

Credits:

  • Producer: Rosette Sewali
  • Studio Production: David Hebden
  • Audio Post-Production: Alina Nehlich
Transcript

Marc Steiner:  Welcome to The Marc Steiner Show here on The Real News. I’m Marc Steiner. It’s great to have you all with us.

Many people remember or know about the moment when the National Guard opened fire on students at Kent State University when they were protesting against the war in Vietnam. Four students were killed that day: Allison Krause, Sandra Scheuer, Jeffrey Miller, and William Schroeder, and nine others were wounded. And just 11 days after that, at the predominantly African American University Jackson State in Mississippi, two students, Philip Lafayette Gibbs and James Earl Green were killed while 12 others were wounded. And earlier in Augusta, Georgia, many people were killed when the Black community erupted over the killing of a 12-year-old boy by police. These are moments that many of us lived through, ones we’ll never forget. They’re indelible in our minds.

Mike Alewitz was a student at Kent State on that day when four unarmed students were gunned down by the National Guard. Mike is professor emeritus of censorship, art, and politics at Central Connecticut State University. Now, when he was a student at Kent State, he was chairman of the Student Mobilization [Committee] against the war in Vietnam. He’s now a world-renowned muralist whose work crosses the nation and the world. Actor Martin Sheen said about him, Mike’s work provides an important example of how an individual, by basing their art on the creative power of the working class, can create a body of work which helps to educate, organize, and agitate for a better world.

So Mike, welcome. Good to have you with us.

Mike Alewitz:  Thank you for having me.

Marc Steiner:  So here we are at this time, these anniversaries of Kent State, Jackson State. You were in the middle of Kent State. Could you, for people who maybe read the history, don’t even really know what happened, talk about that moment, where you were as a student, and exactly how you felt and what you saw?

Mike Alewitz:  Well, the massacre took place on May 4 of 1970, and I was a student activist at Kent. I was chair of the Student Mobilization Committee against the war, which sponsored demonstrations of several thousand students on campus. And we had been organizing, I started at Kent in ’68, and we were organizing against the war, and the anti-war movement nationally was becoming a majority movement.

And what happened was that Nixon announced the invasion of Cambodia, which was basically a major escalation of the war in Southeast Asia. And that began a national student strike. And what happened was that, three days later, the shootings took place, and that was like a spark, and that just threw gasoline on it.

And so, the strike became this massive event. 4 million students were on strike. Over 900 campuses had protests and demonstrations, including high schools, many high schools, and 400 universities were occupied. It began to be a major national student strike. Some of us socialists who were involved were basically trying to follow the example of the students in France in May/June of 1968 who marched to the factory gates and called out the workers, 10 million workers joined, and it became a revolutionary situation in France. They used the base of the university to organize from, they called it the red university, the concept of the university.

Well, we didn’t have a red university. We were organized, an anti-war university, and that’s what we began to do. We tried to pull together a national coalition as the strike was spread, and it just became this massive, organic, national movement, the largest protest that had ever taken place in the United States up to that time.

As you mentioned, there was, after Kent, there was the massacre at Jackson. Two students killed — Actually an unknown number. Generally people use 12. But the fact was that Black students understood that they were going to get different treatment than the students at Kent State. And so, we know that some didn’t go to seek medical help because they felt they would’ve been charged and thrown in jail, which is quite probable.

In between these two student massacres was the massacre in Augusta, Georgia, where six Black men were killed, shot in the back, and 60 wounded, mostly shot in the back. So that was fresh in their minds at Jackson State.

But these events, the use of the National Guard — At Jackson, it was the cops, it wasn’t the National Guard — But the use of the National Guard had a profound effect on a lot of people because, basically, what they were seeing was the US military now turned its guns on its own people.

And a lot of the impact was in the armed forces. I had actually ended up in Texas after the strike, and I was helping to organize GIs against the war, and the shootings at Kent marked, and the national student strike, for a lot of active duty GIs, was a turning point, and the anti-war movement in the armed forces became a mass movement. That was a majority movement that began to spread. It spread into Southeast Asia.

A lot of this history has been suppressed, but there were massive revolts. There were 600,000 men deserted over the course of the war. In Southeast Asia, soldiers were fragging their officers. They were killing officers. There were ships that were taken over. There was major rebellions on an aircraft carrier. The Army was lost to the ruling [inaudible] on the war, and that totally transformed American politics. It totally transformed world politics. The United States has never been able to win a war since that time, and has to fight its wars without involving the American people, to a large extent, because people are totally anti-war. The American people are anti-war.

Marc Steiner:  Couple of things. First I’m going to come back to what you said about the American people being anti-war. Of course, we now have an all-volunteer Army, which is very different than having a mass-based Army that was drafted into the service when we were young. I do want to come back to that.

But I want to take this back to Kent State for a minute. I want you to help paint a picture of that moment and what actually happened and what you felt at that moment. There were demonstrations taking place all across the country, but this changed everything because there were soldiers who actually fired on students, who were their age, and gunned people down. And it led to a whole subculture with Crosby, Stills, Nash & Young, and other songs being written about Kent State. It gripped the nation. So take us back to that moment when you were a young student at Kent State.

Mike Alewitz:  Well, what happened was the invasion of Cambodia was announced on a Friday, I think it was on Friday. And so, we had the initial activities that you would expect. The Black students held a demonstration, the history students buried a Constitution as a symbolic act. There were some things like that. There was unrest in downtown Kent.

And then, in what seemed to be, to me, to be the work of agent provocateurs, the ROTC building was burned down. Now, the ROTC was the military presence on campus. Actually, over the course of the anti-war movement, there were a number of ROTC buildings that were burned down. The one at Kent was actually an old wooden structure from World War II that was scheduled to be destroyed anyway.

That was used as a pretext. And we’re going to see the same thing with what’s unfolding in Los Angeles. What they do is they use these events, whether it’s agent provocateurs or just [inaudible] or well-meaning people engaging in provocative activities, it will be used as an excuse for military action. And that’s what happened at Kent.

So using the destruction of the ROTC building, Nixon in cahoots, Nixon came out and famously called the students bums, the student protestors. And then Gov. Rhodes of Ohio echoed that. He came to Kent, there was this choreographing where he stood over some burned weapons that were actually never weapons, they were just used for exercising, marching around campus and stuff. But the implication was, oh my God, there’s this thing taking place, just like they’re trying to do right now in Los Angeles. And so they laid the political framework for the massacre.

Now, on May 4, we assembled on the Commons, which was a traditional free speech area, because there’d been protests for many years. The Commons had been designated as a place you could hold an activity. You didn’t have to get permission ahead of time or anything, you just go use it. And we formed up, there were a couple thousand students. It was largely unorganized and just spontaneous, organic. And we formed up on the Commons. The guard was on the other side of the Commons —

Marc Steiner:  The National Guard, right?

Mike Alewitz:  Yeah. Our gathering was very peaceful. It was a sunny, warm spring day. People were very relaxed despite the fact that there was this military presence.

And what happened was that General Del Corso of the Ohio National Guard rode over in a Jeep and said, you have no right to assemble, you have to disperse. People yelled and didn’t disperse, at which point the guard formed at the other end of the Commons and began a barrage of tear gas that, if you see the photos of this, is just like you’re in an enormous cloud of tear gas. And for those of you who’ve never had the pleasure of being tear gassed, at that point, the protest was over. It had been broken up.

We ran over, we were in front of a hill. We ran over a hill, Blanket Hill to the other side to get away from the gas, and this line of guardsmen who started marching towards us. On the other side of the hill, there was a practice field, a playing field. And by this time, we had been largely dispersed. We were all over the place. The guard marched to the middle of the practice field, crouched, aimed their weapons, but got up, turned around, and started marching back to the Commons where they had started from.

At the top of the hill, with no students threatening them or anything, and when you see the students, most of the students were hundreds of feet away [who were] shot, they turned and shot, fired into the crowd. And it left four dead and nine wounded.

Now, most of them did not shoot at students, or there would’ve been a lot worse carnage. As you were pointing out before, these were young people. A lot of people in the guard were there to avoid going to Vietnam because for somebody my age, that was the question. When I was in high school, when you were graduating high school, the question was, what are you going to do to avoid Vietnam? I had a brother who went to Canada. There were people who shot their toes off. People had all kinds of ways. And then a lot of people would join the Guard or the Coast Guard or whatever would keep ’em out of Vietnam.

And there was a lot of fraternization between the Guardsmen and the students. Allison Krause, who was an anti-war protester, famously put a flower in the barrel of one of the Guardsmen’s guns and said, flowers are better than bullets, which inspired the great poet Yevtushenko to write a wonderful poem.

Marc Steiner:  Right. That moment, people don’t realize that that changed. When she did that, it became this symbolic, this powerful, symbolic moment that affected the entire anti-war movement.

Mike Alewitz:  Yes.

Marc Steiner:  It was iconic.

Mike Alewitz:  Yeah. And now, Sandy Scheuer, who was my friend, I don’t know if you would call her an activist, but she would always take flyers from me and hand them out and stuff. I guess she was a borderline activist. And Allison certainly took great pride in her activity. She had marched on demonstrations before and was very proud of that. The whole history of the massacre was suppressed. And one of the things they did is they tried to depoliticize this, particularly Allison and Sandy, as though they were just victims, that they weren’t out there protesting the war. And then they suppressed the whole history of the anti-war movement at Kent. They’ve tried to erase the history. They created a fictional history, which has happened in a lot of places, that SDS was the radical group on campus — Which there was an SDS. But SDS after it called the first March on Washington didn’t officially sponsor any of the anti-war actions after that.

It got to the point around the 50th commemoration five years ago. They named Stephanie Danes Smith as head of organizing the commemoration. Smith was a top official in the Central Intelligence Agency. She worked directly with Condoleezza Rice and these other scumbags to organize terror sites that were being used. And she was in charge of the commemoration. And they’ve tried to just totally depoliticize it and take the mass movement away. So it becomes, oh, this unfortunate misunderstanding.

But the fact is they can try to change these histories, they can try to airbrush history. They’ve tried to do that with the whole anti-war movement. You don’t hear about what was going on and stuff. But they can’t erase the collective consciousness of the working class. And that became deeply embedded. The soldiers who fought in Vietnam were profoundly affected, and to the point where the anti-war movement had such an effect that the US can no longer use troops in the same way. They can bomb people from the air. That’s what they do. They bomb. They can go into Afghanistan, they go to Iraq, bomb people from the air. But they run into big problems when they try to occupy because then it’s human beings facing human beings.

And it’s true that it’s a volunteer Army now, but really it’s an economic draft. A lot of these kids are Black and Latino kids who have no other options so they join the service. They want to get a skill, sometimes they just need a job. And so they have a problem sending Black and Brown soldiers into countries where it’s people of color.

So everything has been changed in that way. And they can send the guard into Los Angeles. But who are the guard? Again, it’s largely African American, Latino, a lot of women now, and suddenly they’re facing their neighbors, their families, their friends.

Marc Steiner:  It’ll be interesting to see if that actually happens. This will be a real moment to see if that has an effect. I want to focus a little bit on, given what we’re facing today, what you think that legacy of Kent State and Jackson State and those moments in our history that those of us who are getting long in the tooth experienced [laughs], what do they say about what we’re facing today? Because we’re in a similar place, maybe an even more dangerous place, internally in this country than we were even then, what could be coming. So what does that moment say for you in your analysis of what we face at this time?

Mike Alewitz:  Well, I think it’s very right when you say that there’s a lot more at stake at this point in history. This is not 1970. We were fighting to end the war. It was the women’s movement was emerging, the gay rights movement began —

Marc Steiner:  The Black liberation movement.

Mike Alewitz:  All these social movements began to emerge, and it was a very optimistic time for socialists and activists. We saw these great movements developing. They had a tremendous effect on American culture. For somebody like myself who grew up in a semi-rural housing project in the 1950s, the ’70s was amazing, and it totally transformed American society.

Now though, we’re fighting for the very, in my opinion, we’re fighting for the very existence of the species because capitalism is dying. The US empire is dying, and it’s not pretty. It’s a very ugly thing. And these people who are responsible for this, and the government officials, not just of this country, but of a number of countries, they’re perfectly willing to let the whole planet go down the crapper in their incredible quest for profits. All they know is how to steal money. So we are faced with the possibility of nuclear annihilation or the global change that will fundamentally destroy many species. So the stakes are pretty big in this.

Marc Steiner:  In terms of what happened with the student movement in the late ’60s and early ’70s, we’re seeing at this moment this assault against universities by the right wing, by the people in the Trump administration, to decimate universities and to push them back into the dark ages of the ’30s. That’s a piece of this. I was thinking about Kent State, other things that happened around the country, the organizing that took place on campuses, and it’s very different right now. In many ways, it pushes back everything people fought for in the ’60s and ’70s, from civil rights to anti-war stuff, to community organizing, it’s changed the entire paradigm of the nation.

Mike Alewitz:  Well, they’re trying to, they’re trying to. They want to go back to the ’50s, make America great again. They want to go back to the 1950s when women were in the kitchen, when gays were in the closet. When it was this incredibly oppressive society, and workers dutifully went about their jobs and weren’t protesting, they’d like to go back to that. And it’s not going to happen. You can’t put the genie back in the bottle.

Now what’s happened is they’ve tapped into some of the anger that exists and they’ve redirected it. That’s what the basis of this right wing… I don’t even like to call it right-wing support to Trump. These are people who are very angry, as they should be. Unfortunately, their anger is misdirected. But over time, the promises that have been made to people, they keep promising that things are going to be so much better. The fact of the matter is capitalism cannot solve these problems, and people are very angry, and it’s all going to explode.

I think that’s what we’re seeing the beginnings of in Los Angeles. Right now, it’s centered around immigrant workers and protests by immigrant workers, but that’s always been who has led social change in this country. When we look back at the 1930s and we look at the sit-down strikes and stuff, and you look in, you see those white workers, you don’t think, oh, immigrant workers, but they were immigrant workers. They were from the Baltics, they were from Eastern Europe, they were from Scandinavia. And they were brutally mistreated, and they organized industrial unions. They led the organization of industrial unions. That’s how change happens.

And we’re seeing the beginnings of this. It’s going to be, unfortunately, we are saddled with union, with a union bureaucracy that is totally abstaining, is just sitting by the sidelines. The American working class, which has such a proud and militant history, being led by these millionaire bureaucrats, basically. The head of the California SEIU gets arrested and the AFL-CIO doesn’t do anything. It’s astounding.

Marc Steiner:  That was pretty astounding, yes.

Mike Alewitz:  And largely, these college administrators are toeing the line. Like bureaucrats, they have to keep the host alive. So when Harvard is being threatened with being destroyed, then they make a few timid comments and they file lawsuits. They all file lawsuits as though that somehow resolves anything. Filing a lawsuit is meaningless. First of all, they don’t pay any attention to the results of these things. And the other thing they do is you got Sanders and AOC going around the country saying, you got to fight oligarchy, and they’re just trying to promote the Democratic Party and their own careers, and they’re trying to channel the anger —

Marc Steiner:  You think that’s all they’re doing?

Mike Alewitz:  — Back into the Democratic Party.

Marc Steiner:  Do you think that what they’re doing is that narrow?

Mike Alewitz:  Oh yeah.

Marc Steiner:  I mean, I’m not saying that they are the end-all-be-all.

Mike Alewitz:  I think they’re trying to save the Democratic Party. People are so sick of the Democratic Party, as they should be, which has done nothing to meet their needs, and they’re facing more disasters in elections, and, yeah, AOC and Bernie Sanders and some of these other jokers, they want to save the Democratic Party. They say, we can have a different kind of party, you just got to get back in line. You got to come to our thing. You got to give us money, and we’re going to solve this problem. Well, that’s not going to happen. That’s not how change happens. So it’s an attempt to divert it.

Now, what happens is 10, 20,000 people show up to these things, and they’re not there to save the Democratic Party, they’re there to oppose the government. So, in a sense, that part of it is progressive. They’re going to, it unleashes. Anytime you’re with thousands of people chanting against the government, people get a sense of their own power.

There was a very telling incident at one of Sanders’s things where people held up a Palestine banner behind where he was speaking.

Marc Steiner:  Right. I saw that.

Mike Alewitz:  Activists held up a “Free Palestine” banner, and he had them arrested, and the people were chanting “Free Palestine.” And that right there just shows exactly what the dynamic is in these gatherings. The problem is the working class doesn’t have a political party of its own. It doesn’t have a labor party. It has these ossified bureaucrats at the head of our trade unions. There’s no civil rights group or women’s group taking the stage in order to help organize. This stuff in Los Angeles is totally organized from the ground up by young people. Good on them. It’s wonderful to see.

But unfortunately, anger and protest is not enough. You have to organize a movement that challenges the ruling class. My hope is that that emerges from all this. I’m sure there’s a lot of political discussion going on that we’re not getting reports on. They just take a few incidents and show those. They don’t show the process that’s going on. Fortunately, there’s alternative media like yourself and other people who bring some of this stuff out.

Marc Steiner:  In the time we have left before we close out, so there’s all the stuff you’ve described. Is there a new mural in your head that you need to get out?

Mike Alewitz:  Well [both laugh], I am actually painting a thing about Kent. I’m doing it in the studio, but I am. It’s on my bucket list before I drop dead [Steiner laughs]. I feel like, Jesus, it’s been 54 years, never painted a thing. No, actually, on the 40th commemoration, a fellow faculty member, I was teaching mural painting at Central Connecticut State —

Marc Steiner:  The 40th commemoration of what?

Mike Alewitz:  Of the massacre.

Marc Steiner:  OK, gotcha. Right, right, right.

Mike Alewitz:  On the 40th anniversary, so 15 years ago, myself and Jerry Butler, who came from Jackson, Mississippi, we painted a 40-foot commemorative banner, and the banner and dedication is available if anyone wants to watch. If you go to Red Square, the Red Square, Red Square is our little, [inaudible] mural museum in New London, Connecticut.

Marc Steiner:  We will link to that, yes.

Mike Alewitz:  If they go to Red Square, redsq.org, our website, you can find links to all of this stuff, all this stuff about Kent, the mural, the dedication. Students at Kent have gone back, a lot of students have gone back every year, and it’s this nostalgic affair, and it’s important to commemorate what happened there. I’ve always felt that the commemoration should be out [inaudible], so I’ve always used May 4 as a chance to give slideshows, to show what happened, to talk about the anti-war movement, to build opposition to the US wars and occupations abroad. That’s the real commemoration. That’s the real, living memorial to the students of Kent.

We are going to go through some very hard times. There’s going to be very hard times ahead. But after the last weeks and months, getting up this morning looking at all the demonstrations, young people pouring into the streets and fighting as best they can, it warms my heart. It really does. It gives you hope for the future. One of the slogans from the major events in France was “Our hope comes from the hopeless,” and I think that’s very true. It’s those who’ve been marginalized, who’ve been ridiculed, who’ve been subjected to the worst forms of oppression who are going to inspire us to build new movements for social change.

Marc Steiner:  And in that way, what happened at Kent State, and people need to know the story because it’s that kind of movement, it’s that kind of power that inspires the rest.

Mike Alewitz:  The shootings at Kent was a spark. It was the mass anger that went on for many years of being lied to about the war in Vietnam. It would’ve happened from some other event if it hadn’t happened at Kent.

We’ve been watching as these sociopaths in Washington have been waging these assaults on working people over the last years, and now suddenly there’s a spark, and that spark is in LA, and it’s going to be emulated. There’s going to be demonstrations all over the country. There’s going to be protests against ICE. We’re going to demand that ICE be abolished. We’re going to defend as best we can those who are being victimized.

And in the process, we’re exposing the true nature of this government, just like we’re exposing the true nature of Israel. We’re out there. This started by opposing a genocide. That’s what led to this. Just as it wasn’t violent student protests that leads to the implementation of military assault on the city, it was the fact that we are opposing the genocide of the people in Gaza, and that is something that the US does not want to allow, that the ruling class of this country does not want to allow. But Israel is exposed to the entire world. The US is exposed to the entire world.

Never in my lifetime has it been so clear the nature of capitalism and its bloody hands than what’s going on today. I think more people are more aware that capitalism must die than at any time in my life.

Marc Steiner:  Michael, this has been an interesting conversation, and we are going to link to your work as well because people need to see it.

Mike Alewitz:  Well, I thank you. I wish we had more time. I think I could chat with you for a long time.

Marc Steiner:  We can come back maybe and just focus in on your murals, which would be great.

Mike Alewitz:  I would love that. I would love that. Well, I have to thank you all for inviting me to say these few words. It’s much appreciated.

Marc Steiner:  Keep your brush at the ready.

Mike Alewitz:  And go to our website, redsq.org and check out other stuff that we have.

Marc Steiner:  Absolutely. It’s well worth it. Thank you so much for being with us today.

Mike Alewitz:  Alright, thank you, Marc.

Marc Steiner:  Once again, thank you to Mike Alewitz for joining us today. And thanks to David Hebden for running our program, and our audio editor, Alina Nehlich, and producer Rosette Sewali for making it all work behind the scenes, and everyone here at The Real News for making this show possible.

And please let me know what you thought about what you heard today, what you’d like us to cover. Just write to me at mss@therealnews.com and I’ll get right back to you.

Once again, thank you Mike Alewitz for your brilliant work and for being part of our program today. And so for the crew here at The Real News, I’m Marc Steiner. Stay involved, keep listening, and take care.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Marc Steiner.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/there-were-massive-revolts-the-history-of-the-1970-kent-state-massacre-you-havent-heard/feed/ 0 542510
‘The missiles represented hope’: Palestinians in Gaza react to Iran bombing Israel https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-missiles-represented-hope-palestinians-in-gaza-react-to-iran-bombing-israel/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-missiles-represented-hope-palestinians-in-gaza-react-to-iran-bombing-israel/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 15:45:41 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335183 Still image of Iranian missiles in the night sky descending on Tel Aviv, Israel, on June 13, 2025. Still image from TRNN documentary report "Gaza watches Iran bomb Israel" (2025).“Honestly, I felt, ‘Please God, just push Israel back a bit [so] they might leave us alone, a little.”]]> Still image of Iranian missiles in the night sky descending on Tel Aviv, Israel, on June 13, 2025. Still image from TRNN documentary report "Gaza watches Iran bomb Israel" (2025).

On Friday, June 13, after Israeli airstrikes struck Iran, Iran launched a retaliatory barrage of missiles at Israel, hitting targets in Tel Aviv. Palestinians watched Iran’s bombs fall on Israel from across the militarized border separating the Gaza Strip from Israel. The Real News Network spoke with Palestinians on the ground in Gaza, who continue to endure genocidal violence and forced starvation at the hands of Israel, about their reactions to Iran’s airstrikes.

Credits:
Producers: Belal Awad, Leo Erhardt
Videographers: Ruwaida Amer, Mahmoud Al Mashharawi
Video Editor: Leo Erhardt

Transcript

TEXT SLIDE:

On Friday, June 13, after Israeli airstrikes struck Iran, Iran launched a retaliatory barrage of missiles at Israel, hitting targets in Tel Aviv.

Palestinians watched Iran’s bombs fall on Israel from across the militarized border separating the Gaza Strip from Israel. The Real News spoke with Gazans, who continue to endure genocidal violence and forced starvation at the hands of Israel, about their reactions to Iran’s airstrikes. 

RADIO REPORT:

It has been en route for one hour and will land in a few moments, and emotions are high, not just in support but because of Israel’s actions. 

RAJA NADA ABU HAJAR: 

May God bless them. First and foremost. Iran. Because they have stood with the Palestinians. May God stand with all of us and end the war on us both. I saw them. What did you see? I saw the missiles going across, here. What did you feel? I saw them! What did you feel? We felt joy! May God give them victory over all who fight them! Everyone felt happy. People were shouting with joy, that someone is defending Palestine. That there’s someone who stands with us. 

IMAD HARB DAWAS: 

The war between Israel and Iran is a private war between Israel and Iran. Nuclear reactors, uranium enrichment… Whoever thinks that Iran is going to war for the people of Palestine is confused. This war has other military dimensions, a war between Israel and Iran. Of course, we saw the missiles, and we and all the people were hopeful, that the military pressure— of course, our poor people are confused, they hope for an end to the war. The missiles represented hope: that maybe the war on Gaza might finally end. 

JALIL MUSTAFA REZG FIRDAWS: 

Honestly I felt, please God, just push Israel back a bit. That they might leave us alone, a little. My one and only hope is to go and sit on top of the ruins of my house, nothing more. I want nothing. Just to sit on the ruins of my house. That’s it. Killing, death, hunger and displacement. Evacuated from here to there. They’ve gone to war with Iran and forgotten about us. We don’t know our fate, what’s going to happen to us? 

RAJA NADA ABU HAJAR: 

You leave your home not knowing if you will find the rest of your family alive or dead. You leave thinking maybe there will be a strike on the street and you’ll die. This war is not normal: It’s total destruction, not war. War is not like this. We experienced many wars, but we never saw anything like this. 

IMAD HARB DAWAS: 

The Israelis are deliberately starving us. They cut off the internet, so we couldn’t communicate to the rest of the world about the starvation, it’s a war on journalists and on journalism everywhere. Air traffic over Iran and Israel in the wake of escalation is now almost non-existent. 

JALIL MUSTAFA REZG FIRDAWS: 

Honestly the lack of internet has had a big impact on us. We want the world to hear our voices, to see us. We want the world to see us in reality, not just on the news. No: We want

those outside to see how we’re living. We don’t want them to see fabricated news reports. We need the internet to also hear the news from outside. Just like the world should hear us, we want to hear what’s happening in the world: Who is standing with us, who isn’t? Who’s defending us, who isn’t? Where is the Arab world?


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Belal Awad, Leo Erhadt, Ruwaida Amer and Mahmoud Al Mashharawi.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-missiles-represented-hope-palestinians-in-gaza-react-to-iran-bombing-israel/feed/ 0 542500
Gaza watches Iran bomb Israel: ‘The missiles represented hope’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gaza-watches-iran-bomb-israel-the-missiles-represented-hope/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gaza-watches-iran-bomb-israel-the-missiles-represented-hope/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 15:30:17 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=cbd54847ed4de329db5fe9bf80eabdd3
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gaza-watches-iran-bomb-israel-the-missiles-represented-hope/feed/ 0 542476
GOP Budget Bill Would Make ICE "Largest Federal Law Enforcement Agency in the History of the Nation" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation-2/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 15:22:55 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a03fd1ea69724550358b428e86adc8a0
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation-2/feed/ 0 542490
"Not a Done Deal": After Senate Passes "Big, Ugly Bill," Progressives Fight to Stop It in the House https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/not-a-done-deal-after-senate-passes-big-ugly-bill-progressives-fight-to-stop-it-in-the-house-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/not-a-done-deal-after-senate-passes-big-ugly-bill-progressives-fight-to-stop-it-in-the-house-2/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 15:21:38 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b3abc65901bf7915aa8b3756c7290711
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/not-a-done-deal-after-senate-passes-big-ugly-bill-progressives-fight-to-stop-it-in-the-house-2/feed/ 0 542492
“Have Some Blood! You Like Shedding It All Over the World So Much? There You Go!” https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/have-some-blood-you-like-shedding-it-all-over-the-world-so-much-there-you-go/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/have-some-blood-you-like-shedding-it-all-over-the-world-so-much-there-you-go/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 14:45:52 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159573 Through the looking glass. Mike Ferner, of Veterans For Peace, threw blood at the US mission to the UN today: “Here, United States, have some blood! You like shedding it all over the world so much? There you go! How about some blood? A small amount of the blood — the blood money — that […]

The post “Have Some Blood! You Like Shedding It All Over the World So Much? There You Go!” first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>


Through the looking glass.

Mike Ferner, of Veterans For Peace, threw blood at the US mission to the UN today: “Here, United States, have some blood! You like shedding it all over the world so much? There you go! How about some blood? A small amount of the blood — the blood money — that corporations make taking us to war all the time. No. More. Killing. Please. Stop it.”

He and 28 others were reportedly arrested today. He had been participated in #FastForGaza

Most arrests took place at the Israeli mission to the UN where a mass action was. Joy Metzler, co-founder of Servicemembers For Ceasefire, was among those arrested there. She’s been doing #FastForGaza outside the US mission to the UN for the last 40 days. They limited themselves to “250 calories per day, considered medically to be a starvation diet and the amount reported early this year as the average available” to Palestinians in Gaza. Joy left the Air Force and became a conscientious objector, citing US aggression in the Middle East and the continued ethnic cleansing in all of Palestine and the ongoing mass massacre of Palestinians in Gaza.

One of the last times I saw Mike he was railing about “fuckers” killing “fucking babies”.

Mike is a former Navy corpsman and author of Inside the Red Zone: A Veteran For Peace Reports from Iraq. Mike participated in the 40-day #FastForGaza until he had to be taken to the ER a few weeks ago. I repeatedly asked the UN about the fasters and if UNSG António Guterres would meet with them, but he never did: 35 Days of Fasting: UN Secretary General Won’t Meet With Gaza Hunger Strikers…

35 Days of Fasting: UN Secretary General Won't Meet With Gaza Hunger Strikers...

While I was in NYC recently, I repeatedly questioned the UN Secretary General’s spokespersons about Gaza and if he would meet with the Veterans and Allies who are on day 35 of a 40 day fast in front of the UN — it ends Monday — as well as other issues: Read full story.

In contrast to the lack of coverage of the Fast For Gaza, in 1965, Roger Allen LaPorte immolated himself outside the UN over war, resulting a front page New York Times piece (self-immolators against the Iraq invasion were largely ignored): Holocaust, Immolation, Sacrifice and “An Extreme Act of Protest”.

Holocaust, Immolation, Sacrifice and "An Extreme Act of Protest"

[Aaron Bushnell immolated himself in front of the Israeli embassy in Washington, D.C., a year ago today. A slightly edited version of this article appeared in the Nov/Dec 2024 issue of The Capitol Hill Citizen — which is only available in print. Read full story.

  • Thanks to folks who took videos and Kelley Lane for editing.
The post “Have Some Blood! You Like Shedding It All Over the World So Much? There You Go!” first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Sam Husseini.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/have-some-blood-you-like-shedding-it-all-over-the-world-so-much-there-you-go/feed/ 0 542457
Reclaiming the Forgotten: Our Elders, Our Planet https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/reclaiming-the-forgotten-our-elders-our-planet/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/reclaiming-the-forgotten-our-elders-our-planet/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 14:35:10 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159571 This Earth Day reflection urges us to confront two intertwined truths we too often ignore: our relationship to the environment and our treatment of the elderly. Growing up in Ghana, I was taught by my history professor that true life stems from connection—that severance invites death. This idea mirrors ancient Egyptian cosmology, where a vast community of affection included […]

The post Reclaiming the Forgotten: Our Elders, Our Planet first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
This Earth Day reflection urges us to confront two intertwined truths we too often ignore: our relationship to the environment and our treatment of the elderly.

Growing up in Ghana, I was taught by my history professor that true life stems from connection—that severance invites death. This idea mirrors ancient Egyptian cosmology, where a vast community of affection included the living, the dead, and the unborn. It was the sacred task of the living to remember those who came before and prepare the way for those yet to come. These connections weren’t limited to human beings—they extended to landscapes, waterways, trees, and the entire natural world.

In that worldview, our Earth was not just a backdrop, it was part of the soul’s journey.

Today, I ask: How are we treating our elders? Have we abandon them to strangers in nursing homes devoid of spiritual connection? And what of the Earth itself—wounded, silenced, discarded? What then is the meaning of life, or even the essence of birth, when the elders and the Earth are both forgotten and in

To misread Ancient Egypt as obsessed with death is a mistake. Their monumental tombs weren’t just for mourning—they were messages: affirming an unbroken bridge between the visible and invisible, between the present and ancestral time. This ethos pervades autonomous African cultures. Death, they believed, was not an end but a passage in an ongoing dialogue.

Tombs spoke of immanent souls. The living and dead remained united in memory and spirit. Across East, Central, and Nile Valley Africa, people erected household altars as signs of enduring love. They’d lay offerings with a whispered plea: We haven’t forgotten you. Don’t forget us either.

Even Christ, schooled in Egypt, echoes this connection when on the cross he cries, “Father, Father, why have you forsaken me?”

These ancestors beloved grand parents, guardians, keepers of truth were expected to remain protectors, even in death. And in remembering them, we remained whole.

Visit a nursing home today and look Spiritually deep into the eyes of those we call “senior citizens.” What do you see?

Western dismissals of African reverence for stones, trees, rivers as “fetishism” miss the point. It was never worship. It was respect. To use a resource was a spiritual act. Nature was honored the way one reveres divinity.

But today? We are told to abandon our wisdom and embrace “progress”—destruction named creativity, tyranny masked as democracy, robbery repackaged as free trade. What remains is a shattered cosmos beneath our feet

Reconnect with the Earth!! Reconnect with our elders!! They are the libraries of posterity.

The post Reclaiming the Forgotten: Our Elders, Our Planet first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Sammy Attoh.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/reclaiming-the-forgotten-our-elders-our-planet/feed/ 0 542459
CPJ, partners condemn the Bolsonaro administration’s surveilling of journalists in Brazil https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/cpj-partners-condemn-the-bolsonaro-administrations-surveilling-of-journalists-in-brazil/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/cpj-partners-condemn-the-bolsonaro-administrations-surveilling-of-journalists-in-brazil/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 14:29:58 +0000 https://cpj.org/?p=494338 The Coalition in Defense of Journalism (CDJor), which the Committee to Protect Journalists is a member, strongly condemns the 2019-2022 Bolsonaro administration’s use of the Brazilian Intelligence Agency to surveil journalists, media outlets, and civil society organizations.

Details on the depth of administration’s surveillance of journalists came to light after Brazil’s Federal Supreme Court unsealed a final investigative report filed by the Federal Police, which included names of media outlets and journalists targeted.

CDJor calls for all information about the monitoring be disclosed and that those responsible are held accountable swiftly, transparently, and independently.

Read the full statement in English here and Portuguese here.


This content originally appeared on Committee to Protect Journalists and was authored by CPJ Staff.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/cpj-partners-condemn-the-bolsonaro-administrations-surveilling-of-journalists-in-brazil/feed/ 0 542453
GOP Budget Bill Would Make ICE “Largest Federal Law Enforcement Agency in the History of the Nation” https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 12:31:58 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=228c2ff541fb65feed01f51b41a0ba1d Aaronreichlin melnick ice

The budget bill just passed by the Senate provides more than $170 billion in new funding for immigration enforcement and detention. Aaron Reichlin-Melnick, who worked on an analysis published by the American Immigration Council, says the new budget would make ICE “the single largest federal law enforcement agency in the history of the nation.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/gop-budget-bill-would-make-ice-largest-federal-law-enforcement-agency-in-the-history-of-the-nation/feed/ 0 542482
“Not a Done Deal”: After Senate Passes “Big, Ugly Bill,” Progressives Fight to Stop It in the House https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/not-a-done-deal-after-senate-passes-big-ugly-bill-progressives-fight-to-stop-it-in-the-house/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/not-a-done-deal-after-senate-passes-big-ugly-bill-progressives-fight-to-stop-it-in-the-house/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 12:14:58 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b1711621fd33c5b3ef4b4c6f1cdfea02 Seg1 bbb

After a contentious round of last-minute negotiations, President Trump’s budget bill has passed in the Senate, squeaking by thanks to Vice President JD Vance casting the tie-breaking vote. Three Republicans joined Senate Democrats in voting “no” on the bill, which gives tax cuts to the rich and makes historic cuts to Medicaid and food assistance. The bill now heads to the House of Representatives, where Republicans hold a slim majority, for a final vote before Trump’s July 4 deadline. Citizen groups, including the grassroots political organization ⁠Indivisible⁠, are calling on Americans, particularly those living in Republican and swing districts, to contact their House representatives and urge them to vote against the bill. “It’s not a done deal,” says Indivisible’s co-founder and co-executive director Ezra Levin. “They do not have the votes.”


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/not-a-done-deal-after-senate-passes-big-ugly-bill-progressives-fight-to-stop-it-in-the-house/feed/ 0 542484
The Difference between “News”-Reporting and News-Reporting https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-difference-between-news-reporting-and-news-reporting/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-difference-between-news-reporting-and-news-reporting/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 11:02:15 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159598 On July 1, CBS ‘News’ and Yahoo News headlined “Comparing the Medicaid cuts in House and Senate ‘big, beautiful bill’,” and presented news that was actually an analytical or “opinion” article which was 860 words of gobbledygook that enumerated minor differences between the House-passed and the Senate-passed versions of Trump’s budget-and-tax bill that he insists […]

The post The Difference between “News”-Reporting and News-Reporting first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
On July 1, CBS ‘News’ and Yahoo News headlined “Comparing the Medicaid cuts in House and Senate ‘big, beautiful bill’,” and presented news that was actually an analytical or “opinion” article which was 860 words of gobbledygook that enumerated minor differences between the House-passed and the Senate-passed versions of Trump’s budget-and-tax bill that he insists must be on his desk to sign on July 4th and that in BOTH versions increases spending on ‘Defense’ (aggression) and cuts billionaires’ taxes and cuts health care and disability coverage for the nation’s poor in order to pay for a tiny percentage of the thereby-increased federal deficit — the bill increases the suffering of the poor in order to increase the profits to firms such as Lockheed Martin and to reduce the taxes on those firms’ controlling billionaires, but none of this information was so much as even mentioned in that 860-word ‘news’-report.

The most up-voted and least down-voted of the 650 reader-comments to it at Yahoo News as-of this writing was only 94 words but vastly more informative than that 860-word CBS ‘News’ story was:

George

So every one of you Medicaid recipients who voted for Trump can congratulate Trump and every MAGA member of Congress for either stripping you of health care or making it more difficult to qualify while these guys you voted for have 100% coverage that costs them nothing for life. The money they’re ripping from you is going to help pay for a tax break to people like Amazon owner Jeff Bezos, who just spent $50 million on his wedding reception. Make America Great Again for the billionaires by taking from the poor and disabled.

That too is analytical about Trump’s “Big Beautiful Bill” but it is meaningful instead of meaningless from the standpoint of informing the public about the realities that the public needs to know in order to be able to carry out intelligently their voting-responsibilities.

The ‘news’-media should fire the ‘journalists’ such as Caitlin Yilek who wrote that CBS ‘News’ article and hire ones such as ‘George’ who is not merely far pithier but far more informative. Then these ‘news’-media will become news-media.

Today at another of my articles, “America’s Republicans’ Hatred of the Poor,” I got a reader-comment about the type of elected public-office-holders that we get from such a billionaires-controlled press:

nameless

Eric, at the very beginning of the lock down, I attended a zoom round table set by Steve Kirsch, a former Silicon Valley executive. I forgot his name but the guest was a West Point Graduate. And he said in Sacramento, there was  a bill that was about to be passed that was not to the benefit of the population at large. So a bunch of voters gathered with picket signs asking for the bill not to be passed, and ready to get together and talk about it right at the front of whatever they call that place. Well, guess what happened? The thugs who refer to themselves as “our” law makers and legislators closed the doors behind them completely ignoring the protesters, went Inside and passed it anyway!!!!! This is what the cattle in this country refer to as “democracy”.

If the amount of money to one’s name is what determines one’s worth, then drug dealers, contract killers, murderers and child traffickers should be allowed a piece of the pie, and why not, let’s allow the drug cartel a seat in the Congress!!! LOL. All of these criminals get a piece of that pie, so why not allow the other Party a piece of their pie?! One of the DAs who were after Trump was caught to have no less than 15 million $ in one of her bank accounts, her official salary being like only a mere 100K$ a year!!! I mean you cut the mortgage payment, car payment, food, etc., and there will be virtually nothing left. But she has 15 million $ in the Bank!!!! Where did she get that from if not from drug money laundering, bribes and what have you?…They are all criminals. Thank you for Lincoln’s priceless speech. Awesome!!!

People tell me that my proposed solution to such problems as these is ‘too radical’ but have none of their own to propose instead. I can’t respect anyone who merely complains and who just ignores that the prevailing governmental and political rottenness REQUIRES a radical solution. So, if you don’t like mine, then please contact me and tell me why and tell me your own. And if you like mine, then tell me so, because all that I’ve gotten so far is people who still think that competitive elections by the public are essential in order to have a democracy, and who ignore the massive data proving that to be rabidly false. It seems that everybody is so elitist they can’t get out of that groove, not even to CONSIDER an alternative to it. In ‘democratic’ politics, the natural result is for the scum — no ‘elite’ — to rise to the top. Does NOBODY yet recognize this fact — not even with people such as Biden and Trump being in the White House? This is NOT a passing phenomenon; it has been like this ever since 1945 and is getting worse over time. How much worse does it have yet to be before people start opening their minds to the reality and acting on it?

The post The Difference between “News”-Reporting and News-Reporting first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Eric Zuesse.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-difference-between-news-reporting-and-news-reporting/feed/ 0 542461
Inside Elon Musk’s Stellar Year at the Texas Capitol https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/inside-elon-musks-stellar-year-at-the-texas-capitol/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/inside-elon-musks-stellar-year-at-the-texas-capitol/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/elon-musk-texas-legislature-laws-spacex-tesla by Lauren McGaughy, The Texas Newsroom

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

This article is co-published with The Texas Newsroom and The Texas Tribune as part of an initiative to report on how power is wielded in Texas.

Elon Musk was pleading.

It was April 2013, and Musk stood at a podium in a small committee room in the basement of the Texas Capitol. The Tesla CEO asked the legislators gathered before him to change state law, allowing him to bypass the state’s powerful car dealership lobby and sell his electric vehicles directly to the public.

He painted a bleak picture of what could happen if they didn’t give him his way.

“We would, I’m afraid, we would fail,” Musk told the assembled representatives. “So for us, it’s a matter of life or death.”

Clad in a dark suit instead of his now ubiquitous black T-shirt and baseball hat, the younger Musk was unable to persuade lawmakers in Austin. That year, the bill he wanted to pass died.

More than a decade later, however, Musk’s fortunes inside the Texas Capitol have changed — dramatically.

Musk is now not only one of the richest people in the world, who, until recently, was a key member of President Donald Trump’s second administration, but he’s also become one of the most powerful business and political figures in the state.

During this year’s legislative session, Musk’s lobbyists and representatives publicly advocated for almost a dozen bills that would benefit his companies. The Texas Newsroom identified these priorities by searching legislative records for committee testimony and other evidence of his public stances.

Musk wanted legislators to pass new laws that would make it faster and easier for homeowners to install backup power generators, like the kind Tesla makes, on their properties. He wanted them to create new crimes so people who fly drones or interfere with operations at his rocket company SpaceX can be arrested. And he wanted to change who controlled the highway and public beach near SpaceX’s South Texas site so he can launch his rockets according to his timeline.

Musk got them all.

In a Capitol where the vast majority of bills fail to pass, all but three of Musk’s public priorities will become law. The two bills his lobbyists openly opposed are dead, including a measure that would have regulated autonomous vehicles.

Musk made gains even on bills he didn’t publicly endorse. Texas lawmakers followed the tech giant’s lead by rewriting the state’s corporate laws and creating a new office modeled after the Department of Government Efficiency, the controversial effort he led in the Trump administration to cut federal spending.

By all accounts, Musk’s influence was great enough that he did not have to formally address lawmakers in person this session to make the case for any of his priorities.

Critics said these new laws will hand Musk’s companies more cash, more power and more protection from scrutiny as his business footprint continues to expand across Texas.

“The real harm is the influence of a private company on the decisions made by government,” Cyrus Reed, the conservation director for the Sierra Club’s Lone Star Chapter, told The Texas Newsroom. The Sierra Club is part of a group suing the state over SpaceX’s activities in South Texas.

Musk and his representatives did not respond to requests for an interview. He recently ended his run with DOGE, and his relationship with Trump has increasingly frayed.

Contrary to his slash-and-burn tactics in Washington, D.C., where he bulldozed his way onto the scene after Trump’s reelection, Musk has played the long game to amass power in Texas. He still hasn’t succeeded in changing Texas law to allow for Tesla direct sales, but that hasn’t stopped him from steadily investing his personal and professional capital in the state over more than a decade. Most of his businesses, including the tunneling firm The Boring Company, social media giant X and Tesla, are now headquartered here. While it’s still based in California, SpaceX operates production, testing and launch sites across Texas.

Musk has also moved his personal home to the state, reportedly securing properties in the Austin area and South Texas.

In the Texas Capitol, Musk’s power is subtle but undeniable.

Calendars and emails obtained by The Texas Newsroom through public information requests show his company’s representatives met regularly with lawmakers backing his priority bills and invited Lt. Gov. Dan Patrick to tour SpaceX. Patrick, who leads the state Senate, also penned a letter to the Federal Aviation Administration supporting the rocket company’s request to increase its launches in South Texas.

Texas politics, with its long history of outsize characters, has never seen the likes of Musk, said Rice University political scientist Mark Jones.

“Even in the heyday of the [George W.] Bush era, you couldn’t find somebody who had such dramatic wealth as Musk, who also had the same level of access and business interests here in Texas,” Jones told The Texas Newsroom. “Today, Elon Musk is arguably the most powerful and influential private citizen in the country.”

A mural of Elon Musk in downtown Brownsville, Texas (Michael Gonzalez for KUT News) “It’s All to Help Elon”

When lawmakers convened their 2025 legislative session in January, one of Musk’s top priorities was quickly clear. He wanted more control over the area around SpaceX’s launch site in South Texas.

Known as Starbase, the massive rocket testing and launch facility has come to dominate the small rural area between Brownsville, on the border, and the Gulf of Mexico. It is the launch site for Starship, the rocket meant to eventually take humans to Mars and the heart of Musk’s mission to make humans a multiplanetary species. The FAA recently gave SpaceX permission to increase Starship launches fivefold.

Although SpaceX owns most of the land around Starbase, county officials retained the authority over access to the adjacent public beach, called Boca Chica. The county worked closely with SpaceX to ensure the area was cleared ahead of launches, but the company’s leaders did not have ultimate control over the process.

That changed this year. First, Musk decided to incorporate the launch site as its own city. That happened on May 3, when the few residents who live in the area — most of whom The Texas Newsroom determined work for SpaceX — voted to create the new city of Starbase.

Musk then wanted state lawmakers to hand the new city the power to close Boca Chica Beach and the adjoining public highway during the week, a change the county officials opposed.

State Sen. Adam Hinojosa, a newly elected Republican who represents the area, authored the legislation to shift control to Starbase. Dozens of SpaceX employees got involved in the effort, submitting pages of identical comments to lawmakers in support.

Democrats succeeded in killing Hinojosa’s bill, prompting local activists to celebrate. Their victory was short-lived. Late in the session, lawmakers decided instead to shift some of this power to the Texas Space Commission, which facilitates the state’s space exploration agenda.

The new law states that the commission’s board can close highways and gulf beaches with the approval of a local municipality, which, in this case, is Starbase. SpaceX retains a connection to the commission itself: Kathy Lueders, who confirmed that she left her job as Starbase general manager last month, still sits on the Space Commission board. She directed additional questions to the commission.

The Space Commission declined to answer questions on SpaceX’s potential future involvement with these discussions.

“The way I view it is SpaceX wanted a certain amount of power,” said Reed, with the Sierra Club. “And at the end of the day, they didn’t quite get it, but they got something pretty close.”

The bill passed along largely partisan lines. Republican state Rep. Greg Bonnen, who authored the bill, did not respond to a request for comment about the role Starbase may play now that it will become law.

Lawmakers passed several more bills to benefit spaceports, the sites where spacecraft launch, like SpaceX.

While Texas is home to multiple spaceports, including Amazon founder Jeff Bezos’ Blue Origin, SpaceX dwarfs the rest in size and scope of influence across the state and country, boasting large federal government contracts and a growing satellite industry.

Hinojosa was an author or sponsor on most of these bills; he did not respond to multiple requests for an interview or comment for this story.

Other than the beach closure legislation, many passed with the support of Democrats.

At SpaceX’s urging, Texas lawmakers passed a measure to ban drones over spaceports. They also added spaceports to the state’s “critical infrastructure” facilities, which already include airports and military bases. The law will make it a felony to intentionally damage or interrupt the operation of any site where a spacecraft is tested or launched. Similar critical infrastructure laws have been used in other states to arrest people protesting oil and gas pipeline projects.

Bekah Hinojosa with the South Texas Environmental Justice Network, a local activist group, told The Texas Newsroom the new critical infrastructure law will let Musk “militarize our Boca Chica Beach for his dangerous rocket testing endeavors."

The Sierra Club and other groups from South Texas, including a local Indigenous tribe, are suing the state, arguing that closing Boca Chica violates an amendment to the Texas Constitution that protects access to public beaches.

The General Land Office, the main defendant in that suit, declined to comment. In court filings, Texas Attorney General Ken Paxton argues the state can still regulate beach access for public safety reasons and that it cannot be sued in this case because it has immunity. The case is pending at the Texas Supreme Court.

A rally at Boca Chica Beach against the incorporation of Starbase on May 3 (Michael Gonzalez for KUT News)

Legislators also passed two more new laws that will shield companies like SpaceX from public scrutiny and legal challenges.

One will exempt certain military and aerospace issues from public meetings laws, allowing elected officials in some cases to discuss these topics behind closed doors. The proposal was so concerning to residents who live close to SpaceX’s facility near Waco, where locals say the company’s rocket testing has spooked livestock and damaged homes, that they submitted a dozen comments against it.

This law went into effect on May 15.

Another new law will make it harder for crew members and certain other employees to sue space flight companies. This, like most new legislation approved this session, will become law on Sept. 1.

SpaceX’s only significant public defeat during this year’s legislative session was the failure of a bill it supported to give spaceports a tax cut. The measure would have cost nearly $14.5 million over five years, according to an official estimate from the Legislative Budget Board.

Moriba Jah, a professor of aerospace engineering and engineering mechanics at the University of Texas at Austin, believes Texas is pandering to Musk.

“It’s all to help Elon,” said Jah, who added that his viewpoint is rooted in resisting policies that enable what he called “environmental plunder masked as ‘innovation.’” He has concerns that the state is investing in spaceports, most notably Musk’s, while carving out exceptions that prohibit public insight and input into what’s happening at those facilities.

“There’s this whole cloak of secrecy with whatever Elon is doing,” Jah said. “We will not and should not cease to launch satellites or explore space. But the way in which we do it matters a lot.”

“They Never Come Out of the Shadows”

This year, Tesla’s lobbyists publicly advocated against only two bills. Both died.

One was a GOP-authored proposal intended to create a buffer zone between homes and large-scale energy storage facilities like the kind Tesla sells.

The other bill would have imposed more regulations on the type of cars that Musk is rolling out as robotaxis in Texas, and would have required a public hearing if a collision involving an autonomous vehicle resulted in a fatality.

Bill author Rep. Terry Canales, an Edinburg Democrat, believes his legislation failed because it was not pro-industry enough.

“Tesla is the worst actor that I’ve ever dealt with in the Capitol. They’re subversive. They never come out of the shadows,” Canales told The Texas Newsroom. “Not only did I not hear from them, I didn’t expect to hear from them because that’s the way they operate.”

Lawmakers instead advanced a different bill, one with a lighter regulatory touch that was crafted with input from the autonomous vehicle industry.

It will require commercial operators, such as robotaxi and driverless big rig companies, to obtain authorization from the state. This approval can be revoked if the company’s vehicles endanger the public, including causing “serious bodily injury,” though it requires no public hearings in the case of a fatality, as Canales’ bill would have done. Autonomous vehicle companies will also have to develop plans for interacting with emergency responders.

Tesla took a neutral stance on the legislation. But the bill’s author, state Sen. Robert Nichols, R-Jacksonville, told The Texas Newsroom that Tesla’s team participated in work groups and stakeholder conversations with industry groups, trial lawyers and others.

Texas has been at the forefront of testing this technology for years, rolling out its first regulations in 2017. But with more autonomous vehicles hitting the streets, Nichols said it was time to clarify the rules and called his bill “a real opportunity here to actually improve safety.”

Nichols’ legislation initially died in the Texas House. But with less than a week before lawmakers packed up to go home, a House member added the entirety of Nichols’ bill as an amendment to another transportation bill, which will become law Sept. 1.

Tray Gober, a personal injury lawyer who handles vehicle crash cases in Austin, said it’s smart to get new regulations for autonomous vehicles on the books. But he worries that Texas is rushing to give its blessing to a technology that has not been fully tested.

“We’re not talking about rockets crashing into the ocean. We’re talking about cars crashing into other people,” he said, comparing Tesla to SpaceX. “There’s going to be people that are hurt during this process of improving these systems, and that’s unfortunate. I think it’s viewed as collateral damage by these companies.”

When asked about concerns that there could be fatalities as the number of driverless cars grows in Texas, Nichols said, “There probably will be. Eventually there will be. I would not doubt that.” But he pointed to studies showing autonomous vehicles are safer than human drivers.

“If you start looking at the breakdown of the fatalities on the roads and the crashes and the wrecks, what causes them? It’s not equipment failure. It’s driver distraction,” he told The Texas Newsroom.

Critics of these studies argue their scope is too narrow to make conclusions about the safety of self-driving technology. Citing safety concerns, some local lawmakers asked Tesla’s robotaxi rollout in Austin to be delayed. The company continued with the launch but with human monitors in the passenger seats.

Many Democrats opposed Nichols’ proposal. But at least three other bills affecting Tesla got bipartisan support.

At times, the Sierra Club was fighting against Musk’s SpaceX bills while working with his Tesla lobbyists on clean energy legislation, said Reed, the club’s conservation director. For example, Tesla and the Sierra Club both supported legislation to create new fire standards for battery energy storage facilities and address the environmental and financial challenges associated with decommissioning them.

Tesla also backed a bill that had bipartisan support to make it easier for homeowners to install backup power generators, such as the company’s Powerwall.

Reed said Musk’s shift to the right has created interesting bedfellows, sometimes making it easier for Republicans to back some of the energy policies more traditionally associated with progressives.

He remarked, “It’s an interesting time in our country, right?”

Musk’s Indirect Influence

A Tesla showroom in Austin on March 24 (Michael Minasi/KUT News)

For all the bills Musk pushed to see pass, he also indirectly influenced the creation of new laws on which he did not take a public stance.

Texas lawmakers created the state’s own DOGE office housed under the governor, the name an homage to Musk’s controversial federal cost-slashing effort in Washington, D.C.

Musk himself took no public role in creating the new office. But at a signing ceremony for the bill, Gov. Greg Abbott explained he was the inspiration.

Texas legislators also rewrote the state’s corporate laws after Musk raised concerns about business codes in other states. Authored by Republican state Sen. Bryan Hughes, the rewrite shields business leaders from lawsuits and establishes thresholds for the types of legal challenges shareholders can file.

Musk and his lobbyists never came out in support of the bill, but he has long complained that states needed to shore up protections for CEOs and other business leaders.

Musk began crusading on the issue after his $55 billion compensation package at Tesla was challenged in Delaware’s business courts. Musk moved many of his businesses elsewhere, including Texas, and publicly urged other companies to “get the hell out of Delaware.”

The legislation written in response was dubbed the “DExit” bill.

“Texas is much better than Delaware,” Musk posted on X in early April, just days after the bill passed the state Senate. “If Delaware doesn’t reform, it will lose all its corporate business.”

Last year, a Delaware judge ruled Musk’s pay package violated his fiduciary duties to the company’s stockholders. He won most of it back in a shareholder vote, but the judge again rejected his pay package in December.

In an interview, Hughes told The Texas Newsroom he heard input from different groups in crafting the Texas legislation and could not remember whether Musk’s companies were involved.

Abbott signed the DExit bill and a handful of other business bills into law on May 14. Standing behind him at a public ceremony marking the occasion were Hughes and a large group of business representatives.

Standing behind Hughes was a representative from Tesla.

Lauren McGaughy is a journalist with The Texas Newsroom, a collaboration among NPR and the public radio stations in Texas. She is based at KUT News in Austin. Reach her at lmcgaughy@kut.org. Sign up for KUT newsletters.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Lauren McGaughy, The Texas Newsroom.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/inside-elon-musks-stellar-year-at-the-texas-capitol/feed/ 0 542410
Visual artist Nicole Wittenberg on resisting the pressure of productivity culture https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/visual-artist-nicole-wittenberg-on-resisting-the-pressure-of-productivity-culture/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/visual-artist-nicole-wittenberg-on-resisting-the-pressure-of-productivity-culture/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/visual-artist-nicole-wittenberg-on-resisting-the-pressure-of-productivity-culture Two solo exhibitions of your work opened in May 2025 in Maine; A Sailboat in the Moonlight, on view at the Ogunquit Museum of American Art and Cheek to Cheek, at the Center for Maine Contemporary Art (CMCA). Then you have yet another opening in September at Maison La Roche in Paris and a solo at Acquavella in New York in October, as well as a new monograph, published by Monacelli, Phaidon coming out in July. Can you share more about these current and upcoming shows?

A Sailboat in the Moonlight at the Ogunquit Museum, is a survey show that focuses on the last four years of painting mostly in Maine. Some of the landscapes have figures in them, but they are primarily about light in the trees, the seashore. There’s a room of nocturnal paintings and pastel studies. I’ve never actually had the two of those together, in such a direct way. Then for Cheek to Cheek at the CMCA, I expanded the scale of a series of initial studies [made from life in the landscape], allowing them to grow in size. And those will be installed in a building that was designed by a wonderful architect named Toshiko Mori.

The show with Maison La Roche in Paris, includes a series of flowers—seaside roses and wild hydrangeas—in a very beautiful Corbusier building, designed with Pierre Jeanneret between 1923 and 1925. It has a modernist scale and the paintings have that kind of scale. As an architect, Corbusier had a way of bringing the outside to the inside. These flower paintings [engage with a] very different kind of space than what I was playing with before, which was much deeper andvast. I made studies last summer when I was feeling quite compressed by the world—less landscape, more interior.

How are you handling being so busy?

Honestly, I’m a little knackered, you know? I’m tired. Maine is a month behind in terms of the weather. So the blossoms that are already gone in New York, they’re just beginning to start here.

David Salle has written about your work several times. He wrote about you once again for the upcoming monograph that is being published by Moncelli, Phaidon, as did Jarrett Ernest. What is your relationship to them?

Jarrett has really become such an active voice and presence in the contemporary art world, writing about art and other themes related to writing and thinking. David is an icon, a fantastic painter, and his writing is really wonderful. I’m lucky to to be connected to these voices and to have a chance to be in conversation with them. I just reread one of Jarrett’s books, Valid Until Sunset that I recommend to people. Each story has its own identity combined with an image. They are very focused around his own experience, and feel very seen. It was important for me to read this book again recently.

Nicole Wittenberg. Climbing Roses 7, 2025. Oil on canvas, 72 x 144 in. Photo by Jason Wyche. Courtesy of the artist.

Your new monograph comes out in July, and truly focuses on a variety of paintings you’ve made over the span of your career. These range from natural landscapes to the figurative. Do you approach a body in the same way, you would approach a tree as a subject?

When it comes to my subject, I’m a bit omnivorous. I don’t tend to categorize things in a kind of subject matter. What we [painters] do is constantly shifting in scale and focus.

I’ve always spent a lot of time in nature, longing to be back, to be around things that are growing and of their own volition. Being outside gives us the time and space to think and to have reflective thinking not just active thinking. It requires unscheduled time. I just planted a tree. It’s a yellow magnolia and it’s going to bloom soon.

Some landscape designers have been a very important subject matter for me. I like to spend time reflecting on Gertrude Jekyll (1843-1932), who was an English horticulturist and garden designer (amongst other things) and did quite a few fabulous projects [including over 400 garden designs across the United States, U.K. and Europe]. And then somebody who’s related to her in ideology, is landscape architect Beatrix Farrand (1872-1959), who was born in New York, but ended up moving and working in Bar Harbor in Maine. She’s done quite a few very famous projects, including the Peggy Rockefeller Rose Garden at the New York Botanical Gardens, the gardens of the White House (during the Presidency of Woodrow Wilson), and campuses of Yale and Princeton. I’ve been influenced by these very powerful female voices that permeated the history of landscape design. [They forever altered] how we see landscape design now, and how we have experienced nature during my lifetime.

Nicole Wittenberg. August Evening 8, 2025. Oil on canvas, 96 x 96 in. Photo by Jason Wyche. Courtesy of the artist

Once the shows are actually installed, will you have a moment to rest and relax?

Well, I have some projects forthcoming and the show in New York at Acquavella opens in October. I’m also working on a large commission right now. Do you need to keep busy all the time?

To be honest, when I was younger, I would say yes. As I get older, I’m in my forties now, I actually really relish that in-between time and find that I can be more efficient when I can recharge.

I think that’s a really important aspect of living. It’s a strange thing about our time now, in our culture, there is pressure to make things, get more done more quickly, to [match] the ease of and speed of communication. But this ease and speed of consumption has not made the quality of our conversations increase and it hasn’t made the quality of our consumption increase either. It’s just increased the quantity. I think that it’s a kind of a compulsive behavior, and there’s something about making art that needs to be more obsessive.

The word purpose or purposeful comes to mind.

Exactly, because there’s a purpose behind an obsession. So, I think that is the word that defines or distinguishes the difference. I would say the paintings in my studio, aren’t really about the way something looks, but they’re more about the way something feels. The sensation is actually the narrative, and not a story per se. I’ve been thinking a lot about how art functions in our our world and in dialogue right now. There’s more visibility in our culture and in our lives now. It’s an interesting dynamic of our time, a strange commodification of culture. And it still takes a lot of time to be a painter…to learn how to be a painter. There’s the craft, or the technique of making a painting, and then there’s the thinking behind making a painting—an intellectual component to painting as well.

Installation view of Climbing Roses 10, 2025. Oil on canvas, 112 x 112 in; and August Evening 6, 2025. Oil on canvas, 112 x 112 in. Photo by Dave Clough. Courtesy of the artist.

After years of trying to understand this while in art school, then after art school, and even as a professor, I’ve realized that art isn’t really about anything that can be described specifically and accurately in language. Perhaps art is something that can be, in its best sense, experienced. And experiences don’t always fit within the parameters of words. They go beyond or go into places where words can’t reach them. So a lot artists try to describe painting or artwork in language, and some people do it better than others. But it’s never never fully amounts to the experience of experiencing an artwork.

That’s true, especially now when so much art is shared via social media and email.

Talking about my art is an interesting exercise. Because it’s something that isn’t about my artwork, but is parallel to my artwork. Some people understand what these paintings are and what they’re about. I’m asked the question a lot, “Why do you paint?” and “What are your paintings about?” And after a lot of unclear statements and missteps with words, I think I can say that these paintings are experiences and ideally somebody can have the opportunity to experience them in person.

That makes a lot of sense to me because one of the things that I always find fascinating about artwork as an experiential entity, is the way that the body interacts with the work.Your work looks like it’s very physically involved—the marks, the drips. There’s a lot going on. Can you talk about what the experience of making is like for you?

Like you say, the paintings are very physical. They are large and [in contrast] I’m not a very big person. I started these paintings thinking about a certain feeling I had when I saw, in this case, wild flowers growing last summer in Maine. Beach roses are a kind of rose that grown by the seashore here, and they are everywhere. I make very quick drawings of them in about 15 or 20 minutes. The drawings function as visual notes about how I’m feeling [while] looking at those flowers at that time of day, on that day. They’re personal. I show them sometimes, and I make a lot of them, yet not all of them become paintings. They have a sense of scale, color and form.

They’re spontaneous enough that I don’t feel like I have to stop time to catch that time. I take all of these personal notes and think about the painting and how to translate those notes into something that’s made with a much different material. Paint is very wet, viscous, it moves around and has its own kind of tendencies of what it likes to do. I don’t really like to control paint very much. In part, I’d say these paintings are just the way the notes and my personal recollection of that moment feels, combined with changing the scale and the material. The result is the [finished] painting. In a way, the painting is also completely separate from that experience because no two things in life are ever really the same.

Installation view of Climbing Roses 6, 2025. Oil on canvas, 112 x 132 in. Photo by Dave Clough. Courtesy of the artist.

There is a sense of freedom and control within your canvases that I really appreciate. Being a painter, one can have a didactic or academic way of approaching art. The next level is how an artist actually creates or uses the medium to help fulfill their vision. What I really like is how your hand feels so evident, it feels uniquely you.

It’s all so personal, depending on who’s holding the brush. Any kind of painting could be a great painting or a bad painting. When you experience an artwork, we can feel the way the painter feels about what they’re doing. Anything could be a great painting, if the painter feels connected to it. Artists have their own set of values and in that way, it’s interesting because it’s incredibly personal. Not a lot of things in life fit into that [category].

Self-awareness, is really hard as an artist. I think it’s hard for everyone probably. It’s hard to know who we are through other people’s eyes.

Nicole Wittenberg recommends:

Valid Until Sunset, by Jarrett Earnest

Gertrude Jekyll (1843-1932)

Beatrix Farrand (1872-1959)

Beach Roses

Rhododendron


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Katy Diamond Hamer.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/visual-artist-nicole-wittenberg-on-resisting-the-pressure-of-productivity-culture/feed/ 0 542391
The Bradbury Group features Palestinian journalist Dr Yousef Aljamal, Middle East report and political panel https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-bradbury-group-features-palestinian-journalist-dr-yousef-aljamal-middle-east-report-and-political-panel/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-bradbury-group-features-palestinian-journalist-dr-yousef-aljamal-middle-east-report-and-political-panel/#respond Wed, 02 Jul 2025 00:33:29 +0000 https://asiapacificreport.nz/?p=116890 Asia Pacific Report

In the new weekly political podcast, The Bradbury Group, last night presenter Martyn Bradbury talked with visiting Palestinian journalist Dr Yousef Aljamal.

They assess the current situation in Israel’s genocidal war on Gaza and what New Zealand should be doing.

As Bradbury, publisher of The Daily Blog, notes, “Fourth Estate public broadcasting is dying — The Bradbury Group will fight back.”


Gaza crisis and Iran tensions.     Video: The Bradbury Group/Radio Waatea

Also in last night’s programme was featured a View From A Far Podcast Special Middle East Report with former intelligence analyst Dr Paul Buchanan and international affairs commentator Selwyn Manning on what will happen next in Iran.

Martyn Bradbury talks to Dr Paul Buchanan (left) and Selwyn Manning on Iran
Martyn Bradbury talks to Dr Paul Buchanan (left) and Selwyn Manning on the Iran crisis and the future. Image: Asia Pacific Report

Political Panel:
Māori Party president John Tamihere,
NZ Herald columnist Simon Wilson
NZCTU economist Craig Renney

Topics:
– The Legacy of Tarsh Kemp
– New coward punch and first responder assault laws — virtue signalling or meaningful policy?
– Cost of living crisis and the failing economy


This content originally appeared on Asia Pacific Report and was authored by Pacific Media Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/02/the-bradbury-group-features-palestinian-journalist-dr-yousef-aljamal-middle-east-report-and-political-panel/feed/ 0 542335
Heat waves will keep getting worse as the climate crisis intensifies, says Michael Mann https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/heat-waves-will-keep-getting-worse-as-the-climate-crisis-intensifies-says-michael-mann/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/heat-waves-will-keep-getting-worse-as-the-climate-crisis-intensifies-says-michael-mann/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 21:57:42 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=cd8d62abcb5ce7e3b2464c55b7671997
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/heat-waves-will-keep-getting-worse-as-the-climate-crisis-intensifies-says-michael-mann/feed/ 0 542308
‘These cuts are death sentences’: Trump’s ‘Big, Beautiful Bill’ passes Senate https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/these-cuts-are-death-sentences-trumps-big-beautiful-bill-passes-senate/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/these-cuts-are-death-sentences-trumps-big-beautiful-bill-passes-senate/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 21:56:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=462abc108ea0b9d48074fa71620beca1
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/these-cuts-are-death-sentences-trumps-big-beautiful-bill-passes-senate/feed/ 0 542307
‘These cuts are death sentences’: Trump’s ‘Big, Beautiful Bill’ passes Senate https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/these-cuts-are-death-sentences-trumps-big-beautiful-bill-passes-senate-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/these-cuts-are-death-sentences-trumps-big-beautiful-bill-passes-senate-2/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 21:56:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=462abc108ea0b9d48074fa71620beca1
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/these-cuts-are-death-sentences-trumps-big-beautiful-bill-passes-senate-2/feed/ 0 542309
‘Congress doesn’t eat ’til Gaza eats!’ Faith leaders shut down Capitol Hill cafeteria in protest https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-faith-leaders-shut-down-capitol-hill-cafeteria-in-protest/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-faith-leaders-shut-down-capitol-hill-cafeteria-in-protest/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 21:07:19 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=dd4f8324f4735a2791dc122324b86ddb
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-faith-leaders-shut-down-capitol-hill-cafeteria-in-protest/feed/ 0 542314
‘Congress doesn’t eat ’til Gaza eats!’ Faith leaders shut down Capitol Hill cafeteria in protest https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-faith-leaders-shut-down-capitol-hill-cafeteria-in-protest-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-faith-leaders-shut-down-capitol-hill-cafeteria-in-protest-2/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 21:07:19 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=dd4f8324f4735a2791dc122324b86ddb
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-faith-leaders-shut-down-capitol-hill-cafeteria-in-protest-2/feed/ 0 542315
“Congress doesn’t eat ’til Gaza eats.” https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 20:51:27 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b8079733e177b8925c8f5d65a41c7fec
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats/feed/ 0 542319
“Congress doesn’t eat ’til Gaza eats.” https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-2/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 20:51:27 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=b8079733e177b8925c8f5d65a41c7fec
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/congress-doesnt-eat-til-gaza-eats-2/feed/ 0 542320
The Supreme Court just ended its term. Here are the decisions that will affect climate policy. https://grist.org/justice/supreme-court-term-climate-decisions-trump-workforce/ https://grist.org/justice/supreme-court-term-climate-decisions-trump-workforce/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 20:45:11 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=669266 The Supreme Court often releases one or two big, splashy environmental decisions each term. Last year it was overruling a decades-old legal precedent called the “Chevron deference,” which allowed courts to defer to the expertise of a federal agency when interpreting ambiguous statutes. The year before that, Sackett v. EPA limited the definition of bodies of water that are protected under the federal Clean Water Act.

This year’s term, which began in October and ended last week, was a bit different. The justices issued a number of decisions related to climate and the environment, but none of them was a “blockbuster,” according to University of Vermont Law and Graduate School emeritus professor Pat Parenteau. 

Arguably, the decisions that will have the greatest potential consequences for climate and environmental policy came from cases that weren’t explicitly about the planet at all. 

Rather, they were decisions that legitimized the executive branch’s actions to fire personnel and block funding already appropriated by Congress. These actions may have far-reaching effects on federal agencies that work on climate and environmental issues, such as the Environmental Protection Agency, the Energy Department, and the Department of Agriculture, which have already been affected by layoffs and funding cuts, as well as early retirement offers intended to get longtime staffers to voluntarily leave their posts.

“What’s being done is irredeemable,” Parenteau added. “The brain drain, the firing of people, the defunding — those are causing really, really long-term damage to the institutional capabilities of the federal government to implement and enforce environmental law.” 

Three of the court’s decisions help illustrate what has happened. 

Two of them — Trump v. Wilcox and Office of Personnel Management v. American Federation of Government Employees — which came earlier in the session, have made it possible for decisions by President Donald Trump to move forward while they are being litigated in lower courts, reversing orders from federal judges that had temporarily paused them. These decisions have effectively allowed firings without cause at the National Labor Relations Board and the Merit Systems Protection Board, and have stopped six federal agencies from bringing back probationary employees that the Trump administration had fired. 

Then last week, on the last day of its term, the Supreme Court issued a sweeping decision in Trump v. CASA that limits the power of the country’s more than 1,000 district court judges to issue nationwide injunctions against presidential orders. Those judges’ injunctions are now supposed to target only the plaintiffs in a given case. 

“Trump is the big winner in this decision,” Parenteau said. 

One of the the decision’s most immediate consequences is that it will allow Trump’s unconstitutional limits to birthright citizenship to go into effect in July. In theory, it also means that Trump could issue an executive order illegally rolling back some environmental policy, and district courts would have less power to stop it while a legal challenge makes its way through the courts. District court judges can still issue nationwide injunctions against rules from federal agencies, and they can issue nationwide injunctions against executive orders that are challenged by a large number of plaintiffs, as in a class action lawsuit. Circuit court judges’ injunction powers remain unchanged.

Rust-colored pumpjacks against a clear blue sky
In Ohio v. EPA the court decided not to temporarily block an EPA policy requiring fossil fuel-fired power plants to lower their greenhouse gas emissions. Jim West / UCG / Universal Images Group via Getty Images

Ann Carlson, an environmental law professor at UCLA Law, said the court’s decisions affecting funding and personnel have “giant implications.” They raise “huge questions about the balance between the executive branch and Congress, and the executive branch’s ability and authority to simply ignore what Congress has appropriated.”

Kirti Datla, director of strategic legal advocacy for the nonprofit Earthjustice, said this term’s Supreme Court decisions have been “enabling” the Trump administration in its attempts to shrink the size of the government and eliminate institutional expertise. “It’s hard to quantify, but it’s impossible to deny.”

Although the justices didn’t release any landmark environmental decisions this term, the court took up multiple “unusual cases” that showed its continued interest in environmental statutes and administrative actions, according to Datla. For example, in Ohio v. EPA the court decided not to temporarily block an EPA policy requiring power plants to lower their greenhouse gas emissions, and in Diamond Alternative Energy LLC v. EPA it decided to allow oil company plaintiffs to sue the EPA for having allowed California to set its own stricter auto emissions standards than the federal government’s.

The Ohio case was “just a regular decision,” Datla said — ”getting deep into the weeds of the record and ultimately disagreeing with what a lower court had done, which is not usually how the Supreme Court spends its time.” Neither case changed existing law or resulted in a big-picture pronouncement about how to apply or interpret the law. And the Diamond case may become irrelevant anyway, since the Senate recently voted — controversially — to use the Congressional Review Act to revoke California’s auto emissions waiver

Other notable decisions from the Supreme Court’s term included Seven County Infrastructure Coalition v. Eagle County, which limited the scope of environmental reviews required under the National Environmental Policy Act, or NEPA. The court essentially said that such reviews don’t have to look at upstream consequences of a given project — such as oil drilling and refining, for projects like railroads that are only directly associated with transporting these fuels — and that courts should defer to federal agencies when deciding what to include in environmental impact statements.

City and County of San Francisco v. EPA found that some of the EPA’s pollution permits under the Clean Water Act are unenforceable unless the EPA writes out specific steps that water management agencies should take to comply with them. But Datla said this was a “quite narrow case” whose national implications are unclear.

The justices have not yet added any explicitly climate- and environment-related cases to their docket for its next session. But Parenteau, the emeritus professor at the Vermont Law and Graduate School, said he’s nervous that the court will take up a challenge to Friends of the Earth v. Laidlaw Environmental Services, Inc. That decision from 2000 said residents of South Carolina had legal standing to sue an industrial polluter, even without proving they had been harmed in a particular way. They just had to show that the pollution had impacted the “aesthetic and recreational values” of the river they liked to swim in. Overturning the case could make it more difficult for environmental advocates to file similar lawsuits. “The Laidlaw case has me very worried,” Parenteau said.

For Carlson, the UCLA Law professor, a longer-term worry is that the court’s conservative supermajority will eventually overturn the “endangerment finding,” a precedent set in 2009 saying that carbon dioxide and several other greenhouse gases are pollutants that can be regulated by the EPA. “It’s going to get challenged, and it will get challenged up to the Supreme Court,” Carlson said.

Overall, the outlook isn’t good. The executive branch and the Supreme Court “are exhibiting extraordinary hostility to actions on climate change at a time when the planet is burning,” she said. “It’s a pretty depressing story overall.”

Editor’s note: Earthjustice is an advertiser with Grist. Advertisers have no role in Grist’s editorial decisions.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The Supreme Court just ended its term. Here are the decisions that will affect climate policy. on Jul 1, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Joseph Winters.

]]>
https://grist.org/justice/supreme-court-term-climate-decisions-trump-workforce/feed/ 0 542283
Keep Them On The Shelf https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/keep-them-on-the-shelf/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/keep-them-on-the-shelf/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 20:38:05 +0000 https://progressive.org/latest/keep-them-on-the-shelf-bader-20250701/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Eleanor J. Bader.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/keep-them-on-the-shelf/feed/ 0 542295
‘Kill the bill before it kills us all’: Protesters put their bodies on the line to stop Trump’s ‘Big Disastrous Betrayal Bill’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/kill-the-bill-before-it-kills-us-all-protesters-put-their-bodies-on-the-line-to-stop-trumps-big-disastrous-betrayal-bill/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/kill-the-bill-before-it-kills-us-all-protesters-put-their-bodies-on-the-line-to-stop-trumps-big-disastrous-betrayal-bill/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 20:30:41 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335152 U.S. Capitol Police arrest protesting members of American Disabled for Attendant Programs Today (ADAPT) in the atrium of the Hart Senate Office Building on Tuesday, June 24, 2025. Bill Clark/CQ-Roll Call, Inc via Getty Images“I personally feel in such a desperate state about all of this that I said, ‘I don't care if I get arrested.’ I mean, what else are we going to do?”]]> U.S. Capitol Police arrest protesting members of American Disabled for Attendant Programs Today (ADAPT) in the atrium of the Hart Senate Office Building on Tuesday, June 24, 2025. Bill Clark/CQ-Roll Call, Inc via Getty Images

Dozens of peaceful protesters, including disabled people in wheelchairs, were arrested last Wednesday in Washington, DC, while protesting President Trump’s massive spending and tax bill, which will dramatically slash taxes, restructure the student loan and debt system, and make devastating cuts to vital, popular programs like Medicaid and the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP). With Vice President JD Vance casting the tie-breaking vote, Senate Republicans voted Tuesday to advance Donald Trump’s so-called One Big Beautiful Bill, which will now go back to the House of Representatives for final approval. In this urgent episode of Working People, we speak with Lorraine Chavez and Chrstine Rodriguez, who were among the dozens arrested for their peaceful act of civil disobedience on June 25, about what’s in this bill, what it will mean for working people, and how working people are fighting back

Guests:

  • Lorraine Chavez is an educator, researcher, and community leader based in Chicago. She is also a student debtor and traveled to the Washington DC protest with the Debt Collective.
  • Chrstine Rodriguez is a legal assistant and student debtor from Pasadena, California, who also traveled to the Washington DC protest with the Debt Collective.

Additional links/info:

Featured Music:

  • Jules Taylor, “Working People” Theme Song

Credits:
Audio Post-Production: Jules Taylor

Transcript

The following is a rushed transcript and may contain errors. A proofread version will be made available as soon as possible.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Alright. Welcome everyone to Working People, a podcast about the lives, jobs, dreams, and struggles of the working class today. Working People is a proud member of the Labor Radio Podcast Network and is brought to you in partnership within these Times Magazine and the Real News Network. This show is produced by Jules Taylor and made possible by the support of listeners like you. My name is Maximillian Alvarez and today we are talking about the fight that is playing out right now in Washington DC over President Donald Trump’s giant spending and tax Bill Senate. Republicans voted this weekend to advance the so-called one big beautiful bill, which will now go back to the House of Representatives. And Trump has publicly demanded and pushed that his party get the bill on his desk to sign by July 4th. Although Trump has since retracted a bit and said it’s not a hard and fast thing, but clearly that’s what he’s pushing for.

Now, you may have seen videos from this past week of peaceful protestors, including people in wheelchairs getting zip tied, arrested, protesting this very bill. As Brett Wilkins reports in common dreams, dozens of peaceful protestors, including people in wheelchairs were arrested inside a US Senate building in Washington, DC on Wednesday, June 25th while protesting Republicans propose cuts to Medicaid spending in the budget reconciliation package facing votes on Capitol Hill in the coming days, the group popular Democracy in Action said that today over 60 people were arrested in the Russell Senate Building rotunda in a powerful act of nonviolent civil disobedience against cuts to essential social programs like Medicaid and the Supplemental Nutritional Assistance Program or SNAP protesters were zip tied and dragged from the building by police. After demonstrators unfurled three large banners inside the rotunda with messages calling on lawmakers to protect Medicaid and other essential social programs.

One of the banners read quote, Senate Republicans Don’t Kill Us, save Medicaid, the so-called one big beautiful Bill Act being pushed by US. President Donald Trump would slash federal Medicaid spending by billions of dollars introduce work requirements for recipients and impose other conditions that critics say would result in millions of vulnerable people losing their coverage in order to pay for a massive tax cut that would disproportionately benefit wealthy households and corporations. In addition to popular democracy in action groups, including the Service employees, international Union, planned Parenthood, Federation of America, the Debt Collective Standup Alaska Action, North Carolina, Arkansas Community Organizations and American Disabled for Attendant Programs today, or Adapt took part in Wednesday’s protest, which followed similar past actions in defense of Medicaid. Now, as Brett mentioned in that article, these massive cuts to vital and popular public programs like Medicaid are part of a massive systematic overhaul that would overwhelmingly place the burden and the cost of everything on poor and working people to pay for Trump’s massive increases to war in border spending, and to make his giant tax cuts for corporations and the rich from 2017 permanent.

The bill also includes restructuring of the student loan and debt system, imposing much harsher repayment plans on debtors and among other things, it also includes a provision that bars states from imposing any new regulations on artificial intelligence or AI over the next 10 years. So here to talk with us on the show today about what is in this bill, what it will mean for working people, and what working people are doing to fight back before it’s too late are two guests who were there at the Capitol last Wednesday and who were among the dozens arrested for their peaceful act of civil disobedience. As I understand it, they were even sharing a police van together at one point. Lorraine Chavez is an educator, researcher and community leader based in Chicago. She is also herself a student debtor like me, and frankly most people I know. Christine Rodriguez is a legal assistant and student debtor herself from Pasadena, California.

Both Lorraine and Christine came to DC with the Debt Collective, a Union of Debtors, and they join us here today. Thank you both so much for coming on the show today, especially after the week that you have had. I really, really appreciate it. And with all of that context upfront that I just gave for listeners, Lorraine, I wanted to toss it to you. And then Christine, please hop in. Can we start with the action on Wednesday? Like what brought you to dc? What happened over the course of the day? Talk us through it. Give us an on the ground view.

Lorraine Chavez:

Well, I wanted to thank you, first of all for reporting on this very important effort and this protest that we did in dc. I also really want to thank the Debt Collective for all of its amazing work over the years, and I follow them to eliminate all kinds of debt, medical debt, student debt, and to advocate for a jubilee of debt, which I fully support. I came to DC having followed the collective for a number of years, and I came because I personally have student loan debt that I have no capacity to pay. And I also came because of what happened to me with Wells Fargo trying to basically steal my house under the hemp program. That was part of the Obama administration actually, and I was able to refinance my debt after an eight year struggle of Wells Fargo trying to steal my home.

But in my late fifties, 60 years old, I have a new mortgage. It is 2%, which is what we worked out in federal court, but I still have a federal, I have student loan debt with no capacity to pay that. I am a single mother. I put my two kids who are twins both 33 through college, and they did not receive any financial assistance at all from their college professor, father. So it was all on me. So I have no capacity to pay back my own debt, and I know others have all kinds of medical debt. I know there are all kinds of cutbacks coming to the disabled community of which I had been a part of and an advocate for in Chicago. So I didn’t mind getting arrested. I was really thrilled to be with all these other advocates from all over the country.

Christine Rodriguez:

Hello, I’m Christine Rodriguez. Shout out to all the Real News Network listeners out there. My name is Christine, I live in Pasadena. I went to advocate for student loan forgiveness. I graduated from UCLA School of law with the Master’s of Legal Studies last year. And so through me wanting to get a better education, which is a lot of people’s American dream is to, and honestly as our reality is getting a college education and higher education such as a master’s is really the only way to escape poverty for most working class people with a working class background. So I got my Master’s of legal studies from UCLA School of Law, and that ranked up a lot of student debt for me. I have a lot of student debt. I’m about a hundred thousand dollars plus in student debt because of wanting to get a master’s degree. I also still have some student let leftover from when I did my undergrad because I went to Portland State University to get more involved and kind of political activism.

That was a political activist kind of playground at the time right when Trump got elected. So through my undergrad, through my master’s, through wanting to get a better education, I have now indebted myself to student loan debts debt. I am really banking on student loan forgiveness. That’s in some way either a huge student loan debt off my back completely, that is the goal, but some sort of repayment plan that I could pay off my original student payment plan was way above what I could afford monthly. And I’m in the process of trying to see through the public service loan forgiveness program if working at a nonprofit, if that can provide me any kind of loan forgiveness. However, the big disastrous bill that Trump wants to pass, it really intertwines with all of those things that I’ve gone through. Student loan forgiveness, really taking away opportunities for people to have some part of their loan forgiven, but it also infects people in the future who want to get an education and try to get out of poverty.

Increasing the limits of Pell Grants, which Pell Grants definitely helped me when I was in my undergrad to pay for school, make it affordable for me to go to school and still provide me with some extra funding so that I could survive throughout my educational time. In addition, the PSL Forgiveness program for people who work at nonprofits, being able to give you a more affordable student loan forgiveness plan that is also at stake here for any nonprofit in this big disastrous betrayal bill. That’s what we called it, big disastrous Betrayal bill. So all these things that are just interconnected. And then on top of this, all these tax cuts are going to basically allocate for funding for increased military defense, which I live near Los Angeles. I’ve definitely seen a lot heavier military presence along with their police, but specifically federal military, the Marines coming into Los Angeles, all these tax cuts, that’s just where our money is going to go to armed people who want to just lock us up and silence us. So it was given the wonderful opportunity through the debt collective to travel all the way from West coast to very hot and humid Washington dc And I jumped on that opportunity and I’m really glad that I did because now I get to share my story here.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Oh yeah. And again, we appreciate y’all coming on so much and sharing your stories with us, and I have so many questions that I want to follow up on. But I also wanted for listener’s sake just to also add to some of that incredible context that Christine was giving us, and we’ll link to this piece in the show notes along with other resources so that you can dig into what’s in this bill yourself. But this is from Robert Farrington written in Forbes. Just a quick summation that among the key components in this one big beautiful bill that have to do with student loans and student debt, Robert writes quote, for new borrowers who take out student loans after July 1st, 2026, they will only have two options, a new standard plan or an income driven repayment plan called the repayment assistance plan or wrap. Furthermore, new borrowers will face lower student loan borrowing limits and changes to loan types for existing borrowers.

There will be no immediate changes, but between July, 2026 and July, 2028, the income contingent repayment plans, the ICR Pay and Save will be eliminated and borrowers will have to migrate to a modified version of income-based repayment. These changes will have a dramatic effect on both how families pay for college as well as how they repay their existing student loan obligations. So yeah, basically they’re going to be pushing all of us into, I think it’s around 15% income based of your income and that you can maybe get it forgiven after 25 years, I believe is the most recent version that I’ve read. That may change by the time this episode comes out. We will keep you posted for sure, but I wanted to go back around the table and ask Lorraine and Christine if you could, so that first round gave us a real good sense of all the things that brought you out to dc, all these real issues that you I and so many people we know are dealing with on a day-to-day basis that are going to get even harder with the passage of this bill.

So take us to the action itself. Can you tell us more about who was there, the different groups, the different people, like the stories that you were hearing from people who have different concerns about what’s in this bill, but you guys were all physically there sharing that space as a group of shared interests, right? So I want to ask if we could give our listeners more of a sense of what those interests were and who the people were there. Tell us what happened with the protest itself and what led to you both getting arrested among with dozens of others.

Lorraine Chavez:

Well, I’ve been following the debt collective and I was really impressed and amazed at how well everything was organized and how there were people of all ages, all ethnicities, all backgrounds, going through the training together at the Lutheran Church. And it just speaks to the crisis that we have around all debt on all levels and these really horrific policies that are about to or will be passed. And some of the banners that people had, which I fully support, said that people are going to die if these policies are put in place. How are Medicaid recipients going to get medical care? I know that in Chicago we have this incredible resource, which is the Cook County Medical System, and over the years, people with no health insurance have been able to just go there and get treatment. And I had a friend had a broken leg, she had no health insurance, so she was able to be treated, but I’m not sure if these cuts are also going to affect that incredible resource that we have.

I have friends that have come from out of country for emergency operations to Cook County healthcare. So I have no doubt that many people will die as a result of these cutbacks. And we already have in the United States, amongst all of the advanced industrial countries, we have the highest mortality rate. There’s something like 46, 45 advanced industrial countries that have much better longevity rates than we do. So we are in a deep, profound crisis of health in the country, and these cutbacks will drastically increase the death rate of millions of Americans who will be denied access to healthcare.

Maximillian Alvarez:

And what was it? Was this your first time getting arrested? What was it like being there with folks protesting this and then getting arrested for it for your civil disobedience?

Lorraine Chavez:

Well, I personally feel in such kind of a desperate state about all of this that I said, I don’t care if I get arrested. I mean, what else are we going to do? But unfortunately put our bodies on the line. I don’t know. Of course, I’ve written 500 emails to my representatives. I’ve been an advocate myself for the fight for 15 in 2013, marching on the streets of Chicago for blocks and blocks. So I’ve done this before, but I just feel this incredible feeling of desperation right now. And I know there are some Americans if they can afford to, they’re leaving the country because of these attacks on their lives. And so I was happy to stand up with the debt collective.

Christine Rodriguez:

So reflecting back on that whole day, three words come to mind, which is coordinated. This was all very coordinated, planned out game plan down. And then not only us, but it was organized. And when I say organized, it wasn’t just the debt collective, it was Ace, our people who are really advocating for the disabled community. It was the folks from Arkansas’s and met a lot of people from Arkansas’s who are fighting Medicaid and came all the way down to DC so they could advocate to keep their Medicaid intact. There was an artist group, their name leaves my memory right now, but there was a group of, there were mostly younger folks, so that was the young crowd. The artist folks came in to help us. I met some legal observer folks from Washington dc but this organization of not just one organization of the Debt Collective, but a whole coalition of folks who came to focus on their own issues.

I came with the Debt Collective. I feel like we were really holding down the student loan forgiveness advocacy. I came for the Debt Collective, but at our meetup and our training for the day, right in the morning, we’re ready for training. It’s 9:00 AM. Let’s figure out our game plan. Let’s act it out. Let’s have a dress rehearsal. You’re on this team, you’re going to get arrested. Okay, arrest team, you folks go on that side. This is all, it was a coordinated arrest and it was calculated in a way of they gave us the money for our bail because they had done this so many times that they know the system. We say arrest is really, it’s a dramatic citation is what happened because they let us go for $50. We could have done that from the beginning outside of the state building, get all, but again, it was just like a whole very dramatic citation.

But again, it’s why does this need to be so dramatic of us advocating our First Amendment rights to express how much we don’t want the government to go through with this big disastrous plan. So again, it’s organized. And then the last one was, it was very supportive as well. So again, we have this team that’s organized and throughout the whole time, again, we were team getting arrested. This was coordinated. But we also have team of people who are not getting arrested who are outside or still with us throughout this time. They’re following us or they’re outside of the Senate building. When we get arrested, video recording, just kind of seeing, those are a support team. They’re following us in the, I don’t say paddy wagon because paddy wagon sounds really cutesy and it’s a jail transport shelter. I don’t know. I felt like a shelter dog in that van because it’s not just a regular van where you sit down, there’s actually in that space you’re able to jam packed three. There was three people with you, Lorraine, or just one,

Lorraine Chavez:

Three on one side and three on the other.

Christine Rodriguez:

Okay, six. And then there was me and just one girl. And so about eight people. But the point is we are in our own small jail already in that van. It was dc. It’s super hot. I’m from Los Angeles, California. We have the sun, we have fun, we have breeze. But in DC at that time, it was hot, it was humid, it was an unbearable heat. And so all this is going on our coordinated efforts, but throughout this, we’re feeling supported. They’re following us on the way to the process center. When we’re at stoplights, I could see folks from our supportive team just kind of on the sidewalk watching. And then when we get out, finally after I think we get arrested, maybe at one I’m assuming, and I get processed. I’m the third to the last person to get processed. I get out around six 30 and then once I get out, I see my folks at the end of right across the street, they have pizza for us.

They’re clapping, and they had my stuff at the end of the day. So this whole support throughout the day, they paid for a lunch. But yeah, those are three things I’m going to kind of show how that kind of emulates throughout the day. So as I mentioned, we had our training in the beginning we had our team split up, are you going to get arrested? Are you not? We did our dress rehearsal. And then from there, as a team, we all walk over before this as well. We all go around. There’s about maybe 75 of us in a big space under just coordinating our day. And we all go around the room and we introduce ourselves, who we’re coming with and then why we’re here. And then throughout that process, I came in for student loan forgiveness. But just in that introduction round, I had now become a part of other folks who were fighting for Medicaid, fighting to reduce, to not cut the spending for the SNAP program or for the food stamp program.

I was coming in for folks who also were student debtors, but also saw how this can impact just education in general. Eventually, we all walk over as a team to our, we have a hearing at the senate building and we have a packed house and people, the floors are filled, people are standing along the perimeter, they’re making seats where they can, we have cameras every, and then we see more people come in, more people from other organizations. Planned Parenthood was there. They had thought their pretty early, they had a seats kind of set in place. So not only did this also become about Medicaid and snap, but it was also now about reproductive healthcare because now we have those folks on our side. And I met a group of elderly, I call them RAs ladies who just speak Spanish, but they give very TIA vibes.

They were from New Jersey and they came out to support at the press conference. And so our press conference was really just a big rally, I would say, in the Senate building of people giving speeches and giving chance, and really a moment of solidarity for each kind of organization that came to express why we were there, why we were fighting. And so that was a beautiful event. We had dinner at the Senate, we had lunch at the Senate building, and then we wake our way to the rotunda where we’re ready to have our action. And when we get to the rotunda area, there’s already a lot of police presence there. I guess they got word because there’s so many of us at the hearing, they even kind of tried to tell us like, you guys cannot woo you guys. You guys can’t chant. You can’t be too loud.

You could only clap. So kind of in that moment at the press hearing, we could already see they’re trying to keep us quiet in a sense because we were being too loud with our chance and we were giving too many woos once we would say cut the bill. So I think through that, we got our presence known, and so people were already very heavily geared and the Capitol police were really almost waiting for us at the rotunda, definitely at the second floor where we wanted to do our banner drop at the rotunda. There’s a top, and we wanted to drop our banners from the top one. We had two banner teams. Teams, Lorraine and I were on banner team number one. Banner team number two actually had their banner snatched from them pretty early on, so I don’t even think they got to the second floor, but we still had ours.

And so we walked to the rotunda at the second floor just trying to scope out the location. Turns out that location is used for media. That’s where a lot of media press will hold their cameras. And yet it was really packed in there in that very, very small rotunda walkway. Second floor. There’s just wires everywhere, like cameras. And so we are just kind of walking being like, oh, well, so beautiful. Let me take a picture. Let’s take some group pictures. And already police are approaching us and telling us we cannot be in that space because it’s for media, which is like, yes, that’s true, but I didn’t see any signs that said that we couldn’t be there or this is still a public walkway. If anything, this media is really causing a fire hazard perhaps with all their media in that very small space. So we left.

So we kind of had to think of a plan B because that is where we wanted to drop our banner. And so we just decided we have our banner at the time, we could already hear that the demonstration was going on as we’re trying to drop our banner, we could already kind of hear that the plan of people are going to have a din at the bottom. They’re going to have a banner over us. And I think from the videos that I’ve seen already, when people were lying on the floor, banners were being taken away and people were already getting arrested just from, they could see their association with the din. So people were just getting arrested. And at that time, I think we just decided to drop our banner from a staircase from the third floor of a staircase, which went really well because you could see our banner, but immediately our banner gets snatched.

We all raise our hands, and at that time, they actually don’t arrest us. They let us walk away, but we were really eager to grab our banner, which they did, and we walked away and we’re about to take the elevator to go down to see what’s going on at the bottom floor. And with the elevator door opens, it’s already people arrested and cops in the elevator. I guess we can’t use this because our comrades, we got arrested or there’s no more space for us. So we decided to walk to another stairway to exit. I believe we were chanting at the time, we’re probably doing some chants regarding no, don’t cut Medicaid kind of thing. And we see the police already blocking us saying that we can’t go down, but chanting, we’re chanting, they’re blocking us. It’s like, okay, I want to exit the building. And then we’re still chanting, and then it goes from, we cannot go down to them kind of enclosing us in the staircase and then making the decision of, okay, now we’re going to get arrested.

And so they zip tie us. It was me and my buddy for the day. His name was Talon. Talen was a very young, 20-year-old, was very nervous. The day of, we kind of bonded because I could tell he was nervous about the arrest and I kind of gave him an explanation. It’s like I kept saying, coordinated, this is planned. It really just sounds like a very dramatic citation. It’s not going to go on our record, but we just got to, I dunno, go through the motions of getting arrested. They’re going to make it really, really dramatic, which they definitely did. But in the end, it was really just so they could get 50 bucks out of us and make a show out of expressing our first amendment rights. But we get arrested. Me talin, I don’t know, were you there with me on that kind of group as well, Lorraine?

Lorraine Chavez:

I was on the staircase I think with you.

And so as a group, we traveled together. We were also with the Center for Popular Democracy. I should point that out. They were a huge organization with us. And I just wanted to add too that the police were swarming over the place. We were a peaceful group of demonstrators, totally peaceful, exercising our first amendment rights, and even within the holding center where we were, no air conditioning, it looked like a gigantic empty garage. There were fans, but it was excruciatingly hot the whole time. And I counted how many police men and women. There were about 30 of us there, and there were about 25 policemen and women. I mean, it was absurd. And to see dozens and dozens and dozens of police, men and women swarming the Senate building as well, there must’ve been a police man or woman for every single one of us that was there.

It was ridiculous, quite frankly, and also terrifying because we were just there exercising our First Amendment rights about issues that impact all of us. And there was an enormous crowd, enormous group of protestors in wheelchairs and amongst the disabled, and they tried to, I am not sure what I saw, but their hands were tied in front or in back of them. It was a really dangerous situation. I actually had bruises on my wrist until the next day because of the plastic ties were just gripped around my wrist. And I wasn’t even allowed really to drink water. I mean, it was a dangerous situation given the heat and given the fact there was no air conditioning virtually in the police fans, there was no air conditioning at all in the holding center. And here we were simply exercising our first amendment rights for free speech and to protest, which we are allowed to do under the Constitution. So it was really terrifying, honestly, to observe all of that going on around us.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Yeah, I mean, as someone who has covered demonstrations like this and seen just time and time again, how imposing the police are, how brutal the police are, how often officers seem to delight in the pain that they can inflict on people. I’ve seen this firsthand many times. You guys experienced it. I mean, Christine, you mentioned what we’re watching happening in Southern California right now, which that was what our last episode was on talking to folks about the brutality of these ice raids, the brutality and violation of people’s rights with the ways that the police are cracking down on protestors who are trying to say the ice raids are trying to stop them or saying, Hey, it’s wrong for mass armed agents of the state to be ripping people out of their homes, out of their cars and disappearing them and kidnapping them off the street in broad daylight. People who were protesting that are getting beaten, journalists covering that are getting shot in the head with not non-lethal rounds. These are all things we talked about in our last episode, and I’m bringing those threads together because I kind of want to end there in this last round. I know I got to let you both go in a minute, but Christine, you actually made this connection earlier, right?

This bill as the sort of entire package that’s meant to support and provide the funding and taxation for Trump’s agenda in his second administration. So it includes all these different kind of wishlist, grab bag, smash and grab type policies that you can’t help but look at you as part of. They’re not disconnected, right? So what this is going to mean for all of us as student debtors is directly connected to the fact that the very same bill that we’re talking about here is going to provide billions of dollars to hire 10,000 more ICE employees, which would boost the agency’s ranks by like 50%, right? And again, these are the people who are terrorizing the families of immigrants and people who look like me and our families in the places where our families live. There’s a poor man in Santa Ana who was tackled, beaten on camera.

He’s lived here for over 30 years. All three of his kids served in the military. He got beaten and arrested by ice in the same place where my dad walks. I’m terrified about all of this stuff, and I don’t want to belabor the point. The whole point is just that the increase in border militarization in ice, and at the same time that Medicaid and SNAP are being cut, student loan payments are being restructured. I wanted to end with you all kind of tying that together for us. I mean, again, how is this bill going to impact you personally as a student debtor, but also what does it mean to you to see that your future as a student debtor is going to be made more difficult to pay for things like more ice to terrorize our communities and bigger tax cuts for the rich?

Lorraine Chavez:

Well, I need to say that I’ve been a part of the immigration rights movement for decades. And being in Chicago, we are very fortunate to have a governor, governor Pritzker and a mayor, mayor Brandon Johnson, who has declared that they are going to maintain Chicago as a sanctuary city. But I just recently showed up at an arrest, which people are being asked to do in Chicago, to be a witness to arrests of immigrants and to guarantee that they’re not held at some unknown location or just spirited out of the city to some other place. And we just recently in Chicago had a huge immigrant rights mobilization in March. So all of these things are deeply connected. Absolutely. I just wanted to say, yeah, I’m grateful to be in Chicago and Illinois, but I was recently speaking to a woman who works for the city and who is Mexican, and she says, wow, we’re just a haven, a little oasis surrounded by states and leadership in these states in the Midwest that are fully on board with the Trump plan and administration and all of these ways.

But it doesn’t make us as individuals immune from the impact like in the disability community. For example, my niece works in southern Illinois with the disabled community, and one of her jobs was to go around and visit every single home of families of individuals who are receiving money from the government because they are severely disabled. And they started crying after she was visit, they said, well, our $2,000 is being taken away. And finally she was so upset. She said, well, what did you think was going to happen? Right? What did you think was going to happen by your vote? Because all of southern Illinois voted for Trump, not really the cities in Illinois, but definitely southern Illinois, like Charleston. And they said, well, we didn’t know. We just thought that immigrants are taking our jobs. And so we wanted to be protected from that by voting for him.

It’s such also a lack of education because the birth rate has collapsed in the United States. There are no workers who will be able to replenish the US labor force if there are not immigrants. The US birthright collapsed before COVID, so Americans are not having any children at all. So where do we think even imagine the future labor force is going to come from? And we’ve also seen in Illinois too, just recently in the last six to three months or so, we’ve seen about I think like 40,000 new immigrants. So we are a state that is in deep crisis where there’s a massive net out migration because of the jobs crisis here, no jobs. But because of I think Governor Pritzker and governor and Mayor Brandon Johnson’s stance to protecting immigrants, just in the last six months we’ve had, I think about 40,000 Latinos entered the state probably for protection, I’m guessing from what’s going on. So this is a dire crisis on all levels, certainly for immigrants who are being rounded up and deported who’ve been here for decades. And those of us who will not be able to pay our student loans, those of us who will not be able, who are in deep medical crisis and will not have medical care, and I do believe that that is part of the Trump agenda. They don’t care if people die. I mean, there’s a word for it. It’s called macropolitics. And I think that’s exactly the world that we’re in right now.

Christine Rodriguez:

My name is Christine Rodriguez and let the record show that I do not want my student loan forgiveness money to be funding ice. I think about that a lot as ice raids are increasing. I think that was my line when I was introducing myself. I don’t want my student loan money to be funding the ice raids that are happening in my community. My community in Pasadena, just last week, two weeks ago, we experienced two raids within a week, and these raids were within walking distance of my apartment. This happening right in my backyard. And yeah, it’s something that is completely unnecessary, especially when America is stolen land. How can you be illegal on stolen land? How can we arrest Mexicanos when this was Mexico at one point? It’s just a huge waste of money I feel. And this big disastrous bill wants to add more money to that to have more guns, more power, more AI tools to just install violence in our community and to install fear into those who are the most vulnerable.

Yeah, that’s what I think about a lot. And that was a big reason why I wanted to be a part of this action because this bill wants to take away funding for medical services for the poorest and for the most vulnerable and allocate that money to companies who are extremely wealthy already and are just going to get more wealthy and probably more power and more influence on the federal government. And yeah, I think about that a lot. And that’s something that me as an individual, I could choose not to rent hotels from the Marriott, from the Hilton as a way to divest because they’re letting ice agents stay in their hotels. But what can I do when my wages start to get garnished because I don’t want to, or I can’t pay my student loans. My wages will be garnished and that money will still be going to fund bullets and gas for ice agents to continue doing this atrocious work that they’re doing in our communities.

And as we saw with our action that we did earlier this week, there’s a lot of people who are going to suffer if these funding cuts happen. Unfortunately, it’s the opposite. That’s what should be happening. We should be giving more money to Medicaid. We should be giving more money to food stamps. People are barely getting by and this is their one lifeline that could be cut and they’re going to have a lot of suffering. And unfortunately, they’re going to have to maybe do things in their life that they weren’t proud of in order to make and survive because the help that they were receiving would go away. That’s a really big general statement, but when people are desperate to survive, they will do desperate measures and what will happen, the police force that has a lot more money, they’re going to intervene in some way, whether it be disabled, folks in wheelchairs advocating for their rights, they’re going to be easily arrested because they just have the power and the money to do that.

And so it’s a scary place that we’re in, but there’s so many days that we have left to make a change. Every day is a new opportunity to connect with other folks and to get creative in ways that we want to disrupt the system because they truly believe that what is going is wrong and it can’t sustain itself for that long. There’s been a lot of evil things that have happened systematically here in the US and abroad things, and they don’t last for long. Eventually everybody gets sick of it. Even the people in power start to realize maybe they weren’t getting the best end of the deal. And so Trump will gain a lot of, what’s the word I’m looking for? A lot of enemies just from his own selfish acts. Even the, I noticed that the officers that arrest us, a lot of them were new, A lot of them were getting on the spot training.

They had to fill out a form and I could literally see the top officer being like, this is where you sign the paper and you should really check that they have their names here and make sure. So it’s a lot of high turnover from the police force, I’m assuming, because all the stress, they get paid really well is what I’m hearing. But just the amount of stress and what they have to go through on it every day, how does it feel to be a young man to arrest a little old lady who’s protesting for Medicaid that probably doesn’t sit right. That’s going to cause a lot of stress into somebody’s lives. And I think eventually everybody’s going to get sick of the norm and we’re going to have to get a little bit uncomfortable at some times. We’re going to have to get arrested and be in the back of a very hot van, but everyday actions that we can do can really help to pick at a very already weak system. It just takes a lot of collective effort and energy and a lot of your time and effort to make sure you see the change that you want to have in the future.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Well, and in that vein, if I can just throw one more question at you both in the last minute that I got you here, what’s your message to folks out there listening about the different ways they can get involved, why they should get involved, even if they’re not able to make it out to DC and protest and get arrested, I guess, yeah, what do you want to leave folks with about how they can get involved and why they should?

Lorraine Chavez:

What I have personally been doing is attending a bunch of local meetings in Chicago organized coming out of this huge immigration rights meeting that we had in Chicago locally. So we are trying to kind of move forward after that immigrant rights meeting to be coherent as a group and to remain somewhat organized. We had a huge immigration rights march in 2006 and I attended that. And what some of the feedback that we’ve been discussing is that we did not continue to organize as a collective following that ginormous march. I mean, hundreds of thousands of people came to Chicago until the George Floyd rally, the George Floyd murder marches. I think it might’ve been one of the largest marches in US history. So I’m personally committed to doing that moving forward. I am also personally committed to trying to work on the whole question of student debt relief and to work with a contingent of debt collective folks in Chicago who are meeting here in July to try and organize about that.

I should say that the reason I have my student loan debt to such a huge degree is that I am all but doctorate from University of Chicago for my dissertation. And my dissertation was on the entire. I argued that immigration, politics and policies in the United States, as has happened in France, would lead to the breakdown of the political party system and my first advisor, these are all famous people, professor Gary Orfield said to me who I had done a lot of research for building up to him being my dissertation advisor, he said that immigration would never be a major issue in the United States. Then I followed with Professor Michael Dawson, who had no time for me as his career blew up, and he went off to Harvard and Professor Saskia Sasson, supposedly a scholar on immigration, but she said that she just didn’t understand how political parties would make policy and implement them.

So I really tried for something like 10 or 15 years and at that time the fellowships, so I had maximum fellowships, but they never paid more than 10,000, $8,000 a year. And I was raised by a single mother. All of my colleagues from the University of Chicago that I know had parental help, family help everything else to finish their doctorates, something that I did not have. So I am hopeful based on what I see in Chicago and with all of the immigrant rights groups, organizing the Invisible Institute, and of course I’m going to maintain contact primarily with the debt collective here in Chicago as well.

Christine Rodriguez:

So I would recommend three things if somebody wants to get involved. Are you tired of seeing the system fall in front of you? Are you tired of seeing injustice? Step number one, talk to your neighbors. I always say start local and I think an easy way is just talk to your neighbors, especially if you live in a very now predominant immigrant community. We have to watch out for each other because we’re seeing that the police are not going to intervene and help us when there’s ice rates going on. They’re just going to be backup security, and so we need to check on each other. If you go to a spot for me, my local CBS, there’s always some guy selling fruit there, and so I made friends with him. And so it’s more than just talking, but it’s like getting their name, getting their information, an emergency contact number.

If you ever see anything of an ice raid or just kind of danger going on, you can be able to either check in on that person or let somebody who knows them know what’s going on. And also just if you live in an apartment complex, definitely be talking to your neighbors at this point because we want to make sure that we’re communicating with each other because especially if you live in an apartment complex or kind of like a quiet neighborhood, it could be very, very, we don’t talk to each other, but then there’s also things that we always notice. Have you noticed that there’s a lot of police presence going on in the neighborhood? Did you hear about the ice raid that happened down the street? Right. We have to be our own kind of networks, and a lot of that takes just talking to strangers, but neighbors, but also strangers.

Lorraine was a stranger a week ago, and now we’re buddies for life because we had this amazing experience. I feel like, especially in Los Angeles. For me, I’m taught miha, talk to strangers, there’s weirdos out there, blah, blah, blah. And I grew up very guarded and it took me doing education in Portland, Oregon specifically where Portland’s weird and everybody talks to each other just because that I got to learn how to really just talk to strangers again, when I’m going to places, my local market, there’s a lot of people there that I talk to now and just getting information like, Hey, I haven’t seen this guy. Have you heard anything? Have you seen him? Oh, okay, he’s staying home. Okay, that’s good as long as they’re home. Yeah, really talking to strangers who are in the same kind of sphere as you. And what I see you say about that is if you go to an event, if you go to a march, don’t be in your own bubble.

It’s really easy to just stay with your group of friends. I hope your group of friends are really your people, but we also have to mingle with other folks and build connections so that when we run into them another time, we have already had that bond. But also they can let us know about what’s going on in their bubble in their community. So I do encourage people to talk to strangers, maybe don’t go in their van the first time, but definitely talk to strangers and once you kind of see what they’re about, you start to build a network outside and make your network bigger and then collaborate with folks. And then the last thing I would do is definitely be involved in your local politics. If you live in a city, if you live in an unincorporated area, if there’s some sort of city council, if there’s some sort of town hall that you could just sit in, I will preface, it gets really boring sometimes, but sometimes there’s a lot of drama that we miss because maybe we were at home watching TV or watching a reality show.

The real reality show is at your city council meeting, there’s drama there and they’re making big decisions sometimes that you’re like, oh, I didn’t know they were going to install surveillance on the main street. Why didn’t they tell me this? Oh, there’s a lot of money going into the police. That’s interesting to know when we have schools that are being shut down in our community. So I’d say definitely visit your local city council, city town hall, any local thing, try to get tapped in because there’s a lot of information and drama there that’s not advertised and it could cause a little change in your community and it could really push you to be more involved. That definitely happened with me. I went to one city council meeting and I was like, oh, there’s so much going on. And now I’m pretty involved in my local community.

So talk to your neighbors, talk to strangers, get involved in any way. It doesn’t have to be that way, but I’m just saying find a center, find a community group that can connect you to even more things. We know things on our own, but when we get connected to spaces and to people, we get to know about flying out to DC to do a protest and maybe flying out to some other place. But yeah, definitely mingle and get connected with folks and support people on their journey and in the return they’ll support you on your journey.

Maximillian Alvarez:

Alright, gang, that’s going to wrap things up for us this week. Once again, I want to thank our guests, Lorraine Chavez and Christine Rodriguez who were both arrested in Washington DC last week for participating in a peaceful protest against Trump’s so-called Big Beautiful Bill and the devastating impacts that it will have on poor and working people. And I want to thank you all for listening and I want to thank you for caring. We’ll see you all back here next week for another episode of Working People. And if you can’t wait that long, then go explore all the great work that we’re doing at The Real News Network where we do grassroots journalism that lifts up the voices and stories from the front lines of struggle. Sign up for the real new newsletter so you never miss a story and help us do more work like this by going to the real news.com/donate and becoming a supporter today. I promise you it really makes a difference. I’m Maximilian Alvarez, take care of yourselves. Take care of each other, solidarity forever.


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Maximillian Alvarez.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/kill-the-bill-before-it-kills-us-all-protesters-put-their-bodies-on-the-line-to-stop-trumps-big-disastrous-betrayal-bill/feed/ 0 542281
Iran, Zionism, and the Limits of US Control: An Interview with Faramarz Farbod https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/iran-zionism-and-the-limits-of-us-control-an-interview-with-faramarz-farbod/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/iran-zionism-and-the-limits-of-us-control-an-interview-with-faramarz-farbod/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 20:28:57 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159586

The post Iran, Zionism, and the Limits of US Control: An Interview with Faramarz Farbod first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Faramarz Farbod.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/iran-zionism-and-the-limits-of-us-control-an-interview-with-faramarz-farbod/feed/ 0 542292
Rural Communities Need the Community Schools Approach More Than Ever https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/rural-communities-need-the-community-schools-approach-more-than-ever/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/rural-communities-need-the-community-schools-approach-more-than-ever/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 20:10:09 +0000 https://progressive.org/public-schools-advocate/rural-communities-need-the-community-schools-approach-more-than-ever-bryant-20250701/
This content originally appeared on The Progressive — A voice for peace, social justice, and the common good and was authored by Jeff Bryant.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/rural-communities-need-the-community-schools-approach-more-than-ever/feed/ 0 542276
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 1, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-1-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-1-2025/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=dded745c444c8e37334b163b98d3d318 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – July 1, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-july-1-2025/feed/ 0 542342
Breaking: Popular cop watcher arrested for holding a sign—these words put him in jail https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/breaking-popular-cop-watcher-arrested-for-holding-a-sign-these-words-put-him-in-jail/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/breaking-popular-cop-watcher-arrested-for-holding-a-sign-these-words-put-him-in-jail/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 17:10:10 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=6a87d57433639aa67641a3cc621382ee
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/breaking-popular-cop-watcher-arrested-for-holding-a-sign-these-words-put-him-in-jail/feed/ 0 542256
Oxfam reaction to Spain, Brazil and South Africa launching a new coalition to tax the super-rich https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/oxfam-reaction-to-spain-brazil-and-south-africa-launching-a-new-coalition-to-tax-the-super-rich/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/oxfam-reaction-to-spain-brazil-and-south-africa-launching-a-new-coalition-to-tax-the-super-rich/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 15:45:04 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/oxfam-reaction-to-spain-brazil-and-south-africa-launching-a-new-coalition-to-tax-the-super-rich In response to Spain, Brazil and South Africa’s new global coalition to tax the super-rich, launched today at the Fourth Financing for Development Conference in Seville, Oxfam Tax Justice Policy Lead Susana Ruiz said:

"We welcome the leadership of Brazil, Spain and South Africa in calling for taxes on the super-rich. People around the world are pushing for more countries to reject the corrupting political influence of oligarchies. Taxation of the super-rich is a vital tool to secure sustainable development and fight inequalities. The wealth of the richest 1% has surged $33.9 trillion since 2015, enough to end annual poverty 22 times, yet billionaires only pay around 0.3% in real taxes.

“This extreme inequality is being driven by a financial system that puts the interests of a wealthy few above everyone else. This concentration of wealth is blocking progress towards the Sustainable Development Goals and keeping over three billion people living in poverty: over half of poor countries are spending more on debt repayments than on healthcare or education.

“In a tense geopolitical environment, Spain, Brazil and South Africa have taken an important step in forging an alliance here at the UN conference in Seville to show political will for taxation of the super-rich. Now other countries must follow their lead and join forces. This year, the FFD in Seville, COP30 in Brazil and G20 in South Africa are key opportunities for international cooperation to tax the super-rich and invest in a sustainable future that puts human rights and equality at its core.”


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/oxfam-reaction-to-spain-brazil-and-south-africa-launching-a-new-coalition-to-tax-the-super-rich/feed/ 0 542520
350.org welcomes Spain and Brazil’s new initiative to tax the super-rich https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/350-org-welcomes-spain-and-brazils-new-initiative-to-tax-the-super-rich/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/350-org-welcomes-spain-and-brazils-new-initiative-to-tax-the-super-rich/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 15:43:37 +0000 https://www.commondreams.org/newswire/350-org-welcomes-spain-and-brazils-new-initiative-to-tax-the-super-rich The governments of Spain and Brazil have announced plans for a Platform for Action on Taxing the Super-Rich in a move that could see more funds made available to tackle the climate and development crises. The initiative was launched at the UN Financing for Development conference in Seville and has been welcomed by 350.org.

“This is a bold move by Spain and Brazil to drive forward taxing the super-rich as a key solution to the lack of funds being delivered by rich countries for climate action. We want more countries to join this coalition so that billionaires and multi-millionaires help to foot the bill for the climate damage they have caused and decrease the huge gap between the rich and the poorest. We won't rest until governments like the UK, France, and Germany make the right choice to force the super rich to pay what they owe and increase their spending on climate action and public services at home and around the world.” Kate Blagojevic, 350.org Associate Director for Europe Campaigns.


This content originally appeared on Common Dreams and was authored by Newswire Editor.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/350-org-welcomes-spain-and-brazils-new-initiative-to-tax-the-super-rich/feed/ 0 542243
Conditions in Gaza are "the worst thing I’ve ever seen," says U.S. surgeon https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/conditions-in-gaza-are-the-worst-thing-ive-ever-seen-says-u-s-surgeon/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/conditions-in-gaza-are-the-worst-thing-ive-ever-seen-says-u-s-surgeon/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 15:29:54 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=0bf8624e954287ff5feccc83383369ba
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/conditions-in-gaza-are-the-worst-thing-ive-ever-seen-says-u-s-surgeon/feed/ 0 542229
Climate Scientist Michael Mann on Deadly Heat Domes Around the World https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/climate-scientist-michael-mann-on-deadly-heat-domes-around-the-world/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/climate-scientist-michael-mann-on-deadly-heat-domes-around-the-world/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 15:13:32 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d3e0f72f2f248d8c50f6fb47515ecd55
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/climate-scientist-michael-mann-on-deadly-heat-domes-around-the-world/feed/ 0 542232
The messy reality of solidarity w/ Sarah Schulman #shorts https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/the-messy-reality-of-solidarity-w-sarah-schulman-shorts/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/the-messy-reality-of-solidarity-w-sarah-schulman-shorts/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 13:03:54 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=40371394b046eb284b930051f0e7ee31
This content originally appeared on Laura Flanders & Friends and was authored by Laura Flanders & Friends.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/the-messy-reality-of-solidarity-w-sarah-schulman-shorts/feed/ 0 542207
America’s Republicans’ Hatred of the Poor https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/americas-republicans-hatred-of-the-poor/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/americas-republicans-hatred-of-the-poor/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 13:00:16 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159563 The budget-and-tax bill that President Trump has placed before America’s U.S. Senators and Representatives to pass by a majority in each of the two houses of Congress is a total repudiation of the first Republican U.S. President (and the only progressive Republican U.S. President), Abraham Lincoln, as will here be documented. The Republican Party was […]

The post America’s Republicans’ Hatred of the Poor first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The budget-and-tax bill that President Trump has placed before America’s U.S. Senators and Representatives to pass by a majority in each of the two houses of Congress is a total repudiation of the first Republican U.S. President (and the only progressive Republican U.S. President), Abraham Lincoln, as will here be documented.

The Republican Party was basically started by Lincoln, who (if he had lived) would have repudiated and condemned virtually all of his Republican successors. The assassination that killed him transformed his Party into its exact opposite, in the most important ways.

Here is Lincoln speaking, so that the transformation wrought by that bullet is made clear by Lincoln himself, in his own time:

It is not needed nor fitting here that a general argument should be made in favor of popular institutions, but there is one point, with its connections, not so hackneyed as most others, to which I ask a brief attention. It is the effort to place capital on an equal footing with, if not above, labor in the structure of government. It is assumed that labor is available only in connection with capital; that nobody labors unless somebody else, owning capital, somehow by the use of it induces him to labor. This assumed, it is next considered whether it is best that capital shall hire laborers, and thus induce them to work by their own consent, or buy them and drive them to it without their consent. Having proceeded so far, it is naturally concluded that all laborers are either hired laborers or what we call slaves. And further, it is assumed that whoever is once a hired laborer is fixed in that condition for life.

Now there is no such relation between capital and labor as assumed, nor is there any such thing as a free man being fixed for life in the condition of a hired laborer. Both these assumptions are false, and all inferences from them are groundless.

Labor is prior to and independent of capital. Capital is only the fruit of labor, and could never have existed if labor had not first existed. Labor is the superior of capital, and deserves much the higher consideration. Capital has its rights, which are as worthy of protection as any other rights. Nor is it denied that there is, and probably always will be, a relation between labor and capital producing mutual benefits. The error is in assuming that the whole labor of community exists within that relation. A few men own capital, and that few avoid labor themselves, and with their capital hire or buy another few to labor for them. A large majority belong to neither class — neither work for others nor have others working for them.

Lincoln was profoundly opposed to coerced labor, and he recognized that it can take many forms — not ONLY the form called ”slavery.” He also recognized that the few individuals who, as a group, own the most wealth and consequently hire a substantial percentage of the U.S. population, will possess, by their ability to hire and fire, enormous power, which might enable them to coerce their employees to accept unjustifiably low wages for their work. On this basis, he spoke publicly on the record as siding with the oppressed against their oppressors — even outside the context of merely slavery.

The poor are the lowest class of workers, and Lincoln there was making explicitly clear that — directly opposed to today’s Republican Party, which makes policy on the basis of the principle that a person is worth only whatever his/her net worth is, and so a billionaire is worth as much as a thousand millionaires — a person’s worth has no necessary relationship to his/her wealth — none.

Polling proves that vast majorities of the U.S. public detest Trump’s budget-and-tax priorities. Furthermore, an extraordinarily extensive Yale poll of nearly 5,000 Americans, published on June 27th, found that when respondents are informed of what is in Trump’s budget-and-tax bill, only 11% approve, 78% disapprove of it. Would it become law in a democracy? Of course not!

Today’s Republican Party — this Party that Lincoln would consider an abomination — is the exact opposite of anything that would become law in any democracy. If Trump’s bill, or anything like it, becomes law in America, this will be announcing to the entire world that America is a dictatorship by its super-rich. Such a Government used to be called an “aristocracy.” At every election-time, America’s public are being asked to side with one group of billionaires (the Republicann ones) against another group of billionaires (the Democratic ones), instead of to side with themselves and the rest of the public, against all billionaires — the remarkably few individuals who actually control the U.S. Government. This applies both in national U.S. politics and in state U.S. politics, so that the billionaires have veto-power to prevent ANY candidate they don’t control, from even getting their Party’s nomination (much less winning the final campaign). It is the aristocratic type of dictatorship — and Lincoln condemned it.

The post America’s Republicans’ Hatred of the Poor first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Eric Zuesse.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/americas-republicans-hatred-of-the-poor/feed/ 0 542202
“Damaging and Deadly” Heat Domes Nearly Tripled, from Europe to the U.S.: Climatologist Michael Mann https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/damaging-and-deadly-heat-domes-nearly-tripled-from-europe-to-the-u-s-climatologist-michael-mann/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/damaging-and-deadly-heat-domes-nearly-tripled-from-europe-to-the-u-s-climatologist-michael-mann/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 12:44:13 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=50d80e2b5dac687556e382f165e5d61f Seg4 mann heat 3

A heat wave is raising temperatures to dangerous levels across much of Europe, just days after a heat wave in North America saw over 3,000 temperature records set. For more, we speak with climate scientist Michael Mann, who warns that heat domes and flooding have nearly tripled since the 1950s. “At some level, this isn’t that complicated. You make the planet hotter, you’re going to have more frequent and intense heat extremes,” says Mann, a professor of environmental science at the University of Pennsylvania. Mann’s upcoming book, co-authored with vaccine expert Dr. Peter Hotez, is Science Under Siege: How to Fight the Five Most Powerful Forces That Threaten Our World.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/damaging-and-deadly-heat-domes-nearly-tripled-from-europe-to-the-u-s-climatologist-michael-mann/feed/ 0 542217
Operation Midnight Hammer: Were Iran’s Nuclear Facilities Damaged? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/operation-midnight-hammer-were-irans-nuclear-facilities-damaged/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/operation-midnight-hammer-were-irans-nuclear-facilities-damaged/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 12:00:38 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159560 The aftermath of Operation Midnight Hammer, a strike by the US Air Force on three nuclear facilities in Iran authorized by President Donald Trump on June 22, was raucous and triumphant. But that depended on what company you were keeping. The mission involved the bombing of the Fordow Fuel Enrichment Plant, the uranium-enrichment facility at […]

The post Operation Midnight Hammer: Were Iran’s Nuclear Facilities Damaged? first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The aftermath of Operation Midnight Hammer, a strike by the US Air Force on three nuclear facilities in Iran authorized by President Donald Trump on June 22, was raucous and triumphant. But that depended on what company you were keeping. The mission involved the bombing of the Fordow Fuel Enrichment Plant, the uranium-enrichment facility at Natanz, and the uranium-conversion facility in Isfahan.  The Israeli Air Force had already attacked the last two facilities, sparing Fordow for the singular weaponry available for the USAF.

The Fordow site was of particular interest, located some eighty to a hundred metres underground and cocooned by protective concrete. For its purported destruction, B-2 Spirit stealth bombers were used to drop GBU-57 Massive Ordnance Penetrator “bunker buster” bombs. All in all, approximately 75 precision-guided weapons were used in the operation, along with 125 aircraft and a guided missile submarine.

Trump was never going to be anything other than optimistic about the result. “Monumental Damage was done to all Nuclear sites in Iran, as shown by satellite images,” he blustered. “Obliteration is an accurate term!”

At the Pentagon press conference following the attack, Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth bubbled with enthusiasm. “The order we received from our commander in chief was focused, it was powerful, and it was clear. We devastated the Iranian nuclear program.” The US Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Air Force Gen. Dan Caine, was confident that the facilities had been subjected to severe punishment. “Initial battle damage assessments indicate that all three sites sustained extremely severe damage and destruction.” Adding to Caine’s remarks, Hegseth stated that, “The battle damage assessment is ongoing, but our initial assessment, as the Chairman said, is that all of our precision munitions struck where we wanted them to strike and had the desired effect.”

Resort to satellite imagery was always going to take place, and Maxar Technologies willingly supplied the material. “A layer of grey-blue ash caused by the airstrikes [on Fordow] is seen across a large swathe of the area,” the company noted in a statement. “Additionally, several of the tunnel entrances that lead into the underground facility are blocked with dirt following the airstrikes.”

The director of the Central Intelligence Agency, John Ratcliffe, also added his voice to the merry chorus that the damage had been significant. “CIA can confirm that a body of credible intelligence indicates Iran’s Nuclear Program has been severely damaged by the recent, targeted airstrikes.” The assessment included “new intelligence from a historically reliable and accurate source/method that several key Iranian nuclear facilities were destroyed and would have to be rebuilt over the course of years.”

Israeli sources were also quick to stroke Trump’s already outsized ego. The Israel Atomic Energy Commission opined that the strikes, combined with Israel’s own efforts, had “set back Iran’s ability to develop nuclear weapons by many years.” IDF Chief of Staff Lt. Gen. Eyal Zamir’s view was that the damage to the nuclear program was sufficient to have “set it back by years, I repeat, years.”

The chief of the increasingly discredited International Atomic Energy Agency, Rafael Grossi, flirted with some initial speculation, but was mindful of necessary caveats. In a statement to an emergency meeting of the IAEA’s 35-nation Board of Governors, he warned that, “At this time, no one, including the IAEA, is in a position to have fully assessed the underground damage at Fordow.” Cue the speculation: “Given the explosive payload utilised and extreme(ly) vibration-sensitive nature of centrifuges, very significant damage is expected to have occurred.”

This was a parade begging to be rained on. CNN and The New York Times supplied it. Referring to preliminary classified findings in a Defense Intelligence Agency assessment running for five pages, the paper reported that the bombing of the three sites had “set back the country’s nuclear program by only a few months”. The strikes had sealed off the entrances to two of the facilities, but they were not successful in precipitating a collapse of the underground buildings. Sceptical expertise murmured through the report: to destroy the facility at Fordow would require “waves of airstrikes, with days or even weeks of pounding the same spots.”

Then came the issue of the nuclear material in question, which Iran still retained control over. The fate of over 400 kg of uranium, which had been enriched to 60% purity, is unclear, as is the number of surviving or hidden centrifuges. Iran had already informed the IAEA on June 13 that “special measures” would be taken to protect nuclear materials and equipment under IAEA safeguards, a feature provided under the Non-Proliferation Treaty. Any transfer of nuclear material from a safeguarded facility to another location, however, would have to be declared to the agency, something bound to be increasingly unlikely given the proposed suspension of cooperation with the IAEA by Iran’s parliament.

After mulling over the attacks for a week, Grossi revisited the matter. The attacks on the facilities had caused severe, though “not total” damage. “Frankly speaking, one cannot claim that everything has disappeared and there is nothing there.” Tehran could, “in a matter of months,” have “a few cascades of centrifuges spinning and producing enriched uranium.” Iran still had the “industrial and technological” means to recommence the process.

Efforts to question the thoroughness of Operation Midnight Hammer did not sit well with the Trump administration. White House spokeswoman Karoline Leavitt worked herself into a state on any cautionary reporting, treating it as a libellous blemish. “The leaking of this alleged report is a clear attempt to demean President Trump and discredit the brave fighter pilots who conducted a perfectly executed mission to obliterate Iran’s nuclear program,” she fumed in a statement. “Everyone knows what happens when you drop 14 30,000-pound bombs perfectly on their targets.”

Hegseth similarly raged against the importance placed on the DIA report. In a press conference on June 26, he bemoaned the tendency of the press corps to “cheer against Trump so hard, it’s like in your DNA and in your blood”. The scribblers had to “cheer against the efficacy of these strikes” with “half-truths, spun information, leaked information”. Trump, for his part, returned to familiar ground, attacking any questioning narrative as “Fake News”. CNN, he seethed, had some of the dumbest anchors in the business. With malicious glee, he claimed knowledge of rumours that reporters from both CNN and The New York Times were going to be sacked for making up those “FAKE stories on the Iran Nuclear sites because they got it so wrong.”

A postmodern nonsense has descended on the damage assessments regarding Iran’s nuclear program, leaving the way clear for overremunerated soothsayers. But there was nothing postmodern in the incalculable damage done to the law of nations, a body of acknowledged rules rendered brittle and breakable before the rapacious legislators of the jungle.

The post Operation Midnight Hammer: Were Iran’s Nuclear Facilities Damaged? first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Binoy Kampmark.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/operation-midnight-hammer-were-irans-nuclear-facilities-damaged/feed/ 0 542176
LITTLE BLUE NOTHING • a portrait of the Havlovi (official film) https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/little-blue-nothing-a-portrait-of-the-havlovi-official-film-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/little-blue-nothing-a-portrait-of-the-havlovi-official-film-2/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 10:39:21 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=befc7220a9bee60880686bf757dc2e2a
This content originally appeared on Vincent Moon / Petites Planètes and was authored by Vincent Moon / Petites Planètes.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/little-blue-nothing-a-portrait-of-the-havlovi-official-film-2/feed/ 0 542145
High court rules that the UK’s sale of F-35 fighter jet parts to Israel is lawful https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/high-court-rules-that-the-uks-sale-of-f-35-fighter-jet-parts-to-israel-is-lawful/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/high-court-rules-that-the-uks-sale-of-f-35-fighter-jet-parts-to-israel-is-lawful/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 09:14:34 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=9a181e4ec25d1d3f13388065d7880e26
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/high-court-rules-that-the-uks-sale-of-f-35-fighter-jet-parts-to-israel-is-lawful/feed/ 0 542136
A “Striking” Trend: After Texas Banned Abortion, More Women Nearly Bled to Death During Miscarriage https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/a-striking-trend-after-texas-banned-abortion-more-women-nearly-bled-to-death-during-miscarriage/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/a-striking-trend-after-texas-banned-abortion-more-women-nearly-bled-to-death-during-miscarriage/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/texas-abortion-ban-miscarriage-blood-transfusions by Kavitha Surana, Lizzie Presser and Andrea Suozzo

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

Before states banned abortion, one of the gravest outcomes of early miscarriage could easily be avoided: Doctors could offer a dilation and curettage procedure, which quickly empties the uterus and allows it to close, protecting against a life-threatening hemorrhage.

But because the procedures, known as D&Cs, are also used to end pregnancies, they have gotten tangled up in state legislation that restricts abortion. Reports now abound of doctors hesitating to provide them and women who are bleeding heavily being discharged from emergency rooms without care, only to return in such dire condition that they need blood transfusions to survive. As ProPublica reported last year, one woman died of hemorrhage after 10 hours in a Houston hospital that didn’t perform the procedure.

Now, a new ProPublica data analysis adds empirical weight to the mounting evidence that abortion bans have made the common experience of miscarriage — which occurs in up to 30% of pregnancies — far more dangerous. It is based on hospital discharge data from Texas, the largest state to ban abortion, and captures emergency department visits from 2017 to 2023, the most recent year available.

After Texas made performing abortions a felony in August 2022, ProPublica found, the number of blood transfusions during emergency room visits for first-trimester miscarriage shot up by 54%.

The number of emergency room visits for early miscarriage also rose, by 25%, compared with the three years before the COVID-19 pandemic — a sign that women who didn’t receive D&Cs initially may be returning to hospitals in worse condition, more than a dozen experts told ProPublica.

While that phenomenon can’t be confirmed by the discharge data, which tracks visits rather than individuals, doctors and researchers who reviewed ProPublica’s findings say these spikes, along with the stories patients have shared, paint a troubling picture of the harm that results from unnecessary delays in care.

“This is striking,” said Dr. Elliott Main, a hemorrhage expert and former medical director for the California Maternal Quality Care Collaborative. “The trend is very clear.”

Blood Transfusions in First-trimester Pregnancy Loss ER Visits Spiked After Texas Banned Abortion

After the state’s first abortion ban went into effect in September 2021, blood transfusions increased. After abortion became a felony in August 2022, they increased more.

Note: For emergency department visits involving a pregnancy loss at less than 13 weeks gestation, or with an unknown gestational week.

The data mirrors a sharp rise in cases of sepsis — a life-threatening reaction to infection — ProPublica previously identified during second-trimester miscarriage in Texas.

Blood loss is expected during early miscarriage, which usually ends without complication. Some cases, however, can turn deadly very quickly. Main said ProPublica’s analysis suggested to him that “physicians are sitting on nonviable pregnancies longer and longer before they’re doing a D&C — until patients are really bleeding.”

That’s what happened to Sarah De Pablos Velez in Austin last summer. As she was miscarrying and bleeding profusely, she said physicians didn’t explain that she had options for care. Sent home from the emergency room without a D&C two times, she ultimately needed blood transfusions so that she wouldn’t die, according to medical records. “What happened to me was just so wrong,” she told ProPublica. "Doctors need to be providing care to pregnant women — that needs to be a baseline.”

Sarah De Pablos Velez was sent home from an emergency room while bleeding profusely during a miscarriage last year; she ultimately needed blood transfusions to save her life. (Ilana Panich-Linsman for ProPublica)

After ProPublica exposed preventable deaths following delays in care, the Texas Legislature passed a bill this year to clarify that doctors can provide abortions when a patient is facing a life-threatening emergency, even if it is not imminent.

But many Texas doctors say the reform does not address the difficulty of treating women experiencing early miscarriages, which almost always involve blood loss; they say it’s hard to know when the expected bleeding might evolve into a life-threatening emergency — one that could have been prevented with a D&C. Women can bleed and remain stable for a long time, until they crash.

Texas forbids abortion at all stages of pregnancy — even before there is cardiac activity or a visible embryo. And while the law allows doctors to “remove a dead, unborn child,” it can be difficult to determine what that means during early miscarriage, when an array of factors can signal that a pregnancy is not progressing.

An embryo might fail to develop. Cardiac activity may not emerge when it should. Hormone levels might dip or bleeding might increase. Even if a doctor strongly suspects a miscarriage is underway, it can take weeks to conclusively document that a pregnancy has ended, and all the while, a patient might be losing blood.

Some OB-GYNs and emergency room physicians have long been advising patients to complete their miscarriage at home, especially at Catholic hospitals, even if that is not the standard of care. But now, physicians across the state are faced with a law that threatens up to 99 years in prison, and more are making a new calculus around whether to intervene or even tell patients they are likely miscarrying, said Dr. Anitra Beasley, an OB-GYN in Houston. “What ends up happening is patients have to present multiple times before a diagnosis can be made,” she added, and some of those patients wind up needing blood transfusions.

While they can be lifesaving, transfusions do not stop the bleeding, experts told ProPublica, and they can introduce complications, such as severe allergic reactions, autoimmune disorders or, in rare events, blood cancer. The dangers of hemorrhage are far greater, from organ failure to kidney damage to loss of sensation in the fingers and toes. “There’s a finite amount of blood,” said Dr. Sarah Prager, a professor of obstetrics and gynecology at the University of Washington. “And when it all comes out, you’re dead.”

ProPublica’s findings about the rise in blood transfusions make clear that women who experience early miscarriages in abortion ban states are living in a more dangerous medical climate than many believe, said Amanda Nagle, a doctoral student investigating the same blood transfusion data for a forthcoming paper in the American Journal of Public Health.

“If people are seeking care at an emergency department,” Nagle said, “there are serious health risks to delaying that care.”

Waiting for Certainty

In some clinics and hospitals across Texas, the pressure to definitively diagnose a miscarriage has led to delays in offering D&Cs.

Considering the chance of criminal prosecution, some doctors now default to what many pregnancy loss experts view as an overly cautious method for diagnosing miscarriage: ultrasound images alone, using criteria from the Society of Radiologists in Ultrasound. Relying only on images to diagnose — and discounting other factors, like lab results or clinical symptoms — can take days or even weeks.

Dr. Gabrielle Taper was a resident at a Catholic hospital in Austin when the ban was enacted, and a culture of fear took hold among her colleagues, she told ProPublica. “We started asking, ‘Are we certain that we can document that we’ve met the radiology guidelines?’ as opposed to just treating the patient in front of us,” she said.

If they couldn’t show that the likely miscarriage met the criteria, they often felt they had to discharge patients without offering a D&C. “People are already in distress, and you are giving them confusion, a false sense of hope,” she told ProPublica. “Having to send a patient home knowing they may bleed so much they would need a blood transfusion — when I know there are procedures I could do or medicine I could offer — is just excruciating.”

The hospital where she worked did not respond to ProPublica’s request for comment.

The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists does not recommend this approach, advising doctors instead to review the ultrasound as one piece of information among many and counsel patients on all their options.

The Society of Radiologists in Ultrasound said that the guidelines “are not meant to apply in the setting of a life-threatening situation, such as heavy bleeding,” but did not respond to a question about whether it agreed with ACOG that doctors should use a combination of ultrasound images and clinical judgment to assess a pregnancy loss.

Dr. Courtney A. Schreiber, an obstetrics and gynecology professor and expert in early pregnancy care, said that even if a patient wants to let a likely miscarriage complete at home, the medical team should still explain different management options, including medication to speed up the process or a D&C, should symptoms like bleeding get worse.

“It’s our obligation to share information, help manage expectations and keep women safe,” she said.

What happened to Porsha Ngumezi shows how dangerous it can be to delay care, according to more than a dozen doctors who previously reviewed a detailed summary of her case for ProPublica.

When the mother of two showed up bleeding at Houston Methodist Sugar Land in June 2023, at 11 weeks pregnant, her sonogram suggested an “ongoing miscarriage” was “likely,” her doctor noted. She had no previous ultrasounds to compare it with, and the radiologist did not locate an embryo or fetus — which Ngumezi said she thought she had passed in a toilet; her doctors did not make a definitive diagnosis, calling it a pregnancy of “unknown location.” After hours bleeding, passing “clots the size of grapefruit,” according to a nurse’s notes, she received two blood transfusions — a short-term remedy. But she did not get a procedure to empty her uterus, which medical experts agree is the most effective way to stop the bleeding. Hours later, she died of hemorrhage, leaving behind her husband and young sons.

Hope Ngumezi holds a photograph of him and his late wife, Porsha, who died in a Houston hospital during a miscarriage in June 2023. (Danielle Villasana for ProPublica)

Doctors and nurses involved in Ngumezi’s care did not respond to multiple requests for comment for ProPublica’s story last fall, and the hospital did not answer questions about her care when asked about it again for this story. A spokesperson from Methodist Hospital said its OB-GYNs follow ACOG’s miscarriage diagnosis guidelines, which recommend considering clinical factors in addition to ultrasounds.

Visit After Visit

Even in circumstances in which the abortion ban allows a doctor to intervene — to treat a life-threatening emergency, for example, or to “remove a dead, unborn baby” — there’s plenty of evidence, detailed in lawsuits and federal investigations, that doctors in Texas still aren’t offering procedures.

As soon as Sarah De Pablos Velez, a 30-year-old media director, learned she was pregnant last summer, she began attending regular checkups at St. David’s Women’s Care, in Austin. During her third appointment at about nine weeks, a resident, Dr. Carla Vilardo, and her supervisor, Dr. Cynthia Mingea, reviewed the ultrasound, according to medical records, which indicated her pregnancy wasn’t viable. Instead of being offered treatment for a miscarriage, De Pablos Velez says she was advised to hold out hope and come back for the next checkup.

Five maternal health experts and practicing OB-GYNs who reviewed the records for ProPublica said by that ultrasound visit, doctors would have had enough information to determine that the pregnancy wasn’t viable, even under the most conservative guidelines. If they wanted to be extra sure, they could have done blood work or one more ultrasound during that visit.

Instead, De Pablos Velez was told to come back in two weeks, according to medical records. During a visit when she should have been nearly 11 weeks pregnant, Mingea wrote in her chart she was “not optimistic” about the pregnancy's viability. Still, De Pablos Velez was advised to return in another week to be sure.

Within a few days, when the cramping got so bad she could barely walk, De Pablos Velez went to the emergency room at St. David’s Medical Center, unaware that a D&C could stop the pain and the bleeding. “I’ve never researched what it looks like for women who have a miscarriage,” she told ProPublica. “I always thought you go to the bathroom and have a little bit of blood.”

Over two visits to the emergency room, doctors told her that she could complete the miscarriage at home, even as she reported filling up three toilet bowls with blood and a nurse remarked that they needed a janitor to clean the floor, De Pablos Velez and her husband recalled. No obstetrician ever came to assess her condition, according to medical records, and while her hospital chart says “all management options have been discussed with the patient and her husband,” De Pablos Velez and her husband both told ProPublica no one offered her a D&C.

She was told to follow up with her OB at her next appointment in three days. Six hours after discharge, though, she was trying to ride out the pain at home when her husband heard her muttering “lightheaded” in the bathroom and ran to her in time to catch her as she collapsed. “She was pale as a ghost, sweating, convulsing,” said her husband, Sergio De Pablos Velez. “There was blood on the toilet, the trash can — like a scene out of a horror movie.”

An ambulance rushed her to the hospital, where doctors realized she no longer had enough blood flowing to her organs. She received two blood transfusions. Without them, several doctors who reviewed her records told ProPublica, she would have soon lost her life.

De Pablos Velez and her husband, Sergio, at home in Austin (Ilana Panich-Linsman for ProPublica)

Vilardo and the doctors who saw De Pablos Velez in the emergency room did not respond to requests to speak with ProPublica or declined to be interviewed. St. David’s Medical Center, which is owned by HCA, the largest for-profit hospital chain in America, said it could not discuss her case unless she signed privacy waivers. The hospital did not respond to ProPublica’s questions even after she submitted them. The De Pablos Velezes say that a hospital patient liaison told them after the ordeal that the hospital would conduct an internal investigation, educate the emergency department on best practices and share the results. It never shared anything. When ProPublica asked about the status of the investigation, neither the liaison nor the hospital responded.

Mingea, who supervised Vilardo’s care during checkups, reviewed the clinic’s records with ProPublica and agreed that De Pablos Velez should have been counseled about miscarriage management options at the clinic, weeks before she ended up in the ER. She said she did not know why she wasn’t but pointed ProPublica to the Society of Radiologists in Ultrasound criteria, which is hanging on the clinic’s wall and is used to teach residents.

She was adamant that her clinic, which she described as “very pro-choice — about as much as we can be in Texas,” regularly provides D&Cs for miscarrying patients. “I feel badly that Sarah had this experience, I really do,” she said. “Everybody deserves to be counseled about all their options.”

Doctors had five opportunities to counsel De Pablos Velez about her options and offer her a D&C, said Dr. Jodi Abbott, an associate professor of obstetrics and gynecology at Boston University School of Medicine, who reviewed case records. If they had, the life-or-death risks could have been avoided.

De Pablos Velez “basically received the same care Porsha Ngumezi did, only Porsha died and she survived,” said Abbott. “She was lucky.”

Sophie Chou contributed data reporting, and Mariam Elba contributed research.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Kavitha Surana, Lizzie Presser and Andrea Suozzo.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/a-striking-trend-after-texas-banned-abortion-more-women-nearly-bled-to-death-during-miscarriage/feed/ 0 542131
Miscarriage Is Increasingly Dangerous for Women in Texas, Our Analysis Shows. Here’s How We Did It. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/miscarriage-is-increasingly-dangerous-for-women-in-texas-our-analysis-shows-heres-how-we-did-it/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/miscarriage-is-increasingly-dangerous-for-women-in-texas-our-analysis-shows-heres-how-we-did-it/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 08:55:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/texas-miscarriage-blood-transfusions-methodology by Andrea Suozzo, Kavitha Surana and Lizzie Presser

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up to receive our biggest stories as soon as they’re published.

Even though about a million women a year experience a miscarriage, there is little research on complications related to pregnancy loss in the first trimester, when most miscarriages happen. The need to explore this phase is urgent, experts told ProPublica, given the way state abortion bans have disrupted maternal health care.

Although most early miscarriages resolve without complications, patients with heavy bleeding can hemorrhage if they don’t get appropriate treatment — which includes a procedure called dilation and curettage, or D&C, that is now tangled up in legislation that bans abortion. As women recounted being left to lose dangerous amounts of blood, and ProPublica told the story of a mother who died in a Houston hospital while seeking miscarriage care, reporters searched for a way to gain a broader understanding of what was happening in the state.

We consulted dozens of researchers and clinicians to develop our methodology and understand how to look at early miscarriage outcomes in the emergency department.

Our latest analysis, of hospital discharge data from Texas, found that after the state made performing abortions a felony in August 2022, the number of blood transfusions during emergency room visits for first-trimester miscarriage shot up by 54%.

The number of emergency room visits during first-trimester miscarriage also rose by 25%, a sign that women may be returning to hospitals in worse condition after being sent home, more than a dozen experts told ProPublica.

Experts say the spike is a troubling indicator of delays in care.

The most effective way to prevent severe blood loss during miscarriages, experts said, is a D&C, which uses suction to remove remaining tissue, allowing the uterus to close. The procedure is also used to terminate pregnancies.

Dr. Elliott Main, an expert on maternal hemorrhage and the former medical director for the California Maternal Quality Care Collaborative, said the increase in transfusions suggested to him that doctors working under abortion bans are now delaying those interventions for miscarrying patients for longer — “until they’re really bleeding.”

These findings add to ProPublica’s growing body of reporting revealing that maternal outcomes have gotten worse after the state’s abortion bans. In February, we published an analysis of second-trimester pregnancy loss hospitalizations, which found that the rate of sepsis climbed by more than 50% after the state banned abortion. That study focused only on inpatient stays in Texas hospitals. However, many of the clinicians and researchers we spoke with told us that that focus would limit what we could say about miscarriage care earlier in pregnancy; most people experiencing first-trimester pregnancy complications would likely be seen in a shorter emergency department visit, rather than an inpatient stay.

This methodology lays out the steps we took to examine early miscarriage outcomes in the emergency department, to help experts and interested readers understand our approach and its limitations.

Identifying First-Trimester Emergency Visits

We purchased seven years of discharge records for inpatient and outpatient encounters at hospitals and ambulatory surgery centers from the Texas Department of State Health Services. These records contain deidentified data for visits, with information about the encounter, including diagnoses recorded and procedures performed, as well as some patient demographic information and billing data.

We limited our analysis to visits with a diagnosed pregnancy loss across both the inpatient and outpatient datasets. We followed a methodology that maternal health researchers have used for many years to identify “abortive outcomes” — instances of pregnancy loss at less than 20 weeks, which includes diagnoses like ectopic pregnancy and miscarriage. Researchers have typically identified these cases in order to exclude them from metrics assessing complications in childbirth. In contrast, we focused our analysis only on those encounters with a pregnancy loss diagnosis. Medical experts suggested that it's possible more women are self-managing abortions at home; since a self-managed medication abortion would present like a spontaneous miscarriage, however, we can’t differentiate those patients in our data.

We also limited our analysis to either emergency department visits or inpatient stays that began in the emergency department. The state’s outpatient data also includes encounters for outpatient procedures and data for ambulatory surgery centers, which we excluded to focus on emergent hospital care. Ultimately, our analysis focused on 35,500 first-trimester visits per year that came into hospitals through the emergency department, excluding a small number (about 1,400 per year) of inpatient stays that did not begin in the emergency room.

To limit our analysis to pregnancy loss in the first trimester, we looked for a diagnosis code indicating gestational weeks. In cases where a long hospitalization had multiple gestational week codes recorded over the course of the stay, we took the latest one. We excluded any row that had a gestational week code of 13 weeks or more, which marks the start of the second trimester. The vast majority — 78% — of emergency department visits for pregnancy loss had a code indicating unknown gestational week or no gestational week diagnosis code at all. We included those visits in the first-trimester category. Clinicians told us that a pregnant patient coming to the emergency department in her first trimester is less likely to have had a doctor’s appointment establishing gestational age. Since pregnancy loss in the second or third trimester is more serious, and because it is easier to establish gestational age in a pregnancy that is further along, an emergency department doctor would likely be able to establish a gestational age over the course of treatment in those cases.

We then filtered our list of visits to ones where the patient was female and between the ages of 10 and 54, to exclude rows with potential errors. This removed 2,692 visits, or 1.1% of all visits we’d identified.

The number of emergency department first-trimester hospitalizations were relatively stable prior to COVID-19. In 2022, the first full year after the state passed its six-week abortion ban, the number of encounters jumped by 11%. And in 2023, the year after the state criminalized abortion, they rose again, increasing by 25% from pre-COVID levels.

While we could identify an increase in visits, we could not identify patients across visits, which means we can’t say how many of these visits represent the same person returning to the emergency department multiple times for the same pregnancy loss. Texas has seen an increase in live births since the state banned abortion — about 2.7% in 2022, compared with the pre-COVID average, and declining slightly in 2023. But this increase in births — and, by extension, pregnancies — does not explain the rate of change in emergency visits, which far surpasses it.

Clinicians also told us that the threshold for diagnosing pregnancy loss increased after the state banned abortion. To assess how many relevant visits our analysis might be leaving out, and whether we were missing more visits after hospital policy changes, we looked for visits without a pregnancy loss code but with a diagnosis of “threatened abortion” or “early pregnancy hemorrhage,” indicating uterine cramping or bleeding in early pregnancy. Since clinicians told us that these diagnoses might range from light spotting to significant bleeding, and since bleeding in pregnancy is common and does not always indicate a miscarriage in progress, we did not include these visits in our main analysis. However, we also identified a 23% increase in visits with those codes — from an annual average of 70,936 prior to COVID to 87,431 in 2023.

Identifying Transfusions

Next, we identified pregnancy loss visits with a transfusion, which typically indicates that there has been a dangerous loss of blood.

For our inpatient dataset, where procedures performed during a hospitalization were recorded as ICD-10-PCS codes, we identified visits with a blood transfusion using a list of codes defined by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. The outpatient dataset, which uses Current Procedural Terminology codes, has just one code — 36430 — for blood transfusions.

Prior to COVID-19, there were 840 first-trimester pregnancy loss emergency department visits each year, on average, with a blood transfusion. In 2022, the first full year after the state passed its first abortion ban, transfusions climbed to 1,076 — an increase of 28% from pre-COVID years. By 2023, the first full year after abortion was criminalized, that number climbed to 1,290 — an increase of 54% compared to pre-COVID. That’s 450 more visits with a blood transfusion in 2023 than the pre-COVID average.

Blood Transfusions in First-trimester Pregnancy Loss ER Visits Spiked After Texas Banned Abortion

After the state’s first abortion ban went into effect in September 2021, blood transfusions increased. After abortion became a felony in August 2022, they increased more.

Note: For emergency department visits involving a pregnancy loss at less than 13 weeks gestation, or with an unknown gestational week.

Even as the number of visits to the emergency department increased, the proportion of those visits with a transfusion also went up, from 2.5% in pre-COVID years to 2.8% in 2022 and 3% in 2023 — suggesting that the increase in transfusions may not be explained by an increase in encounters alone.

Experts who reviewed ProPublica’s data wondered if the increase in transfusions might be driven by more women experiencing complications of ectopic or molar pregnancies, rare nonviable pregnancies in which the likelihood of a blood transfusion is much higher than for a spontaneous miscarriage. The data did not bear this out. When we excluded visits with ectopic and molar pregnancy diagnoses, the increase in the number of pregnancy loss transfusions was even higher — it rose by 61% by 2023.

To understand whether there were increases in the numbers of transfusions in other maternal visits over the same time period, we also looked at blood transfusions in delivery events, using the federal methodology to identify birth complications. In hospital births, the number of transfusions increased by 6.7% in 2022 and 9.9% in 2023 compared with the pre-COVID average — an increase, but smaller in magnitude than the increase in first-trimester pregnancy loss hospitalizations.

Sophie Chou contributed data reporting.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Andrea Suozzo, Kavitha Surana and Lizzie Presser.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/miscarriage-is-increasingly-dangerous-for-women-in-texas-our-analysis-shows-heres-how-we-did-it/feed/ 0 542133
Musician Michael Gira (Swans) on letting the work speak through you https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/musician-michael-gira-swans-on-letting-the-work-speak-through-you/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/musician-michael-gira-swans-on-letting-the-work-speak-through-you/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-michael-gira-swans-on-letting-the-work-speak-through-you How would you describe your creative philosophy?

There is no philosophy in the sense of an overarching set of principles or an ethic that serves as a filter for the work. The exigency is: work or die. Do the work. The work itself asks and answers the questions necessary to its existence. Dig in and find out what’s what. Shut everything else out. Let the work speak through you. It’s been hiding there, just behind the air, all along.

You’ve written music, lyrics, fiction and nonfiction. What do you see as common threads in your work?

After hundreds and hundreds of songs and stories and various other writing over the course of four-plus decades I guess one obvious answer is the mind of the author behind all this work. But now I’m not so sure of even that. The author himself is suspect, if he exists at all. I question the existence of self, or at least my own self specifically. So maybe a common thread is erasure. I’m always struck by how an adamant statement or proclamation contains inside it its own opposite, which is equally and simultaneously true, and this friction between the two opposite poles serves the function of a positive negation. For all the talk of love, desire, frustration, hatred, contempt, compassion, transcendence, it’s all just phenomena, suspended and rearranging itself in space, all at once, past and future quivering on the same plane simultaneously. But musically, sonically, I guess a common thread has been to find a sound that is so all-consuming that I, and by extension the audience or the listener, disappears inside it, at least for a moment. The obvious analogy to that is the beautiful, selfless act of true sexual love. To me, that’s where God lives.

You’ve worked in collaboration with many musicians, including Swans and Angels of Light, and you’ve written many songs on your own. What do you see as the pros and cons of collaboration versus the creative control of working by yourself?

There are no pros or cons, and it’s all a mystery to me how anything happens at all. Here’s how I see the process. I’ll tell it as a story: Alone in my room, I pick up my old and beaten and broken contraption made of wood and wires and I thrum the thing, waiting for resonance. When eventually a sound evokes meaning I search for another sound, and before long I have a collection of chords. Through repetition, an invisible, shimmering mist of sound envelops me completely, and before long I notice a portal opening and I walk through it and I suddenly find myself in an unfamiliar room, similar to a prison cell without windows. I scratch words onto the wall of this cell, and those words become the lyrics to a song. This is the first stage of elation, and it is solitary. I sing the song over and over by myself until it inhabits me completely.

Then, excited at my discovery, I gather my friends and collaborators in a rehearsal space and together we unfold billowing waves of sound that grow outwards, way beyond my initial childish discoveries. We’re led through the vaulting archways of cathedrals where dancing fractal shards of light sing down to us from above. We’re ushered through tunnels of sound into new chambers connected endlessly, one to another, where the echoes stretch out and reverberate infinitely. We breathe in and exhale the magical dust that is the intangible substance of these echoes, and we’re transformed from within. We travel around the world, making sound in this fashion.

Over time, the music continues to grow of its own accord, and we follow it where it wants to go. We’re helpless inside it. By the end of a tour the songs bear little resemblance to their shape at the beginning, and you’d be hard pressed to recognize the original songs I wrote alone in my room. Finally, we find ourselves in a vast underground cavern and we no longer know ourselves, who we are or where we’ve been. We’re drained and spent, and the songs are then finished and forgotten completely and never performed again. Then, time for something new, and the process starts over. I want to be sure to mention here the current musicians in Swans who so tirelessly devote themselves to this often arduous spiritual quest: Dana Schechter, Norman Westberg, Kristof Hahn, Larry Mullins, Christopher Pravdica and Phil Puleo.

You’ve also produced albums for other musicians, like Devendra Banhart and Akron/Family. What do you enjoy about that process, and what have you learned from it?

What have I learned from it? NEVER AGAIN! I absolutely love Devendra. I have never met anyone so preternaturally talented and magical as he was in those days. He literally quivered with light. Akron/Family were also tremendously gifted and unique, and fine people too. I remember seeing them live a few times and thinking “They’re the Beatles!” or “They’re Led Zeppelin!”–they were that good. But I am temperamentally not suited to working on other people’s music. I care too much and invest too much in the process psychically and it’s draining for all involved. Worse, I’m selfish as regards my own artistic pursuits, and I inevitably committed too much of what should be a personal store of energy into those projects, to the ultimate detriment of all involved.

You could say that I’m too intense, especially when I get into the studio. It’s a sort of spiritual crucible for me, and it’s not correct to involve that level of personal feeling in the work of others. Of course I’m proud of the work we did together, but never again. The only thing that would induce me to produce someone else’s music again would be if they were to buy me, fully paid off in advance, a modest house along the strand in Hermosa Beach, California, where I could finish my days with sand on my feet and salt on my lips. This is a hopeless dream of course, since the Hermosa Beach of my childhood memories doesn’t exist anymore, but there you go.

You moved around a lot as a teenager. How do you think that prepared you for life as a touring musician, and how do you think it widened your creative perspective?

My personal motto used to be, “I’m only happy when I’m leaving.” When I was 15, I ran away from my father in Germany and hitchhiked down through Yugoslavia to Greece to Istanbul, then got to Israel somehow, where I stayed for close to a year as an itinerant hippie kid. Then, when I returned to LA I took off again and hitchhiked across North America twice, with almost no money, sleeping on the side of the road in the woods or the fields, or with people that would put me up, giving me work sometimes. Through all these various experiences I never had the sense to be afraid. I just threw myself out into the wind. It’s what I still do, musically. I have no idea what I’m doing! I just dive in and figure it out along the way. But as for touring, it’s the opposite of adventurous travel. You drive some random long and boring distance, you arrive at the venue, you unload, then set up, then sound-check, then wait a bit, then perform the show, then sleep, then repeat. Rarely do I get the chance to get out and experience whatever city we’re in, and these days I carry my agoraphobia with me, and I sleep and hide as much as possible when not performing.

You’ve said you took a lot of LSD during this period as well. How do you think that affected your creativity?

Actually, my experiences with drugs began much earlier. I had a completely unsupervised, pretty horrible childhood, from an early age. This is decades upon decades ago, so my memory is hazy, but I must have started taking drugs as early as 11 years old, first with inhaling glue, gasoline and spot remover, then barbiturates and amphetamines and ultimately by 12 or 13 on to LSD, which was ubiquitous at the time. So right at the age when one is first discovering or formulating who they are, developing what we call an identity, I took rather large quantities of a hallucinogen that said instead, “No, actually, you are NOTHING” and I still don’t necessarily disagree with that realization. The thing about LSD, or at least the versions of it that existed back then, is that it came at you in waves, washing over you and dispersing your self and your molecules out into the surrounding world, so that there was no separation between you and everything else. I used to lie on the beach late at night and stare up at the stars and feel myself rushing up and out through the universe, vividly conscious and unconscious simultaneously. Paradoxically, this kind of vision or experience imbues you with a sort of faith, or a certainty of the interconnectedness of all phenomena, and I suppose I’ve since sought out that experience in various ways throughout my life, perhaps especially through music.

You went to art school at one point. What was that experience like for you, and what did you learn from it?

Once I discovered, in my late teens I guess, that I had a natural facility for drawing, I threw myself into it absolutely, drew constantly, and it became a sort of religion for me. Pretty quickly I knew that this would be my path in life—to be an artist. I had no idea what this entailed, how one might go about it in their life, but I’d found something that gave me a conduit to meaning. So I ended up in art school, where my most productive time was spent in the library, devouring art books and reading art magazines. I don’t recall teachers imparting me with any special knowledge or technical skill, other than to perhaps point me towards artists I might not have otherwise known about. Gradually, I discovered that contemporary art was considered to be a profession, replete with its own specialized, recondite language, and that if one were to succeed at it a certain amount of social skill and networking would be involved, and that I, generally feeling like a leper amongst other people, wanted no part of it. I might as well become a lawyer. Around this time Punk Rock happened. I quit art school and threw myself into that milieu, for better or worse. I started a band, and it failed. Then I eventually moved to New York City, where Swans was soon formed.

How do you deal with writer’s block, either musically or with the written word?

For me, that’s an ironic question because I have never known anything other than writer’s block. I liken my process to trying to carve an image in a granite cliff face with a steel toothpick. But through persistence, something eventually emerges.

You’ve spoken of a voice that channels through you called “Joseph” that you credit with many of your songs. What can you tell us about him, and how would you describe your relationship with him?

That’s just a trope I’ve used a few times to depict the unknown entity that reaches into the back of my head somehow and writes the words through me. I have no idea how else to describe it. I sit for hours sometimes staring at a blank page, but eventually when I give up completely something gets written. In the best instances, I don’t really feel like I wrote the words myself at all.

You’ve written two collections of short stories, published nearly 25 years apart. What do you like about writing fiction, and why do you think the impulse to do it (or at least publish it) came at such a vast interval?

I have always written, for as long as I can remember. I suppose I started doing it at the same time I started drawing. I hesitate to call the writing “stories,” since in most instances very little happens, there are no clearly drawn characters, and certainly no plots. I don’t even know who the narrator is—it’s certainly not me personally. It’s more like a disembodied mind dissecting itself, taking a scalpel to itself, tearing apart and arranging and rearranging memories and sensations, putting them in a form that makes an intuitive sense. The collections you mention occurred only when I felt there was enough compelling material to include. My primary focus has been music. It takes up all of my time.

You’ve also published a collection of Swans lyrics/stories/journals. What was that process like for you? In reviewing your own lyrics and experiences, did you learn anything about your own creative process?

During Covid, like everyone else, I had an overabundance of free time. I decided to use the opportunity to finally go through the trunks of journals and ephemera I’d collected over the decades. These plastic trunks had traveled with me from abode to abode over many years, usually residing, never opened, in a basement wherever I lived at the time. I lugged the onus of my past along with me wherever I went. When I opened the lids to these containers, I was sickened to discover a thick carpet of mold over everything, and it permeated the journals, staining the pages. It reeked and was toxic. I have asthma, so the effect was not insubstantial.

Nevertheless, I was determined to go through the writing. I was forced to wear a respirator, eye protection and surgical gloves as I worked. A fitting metaphor for the writing that I encountered! In much of the early writing and unused song lyrics I hardly recognized the author. Truly a maniacal, but focused and determined character. It was interesting to see. I definitely lived in a world of my own making in those days, very solipsistic and self-obsessed, and unapologetic about it. After a long, slow period of trying to type the stuff up for future editing I finally found an obvious solution and took hundreds of pictures of worthwhile pages with my cell phone and was then later able, unencumbered by my ridiculous hazmat protections, to go through the material, type it up and edit it.

Fittingly, as the decades approached more current times, the mold was less pervasive, and eventually of course the writing took place on a computer and was easily accessible, though about a decade was lost when a computer was stolen. But what did I learn? I don’t know. Maybe that work is what matters, just doing the work. The early writing was done during a period of extreme hardship and poverty and general isolation, but I persisted, and then here now is this much older person with an entire life history behind him, and certainly no longer hungry, going through this stuff and mining it. In the end, I used a relatively small portion of what I found, and I excised the material that I thought too personal. There’s tons of it left, enough to fill another book. But my hope is to find the courage to take all those trunks, the entire mess, to the public dump and dispose of it once and for all.

Do you read reviews of your own work?

I have read reviews in the past, yes. It’s always a mistake. A bad review can be misguided and stupid, which has hardly any effect. Or a bad review can contain some truth, and that can be devastating, but perhaps productive in the long run. The worst is a good review, because it can foster complacency and self-satisfaction, which equals death.

Michael Gira recommends:

Jorge Luis BorgesComplete Fictions. It’s all his stories in one fat volume. His writing is honed down to a diamond edge and is nearly impenetrable, but the mysteries within it are irresistibly seductive and I’m convinced contain the keys to the entire universe.

J.G. BallardThe Complete Short Stories of J.G. Ballard. The early, more straightforward science fiction is not really of interest to me, but as he gets going you couldn’t find a more compelling vivisection of the modern techno-consumer society mind.

Martin ScorseseRaging Bull. He’s made many great films, of course, but this one sums up the entire human condition in one short scene, as Jake pummels the concrete walls of his cell with his bare fists, screaming in defiant, hopeless agony.

Jim Morrison’s vocal on “The Crystal Ship”. This is not an objective entry. This sums up my entire, formative childhood. It’s a beautiful vocal—sensual, resigned, drugged, easily confident and slightly unhinged. There’s a wonderful acapella version somewhere online that is spectacular. I listen to it once every few years just to remind myself what a piece of shit singer I am.

Hubert Selby JrLast Exit to Brooklyn, The Room, Requiem for a Dream, The Demon, Song of the Silent Snow. These five books are among the best in modern American literature, and it disgusts, though doesn’t surprise me, that they are so overlooked and neglected. The devotion and compassion in them is Christ-like.


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by J. Bennett.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/musician-michael-gira-swans-on-letting-the-work-speak-through-you/feed/ 0 542126
Musician Helado Negro on noticing what surrounds you https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/musician-helado-negro-on-noticing-what-surrounds-you/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/musician-helado-negro-on-noticing-what-surrounds-you/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 04:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/musician-helado-negro-on-noticing-what-surrounds-you You’re home after a run of shows with Khruangbin. How has your relationship to touring changed over the years?

Touring is hard, not for the faint of heart. People who tour know so many degrees of stress and worry… I started touring in 2003. It kind of snowballed and didn’t stop. I’m always on the road. It wasn’t until lockdown where there was a whole year without playing shows. That was cool for a lot of different reasons. Not for sustainable reasons, but in terms of mental and physical wellness, biological wellness—as a means to survive, I think it’s one of the only ones at this moment.

It feels like you put out a record and you have to tour, continue to make everything float. There’s no independent systems. It’s not like you can make an album and that makes its own world, then you can tour and that’s its own world. Everything is so dependent on the other one doing its job. If you don’t tour, then people don’t know you have a new album out. It really is a cycle. That’s the terminology used within labels and media. It’s kind of sad because doing something because you have to do it is not enticing to anyone.

I’m not here to reinvent the wheel. I’ve always viewed it from the standpoint of a worker perspective. It’s my background; I grew up in a worker family. I’m not necessarily trying to redefine something. It’s always hard for me to know what to do to help mitigate the hardest parts of it, which are burnout or stressing about things that are completely impossible to control, like selling tickets or making something financially feasible.

It seems like touring is becoming untenable for many artists.

My situation is isolated from everybody else’s, but there’s a misconception about how well an artist is doing depending on who they’re releasing records with. I’ve definitely had a lot of people approach me and be like, “Oh, you released with 4AD, everything must be going super well.” There’s still this common misconception that leaning on someone who has a lot of legacy and reputation changes the dynamic for your life. Everyone wants one answer, but never the full system answer—which is, “You have to do all these things, but there’s a healthy way to do them without it being the end all.”

Working with a label is fun and exciting because they bring a creative perspective to how you get your music to more people. They’re looking at it from that perspective. In the most sincere perspective, they’re looking at it from a place of, “We want to support your art. We want people to support your art. We want people to pay for it so you can finance whatever else you want to do.” So that’s great, and I think that’s important to keep in your mind when you’re working with a label.

A lot of people position themselves like, “I don’t need a label. I can do this independently.” And like, yeah, you can. That’s always been the case. People have been doing independent records forever; it’s nothing new. Maybe the tools are new, like Spotify, but the same systems are in place. Just because you release it independently, you still encounter the same obstacles everybody else encounters. There’s still the same amount of people releasing music. It’s just working with a healthy system, finding the right people, and being really honest about what you want.

Any advice for taking care of yourself on the road?

One easy place to start is food. Something I’ve learned is to ask for the things that you really want. Like, “Man, I just need these four things.” Be very specific with brands and things like that. It’s really helpful, as opposed to just being like, “I don’t know, just put out some nachos, guacamole, and hummus.” Everyone’s happy to do the easiest thing, but it’s like, whether it’s difficult or not, who cares? Try to get it the way you want it. It’s so much more helpful to have that peace of mind—to know, “Okay, at least I’m going to have this salad that I can eat backstage.” It’s maybe the one thing you can possibly control. Everything else is extremely difficult. Even just trying to do an ounce of exercise, you’re stealing time from something—from sleeping or taking a shower or eating breakfast or writing an email. Time is nearly impossible to control on tour.

Your sound has changed a lot from album to album. Has this ever presented a challenge for labels or teams you’re working with?

I’m lucky. I’ve worked with a lot of great people and I’m really happy with everyone. I think I’ve gotten everything that I should get. I don’t know what else could be coming or what should have come. It’s hard to know these things… Things move in huge swaths and everything changes. In that respect, I’ve always done what I could do out of necessity. [When] touring, sometimes I can have a band, sometimes I can’t. I’ve heard people say, “Oh, I wish I could always have a band.” But I don’t. It’s cool to have different experiences. I don’t think there’s an ideal way to do live performance. You’re the only one creating these barriers and the perception that your live show should be a certain way. It’s important to never say to yourself, “There’s a better way to do it,” when the moment that you’re in now is actually the best way.

Where did your initial spark to create come from?

I started making music through samplers and drum machines. That’s how I learned. Listening to records and thinking about the sound that I’m listening to. Looking at the back of the record, seeing who played on it, who did what, and then being like, “Damn, that’s an alto saxophone. Okay, that’s different than a tenor.” That opens up your mind and you follow new music and musicians. You chase all these sounds down.

I was really into the label Thrill Jockey. It was like ‘98, I got a Tortoise CD, and asked my cousin, “Man, who are all these people? I don’t even know what this kind of music is.” I started looking them up, finding these different bands, and being excited about seeing folks into a lot of the things that I was into… Then having a guitar and knowing a few chords and just playing it and figuring things out slowly. When I finally went to New York, I started to meet more folks who went to music school and played with them live. I understand more musical language through hearing my band and the different people I play with talk. It’s educational in the sense that I’m taking what I need to take, but in a very generous environment. It isn’t this academic environment with some kind of structure that’s been formed around what you’re learning, so you have to stand inside of that. It’s just applied to the moment that I’m in.

Music education is important. I’ve never felt like it’s not important. Like anything, it’s based on your own creativity. It’s a bunch of instructions on how to do something one way, but then I could do it a million different ways. It’s cool when I meet people and we’re both thinking about music in the same way, they just have a different way they’ve learned it.

How do you lead a group or communicate your ideas with limited rehearsal time?

Music is best understood when played. I’m less of a theoretical person.

When you’re making decisions, you’re coming from a place of respect—respecting the people that you’re with and letting them know you trust them in the skills that they have, but also coming up with decisions or concise ideas. Being like, “Cool, I think we should do it like this.” And they’re like, “Okay, great.” It’s such an amazing balance of not just communication but creative thought in the moment—instantaneous process. Whatever band, whatever music you’re making, whatever you’re doing, rehearsal is so much fun. You could ask anybody that’s played with me: they’ve probably rehearsed in my band a million more hours than they’ve ever played in any of their other bands. It’s just listening. I love listening and sitting there and thinking about everything.

You used to work as a Foley artist for film. What did you learn about sound or listening during that time?

The thing you think about when doing Foley is just how much performance is a part of sound creation. Performance is an umbrella term that can cover so many things. Everybody thinks about acting, or poetry, or music, but the performance of creating sound for film is a thing. You have to move around, distribute your weight differently. There’s a lot of specific jargon when doing that stuff. What you also learn is, as humans, we make so much noise. You’re not in a room by yourself; you’re moving around; you have these clothes on you, rubbing against your skin; your feet are touching the floor, making a sound. We’re just these noise-making animals. It’s cool for people to think about all the sounds that are around them. What sounds are taking up your head space or your ear space when you’re making music? That’s what I think about.

It’s cool to hear you reference acting. You’ve also mentioned that certain sounds can become the protagonist of a track or album.

I try to find things I can anchor myself into—some kind of foundation of, “Okay, stop floating, you’re going to be here.” For PHASOR, I dug into these specific recordings that I made from this machine called the SalMar. It’s a synthesizer made by Salvatore Martirano. What I love about it is his intention: he wanted a tool that would be constantly composing sound and music. A lot of the sounds are primitive sounding. They’re squelchy and blippy and bloopy and beepy. But it was the intention that he was pushing forward. Some of the sounds are radical and beautiful to me, but not necessarily musical notes or specifically tuned sounds.

I love the idea of getting lost in something. That can create a new place for you to start, or to think about, or to be in… What’s grounding me? What’s telling me something new that I don’t know about myself in this music? That’s what I think about when I’m making work. I want to know who I am at that moment.

Helado Negro recommends five daily motivations for creativity:

Sing with your voice and record as is. Your voice will always be you. My friend Jason Ajemian said to me once, “The only perfection is imperfection.”

Make work you can grow old with. Not for nostalgia’s sake or clinging on to your youth, but rather to appreciate you’ve been somewhere before. It doesn’t mean you need to return to it; all those previous places inform where you are now.

Practice making nothing. There’s value and importance in intention, but the place where inspiration and process come from has no finite boundaries. The brain is a trap and an escape. Keep both doors open. Make nothing while making.

You will always contradict yourself. I do. Making is part of that. Collaborating helps get past the discomfort. Ask for help and share early if it feels right.

Also, don’t listen to me. These are random thoughts today. I’m usually good at not listening to any good advice.


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Jeffrey Silverstein.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/musician-helado-negro-on-noticing-what-surrounds-you/feed/ 0 542128
BREAKING: Over 9k City workers STRIKE in #philadelphia at midnight, July 1 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/breaking-over-9k-city-workers-strike-in-philadelphia-at-midnight-july-1/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/breaking-over-9k-city-workers-strike-in-philadelphia-at-midnight-july-1/#respond Tue, 01 Jul 2025 03:43:09 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fa751e4b2d56bef9b28f33a2ab1b299b
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/07/01/breaking-over-9k-city-workers-strike-in-philadelphia-at-midnight-july-1/feed/ 0 542111
The Right to Criticize: Honoring Independent Journalism at the Izzy Awards https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-right-to-criticize-honoring-independent-journalism-at-the-izzy-awards/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-right-to-criticize-honoring-independent-journalism-at-the-izzy-awards/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 20:16:52 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46685 Indeed, as our first amendment rights continue to be gravely threatened, real, independent frontline journalists are more than truth-tellers, they are the keepers of ideals we as Americans are taught to revere. so, this week, a special program: excerpts from the 17th annual Izzy Awards Show which took place at the Park Center for Independent Media at Ithaca College in Ithaca New York in early May of this year. 

The Izzy awards are named after the famous and indeed infamous and intrepid muckraker I.F. ‘Izzy’ Stone…

So this week, we’re featuring remarks by presenters, journalists and media scholars as well as remarks by this year’s winners. Project Censored director and radio show host Mickey Huff was the host of the awards show. He is also the distinguished director of the Park Center for Independent Media. 

The post The Right to Criticize: Honoring Independent Journalism at the Izzy Awards appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-right-to-criticize-honoring-independent-journalism-at-the-izzy-awards/feed/ 0 542064
The Right to Criticize: Honoring Independent Journalism at the Izzy Awards https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-right-to-criticize-honoring-independent-journalism-at-the-izzy-awards-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-right-to-criticize-honoring-independent-journalism-at-the-izzy-awards-2/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 20:16:52 +0000 https://www.projectcensored.org/?p=46685 Indeed, as our first amendment rights continue to be gravely threatened, real, independent frontline journalists are more than truth-tellers, they are the keepers of ideals we as Americans are taught to revere. so, this week, a special program: excerpts from the 17th annual Izzy Awards Show which took place at the Park Center for Independent Media at Ithaca College in Ithaca New York in early May of this year. 

The Izzy awards are named after the famous and indeed infamous and intrepid muckraker I.F. ‘Izzy’ Stone…

So this week, we’re featuring remarks by presenters, journalists and media scholars as well as remarks by this year’s winners. Project Censored director and radio show host Mickey Huff was the host of the awards show. He is also the distinguished director of the Park Center for Independent Media. 

The post The Right to Criticize: Honoring Independent Journalism at the Izzy Awards appeared first on Project Censored.


This content originally appeared on Project Censored and was authored by Kate Horgan.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-right-to-criticize-honoring-independent-journalism-at-the-izzy-awards-2/feed/ 0 542065
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – June 30, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-june-30-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-june-30-2025/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=a7523f77fcebf0cd542d197932f44049 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – June 30, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-june-30-2025/feed/ 0 542096
To Fund Tax Cuts for the Rich, GOP Budget Bill Would Take "Sledgehammer" to Healthcare for Millions https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 14:35:50 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=fb86117df1e357e62e7b7f65d168596c
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/feed/ 0 541966
Magical Theatricality in the Ice Age Caves: Why it Should Matter to Socialists https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/magical-theatricality-in-the-ice-age-caves-why-it-should-matter-to-socialists/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/magical-theatricality-in-the-ice-age-caves-why-it-should-matter-to-socialists/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 13:59:28 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159516 Orientation From the time of the Renaissance until representational art began to be challenged at the end of the 19th century, most of us think of secular art as consisting of separate disciplines – dance, theatre, singing, painting, sculpture and writing. The exception to this was the theatrical work of Richard Wagner, a German composer, […]

The post Magical Theatricality in the Ice Age Caves: Why it Should Matter to Socialists first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>

Orientation
From the time of the Renaissance until representational art began to be challenged at the end of the 19th century, most of us think of secular art as consisting of separate disciplines – dance, theatre, singing, painting, sculpture and writing. The exception to this was the theatrical work of Richard Wagner, a German composer, theater director, essayist and conductor who understood that combining the arts can create altered states of consciousness in the German public. Speaking religiously, the Catholic church was and is a master at creating altered states of consciousness in its followers with the use of stained-glassed windows, organ music, singing and incense filling the senses. Needless to say painters and sculptors were employed to carry out a single vision – the worshiping of God.

I argue that in the beginning of the human species all the arts were one in the service of creating magical states of consciousness and magical rites of passage for their participants. It was only after the formation of class societies in the ancient world that the arts became secular disciplines practiced by specialists. With the secularization of the arts the purpose of art lost its unitary focus and artists, painters and musicians worked to satisfy the whims of their different individual patrons. However, in the Ice Age conditions of Cro-Magnon hunter gathers living in caves doing magical rituals correctly and memorably could mean the difference between intergenerational survival or petering out at best or death at worst. This article is based on two wonderful books. One is John Pfeiffer’s book The Creative Explosion and  more recent work by David Lewis-Williams The Mind in the Cave.

Why should what happened 20-25 thousand years ago interest socialists? From the end of the 19th century socialists, at least in Mordor, have been very bad at creating rituals. Socialists rather allowed rites of passage rituals, pilgrimages, sacred sites, calendars, to be hollowed out by capitalists. As secularists and atheists many socialists thought that rites of passage were silly and not worth bothering about. See my article “The Mythology Ritual and Art of Romantic Socialism: Socialism’s Lost Heart and Soul.”

Today socialists have a golden opportunity to understand how to do rituals right by studying the intense and meaningful practices of so long ago, practices that existed for 9,000 years. They have been chiseled and tempered to a fine point of perfection in harmony with the forces of natural selection.

I Play, Art and Necessity
Play as a precursor of art and rooted in decision-making of the brain (rather than genetics)
Play among reptiles and lower species is questionable and the evidence for it is scanty. According to Pfeiffer (The Creative Explosion) play emerged with the appearance of warm blooded mammals 200,000 years ago co-extensively with the evolution of the brain. Pfeiffer claims that art is a more elaborate form of play and that each has an adaptive function of being able to react creatively to unpredictable situations.

What play and art have in common involves imitation, pretending, fantasy, freedom to improvise, to be able to make and break rules and to create surprise. One advantage of play is that it provides training for real life fighting and escape tactics. On the negative side, play does use up energy which could be expended on more immediate circumstances, like feeding and resting. A second advantage of play is that it promotes friendship and cooperation, but at the same time it could result in serious injuries. Lastly, play invites innovation – exploring and probing which is analogous to random genetic mutations. Yet play can be dangerous if it involves distractions from watching for dangerous predators. If the art in the caves is just an advanced form of play, Pfeiffer explains  why the benefits of it outweighed the costs in the time period between 29,000 and 20,000 BCE.

II Description of the Caves and Methodology
“The way in leads through a metal door, down a flight of stairs, through another metal door, to the threshold of the hall. It is pitch dark inside, and then the lights are turned on. Without prelude, before the eye has a chance to become intellectual, to look at any single feature, you see it whole, painted in red, black and yellow, a burst of animals, a procession dominated by huge creatures with horns. The animals form two lines converging from left and right, seeming to stream into a funnel-month, toward and into a dark hole which marks the way into a deeper gallery.”

The following is a description of the main hall or rotunda of the Lascaux in southern France. Lascaux is one of at least 200 caves in western Europe containing examples of the first prehistoric art. According to John Pfeiffer, about 90% of the sites are located in France and Spain. Most of the images are large animals and when humans appear, they are distorted. Inside the caves temperatures and humidity remain practically constant slowing down the deterioration process of the art. Two of the most astounding findings are that rather than the making of spontaneous images by solitary artists there was planning and collaboration going on in the organization and placement of figures.  Secondly, there was collaboration according to Andre Leroi-Gourhan. What was going on in the caves was a kind of theater for creating altered states of consciousness. Fire was used not just for heating, but for stage design. The gallery extends nearly three football field deep into the earth
“The ceilings of the Great Hall… is an undulating surface of hills, valleys, ripples in rock…every contour used by the artists to enhance the feeling of full-bodied living creatures. Red and black paintings surround two small holes bored into the side of the walls by natural forces. As you stare at these entranceways to another realm, suddenly and without voluntary control – the pictographs break the artificial visual reality that we assume…Suddenly the paintings encompassing the recessed pockets began to pulse, beckoning us inward. The added effects—a nighttime setting, firelight, shadows dancing on the walls and the resonation of aboriginal chanting – could induce even more profound experiences.”

Today we have many more facts about the occupiers of the caves than we did a century ago. For example, we know far more sites—both underground and open air; we have detailed inventories of most of the sites; we have maps showing the precise location of each and every image; many of the images have been data and we have the ingredients of many of the paints which were used to make the images. What we do not have is a grounded explanation of what is going on.

The stages of the exploration of the caves in Spain and then France has been documented by John Pfeiffer, among others. Briefly, exploration began in the 1880s by Don Marcelino Sanz de Sautuola discovery of painting he identified as extinct bison. He linked pieces he had found in France to paintings in Altamira and declared it was created in Paleolithic times. For a number of reasons archaeologists considered this a hoax and paid little attention. Early in the 20th century more caves were discovered and Abbe Henri Breuil spend years doing watercolors to preserve them in the late 1950s

Methodology
In order to begin to explain things what happened we need a method of approach. The questions we have must be organized in order to distinguish foundational questions which must be answered before others can be asked. We must also identify which questions can be left aside without getting in the way of developing an explanation. How do we know what is significant? There is a diversity in the forms of the caves. Some have single entrances while others have multiple entrances. Some have stone arches which allow light to penetrate while others have only small openings through which just one person at a time can squeeze. Once inside the caves, how important is the animal distribution on the walls? How important are the techniques used—engraving, painting or sculpture? How important are the size of the images and what does it say about their value? Once we make a choice about the highest and lowest priority of these considerations then the explanations as to what was really going on will become more clear.

III Altered States of Consciousness: Cave Routes
According to Leroi-Gourhan it is not only the caves that were designed to alter states of consciousness, but the routes leading to selected chambers as well as the chambers themselves. The process of getting there and what the researchers found when they arrived were part of the same designed ordeal with obstacles intentionally put in the way, according to Jean Clottes. From the standpoint of physical endurance, the caves can be broken down the way hiking trails often are—easy, medium and difficult. The easy caves have passages which are high (not requiring stooping down) and wide, with some lighting. This was probably accessible to the entire group. The medium size caves have lower ceilings requiring stooping and crawling and inadequate lighting requiring an individual to carry their own lighting. The passages themselves are uneven and covered with mud. The most difficult caves would require modern equipment equivalent to mining—hard hats, mechanics coveralls, deep treaded boots, ropes and wire ladders. They are needed to climb the sheer walls, pits and other hazards. These hazards created opportunities for altered states.

It might not be too far-fetched to say that the more difficult the route, the greater the altered state would result. The deeper chambers were not for all groups, but probably for special initiation rituals conducted by specialists. The easiness or difficulty of the journey through the caves must have corresponded to grades of secrecy in prehistoric ceremonies. Secret knowledge probably included the ways of producing special lighting, knowledge of echo effects to create illusion and knowledge in the painting of anamorphic effects. For example pictures are drawn in trick perspective so their appearance depends on the angle of viewing. The easier the access to the cave, the closer to common knowledge is of the entire group.

IV Discovery of Prehistoric Art in Three Stages
The discovery of the caves can be broken down into 3 periods. The first explorer, de Sautuola was more interested in the artifacts on the floor of the caves rather than what was on the walls and ceilings. Nevertheless, the discovery of the paintings was billed as the work of prehistoric artists. The experts believed this was a hoax because the paint was so fresh and because there were no traces of soot. They didn’t bother to investigate. This cave was located in Alta Mira in the foothills of Northern Spain.

In 1895 cave art was discovered in France. In 1901 three more discoveries of cave art were reported, two just outside Les Eyzies and one in the Pyrenees. From the turn of the century to roughly 1960 a remarkable Catholic priest, Henri Breuil, dedicated his life to authenticating, recording and copying the art. His dedication was amazing:

During one of his visits to Altamira, Breuil painted 8 hours a day for three weeks, doubled up in crawl-in spaces lit by candles, making water color copies of the animals on the ceiling of the Great Hall.

Leroi-Gourhan succeeded Breuil. He sought to place the paintings and engravings in a chronological framework based primarily on sequences in the development of style. Starting in 1957 he spent three years visiting 66 out of 110 art caves and rock shelters known in France and Spain and counting and mapping positions of every one of 2,188 animal figures including horses, bison, mammoths, ibexes and oxen. He noted the tendency of certain animals to be located in certain parts of the caves. For example, 92% of oxen and bison are located in the central zone and 86% of horses. It is especially understandable that the difficult caves would lend themselves to altered states of consciousness even among the archaeologists studying them. Pfeiffer describes how easy it is to miss things that are there and to see things that aren’t there, for a great majority of the paintings are not obvious. The strain of looking takes its toll and self-hypnosis must be guarded against by taking frequent breaks.

V Competing Theories About the Discovery
Art for art’s sake
One theory about art in the cave is the “art for art sake” theory. This is the notion that some individuals had the leisure time for decorating themselves and their world. This is based on universalistic principles involving an appreciation of symmetry. This theory became more far-fetched because the art was done in subterranean locations, not easily accessible. Why would the people who made this put themselves in this position. Secondly, we find that people who lived under very harsh conditions also made art. This undermines the notion that societies must have a critical amount of leisure time in order to make art. Lastly, the paintings on the wall were by no means symmetrical.

Sympathetic hunting magic
A more common argument is art in the service of magic, specifically hunting and/or fertility magic. The idea is that the paintings on the wall would create a sympathetic relationship with the animal which they wanted to kill or breed. The problem with this theory is that only about 15% of upper Paleolithic bison images seem to be wounded. A bigger problem that Pfeiffer points out is that what was on the walls were not the animals that were actually hunted. Finally, the theory of hunting magic does not explain why Neanderthals didn’t paint on walls, despite the fact that they also hunted large animals and their diet included large portions of meat.

Conflicts between groups
A third explanation by Max Raphael argues that the cave art is expressions of antagonisms among social groups. For example, animals depicted in combat represent antagonistic clans. Animals which were depicted inside each other express alliances in social struggles. Against Breuil, Raphael claimed that images should be seen, not as isolated instances but should be studied as compositions. He further noted that different species tended to predominate in specific caves.

Levi-Straus structuralism
Also as a follower of Levi-Strauss structuralism Raphael believed that what was belief presented in the cave was a myth designed to overcome the contradiction of binary opposites. Then he divided the images of animals along with signs into  male and female and tried to explain what was going on as attempts to overcome this binary opposition. Leroi-Gourhan’s research was abandoned for a number of reasons one because:

  • The diversity of the topography of the caves makes it impossible to compare them with one another in terms of entrance, central region and  deep zones.
  • His classification system was too static and didn’t consider ecological changes in conditions which might affect the animals or signs drawn. The binary oppositions were too ahistorical.

Pulling the pieces together
David Lewis-Williams claims that Annette Laming-Emperaire and Andre Leroi-Gourhan made the greatest 20th century contribution to the study of Upper Paleolithic art. For one thing they agree with magical theories in that the difficulty of access meant that there were sacred intentions. However, that does not mean the animals were painted for any kind of food subsistence. Secondly, they gave up the notion that hunter gatherers in this time period had much to do with contemporary hunter-gatherers, so they resisted drawing from the sacred practices of hunter-gatherers in different climates and different ecological zones. Like other theorists they recognized that the art was of significant complexity and skill to abandon the notion that these Paleolithic hunters had a simple mental life. Like Max Rafael they believed all images should be studied as planned compositions.

Laming-Emperaire argued that the distribution maps should be developed according to the following criteria: position of the works in a cave; associated archaeological remains found with the work; how the work seemed to be used; and the content and form of representation. Leroi-Gourhan divided the animals found into four groups:

  • smaller herbivores—horses, ibexes, stags, reindeer, hinds
  • large herbivores—bison, aurochs
  • peripheral species—mammoth, deer, ibexes
  • dangerous animals—feline, bear, rhinoceros

He further divided the caves into a number of areas—entrances, central areas, and deep areas.

VI Magical Theatrically Theory

Pfeiffer’s thesis is that the paintings in the cave along with whatever rituals were enacted

were ingenious theatrical mimetic devices used by Homo sapiens (as opposed to Neanderthals) to coherently and efficiently process an information explosion that occurred between 30,000-20,000 BCE in Europe. This included better tools, knowledge of new materials and coordination of efforts of larger groups of people. One of the best ways of keeping conflicts of larger groups under control was the invention of a special kind of coming together. Paleolithic art had a group function—sharp increases in ritual and ceremony.

According to David Lewis-Williams, the caves were being used in a systematic way to alter states of consciousness with a sophistication that would make any stage director sit up and take notice.  For example, shadows were used to complete pictures. The experience of moving shadows causes images to appear and disappear. The use of fire also helped to create atmosphere. These altered states are not limited to visual but are also acoustic.

There is a material, neurological , not merely psychological basis for widespread shamanistic beliefs. Research has shown that low frequency drum-beats produce changes in the human nervous-system and induce trance states…There is thus a neurological explanation for shamanistic use of drums.” David Lewis-Williams

 VII Who did it? Tools and Social organization: Neanderthals vs Homo sapiens

The title of the Pfeiffer’s book is called The Creative Explosion because there was nothing to foreshadow its beginnings. Pfeiffer argues that people probably have been making pictures in the sand, decorating wood, animal hides and other perishable materials including their own bodies during earlier times but these works did not endure. The author searches for the reason for the explosion.  Why the art? Why 30,000-20,000 BCE?  Why in Western Europe?

Cro-Magnon attained many advantages over Neanderthals including the use of tools, the quality of their social life and their cultivation of natural resources. In terms of tools, they used more tools, a greater variety of tools and a greater variety of materials. They exploited these materials more efficiently than did Neanderthals. Lastly, Cro-Magnon drew on the material from greater distances, acquiring flint from between 50 and 100 miles away. Cro-Magnon also cultivated a wider range of plants and animals. Its social life included more people coming together for longer periods and communicating over larger distances.

Tool transformation
Compared to Neanderthals, Homo sapiens didn’t just make tools, they made tools for the development of tools. Homo sapiens made tools for working bone (ivory and antler). Furthermore unlike Neanderthals Cro-Magnon treated it differently than if it were flint. Bone is less brittle and softer than flint could be worked more readily to produce a number of otherwise impractical implements.

Another difference is that the tools of Homo sapiens took longer to make. Whereas Homo sapiens kept their tools, Neanderthals used their tools only for immediate use and then got rid of them. Therefore, Neanderthals put less effort into them. Homo sapiens also transformed the materials through heating and slow cooling. They did not simply accept the materials at hand in their natural state.            

Lastly the invention of the bow and arrow exploited the springing energy of the curve that the spear lacked. Compared to the spear the bow and arrow had more range and power. It was quieter, hence more of a surprise to whatever was being hunted. Furthermore, whereas a spear required vulnerability in that you have to spring out of a hiding place in order to throw it, using a bow and arrow would allow one to maintain cover, making its use less dangerous. Finally, the bow and arrow required less body preparation. With a spear, close fighting was required and injuries would be sustained. A bow and arrow is lethal at a distance. Homo sapiens were more ingenious in the use of fire. Whereas Neanderthals used fire, the fire  was started on flat-living floor surfaces whereas Homo sapiens  prepared hollows, encircled them in stone and scooped out the bottom to create a draft. While not all these tools and processes might have been used to create magical theatrics, it does show that we were in a more sophisticated position to exploit these materials when we were making magical theatrics.

Expanding social organization
Why expand sociality? Twenty thousand years ago maximum advancement was reached by glaciers. This occurred at the same time as an increased efficiency in tool making. With rising population and competition for resources, groups had choices to either join into larger groups or try to survive in smaller groups. For those groups who chose to join other groups there was an increasing reliance on the large scale killing of animals and exploiting a wider range of species—limpets, mussels, salmon and more and more plants. Hunting in large groups required creating loyalties extending beyond self and a few blood relatives to wider and wider communities. Interestingly, Randall White points out that largest cave sites have the most portable art, meaning these large groups are mobile. This inter-group organization was for groups that rely heavily on hunting reindeer. This demanded aggregations and greater mobility and monitoring wider regions because reindeer migration routes are less predictable than the routes of many other game.

People coming together for mass hunts do not go their separate ways in a hurry. Everyone has a share in the enterprise. There are rules for dividing the spoils, meat to be distributed and stored, dried or smoked or put into deep-freeze. (pg. 61)

These groups are more likely to push themselves to expand their verbal language skills:

As people came together in massive hunts, they had more to say to each other. Vocabularies must have expanded to keep pace with the increasing numbers of items to name, more ways of doing things and things to do, more kinds of everything from tools and tool making to hearths, pavements…more gradations of meaning, more people, more intricate relationships between people and things and between people and people. At the same time, there may have been trends working in the other direction. Language may have evolved words designed to save words, to improve the efficiency, convenience and the speed of communicating.

On the other hand, when people rely on smaller game they tend to work in smaller groups, dispersing in families. There is no basis for group inequality to emerge because there is nothing holding people together in larger groups. But when groups rely on larger game and engage in mass hunts, or a resource is concentrated in a coastal setting with a rich resource base, they stay in one place year-round. The relationships between groups then becomes an issue. This is not to say there was equality within Neanderthal societies. However, what inequalities existed were between individuals, not subgroups. One indicator of status differences between subgroups of Homo sapiens is the use of ornaments to indicate status. As far as we know Neanderthals did not have status ornaments.

VIII The Origins of Image-Making in Homo sapiens
Primary and secondary consciousness
According to Gerald Edelman, the fundamental cell type in brains are neurons. Neurons are then connected to other neurons by synapses. These connections are facilitated by the generation of neurotransmitters, which are chemical substances that allow electrical impulses to cross over from one neuron to another. From this crossing over Edelman says this is how consciousness emerges. He  divides consciousness into two types, primary and higher-order consciousness.

Primary consciousness includes chimps, most mammals, some birds and probably no reptiles. This world consists of being aware of things in the world and having mental images of them  in the present but not in the past and future. Animals with primary consciousness see the room the way a beam of light illuminates it. Only that which is in the beam is explicitly in the remembered present while everything else is in darkness.  It has long-term memory and can act on it. But it cannot be aware of that memory or plan an extended future for itself.

Higher order consciousness involves recognition by a thinking subject of his or her own acts or affectations. It has a model of the past and future in addition to the present. In higher order consciousness the subject is conscious of being conscious. This being can construct a socially based selfhood to model the world in terms of the past and the future. Why are we discussing this? Because it is connected to why only Homo sapiens, not Neanderthals, could have been co-creating magical theatrics.

Primary vs Higher Order Consciousness

Primary consciousness Category of Comparison Higher Order Consciousness
Awareness of things in the world Range of awareness Awareness of things in the world and awareness of self
Mental images in the present Mental Images and time Mental images in past, present and future
Has long-term memory but cannot be aware of it or act Range of long term memory Has long-term memory, can be aware of it and act on it
No Place of planning Yes
Some birds, most mammals, chimps, not reptiles Which species? Humans, dolphins, crows, ravens

Where do Neanderthals fit in?

How do we know Neanderthals didn’t paint in the caves? According to Lewis-Williams,

Neanderthals have a different type of consciousness and it precluded both image making and elaborate burial because of the neurological structure of their brains. Neanderthals could not:

  • remember and entertain mental imagery derived from a range of states of consciousness—introverted states, dreaming, altered states;
  • manipulate and share that imagery because they are not likely to have verbal language;
  • socialize that imagery or conceive of an alternative reality;
  • recognize a connection between mental images and two and three-dimensional images;
  • couldn’t recognize two and three dimensional representations of 3 dimensional  things in the material world and
  • couldn’t live in accordance with social distinctions beyond physical.

In sum: Neanderthals had the neurological potential to experience dreams and hallucinations but not to remember them in any significant way; to act upon them or to use them as a basis for social discrimination.

Neanderthals vs Homo sapiens States: Prospects for Magical Theatrics

Neanderthals Category of Comparison Homo sapiens

 

Primary consciousness Level of consciousness Higher order consciousness
Present oriented Hunting strategies Past and future oriented

Can foresee the migration of herds in particular times and places

Have it but not capable of long-term recollection of dreams and visions Range of long-term memory Improved memory made possible long-term recollections of dreams and visions
Could not conceive of a spirit world

No afterlife translated into burial sites

Implications for the spirit world Can construct those recollections into the spirit world

Afterlife translated into burial sites

No Verbal language  Yes
Without verbal language dreams and experiences cannot be spoken to others and consolidated Constrictions and possibilities of verbal language  With verbal language dreams and experiences can be spoken to others and consolidated
By not being able to socialize the imagery could not conceive of an alternative reality Ability to conceive an alternative reality By socializing the imagery we can conceive of an alternative reality

IX Magical Theatrics in the Service of Initiation Ceremonies
Art of memory
Pfeiffer argues that there are a number of ways of preparing the brain for altered states. These include sheer monotony—which includes solitary confinement; concentrating on a hypnotist’s words; isolating individuals in a dark soundproof chambers and immersing them under-water in tanks. Under all these conditions the brain begins to daydream. From this sensory deprivation in the caves the mind begins to wander. They are now in a middle zone. They have been pulled from the everyday world of moderate sensory information to a state of sensory deprivation. Now initiates are pulled to the other extreme of sensory saturation by sacred specialists. Sensory saturation includes dancing—slapping thighs, stamping on the ground or drumming. This intensifies and controls the twilight state. Percussion instruments and drums can affect the brain most strongly when it comes to evoking a twilight state. Drums stimulate the auditory cortex. Seven to nine beats per second is the same rhythm as brain waves. In this twilight state the person  loses their guard. This includes: the ability to doubt; ask questions; criticize; distinguish between cause and effect and differentiate between fantasy and reality.

Pfeiffer emphasizes the importance of involving all the senses. The richer the experience, the more associations are attached to it the more widespread is its ripple in the brain and its ultimate representation in the hierarchies and networks of memory. These include the sight of painted bison, drumbeats like bison hoof beats, singing and chanting high-imagery words describing bison stampeding and dance based on movements of bison on the run. It is not just visual stimulation which occurred but it was coupled by acoustic stimulation:

Caves are wonderful places for acoustic as well as visual effects. Underground ceremonies must have been designed to take advantage of and shatter the silence as well as the darkness, to bombard the ear as well as the eye…Imagine the sound of bullroarer nearby in an underground labyrinth, the sound of flutes rising high and clear as a human cry or a bird from some place impossible to locate.

A song sung inside a tube-like corridor would not be heard until someone passed directly in front of the opening directly across the sound beam, which is roughly the acoustical equivalent of a light switch or coming suddenly around a bend upon an illuminated painting….anamorphic music could be created as readily as anamorphic art—music unrecognizable from one position and taking on the shape of a known melody from another.

But it is not only changing the normal input of the senses that is important. Telling stories which link all the new information into a framework is vital. How can words be used to stimulate memory? Any words that evoke action and emotional commitment are more easily remembered.  Lastly, the ability to form images into the story serves memory well. The words should be middle level…not so abstract as to have no imagery, such as facts or statistics, but not so concrete as to limit the power of association and the power of suggestion.

Finally there is the perception of irregularity. This included bringing the participants to unfamiliar, alien and unpleasant places with significant changes in temperature, light and texture of the ground. These caves were cool in the summer and warmer in the winter. There is an intensity of shafts of light from the open air contrasted to the darkness of the caves. Both the floors and the ceilings were irregular. The floors were slippery in places with pits to fall into and rocks to trip over. The high contrast and unpredictability of perception has the effect of making people pay attention and alert, These may have the makings of flashbulb memories.

Initiation techniques
The initiation process was a device used for preparing people for imprinting new information about other people, places and objects. The psychological impact is that of shaking the individual up by trying to erase or undermine their everyday world. When a participant is confused and uncertain about what is happening or about to happen coupled with the fear of being lost and never finding one’s way out the individual is more willing to believe almost anything. Imagine an individual going for days in an initiation ceremony without seeing anything but rocks and then suddenly seeing a painting. The meaning of the painting would be even more vivid.

Techniques were used to make images appear suddenly. Those initiated might be brought to a certain spot, blindfolded and then shown the painting. Another technique is leading people around a sharp bend into an illuminated side chamber. Still another device would be to hide and then run from the hiding place with burning torches into a dark painted chamber. As the anthropologist Victor Turner says, the novice is betwixt and between: he is ungrounded in the world he knows, yet he is not born anew. He lives in a state of “liminality” or “fruitful darkness”.

It is not just the environmental atmosphere that must be changed, but also the appearance of the people doing the initiating. The shaman had to look different than in everyday life to capture attention. Props included masks, body painting, exotic ornaments and amulets. The sounds needed to be different, uttering antique words and phrases along with messages associated with novelty and surprise.

Altered states can be induced by sensory deprivation, fatigue, pain, fasting and ingestion of psychotropic substances. The most common hallucinations include: death/killing; aggression/fighting drowning or going underwater; flight; sexual arousal/intercourse and body transformation (fusing with animals and the experience of bodily distortions). People saw walls of the cave as a membrane between themselves and spirit world and placed objects into the walls and floors of caves to send fragments of animals back through the membrane into the spirit world. The powers of the underworld allowed people to kill animals, provided people responded in certain ritual ways, such as taking fragments of animals into the caves and inserting them into the membrane.

From play to art: the adaptive advantage of the art in the caves

At the beginning of this article I wrote that Pfeiffer discussed how the advantages of play outweighed the costs in energy use, injuries and danger relative to possible predators. The same well may be true for the art in the caves. Apparently, the advantage of training for real-life fighting and escape tactics would be especially important in hunting large herd animals, less than in fighting other groups. Also, the importance building and sustaining relationships outweighed the time lost to feeding and resting or in the loss of energy. It would seem that the cost of losing some time as individuals resting and feeding is more than paid back by the group feeding and resting which would occur after the result of group work.

Furthermore, the ritualistic aspect of art would promote friendships among strangers who do not share a high proportion of their genes. Though the rituals promoted less individual innovative thinking in terms of the ability of the individual to act creatively, as a social being would be enhanced because they would be able to deal with large numbers of people, complex social relationships and more complex tools. While some of the rituals lead to serious physical injuries, the overall benefits of these rituals for social creativity must have outweighed the costs. The possibility that these rituals would distract individuals for the reality of other predators is not realistic given the intensely social nature of humanity. People do not spend all their time in the caves. Further, they have already learned that these caves are safe from other animals or they wouldn’t have been chosen as sites. The caves are used in the service of pragmatic social ends: surviving in a cold environment with less diversity of resources, while initiating through ritual the next generation.

X Why Magical Theatrics Should Matter to Socialists
What is needed is not de-enchantment but re-enchantment
I would think that socialists being social, would be hip to what is going on with these caves. After all, we must not only point out the manipulative nature of enchantment, but we need to be dialectical and ask how we could use these techniques we just discussed to promote socialism. The construction of a sacred space (whether a church or a ballpark), a dramatized story, ritualized gestures, and the use of music and the arts to alter consciousness is not just superstition in the service of the ruling class. Come on! What went on the caves occurred between egalitarian hunter gatherers. Marx’s claim that religion is the opiate of the people does not apply in his primitive communism of these hunter-gatherers. It is part of our bio-evolutionary heritage to be interested in these things. The alternative to a reified otherworldly religion is not  de-enchantment of Max Weber, as so many dry-as-dust socialists seem to think. We must build a “this-worldly” pagan enchantment that is a foundation for socialist socialization for the next generation. The techniques used in the caves could be and were used for celebration of the change of seasons, pilgrimages, as well as just rites of passage ceremonies all informed by singing, dancing, sculpting, painting and mask-making.

Socialist holidays peppered throughout the year
Socialism has certainly had its events that could be claimed as peak experiences or even religious experiences. Anyone who had participated in a revolution knows these moments are euphoric and unforgettable. Anyone who participated in the Occupy Movement will not soon forget it. But what about budding socialists who have never had revolutionary experiences? What do we have to offer them in the way of inspiring collective experiences before a revolutionary process begins? Throughout the year religion, nationalism and sports which

typical Marxists think of as oppressive escapist institutions aren’t only that. Baseball has its opening day in April, the All Star game is in July and the World Series is in October. Religion has its holy days peppered throughout the year. Nationalism has its holidays – President’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving and Christmas. What is missing under socialism is a similar pageantry of rituals, joining in song and dance along with regular places to meet and celebrate. All of these things could build a theatrical stage scaffolding for extraordinary revolutionary events. Hunter gatherers in the cave knew this.

Rites of passage
There is a sad lack of yearly seasonal rituals that keep the fires burning between one revolutionary generation and the next. Religion, nationalism and sports all have ways of linking the important events of the year to the lifetime of the individual. Catholics have confirmation at roughly the age of nine and Hispanic Catholics have a Quinceañera around a girl’s 15th birthday. The socialist and communist movements used to have youth groups which initiated them into socialism. People of different ages were given very specific tasks to do relative to up-coming campaigns. There were socialist children’s magazines and books. In his book Ritual, Politics and Power, David Kertzer points out that the Communist Party in Italy once competed with the Catholic Church over the right to baptize. They did something similar at funerals. Socialists badly need to get re-involved in rites of passage once again: socialist births and baptism, coming of age rituals, socialist marriages and socialist deaths. We can’t cede this to religious traditions. We can learn how to do this from Cro-Magnon in the Ice Age caves.

Making pilgrimages
In San Francisco, once a year in July there is something called “LaborFest”. This is a month-long series of movies, talks, music, panels and plays held at various locations around the city. A comrade of mine would give a walking tour of downtown Oakland and revisit some of the various scenes of the General Strike in San Francisco. Between 50 and 100 people attended this walk every year. Most major cities in the United States have their version of special places connected to labor strikes. Why aren’t they celebrated? There could be LaborFests in every major city in Yankeedom!

In sports an individual might visit Cooperstown (Baseball’s Hall of Fame) for their birthday. Nationalism has its pilgrimages to the Washington monuments in the summer. What does socialism have to offer?? Would it be possible to have an experience of socialism before the revolution, Socialist need to be swept away. We need some Love Potion Number 9.

Singing and dancing
Of course the mighty Internationale heads any list of music for socialists. Any of you who have seen the movie Reds will remember the scene of Jack Reed talking to Russian workers as the Internationale swelled in the background and the red flags flew. However, we have much more than just this song. Some of the best radical songs in the world came out of the Industrial Workers of the World songbook. Why aren’t these songs sung on a regular basis throughout the year by socialists, not just by Wobblies? Do socialists dance? Well of course we do, but not as much as we could. As Red Emma Goldman once said, “If I can’t dance to it, it’s not my revolution”.

Sacred sites and new calendars
In her book Romance of the Communist Party, Vivian Gornick reports that one of her interviewees told her of a co-operative housing development called United Workers Co-op Association consisting of two five-story buildings, each a block square. There were club rooms, meeting halls, a library, nursery schools, a community center, a print shop and an auditorium. People read, talked, held meetings, danced and flirted. It was a little city within a city. Janet Biehl, Murray Bookchin’s biographer, tells a story of how these places were a substitute home away from home for Murray. The buildings stayed open to the wee small hours of the morning. Why can’t we have these kinds of sacred sites again? During and after the French Revolution the leaders created a revolutionary calendar to symbolize breaking with the old world. Capitalism is failing badly. Don’t we need to get busy with drafts of a new world socialist calendar?

Bringing it on home
To summarize, what we need is designated times of the year, perhaps every season, in which socialists in every major city come together, sing and dance across generations, celebrating “holy days”, the birthdays of the great socialists. At the same gatherings, there is time allotted to celebrate rites of passage and make pilgrimages to the scenes of the great labor struggles in that city.

I have no doubt many pagan socialists like Starhawk have already stepped forward to connect political activity with pagan rituals. There are many more processes to be connected and many more people are needed. Any socialists who have an appreciation for theatre, interior design and social psychology should step forward. More earth, less air; more water, less air; more fire, less air. This last section is heavily dependent on my article Re-enchanting Socialism: How Not to Throw the Baby With the Bath Water

Conclusion
I began my article by challenging the notion that all the arts are simply secular disciplines done to either satisfy the public or to find personal meaning. I argue that all the arts were once in the service of creating magical altered states of consciousness. I review other for theories of what went on in the caves: art for art’s sake; sympathetic hunting magic; conflicts between groups and Levi’s Strauss’s structuralism. I describe the sites and the routes in the caves and argue against the belief that the paintings in the caves could have been done by Neanderthals. I describe two states of consciousness, primary and higher order consciousness and conclude that only Homo sapiens have higher states of consciousness that could have made those paintings. I conclude that the paintings were done as part of a theatrical set to create an initiation ordeal. I close my article by arguing that socialists could learn a great deal from these rituals and the theatrical set could vitalize socialist rites of passage, pilgrimages, observation of yearly holidays as well as singing and dancing in the service of creating a socialist neo-pagan culture in the 21st century.

The post Magical Theatricality in the Ice Age Caves: Why it Should Matter to Socialists first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Barbara MacLean.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/magical-theatricality-in-the-ice-age-caves-why-it-should-matter-to-socialists/feed/ 0 541978
A Battle for Humane Consciousness in a War Against Truth: Exposing the Dark Arts of War https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/a-battle-for-humane-consciousness-in-a-war-against-truth-exposing-the-dark-arts-of-war/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/a-battle-for-humane-consciousness-in-a-war-against-truth-exposing-the-dark-arts-of-war/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 13:04:12 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159502 The total liberation and unification of Africa under an All-African Socialist Government must be the primary objective of all Black revolutionaries throughout the world. It is an objective which, when achieved, will bring about the fulfillment of the aspirations of Africans and people of African descent everywhere. It will at the same time advance the […]

The post A Battle for Humane Consciousness in a War Against Truth: Exposing the Dark Arts of War first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The total liberation and unification of Africa under an All-African Socialist Government must be the primary objective of all Black revolutionaries throughout the world. It is an objective which, when achieved, will bring about the fulfillment of the aspirations of Africans and people of African descent everywhere. It will at the same time advance the triumph of the international socialist revolution, and the onward progress towards world communism, under which, every society is ordered on the principle of –from each according to his ability, to each according to his needs.
— Osagyefo Kwame Nkrumah

Jeremy Kuzmarov was kind to spend an hour with me, since I am much more polemical and hyperbolic than his measured writing belies. I’ve written numerous times why it is I am now switched to write THAT way, and there is no need for me to defend my rhetoric and utilizing some of the 11 forms of propaganda Edward Bernays and Goebbels and Madison Avenue and Hasbara Industry deploy.

We talked about his new book, Warmonger: How Clinton’s Malign Foreign Policy Launched the US Trajectory from Bush II to Biden, Clarity Press, Inc., 2023.

Here, this book is divided into thirteen chapters and provides a comprehensive overview of Clinton’s foreign policy across the globe. Utilizing archival research from the Clinton Presidential Library, oral history interviews, alongside a plethora of newspapers and scholarship focusing on the 1990s, Kuzmarov provides succinct overviews of high-profile and well-known events, such as genocide in the Balkans and in Rwanda, and lesser-known case studies such as the administration’s disastrous reworking of the Russian economy or Clinton’s support for dictators in Africa. Kuzmarov makes the salient point that despite rhetoric to the contrary, Clinton was never interested in human rights or humanitarianism when it came to intervention. Rather, the administration was quick to set aside human rights when it served its interests.

Cover of Warmonger (photo of Bill Clinton)

With those Clinton years, we have had the perfect caldron of the witch’s and devil’s brew of a slim-ball, a Cecil Rhodes and Chatam House rodent, and not America’s first Black or Republican president, Clinton working his dark arts with the neo-cons and neoliberals and the imperialists.

Here’s the book’s blurb:

During the 2016 presidential election, many younger voters repudiated Hillary Clinton because of her husband’s support for mass incarceration, banking deregulation and free-trade agreements that led many U.S. jobs to be shipped overseas. Warmonger: How Clinton’s Malign Foreign Policy Launched the Trajectory from Bush II to Biden, shows that Clinton’s foreign policy was just as bad as his domestic policy. Cultivating an image as a former anti-Vietnam War activist to win over the aging hippie set in his early years, as president, Clinton bombed six countries and, by the end of his first term, had committed U.S. troops to 25 separate military operations, compared to 17 in Ronald Reagan’s two terms. Clinton further expanded America’s covert empire of overseas surveillance outposts and spying and increased the budget for intelligence spending and the National Endowment for Democracy (NED), a CIA offshoot which promoted regime change in foreign nations.

The latter was not surprising because, according to CIA operative Cord Meyer Jr., Clinton had been recruited into the CIA while a Rhodes Scholar at Oxford, and as Governor of Arkansas in the 1980s he had allowed clandestine arms and drug flights to Nicaraguan counter-revolutionaries (Contras) backed by the CIA to be taken from Mena Airport in the western part of the state. Rather than being a time of tranquility when the U.S. failed to pay attention to the gathering storm of terrorism, as New York Times columnist David Brooks frames it, the Clinton presidency saw rising tensions among the U.S., China and Russia because of Clinton’s malign foreign policies, and U.S. complicity in terrorist acts.

In so many ways, Clinton’s presidency set the groundwork for the disasters that were to follow under Bush II, Obama, Trump, and Biden. It was Clinton―building off of Reagan―who first waged a War on Terror ridden with double standards, one that adopted terror tactics, including extraordinary rendition, bombing and the use of drones. It was Clinton who cried wolf about human rights abuses and the need to protect beleaguered peoples from genocide to justify military intervention in a post-Cold War age. And it was Clinton’s administration that pressed for regime change in Iraq and raised public alarm about the mythic WMDs―all while relying on fancy new military technologies and private military contractors to distance US shady military interventions from the public to limit dissent.

We spent a lot of time looking at the history of Covert Action Bulletin. We talked about language, the so-called alternative press, what real liberalism was and how liberalism now is an evil spin factory of the neoliberal variety.

    • controlled opposition
    • limited hangout
  • Discredit, disrupt, and destroy
  • Operation Paperclip
  • ECHELON
  • MKUltra
  • DARPA

The list goes on and on and on. Phoenix Program? We know Covert Programs need Covert Action.

LANGUAGE. That whole concept of people berating me for reading CAM articles, for citing guys like William Blum or Douglas Valentine or Jeremy, it’s all based on the language of the oppressed, the amnesiac, colonized, lobotomized, brainwashed, miseducated, anesthetized.

The idea of the CIA being the premier agency of no good, murder incorporated, full of machinations on economic hits and country destabilization.

Yes, the Mossad has taken CIA and British intelligence agencies up a few notches, but we both agree that this was planned, or part of the plan.

You can go to Covert Action Magazine and hit any number of topic arenas you might fancy as your primary interest: social justice issues including intervention, war, covert action, intelligence, political economy, imperialism, labor, repression, surveillance, media, racial justice, sexism, environmentalism, and immigration

By Chris Agee

CovertAction Magazine began publishing in 1978 as a newsletter called Covert Action Information Bulletin (CAIB) and later as CovertAction Quarterly (CAQ). The magazine developed a following not as a conspiracy-theory-related publication, but as a source for reliable, consistent, and accurate investigative reporting.

Originally, CAIB was a watchdog journal that focused on the abuses and activities of the CIA, yet it has gradually evolved into a more general, progressive investigative magazine.

CAIB was cofounded and copublished by Ellen Ray, William Schaap, and Louis Wolf, along with former CIA agents such as James and Elsie Wilcott, and Philip Agee, author of Inside the Company: CIA Diary and On The Run.

Following in the tradition of CounterSpy Magazine (1973-1984)—with whom the founders of CAIB had originally worked—highlights of CAIB included the notorious “Naming Names” column, which printed the names of CIA officers under diplomatic cover. These were tracked through exhaustive research in the State Department Biographic Register and various domestic and international diplomatic lists.

This column, and others like it, came to an end in 1982 when the Intelligence Identities Protection Act was signed into law by Ronald Reagan. CAIB had to end the “Naming Names” column, but more significantly, the act required that magazines such as CAIB be more wary about the names they published within the articles of their contributors. This was particularly significant after December 1975 when Richard S. Welch, a CIA station chief, was assassinated in Athens, Greece. CounterSpy was criticized by both the CIA and the press for its exposure of the agent’s name.

While almost every issue focused on the CIA and its activities in regions like Central America and Southeast Asia, CAIB also covered the CIA interference in the domestic media and on university campuses, as well as a wider range of domestic and international political issues. Occasionally, CAIB dedicated entire issues to surveillance technologies, the U.S. prison system, the environment, Mad Cow disease, AIDS, ECHELON, media cover-ups, Iraqi sanctions, and the so-called “war against drugs.”

Contributing authors have included intellectuals, writers, and activists such as Noam Chomsky, Howard Zinn, Michael Parenti, Sara Flounders, Philip Agee, John Pilger, Ramsey Clark, Leonard Peltier, Allen Ginsberg, Diana Johnstone, Laura Flanders, Edward S. Herman, and Ward Churchill.

In 1992with Issue 43, CAIB changed its name to CovertAction Quarterly (CAQ). As a 64 to 78-page magazine published four times a year, the publication became fondly known as the magazine “recommended by Noam Chomsky; targeted by the CIA.” CAQ had a reputation for beating to the punch more mainstream standard-bearers, such as the New York Times.

In 1995, it covered the genocide in Rwanda and U.S. complicity in those events, years before any other publication cared to notice; it ran in-depth investigative articles on the rise of homegrown militias before the Oklahoma bombing; and it was the first U.S. publication to reveal the existence of ECHELON (the security agencies’ surveillance software).

CAQ was the regular recipient of the annual Project Censored awards for the Top 25 Censored Stories.

Twenty-eighteen was the 40th anniversary of the founding of CovertAction and its publisher Covert Action Publications, Inc. Former writers and publishers of CAIB and CAQ relaunched as CovertAction Magazine (CAM).

The relaunch team also intends to publish several books including an annual compilation of the best of CAM, an encyclopedia of espionage and a republication of CIA Diary: Inside the Company and On The Run by Philip Agee, volumes which will include Philip Agee’s iconic articles and papers.

The relaunch team is headed up by the co-founder, publisher and writer, Louis Wolf, as well as our tried and true investigative journalists, professors, organizers, funders, proofreaders and legal representation. The expanded team includes Chris Agee, William Blum, Jack Colhoun, Michel Chossudovsky, Mark Cook, Jennifer Harbury, Bill Montross, Immanuel Ness, James Petras, Karen Ranucci, Stephanie Reich, Hobart Spalding, Victor Wallis and Melvin L. Wulf, all of whom worked with, and/or wrote for, the magazine in the past.

New talent that has come on board for the relaunch include Sam Alcoff, Steve Brown, Tom Burgess, Hester Eisenstein, Victoria Gamez, David Giglio, Josh Klein, Maureen LaMar, Michael Locker, and Chuck Mohan, to name a few.

All together, the expanded team specializes in a variety of social justice issues including intervention, war, covert action, intelligence, political economy, imperialism, labor, repression, surveillance, media, racial justice, sexism, environmentalism, and immigration. See our masthead for more details.

CovertAction Magazine

The archives will illustrate the beginnings of the hard copy newsletter/magazine — Archives /CovertAction Magazine.

Archives - CovertAction Magazine

Interestingly enough, Jeremy has had his hit entry into the propaganda machine, Canary Mission, updated after his article appeared both on his Substack and in CAM: On the One-Year Anniversary of October 7, It is Clear We Were Not Told The Truth

Imagine that title’s subordinate first clause being replaced by any number of topics

  • On the One-Year Anniversary of the Planned SARS-CoV2 pandemic
  • On the One-Year Anniversary of the USS Liberty
  • On the One-Year Anniversary of September 11
  • On the One-Year Anniversary of Gulf on Tonkin
  • On the One-Year Anniversary of War on Terror
  • On the One-Year Anniversary of US Patriot Act
  • On the One-Year Anniversary of Bush, Biden, Obama, Trump Administrations
  • On the One-Year Anniversary of / / /

Pearl Harbor?

A large ship that is being hit by a large ship Description automatically generated with medium confidence

Sinking of the Lusitania?

A large ship in the water Description automatically generated

Atomic bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki?

Atomic bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki - Wikipedia

Here’s Jeremy’s ending to that article:

In that case, a British commission uncovered that the Lusitania—carrying more than 100 American passengers from the U.S. to Europe (over 1,000 died overall)—was rigged with explosives, though the destruction of the ship was blamed on Germany.

Winston Churchill, then the First Lord of the Admiralty, withheld rescue boats to maximize the number of deaths. The aim was to generate enough outrage for the U.S. public to want to go to war against Germany.[5]

Evidence indicates that Benjamin Netanyahu has adopted the same strategy of Winston Churchill and Franklin Roosevelt in sacrificing the lives of his own people in order to arouse enough anger to generate support for war.

Roosevelt and Churchill are today regarded as national heroes in their respective countries, though Netanyahu is likely to go down in history as a villain, along with his American sponsors. This is because the Israelis have failed to earn a heroic victory against Gaza and have horrified much of the world with the atrocities that they have committed.

Overview

Jeremy Kuzmarov spread anti-Israel conspiracy theories during Israel’s war against Hamas. He has also expressed hatred of Israel and is a supporter of the Boycott, Divestment, Sanctions (BDS) movement.

These Mitzvah Elves, man, this fucking Canary Mission putting thousands of good honest thinkers onto their web site to incite hatred and deplatforming and doxing and you name it:

Continuing with the hateful Canary Mission:

Hatred of Israel

On June 8, 2017, Kuzmarov published an article titled: “Six-Day War A Turning Point In Passionate Attachment To Israel.”

In the article, Kusmarov wrote how the Six-Day War transformed “Israel into an occupier” of “historic Palestine (West Bank and Gaza).”

Kuzmarov further stated in his article:

“The myth of Israel as a humane and embattled David fighting the Arab Goliath has been debunked in recent years, with world opinion expressing growing sympathy for Palestinians living under Israeli occupation.”

Canary Mission - Wikipedia

Read: Who is behind Canary Mission’s anonymous anti-Palestinian blacklisting website? by Hamzah Raza and Max Blumenthal·August 22, 2018

We talked about education, the movement within higher education to suppress and single out and even fire peace activists fighting to expose the lies of Israel, AIPAC, Jewish ties to genocide, both within Israel and outside it.

He’s an adjunct professor at Tulsa Community College, and he says his students in his history courses are for the most part open to learning and getting deep into the reveal, that is, to look at the real history of America, to get to the underbelly and to question their own blinded brainwashing and the grand and meta-hyper narratives of this land tis of thee.

My show, Finding Fringe, airs Wednesdays, 6 pm PST, this one with Jeremy is all the way to Sept. 3. Above is a great line-up via Zoom Doom, with amazing people I have followed over the past few years.

Topics of Discussion:

  • Operation Timber Sycamore – Unpacking the U.S.-backed CIA program and its impact.
  • Empowering al Qaeda – Examining how covert foreign support fueled extremist groups
  • Genocide of Syrian Minorities – Investigating the targeted violence against ethnic and religious communities

Featured Speakers:

  • Dan Kovalik – Human rights lawyer and author
  • Fiorella Isabel – Investigative journalist and analyst
  • Ben Arthur Thomason – Researcher and peace advocate
  • Vanessa Beeley – War correspondent and independent journalist

Tickets: Just $25! All proceeds support CAM’s independent investigative journalism and fundraising initiatives.

*****

Support CAM and send an email to KYAQ and thank them for running my hour-long weekly shows:

KYAQ Radio 91.7 FM

6 pm to 7 Wednesdays

July 2 will be Freedom Farms. Working the soil when leaving incarceration — https://freedom-farms.org/

July 9, reintroducing Sea Otters to Oregon with Chanel Hason, Elakha Alliance — https://www.elakhaalliance.org/

July 16, Nigeria, Madu Smart Ajaja, from Houston, talking about his country Nigeria.

Will Potter, Green is the New Red and his newest book, Little Red Barns, July 23: Animal rights and gag laws and designating farm animal rights folk as terrorists. == https://www.willpotter.com/

July 30 local woman, from Waldport, fighting the City Manager and road crew, Teresa Carter.

August 6 Wisconsin’s Draconian probation provisos on steroids, and other issues around the prison industrial complex with Kelly Kloss.

Max Wilbert, Bright Green Lies, and with CELDF, and an environmental sanity warrior. 13 August. — https://celdf.org/ Biocentric with Max Wilbert

Don Gomez, Stern Castle Publishing, August 20.

Taylor Yount, with her new book, My Sutured Mind: Poems of Healing Beyond Trauma, with local Ukrainian artist, Veta Bakhtina, artwork. August 27.

September 3, Jeremy Kuzmarov, author of five books, his latest being, Warmonger: How Clinton’s Malign Foreign Policy Launched the US Trajectory from Bush II to Biden and managing editor of Covert Action Magazine — https://covertactionmagazine.com/

Zachary Stocks, Executive Director, Oregon Black Pioneers September 10 == https://oregonblackpioneers.org/

My interview June 27 with Jeremy Kuzmarov.

*****

I’m not sure if CAM has had Amaju Baraka on as a guest or writer, but I highly recommend his most recent interview here:

Palestine — The Black Alliance for Peace

Black Alliance for Peace Condemns the U.S. and Israeli Final Solution for Gaza and the West Bank
Justice Demands Action against Zionism, not Hypocritical Rhetoric from the States of the “West”

Just as Nazi Germany sought the total elimination of Jewish life, the state of Israel, with full U.S. support, is now openly pursuing the systematic annihilation of the people of Gaza, the acceleration of mass displacement in the West Bank, and the denial of Palestinian nationhood itself. Those who dare to speak out are vilified, censored, or stripped of their livelihoods, ensuring complicity through coercion. The Black Alliance for Peace rejects this moral and political blackmail. True solidarity demands courage—refusing to be silenced or pacified as we witness, document, and resist this ongoing genocide. History will judge not only the perpetrators but also those who stood by in cowardly silence…

Those with the power to do so can either take such measures or abdicate their humanity. Palestine will not be free until Zionism, along with all white supremacist ideologies, is defeated. BAP will continue to do everything in its power to ensure the final defeat of global white supremacy that is materially grounded in imperialism.

We Stand With Iran 19 June 2025 By A-APRP

The illegal zionist state of Israel started bombing Iran on Friday, June 13th, 2025. The aerial bombing coincided with the assassination of a number of scientists, generals and civilians. This unprovoked, criminal assault was accompanied by sabotage of government facilities, drone attacks on civilian infrastructure and the unleashing of internal cells loyal to the west, determined to dismantle the Iranian state. Taken as a whole the military assault is eerily reminiscent of the 2011 attack on Libya that killed Muammar Gaddafi and devastated Africa’s most progressive nation state.

This is all done to ensure US dominance in the region under the pretext of stopping Iran from developing nuclear weapons. The capitalist mainstream media, the US Government, and Israel are claiming Israel is protecting itself from a powerful nuclear neighbor. But a careful analysis reveals a quite different reality. Firstly, Israel is the state that possesses nuclear weapons. They are aggressors claiming to be victims. Secondly Israel is nothing more than a proxy of US led imperialism, which wants to economically and militarily dominate the region. This is part of the imperialist plan to dominate the world.

The zionist state of Israel was created to serve the interests of imperialism by establishing an imperialist fortress in Western Asia.

Last Gasp Of A Dying Monster (The Imperialist Military Assault)

Imperialism (through the zionist entity in Israel) instituted regime change in Syria, and executed genocide in Gaza and the West Bank. Iran supports the Palestinians with arms, money, training and material. Iran is now being targeted for regime change.

We must also take note that these Imperialist/zionist forces are not confining their military activity to one country or region. While a new war rages in Iran, imperialism creates ongoing conflicts of various types in the Western Sahara, Eritrea, Zimbabwe, DRC, Sudan, Guinea Bissau, the Alliance For Sahelian States (which includes Mali, Niger, and Burkina Faso), Venezuela, Nicaraqua, Cuba, North Korea, Haiti, Russia, China and other places throughout the world. This is in fact an imperialist policy of Full Spectrum Domination.

The U.S. has at least 45 military bases surrounding Iran and the US has already threatened Iran declaring,“If Iran attacks any U.S. military bases we will bomb Iran with the likes they have never seen”. After lying about their involvement in the attacks on Iran by Israelis the US president went on to say, “We gave them a chance to negotiate a peace agreement and they wouldn’t agree to our terms.” So, now they will have to come to the negotiation table and agree to our terms.”

This is how the dying capitalists/imperialists act in their last stage of existence. They engage in multiple wars, terrorism and genocide as they are declining. They try to kill, terrorize as many people and nations as possible. But, they have been losing militarily, economically and politically everywhere. Including losing the propaganda war around the world.

The Significance of Pan-Africanism

A new wave of anti-neo colonial resistance that is sweeping Africa is reshaping oil and gas politics, challenging imperialist dominance, and aligning with the BRICS led push to “de-dollarize” the world’s economy. This movement is driven by youth uprisings, military coups, formation of alliances, and rising ideological awareness that imperialism is the enemy of humanity.

*****

A couple of men holding guns AI-generated content may be incorrect.

Dan’s a regular CAM columnist: The War on Iran Has Been Long in the Making, and the U.S. Is Already a Party to It

This is one measure of the talent and deep thinkers over at CAM: Daniel Kovalik graduated from Columbia University School of Law in 1993. He then served as in-house counsel for the United Steelworkers, AFL-CIO (USW) until 2019.

While with the USW, he worked on Alien Tort Claims Act cases against The Coca-Cola Company, Drummond and Occidental Petroleum—cases arising out of egregious human rights abuses in Colombia.

The Christian Science Monitor, referring to his work defending Colombian unionists under threat of assassination, described Mr. Kovalik as “one of the most prominent defenders of Colombian workers in the United States.”

Mr. Kovalik received the David W. Mills Mentoring Fellowship from Stanford University School of Law and was the recipient of the Project Censored Award for his article exposing the unprecedented killing of trade unionists in Colombia.

He has written extensively on the issue of international human rights and U.S. foreign policy for the Huffington Post and Counterpunch and has lectured throughout the world on these subjects. He is the author of several books including The Plot To Overthrow Venezuela, How The US Is Orchestrating a Coup for Oil, which includes a Foreword by Oliver Stone; The Plot to Attack Iran: How the CIA and the Deep State Have Conspired to Vilify Iran; and with Jeremy Kuzmarov, Syria: Anatomy of a Regime Change.

Michael Parenti:

Jeremy and I talked about that, calling people like CAM writers and readers “nuts”, conspiracy nuts. Imagine that, so, these lobbies, these collective K=Street organizations and their legal squads/associations/groups, no, there are no conspiracies to COVER UP there!

Total number of registered lobbyists in the United States from 2000 to 2024

Yeah, so billions a year spent by lobbies — just call them protection rackets or overt and covert organizations/cartels representing not just special interest a or b, but collectively, representing the entire fucking corporations and groups just in one arena:

 

Nah, not undue influence? In 2024, the groups that spent the most on lobbying were the National Association of Realtors, U.S. Chamber of Commerce, the American Hospital Association, and the Pharmaceutical Research & Manufacturers of America.

1,517 (55.04%)

The number of pharmaceutical/health product lobbyists in the United States and the percentage who are former government employees, as of June 1, 2025.

You thought it was offensive weapons companies? Why, when the Military Mercenaries have their own taxpayer paid for mafia —

Military Departments:

Responsible for organizing, training, and equipping land forces.

Department of the Navy: Includes the Navy and Marine Corps, responsible for sea-based and amphibious operations.

Department of the Air Force: Responsible for air and space operations.

Other Key Components:

Joint Chiefs of Staff:

A group of high-ranking military officers who advise the President, Secretary of Defense, and National Security Council on military matters.

Unified Combatant Commands:

Eleven regional or functional commands responsible for military operations in specific areas or for specific functions. Examples include U.S. Central Command, U.S. Indo-Pacific Command, and U.S. Cyber Command.

Defense Agencies:

Various agencies that provide specialized support to the military departments and combatant commands, such as the Defense Intelligence Agency, National Security Agency, and Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA).

Do these agencies below need lobbies? They are already built into the system:

Department of Justice:

  • Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI): Investigates violations of federal law, including terrorism, cybercrime, and organized crime.
  • Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA): Enforces federal drug laws and combats drug trafficking.
  • United States Marshals Service (USMS): Protects the federal judiciary, apprehends fugitives, and manages seized assets.
  • Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives (ATF): Enforces federal laws related to alcohol, tobacco, firearms, and explosives.
  • Federal Bureau of Prisons (BOP): Manages the federal prison system.

Department of Homeland Security:

  • U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP): Secures US borders and enforces customs laws.
  • U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE): Enforces immigration and customs laws.
  • U.S. Secret Service (USSS): Protects national leaders and investigates financial crimes.
  • U.S. Coast Guard (USCG): Enforces maritime laws and conducts search and rescue.
  • Transportation Security Administration (TSA): Secures transportation systems.
  • Federal Protective Service (FPS): Protects federal buildings and property.

Other Federal Agencies:

  • U.S. Capitol Police: Protects the U.S. Capitol Building and grounds.
  • Amtrak Police Department: Provides law enforcement services for Amtrak’s national passenger rail system.
  • Internal Revenue Service (IRS) Criminal Investigation: Investigates tax fraud and other financial crimes.
  • Military Criminal Investigative Organizations: Each branch of the military has its own investigative service (e.g., NCIS for the Navy, OSI for the Air Force).
  • Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA) Police: Protects DIA facilities and personnel.

Some conspiracy, uh?

Organizations within the Department of Defense:

  • Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA): Provides military intelligence to warfighters, policymakers, and defense planners.
  • National Security Agency (NSA): Focuses on signals intelligence (SIGINT) and cybersecurity.
  • National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA): Provides geospatial intelligence (GEOINT), including imagery and mapping.
  • National Reconnaissance Office (NRO): Develops, acquires, launches, and operates reconnaissance satellites.
  • Army Intelligence: Provides intelligence support to the US Army.
  • Office of Naval Intelligence (ONI): Provides naval intelligence to the US Navy.
  • Air Force Intelligence: Provides intelligence support to the US Air Force.
  • U.S. Space Force Intelligence: Provides intelligence for space operations.
  • Marine Corps Intelligence: Provides intelligence for Marine Corps operations.
  • Coast Guard Intelligence: Focuses on maritime threats and homeland security.

Other key agencies:

  • Central Intelligence Agency (CIA): A civilian foreign intelligence service responsible for gathering, processing, and analyzing intelligence related to national security.
  • Department of Homeland Security (DHS) Office of Intelligence and Analysis: Focuses on homeland security intelligence.
  • Department of Energy Office of Intelligence and Counterintelligence: Deals with nuclear proliferation and energy-related intelligence.
  • Department of State Bureau of Intelligence and Research: Provides foreign policy intelligence to the State Department.
  • Department of the Treasury Office of Intelligence and Analysis: Focuses on financial intelligence related to national security.
  • Drug Enforcement Administration Intelligence Program: Focuses on drug-related intelligence.
  • Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) Counterintelligence Division: Investigates foreign espionage and other threats to national security.
  • Office of the Director of National Intelligence (ODNI): Oversees and coordinates the activities of the entire Intelligence Community.
  • National Counterterrorism Center (NCTC): A component of the ODNI, focused on counterterrorism intelligence.

War is a Very Expensive and Devil’s Bargain — The BIG LIE.

Now now, I really did not go off topic. CAM, Covert Action Magazine. Open it up, man. Just put in the Google “Ukraine and Covert Action Magazine.” Do that for any topic. “Covert Action Magazine and Gaza.” Etc.

Jeremy is a simple guy who believes in truth, and he questions the narratives and the agencies that are the mafias and cartels protecting the agencies, who are just economic hitmen, in that Racket, sir, Gen. Butler.

“Every government is run by liars. Nothing they say should be believed.”
― I.F. Stone

It would have been a hell of a conversation with Jeremy and Stone (R.I.P.):

To write the truth as I see it; to defend the weak against the strong; to fight for justice; and to seek, as best I can to bring healing perspectives to bear on their terrible hates and fears of mankind, in the hope of someday bringing about one world, in which men[and women] will enjoy the differences of the human garden instead of killing each other over them.
― Isidor Feinstein Stone

Listen to my interview with Jeremy of CAM here, KYAQ.

The enduring quality of the myth of the addicted army in many respects demonstrates America’s long-standing inability to come to terms with the moral consequences of the Vietnam War. By reimagining their soldiers as victims and the U.S. military defeat as a “tragedy,” Americans were able to deflect responsibility for the massive destruction and loss of life inflicted on the people of Southeast Asia and thus to avoid serious reconsideration of the ideological principles that rationalized the American intervention. The silencing and demonizing of dissenting voices, including antiwar GIs typecast as psychopathic junkies, aided in this process.”
— Jeremy Kuzmarov in “The Myth of the Addicted Army”

With remarkable continuity, police aid was used not just to target criminals but to develop elaborate intelligence networks oriented towards internal defense, which allowed the suppression of dissident groups to take place on a wider scope and in a more surgical and often brutal way. In effect, the U.S. helped to modernize intelligence gathering and political policing operations, thus magnifying their impact. They further helped to militarize the police and provided them with a newfound perception of power, while schooling them in a hard-line anticommunism that fostered the dehumanization of political adversaries and bred suspicion about grass-roots mobilization…… Although the U.S. was not always in control of the forces that it empowered and did not always condone their acts, human rights violations were not by accident or the product of rogue forces betraying American principles, as some have previously argued. They were rather institutionalized within the fabric of American policy and its coercive underpinnings.
— Jeremy Kuzmarov in “Modernizing Repression: Police Training, Nation-Building and the Spread of Political Violence in the American Century,” Diplomatic History, April 2009

The post A Battle for Humane Consciousness in a War Against Truth: Exposing the Dark Arts of War first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Paul Haeder.

]]> https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/a-battle-for-humane-consciousness-in-a-war-against-truth-exposing-the-dark-arts-of-war/feed/ 0 541945 Why a Hong Kong law that is eroding press freedom is also bad for business https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/why-a-hong-kong-law-that-is-eroding-press-freedom-is-also-bad-for-business/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/why-a-hong-kong-law-that-is-eroding-press-freedom-is-also-bad-for-business/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 12:31:23 +0000 https://cpj.org/?p=493634 New York, June 30, 2025—Hong Kong, an international financial hub and once a beacon of free media, is now in the grip of a rapid decline in press freedom that threatens the city’s status as a global financial information center.

Three journalists told CPJ that investigative reporting on major economic events, a cornerstone of Hong Kong’s financial transparency, has nearly disappeared amid government pressure and the departure of major outlets. 

The sharp decline in press freedom, the journalists said, is a direct result of the National Security Law. This law, enacted on June 30, 2020, was imposed directly by Beijing, bypassing Hong Kong’s local legislature, and included offenses for secession, subversion, terrorist activities, and collusion with foreign forces, with penalties ranging from a three years to life imprisonment.  

In the five years since it was enacted, authorities have shut down media outlets and arrested several journalists, including Jimmy Lai, the founder of one of Hong Kong’s largest newspapers, the pro-democracy Apple Daily. Several major international news organizations have either relocated or downsized their operations in Hong Kong, leading to a decline in reporting on the city and its financial hub.

“Hong Kong’s economic boom happened because journalists could work without interference,” said a veteran reporter with 11 years’ experience in television, newspapers, and digital platforms in Hong Kong, who spoke to CPJ on condition of anonymity due to security concerns.

While markets still function, at least three media professionals told CPJ that the erosion of press freedom — often overlooked — is a key factor behind Hong Kong’s fading financial appeal to market participants. One reporter described the media as “paralyzed.” 

Another hastily passed security law enacted in March 2024 in Hong Kong further deepened fears that it would be used to suppress press freedom and prosecute journalists.

Jimmy Lai walks through the Stanley prison in Hong Kong in 2023.
Jimmy Lai walks through the Stanley prison in Hong Kong in 2023. (Photo: AP/Louise Delmotte)

“There has never been an international financial center in history that operates with restrictions on information,” Simon Lee, an economic commentator and former assistant CEO of Next Digital Group, the parent company of Apple Daily, told CPJ.

Hong Kong long served as a base for reporting on China’s economy and power structures, said a former financial journalist on the condition of anonymity, citing safety concerns.

“Most Hong Kong-listed companies come from the mainland [China]. Foreign media used Hong Kong to observe China’s economic operations or wealth transfers,” the former financial journalist told CPJ. “Now the risks feel similar to reporting from inside China.”

Crackdowns, shutdowns, and an exodus of major media

Since the introduction of the National Security Law in 2020, at least eight media outlets have shut. These included Apple Daily, news and lifestyle magazine Next Magazine, both published by Lai’s Next Digital group, and the online outlet Stand News, after they were raided by authorities.

At least four other media organizations — Post852, DB channel, Citizen News, and FactWire — ceased operations voluntarily, citing concerns over the deteriorating political environment.

Reporting was also criminalized in several cases, with journalists prosecuted for “inciting subversion” or “colluding with foreign forces.”  

China had the world’s highest number of imprisoned journalists in CPJ’s latest prison census — 50 in total, including eight in Hong Kong.

The New York Times moved part of its newsroom to Seoul in 2020. In March 2024, Radio Free Asia closed its Hong Kong office, and in May, The Wall Street Journal relocated its Asia headquarters to Singapore.

 “With fewer foreign correspondents based in the city, there’s simply less reporting on Hong Kong,” the former financial journalist told CPJ. “As a result, the city’s economy may receive less objective attention on the global stage.”

The former financial journalist said that one of the biggest losses after the security law was the disappearance of Apple Daily. Unlike most local media, which focused on routine market updates, Apple Daily connected business to politics and mapped interest networks — an increasingly rare practice.

Copies of the last issue of Apple Daily arrive at a newspaper booth in Hong Kong on June 24, 2021. (Photo: AP/Vincent Yu)

Next Digital, through Apple Daily, built a reputation for investigative financial reporting. A former staff member told the BBC that the company once spent over 100,000 yuan (US$14,000) tracing dozens of property owners to uncover a developer’s hidden ties with a bank.

“From a financial news perspective, one of our biggest problems is losing Apple Daily,” the former financial journalist told CPJ.

Local business reporting also fades away

As Hong Kong’s financial hub reputation comes under question, stories on high unemployment rates, struggling small businesses, and store closures are increasingly out of sight.

“One direct effect is feeling increasingly unable to grasp what’s happening in the city; important information no longer seems easy to access,” Lee said. “Previously, competition among professional outlets encouraged source sharing and helped maintain a power balance. Now, one-way government-controlled information faces little resistance.”

Lee told CPJ that changes in Hong Kong’s media landscape are particularly evident in major financial events, pointing to the coverage of the 2024 sale of Li Ka-shing’s port assets, in which local outlets failed to question the deal’s structure, rationale, or political implications.

“Beijing called it a national security matter, and the other side of the story disappeared,” Lee told CPJ. “Many focus on the judicial system when discussing fairness, but true fairness also depends on the free flow of information … Without information freedom, public oversight fades, and the market’s system of checks and balances collapses.”

Lee also cited the case of Alvin Chau, a casino tycoon in Macao who was sentenced in 2023 to 18 years for illegal gambling. While foreign media uncovered his alleged links to oil smuggling operations to North Korea, local media offered little follow-up.

“These investigations and reports simply no longer exist,” Lee said.

Sources can’t speak freely

Two journalists told CPJ they have noticed increasing reluctance from interviewees. 

During previous years of the Annual Budget Speech, Hong Kong’s yearly announcement of its public spending and economic plans, the media would host analysis shows with economists debating government spending and policies. 

“We would ask about the fiscal surplus, support for the poor, and whether measures were targeted,” the veteran reporter told CPJ, adding that now, “only one professor is willing to speak openly.”

Lee told CPJ that the atmosphere of “not being allowed to criticize” the broader structure or government policy has also extended to the reporting on how financial markets operate.

Market participants should be free to take either optimistic or pessimistic views of the economic outlook, Lee told CPJ, adding that today in Hong Kong, it is discouraged to express pessimism, and even silently shifting toward defensive investment strategies or risk-averse behavior may be interpreted as making a political statement.

“It’s hard for any place with such high information costs to remain a global financial hub,” Lee said. “Because even pulling back on investment can send a signal. If investors are accused of intentionally dragging down the market just because they try to hedge or take a cautious view, they may decide it’s safer to avoid the market altogether.”

In response to CPJ’s request for comment, a Hong Kong government spokesperson referred CPJ to a statement that said the security law has enabled the city to “make a major transition from chaos to order” and “the business environment has continuously improved,” while press freedom is protected under the law.


This content originally appeared on Committee to Protect Journalists and was authored by CPJ's Asia-Pacific program staff.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/why-a-hong-kong-law-that-is-eroding-press-freedom-is-also-bad-for-business/feed/ 0 541938
To Fund Tax Cuts for the Rich, GOP Budget Bill Would “Take a Sledgehammer” to Healthcare for Millions https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-a-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-a-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 12:13:55 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d19455d0b63a2ffdc5f3f0e8b690647f Seg1 bbb

Senate lawmakers are debating President Trump’s 940-page so-called big, beautiful bill as Republicans race to meet a Trump-imposed July 4 deadline and are set to vote on key amendments. Senate Republicans have deepened the cuts to Medicaid while cutting taxes for the wealthy and increasing the national deficit. “Basically, you have Republicans taking food and medicine and other things away from vulnerable people in order to finance tax cuts for the rich,” says David Dayen, executive editor of The American Prospect.

Dr. Adam Gaffney, a critical care physician and professor at Harvard Medical School, co-authored a report that found the bill could lead to 1.3 million Americans going without medications, 1.2 million Americans being saddled with medical debt, 380,000 women going without mammograms, and over 16,500 deaths annually. “I work in the ICU. I see patients with life-threatening complications of untreated illness because they didn’t get care because they couldn’t afford it. What happens when we add to that number massively?” says Gaffney.


This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/to-fund-tax-cuts-for-the-rich-gop-budget-bill-would-take-a-sledgehammer-to-healthcare-for-millions/feed/ 0 541989
Connecticut’s New Towing Law Will Help Some, but Not All, Drivers. Here’s What They Told Us. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/connecticuts-new-towing-law-will-help-some-but-not-all-drivers-heres-what-they-told-us/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/connecticuts-new-towing-law-will-help-some-but-not-all-drivers-heres-what-they-told-us/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/connecticut-drivers-towing-law-reform by Dave Altimari, Ginny Monk and Shahrzad Rasekh, The Connecticut Mirror

This article was produced for ProPublica’s Local Reporting Network in partnership with The Connecticut Mirror. Sign up for Dispatches to get stories like this one as soon as they are published.

A Hartford woman never saw her car again after it was towed while she sat in housing court fighting an eviction.

A home care worker had her car towed while she hurried to assist a patient down the stairs.

A young man lost his car and slipped into financial instability after he mistakenly put his apartment’s parking sticker in the wrong spot.

Late last month, Connecticut lawmakers, following a series of stories by The Connecticut Mirror and ProPublica, passed sweeping reforms to the state’s towing laws that will address many of the issues drivers have complained about. The stories highlighted how towing companies can begin the process to sell people’s cars after 15 days, one of the shortest windows in the country.

Reporters heard from dozens of drivers across Connecticut who had to pay exorbitant fees or had their vehicles sold when they couldn’t afford the charges. Many told reporters about the severe consequences they experienced after their cars were towed or sold, including the loss of jobs, personal mementos and housing.

While some people’s cars might not have been towed under the new law, which takes effect Oct. 1, it doesn’t solve all the problems that vehicle owners raised.

Here are some of their stories, as well as whether the changes in the new law would have helped them.

Towing Home Health Aides

Not fixed: The bill does not address this issue.

Home care worker Maria Jiménez circled the Hartford apartment complex for low-income seniors, looking for a place to park. Jiménez drives patients to and from errands like doctor’s appointments and grocery shopping. Her patient that day last November used a cane, and Jiménez planned to park close so that her patient wouldn’t have to walk too far.

Unsuccessful, Jiménez stopped in front of the building’s entrance.

“I turned on the hazard lights and left the car on, just long enough to let her know I had arrived, since I didn’t have her phone number,” she said. Jiménez said she told a few bystanders she would be right back and asked them to keep an eye on her car.

She said she went inside only briefly, and when she returned, the car was gone. Bystanders told Jiménez the car had been towed and that they’d pleaded with the truck’s driver, to no avail.

Tracy Wodatch, president and CEO at Connecticut Association for Healthcare at Home, said many of her members complain about getting ticketed or towed when they’re doing their jobs helping people.

When it happens frequently enough at a particular complex, she said, an agency might speak with the landlord to ask for a designated spot. But there isn’t a statewide mandate.

New Jersey passed a law in 2018 allowing home health care workers, visiting nurses and others to apply for a placard similar to an accessible parking tag to place in their cars.

“Maybe we can talk to the legislators off session to see if there’s anything we can do,” Wodatch said.

The company that towed Jiménez, MyHoopty.com, was in Watertown, and Jiménez was stranded over 30 miles away in Hartford. “How will I get there if I don’t have a car?” she recalled thinking.

MyHoopty owner Michael Festa said the vehicle was parked in the fire lane without its hazard lights on for 17 minutes before it was towed and that the apartment complex had hired MyHoopty to prevent such parking violations.

“This is a critical safety issue, particularly at an elderly housing complex where the emergency access can be a matter of life and death,” Festa said. (MyHoopty has appeared in other stories in our series.)

Get in Touch

If you have information about health workers and caregivers being towed while on the job, email Dave Altimari at daltimari@ctmirror.org or Ginny Monk at gmonk@ctmirror.org, or call 203-626-4705.

The apartment complex owners didn’t respond to calls and emails for comment.

Jiménez said she makes about $290 a week. By the time she got to MyHoopty, the company told her the bill was more than $400.

Her husband footed the bill. But it wasn’t easy: “The only reason I could afford it is because I work mornings, I work nights,” he said.

Short Meters and Unpaid Tickets

Not fixed: The bill does not address this issue.

Marie Franklin paid the parking meter and dashed into Hartford housing court for a December 2023 hearing that would determine if she would get evicted from her apartment. She worried about the parking. People can wait for hours for the judge to call their cases, but the Hartford Parking Authority limits nearby meters to two hours.

So people facing eviction sometimes run the risk of getting a parking violation, getting their cars towed or missing their names being called for hearings, which can cause them to lose their housing in a default judgement for not showing up to court.

Joshua Michtom, a Hartford City Council member and an attorney who has represented children and parents in juvenile court, said although there’s a nearby parking garage, it’s more expensive and it fills up.

“You have to be there, but then you don’t know how long you’re going to have to wait,” Michtom said. “And the courts are not particularly forgiving if you’re not there the moment your case gets called.”

When Franklin’s name was finally called, a judge rejected her plea to stave off eviction. Dejected and stressed about losing her home, she walked out of court only to discover her 2015 Volvo was gone. Franklin had more than a dozen unpaid parking tickets, some of which were nearly 20 years old. She’d forgotten about some, and others were for vehicles she no longer owned. About half of the tickets were for exceeding the meter limit or parking over the line near the courthouse.

“I had paid for the parking meter and everything,” Franklin said. “They drive around, and they look for people’s cars.”

Marie Franklin’s car was towed during her eviction hearing. (Shahrzad Rasekh/CT Mirror)

Jill Turlo, CEO of the Hartford Parking Authority, said the agency’s officers use license plate scanners to find people with outstanding tickets. Turlo said “high-traffic metered areas,” like the street the courthouse is on, are “regularly patrolled by parking enforcement.” Turlo said that the parking authority has not received any requests to extend the time for metered parking near the courthouses.

While towing cars for unpaid parking tickets is a common practice for cities, Minnesota passed a law last year barring such tows, seeing them as an unfair burden on low-income families. Several cities, including Los Angeles, San Diego and San Francisco, have also stopped such tows after a California appeals court ruled that towing cars for unpaid parking tickets violated people’s rights against warrantless seizures, said Rebecca Miller, an attorney with the Western Center on Law & Poverty.

Hartford has one of the strictest policies in Connecticut. A city ordinance allows tows after two or more unpaid tickets that date back to September 2012. Other cities including Danbury and New Britain don’t tow for unpaid tickets. Norwalk and Waterbury will tow if there are four unpaid tickets; Stamford tows for three unpaid tickets or more than $250 owed, officials in those cities said. The limit in Bridgeport is $100, and New Haven’s is $200.

“We do have an ordinance where we can boot a car for unpaid tickets, but we haven’t used it in years,” said Deborah Pacific, director of the Danbury Parking Authority.

When Franklin went to eviction court, she had been trying to hold onto the place she and her daughter lived while she looked for a new job. Between unpaid fines, late fees, and towing and storage charges, it would have cost almost $3,000 to get her car back, she said.

Get in Touch

If you have information about towing near courthouses, email Dave Altimari at daltimari@ctmirror.org or Ginny Monk at gmonk@ctmirror.org, or call 203-626-4705.

“I would have chose to pay whatever I owed to my housing. So my car, there was nothing I could do,” Franklin said.

The vehicle was towed by Metro Auto Body & Towing, which did not return calls and emails for comment. It was later sold by the lender.

After losing her car and housing, Franklin moved to Florida to stay with her son.

Parking Sticker in the Wrong Place

Fixed: Apartment residents now have 72 hours if caught without a parking permit or with an expired one.

It’s often little discrepancies that lead to big consequences. When Tishawn Tillman moved into his Hartford apartment in September, he got a parking sticker that allowed him to park in the building’s private lot. He said he wasn’t sure where to put it, so he stuck it on the driver’s side window.

But less than a month later, his car was towed by Cross Country Automotive in Hartford.

“There is absolutely no legal documentation in my lease that says that this has to be strictly on the windshield,” Tillman said.

Minor rule violations such as parking crooked or not backing into a space have caused people’s cars to be towed and then sold when they couldn’t afford the fees. Stories like Tillman’s drove legislators to act. Under the new law, the towing company would have had to warn Tillman, giving him 72 hours to get a new sticker and place it in the right spot. The law also says towers have to get permission from the apartment complex to tow a vehicle unless it’s blocking traffic or parked in a fire lane.

Tillman said he assumed his car had been stolen. But the police told him it had been towed.

Tillman contacted Cross Country: “I asked them, ‘Did you see my sticker?’ And they said, ‘We didn’t see the sticker.’” He said he called the apartment manager, but he wouldn’t help.

“When I realized that neither of the parties were going to budge on the matter, I told them that I wasn’t going to pay the fine, even if I had the money, which I didn’t at the time,” Tillman said.

Tillman said his bill was “$200 but growing every day.”

He filed a complaint with the attorney general’s office, which said it unsuccessfully tried to resolve the issue through its voluntary mediation program and recommended he complain to the Department of Motor Vehicles.

Sal Sena, Cross Country’s owner, submitted a letter to the attorney general saying there are signs all over the parking lot explaining the rules. The apartment manager, Jack Matos, wrote to the attorney general that he talked with Sena about giving TIllman a discount on the towing fees.

“I reiterated Tishawn needs to make sure that it’s placed on the windshield,” Matos wrote.

Frustrated, Tillman eventually gave up trying to get his car back.

“I went from being a self-made young man with his own apartment and car to having to burn a hole in my pocket just to get to and from work on ride-share services like Uber and Lyft,” he said.

Unable to Reclaim Car Despite Having the Title

Fixed: The law allows vehicle owners to reclaim their cars with other documents besides DMV registration.

Shaleah Carr needed two more weeks until her DMV appointment in April to register the Chevrolet Malibu she had just bought from her mom. It was the earliest appointment she could get.

Her boyfriend had taken the car to his brother’s house to work on it when they decided to take it for a test drive. But the car broke down on U.S. Route 5 in South Windsor, and police called for a tow.

Her boyfriend told the tow truck driver that the car was registered to Carr’s mother and that Carr had the title and proof of insurance. But the towing company, Tolland Automotive, wouldn’t release the vehicle to Carr because she wasn’t the registered owner, said the company’s owner, George Fellows. The vehicle was towed on a Friday afternoon, and by the time Carr was able to get to the lot on Monday morning, she owed more than $300.

“I told them I’m on one income and I can’t afford it,” Carr said. “I just paid my rent for that month, and I even asked, ‘Do you guys do payments?’”

Since then, her Malibu has been sitting in the company’s lot.

Shaleah Carr couldn’t reclaim her car even though she has the title. (Shahrzad Rasekh/CT Mirror)

Carr’s dilemma has happened to people whose cars have been towed across Connecticut — they’ve been unable to quickly register their cars and then blocked from reclaiming them because they’re not registered in their names yet. By the time they can register their cars, so much time has passed that the tow bill is too expensive or the company has sold their car.

The new law gives consumers time to register their car before it can be towed and requires towers to release vehicles if presented with the title or a bill of sale as proof of ownership. The law also requires towers to accept other forms of payment besides cash and demands towers have business hours on weekends so fees don’t accrue while they’re closed.

Fellows said police called them to the scene. “Then we found out that this guy didn’t own the car at all,” Fellows said. Without the owner there, “it had to come back to our shop.”

Carr called her mother. “I was like, ‘You’re going to have to come up here,’ but even if she does, she can’t really do much,” Carr said. “She didn’t have the money to get it back either.”

Carr said the last time she called Tolland Automotive, the bill was $800. Given that she paid her mother only $500 for the car, she said, it almost wasn’t worth trying to get it back anymore.

Fellows said Carr’s mother did come into the office earlier this month with proof of registration, and he is willing to release the vehicle if she pays what is owed.

“It’s all on them,” he said. “I mean they knew what the issue was back then. Why haven’t they come back?”

Asia Fields contributed reporting.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Dave Altimari, Ginny Monk and Shahrzad Rasekh, The Connecticut Mirror.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/connecticuts-new-towing-law-will-help-some-but-not-all-drivers-heres-what-they-told-us/feed/ 0 541943
A Doctor Challenged the Opinion of a Powerful Child Abuse Specialist. Then He Lost His Job. https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/a-doctor-challenged-the-opinion-of-a-powerful-child-abuse-specialist-then-he-lost-his-job/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/a-doctor-challenged-the-opinion-of-a-powerful-child-abuse-specialist-then-he-lost-his-job/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.propublica.org/article/child-abuse-pediatrician-minneapolis-nancy-harper-cps by Jessica Lussenhop, and photography by Sarahbeth Maney

ProPublica is a nonprofit newsroom that investigates abuses of power. Sign up for Dispatches, a newsletter that spotlights wrongdoing around the country, to receive our stories in your inbox every week.

On a February afternoon in 2022, Dr. Bazak Sharon logged into a remote video meeting from his home office in Minneapolis. He propped up his cellphone next to his laptop and hit record on a video app.

There were several people in the meeting with Sharon, who at the time was a pediatrician with the University of Minnesota. Two hospital leaders, Sharon’s boss and a lawyer were there, too. But the person Sharon was most wary of was in the lower-right corner of the grid of faces: Dr. Nancy Harper, the director of the child abuse team at University of Minnesota Masonic Children’s Hospital in Minneapolis.

Sharon suspected that the discussion, about the care of a 3-month-old named Hank, was going to be contentious. He worried that someday, perhaps even in court, he might need evidence of his role caring for Hank. He was prepared to argue with Harper if she challenged his clinical judgment, but it was quickly apparent that the quality of the care he provided was not at issue.

Hank was born small and was not eating well or gaining enough weight; sometimes, according to his parents, he just seemed to be in pain. (ProPublica is using a nickname for the child at the parents’ request.) At an appointment in January, a doctor ordered an endoscopy, a procedure where a tiny camera is threaded through the body, and also suggested an MRI.

The scans of Hank’s brain showed fluid pooled under both sides of his skull. The blood was old, possibly months old, and Hank was admitted to the hospital. Sharon met him the next day.

A member of Harper’s team named Dr. Caroline George also evaluated Hank that day. In her opinion, according to court records, the bleeding was “consistent with abusive head trauma.” Sharon had suggested other possible causes, including an injury from birth, an infection or even spontaneous bleeding. Sharon wrote in the child’s medical record that it’s “likely we will never identify the exact mechanism that caused his injury.”

Three days after Hank was admitted, Sharon said he learned that a county child protection services worker was preparing to come to the hospital to take custody of the baby, as well as his 2-year-old brother, William.

Sharon said that he was stunned that no one had spoken to him since he was Hank’s primary doctor. So he did something that seemed to put him at odds with George, Harper and hospital leadership: He told Hank’s parents, CPS and police he didn’t think the bleeding alone was enough evidence to say this was abuse.

Sharon was also concerned that separating a sick infant from his parents based only on a suspicion of abuse would cause more harm to Hank. Working with the detective assigned to the case, he admitted William, though the older boy was not sick, so that the whole family could stay in the hospital under the supervision of a nursing assistant while doctors continued to treat and monitor Hank.

But four days later, according to Sharon, his supervisor told him that he was being removed from Hank’s care team, and that he should not communicate further with the parents. When Sharon asked why, he said he was told it was at Harper’s recommendation. “The care,” he said, “changed the second she got involved.”

In less than 48 hours, a judge determined that Hank and William were in need of child protection services and their parents were forced to leave the hospital without them. The same day, Sharon said, he was summoned to the first of two meetings with hospital leadership and Harper. When his supervisors scheduled the second meeting — titled “Review of CPS Patient” in the emailed invitation — less than a month later, Sharon came prepared to record it.

Before all this, Sharon had an appreciation for Harper’s formidability and for her influence in the world of child abuse pediatrics. She began her career as a pediatrician in the U.S. Navy before leading a child abuse team at a hospital in Texas. In 2014, she became the director of the University of Minnesota’s Center for Safe and Healthy Children.

A certified child abuse pediatrician for almost 16 years, the 56-year-old Harper consulted on suspected cases of abuse for several Twin Cities hospital systems, testified as an expert witness in child abuse trials across the U.S. and lectured on diagnosing signs of abuse. She was also the vice president of the Ray E. Helfer Society, a national nonprofit organization for physicians who work on the medical aspects of child abuse and neglect, and she became its president in 2023.

Harper testifies for the prosecution at a 2021 trial. (Coburn Dukehart/Wisconsin Watch)

Sharon, now 53 years old, was also well-respected. Originally from Israel, he came to the U.S. in 2003 to continue his medical studies. He began as a fellow at the University of Minnesota in 2006 and had been on faculty for 12 years. Specializing in infectious diseases, he became medical director of the university’s pediatric COVID-19 clinic and was a contributing member of the state Health Department’s Long COVID Guiding Council. Sharon was also a hospitalist, meaning he directed the care for admitted patients like Hank, coordinating with other doctors and specialists.

As the online February meeting progressed, it became clear to Sharon that, in a face-off with Harper, his medical expertise and the fact that he considered many of the people on the call to be friends counted for little. The lawyer noted that differing medical opinions could open the hospital or the doctors themselves up to a lawsuit. George added that the differences in opinions had also “made things difficult for particularly law enforcement.”

“I’m not a child abuse expert,” said Dr. Sameer Gupta, the chief medical officer of the hospital, on the call. “But, you know, my experience is this: Try to be completely aligned. That’s one story that’s coming from the medical team as much as possible, to avoid the potential for, one, litigation, two, to let the experts really drive the ship.”

Sharon became increasingly agitated during the call, shaking his head. He was angry that the conversation had revolved around protocols and the hospital’s legal liabilities, rather than Hank’s care.

“I think I did the best any doctor can do at that point in making sure that my patient is getting the best care while I’m not trying to hide any potential abuse,” he said during the meeting, the video of which he shared with ProPublica. “I felt very uncomfortable that CPS are showing up unannounced and taking two children away from the parents without having a discussion with the doctors who take care of this patient. I hope no one expects me not to say something when that happens in front of me.”

But Harper seemed to suggest that Hank might have been seen by too many doctors, and that Sharon had interfered with her team’s ability to “frame” the case to CPS and law enforcement. She said she did not consider it her role to be concerned about what could happen to a family after a diagnosis.

“Unfortunately,” she said, “if I spent all of my time worrying about … what’s going to happen with child protection and foster care or the cost for the legal stuff afterwards, I wouldn’t be able to do my job.”

Sharon began to protest. He said he had been reading the scientific literature on abusive head trauma and found it unconvincing, a conclusion more and more doctors were coming to. Harper cut him off. “If I spent two weeks reading the literature on COVID, would you consider me as qualified as you are?” she asked. “I’ve been doing this for decades.”

Gupta abruptly shut down the conversation. He said that Sharon’s plan to keep the family in the hospital was the “wrong decision and will never, ever happen again,” and then he ended the call.

As the screen went blank, Sharon let out a long, deep sigh. Though disturbed and frustrated, he did not yet realize his actions on behalf of Hank and his family would affect his career. Over time, Sharon came to see Harper as the main driver of a campaign to get him to fall in line with the child abuse team.

“She’s very black and white, right and wrong, no gray area,” he said, “which is not the way to do medicine or pediatrics.”

Harper did not respond to requests for comment. She and a spokesperson for University of Minnesota Physicians, which is the clinical practice for the university’s medical school faculty, also did not respond to a detailed list of questions. But the spokesperson wrote that the Otto Bremer Trust Center for Safe and Healthy Children, as it is now called and which is led by Harper, provides “trauma-informed medical care and psychosocial support while addressing research, prevention, advocacy, policy and education.”

“When healthcare providers and community organizations refer patients to CSCH, the team only makes decisions about diagnoses and subsequent medical care based on expert assessment of medical evidence (e.g., medical history, physical exam, lab and radiological findings, input from other medical specialists and information provided by caregivers),” the spokesperson added. “Further investigations and legal determinations are outside of our team’s scope.”

A spokesperson for Fairview Health Services, which owns Masonic Children’s Hospital, said in a statement that although Harper is an employee of University of Minnesota Physicians, “we obviously take these concerns seriously and are actively reviewing the matter.”

“Our highest priority is the safety, dignity, and wellbeing of our patients and families — especially in moments of crisis. We are aware of concerns being raised regarding the conduct of a University of Minnesota Physicians (UMP)-employed provider who practices in a UMP-led clinic within the M Health Fairview Masonic Children’s Hospital,” the spokesperson added. “We are in close communication with our academic partners and are evaluating any steps we may need to take to preserve the trust our patients and families place in us.”

Harper’s arrival in Minnesota coincided with the fallout of a high-profile tragedy: the 2013 death of 4-year-old Eric Dean.

Dean lived with his family in sparsely populated Pope County, in west-central Minnesota. According to an investigation by The Minnesota Star Tribune, teachers and caregivers reported signs that Dean was being abused to child protection workers at least 15 times before his stepmother threw him across a room, causing injuries that would kill him. She is in prison serving a life sentence.

In response, then-Gov. Mark Dayton signed an executive order in 2014 creating the Governor’s Task Force on the Protection of Children. The next year, along with a slew of other reforms, the state Legislature created a $23.35 million grant to give counties money based partially on the number of open child protection investigations.

She’s very black and white, right and wrong, no gray area, which is not the way to do medicine or pediatrics.

—Dr. Bazak Sharon

The number of child abuse cases soared. For instance, in Hennepin County, where Minneapolis is located, cases of physical abuse more than doubled from 2015 to 2016, before dropping over the next several years. Child abuse experts attributed the rise to what Joanna Woolman, a law professor who specializes in child abuse law, called “a moment of hyper-awareness around medical child abuse and child abuse in general.”

“We were convening a task force that was heavily made up of people with the view that we needed to do more, have more eyes on, be more aware,” added Woolman, who is also the executive director of the nonprofit Keeping Families Connected Minnesota, which provides free legal services to families going through child protection proceedings.

A subspecialty of pediatrics first recognized by the American Board of Pediatrics in 2006, child abuse pediatrics focuses on the diagnosis and documentation of signs of abuse. A diagnosis can help determine whether a parent loses custody of their child or faces criminal investigation. In cases where children die, it can mean murder charges. Harper was one of the first certified child abuse pediatricians in the country — the board counts over 350 subspeciality certifications nationwide — and is one of seven currently certified in Minnesota.

“Physicians with less training on child abuse and neglect both over- and under-identify injuries in children, whether they’re physical abuse injuries, sexual abuse injuries,” she testified in a 2019 trial. “A child with a missed injury could come back later with a more serious injury or even die. And so these are sort of issues where we realize that we needed expertise.”

Harper was hired as director of the Center for Safe and Healthy Children by the University of Minnesota the same year as Dayton’s executive order. According to testimony she gave in a 2019 criminal trial, the university recruited her to build up the center and create a regionwide child abuse consultation system.

“When I’m on call, I can be covering up to six different places where children can be seen,” Harper testified.

In 2016, the Otto Bremer Trust, a private charitable organization based in St. Paul, announced a $2.5 million grant to fund Harper’s ambitions to expand the center, which is based at Masonic. Harper is also program director for the university’s Child Abuse Pediatrics Fellowship, a three-year training program, giving her influence over the next generation of child abuse pediatricians. A spokesperson for the trust added that it does not have any “role in the day-to-day operations of the Center.”

Hennepin County has a contract with Harper’s employer, University of Minnesota Physicians, to provide medical consultation, expert witness testimony and case consultation with county attorneys. According to testimony Harper has given in the past, she and her team handle about 700 cases of suspected abuse each year. She has testified that 10% to 20% of those wind up confirmed for physical abuse, although it is difficult to determine if these figures are accurate since child protection case records are not public. She has given different answers on the witness stand when asked if she has ever testified for the defense; in 2021, she said she’d testified for the defense in a “half dozen or a dozen” cases. In 2023, she said she’d done so twice.

In 2018, Harper’s center began cohosting an annual Child Abuse Summit with the Hennepin County Attorney’s Office. In 2022, she received an introduction during a panel discussion from Dan Allard, senior assistant Hennepin County attorney, that illustrated the close relationship between Harper and her team and county prosecutors.

“If you haven’t heard Dr. Harper testify, she does a wonderful job. She knows her stuff,” Allard, who is also the head of the county attorney’s child abuse team, said at the summit. “We just barely try to keep up understanding what she’s talking about. So we just kind of let her go.”

In response to a detailed list of questions, Daniel Borgertpoepping, a spokesperson for the Hennepin County Attorney’s Office, wrote, “Since our office represents Hennepin County in CPS matters, we are unable to comment.”

Before Sharon’s encounter with Harper, he hadn’t given much thought to her team’s practices, which included evaluating and treating some of the worst cases of physical and sexual abuse of children. While he said he had referred a dozen or so cases of suspected neglect to her team, he viewed their work as a bleak side of pediatrics. He was happy to avoid it.

“I had a lot of respect for the child abuse doctors, like, ‘Thank you for doing that for us,’” he said.

But for roughly 15 years, the world of child abuse pediatrics has been roiled by criticism of the diagnosis once known as shaken baby syndrome and now categorized under the umbrella term abusive head trauma. A triad of symptoms — brain bleeding, brain swelling or injury, and blood in the retina — was once considered evidence that a child had been violently shaken, even if there were no other injuries or even bruising.

In court testimony, Harper has said that both shaken baby syndrome and abusive head trauma are considered scientifically valid diagnoses by “the mainstream medical community,” and that the controversy is more of a legal one than a medical one. She has acknowledged there are medical conditions that mimic possible signs of abuse, including bruises, bone fractures and head trauma symptoms, but she said that her assessments take all of that into account in concert with specialists like neurosurgeons and radiologists.

“We take a very detailed history from the family. We do a physical examination, look at past medical history, other medical conditions, the initial laboratory and X-ray reports,” she testified in 2023.

Sharon readily concedes that he wasn’t an expert in child abuse medicine. But as he and the other doctors tried to understand the bleeding in Hank’s brain as well as his lack of weight gain, he spent his evenings reading the scientific and legal literature about shaken baby syndrome and abusive head trauma, scribbling notes to himself. He read a key American Academy of Pediatrics statement reaffirming its belief in the diagnoses; he also read studies that challenged the science underlying them.

“It is wrong to fail to advise parents and courts when these are simply hypotheses, not proven medical or scientific facts,” Sharon wrote on a copy of one law review article.

He read about how the first neurosurgeon to posit the theory of shaken baby syndrome said in an interview years later that he was “disturbed that what I intended as a friendly suggestion for avoiding injury to children has become an excuse for imprisoning innocent parents.” According to the National Registry of Exonerations, over 40 people convicted in cases related to the diagnosis have been exonerated since the 1990s, often over increasing doubts that the three symptoms can be interpreted so definitively.

Sharon also learned that the subspecialty of child abuse pediatrics itself has also been under increasing scrutiny. Perhaps the most famous child abuse pediatrician case became the basis for the Netflix documentary “Take Care of Maya,” in which a 10-year-old girl’s pain syndrome was diagnosed by a child abuse pediatrician as Munchausen syndrome by proxy. A jury found the hospital liable for medical malpractice and awarded the family over $200 million; the hospital has appealed. Several families are suing a Pennsylvania hospital for what they say are false diagnoses of abuse by Dr. Debra Esernio-Jenssen, who led its child abuse team. A series of allegations of overzealous diagnoses of abuse have followed Dr. Barbara Knox from her job leading a child abuse team at the University of Wisconsin to similar positions in Alaska and at the University of Florida.

Sharon began to question the scientific nature of shaken baby syndrome and abusive head trauma after his dispute with Harper’s team. “It is wrong to fail to advise parents and courts when these are simply hypotheses, not proven medical or scientific facts,” he wrote on a copy of one law review article.

The child abuse pediatrician community is tightknit. After Knox left Wisconsin, Harper replaced her as an expert witness in some criminal cases. Esernio-Jenssen wrote Harper a nomination letter for a Ray E. Helfer Society award, calling her “an unstoppable force.”

Esernio-Jenssen and Knox, as well as the Helfer Society, did not respond to requests for comment. In a response to the lawsuit, attorneys for Esernio-Jenssen and her former hospital network wrote that they “are being attacked and demonized for protecting children from abuse and following the law,” and that the allegations of bad-faith abuse investigations are “obviously untrue.” The lawsuit is ongoing.

Knox was sued by two families in Alaska who accused her of leveling false accusations of abuse against them. In response, Knox said in an affidavit that she has no say over whether child protection takes children away from their parents, that she did not “conspire” with police or anyone else on custody issues or criminal prosecution, and that she did not personally evaluate one of the named children. The lawsuit was dismissed in 2024 after the families agreed to drop the matter.

According to a spokesperson for the University of Florida, Knox resigned her job there as a pediatrician with the Child Protective Team, effective Aug. 15. He declined to comment on the circumstances.

From the start, Sharon thought what was happening to Hank — a child struggling with eating and weight gain, with abnormal results on his endoscopy and weeks-old, unexplained cranial bleeding without any other symptoms of abuse — fit into his wheelhouse treating complex and even mysterious cases more than it fit into Harper’s. After poring through the literature on abusive head trauma, he was even more convinced.

Sharon followed his supervisor’s instruction not to speak to Hank’s parents. But after the couple’s attorney approached him, he provided a five-page account of Hank’s medical treatment. He included several potential alternative diagnoses.

“It is clear to me that missing child abuse is as serious as missing bacterial meningitis and should be considered as malpractice,” he wrote. “But also, as a hospitalist, who frequently manage children without clear definitions of their diagnosis, I’m used to ambiguity.”

Dr. Matthias Zinn, Hank’s neurologist, agreed with Sharon that the fluid in Hank’s brain, what he called “subdural collections,” could not be definitively tied to abuse. He provided a letter to the couple’s attorney as well. Zinn, who said he’s consulted on hundreds of cases of suspected abuse, said Harper’s child abuse team was by far the most aggressive he’s worked with.

“It was just crazy,” he said. “I remember speaking to them and saying, ‘What evidence do you have, other than the subdural collections?’ And they made it clear that they did not respect my opinion.”

Zinn has since left the University of Minnesota for a position in Florida.

Both a CPS investigator and a police detective spoke to Sharon repeatedly, and according to Hank’s parents, they also relayed Zinn’s opinion and begged CPS to talk to him as well. But the CPS petition alleging Hank was a victim of abuse only cited George’s assessment. There’s no mention of Sharon or Zinn.

George did not respond to requests for comment.

A spokesperson for Hennepin County declined to comment on individual cases or to respond to a detailed list of questions. But she provided a statement from Kwesi Booker, the director of Hennepin County Children and Family Services, which oversees child protection services. In that statement, Booker said “child protection social workers appropriately rely on the subject matter expertise of trained medical professionals in situations involving complex medical issues.”

Unable to let the matter go, Sharon wrote letters to the hospital’s leadership council about what he called “dangerous overreach” by Harper’s child abuse team. In response, Gupta said he referred the letter for review to the hospital’s Committee for Professional Enhancement. Citing privacy laws, hospital administrators would not tell Sharon the outcome of the committee’s review.

Separately, Gupta wrote Sharon a “peer review” letter informing him that, in several of his cases, there were concerns about his conduct, professionalism and a disregard for hospital protocol. Sharon said he was aware of his reputation for being strong-willed and, at times, dismissive or even rude to colleagues. The letter warned him against doing anything that could be seen as “retaliatory” toward other members of the staff. Gupta gave three examples related to Sharon’s purportedly improper procedures for prescribing medications for pediatric COVID-19 patients; he also referred to Sharon’s interaction with the child abuse team.

“Your documentation in the chart and communication with law enforcement was contrary to what was being stated by the child abuse team,” Gupta wrote in the peer review letter. “This created confusion with the community workers and with the family in a situation in which consistency is very important.”

Gupta did not respond to repeated requests for comment or to a list of questions.

Masonic Children’s Hospital

Hank’s family had a limited view of what was going on behind the scenes at Masonic Children’s Hospital, even though Hank’s mother, Kay, worked in the neonatal intensive care unit there. She recognized Sharon and knew of George, though she hadn’t worked closely with either. Because Hank’s parents both work in the pediatric field and for the privacy of their children, they asked that ProPublica not use their full names.

The day after Hank’s admission, Kay and her husband, Ross, explained to George about the baby’s difficulty with breastfeeding, his inexplicable pain and his inability to tolerate formula. When George asked her about possible accidents or injuries, the only thing Kay could think of was a time when she was driving and slammed on the brakes with Hank in his car seat.

After she read the CPS petition alleging her children were victims of physical abuse, Kay said that she came to suspect that George had been trying to collect information to use against her and her husband, not to treat Hank.

“I think she was sitting there hoping that I was just going to confess or tell her that I thought my husband might have done it,” Kay said. “And I was just hoping that she was going to help me.”

While Hank and William were in foster care, police confiscated the couple’s cellphones, laptops and baby monitors, and interviewed various family members and friends. In April 2022, Hennepin County decided not to pursue criminal charges.

CPS found no additional evidence of abuse, and after nearly four months, a judge ordered both boys returned to the couple, though it was on the condition that a grandparent live in the home full time as well. In June, just before a trial to determine if Hank had been abused, CPS agreed to begin the process of dismissing the matter, though the agency still made a “finding of maltreatment” by an “unknown offender.”

In late July, the Hennepin County Attorney’s Office signed off on the dismissal. It had been nearly seven months since Hank was first admitted to the hospital.

Around the same time, Kay and Ross took Hank for genetic testing, which showed he carried an abnormal gene duplication with unknown effects. He was also put on medication that resolved his stomach sensitivity issues and increased his appetite. One of Sharon’s theories was that the bleeding under his skull was due to poor feeding, dehydration or vitamin deficiency, though no one has been able to identify a definitive cause.

“He’s just been our little mystery baby, but he is a beautiful, healthy, thriving little 3-year-old,” Kay said.

William, she said, still has nightmares about being taken from his parents. At 5 years old, he insists on sleeping in their bed every night. Defending themselves, Kay said, plus the cost of additional caregivers amounted to roughly $100,000 for the family.

Kay never met Harper and only later came to understand the role she played. Because there was no trial, she never had the chance to confront Harper or George, or lay out any of the arguments that she and her husband had been falsely accused of abuse.

But just before the case closed, Kay saw an advertisement for the 2022 Child Abuse Summit, with Harper as a featured panelist. She bought a ticket to the event and sat right in front of Harper.

“They do these things and probably never have to see the people again, outside of places where they’re in charge,” she remembered thinking. “You’re going to have to see me.”

Sharon did not know it at the time, but he was far from the only person struggling in recent years to keep a family from losing their children after Harper’s involvement. In his job as an attorney for indigent parents at Hennepin County Adult Representation Services, Scotty Ducharme has dealt with horror stories and seen cases of extreme child abuse up close. But when allegations have arisen almost exclusively from a medical diagnosis from a child abuse pediatrician, which he calls a “CAP,” he has also seen signs that not all the doctors on the child’s treatment team are in lockstep.

“If you read the medical records written by the CAPs versus the regular doctors in the cases I’ve worked on, you can see the breadcrumbs by the regular doctors who don’t believe what the CAPs are saying,” he said. “I’ve only caught, on the record, doctors directly contradicting each other a few times.”

“I’ve only caught, on the record, doctors directly contradicting each other a few times,” said Scotty Ducharme, a former attorney for indigent parents at Hennepin County Adult Representation Services who is now in private practice.

In the spring of 2023, Ducharme met María Alejandra Ramírez Rodríguez and her husband, Cristian Andrés Guzmán de la Ossa, a couple in their 20s. Recent arrivals from Colombia who spoke no English, they brought their 4-week-old son to Hennepin County Medical Center in Minneapolis after noticing bruises on his thighs, back, forehead and face. They had taken photos of previous bruises as well, which they shared with doctors. (ProPublica is not naming the child to protect his privacy.) The couple also brought him to the hospital when he was 12 days old because his umbilical stump wouldn’t stop bleeding.

Harper examined the baby and reviewed X-rays of his skeleton. The results were alarming; he had 14 healing rib fractures, as well as fractures in his arms and legs in various states of healing. Harper wrote that the baby was “at grave risk for further injury, morbidity and mortality,” and the Hennepin County Attorney’s Office filed an expedited petition to permanently sever the parents’ rights. The baby was placed in foster care with a woman who worked as a nurse.

When Ducharme looked at the medical records, he saw that the baby had gone through a number of blood tests, including ones to check for clotting disorders. Several metrics were marked slightly outside of the normal range, including a reading for a protein tied to a genetic clotting disorder called von Willebrand disease. Ducharme zeroed in on a particular note, perhaps a “breadcrumb,” written by the pediatrician who saw the baby before Harper; he wrote that the baby would need more follow up from the hematology department “if more bruising develops.”

While in the care of the foster parent, the baby developed new bruises and Harper evaluated him again. A new abuse investigation was opened against the foster parent, and he was moved to a second foster family — in this case, a pediatrician and her husband. Once again, the baby developed new bruises, according to his visitation supervisor.

“This is medical, something weird is going on here,” Ducharme remembered thinking.

But according to notes from the CPS investigator, Harper declined to change her determination or to perform additional blood clotting disorder tests as the first doctor had advised: “Would not be any different now so they did not repeat those tests,” he wrote. He added that in Harper’s opinion, whoever bruised the baby in April was the most likely offender in subsequent incidents.

In her notes, Harper also questioned whether the marks noticed on the baby while he was living with his second foster family were true bruises. Instead, prosecutors posited a new theory in the case: that Ramírez and Guzmán were surreptitiously abusing their son during visits, even though the visits were supervised by a woman who works as an observer in CPS cases. To Ducharme, that strained credulity. He became concerned that Harper was too unwilling to change her diagnoses, and that prosecutors were reluctant to challenge her.

“She has this level of cachet with prosecutors, it’s like a trauma bond. I’m sure she’s right more than 90% of the time,” he said. “They’re unwilling to see her failures.”

But not everyone is. In several cases in recent years, judges and juries have found Harper’s diagnoses unconvincing. In 2024, a Wisconsin judge barred Harper from telling the jury that a child died as the result of “abusive head trauma, non-accidental injury, child abuse, or murder.”

“Dr. Harper sees herself as an advocate, at least in part, and this blurs her role as scientist and clinician with the role of advocate against child abuse, further calling into question her fidelity to the scientific validation of abusive head trauma diagnoses, especially when it is a close call,” the judge said.

In another Wisconsin case, Paul Marshall was found not guilty in 2023 of shaking his 7-week-old son, Fox, to death. Harper examined the boy at Children’s Minnesota, a hospital in St. Paul. A spokesperson for Children’s Minnesota declined to comment on the case.

“We were put through the grinder,” Marshall said. “We don’t get our son back, and we don’t get a lot of the closure that we should have had as a family. That was robbed from us.”

The Marshalls at home with their two daughters. “We don’t get our son back, and we don’t get a lot of the closure that we should have had as a family. That was robbed from us,” Paul Marshall said.

After Ducharme became convinced that there was a medical explanation for Ramírez’s baby’s injuries, he prepared a memo that pointed out a number of possible contributing factors, including that Ramírez had gone days without eating while she was pregnant and traveling across the U.S.-Mexico border from Colombia and had a difficult delivery in Minneapolis. Ramírez got her own medical records from Colombia which showed that, as a child, she’d also experienced unexplained bruising.

To challenge the prosecutors’ theory that the baby’s new bruises were from further abuse by the parents, Ducharme spoke to their visitation supervisor. She provided a sworn affidavit saying that she did not witness any abusive behavior from the parents, and that she’d become so stressed in part from the pressure to say she had witnessed abuse that she asked to be taken off the case. She also wrote that CPS workers were lying to and about the couple, claiming that the foster parents spoke Spanish, which they did not, and that Ramírez and Guzmán were unreliable about keeping visitation appointments.

“The parents attended every visit. They never cancelled,” the supervisor wrote. “Even when their tire popped on the way to their first supervised visitations, they got an Uber and were only about five minutes late.”

A judge ruled that there was “no evidence” that the parents were abusing their baby at visits and ordered a second medical opinion. But before that could happen, the county agreed to drop the termination of parental rights petition after Ramírez and Guzmán agreed to acknowledge that their son “sustained serious injury” while living with them, without admitting guilt. The case was converted to a regular child protection matter, which allowed the couple to have home visits. They eventually regained custody, and the case was closed in April 2024.

“There’s no accountability. There’s no finding of fact,” Ducharme said. “You think: ‘You get your baby back. None of the rest of it matters.’ But it matters.”

The couple found the entire experience bewildering and traumatic. Although they are now reunited, they missed six months of their newborn son’s life. Ramírez didn’t have the chance to breastfeed after the first foster parent began feeding her son formula instead of the breast milk she was pumping.

“We didn’t see him crawl. We didn’t see him turn over —” Guzmán said.

“We didn’t see him sit up,” Ramírez said.

María Alejandra Ramírez Rodríguez and her husband, Cristian Andrés Guzmán de la Ossa, brought their 4-week-old son to Hennepin County Medical Center in Minneapolis after noticing bruises on his body. After an evaluation by Harper, their son was sent into foster care for months before he was returned to them.

Although they worry about doing anything that might draw attention from immigration authorities, in late May they filed a federal civil lawsuit against Harper and the institutions she works for. Ducharme, who left his job at Hennepin County and is now in private practice, is representing the couple in the lawsuit, which alleges that Harper acted in “bad faith,” and that because of her actions there was no “genuine investigation” into the baby’s medical condition.

According to a spokesperson for Harper’s employer, University of Minnesota Physicians, they have not been served with the lawsuit yet and have not responded to the allegations.

“Why, after they didn’t find any physical abuse, did the hospital not keep doing exams to see if there was something medically wrong with him?” Guzmán asked. “They robbed us of our child without any real explanation.”

In late May 2023, a year and a half after Hank’s case, Sharon was on his way home from work when he got a phone call. A new case had come into the emergency room at Masonic Children’s Hospital that needed his consultation: a 3-month-old boy named Daniel. An MRI had shown fluid on his brain. CPS was already investigating whether this was abuse.

“Not again,” Sharon recalled thinking. He turned his car around.

At the hospital, he learned the unusual circumstances that had brought Daniel to the hospital: His mother, a pediatric nurse, had volunteered her son for an academic study that needed the MRIs of healthy children as a baseline. Someone on the research team noted fluid in Daniel’s brain, and a report was made to child protection services.

After meeting with the parents, examining Daniel and reviewing the MRI report, Sharon wrote up a one-page note. Among other things, he recommended that CPS continue assessing Daniel for possible abuse. But after what had happened with Hank’s case the year before, Sharon also put his views on the record.

“One should practice extreme caution attributing isolated intracranial fluid collection to abusive head trauma when no additional clinical signs or symptoms are found,” he wrote, “as the evidence to support this is controversial and has been questioned by many authorities (medical as well as legal).”

After a day in the hospital, Daniel and his parents, Grace and Paul, were allowed to go home together, although they said the CPS investigation remained open for a month. George, the same doctor involved in Hank’s case, asked Daniel’s parents to bring him back two weeks later, where Grace said he screamed as he was pinned down for additional X-rays and to check for bruises. According to medical records, George determined that Daniel had experienced an “accidental trauma” but did not attribute the cranial fluid to abuse.

Nevertheless, according to Sharon, his supervisor called to tell him that, once again, Harper was concerned about the legal liability created by his note, and that his opinion about the bleeding was “beyond the scope” of his practice. Struck by the similarities in Daniel’s and Hank’s cases, Sharon wrote another letter reiterating his concerns from the conference call in February 2022. He said that he’d spoken to many colleagues at the hospital who shared those concerns, and that he strongly believed “our organization must acknowledge and address these concerns in a transparent manner.”

In late June, University of Minnesota records show that three complaints were filed within days of one another against Sharon. Because the complaints were closed without discipline, they are protected personnel data under Minnesota law.

The first complaint was filed the same day he said he received an invite to a meeting with Dr. Joseph Neglia, head of the University of Minnesota Medical School’s Department of Pediatrics, physician-in-chief at Masonic Children’s Hospital and one of the people included on the February 2022 call. The second complaint was filed a few days later, while the third came the day before the meeting took place.

According to Sharon, an attorney for University of Minnesota Physicians at the meeting told him he was “weaponizing” his notes. A week and a half after that, Sharon said, Neglia brought him in again and gave him a choice: resign or be terminated on the spot. Sharon was shocked. He ultimately resigned.

Under an agreement with University of Minnesota Physicians, Sharon stayed on the job for several months with strict guidelines, including that he was prohibited from working with the infectious disease division. Neglia warned Sharon in a letter to “maintain a high level of professionalism and decorum” and not to engage in “any behavior that could be perceived as retaliation,” echoing the language in Gupta’s peer review letter to Sharon.

“You will refrain and remove yourself from involvement in any cases of suspected child abuse or potential non-accidental trauma,” Neglia wrote. “This includes any interactions with or communication with parents or guardians of a patient in such a case.”

Neglia did not respond to requests for comment.

At the time of his departure, Sharon was one of only a small number of doctors in the country who treated a complicated immune disease with behavioral symptoms in children known by the acronym PANDAS or PANS. Parents of Sharon’s patients were so upset by news of his resignation that they went to the local newspaper.

The coverage prompted an investigator from the Minnesota Attorney General’s Office to reach out to Sharon, and Sharon said he took the opportunity to share his concerns about the child abuse protocols at his former workplace. He said he has yet to hear back. A spokesperson at the attorney general’s office declined comment.

On a recent April afternoon, Sharon arrived at a restaurant in a suburb of Minneapolis. Tucked in a back corner table was Daniel, now a blond-headed 2-year-old, Grace, Paul and Grace’s mother. Sharon had not seen them since that day in the emergency room two years ago, and the family wanted to thank him for what he’d done. (Because Grace is a pediatric nurse and because she wants to protect her son’s privacy, ProPublica agreed to withhold the families’ full names.)

Grace still feels traumatized by the 24 hours she spent at Masonic Children’s Hospital, not sure if she’d be allowed to take her son home. She remembers that the one person who seemed to be in her corner was Sharon and how it felt to read that single line in her son’s medical report that may have cost Sharon his job.

“That was the light in the darkness at that point,” she said.

Daniel with parents, Grace and Paul. Grace still feels traumatized by the 24 hours she spent at Masonic Children’s Hospital, unsure if she’d be allowed to take her son home.

Since the incident, Grace said, she has had to work with George on cases of suspected child abuse and said she has become more understanding of how parents are treated.

For his part, Sharon characterizes the entire experience as “surreal.” He commutes from Minnesota to Colorado and Wyoming for temporary hospitalist and clinical work, but he is still looking for a full-time job. He wants to get back to treating infectious diseases and thinking about pediatric immunology, and he worries that he could be hurting his own reputation by speaking out about how hospitals deal with cases of suspected child abuse.

At the same time, he said he feels that he has to push back against the attempt to get him, and other physicians like him who may disagree with a child abuse pediatrician, to “fall in line.”

After leaving his job, Sharon got a tattoo on the inside of his left forearm, a quote attributed to Albert Einstein he said reflects his thinking and his actions at Masonic Children’s Hospital: “Unthinking respect for authority is the greatest enemy of truth.”

Mariam Elba contributed research. Melissa Sanchez and Agnel Philip contributed reporting.


This content originally appeared on ProPublica and was authored by by Jessica Lussenhop, and photography by Sarahbeth Maney.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/a-doctor-challenged-the-opinion-of-a-powerful-child-abuse-specialist-then-he-lost-his-job/feed/ 0 541933
Writer Alejandro Heredia on making art in a world that profits off our time https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/writer-alejandro-heredia-on-making-art-in-a-world-that-profits-off-our-time/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/writer-alejandro-heredia-on-making-art-in-a-world-that-profits-off-our-time/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/writer-alejandro-heredia-on-making-art-in-a-world-that-profits-off-our-time Let’s start from the beginning. Did you always want to be a writer? Was there an “aha” moment in your young life when you knew that this was what you were supposed to do?

In high school, our history teacher asked us to write a story about a particular moment in history. He asked us to write one page. I went home that night, and I wrote 12 pages. I thought that was normal. The next day [my teacher] went around, making sure that everyone did their one page. When he saw that I had written a ton, he looked at me like, What? What is wrong with you? Why did you do this? But I think in that moment, seeing his reaction, for some reason made it click for me. This was something that I did because I enjoyed it, not because it was expected of me. I was always a big reader. I knew that I loved literature, but I didn’t know that this was something that I could do.

What does it mean to be a queer son of immigrants AND an artist? Was there any hesitation from your family about your pursuit of an artistic life?

My parents were never discouraging. They were always like, “Do what will make you happy in life.” But I don’t know that they’ve always understood what this artistic life really means and what it entails. I think now they’re starting to sort of wrap their minds around it. They came to my book launch in New York. I was on the local news in the Bronx, on a small channel. When my mom saw that, when my grandparents saw that, they were like, “Oh my God, you’re a serious person. You’re on the news.” It’s been less about them being discouraging and more about working with them to understand what this artistic life entails, what it means, what it doesn’t mean.

Just because I have a fancy fellowship here or there, just because I published a book, they think I’m rich. “You’re a writer and you’re traveling and you’re on a book tour, so you have all this money,” and I’m like, “No, no, you don’t understand….”

That tension between money and art always comes up when I’m talking to my family about what I do. Part of what helped them feel okay with me being an artist is that I always had a full time job in my 20s. I lived on my own. I moved out of my mom’s house after coming back from college. I’ve always sort of taken care of myself financially as an adult. Because they see that, they’re like, “Oh, well, we don’t care what you do, as long as you can pay for your own rent and take care of yourself.”

I would love to hear a bit about your previous work as a community organizer. So much of your writing is about community and place. And I know you yourself are very rooted in the Bronx where you grew up. How has community organizing informed your writing? Why is it important for artists to do this line of work?

I started doing community organizing in college. I went to college around the time of Trayvon Martin’s death, and the subsequent Black Lives Matter movement. I was organizing in college around racial justice. When I graduated, I went back home to the Bronx, and I started getting involved in efforts around responding and resisting gentrification. The first moment where I realized that art and writing has a place in community organizing was during a city council hearing with people in power. It was about the rezoning of Jerome Avenue which would change the landscape of one of the longest streets in the Bronx. During that hearing, I went up there and I read a poem. I hadn’t planned to read that poem. I just decided at the last minute to do it and I saw how much that shifted the room. I wasn’t saying anything that other people weren’t saying. [The poem] encapsulated the feeling, the frustration, the anger and the pride in being someone from the Bronx. It really moved people.

And so from then on, I spent a lot of time trying to bridge the gap between writing and community building, specifically trying to bring artists and writers to spaces where folks were already doing community organizing work. I will say it’s something that I struggle with. I wrote an essay recently about the tension that I find between community organizing and writing. I think that it is important for artists to be involved and engage with their community, to make their local community the best that it can possibly be for its residents. And I also find it a little troubling the way we talk about art and activism these days. It feels to me like we often judge a piece of writing’s value only on its political utility. What issues does it explore? What “communities” is it representing? And I think that is an important part of the conversation, but it cannot be the only way that we judge the value of a piece of art.

Isn’t all art political? Does art have to be political to be good?

I just had a three hour conversation with a friend about this yesterday, and he said the exact same thing. He was like “All art is political. Everything is political. You can’t escape it.” And I said, sure, that’s fine, but I want you to know that when I am sitting down to write a story that is not top of my mind. I am not trying to explore or expand or tease out my politics on the page. I am asking myself questions about people and their feelings and their hearts and their minds and the things that draw them together in community or in relationships, and sure that can be political or be interpreted through a political lens. The reader and the critic can do whatever they want with the work, but I am not thinking about these things first and foremost.

As immigrant writers, as queer writers, as writers of color, there is this question of what are you trying to say about your marginalized group? And sometimes I’m not trying to say anything about any group.

**You don’t want your work to be contrived. You don’t want to try to fit into some sort of immigrant queer writer box, in order to be appreciated as an artist. **

You are a recipient of the prestigious Black Mountain Institute Shearing Fellowship in Las Vegas. What have you learned about yourself as a person and an artist during your time in Sin City?

First I will say that it has been an incredible honor to be a Shearing Fellow. I have written more than I have written ever in my life in the last nine months. I always wanted to know what kind of person, what kind of writer, what kind of artist I would be if I had the privilege and time to just be a full-time artist and dedicate all my energy and time to being an artist. It’s just been pretty incredible to find that out on a very practical level. What time do I write? How do I like writing? How do I revise? Can I make time for reading while I’m writing? There are different questions [to ask] when you have a full time job, as I did for 10 years before I got this fellowship.

I forget who said this. I’m sure many writers have said this: it’s best to write about home when you are away from home, in a place very different from where you grew up.

Yes. I 100 percent agree with that. I think often our job as writers is to mystify and demystify what is familiar to us. When you’re in the place, it’s really hard to see the things that you’re not seeing. And so it has been really helpful. I have been writing about the Bronx and other projects. I’ve been writing about communities in the Bronx that are not Dominican. I spend so much time in Loca and in other projects writing about what I know, what I call a Dominican village, but it’s been such a revelation to write about all these different corners of the Bronx. For example, there’s a huge Irish population in the Bronx that I have been researching and reading about and writing about in my work. It’s been nice to have that space away from home, in order to see it better, or to see it from a different perspective.

Distance makes the heart grow fonder.

Yes, and [makes the heart] ask more complicated questions.

Your debut novel Loca came out in February 2025. The act of writing/creating is so contrary to the publicity machine of a book tour. What have been the most surprising aspects of promoting your book?

I spent so much time working on this novel, understanding it from beginning to end, backwards and forward, but it’s a totally different learning experience when you have to talk about it with other people. It is also incredibly challenging to see your work as an object that you have to sell to other people. You have to anchor your work in the theme and keywords. I have to talk about the fact that this is a queer transnational novel. I wasn’t thinking about that when I was writing the work. I was just asking myself questions about these people on the page. And so it’s incredibly challenging. And the biggest thing that I have learned is that for things to move along, you have to remain in the driver’s seat of the promotional experience as the writer, which is really hard. So if I had to give a piece of advice to a writer that is about to go do this, or will do this one day, it is to get a ton of writing done before your book comes out. Because for a little while there will be no space and time for creativity or spiritual connection to one’s work in traditional ways.

Let’s pivot to Sex and the City for a minute. You have written about your love for this show and spoken about it on book tour. I know it’s a comfort show but also deeply problematic lacking LGBTQ+ representation amongst many other pitfalls, despite all that, why is this show important to you?

The show was important to me because growing up as a queer person, I wanted to have the life that these women had; going out, dancing with friends, meeting random lovers, buying nice clothes, having artistic lives and professional lives. As a young queer person, I projected a lot of my dreams and hopes for adulthood on these white women who were not me but who I was able to connect to just on the basis of emotions. So much has changed in the culture regarding representation, and I really value seeing people who look or sound like me or whose experiences are more aligned with mine on screen or in a book. But I also really value that watching shows like Sex and the City or Buffy the Vampire Slayer attuned me to connecting to people across differences. I don’t begrudge having grown up that way. And sure, it would have been nice to see more people like me on TV or in books or whatever, but I also think that is what has made me a writer. Even when I’m writing about people who are “like me” on the page, I still feel that I’m writing across differences. It just makes me a rigorous thinker and a rigorous writer.

I think it’s such an easy cop out to be like, “That’s not for me because they’re not like me.” The whole point of why we open up a book or watch a television show or movie is to learn about other people.

It’s so true. I was just having a conversation with a young writer recently. He was like, “I don’t read these white people in the canon.” And I was like, you know, I understand the sentiment and also white people write things that slap. I would not be the writer that I am or the thinker that I am without having read Virginia Woolf for example. I follow James Baldwin’s philosophy. He used to say something like, “I’m an artist. I’m a human being. And so all of the art is available to me.” I get to read about the writers of the Harlem Renaissance and connect with those folks, as well as Virginia Woolf or Forester.

What inspires you?

The thing that inspires me the most is [the Bronx.] I’m really interested in the ways in which people share space, even when they don’t want to share space, and the kinds of beautiful things and conflicts that come out of living in an apartment building or living on a block with other people.

When I want to connect to a source bigger than myself, I go to nature. I go to the park. I go on a hike. It’s the same feeling that people get when they go to church. And so I need to do that in order to connect. Reading is a huge source of inspiration. Seeing the way that other writers do language on the page usually pushes me to think differently about what I’m trying to do on the page.

There are some writers that don’t want to get “tainted” by other people’s work. They don’t read.

I used to be one of those people when I was in my early 20s, trying to be a serious writer. I was like, “I don’t want to be influenced by anyone. I want to be my own person and my own thinker.” I appreciate that young version of me and his drive. But I also think it’s quite alright to live and write and exist within a tradition.

I would love to talk a bit about endurance. Writing a novel takes stamina and discipline. How do you convince yourself to get up every day and write; “butt in a chair” as the writer Anne Lamott likes to say?

The thing that propels me to sit down and write every day is just the fact that I’m going to die. When I tell people this, they sort of look at me like, are you okay? I’m not depressed. I’m not walking around with this huge weight of existential dread. I just read this quote by Didion, where she says, “Everyday is all there is.” I am so aware that every day is all that we have and that I am not promised tomorrow. And so while I am here, I have work to do. There are things that I would like to accomplish. There are sentences and stories that I would like to get on the page before it’s my time. Sometimes that pressure can be a lot and I need to be easy on myself and allow myself to rest and recuperate. There’s this American idea that we are endless and that we are going to remain young forever and that we’ll just keep going but I am very aware of my own mortality, and it informs my everyday life.

When I read Claude McKay, I’m able to visit Harlem in the 1920s. Or when I read Virginia Woolf’s Mrs. Dalloway, I’m able to be in London in the 1910s and 1920s. My dream is that in 100 years (if we have a literary society, if people are still reading books) that people will be able to see how some people lived in the Bronx 100 years ago.

This goes back to your origin story. How you wrote all those pages for your history class. You’re contributing to the history of time. What advice do you have for other writers who can’t seem to stick to a writing routine?

My primary piece of advice is that it’s really important to not romanticize the writing process. Writing can be very magical and it can be very spiritually fulfilling, but when I am creating my writing routine, I am grounded in the fact that this is my work in the world. And just as I used to show up from nine to five for my organizing jobs, how I used to show up after work hours for a community meeting, I need to treat my writing work as practically as possible, so that I can build a writing life. That means that you have to get really practical figuring out, what times do I write best? How long can I write? That was a really important question for me. When I was figuring out my process. It was really important for me to figure out that the first hour is usually horrible, the second hour is okay, and then if I’m able to make it a third hour, which I’m not always able to make a third hour, but if I’m able to make a third and fourth hour, that’s when the good stuff really happens. And then after that, it just goes to shit again. But that was really important for me to figure out, and you can only figure that out by experimenting, trying new things and getting very, very practical about your writing process.

Why is it important to get serious about your art?

The world could care less if I write or not. The world will not be moved if I don’t write another book. It’s fine, but I am here in the world to write. If it is my calling in life, which I believe it is, the thing that gives my life the most meaning, then I have to say no to distractions. We are living in a time where one of the most important commodities is our attention, and people are making a lot of money out of grabbing our attention. Not only social media companies, but also our government throws a slew of things at us every single day to keep us distracted from the things that we are meant to pay attention to.

How can we avoid distractions in a world that profits off our time?

On a very practical level, turning off your phone is really helpful. I know that we like to be available to people all the time, and we like to be connected all the time, but we don’t have to be. Sometimes, turning off my phone for like, two or three hours and putting it somewhere is the best thing that I can do for my mind. I was talking to some students last year, and they were telling me, “We have a hard time getting off social media, even though we know that it’s really bad for us, it makes us really anxious, because we want to keep up with the news. We want to keep up with what’s going on. It feels like the ethical thing to do, to be connected all the time.” I hope that individually and collectively, we are able to one day divorce what we believe is our ethical responsibility to the community from being online or reading the news, especially national news, every single day.

We’re not meant to consume this much information.

It’s paralyzing. I asked my students, what would your life look like if, instead of being on social media and reading the news every day and engaging with that all the time, what if you turned off your phone a couple days a week and used that time to volunteer somewhere locally? How would your relationship to yourself and your relationship to this responsibility that you have for collective engagement be different at the speed of a human life? This is always what I go back to. I am interested in living at the speed of a single human life, and anything that demands that I move at the speed of an influencer, at the speed of being everywhere all the time, that’s just not for me. I can’t do it.

Back in the day when novels first came out, people thought that they were addicting and distracting.

The difference between a book and a phone is that you engage with a book, but the book does not change. You change. You can come back to a book 100 times and read it differently and feel differently about it 100 times, but the book is not modifying itself to capture your attention, versus the phone. Technology is constantly being upgraded and changed to capture your attention, manipulate your taste and manipulate the way that you think, how you think, and how much time you spend on these things. It’s just a different beast.

Technology is also homogenizing. It makes us all these stereotypical, algorithmic versions of whoever we’re supposed to be.

It’s boring. I feel like there’s more group think now than people are willing to accept. Everybody wants to think that they are thinking bigger and better than the next person. But if you’re on these platforms, and most of us are, you’re probably getting your information from the algorithm and falling into these niches and thinking the way that other people are thinking.

I do believe that my single job as a writer is to make up my own mind about things. And so that means that it is my responsibility to try to disengage with the group and encourage others to do so by reading about characters that they may not have encountered in their daily lives.

Alejandro Heredia recommends:

Blueberry cheesecake ice cream from NYC’s Sugar Hill Creamery

The film You Won’t Be Alone

Clarice Lispector’s The Hour of the Star

Offering some of your hours in service to someone else

Logging off social media twice a week


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Diana Rozuva.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/writer-alejandro-heredia-on-making-art-in-a-world-that-profits-off-our-time/feed/ 0 541913
Comic book historian Christopher Irving on the art of conversation https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/comic-book-historian-christopher-irving-on-the-art-of-conversation/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/comic-book-historian-christopher-irving-on-the-art-of-conversation/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 07:00:00 +0000 https://thecreativeindependent.com/people/comic-book-historian-christopher-irving-on-the-art-of-conversastion Graphic NYC: The Essay Collection is mostly based on interviews you’ve done for Graphic NYC. I’d love to hear more about your preparation. How do you go about writing your essays?

Graphic NYC was a web project I did with a photographer named Seth Kushner. I did these interview-based critical essays with creators. They usually ran about an hour.

It was a weekly website, a new profile every week… It took me about, on average, eight to nine hours a profile, the subway, transcribing, writing the darn thing. I had to stack my prep quite a lot, so I had to just go back and forth between reading the work of different creators.

To prepare for them, I read as much of their work as I could. I never got Dan Clowes, but had I gotten Dan Clowes—and, at one point, I will get an excuse to interview Dan Clowes—I will read all of Eightball, and I will make notes as I read it. I will look at themes. I will look at stylistic development. I will look at the context in which it was created. I really wanted to get under the hood for why these creators made these decisions where they were with their work.

It depended on the creator. That differed between an author like Mike Allred with Madman, or Jim Shooter, who was editor in chief at Marvel, and a comic book writer in his own respect. It depended on who the subject was, but I would then basically come down with bullet points that I would have handy during an interview. I rarely write really straight questions because I like for it to be an organic conversation. It will be, of course, chopped up, and dispersed, and reorganized within the essay itself.

I was sick of Q&As at that point in my career. I felt like general Q&As for books were kind of lazy. When you look at magazine spotlights and feature articles, there are these fantastic essays. That’s how I started thinking about my work.

Graphic NYC really started as a book on creators. [hold ups notebook] I did these from 2008 to 2013… Peter Bagge was the first one which got printed, and Dean Haspiel was my second. These are actually notes from that. I had a flip phone, but I have all of these notes that I would go through and make as I talked with them, but I would also have these really wonderful bullet points.

It was an amazing experience, and I insisted that when possible, which turned out to be 95% of the time, these were in-person interviews, so I got to really capture the personality. I got some really cool people, like Raina Telgemeier. We had lunch, and I interviewed her. This is right before SMILE came out.

The preparation was to be prepared enough so that I knew what I was talking about, or at least sounded like it, and to know what the high points I wanted to address were. There were some instances, like Jules Feiffer, I found out the night before that we’re going to talk to him the next day. The legendary Jules Feiffer! The reason I’m here today is because the great comic book heroes were given to me by my father. That was the thing where I just had to brainstorm the best I knew, do some last minute Wikipedia-ing. I had a flip phone, so I had to use my ex-girlfriend’s laptop and hope for the best. Those things happen, too.

Would you, for somebody, like a Mike Allred, would you isolate their best known work or particular work? You obviously can’t read everything in preparation.

When I moderate for GalaxyCon, have to still do the same thing. You have to hit the big work, the high notes, but at the same time, try to dig deep enough and find the work where it feels like that artist was starting to develop.

For instance, I can’t remember if I got to talk with Frank Miller about Ronin, but Ronin, that’s where you can see him develop into being the Frank Miller we all start to know in love.

I’ve found that creators want to talk about their early work, and if you ask them about the more esoteric work, it’s good to create a connection between their earliest work with their big signature pieces of work.

Art Spiegelman did not want to talk about Maus. You can’t fault the man, but you can still find sneaky ways to get Art to talk about Maus by asking him about the graphic novel form and what qualifies as a graphic novel.

A lot of that comes from having a conversation with people, breaking the ice. You know these things, but you also have to think on your feet and figure out ways to respond and work with your interview subject as a human being.

There’s a few tricks I’ve found that have worked real well. Basically, when the interview’s done, that’s when I get the most responses. I’m like, “Well, I think this about wraps it up.” People kind of feel naturally like, “Oh, okay. I don’t have to be guarded,” and that’s when you start to get the good stuff. You keep the recorder going, you’re there with them. They know you’re still recording, and that’s when the conversation starts.

With Frank, he had the Adventures of Superman show from the 1950s. He had a box set, and I started talking about that with him. It’s just icebreakers, typical things. It’s why I look at Graphic NYC as me starting to appreciate the art of the conversation. A good interview is a conversation. Even though it wasn’t presented in a Q&A form like a conversation, I try and convey that through the prose, where I describe the creator and maybe even how they respond.

One of my favorite stories is from Joe Kubert. He started in the 40s. Had the School of Comic Art. Joe was in his eighties when I interviewed him. Bear of a guy. He was a big tough dude, and a very, very nice man. He did a graphic novel called Jew Gangster. It was about a kid who turns to a life of crime during the Great Depression, because the gangsters, the mob, they were kind of like the heroes.

We were just talking, and Joe was like, “Yeah, many of my friends were really kind of lured by the mob.” I was like, “Were you ever?” Joe just sat there for a second. His mouth was kind of open. For a millisecond, I was like, “Oh, my god, he’s going to punch me and I’m going to hit the floor.” I don’t care if he’s 80. He’s…”

You’re about to find out the hard way that he does have some pretty tough mob skills.

He just kind of laughed. He was like, “That’s a very provocative question.” It’s like, “Well…” He still never answered it. That made for a really great moment, because I was able to convey his character as this guy who, I don’t know… I just couldn’t believe I asked him that. It just kind of came out just in conversation. He thought it was funny, but he would not have hit me. He was a sweet, lovely man. For this millisecond, I panicked and I’m like, “Oh, you stepped across the line, Irving.”

You’ve mentioned a number of great creators. Looking through the list of people featured in this book, it’s obviously a very heavy emphasis on creators. I’m curious, are there other aspects of the comics industry that this book touches on, or that you feel like you would want to explore in further interviews? I often think about how these kinds of interviews can capture a real moment in time.

It’s been 15 years since the last one in this book, I think. Looking through it again, I realized what an interesting moment in time was captured in regards to comics and technology—we were on the precipice of digital. The iPad was just out [in 2010]. There’s a sense that the tablet was going to happen, but how would that affect comics? I was kind of like, “Well, do you think print issues are going to go away and it’s just going to be trade?”

I’m honestly still surprised by print, like floppies, I hate to use that term, but single issues exist. It’s a really interesting moment in how people address it. Scott McCloud, we had a really great time with him. I’ve known Scott since I was a student, so like 1997, and I’ve come to consider him a friend. Hearing him talk about that, and the missteps we make in trying to predict the flow of technology, and how it’s going to change things a little too soon as he talked about reinventing comics…

Also web comics, there’s quite a lot, because Dean Haspiel was basically the person who made this happen. Dean and a bunch of friends were doing a thing called ACT-I-VATE, which were web comics. They had some really incredible people there and we were really having discussions about, “What is the point? Where is it going? Do we offer things free on the web? How do we pay for this, or how do we sell this?”

There are 85 creators in this book, and I would say at least half of them were active young creators who were really thinking about these things. No one foresaw the subscription model.

That’s what I would say would be the real moment in time we captured.

What I think is also really fascinating, looking back at this, this collection is dedicated to the friends and storytellers we’ve lost. Seth is of course top on the list. He died from cancer about a decade ago. I miss him. I miss him still.

We’ve got Neil Adams, Gene Colan, Jules Feiffer, Irwin Hasen, Hernan Infantino, Al Jaffee, Joe Kubert, Stan Lee, Dwayne McDuffie, Denny O’Neill, Harvey Picard, like this list of creators, at least a dozen creators, maybe a little bit more, all kind of in the same space. It makes it a much more generational work from the literal beginnings of the industry. Joe Simon was 98 when I talked to him for this. Sharp as a tack, 98.

We go back to, as far as people I spoke with, Simon and Jules Feiffer, Al Jaffee… Al was there early on. I think you’re not only going to see a generational collection, a multi-generational collection, that you’re just not going to be able to make anymore, as far as in-person interviews go. I think that’s part of what makes this a distinctive collection.

Was that always part of the inspiration for wanting to do this is capturing the moment and giving historical perspective to then color where we are now? You mentioned Scott McCloud. He gave this fantastic Ted Talk about comics, and in it, uses an example of a comic that is an infinite scroll.

The way he sets it up, he talks about the influence of his father who’s blind, but he worked in Massachusetts for a missile provider, and then all of his siblings have more typical careers. He ended up being a comic artist, and even though his dad was blind, he had blind faith in him, and does a nice job illustrating, I think, some of that belief even from older generations feeding into it.

I’m curious what inspired you to write this collection of essays? What continues to inspire you to engage in the scene, and is it primarily about capturing the history in the moment of this space?

Well, I had the benefit of Seth’s photography, which is not reproduced here because this is an essay collection, and honestly, the photos were reproduced in Leaping Tall Buildings, and I could not do them justice through what I’m doing for this campaign. I really wanted to complement the work he was doing as a photographer, and he was amazing. That was a high bar for me to meet.

I couldn’t half-ass my work as a writer, because I didn’t want to feel like I want people to only go to the site to look for the pictures. Some people did, let’s be honest. I think a lot of capturing a moment in time is creating the context around it. You’re establishing where this person is through where they are now physically. Denny O’Neill met up with us in a Starbucks, and I put that in there. I don’t really wanted to show, “Hey, guess what? Denny O’Neill, legendary comics writer, editor, hangs out and gets a cup of coffee too, like anyone else.”

Peter Bagge, and I’ve done an entire book on Pete, who I love very much, and he’s one of my favorite creators and human beings. We went to this Belgian, it was like a waffle place or something, or crepes, or I can’t remember, but they had an accordion player. I’m like, “Of course, Pete Bagge is going to have an accordion player.” Pete’s funny as hell. He’s a really good guy. I really wanted to place that.

I think the one in this piece that really hit me was Dwayne McDuffie, a legendary writer. I really wanted Dwayne for this project. We were limited by geography and budget. We could only photograph people in New York. We traveled with advance money to Chicago where we got Alex Ross, Jill Thompson, Brian Azzarello, Jeffrey Brown, and Chris Ware. We got Chris Ware in his house. We got to see his really cool house, but most of it was in New York, and Dwayne lived in LA. He came through to promote the All-Star Superman animated movie.

He wrote a script, adapted it for it, whatever. I was on cloud nine, because I’ve always loved Dwayne’s work. He had always been nice to me when I’d met him through conventions and his wife, Charlotte. I had a great talk with him. Seth took a great photo of Dwayne in Central Park. It was winter, and Dwayne passed away a week after, on my birthday.

I had a hard time writing that essay because I was pretty upset, and I barely knew this man. I imagine with people who really knew him and loved him and worked alongside him, but it was very important that I capture what had to be part of the narrative, the story I was trying to tell around him is, yes, this is a vibrant, brilliant creator. Like Scott McCloud, Dwayne was an actual literal genius, and he decided to do anything, and he decided to write comics, and some of the best comics.

One of the things for Comic Book Artist Magazine is for a couple of years I did straight tribute pieces. It was tough after a while, but it was capturing that moment in time. Part of the reason I stopped doing it and took the site down was again, Seth had already started to move towards some other projects he wanted to do, and once he passed away, I couldn’t do it without him. It didn’t feel right. Also, it was exhausting.

If I do go back into this and bring Graphic NYC back, which I’m debating, I think I have to see how well this campaign goes. I would probably focus on more than just people who were graphic novelists as we had for our original, because we had to narrow it down. We had so many people who wanted to be in this, and we could only do so much. I would go and include folks who are artists for the big two writers, there’s a whole new generation of creators who came up since these were originally done, folks like Scott Snyder comes to mind.

He was one we wanted, but we weren’t able to get. Jason Aaron has really blown up since then. There’s a creator, Tana Ford, who I’ve met through the cons, who I would love to [interview]. Tana’s like the greatest person to have on a panel, because they’re just so quirky, and funny, and interesting, and brilliant, and I would love to do a profile on Tana. There’s also a lot more, just in that short amount of time, I think we have an even more diverse range of creators.

It’s nice to get it out on paper, but yeah, who knows? I hope that this interview and this campaign inspires people to see the real power of interviews and conversation. There’s an element of comics that I always tell people with Kickstarter, letting the work speak for itself, but then there is letting the creators speak for themselves.

That’s a large part of what The Creative Independent interviews are about, is the person behind the work, and not necessarily always just about the work—the intention is capturing the moment and their experiences. I think it’s a really vital piece of the industry.

Larry Hama’s one of my favorite people. I did a conversations book on him for University of Mississippi, and what I love about Larry is it’s all craft. If you ask him, “Well, hey, why did you have snake eyes?,” blah, blah, blah, he might give you one or two answers, but he really likes talking about the craft of storytelling, and I love that about him. I also love, conversely, Chris Claremont will go in, and he’ll dig into the weeds, and tell you why he had Jean Grey wear a green dress instead of a blue one.

He’s still present in those books he wrote years ago. It’s like there’s so many different approaches to the work, and then you have an up-and-coming creator who’s doing their comic, they’re so invested in it, and it’s such a personal piece of work for them.

I wanted an Inside the Actor Studio-approach to creators, and that’s still my dream, to do Inside the Actor Studio for comics creators, because no one’s doing it.

I think that they deserve that level of respect.

Christopher Irving Recommends:

Superman! (2025 film)

Star Trek: Strange New Worlds, Season 3

Reading the entirety of the 1980s post-Crisis Superman run of comics

Excavating more ’80s goth music I missed the first time around

Summer-time with my kid


This content originally appeared on The Creative Independent and was authored by Sam Kusek.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/comic-book-historian-christopher-irving-on-the-art-of-conversation/feed/ 0 542004
Read and Resist: The Gaslit Nation Book Club https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/read-and-resist-the-gaslit-nation-book-club/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/read-and-resist-the-gaslit-nation-book-club/#respond Mon, 30 Jun 2025 03:18:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=4e53b27a0c4804253b5e0088911eb31f After Trump’s return to power in January 2024, Gaslit Nation launched a book club not just to inform, but to fortify. Each selection is a lifeline offering strategy, moral clarity, and community in an age of disinformation and despair. 

This isn’t just a book club. It’s a survival toolkit for our time. 

Read with us. Build with us. Let’s overcome the chaos together.

Join us on the last Monday of every month at 4 PM ET at the Gaslit Nation Salon for a live discussion of that month’s book or film. Recordings are available on Patreon, along with bonus shows, ad-free episodes, and more, at Patreon.com/Gaslit. Discounted annual and gift memberships available.

Check out our schedule below: 

February – Man’s Search for Meaning by Viktor E. Frankl and The Stranger by Albert Camus Survival and absurdity under totalitarianism: one man finds purpose in a concentration camp, another questions meaning under occupation. (Book club recording here).

March – From Dictatorship to Democracy by Gene Sharp A handbook of nonviolent action, this foundational text offers strategic tools for dismantling authoritarian regimes. (Book club recording here). 

April – Parable of the Sower by Octavia E. Butler A near-future America unravels. A young Black woman builds a new belief system—and a movement—amid societal collapse. (Book club recording here). 

May – Stride Toward Freedom by Martin Luther King Jr. How the Montgomery Bus Boycott was won. MLK’s essential guide to grassroots organizing. (Book club recording here). 

June – The Gay Revolution by Lillian Faderman The LGBTQ+ rights movement through the stories of those who led it, showing small groups of people make the difference. Book club this coming Monday June 30 4pm ET.

July – Le Petit Prince by Antoine de Saint-Exupéry A wartime allegory on wonder, loss, and resistance. Book club: July 28 4pm ET

August – The Lives of Others and I’m Still Here Two films where art challenges dictatorship—from East Germany to Brazil.  Book club: August 25 4pm ET 

September – Harriet, the Moses of Her People by Sarah Hopkins Bradford Harriet Tubman’s story, in her own words based on interviews with The General herself. Book club: September 29 4pm ET

October – Deaf Republic by Ilya Kaminsky + Total Resistance by H. Von Dach Poetry and guerrilla strategy: tools for survival and defiance. Book club: October 27 4pm ET 

November – Braiding Sweetgrass by Robin Wall Kimmerer Indigenous wisdom and science for reconnection and gratitude. Book club: November 24 4pm ET

December – The Forest Song by Lesya Ukrainka An eco-feminist Ukrainian play that sings of love, rebellion, and resilience. Book club: January 29

 


This content originally appeared on Gaslit Nation and was authored by Andrea Chalupa.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/30/read-and-resist-the-gaslit-nation-book-club/feed/ 0 541888
Iran’s counter-attack ‘punctured the colonial psyche of Israel’ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/29/irans-counter-attack-punctured-the-colonial-psyche-of-israel/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/29/irans-counter-attack-punctured-the-colonial-psyche-of-israel/#respond Sun, 29 Jun 2025 03:43:27 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=538480a0f134322cf7e340f473971e7e
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/29/irans-counter-attack-punctured-the-colonial-psyche-of-israel/feed/ 0 541795
What’s behind the phony ‘Iranian sleeper cells’ hype? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/29/whats-behind-the-phony-iranian-sleeper-cells-hype/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/29/whats-behind-the-phony-iranian-sleeper-cells-hype/#respond Sun, 29 Jun 2025 03:19:36 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d6a765bfe86174b75be11610edcfd3f5
This content originally appeared on The Grayzone and was authored by The Grayzone.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/29/whats-behind-the-phony-iranian-sleeper-cells-hype/feed/ 0 541803
Stonewall: The uprising that sparked the LGBTQ movement https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/stonewall-the-uprising-that-sparked-the-lgbtq-movement/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/stonewall-the-uprising-that-sparked-the-lgbtq-movement/#respond Sat, 28 Jun 2025 23:16:11 +0000 https://therealnews.com/?p=335081 Closeup on the window and sign of The Stonewall Inn. Photo via Getty Images.
June 28, 1969, people rose up against a police raid on the NYC gay bar Stonewall Inn. It sparked a movement. This is episode 53 of Stories of Resistance.]]> Closeup on the window and sign of The Stonewall Inn. Photo via Getty Images.

Stonewall. They say it was the spark that set the fire ablaze. The start of the modern LGBTQ movement. Protests and riots that lasted for days in defense of gay rights. And from it, came gay pride parades, gay pride months, days, and celebrations far from the United States, in cities around the world. 

This is episode 53 of Stories of Resistance—a podcast co-produced by The Real News and Global Exchange. Independent investigative journalism, supported by Global Exchange’s Human Rights in Action program. Each week, we’ll bring you stories of resistance like this. Inspiration for dark times.

If you like what you hear, please subscribe, like, share, comment, or leave a review. 

And please consider signing up for the Stories of Resistance podcast feed, either in Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Spreaker, or wherever you listen.

You can see exclusive pictures, videos, and interviews on many of Michael Fox’s stories on his Patreon account: patreon.com/mfox. There you can also follow his reporting and support his work and this podcast.

Written and produced by Michael Fox.

Resources

Beyond Stonewall: Exploring LGBTQ+ History Through the Smithsonian Archives. Smithsonian Channel

Stonewall Riots: A Revolution Born From Tragedy

Remembering Stonewall: Radio documentary on the birth of a movement. Narrated by Michael Schirker; Produced by David Isay.

National march on Washington for lesbian and gay rights actualities (Part 1 of 4)

Marsha P. Johnson y Sylvia Rivera. Historias de protectores y resistencias

La notte di Stonewall: la testimonianza di Sylvia Rivera

Discurso de Sylvia Rivera en la Marcha del Orgullo de 1973 – Nueva York La activista trans Sylvia Rae Rivera, miembro fundadora del

Transcript

Stonewall. 

They say it was the spark that set the fire ablaze. The start of the modern LGBTQ movement. Riots that lasted for days in defense of gay rights. And from it came gay pride parades, gay pride months, days, and celebrations far from the United States, in cities around the world. 

It’s almost midnight on June 27, 1969. Friday night in New York City. Lower Manhattan. Greenwich Village. Police raid a gay bar known as Stonewall Inn.

It’s supposed to be routine. They’re not used to resistance. The officers try to arrest people in the bar… See, at this time, homosexuality and cross-dressing are illegal in most US states. And people are disrespected and abused for being who they are. There’s a lot of fear of coming out.

This is from a 1990 Pacifica Radio documentary about Stonewall:

“At that time, if there was even a suspicion that you were gay, that you were a lesbian, you were fired from your job. And you were in such a position of disgrace that you slunk out without saying goodbye even to the people that liked you and you liked; never even bother to clean your desk. You just disappeared. You just disappeared. You went quietly because you were afraid that the recriminations that would come if you even stood there and protested would be worse.”

But, tonight, June 28, 1969, instead of cooperating, people fight back.

One Stonewall patron, Michael Fader, would later say, “We weren’t going to be walking meekly in the night and letting them shove us around—it’s like standing your ground for the first time and in a really strong way, and that’s what caught the police by surprise. There was something in the air,” he said. “Freedom, a long time overdue, and we’re going to fight for it.”

“We were tired. We were fed up. And it was… I guess, myself and other people felt it was out time to do something to liberate ourselves.”

That’s Sylvia Rivera, a transgender rights activist who participated in the Stonewall riots. She’d go on to become a powerful activist in support of LGBTQ rights. Her words are taken from an old video published online about a decade ago, though she passed away in 2002. She says the transgender community had it the worst.

“We were treated by the police as the garbage of the homosexual community. And if you said anything to them they would either arrest you or hit you. So we had learned over the years to keep our mouths shut. But that night we had had enough.” 

“There were so many people that came out of the woodwork, like cockroaches. We even had straight people helping us in this moment of liberation, because as the crowds grew bigger, from 200 people, it grew into maybe a thousand or more. That’s when we started throwing bottles, turning over cars. A few of the drag queens uprooted a parking meter out of the ground. The molotov cocktails started flying. It was a riot that you were used to seeing on the television, when you went to other demonstrations. It got so bad that the police had to go back inside the bar and barricade themselves inside the bar.

“The most beautiful thing that I found that evening was that I saw the anger of the people who were getting beat up. They had blood on their faces and their bodies. They did not run away. They kept on coming back for more. Because we knew we had to fight for what we believed in. And it was our night.”

That was just the first night. Riots continued into the coming days. It was the start of something. Gay activists founded LGBTQ rights groups demanding justice, freedom, and respect. 

The following year, the first gay pride parades were held in a handful of US cities on the anniversary of the Stonewall riots. It had sparked a movement that could not be contained. A movement for LGBTQ rights. A movement for people to be respected for who they are. 

Today, June is celebrated as LGBTQ Pride Month. Gay pride parades are held in cities across the world. And in 2016, the Stonewall National Monument was established at the site of the Stonewall Riots. The legacy lives on… 

Today, the Trump administration is again attacking trans rights. Earlier this year, the Park Service even removed the word “transgender” from its history of the Stonewall Uprising on the Stonewall National Monument website. It is a sign that the fight for transgender and true LGBTQ rights continues…


This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by Michael Fox.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/stonewall-the-uprising-that-sparked-the-lgbtq-movement/feed/ 0 541780 Why Venetians want Jeff Bezos to choke on his wedding cake… https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/why-venetians-want-jeff-bezos-to-choke-on-his-wedding-cake/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/why-venetians-want-jeff-bezos-to-choke-on-his-wedding-cake/#respond Sat, 28 Jun 2025 15:03:26 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=3b253f00d570abc59547479440084464
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/why-venetians-want-jeff-bezos-to-choke-on-his-wedding-cake/feed/ 0 541744
Carl von Clausewitz and the Clausewitzian Viewpoint of Warfare https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/carl-von-clausewitz-and-the-clausewitzian-viewpoint-of-warfare/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/carl-von-clausewitz-and-the-clausewitzian-viewpoint-of-warfare/#respond Sat, 28 Jun 2025 15:01:22 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159479 The focal questions about war  In dealing with both theoretical and practical points of view about war, at least six fundamental questions arise: 1) What is war?; 2) What types of war exist?; 3) Why do wars occur?; 4) What is the connection between war and justice?; 5) The question of war crimes?; and 6) […]

The post Carl von Clausewitz and the Clausewitzian Viewpoint of Warfare first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The focal questions about war

 In dealing with both theoretical and practical points of view about war, at least six fundamental questions arise: 1) What is war?; 2) What types of war exist?; 3) Why do wars occur?; 4) What is the connection between war and justice?; 5) The question of war crimes?; and 6) Is it possible to replace war with the so-called “perpetual peace”?

Probably, up to today, the most used and reliable understanding of war is its short but powerful definition by Carl von Clausewitz:

“War is merely the continuation of politics by other means” [On War, 1832].

It can be considered the terrifying consequences if, in practice, Clausewitz’s term “merely” from a simple phrase about the war would be applied in the post-WWII nuclear era and the Cold War (for instance, the Cuban Missile Crisis in 1962).

Nevertheless, he became one of the most important influencers on Realism in international relations (IR). To remind ourselves, Realism in political science is a theory of IR that accepts war as a very normal and natural part of the relationships between states (and after WWII, of other political actors as well) in global politics. Realists are keen to stress that wars and all other kinds of military conflicts are not just natural (meaning normal) but even inevitable. Therefore, all theories that do not accept the inevitability of war and military conflicts (for instance, Feminism) are, in fact, unrealistic.

The art of war is an extension of politics

A Prussian general and military theorist, Carl Philipp Gottfried von Clausewitz (1780−1831), the son of a Lutheran Pastor, entered the Prussian military service when he was only 12, and achieved the rank of Major-General in his 38. He was studying the philosophy of I. Kant and became involved in the successful reform of the Prussian army. Clausewitz was of the opinion that war is a political instrument similar to, for instance, diplomacy or foreign aid. For this reason, he is considered to be a traditional (old) realist. Clausewitz echoed the Greek Thucydides, who had described in the 5th century B.C. in his famous The History of the Peloponnesian War the dreadful consequences of unlimited war in ancient Greece. Thucydides (ca. 460−406 B.C.) was a Greek historian but had a great interest in philosophy too. His great historiographical work, The History of the Peloponnesian War (431−404 B.C.), recounts the struggle between Athens and Sparta for geopolitical, military, and economic control (hegemony) over the Hellenic world. The war culminated at the end with the destruction of Athens, the birthplace of both ancient democracy and imperialistic/hegemonic ambitions. Thucydides explained the war in which he participated as the Athenian “strategos” (general) in terms of the dynamics of power politics between Sparta and Athens and the relative power of the rival city-states (polis). He consequently developed the first sustained realistic explanation of international relations and conflicts and formed the earliest theory of IR. In his famous Melian dialogue, Thucydides showed how power politics is indifferent to moral argument. This is a dialogue between the Melians and the Athenians, which Thucydides quoted in his The History of the Peloponnesian War, in which the Athenians refused to accept the Melians’ wish to remain neutral in the war with Sparta and Spartan allies. The Athenians finally besieged the Melians and massacred them. His work and dark view of human nature influenced Thomas Hobbes.

Actually, Clausewitz was in strong fear that unless politicians controlled war, it is going to degenerate into a struggle with no clear other objectives except one – to destroy the enemy. He was serving in the Prussian army during the Napoleonic Wars until being captured in 1806. Later, he helped it to be reorganized and served in the Russian army from 1812 to 1814, and finally fought at the decisive Battle of Waterloo on June 18, 1815, which brought about Napoléon’s ultimate downfall from power.

The Napoleonic Wars influenced Clausewitz to caution that war is being transformed into a struggle among whole nations and peoples without limits and restrictions, but without clear political aims and/or objectives. In his On War (in three volumes, published after his death), he explained the relationship between war and politics. In other words, war without politics is just killing, but this killing with politics has some meaning.

Clausewitz’s assumption about the phenomenon of warfare was framed by the thought that if it is reflected that war has its origin in a political object, then, naturally, it comes to the conclusion that this original motive, which called it into existence, should also continue the first and highest consideration in its conduct. Consequently, the policy is interwoven with the whole action of war and must exercise a continuous influence upon it. It is clearly seen that war is not merely a political act, but as well as a real political instrument, a continuation of political commerce, a carrying out of the same by other means. In other words, the political view is the object while war is the means, and the means must always include the object in our conception.

Another important notice by Clausewitz is that the rising power of nationalism in Europe and the use of large conscript armies (in fact, national armies) could produce in the future absolute or total wars (like WWI, WWII), that is, wars to the death and total destruction rather than wars waged for some more or less precise and limited political objectives. However, he was particularly fear leaving warfare to the generals for the reason that their idea of victory in war is framed only within the parameters of the destruction of enemy armies. Such an assumption of victory is in contradiction with the war aim of politicians, who understand victory in war as the realization of the political aims for which they started the particular war. Nevertheless, such ends in practice could range from very limited to large, and according to Clausewitz:

… wars have to be fought at the level necessary to achieve them”. If the aim of the military action is an equivalent for the political objective, that action will, in general, diminish as the political objective diminishes”. This explains why “there may be wars of all degrees of importance and energy, from a war of extermination down to the mere use of an army of observation [On War, 1832].

Generals and the war

Strange enough, but he was of the strong opinion that generals should not be allowed to make any decision concerning the question of when to start and end wars or how to fight them, because they would use all instruments at their disposal to destroy an enemy’s capacity to fight. The real reason, however, for such an opinion was the possibility of converting a limited conflict into an unlimited and, therefore, unpredictable warfare. It really happened during WWI when the importance of massive mobilization and striking first was a crucial part of the war plans by the top military commanders in order to survive and finally win the war. It simply meant that there was not enough time for diplomacy to negotiate in order to prevent war from breaking out and to be transformed into unlimited war with unpredictable consequences. In practice, such military strategy effectively shifted the decision about whether and when to go to war from political leadership to military one as political leaders had, in fact, little time to take all matters into consideration, being pressed by the military leadership to quickly go to war or to accept responsibility for the defeat. From this viewpoint, military plans and war strategies completely revised the relationship between war and politics and between civil politicians and military generals that Carl von Clausewitz had advocated a century earlier.

It has to be recognized, nonetheless, that Prussian General Carl von Clausewitz, in fact, predicted WWI as the first total war in history in which generals dictated to political leaders the timing of military mobilization and pressed politicians to take both the offensive and strike first. The insistence, in effect, of some of the top military commanders on adhering to pre-existing war plans, as it was, for instance, the case with Germany’s Schlieffen Plan and mobilization schedules, took decision-making out of the hands of politicians, i.e., civilian leaders. Therefore, in such a way, it limited the time those leaders had to negotiate with one another in order to prevent the start of the war actions and bloodshed. Furthermore, the military leaders as well as pressured civilian leaders to uphold alliance commitments and consequently spread a possibly limited war across Europe into a European total war.

As a matter of illustration, the best-known design of such nature is Germany’s Schlieffen Plan, as it was named after German Count Alfred von Schlieffen (1833−1913), who was the Chief of the German Great General Staff from 1891−1905. The plan was revised several times before WWI started. The Schlieffen Plan, like some other war plans created before WWI by the European Great Powers, was founded on the assumption of the offensive. The key to the offensive, however, was a massive and very quick military mobilization, i.e., quicker than the enemy could do the same. Something similar was designed during the Cold War when the primacy of a nuclear first strike was at the top of military plans’ priority by both superpowers. Nevertheless, a massive and even general military mobilization meant gathering troops from the whole country at certain mobilization centers to receive arms and other war materials, followed by the transportation of them together with logistic support to the frontlines to fight the enemy. Shortly, in order to win the war, it was required for a country to invest huge expenses and significant time in order to strike the enemy first, i.e., before the enemy could start its own military offensive. Concerning WWI, the German top military leaders understood massive mobilization with crucial importance for the very reason regarding their war plans to fight on two fronts – French and Russian: they thought that the single option to win the war was by striking rapidly in the West front to win France and then decisively launching an offensive against Russia as it was the least advanced country of the European Great Powers for the reason that Russia would take the longest period for the massive mobilization and preparation for war.

A trinitarian theory of warfare

For Clausewitz, war has to be a political act with the intention to compel the opponent to fulfill the will of the opposite side. He further argued that the use of force has to be only a tool or a real political instrument, as, for instance, diplomacy, in the arsenal of the politicians. War has to be just a continuation of politics by other means or instruments of forceful negotiations (bargaining), but not an end in itself. Since the war has to be only initiated for the sake of achieving strictly the political goals of civilian leadership, it is logical for him that:

“… if the original reasons were forgotten, means and ends would become confused” [On War, 1832] (something similar, for instance, occurred with the American military intervention in Afghanistan from 2001 to 2021).

He believed that in the case of forgotten original reasons for war, the use of violence is going to be irrational. In addition, in order to be usable, war has to be limited. Not all unlimited wars are usable or productive for civil purposes. However, history experienced during the last two hundred years several developments like industrialization or enlarged warfare, exactly going in the direction that Clausewitz had feared. In fact, he warned that militarism can be extremely dangerous for humanity – a cultural and ideological phenomenon in which military priorities, ideas, or values are pervading the larger or total society (for instance, Nazi Germany).

The Realists, actually, accepted Clausewitz’s approach, which later after WWII, was further developed by them into a view of the world that is distorted and dangerous, causing the so-called “unnecessary wars”. In general, such kinds of wars have been attributed to the US foreign policy during and after the Cold War around the globe. For example, in South-East Asia during the 1960s the US authorities were determined not to appease the Communist powers the way the German Nazis had been in the 1930s. Consequently, in attempting to avoid a Communist occupation of Vietnam the US became involved in a pointless and, in fact, unwinnable war, arguably confusing Nazi aims of geopolitical expansionism with the legitimate post-colonial patriotism of the people of Vietnam.

Carl von Clausewitz is by many experts considered to be the greatest writer on military theory and war. His book On War (1832) is generally interpreted as favoring the very idea that war is, in essence, a political phenomenon as an instrument of policy. The book, nevertheless, sets out a trinitarian theory of warfare that involves three subjects:

  1. The masses are motivated by a sense of national animosity (national chauvinism).
  2. The regular army devises strategies to take account of the contingencies of war.
  3. The political leaders formulate the goals and objectives of military action.

Critics of the Clausewitzian viewpoint of war

However, from another side, the Clausewitzian viewpoint of war can be deeply criticized for several reasons:

  1. One of them is the moral side of it, as Clausewitz was presenting war as a natural and even inevitable phenomenon. He can be condemned for the justification of war by reference to narrow state interest instead of some wider principles, like justice or so. However, his approach suggests that if war serves legitimate political purposes, its moral implications can be simply ignored, or in other words, not taken at all into account as an unnecessary moment of the war.
  2. Clausewitz can be criticized for the reason that his conception of warfare is outdated and therefore not fitting to modern times. In other words, his conception of war is relevant to the era of the Napoleonic Wars, but surely not to modern types of war and warfare for several reasons. First, modern economic, social, cultural, and geopolitical circumstances may, in many cases, dictate that war is a less effective power than it was at the time of Clausewitz. Therefore, war can be today of obsolete policy instrument. If contemporary states are rationally thinking about war, military power can be of lesser relevance in IR. Second, industrialized warfare, and especially the feature of total war, can make calculations about the likely costs and benefits of war much less reliable. If it is the case, then war can simply stop being an appropriate means of achieving political ends. Thirdly, most of the criticism of Clausewitz stresses the fact that the nature of both war and IR has changed and, therefore, his understanding of war as a social phenomenon is no longer applicable. In other words, Clausewitz’s doctrine of war can be applicable to the so-called “Old wars” but not to the new type of war – “New war.” Nevertheless, on the other hand, in the case that Clausewitz’s requirement that the recourse to war has to be based on rational analysis and careful calculation, many modern and contemporary wars would not have taken place.
The post Carl von Clausewitz and the Clausewitzian Viewpoint of Warfare first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Vladislav B. Sotirovic.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/carl-von-clausewitz-and-the-clausewitzian-viewpoint-of-warfare/feed/ 0 541718
Carl von Clausewitz and the Clausewitzian Viewpoint of Warfare https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/carl-von-clausewitz-and-the-clausewitzian-viewpoint-of-warfare-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/carl-von-clausewitz-and-the-clausewitzian-viewpoint-of-warfare-2/#respond Sat, 28 Jun 2025 15:01:22 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159479 The focal questions about war  In dealing with both theoretical and practical points of view about war, at least six fundamental questions arise: 1) What is war?; 2) What types of war exist?; 3) Why do wars occur?; 4) What is the connection between war and justice?; 5) The question of war crimes?; and 6) […]

The post Carl von Clausewitz and the Clausewitzian Viewpoint of Warfare first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
The focal questions about war

 In dealing with both theoretical and practical points of view about war, at least six fundamental questions arise: 1) What is war?; 2) What types of war exist?; 3) Why do wars occur?; 4) What is the connection between war and justice?; 5) The question of war crimes?; and 6) Is it possible to replace war with the so-called “perpetual peace”?

Probably, up to today, the most used and reliable understanding of war is its short but powerful definition by Carl von Clausewitz:

“War is merely the continuation of politics by other means” [On War, 1832].

It can be considered the terrifying consequences if, in practice, Clausewitz’s term “merely” from a simple phrase about the war would be applied in the post-WWII nuclear era and the Cold War (for instance, the Cuban Missile Crisis in 1962).

Nevertheless, he became one of the most important influencers on Realism in international relations (IR). To remind ourselves, Realism in political science is a theory of IR that accepts war as a very normal and natural part of the relationships between states (and after WWII, of other political actors as well) in global politics. Realists are keen to stress that wars and all other kinds of military conflicts are not just natural (meaning normal) but even inevitable. Therefore, all theories that do not accept the inevitability of war and military conflicts (for instance, Feminism) are, in fact, unrealistic.

The art of war is an extension of politics

A Prussian general and military theorist, Carl Philipp Gottfried von Clausewitz (1780−1831), the son of a Lutheran Pastor, entered the Prussian military service when he was only 12, and achieved the rank of Major-General in his 38. He was studying the philosophy of I. Kant and became involved in the successful reform of the Prussian army. Clausewitz was of the opinion that war is a political instrument similar to, for instance, diplomacy or foreign aid. For this reason, he is considered to be a traditional (old) realist. Clausewitz echoed the Greek Thucydides, who had described in the 5th century B.C. in his famous The History of the Peloponnesian War the dreadful consequences of unlimited war in ancient Greece. Thucydides (ca. 460−406 B.C.) was a Greek historian but had a great interest in philosophy too. His great historiographical work, The History of the Peloponnesian War (431−404 B.C.), recounts the struggle between Athens and Sparta for geopolitical, military, and economic control (hegemony) over the Hellenic world. The war culminated at the end with the destruction of Athens, the birthplace of both ancient democracy and imperialistic/hegemonic ambitions. Thucydides explained the war in which he participated as the Athenian “strategos” (general) in terms of the dynamics of power politics between Sparta and Athens and the relative power of the rival city-states (polis). He consequently developed the first sustained realistic explanation of international relations and conflicts and formed the earliest theory of IR. In his famous Melian dialogue, Thucydides showed how power politics is indifferent to moral argument. This is a dialogue between the Melians and the Athenians, which Thucydides quoted in his The History of the Peloponnesian War, in which the Athenians refused to accept the Melians’ wish to remain neutral in the war with Sparta and Spartan allies. The Athenians finally besieged the Melians and massacred them. His work and dark view of human nature influenced Thomas Hobbes.

Actually, Clausewitz was in strong fear that unless politicians controlled war, it is going to degenerate into a struggle with no clear other objectives except one – to destroy the enemy. He was serving in the Prussian army during the Napoleonic Wars until being captured in 1806. Later, he helped it to be reorganized and served in the Russian army from 1812 to 1814, and finally fought at the decisive Battle of Waterloo on June 18, 1815, which brought about Napoléon’s ultimate downfall from power.

The Napoleonic Wars influenced Clausewitz to caution that war is being transformed into a struggle among whole nations and peoples without limits and restrictions, but without clear political aims and/or objectives. In his On War (in three volumes, published after his death), he explained the relationship between war and politics. In other words, war without politics is just killing, but this killing with politics has some meaning.

Clausewitz’s assumption about the phenomenon of warfare was framed by the thought that if it is reflected that war has its origin in a political object, then, naturally, it comes to the conclusion that this original motive, which called it into existence, should also continue the first and highest consideration in its conduct. Consequently, the policy is interwoven with the whole action of war and must exercise a continuous influence upon it. It is clearly seen that war is not merely a political act, but as well as a real political instrument, a continuation of political commerce, a carrying out of the same by other means. In other words, the political view is the object while war is the means, and the means must always include the object in our conception.

Another important notice by Clausewitz is that the rising power of nationalism in Europe and the use of large conscript armies (in fact, national armies) could produce in the future absolute or total wars (like WWI, WWII), that is, wars to the death and total destruction rather than wars waged for some more or less precise and limited political objectives. However, he was particularly fear leaving warfare to the generals for the reason that their idea of victory in war is framed only within the parameters of the destruction of enemy armies. Such an assumption of victory is in contradiction with the war aim of politicians, who understand victory in war as the realization of the political aims for which they started the particular war. Nevertheless, such ends in practice could range from very limited to large, and according to Clausewitz:

… wars have to be fought at the level necessary to achieve them”. If the aim of the military action is an equivalent for the political objective, that action will, in general, diminish as the political objective diminishes”. This explains why “there may be wars of all degrees of importance and energy, from a war of extermination down to the mere use of an army of observation [On War, 1832].

Generals and the war

Strange enough, but he was of the strong opinion that generals should not be allowed to make any decision concerning the question of when to start and end wars or how to fight them, because they would use all instruments at their disposal to destroy an enemy’s capacity to fight. The real reason, however, for such an opinion was the possibility of converting a limited conflict into an unlimited and, therefore, unpredictable warfare. It really happened during WWI when the importance of massive mobilization and striking first was a crucial part of the war plans by the top military commanders in order to survive and finally win the war. It simply meant that there was not enough time for diplomacy to negotiate in order to prevent war from breaking out and to be transformed into unlimited war with unpredictable consequences. In practice, such military strategy effectively shifted the decision about whether and when to go to war from political leadership to military one as political leaders had, in fact, little time to take all matters into consideration, being pressed by the military leadership to quickly go to war or to accept responsibility for the defeat. From this viewpoint, military plans and war strategies completely revised the relationship between war and politics and between civil politicians and military generals that Carl von Clausewitz had advocated a century earlier.

It has to be recognized, nonetheless, that Prussian General Carl von Clausewitz, in fact, predicted WWI as the first total war in history in which generals dictated to political leaders the timing of military mobilization and pressed politicians to take both the offensive and strike first. The insistence, in effect, of some of the top military commanders on adhering to pre-existing war plans, as it was, for instance, the case with Germany’s Schlieffen Plan and mobilization schedules, took decision-making out of the hands of politicians, i.e., civilian leaders. Therefore, in such a way, it limited the time those leaders had to negotiate with one another in order to prevent the start of the war actions and bloodshed. Furthermore, the military leaders as well as pressured civilian leaders to uphold alliance commitments and consequently spread a possibly limited war across Europe into a European total war.

As a matter of illustration, the best-known design of such nature is Germany’s Schlieffen Plan, as it was named after German Count Alfred von Schlieffen (1833−1913), who was the Chief of the German Great General Staff from 1891−1905. The plan was revised several times before WWI started. The Schlieffen Plan, like some other war plans created before WWI by the European Great Powers, was founded on the assumption of the offensive. The key to the offensive, however, was a massive and very quick military mobilization, i.e., quicker than the enemy could do the same. Something similar was designed during the Cold War when the primacy of a nuclear first strike was at the top of military plans’ priority by both superpowers. Nevertheless, a massive and even general military mobilization meant gathering troops from the whole country at certain mobilization centers to receive arms and other war materials, followed by the transportation of them together with logistic support to the frontlines to fight the enemy. Shortly, in order to win the war, it was required for a country to invest huge expenses and significant time in order to strike the enemy first, i.e., before the enemy could start its own military offensive. Concerning WWI, the German top military leaders understood massive mobilization with crucial importance for the very reason regarding their war plans to fight on two fronts – French and Russian: they thought that the single option to win the war was by striking rapidly in the West front to win France and then decisively launching an offensive against Russia as it was the least advanced country of the European Great Powers for the reason that Russia would take the longest period for the massive mobilization and preparation for war.

A trinitarian theory of warfare

For Clausewitz, war has to be a political act with the intention to compel the opponent to fulfill the will of the opposite side. He further argued that the use of force has to be only a tool or a real political instrument, as, for instance, diplomacy, in the arsenal of the politicians. War has to be just a continuation of politics by other means or instruments of forceful negotiations (bargaining), but not an end in itself. Since the war has to be only initiated for the sake of achieving strictly the political goals of civilian leadership, it is logical for him that:

“… if the original reasons were forgotten, means and ends would become confused” [On War, 1832] (something similar, for instance, occurred with the American military intervention in Afghanistan from 2001 to 2021).

He believed that in the case of forgotten original reasons for war, the use of violence is going to be irrational. In addition, in order to be usable, war has to be limited. Not all unlimited wars are usable or productive for civil purposes. However, history experienced during the last two hundred years several developments like industrialization or enlarged warfare, exactly going in the direction that Clausewitz had feared. In fact, he warned that militarism can be extremely dangerous for humanity – a cultural and ideological phenomenon in which military priorities, ideas, or values are pervading the larger or total society (for instance, Nazi Germany).

The Realists, actually, accepted Clausewitz’s approach, which later after WWII, was further developed by them into a view of the world that is distorted and dangerous, causing the so-called “unnecessary wars”. In general, such kinds of wars have been attributed to the US foreign policy during and after the Cold War around the globe. For example, in South-East Asia during the 1960s the US authorities were determined not to appease the Communist powers the way the German Nazis had been in the 1930s. Consequently, in attempting to avoid a Communist occupation of Vietnam the US became involved in a pointless and, in fact, unwinnable war, arguably confusing Nazi aims of geopolitical expansionism with the legitimate post-colonial patriotism of the people of Vietnam.

Carl von Clausewitz is by many experts considered to be the greatest writer on military theory and war. His book On War (1832) is generally interpreted as favoring the very idea that war is, in essence, a political phenomenon as an instrument of policy. The book, nevertheless, sets out a trinitarian theory of warfare that involves three subjects:

  1. The masses are motivated by a sense of national animosity (national chauvinism).
  2. The regular army devises strategies to take account of the contingencies of war.
  3. The political leaders formulate the goals and objectives of military action.

Critics of the Clausewitzian viewpoint of war

However, from another side, the Clausewitzian viewpoint of war can be deeply criticized for several reasons:

  1. One of them is the moral side of it, as Clausewitz was presenting war as a natural and even inevitable phenomenon. He can be condemned for the justification of war by reference to narrow state interest instead of some wider principles, like justice or so. However, his approach suggests that if war serves legitimate political purposes, its moral implications can be simply ignored, or in other words, not taken at all into account as an unnecessary moment of the war.
  2. Clausewitz can be criticized for the reason that his conception of warfare is outdated and therefore not fitting to modern times. In other words, his conception of war is relevant to the era of the Napoleonic Wars, but surely not to modern types of war and warfare for several reasons. First, modern economic, social, cultural, and geopolitical circumstances may, in many cases, dictate that war is a less effective power than it was at the time of Clausewitz. Therefore, war can be today of obsolete policy instrument. If contemporary states are rationally thinking about war, military power can be of lesser relevance in IR. Second, industrialized warfare, and especially the feature of total war, can make calculations about the likely costs and benefits of war much less reliable. If it is the case, then war can simply stop being an appropriate means of achieving political ends. Thirdly, most of the criticism of Clausewitz stresses the fact that the nature of both war and IR has changed and, therefore, his understanding of war as a social phenomenon is no longer applicable. In other words, Clausewitz’s doctrine of war can be applicable to the so-called “Old wars” but not to the new type of war – “New war.” Nevertheless, on the other hand, in the case that Clausewitz’s requirement that the recourse to war has to be based on rational analysis and careful calculation, many modern and contemporary wars would not have taken place.
The post Carl von Clausewitz and the Clausewitzian Viewpoint of Warfare first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Vladislav B. Sotirovic.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/carl-von-clausewitz-and-the-clausewitzian-viewpoint-of-warfare-2/feed/ 0 541719
It’s not just the cities. Extreme heat is a growing threat to rural America. https://grist.org/extreme-heat/extreme-heat-growing-threat-rural-america/ https://grist.org/extreme-heat/extreme-heat-growing-threat-rural-america/#respond Sat, 28 Jun 2025 13:00:00 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=669126 Summer has officially begun with a blast of scorching temperatures across much of the United States. The National Weather Service is warning of “extremely dangerous heat” baking 160 million people under a heat dome stretching from the Midwest to the East Coast the rest of this week. It’s already proven fatal.

But while this is the first real taste of extreme heat for Northeastern cities, parts of the country like Texas have been cooking since May. Alaska this month issued its first-ever heat advisory. Forecasters expect more above-average temperatures through the summer.

Summers are indeed getting hotter, a consequence of the warming planet. As the climate heats up, the frequency and intensity of heat waves is increasing and their timing is changing, arriving earlier in the season.

But the damage from extreme heat isn’t spread out evenly, and the more dangerous effects to people are not necessarily found in the hottest places. High temperatures often lead to more emergencies and hospital visits when they represent a big jump from a place’s average, which means ordinarily cooler regions tend to suffer the worst harm from heat. That includes places like Alaska and the Pacific Northwest, where temperatures rarely climb higher than 80 degrees Fahrenheit and most homes don’t have air-conditioning.

Now researchers have found that rural areas may suffer more under extreme heat than previously thought. A report from Headwaters Economics and the Federation of American Scientists found that more than half of rural ZIP codes in the United States, which includes some 11.5 million Americans, have “high” heat vulnerability, a consequence not just of temperatures but unique risk factors that occur far outside of major cities.The thermometers thus do not tell the whole story about who is likely to suffer from extreme heat — nor do the images, which tend to come from sweltering cities. But understanding the factors that worsen the harm of rising temperatures could help save lives.

What makes the countryside so vulnerable to extreme heat

The discussion around the geography of extreme heat tends to focus on the urban heat island effect. The concrete, asphalt, steel, and glass of dense urban areas act as a sponge for the sun’s rays. Air pollution from cars, trucks, furnaces, and factories helps trap warmer temperatures over cities, and that hotter air, in turn, accelerates the formation of pollutants like ozone. On a hot summer day, a city center can be 25 degrees Fahrenheit warmer than the surrounding regions. And with so many people squeezed into these metropolitan ovens, it adds up to a massive health burden from extreme heat.

But far outside of downtowns, where homes and buildings get farther and farther apart, rural regions face their own long-running challenges that exacerbate the dangers of extreme heat.

A major factor: the median age of the rural population is older than in cities. That matters, because on a physiological level, older adults struggle more to cope with heat than the young. People living in rural communities also have double the rates of chronic health conditions that enhance the damage from heat like high blood pressure and emphysema compared to people living in urban ZIP codes.

Rural infrastructure is another vulnerability. While there may be more forests and farms in the country that can cool the air, the buildings there are often older, with less adequate insulation and cooling systems for this new era of severe heat. Manufactured and mobile homes, more common in rural areas, are particularly sensitive to heat. In Arizona’s Maricopa County, home to Phoenix, mobile homes make up 5 percent of the housing stock but account for 30 percent of indoor heat deaths.

Even if rural residents have air conditioners and fans, they tend to have lower incomes and thus devote a higher share of their spending for electricity, up to 40 percent more than city dwellers, which makes it less affordable for them to stay cool. That’s if they can get electricity at all: Rural areas are more vulnerable to outages due to older infrastructure and the long distances that power lines have to be routed, creating greater chances of problems like tree branches falling on lines. According to the US Census Bureau, 35.4 percent of households in rural areas experienced an outage over the course of a year, compared to 22.8 percent of households in urban areas.

Sparsely populated communities also have fewer public spaces, such as shopping malls and libraries, where people can pass a hot summer day. Rural economies also depend more on outdoor labor, and there are still no federal workplace heat regulations. Farmworkers, construction crews, and delivery drivers are especially vulnerable to hot weather, and an average of 40 workers die each year from extreme heat.

The health infrastructure is lacking as well. “There is a longstanding healthcare crisis in rural areas,” said Grace Wickerson, senior manager for climate and health at the Federation of American Scientists. There aren’t always nearby clinics and hospitals that can quickly treat heat emergencies. “To really take care of someone when they’re actually in full-on heat stroke, they need to be cooled down in a matter of minutes,” Wickerson said.

The Phoenix Fire Department has now started using ice immersion for heat stroke victims when transporting patients to hospitals to buy precious time. But rural emergency responders are less likely to have tools like this in their ambulances. “In Montana, which has not traditionally seen a lot of extreme heat, you would not have those tools on your truck and not have that awareness to do that cooling. When you see someone who has to also then travel miles to get care, that’s going to worsen their health related outcomes,” Wickerson said.

Emergency response times are generally much longer in rural areas, sometimes extending more than 25 minutes. People also have lower incomes and lower rates of insurance far from cities. Hospitals in rural areas are closing down as well. So when severe heat sets in, rural healthcare systems can get overwhelmed easily.Looking at data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and the US Census Bureau, Wickerson and her collaborators mapped out how all these underlying factors are converging with extreme heat. They found that 59 percent of urban ZIP codes and 54 percent of rural ZIP codes are highly vulnerable to extreme heat as defined by the CDC’s Heat and Health Index, meaning they are much more likely to see health problems from extreme heat. So while rural areas may be cooler, the people living there face heat dangers comparable to those in much hotter cities, and geographically, they cover a much wider expanse of the country.

Rural areas across the U.S. are facing major threats from extreme heat. Headwaters Economics / Federation of American Scientists

So while temperatures out in the sticks may not climb to the same peaks they do in downtowns, urban heat islands are surrounded by an ocean of rural heat vulnerabilities.

There’s no easy path to cooling off

There are ways to reduce the dangers of scorching weather across vast swaths of the country, but they aren’t fast or cheap. They require big upgrades to infrastructure — more robust energy delivery, more shade and green spaces, better insulation, cool roofs, and more energy-efficient cooling.

Countering extreme heat also requires bigger structural investments to reverse the ongoing rural healthcare crisis where a doctor shortage, hospital closures, and longer emergency response times are converging. But the Republican budget proposal will do the opposite, cutting healthcare access for millions of Americans that would, in turn, lead to dozens of hospitals closing down, mainly in rural areas.

Protecting people from dangerous heat also demands policy changes. Most states don’t have any worker protections on the books for extreme heat. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration is in the process of creating the first federal heat safety standard for employers, requiring them to give employees breaks, water, and shade when it gets hot. But it’s not clear how strong the final regulation will be given that the Trump administration has been working to weaken rules across the board.

Cities and local governments could also impose rules that prevent utilities from shutting off power to customers during heat waves, similar to regulations that limit heat shutoffs during the winter.

But there are limits to how much people can adapt to hotter temperatures. Even places with a long history of managing heat are seeing more deaths and hospitalizations as relentless temperatures continue to mount. That means curbing the ongoing warming trend has to be part of the solution as well, reducing greenhouse gas emissions to slow climate change.

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline It’s not just the cities. Extreme heat is a growing threat to rural America. on Jun 28, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Umair Irfan, Vox.

]]>
https://grist.org/extreme-heat/extreme-heat-growing-threat-rural-america/feed/ 0 541712
The Wobbly Planet https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/the-wobbly-planet/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/the-wobbly-planet/#respond Sat, 28 Jun 2025 07:21:55 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159522 Science is under attack throughout the world. Meanwhile, there’s substantial scientific evidence that the planetary system is turning unstable. This may not strike most people as a big problem because ‘life goes on,’ an attitude that’s more, and more, prevalent and one of the factors behind anti-science attitudes. But, if in fact the planetary system […]

The post The Wobbly Planet first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Science is under attack throughout the world. Meanwhile, there’s substantial scientific evidence that the planetary system is turning unstable. This may not strike most people as a big problem because ‘life goes on,’ an attitude that’s more, and more, prevalent and one of the factors behind anti-science attitudes. But, if in fact the planetary system is becoming unstable, if it is true, life will be hell.

Johan Rockström, joint director of the Potsdam Institute for Climate Impact Research/Germany, internationally recognized for his work on global sustainability, recently gave a 30-minute speech that specifically addresses stability of the Earth system. This is a synopsis of his remarks, including some editorial comment.

“We are facing, undoubtably, in all forms of risk assessment, a decisive moment for humanity’s future on planet Earth… I’m talking about for the first time in human history on planet Earth that we are forced to seriously consider the risks we are destabilizing the stability of the entire planet.” (Johan Rockström, Potsdam Institute speech Publica 25: Decisive Decade: From Global Promises to Planetary Action)

“We are hitting the ceiling of the biophysical processes, the hardwired process that regulates the very functioning of the Earth’s system,” Ibid.

All parameters of planetary health for human well-being have similar trajectories, sharply upwards. Until the 1950s we had a linear system (relatively stable and predictable but unsustainable exploitation) and starting in 1955 with 3.5 billion people, and going forward, an exponential rise suddenly took off with overexploitation of biodiversity, and acid rain, and massive deforestation. All forms of pressure on the planet took off to the point where today we are in an entirely new geological epoch, and it’s happening within only one generation, remarkably, in the context of a stable planetary system ever since humans first huddled together around fires. It’s potentially the most momentous happening in all of human history, period!

Civilization is exiting the Holocene, entering the Anthropocene. Humans are now the dominating “force of change.” This is too new, too quick for a 4.5-billion-year-old planet system accustomed to old-fashioned ways. In fact, we’re already hitting the ceiling of stable planetary processes and starting to push through. For example. for the first time, last year was a full year to exceed 1.5°C pre-industrial, the warmest temperature on Earth over the last 100,000 years. We’re starting to feel it, see it, smell it, and taste it, record wildfires, record floods, record hurricanes, record tornados, record coral bleaching, record glacial melt, record droughts, record sea level rise, record dry riverbeds, record heat deaths, record ocean acidification, record insect loss, and record marine loss. Humans are the only gainers.

The 2023 Watershed Year

According to Rockström: “We are already outside of the Holocene range of variability… let me bring you to why we are so nervous today. Why we have over the past 12 months heard scientific language that I’ve never experienced in my whole career, mind-boggling, shocking data, observations that we never thought was possible, that we would never be able to predict in our models… it’s the observation of air temperature and sea surface temperatures”:
“We have a global climate crisis.”
“We are in a situation of dire need of change.”
In 2023, a 0.3° C jump in global temperature occurred. The planet experienced a sudden 10-times increase in only 12 months; it’s unheard of.

Under normal circumstances, with the 2023 watershed year, when global temperature suddenly spikes up, it stabilizes for a period of time, but it demonstrated an alarming change in behavior and serious cause for concern because El Niño (natural warming phase) and La Niña (natural cooling phase) cycles that always influence the climate system are not having any impact, none!. This has never happened before.

Rockström: “There is something wrong. What is happening?” Honest answer: “We do not know yet.”

The rapid escalation of planetary instability has sparked unprecedented concern as the interplay of human activity with natural systems has created a volatile environment, thunderstorms become more severe, rainstorms more powerfully destructive as atmospheric rivers suddenly bring flash floods, and droughts longer, hotter.

Increasingly, feedback mechanisms include the accelerated release of methane from thawing permafrost, which is a potent greenhouse gas, and the retreat of polar ice, which diminishes the planet’s reflection of solar radiation and further intensifies warming. The urgency of the situation has led to calls for systemic change, not only in reducing greenhouse gas emissions but also in restructuring economies and societies to prioritize sustainability over short-term gains. Yet, global emissions continue, and international agreements fall short of binding commitments or fail altogether in implementation.

The risks are glaring, for example, the latest data on the Brazilian Amazon rainforest tells the story, as Earth’s richest ecosystem, the Brazilian portion of the rainforest, which is the largest part, has already tipped. It’s no longer a carbon sink. It’s a carbon source. This has ominous warning signs written all over it. For the first time, we are seeing signs of the planet losing its resilience, losing its buffering capacity, which the science community refers to as “climate sensitivity.”

We now have the evidence of what occurs as certain limits are exceeded. For example, coincident with 1.5°C, “we’ve never before seen the frequency, amplitude, and strength of droughts, fires, floods, heat waves… There’s been a 60% increase in droughts.” The signs are everywhere. The planet is leaving the all-important “corridor of life.” The planet, for over one million years, never exceeded +2°C during warm interglacial and never below -5°C deep ice age. It’s the biogeochemical system that we depend on. It is threatened.

It’s already approaching the high end of that range. There are 16 tipping elements that regulate the Earth system. Six of those are in the Arctic, which is ground zero for Earth: 1) Greenland ice sheet 2) boreal forest 3) Arctic winter ice 4) permafrost system 5) connected by North Atlantic and AMOC. Also impacting, the Amazon rainforest, all three big systems, Antarctica, and tropical coral reef systems. These regulate the stability of the climate system.

Risk of Domino Effect

Temperatures at which a system tips from a state that helps us survive to a state of self-amplified warming include threats to the Greenland Ice Sheet, West Antarctica Ice Sheet, abrupt permafrost thawing, tropical coral systems, collapse of Labrador Sea ice and collapse of Barren Sea ice. These are all at risk. There is strong evidence that these systems interact with each other, meaning, there’s a risk of cascading impacts. Where one system triggers several others. These six systems are already outside the boundary of safe space. This is an extremely significant development for the first time in human history.

We’re at a point where we need to buckle up for a challenging journey. The probability of not exceeding 1.5°C on a sustained 10-yr basis is no longer possible. No matter what course is taken going forward, “it will get worse before it gets better.” And every tenth of a degree warming has big impact going forward. Along those lines, science has identified big costs to the global economy based upon current economics with up to 20% costs over the next decades as a result of loss of planetary stability.

The amount of time remaining to take mitigation measures is running short. Based upon analyses by the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), we only have 200 Gt CO2 remaining in the global carbon budget to achieve a 50/50 chance of holding to 1.5°C, after an expected upcoming overshoot to 1.7°C. That’s five years of global emissions. Five years to accomplish “decades of work” to hopefully hold the line.

Positive Signs Within a Narrow Window of Opportunity

Efforts are being made to harness innovative technologies and traditional ecological knowledge to mitigate. From reforestation projects aimed at sequestering carbon to advancements in renewable energy, the pathways for resilience are there. However, time is running out; incremental progress will no longer suffice to prevent catastrophic outcomes. A lot needs to squeeze into the next five years, or all bets are off.

There are some favorable signs, for example, renewables are on a strong pathway in parts of the world economy, 90% of vehicle sales in Norway today are fully electric. In Denmark the EV market share is almost 60%.

Rockström: “As of today, we are in a danger zone. But we still have an opportunity to turn this around.”

Or does the strong anti-science political movement, emanating throughout the world from the United States, throw a wet blanket on the crucial five years ahead?

Useful link: Resources for Researchers and Scholars Under Threat in the United States, National Academies, Sciences, Engineering, Medicine.

The post The Wobbly Planet first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Robert Hunziker.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/the-wobbly-planet/feed/ 0 541670
The Wobbly Planet https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/the-wobbly-planet-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/the-wobbly-planet-2/#respond Sat, 28 Jun 2025 07:21:55 +0000 https://dissidentvoice.org/?p=159522 Science is under attack throughout the world. Meanwhile, there’s substantial scientific evidence that the planetary system is turning unstable. This may not strike most people as a big problem because ‘life goes on,’ an attitude that’s more, and more, prevalent and one of the factors behind anti-science attitudes. But, if in fact the planetary system […]

The post The Wobbly Planet first appeared on Dissident Voice.]]>
Science is under attack throughout the world. Meanwhile, there’s substantial scientific evidence that the planetary system is turning unstable. This may not strike most people as a big problem because ‘life goes on,’ an attitude that’s more, and more, prevalent and one of the factors behind anti-science attitudes. But, if in fact the planetary system is becoming unstable, if it is true, life will be hell.

Johan Rockström, joint director of the Potsdam Institute for Climate Impact Research/Germany, internationally recognized for his work on global sustainability, recently gave a 30-minute speech that specifically addresses stability of the Earth system. This is a synopsis of his remarks, including some editorial comment.

“We are facing, undoubtably, in all forms of risk assessment, a decisive moment for humanity’s future on planet Earth… I’m talking about for the first time in human history on planet Earth that we are forced to seriously consider the risks we are destabilizing the stability of the entire planet.” (Johan Rockström, Potsdam Institute speech Publica 25: Decisive Decade: From Global Promises to Planetary Action)

“We are hitting the ceiling of the biophysical processes, the hardwired process that regulates the very functioning of the Earth’s system,” Ibid.

All parameters of planetary health for human well-being have similar trajectories, sharply upwards. Until the 1950s we had a linear system (relatively stable and predictable but unsustainable exploitation) and starting in 1955 with 3.5 billion people, and going forward, an exponential rise suddenly took off with overexploitation of biodiversity, and acid rain, and massive deforestation. All forms of pressure on the planet took off to the point where today we are in an entirely new geological epoch, and it’s happening within only one generation, remarkably, in the context of a stable planetary system ever since humans first huddled together around fires. It’s potentially the most momentous happening in all of human history, period!

Civilization is exiting the Holocene, entering the Anthropocene. Humans are now the dominating “force of change.” This is too new, too quick for a 4.5-billion-year-old planet system accustomed to old-fashioned ways. In fact, we’re already hitting the ceiling of stable planetary processes and starting to push through. For example. for the first time, last year was a full year to exceed 1.5°C pre-industrial, the warmest temperature on Earth over the last 100,000 years. We’re starting to feel it, see it, smell it, and taste it, record wildfires, record floods, record hurricanes, record tornados, record coral bleaching, record glacial melt, record droughts, record sea level rise, record dry riverbeds, record heat deaths, record ocean acidification, record insect loss, and record marine loss. Humans are the only gainers.

The 2023 Watershed Year

According to Rockström: “We are already outside of the Holocene range of variability… let me bring you to why we are so nervous today. Why we have over the past 12 months heard scientific language that I’ve never experienced in my whole career, mind-boggling, shocking data, observations that we never thought was possible, that we would never be able to predict in our models… it’s the observation of air temperature and sea surface temperatures”:
“We have a global climate crisis.”
“We are in a situation of dire need of change.”
In 2023, a 0.3° C jump in global temperature occurred. The planet experienced a sudden 10-times increase in only 12 months; it’s unheard of.

Under normal circumstances, with the 2023 watershed year, when global temperature suddenly spikes up, it stabilizes for a period of time, but it demonstrated an alarming change in behavior and serious cause for concern because El Niño (natural warming phase) and La Niña (natural cooling phase) cycles that always influence the climate system are not having any impact, none!. This has never happened before.

Rockström: “There is something wrong. What is happening?” Honest answer: “We do not know yet.”

The rapid escalation of planetary instability has sparked unprecedented concern as the interplay of human activity with natural systems has created a volatile environment, thunderstorms become more severe, rainstorms more powerfully destructive as atmospheric rivers suddenly bring flash floods, and droughts longer, hotter.

Increasingly, feedback mechanisms include the accelerated release of methane from thawing permafrost, which is a potent greenhouse gas, and the retreat of polar ice, which diminishes the planet’s reflection of solar radiation and further intensifies warming. The urgency of the situation has led to calls for systemic change, not only in reducing greenhouse gas emissions but also in restructuring economies and societies to prioritize sustainability over short-term gains. Yet, global emissions continue, and international agreements fall short of binding commitments or fail altogether in implementation.

The risks are glaring, for example, the latest data on the Brazilian Amazon rainforest tells the story, as Earth’s richest ecosystem, the Brazilian portion of the rainforest, which is the largest part, has already tipped. It’s no longer a carbon sink. It’s a carbon source. This has ominous warning signs written all over it. For the first time, we are seeing signs of the planet losing its resilience, losing its buffering capacity, which the science community refers to as “climate sensitivity.”

We now have the evidence of what occurs as certain limits are exceeded. For example, coincident with 1.5°C, “we’ve never before seen the frequency, amplitude, and strength of droughts, fires, floods, heat waves… There’s been a 60% increase in droughts.” The signs are everywhere. The planet is leaving the all-important “corridor of life.” The planet, for over one million years, never exceeded +2°C during warm interglacial and never below -5°C deep ice age. It’s the biogeochemical system that we depend on. It is threatened.

It’s already approaching the high end of that range. There are 16 tipping elements that regulate the Earth system. Six of those are in the Arctic, which is ground zero for Earth: 1) Greenland ice sheet 2) boreal forest 3) Arctic winter ice 4) permafrost system 5) connected by North Atlantic and AMOC. Also impacting, the Amazon rainforest, all three big systems, Antarctica, and tropical coral reef systems. These regulate the stability of the climate system.

Risk of Domino Effect

Temperatures at which a system tips from a state that helps us survive to a state of self-amplified warming include threats to the Greenland Ice Sheet, West Antarctica Ice Sheet, abrupt permafrost thawing, tropical coral systems, collapse of Labrador Sea ice and collapse of Barren Sea ice. These are all at risk. There is strong evidence that these systems interact with each other, meaning, there’s a risk of cascading impacts. Where one system triggers several others. These six systems are already outside the boundary of safe space. This is an extremely significant development for the first time in human history.

We’re at a point where we need to buckle up for a challenging journey. The probability of not exceeding 1.5°C on a sustained 10-yr basis is no longer possible. No matter what course is taken going forward, “it will get worse before it gets better.” And every tenth of a degree warming has big impact going forward. Along those lines, science has identified big costs to the global economy based upon current economics with up to 20% costs over the next decades as a result of loss of planetary stability.

The amount of time remaining to take mitigation measures is running short. Based upon analyses by the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), we only have 200 Gt CO2 remaining in the global carbon budget to achieve a 50/50 chance of holding to 1.5°C, after an expected upcoming overshoot to 1.7°C. That’s five years of global emissions. Five years to accomplish “decades of work” to hopefully hold the line.

Positive Signs Within a Narrow Window of Opportunity

Efforts are being made to harness innovative technologies and traditional ecological knowledge to mitigate. From reforestation projects aimed at sequestering carbon to advancements in renewable energy, the pathways for resilience are there. However, time is running out; incremental progress will no longer suffice to prevent catastrophic outcomes. A lot needs to squeeze into the next five years, or all bets are off.

There are some favorable signs, for example, renewables are on a strong pathway in parts of the world economy, 90% of vehicle sales in Norway today are fully electric. In Denmark the EV market share is almost 60%.

Rockström: “As of today, we are in a danger zone. But we still have an opportunity to turn this around.”

Or does the strong anti-science political movement, emanating throughout the world from the United States, throw a wet blanket on the crucial five years ahead?

Useful link: Resources for Researchers and Scholars Under Threat in the United States, National Academies, Sciences, Engineering, Medicine.

The post The Wobbly Planet first appeared on Dissident Voice.


This content originally appeared on Dissident Voice and was authored by Robert Hunziker.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/28/the-wobbly-planet-2/feed/ 0 541671
The Trump administration claims roads in forests prevent wildfires. Researchers disagree. https://grist.org/wildfires/wildfire-prevention-roads-trump-repeal-roadless-rule-usda-forest-service/ https://grist.org/wildfires/wildfire-prevention-roads-trump-repeal-roadless-rule-usda-forest-service/#respond Fri, 27 Jun 2025 23:12:48 +0000 https://grist.org/?p=669200 The Trump administration announced its intention earlier this week to rescind the 2001 Roadless Area Conservation Policy, also known as the “Roadless Rule,” which restricts road-building, logging, and mining across 58 million acres of the country’s national forests. 

The administration’s rationale was that the “outdated” Roadless Rule has exacerbated wildfire risks. In a statement announcing the policy change, U.S. Agriculture Department Secretary Brooke Rollins said that “properly managing our forests preserves them from devastating fires and allows future generations of Americans to enjoy and reap the benefits of this great land.” 

Fire ecologists agree that the U.S. needs to step up land management efforts to reduce the likelihood of dangerous conflagrations. But experts don’t think more roads penetrating the country’s protected national forests is the best way to do that. Most fires — especially those that significantly affect communities — start on private lands that aren’t affected by the Roadless Rule, and remote areas can usually be managed for fire risk using flown-in firefighters. 

Rescinding the Roadless Rule “does not change our current federal land management capacity to improve management and stop wildfires,” said Camille Stevens-Rumann, interim director of the Colorado Forest Restoration Institute and an associate professor of forest management and rangeland stewardship at Colorado State University. “What opening up currently roadless areas really does is allow for timber extraction.”

Before the Forest Service — an agency of the USDA — finalized the Roadless Rule at the very end of the Clinton administration in 2001, the agency struggled to pay for the maintenance of existing roads in national forests, let alone the construction of new ones. 

But the policy has been controversial, facing multiple challenges from states, private companies, and GOP lawmakers who saw the rule as an impediment to commercial logging. It was repealed in 2005 by the administration of then-president George W. Bush, but reinstated the following year by a federal district court. Lawsuits from states including Alaska and Idaho have attempted to carve out exemptions for their forests, and some Republican lawmakers have facilitated land transfers from federal ownership in order to circumvent Roadless Rule protections. 

Road through a forest going toward large, rocky mountains, with blue sky in background.
A road through forests near Markleeville, California. George Rose / Getty Images

Most recently, in 2020, during President Donald Trump’s first term, the Forest Service rolled back the Roadless Rule for the 9 million-acre Tongass National Forest in Alaska. Republican Senator Dan Sullivan of Alaska praised the repeal “fostering opportunities for Alaskans to make a living.” But that decision was reversed in 2023 under then-president Joe Biden. 

This time around, the Trump administration is deemphasizing logging as a rationale for nixing the Roadless Rule. The USDA press release on the decision only briefly touches on the industry, saying that the Roadless Rule “hurts jobs and economic development” and that repealing it will allow for “responsible timber production.” The communication devotes more attention to the supposed wildfire risk that the rule creates, pointing out that 28 million acres of land covered by the rule are at high risk of wildfire, and arguing that repealing it will “reduce wildfire risk and help protect surrounding communities and infrastructure.”

Forest Service Chief Tom Schultz, in a column posted to the Forest Service website, said the amount of land lost to wildfire in roadless areas each year has “more than doubled” since the Roadless Rule’s inception, though he does not provide evidence that this is because of the Roadless Rule and not other factors like climate change and the hotter, drier conditions associated with it. Schultz did not respond to a request for comment.

The implication of the USDA and Forest Service’s statements is that roads can help get firefighters and equipment to remote forests to reduce their risk of fires, or fight fires when they break out. It’s true that land managers sometimes need access to densely forested areas to get rid of overgrown plants and dead wood that could fuel a small blaze and turn it into an out-of-control fire. They do this with practices known as tree-thinning, which involves the removal of small shrubs and trees, and prescribed burns — intentionally set, carefully managed fires

But five experts told Grist that the relationship between roads and forest fires is not as simple as the USDA’s announcement implies. Although roads can help transport firefighters and their gear to the wilderness — whether to fight existing wildfires or to conduct prescribed burns — they also increase the risk of unintentional fires from vehicles and campfires. 

“If we’re gonna say which one leads to a greater risk” — roads or no roads — “I don’t think we have the full picture to assess that,” said Chris Dunn, an assistant professor of forest engineering, resources, and management at Oregon State University. “Those two components might counteract each other.”

In a 2022 research paper looking at cross-boundary wildfires — meaning those that move between private lands and lands managed by the Forest Service, including roadless areas — Dunn and his co-authors found that the vast majority of wildfires start on private lands, with ignitions rising as a function of an area’s road density. In other words, more roads are associated with more fires. This research also showed that most fires that destroy 50 buildings or more are started by humans on private lands.

Another study, this one from 2021, focused on roads and roadless areas within 11 Western states’ national forests. Dunn and his co-authors found that most wildfires between 1984 and 2018 started near roads, not in roadless areas, and that there was no connection between roadlessness and the “severity” of a fire — the amount of vegetation it killed. However, fires in roadless areas were more likely to escape initial suppression efforts, and they tended to burn a larger area.

Road with emergency vehicle parked on the right side, ahead of a felled tree. Forests are on either side of the road, and the air is smoky.
A Forest Service truck blocks a road with burned trees during the 2020 Holiday Farm Fire in Oregon. Tyee Burwell / AFP via Getty Images

Dunn noted that not all big, severe, remote fires are bad. Some ecosystems depend on occasional burning, and his research suggests that the greater size of fires in roadless areas can make landscapes more resilient to climate change. A problem arises when forest managers look at forests exclusively “through the lens of timber and dollar signs on trees,” he said, which can create a bias against tree mortality — even if it’s ecologically healthy for trees to burn or get thinned out by workers. That economic perspective seems to match that of the Trump administration, which has repeatedly referred to public lands and waters in terms of their “resource potential.” 

Steve Pyne, a fire expert and emeritus professor at Arizona State University’s Center for Biology and Society, agreed with other experts Grist spoke with that rescinding the Roadless Rule “is not about fire protection; it’s about logging.” In April, USDA Secretary Rollins directed regional Forest Service offices to increase timber extraction by 25 percent, in line with an executive order Trump signed in March ordering federal agencies to “immediately increase domestic timber production.”

In response to Grist’s request for comment, a USDA spokesperson said that, “while some research indicates that roads can increase the likelihood of human-caused fires, they also improve access for forest management to reduce fuels and for fire suppression efforts.” They declined to respond to a question about opening up public lands for logging interests, except to say that the agency is “using all strategies available to reduce wildfire risk,” including timber harvesting.

Even if it were certain that more roads mitigate fire risk, it’s not clear that rescinding the Roadless Rule will lead to more of them being constructed. James Johnston, an assistant research professor at the University of Oregon’s Institute for Resilient Organizations, Communities, and Environments, said the Forest Service lacks the personnel and funding to maintain the road system it already has, and building new ones is likely to be a challenge. The Trump administration has only exacerbated the problem by firing 10 percent of the agency’s workers since taking office. 

“Nobody is going to next week, next month, or any time in the future build roads across an area the size of the state of Idaho,” he said, referring to the 58 million acres covered by the Roadless Rule. Private companies that want to build new roads on public lands also face barriers to road construction because they need to obtain environmental permits, he added. New roads on Forest Service land would have to comply with statutes like the Endangered Species Act and the Clean Water Act. Johnston also noted that many roadless areas are unsuitable to roads because they are too steep or rocky. 

Ryan Talbott, Pacific Northwest conservation advocate for the nonprofit WildEarth Guardians, noted that it will take time for the USDA to legally rescind the Roadless Rule. “There’s a process,” he said. “In ordinary times they would put a notice in the Federal Register announcing that they intend to rescind the Roadless Rule, and then there would be a public comment process and then eventually they would get to a final decision.” The USDA spokesperson told Grist that a formal notice would be published in the Federal Register, the government’s daily journal that publishes newly enacted and proposed federal rules, “in the coming weeks.” 

Stevens-Rumann, at Colorado State University, said that if the Trump administration were serious about mitigating wildfire risk, it would make more sense to increase Forest Service funding and personnel, and, critically, to conduct tree-thinning and prescribed burns in areas that already have roads. “We have a ton of work that we could be doing in roaded areas before we even go to roadless areas,” she said. 

This story was originally published by Grist with the headline The Trump administration claims roads in forests prevent wildfires. Researchers disagree. on Jun 27, 2025.


This content originally appeared on Grist and was authored by Joseph Winters.

]]>
https://grist.org/wildfires/wildfire-prevention-roads-trump-repeal-roadless-rule-usda-forest-service/feed/ 0 541606
Democrat elites try to destroy Zohran Mamdani’s chance at NYC mayor—will they succeed? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/democrat-elites-try-to-destroy-zohran-mamdanis-chance-at-nyc-mayor-will-they-succeed/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/democrat-elites-try-to-destroy-zohran-mamdanis-chance-at-nyc-mayor-will-they-succeed/#respond Fri, 27 Jun 2025 21:47:33 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=d424940dedf52d07a266dc0eed5068f8
This content originally appeared on The Real News Network and was authored by The Real News Network.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/democrat-elites-try-to-destroy-zohran-mamdanis-chance-at-nyc-mayor-will-they-succeed/feed/ 0 541599
The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – June 27, 2025 https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-june-27-2025/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-june-27-2025/#respond Fri, 27 Jun 2025 18:00:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=74a3d699fc096e3893156614d392ce82 Comprehensive coverage of the day’s news with a focus on war and peace; social, environmental and economic justice.

The post The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays – June 27, 2025 appeared first on KPFA.


This content originally appeared on KPFA - The Pacifica Evening News, Weekdays and was authored by KPFA.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/the-pacifica-evening-news-weekdays-june-27-2025/feed/ 0 541619
Why does the UN want you to know about ‘transnational repression’ and its inherent dangers? https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/why-does-the-un-want-you-to-know-about-transnational-repression-and-its-inherent-dangers/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/why-does-the-un-want-you-to-know-about-transnational-repression-and-its-inherent-dangers/#respond Fri, 27 Jun 2025 16:35:06 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=0059ca1b9ec25b6a8a6e31eb9e48bf2f
This content originally appeared on Human Rights Watch and was authored by Human Rights Watch.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/why-does-the-un-want-you-to-know-about-transnational-repression-and-its-inherent-dangers/feed/ 0 541554
Rep. Pramila Jayapal: Trump Is Attacking "Every Part of the Legal Immigration System" https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/rep-pramila-jayapal-trump-is-attacking-every-part-of-the-legal-immigration-system-2/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/rep-pramila-jayapal-trump-is-attacking-every-part-of-the-legal-immigration-system-2/#respond Fri, 27 Jun 2025 15:54:24 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=9a247fba614906e450f7f2112451a54e
This content originally appeared on Democracy Now! and was authored by Democracy Now!.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/rep-pramila-jayapal-trump-is-attacking-every-part-of-the-legal-immigration-system-2/feed/ 0 541540
Feel the rhythm!! #labamba #loslobos #andrescalamaro #lamarisoul https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/feel-the-rhythm-labamba-loslobos-andrescalamaro-lamarisoul/ https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/feel-the-rhythm-labamba-loslobos-andrescalamaro-lamarisoul/#respond Fri, 27 Jun 2025 15:29:00 +0000 http://www.radiofree.org/?guid=3911ab4538e6792dd358c86f3fa7c232
This content originally appeared on Playing For Change and was authored by Playing For Change.

]]>
https://www.radiofree.org/2025/06/27/feel-the-rhythm-labamba-loslobos-andrescalamaro-lamarisoul/feed/ 0 541548